Press Alt + R to read the document text or Alt + P to download or print.
AGENDA REPORT 2023 0802 CCSA SPC ITEM 05A
HomeMy WebLinkAboutAGENDA REPORT 2023 0802 CCSA SPC ITEM 05ACITY OF MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
City Council Meeting
of August 2, 2023
ACTION APPROVED STAFF
RECOMMENDATION, INCLUDING
ADOPTION OF RESOLUTION NO. 2023-
4199. (ROLL CALL VOTE: UNANIMOUS)
BY A. Hurtado.
A. Consider Award of Agreement to Monet Construction, Inc. for City Hall Tenant
Improvement Project; and Resolution Amending Fiscal Year (FY) 2023/24 Budget
by Allocating $6,880,750 from the Special Projects Fund (3004) to Fund the
Project; and Determination of Exemption Under the California Environmental
Quality Act in Connection Therewith. Staff Recommendation: 1) Award bid to
Monet Construction, Inc. for a total not-to-exceed contract value of $6,580,750,
including contingency; and authorize City Manager to sign the Agreement, subject
to final language approval of the City Manager; and Authorize City Manager to
approve Change Orders up to the authorized contingency amount of $598,250;
and 2) Adopt Resolution No. 2023-4199, amending FY 2023/24 budget by
allocating $6,880,750 from the Special Projects Fund (3004) to fund the project.
(Staff: Jessica Sandifer, Deputy Parks and Recreation Director) (ROLL CALL
VOTE REQUIRED)
Item: 5.A.
MOORPARK CITY COUNCIL
AGENDA REPORT
TO: Honorable City Council
FROM: Jessica Sandifer, Deputy Parks and Recreation Director
DATE: 08/02/2023 Special Meeting
SUBJECT: Consider Award of Agreement to Monet Construction, Inc. for City Hall
Tenant Improvement Project; and Resolution Amending Fiscal Year
(FY) 2023/24 Budget by Allocating $6,880,750 from the Special
Projects Fund (3004) to Fund the Project; and Determination of
Exemption Under the California Environmental Quality Act in
Connection Therewith
BACKGROUND
In October 2021, the City Council authorized the purchase of 323 Science Drive as the
location for a new City Hall. Escrow closed in February 2022, and on February 16, 2022,
the City Council approved an Agreement with SVA Architects, Inc. (SVA) for Architectural
Design Services for the Tenant Improvements. SVA completed plans for a
comprehensive tenant improvement project to reconfigure the building to provide enough
office space to house all staff, create a new public counter and a new City Council
chamber. On April 5, 2023, the City Council approved the plans and specifications and
authorized staff to bid the project.
DISCUSSION
A notice inviting bids was published on June 11, 2023, and June 16, 2023. Two non-
mandatory pre-bid site meetings were held on June 21, 2023, and June 27, 2023, and
were attended by eighteen (18) contractors and sub-contractors. Six bids were received
by the due date of July 21, 2023. The results are:
Bidder Bid Amount
McGillivray Construction, Inc. $6,308,000.00
Monet Construction, Inc. $5,888,000.00
Nationwide Contracting Services, Inc. $7,822,300.00
PreCon Industries $6,874,000.00
QuinCon, Inc. $6,404,406.00
Waisman Construction, Inc. $6,493,000.00
Item: 5.A.
1
Honorable City Council
08/02/2023 Special Meeting
Page 2
The bids were evaluated on their completeness and cost. The apparent low bidder is
Monet Construction, Inc. (Monet). Staff reviewed the bid package and conducted
reference checks. Monet possesses the necessary qualifications, resources, and
experience to perform the work.
The bid package also included two additive items for parking lot slurry seal and landscape
and irrigation improvements. The parking lot and landscaping at 323 Science Drive are
in poor condition, however, this work scope was removed from the main bid scope and
included as an additive bid item as a cost saving measure. Since the bid pricing is
favorable, staff is recommending including these additive items in the bid to be completed
now. The low bidder included pricing for these two additive items which will add $94,500
to the total project cost. With the addition of these items, the total project cost is
$5,982,500. As a reminder, the estimated project cost with contingency was $7,370,000.
The addition of these additive items is still below the estimated project cost.
The project also includes a number of Owner Furnished Owner Installed (OFOI) items
that will be completed by City staff or using separate contracts. First, the work to add the
servers and associated infrastructure for access to the City’s network and the work to
move the television broadcast system to the new City Hall is not included. These items
are being installed separately by the City’s information technology (IT) staff and broadcast
consultant. At this time the addition of network infrastructure and broadcast equipment
to the building is estimated to cost $200,000. A portion of this work will be offset using
Public, Educational, and Governmental (PEG) Access Fees, which are fees collected
from cable service providers and can be used for equipping the City’s public broadcast
station. Secondly, exterior monument signage and wayfinding signage will be designed
and installed separately by a specialty sign contractor. This work is estimated to cost
approximately $40,000. Third, the City’s contract intrusion detection and fire alarm
company will need to install these systems throughout the new spaces in the building.
This work is estimated to cost $40,000. Lastly, the services of a third-party Materials
Testing and Special Inspection Consultant is also needed. The Building Code requires
certain identified materials such as structural steel, epoxy, and structural concrete be
tested and inspected to ensure they are installed correctly and meet certain standards
outlined in the code. Staff is in the process of selecting a consultant for this work.
Staff has included the costs for the IT Infrastructure, exterior signage and security and
alarm systems in the budget amendment included with this staff report. Staff will return
in the near future with an additional budget amendment for the costs for the Materials
Testing and Special Inspection Consultant once a firm cost is known for that work scope.
The project funds to be budgeted, including contingency and the OFOI items, will total
$6,880,750.
2
Honorable City Council
08/02/2023 Special Meeting
Page 3
ENVIRONMENTAL DETERMINATION
The Community Development Director has reviewed this project and found it to be
Categorically Exempt in accordance with Section 15301 (Class 1: Existing Facilities) of
the CEQA Guidelines because the project is for a tenant improve project on an existing
building with negligible expansion of use. Therefore, staff has determined that there is
no substantial evidence that the project would have a significant effect on the
environment.
FISCAL IMPACT
The total cost for the tenant improvement project is $5,982,500 including the additive
items. Staff is recommending a ten percent (10%) contingency of $598,250 be added to
the contract for a total not-to-exceed contract amount of $6,580,750. Staff is also
requesting an additional $300,000 for the various OFOI items. Funds have not been
budgeted for the Tenant Improvement project . A budget amendment is being requested
in the amount of $6,880,750 from the Special Projects Fund (3004) for this work.
The current balance in the Special Projects Fund is $28,216,979. After the budget
amendment the balance will be $21,336,229.
COUNCIL GOAL COMPLIANCE
This action is consistent with City Council Goal 3, Objective 3.9: “New City Hall Tenant
Improvements and Move”.
STAFF RECOMMENDATION (ROLL CALL VOTE REQUIRED)
1. Award bid to Monet Construction, Inc. for a total not-to-exceed contract value of
$6,580,750, including contingency; and authorize City Manager to sign the
Agreement, subject to final language approval of the City Manager; and Authorize
City Manager to approve Change Orders up to the authorized contingency amount
of $598,250; and
2. Adopt Resolution No. 2023-____, amending FY 2023/24 budget by allocating
$6,880,750 from the Special Projects Fund (3004) to fund the project.
Attachment 1: Agreement – Monet Construction, Inc.
Attachment 2: Draft Resolution No. 2023-____
3
AGREEMENT BETWEEN THE CITY OF MOORPARK AND
MONET CONSTRUCTION, INC. FOR CITY HALL TENANT IMPROVEMENT
PROJECT AT 323 SCIENCE DRIVE
THIS AGREEMENT, executed as of _________________________, between the
City of Moorpark, a municipal corporation (“City”) and Monet Construction, Inc., a
corporation (“Contractor”). In consideration of the mutual covenants and conditions set
forth herein, the parties agree as follows:
WHEREAS, City has the need for construction services related to City Hall tenant
improvement project at 323 Science Drive; and
WHEREAS, Contractor specializes in providing such services and has the proper
work experience, certifications, and background to carry out the duties involved; and
WHEREAS, on August 2, 2023, the City Council of the City of Moorpark authorized
the City Manager to enter into this Agreement after public bidding in accordance with
California Public Contract Code Section 22030, et seq.
NOW, THEREFORE, in consideration of the mutual covenants, benefits , and
premises herein stated, the parties hereto agree as follows:
1. TERM
The term of the Agreement shall be from the date of execution until completion of
the work identified in the Scope of Services and in conformance with Exhibit s C and D,
unless this Agreement is terminated or suspended consistent with Section 6 of this
Agreement.
2. SCOPE OF SERVICES
City does hereby retain Contractor in a contractual capacity to provide construction
services related to City Hall tenant improvement project, as set forth in Exhibit C:
Contractor’s Bid Proposal, dated July 17, 2023, which exhibit is attached hereto and
incorporated herein by this reference as though set forth in full and hereinafter referred to
as the “Proposal” and as set forth in City of Moorpark Contract Documents for City Hall
Tenant Improvement Project, ID # P&R-2023-01 attached hereto and incorporated herein
by this reference as though set forth in full and hereinafter referred to as Exhibit D. Where
said Scope of Services as set forth in Exhibits C and D, is modified by this Agreement, or
in the event there is a conflict between the provisions of said Scope of Services and this
Agreement, the language contained in this Agreement shall take precedence.
Contractor shall perform the tasks described and set forth in Exhibit s C and D.
Contractor shall complete the tasks according to the schedule of performance which is
also set forth in Exhibit D.
Compensation for the services to be performed by Contractor shall be in
accordance with Exhibit C. Compensation shall not exceed the rates or total value of five
ATTACHMENT 1
4
Monet Construction, Inc. Page 2 of 18
million nine hundred eighty-two thousand five hundred dollars ($5,982,500) as stated in
Exhibit C, plus a 10% contingency of five hundred ninety-eight thousand two hundred fifty
dollars ($598,250) for a total not-to-exceed contract value of six million five hundred eighty
thousand seven hundred fifty dollars ($6,580,750) without a written amendment to the
agreement executed by both parties. Payment by City to Contractor shall be as referred
to in this Agreement.
City and Contractor acknowledge that this project is a public work to which
prevailing wages apply, and that a public work project is subject to compliance monitoring
and enforcement by the California Department of Industrial Relations (DIR). Contractor
agrees to comply with and be bound by all the terms, rules and regulations described in
(a) Division 2, Part 7, Chapter 1 (commencing with Section 1720) of the California Labor
Code, including without limitation Labor Code Section 1771 and (b) the rules and
regulations established by the DIR implementing such statutes, as though set forth in full
herein, including any applicable amendments made thereto duri ng the term of this
Agreement. For every subcontractor who will perform work on this project, Contractor
shall be responsible for subcontractor’s compliance with (a) and (b) and Contractor shall
take all necessary actions to ensure subcontractor’s compliance. Labor Code Section
1725.5 requires all contractors and subcontractors to annually register with the DIR before
bidding or performing on any public work contract.
3. PERFORMANCE
Contractor shall at all times faithfully, competently, and to the best of Contractor’s
ability, experience, and talent, perform all tasks described herein. Contractor shall
employ, at a minimum, generally accepted standards and practices utilized by persons
engaged in providing similar services as are required of Contractor hereunder in meeting
its obligations under this Agreement.
4. MANAGEMENT
The individual directly responsible for Contractor’s overall performance of the
Agreement provisions herein above set forth and to serve as principal liaison between
City and Contractor shall be Richard Boctor, and no other individual may be substituted
without the prior written approval of the City Manager.
The City’s contact person in charge of administration of this Agreement, and to
serve as principal liaison between Contractor and City, shall be the City Manager or the
City Manager’s designee.
5. PAYMENT
The City agrees to pay Contractor monthly, in accordance with the terms and the
schedule of payment as set forth in Exhibit C, attached hereto and incorporated herein
by this reference as though set forth in full, based upon actual time spent on the above
tasks. This amount shall not exceed six million five hundred eighty thousand seven
hundred fifty dollars ($6,580,750), which includes contingency of five hundred ninety-eight
thousand two hundred fifty dollars ($598,250), for the total term of the Agreement unless
5
Monet Construction, Inc. Page 3 of 18
additional payment is approved as provided in this Agreement.
Contractor shall not be compensated for any additional services rendered in
connection with its performance of this Agreement, unless such additional services and
compensation are authorized, in advance, in a written amendment to this Agreement
executed by both parties.
Contractor shall submit invoices monthly for actual services performed. Invoices
shall be submitted on or about the first business day of each month, or as soon thereafter
as practical, for services provided in the previous month. Payment shall be made within
thirty (30) days of receipt of each invoice as to all non-disputed fees. If the City disputes
any of Contractor’s fees it shall give written notice to Contractor within thirty (30) days of
receipt of any disputed fees set forth on the invoice. Contractor shall provide appropriate
documentation, as determined by the City, for all reimbursable expenses.
6. TERMINATION OR SUSPENSION WITHOUT CAUSE
The City may at any time, for any reason, with or without cause, suspen d, or
terminate this Agreement, or any portion hereof, by serving upon the Contractor at least
ten (10) days prior written notice. Upon receipt of said notice, the Contractor shall
immediately cease all work under this Agreement, unless the notice provides otherwise.
If the City suspends or terminates a portion of this Agreement such suspension or
termination shall not make void or invalidate the remainder of this Agreement.
The Contractor may terminate this Agreement only by providing City with written
notice no less than thirty (30) days in advance of such termination. In the event of such
termination, Contractor shall be compensated for such services up to the date of
termination. Such compensation for work in progress shall be prorated as to the
percentage of progress completed at the date of termination.
If the City Manager or the City Manager’s designee determines that the Contractor
is in default in the performance of any of the terms or conditions of this Agreement, the
City may proceed in the manner set forth in Section 6 -4 of the Greenbook.
7. DEFAULT OF CONTRACTOR
The Contractor’s failure to comply with the provisions of this Agreement shall
constitute a default. In the event that Contractor is in default for cause under the terms of
this Agreement, City shall have no obligation or duty to continue compensating Contractor
for any work performed after the date of default and can terminate this Agreement
immediately by written notice to the Contractor. If such failure by the Contractor to make
progress in the performance of work hereunder arises out of causes beyond the
Contractor’s control, and without fault or negligence of the Contractor, it shall not be
considered a default.
If the City Manager or the City Manager’s designee determines that the Contractor
is in default in the performance of any of the terms or conditions of this Agreement, he/she
shall cause to be served upon the Contractor a written notice of the default. The
6
Monet Construction, Inc. Page 4 of 18
Contractor shall have five (5) working days after service upon it of said notice in which to
cure the default by rendering a satisfactory performance. In the event that the Contractor
fails to cure its default within such period of time, the City shall have the right,
notwithstanding any other provision of this Agreement, to terminate this Agreement
without further notice and without prejudice to any other remedy to which it may be entitled
at law, in equity or under this Agreement.
8. LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
If the Contractor fails to complete the work, or any portion thereof, within the time
period required by this Agreement or as duly extended in writing by the City Manager,
Contractor shall forfeit and pay to the City, as liquidated damages, the sum of one
hundred twenty-five dollars ($125) per day for each calendar day the work, or portion
thereof, remains uncompleted after the above specified completion date. Liquidated
damages shall be deducted from any payments due or to become due to the Contractor
under the terms of this Agreement [Government Code Sec. 53069.85]. Progress
payments made by the City after the above specified completion date shall not constitute
a waiver of liquidated damages by the City.
9. OWNERSHIP OF DOCUMENTS
Contractor shall maintain complete and accurate records with respect to sales,
costs, expenses, receipts, and other such information required by City that relate t o the
performance of services under this Agreement. Contractor shall maintain adequate
records of services provided in sufficient detail to permit an evaluation of services. All
such records shall be maintained in accordance with generally accepted account ing
principles and shall be clearly identified and readily accessible. Contractor shall provide
free access to the representatives of City or its designees at reasonable times to such
books and records; shall give the City the right to examine and audit sa id books and
records; shall permit City to make transcripts therefrom as necessary; and shall allow
inspection of all work, data, documents, proceedings, and activi ties related to this
Agreement. Notification of audit shall be provided at least thirty (30) days before any such
audit is conducted. Such records, together with supporting documents, shall be
maintained for a period of ten (10) years after receipt of final payment.
Upon completion of, or in the event of termination or suspension of this Agreeme nt,
all original documents, designs, drawings, maps, models, computer files, surveys, notes,
and other documents prepared in the course of providing the services to be performed
pursuant to this Agreement shall become the sole property of the City and may be used,
reused, or otherwise disposed of by the City without the permission of the Contractor.
With respect to computer files, Contractor shall make available to the City, at the
Contractor’s office and upon reasonable written request by the City, the nec essary
computer software and hardware for purposes of accessing, compiling, transferring, and
printing computer files.
7
Monet Construction, Inc. Page 5 of 18
10. INDEMNIFICATION AND HOLD HARMLESS
Contractor shall indemnify, defend with legal counsel approved by City, and hold
harmless City, its officers, officials, employees and volunteers from and against all liability,
loss, damage, expense, cost (including without limitation reasonable legal counsels’ fees,
expert fees and all other costs and fees of litigation) of every nature arising out of or in
connection with Contractor's negligence, recklessness or willful misconduct in the
performance of work hereunder or its failure to comply with any of its obligations contained
in this Agreement, except such loss or damage which is caused by the sole or active
negligence or willful misconduct of the City. Should conflict of interest principles preclude
a single legal counsel from representing both City and Contractor, or should City otherwise
find Contractor’s legal counsel unacceptable, then Contractor shall reimburse the City its
costs of defense, including without limitation reasonable legal counsels fees, expert fees
and all other costs and fees of litigation. The Contractor shall promptly pay any final
judgment rendered against the City (and its officers, officials, employees and volunteers)
with respect to claims determined by a trier of fact to have been the result of the
Contractor’s negligent, reckless or wrongful performance. It is expressly understood and
agreed that the foregoing provisions are intended to be as broad and inclusive as is
permitted by the law of the state of California and will survive termination of this
Agreement.
Contractor obligations under this section apply regardless of whether or not such
claim, charge, damage, demand, action, proceeding, loss, stop notice, cost, expense,
judgment, civil fine or penalty, or liability was caused in part or contributed to by an
Indemnitee. However, without affecting the rights of City under any provision of this
agreement, Contractor shall not be required to indemnify and hold harmless City for
liability attributable to the active negligence of City, provided such active negligence is
determined by agreement between the parties or by the findings of a court of competent
jurisdiction. In instances where City is shown to have been actively negligent and where
City active negligence accounts for only a percentage of the liability involved, the
obligation of Contractor will be for that entire portion or percentage of liability not
attributable to the active negligence of City.
Contractor agrees to obtain executed indemnity agreements with provisions
identical to those set forth here in this Section from each and every subcontractor or any
other person or entity involved by, for, with, or on behalf of Contractor in the performance
of this Agreement. In the event Contractor fails to obtain such indemnity obligations from
others as required here, Contractor agrees to be fully responsible according to the terms
of this Section.
Failure of City to monitor compliance with these requirements imposes no
additional obligations on City and will in no way act as a waiver of any rights hereunder.
This obligation to indemnify and defend City as set forth here is binding on the successors,
assigns, or heirs of Contractor and shall survive the termination of this Agreement or
Section.
8
Monet Construction, Inc. Page 6 of 18
This Indemnity shall survive termination of the Agreement or Final Payment
hereunder. This Indemnity is in addition to any other rights or remedies that the
Indemnitees may have under the law or under any other Contract Documents or
Agreements. In the event of any claim or demand made against any party which is entitled
to be indemnified hereunder, City may, in its sole discretion, reserve, retain, or apply any
monies to the Contractor under this Agreement for the purpose of resolving such claim s;
provided, however, City may release such funds if the Contractor provides City with
reasonable assurance of protection of the Indemnitees’ interests. City shall, in its sole
discretion, determine whether such assurances are reasonable.
11. INSURANCE
Contractor shall maintain prior to the beginning of and for the duration of this
Agreement insurance coverage as specified in Exhibit A attached hereto and incorporated
herein by this reference as though set forth in full.
12. INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
Contractor is and shall at all times remain as to the City a wholly independent
Contractor. The personnel performing the services under this Agreement on behalf of
Contractor shall at all times be under Contractor’s exclusive direction and control. Neither
City nor any of its officers, employees, or agents shall have control over the conduct of
Contractor or any of Contractor’s officers, employees, or agents, except a s set forth in
this Agreement. Contractor shall not at any time or in any manner represent that it or any
of its officers, employees, or agents are in any manner officers, employees, or agents of
the City. Contractor shall not incur or have the power to incur any debt, obligation, or
liability against City, or bind City in any manner.
No employee benefits shall be available to Contractor in connection with the
performance of this Agreement. Except for the fees paid to Contractor as provided in the
Agreement, City shall not pay salaries, wages, or other compensation to Contractor for
performing services hereunder for City. City shall not be liable for compensation or
indemnification to Contractor for injury or sickness arising out of performing services
hereunder.
13. LEGAL RESPONSIBILITIES
The Contractor shall keep itself informed of local, state, and federal laws and
regulations which in any manner affect those employed by it or in any way affect the
performance of its service pursuant to this Agreement. The Contractor shall at all times
observe and comply with all such laws and regulations, including but not limited to the
Americans with Disabilities Act and Occupational Safety and Health Administration laws
and regulations. The City and Contractor shall comply with Exhibit B, California Public
Contract Code Section 9204, when applicable. The City, and its officers and employees,
shall not be liable at law or in equity occasioned by failure of the Contractor to comply
with this Section.
9
Monet Construction, Inc. Page 7 of 18
14. ANTI DISCRIMINATION
Neither the Contractor, nor any subcontractor under the Contractor, shall
discriminate in employment of persons upon the work because of race, religious creed,
color, national origin, ancestry, physical disability, mental disability, medical condition,
genetic information, marital status, sex, gender, gender identity, gender expression, age,
sexual orientation, or military and veteran status of such person; or any other basis
protected by applicable federal, state, or local law, except as provided in Section 12940
of the Government Code. The Contractor shall have responsibility for compliance with
this Section, if applicable [Labor Code Section 1735].
15. UNDUE INFLUENCE
Contractor declares and warrants that no undue influence or pressure is used
against or in concert with any officer or employee of the City in connection with the award,
terms, or implementation of this Agreement, including any method of coercion,
confidential financial arrangement, or financial inducement. No officer or employee of the
City will receive compensation, directly or indirectly from Contractor, or any o fficer,
employee, or agent of Contractor, in connection with the award of this Agreement or any
work to be conducted as a result of this Agreement. Violation of this Section shall be a
material breach of this Agreement entitling the City to any and all rem edies at law or in
equity.
16. NO BENEFIT TO ARISE TO LOCAL EMPLOYEES
No member, officer, or employee of the City, or their designees or agents, and no
public official who exercises authority over or responsibilities with respect to the Project
during his/her tenure or for one (1) year thereafter, shall have any interest, direct or
indirect, in any agreement or sub-agreement, or the proceeds thereof, for work to be
performed in connection with the Project performed under this Agreement.
17. CONFLICT OF INTEREST
Contractor covenants that neither they nor any officer or principal of their firm have
any interests, nor shall they acquire any interest, directly or indirectly, which will conflict
in any manner or degree with the performance of their services h ereunder. Contractor
further covenants that in the performance of this Agreement, they shall employ no person
having such interest as an officer, employee, agent, or sub contractor. Contractor further
covenants that Contractor has not contracted with nor is performing any services directly
or indirectly, with the developer(s) and/or property owner(s) and/or firm(s) and/or
partnership(s) and/or public agency(ies) owning property and/or processing an
entitlement application for property in the City or its Area of Interest, now or within the
past one (1) year, and further covenants and agrees that Contractor and/or its
subcontractors shall provide no service or enter into any contract with any developer(s)
and/or property owner(s) and/or firm(s) and/or partnership(s) and/or public agency(ies)
owning property and/or processing an entitlement application for property in the City or
its Area of Interest, while under contract with the City and for a one (1) year time period
following termination of this Agreement.
10
Monet Construction, Inc. Page 8 of 18
18. NOTICE
Any notice to be given pursuant to this Agreement shall be in writing, and all such
notices and any other document to be delivered shall be delivered by personal service or
by deposit in the United States mail, certified or registered, return receipt requested, with
postage prepaid, and addressed to the party for whom intended as follows:
To: City Manager
City of Moorpark
799 Moorpark Ave.
Moorpark, CA 93021
To: Chief Executive Officer
Monet Construction, Inc.
7610 Day Street
Tujunga, CA 91042
Either party may, from time to time, by written notice to the other, designate a
different address or contact person, which shall be substituted for the one above
specified. Notices, payments and other documents shall be deemed delivered upon
receipt by personal service or as of the third (3rd) day after deposit in the United States
mail.
19. CHANGE IN NAME
Should a change be contemplated in the name or nature of the Contractor’s legal
entity, the Contractor shall first notify the City in order that proper steps may be taken to
have the change reflected in the Agreement documents.
20. ASSIGNMENT
Contractor shall not assign this Agreement or any of the rights, duties , or
obligations hereunder. It is understood and acknowledged by the parties that Contractor
is uniquely qualified to perform the services provided for in this Agreement.
21. LICENSES
At all times during the term of this Agreement, Contractor shall have in full force
and effect, all licenses required of it by law for the performance of the services in this
Agreement.
22. VENUE AND GOVERNING LAW
This Agreement is made, entered into, and executed in Ventura County, California,
and any action filed in any court or for arbitration for the interpretation, enforcement or
other action of the terms, conditions, or covenants referred to herein shall be filed in the
applicable court in Ventura County, California. The City and Contractor understand and
agree that the laws of the state of California shall govern the rights, obligations, duties,
11
Monet Construction, Inc. Page 9 of 18
and liabilities of the parties to this Agreement and also govern the interpretation of this
Agreement.
23. ENTIRE AGREEMENT
This Agreement contains the entire understanding between the parties relating to
the obligations of the parties described in this Agreement. All prior or contemporaneous
agreements, understandings, representations, and statements, oral or written, are
merged into this Agreement and shall be of no further force or effect. Each party is
entering into this Agreement based solely upon the representations set forth herein and
upon each party’s own independent investigation of any and all facts such party deems
material.
24. CAPTIONS OR HEADINGS
The captions and headings of the various Articles, Paragraphs, Sections, and
Exhibits of this Agreement are for convenience and identification only and shall not be
deemed to limit or define the content of the respective Articles, Paragraphs, Sections,
and Exhibits hereof.
25. AMENDMENTS
Any amendment, modification, or variation from the terms of this Agreement shall
be in writing and shall be effective only upon approval by both parties to this Agreement.
26. TIME OF COMPLETION
City and Contractor agree that time is of the essence in this Agreement. City and
Contractor further agree that Contractor’s failure to perform on or at the times set forth in
this Agreement will damage and injure City, but the extent of such damage and injury is
difficult or speculative to ascertain. Consequently, City and Contractor agree that any
failure to perform by Contractor at or within the times set forth h erein shall result in
liquidated damages as defined in this Agreement for each and every day such
performance is late. City and Contractor agree that such sum is reasonable and fair.
Furthermore, City and Contractor agree that this Agreement is subject to Government
Code Section 53069.85 and that each party hereto is familiar with and understands the
obligations of said Section of the Government Code.
27. PRECEDENCE
Contractor is bound by the contents of City’s Bid Package and Proposal, Exhibit D
attached hereto and incorporated herein by this referen ce as though set forth in full. In
the event of conflict, the requirements of the City’s Bid Package and this Agreement shall
take precedence over those contained in the Proposal.
12
Monet Construction, Inc. Page 10 of 18
28. INTERPRETATION OF AGREEMENT
Should interpretation of this Agreement, or any portion thereof, be necessary, it is
deemed that this Agreement was prepared by the parties jointly and equally, and shall
not be interpreted against either party on the ground that the party prepared the
Agreement or caused it to be prepared.
29. WAIVER
No waiver of any provision of this Agreement shall be deemed, or shall constitute,
a waiver of any other provision, whether or not similar, nor shall any such waiver constitute
a continuing or subsequent waiver of the same provision. No waiver shall be binding
unless executed in writing by the party making the waiver.
30. AUTHORITY TO EXECUTE
The person or persons executing this Agreement on behalf of the Contractor
warrants and represents that he/she has the authority to execute this Agreement on
behalf of the Contractor and has the authority to bind Contractor to the performance of
obligations hereunder.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, the parties hereto have caused this Agreement to be
executed the day and year first above written.
CITY OF MOORPARK MONET CONSTRUCTION, INC.
_____________________________ _______________________________
Troy Brown, City Manager Richard Boctor, Chief Executive Officer
Attest:
_____________________________
Ky Spangler, City Clerk
13
Monet Construction, Inc. Page 11 of 18
EXHIBIT A
INSURANCE REQUIREMENTS
Prior to the beginning of and throughout the duration of the Work, Contractor will
maintain insurance in conformance with the requirements set forth below. Contractor will
use existing coverage to comply with these requirements. If that existing coverage does
not meet the requirements set forth here, it will be amended to do so. Contractor
acknowledges that the insurance coverage and policy limits set forth in this section
constitute the minimum amount of coverage required. Any insurance proceeds available
to City in excess of the limits and coverage required in this Agreement and which is
applicable to a given loss, will be available to the City.
Contractor shall provide the following types and amounts of insurance:
Commercial General Liability
Commercial General Liability Insurance shall be provided by an Insurance
Services Office “Commercial General Liability” policy form CG 00 01 or t he exact
equivalent. Defense costs must be paid in addition to limits. There shall be no cross
liability exclusion for claims or suits by one insured against another. Limits shall be no
less than $2,000,000 per occurrence for all covered losses and no less than $4,000,000
general aggregate.
Contractor’s policy shall contain no endorsements limiting coverage beyond the
basic policy coverage grant for any of the following:
a. Explosion, collapse or underground hazard (XCU)
b. Products and completed operations
c. Pollution liability
d. Contractual liability
Coverage shall be applicable to City for injury to employees of contractors,
subcontractors, or others involved in the project. Policy shall be endorsed to provide a
separate limit applicable to this project.
Workers’ Compensation
Workers’ Compensation insurance shall be provided on a state -approved policy
form providing statutory benefits as required by law with employers’ liability limits no less
than $1,000,000 per accident for all covered losses.
14
Monet Construction, Inc. Page 12 of 18
Business Auto Coverage
Business Auto Coverage on ISO Business Auto Coverage form CA 00 01 06 92
including symbol 1 (Any Auto) or the exact equivalent shall be provided. Limits shall be
no less than $1,000,000 per accident, combined single limit. If Contractor owns no
vehicles, this requirement may be satisfied by a non -owned auto endorsement to the
general liability policy described above. If Contractor or Contractor’s employees will use
personal autos in any way on this project, Contract or shall provide evidence of personal
auto liability coverage for each such person.
Excess or Umbrella Liability
Excess or Umbrella Liability insurance (Over Primary) if used to meet limit
requirements, shall provide coverage at least as broad as specified for the underlying
coverages. Coverage shall be provided on a “pay on behalf” basis, with defense costs
payable in addition to policy limits. There shall be no cross liability exclusion precluding
coverage for claims or suits by one insured against another. Coverage shall be applicable
to City for injury to employees of contractor, subcontractors, or others involved in the
Work. The scope of coverage provided is subject to the approval of city following receipt
of proof of insurance as required herein. Limits are subject to review.
Insurance procured pursuant to these requirements shall be written by insurers
that are admitted carriers in the state of California and with A.M. Best rating of A - or better
and a minimum financial size of VII.
Contractor and City agrees as follows:
1. Contractor agrees to endorse the third party general liability coverage required
herein to include as additional insureds City, its officials, employees, agents, using
standard ISO endorsement No. CG 2010 and No. CG 2037 with edition acceptable
to the City. Contractor also agrees to require all contractors, subcontractors, and
any one else involved in any way with the project contemplated by this Agreement
to do likewise.
2. Any waiver of subrogation express or implied on the part of the Cit y to any party
involved in this Agreement or related documents applies only to the extent of
insurance proceeds actually paid. City, having required that it be named as an
additional insured to all insurance coverage required herein, expressly retains the
right to subrogate against any party for sums not pai d by insurance. For its part,
Contractor agrees to waive subrogation rights against City regardless of the
applicability of any insurance proceeds, and to require all contractors,
subcontractors, or others involved in any way with the project contemplated by this
Agreement to do likewise.
3. All insurance coverage maintained or procured by Contractor or required of others
by Contractor pursuant to this Agreement shall be endorsed to delete the
subrogation condition as to the city, or to specifically allow Contractor or others
providing insurance herein to waive subrogation prior to a loss. This endorsement
15
Monet Construction, Inc. Page 13 of 18
shall be obtained regardless of existing policy wording that may appear to allow
such waivers.
4. It is agreed by Contractor and City that insurance provided pursuant to these
requirements is not intended by any party to be limited to providing coverage for
the vicarious liability of City, or to the supervisory role, if any, of City. All insurance
coverage provided pursuant to this or any other Agreement (express or implied) in
any way relating to City is intended to apply to the full extent of the policies
involved. Nothing referred to here or contained in any agreement involving City in
relation to the project contemplated by this Agreement is intended to be construed
to limit the application of insurance coverage in any way.
5. None of the coverages required herein will be in compliance with these
requirements if they include any limiting endorsement of any kind that has not been
first submitted to City and approved of in writing.
6. All coverage types and limits required are subject to approval, modification, and
additional requirements by the City, as the need arises. Contractor shall not make
any reductions in scope of coverage (e.g. elimination of contractual liability or
reduction of discover period) that may affect City’s protection without City’s prior
written consent.
7. Proof of compliance with these insurance requirements, consisting of binders of
coverage, or endorsements, or certificates of insurance, shall be delivered to City
at or prior to the execution of this Agreement. In the event such proof of insurance
is not delivered as required, or in the event such insurance is canceled or reduced
at any time and no replacement coverage is provided, City has the right, but not
the duty, to obtain any insurance it deems necessary to protect its interests under
this or any other Agreement and to pay the premium. Any premium so paid by City
shall be charged to and promptly paid by Contractor or deducted from sums due
Contractor, at City option.
8. Contractor agrees to endorse, and to required others to endorse, the insurance
provided pursuant to these requirements, to require 30 days notice to Cit y and the
appropriate tender prior to cancellation or reduction of such liability coverage and
notice of any material alteration or non-renewal of any such coverage, and to
require contractors, subcontractors, and any other party in any way involved with
the project contemplated by this Agreement to do likewise.
9. It is acknowledged by the parties of this Agreement that all insurance coverage
required to be provided by Contractor or any subcontractor, and any other party
involved with the project who is brought onto or involved in the project by
Contractor, is intended to apply first and on a primary non -contributing basis in
relation to any other insurance or self insurance available to the City.
10. Contractor agrees to ensure that subcontractors, and any other party involved with
the project who is brought onto or involved in the project by Contractor, provide the
same minimum insurance coverage required of Contractor. Contractor agrees to
16
Monet Construction, Inc. Page 14 of 18
monitor and review all such coverage and assumes all responsibility for ensuring
that such coverage is provided in conformity with the requirements of this
Agreement. Contractor agrees that upon request, all agreements with
subcontractors and others engaged in this project will be submitted to City for
review.
11. Contractor agrees not to self-insure or to use any self-insured retentions or
deductibles on any portion of the insurance required herein and further agrees that
it will not allow any contractor, subcontractor, architect, engineer, or other entity or
person in any way involved in the performance of Work on the project
contemplated by this Agreement to self-insure its obligations to City. If Contractor’s
existing coverage includes a deductible or self-insured retention, the deductible or
self-insured retention must be declared to the City. At that time the City shall
review options with the Contractor, which may include reduction or elimination of
the deductible or self-insured retention, substitution of other coverage, or other
solutions.
12. The City reserves the right at any time during the term of this Agreement to change
the amounts and types of insurance required by giving the Contractor 90 days
advance written notice of such change. If such change results in substantial
additional cost to the Contractor, the City will negotiate additional compensation
proportional to the increased benefit to City.
13. For purposes of applying insurance coverage only, all contracts pertaining to the
project will be deemed to be executed when finalized and any activity commences
in furtherance of performance under this Agreement.
14. Contractor acknowledges and agrees that any actual or alleged failure on the part
of City to inform Contractor of non-compliance with any insurance requirement in
no way imposes any additional obligations on City no r does it waive any rights
hereunder in this or any other regard.
15. Contractor will renew the required coverage annually as long as City, or its
employees or agents face an exposure from operations of any typ e pursuance to
this Agreement. This obligation applies whether or not the Agreement is canceled
or terminated for any reason. The insurance shall include but not be limited to
products and completed operations and discontinued operations, where
applicable. Termination of this obligation is not effective until City executes a
written statement to that effect.
16. Contractor agrees to waive its statutory immunity under any workers’
compensation statute or similar statute, in relation to the City, and to require all
subcontractors and any other person or entity involved in the project contemplated
by this Agreement to do likewise.
17. Requirements of specific coverage features are not intended as limitations on other
requirements or as a waiver of any coverage normally provided by any given
policy. Specific reference to a given coverage feature is for purposes of clarification
17
Monet Construction, Inc. Page 15 of 18
only as it pertains to a given issue, and is not intended by any party or insured to
be all-inclusive.
18. Any provision in any of the construction documents dealing with the insurance
coverage provided pursuant to these requirements, is subordinate to and
superseded by the requirements contained herein. These insurance requirements
are intended to be separate and distinct from any other provision in this Agreement
and are intended by the parties to be interpreted as such.
19. All liability coverage provided according to these requirements must be endorsed
to provide a separate aggregate limit for the project that is the subject of this
Agreement and evidencing products and completed operations coverage for not
less than two years after issuance of a final certificate of occupancy by all
appropriate government agencies or acceptance of the completed work by City.
20. Contractor agrees to be responsible for ensuring that no contract used by any party
involved in any way with the project reserves the right to charge City or Contractor
for the cost of additional insurance coverage required by this Agreement. Any such
provisions are to be deleted with reference to City. It is not the intent of City to
reimburse any third party for the cost of complying with these requirements. There
shall be no recourse against City for payment of premiums or other amounts with
respect thereto.
21. Contractor agrees to obtain and provide to City a copy of Professional Liabili ty
coverage for Architects or Engineers on this project, when required by City. City
shall determine the liability limit.
18
Monet Construction, Inc. Page 16 of 18
EXHIBIT B
PUBLIC CONTRACT CODE SECTION 9204
9204. (a) The Legislature finds and declares that it is in the best interests of the state
and its citizens to ensure that all construction business performed on a public works
project in the state that is complete and not in dispute is paid in full and in a timely
manner.
(b) Notwithstanding any other law, including, but not limited to, Article 7.1 (commencing
with Section 10240) of Chapter 1 of Part 2, Chapter 10 (commencing with Section
19100) of Part 2, and Article 1.5 (commencing with Section 20104) of Chapter 1 of Part
3, this section shall apply to any claim by a contractor in connection with a public works
project.
(c) For purposes of this section:
(1) “Claim” means a separate demand by a contractor sent by registered mail or
certified mail with return receipt requested, for one or more of the following:
(A) A time extension, including, without limitation, for relief from damages or penalties
for delay assessed by a public entity under a contract for a public works project.
(B) Payment by the public entity of money or damages arising from work done by, or on
behalf of, the contractor pursuant to the contract for a public works project and payment
for which is not otherwise expressly provided or to which the claimant is not otherwise
entitled.
(C) Payment of an amount that is disputed by the public entity.
(2) “Contractor” means any type of contractor within the meaning of Chapter 9
(commencing with Section 7000) of Division 3 of the Business and Professions Code
who has entered into a direct contract with a public entity for a public works project.
(3) (A) “Public entity” means, without limitation, except as provided in subparagraph (B),
a state agency, department, office, division, bureau, board, or commission, the
California State University, the University of California, a city, including a charter city,
county, including a charter county, city and county, including a charter city and county,
district, special district, public authority, political subdivision, public corporation, or
nonprofit transit corporation wholly owned by a public agency and formed to carry out
the purposes of the public agency.
(B) “Public entity” shall not include the following:
(i) The Department of Water Resources as to any project under the jurisdiction of that
department.
(ii) The Department of Transportation as to any project under the jurisdiction of that
department.
(iii) The Department of Parks and Recreation as to any project under the jurisdiction of
that department.
(iv) The Department of Corrections and Rehabilitation with respect to any project under
its jurisdiction pursuant to Chapter 11 (commencing with Section 7000) of Title 7 of Part
3 of the Penal Code.
(v) The Military Department as to any project under the jurisdiction of that department.
(vi) The Department of General Services as to all other projects.
(vii) The High-Speed Rail Authority.
(4) “Public works project” means the erection, construction, alteration, repair, or
improvement of any public structure, building, road, or other public improvement of any
kind.
19
Monet Construction, Inc. Page 17 of 18
(5) “Subcontractor” means any type of contractor within the meaning of Chapter 9
(commencing with Section 7000) of Division 3 of the Business and Professions Code
who either is in direct contract with a contractor or is a lower tier subcontractor.
(d) (1) (A) Upon receipt of a claim pursuant to this section, the public en tity to which the
claim applies shall conduct a reasonable review of the claim and, within a period not to
exceed 45 days, shall provide the claimant a written statement identifying what portion
of the claim is disputed and what portion is undisputed. Upon receipt of a claim, a public
entity and a contractor may, by mutual agreement, extend the time period provided in
this subdivision.
(B) The claimant shall furnish reasonable documentation to support the claim.
(C) If the public entity needs approval from its governing body to provide the claimant a
written statement identifying the disputed portion and the undisputed portion of the
claim, and the governing body does not meet within the 45 days or within the mutually
agreed to extension of time following receipt of a claim sent by registered mail or
certified mail, return receipt requested, the public entity shall have up to three days
following the next duly publicly noticed meeting of the governing body after the 45 -day
period, or extension, expires to provide the claimant a written statement identifying the
disputed portion and the undisputed portion.
(D) Any payment due on an undisputed portion of the claim shall be processed and
made within 60 days after the public entity issues its written statement. If the public
entity fails to issue a written statement, paragraph (3) shall apply.
(2) (A) If the claimant disputes the public entity’s written response, or if the public entity
fails to respond to a claim issued pursuant to this section within the time prescribed, the
claimant may demand in writing an informal conference to meet and confer for
settlement of the issues in dispute. Upon receipt of a demand in writing sent by
registered mail or certified mail, return receipt requested, the public entity shall schedule
a meet and confer conference within 30 days for settlement of the dispute.
(B) Within 10 business days following the conclusion of the meet and confer
conference, if the claim or any portion of the claim remains in dispute, the public entity
shall provide the claimant a written statement identifying the portion of the claim that
remains in dispute and the portion that is undisputed. Any payment due on an
undisputed portion of the claim shall be processed and made within 60 days after the
public entity issues its written statement. Any disputed portion of the claim, as identified
by the contractor in writing, shall be submitted to nonbinding mediation, with the public
entity and the claimant sharing the associated costs equally. The public entity and
claimant shall mutually agree to a mediator within 10 business days after the disputed
portion of the claim has been identified in writing. If the parties cannot agree upon a
mediator, each party shall select a mediator and those mediators shall select a qualified
neutral third party to mediate with regard to the disputed portion of the claim. Each party
shall bear the fees and costs charged by its respective mediator in connection with the
selection of the neutral mediator. If mediation is unsuccessful, the parts of the claim
remaining in dispute shall be subject to applicable procedures outside this section.
(C) For purposes of this section, mediation includes any nonbinding process, including,
but not limited to, neutral evaluation or a dispute review board, in which an independent
third party or board assists the parties in dispute resolution through negotiation or by
issuance of an evaluation. Any mediation utilized shall conform to the timeframes in this
section.
20
Monet Construction, Inc. Page 18 of 18
(D) Unless otherwise agreed to by the public entity and the contractor in writing, the
mediation conducted pursuant to this section shall excuse any further obligation under
Section 20104.4 to mediate after litigation has been commenced.
(E) This section does not preclude a public entity from requiring arbitration of disputes
under private arbitration or the Public Works Contract Arbitration Program, if mediation
under this section does not resolve the parties’ dispute.
(3) Failure by the public entity to respond to a claim from a contractor wit hin the time
periods described in this subdivision or to otherwise meet the time requirements of this
section shall result in the claim being deemed rejected in its entirety. A claim that is
denied by reason of the public entity’s failure to have responded to a claim, or its failure
to otherwise meet the time requirements of this section, shall not constitute an adverse
finding with regard to the merits of the claim or the responsibility or qualifications of the
claimant.
(4) Amounts not paid in a timely manner as required by this section shall bear interest at
7 percent per annum.
(5) If a subcontractor or a lower tier subcontractor lacks legal standing to assert a claim
against a public entity because privity of contract does not exist, the contractor may
present to the public entity a claim on behalf of a subcontractor or lower tier
subcontractor. A subcontractor may request in writing, either on their own behalf or on
behalf of a lower tier subcontractor, that the contractor present a claim for work which
was performed by the subcontractor or by a lower tier subcontractor on behalf of the
subcontractor. The subcontractor requesting that the claim be presented to the public
entity shall furnish reasonable documentation to support the claim. Within 45 days o f
receipt of this written request, the contractor shall notify the subcontractor in writing as
to whether the contractor presented the claim to the public entity and, if the original
contractor did not present the claim, provide the subcontractor with a statement of the
reasons for not having done so.
(e) The text of this section or a summary of it shall be set forth in the plans or
specifications for any public works project that may give rise to a claim under this
section.
(f) A waiver of the rights granted by this section is void and contrary to public policy,
provided, however, that (1) upon receipt of a claim, the parties may mutually agree to
waive, in writing, mediation and proceed directly to the commencement of a civil action
or binding arbitration, as applicable; and (2) a public entity may prescribe reasonable
change order, claim, and dispute resolution procedures and requirements in addition to
the provisions of this section, so long as the contractual provisions do not conflict with or
otherwise impair the timeframes and procedures set forth in this section.
(g) This section applies to contracts entered into on or after January 1, 2017.
(h) Nothing in this section shall impose liability upon a public entity that makes loans or
grants available through a competitive application process, for the failure of an awardee
to meet its contractual obligations.
(i) This section shall remain in effect only until January 1, 2027, and as of that date is
repealed, unless a later enacted statute that is enacted b efore January 1, 2027, deletes
or extends that date.
(Amended by Stats. 2019, Ch. 489, Sec. 1. (AB 456) Effective January 1, 2020.
Repealed as of January 1, 2027, by its own provisions.)
21
CHECKLIST FOR BIDDERS
I
The following information is required of all Bidders at the t ime of Bid submission /
/ Completed and Signed Bidders Checklist Sheet (This Sh7et)
L
_L_
_L
Completed and Signed Bid Cover Form
Completed and Signed Bid Sheets
Completed and Signed Questionnaire
Completed References Form
\
1 Resume of General Construction Superintendent/On-Site Construction
Manager
L Completed Subcontractor Designation Form
L Completed and S igned Industria l Safety Record Form
L_ Completed, Signed and Notarized Bid Bond or Other Security Fo rm
L Signed Noncollusion Declaration Form
.J_ Evidence satisfactory to the City indicating the capacity of the person(s)
signing the Bid to bind the Bidder
Failure of the Bidder to provide all required information in a complete and accurate manner may
cause the Bid to be cons idered non-responsive.
I hereby certify under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of Cali fornia that all of the
information submitted in connection with this Bid and all of the representations made herein are
true and correct.
Name of Bidder Monet Construction, Inc .
Signature
I
Name and Title Richard Boctor
Dated 07/17/2023
Checklist-1 Richards, Watson & Gershon -2020
12853-0019\2476738v1 .doc
EXHIBIT C
22
BID
CITY OF MOORPARK
CITY HALL TENANT IMPROVEMENT PROJECT [PROJECT]
TO THE HONORABLE MAYOR AND CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF MOORPARK:
The undersigned, as Bidder, declares that: (1) this Bid is made without collusion with any other
person and that the only persons or parties interested as principals are those named herein;
(2) the undersigned has carefu ll y examined the Contract Documents (including all Addenda) and
the Project site; and (3) the undersigned has investigated and is satisfied as to the conditions to
be encountered, the character, quality and quantities of Work to be performed, and the materials
to be furnished. Furthermore, the undersigned agrees that submission of this Bid shall be
conclusive evidence that such examination and investigation have been made and agrees, in the
event the Contract be awarded to it, to execute the Contract with the City of Moorpark to perform
the Project in accordance with the Contract Documents in the time and manner therein prescribed,
and to furnish or provide all materials, labor, tools, equipment, apparatus and other means
necessary so to do, except as may otherwise be furnished or provided under the terms of the
Contract Documents, for the following stated unit prices or lump-sum price as submitted on the
Bid herein.
Bidder acknowledges receipt , understanding and full consideration of all addenda, as follows:
Addendum No. ~------Date: 07/06/2023
Addendum No. _2 _____ _ Date: 07/17/2023
Addendum No. ______ _ Date:
Addendum No. ______ _ Date:
The undersigned submits as part of this Bid a completed copy of its Industrial Safety Record. This
Safety Record includes all construction Work undertaken in California by the undersigned and
any partnership, joint venture or corporation that any principal of the undersigned participated in
as a principal or owner for the last five (5) calendar years a nd the current calendar year before
the date of B id submittal. Separate information is being submitted for each such partnership, joint
venture, or corporate or individual Bidder. The undersigned may attach any additiona l information
or explan ation of data that it would like to be taken into consideration in evalu ating the Safety
Record. An explanation of the circumstances surround ing any and all fatalities is attached.
Accompanying this Bid is cash , a cashier's check , a certified check or a Bid Bond in an amount
equal to at least ten percent (10%) of the total aggregate Bid price based on the quantities shown
and the unit prices quoted. The undersigned further agrees that, should it be awarded the Contract
and thereafter fail or refuse to execute the Contract and provide the required evidence of
insurance and Bonds within fifteen (15) Days after delivery of the Contract to the undersigned,
then the cash, check or Bid Bond shall be forfeited to the City to the extent permitted by law.
The undersigned certifies to have a minimum of three (3) consecutive years of current experience
in the type of Work related to the Project and that this experience is in actual operation of t he firm
with permanent employees performing a part of the Work as distinct from a firm operating entirely
B-1 Richards, Watson & Gershon -2020
12853-0019\2476738v1 .doc 23
by subcontracting all phases of the Work. The undersigned also certifies to be properly li censed
by the State as a contractor to perform this type of Work. The undersigned possesses California
Contractor's License Number 826930 , Class A&B , which expires on
October 3 l, 2023 . Contractor a lso certifies that they are registered with the
Department of Industrial Relations l00000487 I (DIR number) which expires
on June 30 2026
Bidder's Name: Monet Construction Tnc.
SignatureflO f-0
¥ichard Boctor Signature: ______________ _
B-2
12853-0019\24 76738v1 .doc
Title: President Date: 07/17/2023
Title: ____ _ Date: __ _
Richards, Watson & Gershon • 2020
24
CITY OF MOORPARK
BID SHEETS FOR
CITY HALL TENANT IMPROVEMENT [PROJECT]
Bidder's Name: Monet Construction I nc.
To the Honorable Mayor and Members of the City Council:
In compliance with the Notice Inviting Bids, the undersigned hereby agrees to execute the
Contract to furnish all labor, materials, equipment and supplies for the Project in accordance with
the Contract Documents to the satisfaction and under the direction of the City, at the following
prices:
BASE AMOUNT:
ITEM DESCRIPTION UNIT EXTENDED
NO. AMOUNT
1. City Hall Tenant Improvement, per provided Plans LS $ 5,2i8,C>O? and Specifications dated 06112023
TOTAL BASE AMOUNT $ t;L@s ,(JO (J
Y"
ADDITIVE OR DEDUCTIVE ITEM (if applicable):
ITEM NO. DESCRIPTION
1. Add Slurry Seal per Specification Section 01 23 00
2 . Add Landscape/Irrigation per Specification Section
01 23 00 and L series drawings
TOTAL ADDITIVE OR DEDUCTIVE ITEM:
UNIT
LS
LS
EXTENDED
AMOUNT
$16CJO
$
gt;,ooo
Note: Items may be adjusted or deleted . Therefore, regardless of total actual volume (percentage)
compared to estimated quantities, the unit prices provided above by the Bidder shall be applied
to the final quantity when payment is calculated for these items. No adjustment in the unit prices
will be a llowed . The City reserves the right to not use any of the estimated quantities; and if this
B-3 Richards, Watson & Gershon -2020
12853-0019\24 76738v1 .doc 25
right is exercised, the Contractor will not be entitled to any add itional compensation. Cost of all
export and/or import of material shall be included in the above unit costs; no additional
compensation will be granted for such expenses.
TOTAL BASE BID PRICE IN DIGITS:$/ £g~(} ff{)
TOTALBASEBIDPRICEINWORDS:$F,ve-,v<; /{,'oil -e ,rh+ kv~,J-e,~U'/~e<:rh+
TOTAL BID PRICE= BASE AMOUNT PLUS(+) ALL ADDITIVE ITEMS, MINUS(-) ALL
DEDUCTIVE ITEMS
~~~
TOTAL BID PRICE IN DIGITS:$ *#J?:!:;lfo ,5;Cf&'C J ,;d () r~ _.A.A-1 '--Lf'\1'1\) /tllNt HtJ'hJ;i2_l;_P (=1 6,/fry ,w b
TOTAL 8600 PRIC WORDS: r t vl= ft VrfJ::;,&t-~ l)b ~
--,z_~
Signatur : / j? 1/""> Title: President Date: 07/17/2023
. /~chard Boctor
Signature-________________ Title:_____ Date: __ _
8-4 Richards, Watson & Gershon -2020
12853-0019\2476738v1 .doc 26
QUESTIONNAIRE FORM
Fill out all of the following information. Attach additional sheets if necessary.
( 1) Bidder's Name: Mon et Con st ructi o n, Inc.
(2) If the Bidder's name is a fictitious name, who or what is the full name of the registered
owner? If the Bidder's name is not a fictitious name, write "N/A" in the response to this
question. If you are doing business under a fictitious name, provide a copy of the filed valid
Fictitious Business Name Statement.
(3) Business Address: 76 10 D ay St., Tujunga CA 9 I 042
(4) Telephone: 818-33 0-73 06 Facsimile: 8 18-33 0-73 08
(5) Type of Firm -Individual, Partnership, LLC or Corporation: ....;C=o=r..,_p=o1=·a=t io=n:.::,__ ____ _
(6) Corporation organized under the laws of the State of: _C_A _________ _
(7) California State Contractor's License Number and Class: _A.....C...&---'B'---------
Original Date Issued: ....;l~0~/3~1~/2~0~0=3 _________ Expiration Date: I 0/31/2023
(8) DIR Contractor Registration Number: _1-0~0~00-0-4_8_7_1 ___________ _
(9) List the name and title of the person(s) who inspected the Project site for your firm:
Richard Boctor, Pre side nt
(10) List the name and title of the person(s) who attended the non-mandatory pre-Bid meeting
for your f irm , including the non-mandatory site visit (if any):
NA
(11) Number of years' experience the company has as a contractor in construction work: ..12_
(12) List the names, titles, addresses and telephone numbers of all ind ividuals, firm members,
partners, joint venturers, and company or corporate officers having a principal interest in
this Bid:
Rich ard Bocto r Pres i dent
761 0 Day St Tujun g CA 9 I 04 2
818 -330-7306
(13) List all current and prior D.B.A.'s, aliases, and fictitious business names for any principal
having interest in this Bid:
NA
B-5 Richards, Watson & Gershon -2020
12853-0019\2476738v1 .doc 27
(14) List the dates of any voluntary or involuntary bankruptcy judgments against any principal
having an interest in this Bid:
NA
( 15) For all arbitrations, lawsuits, settlements and the li ke (in or out of court) that the company
or any principal having an interest in this Bid has been involved with in the past five (5)
years:
a. List the names, addresses and telephone numbers of contact persons for the
parties:
NA
b. Briefly summarize the parties' claims and defenses:
c. State the tribunal (e.g., Superior Court, American Arbitration Association, etc.), the
matter number, and the outcome:
(16) Has the company or any principal having an interest in this Bid ever had a contract
terminated by the owner or agency? If yes, explain.
No
Richa rds , Watson & Gershon -2020
12853-0019\24 76738v1 .doc 28
(17) Has the company or any principal having an interest in this Bid ever failed to complete a
project? If yes, explain.
No
(18) Has the company or any principal having an interest in this Bid ever been terminated for
cause, even if it was converted to a "termination of convenience"? If yes, explain.
No
(19) For projects that the company or any principal having an interest in this Bid has been
involved w ith in the last five (5) years, did you have any claims or actions:
a. By you against the owner? Circle one:
b. By the owner against you? Circle one:
Yes ~
Yes (®
c. By any outside agency or individual for labor compliance?
Circle one: Yes ~
d. By Subcontractors? Circle one: Yes (§)
e. Are any of these claims or actions unresolved or outstanding?
Circle one: Yes @)
If your answer is "yes" to any part or parts of this question, explain.
(20) List the last three (3) projects you have worked on or are currently working on for t he City
of Moorpark:
None
B-7 Richards, Watson & Gershon -2020
12853-0019\2476738v1 .doc 29
Upon request of the City, the Bidder shall furnish ev idence showing a notarized financial
statement, financial data, construction experience, or other additiona l information.
Failure to provide truthful answers to the questions above or in the following References Form
may result in the B id being deemed non-responsive.
The Bidder certifies under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the
information provided above is true and correct.
Company Monet Construction, Inc.
Signature: ___________ _
T itle: _____________ _
Date: --------------
8-8 Richards, Watson & Gershon -2020
12853-0019\2476738v1 .doc 30
REFERENCES FORM
F or fill public agency projects in excess of $5,000,000 that you are currently working on or have
worked on in the past two (2) ye ars , provide the following information :
Proj ect 1 Na me/Number LARSEN & PARKVTEW ES 122-23-04 & 22-23-05
Project Description HV AC, ELECTRICAL & FIRE ALARM UPGRADES
From: 01 /10/2023 To: 04/30/2024 Approximate Construction Dates
Agency Name: Hueneme ESD
Contact Person : David Ragsdale Telephone: 805-488-3588
Address: BAFLOUR BEATTY, 300 E. ESPLANADE DRIVE, #1120, OXNARD, CA 93036
Original Contract Amount: $_7..,___17--'-0 ....... 3--'-l....;;..0 ____ Final Contract Amount: $ 7,170 310
If final amount is different from original amount, please explain (change orders, extra work, etc.).
Did you or any Subcontractor, file any claims against the Agency?
C irc le one: Yes (&v
Did the Agency file any cla ims against you? Circle one: Yes @
If you answered yes to e ither of the above two questions, please explain and indicate outcome of
c laims.
NA
Project 2 Name/Number C. BLA CKSTOCK JHS ! 22-23-03-C
Project Description HV AC, FIRE ALARM, AND ELECTRICAL UPGRADES
Approximate Constru ction Date
Agency Name: Hueneme ESD
Contact Person: David Ragsdale
From: I l /28/2022 To: Q9/J Q/2023
Telephone: 805-488-3588
Address: BAFLOUR BEATTY, 300 E . ESPLANADE DRIVE, #1120 , OXNARD, CA 93036
Origin al Contract Amount: $ 4 389 000 Final Contract Amount: $ 4 389 000
B-9 Richards, Watson & Gershon -2020
12853-0019\2476738v1 .doc 31
If final amount is different from original amount, please explain (change orders, extra work, etc.).
NA
Did you or any Subcontractor, file any claims against the Agency?
Circle one: Yes (fIQ)
Did the Agency file any claims against you? Circle one: Yes @
If you answered yes to e ither of the above two questions, please explain and indicate outcome of
claims.
NA
Project 3 Name/Number PALM CREST E.S. MODERNlZATION I BlD NO. LCF 20/21-7
Project Description SEISMIC REINFORCING AND TENANT I MPROVE M E NTS
Approximate Construction Dates
Agency Name: La Canada USO
From: 07/22/2022 To: 12/28/2023
Contact Person: _F_r_an_k_N_av_a_n_·o ______ Telephone: 818-952-8077
Address: LINIK CORP PO BOX 803040 SANT A CLARJT A
Original Contract Amount: $_6..._,6_8_4..._,0_0_0 ____ Final Contract Amount: $6,684,000
If f inal amount is d ifferent from original amount, please explain (change orders, extra work, etc.).
NA
Did you or any Subcontractor, file any claims against the Agency?
Circle one: Yes @
Did the Agency file any claims against you? Circle one: Yes
If you answered yes to either of the above two questions, please explain and indicate outcome of
claims.
B-10 Richards, Watson & Gershon -2020
12853-0019\2476738v1 .doc 32
Project 4 Name/Numbe r 202 I-2022-05 HUENEME ES & 2021-2022-06 SUNKIST ES
Proje ct Description HV AC, ELECTRJCAL AND FIRE ALARM UPGRADES
Approximate Construction Dates
Agency Name: Hueneme ESD
Contact Person : DENNIS KUYKENDALL
From: 0 3/21/2022 To: 08/30/2023
Telephone: 805-983-1558
Address: BAFLOUR BEATTY , 300 E, ESPLANADE DRIVE, #I 120, OXNARD , CA 93036
Original Contract Amount: $_6~7_0_7~1_2_8 ____ Final Contract Amount:$ 7,237 ,500
If final amount is different from original amount. please explain (change orders, extra work, etc.).
Change Orders per Owner
Did you or any Subcontractor, file any claims against the Agency?
Circle one: Yes @
Did the Agency file any claims against you? Circle one: Yes
If you answered yes to e ither of the above two questions, please explain and indicate outcome of
claims.
NA
Proj ect 5 Name/Number MANHATTAN BEACH FS #2 I PROJE CT NO . D-939
Project Description NEW CONSTRUCTION OF FIRE STATION
Approximate Construction Dates From: 11/01/2021 To: 04/12/2023
Agency Name: CITY OF MANHATTAN BEACH, PUBLIC WORKS
Contact Person: LIANA URRUTIA Telephone: 3 10-802-5353
Address: 1400 HIGHLAND AVE., MANHATTAN BEACH , CA 90266
Original Contract Amount: $_7~·=05~5~,0~0~0 ____ Final Contract Amount: $7,235.993
If final amount is different from original amount. please explain (change orders, extra work, etc.).
Change Order per Owner
B-11 R ichards, Watson & Gershon -2020
12853-001912476738v1 .doc 33
Did you or any Subcontractor, file any claims against the Agency?
Circle one: Yes ~
Did the Agency file any claims against you? Circle one : Yes ®)
If you answered yes to either of the above two questions, please explain and indicate outcome of
claims.
NA
Project 6 Name/Number FIRE STATION #2 & 4 I ClP NO.s J 9-37-02 & 19-37-04
Project Description MODERNIZATION & EXPANSION PROJECT
Approximate Construction Dates From: 09/09/2020 To: 09/25/2021
Agency Name: CITY OF DOWNEY
Contact Person: _W_A_L_T_E_D_E_N ______ Telephone: 949-874-9170
Address: 11111 BROOKSHIRE AVE, DOWNEY. CA 90241
Original Contract Amount: $~5-,7~4~4~,0~0_0 ____ Final Contract Amount:$ 5,956.945
If final amount is different from original amount, please explain (change orders , extra work, etc.).
Change Orders per Owner
Did you or any Subcontractor, file any claims aga inst the Agency?
Circle one : Yes @
Did the Agency file any claims against you? Circle one: Yes
If you answered yes to e ither of the above two questions, please explain and indicate outcome of
claims.
NA
RESUME
Attach to this Bid the experience resume of the person who will be designated as General
Construction Superintendent or on-site Construction Manager for the Project.
B-12 Richards, Watson & GershOn -2020
12853-0019\2476738v1 .doc 34
Joe Schahaf
Project Superintendent
Contact
Mobile: (310) 945-8634
Email: joe@monetinc.net
License
General Contractor State License (B),
License Number: 866552
Date Received:2005
OSHA Construction Certified-30 hours
Cal/OSHA Certified-10 hours
CPR Certified
Key Skills
Analyzing & Assessing Blueprints
Safety & Risk Management
Scheduled Product Delivery
Quality Assurance & Control
Strategy & Manpower Planning
Coordinating Trades
Scheduling & Coordinating
Subcontractors
Productivity, Efficiency & Performance
Problem Identification & Resolution
Objective
Quality-oriented and results driven professional with 28 years of vast
experience working as a Project Superintendent for the
Public Works Construction Project Sites. Successfully managed over
20 large projects including LA and Ventura county projects, schools,
and libraries ranging in value from $1 million to multi-million dollar
assignments with a high level of accountability, professional ethics,
and dedication. Effectively maintain positive relationships
with subcontractors and government agencies to ensure each project
is completed on schedule, on budget.
Experience
Oct 2021-Present
Superintendent• Monet Construction,lnc.
2020-2021
Supervisor • Morillo Construction
2018-2020
Responsible Manager Owner• Power Synergies Inc
1991-2019
Superintendent and Estimator• G2K Construction,lnc
• Monitor projects from planning to completion, including tasks such as
budgeting and scheduling.
• Follow quality standards and ensure the safety and security of the
construction site.
• Collaborate with engineers, subcontractors, etc. to determine project needs
• Set performance goals and deadlines
• Plan construction processes
• Estimate costs and ensure the project is on budget
• Supervise staff and provide constructive feedback
• Monitor and report on project progress
35
LIST OF PROJECTS AS PRO,JECT SUPERINTENDENT
2022-2023(Present) Larsen & Parkview Es Hvac, Electrical & Fire Alarm Upgrades$ 7,170,310.00
Hueneme Elementary School District Dennis Kuykendall (805)983-1558
2021-2022 Mesa Union Es -Window Replacements, Hvac And Electrical Upgrades $3,578,000
Mesa Union School District Orlando De Leon (805) 383-9315
2021-2022 Fillmore Library Expansion $2,298,045.79
County Of Ventura Public Works Agency Devi Nallamala (805) 658-4354
2020-2021 Mental Health Center LAUSD Under OSHPD $9,000,000
Matthew Blane LAUSD Owner Representative (213) 663-9355
2017-2018 Lincoln Park Pool&Bath House City Project Manager $7,600,000
City Of LA-Dept. of Parks&Recreation Ingrid Reyes 213-847-4805
2014-2016 Mckinley Elementary Campus. City Project Inspector $5,182,000
San Gabriel Unified School District Victor Curiel 213-798-5644
2013-2015 Hamilton Elementary School AOR:LPA, Inc. $2,311,900
Pasadena Unified School District Randy Gamache 949-599-6516
2011-2012 Jefferson Middle School Sports&Fitness AOR:Flewelling&M oody $3,790,000
San Gabriel Unified School District. Sam Sahand 3230542-8300
2010-2012 Builing I Bookstore Renovation CM Cordoba Corporation $2,160,097
Long Beach Community College District Lisa Hernandez 562-938-5068
2008-2009 LAHC-New Child Development Center AOR:PBWS $7,270,000
Los Angeles Community College LACCD Jennifer Maclssac 626-432-5000
2008 Sky Blue Mesa Elementary School AOR:CarMichael Kemp. $4,899,000
Saugus Elementary Syrus Mobyen 626-357-9880
36
DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS
[Public Contract Code Section 4104]
List all Subcontractors who will perform Work or labor or re nder service to the Contractor in or about the construction of the Work or
improvement, or a Subcontractor licensed by the State of California who, under subcontract to the Contractor, specially fabricates and
installs a portion of the Work or improvement according to detailed drawings contained in the Plans and Specifications , in an amount
i n excess of one-half percent (0.5%) of the Contractor's total Bid or, in the case of bids o r offers for the construction of street s or
highways, including bridges, in excess of one-half percent (0.5%) of the Contractor's total Bid or $10 ,000, whiche ver is greater. If a ll
Subcontractors do not fit on this page, attach another page listing all information for all other Subcontractors.
Name under which
Subcontractor is
Licensed
and Re istered
CSLB License
Number{s) and
Class(es)
DIR Contractor
Registration
Number
Address and Phone Number Type of Work
(e.g., Electrical)
Percentage of Total
Bid (e.g., 10%)"
· The perc entage of the total Bid shall represent the "portion of the work" for the purposes of Public Contract Code Section 4104 (b ).
B-13 Richards, W atson & G ershon -2020
1285~1912476738v1 .doc 37
j!/J
DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS
[Public Contrac t Code Section 4104]
List all Subcontractors who will perform Work or labor or rend er service to the Contractor in or about the construction of the Work or
improve ment, or a Subcontractor licensed by the State of California who, under subcontract to the Contractor, specially fabricates and
installs a portion of the Work or improvement accord ing to detailed drawings contained in the Plans and Specifications, in an amount
in excess of one-half percent (0.5%) of the Contractor's total Bid or, in the case of bids or offers for the construction of streets or
highways, including bridges, in excess of one-half percent (0.5%) of the Contractor's total B id or $10 ,000, whicheve r is greater. If all
Subcontractors do not fit on this page, attach another page listing all information for all other Subcontractors.
Name under wh ich CSLB License DIR Contractor Type of Work Percentage of Total
Subcontractor is Number(s ) and Registration Address and Phone Numbe r
Licensed Class(es) Number
(e.g., Electrical) Bid (e.g ., 10%)"
and Registered
-~? 7 001"Utfh ft, Vl ~JI.IA fnl NT I N7
I IV Tl'~ ~ C' .,J~,11~ II-/. O CA-4.c(
~t,./# IGt/<( OfJOOOb ~q((J -,rr /Y. 4N1Ef<!~.4 ,,[.,[
v 6/ltl ,d-, c,4. f ~ ·r I
i""'~E'~ I z.
ft},?,?D()OO /(}67t:, I/~;£ )f~L---?AaJIAI/ crl 75~/ I
/CtJ/4 ?A~MvtR.
Cl $v/l/L..A-N(> (A-l.<ff GVfAf~~t6/II 2 . (p
· The percentage of the total Bid sha ll represent the "portion of the work" for the purposes of Public Contract Code Section 4104(b).
B-13 Richards. W atson & Gershon -2020
12853-0019\24 76738v1 .doc 38
DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS
[Public Contract Code Section 4104]
List all Subcontractors who will perform Work or labor or render service to the Contractor in or about the construction of the Work or
improvement, or a Subcontractor licensed by the State of California who, under subcontract to the Contractor, speci ally fabricates and
installs a portion of the Work or improvement according to detailed drawings contained in the Plans and Specifications , i n an amount
in excess of one-half percent (0.5%) of the Contractor's total Bid or, in the case of bi ds or offers for the construction of streets or
highways, including bridges, in excess of one-half percent (0.5%) of the Contractor's total Bid or $10,000, whichever is greater. If all
Subcontractors do not fit on this page, attach another page li sting all information for all other Subcontractors.
Name under which CSLB license DIR Contractor Type of Work Percentage of Total Subcontractor is Number(s) and Registration Address and Phone Number (e.g., Electrical) Bid (e.g., 10%)" licensed Class (es) Number
and Registered
-,-~v~N P1E.l-D ~%l loocoz.1t;13 .fl, 5Cf77 tJtp co«e J " AP (o ~VABtNC., 1.. I. <_ I ,A/ r wD f//<, l/ 17 ;f lt,k-, 4,,t-
t7r1'3~ I ~~I' /tJ '/7f t'J.'I I/~-~ 1,;y,. wrrr-r1:7r. V~7A ~ /0--:J;, 711 Mt.t.fw,11[) cA r~'fi,N>
I
~ ttloOQO{'f/tlQ -rcs,.-~ ~ fl.,P -z_ L-
9-1 /C?--
tt?o 10¢0o9Sr9 ~5 7 .-z_.
tbq t./. 5°.-rN ~.lf,R,171,ifO ~l--It Cc?V-/A/A-
· The percentage of the total Bid shall represent the "portion of the work» for the purposes of Public Contract Code Section 4104(b ).
B-13 Richards, Watson & Gershon -2020
12853-0019\2476738v1 .doc
/
39
DESIGNATION OF SUBCONTRACTORS
[Public Contract Code Section 4104]
List all Subcontractors who will perform Work or labor or render service to the Contractor in or about the construction of the Work or
improvement, or a Subcontractor licensed by the State of California who, under subcontract to the Contractor, specially fabricates and
installs a portion of the Work or improvement according to detailed drawings contained in the Plans and Specifications , in an amount
in excess of one-half percent (0.5%) of the Contractor's total Bid or, in the case of bids or offers for the construction of streets or
highways, including bridges, in excess of one-half percent (0.5%) of the Contractor's total Bid or $10,000, whichever is greater. If a ll
Subcontractors do not fit on this page, attach another page listing all information for all other Subcontractors.
Name under which CSLB License DIR Contractor Type of Work Percentage of Total
Subcontractor is Number(s) and Reg istration Address and Phone Numbe r (e.g., Electrical) Bid (e.g., 10%)" Licensed Class(es) Number
and Registered
g/0 ( '1';::? Yr>1t 171/ f: ~ 3J-( C.,4$f'< t9~
'('G3Rfq oa-6~1/~L f!VAC t~ fl t,v 11 (7 /V7 I. '()
~Vl/!P c?Ai-r.;1~o
,M.£ ?-c
· The percentage of the total Bid shall represent the "portion of the work~ for the purposes of Public Contract Code Section 4104 (b).
8 -13 R ichards. Watson & Gershon -2020
12853-0019\24 76738v1 .doc 40
INDUSTRIAL SAFETY RECORD FORM
Bidder's Name Manet Caostmctiao_ Toe
Current
Year of 2022 2021 2020 201 9 2018 Total
Record
Number of contracts 4 5 12 6 9 8 44
Total dollar amount of
contracts (in thousands of
dollars) 7 ,3 13,91 l 26,705,616 25 .790,033 9,460,344 17,709,164 13,434,067 100,413.135
N umber of fatalities 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
Number of lost workday
cases 0 116 0 0 0 97 2 13
Number of lost workday
cases involving permanent
· transfer to another j ob or
termination of employment 0 0 0 0 0 0 0
The above information was compiled from the records that are avai lable to m e at th is t ime and I declar e under penalty of perjury und er
the laws of the State of California that the information is t rue and accurate with in t he li m itations of those records.
Signat urefO /S ,;:=:-
T itle: Pr~ideot '
Date: Q7fl 7/?Q23
S i gnatur e : ___________________ _
T it l e : ____________________ _
Date: ____________________ _
B-14 Richards , W atson & Gershon -2020
1 2853-001 9\24 7 6738v1 .doc 41
BID BOND
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS that:
Bond No . ..;..N"-'-/A...;.__ __
WHEREAS the City of Moorpark ("City"), has issued an invitation for Bids for the Work described
as follows: City Hall Tenant Improvement Project at 323 Science Drive, Moorpark, CA 93021._
WHEREAS MONET CONSTRUCTION, INC. -7610 DAY STREET TUJUNGA, CA 91042
(Name and address of Bidder)
("Principal"), desires to submit a Bid to City for the Work.
WHEREAS, Bidders are required to furnish a form of Bidder's security with their Bids.
NOW, THEREFORE, we, the undersigned Principal, and _____________ _
GREAT AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY -750 THE CITY DRIVE SOUTH #470 ORANGE, CA 92868
(Name and address of Surety)
("Surety"), a duly admitted surety insurer under the laws of the State of California, as Surety, are
held and firmly bound unto the City in the penal sum of TEN PERCENT OF AMOUNT BID
Dollars($ 10% , being not less than ten percent
(10%) of the total Bid price, in lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of
which sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, executors, administrators,
successors, and assigns, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT, if the hereby bounded Principal is
awarded the Contract for the Work by the City and, within the time and in the manner required by
the bidding specifications, enters into the written form of Contract included with the bidding
specifications, furnishes the required Bonds (one to guarantee faithful performance and the other
to guarantee payment for labor and materials), and furnishes the required insurance coverage,
then this obligation shall become null and void; otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and
effect.
In case suit is brought upon this instrument, Surety further agrees to pay all court costs incurred
by the City in the suit and reasonable attorneys' fees in an amount fixed by the court. Surety
hereby waives the provisions of Civil Code Section 2845.
B-15 Richards, Watson & Gershon -2020
12853-0019\2476738v1 .doc
42
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, this instrument has been duly executed by Principal and Surety, on the
date set forth below, the name of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents
duly s igned by its undersigned representative(s) pursuant to authority of its governing body.
Dated: JULY 14TH, 2023
"Principal" "Surety"
MONET CONSTRUCTION, IN C. GREAT AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY
By:
Its: _A_TT_O_--="---------
By: ___________ By:
Its: _____________ Its:
Nole: This Bond must be dated, all signatures must be notarized, and evidence of the authority of any person signing as
attorney-in-fact must be attached.
B-16 Richards , Watson & Gershon -2020
12853-001912476738v1 .doc
43
GREAT AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY®
Administrative Office: 301 E 4TH STREET • CINCINNATI, OHIO 45202 • 513-369-5000 • FAX 513-723-2740
The number of persons authorized by
this power of attorney is not more than FOUR
No. 0 20974
POWER OF ATTORNEY
KNOW ALL MEN BY THESE PRESENTS: That the GREAT AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY, a corporation organized and existing under
and by virtue of the laws of the State of Ohio, does hereby nominate, constitute and appoint the person or persons named below, each individually if more than
one is named, its true and lawful attorney-in-fact, for it and in its name, place and stead to execute on behalfofthe said Company, as surety, any and all bonds,
undertakings and contracts of suretyship, or other written obligations in the nature thereof; provided that the liability of the said Company on any such bond,
undertaking or contract of suretyship executed under this authority shall not exceed the limit stated below.
PHILIP E. VEGA
KEVIN VEGA
BRITTON CHRISTIANSEN
MYRNA F. SMITH
Name Address
ALL OF
COVINA, CALIFORNIA
Limit of Power
ALL
$100,000,000
This Power of Attorney revokes all previous powers issued on behalf of the attomey(s)-in-fact named above.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF the GREAT AMERICAN INSURANCE COMPANY has caused these presents to be signed and attested by its appropriate
officers and its corporate seal hereunto affixed this 9TH day of FEBRUARY 2021 """ 4-c e. :E_ GREATAMERICA"}i/;i//ilv
As.ristcmt Secretwy Divisional Senior nee President
STATE OF OHIO, COUNTY OF HAMILTON -ss: MARK VICARIO (877-377-2405)
On this 9TH day of FEBRUARY , 2021 , before me personally appeared MARK VICARIO, to me known,
being duly sworn, deposes and says that he resides in Cincinnati, Ohio, that he is a Divisional Senior Vice President of the Bond Division of Great American
Insurance Company, the Company described in and which executed the above instrument; that he knows the seal of the said Company; that the seal affixed to the
said instrument is such corporate seal; that it was so affixed by authority of his office under the By-Laws of said Company, and that he signed his name thereto
by like authority.
SUSAN A KOHORST
Notary Public
State of Ohio
My Comm. Expire<;
May 18, 202.5
This Power of Attorney is granted by authority of the following resolutions adopted by the Board of Directors of Great American Insurance Company
by unanimous written consent dated June 9, 2008.
RESOLVED: That the Divisional President, the several Divisional Senior Vice Presidents, Divisional Vice Presidents and Divisonal Assistant Vice
Presidents, or any one of them. be and hereby is authorized, from time to time, to appoint one or more Attorneys-in-Fact to execute on behalf of the Company,
as surety, any and all bonds, undertakings and contracts of suretyship, or other written obligations in the nature thereof-to prescribe their respective duties and
the respective limits of their authority; and to revoke any such appointment at any time.
RESOLVED FURTHER: That the Company seal and the signature of any of the aforesaid officers and any Secretary or Assistant Secretary of the
Company may be affixed by facsimile to any poll'er of attorney or certificate of either given for the execution of any bond, undertaking, contract of suretyship,
or other written obligation in the nature thereof. such signature and seal when so used being hereby adopted by the Company as the original signature of such
officer and the original seal of the Company, to be valid and binding upon the Company with the same force and effect as though manually affixed.
CERTIFICATION
I, STEPHEN C. BERAHA, Assistant Secretary of Great American Insurance Company, do hereby certify that the foregoing Power of Attorney and
the Resolutions of the Board of Directors of June 9, 2008 have not been revoked and are now in full force and effect.
Signed and sealed this 14th day of July 2023
Assistant S<!cretary
S 1029AH (03/20)
44
CALIFORNIA ALL-PURPOSE ACKNOWLEDGMENT C IV I L CODE§ 1189
A notary public or other oflicer comp leting this certificate verifies only the identity of the individual who signed the
document to whic h this certificate is attached , and not the truthfulness, accuracy, or validity of that document.
State of Cal ifornia
County of LOS ANGELES
On 07/14/2023 before me, PHILIP VEGA , NOTARY PUBLIC
Date Here Insert Name and Title of the Officer
personally appeared KEVIN VEGA, ATTORNEY-in -FACT
Name(s) of Signer(s)
who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory ev idence to be the person'(-sl_ whose name~ is/are
subscribed to the w ithin instrument and acknowledged to me that he/~/fhsy executed the same in
his/hm/thsir authorized capacity(tes~ and that by his/her-Mleii: s ignature~ on the instrument the person~t
or the entity upon behalf of which the person~ acted , executed the instrument.
PHILIP VEGA
Notary Public -California
Los Angeles County I
Commission II 2327592
My Comm. Expires May 31 , 2024
Place Notary Seal Above
I certify under PENAL TY OF PERJURY under the laws
of the State of Californ ia that the forego ing paragraph
is true and correct.
WITNESS my hand and official seal.
Signatur
----------------OPTIONAL----------------
Though this section is optional, completing this information can deter alteration of the document or
fraudulent reattachment of this form to an unintended document.
Descr ipti on of Attached Document
Titl e or Type of Document: _____________ Document Date: _______ _
Number of Pages: Signer(s) Other Than Named Above: ____________ _
Capacity(ies) C la imed by S igner(s)
Signer's Name: ____________ _ Si gner's Name: ____________ _
D Corporate Officer -Title(s): ______ _ D Corporate Officer -T itle(s): ______ _
D Partner -D Lim ited D General D Partner -D Lim ited D General
D Individual □ Attorney in Fact D Individual □ Attorney in Fact
D Trustee D Guardian or Conservator D Trustee □ Guardian or Conservator
D Other: ______________ _ □ Other: _____________ _
Signer Is Representing: _________ _ Signer Is Representing: _________ _
©2014 National Notary Assoc iation· www.Nationa lNotary.org · 1-800-US NOTARY {1-800-876-6827) Item #5907
45
ACKNOWLEDGMENT
A notary public or other officer completing this
certificate verifies only the identity of the individual
who signed the document to which this certificate is
attached, and not the truthfulness, accuracy, or
validity of that document.
State of California
County of Los Angeles
On 07/17/2023 before me Jenny Altagracia Martinez, Notary Public '-------------------
(insert name and title of t he officer)
personally appeared _R_._1c_h_a_rd_B_o_ct_o_r_-_--_--_-_--_--_-_--_-_--_--_-_--_--_-_--_-_--_--_-_--_-_--_--_-_--_--_-_--_-_--_--_-_--_-_--__ _
who proved to me on the basis of satisfactory evidence to be the person(s) whose name(s) is/are
subscribed to the within instrument and acknowledged to me that he/she/they executed the same in
his/her/their authorized capacity(ies), and that by his/her/their signature(s) on the instrument the
person(s), or the entity upon behalf of which the person(s) acted, executed the instrument.
I certify under PENAL TY OF PERJURY under the laws of the State of California t hat the foregoing
paragraph is true and correct.
WITNESS my hand and official seal.
Signatu re~ (Seal)
eeeeeeeef
JENNY ALTAGRACIA MARTINE'Z
Notary Publlc • California :
Los Angeles County s:
Commlsslon # 2412944 -
y Comm. Expires Sep 11, 2026
46
NONCOLLUSION DECLARATION FORM
TO BE EXECUTED BY BIDDER AND SUBMITTED WITH BID
[Public Contract Code Section 7106]
The undersigned declares:
I am the Pres i dent
Bid.
of Monet Construction, Inc ., the party making the foregoing
The Bid is not made in the interest of, or on behalf of, any undisclosed person, partnership,
company, association, organization, or corporation. The B id is genuine and not co llusive or sham.
The B idder has not directly or indirectly induced or sol icited any other Bidder to put in a false or
sham Bid. The Bidder has not directly or indirectly co lluded , conspired, connived, or agreed with
any Bidder or an yone else to put in a sham Bid, or to refrain from bidding. The Bidder has not in
any manner, directly or indirectly, sought by agreement, communication, or conference with
anyone to fix the Bid price of the Bidder or any other B idder, or to fix any overhead, profit, or cost
e lem ent of the Bid price, or of that of any other Bidder. All statements contained in the Bid are
true. The Bidder has not, directly or indirectly, submitted his or her Bid price or any breakdown
thereof, or the contents thereof, or divulged information or data relative thereto, to any corporation,
partnership, company, association, organization, Bid depository, or to any member or agent
thereof, to effectuate a collusive or sham Bid, and has not paid, and will not pay, any Person or
entity for such purpose.
Any person executing this declaration on behalf of a Bidder that is a corporation, partnership, joint
venture, lim ited liability company, limited liability partnership, or any other entity, hereby
represents that he or she has full power to execute, and does execute, this declaration on behalf
of the Bidder.
I declare under penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that the foregoing is
true and correct and that this declaration is executed on 07/17/2023 [date], at
Tujunga [city], CA [state].
Signature: Signature:
Printed Name: ·chard Boctor Printed Name: __________ _
Date: 07/17/20 23 -----------Date:
B-17 Richards, Watson & Gershon -2020
12853-0019\2476738v1 .doc 47
-
~
Cons truction • Development • Man agement
MINUTES OF SPEC IAL MEETIN G OF DIRECTORS
OF
MO NETCONSTRU CTION, I NC.
A Ca lifornia CORPORATION
The Directors of M onet Construction, Inc. having consented to the time and place of the
special Meeting held on February 05, 2022 at 10:30 a .m. at: 7610 Day St., Tujunga CA 91042
Duri ng the meeting it was resolved that t he President of the Corporation Richard Boctor
will continue to be authorized to enter into constr uction contracts with various public agencies
and to bind the Corporat ion to t hose contracts.
There being no further business brought before the meeting and motion was made to
adjourn.
Dated: February 05, 2022
Name Title
Richard Boctor Director
MONET CONSTR UCTI ON, I NC. 7610 Day Street, Tujunga, CA 91042 Lie. #826930
(818) 330-7306 FAX (818) 330-7308 48
July 6, 2023
CITY OF MOORPARK
PARKS, RECREATION & COMMUNITY SERVICES DEPT. I 799 Moorpark Avenue, Moorpark, CA 93021
Main City Phone Number (805) 517-6200 I Fax (805) 532-2550 I moorpark@moorparkca.gov
ADDENDUM NO. 1
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS
323 SCIENCE DRIVE
Identification No. P&R-2023-01
NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN to all bidders and plan holders that the plans and specifications
for the above described project are hereby amended I clarified as follows:
CLARIFICATIONS:
• Building permit is ready to be pulled by the selected Contractor. Selected contractor will be
responsible for complying with Construction & Demolition Management Plan requirements.
• Mold Remediation and Asbestos Report -attached (Appendix 1 ).
• Construction timing: General Construction timing is 8 months, however, City will coordinate
with Contractor on long lead time items and adjust timing as appropriate.
• Fire Alarm/ Intrusion Detection I Surveillance/ Access-There have been several questions
requesting clarification of the scope for the Fire Alarm/Intrusion Detection/ Access Cards/
Surveillance system. This is intended to answer all of those questions. The City's Fire
Detection/Intrusion monitoring contractor will be providing the fire detection system and the
intrusion detection system. The GC will be responsible for procurement and installation of
the fire sprinkler switches for monitoring, which is standard. The CG is also responsible for
procurement and installation of the required duct detectors and dampers for the HVAC
system, which is also standard. In addition to these, the GC would be responsible for
providing an electrical outlet on a dedicated circuit for the fire detection control panel and
power supplies, and an outlet for the intrusion detection system and power supply. Lastly,
the City Fire Detection/Intrusion monitoring contractor will also remove the existing fire alarm
and intrusion detection equipment prior to demo which will need to be coordinated with the
GC.
No conduit is needed for the fire alarm or intrusion detection. All wire will be run above the
ceiling by the City's monitoring contractor. The security system has three components as
follows: Intrusion Detection -procured and installed by City Security monitoring company
(includes motion sensors, door breaks, glass breaks, monitoring panel etc.)
Electronic Access Control -purchased and installed by General Contractor per plans,
programmed/controlled by City
Video Surveillance -purchased and installed by General Contractor per plans.
CHRIS R. ENEGREN
Mayor
RENEE DELGADO
Councilmember
DANIEL GROFF
Councilmember
TOM MEANS
Councilmember
DR. ANTONIO CASTRO
Councilmember 49
Addendum #1
July 6, 2023
Page 2
Division 27 and Division 28 apply to this scope. Division 27 is by the General Contractor.
Division 28 scope for the access control and video surveillance are part of the General
Contractors scope of work, while the Division 28 Intrusion and fire alarm fall under the City
monitoring contractor scope.
• Re-Roofing -The project is a re-roof per the plan set
• As-Builts -The City does not have as-built plans. We have the plans provided for the
building permit when the building was constructed. If desired, we can make those available.
• Confirming that the City is requesting installation of Solatubes as per the plans
• General Contractor responsible for removal and disposal of all cubicles, furniture and other
debris in the building, not slated for reuse on the plans.
• City will have vines removed from exterior of the building. However, General Contractor will
still need to prep walls for paint.
• Door reuse/finish -Door finishes are per comments 9 and 10 where the alternate color is
applied. All other doors are existing to remain, existing to be relocated (same door, same
finish), or new with cherry finish to match existing. See specification section 08 14
00 2.2 B 1 a 1 and 2. ------
MG3 is solid wood, stained, per door schedule. The color is not indicated so that can be
clarified as white oak veneer with wheat stain WH18 to match PL-2.
• Door schedule -G/N restroom: The door tag is missing on the plan at the GIN restroom.
That door is #238 on the schedule which is HW Group 18. (HW Group refers to 130A)
• First Floor Breakroom Scope is minimal, renovations as noted on the plan set
• Wall Paper Removal and Replacement -Wall paper is only being added in limited areas
noted on the plans, the existing wallpaper throughout is being removed and prepped for
painting.
• 50% Self-performance Requirement -City will modify the self-performance requirement to
25% self-performance of the contract documents.
QUESTIONS:
Q1. On T0.1 Telecomm Coversheet, there are AV markings with a# symbol. Are these locations
receiving the same Cat6A cable we would be providing to the data ports?
A 1 /MEG: Symbol subscript indicates device type (e.g., A V1, AV2). Refer to Technology
Equipment Schedule on TO. 2.
50
Addendum #1
July 6, 2023
Page 3
Q2. On sheets T3.1 and T3.2 there are "WP#" symbols, which is not a type of symbol covered
by the coversheet. Please clarify.
A2 /MEG: WP# is a subscript of the below symbol (e.g., AV-WP1-W, AV-WP2-W). Refer to
Technology Equipment Schedule on T0.2.
Q3. On T0.1 Coversheet, there are locations marked as "RI Rough In". Is there a note that
explains what this is meant to be? If not, please clarify.
A3 /MEG: "Rough In' is used in locations needing to transition from wall box to modular furniture
or casework. Reference keynotes on floorplans and coordinate with appropriate trades onsite to
provide an acceptable transition. Rough in detail below provides typical rough in for modular
furniture connection. This detail does not relieve the contractor of responsibility to coordinate with
other trades for acceptable transition.
Q4. On the 6/21 walk, there was mention that there might be existing As-Builts for the telecom.
Can these be provided?
A4 There are no as-built plans for the telecom system.
Q5. On sheets T1 .1, T3.1 , and T3.2 there are camera location markings without a data cable
count. Please provide quantities for these locations
A5 /MEG: Provide two (2) CAT 6A cables to each camera location.
REFER TO FlOOR
PLANS FOR WALL
LOCATION
::i !: ,.,,.--~CD
::...----,, ,, ,, ,, ,, ,, ,, ::
# !!~HNOLOGYFURNITUREFEED
T 136 01
==CD
I. DEDICATED 1 5" EMT CONDUIT STUBBED TO ABOVE ACCESSIBLE CEILING
2. DOUBLE-GANG DEEP DEVICE BOX ANO STAINLESS FACEPLATE, PROVIDE WITH
90 OEOREE FITTINO.
3. PROVIDE 1.5" FLEXIBLE NONMETALLIC CONDUIT FROM JUNCTION BOX TO
SYSTEMS FUANrTURE. COORDINATE CONNECTION FITTINO AT BASE OF
FURN!TURE WITH FINAL APPROVED SYSTEMS FURNITURE SHOP DRAWINGS.
♦IM E G TECHNOLOGY FURNITURE FEED DETAIL T_136_01
rn.MUll"-"'1--_,,!•r,Jc~•i,l'•)'TI
51
Addendum #1
July 6 , 2023
Page 4
Q6. I see that the access control product specified in division 28 13 00 is called Paxton Net2
system. It is mentioned that this system is existing. I was wondering if the City does indeed already
have badge readers that are connected to a Paxton system. I'm trying to determine if the City is
open to alternate products.
A6 The City has the Paxton Net2 System. We currently use the Paxton system for all of our
card readers at all facilities. As far as alternate products we aren't looking to have different systems
for the facilities. They will all have to be the Paxton system or work with the Paxton system.
Q7. A note on the plans on sheet FP2.1 calls out to remove the (E) 2" fire pipe that crosses the
building. Additiona lly, notes on the fire protection plans call out to remove existing sprinklers, piping
and appurtenances. And all new sprinkler heads are shown throughout the build ing on the
proposed p lans. Is this required or do these only need to be removed/modified as necessary to
accommodate construction, ceiling heights, and based on any deficiencies in size from the
hydraulic calculations.
A 7 Fire sprinkler main and branch routing, shown on the bid set, is based on limited field
verification. Contractor shall verify exact locations in field and coordinate necessary
revisions/relocations, for entire building, with improvement plans. Revisions/relocations shall be
prepared as a deferred submittal, with appropriate engineering calculations and professional
engineer's stamp. The area of the council chamber improvement is known to impact the existing
system more substantially than other areas: an existing 2 " main appears to be running in conflict
with HVAC improvements, that are location critical, and it should be planned for
relocation. Additionally, branch routing in the council chamber improvement area should be
planned for relocation due to the maximization of finished ceiling height in the center of that
space. The FP drawings indicate and extent of relocation of 2 " main line extending from the central
corridor back toward the riser, we do not believe this is necessary to accommodate improvements
but should be confirmed by the contractor prior to bidding.
Q8. Sheet A61 .2 ca ll s for "3) PUTTY PADS SHALL BE PROV IDED AT ALL BACK BOXES, SEE DETAIL
19/A61.4 ."
Do you really want all back boxes in all walls, whether fire rated or not? If so perhaps you should allow for an
acoustica l putty pad instead of the fire rated pads called out on 19/A61.4. If you do want them on all back boxes
for acoustics , perhaps you dont really need them on exterior walls .
WALL TYPE SCHEDULE
HAT C()tlfRAC l 00'9 DISCRETK>H, t,,():1-TYPP. ~ OVPSUM BOARO
[STAHOMO)M,\V' Ot useo AT NON RA TEO W"ll CONOrTt():15
1! REFER TO PO,E.lR.-.~ J:11:E STOP AJJ!J OTHER PE.LATED OE.lAIL.S ON
SttEfiT MU "
H FVTTV Pf~IAU..0 OVIOCD.~DACP<B()XtA.. stt Oc.Jhll
IQ,AGld,
e.\lIIl.PAD ,iw,,., 19
AB Provide acoustic putty pads at all partition walls. Exterior walls, furred walls at exterior, do
not require putty pads. Provide fire rated putty pads at fire rated walls only.
52
Q9.
Addendum #1
July 6 , 2023
Page 5
Please tell us if the exi sting interior walls on the second fl oor, we re fram ed with the bottom plat e as shown on the
left, (w ith no gypcrete und er th e bottom pl ate) or th e bottom pl ate as shown on th e right (with gypcrete passing
und er the bottom plate). We are trying to figure out how mu ch gypcrete patch ing will be needed , and that
de pends on your answer to thi s question.
-~==J 11 ~ -Ill ==--· -~c--·
A9 As built plans/details are not conclusive on this existing condition; for the purpose of bidding,
please assume that partition wall tracks are set on top of existing topping.
Q10. Do we need to overex and recompact soils at the generator/trash enclosure masonry wall
footings and slab? If so how much?
A 10 Structural Response: Soils report was not provided as a part of this project thus minimum
CBC requirements were followed as indicated on S -0. 1 "Foundation Notes (No Soils Report)".
Bottom of footings shall be as indicated on plans and supporting soils shall have minimum
compaction as indicated in the foundation general notes. If unsuitable soils are found, follow
requirements stated in the general notes.
Q11. We seek clarification regarding the extents of asphalt demo and patch for the irrigation
portion of the project
Existing Mainline Location:
a. As per the irrigation plans, the location of the existing ma inline is stated as "to be determined in
the field by the contractor." We cannot determine the location prior to bid time. Is there an as-bu ilt
drawing ava ilable that shows the layout of t he existing main line? If not, can we assume the
accuracy of the main line's location as depicted on the drawings for bidding purposes?
Irrigation Controller Placement:
a. Could you please indicate on the plans the intended locations of both the new irrigation controller
and the existing irrigation controller? This information will help us determin e if any adjustments
need to be made t o the wiring and will impact our bid accordingly. Keep ing the contro ll er in the
same location would be ideal.
A 11 No as-builts are available and the City will not guarantee the irrigation mainline is where it's
noted on the plans. It is anticipated that any additional irrigation will use the existing mainline and
that tapping into that mainline can be achieved from within a landscape planter. No asphalt removal
is anticipated.
The new irrigation controller will be placed where the existing controller is and re-use the electrical
as stated per plans.
53
Addendum #1
July 6, 2023
Page 6
Q12. Note 8 on A-12.1 says: Install R-30 BATT Insulation at underside of roof, typical entire 2 nd
Floor. But pictures seem to already show existing insulation , shall we remove existing insulation
and provide new?
A 12 Existing insulation to remain unless it is impacted by demolition/improvement work. New
insulation shall be installed where existing insulation does not occur or remain.
Q12. Clarification on the "USG Geometrix" ceiling tile at Council Dias 131, see note 4 on A 12.1.
The product comes in a few different profiles, depths and color option s. Also a choice of sol id a nd
perforated panels. Can you provide this informatio n?
A 12 Wedge Style, 2 ¼", flat white, solid (non-petforated) panels
This add endum shall be made part of the above referenced project. Full compensation for all work
and requirements of this addendum s h all be considered as included in the appropriate price
proposal and no additional compensation will be allowed therefore.
Jessica Sandifer, Deputy Parks and Recreation Director
Questions regarding this addend um may be directed to the City's Project Representative Jessica
Sandifer, jsandifer@moorparkca .gov no later than July 10, 2023 .
...........................................................................................................................................
PLEASE EMAIL A SIGNED COPY OF ADDENDUM TO JESSICA SANDIFER AT
JSANDIFER@MOORPARKCA.GOV AND INCLUDE WITH BID.
RECEIPT OF THIS ADDENDUM IS HEREBY ACKNOWLEDGED.
Company Name: Monet Construction, Inc.
Authorized Representative: Richard Boctor
Signature of Authorized Re-p-re_s_e-nt-a-tiv_e_;:_/____,..n""--+.,,, _ __,-~-------C'-.---------r (
54
CITY OF MOORPARK
PARKS, RECREATION &: COMMUNITY SERVICES DEPT. I 799 Moorpark Avenue, Moorpark, CA 93021
Main City Phone Number (805) 517-6200 I Fax (805) 532-2550 I moorpark@moorparkca.gov
July 17, 2023
ADDENDUM NO. 2
TENANT IMPROVEMENTS
323 SCIENCE DRIVE
Identification No. P&R-2023-01
NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN to all bidders and plan holders that the plans and specifications for
the above described project are hereby amended as follows:
CLARIFICATION
Insulation between first and second floor:
Please allow for 8,000 sq.ft. of R-19 acoustic batt insulation, attached in the joist bay/deck above
1st floor ceiling. Discard existing insulation where encountered during demolition.
QUESTIONS:
Q1. Electrical panel on roof that is exposed, is this being changed or upgraded?
A 1. Confirmed: (E) panel '2h' to remain and reuse with circuit breakers as shown in panel
schedule. Panel '2HA' is new.
Q2. Crestron components are long lead time, is this acceptable as it relates to timing for the
project?
A2. Yes.
Q3. Does the City have a data cable standard?
A3. No.
Q4. Fiber Backbone Cabling -Note-6 calls out fiber cabling but does not specify what type of
cables and strand count? Specification 27 13 00 Backbone cabling does not specify what cable is
required either. Please confirm what type of fiber cabling is required per Note 6 on Detail 1.
Q5. There are 2 fiber standards described for the fiber backbone, OM3 MultiMode and OS2
Single Mode. Are we installing both as backbone connections between closets or should we
prioritize one over the other?
A4 &A5. Install minimum 12-strand OM3 fiber between telecommunications rooms.
Singlemode is not required on this project.
CHRIS R. ENEGREN
Mayor
RENEE DELGADO
Councilmember
DANIEL GROFF
Councilmember
TOM MEANS
Councilmember
DR. ANTONIO CASTRO
Councilmember 55
Addendum #2
July 17, 2023
Page 2
06. Tree pruning -does the City want to do tree pruning per section 32 93 01 as well?
A6. All tree pruning and removals have already been completed at the site.
This addendum shall be made part of the above referenced project. Full compensation for all work
and requirements of this addendum shall be considered as included in the appropriate price
proposal and no add itional compensation w ill be allowed therefore.
Jessica Sandifer, Deputy Parks and Recreatio n Director
The time period for asking questions has passed, no additional clarifications will be made prior to
bid due date .
..•............•...........................................................................................................................
PLEASE EMAIL A SIGNED COPY OF ADDENDUM TO JESSICA SANDIFER AT
JSANDIFER@MOORPARKCA.GOV AND INCLUDE WITH BID.
RECEIPT OF THI S ADDENDUM IS HEREBY ACKNOWLEDGED.
Company Name: Monet Construction, Inc.
Authorized Representative: Richard Boctor, President
Signature of Auth orized Re-p-re_s_e-nt-a-tiv_?(}D_:_/-=-=~,-....,..._[L; __ /) _________ _
(
56
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
CITY OF MOORPARK
CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
FOR
CITY HALL TENANT IMPROVEMENT PROJECT
IDENTIFICATION NO. P&R-2023-01
EXHIBIT D
57
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Page
-i- Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
NOTICE INVITING BIDS ................................................................................................... NIB-1
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS ........................................................................................... IB-1
CHECKLIST FOR BIDDERS .................................................................................................... 1
BID ..................................................................................................................................B-1
CHECKLIST FOR EXECUTION OF CONTRACT .................................................................... 1
CONTRACT ......................................................................................................................... C-1
PAYMENT BOND (LABOR AND MATERIALS) ................................................................ LMB-1
PERFORMANCE BOND .................................................................................................... PB-1
INSURANCE CERTIFICATES AND ENDORSEMENTS ................................................... INS-1
GENERAL PROVISIONS ................................................................................................... GP-1
SPECIAL PROVISIONS ..................................................................................................... SP-1
APPENDIX I - CITY HOLIDAYS
APPENDX II - CONSTRUCTION PLANSET
APPENDIX III - TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
58
NIB-1 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
NOTICE INVITING BIDS
FOR
CITY HALL TENANT IMPROVEMENT PROJECT [the “Project”]
Identification number: P&R-2023-01
NOTICE IS HEREBY GIVEN that the City of Moorpark, California (“City”) invites sealed Bids for
the Project. The City will receive such Bids at the City Clerk’s office, City Hall, 799 Moorpark Ave.,
Moorpark, California 93021 up to _________ a.m./p.m. on ________________________, at
which time they will be publicly opened and read aloud. The official bid clock, which will establish
the official bid time, will be determined by the City Clerk’s Division of the City of Moorpark. Bids
must be submitted on the City’s Bid Forms.
SCOPE OF WORK. The Project includes, without limitation, furnishing all necessary labor,
materials, equipment and other incidental and appurtenant Work necessary to satisfactorily
complete the tenant improvement project of approximately 22,464 s.f. 2-story building, including
but not limited to selective demolition of interior improvements, construction of new council
chambers and support spaces, private offices, open office areas, restroom improvements,
millwork, finishes, lighting, convenience power, HVAC systems, security system, AV and
broadcast system, fire sprinkler modifications, FM200 system, fire alarm system, exterior wall
painting, window seal repair, exterior door infill and construction, site accessibility improvements,
exterior site improvements, roofing, rooftop HVAC units, emergency generator, and trash area
expansion and the associated enclosures, as more specifically described in the Contract
Documents. This Work will be performed in strict conformance with the Contract Documents,
permits from regulatory agencies with jurisdiction, and applicable regulations. The quantity of
Work to be performed and materials to be furnished are approximations only, being given as a
basis for the comparison of Bids. Actual quantities of Work to be performed may vary at the
discretion of the City Manager.
The project is located at 323 Science Drive, Moorpark, CA 93021.
OBTAINING BID DOCUMENTS. Bidders may obtain free copies of the Plans, Specifications and
other Contract Documents online by visiting www.moorpark.ca.gov/bidding. Bidders are
responsible for having the documents printed.
NON - MANDATORY PRE-BID MEETING AND SITE VISIT. A non-mandatory pre-bid meeting
will be held on ____________ at ________ a.m./p.m. at 323 Science Drive, Moorpark, CA 93021
followed by a non-mandatory site visit. Additional site visits will be offered prior to bid submittal.
No allowances for cost adjustments will be made if a Bidder does not attend the pre-bid meeting
and site visit and/or fails to adequately examine the Project site before submitting a Bid.
REGISTRATION WITH THE DEPARTMENT OF INDUSTRIAL RELATIONS. In accordance with
Labor Code Sections 1725.5 and 1771.1, no contractor or subcontractor shall be qualified to bid
on, be listed in a bid proposal, subject to the requirements of Section 4104 of the Public Contract
Code, or engage in the performance of any contract for public work, unless currently registered
and qualified to perform public work pursuant to Section 1725.5 [with limited exceptions for bid
purposes only under Labor Code Section 1771.1(a)].
PREVAILING WAGES. In accordance with Labor Code Section 1770 et seq., the Project is a
“public work.” The selected Bidder (Contractor) and any Subcontractors shall pay wages in
59
NIB-2 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
accordance with the determination of the Director of the Department of Industrial Relations (“DIR”)
regarding the prevailing rate of per diem wages. Copies of those rates are on file with the Director
of Public Works, and are available to any interested party upon request. The Contractor shall post
a copy of the DIR’s determination of the prevailing rate of per diem wages at each job site. This
Project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the DIR.
BONDS. Each Bid must be accompanied by a cash deposit, cashier’s check, certified check or
Bidder’s Bond issued by a Surety insurer, made payable to the City and in an amount not less
than ten percent (10%) of the total Bid submitted. Personal or company checks are not
acceptable. Upon Contract award, the Contractor shall provide faithful performance and payment
Bonds, each in a sum equal to the Contract Price. All Bonds must be issued by a California
admitted Surety insurer using the forms set forth in the Contract Documents, or in any other form
approved by the City Attorney. Failure to enter into the Contract with the City, including the
submission of all required Bonds and insurance coverages, within fifteen (15) Days after the date
of the mailing of written notice of contract award to the Bidder, shall subject the Bid security to
forfeiture to the extent provided by law.
LICENSES. Each Bidder shall possess a valid Class A or B Contractor’s license issued by the
California State Contractors License Board at the time of the Bid submission, unless this Project
has any federal funding, in which case the successful Bidder must possess such a license at the
time of Contract award. Subconsultants shall possess a valid Class A, B or C Contractor’s license.
The successful Contractor must also possess a current City business license or purchase one
upon award of the Contract.
LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
The successful bidder will be required to complete all work within XXX calendar days from the
commencement date stated in the Notice to Proceed. In accordance with Government Code
section 53069.85, City will be compensated for damages incurred due to delays for which the
Contractor is responsible. The parties agree that determining City’s exact delay damages is and
will continue to be impracticable and extremely difficult. As such, for each calendar day in excess
of the time agreed upon for completion of the work, the Contractor shall pay to the City $125.00
per day, as liquidated damages and not as a penalty or forfeiture. Such amount shall constitute
the only payment allowed for damages resulting from Contractor caused delays. The City shall
have the right to deduct the amount of liquidated damages from any money due or that may
become due under the Contract.
The calendar days specified above includes the City’s Holiday Closures, as well as all legal
holidays. Inspection is not available on all holidays and weekends.
RETENTION SUBSTITUTION. Five percent (5%) of any progress payment will be withheld as
retention. In accordance with Public Contract Code Section 22300, and at the request and
expense of the Contractor, securities equivalent to the amount withheld may be deposited with
the City or with a State or federally chartered bank as escrow agent, which shall then pay such
moneys to the Contractor. Upon satisfactory completion of the Project, the securities shall be
returned to the Contractor. Alternatively, the Contractor may request that the City make payments
of earned retentions directly to an escrow agent at the Contractor’s expense. No such
substitutions shall be accepted until all related documents are approved by the City Attorney.
BIDDING PROCESS. The City reserves the right to reject any Bid or all Bids, and to waive any
irregularities or informalities in any Bid or in the bidding, as deemed to be in its best interest.
60
NIB-3 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
For further information, contact the City’s Project Manager Jessica Sandifer, City of Moorpark
(805) 517-6225, jsandifer@moorparkca.gov.
By: _____________________________ ___________________________________
City Manager Date
61
IB-1 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
INSTRUCTIONS TO BIDDERS
FORM OF BID. Bids shall be made on the Bid forms found herein. Bidders shall include all forms
and fill in all blank spaces, including inserting “N/A” (for not applicable) where necessary. Each
Bid must be submitted in a sealed envelope bearing the Bidder’s name and addressed to the City
Clerk with the Project name and identification number (as described in the Notice Inviting Bids)
typed or clearly printed on the lower left corner of the envelope.
DELIVERY OF BIDS. The Bid shall be delivered by the time and date, and to the place specified
in the Notice Inviting Bids. No oral, faxed, emailed, or telephonic Bids or alternatives will be
considered. The time of delivery shall be conclusively determined by the time-stamping clock
located at the City Clerk’s office. Bidders are solely responsible for ensuring that their Bids are
received in proper time, and Bidders assume all risks arising out of their chosen means of delivery.
Any Bid received after the Bid submission deadline shall be returned unopened. Bidders are
invited to be present for Bid opening. Accepted Bids shall become the property of the City.
AMENDED BIDS. Unauthorized conditions, limitations or provisos attached to a Bid may cause
the Bid to be deemed incomplete and non-responsive.
WITHDRAWAL OF BID. A Bid may be withdrawn without prejudice upon written request by the
Bidder filed with the City Clerk before the Bid submission deadline. Bids must remain valid and
shall not be subject to withdrawal for sixty (60) Days after the Bid opening date.
BIDDER’S SECURITY. Each Bid shall be accompanied by cash, a certified or cashier’s check
payable to the City, or a satisfactory Bid Bond in favor of the City executed by the Bidder as
principal and an admitted surety insurer as Surety, in an amount not less than ten percent (10%)
of the amount set forth in the Bid. The cash, check or Bid Bond shall be given as a guarantee
that, if selected, the Bidder will execute the Contract in conformity with the Contract Documents,
and will provide the evidence of insurance and furnish the specified Bonds, within fifteen (15)
Days after the date of delivery of the Contract Documents to the Bidder. In case of the Bidder’s
refusal or failure to do so, the City may award the Contract to the next lowest responsible bidder,
and the cash, check, or Bond (as applicable) of the lowest Bidder shall be forfeited to the City to
the extent permitted by law. No Bid Bond will be accepted unless it conforms substantially to the
form provided in these Contract Documents.
QUANTITIES APPROXIMATE. Any quantities shown in the Bid form or elsewhere herein shall
be considered as approximations listed to serve as a general indication of the amount of Work or
materials to be performed or furnished, and as basis for the Bid comparison. The City does not
guarantee that the actual amounts required will correspond with those shown. As deemed
necessary or convenient, the City may increase or decrease the amount of any item or portion of
Work or material to be performed or furnished or omit any such item or portion, in accordance
with the Contract Documents.
ADDENDA. The City may, from time to time, issue Addenda to the Contract Documents. Bidders
are responsible for ensuring that they have received any and all Addenda. Each Bidder is
responsible for verifying that it has received all Addenda issued, if any. Bidders must acknowledge
receipt of all Addenda, if any, in their bids. Failure to acknowledge receipt of all Addenda may
cause a Bid to be deemed incomplete and non-responsive.
FACSIMILE NUMBER AND EMAIL ADDRESS. Bidders shall supply the City with a facsimile
number and email address to facilitate transmission of Addenda and other information related to
62
IB-2 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
these Contract Documents. If the Addenda and other information are emailed, the City shall also
send all documents by facsimile or U.S. Mail. Failure to provide such a facsimile number and
email address may result in late notification. The City does not guarantee that it will provide any
information by facsimile, email, or both. A Bidder shall be responsible for all Addenda regardless
of whether Bidder received any such fax or email, and a Bidder shall have no recourse due to not
receiving such facsimile, email or both.
DISCREPANCIES IN BIDS. Each bidder shall set forth as to each item of Work, in clearly legible
words and figures, a unit or line item Bid amount for the item in the respective spaces provided
for this purpose.
In case of discrepancy between the unit price and the extended amount set forth for the item, the
unit price shall prevail. However, if the amount set forth as a unit price is ambiguous, unintelligible
or uncertain for any cause, or is omitted, or if the unit price is the same amount as the entry in the
“extended amount” column, then the amount set forth in the “extended amount” column for the
item shall prevail in accordance with the following:
(1) As to lump sum items, the amount set forth in the “extended amount” column shall be
the unit price.
(2) As to unit price items, the amount set forth in the “extended amount” column shall be
divided by the estimated quantity for the item set forth in the Bid documents, and the
price thus obtained shall be the unit price.
In case of discrepancy between words and figures, the words shall prevail.
COMPETENCY OF BIDDERS. In evaluating Bidder responsibility, consideration will be given not
only to the financial standing, but also to the general competency of the Bidder for the
performance of the Project. Each Bidder shall set forth in the designated area of the Bid form a
statement of its experience. No Contract will be executed with a Bidder that is not licensed and
registered with the DIR in accordance with State law, and with any applicable specific licensing
requirements specified in these Contract Documents. These licensing and registration
requirements for Contractors shall also apply to all Subcontractors.
BIDDER’S EXAMINATION OF SITE AND CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. Each Bidder must
carefully examine the Project site and the entirety of the Contract Documents, including any
addenda issued during the bidding period. Upon submission of a Bid, it will be conclusively
presumed that the Bidder has thoroughly investigated the Work and is satisfied as to the
conditions to be encountered and the character, quality, and quantities of Work to be performed
and materials to be furnished. Upon Bid submission, it also shall be conclusively presumed that
the Bidder is familiar with and agrees to the requirements of the Contract Documents, including
all Addenda. No information derived from an inspection of records or investigation will in any way
relieve the Contractor from its obligations under the Contract Documents nor entitle the Contractor
to any additional compensation. The Contractor shall not make any claim against the City based
upon ignorance or misunderstanding of any condition of the Project site or of the requirements
set forth in the Contract Documents. No claim for additional compensation will be allowed which
is based on a lack of knowledge of the above items. Bidders assume all risks in connection with
performance of the Work in accordance with the Contract Documents, regardless of actual
conditions encountered, and waive and release the City with respect to any and all claims and
liabilities in connection therewith, to the extent permitted by law.
63
IB-3 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
TRADE NAMES OR EQUALS. Requests to substitute an equivalent item for a brand or trade
name item must be made by written request submitted no later than the date specified in Section
4-6 of the General Provisions. Requests received after this time shall not be considered. Requests
shall clearly describe the product for which approval is requested, including all data necessary to
demonstrate acceptability.
DISQUALIFICATION OF BIDDERS. No Person shall be allowed to make, file or be interested in
more than one Bid for the Project, unless alternate Bids are specifically called for. A Person that
has submitted a sub-bid to a Bidder, or that has quoted prices of materials to a Bidder, is not
thereby disqualified from submitting a sub-proposal or quoting prices to other Bidders or from
making a prime Bid. If there is a reason to believe that collusion exists among the Bidders, all
affected Bids will be rejected.
RETURN OF BID SECURITY. The successful Bidder’s Bid security shall be held until the Contract
is executed. Bid security shall be returned to the unsuccessful Bidders within a reasonable time,
which in any case shall not exceed sixty (60) Days after the successful Bidder has signed the
Contract.
AWARD OF CONTRACT. The City reserves the right to reject any or all Bids or any parts thereof
or to waive any irregularities or informalities in any Bid or in the bidding. The Contract award, if
made, will be to the lowest responsible, responsive Bidder and is anticipated to occur within
sixty (60) Days after the Bid opening. The Contract award may be made after that period if the
selected Bidder has not given the City written notice of the withdrawal of its Bid.
DETERMINATION OF LOWEST BID. In accordance with Public Contract Code Section 20103.8,
the lowest Bid shall be determined as follows: The lowest bid shall be the lowest bid price on the
base contract without consideration of the prices on the additive or deductive items.
TRENCHING. If the Project involves the construction of a pipeline, sewer, sewage disposal
system, boring and jacking pits, or similar trenches or open excavations, which are five (5) feet
deep or more, then each Bidder must submit, as a Bid item, adequate sheeting, shoring, and
bracing, or an equivalent method, for the protection of life or limb, which shall conform to
applicable safety orders. This final submission must be accepted by the City in advance of
excavation and must include a detailed plan showing the design of shoring, bracing, sloping, or
other provisions to be made for worker protection from caving ground during the excavation Work.
If such plan varies from the shoring system standards, the plan shall be prepared by a registered
civil or structural engineer.
LISTING SUBCONTRACTORS; SELF-PERFORMANCE. Each Bidder shall submit a list of the
proposed Subcontractors on the Project, as required by the Subletting and Subcontracting Fair
Practices Act (Public Contract Code Section 4100, et seq.). Contractor shall self-perform not less
than 50% of the Work, in accordance with Section 3-2 of the Standard Specifications.
EXECUTION OF CONTRACT. The selected Bidder shall execute the Contract in the form
included in these Contract Documents within fifteen (15) Days from the date of delivery of the
Contract Documents to the Bidder. Additionally, the selected Bidder shall also secure all
insurance and Bonds as herein specified, and provide copies to the City, within fifteen (15) Days
from the date of delivery of the Contract Documents to the Bidder. Failure or refusal to execute
the Contract or to conform to any of the stipulated requirements shall be just cause for the
annulment of the award and forfeiture of the Bidder’s security. In such event, the City may declare
64
IB-4 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
the Bidder’s security forfeited to the extent permitted by law, and the City may award the Contract
to the next lowest responsible, responsive Bidder or may reject all bids.
NO COMPENSATION FOR COSTS INCURRED PRIOR TO CONTRACT EXECUTION. All costs
incurred by the selected Bidder prior to Contract award and execution of the Contract by the City
shall be at the Bidder’s sole risk. City shall have no liability for costs incurred prior to its execution
of the Contract.
SIGNATURES. The Bidder shall execute all documents requiring signatures, and shall cause to
be notarized all documents that indicate such a requirement. Bids submitted as joint ventures
must so state and be signed by each joint venturer. The Bidder shall provide evidence satisfactory
to the City, such as an authenticated resolution of its board of directors, a certified copy of a
certificate of partnership acknowledging the signer to be a general partner, or a power of attorney,
indicating the capacity of the person(s) signing the Bid to bind the Bidder to the Bid and any
Contract arising therefrom. Alternatively, Bids submitted by corporations must be executed as
specified in Corporations Code Section 313, and Bids submitted by partnerships must be
executed by all partners comprising the partnership.
INSURANCE AND BONDS. The Contractor shall not begin Work until it has given the City
evidence of all required insurance coverage (including all additional insured endorsements), a
Bond guaranteeing the Contractor’s faithful performance of the Contract, and a Bond securing
the payment of claims for labor and materials.
TELEPHONES. Bidders are hereby notified that the City will not provide telephones for their use
at the time of Bid submission.
INTERPRETATION OF CONTRACT DOCUMENTS. Any Bidder that is in doubt as to the
intended meaning of any part of the Contract Documents, or that finds discrepancies in or
omissions from the Contract Documents, may submit to the City a written request for an
interpretation or correction not later than ten (10) Days before the Bid submission deadline. Such
submission, if any must be sent to the Project Manager, Jessica Sandifer by emailing to
jsandifer@moorparkca.gov. Requests for clarification received after this date will be disregarded.
Please indicate the Project and identification number in the request for clarification. Telephonic
requests will not be taken. Any interpretation or correction of the Contract Documents will be
made only by a written Addendum. No oral interpretation of any provision in the Contract
Documents shall be binding.
TAXES. Except as may be otherwise specifically provided herein, all sales and/or use taxes
assessed by federal, State or local authorities on materials used or furnished by the Contractor in
performing the Work shall be paid by the Contractor. The Bidder shall calculate payment for all
sales, unemployment, pension and other taxes imposed by federal, State, and local law and shall
include these payments in computing the Bid.
65
PAGES: Checklist 1 and B-1 through B-18
are the Contractors Bid Proposal
Documents and have been removed so as
not to be duplicative.
66
B-19 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
CHECKLIST FOR EXECUTION OF CONTRACT
TO BE SUBMITTED BY SUCCESSFUL BIDDER:
____ Two (2) executed and notarized copies of the Contract
____ Evidence satisfactory to the City indicating the capacity of the person(s)
signing the Contract to bind the Contractor
_____ Payment Bond in amount of the Contract
____ Performance Bond in amount of the Contract
____ Workers’ Compensation Certificate
____ Liability insurance certificate in the amounts specified in Section 5-4.2 of
the General Provisions, naming the City as a co-insured
____ Automobile insurance certificate in the amount specified in Section 5-4.4 of
the General Provisions, naming the City as a co-insured
____ Copy of City business license
____ Additional insured endorsement – comprehensive general liability
____ Additional insured endorsement – automobile liability
____ Additional insured endorsement – excess liability
67
PAGES: C-1 through C-16 are the
Agreement Documents and have been
removed so as not to be duplicative.
68
C-17 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
SAMPLE INSURANCE FORMS
ACORD"' CERTIFICATE OF LIABILITY INSURANCE I DATE jMMIOONYYY)
L___...-
THIS CERTIFICATE IS ISSUED AS A MATTER OF INFORMATION ONLY AND CONFERS NO RIGHTS UPON THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER. THIS
CERTIFICATE DOES NOT AFFIRMATIVELY OR NEGATIVELY AMEND, EXTEND OR ALTER THE COVERAGE AFFORDED BY THE POLICIES
BELOW. THIS CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE DOES NOT CONSTITUTE A CONTRACT BETWEEN THE ISSUING INSURER($), AUTHORIZED
REPRESENTATIVE OR PRODUCER, AND THE CERTIFICATE HOLDER.
IMPORTANT: If the certificate holder is an ADDITIONAL INSURED, the policy(ies) must be endor sed. If SUBROGATION IS WAIVED, subject to
the terms and conditions of the policy, certain policies may require an endorsement. A statement on this cert.ificate does not confer rights to the
certificate holder in lieu o f such endorsement(s).
~--
PROOUCER
Ii~ Nol:
IN SUR ERIS, AFFORDING COVERAGE NAIC•
INSURER A :
INS\JRED INSURER B :
INSURERC :
~SU~ER O :
INSURER E :
INSURER F :
COVERAGES CERTI FICATE NUMBER· REVISION NUMBER·
THIS IS TO CERTIFY THAT THE POLICIES OF INSURANCE LISTED BELOW HAVE BEEN ISSUED TO THE INSURED NAMED ABOVE FOR THE POLICY PERIOD
INDICATED. NOTWITHSTANDING ANY REQUIREMENT, TERM OR CONDITION OF ANY CONTRACT OR OTHER DOCUMENT WI TH RE SPECT TO WHICH THIS
CERTIFICATE MAY BE ISSUED OR MAY PE RTAIN. THE INSURANCE AFFORDED BY THE POUOES DESCRIBED HEREIN IS SUBJECT TO ALL THE TERMS.
EXCLUSIONS AND CONDITIONS OF SUCH POLICIES. LIMITS SHOWN MAY HAVE BEEN REDUCED BY PAID CLAIMS .
INSR LTA TYPE O F INSURANCE r,;'~/ .-:::.!. POLICY NUM8EA ' ,:N;·tJlllVI I IMWOMW.,., LIMITS
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABll.ln' EACH OCCURRENCE $ -□ CI.AJMS-MI\OE □ OCCUR t"o~~Vs?J!~~r:-'--, -s
-MEO EXP (Any one""''°"' $
PERSONAL & ADV INJURY $ -
GENL AGGREGATE l,.IMIT APPLIES PER GENERAL AGGREGATE $
~POI.ICY □~~ □ LOC PRODUCTS· COMP,iOP AGG s
OTHER s
AUTOM081L.E l lABaLITV w~~~.~NGLEUMJT s -
:~~~ Fl SCHEDULED
BODILY INJURY (Ptr per""1) $ -
-AUTOS AUTOS BODIL y INJURY (?er ae,e.fOttlt) $
NON-O'M<ED ~?~~~AMAGE s -HIRED AUTOS AUTOS
$
UMBRELLA UAB H OCCUR EACH OCCURRENCE $ -
EXCESS LlAB CLAIMS-MADE AGGREGATE s
OED I I RETENTION$ s
WORKERS COM.PeNSATIO N l ~~MC I 1i~H-
AND EMPLOYERS" LIABILITY YIN
ANY PROPRtETO~A.RTNER/EXECUTIVE □ NIA E-L EAC>l ACCIDENT $
OFFICER/MEMBER EXCLUOEOI)
(Ma ndatory In NH) E-L l)jSEASE . EA EMPLOYEE $
u~~~~ ~OPERArroNS betow E.L DISEASE -POLICY Lit.IT $
I I
DESCRIPTION OF OPERATIONS I LOCATQNS I vauctes (ACORO 10t, Additional Re m~J'ks ~edule. may be ~che d if more sp11ce Is requi~)
Add: "T he Crty o f Moorpark , rts o fficers, o fficials, emplo yees, a gents are named a s a ddrtional Insu red per forms C G 20 10 04 13
and C G 20 37 0 4 13"
Attachments: Additional Insured Endorseme nt (Ongoing Operations)
Additional Insured Endorse ment (Completed Operations)
P rimary, Non-contributory Endorsement
Waiver of Subrogation
CERTIFICATE HO LDER CANCELLATION
SHOULD ANY OF THE ABOVE DESCRIBED POLICIES BE CANCELLED BEFORE
THE EXPIRATION DATE THEREOF, NOTICE W ILL BE DELIVER.ED IN
ACCORDANCE WITH THE POLICY PROVISIONS.
AUTHORIZED REPRESENT A TfVE
I
© 1988-2014 ACORD CORPORATION. All rights reserved.
ACORD 25 (2014/01) The ACORD name and logo a re r egi stered m arks of ACORD
69
C-18 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
POLICY N UMBER: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY
CG20100413
THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY.
ADDITIONAL INSURED -OWNERS, LESSEES OR
CONTRACTORS -SCHEDULED PERSON OR
ORGANIZATION
This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the followi ng:
COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY COVERAGE PART
SCHEDULE
Name Of Additional Insured Person(s)
Or Organization(s) L ocation(s) Of Covered Operations
Information required to complete this Schedule if not shown above will be shown in the Declarations.
A. Section II -Who Is A n Insured is amended to
include as an addit ional insured the person(s) or
organization(s) shown in the Schedule, but only
w it h respect to liability for ''bod ily injury", "property
damage" o r "persona l and advertising injury"
caused, in whole or in part, by:
1 . Your acts or omissions; o r
2. The acts or omissions of those acting on your
behalf;
in the performance of your ongoing operations for
the additional insured(s) at the location(s)
designated above.
Howeve r:
1 . The insurance afforded to such additional
insured only applies to the extent perm itted by
law; and
2. If coverage provided to the additional insured is
required by a contract or agreement, t he
insurance afforded to such additional insured
will not be broader than that which you are
required by the contract or agreement to
provide for such additiona l insured.
B. With respect to t he insurance affo rded to these
additional insureds, the following additional
exclusions apply:
This insurance does not apply to "bodily injury" o r
"property damage" occurring after:
1 . All work, including materials, parts o r
equipment fu rnished in connect ion with such
work, on t he project (other t han service,
maintenance or repairs) to be performed by o r
on behalf of the additional insured(s) at the
location of the covered operations has been
completed; o r
2. That portion of "your work'' out of which the
injury or damage arises has been put to its
intended use by any person or organization
other than another contractor or subcontractor
engaged in performing operations for a
principal as a part of the same project.
CG 20100413 © Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2012 Page 1 of2
70
C-19 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
C. With respect to the insurance afforded to these
additional insureds, the follow ing is added to
Section Ill -Limits Of Insurance:
If coverage provided to the additional insured is
requi red by a cont ract o r agreement, the most we
w ill pay on behalf of the additional insured is the
amount of insurance:
1. Requ ired by the contract o r agreement; or
2. Avai lable under the applicable Limits of
Insurance shown in the Dec lara tions;
w hichever is less.
This endorsement s hall not increase the
applicable Limits of Insurance shown in the
Declarations.
Page 2of 2 © Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2012 CG 2010 0413
71
C-20 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
POLICY N U MBER: COMMERCIAL GENERAL LIABILITY
CG 20 37 0413
THIS ENDORSEMENT CHANGES THE POLICY. PLEASE READ IT CAREFULLY.
ADDITIONAL INSURED -OWNERS, LESSEES OR
CONTRACTORS -COMPLETED OPERATIONS
This endorsement modifies insurance provided under the following:
COMM ERC IAL G EN ERAL LI ABILITY COVERAGE PART
PRODUCTS/COMPLETED OPERATIONS LIABILITY COVERAGE PART
SCHEDULE
Name Of Additional Insured Person(s)
Or Oraanization/sl Location And Description Of Completed O.,..rations
Information required to complete this Schedule if not shown above will be shown in the Declarations.
A . Section II -W ho Is An Insured is amended to
include as an additional insured the person(s) o r
organization(s) shown in the Schedule , but only
w ith respect to liability for "bodily injury" or
"property damage" caused, in whole or in part , by
''your work" at the location designated and
described in the Schedule of this endorsement
performed for that additi onal insured and
included in the "products-completed operations
hazard".
However:
1 . The insurance afforded to such additional
insured only applies to t he extent permitted
by law; and
2. If coverage provided to the additional insured
is required by a contract or agreement, the
insurance afforded to such additional insured
will not be broader than that which you are
required by the contract or agreement to
provide for such additiona I insured.
B . With respect to the insurance afforded to these
addit ional insureds, the following is added to
Section Ill -Limits Of Insurance:
If coverage provided to the additional insured is
required by a contract or agreement, the most we
w ill pay on behalf of the additiona l insured is the
amount of insurance:
1 . Required by the contract or agreement; or
2. Available under the applicable Limits of
Insurance shown in the Declarations;
w hic hever is less.
This endorsement shall not increase the applica ble
Limits of Insurance shown in the Declarations.
CG 2037 0413 © Insurance Services Office, Inc., 2012 Page 1 of 1
72
LMB-1 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
Bond No. __________
PAYMENT BOND
(LABOR AND MATERIALS)
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS that:
WHEREAS the City of Moorpark (“City”), State of California, has awarded to
(“Principal”)
(Name and address of Contractor)
a contract (the “Contract”) for the Work described as follows:
CITY HALL TENANT IMPROVEMENT PROJECT - 323 SCIENCE DRIVE, MOORPARK, CA
(Project name)
WHEREAS, under the terms of the Contract, the Principal is required before entering upon the
performance of the Work, to file a good and sufficient payment Bond with the City to secure the
claims to which reference is made in Title 3 (commencing with Section 9000) of Part 6 of Division
4 of the Civil Code.
NOW, THEREFORE, we, the undersigned Principal, and
(Name and address of Surety)
(“Surety”) a duly admitted surety insurer under the laws of the State of California, as Surety, are
held and firmly bound unto the City and all contractors, subcontractors, laborers, material
suppliers, and other persons employed in the performance of the Contract and referred to in Title
3 (commencing with Section 9000) of Part 6 of Division 4 of the Civil Code in the penal sum of
Dollars ($ ), for materials furnished or labor thereon of any kind,
or for amounts due under the Unemployment Insurance Act with respect to this Work or labor,
that the Surety will pay the same in an amount not exceeding the amount hereinabove set forth,
and also in case suit is brought upon this Bond, will pay, in addition to the face amount thereof,
costs and reasonable expenses and fees, including reasonable attorneys’ fees, incurred by City
in successfully enforcing this obligation, to be awarded and fixed by the court, and to be taxed as
costs and to be included in the judgment therein rendered.
It is hereby expressly stipulated and agreed that this Bond shall inure to the benefit of any and all
persons, companies, and corporations entitled to file claims under Title 3 (commencing with
Section 9000) of Part 6 of Division 4 of the Civil Code, so as to give a right of action to them or
their assigns in any suit brought upon this Bond.
Upon expiration of the time within which the California Labor Commissioner may serve a civil
wage and penalty assessment against the principal, any of its subcontractors, or both the principal
and its subcontractors pursuant to Labor Code Section 1741, and upon expiration of the time
within which a joint labor management committee may commence an action against the principal,
any of its subcontractors, or both the principal and its subcontractors pursuant to Labor Code
Section 1771.2, if the condition of this Bond be fully performed, then this obligation shall become
null and void; otherwise, it shall be and remain in full force and effect.
73
LMB-2 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
The Surety hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration, or addition
to the terms of the Contract or the Specifications accompanying the same shall in any manner
affect its obligations on this Bond, and it does hereby waive notice of any such change, extension,
alteration, or addition.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, two (2) identical counterparts of this instrument, each of which shall for
all purposes be deemed an original hereof, have been duly executed by Principal and Surety, on
the date set forth below, the name of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents
duly signed by its undersigned representative(s) pursuant to authority of its governing body.
Dated:
“Principal”
By:
Its
By:
Its
(Seal)
“Surety”
By:
Its
By:
Its
(Seal)
Note: This Bond must be executed in duplicate and dated, all signatures must be notarized, and evidence
of the authority of any person signing as attorney-in-fact must be attached. DATE OF BOND MUST
NOT BE BEFORE DATE OF CONTRACT. Surety companies executing Bonds must appear on the
Treasury Department’s most current list (Circular 570 as amended) and be authorized to transact
business in the State where the project is located.
74
PB-1 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
Bond No. __________
PERFORMANCE BOND
KNOW ALL PERSONS BY THESE PRESENTS that:
WHEREAS the City of Moorpark (“City”), has awarded to
(“Principal”)
(Name and address of Contractor)
a contract (the “Contract”) for the Work described as follows:
CITY HALL TENANT IMPROVEMENT PROJECT - 323 SCIENCE DRIVE, MOORPARK ,CA
(Project name)
WHEREAS, Principal is required under the terms of the Contract to furnish a Bond for the faithful
performance of the Contract.
NOW, THEREFORE, we, the undersigned Principal, and
,
(Name and address of Surety)
(“Surety”) a duly admitted surety insurer under the laws of the State of California, as Surety, are
held and firmly bound unto the City in the penal sum of
Dollars ($ ), this amount being not less than the
total Contract Price, in lawful money of the United States of America, for the payment of which
sum well and truly to be made, we bind ourselves, our heirs, successors executors and
administrators, jointly and severally, firmly by these presents.
THE CONDITION OF THIS OBLIGATION IS SUCH THAT, if the hereby bounded Principal, his,
her or its heirs, executors, administrators, successors or assigns, shall in all things stand to and
abide by, and well and truly keep and perform the covenants, conditions and provisions in the
Contract and any alteration thereof made as therein provided, on the Principal’s part, to be kept
and performed at the time and in the manner therein specified, and in all respects according to
their true intent and meaning, and shall indemnify and save harmless the City, its officers, agents
and employees, as therein stipulated, then this obligation shall become null and void one year
from the date of recordation of the Notice of Completion; otherwise, it shall be and remain in full
force and effect.
As a part of the obligation secured hereby and in addition to the face amount specified therefor,
there shall be included costs and reasonable expenses and fees, including reasonable attorneys’
fees, incurred by City in successfully enforcing such obligation, all to be taxed as costs and
included in any judgment rendered. Surety hereby waives any statute of limitations as it applies
to an action on this Bond.
The Surety hereby stipulates and agrees that no change, extension of time, alteration or addition
to the terms of the Contract or of the Work to be performed thereunder or the specifications
accompanying the same shall in anywise affect its obligations under this Bond, and it does hereby
waive notice of any such change, extension of time, alteration or addition to the terms of the
75
PB-2 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
Contract or to the Work or to the specifications. Surety hereby waives the provisions of California
Civil Code Sections 2845 and 2849. The City is the principal beneficiary of this Bond and has all
rights of a party hereto.
IN WITNESS WHEREOF, two (2) identical counterparts of this instrument, each of which shall for
all purposes be deemed an original hereof, have been duly executed by Principal and Surety, on
the date set forth below, the name of each corporate party being hereto affixed and these presents
duly signed by its undersigned representative(s) pursuant to authority of its governing body.
Dated:
“Principal”
By:
Its
By:
Its
(Seal)
“Surety”
By:
Its
By:
Its
(Seal)
Note: This Bond must be executed in duplicate and dated, all signatures must be notarized, and evidence of
the authority of any person signing as attorney-in-fact must be attached. DATE OF BOND MUST NOT
BE BEFORE DATE OF CONTRACT. Surety companies executing Bonds must appear on the Treasury
Department’s most current list (Circular 570 as amended) and be authorized to transact business in the
State where the project is located.
76
PB-3 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
PLEASE PROVIDE CONTACT INFORMATION FOR THE SURETY AND THE BROKER
IN THE SPACE PROVIDED BELOW
SURETY – Contact Information
_________________________________________
_
Attn:______________________________________
_
Address:__________________________________
_
City State Zip_______________________________
Phone
#:___________________________________
BROKER – Contact Information
______________________________________
_
Attn:__________________________________
_
Address:_______________________________
_
City State Zip
____________________________
Phone#
________________________________
77
INS-1 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
WORKERS’ COMPENSATION
CERTIFICATE OF INSURANCE
WHEREAS, the City of Moorpark (“City”) has required certain insurance to be provided by:
NOW THEREFORE, the undersigned insurance company does hereby certify that it has issued
the policy or policies described below to the following named insureds and that the same are in
force at this time:
1. This certificate is issued to:
City of Moorpark
City Hall
799 Moorpark Ave
Moorpark, California 93021
The insureds under such policy or policies are:
2. Workers’ Compensation Policy or Policies in a form approved by the Insurance
Commissioner of California covering all operations of the named insureds as follows:
Policy Number Effective Date Expiration Date
By:
Its Authorized Representative
78
GP-1 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
GENERAL PROVISIONS
SECTION 0. GENERAL PROVISIONS DEFINED
0-1 STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
The 2021 edition of “Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction” (“Standard
Specifications”), as amended by the Contract Documents, is incorporated into the Contract
Documents by this reference. The Work described herein shall be done in accordance with the
provisions of the Standard Specifications, as amended by the Contract Documents.
0-2 NUMBERING OF SECTIONS
The number of sections and subsections in these General Provisions are compatible with the
numbering in the Standard Specifications.
0-3 SUPPLEMENTATION OF STANDARD SPECIFICATIONS
The Sections that follow supplement, but do not replace, the corresponding provisions in Part 1
(General Provisions) of the Standard Specifications, except as otherwise indicated herein. In the
event of any conflict between the Standard Specifications and these General Provisions, these
General Provisions shall control.
SECTION 1. GENERAL, TERMS, DEFINITIONS, ABBREVIATIONS, UNITS OF MEASURE,
AND SYMBOLS
1-2 TERMS AND DEFINITIONS
Whenever in the Standard Specifications or in the Contract Documents the following terms are
used, they shall be understood to mean the following:
Acceptable, Acceptance – or words of similar import shall be understood to be the
acceptance of the City.
Agency – The City of Moorpark.
Applicable Laws – laws, statutes, ordinances, rules, codes, regulations, permits, and
licenses of any kind, issued by governmental authorities or private authorities with
jurisdiction (including utilities), to the extent they apply to the Work.
Board – The City Council of the City of Moorpark.
Contract Documents – As defined in Standard Specifications Section 1-2, but also
including these General Provisions.
Engineer – The City Engineer, acting either directly or through properly authorized
agents. Such agents shall act within the scope of the particular duties entrusted to
them.
Inspector – An authorized representative of the City, assigned by the City to make
inspections of Work performed by or materials supplied by the Contractor.
79
GP-2 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
Laboratory – A laboratory authorized by the City to test materials and Work involved
in the Contract.
Notice of Completion – The notice authorized by Civil Code Section 9204.
Project – See Work.
Submittal – Any drawing, calculation, specification, product data, samples, manuals,
requests for substitutes, spare parts, photographs, survey data, traffic control plans,
record drawings, Bonds or similar items required to be submitted to the City under the
terms of the Contract.
Work – The construction or related work that is to be performed under the Contract,
including furnishing all labor, materials, equipment, and services.
1-3.3 Institutions
The institutions listed in Section 1-3.3 of Part 1 of the Standard Specifications shall be
supplemented by the list below:
Abbreviation Word or Words
AAN ................................................................................... American Association of Nurserymen
AGCA ....................................................................... Associated General Contractors of America
APWA ................................................................................... American Public Works Association
CRSI ..................................................................................... Concrete Reinforcing Steel Institute
CSI ........................................................................................ Construction Specifications Institute
NEC ........................................................................................................... National Electric Code
NFPA .................................................................................... National Fire Protection Association
SSS ........................................................................... State of California Standard Specifications,
Latest edition, Department of Transportation
SSP ....................................................................................... State of California Standard Plans,
Latest edition, Department of Transportation
1-7.2 CONTRACT BONDS
The Faithful Performance Bond shall remain in force until the date of recordation of the Notice of
Completion and the end of all warranty periods set forth in the Contract Documents. The Material
and Labor Bond shall remain in force until expiration of the time within which the California Labor
Commissioner may serve a civil wage and penalty assessment against the principal, any of its
subcontractors, or both the principal and its subcontractors pursuant to Labor Code Section 1741,
and until the expiration of the time within which a joint labor management committee may
commence an action against the principal, any of its subcontractors, or both the principal and its
subcontractors pursuant to Labor Code Section 1771.2.
All Bonds must be submitted using the required forms, which are in the Contract Documents, or
on any other form approved by the City Attorney.
SECTION 2. SCOPE OF THE WORK
2.2 PERMITS
80
GP-3 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
Before starting any construction work, the Contractor will be required to obtain all necessary
permits from the City, which may include obtaining a no fee encroachment permit for Work within
the public right-of-way, as well as all other permits required from all other agencies. Should this
Project require construction of trenches or excavations which are five (5) feet or deeper and into
which a person is required to descend, the Contractor shall obtain a Cal/OSHA permit and furnish
the City with a copy before Work can commence on this Project. Contractor shall bear all cost for
fees for all agencies except for the City’s permit fees. Before acceptance of the Project, the
Contractor shall submit all licenses, permits, certificates of inspection, and required approvals to
the City.
2.4 COOPERATION AND COLLATERAL WORK
The Contractor shall be responsible for coordinating all Work with the City’s street sweeping, trash
pick-up, and street maintenance contractors, emergency services departments, utility companies’
crews, and others when necessary. Payment for conforming to these requirements shall be
included in other items of Work, and no additional payment shall be made thereof.
2-5.4 Haul Routes
Subsection 2-5.4 of Part 1 of the Standard Specifications shall be deleted and replaced as follows:
The Contractor must obtain the City’s approval before using any haul routes.
Further detail requirements for haul traffic can be obtained from the Public Works
Department 805-517-6294.
2-7 CHANGES INITIATED BY THE AGENCY
2-7.1 General.
The City reserves the right, without notice to the Surety, to increase or decrease the quantity of
any item or portion of the Work described in the Contract Documents or to alter or omit portions
of the Work so described, as may be deemed necessary or expedient by the City, without in any
way making the Contract void. Such increases, alterations or decreases of Work shall be
considered and treated as though originally contracted for, and shall be subject to all the terms,
conditions and provisions of the original Contract. The Contractor shall not claim or bring suit for
damages, whether for loss of profits or otherwise, on account of any decrease, alteration or
omission of any kind of Work to be done.
2-7.2 Allowances Adjustment
For Contract items bid based on allowance, submit Change Order Request on difference between
actual purchase amount and allowance, based on work-in-place.
When requested, prepare explanations and documentation to substantiate amounts claimed for
work done based on allowances. City reserves the right to establish actual quantity of work-in-
place by independent quantity survey, measure, or count.
2-8 EXTRA WORK
New and unforeseen work will be classified as Extra Work only when the Work is not covered and
cannot be paid for under any of the various items or combination of items for which a Bid price
81
GP-4 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
appears on the Bid. The Contractor shall not do any Extra Work except upon written order from
the City.
2-8.1 Work Directive Change
City may direct changes in the Work by issuing a Work Directive given in writing to Contractor's
representative or on-site superintendent or foreman in charge of the particular Work for which the
Work Directive is given. A Work Directive shall describe the work to be undertaken and any
change in the Work. A Work Directive shall only be used when the Work to be added or deleted
must be accomplished before the Change Order procedure can be accomplished.
THE CONTRACT PRICE AND CONTRACT TIME MAY ONLY BE ADJUSTED BY CHANGE
ORDER AND MAY NOT BE ADJUSTED BY WORK DIRECTIVE. TO THE EXTENT THE WORK
DIRECTIVE RESULTS IN A CHANGE TO THE CONTRACT PRICE OR THE CONTRACT TIME,
CONTRACTOR MUST TIMELY REQUEST A CHANGE ORDER AND COMPLY WITH ALL
CHANGE ORDER PROCEDURES IN ACCORDANCE WITH THIS SECTION.
Notwithstanding issuance of a Work Directive, failure to timely request a Change Order shall
constitute a waiver by Contractor of any adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time for the
Work performed under the Work Directive. City shall not be liable to Contractor for Work
performed or omitted by Contractor in reliance on verbal orders.
2-8.2 Change Order Work
The City, without invalidating the Contract, may order changes in the Work consisting of additions,
deletions or other revisions, and the Contract Price and Contract Time shall be adjusted
accordingly. All such changes in the Work shall be authorized by Change Order and shall be
performed under the applicable conditions of the Contract Documents. A Change Order signed
by the Contractor indicates the Contractor’s agreement therewith, including any adjustment in the
Contract Price or the Contract Time, and the full and final settlement of all costs (direct, indirect,
and overhead) related to the Work authorized by the Change Order.
All requests for additional compensation to the Contractor shall be presented in writing before the
expense is incurred and will be adjusted as provided herein. No work shall be allowed to lag
pending such adjustment, but shall be promptly executed as directed, even if a dispute arises. No
request for a change will be considered after the work in question has been done unless a written
contract change order has been issued or a timely written notice of change or delay has been
made by Contractor. Contractor shall not be entitled to claim or to bring suit for damages, whether
for loss of profits or otherwise, on account of any decrease or omission of any item or portion of
Work to be done. Whenever any change is made as provided for herein, such change shall be
considered and treated as though originally included in the Contract, and shall be subject to all
terms, conditions, and provisions of the original Contract.
2-8.3 Notice of Delay or Change
With respect to any matter that may involve or require an adjustment to the Contract Time or the
Contract Price, Contractor shall provide written notice of the underlying facts and circumstances
that gave rise to the proposed change, within the following times:
1. If due to unknown subsurface or latent physical conditions, within three (3) days from the
discovery date or prior to the alterations of the conditions, whichever is earlier.
82
GP-5 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
2. If due to any other matter that may involve an adjustment to the Contract Time or the
Contract Price, within seven (7) days from the discovery date.
2-8.4 Request for Extension or Change
Within twenty-one (21) days from providing the notice of delay or change, and prior to incurring
any expense, Contractor shall submit a Change Order Request. The Change Order Request shall
identify the amount of the adjustment to the Contract Price or the Contract Time, or both.
The Change Order Request shall contain all supporting documentation for the proposed changes,
including but not limited to data showing the hours worked, cost estimates, invoices, and
schedules. If the Change Order Request includes a request for an extension of the Contract Time,
the Change Order Request shall include a time impact analysis showing the impact of the
underlying facts and circumstances to the critical path. City may request, and Contractor shall
provide, any additional information supporting the Change Order Request, including but not
limited to native electronic format version of schedules and time impact analyses.
If any added costs or information cannot be determined at the time of the Change Order Request,
Contractor shall identify the reason the costs or information cannot be determined. For any costs
or information that cannot be determined at the time Contractor submits the Change Order
Request, Contractor shall submit to City notice of the costs or information and all supporting
documentation within three (3) days of when the costs or information become subject to
determination.
Whenever possible, any changes to the Contract Price shall be in a lump sum mutually agreed
by the Contractor and the City.
Price quotations from the Contractor shall be accompanied by such detailed supporting
documentation, including but not limited to estimates and quotations from subcontractors or
material suppliers, as City may reasonably request.
If the Contractor fails to submit a complete cost proposal within the twenty-one (21) Day period
(or as requested), the City has the right to order the Contractor in writing to commence the work
immediately on a force account basis and/or issue a lump sum change to the Contract Price in
accordance with the City’s estimate of cost. If the change is issued based on the City estimate,
the Contractor will waive its right to dispute the action unless within fifteen (15) Days following
receipt of the City’s estimate, the Contractor presents written proof that the City’s estimate was in
error.
Estimates for lump sum quotations and accounting for cost-plus-percentage work shall be limited
to direct expenditures necessitated specifically by the extra work, and shall be segregated as
follows:
1. Labor. The costs of labor will be the actual cost for wages prevailing locally for each craft
or type of worker at the time the extra work is done, plus employer payments of payroll taxes and
insurance, health and welfare, pension, vacation, apprenticeship funds, and other direct costs
resulting from Federal, State, or local laws, as well as assessment or benefits required by lawful
collective bargaining agreements. The use of a labor classification which would increase the extra
work cost will not be permitted unless the Contractor establishes the necessity for such additional
costs. Labor costs for equipment operators and helpers shall be reported only when such costs
are not included in the invoice for equipment rental.
83
GP-6 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
2. Materials. The cost of materials reported shall be at the lowest current price at which such
materials are locally available in the quantities involved, plus sales tax, freight, and delivery.
Materials costs shall be based upon supplier or manufacturer’s invoice. If invoices or other
satisfactory evidence of costs are not furnished within the time required for requesting a change
of the Contract Price or Contract Time, then the City may determine the materials cost, at its sole
discretion, or may determine that the Contractor waived all rights to payment for material costs
pursuant to Section 2-8.5.
3. Tool and Equipment Use. Regardless of ownership, the rates to be used in determining
equipment use shall not exceed listed rates prevailing locally at equipment rental agencies, or
distributors, at the time the work is performed. The Contractor shall furnish cost data supporting
the establishment of the rental rate. The rental rate to be applied for use of each item of equipment
shall be the rate resulting in the least total cost to the City for the total period of use. The City shall
the make the final determination as to an equitable rental rate for the equipment. No payment will
be made for the use of small tools, which have a replacement value of $1,000 or less.
i. The rental time to be paid for equipment shall be the time the equipment is
in productive operation on the extra work being performed. Rental time will not be allowed
while equipment is inoperative due to breakdowns.
ii. All equipment shall, in the opinion of the City, be in good working condition
and suitable for the purpose for which the equipment is to be used. Equipment with no
direct power unit shall be powered by a unit of at least the minimum rating recommended
by the manufacturer.
iii. Before construction equipment is used on any extra work, the Contractor
shall plainly stencil or stamp an identifying number thereon at a conspicuous location, and
shall furnish to the City, in duplicate, a description of the equipment and its identifying
number.
iv. When hourly rates are listed, any part of an hour less than 30 minutes of
operation shall be considered to be 1/2-hour of operation, and any part of an hour greater
than 30 minutes will be considered one hour of operation. When daily rates are listed, any
part of a day less than 4 hours operation shall be considered to be 1/2-day of operation.
4. Allowed Mark-up. The allowed mark-up for any and all overhead (including supervision
and home and field office costs) and profit on work added to the Contract shall be determined in
accordance with the following provisions:
i. “Net Cost” is defined as the actual costs of labor, materials and tools and
equipment only, excluding overhead and profit. The costs of applicable insurance and
bond premium will be reimbursed to the Contractor and subcontractors at cost only,
without mark-up. Contractor shall provide City with documentation of the costs, including
but not limited to payroll records, invoices, and such other information as City may
reasonably request.
ii. For Work performed by the Contractor’s forces the allowed mark-up shall
not exceed fifteen (15%) percent of Labor costs, ten percent (10%) of Material costs, and
ten percent (10%) of the cost of Tools and Equipment use.
84
GP-7 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
iii. For Work performed by a subcontractor or sub-subcontractor, the allowed
mark-up shall not exceed ten (10%) percent of the subcontractor’s or sub-subcontractor’s
Net Cost of the Work.
For added or deducted Work by subcontractors, the Contractor shall furnish to the City the
subcontractor’s signed detailed records of the cost of labor, material, and equipment, including
the subcontractor markup for overhead and profit. The same requirement shall apply to sub-
subcontractors.
For added or deducted work furnished by a vendor or supplier, the Contractor shall furnish to the
City a detailed record of the cost to the Contractor, signed by such vendor or supplier.
Contractor shall not be entitled to any compensation for Work subject to a change order except
as expressly set forth in this Section. The mark-up added in instances of extra or additional work
shall constitute the entire amount of profit, any mark-ups, any field or home office overhead costs,
including personnel, equipment or office space, any materials, or any costs of equipment idle time
for such work.
Contractor shall not reserve a right to assert impact costs, extended job site costs, extended
overhead, constructive acceleration and/or actual acceleration beyond what is stated in the
Change Order. No claims shall be allowed for impact, extended overhead costs, constructive
acceleration and/or actual acceleration due to a multiplicity of changes and/or clarifications. The
Contractor may not change or modify the City’s Change Order form in an attempt to reserve
additional rights.
If the City disagrees with the proposal submitted by Contractor, it will notify the Contractor, and
the City will provide its opinion of the appropriate price and/or time extension. If the Contractor
agrees with the City, a change order will be issued by the City. If no agreement can be reached,
the City shall have the right to issue a unilateral change order setting forth its determination of the
reasonable additions or savings in costs and time attributable to the extra or deleted work. Such
determination shall become final and binding if the Contractor fails to submit a claim in writing to
the City within fifteen (15) Days of the issuance of the unilateral change order, disputing the terms
of the unilateral change order and providing such supporting documentation for its position as the
City may reasonably require.
No dispute, disagreement, or failure of the parties to reach agreement on the terms of the Change
Order shall relieve the Contractor from the obligation to proceed with performance of the changed
work, including extra work, promptly and expeditiously.
Any alterations, extensions of time, extra work, deductions in work, or any other changes may be
made without securing consent of the Contractor’s surety or sureties.
2-8.5 Waiver of Rights of Contractor
Failure by contractor to provide timely notice and request where such notice and request is
required by this Section shall constitute a waiver by contractor of the right to a contract adjustment
on account of such circumstances and a waiver of any right to further recourse or recovery by
reason of or related to such change by means of the claims dispute resolution process or by any
other legal process otherwise provided for under applicable laws.
85
GP-8 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
SECTION 3. CONTROL OF THE WORK
3-1 ASSIGNMENT
Any purported assignment without written consent of the City shall be null, void, and of no effect,
and the Contractor shall hold harmless, defend and indemnify the City and its officers, officials,
employees, agents and representatives with respect to any claim, demand or action arising from
or relating to any unauthorized assignment.
If the City opts to consent to assignment, the City’s consent shall be contingent upon: (1) a letter
from the Surety agreeing to the assignment and assigning all of the Bonds to the assignee without
any reduction, or the assignee supplying all new Bonds in the amounts originally required under
the Contract Documents; and (2) the assignee supplying all of the required insurance in the
amounts required in the Contract Documents. Until the Surety assigns all of the Bonds or the
assignee supplies all of the new Bonds, and until the assignee supplies all of the required
insurance, an assignment otherwise consented to in writing by the City shall not be effective. Even
if the City consents to assignment, no assignment shall relieve the Contractor of liability under the
Contract.
3-5 INSPECTION
The Contractor shall arrange and pay for all site inspection of the Work including any off-site
inspection, required by any ordinance or governing authorities. The Contractor shall also arrange
and pay for other inspections, including tests in connection therewith, as may be assigned or
required.
If the Contract Documents, the City, or any instructions, laws, ordinances, or public authority
requires any part of the Work to be tested or Approved, Contractor shall provide the City at least
two (2) working days’ notice of its readiness for observation or inspection. If inspection is by a
public authority other than the City, Contractor shall promptly inform the City of the date fixed for
such inspection. Required certificates of inspection (or similar) shall be secured by Contractor.
Costs for initial testing and City inspection shall be paid by the City. Costs of re-tests and/or re-
inspection for Work found not to be in compliance shall be paid by the Contractor. Costs for
inspection by authorities other than the City shall be paid for by the Contractor.
If any Work is done or covered up without the required testing or approval, the Contractor shall
uncover or deconstruct the Work, and the Work shall be redone after completion of the testing at
the Contractor’s cost.
Where inspection and testing are to be conducted by an independent laboratory or agency,
materials or samples of materials to be inspected or tested shall be selected by such laboratory
or agency, or by the City, and not by Contractor. All tests or inspections of materials shall be made
in accordance with the commonly recognized standards of national organizations.
In advance of manufacture of materials to be supplied by Contractor which must be tested or
inspected, Contractor shall notify the City so that the City may arrange for testing at the source of
supply. Any materials which have not satisfactorily passed such testing and inspection shall not
be incorporated into the Work
If the manufacture of materials to be inspected or tested will occur in a plant or location greater
than sixty (60) miles from the City, the Contractor shall pay for any excessive or unusual costs
86
GP-9 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
associated with such testing or inspection, including but not limited to excessive travel time,
standby time and required lodging.
Re-examination of Work may be ordered by the City. If so ordered, Work must be uncovered or
deconstructed by Contractor. If Work is found to be in accordance with the Contract Documents,
the City shall pay the costs of re-examination and re-construction. If such work is found not to be
in accordance with the Contract Documents, Contractor shall pay all costs.
3.7 CONTRACT DOCUMENTS
3-7.1 General
In addition to the requirements under Section 3-7.1 in the Standard Specifications, the Contractor
shall maintain a control set of Plans and Specifications on the Project site at all times. All final
locations determined in the field, and any deviations from the Plans and Specifications, shall be
marked in red on the control set to show the as-built conditions. This control set of Plans shall
also be edited for all Addenda, Requests for Information, Change Orders, field changes not
involving cost, and any other variation that occurred during construction. Upon completion of all
Work, the Contractor shall return the control set to the City. Final payment will not be made until
this requirement is met.
Where a work feature is shown on the drawings or identified in the Specifications but is not
specifically indicated as an item in the Bid sheets, and there is no ambiguity regarding the
requirement to construct, install, or construct and install that work feature, the Contractor is
required to complete the work feature. All costs to the Contractor for constructing, installing, or
both constructing and installing such a work feature shall be included in the Bid.
3-7.2 Precedence of the Contract Documents
The Contract Documents are intended to be fully cooperative and to be complementary. If
Contractor observes that any of the Contract Documents are in conflict, the Contractor shall
promptly notify the City in writing.
With regard to Section 3-7.2 in the Standard Specifications, in case of conflicts between the
Contract Documents, the order of precedence shall be as follows:
1. Permits issued by regulatory agencies with jurisdiction.
2. Change Orders and Supplemental Agreements, whichever occurs last.
3. Contract/Agreement.
4. Addenda.
5. Notice Inviting Bids.
6. Instructions to Bidders.
7. Bid/Proposal.
8. Special Provisions.
9. General Provisions.
10. Plans.
11. Standard Plans.
12. Standard Specifications.
13. Reference Specifications.
With reference to the Drawings, the order of Precedence shall be as follows:
87
GP-10 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
1. Figures govern over scaled dimensions.
2. Detail drawings govern over general drawings.
3. Addenda or Change Orders drawings govern over Contract Drawings
4. Contract Drawings govern over Standard Drawings
5. Contract Drawings govern over Shop Drawings
3-7.3 Examination of the Contract Documents
Before commencing any portion of the Work, Contractor shall again carefully examine all Contract
Documents, the Site and other information given to Contractor as to materials and methods of
construction and other Work requirements. Contractor shall immediately notify the City of any
potential error, inconsistency, ambiguity, conflict or lack of detail or explanation. If Contractor
performs, permits, or causes the performance of any Work which is in error, inconsistent or
ambiguous, or not sufficiently detailed or explained in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall
bear any and all resulting costs, including, without limitation, the cost of correction. In no case
shall the Contractor or any subcontractor proceed with Work if uncertain as to the applicable
requirements.
3-7.4 Request for Information; Additional Instructions
Contractor may make a written request for information from the City to address any error,
inconsistency, ambiguity, conflict or lack of detail or explanation in the Contract Documents. The
City will provide any required additional instructions, by means of drawings or other written
direction, necessary for proper execution of Work. City shall respond to Requests for Information
within a reasonable time. For purposes of this section ten (10) calendar days shall constitute a
reasonable time. If additional time is needed, the City will notify the Contractor with the
approximate timing.
3-7.5 Contractor’s Variation from Contract Documents
If Contractor varies from the requirements of the Contract Documents including the requirement
to comply with all Applicable Laws, the City may at any time, before or after completion of the
Work, order the improper Work removed, remade, or replaced by the Contractor at the
Contractor’s sole expense.
3-8 SUBMITTALS
3-8.1 Submittals
Contractor shall furnish to the City for approval, prior to purchasing or commencing any Work, a
log of all samples, material lists and certifications, mix designs, schedules, and other submittals,
as required in the Contract Documents. The log shall indicate whether samples will be provided
in accordance with other provisions of this Contract.
Contractor will provide samples and submittals, together with catalogs and supporting data
required by the City, to the City within a reasonable time period to provide for adequate review
and avoid delays in the Work.
The requirements in shall not authorize any extension of time for performance of this contract.
City will review such samples, but only for conformance with design concept of work and for
88
GP-11 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
compliance with information given in the Contract Documents. Work shall be in accordance with
approved samples and submittals.
3-8.3 Shop Drawings
Contractor shall check and verify all field measurements and shall submit with such promptness
as to provide adequate time for review and cause no delay in its own Work or in that of any other
contractor, subcontractor, or worker on the Project, electronic files of all shop drawings,
calculations, schedules, and materials list, and all other provisions required by the Contract
Documents. Contractor shall sign all submittals affirming that submittals have been reviewed and
approved by Contractor prior to submission to City. Each signed submittal shall affirm that the
submittal meets all the requirements of the Contract Documents except as specifically and clearly
noted and listed on the transmittal letter of the submittal.
Contractor shall make any corrections required by the City, and file with the City corrected
electronic files, and furnish such other copies as may be needed for completion of the Work. City’s
acceptance of shop drawings shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for deviations from
the Contract Documents unless Contractor has, in writing, called City’s attention to such
deviations at time of submission and has secured the City’s written acceptance. City’s acceptance
of shop drawings shall not relieve Contractor from responsibility for errors in shop drawings.
3-9 SUBSURFACE DATA
If the City or its consultants have made investigations of subsurface conditions in areas where
the Work is to be performed, such investigations shall be deemed made only for the purpose of
study and design. If a geotechnical or other report has been prepared for the Project, the
Contractor may inspect the records pertaining to such investigations subject to and upon the
conditions hereinafter set forth. The inspection of the records shall be made in the office of the
City. It is the Contractor’s sole responsibility to determine whether such investigations exist, and
the City makes no affirmative or negative representation concerning the existence of such
investigations.
The records of any such investigations are made available solely for the convenience of the
Contractor. It is expressly understood and agreed that the City, their agents, consultants or
employees assume no responsibility whatsoever with respect to the sufficiency or accuracy of
any investigations, the records thereof, and the interpretations set forth therein. No warranty or
guarantee is expressed or implied that the conditions indicated by any such investigations or
records are representative of those existing in the Project area. The Contractor agrees to make
such independent investigations and examination as necessary to be satisfied of the conditions
to be encountered in the performance of the Work.
The Contractor represents that it has studied the Plans, Specifications and other Contract
Documents, and all surveys and investigation reports of subsurface and latent physical conditions,
has made such additional surveys and investigations as necessary for the performance of the
Work at the Contract Price in accordance with the requirements of the Contract Documents, and
that it has correlated the results of all such data with the requirements of the Contract Documents.
No claim of any kind shall be made or allowed for any error, omission or claimed error or omission,
in whole or in part, of any geotechnical exploration or any other report or data furnished or not
furnished by the City.
3-10 SURVEYING
89
GP-12 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
3-10.1 General
The Contractor shall verify all dimensions on the drawings and shall report to the City any
discrepancies before proceeding with related Work. The Contractor shall perform all survey and
layout Work per the information on the Project Plans. All surveying Work must conform to the
Professional Land Surveyors’ Act (Business and Professions Code Section 8700 et seq). All
Project surveying notes and “cut-sheets” are to be provided to the City after the completion of
each surveying activity and all final surveying notes shall be provided before final payment to the
Contractor.
Construction stakes shall be set and stationed by Contractor at its expense. Unless otherwise
indicated in the Special Provisions, surveying costs shall be included in the price of items bid. No
separate payment will be made. Re-staking and replacement of construction survey markers
damaged as a result of the Work, vandalism, or accident shall be at the Contractor’s expense.
3-11 CONTRACT INFORMATION SIGNS
The names, addresses and specialties of the Contractor, Subcontractors, architects or engineers
may not be displayed on any signage within the public right-of-way. This signage prohibition
includes advertising banners hung from truck beds or other equipment.
3-12 WORKSITE MAINTENANCE
3-12.1 General.
Clean-up shall be done as Work progresses at the end of each day and thoroughly before
weekends. The Contractor shall not allow the Work site to become littered with trash and waste
material, but shall maintain the same in a neat and orderly condition throughout the construction
operation. Materials which need to be disposed shall not be stored at the Project site, but shall be
removed by the end of each Working Day. If the job site is not cleaned to the satisfaction of the
City, the cleaning will be done or contracted by the City and shall be back-charged to the
Contractor and deducted from the Contract Price.
The Contractor shall promptly remove from the vicinity of the completed Work, all rubbish, debris,
unused materials, concrete forms, construction equipment, and temporary structures and facilities
used during construction. Final acceptance of the Work by the City will be withheld until the
Contractor has satisfactorily complied with the foregoing requirements for final clean-up of the
Project site.
3.12.4 Storage of Equipment and Materials.
3-12.4.1 General
The Contractor shall make arrangements for storing its equipment and materials. The Contractor
shall make its own arrangements for any necessary off-site storage or shop areas necessary for
the proper execution of the Work. Approved areas within Work site may be used for temporary
storage; however, the Contractor shall be responsible for obtaining any necessary permits from
the City. In any case, the Contractor’s equipment and personal vehicles of the Contractor’s
employees shall not be parked on the traveled way or on any section where traffic is restricted at
any time. The Contractor shall submit a staging plan for approval by the City.
--
90
GP-13 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
The Contractor shall deliver, handle, and store materials in accordance with the manufacturer’s
written recommendations and by methods and means that will prevent damage, deterioration,
and loss including theft. Delivery schedules shall be controlled to minimize long-term storage of
products at the Project site and overcrowding of construction spaces. In particular, the Contractor
shall provide delivery and installation coordination to ensure minimum holding or storage times
for materials recognized to be flammable, hazardous, easily damaged, or sensitive to
deterioration, theft, and other sources of loss.
Storage shall be arranged to provide access for inspection. The Contractor shall periodically
inspect to assure materials are undamaged and are maintained under required conditions.
All costs associated with the clean-up and storage required to complete the Project shall be the
sole responsibility of the Contractor.
3-12.4.2 Storage in Public Streets
The first sentence of Section 3-12.4.2 shall not be incorporated and shall instead be replaced with
the following:
Construction materials and equipment shall not be stored in Streets, roads, or highways unless
otherwise specified in the Special Provisions or approved by the City.
3-13 COMPLETION, ACCEPTANCE, AND WARRANTY
3-13.1 Completion.
The Contractor shall complete all Work under the Contract within ___________ (____) Working
Days from the Notice to Proceed.
3-13.2 Acceptance
The Project will not be considered complete and ready for City Council direction to staff regarding
recordation of the Notice of Completion until all required Work is completed, the Work site is
cleaned up in accordance with Section 3-12 of Part 1 of the Standard Specifications and the
Special Provisions, and all of the following items have been received by the City:
1. A form of Notice of Completion, with all information required by the California Civil Code;
2. All written guarantees and warranties;
3. Evidence that the Performance Bond has been extended and will remain in effect for the
period specified in Section 1-7.2 of the Standard Specifications, as modified by these
General Provisions;
4. All “as-builts”;
5. Duplicate copies of all operating instructions and manufacturer’s operating catalogs and
data, together with such field instructions as necessary to fully instruct City personnel in
correct operation and maintenance procedures for all equipment installed listed under the
electrical, air conditioning, heating, ventilating and other trades. This data and instructions
shall be furnished for all equipment requiring periodic adjustments, maintenance or other
91
GP-14 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
operation procedures.
The Contractor shall allow at least seven (7) Working Days’ notice for final inspection. Such notice
shall be submitted to the City in writing.
3-13.3 Warranty
Contractor warrants that all materials and equipment furnished under this Contract shall be new
unless otherwise specified in the Contract Documents; and that all Work conforms to the Contract
Document requirements and is free of any defect whether performed by the Contractor or any
subcontractor or supplier.
For the purposes of the calculation of the start of the warranty period, the Work shall be deemed
to be completed upon the date of recordation of the Notice of Completion. If that direction is
contingent on the completion of any items remaining on a punchlist, the Work shall be deemed to
be completed upon the date of the City’s acceptance of the final item(s) on that punchlist.
Unless otherwise stated, the warranty period shall be for one year.
The Contractor shall repair or replace defective materials and workmanship as required in this
Section 3-13.3 at its own expense. Additionally, the Contractor agrees to defend, indemnify and
hold the City harmless from claims of any kind arising from damage, injury or death due to such
defects.
The City shall notify the Contractor, in writing, within a reasonable time after the discovery of any
failure, defect, or damage. The Contractor shall within ten (10) Days after being notified
commence and perform with due diligence all necessary Work to complete or correct the work at
issue. If the Contractor fails to promptly remedy any defect, or damage within this time; the City
shall have the right to replace, repair, or otherwise remedy the defect, or damage at the
Contractor’s expense.
With respect to all warranties, express or implied, from subcontractors, manufacturers, or
suppliers for Work performed and Materials furnished under this Contract, the Contractor shall:
1. Obtain for City all warranties that would be given in normal commercial practice or that are
required in the Contract Documents.
2. Require all warranties to be executed, in writing, for the benefit of the City; and
3. Enforce all warranties for the benefit of the City, unless otherwise directed in writing by the
City.
The parties agree that no certificate given shall be conclusive evidence of the faithful performance
of the Contract, either in whole or in part, and that no payment shall be construed to be in
acceptance of any defective Work or improper materials. Further, the certificate or final payment
shall not terminate the Contractor’s obligations under the warranty herein. The Contractor agrees
that payment of the amount due under the Contract and the adjustments and payments due for
any Work done in accordance with any alterations of the same, shall release the City, the City
Council and its officers and employees from any and all claims or liability on account of Work
performed under the Contract or any alteration thereof.
92
GP-15 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
SECTION 4. CONTROL OF MATERIALS
4-1 GENERAL
The Contractor and all Subcontractors, suppliers, and vendors shall guarantee that the Work will
meet all requirements of this Contract as to the quality of materials, equipment, and workmanship.
4-4 TESTING
Except as elsewhere specified, the City shall bear the cost of testing materials and workmanship
that meet or exceed the requirements indicated in the Standard Specifications and the Special
Provisions. The cost of all other tests, including the retesting of material or workmanship that fails
to pass the first test, shall be borne by the Contractor.
4-6 TRADE NAMES
If the Contractor requests to substitute an equivalent item for a brand or trade name item, the
burden of proof as to the comparative quality and suitability of alternative equipment or articles or
materials shall be upon the Contractor, and the Contractor shall furnish, at its own expense, all
information necessary or related thereto as required by the City. All requests for substitution shall
be submitted, together with all documentation necessary for the City to determine equivalence,
no later than thirty-five (35)Days after the award of Contract, unless a different deadline is listed
in the Special Provisions.
The Contractor shall be responsible for paying all costs related to a substituted “equal” material,
process, or article.
If a proposed “equal” substitution is rejected, Contractor shall be responsible for providing the
specified material, process, or article without adjustment to the Contract Price or Contract Time.
The City has the complete and sole discretion to determine if a material, process, or article is an
“equal” material, process or article that may be substituted.
SECTION 5. LEGAL RELATIONS AND RESPONSIBILITIES
5-3 LABOR
5-3.1 Public Work
The Contractor acknowledges that the Project is a “public work” as defined in Labor Code Section
1720 et seq. (“Chapter 1”), and that this Project is subject to (a) Chapter 1, including without
limitation Labor Code Section 1771 and (b) the rules and regulations established by the Director
of Industrial Relations (“DIR”) implementing such statutes. The Contractor shall perform all Work
on the Project as a public work. The Contractor shall comply with and be bound by all the terms,
rules and regulations described in (a) and (b) as though set forth in full herein.
5-3.2 Copies of Wage Rates
Pursuant to Labor Code Section 1773.2, copies of the prevailing rate of per diem wages for each
craft, classification, or type of worker needed to perform the Project are on file at City Hall and will
be made available to any interested party on request. By initiating any Work, the Contractor
acknowledges receipt of a copy of the DIR determination of such prevailing rate of per diem
93
GP-16 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
wages, and the Contractor shall post such rates at each job site covered by these Contract
Documents.
The Contractor shall comply with and be bound by the provisions of Labor Code Sections 1774
and 1775 concerning the payment of prevailing rates of wages to workers and the penalties for
failure to pay prevailing wages. The Contractor shall, as a penalty paid to the City, forfeit two
hundred dollars ($200) for each calendar day, or portion thereof, for each worker paid less than
the prevailing rates as determined by the DIR for the work or craft in which the worker is employed
for any public work done pursuant to these Contract Documents by the Contractor or by any
Subcontractor.
5-3.3 Payroll Records
The Contractor shall comply with and be bound by the provisions of Labor Code Section 1776,
which requires the Contractor and each Subcontractor to (1) keep accurate payroll records and
verify such records in writing under penalty of perjury, as specified in Section 1776, (2) certify and
make such payroll records available for inspection as provided by Section 1776, and (3) inform
the City of the location of the records. The Contractor has ten (10) days in which to comply
subsequent to receipt of a written notice requesting these records, or as a penalty to the City, the
Contractor shall forfeit one hundred dollars ($100) for each Day, or portion thereof, for each
worker, until strict compliance is effectuated. Upon the request of the Division of Labor Standards
Enforcement, these penalties shall be withheld from progress payments then due.
The Contractor and each Subcontractor shall comply with and be bound by the provisions of Labor
Code Section 1771.4(a)(3), which requires that each Contractor and each Subcontractor shall
furnish the records specified in Section 1776 directly to the Labor Commissioner at least monthly,
in a format prescribed by the Labor Commissioner.
5-3.4 Hours of Labor
The Contractor acknowledges that eight (8) hours labor constitutes a legal day’s work. The
Contractor shall comply with and be bound by Labor Code Section 1810. The Contractor shall
comply with and be bound by the provisions of Labor Code Section 1813 concerning penalties for
workers who work excess hours. The Contractor shall, as a penalty paid to the City, forfeit twenty-
five dollars ($25) for each worker employed in the performance of this Project by the Contractor
or by any Subcontractor for each calendar day during which such worker is required or permitted
to work more than eight (8) hours in any one (1) calendar day and forty (40) hours in any one
calendar week in violation of the provisions of Division 2, Part 7, Chapter 1, Article 3 of the Labor
Code. Pursuant to Labor Code Section 1815, work performed by employees of the Contractor in
excess of eight (8) hours per day, and forty (40) hours during any one week shall be permitted
upon public work upon compensation for all hours worked in excess of eight (8) hours per day at
not less than one and one-half (1-1/2) times the basic rate of pay.
5-3.5 Apprentices
The Contractor shall comply with and be bound by the provisions of Labor Code Sections 1777.5,
1777.6 and 1777.7 and California Code of Regulations Title 8, Section 200 et seq. concerning the
employment of apprentices on public works projects. The Contractor shall be responsible for
compliance with these Sections for all apprenticeable occupations. Before commencing Work on
this Project, the Contractor shall provide the City with a copy of the information submitted to any
applicable apprenticeship program. Within sixty (60) Days after concluding Work, Contractor and
94
GP-17 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
each of its Subcontractors shall submit to the City a verified statement of the journeyman and
apprentice hours performed under this Contract.
5-3.6 Debarment or Suspension
The Contractor shall not perform Work with any Subcontractor that has been debarred or
suspended pursuant to California Labor Code Section 1777.1 or any other federal or State law
providing for the debarment of contractors from public works. The Contractor and Subcontractors
shall not be debarred or suspended throughout the duration of this Contract pursuant to Labor
Code Section 1777.1 or any other federal or State law providing for the debarment of contractors
from public works. If the Contractor or any Subcontractor becomes debarred or suspended during
the duration of the Project, the Contractor shall immediately notify the City.
5-3.7 Registration with the DIR
In accordance with Labor Code Sections 1725.5 and 1771.1, no contractor or subcontractor shall
be qualified to bid on, be listed in a bid proposal, subject to the requirements of Section 4104 of
the Public Contract Code, or engage in the performance of any contract for public work, unless
currently registered and qualified to perform public work pursuant to Section 1725.5.
5-3.8 Compliance Monitoring and Posting Job Sites
This Project is subject to compliance monitoring and enforcement by the DIR. The Contractor
shall post job site notices, as prescribed by regulation.
5-3.9 Subcontractors
For every Subcontractor who will perform Work on the Project, the Contractor shall be responsible
for such Subcontractor’s compliance with Chapter 1 and Labor Code Sections 1860 and 3700,
and the Contractor shall include in the written Contract between it and each Subcontractor a copy
of the provisions in this Section 5-3 of the General Provisions and a requirement that each
Subcontractor shall comply with those provisions. The Contractor shall be required to take all
actions necessary to enforce such contractual provisions and ensure Subcontractor’s compliance,
including without limitation, conducting a periodic review of the certified payroll records of the
Subcontractor and upon becoming aware of the failure of the Subcontractor to pay its workers the
specified prevailing rate of wages. The Contractor shall diligently take corrective action to halt or
rectify any failure.
5-3.10 Prevailing Wage Indemnity
To the maximum extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall indemnify, hold harmless and
defend (at the Contractor’s expense with counsel reasonably acceptable to the City) the City, its
officials, officers, employees, agents and independent contractors serving in the role of City
officials, and volunteers from and against any demand or claim for damages, compensation, fines,
penalties or other amounts arising out of or incidental to any acts or omissions listed in Section
5-3 of the General Provisions by any Person (including the Contractor, its Subcontractors, and
each of their officials, officers, employees and agents) in connection with any Work undertaken
or in connection with the Contract Documents, including without limitation the payment of all
consequential damages, attorneys’ fees, and other related costs and expenses. All duties of the
Contractor under this Section 5-3.10 shall survive expiration or termination of the Contract.
95
GP-18 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
5-4 INSURANCE
5-4.1 General
The first paragraph of Section 5-4.1 of Part 1 of the Standard Specifications shall not be
incorporated and shall instead be replaced with the following:
The Contractor shall provide and maintain insurance naming the City, its elected
and appointed officials, officers, employees, attorneys, agents, volunteers, and
independent contractors in the role of City officials as insureds or additional
insureds regardless of any inconsistent statement in the policy or any subsequent
endorsement whether liability is attributable to the Contractor or the City. The
insurance provisions shall not be construed to limit the Contractor’s indemnity
obligations contained in the Contract. The City will not be liable for any accident,
loss or damage to the Work prior to completion, except as otherwise specified in
Section 6-5.
5-4.2 General Liability Insurance
The Contractor shall at all times during the term of the Contract carry, maintain, and keep in full
force and effect the insurance referenced in Section 5-4 of Part 1 of the Standard Specifications,
as modified below.
5-4.2.1 Additional Insureds
The City, its elected and appointed officials, officers, employees, attorneys, agents, volunteers,
and independent contractors in the role of City officials, shall be the insured or named as
additional insureds covering the Work, regardless of any inconsistent statement in the policy or
any subsequent endorsement, whether liability is attributable to the Contractor or the City.
5-4.2.2 No Limitation on Indemnity
The insurance provisions shall not be construed to limit the Contractor’s indemnity obligations
contained in these Contract Documents.
5-4.2.3 Replacement Insurance
The Contractor agrees that it will not cancel, reduce or otherwise modify the insurance coverage.
The Contractor agrees that if it does not keep the required insurance in full force and effect, and
such insurance is available at a reasonable cost, the City may take out the necessary insurance
and pay the premium thereon, and the repayment thereof shall be deemed an obligation of the
Contractor and the cost of such insurance may be deducted, at the option of the City, from
payments due the Contractor. This shall be in addition to all other legal options available to the
City to enforce the insurance requirements.
5-4.2.4 Certificates of Insurance with Original Endorsements
The Contractor shall submit to the City certificates of insurance with the original endorsements,
both of which reference the same policy number, for each of the insurance policies that meet the
insurance requirements, not less than one (1) day before beginning of performance under the
Contract. The endorsements are to be signed by a person authorized by that insurer to bind
96
GP-19 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
coverage on its behalf. Endorsements may be executed on the City’s standard forms titled
“Additional Insured Endorsement,” copies of which are provided in the Contract Documents, or
on any other form that contains substantially the same terms and is approved by the City’s Risk
Manager. In any case, the endorsements must specifically name the City of Moorpark and its
elected and appointed officials, officers, employees, attorneys, agents, volunteers, and
independent contractors in the role of City officials as insureds or additional insureds. Current
insurance certificates and endorsements shall be kept on file with the City at all times during the
term of this Contract. The City reserves the right to require complete, certified copies of all
required insurance policies at any time.
5-4.2.5 Subcontractors
The Contractor shall require each of its Subcontractors that perform services under the Contract
to maintain insurance coverage that meets all of the requirements of this Section 5-4.
5-4.5 Insurance Requirements not Limiting
If the Contractor maintains broader coverage and/or higher limits than the minimums required in
this Section 5-4, the City requires and shall be entitled to the broader coverage and/or the higher
limits maintained by the Contractor. Any available insurance proceeds in excess of the specified
minimum limits of insurance and coverage shall be available to the City.
5.7 SAFETY
5-7.8 Steel Plate Covers
5-7.8.1 General
The Contractor shall cover all openings, trenches and excavations at the end of each Work Day
with steel plate covers.
Section 5-8 is hereby added to Section 1 of Part 1 of the Standard Specifications, as follows:
5-8 INDEMNIFICATION
The following indemnity provisions shall supersede the indemnity in Section 5-4.1 of the Standard
Specifications.
5-8.1 Contractor’s Duty.
To the fullest extent permitted by law, the Contractor shall, at its sole cost and expense, defend,
hold harmless and indemnify the City and its elected officials, officers, attorneys, agents,
employees, volunteers, successors, assigns and those City agents serving as independent
contractors in the role of City officials (collectively “Indemnitees”), from and against any and all
damages, costs, expenses, liabilities, claims, demands, causes of action, proceedings, expenses,
judgments, penalties, stop payment notices, liens, and losses of any nature whatsoever, including
fees of accountants, attorneys, or other professionals and all costs associated therewith and the
payment of all consequential damages (collectively “Liabilities”), in law or equity, whether actual,
alleged or threatened, which arise out of, are claimed to arise out of, pertain to, or relate to the
acts or omissions of the Contractor, its officers, agents, servants, employees, Subcontractors,
materialmen, contractors or their officers, agents, servants or employees (or any entity or
97
GP-20 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
individual for whom the Contractor bears legal liability) in the performance of the Contract,
including the Indemnitees’ active or passive negligence, except for Liabilities arising from the sole
negligence or willful misconduct of the Indemnitees, as determined by court decision or by the
agreement of the Parties. The Contractor shall defend the Indemnitees in any action or actions
filed in connection with any Liabilities with counsel of the Indemnitees’ choice, and shall pay all
costs and expenses, including all attorneys’ fees and experts’ costs actually incurred in
connection with such defense. The Contractor shall reimburse the Indemnitees for any and all
legal expenses and costs incurred by Indemnitees in connection therewith. The City shall not be
liable for any accident, loss, or damage to the Work prior to completion, except as otherwise
specified in Section 6-5.
5-8.1.1 Taxes and Workers’ Compensation.
The Contractor shall pay all required taxes on amounts paid to the Contractor under the Contract,
and indemnify and hold the City harmless from any and all taxes, assessments, penalties, and
interest asserted against the City by reason of the independent contractor relationship created by
the Contract. The Contractor shall fully comply with the Workers’ Compensation law regarding the
Contractor and the Contractor’s employees. The Contractor shall indemnify and hold the City
harmless from any failure of the Contractor to comply with applicable Workers’ Compensation
laws. The City may offset against the amount of any fees due to the Contractor under the Contract
any amount due to the City from the Contractor as a result of the Contractor’s failure to promptly
pay to the City any reimbursement or indemnification arising under this Subsection 5-8.1.1.
5-8.1.2 Subcontractor Indemnity Agreements.
The Contractor shall obtain executed indemnity agreements with provisions identical to those in
this Section 5-8 from each and every Subcontractor or any other person or entity involved by, for,
with or on behalf of the Contractor in the performance of the Contract. If the Contractor fails to
obtain such indemnity obligations, the Contractor shall be fully responsible and indemnify, hold
harmless and defend the Indemnitees from and against any and all Liabilities at law or in equity,
whether actual, alleged or threatened, which arise out of, are claimed to arise out of, pertain to,
or relate to the acts or omissions of the Contractor’s Subcontractor, its officers, agents, servants,
employees, Subcontractors, materialmen, contractors or their officers, agents, servants or
employees (or any entity or individual for whom the Contractor’s Subcontractor bears legal
liability) in the performance of the Contract, including the Indemnitees’ active or passive
negligence, except for Liabilities arising from the sole negligence or willful misconduct of the
Indemnitees, as determined by final court decision or by the agreement of the Parties.
5-8.2 Workers’ Compensation Acts not Limiting.
The Contractor’s indemnifications and obligations under this Section 5-8, or any other provision
of the Contract, shall not be limited by the provisions of any Workers’ Compensation act or similar
act. The Contractor expressly waives its statutory immunity under such statutes or laws as to the
City, its officers, agents, employees and volunteers.
5-8.3 Insurance Requirements not Limiting.
The City does not, and shall not, waive any rights that it may possess against the Contractor
because of the acceptance by the City, or the deposit with the City, of any insurance policy or
certificate required pursuant to the Contract. The indemnities in this Section 5-8 shall apply
regardless of whether or not any insurance policies are determined to be applicable to the
98
GP-21 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
Liabilities, tax, assessment, penalty or interest asserted against the City.
5-8.4 Civil Code Exception.
Nothing in this Section 5-8 shall be construed to encompass Indemnitees’ sole negligence or
willful misconduct to the limited extent that the underlying Contract is subject to Civil Code Section
2782(a) or the City’s active negligence to the limited extent that the underlying Contract
Documents are subject to Civil Code Section 2782(b), provided such sole negligence, willful
misconduct or active negligence is determined by agreement between the parties or by the
findings of a court of competent jurisdiction.
5-8.5 Nonwaiver of Rights.
Indemnitees do not and shall not waive any rights that they may possess against the Contractor
because the acceptance by the City, or the deposit with the City, of any insurance policy or
certificate required pursuant to these Contract Documents. This indemnity provision is effective
regardless of any prior, concurrent, or subsequent active or passive negligence by Indemnitees
and shall operate to fully indemnify Indemnitees against any such negligence.
5-8.6 Waiver of Right of Subrogation.
The Contractor, on behalf of itself and all parties claiming under or through it, hereby waives all
rights of subrogation and contribution against the Indemnitees, while acting within the scope of
their duties, from all Claims arising out of or incident to the activities or operations performed by
or on behalf of the Contractor regardless of any prior, concurrent or subsequent active or passive
negligence by Indemnitees.
5-8.7 Survival of Terms.
The Contractor’s indemnifications and obligations under this Section 5-8 shall survive the
expiration or termination of the Contract, are intended to be as broad and inclusive as is permitted
by the law of the State, and are in addition to any other rights or remedies that Indemnitees may
have under the law. Payment is not required as a condition precedent to an Indemnitee’s right to
recover under this indemnity provision, and an entry of judgment against the Contractor shall be
conclusive in favor of the Indemnitee’s right to recover under this indemnity provision.
5-9 RECYCLING OF MATERIALS
Subsection 5-9 is hereby added to the Standard Specifications as follows:
5-9.1 Construction and Demolition Ordinance
The City of Moorpark has adopted a Construction and Demolition (C&D) ordinance requiring all
demolition and city-sponsored projects, regardless of cost; new construction projects valued over
$500,000; or renovation projects valued over $100,000 to divert a minimum of 65% of material
generated during the project from disposal in a landfill (through reuse or recycling). The City has
created a Construction and Demolition Materials Management Plan (C&DMMP) form to assist
applicants to meet these diversion requirements. You will be required to submit a Diversion
Security Deposit of 3% of the project valuation to the City to ensure compliance with the
ordinance. The deposit will be returned upon verification that you met the 65% diversion
requirement. Also, a one-time fee for staff time associated with processing your C&D plan will be
99
GP-22 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
charged. You have two options to meet this requirement. You may use the City’s franchised hauler
(Waste Management) who can provide temporary bins and will dispose of your waste at a City
authorized facility. Or you may self-haul your waste to a city authorized certified C&D processing
facility. If you self-haul your waste you must use proper hauling vehicles and bins owned by
your company and those vehicles must be driven by your employees. Please remember that
because this project is a prevailing wage project, the driver of the self-haul vehicle will need to be
paid a prevailing wage rate for driving the C&D materials to the authorized facility. You will need
to submit itemized weigh tickets from each facility documenting your C&D recycling and
disposal that indicates the weight and type of material recycled or disposed. These weigh
tickets will need to be turned in to the Solid Waste Division and verified prior to final payment
release for the job and refund of your C&D diversion security deposit. If diversion requirements
are not met, the City will retain the deposit. Please contact the Solid Waste Division at 805-517-
6247 with questions about the C&D ordinance or about how to obtain the forms and
documentation requirements.
SECTION 6. PROSECUTION AND PROGRESS OF THE WORK
6-1 CONSTRUCTION SCHEDULE AND COMMENCEMENT OF THE WORK
6-1.1 Construction Schedule
One (1) week before the scheduled pre-construction meeting, the Contractor must submit to the
City for review and approval the construction schedule required by the first paragraph of Section
6-1.1. The Contractor shall make revisions as required by the City. The schedule must account
for all subcontract work, as well as the work of the Contractor, submittals, City review, coordination
with the other contractors performing concurrent work and the Traffic Control Plan. The Contractor
shall update this Construction Schedule when directed by the City, or when:
a. A Change Order significantly affects the Contract completion date or the sequence
of construction approach or activities; or
b. The actual sequence of the Work, or the planned sequence of the Work, is
changed and does not conform to the Contractor’s current accepted Project construction
schedule.
The Contractor shall submit an updated construction schedule with its monthly invoice
every month. Progress payments shall be contingent upon the receipt of monthly updated
construction schedules.
6-1.1.1 Pre-Construction Conference
Approximately seven (7) Days before the commencement of Work at the site, a pre-construction
conference will be held at the site and shall be attended by the Contractor’s Project manager, its
on-site field superintendent, and any Subcontractors that the Contractor deems appropriate.
Attendance by the Contractor and any Subcontractors designated is mandatory.
Contractor shall submit its twenty-four (24) hour emergency telephone numbers to the City for
approval a minimum of two (2) Working Days before the pre-construction conference. Unless
previously submitted to the City, the Contractor shall bring to the pre-construction conference
copies of each of the following:
100
GP-23 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
1) Construction Schedule.
2) Procurement schedule of major equipment and materials and items requiring long
lead time.
3) Shop drawing/sample submittal schedule.
4) Preliminary schedule of values (lump sum price breakdown) for progress payment
purposes.
5) Written designation of the on-site field superintendent and the Project manager.
Both daytime and emergency telephone numbers shall be included in the written
designation.
The purpose of the conference is to designate responsible personnel and establish a working
relationship. The parties will discuss matters requiring coordination and establish procedures for
handling such matters. The complete agenda will be furnished to the Contractor before the
meeting date. The Contractor shall be prepared to discuss all of the items listed below.
1) The Contractor’s construction schedule.
2) Notification of local residents before starting any Work and keeping them informed
throughout the Project.
3) Procedures for transmittal, review, and distribution of the Contractor’s submittals.
4) Processing applications for payment.
5) Maintaining record documents.
6) Critical Work sequencing.
7) Maintaining sewage service during construction, including proposed by-passes.
8) NPDES requirements, if any.
9) Field decisions and Change Orders.
10) Use of Project site, office and storage areas, security, housekeeping, and the City’s
needs.
11) Major equipment deliveries and priorities.
12) Traffic control.
13) Any other item that the City representative states is relevant to the meeting.
6-1.1.2 Weekly Progress Meetings
Progress meetings will be held each week during the course of the Project. The meeting location,
day of the week and time of day will be mutually agreed to by the City and the Contractor. The
Contractor shall provide a three (3) week “look ahead” schedule at least 24 hours prior to each
meeting. The construction manager will preside at these meetings and will prepare the meeting
agenda, meeting minutes and will distribute minutes to all persons in attendance. As the Work
progresses, if it is determined by agreement of the attendees, that weekly meetings are not
necessary, the weekly progress meetings may be changed to bi-weekly progress meetings.
6-1.2 Commencement of the Work
The Contractor shall not begin any construction activity at the site before the issuance of the
Notice to Proceed. Any Work that is done by the Contractor in advance of the Notice to Proceed
shall be considered as being done at the Contractor’s own risk and responsibility, and as a
consequence will be subject to rejection.
Section 6-1.3 is hereby added to Section 6 of Part 1 of the Standard Specifications, as follows:
6-1.3 Working Days And Hours
101
GP-24 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
The Contractor shall do all Work between the hours of 8 a.m. to 5 p.m., Monday through Friday.
No Work will be allowed on Saturday, Sunday, or City holidays, which are noted in Appendix I.
A permit may have other hours or Days for the Contractor to do the Work, and those hours and
Days shall supersede any hours and Days written in this Section.
Whenever the Contractor is permitted or directed to perform night Work or to vary the period
during which Work is performed during the Working Day, the Contractor shall give twenty four
(24) hours’ notice to the City so that inspection may be provided. A charge may be made to the
Contractor for approved overtime or weekend inspections requested by the Contractor.
6-4 DELAYS AND EXTENSIONS OF TIME
6-4.1 General.
Unless otherwise agreed in writing, an adjustment to the Contract time by reason of a Change
Order shall be agreed to at the time the Change Order is issued and accepted by Contractor. If
the Change Order does not reserve the right of the parties, or either of them, to seek an
adjustment to the Contract time, then the parties forever relinquish and waive such right and there
shall be no further adjustments to the Contract time.
No extension of time will be granted for any event, including pandemics, leading to the issuance
of a “stay at home” or similar kind of order by any local, State, or federal governmental authority,
if the Work has been deemed, either by emergency order or proclamation, or operation of law, to
be an essential service that is exempt from such stay at home or similar order.
6-4.2 Extensions of Time
In the event it is deemed appropriate by the City to extend the time for completion of the Work,
any such extension shall not release any guarantee for the Work required by the Contract
Documents, nor shall any such extension of time relieve or release the Sureties on the Bonds
executed. In executing such Bonds, the Sureties shall be deemed to have expressly agreed to
any such extensions of time. The amount of time allowed by an extension of time shall be limited
to the period of the delay giving rise to the same as determined by the City. Notwithstanding any
dispute which may arise in connection with a claim for adjustment of the Contract time, the
Contractor shall promptly proceed with the Work.
6-4.3 Payment for Delays
Notwithstanding any other terms and conditions of the Contract Documents, the City shall have
no obligation whatsoever to increase the Contract Price or extend the time for delays.
Unless compensation and/or markup is agreed upon by the City, the Contractor agrees that no
payment of compensation of any kind shall be made to the Contractor for damages or increased
overhead costs caused by any delays in the progress of the Contract, whether such delays are
avoidable or unavoidable or caused by any act or omission of the City or its agents. Any accepted
delay claim shall be fully compensated for by an extension of time to complete the performance
of the Work.
This Section shall not apply to compensable delays caused solely by the City. If a compensable
delay is caused solely by the City, the Contractor shall be entitled to a Change Order that:
102
GP-25 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
(1) extends the time for completion of the Contract by the amount of delay caused by the City;
and (2) provides equitable adjustment, as determined by the City, to the Contractor.
6-8 TERMINATION OF THE CONTRACT FOR CONVENIENCE
The following sentence is added to Section 6-8:
In no event (including termination for impossibility or impracticability, due to conditions or events
beyond the control of the City, for any other reason or for no reason) shall the total amount of
money to Contractor exceed the amount which would have been paid to Contractor for the full
performance of the services described in the Contract.
6-9 LIQUIDATED DAMAGES
For the purposes of the calculation of the start of the liquidated damages, the Work shall be
deemed to be completed when the same has been completed in accordance with the Plans and
Specifications therefor and to the satisfaction of the City, and the City has certified such
completion in accordance with Section 3-13.1 of Part 1 of the Standard Specifications.
SECTION 7. MEASUREMENT AND PAYMENT
7.3 PAYMENT
7.3.1 General
The unit and lump sum prices to be paid shall constitute full compensation for all labor, equipment,
materials, tools and incidentals required to complete the Project as outlined in these Contract
Documents and as directed by the City. In accordance with Public Contract Code Section 7107,
if no claims have been filed and are still pending, the amount deducted from the final estimate
and retained by the City will be paid to the Contractor except such amounts as are required by
law to be withheld by properly executed and filed notices to stop payment, or as may be withheld
for any other lawful purposes.
Contractor shall furnish within (10) Days of Notice to Proceed, on forms approved by the City, a
detailed schedule of values giving a complete itemized breakdown of the Contract price. The
schedule of values shall be adjusted as directed by the City. 7-3.2 Partial and Final Payment
7-3.2.1 Monthly Closure Date and Invoice Date
For purposes of Section 7-3.2, the monthly closure date shall be the last Day of each month. A
measurement of Work performed and a progress estimate of the value thereof based on the
Contract and of the monthly payment shall be prepared by the Contractor and submitted to the
City before the tenth (10th) Day of the following month for verification and payment consideration.
The City shall have the right to adjust any measurement of quantity and to subsequently correct
any error made in any measurement of quantity for payment.
Contractor shall certify under penalty of perjury, that all cost breakdowns and periodic estimates
accurately reflect the Work on the Project.
7-3.2.2 Payments
103
GP-26 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
The City shall make payments within thirty (30) Days after receipt of the Contractor’s undisputed
and properly submitted payment request, including an updated construction schedule pursuant to
Section 6-1.1 of the General Provisions. The City shall return to the Contractor any payment
request determined not to be a proper payment request as soon as practicable, but not later than
seven (7) Days after receipt, and shall explain in writing the reasons why the payment request is
not proper.
Any dispute related to a payment request shall not relieve or excuse Contractor from its duty to
proceed with the Work and complete the Work within the Contract Time.
7-3.2.3 Retention
The City shall withhold not less than five percent (5%) from each progress payment. However, at
any time after fifty percent (50%) of the Work has been completed, if the City Council finds that
satisfactory progress is being made, it may, at its discretion, make any of the remaining progress
payments in full for actual Work completed. The City shall withhold not less than five percent (5%)
of the Contract Price from the Final Payment Amount (defined in Section 7-3.2.4) until at least
thirty-five (35) days after recordation of the Notice of Completion, or recordation of a notice of
acceptance or cessation, but not later than the period permitted by Public Contract Code Section
7107.
7-3.2.4 Final Invoice and Payment
Whenever the Contractor shall have completely performed the Contract in the opinion of the City,
the City Clerk shall be notified that the Contract has been completed in its entirety. The Contractor
shall then submit to the City a written statement of the final quantities of Contract items for
inclusion in the final invoice. Upon receipt of such statement, the City shall check the quantities
included therein and shall authorize a payment amount, which in the City’s opinion shall be just
and fair, covering the value of the total amount of Work done by the Contractor, less all previous
payments and all amounts to be retained under the provisions of the Contract Documents (“Final
Payment Amount”). The City shall then request that the City accept the Work and that the City
Clerk be authorized to file, on behalf of the City in the office of the County Recorder, a Notice of
Completion of the Work herein agreed to be done by the Contractor. In addition, the final payment
will not be released until the Contractor returns the control set of Plans and Specifications showing
the redlined as-built conditions.
7-3.2.5 Substitute Security
In accordance with Public Contract Code Section 22300, the Contractor may request that it be
permitted to substitute securities in lieu of having retention withheld by the City from progress
payments when such payments become due or, in the alternative, the Contractor may request
that the City make payments of earned retentions directly to an agreed upon designated escrow
agent at the Contractor’s expense. If the Contractor selects either one of these alternatives, the
following shall control.
7.3.2.5.1 Substitution of Securities for Performance Retention
At some reasonable time before any progress payment would otherwise be due and payable to
the Contractor in the performance of Work under these Contract Documents, the Contractor may
submit a request to the City in writing to permit the substitution of retentions with securities
equivalent to the amount estimated by the City (“estimated amount of retention”) to be withheld.
104
GP-27 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
The Contractor shall deposit such securities with the City or may, in the alternative, deposit such
securities in escrow with a State or federally chartered bank in California, as the escrow agent, at
the Contractor’s expense. Such securities will be the equivalent or greater in value of the
estimated amount of retention. If the Contract is modified by written Modifications or Change
Orders or the Contractor otherwise becomes entitled to receive an amount more than the Contract
Price at the time the securities are deposited, the Contractor shall, at the request of the City,
deposit with the City or escrow agent, whichever is applicable, additional securities within a
reasonable time so that the amount of securities on deposit with the City or escrow agent is
equivalent or greater in value than the amount of retention the City would otherwise be entitled to
withhold from progress payments due or to become due to the Contractor as the Work progresses.
The City shall withhold any retention amount that exceeds the security amount until the additional
securities are deposited and, if the deposit is with an escrow agent, the City has confirmation from
that escrow agent of the new total value of securities. Upon satisfactory completion of the
Contract, which shall mean, among other things, that the City is not otherwise entitled to retain
proceeds from progress payments as elsewhere provided in the Contract or under applicable law,
the securities shall be returned to the Contractor. The City shall, within its sole discretion,
determine whether the amount of the securities on deposit with the City or escrow agent is equal
to or greater than the amount of estimated retention of progress payments that could otherwise
be held by the City if the Contractor had not elected to substitute same with securities.
7-3.2.5.2 Deposit of Retention Proceeds with an Escrow Agent
As an alternative to the substitution of securities, as provided above, or the City otherwise
retaining and holding retention proceeds from progress payments, the Contractor may request
the City to make payments of retentions earned directly to an escrow agent with the same
qualifications as required in Section 7-3.2.5.1 above and at the expense of the Contractor. At its
sole expense, the Contractor may direct the investment of such retention payments into only such
securities as mentioned in Section 7-3.2.5.4 below and shall be entitled to interest earned on such
investments on the same terms provided for securities deposited by the Contractor. Upon
satisfactory completion of the Contract, which shall mean when the City would not otherwise be
entitled to withhold retention proceeds from progress payments had the Contractor not elected to
have such proceeds deposited into escrow, the Contractor shall be allowed to receive from the
escrow agent all securities, interest and payments deposited into escrow pursuant to the terms of
this Section. The Contractor shall pay to each Subcontractor, not later than ten (10) Days of
receipt of payment, the respective amount of interest earned, net of costs attributed to retention
withheld from each Subcontractor, on the amount withheld to ensure performance of the
Contractor.
7-3.2.5.3 Subcontractor Entitlement to Interest
If the Contractor elects to receive interest on any moneys withheld in retention by the City, then
the Subcontractor shall receive the identical rate of interest received by the Contractor on any
retention moneys withheld from the Subcontractor by the Contractor, less any actual pro rata
costs associated with administering and calculating that interest. In the event that the interest rate
is a fluctuating rate, the rate for the Subcontractor shall be determined by calculating the interest
rate paid during the time that retentions were withheld from the Subcontractor. If the Contractor
elects to substitute securities in lieu of retention, then, by mutual consent of the Contractor and
the Subcontractor, the Subcontractor may substitute securities in exchange for the release of
moneys held in retention by the Contractor. The Contractor shall pay each Subcontractor, not
later than ten (10) Days after receipt of escrow moneys, the amount owed to each Subcontractor
from the moneys plus the respective amount of interest earned, net of costs attributed to the
105
GP-28 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
retention held from each Subcontractor, on the amount of retention withheld to ensure
performance of the Subcontractor.
7-3.2.5.4 Securities Eligible for Investment
Securities eligible for investment shall include those listed in Government Code Section 16430,
bank or savings and loan certificates of deposit, interest-bearing demand deposit accounts,
standby letters of credit, or any other security mutually agreed upon between the Contractor and
the City. The Contractor shall be the beneficial owner of any securities substituted for any monies
withheld and shall receive any interest thereon.
106
GP-29 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
7-3.2.5.5 Escrow Agreement for Security Deposits in Lieu of Retention
The escrow agreement that shall be used for the deposit of securities in lieu of retention shall
substantially conform to the form prescribed in Public Contract Code Section 22300(f).
7-3.2.5.6 Inconsistencies with Prevailing Statutory Requirements
If there is any inconsistency between or differences in Public Contract Code Section 22300 and
the terms of this provision, or any future amendments thereto, Section 22300 shall control.
Section 7-3.9 is hereby added to Section 7-3 of Part 1 of the Standard Specifications, as follows:
7-3.4 MOBILIZATION
All mobilization costs of Contractor and all subcontractors are deemed included in Contractor’s
bid. This amount constitutes full compensation for all such mobilization costs, and no further
payment shall be made to Contractor for costs of mobilization of Contractor or any subcontractor.
The scope of Work included under Mobilizations shall include, but shall not be limited to, the
following principal items:
1. Obtaining, paying for a delivering to the City all bonds, insurance, and permits
2. Moving on to the Site all Contractor’s equipment required for the first month’s
operations.
3. Installing temporary construction power, wiring, and lighting facilities.
4. Establishing a fire protection system.
5. Developing and installing a construction water supply.
6. Submittal and approval of all preliminary site videos, photographs and any other
existing condition surveys required.
7. Submittal and approval of the detailed list of submittals and shop drawings, and
any other submittals required.
8. Providing on-site sanitary facilities and potable water facilities as specified per Cal-
OSHA and these Contract Documents.
9. Posting all OSHA required notices and establishment of safety programs per Cal-
OSHA.
10. Full-time presence of Contractor’s superintendent at the Site as required herein in
Section 9-22.
11. Submittal and approval of the Initial Construction Schedule as required by the
Contract Documents, including all necessary revisions.
12. Submittal and approval of the Contractor’s Injury and Illness Prevention Program.
107
GP-30 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
7-3.9 AUDIT
The City or its representative shall have the option of inspecting and/or auditing all records and
other written materials used by the Contractor in preparing its billings to the City as a condition
precedent to any payment to the Contractor or in response to a construction claim or a Public
Records Act (Government Code Section 6250 et seq.) request. The Contractor will promptly
furnish documents requested by the City at no cost. Additionally, the Contractor shall be subject
to State Auditor examination and audit at the request of the City or as part of any audit of the City,
for a period of three (3) years after final payment under the Contract. The Contractor shall include
a copy of this Section 7-3.9 in all contracts with its Subcontractors, and the Contractor shall be
responsible for immediately obtaining those records or other written material from its
Subcontractors upon a request by the State Auditor or the City. If the Project includes other
auditing requirements, those additional requirements will be listed in the Special Provisions.
SECTION 8 FACILITIES FOR AGENCY PERSONNEL
8-1 General
No field offices for City personnel shall be required; however, City personnel shall have the right
to enter upon the Project at all times and shall be admitted to the offices of the Contractor to use
the telephone, desk and sanitary facilities provided by the Contractor for its own personnel.
8-7 Sanitary Facilities
Contractor shall provide sanitary temporary toilet buildings and hand washing facilities for the use
of all workers. All toilets and hand washing facilities shall comply with all applicable federal, state,
and local laws, codes, ordinances, and regulations. Toilets shall be kept supplied with toilet paper
and shall have workable door fasteners. Toilets and hand washing facilities shall be serviced no
less than once weekly and shall be present in a quantity of not less than 1 per 20 workers or as
required by Cal/OSHA regulations. The toilets and hand washing facilities shall be maintained in
a sanitary condition at all times. Use of toilet and hand washing facilities within the Work of the
Project under construction shall not be permitted. Any other Sanitary Facilities required by
Cal/OSHA shall be the responsibility of the Contractor.
Section 9 is hereby added to Part 1 of the Standard Specifications, as follows:
SECTION 9. ADDITIONAL TERMS
9-1 NONDISCRIMINATORY EMPLOYMENT
The Contractor shall not unlawfully discriminate against any individual based on race, religious
creed, color, national origin, ancestry, physical disability, mental disability, medical condition,
genetic information, marital status, sex, gender, gender identity, gender expression, age, sexual
orientation or military and veteran status. The Contractor understands and agrees that it is bound
by and will comply with the nondiscrimination mandates of all statutes and local ordinances and
regulations.
9-3 CONTRACTOR’S RESPONSIBILITY FOR WORK
Until the final acceptance of the Work by the City Council in accordance with Section 3-13.2 of
the General Provisions, the Contractor shall have the charge and care thereof and shall bear the
108
GP-31 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
risk of injury or damage to any part of the Work by the action of the elements, criminal acts, or
any other cause. The Contractor shall rebuild, repair, restore and make good all injuries or
damages to any portion of the Work occasioned by any cause before its completion and
acceptance and shall bear the expense thereof, except for such injuries or damages arising from
the sole negligence or willful misconduct of the City, its officers, agents or employees. In the case
of suspension of Work from any cause whatever, the Contractor shall be responsible for all
materials and the protection of Work already completed, shall properly store and protect them if
necessary, and shall provide suitable drainage and erect temporary structures where necessary.
9-4 PROCEDURE IN CASE OF DAMAGE TO PUBLIC PROPERTY
Any portions of curb, gutter, sidewalk or any other City improvement damaged by the Contractor
during the course of construction shall be replaced by the Contractor at its own cost. The cost of
additional replacement of any items in excess of the estimated quantities shown in the Bid form
and Specifications, and found necessary during the process of construction (but not due to
damage resulting from carelessness on the part of the Contractor during its operation), shall be
paid to the Contractor at the unit prices submitted in his or her Bid.
9-5 REMOVAL OF INTERFERING OBSTRUCTIONS
The Contractor shall remove and dispose of all debris, abandoned structures, tree roots and
obstructions of any character encountered during the process of excavation. It is understood that
the cost of any such removals are made a part of the unit price bid by the Contractor under the
item for excavation or removal of existing Work.
9-6 SOILS ENGINEERING AND TESTING
A certified materials testing firm may be retained by the City to perform materials tests during the
Contractor’s entire operation to ascertain compliance with the Contract requirements. The City
shall be responsible for the first series of tests. If the initial tests do not meet the Contract
requirements, the Contractor shall bear the cost of all subsequent tests.
If the City requires other tests or more specific requirements for testing regarding this Project,
those details will be included in the Special Provisions.
9-7 ACCESS TO PRIVATE PROPERTY
Unless otherwise stated in the Special Provisions, the Contractor shall be responsible for all fees
and costs associated with securing permission to access private property for any portion of the
Project.
9-9 CLAIM DISPUTE RESOLUTION
In the event of any dispute or controversy with the City over any matter whatsoever, the Contractor
shall not cause any delay or cessation in or of Work, but shall proceed with the performance of
the Work in dispute. The Contractor shall retain any and all rights provided that pertain to the
resolution of disputes and protests between the parties. The Disputed Work will be categorized
as an “unresolved dispute” and payment, if any, shall be as later determined by mutual agreement
or a court of law. The Contractor shall keep accurate, detailed records of all Disputed Work, claims
and other disputed matters.
109
GP-32 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
All claims arising out of or related to the Contract Documents or this Project, and the consideration
and payment of such claims, are subject to the Government Claims Act (Government Code
Section 810 et seq.) with regard to filing claims. All such claims are also subject to Public Contract
Code Section 9204 and Public Contract Code Section 20104 et seq. (Article 1.5), where
applicable. This Contract hereby incorporates those provisions as though fully set forth herein.
Thus, the Contractor or any Subcontractor must file a claim in accordance with the Government
Claims Act as a prerequisite to filing a construction claim in compliance with Section 9204 and
Article 1.5 (if applicable), and must then adhere to Section 9204 and Article 1.5 (as applicable),
pursuant to the definition of “claim” as individually defined therein.
9-10 THIRD PARTY CLAIMS
The City shall have full authority to compromise or otherwise settle any claim relating to the Project
at any time. The City shall timely notify the Contractor of the receipt of any third-party claim relating
to the Project. The City shall be entitled to recover its reasonable costs incurred in providing this
notice.
9-11 COMPLIANCE WITH LAWS
The Contractor shall comply with all applicable federal, State and local laws, ordinances, codes
and regulations in force at the time the Contractor performs pursuant to the Contract Documents.
9-12 CONTRACTOR’S REPRESENTATIONS
By signing the Contract, the Contractor represents, covenants, agrees, and declares under
penalty of perjury under the laws of the State of California that: (a) the Contractor is licensed,
qualified, and capable of furnishing the labor, materials, and expertise necessary to perform the
services in accordance with the terms and conditions set forth in the Contract Documents;
(b) there are no obligations, commitments, or impediments of any kind that will limit or prevent its
full performance under the Contract Documents; (c) there is no litigation pending against the
Contractor that could adversely affect its performance of the Contract, and the Contractor is not
the subject of any criminal investigation or proceeding; and (d) to the Contractor’s actual
knowledge, neither the Contractor nor its personnel have been convicted of a felony.
9-13 CONFLICTS OF INTEREST
The Contractor agrees not to accept any employment or representation during the term of the
Contract or within twelve (12) months after acceptance as defined in Section 3-13.2 of the General
Provisions that is or may likely make the Contractor “financially interested,” as provided in
Government Code Sections 1090 and 87100, in any decisions made by the City on any matter in
connection with which the Contractor has been retained pursuant to the Contract Documents.
9-14 APPLICABLE LAW
The validity, interpretation, and performance of these Contract Documents shall be controlled by
and construed under the laws of the State of California, excluding California’s choice of law rules.
Venue for any such action relating to the Contract shall be in the Superior Court with geographic
jurisdiction over the City.
9-15 TIME
110
GP-33 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
Time is of the essence in these Contract Documents.
9-16 INDEPENDENT CONTRACTOR
The Contractor and Subcontractors shall at all times remain, as to the City, wholly independent
contractors. Neither the City nor any of its officials, officers, employees or agents shall have
control over the conduct of the Contractor, Subcontractors, or any of their officers, employees, or
agents, except as herein set forth, and the Contractor and Subcontractors are free to dispose of
all portions of their time and activities that they are not obligated to devote to the City in such a
manner and to such Persons that the Contractor or Subcontractors wish except as expressly
provided in these Contract Documents. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall have no power
to incur any debt, obligation, or liability on behalf of the City, bind the City in any manner, or
otherwise act on behalf of the City as agents. The Contractor and Subcontractors shall not, at any
time or in any manner, represent that they or any of their agents, servants or employees, are in
any manner agents, servants or employees of the City. The Contractor and Subcontractors agree
to pay all required taxes on amounts paid to them under the Contract, and to indemnify and hold
the City harmless from any and all taxes, assessments, penalties, and interest asserted against
the City by reason of the independent contractor relationship created by the Contract Documents.
The Contractor shall include this provision in all contracts with all Subcontractors.
9-17 CONSTRUCTION
In the event of any asserted ambiguity in, or dispute regarding the interpretation of any matter
herein, the interpretation of these Contract Documents shall not be resolved by any rules of
interpretation providing for interpretation against the party who causes the uncertainty to exist or
against the party who drafted the Contract Documents or who drafted that portion of the Contract
Documents.
9-18 NON-WAIVER OF TERMS, RIGHTS AND REMEDIES
Waiver by either party of any one (1) or more of the conditions of performance under these
Contract Documents shall not be a waiver of any other condition of performance under these
Contract Documents. In no event shall the making by the City of any payment to the Contractor
constitute or be construed as a waiver by the City of any breach of covenant, or any default that
may then exist on the part of the Contractor, and the making of any such payment by the City
shall in no way impair or prejudice any right or remedy available to the City with regard to such
breach or default.
9-19 TERM
The Contract is effective as of the Effective Date listed, and shall remain in full force and effect
until the Contractor has fully rendered the services required by the Contract Documents or the
Contract has been otherwise terminated by the City. However, some provisions may survive the
term listed within this Section, as stated in those provisions.
111
GP-34 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
9-20 NOTICE
Except as otherwise required by law, any notice or other communication authorized or required
by these Contract Documents shall be in writing and shall be deemed received on (a) the day of
delivery if delivered by hand or overnight courier service during the City’s regular business hours
or (b) on the third (3rd) business day following deposit in the United States mail, postage prepaid,
to the addresses listed on the Contractor’s Bid and City Hall, or at such other address as one
party may notify the other.
9-21 SEVERABILITY
If any term or portion of these Contract Documents is held to be invalid, illegal, or otherwise
unenforceable by a court of competent jurisdiction, the remaining provisions of these Contract
Documents shall continue in full force and effect.
9-22 CONTRACTORS SUPERVISION
Contractor shall continuously keep at the Project site, a competent and experienced full-time
Project superintendent acceptable to the City. Superintendent must be able to proficiently speak,
read and write in English and shall have the authority to make decisions on behalf of the
Contractor. Contractor shall continuously provide efficient supervision of the Project.
9-23 WORKERS
Contractor shall at all times enforce strict discipline and good order among its employees.
Contractor shall not employ on the Project any unfit person or any one not skilled in the Work
assigned to him or her.
Any person in the employ of the Contractor whom the City may deem incompetent or unfit shall
be dismissed from the Work and shall not be employed on this Project.
9-23 SUBCONTRACTORS
Contractor agrees to bind every subcontractor to the terms of the Contract Documents as far as
such terms are applicable to subcontractor’s portion of the work. Contractor shall be as fully
responsible to the City for the acts and omissions of its subcontractors and of persons either
directly or indirectly employed by its subcontractors, as Contractor is for acts and omissions of
persons directly employed by contractor. Nothing contained in these Contract Documents shall
create any contractual relationship between any subcontractor and the City.
The City reserved the right to accept all subcontractors. The City’s acceptance of any
subcontractor under this Contract shall not in any way relieve Contractor of its obligations in the
Contract Documents.
Prior to substituting any subcontractor listed in the Bid Forms, Contractor must comply with the
requirements of the Subletting and Subcontracting Fair Practices Act pursuant to California Public
Contract Code section 4100 et seq.
Formal notification of substitution of any subcontractor shall be issued to the City and does not
entitle the Contractor to additional costs or time to complete the Project.
112
GP-35 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
9-24 MATERIALS
Except as otherwise specifically stated in the Contract Documents, Contractor shall provide and
pay for all materials, labor, tools, equipment, lights, power, transportation, superintendence,
temporary constructions of every nature, and all other services and facilities of every nature
whatsoever necessary to execute and complete this Contract within specified time.
Unless otherwise specified, all materials shall be new and the best of their respective kinds and
grades as noted and/or specified, and workmanship shall be of good quality.
Materials shall be furnished in ample quantities and at such times as to ensure uninterrupted
progress of the Work and shall be stored properly and protected as required by the Contract
Documents. Contractor shall be entirely responsible for damage or loss by weather or other
causes to materials or Work until the City has accepted the Work.
No materials, supplies, or equipment for Work under this Contract shall be purchased subject to
any chattel mortgage or under a conditional sale or other agreement by which an interest therein
or in any part thereof is retained by the seller or supplier. Contractor warrants good title to all
material, supplies, and equipment installed or incorporated in the Work and agrees upon
completion of all work to deliver the Project, to the City free from any claims, liens, or charges.
Materials shall be stored on the Project site in such manner so as not to interfere with any
operations of the City or any independent contractor.
Contractor shall verify all measurements, dimensions, elevations, and quantities before ordering
any materials or performing any Work, and the City shall not be liable for Contractor’s failure to
so. No additional compensation, over and above payment for the actual quantities at the prices
set out in the Bid Form, will be allowed because of differences between actual measurements,
dimension, elevations and quantities and those indicated on the Plans and in the Specifications.
Any difference therein shall be submitted to the City for consideration before proceeding with the
Work.
9-25 TRAFIC CONTROL
Traffic control plan(s) for the Work may be required by the Agency(s) of Jurisdiction. Traffic control
plans, if required, shall be prepared at Contractor’s expense, in accordance with the requirements
of the Agency(s) of Jurisdiction. Costs for preparation of any required traffic control plans or
implementation of any traffic control requirements that may be required, shall be included in the
Contractor’s bid.
All warning signs and safety devices used by the Contractor to perform the Work shall conform to
the requirements contained in the State of California, Department of Transportation’s current
edition of “Manual of Traffic Controls for Construction and Maintenance Work Zones” or to the
requirements of the local agency. The Contractor shall also be responsible for all traffic control
required by the agency having jurisdiction over the project on the intersecting streets. Contractor
must submit a traffic control plan to the agency having jurisdiction over the project for approval
prior to starting work, if required.
The Contractor’s representative on the site responsible for traffic control shall produce evidence
that he/she has completed training acceptable to the California Department of Transportation for
safety through construction zones. All of the streets in which the Work will occur shall remain open
113
GP-36 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
to traffic and one lane of traffic maintained at all times unless otherwise directed by the agency of
jurisdiction. Businesses and residences adjacent to the Work shall be notified at least forty-eight
(48) hours in advance of closing of driveways. The Contractor shall make every effort to minimize
the amount of public parking temporarily eliminated due to construction in areas fronting
businesses. No stockpiles of pipe or other material will be allowed in traveled right-of-ways after
working hours unless otherwise approved by the Engineer.
9-26 AIR POLUTION CONTROL
Contractor shall comply with all air pollution control rules, regulations, ordinances and statues. All
containers of paint, thinner, curing compound, solvent or liquid asphalt shall be labeled to indicate
that the contents fully comply with the applicable material requirements.
9-27 CONTRACTOR’S MEANS AND METHODS
Contractor is solely responsible for the means and methods utilized to perform the Work. In no
case shall the Contractor’s means and methods deviate from commonly used industry standards.
9-28 DOCUMENT RETENTION & EXAMINATION
In accordance with Government Code Section 8546.7, records of both the City and the Contractor
shall be subject to examination and audit by the State Auditor General for a period of three (3)
years after final payment.
Contractor shall make available to the City any of the Contractor’s other documents related to the
Work immediately upon request of the City.
In addition to the State Auditor’s rights described above, the City shall have the right to examine
and audit all books, estimates, records, contracts, documents, bid documents, subcontracts, and
other data of the Contractor (including electronic records, computations and projections) related
to negotiating, pricing, or performing the Work in order to evaluate the accuracy and completeness
of the cost or pricing data, for a period of four (4) years after final payment.
114
SP-1 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
SPECIAL PROVISIONS
The Sections that follow supplement, but do not replace, the corresponding provisions in Part 3
(Construction Methods) and Part 4 (Existing Improvements) of the Standard Specifications,
except as otherwise indicated herein. In the event of any conflict between the Standard
Specifications and these Special Provisions, these Special Provisions shall control.
SECTION 306 - OPEN TRENCH CONDUIT CONSTRUCTION
306-3.1 GENERAL
Pursuant to Public Contract Code Section 7104, if the project involves trenching more than four
(4) feet deep, Contractor shall promptly and before the following conditions are disturbed notify
the City in writing of any:
a. Material that Contractor believes may be material that is hazardous waste,
as defined in California Health and Safety Code Section 25117, that is required to be removed to
a Class I, Class II, or Class III disposal site in accordance with provisions of existing law; and/or
b. Subsurface or latent physical conditions at the site differing from those
indicated; and/or
c. Unknown physical conditions at the site of any unusual nature, different
materially from those ordinarily encountered and generally recognized as inherent in work of the
character provided for in the Contract.
d. As required by Labor Code Section 6705 and in addition thereto, whenever
work under the Contract that involves an estimated expenditure in excess of twenty-five thousand
dollars ($25,000) for the excavation of any trench or trenches five (5) feet or more in depth,
Contractor shall submit for acceptance by City in advance of excavation, a detailed plan showing
the design of shoring, bracing, sloping, or other provisions to be made for worker protection from
the hazard of caving ground during the excavation of such trench or trenches. If such plan varies
from the shoring system standards established by the Construction Safety Orders of the Division
of Industrial Safety, the plan shall be prepared by a registered civil or structural engineer employed
by Contractor, and all costs therefor shall be included in the price of the Contract. Nothing in this
provision shall be deemed to allow the use of a shoring, sloping, or other protective system less
effective than that required by the Construction Safety Orders. Nothing in this provision shall be
construed to impose tort liability on the City or on any City officer, agent, consultant,
representative, or employee. All plans, processing and shoring costs are Contractor’s
responsibility and must be included in Contractor’s bid.
The City shall promptly investigate the conditions, and if it finds that the conditions do so materially
differ, or do involve hazardous waste, and cause a decrease or increase in Contractor’s cost of,
or the time required for, performance of any part of the Work, shall issue a change order under
the procedures described in the Contract Documents.
In the event that a dispute arises between the City and the Contractor as to whether the conditions
materially differ, or involve hazardous waste, or cause a decrease or increase in the Contractor’s
cost of, or time required for, performance of any part of the Work, the Contractor shall not be
excused from any scheduled completion date provided for by the Contract, but shall proceed with
115
SP-2 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
all Work to be performed under the Contract. Contractor shall retain any and all rights provided
either by contract or by law which pertain to the resolution of disputes and protests between the
parties.
SECTION 400 - PROTECTION AND RESTORATION
400-1 GENERAL
All costs to the Contractor for protecting, removing, restoring, relocating, repairing, replacing, or
reestablishing existing improvements shall be included in the Bid.
SECTION 402 - UTILITIES
402-1 LOCATION
The location and existence of any underground Utility or substructure has not been obtained. The
methods used and costs involved to locate existing elements, points of connection and all
construction methods are the Contractor’s sole responsibility. Accuracy of information furnished,
as to existing conditions, is not guaranteed by the City. The Contractor, at its sole expense, must
make all investigations necessary to determine locations of existing elements, which may include
contacting Underground Service Alert and other private underground locating firm(s), utilizing
specialized locating equipment, hand trenching, or both. For every Dig Alert Identification Number
issued by Underground Service Alert during the course of the Project, the Contractor must submit
to the City the following form. The Contractor shall be responsible for preserving the integrity of
the existing underground utilities at the site.
116
SP-3 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
UNDERGROUND SERVICE ALERT IDENTIFICATION NUMBER FORM
No excavation will be permitted until this form is completed and returned to the City.
Government Code Section 4216 et seq. requires a Dig Alert Identification Number to be issued
before a permit to excavate will be valid.
To obtain a Dig Alert Identification Number, call Underground Service Alert at 811 a minimum of
three (3) Working Days before scheduled excavation. For best response, provide as much notice
as possible up to ten (10) Working Days.
Dig Alert Identification Number: ________________________________________________
Dated:
(“CONTRACTOR”)
By:
Printed Name:
Title:
By:
Printed Name:
Title:
Note: This form is required for every Dig Alert Identification Number issued by Underground
Service during the course of the Work. Additional forms may be obtained from the City upon
request.
117
SP-4 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
402-1.3 Entry by Utility Owners
The right is reserved to the owners of public Utilities or franchises to enter the Project site for the
purpose of making repairs or changes in their property that may be necessary as a result of the
Work as well as any other reason authorized by the City. When the Contract Documents provide
for the Utility owners to alter, relocate or reconstruct a Utility, or when the Contract Documents
are silent in this regard and it is determined by the City that the Utility owners must alter, relocate
or reconstruct a Utility, the Contractor shall schedule and allow adequate time for those
alterations, relocations or reconstructions by the respective Utility owners. City employees and
agents shall likewise have the right to enter upon the Project site at any time and for any reason
or no reason at all.
402-2 PROTECTION
If Contractor damages or breaks the Utilities, it will be the Contractor’s responsibility to repair the
Utility at no cost to the Utility or the City.
402-3 REMOVAL
Facilities encountered during the prosecution of the Work that are determined to be abandoned
shall be removed by the Contractor as required for the Work, unless directed otherwise by the
City. The remaining portion of the existing Utility which is left in place shall be accurately recorded,
in elevation and plan, on the control set of Contract Drawings.
402-4 RELOCATION
The Contractor shall cooperate fully with all Utility forces of the City or forces of other public or
private agencies engaged in the relocation, altering, or otherwise rearranging of any facilities that
interfere with the progress of the Work. The Contractor shall schedule the Work so as to minimize
interference with the relocation, altering, or other rearranging of facilities.
Temporary or permanent relocation or alteration of utilities desired by the Contractor for its own
convenience shall be the Contractor’s responsibility and it shall make arrangements and bear all
costs for such work.
402-6 COOPERATION
The Contractor’s attention is directed to the fact that Work may be conducted at or adjacent to
the site by other contractors during the performance of the Work under this Contract. The
Contractor shall conduct its operations so as to cause a minimum of interference with the work of
such other contractors, and shall cooperate fully with such contractors to provide continued safe
access to their respective portions of the site, as required to perform work under their respective
contracts. Compensation for compliance shall be included in the various items of the Work, and
no additional compensation shall be allowed therefor.
402-7 NOTIFICATION
The Contractor shall notify the City and the owners of all Utilities and substructures not less than
forty-eight (48) hours before starting construction. The following list of names and telephone
numbers is intended for the convenience of the Contractor and is not guaranteed to be complete
or accurate:
118
SP-5 Richards, Watson & Gershon - 2020
12853-0019\2476738v1.doc
Agency:
Phone Number:
Contact Person:
Agency:
Phone Number:
Contact Person:
Agency:
Phone Number:
Contact Person:
119
APPENDIX I
CITY HOLIDAYS – 2023
120
Rev. 10/21/2022
CITY HOLIDAYS – 2023
January
New Year’s Day (observed) Monday, Jan. 2
Martin Luther King, Jr. Day Monday, January 16
February
Presidents Day Monday, February 20
March
Cesar Chavez Day Friday, March 31
May
Memorial Day Monday, May 29
July
Independence Day Extended Monday, July 3
Independence Day Holiday Tuesday, July 4
September
Labor Day Monday, September 4
November
Veterans Day Friday, November 10
Thanksgiving Day Thursday, November 23
Extended Thanksgiving Holiday Friday, November 24
December
Christmas Holiday (observed) Monday, December 25
January 2024
2024 New Year’s Day (observed) Monday, Jan. 1
,;_
.
,
;
;
.~
..
~
o:
-¾
,
-
,
.
,J
I~
~
~
,~
,
\,
~
~
f
;
.
,
'
,,
,-
.0,
.
,
~
y
121
APPENDIX II
CONSTRUCTION PLAN SET
122
Architectural Plans (115 Sheets),
pages 120 to 234 of the Agreement
are omitted pursuant to Senate Bill 1214 and
are available for public inspection at
Moorpark City Hall, Community Development Department
123
APPENDIX III
TECHNICAL SPECIFICATIONS
124
PROJECT MANUAL
INCLUDING SPECIFICATIONS
FOR
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
323 Science Dr.
Moorpark, CA 93021
ARCHITECT
SVA ARCHITECTS
6 Hutton Centre Drive, Suite 1150
Santa Anna, CA 92707
Telephone: 949.809.3380
SVA Project Number: 2022-40110
June 08, 2023
125
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENTANT IMPROVEMENT
06/12/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
00 01 10 - 1 Table of Contents
SECTION 00 01 10
TABLE OF CONTENTS
PROJECT MANUAL
INTRODUCTORY INFORMATION
Document 00 01 10 Table of Contents
SPECIFICATIONS GROUP
DIVISION 01 – GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
Section
01 11 00 Summary of Work
01 23 00 Alternates
01 25 00 Substitution Procedures
01 30 00 Administrative Requirements
01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination
01 31 10 Request For Information (RFI)
01 35 15 CALGreen Environmental Requirements
01 40 00 Quality Requirements
01 50 00 Temporary Facilities and Controls
01 56 39 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
01 60 00 Product Requirements
01 70 00 Execution Requirements
01 73 00 Cutting and Patching
01 74 10 Waste Management
01 77 00 Closeout Procedures
01 78 00 Warranties
01 79 00 Demonstration and Training
DIVISION 02 – EXISTING CONDITIONS
Section
02 41 20 Selective Building Demolition
DIVISION 03 – CONCRETE
Section
03 54 10 Gypsum Underlayment
03 10 00 Concrete Formwork
126
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENTANT IMPROVEMENT
06/12/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
00 01 10 - 2 Table of Contents
03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcement
03 30 00 Cast-in-Place Concrete
DIVISION 04 – MASONRY
Section 04 22 70 Concrete Unit Masonry
DIVISION 05 – METALS
Section 05 12 00 Structural Steel
05 30 00 Metal Decking
05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing
05 50 00 Metal Fabrications
DIVISION 06 – WOOD, PLASTICS, AND COMPOSITES
Section 06 10 50 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry
06 18 00 Structural Glued-Laminated Timber
06 20 00 Finish Carpentry
06 40 00 Architectural Woodwork
DIVISION 07 – THERMAL AND MOISTURE PROTECTION
Section 07 18 00 Traffic Coating - Urethane
07 19 00 Water Repellent
07 21 00 Thermal Insulation
07 26 00 Below-Grade Vapor Retarder
07 28 00 Weather Barrier Underlayment
07 52 00 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
07 60 00 Flashing and Sheet Metal
07 72 00 Roof Hatches
07 84 00 Firestopping
07 90 00 Joint Sealants
DIVISION 08 – OPENINGS
Section 08 11 10 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
08 11 20 Interior Aluminum Frames
08 14 00 Wood Doors - Flush
08 17 00 Integrated Door Opening Assemblies
08 31 00 Access Doors and Panels
08 41 00 Entrances and Storefronts
08 62 23 Tubular Daylighting Devices
08 71 00 Door Hardware
08 80 00 Glazing
08 83 00 Frameless Mirrors
127
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENTANT IMPROVEMENT
06/12/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
00 01 10 - 3 Table of Contents
DIVISION 09 – FINISHES
Section
09 21 00 Gypsum Board Assemblies – Metal Framing
09 24 00 Portland Cement Plaster
09 30 00 Tiling
09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings
09 65 10 Resilient Base
09 65 20 Resilient Tile Flooring
09 68 00 Carpeting - Adhered
09 68 10 Tile Carpeting
09 72 10 Vinyl-Coated Fabric Wall Covering
09 77 20 Fabric Wrapped Panels
09 90 00 Painting and Coating
DIVISION 10 – SPECIALTIES
Section
10 14 00 Signage
10 21 20 Phenolic Toilet Compartments
10 28 00 Toilet Accessories
10 44 00 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
10 75 00 Metal Flagpoles
DIVISION 11 – EQUIPMENT
Not used
DIVISION 12 – FURNISHINGS
Section 12 93 00 Site Furnishings
DIVISION 13 – SPECIAL CONSTRUCTION
Not used.
DIVISION 14 – CONVEYING EQUIPMENT
Not used
DIVISION 21 – FIRE SUPPRESSION
Section
21 05 00 - Basic Fire Suppression Requirements
128
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENTANT IMPROVEMENT
06/12/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
00 01 10 - 4 Table of Contents
21 05 03 - Through Penetration Firestopping
21 05 05 - Fire Suppression Demolition For Remodeling
21 05 29 - Fire Suppression Supports And Anchors
21 05 50 - Seismic Requirements For Equipment And Supports
21 05 53 - Fire Suppression Identification
21 13 00 - Fire Protection Systems
21 22 00 - Clean Agent Fire Suppression System
DIVISION 22 - PLUMBING
22 05 00 - Basic Plumbing Requirements
22 05 03 - Through Penetration Firestopping
22 05 05 - Plumbing Demolition For Remodeling
22 05 29 - Plumbing Supports And Anchors
22 05 53 - Plumbing Identification
22 07 19 - Plumbing Piping Insulation
22 09 00 - Instrumentation
22 10 00 - Plumbing Piping
22 10 30 - Plumbing Specialties
22 40 00 - Plumbing Fixtures
DIVISION 23 - HEATING, VENTILATING, AND AIR-CONDITIONING(HVAC)
Section 23 05 00 - Basic Hvac Requirements
Section 23 05 03 - Through Penetration Firestopping
Section 23 05 05 - Hvac Demolition For Remodeling
Section 23 05 13 - Motors
Section 23 05 29 - Hvac Supports And Anchors
Section 23 05 53 - Hvac Identification
Section 23 05 93 - Testing, Adjusting, And Balancing
Section 23 07 13 - Ductwork Insulation
Section 23 07 19 - Hvac Piping Insulation
Section 23 09 05 - Small Equipment Controls
Section 23 31 00 - Ductwork
Section 23 33 00 - Ductwork Accessories
Section 23 34 23 - Power Ventilators
Section 23 37 00 - Air Inlets And Outlets
Section 23 40 00 - Air Cleaning
Section 23 74 16.12 - Packaged Rooftop Air Conditioning Units 25 Ton And Below
Section 23 81 26 - Split System Air Conditioning Units
DIVISION 26 - ELECTRICAL
Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Requirements
Section 26 05 03 - Through Penetration Firestopping
Section 26 05 05 - Electrical Demolition For Remodeling
Section 26 05 13 - Wire and Cable
Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding
Section 26 05 27 - Supporting Devices
129
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENTANT IMPROVEMENT
06/12/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
00 01 10 - 5 Table of Contents
Section 26 05 33 - Conduit And Boxes
Section 26 05 53 - Electrical Identification
Section 26 05 73 - Power System Study
Section 26 09 16 - Electrical Controls And Relays
Section 26 09 33 - Lighting Control Systems
Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards
Section 26 27 16 - Cabinets And Enclosures
Section 26 27 26 - Wiring Devices
Section 26 28 13 - Fuses
Section 26 28 16 - Disconnect Switches
Section 26 32 13 - Packaged Engine Generator Systems
Section 26 36 00 - Transfer Switch
Section 26 51 19 - Led Lighting
DIVISION 27 - COMMUNICATIONS
Section 27 05 00 - Basic Communications Systems Requirements
Section 27 05 03 - Through Penetration Firestopping
Section 27 05 26 - Communications Bonding
Section 27 05 28 - Interior Communication Pathways
Section 27 05 53 - Identification and Administration
Section 27 11 00 - Communication Equipment Rooms (Cer)
Section 27 13 00 - Backbone Cabling Requirements
Section 27 15 00 - Horizontal Cabling Requirements
Section 27 17 10 - Testing
Section 27 41 00 - Professional Audio/Video System
DIVISION 28 - ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY
Section 28 05 00 - Basic Electronic Safety and Security System Requirements
Section 28 05 03 - Through Penetration Firestopping
Section 28 13 00 - Electronic Access Control
Section 28 23 00 - Video Surveillance
Section 28 26 05 - Rescue Assistance Communication
Section 28 31 00 - Fire Alarm And Detection Systems
DIVISION 31 – EARTHWORK
Section 31 10 00 Site Clearing
31 11 00 Clearing and Grubbing
31 22 00 Grading
31 23 13 Excavation and Fill
31 23 16 Excavation and Fill Paving
31 23 19 Excavation Fill Structures
31 23 23 Excavation and Fill for Utilities
31 23 26 Base Course
31 31 19 Vegetation Control
130
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENTANT IMPROVEMENT
06/12/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
00 01 10 - 6 Table of Contents
DIVISION 32 – EXTERIOR IMPROVEMENTS
Section 32 01 13 Rolled Slurry Seal Existing Pavement
32_0117 Asphalt Pavement Repair
32 01 90 Operation and Maintenance
32 12 16 Asphalt Paving
32 12 36 Seal Bituminous Surfacing
32 13 13 Site Concrete Work
32 17 00 Parking Bumpers
32 17 20 Tactile Warning Surfaces
32 84 00 Landscape Irrigation
32 93 00 Landscape Planting
32 93 01 Tree Pruning
DIVISION 33 –UTILITIES
Not used
END OF SECTION
131
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 06/08/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 11 00 - 1 Summary of Work
SECTION 01 11 00
SUMMARY OF WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Project consists of the remodel of the existing 2-story commercial office building at
323 Science Drive, Moorpark, into the new city hall for the City of Moorpark. The
program includes office space for city staff, staff support spaces, a public counter and
lobby, a city council chamber and other associated spaces.
a. The project includes site work as indicated for base scope and site work as
additive alternates, as specified in alternates section.
b. The project includes new roofing, new HVAC systems, an emergency
generator, and other building infrastructure improvements as indicated.
2. Owner reserves right to remove and retain possession of existing items prior to
start of Contract.
3. Removal of hazardous material shall be per provided hazardous material
abatement report prepared by others. Removal and disposal of hazardous
materials is the responsibility of the abatement contractor.
1.2 REQUIREMENTS INCLUDED
A. This section includes administrative provisions:
1. Work sequence.
2. Contractors use of premises.
3. Building occupancy.
4. Field engineering.
5. Lines and levels.
6. Regulatory requirements and reference standards.
7. Owner furnished Contractor installed products (OFCI).
8. Owner pre-ordered products.
1.3 WORK SEQUENCE
A. Coordinate construction schedule and operations with Owner and Architect.
1. Construct Work to accommodate Owner's occupancy requirements during
construction period.
B. Perform construction in phases as indicated.
132
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 06/08/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 11 00 - 2 Summary of Work
1.4 CONTRACTORS USE OF PREMISES
A. Limit use of premises for Work and construction operations and to allow for:
1. Building occupancy.
2. Work by other contractors.
3. Authorized access to restricted areas.
4. Public access to public areas.
B. Coordinate use of premises and access to site under direction of Owner or Architect.
1.5 BUILDING OCCUPANCY
A. Building is un-occupied during construction.
1.6 FIELD ENGINEERING
A. Provide field engineering services; establish lines and levels by use of recognized
engineering survey practices.
B. Locate and protect control and reference points.
1.7 LINES AND LEVELS
A. Establish lines and levels by use of recognized engineering practices.
B. Locate and protect control and reference points.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS AND REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Architect has contacted governing authorities and reviewed design requirements
of local, state and federal agencies for applicability to Project.
2. Contractor shall be responsible for contacting governing authorities directly for
necessary information and decisions bearing upon performance of Work.
B. Reference Standards:
1. For Products specified by association or trade standards, comply with
requirements of referenced standard, except when more rigid requirements are
specified or are required by applicable codes.
2. Applicable date of each standard is that in effect as of date on proposal or date on
Contract where no proposal is available, except when a specific date is specified.
1.9 OWNER FURNISHED CONTRACTOR INSTALLED PRODUCTS (OFCI)
A. Select products are to be furnished and paid for by Owner and installed by Contractor:
1. Refer to Drawings and Specifications.
133
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 06/08/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 11 00 - 3 Summary of Work
B. Owner's Responsibilities:
1. Arrange for and deliver shop drawings, product data, and samples to Contractor.
2. Arrange and pay for product delivery to site.
3. Inspect products jointly with Contractor on delivery.
4. Submit claims for transportation damage.
5. Arrange for replacement of damaged, defective, or missing items.
6. Arrange for manufacturer's warranties, inspections, and service.
C. Contractor's Responsibilities:
1. Review shop drawings, product data, and samples.
2. Receive and unload products at site.
3. Inspect jointly with Owner for completeness and damage.
4. Handle, store, and install products.
5. Finish products as required after installation.
6. Repair or replace items damaged by Work of this Contract.
1.10 OWNER PRE-ORDERED PRODUCTS
A. Select products have been pre-ordered by Owner:
1. Refer to Drawings.
B. Owner has negotiated purchase orders for these products for incorporation into Project.
1. Purchase orders are assigned to Contractor; costs shall be included into base bid.
2. Contractor's responsibilities are same as if Contractor negotiated purchase orders.
END OF SECTION
134
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 06/08/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 23 00 - 1 Alternates
SECTION 01 23 00
ALTERNATES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section includes a description of alternate work.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Pricing Documents: Quotation of cost of each alternate.
2. Owner-Contractor Agreement: Alternates accepted by Owner for incorporation
into the Work.
3. Sections of Specifications identified in each Alternate.
1.2 PROCEDURES
A. Alternates will be exercised at Owner's option.
B. Coordinate Related Work: and modify surrounding work as required to complete
Work, including changes under each alternate, when acceptance is designated in
Owner-Contractor Agreement.
1.3 ALTERNATES
A. Alternate No. 1: Slurry Seal entire parking lot and stripe all parking stalls.
1. Additive cost: This scope is in addition to the parking lot repairs indicated on civil
drawings which define limited areas for sealing and striping as part of the base
contract.
B. Alternate No. 2: Landscape and Irrigation as indicated in L series Drawings.
1. Additive cost for landscaping and irrigation.
a. (Hardscape and features such as the flagpoles and site furnishings are part
of the base scope)
END OF SECTION
135
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 25 00 - 1 Substitution Procedures
SECTION 01 25 00
SUBSTITUTION PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. General: Procedures are described for requesting substitution of unlisted materials in
lieu of materials named in Specifications or approved for use in addenda.
1. Provide products listed in Contract Documents, products by manufacturers listed
in Contract Documents, and products meeting specified requirements.
a. Contract Amount: Base on materials and products included in Contract
Documents.
b. Where materials and products are listed in Contract Documents, materials
and products by manufacturers not listed shall not be used without Owner’s
and Architect’s approval of Contractor's written request for substitution.
2. Purpose: After bidding, substitutions will only be considered where Owner will
receive financial benefit or because specified materials are no longer available
due to no fault of Contractor.
3. Purpose: Substitutions will only be considered where Owner will receive benefit or
because specified materials are no longer available due to conditions beyond
Contractor control.
a. Owner benefits either from a Contractor proposed reduction of the Contract
amount or from a reduction in Contract time based on acceptance of
proposed substitution.
b. List proposed cost or time reductions on request for substitution.
c. Requests not including a proposed cost or time reduction will not be
considered unless Contractor submits supporting information indicating
specified materials are not available.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 60 00: Product requirements.
1.2 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Within a period of 35 days after award of Contract, Owner and Architect will consider
formal requests for substitutions only from Contractor as specified in 1.1 Summary.
1. Owner and Architect will consider only one request for substitution for each
material; where requests are denied Contractor shall be required to provide
specified materials.
136
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 25 00 - 2 Substitution Procedures
2. After initial 35-day period, requests will be considered only when a product
becomes unavailable through no fault of Contractor; more than one request for
substitution will be considered if necessary.
B. Prior to submittal of second Request for Payment Owner and Architect will consider
formal requests for substitutions from Contractor as specified in 1.1 Summary.
1. Owner and Architect will consider only one request for substitution for each
material; where requests are denied Contractor shall be required to provide
specified materials.
2. After payments begin, requests will be considered only when a product becomes
unavailable through no fault of Contractor; more than one request for substitution
will be considered if necessary.
C. Submit each request with sequentially numbered “Substitution Request Transmittal”
acceptable to Owner and Architect; submit separate request for each product and
support each request with:
1. Product identification with manufacturer's literature and samples where applicable.
2. Name and address of similar projects on which product has been used, and date
of installation.
D. Submit itemized comparison of proposed substitution with product specified and list
significant variations.
E. Submit data relating to changes in construction schedule.
F. Note effect of substitution on other work, products, or separate contracts.
1. Note if acceptance of substitution could require revision of Contract Documents,
Drawings, details or Specifications.
G. Include accurate cost data comparing proposed substitution with product and amount
of net change in Contract price.
1. Include costs to other contractors and costs for revisions to Drawings, details or
Specifications.
H. Substitutions will not be considered for acceptance when:
1. They are indicated or implied on submittals without a formal request from Contractor.
2. They are requested directly by a subcontractor or supplier.
3. Acceptance will require substantial revision of Contract Documents.
I. Substitute products shall not be ordered without written acceptance of Owner and
Architect.
137
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 25 00 - 3 Substitution Procedures
J. Owner and Architect will determine acceptability of proposed substitutions and
reserves right to reject proposals due to insufficient information.
1.3 CONTRACTOR'S REPRESENTATION
A. Requests constitute a representation that Contractor:
1. Has investigated proposed product and determined it meets or exceeds, in all
respects, specified product.
2. Will provide same warranty or longer warranty for substitution as for specified
product.
3. Will coordinate installation and make other changes that may be required for
Work to be complete in all respects.
4. Waives claims for additional costs that subsequently become apparent.
5. Will pay costs of changes to Contract Documents, Drawings, details and
Specifications required by accepted substitutions.
1.4 ARCHITECT'S DUTIES
A. Review Contractor's requests for substitutions with reasonable promptness.
1. Architect will recommend that Owner accept or reject substitution request.
2. Upon request, Architect will provide cost for changes to Contract Documents,
Drawings, details and Specifications required for substitutions.
B. Notify Contractor in writing of decision to accept or reject requested substitution.
138
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 25 00 - 4 Substitution Procedures
CONTRACTOR'S SUBSTITUTION REQUEST
(Use separate form for each request)
Date: Request No.:
TO: Architect Date:__________
PROJECT: Project No.:
CONTRACTOR
SPECIFIED ITEM:
Section: Page: Paragraph: Description:
Drawing Number(s): Detail Number(s):
The undersigned request consideration of the following:
PROPOSED SUBSTITUTION:
REASON FOR NOT GIVING PRIORITY TO SPECIFIED ITEMS:
SAVINGS or CREDIT to OWNER for ACCEPTING SUBSTITUTE: $
PROJECT COMPLETION CHANGE for ACCEPTING SUBSTITUTE Days
Attached data includes description, specifications, drawings, photographs, performance and test data adequate for evaluation of the
request; applicable portions of the data are clearly identified.
Attached data also includes a description of changes to the Contract Documents that the proposed substitution will require for its proper
installation.
The undersigned certifies that the following paragraphs, unless modified by attachments, are correct:
1. Proposed substitution has been fully checked and coordinated with the Contract Documents.
2. The proposed substitution does not affect dimensions shown on Drawings.
3. The proposed substitution does not require revisions to mechanical or electrical work.
4. The undersigned will pay for changes to the building design, including architectural and engineering design, detailing, and
construction costs caused by the requested substitution.
5. The proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on other trades, construction schedule, or warranty.
6. Maintenance and service parts will be locally available for the proposed substitution.
7. The proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on LEED credits (applies to LEED Projects ONLY)
8. The proposed substitution will have no adverse effect on Green Building Requirements where applicable.
The undersigned further states that the function, appearance, and quality of the proposed substitution are equivalent or superior to the
specified item.
Attachments: The attached data is furnished herewith for evaluation of the proposed substitution.
Catalog Drawings Samples Reports Tests Other:
Submitted by:
(Name of Authorized Representative) (Authorized Legal Signature)
( )
(Firm) (Telephone)
For use by the
Architect: Accepted Accepted as Noted Rejected: Submit Specified Item
BY:
(Authorized Signature)
Date: Remarks:
END OF SECTION
139
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 06/09/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 30 00 - 1 Administrative Requirements
SECTION 01 30 00
ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section describes general procedural requirements for ongoing submittals.
1. Schedule of values. Per front end documents.
2. Product data and manufacturer’s literature.
3. Shop drawings.
4. Samples.
5. Manufacturers' certificates.
6. Excess materials and attic stock.
7. Design build (delegated design) procedures.
8. Deferred approval requirements.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 31 00: Project management and coordination.
2. Section 01 32 00: Construction Schedule – Network Analysis.
3. Section 01 40 00: Quality Requirements
4. Section 01 70 00: Execution Requirements
5. Section 01 77 00: Closeout requirements including Project Record Documents.
6. Section 01 78 00: Warranties.
1.2 GENERAL SUBMITTAL PROCEDURES
A. Where conflicts exist between this section and front end documents, section 3-8,
section 3-8 shall take precedence.
B. Submittals: Transmit each item using form approved by Owner; submit sample to
Owner for approval prior to use.
1. Identify Project, Contractor, subcontractor, major supplier.
a. Attach sequential identification number for each new submittal.
b. Identify each resubmittal using original submittal number and sequential
identification clearly indicating item is resubmitted.
2. Identify pertinent Drawing sheet and detail number, and Specification section
number as appropriate.
3. Identify deviations from Contract Documents.
4. Provide space for Contractor and Architect review stamps.
140
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 06/09/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 30 00 - 2 Administrative Requirements
5. Contractor: Review and stamp submittals from subcontractors prior to submitting
to Owner.
a. Review submittals and indicate where conflicts occur with Contract
Documents and with work of other subcontractors.
b. Return submittals, to sub contractors, that vary from Contract Documents for
correction and resubmittal prior to submitting to Owner.
c. Submittals that vary from Contract Documents and that fail to indicate
thorough Contractor review prior to submission to Owner will be returned
without review.
d. Cursory review and stamping of subcontractor submittal by Contractor shall
not be acceptable.
C. Initial Schedules: Submit initial progress schedule and schedule of value in duplicate
within 15 working days after award of Contract.
1. After review by Owner and Architect revise and resubmit where required.
D. Comply with progress schedule for submittals related to Work progress. Coordinate
submittal of related items.
E. After Architect review of submittal, revise and resubmit as required, identify changes
made since previous submittal.
F. Distribute copies of reviewed submittals to concerned persons. Instruct recipients to
promptly report any inability to comply.
1.3 TYPES OF SUBMITTALS
A. General: Project requires various types of submittals to maintain communications,
minimize misunderstandings, avoid unnecessary conflicts, and to ensure complete
documentation for Project Record Documents.
1. Maintain complete set of submittals including required revisions.
B. Construction Schedules: Submit construction progress schedules for Design Team
and Owner review and to maintain entire team up-to-date on construction activities.
C. Schedule of Values: Submit Schedule of Values indicating division of Work,
subcontractors to perform work, products being used, and values attributed to each to
inform Design Team and Owner.
D. Action Submittals: Submittals relating to product data and manufacturer’s literature,
shop drawings, and samples for Design Team review and comment; do not begin
fabrication, delivery, or installation until Design Team review is complete.
141
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 06/09/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 30 00 - 3 Administrative Requirements
E. Information Submittals: Submittals relating to certifications, qualifications, reports,
including test reports, and instructions are for information; Design Team may choose
to comment but action is not generally anticipated.
1. Manufacturer installation instructions and recommendations shall be considered
information submittals.
F. Design/Build Submittals: Where portion of Work requires design by specialized
professionals submit information necessary to ensure work complies with Contract
Documents along with certifications signed by qualified professional.
1. Calculations: Do not submit calculations unless specifically required by Contract
Documents or required by applicable authorities directly to applicable authorities:
a. Submit certification by qualified professional indicating required calculations
have been prepared and work conforms to Contract Documents and
applicable codes and regulations.
G. Maintenance Materials Submittals: Compile maintenance information and materials
during Work to ensure complete set of documents, maintenance manuals, and
operation instructions.
H. Closeout Submittals: Compile closeout submittals, organize, and submit to Owner
prior to or at time of Substantial Completion. Project will not be considered
Substantially Complete until closeout submittals have been received by Owner.
I. Material Safety Data Sheets (MSDS):
1. Submittals, or portions thereof, that include material safety data sheets will be
returned for without review.
1.4 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
1. Format per front end documents.
1.5 PRODUCT DATA/MANUFACTURERS' LITERATURE
A. Action Submittals: Mark each copy to identify applicable Products, models, options,
and other data; supplement manufacturers' standard data to provide information
unique to the Work.
B. Information Submittals: Include manufacturers' installation instructions only when
required by Specifications or specifically requested by Owner.
1. Maintain copy of manufacturer installation instructions and recommendations in
Contractor's field office for review.
C. Product data shall be submitted as electronic PDF files unless otherwise noted or
approved by Owner in advance.
142
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 06/09/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 30 00 - 4 Administrative Requirements
1. Where paper copies are permitted submit number of copies Contractor requires,
plus one copy to be retained by Owner.
D. Submit number of copies Contractor requires, plus one copy to be retained by Owner.
1.6 SHOP DRAWINGS
A. Shop drawings shall be submitted as electronic PDF files unless otherwise noted or
approved by Owner in advance.
1. Where prints are permitted submit one reproducible print; minimum sheet size
8-1/2” by 11”.
B. Shop drawings shall be submitted in pdf format for owner and architect review.
1. Prints: Submit printed to paper shop drawings where required for deferred
approval submittals to AHJs.
1.7 SAMPLES
A. Submit full range of manufacturers' standard colors, textures, and patterns for
Owner's selection where substitutions are proposed.
B. Where submitting a specified product, submit 1 sample.
C. Coordinate submittal of different categories for interfacing work.
D. Include identification on each sample, giving full information.
E. Submit number of samples required by Contractor plus one to be retained by Owner.
1. Maintain one set of approved samples at Project Field Office.
F. Sizes: Provide following sizes unless otherwise specified.
1. Flat or Sheet Products: Minimum 6" square, maximum 12" by 12".
2. Linear Products: Minimum 6", maximum 12" long.
1.8 MANUFACTURERS' CERTIFICATES
A. Submit certificates, in duplicate in accordance with requirements of each
Specification section.
1.9 EXCESS MATERIALS AND ATTIC STOCK
A. Excess Materials: Excess materials shall be considered property of Owner; inform
Owner of extent of excess materials and methods required for handling and storage;
remove from site excess materials not required by Owner for maintenance stock.
B. Attic Stock: Owner may choose to obtain additional attic stock for maintenance
purposes where excess materials are not considered adequate.
143
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 06/09/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 30 00 - 5 Administrative Requirements
1. Owner may requires extra materials for maintenance purposes. Exact amount of
each material scheduled below:
a. Carpet Tile: 400 s.f.
b. Ceramic Tile: 2 boxes floor tile, 1 box wall tile.
c. Ceiling Tile: 100 s.f. of standard. (10) 2x2 panels of geometrix tile.
d. Paint: Provide color codes for each color.
2. Meeting: Conduct meeting prior to beginning Work to discuss process for transfer
of material to owner.
a. Assist Owner in determining where on-site or off-site additional attic stock for
maintenance purposes will be delivered and stored.
3. Final Completion: Ensure attic stock has been received, identified, cataloged,
and stored at locations agreed upon with Owner.
1.10 DESIGN/BUILD PROCEDURES
A. Design as Part of Means and Methods of Construction: Select Project components
require construction team design as part of means and methods of construction as
described in various sections.
1. Terms commonly used such as Design/Build, Delegated Design, and
Design/Assist are applicable to these procedures as determined by law but shall
be generally referred to in these documents as Design/Build.
a. In general Design/Build includes design by licensed professionals with
expertise beyond that allowed under standard architectural licensure, and
outside of scope of work of other design professionals on the design team.
2. Contractor may be required to provide design services as part of construction for
specific work defined as design or design-build where special expertise is
required that is not available in the Project design team.
3. Subcontractors, fabricators, and manufacturers may be required to provide
design services as part of their work due to special expertise in design services
for their specific components, refer to technical sections for Design/Build.
144
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 06/09/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 30 00 - 6 Administrative Requirements
4. Contractor, subcontractors, fabricators, manufacturers, and suppliers shall be
responsible for attachments, anchors, fasteners, adhesives, and connectors
suitable to applications unless specific items are listed in Contract Documents.
a. Where specific items are listed in Contract Documents Contractor,
subcontractors, fabricators, manufacturers, and suppliers shall review and
submit comments where items listed are not acceptable.
b. Where no comments are received, listed items shall be considered
acceptable.
B. Contractor acknowledges and accepts responsibility for specialty design as part of
means and methods of construction, as well as coordination of parties involved to
achieve architectural design intent indicated in Contract Documents.
1. Design-build work includes sizing, sequencing, and detailing for construction by
professional licensed or registered engineer or design professional with special
expertise applicable to portion of Work involved.
2. Design-build work shall be constructed in compliance with building codes and
regulations in effect and shall be fit and proper for intended use.
3. Design-build work shall include drawings, specifications, and calculations
prepared, stamped, and signed by qualified professional licensed or registered
engineer licensed in the Project location as appropriate to design-build work.
a. Plans, specifications, and calculations shall be acceptable to Owner,
Owner’s Representative, and applicable authorities.
4. Contractor shall make all revisions and corrections necessary to obtain all
approvals from all agencies and authorities having jurisdiction at no additional
cost to the owner.
C. Where required by Owner Contractor shall submit copies of current insurance policies
covering errors and omissions of persons designing design-build work with
deductibles and limits per occurrence as mutually agreed by Owner and Contractor.
1. Provide endorsement to insurance providing for 30-day notice to Owner prior to
cancellation or material reduction in coverage.
2. Insurance shall be maintained for not less than applicable statute of limitations
for claims of latent defects, if such insurance is not written on an occurrence
basis during time design-build work is designed and constructed.
145
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 06/09/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 30 00 - 7 Administrative Requirements
D. Review proposed layouts with Design Team and with various trades prior to
commencing work related to design-build work.
1.11 DEFERRED APPROVAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Installation of deferred approval items shall not be started until detailed plans,
specifications, and engineering calculations have been accepted and signed by
Architect or Engineer of Record responsible for Project design.
B. Deferred Approval Items shall be signed by California registered architect or
professional engineer delegated responsibility covering specific work shown requiring
approval from the authority having jurisdiction.
1. Deferred approval items for this Project include but may not be limited to
following:
a. Fire Protection system (alteration and expansion)
b. Dry Agent/Chemical fire suppression system for computer room
c. Fire Alarm (under separate contract)
d. Exterior Signage, building mounted.
e. Emergency Generator (Ventura County Air Quality Permit)
2. Deferred approval drawings and specifications become part of the approved
submittal documents for the Project when they are submitted to and approved by
the authority having jurisdiction.
3. Submit copies of calculations, product data and test reports in quantity required
by authority having jurisdiction.
4. Identify and specify supports, fasteners, spacing, penetrations, etc., for each
deferred approval items, including calculations for each fastener.
5. Submit documents to Owner for review prior to submittal to authority having
jurisdiction.
6. Deferred submittal documents shall bear stamp and signature of architect or
engineer licensed in State of California and responsible for work shown on
deferred submittal documents.
7. Contractor shall make all corrections as required by reviewing agencies and
resubmit as required to obtain approval at no additional cost to the owner.
END OF SECTION
146
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 31 00 - 1 Project Management and Coordination
SECTION 01 31 00
PROJECT MANAGEMENT AND COORDINATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Description of Project management and coordination including but
not necessarily limited to the following:
1. General Project coordination procedures.
2. Coordination drawings.
3. Staff names.
4. Administrative and supervisory personnel.
5. Project meetings.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 30 00: Administrative requirements.
2. Section 01 79 00: Demonstration and training.
1.2 COORDINATION
A. Coordination: Coordinate construction operations included in various Specifications
sections to ensure efficient and orderly installation of each part of Work.
1. Coordinate construction operations that depend on each other for proper
installation, connection, and operation.
2. Coordinate work to assure efficient and orderly sequence of installation of
construction elements.
3. Make provisions for accommodating items installed by Owner or under separate
contracts.
B. Prepare memoranda for distribution to each party involved as needed, outlining
special procedures required for coordination.
1. Include required notices, reports, and list of attendees at meetings; include
Architect and Owner in distribution.
C. Verify characteristics of interrelated operating equipment are compatible; coordinate
work having interdependent responsibilities for installing, connection to, and placing
such equipment in service.
147
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 31 00 - 2 Project Management and Coordination
D. Coordinate space requirements and installation of mechanical and electrical work
indicated diagrammatically on Drawings.
1. Follow routing shown for pipes, ducts, and conduits as closely as possible; make
runs parallel with lines of building.
2. Utilize spaces efficiently to maximize accessibility for other installations, for
maintenance, and for repairs.
E. Conceal pipes, ducts, and wiring in finished areas unless otherwise indicated;
coordinate locations of fixtures and outlets with finish elements.
F. Administrative Procedures: Coordinate scheduling and timing of administrative
procedures with other construction activities and activities of other contractors to
avoid conflicts and ensure orderly progress of Work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Coordination Drawings: Prepare Coordination Drawings for areas where space
availability is limited and necessitates maximum utilization of space for components
and where separate entities, products, and materials require coordination.
1. Require each subcontractor with items located in ceiling space to furnish
coordination drawings of their items to assist in preparation of Contractor’s
Coordination Drawings.
2. Indicate relationship of components shown on separate Shop Drawings.
3. Indicate required installation sequences.
4. Ceiling Spaces: Take special care to coordinate structure, ceiling systems,
equipment located in ceiling spaces, fire protection systems, mechanical
systems, and electrical systems.
B. Staff Names: Immediately after receipt of notice to proceed or immediately after signing
of Contract by Owner and Contractor, submit list of principal staff assignments, including
superintendent and other personnel in attendance at Project site.
1. Post copies of list in Project meeting room, in temporary field office, and by each
temporary telephone.
1.4 SUPERVISORY AND ADMINISTRATIVE PERSONNEL
A. Provide supervisory personnel, in addition to Project Superintendent, as required for
proper and timely performance of Work and coordination of subcontracts.
B. Provide administrative staff as required to allow Project Superintendent and supervisory
personnel to allocate maximum time to Project supervision and coordination.
1.5 PROJECT MEETINGS
A. Schedule and administer Project meetings throughout progress of Work:
148
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 31 00 - 3 Project Management and Coordination
1. Pre-construction meeting.
2. Progress meetings at weekly intervals.
3. Pre-installation conferences.
4. Coordination meetings.
5. Special meetings.
B. Make physical arrangements for meetings, prepare agenda with copies for
participants, preside at meetings, record minutes and distribute copies within two
days to Architect, Owner, participants, and those affected.
C. Attendance: Job superintendent, major subcontractors and suppliers as appropriate
to agenda; Architect, Owner, and Owner and Architect’s consultants as appropriate to
agenda topics for each meeting.
D. Suggested Agenda: Review of Work progress, status of progress schedule and
adjustments, delivery schedules, submittals, requests for information, maintenance of
quality standards, pending changes and substitutions, and issues needing resolution.
END OF SECTION
149
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 31 10- 1 Information and Procedures Instructions (RFI)
SECTION 01 31 10
INFORMATION AND PROCEDURES INSTRUCTIONS (RFI)
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section contains procedures to be followed by Contractor upon discovery of any
apparent conflicts, omissions, or errors in Contract Documents or upon having any
question concerning interpretation.
B. Alternate: At the Owners option, Utilize the standard forms, procedures, contracts
and / or agreements, preferred by the owner, in lieu of the methods described herein.
1.2 PROCEDURES
A. Requests for clarification shall be submitted to the owner per front end
documents. Section 3-7.4.
B. RFIs shall be numbered sequentially. RFI number shall be followed by a
sequential numerical suffix as necessary for each resubmission. For example,
first RFI would be 001. Second RFI would be 002 and first resubmittal of RFI 002
would be 002.1.
C. Each RFI shall be limited to ONE subject.
D. An RFI shall be submitted if one of following conditions occur:
1. Contractor discovers an unforeseen condition or circumstance that is not
described in Contract Documents.
2. Contractor discovers an apparent conflict or discrepancy between
portions of Contract Documents that appears to be inconsistent or is not
reasonably inferred from intent of Contract Documents.
3. Contractor discovers what appears to be an omission from Contract
Documents that cannot be reasonably inferred from intent of Contract
Documents.
E. Contractor shall not:
1. Submit an RFI as a request for substitution.
2. Submit an RFI as a submittal.
3. Submit an RFI under pretense of a Contract Documents discrepancy or
omission without thorough review of documents.
150
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 31 10- 2 Information and Procedures Instructions (RFI)
4. Submit an RFI in a manner that suggests specific portions of Contract
Documents are assumed to be excluded or by taking an isolated portion
of Contract Documents in part rather than whole.
5. Submit an RFI in an untimely manner without proper coordination and
scheduling of Work of related trades.
6. If Contractor submits an RFI contrary to any of above, Contractor shall
pay cost of any review, which cost shall be deducted from Contract sum.
F. Submit a request for information or clarification immediately upon discovery. Submit
RFI’s within a time frame so as not to delay Contract schedule while allowing full
response time described below.
1.3 RESPONSE TIME:
A. Per front end documents. Section 3-7.4.
B. Should Contractor proceed with Work affected before receipt of a response from
Architect, within response time described above, any portion of Work which is not
done in accordance with Architect’s interpretations, clarifications, instructions, or
decisions is subject to removal or replacement and Contractor shall be responsible
for all resultant losses.
C. In event of failure to agree as to scope of Contract requirements, Contractor shall
follow procedures set forth in General Conditions.
END OF SECTION
151
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 35 15 - 1 CALGreen Environmental Requirements
SECTION 01 35 15
CALGREEN ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Comply with CALGreen environmental requirements related to
energy efficiency, water efficiency and conservation, material conservation and
resource efficiency, and environmental quality.
1. Comply with specific CALGreen requirements as adopted by authorities having
jurisdiction and applicable to Project.
2. Comply with waste management program as enforced by the City of Moorpark,
see front end documents.
1.2 ENVIRONMENTAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Mandatory Measures: Comply with CALGreen Mandatory Measures applicable to
Project.
B. Requirements: Construction team is required to review CALGreen requirements
relative to Project related to following.
1. Energy Efficiency: Comply with California Energy Commission requirements.
2. Water Efficiency and Conservation: Comply with requirements for both indoor
and outdoor water use.
3. Material Conservation and Resource Efficiency:
a. Nonresidential Projects: Provide weather-resistant exterior wall and
foundation envelope including prevention of landscape irrigation spray on
structures (if any) and prevent water intrusion at exterior entries.
b. Provide construction waste management plan as defined by CALGreen with
demolition and construction waste diverted from landfill by recycling or
salvage for reuse.
c. Nonresidential Projects Building Maintenance and Operation: Provide for
commissioning requirements as required by CALGreen including but not
limited to testing, documentation and training, testing and adjusting.
4. Nonresidential Projects Environmental Quality: Comply with following as adopted
by authorities having jurisdiction and as applicable to Project.
a. Mechanical Equipment Pollution Control: Cover duct and related air
distribution component openings to prevent dust and debris accumulation.
152
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 35 15 - 2 CALGreen Environmental Requirements
b. Finish Material Pollution Control: Comply with CALGreen requirements for
volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions including but not necessarily
limited to following (as applicable):
1) Adhesives, sealants and caulks.
2) Paints and coatings.
3) Carpet systems including carpet, carpet cushion, and adhesives.
4) Resilient flooring systems.
5) Composite wood products formaldehyde limitations.
c. Filters: Comply with requirements for mechanically ventilated buildings to
have air filtration media for outside and return air prior to occupancy.
d. Environmental Tobacco Smoke (ETS) Control: Comply with CALGreen
requirements for ETS.
e. Interior Moisture Control: Comply with California Building Code requirements
and CALGreen requirements for vapor retarder at concrete slab foundations
and capillary break (aggregate base).
f. Building Material Moisture Content: Do not use water damaged building
materials, remove and place wet and high moisture content insulation, and
do not enclose wall or floor framing when moisture content exceeds 19%.
g. Indoor Air Quality: Comply with CALGreen requirements for outside air
delivery and carbon dioxide monitoring.
h. Environmental Comfort: Comply with CALGreen requirements for whole
acoustical control and interior sound control.
i. Outdoor Air Quality: Comply with CALGreen requirements for reduction of
greenhouse gases and ozone depletion.
C. Planning and Design: Construction team shall coordinate with Design Team
regarding Project Planning and Design methods related to CALGreen requirements
related to Project design and shall comply with requirements related to construction.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Project Management and Coordination: Contractor to identify one person on
Contractor’s staff to be responsible for CALGreen issues compliance and
coordination.
1. Experience: Environmental project manager to have experience relating to
CALGreen building construction.
2. Responsibilities: Carefully review Contract Documents for CALGreen issues,
coordinate work of trades, subcontractors, and suppliers; instruct workers relating
to environmental issues; and oversee Project Environmental Goals.
153
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 35 15 - 3 CALGreen Environmental Requirements
a. Submittals: Collect, compile, verify, and maintain sufficient information for
submittals indicating compliance with applicable CALGreen requirements.
3. Meetings: Discuss CALGreen Goals at following meetings.
a. Pre-construction meeting.
b. Pre-installation meetings.
c. Regularly scheduled job-site meetings.
B. CALGreen Issues Criteria: Comply with requirements listed in CALGreen and various
Specification sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. General Issues: Do not use materials with moisture stains or with signs of mold or
mildew.
1. Moisture Stains: Materials that have evidence of moisture damage, including
stains, are not acceptable, including both stored and installed materials;
immediately remove from site.
2. Mold and Mildew: Materials that have evidence of growth of molds or of mildew
are not acceptable, including both stored and installed materials; immediately
remove from site.
2.2 SUBSTITUTIONS
A. Substitutions Environmental Issues: Requests for substitutions shall comply with
requirements specified in Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures, with following
additional information required where environmental issues are involved.
1. Indicate each proposed substitution complies with CALGreen requirements.
2. Owner and Architect reserve right to reject proposed substitutions where
CALGreen information is not provided and where substitution may impact
mandatory requirements or Project voluntary tier requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PROTECTION
A. Environmental Issues: Protect interior materials from water damage; where interior
products not intended for wet applications are exposed to moisture, immediately
remove from site.
1. Protect installed products using methods that do not support growth of molds and
mildews. Immediately remove from site materials with mold and materials with
mildew.
154
McLARAND, VASQUEZ, EMSIEK & PARTNERS, INC. OFFICE SPEC MASTERS 2011
01 35 15 - 4 CALGreen Environmental Requirements
END OF SECTION
155
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 40 00 - 1 Quality Requirements
SECTION 01 40 00
QUALITY REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section describes general quality control requirements.
1. General quality control.
2. Manufacturers' field services.
3. Independent testing laboratory services and inspections.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Refer to applicable codes and Specifications sections for test requirements.
1.2 QUALITY CONTROL, GENERAL
A. Maintain quality control over suppliers, manufacturers, products, services, site
conditions, and workmanship, to produce work of specified quality.
1.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. When specified in respective Specification sections, require manufacturer or supplier
to have qualified personnel provide on-site observations and recommendations.
1. Observe field conditions, including conditions of surfaces and installation.
2. Observe quality of workmanship.
3. Provide recommendations to assure acceptable installation and workmanship.
4. Where required, start, test, and adjust equipment as applicable.
B. Representative shall submit written report to Architect or Owner listing observations
and recommendations.
1.4 TESTING LABORATORY SERVICES AND INSPECTIONS
A. Refer to owner’s front end documents.
END OF SECTION
156
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 50 00 - 1 Temporary Facilities and Controls
SECTION 01 50 00
TEMPORARY FACILITIES AND CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section describes temporary construction facilities and temporary controls.
1. Electricity and lighting.
2. Heat and ventilation.
3. Water and sanitary facilities.
4. Construction aids.
5. Temporary enclosures.
6. Barriers.
7. Cleaning during construction.
8. Project identification.
9. Field offices.
10. Cellular telephone service.
11. Storage.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 70 00: Progress cleaning and final cleaning.
2. Section 01 74 10: Waste management.
C. Provide temporary construction facilities and temporary controls as required to
conform to applicable authorities and as required to complete Project in accordance
with Contract Documents.
1. Authorities: Contact governing authorities to establish extent of temporary
facilities and temporary controls required by authorities.
1.2 ELECTRICITY AND LIGHTING
A. Provide electrical service required for construction operations, with branch wiring and
distribution boxes located to allow service and lighting by means of construction-type
power cords.
1. Connection to existing electrical service is permitted.
B. Provide lighting for construction operations.
1. Permanent lighting may be used during construction; maintain lighting and make
routine repairs.
C. Owner will pay costs of energy used from existing on-site services.
157
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 50 00 - 2 Temporary Facilities and Controls
1.3 HEAT AND VENTILATION
A. Provide heat and ventilation as required to maintain specified conditions for
construction operation, to protect materials and finishes from damage due to
temperature and humidity.
B. Owner will pay costs of energy used from existing on-site services.
1.4 WATER AND SANITARY FACILITIES
A. Provide water service required for construction operations; extend branch piping with
outlets located so water is available by use of hoses.
1. Connection to existing facilities is permitted.
2. Owner will pay for water used from existing on-site services.
B. Provide and maintain required sanitary facilities and enclosures.
1.5 CONSTRUCTION AIDS
A. Noise, Dust and Pollution Control: Provide materials and equipment necessary to
comply with local requirements for noise, dust and pollution control.
B. Fire Protection: Maintain on-site fire protection facilities as required by applicable
authorities and insurance requirements.
C. Security: Protect Site and Work; prevent unauthorized entry, vandalism, and theft.
D. Dewatering: Provide and operate drainage and pumping equipment; maintain
excavations and site free of standing water.
1.6 ENCLOSURES
A. Temporary Closures: Provide temporary weather-tight closures for exterior openings
for acceptable working conditions, for protection for materials, to protect interior
materials from dampness, for temporary heating, and to prevent unauthorized entry.
1. Provide doors with self-closing hardware and locks.
B. Temporary Partitions: Provide temporary partitions as required to separate work
areas from completed areas, to prevent penetration of dust and moisture into
completed areas, and to prevent damage to finished areas and installed equipment.
1. Construction: Framing and sheet materials with closed joints and sealed edges at
intersections with existing surfaces; Flame Spread Rating of 25 in accordance
with ASTM E84.
1.7 BARRIERS
A. Barriers: Provide barriers as required to prevent public entry to construction areas
and to protect adjacent properties from damage from construction operations.
158
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 50 00 - 3 Temporary Facilities and Controls
1. Fence: Provide minimum 8-foot high commercial grade chain link fence around
construction site; equip with gates with locks.
2. Temporary Signs: Subject to approval of Owner unless required by an agency.
B. Barricades: Provide barricades as required by governing authorities.
C. Tree Protection: Provide barriers around trees and plants designated to remain;
protect against vehicular traffic, stored materials, dumping, chemically injurious
materials, and puddling or continuous running water.
1.8 CLEANING DURING CONSTRUCTION
A. Control accumulation of waste materials and rubbish; recycle or dispose of off-site.
B. Clean interior areas prior to start of finish work, maintain areas free of dust and other
contaminants during finishing operations.
1.9 FIELD OFFICES
A. Field Office: Provide weather-tight field office, with lighting, electrical outlets, data
outlets, heating, and ventilating equipment, and equipped with furniture.
1. Meeting Space: In addition, provide space for Project meetings with table and
chairs to accommodate minimum six persons.
2. Telephone Service: Provide telephone service to field office.
3. Multi-Purpose Copier: Provide plain paper multi-purpose color and black-and-
white copier with enlargement and reduction capability and with built-in printer,
scanner, and facsimile capabilities.
1.10 CELLULAR TELEPHONE SERVICE
A. Cellular Telephone Service: Furnish on-site Project Managers with cellular telephone.
Ensure Owner and Architect ability to contact site during construction operations.
1. Schedules: Submit schedules of on-site Project Managers with individual cellular
telephone numbers to Owner and Architect; maintain schedules and cell phone
numbers up to date during Project on-site operations.
1.11 STORAGE
A. Storage for Tools, Materials, and Equipment: Limit on-site storage to Project area;
provide weather-tight storage, with heat and ventilation for products requiring
controlled conditions.
1. Maintain adequate space for organized storage and access.
2. Provide lighting for inspection of stored materials.
159
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 50 00 - 4 Temporary Facilities and Controls
1.12 REMOVAL
A. Remove temporary materials, equipment, services, and construction prior to
Substantial Completion Inspection.
B. Clean and repair damage caused by installation or use of temporary facilities.
C. Restore existing facilities used during construction to specified or original condition.
END OF SECTION
160
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 56 39 - 1 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
SECTION 01 56 39
TEMPORARY TREE AND PLANT PROTECTION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the protection and trimming and root pruning of trees that interfere with,
or are affected by, execution of the Work, whether temporary or new construction.
1.2 SUBMITTAL
A. The Contractor's representatives and employees shall be experienced in landscape
maintenance.
B. Certification from a qualified arborist that trees indicated to remain have been protected during
construction according to recognized standards and that trees were promptly and properly
treated and repaired when damaged.
C. Maintenance recommendation from a qualified arborist for care and protection of trees
affected by construction during and after completing the Work. American Welding Society
(AWS): D1.1, Structural Welding Code.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Arborist Qualifications: An arborist certified by the International Society of Arboriculture or
licensed in the jurisdiction where Project is located.
B. Tree Pruning Standards: Comply with ANSI A300, "Trees, Shrubs, and Other Woody Plant
Maintenance--Standard Practices," unless more stringent requirements are indicated.
C. Pre-installation Conference: Before starting tree protection and trimming, meet with
representatives of authorities having jurisdiction, Owner, Landscape Architect, consultants,
and other concerned entities. Review tree protection and trimming procedures and
responsibilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Drainage Fill: Selected crushed stone, or crushed or uncrushed gravel, washed, ASTM D
448, Size 24, with 90 to 100 percent passing a 2-1/2-inch sieve and not more than 10 percent
passing a 3/4-inch sieve.
B. Topsoil: Fertile, friable, surface soil, containing natural loam and complying with ASTM D
5268. Provide topsoil that is free of stones larger than 1 inch in any dimension and free of
other extraneous or toxic matter harmful to plant growth. Obtain topsoil only from well-drained
sites where soil occurs in depth of 4 inches or more; do not obtain from bogs or marshes.
C. Filter Fabric: Manufacturer's standard, non-woven, pervious, geotextile fabric of
polypropylene, nylon, or polyester fibers.
161
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 56 39 - 2 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
D. Chain Link Fence: Metallic-coated steel chain link fence fabric, 0.120-inch- diameter wire
size; 72 inches high, minimum; line posts, 1.9 inches in diameter; terminal and corner posts,
2-3/8 inches in diameter; top rail, 1-5/8 inches in diameter; bottom tension wire, 0.177 inch in
diameter; with tie wires, hog ring ties, and other accessories for a complete fence system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Before construction begins, fertilize affected trees to improve tree vigor and health. Soil
analysis testing should be completed to assure fertilization with the appropriate fertilizer
products.
B. Temporary Fencing: Install temporary fencing located at or outside the drip line of trees.
C. Protect tree root systems from damage due to noxious materials caused by runoff or spillage
while mixing, placing, or storing construction materials. Protect root systems from flooding,
eroding, or excessive wetting caused by dewatering operations.
D. Do not store construction materials, debris, or excavated material within the drip line of
remaining trees. Do not permit vehicles or foot traffic within the drip line; prevent soil
compaction over root systems.
E. Do not allow fires under or adjacent to remaining trees or other plants.
3.2 EXCAVATION
A. Do not excavate within drip line of trees.
B. Where excavation for new construction is required within drip line of trees, hand clear and
excavate to minimize damage to root systems. Use narrow tine spading forks and comb soil
to expose roots.
1. Cut roots approximately 3 inches back from new construction.
2. Do not allow exposed roots to dry out before placing permanent backfill. Provide
temporary earth cover or pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water and maintain
in a moist condition. Protect roots from damage until they are permanently relocated and
covered with soil.
3. Where utility trenches are required within drip line of trees, tunnel under or around roots
by drilling, auger boring, pipe jacking, or digging by hand.
4. Root Pruning: Do not cut main lateral roots or taproots; cut only smaller roots that
interfere with installation of utilities. Cut roots with sharp pruning instruments; do not
break or chop.
162
JLS MS Building Remodel and Addition DSA SUBMITTAL
Palo Alto Unified School District 5/26/2022
00 01 10 - 3 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
3.3 TREE PRUNING
A. Promptly repair trees damaged by construction operations within 24 hours. Treat damaged
trunks, limbs, and roots according to written instructions of the qualified arborist.
B. Root prune existing street trees to prevent sidewalk and curb damage.
C. Prune remaining trees to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root system.
Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by qualified arborist.
D. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 as follows:
1. Crown cleaning.
2. Crown thinning.
3. Crown reduction.
3.4 TREE REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
A. Promptly repair trees damaged by construction operations within 24 hours. Treat damaged
trunks, limbs, and roots according to written instructions of the qualified arborist.
B. Remove and replace dead and damaged trees that the qualified arborist determines to be
incapable of restoring to a normal growth pattern.
C. Provide new trees of the same size and species as those being replaced; plant and maintain
as specified in Division 2 Section "Planting.
3.5 SOIL AERATION
A. Aerate surface soil compacted during construction, 10 feet beyond drip line and no closer than
36 inches to tree trunk. Drill 2-inch- diameter holes a minimum of 12 inches deep at 24 inches
on center. Backfill holes with an equal mix of augured soil and sand.
3.6 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS
A. Burning is not permitted.
B. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, and excess chips from
Owner's property.
3.7 TREE PRUNING
A. Prune tree canopies and branches at the direction of the project arborist to remove any dead
or broken branches, and to provide the necessary clearances for the construction equipment.
B. Root prune existing street trees to prevent sidewalk and curb damage.
C. Prune remaining trees to compensate for root loss caused by damaging or cutting root
system. Provide subsequent maintenance during Contract period as recommended by
qualified arborist.
D. Pruning Standards: Prune trees according to ANSI A300 as follows:
1. Crown cleaning.
163
JLS MS Building Remodel and Addition DSA SUBMITTAL
Palo Alto Unified School District 5/26/2022
00 01 10 - 4 Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
2. Crown thinning.
3. Crown reduction.
3.8 TREE REPAIR AND REPLACEMENT
A. Promptly repair trees damaged by construction operations within 24 hours. Treat damaged
trunks, limbs, and roots according to written instructions of the qualified arborist.
B. Remove and replace dead and damaged trees that the qualified arborist determines to be
incapable of restoring to a normal growth pattern.
C. Provide new trees of the same size and species as those being replaced; plant and maintain
as specified in Division 2 Section "Planting.
3.9 SOIL AERATION
A. Aerate surface soil compacted during construction, 10 feet beyond drip line and no closer than
36 inches to tree trunk. Drill 2-inch- diameter holes a minimum of 12 inches deep at 24 inches
on center. Backfill holes with an equal mix of augured soil and sand.
3.10 DISPOSAL OF WASTE MATERIALS
A. Burning is not permitted.
B. Disposal: Remove excess excavated material, displaced trees, and excess chips from
Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
164
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 60 00 - 1 Product Requirements
SECTION 01 60 00
PRODUCT REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section describes basic product requirements governing material and equipment.
1. General product requirements.
2. Product list.
3. Quality assurance.
4. Delivery, storage, and handling.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 25 00: Substitution procedures.
2. Section 01 30 00: Submittal of manufacturers' certificates.
3. Section 01 77 00: Operation and maintenance data.
1.2 GENERAL PRODUCTS REQUIREMENTS
A. Products include material, equipment, and systems.
B. Comply with Specifications, referenced standards, and applicable codes and
regulations as minimum requirements.
C. Provide new materials except as specifically allowed by Contract Documents.
D. Materials to be supplied in quantity within a Specification section shall be by one
manufacturer, shall be the same, and shall be interchangeable.
E. Provide equipment and systems composed of materials from a single manufacturer
except where otherwise recommended by equipment or systems manufacturer or
where otherwise indicated in Contract Documents.
F. Contractor’s Options: Comply with following options; requests for substitutions for
named manufacturers and products shall comply with requirements specified in
Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures.
1. Products Identified by Reference Standards: Select product meeting referenced
standard for products specified only by reference standard.
a. Requests for Substitutions to be limited to products not complying with
referenced standards.
1) Submit justification for non-compliance with reference standards as part
of Request for Substitutions; if product is foreign made submit rationale
why foreign standards and basic materials indicates compliance.
165
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 60 00 - 2 Product Requirements
2. Named Manufacturers: Where names of manufacturers are specified select any
named manufacturer product meeting Specifications for products specified by
naming one or more manufacturers.
a. Submit Request for Substitution for any manufacturer not named.
3. Named Manufacturers and Named Products: Select any named manufacturer
named product meeting Specifications for products specified by naming one or
more manufacturers and products.
a. Where only one manufacturer and product is named together with additional
manufacturers without specific products, Requests for Substitutions to be
limited to products not comparable to that specified.
1) Contractors, subcontractors, suppliers, and manufacturers shall take
special care to ensure comparable products are being supplied based
on design, performance, quality, and longevity.
2) Substitutions: Submit Request for Substitution for any manufacturer not
named and for products not comparable to those specified in design,
performance, quality, and longevity.
4. Basis of Design: Where manufacturer or manufacturer and product both are
indicated as Basis of Design, submit Request for Substitution for other
manufacturers and products.
5. “Or Equal” Clauses: Submit request for substitution for manufacturer or product
not specifically named in Specifications where terms "or equal", "or approved
equal", or similar references are made.
G. Nameplates: Do not attach or imprint manufacturer or producer nameplates on
exposed surfaces in occupied spaces except for required labels and operating data.
1. Equipment Nameplates: Provide permanent nameplate on service connected
and power operated equipment located on easily accessible surface
inconspicuous in occupied spaces.
a. Provide name of product and manufacturer, model and serial number,
capacity, speed, rating, and similar information.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product List: Within 21 days after award of Contract, submit to Owner and Architect a
complete list of major products proposed for installation, with name of manufacturer,
trade name, and model.
B. Product List: Prior to submittal of second Request for Payment, submit to Architect
complete list of major products which are proposed for installation, with name of
manufacturer, trade name, and model.
166
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 60 00 - 3 Product Requirements
1. Tabulate products by Specification number and title.
C. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with industry standards and applicable codes except when more restrictive
tolerances or requirements indicate more rigid standards or precise workmanship.
B. Perform work by persons qualified to produce workmanship of specified quality.
C. Install products straight, true-to-line, and in correct relationship to adjacent materials,
with hairline joints, free of rough, sharp and potentially hazardous edges.
D. Secure products in place with positive anchorage devices designed and sized to
withstand stresses, vibration, and racking.
1. Seismic Anchors: Conform to code requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Transport products by methods to avoid product damage, deliver in undamaged
condition in manufacturer's unopened containers or packaging.
B. Store products in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, with seals and labels
intact and legible.
C. Store sensitive products in weather-tight enclosures; maintain within temperature and
humidity ranges required by manufacturer's instructions.
D. For exterior storage of fabricated products, place on sloped supports above ground.
E. Store loose granular materials on solid surfaces in a well-drained area; prevent
mixing with foreign matter.
F. Arrange storage to provide access for inspection; periodically inspect to assure
products are undamaged and are maintained under required conditions.
G. Provide equipment and personnel to handle products by methods to prevent soiling
and prevent damage.
H. Promptly inspect shipments to assure products comply with requirements, quantities
are correct, and products are undamaged.
I. Immediately remove from Project products damaged, wet, stained, and products with
mold and products with mildew.
1. Take special care to prevent absorbent products such as gypsum board and
acoustical ceiling units from becoming wet.
END OF SECTION
167
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 70 00 - 1 Execution Requirements
SECTION 01 70 00
EXECUTION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section describes execution requirements.
1. Installer qualifications.
2. Examination.
3. Manufacturer’s instructions.
4. Installation.
5. Cleaning.
6. Protection.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 50 00: Temporary Facilities and Controls.
2. Section 01 77 00: Closeout procedures.
3. Section 01 79 00: Demonstration and training.
1.2 INSTALLER QUALIFICATIONS
A. Experienced Installers: Installers to have minimum five-years successful experience
installing items like those required for Project, except for individuals in training under
direct supervision of experienced installer.
1.3 EXAMINATION
A. Acceptance of Conditions: Beginning installation of a product signifies installer has
examined substrates, areas, and conditions for compliance with manufacturer
requirements for tolerances and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Field Measurements: Take field measurements as required to fit Work properly;
recheck measurements prior to installing each product.
1. Where portions of Work are to fit to other construction verify dimensions of other
construction by field measurements before fabrication; allow for cutting and
patching to avoid delaying Work.
C. Space Requirements: Verify space requirements and dimensions of items shown
diagrammatically on Drawings.
168
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 70 00 - 2 Execution Requirements
1.4 MANUFACTURERS' INSTRUCTIONS
A. Manufacturer’s Recommendations: When work is specified to comply with
manufacturers' recommendations or instructions, distribute copies to persons
involved and maintain one set in field office.
1. Conform to requirements specified in Section 01 30 00 for submittal of
recommendations or instructions to Architect; submit to Architect only where
specified or where specifically requested; otherwise keep in Field Office.
B. Perform work in accordance with details of recommendations and instructions and
specified requirements.
1. Should a conflict exist between Specifications and recommendations or
instructions consult with Architect.
C. Where manufacturer's information notes special recommendations in addition to
installation instructions, comply with both recommendations and instructions.
1.5 INSTALLATION
A. Pre-Installation Meetings: Installers and suppliers are to attend pre-installation
meetings scheduled by Contractor.
B. Comply with manufacturers written recommendations and installation instructions
unless more restrictive requirements are specified.
C. Locate Work and components accurately, in correct alignment and elevation.
1. Make vertical work plumb and horizontal work level.
2. Install components to allow space for maintenance and ease of removal for
replacement.
D. Install products at time and under conditions to ensure best possible results; maintain
conditions required for product performance until Substantial Completion.
E. Conduct operations so no part of Work is subject to damaging operations or
excessive loads during normal conditions.
F. Securely anchor permanent construction in place, accurately located and aligned with
other portions of Work.
G. Allow for building movement including thermal expansion and contraction.
H. Make joints of uniform width; arrange joints as indicated, for best visual effect where
not otherwise indicated; fit exposed connections together to form hairline joints except
where otherwise indicated.
169
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 70 00 - 3 Execution Requirements
1.6 CLEANING
A. Cleaning During Construction: Specified in Section 01 50 00 - Temporary Facilities
and Controls.
B. Progress Cleaning: Keep installed areas clean using cleaning materials specifically
recommended by manufacturers of product being cleaned; where not otherwise
recommended use nontoxic materials that will not damage surfaces.
1. Remove debris from concealed spaces before enclosing space.
2. Supervise construction operations to assure no part of construction, completed or
in progress, is subject to harmful, dangerous, damaging, or otherwise deleterious
exposure during construction period.
C. Final Cleaning: Execute final cleaning at Substantial Completion.
1. Clean interior and exterior surfaces exposed to view; remove temporary labels,
stains and foreign substances; polish transparent and glossy surfaces; vacuum
carpeted and soft surfaces.
a. Vacuuming Equipment: Type with high efficiency particulate arrestor (HEPA)
type filters; properly maintained.
2. Clean equipment and fixtures to a sanitary condition, clean filters of mechanical
equipment, replace filters where cleaning is impractical.
a. Clean ducts.
3. Clean site; sweep paved areas.
4. Remove waste, surplus materials and rubbish from Project and site; recycle to
maximum extent feasible.
1.7 PROTECTION
A. Protect products subject to deterioration with impervious cover. Provide ventilation to
avoid condensation and trapping water.
B. Take care to use protective covering and blocking materials that do not soil, stain, or
damage materials being protected.
C. After installation, provide coverings to protect products from damage from traffic and
construction operations, remove when no longer needed.
D. Protect interior materials from water damage; immediately remove wet materials from
site to prevent growth of mold and mildew on site.
END OF SECTION
170
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 73 00 - 1 Cutting and Patching
SECTION 01 73 00
CUTTING AND PATCHING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Contractor is responsible for cutting, fitting and patching to complete Work and to:
1. Make its parts fit together properly.
2. Uncover work to provide for installation of ill-timed work.
3. Remove and replace defective work.
4. Remove and replace work not conforming to Contract Documents.
5. Remove samples of installed work as required for testing.
6. Provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of piping.
7. Provide routine penetrations of non-structural surfaces for installation of conduit.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 50 00: Temporary facilities and controls.
2. Section 02 41 20: Selective building demolition for remodeling.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit written request well in advance of cutting or alteration which affects:
1. Structural value or integrity of any element of Project.
2. Integrity of weather-exposed or moisture-resistant elements.
3. Efficiency, operational life, maintenance or safety of operational elements.
4. Visual qualities of sight-exposed elements.
B. Request shall include:
1. Identification of Project and description of affected work.
2. Necessity for cutting or alteration.
3. Effect on structural integrity, or weatherproof integrity of Project.
4. Alternatives to cutting and patching.
5. Cost proposal, when applicable.
6. Written permission of separate contractor whose work will be affected.
7. Description of proposed work including:
a. Scope of cutting, patching, alteration, or excavation.
b. Products proposed to be used.
c. Extent of refinishing to be included.
C. Should conditions of Work or schedule indicate a change of products from original
installation, Contractor shall submit request for substitution as specified in
Section 01 25 00 – Substitution Procedures.
D. Submit written notice to Architect designating date and time work will be uncovered.
171
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 73 00 - 2 Cutting and Patching
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Comply with Specifications and standards for each specific product involved.
B. Where Specifications and standards have not been provided, provide materials and
fabrication consistent with quality of Project and intended for commercial construction.
C. Provide new materials for cutting and patching unless otherwise indicated.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Inspect existing conditions of Project, including elements subject to damage or to
movement during cutting and patching.
B. After uncovering work, inspect conditions affecting installation of products, or
performance of work.
C. Report unsatisfactory or questionable conditions to Architect in writing; do not
proceed with work until Architect has provided further instructions.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Provide adequate temporary support as necessary to assure structural value or
integrity of affected portion of Work.
1. Provide services of licensed engineer for designing temporary support where
required by applicable authorities for temporary supports and for shoring; submit
engineering calculations directly to applicable authorities upon request.
B. Protect other portions of Project from damage.
3.3 PERFORMANCE
A. Execute cutting by methods that provide proper surfaces to receive installation of
repairs and finishes.
1. Execute excavating and backfilling by methods which will prevent settlement,
and which will prevent damage to other work.
B. Employ same installer or fabricator to perform cutting and patching work as employed
for new construction for:
1. Weather-exposed or moisture resistant elements.
2. Sight-exposed finished surfaces.
C. Execute fitting and adjustment of products to provide a finished installation to comply
with specified products, functions, tolerances and finishes.
172
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 73 00 - 3 Cutting and Patching
D. Restore work that has been cut or removed; install new products to provide
completed Work in accordance with requirements of Contract Documents.
E. Fit work tight to pipes, sleeves, ducts, conduit and penetrations through surfaces.
F. Refinish entire surfaces as necessary to provide even finish to match adjacent finishes:
1. For continuous surfaces, refinish to nearest intersection.
2. For an assembly, refinish entire unit.
END OF SECTION
173
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 74 10 - 1 Waste Management
SECTION 01 74 10
WASTE MANAGEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Project requires special Waste Management Program.
1. CALGreen Waste Management: As required in Section 01 35 15.
2. Provide itemization of costs related to Waste Management Program.
3. Effect optimum control of solid wastes.
4. Prevent environmental pollution and damage.
B. Related Work:
1. Section 01 35 15: CALGreen environmental requirements.
2. Section 01 50 00: Temporary facilities and controls.
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Inert Fill: A permitted facility that accepts inert waste such as asphalt and concrete
exclusively.
B. Class III Landfill: A landfill that accepts non-hazardous waste such as household,
commercial, and industrial waste, including construction, remodeling, repair, and
demolition operations.
C. Construction and Demolition Waste: Includes solid wastes, such as building
materials, packaging, rubbish, debris, and rubble resulting from construction,
remodeling, repair, and demolition operations.
1. Rubbish: Includes both combustible and noncombustible wastes, such as paper,
boxes, glass, crockery, metal and lumber scrap, tin cans, and bones.
2. Debris: Includes both combustible and noncombustible wastes, such as leaves
and tree trimmings that result from construction or maintenance and repair work.
D. Chemical Waste: Includes petroleum products, bituminous materials, salts, acids,
alkalis, herbicides, pesticides, organic chemicals and inorganic wastes.
E. Sanitary Wastes:
1. Garbage: Refuse and scraps resulting from preparation, cooking, distribution, or
consumption of food.
2. Sewage: Domestic sanitary sewage.
174
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 74 10 - 2 Waste Management
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Waste Management Program: Comply with Contract Documents and applicable code
requirements for salvaging, recycling, and disposing of nonhazardous waste.
END OF SECTION
175
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 77 00 - 1 Closeout Procedures
SECTION 01 77 00
CLOSEOUT PROCEDURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This section describes Contract closeout procedures.
1. Substantial Completion.
2. Final Completion.
3. Project record documents.
4. Material and finish data.
5. Operation and maintenance manuals.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Section 01 30 00: Administrative requirements including attic stock.
2. Section 01 78 00: Warranties.
3. Section 01 79 00: Demonstration and training.
1.2 SUBSTANTIAL COMPLETION
A. Immediately prior to Substantial Completion, schedule agency reviews as required for
“temporary certificate of occupancy” or for “certificate of occupancy”.
B. When Contractor considers Work, or a designated portion thereof is substantially
complete, submit written notice, with list of items to be completed or corrected.
1. List (“Punch List”): Format pre-approved by Owner and Architect; tabular form
with each space listed required.
C. Within a reasonable time, Owner and Architect will inspect status of completion and
may add to “Punch List”.
1. Contractor shall pay for Architect's time and direct expenses where more than
one Substantial Completion inspection is required.
D. Should Owner and Architect determine Work is not substantially complete, Contractor
will be promptly notified in writing, giving reasons.
E. Contractor shall remedy deficiencies and send a second written notice of substantial
completion; Architect will reinspect Work.
1. Contractor shall pay for Architect's time and direct expenses where more than
one Substantial Completion inspection is required.
F. When Work is determined to be substantially complete by owner, a Certificate of
Substantial Completion will be prepared in accordance with General Conditions.
176
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 77 00 - 2 Closeout Procedures
1.3 FINAL COMPLETION
A. When Work is complete, submit written certification indicating:
1. Work has been inspected for compliance with Contract Documents.
2. Work has been completed in accordance with Contract Documents and
deficiencies listed (in ‘Punch List”) with Certificate of Substantial Completion
have been corrected.
3. Equipment and systems have been tested in presence of Owner's representative
and are operational.
4. Work is complete and ready for final inspection.
B. Special Submittals: In addition to submittals required by Contract, submit following.
1. Provide submittals required by governing authorities to governing authorities with
copies included in Project Record Documents.
2. Submit final statement of accounting giving total adjusted Contract Sum, previous
payments, and sum remaining due.
1.4 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Keep documents current; do not permanently conceal any work until required
information has been recorded.
1. Owner will provide Contractor with a separate set of Drawings to maintain for
Project Record Documents.
2. Store reproducible Drawings, one set of Project Manual, and one copy of each
Change Order separate from documents used for construction, for use as Project
Record Documents.
3. Indicate actual work on Drawings; indicate actual products used in Project
Manual, including manufacturer, model number and options.
4. Update Project Record Documents daily and allow for owner inspection at least
once a month.
B. At Contract close-out submit documents with transmittal letter containing date, Project
title, Contractor's name and address, list of documents, and signature of Contractor.
C. As-Built Documents: General Contractor shall have electronic “As Built” sets of
Contract Documents (Project Drawings and Project Specifications) prepared prior to
Final Completion.
1. Contractor shall use one complete electronic set of Contract Documents
(Drawings and Specifications) for use for “As-Builts”.
177
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 77 00 - 3 Closeout Procedures
2. As-Built Drawings: Revise Drawings based on Record Documents and field
measurements made after installation and indicate actual locations of structural
elements, ducts, piping, wiring, and equipment.
a. Professional draftspersons experienced in electronic media used for
Contract Documents shall revise original Project Drawings based on
information recorded on Project Record Documents.
3. As-Built Specifications: Revise Specifications to indicate manufacturers who
provided materials specified along with specifics indicating accessories, options,
and finishes used in Project.
a. Cross referencing Submittal records is acceptable for accessories only.
4. Review Submittal: Submit two copies of electronic media of “As-Built” Documents
to owner for review.
a. After owner review, revise where indicated and submit final electronic media
to Owner.
D. Final Completion Submittal: At Project Completion submit both Project Record
Documents and As-Built Documents with transmittal letter containing date, Project
title, Contractor's name and address, list of documents, and signature of Contractor.
1.5 MATERIAL AND FINISH DATA
A. Provide data for primary materials and finishes.
B. Submit two sets prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1/2" by 11" three-ring binders with
durable plastic covers, clearly identified regarding extent of contents.
1. Electronic Format: Where available in electronic format, submit USB 3.0 flash
drives with information required for material and finish data.
C. Arrange by Specification division and give names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of subcontractors and suppliers. List:
1. Trade names, model or type numbers.
2. Cleaning instructions.
3. Product data.
4. Maintenance recommendations.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. Provide manuals for:
1. Electrically operated items.
2. Electrical equipment and controls.
3. Maintenance manuals provided as part of Submittals.
178
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 77 00 - 4 Closeout Procedures
B. Submit two sets prior to final inspection, bound in 8-1/2" by 11" three-ring binders with
durable plastic covers, clearly identified regarding extent of contents.
C. Provide a separate volume for each system, with a table of contents and index tabs
for each volume.
D. Arrange by Specification division and gives names, addresses, and telephone
numbers of Subcontractors and suppliers. List:
1. Appropriate design criteria.
2. List of equipment and parts lists.
3. Operating and maintenance instructions.
4. Shop drawings and product data.
E. Electronic Format: Where available in electronic format, submit two USB 3.0 flash
drives with information required for operation and maintenance manuals.
END OF SECTION
179
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 78 00 - 1 Warranties
SECTION 01 78 00
WARRANTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Warranties: Compile required, and incidental warranties required by Contract
Documents.
1. Manufacturer Warranties: Provide manufacturer’s standard warranties where
specified including inspections and services included or required as part of
manufacturer’s standard warranty.
2. Special Warranties: Provide special warranties as required by Specifications
sections.
3. These warranties shall be in addition to and not a limitation of other rights Owner
may have against Contractor under Contract Documents and which may be
prescribed by law, regardless of wording of warranty.
B. Extended Correction Period: Contractor shall correct failure of materials and systems
to perform in a manner consistent with their intended use including but not limited to
failure of waterproofing and roofing systems to resist penetration from water.
1. Standard Correction Period: One year after Substantial Completion or Beneficial
Occupancy by Owner except where otherwise noted in Contract Documents;
coordinate with General Conditions and Supplementary Conditions.
a. Items used by Contractor during construction operations shall not be
considered substantially completed.
b. Correction of Work Period begins with notice of completion.
2. Extended Correction Period: Requirements are same as standard correction
period but for an extended period as indicated in Specifications sections.
3. Contractor Responsibilities: Bear cost of correcting failed work and replacing
construction damaged by failure of materials and systems to perform in a manner
consistent with their intended use during correction period.
a. Requirements for correction period shall apply to Subcontractors, suppliers,
installers, and those responsible for failed work.
b. Owner and Design Team shall not be responsible for determining degree of
responsibility of those involved.
4. Owner’s Rights under Law: Correction period shall be in addition to and not a
limitation of other rights Owner may have against Contractor under Contract
Documents and which may be prescribed by law.
180
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 78 00 - 2 Warranties
1.2 FORM OF SUBMITTAL
A. Special Warranty and Extended Correction Period Forms: Provide duplicate copies,
notarized or on Contractor and Manufacturer's letterhead without conditions or
exceptions to requirements specified.
1. Assemble documents executed by subcontractors, installers, suppliers, and
manufacturers.
2. Provide table of contents and assemble in binder with durable plastic cover,
clearly identified regarding extent of contents.
3. Electronic Format: Submit USB 3.0 flash drives of warranties, in Microsoft Word.
B. Manufacturer Warranty Forms: Use manufacturer’s standard forms unless otherwise
directed in Contract Documents; completed form shall not detract from or confuse
interpretations of Contract Documents.
1. Manufacturer’s authorized representative shall sign manufacturer warranties.
2. Subcontractor and installer shall countersign warranty where specified.
a. Provide required warranties for waterproofing and roofing systems
countersigned by subcontractor and installer.
C. Submit final warranties prior to final application for payment.
1. For equipment put into use with Owner's permission during construction, submit
within ten days after first operation.
2. For items of Work delayed materially beyond Date of Substantial Completion,
provide updated submittal within ten days after acceptance, listing date of
acceptance as start of warranty period.
D. Provide information for Owner's personnel regarding proper procedure in case of
failure and instances that might affect validity of manufacturer warranty.
E. Size: 8-1/2" by 11" for three-ring binder; fold larger sheets to fit.
1.3 WARRANTIES AND CORRECTION OF WORK DOCUMENTS
A. Warranties and Correction of Work Documents are intended to protect Owner against
failure of work and against deficient, defective and faulty materials and workmanship,
regardless of sources.
B. Limitations: Warranties and correction of work requirements are not intended to cover
failures that result from:
1. Unusual or abnormal phenomena of the elements.
2. Owner's misuse, maltreatment or improper maintenance of work.
181
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 78 00 - 3 Warranties
3. Vandalism after substantial completion.
4. Insurrection or acts of aggression including war.
C. Related Damages and Losses: Remove and replace work which is damaged as result
of failure, or which must be removed and replaced to provide access for correction of
work.
D. Reinstatement: After correction of work reinstate warranty or extended correction
period for corrected work to date of original expiration, but not less than half original
period.
1. Correction of Work Period: The general correction of work period specified shall
not be extended by corrective work except to extent required to correct failure
and repair or replace materials damaged by failure.
E. Replacement Cost: Replace or restore failing items without regard to anticipated
useful service lives where part of correction of work period, extended correction of
work period, and special warranty period unless otherwise noted.
F. Rejection of Warranties: Owner reserves right to reject unsolicited and coincidental
product warranties that detract from or confuse interpretations of Contract Documents.
END OF SECTION
182
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 79 00 - 1 Demonstration and Training
SECTION 01 79 00
DEMONSTRATION AND TRAINING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide equipment and systems demonstration and instruction in
accordance with Contract Documents.
1. Video record seminars and system demonstrations.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 31 00: Project management and coordination.
2. Section 01 77 00: Contract closeout procedures.
3. Refer to Facility Services Subgroups for mechanical and electrical requirements.
1.2 DESCRIPTION
A. Seminar Agenda and Outline:
1. Prepare a seminar agenda and outline in consultation and cooperation with
Owner. Include following:
a. Equipment and systems that will be included in seminars.
b. Name of companies and representatives presenting at seminars.
c. Outline of each seminar's content.
d. Time and date allocated to each system and item of equipment.
2. Submit preliminary seminar agenda and outline for review and comment by Owner.
a. Revise and resubmit agenda and outline until all seminar requirements have
been satisfied and seminar dates and presenters have been finalized.
3. Submit final seminar agenda and outline no later than eight weeks before date of
Acceptance of Work.
B. Seminar Organization:
1. Contractor’s presentation leaders shall chair seminars.
a. Coordinate qualification of training personnel, seminar contents, and
presentations with Owner.
2. Coordinate individual presentations and ensure manufacturer’s representatives
scheduled to be at training seminars are present.
183
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 79 00 - 2 Demonstration and Training
3. Arrange for presentation leaders familiar with design operation, maintenance and
troubleshooting of equipment and systems.
a. Where one person is not familiar with all aspects of equipment or system;
arrange for specialists familiar with each aspect.
4. Coordinate proposed seminar dates with Owner and select mutually agreeable
dates.
5. Video Recording: Arrange for video recording (audio and video) of training
seminars and system demonstrations, including seminar and demonstration
questions and answers.
C. Seminar Content:
1. Architect’s Consultants will explain design philosophy of primary systems.
2. Include following information in presentations dealing with specific systems.
a. An overview of how system is intended to operate.
b. Describe design parameters, constrains and operational requirements.
c. Describe system operation strategies.
d. Provide information to help in identifying and troubleshooting problems.
3. Include following information in presentations dealing with equipment.
a. Explanation of how equipment operates.
b. Recommended preventative and routine maintenance.
D. System Demonstration:
1. Demonstrate operation of equipment and systems when specified in individual
technical sections. Include following in demonstration.
a. Start-up and shut down.
c. Operation.
d. Scheduled and preventative maintenance.
e. Troubleshooting.
2. Demonstration may be conducted at time of original starting with Owner's prior
approval.
E. Seminar and Demonstration Questions:
1. Be prepared to answer questions raised by Owner’s personnel at demonstrations
and seminars.
2. If unable to satisfactorily answer questions immediately, provide written response
within three days.
F. Use manufacturer’s operation and maintenance data as basis of instruction.
184
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
01 79 00 - 3 Demonstration and Training
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Video Recording: Submit three copies of each video recording in DVD format
acceptable to Owner; include label on each DVD and on each container identifying
Project and Seminar content.
END OF SECTION
185
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02 41 20 - 1 Selective Building Demolition
SECTION 02 41 20
SELECTIVE BUILDING DEMOLITION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Selectively remove materials, systems, components, fixtures and
equipment as designated and as required for completion of Project as indicated.
1. Cap and identify active utilities.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 10 00: Summary of work including hazardous materials requirements.
2. Section 01 50 00: Temporary facilities including barriers and waste management.
3. Section 01 73 00: Cutting and patching.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Prevent movement of structural components, provide and place bracing and be
responsible for safety and support of structural components. Assume liability for
movement, settlement, damage or injury.
2. Cease operations and notify Architect immediately if safety of structural
components appears to be endangered; take precautions to properly support
structures. Do not resume operations until safety is restored.
B. Design/Build: Provide special engineering to ensure compliance with applicable
codes and Contract Documents for support systems.
C. Scheduling: Do not close or obstruct roadways without permits. Conduct operations
with minimum interference to adjacent traffic.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Action Submittals: Submit selective demolition operational sequence to ensure
Project sequencing is consistent with Owner needs.
B. Informational Submittals: Submit permits for transport and disposal of debris.
Contractor to Coordinate with City and County requirements. Contractor is
responsible for fees.
186
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02 41 20 - 2 Selective Building Demolition
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to finish material pollution control and for construction waste.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Debris: Maintain possession of materials being demolished except where noted as a
material for reinstallation or a material to be retained by Owner. Immediately remove
debris from site.
1. Immediately remove from site wet materials and materials with water stains, with
mold, and with mildew.
B. Materials for Reinstallation: Carefully remove, store and protect materials indicated to
be reinstalled. Contact Owner and Architect prior to beginning demolition to
determine extent of other materials that might be suitable for reinstallation.
1. Inventory and record condition of items to be reinstalled.
C. Owner Retained Materials: Contact Owner prior to beginning demolition to determine
extent of materials to be retained. Carefully remove materials indicated to be retained
by Owner; deliver and store where directed.
1. Inventory and record condition of items to be retained by Owner.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXISTING SERVICES
A. Disconnect or remove utility services as required for completion of Project;
disconnect, stub off, and cap utility service lines not required for new construction.
1. Do not remove utilities discovered during demolition but not indicated without first
determining purpose for utility; coordinate with Architect and Engineers.
B. Do not disrupt services to adjacent buildings not in Project.
C. Place markers to indicate location of disconnected services; identify service lines and
capping locations on Project Record Documents.
3.2 DEMOLITION
A. Demolish indicated appurtenances as indicated and as required for Project
completion in an orderly and careful manner.
1. Use methods that do not damage materials indicated to remain.
187
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02 41 20 - 3 Selective Building Demolition
2. Cut concrete and masonry using masonry saws and hand tools; provide sharp
clean cuts requiring minimal patching for new construction.
3. Use impact tools only where specifically approved in advance for areas where
operations do not disturb building occupancy.
B. Perform demolition in accordance with authorities having jurisdiction.
C. Remove demolished materials from site, unless otherwise directed.
1. Remove from site, contaminated, vermin infested, and dangerous materials
encountered and dispose of by safe means so as not to endanger health of
workers or public.
D. Remove tools and equipment upon completion of work; leave area in condition
acceptable to Owner and Architect.
3.3 REPAIR
A. Repair damage to adjacent construction caused as result of this work, at no additional
cost to the owner.
B. Repair demolition beyond that required, at no additional cost to the owner.
END OF SECTION
188
March 6, 2023
Ms. Jessica Sandifer, Community Services Manager
City of Moorpark
799 Moorpark Avenue
Moorpark, CA 93021
cball@moorparkco.gov
Subject: Asbestos Survey with Lead Paint Screening
Preliminary Mold & Moisture Assessment
323 Science Drive (Proposed City Hall Building)
Moorpark, CA 93021 FCG Project Code: City of Moorpark-37
Dear Ms. Sandifer:
FCG Environmental (FCG) conducted an asbestos survey and preliminary mold
assessment at 323 Science Drive in Moorpark, California. The investigation was
performed by FCG personnel on February 16, 2023, under the supervision of Alan
Forbess, FCG’s Principal Consultant. Additional screening for lead paint or lead
components was also conducted in selected areas. This report documents the results of
our inspection and provides recommendations for corrective action as necessary.
1.0 BACKGROUND/SCOPE OF WORK
According to information provided to FCG, the subject building is a two-story commercial
office building constructed in 1988. The property sits on a 1.3 acre lot and is estimated
at 24,464 sq. ft. The building is proposed as the new location of Moorpark City Hall.
FCG was asked to conduct an inspection of s, to document site conditions and assess
for potential microbial and/or moisture intrusion issues.
Scope of Services: FCG conducted the following services to determine the existence of
mold conditions at the site:
• Visual Inspection: A visual inspection of the interior and exterior surfaces was
conducted throughout the subject site, to identify areas of suspect asbestos and
lead paint or lead components (ceramic tiles, porcelain fixtures, etc.). We also
looked for obvious signs of water intrusion, visible mold growth, water staining,
damaged building materials, odors and similar concerns related to past water
intrusion issues reported by the client.
• Asbestos Survey: After a visual inspection of the site was performed to identify
suspect asbestos materials, a total of 42 bulk samples were collected and
forwarded for analysis to a qualified asbestos laboratory. All samples were
forwarded to McCall and Spero Environmental, a certified asbestos laboratory
located in Louisville, KY for analysis by polarized light microscopy (PLM)
umm
FCG Environmental
1009 Mercer Ave.
Ojai , CA 93023
Environmental Consulting Services
Asbestos• Mold • Lead• Property Assessment
Tel: 805.646.1995 I Fax: 805.669.3538
lnfo @fcgenviro .com I www.fcgenviro .com
189
FCG Environmental Asbestos, Lead & Mold Survey
March 6, 2023 323 Science Drive
Moorpark, CA 93021
City of Moorpark-37, 323 Science Dr., Prel Mold Asmt Rpt.doc 2
methods to document the asbestos content in each material. Please refer to the
attached laboratory analytical report for more information.
• Lead Paint & Component Screening: Screening for lead-based paint and other
lead materials was conducted using an X-Ray Fluorescence (XRF) field
instrument to test representative surfaces in the field. Since the building was
constructed after 1978 (when lead-based paint was banned from commercial and
residential sales) ceramic and porcelain surfaces suspected of being coated with
lead-based glazing, such as ceramic tiles and porcelain fixtures. Based on our
limited XRF screening results, lead was not detected above the regulatory level
of 1.0 mg/cm2 in any of the ceramic tiles and porcelain fixtures. Therefore, no
special handling is required if these materials are disturbed as part of future site
work.
• Mold & Moisture Survey: A limited moisture survey was conducted using
penetrating and radio frequency moisture meter equipment from the areas of
concern, with emphasis on areas showing evidence of moisture damage, water
intrusion, microbial contamination or water staining.
• Mold/Fungal Sampling Assessment: Our assessment included the collection of
air and surface samples to document site conditions at the time of our
assessment. Samples were forwarded for analysis to Natural Link Mold
Laboratory, a certified microbiology laboratory located in Sparks, Nevada.
• Data Evaluation: Our field observations and analytical results have been
evaluated and recommendations have been included in this report for your
consideration.
2.0 ASBESTOS SURVEY
Background: The subject building was reportedly constructed in 1988 which is typically
beyond the date of asbestos being used in commercial and residential building
materials, with few exceptions (roofing mastics, etc.). However, in order to obtain
permits for removal or demolition of building materials, testing for asbestos is
recommended to ensure proper handling and disposal is conducted.
Suspect Materials: After a visual inspection of the site was completed, the following
suspect asbestos materials were noted:
• Carpet mastics – throughout all carpeted areas
• Vinyl cove base with mastics (6” grey with white mastic)
• Drywall with joint compound – all interior partition walls
• 12” x 12” Grey vinyl floor tiles with yellow mastic (1st floor, selected locations)
• 2’ x 2’ Acoustic ceiling tiles – various office areas
• Ceramic wall tile grout – restrooms
• Floor tile grout – restrooms
• Rubberized flooring with mastics – 2nd floor closet (west)
• Roofing Layers (composite or rolled roofing over felt, etc.)
• Roofing mastics (used to seal around penetrations, vents, etc.)
190
FCG Environmental Asbestos, Lead & Mold Survey
March 6, 2023 323 Science Drive
Moorpark, CA 93021
City of Moorpark-37, 323 Science Dr., Prel Mold Asmt Rpt.doc 3
Bulk Sampling Results: FCG collected 42 bulk samples from suspect asbestos
containing materials from the subject site. Samples were forwarded to McCall & Spero
Environmental, for analysis by Polarized Light Microscopy (PLM) using EPA Method
600/R-93-116, Visual Area Estimation. Table 1 below provides a summary of those
materials which tested positive for asbestos based on laboratory analytical data from
collected samples. Please refer to the Attachments for a complete copy of the laboratory
analytical results.
Table 1: Summary of Asbestos Bulk Sampling Results
Sample
ID
Suspect
Material Location Asbestos Results
(ND = None Detected) Comments
1, 2, 19 Carpet Mastic 1st & 2nd Floors
Various locations Carpet Mastic = ND No Asbestos
Detected
3, 4, 20 Cove Base
Mastics Lower walls throughout Grey vinyl base = ND
White mastic = ND
No Asbestos
Detected
5 - 9, 16,
21 - 25
Drywall with
joint compound
Through interior partition
walls
Drywall = ND
Joint Compound = ND
No Asbestos
Detected
10-12,
33-34
12” Vinyl Floor
Tiles & mastic 1st Floor (NW receiving, stair
landing, electrical room, etc.)
Grey tiles = ND
Yellow mastics = ND
No Asbestos
Detected
13-15,
26-29
Acoustic
Ceiling Tiles
(2’ x 2’)
1st floor & 2nd floor
(selected office areas) Acoustic tiles = ND No Asbestos
Detected
30, 31 Tile grout Restrooms
(ceramic wall and floor tiles) Tile grout = ND No Asbestos
Detected
32 Rubber
flooring mastic 2nd floor Rubber flooring = ND
White mastic = ND
No Asbestos
Detected
35 - 38 Roofing Layers Throughout exterior Roofing layers = ND No Asbestos
Detected
39 - 42 Roofing
Mastics Various penetrations
(vents, piping, curbs, etc.) Roofing mastics = ND No Asbestos
Detected
All suspect materials identified within the subject site tested negative for asbestos.
Please refer to the attached laboratory analytical report for additional information.
Notes on Tables and Assessment Terms:
• Asbestos containing material (ACM): Federal and County APCD regulations define ACM
as any material or product that contains more than 1% asbestos.
• Asbestos containing construction material (ACCM): State regulations define ACCM as
any material with greater than 0.1% asbestos by weight.
• Asbestos renovation: Defined by NESHAPS as the removal of more than 160 square
feet or 260 linear feet of ACM. OSHA requires registration of all contractors removing
more than 100 sq. ft. on any project.
• Friable ACM: any ACM that when dry can be crumbled, pulverized, or reduced to powder
by normal hand pressure.
• Non-friable ACM: any ACM that cannot be reduced to powder by normal hand pressure.
• Category I non-friable ACM: asbestos-containing packings, gaskets, resilient floor
covering, and asphalt roofing products (typically pliable materials, including sealants and
mastics).
191
FCG Environmental Asbestos, Lead & Mold Survey
March 6, 2023 323 Science Drive
Moorpark, CA 93021
City of Moorpark-37, 323 Science Dr., Prel Mold Asmt Rpt.doc 4
• Category II non-friable ACM: any other ACM that when dry cannot be reduced to powder
by hand pressure (typically non-pliable/cementitious materials).
• Regulated Asbestos Containing Material (RACM): any friable ACM that will be removed
during a renovation of a regulated structure. ACM that will become friable due to the
removal technique is also regulated. Note: while linoleum flooring is considered Category
II ACM while managed in place, removal always renders it friable.
• Presumed Asbestos Containing Materials (PACM): This designation is for those
materials which are normally asbestos containing but were not sampled due to access
issues or potential for irreparable damage. This typically includes transite (asbestos
cement) piping or sheeting, or HVAC insulation materials in walls, under floors, etc.
where destructive testing is not recommended. Regulations allow asbestos inspectors to
“presume” that these materials contain asbestos without laboratory data based on the
inspector’s experience and knowledge of building materials.
Summary: Our survey found no asbestos in any of the bulk samples collected.
Therefore, no Asbestos Containing Materials (ACM) were identified at the site which will
require abatement or special handling as part of future renovation activities.
3.0 LIMITED LEAD PAINT AND COMPONENT SURVEY
FCG conducted limited field screening in order to determine the presence of lead-based
components (ceramic tiles, porcelain fixtures, etc.) within the subject site. As the building
was constructed in 1988, there should be no lead-based paint as lead paint was banned
from commercial use in 1978. Therefore, our screening for lead was limited to various
components (tiles, fixtures) where lead is commonly found in glazing compounds used to
seal the tiles. All work was conducted in the field using XRF methodology in accordance
with current state and federal regulations. Inspection work was conducted by a Certified
Lead Sampling Technician under the supervision of a CA Certified Lead
Inspector/Assessor. The results of this survey are summarized in this section.
Background Information on Lead Paint Requirements: Several regulations apply to
the disturbance and possible exposure to lead from paints and other coatings. Title 17
of the California Code of Regulations (CCR) applies to residences and buildings
accessible to the public that were constructed prior to 1979, and schools constructed
before 1993 where lead paint may exist. Cal-OSHA regulations found within Title 8 of
the CCR apply to worker exposure as stated in the Lead-in-Construction Standard (8-
CCR-1532.1). The EPA recently issued a final rule to address lead-based paint hazards
created by renovation, repair and painting activities that disturb lead-based paint in
target housing and child-occupied facilities.
The EPA’s Lead Renovation, Repair and Painting (RRP) Program was passed into
regulation requiring compliance with training and certification requirements per Title 40
of the Code of Federal Regulations (40 CFR Part 745). The RRP rule states that firms
and individuals conducting renovations of target housing constructed before 1978 must
assume that lead is present in all painted surfaces or coatings unless a written
determination has been made by a Certified Inspector that the components affected by
the renovation are free of paint or other surface coatings that contain lead equal to or in
excess of 1.0 milligrams per square centimeter (mg/cm2) or 0.5% by weight.
192
FCG Environmental Asbestos, Lead & Mold Survey
March 6, 2023 323 Science Drive
Moorpark, CA 93021
City of Moorpark-37, 323 Science Dr., Prel Mold Asmt Rpt.doc 5
Scope of Lead Testing Services: FCG’s scope of services involved field testing
through use of X-ray fluorescence (XRF) instrumentation, which provides instantaneous
readings in the field. The XRF instrument is used because of its demonstrated abilities to
accurately determine the amount of lead that is present without disturbing the painted
surfaces, as well as their high speed and relatively low cost per sample. The XRF device
is capable of measuring lead in both deteriorated and intact paint. See the Attachments
to this report for more information on XRF sampling methodology. The following is a
summary of our lead survey results:
• None of the suspect components (tiles, fixtures, etc.) tested as part of this survey
were found with lead concentrations above the regulated level of 1.0 mg/cm2.
Therefore, no lead-based components were identified within the subject site.
• Based on the age of the building (1988), there should be no Lead-Based Paint as
these paints and coatings were banned from commercial sales in 1978. This
complies with the EPA and CA Title 17 requirements for lead inspections, where
inspectors and contractors must presume lead paint is present only in pre-1978
buildings.
• We found no evidence of lead-based paints or lead components that will require
special handling as part of proposed site renovations.
Please refer to the attached spreadsheet for a summary of all XRF field readings
collected from the subject site. The A side noted is the front side or main entry to the
building with the B, C and D sides continuing in a clockwise direction around the site.
4.0 FIELD OBSERVATIONS
During our site assessment, the following visual observations and results were noted as
part of our investigation:
Exterior - The structure is partially covered with vines,
which can trap moisture and possibly damage the plaster
exterior walls.
First Floor Lobby/Hallway – Ceramic tile flooring, with
drywall walls and suspended T-Bar ceilings with acoustic
tiles. Air sample A-1 was found to have slight elevation of
Penicillium/Aspergillus mold types. See Section 5.0 below
for details on air sampling results.
193
FCG Environmental Asbestos, Lead & Mold Survey
March 6, 2023 323 Science Drive
Moorpark, CA 93021
City of Moorpark-37, 323 Science Dr., Prel Mold Asmt Rpt.doc 6
First Floor N. Cubicle Area – Areas of water staining
were noted on ceiling tiles and the lower walls (fabric)
along the north side of the room. Air sample A-2 was found
to have slightly elevated mold spore concentrations at the
time of the inspection. See Section 5.0 for details.
First Floor S Warehouse Space – This is an area of
concrete flooring and walls, with open framed ceiling. Air
sample A-3 was found to have slight elevation of
Penicillium/Aspergillus mold types. See Section 5.0 below.
First Floor S Warehouse Space – Water staining was
noted on wood framing and concrete walls in the vicinity of
the roof drains located in the southeast and southwest
corners of the room.
First Floor S Warehouse Space – Closeup view of water
staining from roofing related leaks in the southwest corner.
Moisture readings were within the normal, dry range
(<15%) at the time.
Second Floor N Cubicle Area – Areas of water staining
were noted on the windowsills and lower walls (fabric
covered) along the north side of the room. Air sample A-4
was found to be within outdoor/background spore
concentrations inspection. See Section 5.0 for details.
Second Floor N Cubicle Area – Several areas of water
stained ceiling tiles were noted, indicating past roofing or
other leaks. Moisture readings were within the normal, dry
range (<15%) at the time.
194
FCG Environmental Asbestos, Lead & Mold Survey
March 6, 2023 323 Science Drive
Moorpark, CA 93021
City of Moorpark-37, 323 Science Dr., Prel Mold Asmt Rpt.doc 7
2nd Floor N Cubicle Area – Water stains and visible mold
growth were observed along the upper north wall area
throughout, indicative of past roofing related leaks.
2nd Floor N Cubicle Area – Surface Sample T-6, collected
from the top side of a ceiling tile, was found to have
significant growth of Penicillium and lesser growth of
Cladosporium and Alternaria mold types. See Section 6.0
below for details on surface sampling for mold.
2nd Floor N Cubicle Area – Surface Sample T-7, collected
from the concrete wall above the ceiling tiles, was found to
have significant growth of Cladosporium and lesser growth
of Stachybotrys and Aspergillus mold types. See Section
6.0 below for details.
2nd Floor S Cubicle Area – Surface Sample T-8, collected
from the fabric windowsill on the east side of the structure,
was found to have significant growth of Chaetomium and
lesser growth of Penicillium/Aspergillus mold types. Vinyl or
fabric wallcoverings can trap moisture and result in growth
on the backing drywall paper. See Section 6.0 for details
5.0 MOLD AIR SAMPLING ASSESSMENT
FCG collected a total of seven (7) non-viable air samples which were forwarded for
analysis to Natural Link Mold Laboratory, Inc. of Sparks, Nevada, an AIHA Laboratory
with EMPAT certification (No. 162969). Six samples (A-1 thru A-6) were taken from
indoor areas with one outdoor air sample (OS-1) taken for background, comparison
purposes. The methods used for data interpretation are consistent with published
industry documents including: Bioaerosols: Assessment and Control, published by the
American Conference of Governmental Industrial Hygienist (ACGIH) 1999; and Mold
Sampling and Assessment; Indoor Environmental Standard Organization (IESO), 2002.
These standards are used in conjunction with our professional experience in reviewing
and evaluating analytical data. The data is evaluated to review total spore counts and
individual mold types to determine the hierarchy of mold species found. Ideally, indoor
air spore counts should be comparable to outdoor, baseline levels with similar hierarchy
or distribution of individual species. If indoor counts are significantly higher or show an
195
FCG Environmental Asbestos, Lead & Mold Survey
March 6, 2023 323 Science Drive
Moorpark, CA 93021
City of Moorpark-37, 323 Science Dr., Prel Mold Asmt Rpt.doc 8
obvious variation with the outdoor baseline, mold amplification or growth within the
interior may be indicated. Air sample data should always be evaluated in conjunction
with a visual inspection, moisture readings, surface sampling and other parameters to
provide an overall picture of site conditions. It is very difficult to reach conclusions based
solely on air sample data.
Sample collection was conducted according to standard sampling methodologies used in
indoor air quality assessments for microbial investigations. This included the use of a
specially designed spore trap cassette (Allergenco-D) connected to a portable vacuum
pump (Zefon BioPump™) which is calibrated to 15 liters per minute. Samples are
collected over a period of 5 minutes for a total sample volume of 75 liters. The cassette
features an induction slit over a small glass slide which is coated with a sterile adhesive.
The cassette acts as a spore trap device which traps the airborne mold spores as they
are pulled into the cassette by the vacuum pump. Each collected sample is sealed,
labeled with a unique identification number and forwarded to a qualified laboratory for
analysis. Each sample is analyzed by direct microscopic examination by a trained
microbiologist. This is a non-viable method where the analyst identifies various spore
types to genus level.
The following table provides a summary of the air sample results from this site. Please
refer to the Attachments section for a complete copy of the laboratory analytical report.
Table 2: Mold/Fungal Air Sample Results
Sample
ID
Sample
Location
Total Count
(s/m3)
Mold Types Detected
(s/m3)
A-1 First Floor
Lobby/Hallway 1,027
Cladosporium – 650
Penicillium/Aspergillus – 270
Basidiospores – 67
Smuts/Myxomycetes – 27
Alternaria – 13
A-2 First Floor
N Cubicle Area 1,043
Basidiospores – 470
Cladosporium – 440
Scopulariopsis/Microascus – 40
Alternaria – 27
Smuts/Myxomycetes – 27
3 other mold types @ 13
A-3 First Floor
S Warehouse Space 643
Basidiospores – 270
Penicillium/Aspergillus – 200
Ascospores – 67
Cladosporium – 67
3 other mold types @ 13
A-4 Second Floor
N Cubicle Area 430
Basidiospores – 270
Penicillium/Aspergillus – 67
Cladosporium – 27
Rusts/Pucciniales – 27
3 other mold types @ 13
A-5 Second Floor
S Cubicle Area 466
Cladosporium – 270
Basidiospores – 130
Botrytis – 53
Alternaria – 13
A-6 Second Floor
Breakroom 213 Basidiospores – 200
Smuts/Myxomycetes – 13
196
FCG Environmental Asbestos, Lead & Mold Survey
March 6, 2023 323 Science Drive
Moorpark, CA 93021
City of Moorpark-37, 323 Science Dr., Prel Mold Asmt Rpt.doc 9
Sample
ID
Sample
Location
Total Count
(s/m3)
Mold Types Detected
(s/m3)
OS-1 SE of Building
Outside/Background 597
Basidiospores – 330
Smuts/Myxomycetes – 120
Penicillium/Aspergillus – 67
Alternaria – 40
Ascospores – 27
Aureobasidium – 13
All data reported in spores per cubic meter (s/m3).
Please see the attached lab report for additional information.
Air Sample Results Summary:
• Samples A-1 and A-2 were found to have total airborne mold spore
concentrations that were elevated above the outdoor background level detected
at the time of our inspection (1,025 & 1,043 s/m3 inside vs. 597 s/m3 outside).
• Samples A-3 through A-6 were all found to have total airborne mold spore
concentrations that were below or comparable to the detected outdoor
background level (213 – 643 s/m3 inside vs. 597 s/m3 outside).
• The majority of the individual mold types detected in all six indoor air samples
were found to be comparable to or within the corresponding background levels.
A limited number of molds were detected indoors at levels above the outdoor
background, but at such low levels that they should not pose a health risk or
indication of indoor contamination.
• One minor exception was Penicillium/Aspergillus mold types which were found to
be slightly elevated in Samples A-1 & A-3, with 270 & 200 s/m3 detected vs. 67
s/m3 outside. However, the normal outdoor range for Penicillium/Aspergillus in
outdoor air ranges from 107 (low) to 587 (high), with an average concentration of
213 s/m3. According to the Environmental Microbiology Laboratory (EMLab)
Reference Guide™, the levels of Pen/Asp detected in Samples A-1 & A-3 are
considered “Low-Medium” for CA outdoor levels (see Attachments). Based on
these findings, the Penicillium/Aspergillus levels are not significantly elevated
beyond what is normally found in the outdoor environment.
• Penicillium and Aspergillus are distinct and separate mold genera which appear
similar under direct microscopic examination methods and are therefore reported
together by the laboratory analyst. Penicillium and Aspergillus are xerophilic mold
species which means they can thrive in conditions with only limited water activity
or available moisture, often relying solely on humidity, colonizing organic
nutrients found in dust and dirt.
• Although Basidiospores and Cladosporium were found to be elevated above
background levels in Sample A-2 (470 s/m3 inside vs. 330 s/m3 outside for
Basidiospores and 440 s/m3 inside vs. 0 s/m3 outside for Cladosporium) the
detected levels of both of these mold types are considered “Low-Medium” for CA
outdoor levels. Basidiospores and Cladosporium ubiquitous outdoors and not
considered to be some of the more important mold types with regards to health
effects.
• Based on the air sampling analytical results, no concerns regarding significant
airborne mold spore amplification were indicated in any of the areas tested at the
time of our inspection.
197
FCG Environmental Asbestos, Lead & Mold Survey
March 6, 2023 323 Science Drive
Moorpark, CA 93021
City of Moorpark-37, 323 Science Dr., Prel Mold Asmt Rpt.doc 10
6.0 MOLD SURFACE SAMPLING
FCG collected eleven (11) surface tape-lift samples for analysis, three of which were
analyzed by direct microscopic examination using non-viable or non-culturable methods.
The other eight samples were put on HOLD at the laboratory pending future analysis if
requested. This section provides a summary of laboratory analytical data from the
analyzed samples only. Please refer to the attachments to this report for a full copy of
the laboratory analytical results and a copy of the chain-of-custody showing the
additional samples still on hold.
Tape-lift methods use a piece of transparent adhesive tape which is affixed to the area
of suspect mold growth, transferring the suspect mold spores and hyphal fragments from
the surface to the tape. Samples are placed in a sealed container, labeled and
forwarded to a qualified laboratory for microscopic examination by a trained mycologist.
The analyst is often able to determine the presence of spores and attached hyphae or
mycelium which indicates actual growth at the area of the surface tested, providing an
estimate of the amount of growth on a scale of 0-5 using the following scale:
Table 2: Non-Viable Surface Sample Results
Sample ID Sample Location Mold Growth Observed*
T-6 N Cubicle Area
Top of T-bar Ceiling Tile on 2nd Floor
Penicillium – 5
Cladosporium – 3
Alternaria – 1
T-7
N Cubicle Area
N Concrete Wall Above Suspended
Ceiling on 2nd Floor
Cladosporium – 5
Stachybotrys – 3
Aspergillus – 1
T-8 S Cubicle Area
E Fabric Windowsill on 2nd Floor
Cladosporium – 5
Chaetomium – 4
Alternaria, Thielaviopsis – 1
Mold growth is reported using the following scale:
0 = no growth (miscellaneous spores, indicative of normal settling of air flora)
1 = sparse/minimal growth (1 -20% coverage)
2 = limited growth (21-40% coverage)
3 = moderate growth (41-60% coverage)
4 = extensive growth (61-80% coverage)
5 = nearly confluent growth (81-100% coverage)
The following samples were collected during our survey and placed on hold at the laboratory:
• T-1: Lobby planter box (wood) on 1st floor
• T-2: NE Office, near concrete wall at NE roof drain on 1st floor
• T-3: South Warehouse, lower south wall
• T-4: Breakroom, acoustic ceiling tile on 1st floor
• T-5: Mop closet, lower north wall on 1st floor
• T-9: SW Cubicle area, fabric window sill on south wall at 2nd floor
• T-10: SW corner office, drywall near roof drain chase on 2nd floor
• T-11: Breakroom, west concrete wall above ceiling on 2nd floor
Note: These samples can be analyzed upon request. Please call FCG for additional information.
198
FCG Environmental Asbestos, Lead & Mold Survey
March 6, 2023 323 Science Drive
Moorpark, CA 93021
City of Moorpark-37, 323 Science Dr., Prel Mold Asmt Rpt.doc 11
Surface Sample Results Summary:
• Surface sample T-6, collected from the ceiling tile in the north cubicle area,
indicated nearly confluent growth of Penicillium, moderate growth of
Cladosporium and sparse growth of Alternaria.
• Surface sample T-7, collected from the upper concrete wall in the north cubicle
area, indicated nearly confluent growth of Cladosporium, moderate growth of
Stachybotrys and sparse growth of Aspergillus.
• Surface sample T-8, collected from the east windowsill in the north cubicle area,
indicated nearly confluent growth of Cladosporium, extensive growth of
Chaetomium and sparse growth of Alternaria and Thielaviopsis.
• Mold remediation is recommended based on surface sample results and visual
observations of water intrusion, water damage and other evidence.
7.0 CONCLUSIONS & RECOMMENDATIONS
Conclusions: FCG has completed an asbestos and lead survey of the subject site,
along with preliminary mold & moisture assessment activities. Based on our
observations and evaluation of laboratory analytical data, we conclude the following:
• Asbestos: No asbestos was found within the subject site based on laboratory
analysis of various suspect building materials. This is consistent with the age of
the building, as asbestos was largely removed from commercial use at the time
of building construction (~1988). No asbestos concerns were found within the
subject site.
• Lead Paint and Lead Components: No regulated levels of lead were detected
in any of the components tested (ceramic tiles, porcelain fixtures) using XRF
screening methods. Based on the age of the building (~1988), lead-based paint
had been banned from commercial and residential use for approximately 10
years (1978). No lead paint or lead components were found at the subject site.
• Mold & Moisture Assessment: As part of the site inspection project, FCG
conducted a visual inspection for evidence of mold growth and water intrusion,
with air and surface samples collected to document site conditions prior to
occupancy and proposed renovations. The following is a summary of our mold
and moisture assessment findings:
o Water intrusion from roofing and window leaks has impacted the building,
with damaged and stained areas found on both floors, primarily on the
north and south sides of the building. Significant water staining was also
noted in the corners of the building in the vicinity of the roof drain piping.
o Water staining was noted on suspended ceiling tiles in various locations,
likely the result of roofing leaks or plumbing leaks from water systems or
other sources.
o All moisture readings from representative surfaces and building materials
were within the normal, dry range (<15% on wood scale) at the time of the
inspection, indicating that building materials had dried out.
199
FCG Environmental Asbestos, Lead & Mold Survey
March 6, 2023 323 Science Drive
Moorpark, CA 93021
City of Moorpark-37, 323 Science Dr., Prel Mold Asmt Rpt.doc 12
o Based on surface tape-lift sample results, mold growth was documented
in several areas, including ceiling tiles (Sample T-6) and upper concrete
walls (Sample T-7) and on fabric wall coverings on windowsill areas
(Sample T-8). Additional surface samples were collected from areas of
suspected mold growth and were placed on hold to stay within our
original cost estimate. These samples can be analyzed upon request.
o Air samples were collected from representative areas throughout the
building with mold spore counts largely within the background levels
found outdoors. A slight elevation of Penicillium/Aspergillus spore counts
was noted in two indoor air samples on the 1st floor (A-1, lobby/hallway
and A-3, warehouse), with counts of 270 and 200 respectively, vs. 67
outdoors. This may be evidence of mold growth indoors, as significant
Penicillium growth was also noted on at least one surface sample.
Although these findings may not pose a significant health risk to
occupants, the elevated spore counts are indicative of mold amplification
warranting remedial efforts to return the site to a normal background
condition.
Summary: Based on our preliminary investigation, no asbestos or lead conditions were
found. However, water intrusion has resulted in mold growth and water damage which
will warrant remediation efforts to return the site to a normal, background condition.
Please see the mold remediation recommendations below and the attached Standard
Mold Remediation Protocol for additional information.
Mold Recommendations: Based on our field observations and laboratory results, we
recommend a qualified contractor perform the following action items:
Note: Recommendations are based on understanding that the interior of the site will be
significantly renovated, including removal of existing ceilings, flooring, wall coverings and
other finishes. We recommend that the following action items be conducted by a trained
and experienced mold remediation contractor, using appropriate controls and
containment to prevent cross-contamination from mold spore emissions.
1. Remove all stained and damaged acoustic ceiling tiles from areas of roofing
leaks or other water intrusion. Dispose of stained or water damaged batt
insulation where found. Impacted areas were noted primarily on the 2nd floor in
the North cubicle area and west side in Break Room and office areas.
2. Areas of stained concrete walls should be abrasively cleaned to remove surface
growth and staining. This includes the 2nd floor areas above the suspended
ceiling, including north wall and west wall (break room) and 1st floor in the NE
corner (near roof drain), SE and SW corners (near roof drains).
3. Areas of damaged and stained wall fabric on windowsills and other areas should
be removed and the exposed substrate abrasively cleaned to remove any growth
sites.
200
FCG Environmental Asbestos, Lead & Mold Survey
March 6, 2023 323 Science Drive
Moorpark, CA 93021
City of Moorpark-37, 323 Science Dr., Prel Mold Asmt Rpt.doc 13
4. Wood framing above the suspended ceilings and the underside of the exposed
roof deck should be inspected for evidence of water staining, mold growth and
similar concerns. These areas should be abrasively cleaned and encapsulated
as needed to abate active mold growth or water damage. All areas of active
leaks must be identified with emphasis on roof drains, with repairs conducted to
prevent future roof leaks. A qualified roofing contractor should be retained to
inspect the roof and drainage systems and conduct repairs as necessary.
5. We recommend conducting general HEPA cleaning and air scrubbing throughout
the interior areas to ensure air quality is returned to a normal, background
condition. Please see the attached Standard Mold Remediation Protocol for
additional details on mold remediation practices and procedures.
6. Please contact FCG Environmental for names of qualified remediation
contractors or if you have any questions or concerns regarding this information.
201
FCG Environmental Asbestos, Lead & Mold Survey
March 6, 2023 323 Science Drive
Moorpark, CA 93021
City of Moorpark-37, 323 Science Dr., Prel Mold Asmt Rpt.doc 14
Limitations Statement
The data compiled and evaluated as part of this assessment was limited and may not
represent all conditions at the subject site. Mold infestation normally occurs within areas
hidden from view (i.e., crawlspaces, wall cavities, plumbing chases, etc.), making it
difficult to locate and define microbial contamination issues. Air and bulk sampling can
provide some guidance but should not be considered definitive. This assessment
reflects the data collected from specific locations tested to identify microbial conditions in
those locations and therefore, should not be considered comprehensive or all
encompassing. The findings from this report have been based solely upon the
subjective evaluation of limited data collected during this assessment. All data
collection, findings, conclusions and recommendations presented within this report are
based upon limited data using current standard practices accepted within the industry.
The data collected during this assessment and any resulting recommendations shall be
used only by the client for the site described in this report. Any use or reliance of this
report, including any of its information or recommendations by a third party without the
explicit authorization of FCG or the client shall be strictly at the risk of the third party.
Currently there are no federal or state standards for the assessment or abatement of
microbiological contaminated sites. No acceptable thresholds or health standards have
been implemented for mold exposure. Biological pollutants found at elevated
concentrations have the potential to cause impacts to human health. These impacts may
be limited to allergic reactions such as nasal congestion, watery eyes, runny nose,
sneezing, coughing, itching or similar responses. Other responses may include fatigue,
headaches, or more serious health problems such as asthma, viral infections, fevers,
various forms of pneumonia, and similar respiratory problems. Responses will differ
greatly between individuals depending on a number of factors, such as the sensitivity of
the individual to a particular biological pollutant and their pre-existing health conditions.
Forbess Consulting Group, Inc. cannot and will not provide medical advice or opinions
as to the associated health problems encountered from exposure to biological pollutants.
If individuals are experiencing symptoms, they should consult their personal physician or
an appropriate medical care provider.
If you have any questions or concerns regarding the information provided, please do not
hesitate to call us at 805.646.1995.
_________________________
Alan Forbess, Principal Consultant
Attachments: Asbestos Laboratory Report & Bulk Sample Log
Table of XRF Field Readings for Lead
Mold Laboratory Analytical Report with Chain-of-Custody
Field Plots showing mold sample locations, notes, etc.
FCG Staff Certifications
Standard Mold Remediation Protocol
202
Attachments
Asbestos Laboratory Analytical Reports
Table of XRF Field Readings for Lead
Mold Laboratory Analytical Report
Plot Plans with Field Notes
FCG Staff Certifications
Standard Mold Remediation Protocol
203
McCall and Spero
Environmental, Inc.
Specialists in Microanalysis
Date: February 22, 2023
Attention: Alan Forbess
FCG Environmental
1831 Will ia mson Court • Suite 100 • Lou isville, KY 4 022 3
Phone (502) 244-7135 • FAX (502) 244-7136
E-mail : customerservice@mselabs.com • Website: www.mselabs.com
Subject: Analysis of bulk samples for asbestos mineral fibers by Polarized Light
Microscopy (PLM) with Dispersion Staining (EPA/600/R-93/116)
RE: MSE-P2173FCG
Dear Mr. Forbess:
City of Moorpark -37 Future City Hall Project
FCG# City of Moorpark -3 7
McCall & Spero Environmental, Inc. has completed the analysis of the bulk samples we received
from your offices on February 17, 2023. These samples represent the bulk samples from the City
of Moorpark -37 Future City Hall Project.
The PLM bulk analysis was performed according to the "M ethod of the Determination of
Asbestos in Bulk Building Materials", R. L. Perkins and B. W. Harve y (EPA/600/R-93/l 16).
The results for the sixty-two (62) samples are summarized in the following report. Please note
that for samples consisting of two or more distinct compone nts, each component is analyzed and
reported individually (EPA 40 CFR Part 61 [FRL-4821-71 ]).
Thank you for cons ulting McCall & Spero Environmental, Inc. Should you have any questions
concerning these results, please contact our office.
Sincerely ,
~~
K e vin R. Bean, B.A.
PLM Laboratory Director
204
SUMMARY OF PLM BULK ANALYSIS RESULTS
Page I
Project Name: City of Moorpark -37 Future City Hall Project
M C 11 & S E . 1 P . N MSE P2 l 73FCG C a >Pero nvironmenta ro1ect 0. -
MSE # SAMPLE# ASBESTOS OTHER FIBROUS % NON -FIBROUS
P2173FCG DESCRIPTION TYPE&% MATERIAL&% MATE RIAL
1 Cellulose / 5%
001 Carpet Mastic ND** Synthetics / 5% 90%
2 Cellulose / 5%
002 Carpet Mastic ND** Svnthetics / 5% 90%
3 (A)
003 (A) Cove Base ND** Cellulose / 2% 98%
3 (B)
003 (B) Mastic N D** Cellulose / 5% 95%
4 (A)
004 (A) Cove Base ND** Cellulose/ 2% 98%
4 (B)
004 (B) Mastic ND** Cellulose / 5% 95%
5 (A)
005 (A) Drywall ND Cellulose/ 10% 90%
5 (B)
005 (B) Joint Compound ND Cellulose / 5% 95%
6 (A)
006 (A) Drywall ND Cellulose / 10% 90%
6 (B)
006 (B) Joint Compound ND Cellulose/ 5% 95%
7 (A)
007 (A) Drywall ND Cellulose / 10% 90%
7 (B)
007 (B) Joint Compound ND Cellulose / 5% 95%
8 (A)
008 (A) Drywall ND Cellulose / 10% 90%
8 (B)
008 (B) Joint Compound ND Cellulose / 5% 95%
9 (A)
009 (A) Drywall ND Cellulose/ l 0% 90%
COLOR
Yellow
Yellow
Gray
White
Gray
White
White
White
White
White
White
White
White
White
White
McCall & Spero Environmental, Inc.
205
MSE #
P2173FCG
009 (B)
010 (A)
010 (B)
011 (A)
011 (B)
012 (A)
012 (B)
013
014
015
016 (A)
016 (B)
017
018
019
SUMMARY OF PLM BULK ANALYSIS RESULTS
Page2
SAMPLE # ASBESTOS OTHER FIBROUS % NON-FIBROUS
DESCRJPTION TYPE&% MATERIAL&% MATERIAL
9 (B)
Joint Compound ND Cellulose I 5% 95%
10 (A)
VFT ND** Cellulose/ 2% 98%
10 (B)
Mastic ND** Cellulose / 5% 95%
11 (A)
VFT ND** Cellulose I 2% 98%
11 (B)
Mastic ND** Cellulose I 5% 95%
12 (A)
VFT ND** Cellulose I 2% 98%
12 (B)
Mastic ND** Cellulose I 5% 95%
13 Cellulose I 20%
Ceiling Tile ND Glass/ 30% 50%
14 Cellulose I 20%
Ceiling Tile N D Glass/ 30% 50%
15 Cellulose/ 20%
Ceiling Tile ND Glass / 30% 50%
16 (A)
Drywall ND Cellulose / 10% 90%
16 (B)
Joint Compound ND Cellulose / 5% 95%
17
Grout ND** Cellulose/ 3% 97%
18
Grout ND** Cellulose I 3% 97%
19 Cellulose/ 5%
Carpet Mastic ND** Synthetics / 5% 90%
COLOR
White
Grav
Yellow
Gray
Yellow
Gray
Yellow
Tan
Tan
Tan
White
White
Gray
Gray
Yellow
McCall & Spero Environmental, Inc.
206
MSE #
P2173 FCG
020 (A)
020 (B)
021 (A)
021 (B)
022 (A)
022 (B)
023 (A)
023 (B)
024 (A)
024 (B)
025 (A)
025 (B)
026
027
028
SUMMARY OF PLM BULK ANALYSIS RESULTS
Page 3
SAMPLE# ASBESTOS OTHER FIBROUS % NON-FIBROUS
DESCRIPTION TYPE&% MATERIAL&% MATERIAL
20 (A)
Drywall ND** Cellulose/ 10% 90%
20 (B)
Joint Compound ND Cellulose / 5% 95%
21 (A)
Drywall N D Cellulose/ 10% 90%
21 (B)
Joint Compound ND Cellulose/ 5% 95%
22 (A)
Drywall ND Cellulose / 10% 90%
22 (B)
Joint Compound ND Cellulose / 5% 95%
23 (A)
Drywall ND Cellulose I l 0% 90%
23 (B)
Joint Compound N D Cellulose / 5% 95%
24 (A)
Drywall ND Cellulose / I 0% 90%
24 (B)
Joint Compound ND Cellulose / 5% 95%
25 (A)
Drywall ND Cellulose / 10% 90%
25 (B)
Joint Compound ND Cellulose I 5% 95%
26 Cellulose I 20%
Ceiling Tile ND Glass/ 30% 50%
27 Cellulose / 20%
Ceiling Tile ND Glass / 30% 50%
28 Cellulose I 20%
Ceiling Tile ND Glass/ 30% 50%
COLOR
White
White
White
White
White
White
White
White
White
White
White
White
White
White
White
McCall & Spero Environmental, Inc.
207
MSE #
P2 173FCG
029
030
031
032 (A)
032 (B)
033 (A)
033 (B)
034 (A)
034 (B)
035
036
037
038
039
040
SUMMARY OF PLM BULK ANALYSIS RESULTS
Page4
SAMPLE# ASBESTOS OTHER FIBROUS % NON-FIBROUS
DESCRIPTlON TYPE&% MATERIAL&% MATERIAL
29 Cellulose/ 20%
Ceiling Tile ND Glass/ 30% 50%
30
Grout ND** Cellulose/ 3% 97%
31
Grout ND** Cellulose/ 3% 97%
32 (A)
Rubber Floor ND** Cellulose I 3% 97%
32 (B)
Mastic ND** Cellulose/ 5% 95%
33 (A)
VFT ND** Cellulose I 2% 98%
33 (B)
Mastic ND** Cellulose / 5% 95%
34 (A)
VFT ND** Cellulose/ 2% 98%
34 (B)
Mastic N D** Cellulose/ 5% 95%
35 Cellulose / 10%
Roof Layer ND** Glass/ 10% 80%
36 Cellulose / 10%
Roof Layer ND** Glass/ 10% 80%
37 Cellulose/ 10%
Roof Layer ND** Glass / 10% 80%
38 Cellulose / 10%
Roof Layer ND** Glass / 10% 80%
39
Roof Mastic ND** Cellulose / 5% 95%
40
Roof Mastic ND** Cellulose / 5% 95%
COLOR
White
Gray
Gray
Gray
White
Gray
Yellow
Gray
Yellow
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
Black
McCall & Spero Environmental, Inc.
208
MSE #
P2173FCG
041
042
NOTES:
ND = None Detected
CR = Crocidolite
SUMMARY OF PLM BULK ANALYSIS RESULTS
Page 5
SAMPLE # ASB E STOS OTHER FIBROUS % NON-FIBROUS
DESCRIPTION TYPE&% MATERIAL&% MATER[AL
41
Roof Mastic ND** Cellulose / 5% 95%
42
Roof Mastic ND** Cellulose / 5% 95%
CH = Chrysotile A = Amosite AC = Actinolite
AN = Anthophyllite TR= Tremolite
COLOR
Black
Black
For samples consisting of separate components, each component is analyzed and reported separately.
Results apply only to items tested. Quantification is accurate to within ± 10%. Results from this report must
not be reproduced, except in full , with the approval of McCall & Spero Environmental, Inc. This report must
not be used to claim product endorsement by NVLAP or any agency of the U.S. Government.
** EPA recommends that bulk materials found negative for asbestos or less than one percent asbestos by
polarized light microscopy that fall into one of five dominantly nonfriable categories be reanalyzed by an
additional method, such as transmission electron microscopy. (EPA Notice of Advis ory, FR Vol. 59, No. 146
& Test Method EPA 600/ R-93/ l 16).
Analyst: Taylor B Parmly 1 C\@D \ ~ ®j
McCall & Spero Environmental, Inc.
209
McCall and Spero
c ,·t" -r t9li In Williamson Court• Suite 100 • Louisv ille, KY 40223
Phone (502) 244-7135 • FAX (502) 244 -7 136
Specialists in M icroanalysis E-mail: customerservice@mselabs.com • Website: www.mselabs.com
BULK SAMPLE CHAIN OF CUSTODY FORM
Company: Fe& £tvV1✓2'u,v,;'1'£.V14-l--Telephone# fo~ (1/6-/'l 'JS-Fax#:
Contact: .4L4N ;=v;e,a ~S S Client Project Number: CIT oP ,A?c oll.f'/.1:l!,/c·
Relinquished by: _______________ Date: 2/ / t:/ 2 T ime: 3 :-o ,,
WrittenReportTo: ,/fro/c.(5£..5.-.S t:_ /=-CGCtV(,/1/cD ·C6r"J,
Project Name: C'/7' or-/?7PPr't.lnlZ/c, S 7 h:,,1v/Zc Ct 'rl.. /+4-L L
Turn-Around (Circle One): Same Day 24 Hour ~ 4-5 Day Weekend Rush After Hour Rush
Anal sis Re uested Circle One : LM Bulk Anal sis TEM Qualitative Anal sis TEM uantitative Anal sis 4-5 Da
For laboratory Use 011/y
MSE Projec; # Y2. \] tJf C{Q
Samples Received by: _} ... ~-------------
Method: EPA/600/R-93/116
Date: 2 I \1 !23 Time: \ONA
Client Sample Location Sample Desc.-iption Sampled By Number
J-'-12 .S ~ £ ~--r4c11£D WG-S
210
/o,cy
FCG Environmental Inc.
Asbestos Bulk Sampling Field Log
Date: 2/16/23
Client: crry c t= /'1tJ<7/Z/'1A~K...
Site: J'23 Sc., E IV((. 01<..
Project: c, ry of!' />I v()/2!1PlP -5 7
lnspector(s): w n /!Sr-
Area/Unit:
Sample• Material-Samaili location
t G4~E:'.;-/J'Ms7iL
, ..s ·r ~f.h;,,/6 £.IJ(,)P-1 ,:LA()/l_
2 ), ~l. ) ,JC g ..,1..<-P~ a '2.£4
3 ~ 11 G/2.C y
c v-./Cf?AS'i w/ .,-:12A--. !V • IV f. 12..o v ~ M/'J':rn L
'f '-)~ l N S:. (? ...._p '!C\.i ,.q,uA -w / ::IlJ, ,vr ' s P12V i..J.Q z..L-('o /1"),t' /Yl. f.,.✓ $ R_f. S T rZ...c Q"l-\
t \ \ l,N o .('),J c.,,./ s eL i •nz .. , =-~
7 J
tJ£ (3J_\...{)£._,v 4'2~
~ ( I
l'J!A) R'c... ~ i V 1,,J 6 .i_.., i) ,..,,..._
7
I
_L, I,,~ S F f2.\J<.R.... e_0of1-1
/ () /I V'-"1/YY\--3',;-L
I\JW /l_E.C...£1 ✓JtVC::. !m--:1 ; ?... vr-7 Ga.LY
' ' ' II I f.J w ..s ;"A-d i... CA,J P .. ;v 6
I I j
I z__ ) /'.<.u .;>r..,
<-, r,., . ..,. ...L \i~ ~ {2_1C. 1-1\l pVl,
Friable: Friability Codes: N=Non-friab1e; F=Friable
Cond: Condition Codes: G=Good; F=Fair; P=Poor
Quantity
""T"'/o
)
--
T7.::>
\
I
(
\
J
i<i"D Sr-
I
• _J
l !/
NA=Not Analyzed
ND=Detected
N=Negative
~ Alu w
.S~,(2 (AtvO,r/CI
{ iA-z..t..-'{_
N W Q[c f,\.4 N6
frlablllty
f')
....
\
\
I
)
\
~ 'J
6
\
\
I
I
)
. J .
211
FCG Environmental Inc.
Asbestos Bulk Sampling Field Log
Date: 2//6/Z..5
Client: c ,,../ or ,-»ot,/l..~1L
Site: 3 2-'3 sc 1LA1L c ,cYZ-.
Project: C117 of !"111 v1t#.YZL-~7
lnspector(s ): lv'l""1 I ~p
Area/Unit:
:_,..,:_I llaterlal __ ..:_:
)]
. 01?...oP C'£,/t..;N£ 2)(2 T1, .. :,;:.s
I'-/ ) \
1S-J_ 1,
/6 w{ ;rr, .. v,
()12.YvJAu.-t"O r?1 (). .
17 ... ~~ Tl(.(. 6/2.0v,
IY FL.c v e----n1-e. 6 /LcD-r-
/7 • C/.+1Z~ ,-,/'J'v'H r, L
2v .. , c O v"€ ~ l. W (
b G (lE,-/ .M~ rJ I
2i C>r<yw4<...t,..
(,..I/ ✓ChN ,-
co ff}f?
22 ."'\ \
23 / I
l -zy .... L, \ ..._ ,_
I
... Location
/S, T/2,4-,,,/JN & QL·O /)'\
Ft-ootZ..
) €,{Ut:l I<:.. /2,::,o /1-\.
I .1,-fZV)-
..... .ti' NG-B v u..Puv
I Nf.. ~Ft<..c:r '-'4-L-<--
\ 12.£5~D ~ fYJ(NS
'/ .l l
2µ0
Ft .nuc'L S w of>~ or-F,c.z
'
.... :7 --' ~
I 'S,.b t:J71./ <·o fllt=" /2!>1 .
'
'
fYJ ,(!11£ ll.£~7/l,.,~ M
Friable: Friability Codes: N=Non-friable; F=Friable
Cond: Condition Codes: G=Good; F=Fair; P=Poor
--·---
r-/~
\
~
-r70
,-/. ...
T/o
I IC)
' \
I
NA=Not Analyzed
ND=Detected
N=Negative
.. Area . -
12. (5 ;-,z_ 0 i).,., s k
e£~;""'2..oont5 4
'-'4-t:-L..-I!"'~--
Frlabllity
r-
' l
I\ i
)
j ,, ,.., .
I
\
' \
.1 w~/J'J~f'\J-J ~~:-a..:..,.,,.11 j/ .L
Concllllon
6
\
l
c..
1
\
I
(
-\
I
j
'
.... i.--
212
FCG Environmental Inc.
Asbestos Bulk Sampling Field Log
Date: 2//6/23
Client: c/TY vr-J?tc,v;t,~l<C-
Site: 52'3 ~C I 'i.ll/ C. .£ 1)12 .
Project: (/ r--y o I'" l)1ov£. t;,q...'2./,? -:? 7
lnspector(s): J,,v /1'? I z.,c
Area/Unit:
-• • Matertal-. . SamDle Location
2:;-t./ I J1J /IV,--::zµo IV£ [5.,..LfJOV Dl<.'/t,,A,1,,,__ c'v -,,,P . Pl-i:otl. -/.lQ...-(..4
26 ' 0 /ltJI° C£.,c.,,,,v-i ' 2x2 -r, L <. .S I SfN' 6P-r/(_£
27 \ ) .5o t/ '"i7 I
f3vuPu/
~{./1
Zfr ( '£Lf-v/J,-;-zfi.. l-/.✓-Y L l..
zJ l j/ ;v 1£_ /?viL ?z-n/ 1¥-i:A ..... "'
Jo "1.J,4-1./4.,, T7L~ CtZa v r ) ,.
/J1&-v..J /Lf.ST_t2c.,c/Vf.
71 0 c:(2.. 7h.<£ 6/2.11;)1 ( i j_
72 R. uBBfa. H,..;dl, ,., 6
i .J ( (Ylllt.$,., l ) ---J\_/ W'L.> I C't-.:JS4... ,-
?3 ,"r 6--'/ "I ST E <-E c. , fl. u i,/1--1 12 &/(.[7 vrr ~PL r(.,.1;,, .. ,7
5/ -i -b I. ~
3'~ /2-ooP l,A.7'1ue,_g ._§t h> 7)-f c'cv'O
36 -t-j_ Mu:? ,v,oP
Friable: Friability Codes: N=Non-friable; F=Friable
Cond: Condition Codes: G=Good; F=Fair; P=Poor
QuaniiiY
Tlo
' I
I
J
l
-...J /
;::..
f/o -=j
)J-?
7/o ~
/2a SP
i
T/0
j_
NA=Not Analyzed
ND=Detected
N=Negative
. ·---=Area I
p_ brfZ..,c.. ,,,_,...5
Qt.,S ;-;z_J ._,r,,, ~ (
Q..ei:-~ f!_...,;,r>'\.
C' L-v.S E";--s
F, ..
IV
r-
\
t
IV
..
...,,
I
-t
Condition
d
G
'\
I
:,
c;
)
j~
r
l
F
l
213
FCG Environmental Inc.
Asbestos Bulk Sampling Field Log
Date: 2//612..<
Client: C';Tyo~ /J7 o(.)/l P4--'2-r<!..
Site: s27 SC. (£N C[_ 012...
Project: ~,r7 oP /71ooltf.?Afl. 1-L--5 I
lnspector(s): l,//>t / -;r/7"
Area/Unit:
-. --Location
37 /u.,u~ tA-7&2..S fvC/1.,,7rf-~D
3? l -l. l,,v £SI~-;-t<fa-l,L,,
?3 12..ao /> /1'1/.f;S T7 L, f, f> t Pct'-1 .1 TW-Frro .. v
y'Q '\ \ P, iZlf Poc,L~r('
'11 J / Cv<LO ~11c
l/2
I /Jr¥2A f'f: .. -W,,,tf <-l--1 0 ~
~ -.... v I m,,q;f1/(..
Friable: Friability Codes: N=Non-friable; F=Friable
Cond: Condition Codes: G=Good; F=Fair; P=Poor
.
-r70
J_
60 SP.
2c.t $f=.
770 Sf'
Soc, L<-
I
NA=Not Analyzed
ND=Detected
N=Negative
-· ArN .
,PiPE / l}i:.rvTJ
~. <' i ~.,,J ,
Sca.Ucv ~ ... P!'ut:..7'!.
C v/Z.t:, S
(?,!:'AD 6 r ..:, WA--<
ft, p 'lz .,'-,t:I'>
I
Frtablllty
,J
)
-r
\
~
Condlllon
p
\
\
I
J
(
~
214
Table of XRF Lead Readings
323 Science Drive
Moorpark, CA 93021
1
Component Substrate Side Condition Color Floor Area Results Lead
Mg/cm2
CALIBRATE Positive 1.1
CALIBRATE Positive 1
CALIBRATE Positive 1.1
WALL CERAMIC TILE A INTACT LIGHT PINK FIRST WOMENS HALLWAY RR Negative 0
WALL CERAMIC TILE A INTACT PURPLE ACCENT FIRST WOMENS HALLWAY RR Negative 0.01
FLOOR CERAMIC TILE A INTACT PURPLE FIRST WOMENS HALLWAY RR Negative 0
FLOOR CERAMIC TILE A INTACT LIGHT PINK ACCENT FIRST WOMENS HALLWAY RR Negative 0
SINK PORC C INTACT WHITE FIRST WOMENS HALLWAY RR Negative 0.01
TOILET PORC C INTACT WHITE FIRST WOMENS HALLWAY RR Negative 0
TOILET PORC A INTACT WHITE FIRST MENS HALLWAY RR Negative 0.02
URINAL PORC A INTACT WHITE FIRST MENS HALLWAY RR Negative 0
SINK PORC A INTACT WHITE FIRST MENS HALLWAY RR Negative 0
WALL CERAMIC TILE C INTACT LIGHT GREY FIRST MENS HALLWAY RR Negative 0
WALL CERAMIC TILE C INTACT DARK GREY ACCENT FIRST MENS HALLWAY RR Negative 0.01
FLOOR CERAMIC TILE C INTACT BLUE FIRST MENS HALLWAY RR Negative 0
FLOOR CERAMIC TILE C INTACT LIGHT PURPLE ACCENT FIRST MENS HALLWAY RR Negative 0.03
FLOOR CERAMIC TILE C INTACT BLUE FIRST HALLWAY MOP CLOSET Negative 0
MOP SINK PORC C INTACT WHITE FIRST HALLWAY MOP CLOSET Negative 0
WALL DRYWALL D INTACT WHITE FIRST HALLWAY MOP CLOSET Negative 0
FLOOR CERAMIC TILE D INTACT LIGHT GREY FIRST HALLWAY Negative 0
FLOOR CERAMIC TILE D INTACT DARK GREY FIRST BREAK ROOM Negative 0.03
FLOOR CERAMIC TILE D INTACT OFF-WHITE ACCENT FIRST BREAK ROOM Negative 0.01
FLOOR CERAMIC TILE A INTACT BLUE ACCENT FIRST LOBBY Negative 0
FLOOR CERAMIC TILE A INTACT LIGHT GREY FIRST LOBBY Negative 0.02
FLOOR CERAMIC TILE A INTACT DARK GREY SECOND EXECUTIVE RR Negative 0
WALL CERAMIC TILE A INTACT DARK GREY SECOND EXECUTIVE RR Negative 0
FLOOR CERAMIC TILE A INTACT DARK BLUE ACCENT SECOND EXECUTIVE RR Negative 0
TOILET PORC A INTACT WHITE SECOND EXECUTIVE RR Negative 0
215
Table of XRF Lead Readings (Continued) 323 Science Drive
2
Component Substrate Side Condition Color Floor Area Results Lead
Mg/cm2
SINK PORC D INTACT WHITE SECOND EXECUTIVE RR Negative 0.02
SINK PORC D INTACT WHITE SECOND HALLWAY WOMENS RR Negative 0
TOILET PORC D INTACT WHITE SECOND HALLWAY WOMENS RR Negative 0.01
WALL CERAMIC TILE D INTACT LIGHT PINK SECOND HALLWAY WOMENS RR Negative 0.01
WALL CERAMIC TILE D INTACT PURPLE ACCENT SECOND HALLWAY WOMENS RR Negative 0.02
FLOOR CERAMIC TILE D INTACT PURPLE SECOND HALLWAY WOMENS RR Negative 0
FLOOR CERAMIC TILE D INTACT BEIGE ACCENT SECOND HALLWAY WOMENS RR Negative 0.02
FLOOR CERAMIC TILE D INTACT DARK PINK SECOND MOP CLOSET Negative 0
MOP SINK PORC C INTACT WHITE SECOND MOP CLOSET Negative 0
WALL DRYWALL C INTACT WHITE SECOND MOP CLOSET Negative 0
CEILING DRYWALL C INTACT WHITE SECOND HALLWAY MENS RR Negative 0
WALL CERAMIC TILE C INTACT LIGHT BLUE SECOND HALLWAY MENS RR Negative 0.01
WALL CERAMIC TILE C INTACT DARK BLUE ACCENT SECOND HALLWAY MENS RR Negative 0.01
FLOOR CERAMIC TILE C INTACT GREY SECOND HALLWAY MENS RR Negative 0
FLOOR CERAMIC TILE C INTACT WHITE ACCENT SECOND HALLWAY MENS RR Negative 0.01
SINK PORC A INTACT WHITE SECOND HALLWAY MENS RR Negative 0.01
URINAL PORC A INTACT WHITE SECOND HALLWAY MENS RR Negative 0
TOILET PORC A INTACT WHITE SECOND HALLWAY MENS RR Negative 0.02
FLOOR CERAMIC TILE A INTACT LIGHT GREY SECOND BREAKROOM Negative 0
FLOOR CERAMIC TILE A INTACT DARK GREY ACCENT SECOND BREAKROOM Negative 0
CALIBRATE Positive 1.1
CALIBRATE Positive 1.1
CALIBRATE Positive 1.1
216
56222
Bioaerosol, non-culturable
Tape Sample
Fungal Microscopic Exam
Fungal Microscopic Exam
56222-R01
56222-R02
City of Moorpark - 37
02-17-2023
February 17, 2023
Blake Forbess
FCG Environmental
1009 Mercer Avenue
Ojai, California 93023
Ph. (805) 646-1995
Analytical Laboratory Report
FINAL REPORT
Project/PO:
Control ID #
Laura Parsons, Technical Director
Natural Link Mold Lab
1320 Freeport Blvd #104, Sparks NV 89431
Report submitted to:
Natural Link MOLD LAB
A subsidiary of
Asbestos TEM
Laboratories, Inc.
Received:
AIHA Lab ID 101754
217
Analytical Laboratory Report
Bioaerosol, non-culturable
Fungal Microscopic ExamNatural Link MOLD LAB
A subsidiary of
Asbestos TEM
Laboratories, Inc.
Account Name:
Blake ForbessSubmitter:
Project PO:02-17-2023Date Received:
56222Control ID #:
Date Reported:
Sample Identification:
City of Moorpark - 37
FCG Environmental
02-17-2023
Fungi Identified Sample Count (spores/sample)Calculated Count (spores/m3)
A-1. Lobby / Hallway 1st Floor; Allergenco-D Spore-trap; 75L; 2-16-2023 [S216191AA155982]
49 650Cladosporium
20 270Penicillium/Aspergillus
5 67Basidiospores
2 27Smuts/Myxomycetes
1 13Alternaria
Other Airborne Particles
Hyphal fragments
Pollen
Insect/arthropod parts
Fiberglass particles
Total biological particles
Total non-biological particles
None Detected
Detected /None Detected Particle Density (1-5)
TOTAL
Detected
None Detected
Detected
2
3
77 1 027
• Dominant fungal spores detected on the sample: Cladosporium.
• Sensitivity: 13 spores/cubic meter.
• See Summary Table (56222-R01A).
Summary of Findings
Report #:R01 Analysis Date:02-17-2023
Laboratory Results authorized by Laura Parsons, Mold Lab Technical Director
Natural Link MOLD LAB reports sample results as a record of the microbes identified by our analytical staff. Any guidance given with regards to sampling methods, interpretation of results, remediation,
health effects, or other information given to the client, beyond microbial identification, is given as general information from published sources and is not an extension of liability to Natural Link MOLD LAB
Natural Link MOLD LAB establishes responsibility over analysis completed in the laboratory but cannot establish responsibility for activities completed in the field by the client, other personnel associated
with the samples submitted, or other activities beyond the laboratory. All reports are confidential and are not to be reproduced, except in whole, without the permission of Natural Link MOLD LAB.
Natural Link MOLD LAB, 1320 Freeport Blvd., #104, Sparks, NV 89431 phone: (775) 359-3377 1
56222-
-----------------
218
Analytical Laboratory Report
Bioaerosol, non-culturable
Fungal Microscopic ExamNatural Link MOLD LAB
A subsidiary of
Asbestos TEM
Laboratories, Inc.
Account Name:
Blake ForbessSubmitter:
Project PO:02-17-2023Date Received:
56222Control ID #:
Date Reported:
Sample Identification:
City of Moorpark - 37
FCG Environmental
02-17-2023
Fungi Identified Sample Count (spores/sample)Calculated Count (spores/m3)
A-2. North Cubicle Area - 1st Floor; Allergenco-D Spore-trap; 75L; 2-16-2023 [S216192AA155983]
35 470Basidiospores
33 440Cladosporium
3 40Scopulariopsis/Microascus
2 27Alternaria
2 27Smuts/Myxomycetes
1 13Aureobasidium
1 13Botrytis
1 13Yeasts
Other Airborne Particles
Hyphal fragments
Pollen
Insect/arthropod parts
Fiberglass particles
Total biological particles
Total non-biological particles
Detected
Detected /None Detected Particle Density (1-5)
TOTAL
None Detected
Detected
Detected
3
3
78 1 043
• Dominant fungal spores detected on the sample: Basidiospores and Cladosporium.
• Sensitivity: 13 spores/cubic meter.
• See Summary Table (56222-R01A).
Summary of Findings
Report #:R01 Analysis Date:02-17-2023
Laboratory Results authorized by Laura Parsons, Mold Lab Technical Director
Natural Link MOLD LAB reports sample results as a record of the microbes identified by our analytical staff. Any guidance given with regards to sampling methods, interpretation of results, remediation,
health effects, or other information given to the client, beyond microbial identification, is given as general information from published sources and is not an extension of liability to Natural Link MOLD LAB
Natural Link MOLD LAB establishes responsibility over analysis completed in the laboratory but cannot establish responsibility for activities completed in the field by the client, other personnel associated
with the samples submitted, or other activities beyond the laboratory. All reports are confidential and are not to be reproduced, except in whole, without the permission of Natural Link MOLD LAB.
Natural Link MOLD LAB, 1320 Freeport Blvd., #104, Sparks, NV 89431 phone: (775) 359-3377 2
56222-
-----------------
219
Analytical Laboratory Report
Bioaerosol, non-culturable
Fungal Microscopic ExamNatural Link MOLD LAB
A subsidiary of
Asbestos TEM
Laboratories, Inc.
Account Name:
Blake ForbessSubmitter:
Project PO:02-17-2023Date Received:
56222Control ID #:
Date Reported:
Sample Identification:
City of Moorpark - 37
FCG Environmental
02-17-2023
Fungi Identified Sample Count (spores/sample)Calculated Count (spores/m3)
A-3. South Warehouse Space - 1st Floor; Allergenco-D Spore-trap; 75L; 2-16-2023
[S216193AA155984]
20 270Basidiospores
15 200Penicillium/Aspergillus
5 67Ascospores
5 67Cladosporium
1 13Aureobasidium
1 13Botrytis
1 13Periconia
Other Airborne Particles
Hyphal fragments
Pollen
Insect/arthropod parts
Fiberglass particles
Total biological particles
Total non-biological particles
None Detected
Detected /None Detected Particle Density (1-5)
TOTAL
Detected
None Detected
None Detected
2
2
48 643
• Dominant fungal spores detected on the sample: Basidiospores and Penicillium/Aspergillus.
• Sensitivity: 13 spores/cubic meter.
• See Summary Table (56222-R01A).
Summary of Findings
Report #:R01 Analysis Date:02-17-2023
Laboratory Results authorized by Laura Parsons, Mold Lab Technical Director
Natural Link MOLD LAB reports sample results as a record of the microbes identified by our analytical staff. Any guidance given with regards to sampling methods, interpretation of results, remediation,
health effects, or other information given to the client, beyond microbial identification, is given as general information from published sources and is not an extension of liability to Natural Link MOLD LAB
Natural Link MOLD LAB establishes responsibility over analysis completed in the laboratory but cannot establish responsibility for activities completed in the field by the client, other personnel associated
with the samples submitted, or other activities beyond the laboratory. All reports are confidential and are not to be reproduced, except in whole, without the permission of Natural Link MOLD LAB.
Natural Link MOLD LAB, 1320 Freeport Blvd., #104, Sparks, NV 89431 phone: (775) 359-3377 3
56222-
-----------------
220
Analytical Laboratory Report
Bioaerosol, non-culturable
Fungal Microscopic ExamNatural Link MOLD LAB
A subsidiary of
Asbestos TEM
Laboratories, Inc.
Account Name:
Blake ForbessSubmitter:
Project PO:02-17-2023Date Received:
56222Control ID #:
Date Reported:
Sample Identification:
City of Moorpark - 37
FCG Environmental
02-17-2023
Fungi Identified Sample Count (spores/sample)Calculated Count (spores/m3)
A-4. North Cubicle Area - 2nd Floor; Allergenco-D Spore-trap; 75L; 2-16-2023 [S216194AA155985]
20 270Basidiospores
5 67Penicillium/Aspergillus
2 27Cladosporium
2 27Rusts/Pucciniales
1 13Alternaria
1 13Scopulariopsis/Microascus
1 13Smuts/Myxomycetes
Other Airborne Particles
Hyphal fragments
Pollen
Insect/arthropod parts
Fiberglass particles
Total biological particles
Total non-biological particles
Detected
Detected /None Detected Particle Density (1-5)
TOTAL
Detected
Detected
Detected
3
4
32 430
• Dominant fungal spores detected on the sample: Basidiospores.
• Sensitivity: 13 spores/cubic meter.
• See Summary Table (56222-R01A).
Summary of Findings
Report #:R01 Analysis Date:02-17-2023
Laboratory Results authorized by Laura Parsons, Mold Lab Technical Director
Natural Link MOLD LAB reports sample results as a record of the microbes identified by our analytical staff. Any guidance given with regards to sampling methods, interpretation of results, remediation,
health effects, or other information given to the client, beyond microbial identification, is given as general information from published sources and is not an extension of liability to Natural Link MOLD LAB
Natural Link MOLD LAB establishes responsibility over analysis completed in the laboratory but cannot establish responsibility for activities completed in the field by the client, other personnel associated
with the samples submitted, or other activities beyond the laboratory. All reports are confidential and are not to be reproduced, except in whole, without the permission of Natural Link MOLD LAB.
Natural Link MOLD LAB, 1320 Freeport Blvd., #104, Sparks, NV 89431 phone: (775) 359-3377 4
56222-
-----------------
221
Analytical Laboratory Report
Bioaerosol, non-culturable
Fungal Microscopic ExamNatural Link MOLD LAB
A subsidiary of
Asbestos TEM
Laboratories, Inc.
Account Name:
Blake ForbessSubmitter:
Project PO:02-17-2023Date Received:
56222Control ID #:
Date Reported:
Sample Identification:
City of Moorpark - 37
FCG Environmental
02-17-2023
Fungi Identified Sample Count (spores/sample)Calculated Count (spores/m3)
A-5. South Cubicle Area - 2nd Floor; Allergenco-D Spore-trap; 75L; 2-16-2023 [S216195AA155986]
20 270Cladosporium
10 130Basidiospores
4 53Botrytis
1 13Alternaria
Other Airborne Particles
Hyphal fragments
Pollen
Insect/arthropod parts
Fiberglass particles
Total biological particles
Total non-biological particles
Detected
Detected /None Detected Particle Density (1-5)
TOTAL
Detected
None Detected
None Detected
2
3
35 466
• Dominant fungal spores detected on the sample: Cladosporium.
• Sensitivity: 13 spores/cubic meter.
• See Summary Table (56222-R01A).
Summary of Findings
Report #:R01 Analysis Date:02-17-2023
Laboratory Results authorized by Laura Parsons, Mold Lab Technical Director
Natural Link MOLD LAB reports sample results as a record of the microbes identified by our analytical staff. Any guidance given with regards to sampling methods, interpretation of results, remediation,
health effects, or other information given to the client, beyond microbial identification, is given as general information from published sources and is not an extension of liability to Natural Link MOLD LAB
Natural Link MOLD LAB establishes responsibility over analysis completed in the laboratory but cannot establish responsibility for activities completed in the field by the client, other personnel associated
with the samples submitted, or other activities beyond the laboratory. All reports are confidential and are not to be reproduced, except in whole, without the permission of Natural Link MOLD LAB.
Natural Link MOLD LAB, 1320 Freeport Blvd., #104, Sparks, NV 89431 phone: (775) 359-3377 5
56222-
-----------------
222
Analytical Laboratory Report
Bioaerosol, non-culturable
Fungal Microscopic ExamNatural Link MOLD LAB
A subsidiary of
Asbestos TEM
Laboratories, Inc.
Account Name:
Blake ForbessSubmitter:
Project PO:02-17-2023Date Received:
56222Control ID #:
Date Reported:
Sample Identification:
City of Moorpark - 37
FCG Environmental
02-17-2023
Fungi Identified Sample Count (spores/sample)Calculated Count (spores/m3)
A-6. Breakroom - 2nd Floor; Allergenco-D Spore-trap; 75L; 2-16-2023 [S216196AA155987]
15 200Basidiospores
1 13Smuts/Myxomycetes
Other Airborne Particles
Hyphal fragments
Pollen
Insect/arthropod parts
Fiberglass particles
Total biological particles
Total non-biological particles
Detected
Detected /None Detected Particle Density (1-5)
TOTAL
None Detected
None Detected
None Detected
2
2
16 213
• Dominant fungal spores detected on the sample: Basidiospores.
• Sensitivity: 13 spores/cubic meter.
• See Summary Table (56222-R01A).
Summary of Findings
Report #:R01 Analysis Date:02-17-2023
Laboratory Results authorized by Laura Parsons, Mold Lab Technical Director
Natural Link MOLD LAB reports sample results as a record of the microbes identified by our analytical staff. Any guidance given with regards to sampling methods, interpretation of results, remediation,
health effects, or other information given to the client, beyond microbial identification, is given as general information from published sources and is not an extension of liability to Natural Link MOLD LAB
Natural Link MOLD LAB establishes responsibility over analysis completed in the laboratory but cannot establish responsibility for activities completed in the field by the client, other personnel associated
with the samples submitted, or other activities beyond the laboratory. All reports are confidential and are not to be reproduced, except in whole, without the permission of Natural Link MOLD LAB.
Natural Link MOLD LAB, 1320 Freeport Blvd., #104, Sparks, NV 89431 phone: (775) 359-3377 6
56222-
-----------------
223
Analytical Laboratory Report
Bioaerosol, non-culturable
Fungal Microscopic ExamNatural Link MOLD LAB
A subsidiary of
Asbestos TEM
Laboratories, Inc.
Account Name:
Blake ForbessSubmitter:
Project PO:02-17-2023Date Received:
56222Control ID #:
Date Reported:
Sample Identification:
City of Moorpark - 37
FCG Environmental
02-17-2023
Fungi Identified Sample Count (spores/sample)Calculated Count (spores/m3)
OS-1. Outside - SE of Building; Allergenco-D Spore-trap; 75L; 2-16-2023 [S216197AA155988]
25 330Basidiospores
9 120Smuts/Myxomycetes
5 67Penicillium/Aspergillus
3 40Alternaria
2 27Ascospores
1 13Aureobasidium
Other Airborne Particles
Hyphal fragments
Pollen
Insect/arthropod parts
Fiberglass particles
Total biological particles
Total non-biological particles
None Detected
Detected /None Detected Particle Density (1-5)
TOTAL
Detected
None Detected
Detected
3
2
45 597
• Dominant fungal spores detected on the sample: Basidiospores.
• Sensitivity: 13 spores/cubic meter.
• See Summary Table (56222-R01A).
Summary of Findings
Report #:R01 Analysis Date:02-17-2023
Laboratory Results authorized by Laura Parsons, Mold Lab Technical Director
Natural Link MOLD LAB reports sample results as a record of the microbes identified by our analytical staff. Any guidance given with regards to sampling methods, interpretation of results, remediation,
health effects, or other information given to the client, beyond microbial identification, is given as general information from published sources and is not an extension of liability to Natural Link MOLD LAB
Natural Link MOLD LAB establishes responsibility over analysis completed in the laboratory but cannot establish responsibility for activities completed in the field by the client, other personnel associated
with the samples submitted, or other activities beyond the laboratory. All reports are confidential and are not to be reproduced, except in whole, without the permission of Natural Link MOLD LAB.
Natural Link MOLD LAB, 1320 Freeport Blvd., #104, Sparks, NV 89431 phone: (775) 359-3377 7
56222-
-----------------
224
02-17-2023 56222
FCG Environmental
City of Moorpark - 37
Alternaria
Ascospores
Aureobasidium
Basidiospores
Botrytis
Cladosporium
Penicillium/Aspergillus
Periconia
Rusts/Pucciniales
Scopulariopsis/Microascus
Smuts/Myxomycetes
Yeasts
Fungal Microscopic Examination
Bioaerosol, non-culturable
Page 1 of 1Report # 56222-R01A
Control #
Account Name
Project/P.O.:Date Reported
A-1. Lobby /
Hallway 1st Floor
A-2. North
Cubicle Area -
1st Floor
A-3. South
Warehouse Space
- 1st Floor
A-4. North
Cubicle Area -
2nd Floor
A-5. South
Cubicle Area -
2nd Floor
A-6. Breakroom -
2nd Floor
OS-1. Outside -
SE of Building
Summary Table
Fungi ID
13
67
650
270
27
27
13
470
13
440
40
27
13
67
13
270
13
67
200
13
13
270
27
67
27
13
13
13
130
53
270
200
13
40
27
13
330
67
120
1 043 643 430 466 213 5971 027
1 %
7 %
63 %
26 %
3 %
3 %
1 %
45 %
1 %
42 %
4 %
3 %
1 %
10 %
2 %
42 %
2 %
10 %
31 %
2 %
3 %
63 %
6 %
16 %
6 %
3 %
3 %
3 %
28 %
11 %
58 %
94 %
6 %
7 %
5 %
2 %
55 %
11 %
20 %
Spores /
cubic meter
Spores /
cubic meter
Spores /
cubic meter
Spores /
cubic meter
Spores /
cubic meter
Spores /
cubic meter
Spores /
cubic meter
% of
total
% of
total
% of
total
% of
total
% of
total
% of
total
% of
total
Sample ID
TA40142
Natural Link MOLD LAB A subsidiary of
Asbestos TEM
Laboratories, Inc.
Natural Link Mold Lab, 1320 Freeport Blvd., #104, Sparks, NV 89431
225
Tape Sample
Analytical Laboratory Report
Fungal Microscopic ExamNatural Link MOLD LAB A subsidiary of
Asbestos TEM
Laboratories, Inc.
T-6. North Cubicle Area, Top of T-Bar Ceiling Tile - 2nd Floor; Tape Sample; 2-16-2023
[S216203AB27329]
FCG EnvironmentalAccount Name:
Blake ForbessSubmitter:
City of Moorpark - 37Project PO:02-17-2023Date Received:
56222Control ID #:
02-17-2023Date Reported:
Sample Identification:
Summary of Findings
s Dominant fungi detected on sample: Penicillium
Macroscopic Observations:
s Grey colored material present on sample.
s Density: Medium.
Microscopic Observations:
s See Summary Table (56222-R02A).
s
s Nearly confluent growth; spores and hyphae detected.
s Fungal growth detected: Cladosporium.
s Moderate growth; spores and hyphae detected.
s Fungal growth detected: Alternaria.
s Sparse/minimal growth; .
s Fiberglass particles detected.
Fungal growth detected: Penicillium.
Report #:56222-R02 Analysis Date:02-17-2023 RB27329
1
Laboratory Results authorized by Laura Parsons, Mold Lab Technical Director
Natural Link MOLD LAB reports sample results as a record of the microbes identified by our analytical staff. Any guidance given with regards to sampling methods, interpretation of results, remediation,health effects, or other information given to the client, beyond microbial identification, is given as general info from published sources and is not an extension of liability to Natural Link MOLD LABNatural Link MOLD LAB establishes responsibility over analysis completed in the laboratory but cannot establish responsibility for activities completed in the field by the client, other personnel associatedwith the samples submitted, or other activities beyond the laboratory. All reports are confidential and are not to be reproduced, except in whole, without the permission of Natural Link MOLD LAB.
Natural Link MOLD LAB, 1320 Freeport Blvd., #104, Sparks, NV 89431 phone: (775) 359-3377
226
Tape Sample
Analytical Laboratory Report
Fungal Microscopic ExamNatural Link MOLD LAB A subsidiary of
Asbestos TEM
Laboratories, Inc.
T-7. North Cubicle Area / North Concrete Wall Above Drop - 2nd Floor; Tape Sample; 2-16-2023
[S216204AB27330]
FCG EnvironmentalAccount Name:
Blake ForbessSubmitter:
City of Moorpark - 37Project PO:02-17-2023Date Received:
56222Control ID #:
02-17-2023Date Reported:
Sample Identification:
Summary of Findings
s Dominant fungi detected on sample: Cladosporium
Macroscopic Observations:
s Black colored material present on sample.
s Density: Heavy.
Microscopic Observations:
s See Summary Table (56222-R02A).
s
s Nearly confluent growth; spores, conidiophores and hyphae detected.
s Fungal growth detected: Stachybotrys.
s Limited growth; spores and hyphae detected.
s Fungal growth detected: Aspergillus.
s Sparse/minimal growth; spores, conidiophores and hyphae detected.
s Fiberglass particles detected.
Fungal growth detected: Cladosporium.
Report #:56222-R02 Analysis Date:02-17-2023 RB27330
2
Laboratory Results authorized by Laura Parsons, Mold Lab Technical Director
Natural Link MOLD LAB reports sample results as a record of the microbes identified by our analytical staff. Any guidance given with regards to sampling methods, interpretation of results, remediation,health effects, or other information given to the client, beyond microbial identification, is given as general info from published sources and is not an extension of liability to Natural Link MOLD LABNatural Link MOLD LAB establishes responsibility over analysis completed in the laboratory but cannot establish responsibility for activities completed in the field by the client, other personnel associatedwith the samples submitted, or other activities beyond the laboratory. All reports are confidential and are not to be reproduced, except in whole, without the permission of Natural Link MOLD LAB.
Natural Link MOLD LAB, 1320 Freeport Blvd., #104, Sparks, NV 89431 phone: (775) 359-3377
227
Tape Sample
Analytical Laboratory Report
Fungal Microscopic ExamNatural Link MOLD LAB A subsidiary of
Asbestos TEM
Laboratories, Inc.
T-8. South Cubicle Area / East Fabric Window Sill - 2nd Floor; Tape Sample; 2-16-2023
[S216205AB27331]
FCG EnvironmentalAccount Name:
Blake ForbessSubmitter:
City of Moorpark - 37Project PO:02-17-2023Date Received:
56222Control ID #:
02-17-2023Date Reported:
Sample Identification:
Summary of Findings
s Dominant fungi detected on sample: Cladosporium and Chaetomium.
Macroscopic Observations:
s Black colored material present on sample.
s Density: Medium.
Microscopic Observations:
s See Summary Table (56222-R02A).
s
s Nearly confluent growth; spores, conidiophores and hyphae detected.
s Fungal growth detected: Chaetomium.
s Extensive growth; spores, ascocarps and hyphae detected.
s Fungal growth detected: Alternaria.
s Sparse/minimal growth; spores detected.
s Many spores detected possibly indicative of remnants of growth or growth in adjacent areas.
s Fungal growth detected: Thielaviopsis.
s Sparse/minimal growth; spores detected.
s Many spores detected possibly indicative of remnants of growth or growth in adjacent areas.
s Few miscellaneous spores (including Aureobasidium) detected, possibly indicative of typical settled air flora or growth in
adjacent areas.
s Fiberglass particles detected.
Fungal growth detected: Cladosporium.
Report #:56222-R02 Analysis Date:02-17-2023 RB27331
3
Laboratory Results authorized by Laura Parsons, Mold Lab Technical Director
Natural Link MOLD LAB reports sample results as a record of the microbes identified by our analytical staff. Any guidance given with regards to sampling methods, interpretation of results, remediation,health effects, or other information given to the client, beyond microbial identification, is given as general info from published sources and is not an extension of liability to Natural Link MOLD LABNatural Link MOLD LAB establishes responsibility over analysis completed in the laboratory but cannot establish responsibility for activities completed in the field by the client, other personnel associatedwith the samples submitted, or other activities beyond the laboratory. All reports are confidential and are not to be reproduced, except in whole, without the permission of Natural Link MOLD LAB.
Natural Link MOLD LAB, 1320 Freeport Blvd., #104, Sparks, NV 89431 phone: (775) 359-3377
228
Natural Link MOLD LAB A subsidiary of
Asbestos TEM
Laboratories, Inc.
TB15972
56222
FCG Environmental
City of Moorpark - 37 02-17-2023
T-6. North Cubicle Area, Top of T-
Bar Ceiling Tile - 2nd Floor
T-7. North Cubicle Area / North
Concrete Wall Above Drop - 2nd
Floor
T-8. South Cubicle Area / East
Fabric Window Sill - 2nd Floor
Tape Sample Tape Sample Tape Sample
Page 1 of 1Report # 56222-R02A
Control #
Account Name
Project/P.O.:Date Reported
Summary Table
Level 5
Level 4
Level 3
Level 2
Level 1
Level 0
Comments
Nearly confluent growth
(81-100% cover)
Extensive growth
(61-80% cover)
Moderate amounts of growth
(41-60% cover)
Limited growth
(21-40% cover)
Sparse/minimal growth
(1-20% cover)
Miscellaneous Spores
(<1% cover)
Extent of
Biological Activity
Fungal Microscopic Examination
Penicillium
Cladosporium
Alternaria
Cladosporium
Stachybotrys
Aspergillus
Cladosporium
Chaetomium
Alternaria
Thielaviopsis
Aureobasidium
[b]
Natural Link Mold Lab, 1320 Freeport Blvd., #104, Sparks, NV 89431 229
Chain-of-Custody Form
Account name t c~ e/llt/~rQV..\JV\cvJ.o.-1
Sampling date L -b -
Project I P .0. -37
31.-J Sc.,l .. v\~J"' 11\r.
Sample ident i fication, descript ion . and/or location
A-I Lobb,1/Ho..\\w,.v -1i~ Floor
A-2.. No,~1L r ,iJ,iJ~t Aa-..r..-,,.1 '..,,
A-~ <-..,.,fl,.(,1 1 . -5..,,s,._-'t' v
A-1/ /Jorll CtLb;Je., ,4;e--?,"',.1 Floor
A-f 50..-tt... ~ ~ -'-~ .I
Avb ~{<-n9~"""" -t ~ L,
ns-1 tJCJ..,+ s,-;1. --s E of /'Side... .
-f'-t Lo/Jov pltW.,~c.r Bo:ic: _ wJ 6~-1$+ Fk,~
i::{i~ t,./P-11 $' (-z. N£ of~~,e..-A}etN"Jl£ -rd./;,,... a~~~ 1 . Fico-
f, 3 So'-"f.. ~~ ~p,-u..--fowv s,v-fl.. wd.ll i-'
I
Sample Analysis*
vol ume Fl',1E NFME FC BC EC
l~L )t
'I._
y
)(
)(
,v X
X
k'
t
)l
(775) 359-3377
(7 75) 356-MOLD
info@asbes1os1emlabs.com
Altema1ive I add itional T .A.T.
anal vs is rcnuested: RU'-l-f STD -
X
)(
'Y..
x
~
X
)(
llfu...,._ Mel~ -Utt Alo-"' .
F~s k
'i
U' ,w ~
) FM£. F1111gal Micrmmpil" Emmi mu ion --NFME . .V,111-F11n1tu l Min osmpic Emm --FC.Frmg al C11/rn re -· BC.&wceria/ Ci1/111 re -EC. E H1 l i (rn/ifr,r,m) ID
Submjller'<;
Signamre
Submjuer's
Signalure
Dale ~I Receiver•~
Time .3 : I a Signature
Da te _/_/_ Receiv e r's
lime am pm Signature
Submit all samples ro Nat ural Link MO L D L A B . 1320 Freeporr 811-d 11 104. Sparks NV 89431
Dale ~/ _J..1_1 ~
Time , ,: '1'
Dale _/ __
lime am pm
NLMLab COC (r 7.0) © 2022
230
/
.I
I
Chain-of-Custody Form
.l\=um name f { (;_, & v l~ro v---~1~ l
,?j's • \ I' . i -( (A.. v,<_; hr .
Sample identification, description. and/or location Sample
volu me FME
"'f-'( l?f'Ukroo ...... z,.o df T-8-u;(;,~ l,l~-1s' Floa -)I
f -~ Mo{) Clo~/,~~ AJ..-1.L ,:;"'-,l -~ 4' y
T-t. ,Uiw~ r ,,b:J~ A1e,o.., -r.~ of. r-s-u.-li,,ji/,,-2"'" l 1=-/ "(h .-y
f-7 t I-t 7 " ~ /11,.,,/L ~,J~IAJ.,J/ ,._J...~l,.,.,.-J. ...,
f -g ✓~ .. ..J(,.. 't ~ I ~J. C..f,,tc.. w-."'lov. 1;// :.... .J, •v .k'
lf-9 ~w ~v ,11 ,A-,"'k J., i, J.. -'., L; ~
1-/() ~~ f O(l',V dtk'<.,!DN~1, foof J)t,: .... a'-k -,.,.. . y
-r-11 J?v..,/.k llootk/wJf ,~Je, tuLU ~~ ~.t -1 v • I/ y
J
~-~ -"· al ti ,, ....
Natu.ralli11 kMOLD LAB p;-; I . . ' . I ~ I ~-
Analysis*
NFME FC BC EC
~ ft. I Iii! I ~ l'.a_
(775) 359-3377
(775 ) 356-MOLD
i nfo @as bestostemlabs.com
Al lemative/ a d ditional T.A.T.
an al vs is reouested : RUSH sro
P(~ HolfL-C,ci....l\
_A f,4u .,.-' --:> )(
X
y
y
)(
V
'y
,v ,v lk
l Microscopic £wmination -NFME. Non-Fungal Micrnscopic Exam -· FC. Fun gal Cu/rure --BC. Bacterial Culture -EC. E.coli (colifo r ms) ID
Submitter'
Sign ature
Submiuer's
Signature
Date
lime
0-,lle
Time
ignacure
Receiver's
am pm Signature
Date Z-/ _J:!..__/ ~
Time 10 :'"'-X.)
'Date -. I _I _
Time am pm
·~!-----------------------■ 5~222--
Page:k_of L-Submit all samples to Natural Link MOW LAB, /320 Freeport Blvd #104, Sparks NV 89431 NLMLab CDC (v 7.0) © 2022
231
.., ...
~
rn I I 1 1_1_11 L
w
(..c,wU
v»-
Level 1. ENLARGED RESTROOM PRECISION DEMO PLAN iw.,.,.. i
-:. \.,JS" IAJ,>J l ~ -t,JS Floo, U pl-.-l-v-~
0 w ~ 'T-B-Ce\h·') 1'il-c...1>
• -I/fr
-/o :. A,us of F:.M 4b~ l6°fo
JJt. w!M., M~'\,..,,./,,
r.;. l
" '--~J l
. . . : :j'.
: C • . . .
{:' . . ' . ' . ~ : . . " : :
:1-s+
=I =
0 ---~~!0lllnC-U:1':ll.'U.f toUtOo\•Dm.lU,,Uo;
Q)IIUVl!...nE L.WfMTt.•~,...,,.,__ffllllfl .... e l>IC"'ll._,.0.ffOIII
=:~~..:'1?~f,=:_'3~~'=~~0:,.
•-li....itt-,
®~~-:rn::~~--=rJ..~:f:;r~;W"-="J\C:.
CbrrC.IOft~l'"1N~ll. @=~=~':.!~~~-=~~:==-~""'
®~=---=:.lS•WJi«,;i>UtCU.Tliit<•MNCt,'4(
@«..:i..'llitJOUT-U~O
@1,1.tuRD011•SNO:lil:I IQA!lAISf~N~'KJll.(IOoll'l(T.
®~"',V,C:ftwl)IOo,ait~
@~~-
® =~:i~-=.::=~~fOO~o,w...4
@~-.i.wov.
@ilb-t.!IO«-,.uorc:,11-L
® ~tO.,.,_Q;_~~M~Mel-1'1-~111".
@ llfW«OUU~11f/MDI UHltJ!fl'4l.l ... ~,
~r.,~1a.itoo>nrnao•1oG.
PLAN DEMO KEYNOTES
e 5ri.~:J.:t=...~~~-='~"~~co
® .C-a'-~1,,0!'lll~~flO\IIU.1 US~fl,c,:nic,,,c_
®""-Cll#'-""'TnlTUIIIU 1-tt"""°f\"'ffl( ...
@«---~f!)f.,..Ulil«'C,t(-('.flll'II.C ... t
@11t:~tri'1w,l;to.N'"'"'t,~,f~"'~Wlut.
@(At.1.•l:C(UIGOflt-l'IJlll<>IXW'fOl't.\('J-0,~
RCP DEMO NOTES
..,_ -l•.-,.~......,.. N<MC1U..c<~nuowD1WOUrDO ~.,_.~-flll~J.>~ ... M;QQIIA1,-01-~--tl0ill11-~IWl~=,crC.:~::r:-:=:~t..OOll..,J!kUDOOI
.. fl-"9t'D"l'IM!f/le(>IOU!il>f0....c\.lWIKP:f•10IIUTUAMEO!'°"'
~lliC~lCfJu»IO,,lpl)(ltUQ.
c,,1tl0000wt!l"1ltl>l[.j,J-\S CO,.~llllS,040TlolJJIICSUtM.
~l( .. T$611(~1,1fOWHIGIICCIIUntc»'OCWJI.IICW IN:Oill~l
,...,..IC.AlPl•-flof~Ntl:,"'-"'IO"':left~A
.,,OO'it.ll-l"'""40IQl,llil(O .... ~Ctu,,D""-"G:OlllfUJritO,
l'"'-"°"''Ul!-lbl1,a1'Jlllhrottt.1W'1""-1t".I.&_.._, UCIQ;: ...... t¢,,,.f,r," ... ,.._4,,
6-U-~CCUll)fll..fNIOllfl'O ~IMIQl._,lt(IOl.J°'.a«lr.li-
'llll-tcl.llll-lO.Olll'IC"1'rQIIJtW:,,-,,U. ~_,,.-'1:~,0\'•MO
«&IOGl ll'"--C(),..01,.UW.~tcfXWl"fl;ll-~l'llt.--
Ol~CJ•Oll'l~
I
:.:: i a:: ct ...J I n. a:: ...J
0 ct i 0 J:
::i;; >-i u. I-
0 u ~ >-~ t-ll u z a
■
AsMCllll!G
A10.1
LEVEL 1
DEMOLITION
FLOOR AND
REFLECTED
CEILING PLANS
ARCHITECTS
..... ._...., ,.. ..... , ..... ··•=~ ., ~ ....... , '•'"'>'
1--------------------------------------------------------l-e-ve_l _1 -. R_C_P_D_e_m-ol-il_io..,nr---.--,--1+----0-EM_O_L_IT_IO_N_G_E_NE_RA_L_N_O_T_ES-----I ,.'..,. ~· ....... ,_,,,: ,...,.,r ~J4-'•r-
232
:: ., I 1 1 1 1 LLI I I I
Level 2. ENLARGED RESTROO::M----~ S PRECISION OE .. OUTI ON PLAN ...... ,.... 3
.
?®
or~ t..i.C u.lil
o_,-~7 ., e-...-c l
efJ)
S"6i...-f~ ,.J!i
ill ~
j ~ ~/ _.,/,==~-.
@
~-" f--1 . l.@)
l e vC?l 2 -Demolition
FLOOR PLAN OEMO KEYNOTES
RCP DEMO NOTES
DEMOLITION Gt;NER.AL NOTES
~
0:
<t
D. ...J
0: ...J
0 <t
0 :r
:i: >-
u.. ~
0 u
>-~ ~ u w z
RE\IC51Dhllll ■
A10.2
LEVEL 2
DEMOLITION
FLOOR AND
REFLECTED
CEILING PLANS
233
Alan W. Forbess, Certifications (2023-2024)
Sta te of Ca liforn ia
Division of O ccupatio na l Safet y and Hea lth
~-=-
-)~ 111 lq, II I(
Public Health
Certified Asbestos Consultant
Alan Wayne Forbess
Name
Certificati o n No . 94-1549-
Expires o n _ __.o .... 1.6...11 .... 2....,12&,::4L--__
This certification was issued by the Division of
Occupational Safety and Health as authOrlzed
by Sections 7180 et seq . of the Business and
Profess ions Code .
STATE OF CALIFORNIA
DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC HEALTH
LEAD-RELATED CONSTRUCTION CERTIFICATE
INDIVIDUAL: CERTIFICATE TYPE:
LC'ad lnspeccor/A.ssc!>\C>r
l.rJ<I Projrc1 Moni1or
NUMBER:
LRC 00000505
I RC 00000504
EXPIRATION DATE:
G/20/2023
h/llWl0l:1
D l~l+.11 111<-r T his documC'm alonr should nol br relied u 1X1n 10 t'onnnn tf'llint,Hi o n ,1n1u, Co mpart' tht' 111d1 vldu.11', llho10 ,md namr to aoo1hr1 vaHd form or
govl'rnrm:nt i '>.\Ul'd pho to ldcn1iOc.11ion V('rify the indivldu.11 · ~ C<'rt l 0ca11on srnlus by ,(•ardnng for I .ea d ... Rc:l:ucd Construction Profr\sin nal, ,II
WWW ( rlph .qt 1mvlprn41,1 111-.;'c lpph or c.i lling (800) 597.1 F.AD
OARD CE RTIFIE D
#0804051
Exp. 6/30/2022 ~
Micro
234
FCG Staff Certifications – William A. Miller
State of California
Division of Occupational Safety and Health
Certified Site Surveillance Technician
William A Miller
Na me
Certification No . 07-4160
Expires on 03/22/23
This certification was issued by the Di vision of
Occupati onal Safety and Health as authorized by
Sections 7180 et seq. of the Business and
Professions Code .
I t-. " ,,, ....... -,,,
Public Hea lth
ST AT£ 01-·C A LI FOR.N I A
DlPA l{'('M ENT O F l'UULIC IIEA LT H
LEAD-RELATED CONSTRUCTION CERTIFICATE
l '\'Dl\'IDUA L:
\\-illia m \tille r
C ERTI F ICATE T YPE :
Lead l ru;pcc1or 1Asscuor
Lead ProJcct Monitor
NU MBER:
LRC-00000721
LRC-00000720
EX PlllATION DATE:
6/13'2013
61 13·2023
D1scl a1mcr· I h,~ document alone i.hould nOI be relied upon to confinn ccrt1ficnt1on Matu:. Com pare the md1,1d ua1·s photo and name lo 1m01 hcr ,al1d fom1 of
go\-cmmcnt 1"3ucd photo 1dcn11fir.:at mn Vcnfy the mdn1du11's ccr11ficauon !.l.tlui. by scarch mg for Lc-ad-Rchucd ('oru.truction Prok~1onals 111
v.ww cdph ca g<1, programs.'dppb or calling (800) 597-L£AO
',10Sll5&2.0125rnl-001
Willinm Miller
000-00-720tt
h.,.\aamJcJ111.J-J~t•11I) ,m-lc-tcJdk ,~an
Sampl ing and E,aluau r.g Airborne A,be\10, Du...a
JOSH 582 Eq11il'alent
\olllill,I.LI)
frl,r,1i1rv.?<1,Jw~
235
Blake Forbess Certifications 2023
State of California
Division of Occupational Saf ety and Hea lt h
Certified Site Surveillance Technician
Bia ~ R Forbes,s
me
J.:.,..,
Certi fi cation No. 18•6328
Expires on 11 ,'15 ,'23
This certilication was issued by the Division of
Occupational Safety and Health as authori zed by
Seclions 71 BO et seq. of the Business and
Professions Code .
STATE OF C.\1.1 1 OUN L\ ~ c~lifornfo Otl'!lflflll'!H (I : JJU' ARTMEr--T OF Pl,IUJC Hl:ALTI T
PublicHea lth
LEAD-RELATED CONSTRUCTION CERTIFICATE
)'.llDTVfl>l.f,\L: CERTIFIC,\TI-: TYl'E:
~_,, eA 1.e.tt.S.i.ll~n .. .-,,,.. .. ,~ ..... \?JI
EXPIRA.'TION O,Yt li;
lllak" Fur Iii'~
l \b<hl.m(1: T hl\dr~m'lllilll ~l.')~$:l'Ju;d:I n:,t b ett-:lc..1 -.p~,) !(l 1,.t.mli,1t1•.\'i:dHotton .'1.~lu\, Cr.,,,,,;,,,, II •· ;..,i,,·i.,J,...j)·11c pWw~ml m 1m: 10 .:.nl'lllll'r •:;iU~ (Gm .;,J
1,:,vrrnm:-nt 't<~.00 ptoto ill~ulilie~lwn. Vmfy 1l-.."l lncJ.,·l h.1Al'H1et tilkstiu n 1o1:1h1:: ~·~tt((Wng:t:i; lttd·Rt!atr.tl Umvn1::1l(ln Prd~.s,<;ihO!'\ls ru.
V,V."'!.rtlpt ,.a ~, ..... HOS:-"'<l1m:~t!l11b<II' 1:.tlliu;~ ,.xm ~97-tEAD
236
Dana Stephens Certifications - 2023
d~
~Californi1 Dcput mrn, of
Public Health
STATE OF CALIFORNIA
DEPARTMENT OF PUBLIC H EALTii
LEAD-RELATED CONSTR UCTION CERTIFICATE
INDIVIDUAL: CERTIFICATE TYP E: NUMilER: EXPIRATION DAT E:
Lead S.1mpllng Technician LRC-0000 1070 7/19/2023
Dan a Stephens
Disclaimer: This doc umcnl alone should no1 be relied upon 10 confinn certiOcaUon s lal us. Com pare Iii, lrMllvldual's photo and name 10 ano1hcr valid fo nn of
govcmm en1 Issued pho10 iden1ifica1ion. Verify the ind ividual's cer1m,•a1ion s1a1us by searching for Lead-Related Construc tion Professionals al
\\Ww.cdoh.ca.gov/progr.uns/cl pph OI' ca lllng (800) 597-LEAD
ACC
ANA M. STEPHEN
BOARD CERTIFIED
#1102018
Exp. 3/31/2021
Mier
237
Standard Mold Remediation Protocol
General Information:
The enclosed protocol is recommended for the proper remediation of microbial growth or
moisture damaged building materials as part of a site renovation or restoration project.
These procedures comply with current industry standards, including, but not limited to
the following:
IICRC S520 - Standard and Reference Guide for Professional Mold Remediation
EPA - Mold Remediation in Schools and Commercial Buildings
ACGIH – Bioaerosols: Assessment and Control
Purpose/Intent: The standard protocol is provided as a guidance document for the
contractor which will allow him to properly contain and remediate areas of identified mold
growth using the procedures enclosed. The standard protocol conforms to procedures
outlined in a variety of established resources on mold contamination and remediation.
Contractors should adhere to these guidelines to facilitate the remediation of microbial
contamination. The procedures and guidelines provided may be modified as necessary
to preserve the health and safety of workers and occupants or to increase the
effectiveness of the remediation.
Recommended Procedures for Mold Remediation
1.0 Pre-Abatement Measures
1.1 Source Identification: In all mold remediation projects, identification of the
source of water intrusion is the first and most important step. The success
of the project will rely on the identification of the source of water intrusion
to prevent further growth and damage from on-going leaks or moisture
intrusion. Repairs should be conducted simultaneously or prior to the
anticipated mold remediation project. This protocol anticipates that mold
remediation tasks will be conducted in the areas of concern which will
allow for the proper plumbing repairs or other corrective measures to
ensure the problem is remedied. This will require the following
anticipated steps:
Contractor will visually inspect the area of proposed work and look
for signs of visible mold growth, staining, water damage, or similar
evidence of microbial contamination.
Based on the visual observations, contractor shall place the area
of concern within properly established negative air containment
per Section 1.3 below. This includes identification of mold on the
finished surfaces or mold that is discovered in the interior wall
cavities during initial removal of building materials.
1.2 Communication: Proper communication between the involved parties is
essential in successful remediation of the identified problem areas. This
involves notification and communication between the various contractors,
umm
FCG Environmental
1009 Mercer Ave.
Ojai , CA 93023
Environmental Consulting Services
Asbestos• Mold• Lead• Property Assessment
Te l : 805 .646.1995 I Fax: 805 .669 .3538
lnfo @fcgenv iro .com I www.fcgenviro .com
238
FCG Environmental Standard Mold Remediation Protocol
project managers, environmental consultant and property
owners/occupants. The roles and responsibilities of the various parties
are described below:
Contractor/Remediation Supervisor: All mold remediation work
will be conducted by a qualified mold remediation company. The
contractor shall employ a Remediation Supervisor with
appropriate training and certification to oversee all field work. The
Supervisor must be located on site during all field work where
mold impacted materials are being removed or disturbed. It is the
on-site supervisor’s responsibility to ensure that all work is
conducted per the enclosed protocol and current industry
standards for mold remediation.
Project Manager: Most large projects will require a Project
Manager responsible for scheduling renovation work and
coordination with contractors and sub-contractors, and
correspondence with building occupants and owners regarding all
facets of scheduling, planning and supervising the overall project
progress.
Environmental Consultant: FCG Environmental or similar 3rd party
consultant shall provide consulting and testing services as
needed, including development of the initial scope of work,
monitoring the remediation process and providing clearance
inspections and air sampling of all impacted areas following
remediation work. FCG should be consulted if unusual conditions
or extensive mold growth is encountered which requires additional
guidance or testing services. FCG is available as needed for all
questions or concerns regarding mold contamination issues,
occupant exposure or similar matters.
Owners/Occupants: It is important that the property owner and
any tenants or occupants cooperate with on-site personnel and
allow access to the impacted areas for remediation. These
individuals must be notified prior to site inspections or field work in
accordance with any lease agreements or CC&R requirements,
typically being given a minimum of 24-hours notice. Once work
has begun and the work area has been properly contained, it the
responsibility of the occupants to stay out of the work area and not
disturb unplug any fans or filtration equipment, and keep all
children, pets and others away from the work area.
1.3 Work Area Containment: The purpose of containment is to inhibit the
release of mold spores and other microbial contaminants into surrounding
areas. Each identified work area (bathroom, kitchen, laundry room, etc.)
shall be established using the following procedures:
Containment shall be used for all projects where mold remediation
tasks are anticipated.
Standard Mold Remediation Protocol - 2013.doc 2
239
FCG Environmental Standard Mold Remediation Protocol
Prior to setting containment, all non-structural or personal belongings
shall be moved from the work area by either bagging or boxing and
coordinating storage with the occupants. See Section 6.3 Contents
Cleaning for further information regarding optional cleaning of
personal belongings or non-structural items.
To enclose the work area, remediation contractors shall attach 6 mil
polyethylene sheeting from floor to ceiling across openings using with
duct tape, furring strips or other suitable means, covering the
perimeter of the work area. Contractor should attempt to protect
finished surfaces by using masking tape of similar means prior to
adhering duct tape or other material which may damage paint
finishes, wood surfaces or other materials when removed.
Polyethylene sheeting may be attached to a PVC or wooden frame to
establish temporary walls and contain larger areas.
All entry points should consist of a critical barrier with plastic sheeting
covering both sides of a Z-flap or T-flap.
Polyethylene sheeting should be used to cover all critical openings,
including doors, windows, air vents, and risers.
Remediation workers should maintain containment areas under
negative pressure by use of an appropriate sized, negative air
machine equipped with HEPA filtration. The negative air exhaust
should be ducted outside the containment and outside the structure
whenever possible.
A single-stage decontamination unit should be constructed for the
entry and exit points. The decon unit should be large enough to
contain waste bags and to allow workers to don or remove PPE.
Remediation contractors shall maintain containment areas under
negative pressure throughout the duration of all building material
removal and disturbance activities, including final cleaning and wipe
down.
Contractors shall use appropriate decontamination methods upon
exiting the contained work area to avoid cross contamination of areas
outside the containment. This includes removal of disposal suits,
gloves and equipment prior to leaving the containment.
Additional HEPA-filtered negative air machines may be used within
the containment areas to assist with air filtration as necessary.
Whenever possible, containment should be constructed in an
unoccupied or common area, such as the hallway or common wall
behind the area of concern to avoid unnecessary damage to interior
units and surfaces.
1.4 Tenant Move Out (optional): In situations where containment is extensive
and planned operations will prevent access to basic kitchen and
bathroom use, or where mold concentrations may pose a health threat to
the occupants, it is recommended that the tenants be moved out of the
residence temporarily until clearance is granted. This makes the
contractor’s job easier and protects the tenants from possible exposure to
elevated mold spore counts. In situations where minimal work is planned
and indoor air quality is within background levels, the tenants may remain
in the residence.
Standard Mold Remediation Protocol - 2013.doc 3
240
FCG Environmental Standard Mold Remediation Protocol
2.0 Removal and Cleaning Procedures:
The following procedures are recommended for the removal and cleaning of
mold-impacted building materials and surfaces. All work shall conform to current
industry standards for remediation, including the IICRC S520 and EPA guidance
documents.
Removal or disturbance of building materials shall not be performed until
negative air containment is established and all non-structural items have been
removed from the work area.
The contained areas shall be marked with appropriate signage to prevent
untrained workers or residents from entering the work area.
Remove all porous, stained mold-impacted or damaged building materials from
the area of concern. Porous building materials include drywall, insulation,
carpeting or other soft, porous materials that cannot be cleaned using standard
methods. It is recommended that removal of impacted building materials
continue to a distance of at least 1-2’ beyond the area of visible damage or
staining to ensure that all impacted areas are exposed.
Inspect all backing wallboard or exposed building materials on the opposite side
of destructive openings for signs of mold contamination. If significant
contamination is noted, the containment may need to be expanded to allow for
continued removal of impacted, porous materials.
If visible contamination extends into a neighboring room or unit, or extends to
inaccessible areas (i.e., behind bathtubs, cabinets, etc.), the Project Manager
shall be notified and arrangements for additional remediation provided.
Contractor shall not remove fixtures or cabinetry outside the scope of work
without prior approval.
Clean all exposed surfaces and wood framing through the use of abrasive
cleaning methods, including the use of sanding, wire brushing, scrubbing, or
similar methods to remove surface staining or visible growth sites. Abrasive
methods shall be performed using HEPA vacuums and other dust control
methods.
All removal activities, demolition, sanding or similar actions which may cause a
significant release of dust and spores must be performed using appropriate
controls to minimize airborne contamination.
Due to the potential for bacterial contamination from sewer piping leaks, it is
recommended that the contractor use of an appropriate cleaning agent, such
diluted bleach, surfactant or detergent solutions in order to disinfect the affected
areas.
HEPA vacuum and damp wipe all surfaces within containment upon conclusion
of abrasive cleaning activities.
All surfaces and materials must be dried to within normal, acceptable range
(<15% by standard wood scale) and shall be checked by moisture meter prior to
clearance.
Encapsulation is not recommended and should be conducted only with prior
approval of the involved parties after a visual inspection of the remediated area
has been performed to inspect the remediated areas.
Dispose of all removed building materials and waste generated by bagging and
transporting out of the containment to an appropriate disposal bin.
Standard Mold Remediation Protocol - 2013.doc 4
241
FCG Environmental Standard Mold Remediation Protocol
Maintain HEPA filtration on negative air mode until all cleaning and disturbance
work is completed. It is recommended that the contractor disconnect the exhaust
ducting and switch to air scrub or recirculation mode after cleaning is complete to
remove airborne mold spores down to acceptable background levels.
Ensure that all exposed building materials are clean and dry at the conclusion of
field work, with no visible debris or excessive dust in the containment at the time
of final inspection.
Clearance by a 3rd party, independent consultant or hygienist is recommended to
document the success of the remediation project, and is discussed in Section 5.0
below.
Encapsulation shall be considered only where surface abrasion and normal
cleaning processes cannot return the material to a mold-free condition, and
removal is not appropriate.
3.0 Contractor Requirements
3.1 Training and Licensing: The remediation contractor shall be licensed in
the State of California to perform the required tasks. All workers shall be
properly trained with experience in mold remediation projects. All workers
required to wear respiratory protection shall be properly fit tested and
medically approved through pulmonary function testing by a licensed
physician.
3.2 Insurance: The contractor shall maintain insurance coverage per the
requirements of the owner or client, which may include, but is not limited
to: general liability, pollution liability, workers compensation, automobile
and professional liability (errors and omissions). All insurance coverage
shall comply with the coverage amounts and contract requirements
requested by the client.
3.3 Site Supervision/Monitoring: The contractor shall ensure that a qualified
supervisor is present during all site work where disturbance activity is on-
going. The supervisor shall be responsible for ensuring a safe working
environment, overseeing all removal and abatement tasks, ensuring
negative air conditions are maintained within containment, controlling
access to the work area, and similar supervisory tasks. The supervisor
shall be available to correspond with representatives, inspectors and
technical personnel as needed to provide information regarding project
progress, problems, or similar concerns. The supervisor must be
experienced in all phases of mold remediation. If problems arise which
may impact the successful completion of the project, it is the responsibility
of the supervisor to contact the appropriate parties and stop work as
necessary.
3.4 Site Security: Contractor shall maintain each work area in a secure and
safe manner, preventing exposure to untrained workers and residents.
All equipment, tools and materials shall be secured at the end of each
work shift, with waste materials properly contained and disposed or
stored within a secured or locked area. General safety requirements,
including OSHA compliance is discussed below.
Standard Mold Remediation Protocol - 2013.doc 5
242
FCG Environmental Standard Mold Remediation Protocol
4.0 Health and Safety Requirements:
4.1 Health and Safety Plan: The selected contractor must maintain an
appropriate Health and Safety Plan (H&S Plan) for site work involving the
potential disturbance of mold contaminated materials. All contractor
personnel must be properly trained and familiar with the H&S Plan
elements, which should include information on safe work practices, the
potential health effects of mold, personal protective equipment (PPE)
requirements, medical surveillance and monitoring requirements, and
other important issues related to mold remediation projects. The
contractor should also maintain a written respiratory protection program
as personnel will be wearing respirators during all disturbance work. If
the contractor does not have an adequate H&S Plan and/or respiratory
protection program, these items should be developed prior to starting the
project. It is the responsibility of the contractor to provide these
documents.
4.2 Personal Protective Equipment (PPE): This project will include the proper
use of personal protective equipment (PPE), including, but not limited to,
air purifying respirators, gloves and protective suits. Full-face respirators
are preferred for those workers performing actual disturbance work, while
half-mask respirators may be appropriate for limited tasks where
disturbance is not significant. P-100 HEPA filters are recommended, with
organic vapor cartridges added where significant odors or possible
volatile organic compounds (VOCs) are anticipated.
4.3 OSHA Requirements: All work practices shall be conducted in
accordance with OSHA standards and other applicable regulations,
including Title 8 of the California Code of Regulations and Title 29 of the
Code of Federal Regulations.
5.0 Monitoring and Post-Remediation Sampling
Post-remediation sampling will be performed by FCG personnel to determine the
success or failure of additional remediation work. Sampling will be conducted
following the final cleaning stages to confirm the remediation of surface growth
and airborne mold spores to normal, background levels. This will be completed
using a combination of a thorough visual inspection combined with air and/or
surface sampling to confirm successful remediation. Criteria for clearance will
include the following elements:
All impacted porous materials have been removed and surfaces have
been properly cleaned, with no visible evidence of mold growth, staining,
excessive dust or debris found within the contained work areas.
Building materials are within normal, dry range (<15%) when checked
using standard moisture meter equipment.
The source of water intrusion has been identified and repaired, with no
leaks or standing water found at the time of clearance inspection.
Standard Mold Remediation Protocol - 2013.doc 6
243
FCG Environmental Standard Mold Remediation Protocol
Indoor air and surface sampling results are consistent with normal,
background conditions. Air samples from inside the contained work areas
will be compared to outdoor air samples, and deemed cleared if the total
spore counts and species distribution are within acceptable, comparable
range. If final sampling indicates spore concentrations are significantly
above ambient levels, additional assessment, remediation and air
scrubbing will be performed until ambient levels are achieved. Following
successful sampling, reconstruction work can begin.
6.0 Supplemental Recommendations & Protocols (Optional)
6.1 HVAC System: It is recommended that regular cleaning of individual
HVAC systems be conducted as part of normal site maintenance.
Cleaning should include the forced air unit, supply and return plenums,
and air ducting systems. The objective is to remove any settled spores
and dust within the system. If the duct system consists of flex ducting,
removal and replacement may be considered as thorough cleaning of flex
ducting can be difficult.
6.2 Asbestos and Lead Paint Testing: For structures built before 1980,
sampling or assessment is recommended to identify the presence of
suspect asbestos containing materials (ACM) or lead-based paint
compounds. The contractor should be aware of the requirements for
proper handling and disposal of asbestos and lead compounds, and if
necessary, a qualified subcontractor should be hired to perform
abatement of asbestos and/or lead as necessary. If a survey has not
been performed, suspect materials must be treated as asbestos or lead
containing.
6.3 Contents Cleaning: In the event that personal contents or belongings
have been impacted by mold growth or excessive spore concentrations,
the following protocols are recommended for the various items as noted
below:
Porous Materials/Soft Goods: Porous, soft items such as clothing,
upholstered furniture, area rugs or similar items containing visible mold
growth can be very difficult to clean and will most often be discarded and
replaced. Porous items which have been exposed to significantly elevated
spore counts may require HEPA cleaning to return the items to a normal,
background condition. Random testing may be required to determine the
extent of contamination. The following is a general protocol for the typical
items encountered in a mold remediation project:
Cloth materials (washable): Bag and transport all items made of
soft washable fabric off site for laundering. This includes bedding,
pillows, clothing and similar small items. These items should be
laundered using hot water and a standard laundry detergent.
Where warranted, specialty items should be sent for professional
dry cleaning or steam cleaning and vacuumed with HEPA-filtration
equipment. Most delicate clothing items may be dry cleaned.
Larger Porous Items: Upholstered furniture, area rugs, draperies
or similar items may be HEPA vacuumed to remove settled spores
Standard Mold Remediation Protocol - 2013.doc 7
244
FCG Environmental Standard Mold Remediation Protocol
and return the items to normal conditions. HEPA vacuuming,
followed by steam cleaning, and then followed by additional HEPA
vacuuming is also an acceptable method for selected items.
Non-porous materials (plastic, metal, glass, finished wood, etc.: Vacuum
non-porous materials with HEPA filtration equipment then wipe down with
a clean damp cloth using a mild soap or surfactant. After cleaning, non-
porous materials should be bagged or boxed, transported off site and
stored in a clean environment.
Computer, Stereo and Electronic Equipment: Vacuum these items using
HEPA filtration equipment; wipe down with damp cloth; box or bag and
seal the items for transportation and storage. It may be necessary to use
a commercial can of compressed air (Duster or similar product) to blow
out dust from cases and housings. This should be done inside of a
contained area using HEPA filtration to remove the excess dust and
spores from the air.
Books, Documents, Paper Products: HEPA vacuum and fan
simultaneously any paper products such as books to remove potential
loose spores. This work should also be conducted in a negative pressure
chamber with HEPA filtration. These items should be boxed or bagged to
prevent microbial reproduction. Dispose of any paper materials showing
water damage or visible mold contamination. If necessary, responsible
parties may send valuable papers offsite for reproduction or to a qualified
professional cleaning service for restoration.
Standard Mold Remediation Protocol - 2013.doc 8
245
FCG Environmental Standard Mold Remediation Protocol
Limitations Statement
The information provided within this document is intended to comply with current
standard practices accepted within the industry. The recommendations and procedures
shall be used only by the involved parties for the project described in this report. Any
use or reliance of this documentation by a third party without the explicit authorization of
Forbess Consulting Group Inc. (FCG Environmental) or the designated client shall be
strictly at the risk of the third party.
Currently there are no federal or state standards for the assessment or remediation of
microbiological contaminated sites. No acceptable thresholds or health standards have
been implemented for mold exposure. Responses will differ greatly between individuals
depending on a number of factors, such as the sensitivity of the individual to a particular
biological pollutant and their pre-existing health conditions. Forbess Consulting Group,
Inc. (FCG Environmental) cannot and will not provide medical advice or opinions as to
the associated health problems encountered from exposure to biological pollutants. If
individuals are experiencing symptoms they should consult their personal physician or
an appropriate medical care provider.
If you have any questions or concerns regarding the information provided, please do not
hesitate to call FCG at 805.646.1995
_________________________
Prepared by:
Alan Forbess, Principal
Certified Microbial Consultant No. 0804051 (IAQA, ACAC)
Standard Mold Remediation Protocol - 2013.doc 9
246
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
03 10 00 - 1 CONCRETE FORMWORK
SECTION 03 10 00
CONCRETE FORMWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Formwork for cast-in-place concrete with, bracing, and anchorage.
B. Openings for other affected work.
C. Form accessories.
D. Stripping forms.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. 2019 CBC – California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2,
Chapter 19.
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
C. PS-1 - Construction and Industrial Plywood.
1.3 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Design, engineer, and construct formwork, shoring, and bracing to meet design and code
requirements, so that resultant concrete conforms to required shapes, lines, and dimensions.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Construct and erect concrete formwork in accordance with ACI 301.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to CBC - California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part
2.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FORM MATERIALS
A. Plywood: PS-1, BB Plyform grade, Class I, Exterior classification.
B. Lumber: Douglas Fir species; construction grade; with grade stamp clearly visible.
2.2 FORMWORK ACCESSORIES
A. Form Ties: Snap-off metal of adjustable length; cone type; 1 inch break back dimension; free of
defects that will leave holes no larger than one inch diameter in concrete surface.
247
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
03 10 00 - 2 CONCRETE FORMWORK
B. Form Release Agent: Colorless material which will not stain concrete, absorb moisture, or impair
natural bonding or color characteristics of coating intended for use on concrete.
C. Fillets for Chamfered Corners: Wood strips type; 3/4 x 3/4 inch size; maximum possible lengths.
D. Dovetail Anchor Slots: Minimum 22 gage galvanized steel; foam filled; release tape sealed slots;
bent tab anchors; securable to concrete formwork; manufactured by Heckmann Building Products
Co., www.heckmannbuildingprods.com.
E. Nails, Spikes, Lag Bolts, Through Bolts, Anchorages: Sized as required; of strength and character
to maintain formwork in place while placing concrete.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Verify lines, levels, and measurements before proceeding with formwork.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Minimize form joints. Symmetrically align joints and make watertight to prevent leakage of mortar.
B. Arrange and assemble formwork to permit stripping, so that concrete is not damaged during its
removal.
C. Arrange forms to allow stripping without removal of principal shores, where required to remain in
place.
3.3 ERECTION
A. Erect formwork, shoring and bracing to achieve design requirements, in accordance with
requirements of ACI 301.
B. Provide bracing to ensure stability of formwork. Strengthen formwork liable to be overstressed by
construction loads.
C. Provide chamfer strips on external corners of walls.
D. Obtain approval before framing openings in structural members which are not indicated on
Drawings.
E. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier placed by Section 03 30 00.
F. Construct formwork to maintain tolerances in accordance with ACI 301.
3.4 APPLICATION OF FORM RELEASE AGENT
A. Apply form release agent on formwork in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Apply prior
to placing reinforcing steel, anchoring devices, and embedded items.
B. Do not apply form release agent where concrete surfaces are scheduled to receive applied
coverings which may be affected by agent. Soak contact surfaces of untreated forms with clean
water. Keep surfaces wet prior to placing concrete.
248
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
03 10 00 - 3 CONCRETE FORMWORK
3.5 INSERTS, EMBEDDED PARTS, AND OPENINGS
A. Provide formed openings where required for work embedded in or passing through concrete.
B. Coordinate work of other Sections in forming and setting openings, slots, recesses, chases,
sleeves, bolts, anchors, and other inserts.
C. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, level and plumb. Ensure items
are not disturbed during concrete placement.
3.6 FORM REMOVAL
A. Do not remove forms and bracing until concrete has sufficient strength to support its own weight
and imposed loads.
B. Do not damage concrete surfaces during form removal.
C. Store reusable forms for exposed architectural concrete to prevent damage to contact surfaces.
3.7 CLEANING
A. Clean forms to remove foreign matter as erection proceeds.
B. Ensure that water and debris drain to exterior through clean-out ports.
3.8 EARTH FORMS
A. Construct wood edge strips at top sides of excavations as indicated on drawings.
B. Provide forms for footings and foundation walls wherever concrete cannot be placed against solid
earth.
C. Remove loose dirt and debris from form area prior to concrete placement.
D. When earth formed foundations are used, the minimum formwork shown on the drawings is
mandatory to insure clean excavations prior to and during concrete placement.
END OF SECTION
249
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
03 20 00 - 1 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
SECTION 03 20 00
CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Reinforcing steel bars for cast-in-place concrete.
B. Support chairs, bolsters, bar supports, and spacers, for supporting reinforcement.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. A. 2019 CBC California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2,
Chapters 17 & 19 (ACI 318).
B. ACI 301 - Specifications for Structural Concrete for Buildings.
C. ACI 315 (SP-66) - Details and Detailing of Concrete Reinforcement.
D. ACI 318 - Building Code Requirements for Reinforced Concrete.
E. ASTM A82 - Cold Drawn Steel Wire for Concrete Reinforcement.
F. ASTM A1064- Welded Steel Wire Fabric for Concrete Reinforcement.
G. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
H. ASTM A706 - Standard Specification for Low Alloy Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete
Reinforcement.
I. AWS D1.4 - Structural Welding Code Reinforcing Steel.
J. CRSI - Manual of Practice.
K. CRSI - Placing Reinforcing Bars.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform concrete reinforcement work in accordance with CRSI Manual of Standard Practice.
B. Conform to ACI 301 and ACI 315 (SP-66).
C. Conform to CBC California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2.
1.4 CERTIFICATES
A. Submit mill test certificates of supplied concrete reinforcing, indicating physical and chemical
analysis.
250
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
03 20 00 - 2 CONCRETE REINFORCEMENT
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Reinforcing Steel: ASTM A615, Grade 60. Billet-steel deformed bars, uncoated finish.
B. Steel Wire: ASTM A82, plain, cold drawn steel.
2.2 ACCESSORY MATERIALS
A. Tie Wire: Minimum 16 gage annealed type.
B. Chairs, Bolsters, Bar Supports, Spacers: Sized and shaped for strength and support of
reinforcement during installation and placement of concrete including load bearing pad on bottom
to prevent vapor barrier puncture.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate in accordance with ACI 315 (SP-66), providing concrete cover specified in Section 03
30 00.
B. Locate reinforcing splices not indicated on Drawings at points of minimum stress. Indicate
location of splices on shop drawings.
C. Weld reinforcing bars in accordance with AWS D1.4.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Before placing concrete, clean reinforcement of foreign particles or coatings.
B. Place, support, and secure reinforcement against displacement. Do not deviate from alignment or
measurement.
C. Do not displace or damage vapor barrier required by Section 03 30 00.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 01 40 00
.
END OF SECTION
251
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
03 30 00-1 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
SECTION 03 30 00
CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY:
A. Section Includes:
1. Cast-in-place normal weight concrete, placement and finishing.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 32 13 13: Site Concrete Work.
3. Section 03 20 00: Concrete Reinforcing.
1.2 REFERENCES:
A. 2019 CBC – California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2,
Chapters 17A & 19A.
B. American Concrete Institute (ACI) Publication:
1. AC I - 224R-01 Control of Cracking in Concrete Structures.
2. AC I - 224.3R-2013- Joints in Concrete.
3. AC I 301 - Structural Concrete for Buildings.
4. AC I 302.1R-15 - Guide for Concrete Floor and Slab Construction.
5. AC I 318-2014 - Building Code Requirements for Structural Concrete and Commentary
C. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Standards:
1. ASTM A615 - Deformed and Plain Billet-Steel for Concrete Reinforcement.
2. ASTM A706 - Low-Allow Steel Deformed Bars for Concrete Reinforcement.
3. ASTM E 1745 - Water Vapor Retarders Used In Contact with Soil or Granular Fill Under
Concrete Slabs.
4. ASTM C33 - Concrete Aggregates.
5. ASTM C94 - Ready-Mixed Concrete.
6. ASTM C150 - Portland Cement.
7. ASTM C171 - Sheet Materials for Curing Concrete.
252
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
03 30 00-2 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
8. ASTM C856-04 - Practice for Petrographic Examination of Hardened Concrete.
9. ASTM E-96 - Water Vapor Transmission of Materials.
10. ASTM E1155 - Test for Determining Floor Flatness and Floor Levelness.
11. ASTM F1869 - Test Method for Measuring Moisture Vapor Emission.
12. ASTM F2170 - Determining Relative Humidity in Concrete Floor Slabs Using In-Situ
Probes.
D. SSPWC - Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Latest Edition.
1.3 SUBMITTALS:
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings: Shop drawings shall indicate locations of cast-in-place
concrete Work and accessory items such as vapor barriers. Include details and locations of
reinforcing, embedded items, and interfacing with other Work.
B. Mix Design Data: Submit concrete mix designs as specified herein and in Article 2.02.
1. Submit name, address and telephone number of the concrete production facility which the
contractor intends to engage to design the concrete mixes. Submit name and qualifications
of the proposed concrete technologist.
2. Mix Design: Submit a concrete mix design for each strength and type of concrete indicated
in the drawings or specified. Include water/cement ratio, source, size and amount of coarse
aggregate and admixtures. Predict minimum compressive strength, maximum slump and air
content percentage. Clearly indicate locations where each mix design will be used.
3. Test Reports: Submit copies of test reports showing that the proposed mixes produce
concrete with the strengths and properties specified. Include tests for cement, aggregates
and admixtures. Provide gradation analysis.
C. Certificates: Submit certification that each of the following conforms to the standards indicated.
1. Portland cement: ASTM C150.
2. Normal weight concrete aggregates: ASTM C33.
3. Aggregates: Submit evidence that the aggregate is not reactive in the presence of
cement alkalis. In the absence of evidence, aggregate shall be tested per ASTM C289.
If results of test are other than innocuous, aggregates shall be tested per ASTM C1567
as reported per ACI 318 as modified by CBC, Section 1903A.5.
4. Curing materials: ASTM C171.
D. Admixtures: Submit product data for proposed concrete admixtures.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE:
A. Inspection shall be performed by a representative of a testing laboratory selected by the Owner.
Owner will pay for inspection costs. Notify the laboratory 24 hours in advance of time concrete is to
be mixed. Notify the laboratory of postponement or cancellation of mixing within at least 24 hours of
253
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
03 30 00-3 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
scheduling time.
B. Contractor shall assist the testing laboratory in obtaining and handling samples at the project site and
at the source of materials.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Store cement and aggregate materials so as to prevent their deterioration or intrusion by foreign
matter. Deteriorated or contaminated materials shall not be furnished.
B. Packaged materials shall bear the manufacturers and brand name label and shall be stored in their
original unbroken package in a weather tight place until ready for use in the work.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS:
A. Cold Weather Requirements: Batching, mixing, delivering and placing of concrete in cold weather
shall comply with the applicable requirements of ACI 306.1.
B. Hot Weather Requirements: Batching, mixing, delivering and placing of concrete in hot weather shall
comply with the applicable requirements of ACI 305R.
C. Concrete temperature of freshly mixed concrete shall be determined per ASTM C1064.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS:
A. Cement: ASTM C150. Portland Cement. Type(s) as indicated on drawings.
B. Aggregates: Conform to the following standards:
1. Normal weight concrete: ASTM C33.
2. Aggregate shall be tested for Potential Alkali Reactivity of Cement-Aggregate Combinations
per ASTM C289.
3. Nominal maximum size of coarse aggregate shall be no larger than:
a. 1/5 the narrowest dimension between sides of forms, nor
b. 1/3 the depth of slabs, nor
c. 3/4 the clear spacing between individual reinforcing bars or wires, bundles of bars,
individual tendons, or ducts.
C. Water: Water for concrete mixes, curing and cleaning shall be potable and free from deleterious
matter.
D. Admixtures: Shall be shown capable of maintaining essentially the same composition and
performance throughout the work as the product used in establishing concrete proportions in
accordance with ACI 318, Section 3.6.
1. Admixtures containing chlorides or sulfides are not permitted.
254
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
03 30 00-4 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
2. Air-entraining admixtures shall comply with ASTM C260. Air-entrained admixtures shall not
be used for floor slabs to receive steel trowel finish.
3. Admixtures for water reduction and setting time modification shall conform to ASTM C494.
4. Admixtures for producing flowing concrete shall conform to ASTM C1017.
5. Admixtures containing ASTM C845 expansive cements shall be compatible with the cement
and produce no deleterious effects.
6. Silica fumes used as an admixture shall conform to ASTM C1240.
E. Reinforcement Fibers: Chop strands of alkali-resistant polypropylene or nylon fibers added to the
concrete mix for protection against shrinkage cracks.
F. Expansion Joint Fillers: Preformed strips, non-extruding and resilient bituminous type, of thickness
indicated, conforming to ASTM D1751.
G. Curing Paper: Shall conform to ASTM C171 and consist of two sheets of kraft paper cemented
together with a bituminous material in which are embedded cords or strands of fiber running in
both directions. The paper shall be light in color, shall be free of visible defects, with uniform
appearance.
H. Floor Hardener: See Section: 03 35 15 Sealed Concrete Flooring
I. Underlayment: Two component latex underlayment for filling low spots in concrete for both interior
and exterior applications, from featheredge to a maximum of 3/8 inch in thickness. Underlayment
shall be non-shrink and suitable for repairing exposed concrete surfaces and for underlayment of
carpet, resilient, tile and quarry floor coverings. La-O-Tex by TexRite, Underlay C, RS by Mer-Krete
Systems, Underlayment 962 by C-Cure, or equal.
J. Grout: ASTM C1107, non-shrink type, pre-mixed compound consisting of non-metallic aggregate,
cement, water reducing and plasticizing additives, capable of developing a minimum compressive
strength of 8,000 psi at 7 days; of consistency suitable for application and a 30 minute working
time.
2.2 CONCRETE MIX:
A. Mix shall be signed and sealed by a Civil or Structural Engineer currently registered in the State
of California.
B. Strength of Concrete: Strengths and types of concretes shall be as indicated in the Drawings.
Unless otherwise indicated or specified, concrete shall be provided with minimum 28-day strength as
specified on the Drawings.
C. The required strength and durability of concrete shall be determined by compliance with the
proportioning, testing, mixing and placing provisions of CBC Chapter 19A. Concrete mix shall
meet the durability requirements of ACI 318, Chapters 19 & 26.
D. Concrete proportioning shall be determined on the basis of field experience and/or trial mixtures
shall in accordance with CBC Sections 1903A, 1904A and ACI 318, Section 26.4. Proportions of
materials shall provide workability and consistency to permit concrete to be placed readily into forms
and around reinforcement under conditions of placement to be employed, without segregation or
excessive bleeding.
255
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
03 30 00-5 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
E. Ready-Mixed Concrete: Mix and deliver in accordance with requirements of ASTM C94.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL:
A. Surfaces to receive concrete shall be free of debris, standing water, and any other deleterious
substances before start of concrete placing.
B. Time of Placing: Do not place concrete until reinforcement, conduits, outlet boxes, anchors, hangers,
sleeves, bolts, and other embedded materials are securely fastened in place. Contact the Inspector
at least 24 hours before placing concrete; do not place concrete until inspected by the inspector of
record.
C. Pouring Record: A record shall be kept on the Project site of time and date of placing concrete in
each portion of structure. Such record shall be maintained on the Project site until Substantial
Completion and shall be available for examination by the Architect and Inspector.
3.2 TOLERANCES:
A. Concrete construction tolerances shall be as specified in ACI 117 and as modified herein.
B. Floor Flatness (FF) and Floor Levelness (FL) shall be as indicated below:
Specified Overall Value
Minimum Local Value
FF FL FF FL
Slabs on ground: mechanical
and electrical rooms, parking
structures and mortar bed set
tile and quarry flooring.
20 15 15 10
Slab on ground: carpet. 25 20 17 15
Slab on ground: thinset tile
and resilient flooring.
35 25 24 17
C. Refer to ACI 302.1R, Tables 8.1 and 8.2 Slab on Ground and Suspended Flatness/Levelness
Construction Guide, for recommended concrete placing and finishing methods.
D. Floor Flatness and Floor Levelness shall be tested in accordance to ASTM E1155. Floor
measurements shall be made within 48 hours after slab installation, and shall precede removal of
shores and forms.
3.3 PREPARATION:
A. Vapor Barrier: Before installation of screeds and slab reinforcement, install vapor barrier under slabs
on grade, as indicated in the drawings.
256
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
03 30 00-6 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1. Install in accordance to ASTM E1643.
2. Place vapor retarder sheeting with the longest dimension parallel with the direction of the
concrete pour.
3. Laps or seams shall be overlapped 6 inches, or as recommended by manufacturer. Las and
penetrations shall be sealed with the manufacturer’s recommended tape and/or mastic.
4. Inspector will inspect and mark areas of damage and insufficient installation of the vapor
barrier sufficiently in advance of concrete placement.
a. Deficiencies shall be corrected before concrete is placed.
b. Patch damaged areas with vapor barrier overlapping four sides 6 inches and
adhering with tape.
3.4 INSTALLATION:
A. Conveying and Placing:
1. Concrete shall be placed only under direct observation of the inspector of record. Do not
place concrete outside of regular working hours, unless the Inspector has been notified at
least 48 hours in advance.
2. Concrete shall be conveyed from mixer to location of final placement by methods that will
prevent separation or loss of materials.
3. Concrete shall be placed as nearly as practicable to its final position to avoid segregation
due to re-handling or flowing. No concrete that has partially hydrated or has been
contaminated by foreign materials shall be placed, nor shall re-tempered concrete or
concrete which has been remixed after initial set be placed.
4. In placing concrete in columns, walls or thin sections, provide openings in forms, elephant
trunks, tremies or other recognized devices, to prevent segregation and accumulation of
partially hydrated concrete on forms or metal reinforcement above level of concrete being
placed. Such devices shall be installed so that concrete will be dropped vertically.
Unconfined vertical drop of concrete from end of such devices to final placement surface
shall not exceed 6 feet.
5. Concrete shall be placed as a continuous operation until placing of panel or section is
completed. Top surfaces of vertically formed lifts shall be level.
6. Concrete shall be thoroughly consolidated by suitable means during placement, and shall be
thoroughly worked around reinforcement and embedded fixtures and into corners of forms.
7. Where conditions make consolidation difficult or where reinforcement is congested, batches
of mortar containing same proportions of cement, sand, and water as provided in the
concrete, shall first be deposited in the forms to a depth of at least one inch.
B. Cold Weather:
1. Provide adequate equipment for heating concrete materials and protecting concrete
during freezing or near-freezing weather. All ground with which concrete is to come in
contact shall be free from frost. No frozen materials or materials containing ice shall be
257
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
03 30 00-7 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
used.
2. The temperature of concrete at the time of placement shall not be below the minimum
temperatures given in Table 3.1 of ACI 306.1.
3. Concrete shall be maintained at a temperature of at least 50° F. for not less than 72 hours
after placing or until it has thoroughly hardened. Cover concrete and provide sufficient heat
as required. When necessary, aggregates shall be heated before mixing. Special
precautions shall be taken for protection of transit-mixed concrete.
C. Hot Weather:
1. Concrete to be placed during hot weather shall comply with the requirements of ACI 318,
Section 26.5.5.
2. Maintain concrete temperatures indicated in Table 2.1.5 of ACI 305R to prevent the
evaporation rate from exceeding 0.2 pound of water per square feet of exposed concrete per
hour.
3. Cool concrete using methods indicated in ACI 305R Appendix B.
4. Place and cure concrete as specified in ACI 305R Chapter 4.
D. Compaction and Screeding:
1. Tamp freshly placed concrete with a heavy tamper until at least 3/8 inch of mortar is brought
to surface. Concrete shall then be tamped with a light tamper and screeded with a heavy
straightedge until depressions and irregularities are eliminated, and surface is true to finish
grades or elevations. Remove excess water and debris.
2. Where slabs are to receive separate cement finish or mortar setting bed, continued tamping
to raise mortar to surface is not performed. Laitance shall be removed by brushing with a stiff
brush or by light sandblasting to expose clean top surface of coarse aggregate.
E. Floating and Troweling:
1. When concrete has hydrated sufficiently, it shall be floated to a compact and smooth
surface. After floating, wait until concrete has reached proper consistency before troweling.
Top surfaces shall receive at least 2 troweling operations with steel hand trowel. Prior to
and during final troweling, apply a fine mist of water frequently with an atomizing type fog
sprayer. Omit troweling for slabs to receive a separate cement finish.
2. For interior finish slabs, final troweling shall provide a hard, impervious, and non-slip
surfaces, free from defects and blemishes. Finished surface shall be within tolerances
indicated in Article 3.02. Avoid burnishing. Do not add cement or sand to absorb excess
moisture.
F. Curing:
1. Length of time, temperature and moisture conditions for curing concrete shall be in
accordance with ACI 308R & ACI 318 Section 26.5.3.
2. Forms containing concrete, top of concrete between forms, and exposed concrete surfaces
after removal of forms shall be maintained in a thoroughly wet condition for at least 7
258
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
03 30 00-8 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
consecutive days after placing.
3. If weather is hot or surface has dried out, spray surface of concrete slabs and paving with
fine mist of water, starting not later than 2 hours after final troweling and continuing until
sunset. Surface of finish shall be kept continuously wet until curing medium has been
installed.
4. Immediately after finishing, monolithic floor slabs shall be covered with curing paper. Paper
shall be lapped 4 inches at joints and sealed with waterproof sealer. Edges shall be
cemented to finish. Repair or replace paper damaged during construction operations.
G. Filling, Leveling and Patching:
1. Concrete slabs exhibiting high or low spots and indicated to receive resilient floor covering or
soft floor covering, shall have surfaces repaired. High spots shall be honed, or ground with
power-driven machines to required tolerances. Low spots shall be filled with latex
underlayment, installed in strict accordance with manufacturer's written recommendations.
2. Holes resulting from form ties or sleeve nuts shall be solidly packed, through exterior walls,
by pressure grouting with cement grout, as specified. Grouted holes on exposed surfaces
shall be screeded flush and finished to match adjoining surfaces.
H. Cement Base: Cement base shall be of the height, thickness, and shape detailed. Base shall be
reinforced with one inch mesh, 18 gage, zinc-coated wire fabric. Base finish mixture shall be one part
Portland cement, 2 parts of fine aggregate and one part pea gravel. Colored cement base shall
include a chemically inert mineral oxide pigment in the mix.
3.5 FINISHING:
A. Sacking: Exposed concrete curbs, walls, and other surfaces shall be sacked by an application of
Portland cement grout, floated, and rubbed. Sacking shall not be performed until patching and filling
of holes has been completed. Entire sacking operation for any continuous area shall be started and
completed within the same day.
1. Mix one part Portland cement and 1-1/2 parts fine sand with sufficient water to produce a
grout having consistency of thick paint. Wet surface of concrete sufficiently to prevent
absorption of water from grout. Apply grout uniformly with a brush or spray gun, then
immediately float surface with a cork or other suitable float, scouring wall vigorously.
2. While grout is still plastic, finish surface with a sponge-rubber float, removing excess grout.
Allow surface to dry thoroughly, then rub vigorously with dry burlap to completely remove
dried grout. No visible film or grout shall remain after rubbing with burlap.
B. Cement Grout and Dry-Pack Concrete: Cement grout shall be mixed at the Project site and shall be
composed of one volume of Portland cement and 2-1/2 volumes of fine aggregate. Materials shall be
mixed dry with sufficient water added to make mixture flow under its own weight. When grout is used
as a dry pack concrete, add sufficient water to provide a stiff mixture, which can be molded into a
sphere.
3.6 EXPANSION AND CONSTRUCTION JOINTS:
A. Construction Joints: Details and proposed location of construction joints shall be as indicated on the
Drawings, located to least impair strength of structure, in accordance with the following:
259
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
03 30 00-9 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
1. Thoroughly clean contact surface by sand blasting entire surface not earlier than 5 days
after initial placement.
2. A mix containing same proportion of sand and cement provided in concrete plus a maximum
of 50 percent of coarse aggregate shall be placed to a depth of at least one inch on
horizontal joints. Vertical joints shall be wetted and coated with a neat cement grout
immediately before placing of new concrete.
3. Should contact surface become coated with earth, sawdust, or deleterious material of any
kind after being cleaned, entire surface shall be re-cleaned before applying mix.
B. Expansion Joints: Provide expansion joints where indicated in walks and exterior slabs. Space
approximately 20 feet apart, unless otherwise indicated. Joints shall extend entirely through slab
with joint filler in one piece for width of walk or slab. Joint filler shall be 3/8 inch thick, unless
otherwise indicated.
C. Tooled Joints: Slabs, walks and paving shall be marked into areas as indicated with markings made
with a V-grooving tool. Marks shall be round-edged, free from burrs or obstructions, with clean cut
angles and shall be straight and true. Walks, if not indicated, shall be marked off into rectangles of
not more than 12 square feet and shall have a center marking where more than 5 feet wide.
3.7 TESTING:
A. Molded Cylinder Tests:
1. Inspector or testing lab personnel will prepare cylinders and perform slump tests. Samples
for concrete strength shall be taken in accordance to ASTM C172. Each cylinder shall be
dated, given a number, point in structure from which sample was obtained, mix design
number, mix design strength and result of accompanying slump test noted.
2. Separate tests of molded concrete cylinders obtained at same place and time shall be made
at age of three days, seven days, and 28 days. A strength test shall be the average of the
compressive strength of two cylinders, obtained from the same sample of concrete and
tested at 28 days or at test age designated for determination of f'c.
3. Test cylinders shall be prepared at the Project site and stored in testing laboratory in
accordance with ASTM C31, and tested in accordance with ASTM C39.
B. Concrete Consistency: Measure consistency according to ASTM C143. Test twice each day or
partial day's run of the mixer.
C. Adjustment of Mix: If the strength of any grade of concrete for any portion of Work, as indicated by
molded test cylinders, falls below minimum 28 days compressive strength specified or indicated,
adjust mix design for remaining portion of construction so that resulting concrete meets minimum
strength requirements.
D. Air Content Testing: Measure in accordance to ASTM C173 or ASTM C231, for each composite
sample taken in accordance to ASTM C172.
E. Defective Concrete:
1. Should strength of any grade of concrete, for any portion of Work indicated by tests of
molded cylinders and core tests, fall below minimum 28 days strength specified or indicated,
concrete will be deemed defective Work and shall be replaced or adequately strengthened
260
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
03 30 00-10 CAST-IN-PLACE CONCRETE
in a manner acceptable to the Architect
2. Concrete Work that is not formed as indicated, is not true within 1/250 of span, not true to
intended alignment, not plumb or level where so intended, not true to intended grades and
levels, contains sawdust shavings, wood or embedded debris, or does not fully conform to
Contract provisions, shall be deemed to be defective Work and shall be removed and
replaced.
F. Concrete for Equipment Pads, Mechanical and Electrical Work: Unless otherwise indicated, strength
shall have a minimum f’c as indicated on the Drawings. Exposed concrete shall be provided with a
hand trowel finish with radius corners and edges. Form and place concrete where necessary as
described in Section 03 10 00 Concrete Forming and Accessories, and reinforced as described in
Section 03 20 00 Concrete Reinforcing. Calcium chloride shall not be furnished in any concrete mix
provided for the installation of underground electrical conduits. For concrete encasement of more
than one conduit, furnish 3/4 inch maximum aggregate.
3.8 PROTECTION:
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
B. CLEAN UP:
1. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
At contractor’s expense.
END OF SECTION
261
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
03 54 10 - 1 Gypsum Underlayment
SECTION 03 54 10
GYPSUM UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide high strength poured gypsum concrete underlayment with
accessories as required for complete installation.
1. Provide special acoustical underlayment sound deadening system underneath
gypsum concrete to achieve maximum possible impact isolation class (IIC).
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design Requirements: Completed system to provide maximum impact isolation class
(IIC) rating possible for system indicated.
B. Scheduling: Schedule application as late as possible during construction to avoid
damage by heavy trades.
1. Schedule pour after installation of drywall to minimize damage to installed
underlayment and to complete fire and sound seals.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for items of work not clearly dimensioned or detailed in
manufacturer's product data.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualification of Installers: Manufacturer approved applicator using approved
mixing/placement equipment.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials in original unopened packages, protected from exposure to
elements; remove damaged or deteriorated materials from premises.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Before, during and after installation, building interior shall be enclosed and
maintained at temperature above 50 degrees F until structure and sub-floor
temperatures are stabilized.
B. Provide continuous heat and adequate ventilation to rapidly remove moisture from
area until underlayment is dry; provide mechanical ventilation if necessary.
262
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
03 54 10 - 2 Gypsum Underlayment
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Maxxon Corp./Dura-Cap Gypsum Concrete.
B. Hacker Industries, Inc./Firm-Fill High Strength Gypsum Concrete.
C. USG Corp./Levelrock 2500.
D. Maxxon Corp./Therma-Floor Gypsum Underlayment.
E. Hacker Industries, Inc./Gyp-Span Radiant Floor Underlayments.
F. USG Corp./Levelrock Brand Floor Underlayment RH (Radiant Heat).
G. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Requirements: Provide high strength poured gypsum concrete underlayment
with accessories.
B. Gypsum Cement: Mill mixture of calcined gypsum and aggregate complying with
ASTM C317.
1. Type: High strength gypsum concrete minimum 2500 psi compressive strength.
C. Primer: As recommended by gypsum concrete manufacturer.
1. On old wooden structures use asphalt emulsion as recommended by gypsum
concrete manufacturer.
D. Sand: 1/16" or less washed mason, mortar or plaster sand.
E. Water: Potable, free from impurities.
F. Sealer: Provide manufacturer recommended sealer for gypsum underlayment to
ensure sealing of underlayment and bonding of flooring systems to underlayment.
G. Acoustical Underlayment: Manufacturer's standard dense acoustical underlayment for
sound deadening system providing maximum impact isolation class (IIC) rating.
1. Basis of Design: Provide acoustical underlayment comparable to Maxxon
Corp./Acousti-Mat 1/4 as integral part of gypsum concrete system.
2. Perimeter Isolation Board (PIB): Provide 1/4” thick perimeter isolation board
integral with acoustical underlayment system.
3. Impact Isolation Class (IIC) Rating: Not less than IIC 50 or better unless
otherwise noted based on Acoustical Consultant reports.
263
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
03 54 10 - 3 Gypsum Underlayment
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Inspect subfloor for structurally sound condition required for type of underlayment and
conditions under which work will be performed.
1. Start of work indicates acceptance of conditions.
B. Inspect area to be poured for proper nailing of plywood and replace any areas of
plywood that have weakened or delaminated during construction.
C. Remove stud wall base plates in doors and other openings.
D. Prevent leakage at cracks; fill cracks and voids with quick setting drywall patching
material.
E. Ensure area to be poured is clean and free of mud, oil, grease or other contaminants.
F. Acoustical Underlayment: Install acoustical underlayment system in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions over prepared
substrate for maximum impact isolation class (IIC) rating.
1. Treat joints and perimeter in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
2. Install perimeter isolation board (PIB) prior to installation of acoustical
underlayment, extend PIB at least 1/4” above top of gypsum underlayment, and
tape acoustical underlayment to PIB.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Priming: Apply in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for type of
substrate and underlayment to be poured.
B. Wood Renovations: Mop or squeegee asphalt emulsion over entire surface
completely sealing old boards, not less than two hours nor more than 24 hours prior
to installation of gypsum concrete.
1. Coverage of asphalt emulsion shall be one gallon per 100 sf unless otherwise
recommended by manufacturer.
C. Underlayment Application: Comply with manufacturer's recommendations and
installation instructions for application indicated.
1. Mix gypsum concrete in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations for
type of placement operation employed; do not exceed amounts of water
determined by manufacturer.
2. Keep mixing and placement equipment clean and free of hardened lumps of
gypsum concrete.
264
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
03 54 10 - 4 Gypsum Underlayment
3. Provide adequate equipment and personnel to ensure uniform, continuous flow
of gypsum concrete at point of delivery without segregation and loss of material.
D. Thickness: Comply with manufacturer's recommended minimum thickness for type of
substrate.
1. Install gypsum concrete in one layer at 1" minimum thickness unless greater
thickness indicated.
E. Do not interrupt placement of gypsum concrete until entire section is completed;
ensure no slurry is placed against underlayment that has obtained initial set, except
at authorized joints.
F. Immediately after placement, screed and level to required thickness and trowel to
smooth, even plane.
G. Provide adequate ventilation and heat, if necessary, after placement of gypsum
concrete to ensure complete drying of underlayment.
H. Seal gypsum underlayment in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and
installation instructions.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean spatter from supporting structure and walls before it sets.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Tests: Provide following tests.
1. Compressive Strength: In accordance with ASTM C 472 testing procedures,
using 2" by 2" cube molds.
2. Record and identify each set of test specimens listing area underlayment is being
placed.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. During construction, place temporary wood planking over underlayment wherever it
will be subjected to heavy wheeled or concentrated loads.
B. Replace damaged work.
END OF SECTION
265
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
04 22 00 - 1 Concrete Unit Masonry
SECTION 04 22 00
CONCRETE UNIT MASONRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide concrete masonry unit construction, with mortar,
reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories as required for complete installation.
1. Cut and fit concrete masonry for work of other trades.
B. Work Installed But Not Furnished: Build in items supplied by other trades and
suppliers. Structural steel. As indicated.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing work
of this section. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section.
1. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's certificate concrete masonry units conform to
specified standards.
B. Shop Drawings: Furnish drawings for reinforcing; show bar schedules, diagrams of
bent bars, ties and arrangements and assemblies.
C. Samples: Furnish section of exposed concrete masonry face indicating texture and
color along with each type of colored mortar.
1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Temperature: Maintain materials to minimum 50 degrees F prior to, during and
48 hours after completion of masonry work.
1. Do not place masonry units when air temperature is below 40 degrees F.
2. During colder weather, work may continue where equipment is used to maintain
constant temperature above 40 degrees F and masonry work completed and in
progress is kept covered.
3. Protect masonry construction from direct wind and sun exposure when
temperatures exceed 99 degrees F and relative humidity is less than 50 percent.
B. Bracing: Provide temporary bracing during erection of masonry work, maintain in
place until building structure provides permanent bracing.
266
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
04 22 00 - 2 Concrete Unit Masonry
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description Includes: Provide concrete masonry unit construction, with
mortar, reinforcement, anchorage, and accessories as required for complete
installation.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Perform concrete unit masonry work in accordance with
requirements of California Building Standards Code except where more restrictive
requirements are specified.
C. Concrete Masonry Units: Hollow loadbearing units conforming to ASTM C90.
1. Concrete Masonry Manufacturers:
a. Angelus Block, Co., Inc.
b. Orco Block Co., Inc.
c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2. Weight: Provide medium weight units unless specific weight classification is
indicated.
a. Medium Weight, 105 to 125 pcf.
3. Compressive Strength: Comply with ASTM C90, with minimum 2000 psi per unit
when tested in accordance with ASTM C140.
4. Size: Nominal 8" by 16" face measurement with thickness as indicated on
Drawings.
5. Exposed Face Surfaces: Dense with uniform texture and color throughout
Project.
6. Exposed Face Surfaces: Dense with finish as approved by Architect prior to
manufacturing; uniform texture and color throughout Project.
a. Texture: precision, smooth
b. Colors: standard gray
7. Special Shapes: Provide proper specially shaped units for bond beams, lintels,
corners and jambs.
a. Exposed Special Shapes: Design bond beams, lintels, corners and jambs
and fillers to match and compliment block units; where required perform
cutting with masonry saw.
267
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
04 22 00 - 3 Concrete Unit Masonry
D. Mortar: Conform to ASTM C270, Type S.
1. Masonry Cement/Premix Mortar: Acceptable only if manufacturer certifies
product is made of cement and lime, with no limestone or pulverized material
used in lieu of hydrated lime.
E. Grout: Conform to ASTM C476; minimum compressive strength 2,000 psi.
F. Mortar and Grout Materials:
1. Portland Cement: ASTM C150, Type I.
2. Hydrated Lime: ASTM C207, Type S.
3. Aggregates: Standard masonry mortar and grout type; clean, dry and protected
against dampness, freezing and foreign matter.
a. Mortar Aggregates: Conform to ASTM C144.
b. Grout Aggregates: Conform to ASTM C404.
4. Water: Clean, drinkable, free of injurious amounts of oil, alkali, organic matter or
other harmful materials.
5. Exposed Mortar Colors: Integral color as indicated, as directed by Architect
where not otherwise indicated.
G. Reinforcement and Anchorages: Provide reinforcing and anchorages as indicated on
Drawings.
1. Deformed Bars: ASTM A615, Grade 60 for bars No. 3 and larger, unless
otherwise indicated.
2. Plain Bars: ASTM A675, Grade 80 for No. 2 bars, unless otherwise indicated.
3. Joint Reinforcement: ASTM A82, free from mill scale and excess or loose rust
deposits.
H. Control Joints: Closed cell neoprene or PVC factory fabricated solid sections,
resistant to oils and solvents, flexible at temperatures from 40-degree F after five
hours exposure; ASTM D2240 minimum durometer 70.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Supply metal anchors required for concrete masonry to appropriate trades for
placement; provide in quantities required for Project and direct placement.
1. Ensure items built in by other trades are properly located and sized.
B. Establish lines, levels and coursing, protect from disturbance.
268
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
04 22 00 - 4 Concrete Unit Masonry
C. Clean surfaces to receive masonry free from dirt, debris, and laitance.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Do not wet concrete masonry units; lay units in mortar with full bed and head joints,
properly jointed with other work.
1. Fully bond corners and intersections.
2. Align cells of units to maintain clear, unobstructed space for reinforcing and
grout, keep cells free of mortar and debris.
B. Do not shift or tap masonry units after mortar has taken initial set, where adjustment
must be made, remove mortar and replace.
C. Buttering corners of joints and deep or excessive furrowing of mortar joints is not
acceptable.
D. Perform job site cutting with proper power tools to provide straight, true, unchipped
edges.
E. Provide structural anchorage or retention in accordance with applicable code
requirements.
F. Ensure masonry courses are of uniform height, make vertical and horizontal joints
equal and of uniform thickness.
1. Lay concrete unit masonry in running bond.
2. Course one block unit and one mortar joint to equal 8".
G. Remove excess mortar and projections, take care to prevent breaking block corners.
H. Tolerances:
1. Maximum allowable variation from masonry unit to adjacent masonry unit is 1/32"
where masonry units are exposed in finished construction and where
waterproofing is applied over masonry units.
2. Maximum allowable variation from plane of wall is 1/4" in 10 feet, and maximum
1/2" in 20 feet or more.
3. Maximum allowable variation from plumb is 1/4" per story, non-cumulative, and
maximum 1/2" in two or more stories.
4. Maximum allowable variation of level coursing is 1/8" in 3 feet, 1/4" in 10 feet and
1/2" in 30 feet.
I. Mortar Joints: Compress joints with a round or curved metal tool.
269
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
04 22 00 - 5 Concrete Unit Masonry
1. Compress mortar joints with jointing tool with minimum diameter three times
width of mortar joint, to provide a flush surface where resilient base or
waterproofing is to be applied over masonry.
J. Reinforcement and Anchorage: Fully reinforce corners and intersections. Lap splices
minimum 6". Extend splices minimum 16" each side of openings.
1. Support and secure reinforcing bars to maintain within 1/2" of dimensioned position.
2. Retain vertical reinforcement in position at top and bottom of cells and at
intervals not to exceed 192 bar diameters.
K. Grouting: Place grout when concrete masonry units are surface dry; consolidate and
reconsolidate by mechanical vibration.
1. Fine Grout: Use for spaces less than 2" in width using low lift grouting techniques.
2. Coarse Grout: Use for spaces 2" or more in width.
3. When grouting is stopped for more than one hour, terminate grout approximately
2" below top of upper masonry unit to form positive key for subsequent grout
placement.
4. Low-Lift Grouting: Place first lift of grout at 16" and place subsequent lifts at 8"
increments.
L. Built-In Work: As work progresses, build in frames, lintels, nailing strips, anchor bolts,
plates, and other items supplied by other trades.
1. Build in items plumb and true.
2. Do not build in organic materials which will be subject to rot or deterioration.
3. Bed anchors of frames in mortar joints; fill frame voids solid with mortar; fill
masonry cores with grout minimum 12" from framed openings.
M. Cutting and Fitting: Cut and fit for chases, pipes, conduit, sleeves, and grounds;
coordinate with work of other Specification sections to ensure correct size, shape and
location.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove excess mortar and smears upon completion of masonry work.
B. Point or replace defective mortar, match adjacent work.
C. Clean soiled surfaces using a non-acidic solution which will not harm masonry or
adjacent materials, consult masonry manufacturer for acceptable cleaners.
D. Use non-metallic tools in cleaning operations.
270
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
04 22 00 - 6 Concrete Unit Masonry
3.4 PROTECTION
A. Maintain protective boards at exposed external corners which may be damaged by
construction activities; protect without damaging completed work.
END OF SECTION
271
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 12 00 - 1 STRUCTURAL STEEL
SECTION 05 12 00
STRUCTURAL STEEL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section includes: Furnish and Installation of structural framing members, complete in
place with required bracing, weld washers, nuts, shims, anchor bolts, and baseplates as
indicated on the Drawings and specified herein.
B. Related Sections:
1. Miscellaneous metals, refer to Section 05 50 00
1.02 REFERENCE STANDARDS
A. Refer to the following for information regarding materials and installation methods
necessary:
1. California Building Code (CBC) 2022, Chapters 22 and 35, as adopted by Title
24, and Chapter 7, Section 704 Protection of Structural Members.
a. Refer to Drawings for details, design numbers, and ratings.
2. On-Site Welding Requirements, Title 24, Part 9, Articles 49 and 74.
3. American Society for Testing and Materials: Specifications A36, A53, A108,
A123, A153, A307, F3125 A490, A500, A501, A572, A653, A673, A780, A992,
A1085, C1107, E23, F436, F959M F1554 AND F1852.
4. American Institute of Steel Construction (AISC) 360-16 & 341-16.
5. American Welding Society: AWS D1.1 and AWS D1.4
6. Steel Structures Painting Council (SSPC).
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit Shop and Erection Drawings Prior to Fabrication: Notify Architect and Structural
Engineer 2 weeks minimum prior to submitting for review. Prepare erection drawings by
State registered Structural Engineer. Show welded connections, lengths of welds,
profiles, sizes, spacing and locations of members, attachments, anchorages, framed
openings, size and type of fasteners, cambers and live loads. Contractor shall be
responsible for reviewing and verifying all dimensions on shop Drawings.
1. Splices and Deviations: Splices will be permitted only where and as shown on
Drawings. Deviations from design drawings desired or required by fabricator are
to be indicated on shop drawings by providing a heavy line around the feature on
which deviation approval is being requested, showing complete detail and
describing deviation proposed. Provide detail with a note specifically requesting
approval of deviation by fabricator. Deviations or changes shall not be made
without the approval of the Building Department.
a. Refer to Division 1 of owner’s specifications (Revisions) Cost of such
changes shall be borne by the Contractor.
272
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 12 00 - 2 STRUCTURAL STEEL
B. Erection and Bracing Plan and Procedure: Refer to Section 1710, Title 8, California
Code of Regulations. Employ a California State licensed Civil Engineer to prepare
erection and bracing plan and erection procedure for structural steel including columns,
beams, and girders, who will be responsible for compliance. Follow plan and procedure
exactly. Maintain a copy at project site. Pay for costs involved.
C. Scrap collection and recycling plan: Contractor shall collect and recycle scrap per city’s
waste management requirements.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Tests and Inspections: Testing for steel shall be done in accordance with Title 24, Part 2,
Section 1705. Inspection shall be in accordance with Title 24, Part 2, Table 1705
B. If structural steel can be identified by heat or melt numbers and is accompanied by mill
analysis and test reports (identified stock shall not be tested), testing shall be in
accordance with Title 24, Part 2, Section 2202A.1 and 2205A.
D. Furnish test specimens from steel fabricator and take them under the direction of the
Testing Agency. Machine each test specimen by Testing Agency to dimensions required
by ASTM A370.
E. Have testing agency pick up test specimens and make required tests.
F. Costs of tests of identified stock will be paid for by Owner, unless tests fail to comply with
the specifications, in which case the Owner will pay for testing, but backcharge the
Contractor.
G. Complete a 4-sided inspection of steel. Such inspection shall be paid for by the Owner.
The Inspector of structural steel which is not fabricated within 25 miles of the project site,
shall also be paid for by the Owner, but the Contractor shall pay for travel expenses.
H. After fabrication and inspection, costs associated with re-inspection of defective or
replaced materials shall be paid for by the Owner, but backcharged to the Contractor.
I. Provide labor, equipment and facilities necessary for moving and handling materials to be
inspected.
J. Provide and pay for supervision by a registered Inspector of welding operations of frames
with joints, including inspection for quality, penetration, and conformity of Drawings, and a
report verifying that welding is adequate and was done in conformity of project
requirements.
1. Visually inspect welds and have inspector present to approve welding and high
strength bolting whether performed in fabricator's shop or at project site and
inspect erection. Ensure testing laboratory compliance with regulations of the
City and certify in writing, upon completion of work, that welding and high
strength bolting has been performed in accordance with Drawings and these
Specifications. Inspect grouting of column base plates.
2. Have testing laboratory check bolt tightness on not less than 10 percent of bolts
selected at random in each high strength bolt connection. Follow procedures of
ASTM F3125 A325 and F3125 A490.
3. Inspect all complete penetration welds and partial penetration welds by ultrasonic
or other approved nondestructive tests. Inspect first pass of multi-pass welds
273
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 12 00 - 3 STRUCTURAL STEEL
and groove welds.
4. Perform ultrasonic testing by specially trained, qualified technicians who operate
equipment, examine welds and maintain a record of welds examined, defects
found and disposition of each defect. Repair defective welds and retest.
5. Ultrasonically test welds at rate of 100 percent to establish welder qualifications.
If rejectable defect rate is less than 5 percent, frequency may be reduced to 25
percent. If rate increases above 5 percent, continue 100 percent testing until
rejectable defect rate again drops below 5 percent. Calculate percentages by
individual welder.
6. Submit all preliminary, working and final documents required by subsection
1.04K.
7. Inspect all seam welds at HSS steel member.
K. Comply with California Building Code (CBC) Title 24, Part 2, Sections 2213 and 1705.
1.05 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Verify measurements, lines, grades, locations and details at project site. Conform to
existing field conditions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS AND COMPONENTS
A. Structural Steel Members: Shall conform to the requirements of ASTM A6 and shall be
fabricated according to AISC Practice and Specifications for Building.
B. Structural plates, bars, etc., shall conform to ASTM 572, unless noted otherwise on
drawings. Structural wide flange beams and columns shall conform to ASTM A992,
Grade 50.
C. Pipe columns shall conform to ASTM A1085.
D. Tube members shall conform to ASTM A1085.
E. All welding shall be done using the shielded electric arc process by AWS certified
welders using AWS D 5.1, E70XX series electrodes.
F. All welds used in primary members and connections in the lateral force systems shall be
made with a filler metal that has a minimum Charpy V-notch toughness of 20 ft.-lbs. at
minus 20 degrees F., as determined by AWS classification.
G. Continuous inspection is required for all field and shop welding by an Inspector approved
by the Building Department.
H. Bolts shall conform to ASTM F3125 GR. A490, unless noted otherwise.
I. Structural Steel Shop Drawings shall be reviewed by the Structural Engineer of Record
prior to fabrication.
J. Light gauge steel members shall conform to ASTM A446, Grade A.
274
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 12 00 - 4 STRUCTURAL STEEL
2.02 LIGHT STRUCTURAL STEEL
A. Standard specifications for Hot-Formed Welded and seamless Carbon Steel Structural
Tubing, ASTM 1085.
2.03 WELDING ELECTRODES
A. Conform to AWS, Latest Edition, AWS 1.1.
1. Required strength of weld shall comply with CBC Title 24, Part 2, Section
1705A.2.5.
2.04 GALVANIZING
Galvanize all structural steel exposed to weather.
A. Provide hot-dip galvanizing in accordance with ASTM A123, Grade 90.
B. Field Galvanizing: Provide ZRC, or other approved.
2.05 PRIMER
B. Interior Primer – Provide interior primer 734149X red oxide by Rodda Co., or equal.
Primer shall have a VOC content of 100 g/l (0.83 lb/gal) or less when calculated
according to 40 CRF 59, Subpart D (EPA method 24).
C. Clean, prepare and shop prime exterior members in accordance with SSPC-Paint 20 or
SSPC-Paint 29 and compatible with top coats indicated on plans. Do not prime specific
surfaces to be welded or which will be in direct contact with concrete or other
cementitious materials.
D. Clean, prepare and shop prime interior members in accordance with SSPC-Paint 23 and
compatible with topcoats indicated on plans. Do not prime specific surfaces to be welded or
which will be in direct contact with concrete or other cementitious materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Surface Conditions: Prior to commencing work of this section, inspect the work of others
and verify that such work has been properly completed and installed to allow for proper
installation of materials and methods required of this section.
3.02 FABRICATION AND ERECTION
A. Fabricate and assemble work by skilled workers using sizes and weights shown.
Connections are to develop at least strengths shown, unless approved otherwise
beforehand. Allow no splices except where shown.
B. Drilling, Punching and Reaming: Hole burning to make or enlarge previous holes is not
allowed. Prepare required holes in structural steel members for attachment or passage
275
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 12 00 - 5 STRUCTURAL STEEL
of work of other trades. Where allowed, steel may be punched 1/16-inch larger than the
nominal diameter of the bolt when thickness of the steel is equal to or less than the
diameter of the bolt plus 1/8-inch. Where the steel is thicker than the diameter of the bolt
plus 1/8-inch, the holes must be drilled or sub-punched and reamed. Diameter of the
sub-punched holes, and the drill for sub-drilled holes, is to be 1/16-inch smaller than the
nominal diameter of bolt to be installed. Precisely locate finished holes to ensure
passage of bolts through steel assemblies without drifting. Enlarge holes only by
reaming. Poor matching of holes is cause for rejection of work.
C.
1. Storage and Care of Electrodes: Ensure that coatings of low hydrogen
type electrodes are thoroughly dry when used. Use electrodes taken
from hermetically sealed packages within four hours of the time the
package is opened. Electrodes not used within this time period, and
electrodes which have been exposed more than one hour to air having a
relative humidity of 75 percent or greater, are to be dried for at least two
(2) hours at 200 to 250 degrees F. before used, or are to be
reconditioned according to manufacturer's printed recommendations.
Electrodes dried or reconditioned, which are not used within four hours
after drying is completed, are to be re-dried before use. Electrodes of
any classifications that have been wet are not to be used under any
conditions.
2. Preparation: Clean surfaces to be welded of paint, grease, scale, and
foreign matter. Clean welds each time electrode is changed. Chip entire
area of hand guided and controlled flame cut edges before welds are
deposited. In general, surfaces made by automatic or mechanically
guided and controlled equipment need not be ground or chipped before
welded.
3. Procedures: During assembling and welding, hold components of a
built-up member with sufficient clamps or other adequate means to keep
parts straight and in close contact. Do no welding in wind until adequate
protective screening has been set up.
4. Characteristics of Welds: After being deposited, brush welds and ensure
they exhibit uniform section, smoothness of weld metal, feather edges
without undercuts or overlays, and freedom from porosity and clinkers.
Ensure through visual inspection at edges and ends of fillet welds there
is good fusion and penetration into base metal.
D. Bolting:
1. Common Bolts: Make connections with ASTM A307 common bolts only
where indicated.
2. High Strength Steel Bolting: Where structural joints are made using high
strength bolts, load indicator washers, and nuts tightened to a high
tension, the materials, method of installation and tension control, types of
wrenches to be used, and inspection methods are to conform to
specifications for structural jointing using ASTM F3125 A490 bolts
established by the Research Council on Riveted and Bolted Structural
Joints of the Engineering Foundation and the following requirements:
a. Provide high strength bolts with a suitable identifying mark
placed on top of the head before leaving factory.
b. Do tightening of nuts with properly calibrated wrenches, load
276
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 12 00 - 6 STRUCTURAL STEEL
indicator washers, or turn of nut method; the minimum bolt
tension for the size of bolt used is to be in accordance with
tables listed in the above standards.
c. Check calibrated wrenches individually for accuracy at least
twice daily for actual conditions of application.
d. Mark bolts that have been completely tightened with identifying symbol.
e. Install load indicator washers in accordance with AISC specifications and
Contract Drawings.
f. Ensure that contact bearing surfaces and threads of bolted parts are free
of scale, slag, and burrs which could prevent solid seating of parts.
g. Bolt lengths are to be grip plus 1-1/4 inch.
h. At moment connections perform welding prior to high-strength bolt
tightening.
3. Load Indicator Washers: Provide as manufactured/ licensed by Cooper and
Turner, or Bethlehem Steel. They may be used for field installation of high-
strength bolts. These washers may not be substituted for any required washer,
but may be used in conjunction with required washers. Tightening is to be in
accordance with these specifications using high strength bolts. After sufficient
bolts in a joint are snugged to draw the members into close contact, tightening
should progress from the most rigid part to the free edges until the load indicators
on bolts are closed to the required gap of 0.015 inches under bolt heads or 0.010
inches under the nuts. To prevent overtightening and damage to the bolts, do
not completely close the gap.
4. Nuts, and Washers: Series F9t as manufactured by Cold Form Specialties or
Bethlehem Steel, may also be used for field installation of high strength bolts. In
multi-bolt joints, tighten nuts in stages, a little at a time, without breaking the
spline in any one of them until the final stage, to minimize slackening of the
installed bolts.
5. Inspection of high strength bolting shall comply with Title 24, Part 2, Sections
2213 and 1705.
6. Erector to touch-up all welds and bolts after inspection.
E. Erection:
1. Erect structural steel by professional riggers, using proper hoists and equipment,
carefully planned and laid out so that cutting shall not be necessary. Erect the
work plumb, square and true to line. Provide temporary bracing and guys where
necessary to provide for loads and stresses to which the structure may be
subjected, including those due to erection equipment and its operation, and leave
in place as long as necessary to safeguard parts of the work.
2. Temporary Connections: Securely bolt work to maintain the steel in proper
position while bolting and welding is being performed. Align, plumb and level
work prior to welding and final bolting.
3. Set column base plates in exact position as to alignment, level and elevation and
support on steel wedges or equivalent until grout has properly set. Center of
each base is to be true to the column center within 1/16-inch and adjusted to its
277
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 12 00 - 7 STRUCTURAL STEEL
elevation to 1/32-inch. Exactly level plates on both axes.
4. Sequence: Carry out the erection of steel in the proper sequence with the work
of others. Frame, bed and anchor to concrete and related work in accordance
with detailed drawings and setting diagrams.
5. Erection Tolerance: Follow AISC except as follows:
a. Vertical dimensions measured from top of beams at their connections at
any one column, not varying more than 1/4-inch plus or minus per story
or, when accumulative from floor to floor, not exceeding 3/8-inch per
story exclusive of column shortening due to dead load.
b. Floor level is considered level if floor framing members on any one floor
measured from top of column connections do not vary by more than 1-
1/2 inch plus or minus.
c. Plumb displacement center line of columns from established column line,
no more than 1 inch toward or away from established center line.
d. Horizontal dimension variances governed by column displacement.
6. Perform erection with suitable equipment, of adequate capacity and design with
due regard for personnel and public safety and as not to deflect or stress
members beyond reasonable limits. Maintain erection and temporary bracing
plan at project site in accordance with Title 8, California Code of Regulations.
7. Damaged Members During Erection: Straighten or replace members which are
bent, twisted or damaged as directed. If heating is required in straightening,
perform heating by methods which ensure uniform temperatures throughout
entire member. When directed, remove members which are damaged to an
extent impairing their appearance, strength or serviceability and replace with new
members at no additional cost to Owner.
8. Anchor Bolt Rods: Provide with setting drawings and instructions. Verify position
of bolts prior to delivery of steel; report errors or deviations for adjustment.
F. Erection Bracing: Provide erection bracing immediately upon erection of members and
leave in place until members are braced by balance of building.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protection of Floors and Temporary Flooring:
1. Exercise caution to protect floor surfaces and adjacent work from damages. Do
not overload floors. Provide only pneumatic mobile equipment with tires, for
moving steel. Do not place steel members directly on concrete floors. Pads,
timbers, or other materials for cushioning shall be used.
2. Provide necessary planking, scaffolding and temporary flooring in connection
with erection of steel or support of erection machinery as part of the work.
Conform use of temporary floors or steel deck to governing codes and
regulations.
3. Temporarily tack weld steel deck to supports where used as a working platform.
Distribute concentrated loads from welding machines or other heavy machinery
by planking or other equivalent means. Replace steel deck damaged in using as
working platform at no additional cost to Owner.
278
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 12 00 - 8 STRUCTURAL STEEL
3.04 CLEANING
A. Shop Priming:
1. Clean surfaces according to SSPC and AISC recommendations, and apply
specified primer to minimum 1.0 dry mil thickness. Ensure that primer is worked
into joints.
2. Steel to be embedded into cementitious materials, permanently concealed steel
surfaces, contact surfaces of high-strength bolted connections, and surfaces to
receive fireproofing are not to be primed.
END OF SECTION
279
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 30 00 - 1 METAL DECKING
SECTION 05 30 00
METAL DECKING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section.
B. Section Includes:
1. Metal decking as indicated.
C. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 40 00: Per Division 1 of owner’s specifications
3. Section 05 12 00: Structural Steel
4. Section 07 60 00: Flashing and Sheet Metal.
D. Referenced Standards
1. Conform to current adopted reference standards by date of issue of the
current code cycle and the Date of the Contract Documents.
2. 2019 CBC – California Building Code, (CCR) California Code of
Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, Chapters 17, 22, and Section 2210.
3. ASTM A36 - Specification for Structural Steel.
4. ASTM A 108 - Specification for Steel Bars, Carbon, Cold-Finished,
Standard Quality.
5. ASTM A572 - Grade 50, Structural Steel.
6. ASTM A653/A653M-98 - Sheet Steel, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or Zinc -
Iron Alloy Coated by the Hot- Dip Process.
7. ASTM A 1008 - Steel, Sheet, Cold-Rolled, Carbon, Structural, High-
Strength Low-Alloy and High-Strength Low-Alloy with Improved
Formability.
8. AWS D 1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
9. AWS D 1.3 - Structural Welding Code, Sheet Steel.
1.02 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Requirements: Compute properties of deck sections on basis of
effective design width as limited by provisions of the AISI specifications. Provide
no less than deck section properties specified, including section modulus and
moment of inertia per foot of width.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
280
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 30 00 - 2 METAL DECKING
1. Work of this section shall be in accordance with CBC.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Drawings, sections and details indicate type of decking, location,
finish, gage of metal, arrangement of sheets, necessary fabrication to incorporate
decking into the Work, and relationship to openings and flashing.
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General: Metal decking steel shall conform to requirements of strengths and
properties of standards specified.
B. Qualifications of Welders: Properly certified for the type of Work involved in
compliance with CBC requirements.
D. Identification of metal decking steel shall conform to the standards specified in
Section 01 40 00: Per Division 1 of owner’s specifications.
1. Fabricator shall furnish sufficient evidence to the Architect attesting
compliance with specified requirements.
2. Conform to CBC requirements. Unclassified or unidentified decking is not
permitted. Furnish deck manufacturer's certified mill analyses and test
reports for each heat covering decking having Fy of 33 Ksi or less. In
addition, for decking having Fy greater than 33 Ksi, testing laboratory
shall perform one tension and elongation test and one bend or flattening
test for each gage.
E. Unidentifiable Steel: Steel which is not readily identifiable as to grade from
markings and test records is not permitted to be provided as part of the Work of
this section.
F. Payment For Tests and Inspections:
1. Owner shall pay inspection and testing costs of identifiable steel.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. BHP Steel Building Products, Inc.
B. Verco Manufacturing Co.
C. Members of Steel Deck Institute (SDI).
E. AEP Span
281
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 30 00 - 3 METAL DECKING
2.02 MATERIALS
A. Metal Decking: Roll-formed sheets conforming to ASTM A653 Grade 50
minimum, with G90 zinc coating.
1. Section properties shall conform to applicable provisions of latest edition
of AISI - Specification for the Design of Cold-Formed Steel Structural
Members.
B. Flexible Closure Strips for Deck: Vulcanized, closed-cell, expanded chloroprene
elastomer, complying with ASTM D 1056, Grade SCE #41.
1. Brittleness Temperature: Minus 40 degrees F, ASTM D 746.
2. Flammability Resistance: Self-extinguishing, ASTM D 1692.
C. Metal Flashing and Closures: 22 gage minimum, with ASTM A653, G90 zinc
coating, unless noted otherwise on drawings.
D. Shear Connectors: Headed stud type, ASTM A 108 Grade 105 or 1020, cold-
finished carbon steel complying with AISC specifications.
2.03 FABRICATION
A. Corrugated sheets or sections shall be designed to support required live load
between supporting members.
B. Wherever practical, provide decking in lengths to span over three or more
supports.
C. Except as detailed otherwise, provide decking with interlocking side laps, 2-1/2
inches minimum end bearing, and 1-1/2 inches minimum side bearing.
D. Welding: Provide materials and methods in accordance with recommendations
of steel decking manufacturer and reviewed submittals. Hold decking tight to the
supporting elements with screws or other means for proper welding or crimping
of the decking edges. Conform to AWS D1.3, CBC Standards, and to the
patterns and weld types indicated, with welds free from sharp edges and
protrusions. Field coat welds and abraded surfaces at completion with a anodic
type galvanizing repair paint. Omit the field paint coating where welds or
abrasions are covered by concrete fill or sprayed fireproofing.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal decking in accordance with decking manufacturers'
recommendations, requirements of Drawings, Shop Drawings, and
Specifications.
282
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 30 00 - 4 METAL DECKING
B. Install metal decking on supporting steel framework and adjust to final position
before permanently fastening in place.
1. Install each unit to proper bearing on supports.
2. Install units in straight alignment for entire length of run of cells with close
registration of cells of one unit with those of abutting unit.
C. Fasten decking to steel framework at ends of units and at intermediate supports.
Welding shall be as indicated on Drawings.
D. Fasten side laps between supports as indicated on Drawings.
E. Perform field cutting parallel with cells in area between cells, leaving sufficient
horizontal material to permit welding to support steel.
F. Weld shear connectors to supports thru decking units as required by Drawings.
Weld only on clean, dry surfaces. Do not weld shear connectors thru two layers
of decking units.
3.03 METAL FLASHINGS AND CLOSURES
A. Furnish, install, and weld in position, sheet metal closure flashing, closure
angles, closure plates, profile plates, and shear plates.
B. Close open ends of cell runs at columns, openings, walls, similar interruptions
and termination.
3.05 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the
Project site.
3.06 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
283
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 40 00 - 1 Cold-Formed Metal Framing
SECTION 05 40 00
COLD-FORMED METAL FRAMING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide non-load bearing metal framing, 18-gage and heavier, with
anchorage and bracing, and with accessories as required for complete installation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 21 00: Light gage framing.
2. Section 09 24 00: Metal furring and lathing for plaster.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Iron and Steel Institute (AISI): Specifications for Design of Cold-Formed
Steel Structural Members.
B. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): Standard
ML/SFA 540, Lightweight Steel Framing Systems Manual.
C. American Welding Society (AWS) D1.3: Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Pre-Installation Meeting: Prior to fabrication of components, meet at Project with
installers of doors, windows, mechanical, and electrical work to review areas of
potential interference and conflicts.
1. Coordinate layout and support provisions for interfacing work.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate component details, framing of openings, and welds, type
and location of mechanical fasteners and accessories, and items required of other
work for complete installation.
1. Detail framing layout.
C. Manufacturer Certification: Provide certification by manufacturer indicating
compliance with Contract Documents and applicable codes.
1. Calculations: Where requested, submit calculations directly to enforcing agency.
284
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 40 00 - 2 Cold-Formed Metal Framing
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Welder Qualifications: Use qualified welders and comply with AWS D1.3.
B. Regulatory Requirement: Comply with CFC Chapter 35.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS
A. ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
B. CEMCO.
C. United Metal Products.
D. Steel Stud Manufacturers Association Members.
E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide non-load bearing metal framing, 18-gage and heavier,
with anchorage and bracing, and with accessories as required for complete
installation.
B. Framing Members: Sheet steel conforming to ASTM A1003, A1011, or ASTM A653,
formed into "C" shaped sections; with knurled sides and faces.
1. Gages: As indicated
C. Track: Formed steel; channel shaped; same width as studs, for tight fit and as
indicated.
D. Bracing: Formed galvanized sheet steel; channel shaped.
E. Plates, Gussets, Clips: Galvanized steel, of formed or sheet material as required for
particular use.
F. Fastenings:
1. Self-Drilling Self-Tapping Screws, Bolts, Nuts and Washers: Hot dip galvanized,
ASTM A90. As indicated in drawings.
2. Anchorage Devices: Powder driven or drilled expansion bolts; or screws with
sleeves. As indicated in drawings.
3. Welding: AWS D1.3, Structural Welding Code - Sheet Steel.
G. Finish:
285
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 40 00 - 3 Cold-Formed Metal Framing
1. Framing at Exterior Walls: Galvanized, ASTM A924 and A653, minimum G60
coating.
2. Interior Framing: Galvanized
3. Accessories: Match framing finish.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate assemblies and framed sections of sizes and profiles indicated, with joints
fitted and secured, reinforced, and braced to meet design requirements.
1. Comply with fabrication and connection recommendations of NAAMM
ML/SFA 540, "Lightweight Steel Framing Systems Manual."
B. Wire tying of framing components is not acceptable.
C. Fabrication Tolerances: Fabricate panels to maximum allowable tolerance variation
from plumb, level, and true to line of 1/8" in 10'-0".
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal framing systems in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
1. Comply with connection and erection recommendations of NAAMM ML/SFA 540,
"Lightweight Steel Framing Systems Manual."
B. Align top and bottom tracks, locating to wall layout; secure in place with screws or
welding at maximum 16" on center and as indicated in drawings.
C. Place studs not more than 2" from abutting walls and at each side of openings;
connect studs to tracks using clips, ties, screws or welding, in accordance with
manufacturer's instructions and as indicated in drawings.
D. Construct corners using minimum three studs; double studs at openings and as
indicated in drawings.
E. Install intermediate studs above and below openings as indicated in drawings.
F. Install framing between studs for attachment of mechanical and electrical items and
as indicated in drawings.
G. Erect studs, brace, and reinforce to develop full strength.
H. Make provisions for erection stresses; provide temporary alignment and bracing.
286
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 40 00 - 4 Cold-Formed Metal Framing
I. Assure framing provides true and flat surfaces, ready to receive finish, with maximum
variance of 1/8" in 10'-0".
1. Panels: Maximum step in face and jog in alignment between panels is not to
exceed 1/16".
J. Touch-up protective coating damaged during handling and installation.
1. Exterior Framing: Use zinc-rich galvanizing repair paint for galvanized surfaces.
END OF SECTION
287
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 50 00 - 1 Metal Fabrications
SECTION 05 50 00
METAL FABRICATIONS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide stock and custom fabricated metal items scheduled at end
of this Section and as indicated in drawings, complete in respect to function as
intended.
1. Metal fabrications includes items made from stainless steel and steel shapes,
plates, bars, strips, tubes, pipes and castings which are not a part of structural
steel or metal systems specified elsewhere.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Welding Society (AWS): D1.1, Structural Welding Code.
B. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM):
1. Pipe Rail Manual.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Railing Design/Build: Provide special engineering for railings to ensure railings
comply with applicable codes and Contract Documents.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature for products used in metal
fabrications, including paint, grout and manufactured items.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit for fabrication and erection of metal fabrications. Indicate
profiles, sizes, connection, reinforcing and anchorage.
1. Provide templates for anchorage installation by others.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide stock and custom fabricated metal items.
B. Steel Shapes, Plates and Bars: ASTM A36.
C. Steel Pipe: ASTM A53, Type S seamless, grade as selected by fabricator and as
required for design loading; minimum standard weight, STD or Schedule 40.
288
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 50 00 - 2 Metal Fabrications
D. Castings: Gray iron, ASTM A48, Class 30; malleable iron, ASTM A47.
E. Fasteners and Rough Hardware: Type required for specific usage; provide zinc-
coated fasteners for exterior use or where built into exterior walls.
F. Welding Materials: AWS D1.1, type required for materials being welded.
G. Paint: Provide primers as recommended by paint manufacturers for substrates and
paints specified in Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating.
1. Galvanizing Repair Paint: High zinc-dust content paint for regalvanizing welds in
galvanized steel.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate items with joints neatly fitted and properly secured.
B. Grind exposed welds continuous, smooth and flush with adjacent finished surfaces,
and ease exposed edges to approximate 1/32" uniform radius.
C. Exposed Mechanical Fastenings: Flush countersunk fasteners unobtrusively located,
consistent with design of structure.
D. Fit and shop assemble in largest practical sections for delivery.
E. Make exposed joints flush butt type, hairline joints where mechanically fastened.
1. Fabricate joints exposed to weather in manner to exclude water or provide weep
holes where water could accumulate.
F. Supply components required for proper anchorage of metal fabrications; fabricate
anchorage and related components of same material and finish as metal fabrication.
G. Railings: Comply with California and ADA Standards access requirements and
NAAMM "Pipe Railing Manual"; welded construction; cap exposed ends. Refer to
drawings for exact configuration of railing and attachment and/or anchorage. See
drawings for railings and guards with custom design; Corten steel panels.
1. Regulatory requirements:
a. Top of gripping surfaces of handrails shall be 34” minimum and 38”
maximum vertically above walking surfaces, stair nosings and ramp
surfaces. Handrails shall be a consistent height above such surfaces.
b. Clearances between handrail gripping surfaces and adjacent surfaces shall
be 1-1/2” minimum. Handrail may be located in a recess if the recess is 3”
maximum deep and 18” minimum clear above the top of the handrail.
c. Handrail gripping surfaces shall be continuous along their length and shall
not be obstructed along their tops or sides. The bottoms of handrail gripping
surfaces shall not be obstructed for more than 20% of their length. Where
289
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 50 00 - 3 Metal Fabrications
provided, horizontal projections shall occur 1-1/2’ minimum below the bottom
of the handrail gripping surfaces.
d. Handrail gripping surfaces with a circular cross section shall have an outside
diameter of 1-1/4” minimum and 2” maximum.
e. Handrail gripping surfaces with a non-circular cross section shall have an
outside dimension of 4” minimum and 6-1/4” maximum, and a cross-
sectional dimension of 2-1/4” maximum.
f. Handrail gripping surfaces and any surfaces adjacent to them shall be free of
sharp or abrasive elements and shall have rounded edges.
g. Handrails shall not rotate in their fittings.
h. Handrail gripping surfaces shall extend beyond and in the same direction of
stair flights and ramp runs in accordance with CBC Section 11B-505.10.
Such extensions are not required for continuous handrails at the inside turn
of switchback or dogleg stairs and ramps.
i. A 2” minimum high curb or a barrier shall be provided to prevent the passage
of a 4” diameter sphere rolling off the sides of a ramp surface. Such a curb
or barrier shall be continuous and uninterrupted along the length of the ramp
per CBC Section 11B-405.9.2.
j. Code: Comply with requirements of applicable codes for railing design,
except where more restrictive codes are specified.
2. Handrails:
a. Steel
b. Aluminum.
3. Wall Rail Brackets: Stainless steel brackets as approved by Architect.
4. Wall Returns: 90° elbow return with 1/4" maximum clearance unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Provide wall plates only where indicated and where required by applicable
codes.
5. Ladder Extensions: Provide 48" ladder extension device for fixed ladders under
access hatches
a. Manufacturers:
1) Bilco/LadderUP Safety Post.
2) O’Keeffe’s/Safety Post Model SP400.
3) Precision Ladder/Extend-A-Rail.
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
290
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 50 00 - 4 Metal Fabrications
H. Finishes: Galvanize and prime paint exterior work and prime paint interior work unless
otherwise noted in Schedule; comply with requirements of Section 09 90 00 - Painting
and Coating for preparation and priming.
1. Thoroughly clean surfaces of rust, scale, grease and foreign matter prior to
applying finish.
2. Do not shop prime surfaces in contact with concrete or requiring field welding;
shop prime in one coat.
3. Galvanized Coating: Provide coating comparable to ASTM A924 and A653,
minimum G90 hot dip galvanized coating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings
and fabrication, where possible; do not delay job progress; allow for trimming and
fitting where necessary.
3.2 ERECTION
A. Obtain Architect's review prior to site cutting or making adjustments which are not
part of scheduled work.
1. Perform necessary cutting and altering for installation and coordination with other
work.
B. Install items square and level, accurately fitted and free from distortion or defects
detrimental to appearance or performance.
1. Supply items required to be cast into or embedded in other materials to
appropriate trades.
2. Ensure alignment with adjacent construction; coordinate with related work to
ensure no interruption in installation.
C. Make provision for erection stresses by temporary bracing; keep work in alignment.
D. Field bolt and weld to match standard of shop bolting and welding; hide bolts and
screws whenever possible, where not hidden, use flush countersunk fastenings.
1. Perform field welding in accordance with AWS D1.1.
E. After installation, touch-up field welds and scratched and damaged surfaces; use primer
consistent with shop coat or recommended for galvanized surfaces, as applicable.
F. Replace items damaged in course of installation and construction.
291
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
05 50 00 - 5 Metal Fabrications
3.3 SCHEDULE
A. Supply and install metal fabrications listed in Schedule, complete with anchorage and
attachments necessary for installation.
1. Schedule lists principal items only, refer to Drawings for items not listed.
B. Schedule:
1. Miscellaneous angles, plates and attachments to be set in concrete or masonry
for anchorage of other items.
2. Iron and steel shapes, sleeves, anchors, connectors and fastenings required to
complete construction work, and which are not provided in other Specification
sections.
a. Rough hardware, including bolts, fabricated plates, anchors, hangers,
dowels and miscellaneous metals.
b. Ledge and shelf angles, channels and plates not attached to structural steel,
and for support of metal decking.
3. Millwork support brackets and misc. reinforcing
4. Partial height wall steel reinforcing
END OF SECTION
292
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
06 10 50 - 1 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry
SECTION 06 10 50
MISCELLANEOUS ROUGH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide miscellaneous wood blocking and plywood, including
blocking for roofing, roof curbs, and related flashing.
1. Provide plywood panel boards.
2. Preservative treat wood members as indicated.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 18 00: Structural Glued-Laminated Timber
2. Section 06 20 00: Finish carpentry.
3. Section 06 40 00: Architectural woodwork.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Forest Products Society (FPS): National Design Specification for Stress Grade
Lumber and its Fastening.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit wood treatment certifications and instructions for proper use of
each type of treated material.
B. Wood Product Certification: Furnish certification indicating wood products are from
“well-managed” forests.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Lumber Grades: Provide visible grade stamp of an agency certified by FPS.
B. Lumber Standard: Comply with US Product Standard PS20 for each indicated use,
including moisture content and actual sizes related to indicated nominal sizes.
C. Plywood Standard: Comply with PS1 (ANSI A199.1).
D. Certified Wood Products: Wood products to be from forests certified “well-managed”
by an agency accredited by Forest Stewardship Council (FSC) including SmartWood
Program and Forest Conservation Program.
293
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
06 10 50 - 2 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Requirements: Provide miscellaneous wood blocking and plywood, including
blocking for roofing system and related flashing.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable code requirements for
miscellaneous rough carpentry.
C. Blocking: Provide dimensional lumber graded in accordance with FPS Grading Rules;
Construction Grade, Douglas Fir; minimum S-Dry.
D. Plywood: Provide minimum APA C-D exterior (CDX) plywood; stress rated where
spanning between supporting members; fire retardant treated; minimum 3/4" thick
unless otherwise indicated.
E. Plywood Panel Boards: Provide panel boards for electrical and communication panel
boards; APA C-D plugged, interior type plywood with exterior glue, fire retardant
treated; minimum 1/2" thick.
F. Nails, Spikes and Staples: Galvanized; size and type to suit application.
G. Bolts, Nuts, Washers, Lags, Pins and Screws: Medium carbon steel; galvanized; size
and type to suit application.
H. Fasteners: Provide fasteners as required for complete, secure installation of
miscellaneous rough carpentry.
1. Solid Masonry or Concrete: Expansion shield and lag bolt type.
2. Steel: Bolts or powder activated type.
3. Concrete: Simpson or equal clips, anchored to concrete, as indicated.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Wood Preservation: Treat lumber and plywood to comply with applicable
requirements of American Wood Preservers Association and applicable codes.
1. Decay Resistance Treatment: Pressure treat wood in accordance with AWPA U1
using preservative chemicals acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction and
containing no arsenic or chromium.
a. Treat wood members based on AWPA U1 Use Categories as appropriate to
Project location and exposure.
b. Kiln-dry wood to a maximum moisture content of 19% after treatment with
water-borne preservative.
294
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
06 10 50 - 3 Miscellaneous Rough Carpentry
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLACEMENT
A. Place miscellaneous rough carpentry true to lines and levels.
B. Correlate location so attached work will comply with design requirements and be
properly located.
C. Construct members of continuous pieces of longest possible lengths.
D. Fit carpentry work to other work; scribe and cope as required for accurate fit.
E. Shim with metal or slate for bearing on concrete and masonry.
F. Securely attach carpentry work to substrates by anchoring and fastening as required
by recognized standards.
1. Provide washers under bolt heads and nuts in contact with wood.
G. Wood Blocking: Provide blocking of S4S lumber not less than 1-1/2" wide and of
thickness required to provide adequate support or to properly locate attached
material.
1. Provide attachment to other work; form to shapes shown.
2. Countersink bolts and nuts flush with surfaces.
3. Remove temporary blocking when no longer needed.
4. Anchor to formwork before concrete placement.
5. Build into masonry as work progresses, cutting to fit masonry unit size involved.
H. Plywood: Comply with recommendations of American Plywood Association (APA) for
fabrication and installation of plywood work.
END OF SECTION
295
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
06 18 00- 1 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
SECTION 06 18 00
STRUCTURAL GLUED LAMINATED TIMBER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Provisions of Division 01 apply to this section.
B. Section Includes:
1. Glued Laminated Wood Beams
C. Referenced Standards
1. ANSI/ AITC Standard A190.1 and ASTM D3737
2. NDS- National Design Specification for Wood Construction.
3. PS-56 Structural Glued Laminated Timber
4. California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2, California Building Code
Chapter 23
5. ASTM D3024 – Dry Use Adhesive with Protein Base, Casein Type.
ASTM D2559- Wet Use Adhesive. APA Specification AFG-01 – Adhesive
for Field Gluing Plywood to Wood Framing.
1.02 DEFINITIONS
A. Structural Glued-Laminated (Glulam) Timber: An engineered, stress-rated timber
product assembled from selected and prepared wood laminations bonded
together with adhesives and with the grain of the laminations approximately
parallel longitudinally.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Show layout of structural glued-laminated timber system and full
dimensions of each member. Indicate species and laminating combination,
adhesive type, and other variables in required work. Including large-scale details
of connections.
296
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
06 18 00- 2 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
1.04 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: Provide factory-glued structural units produced by
an AITC- or APA-licensed firm.
B. Factory mark each piece of structural glued-laminated timber with AITC Quality
Mark or APA trademark. Place mark on surfaces that will not be exposed in the
completed work.
C. Quality Standard: Comply with AITC A190.1, "Structural Glued Laminated
Timber."
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. General: Comply with provisions in AITC 111, "Recommended Practice for
Protection of Structural Glued Laminated Timber during Transit, Storage, and
Erection."
B. Individually wrap members using plastic-coated paper covering with water-
resistant seams.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
A. General: Provide structural glued-laminated timber that complies with AITC 117--
MANUFACTURING or research/evaluation reports acceptable to authorities
having jurisdiction. Provide structural glued-laminated timber made from a single
species.
B. Species and Grades for Structural Glued-Laminated Timber: Provide structural
glued-laminated timber made from Douglas fir-larch that complies with
combination symbols indicated.
C. Adhesive: Wet-use type complying with ASTM D 2559.
D. End Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, colorless wood sealer that is
effective in retarding the transmission of moisture at cross-grain cuts and is
compatible with indicated finish.
E. Penetrating Sealer: Manufacturer's standard, transparent, penetrating wood
sealer that is compatible with indicated finish.
297
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
06 18 00- 3 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
2.02 FABRICATION
A. Shop fabricate for connections to greatest extent possible, including cutting to
length and drilling bolt holes. Dress exposed surfaces to remove planning or
surfacing marks and to provide a finish equivalent to that produced by machine
sanding with No. 120 grit sandpaper.
B. Camber: Fabricate horizontal and inclined members of less than 1:1 slope with
either circular or parabolic camber equal to 1/500 of span.
C. End-Cut Sealing: Immediately after end-cutting each member to final length,
apply a saturation coat of end sealer to ends and other cross-cut surfaces,
keeping surfaces flood-coated for not less than 10 minutes.
D. Seal Coat: After fabricating, sanding, and end-coat sealing, apply a heavy
saturation coat of penetrating sealer on surfaces of each unit.
2.03 COMBINATION AND APPERANCE GRADE:
A. AITC 24F-V4 & 24F-V8 in conformance with AITC 110.
B. Appearance of Members: Industrial Grade
C. Unit shall be fabricated for wet use.
PART 3 – EXECUTION
3.01 EXAMINATION
A. Examine substrates in areas to receive structural glued-laminated timber, with
Installer present, for compliance with requirements, installation tolerances, and
other conditions affecting performance of structural glued-laminated timber.
Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory conditions have been
corrected.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. General: Erect structural glued-laminated timber true and plumb, with uniform,
close-fitting joints. Provide temporary bracing to maintain lines and levels until
permanent supporting members are in place.
1. Lift with padded slings and protect corners with wood blocking.
298
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
06 18 00- 4 STRUCTURAL GLUED-LAMINATED TIMBER
2. Install structural glued-laminated timber to comply with Shop Drawings.
3. Install timber connectors as indicated.
B. Cutting: Avoid extra cutting after fabrication. Where field fitting is unavoidable,
comply with requirements for shop fabrication.
3.03 ADJUSTING
A. Repair damaged surfaces and finishes after completing erection. Replace
damaged structural glued-laminated timber if repairs are not approved by
Architect.
3.04 PROTECTION
A. Do not remove wrappings on individually wrapped members until they no longer
serve a useful purpose including protection from weather, sunlight, soiling, and
damage from work of other trades. Coordinate wrapping removal with finishing
work specified in Division 9. Retain wrapping where it can serve as a painting
shield.
END OF SECTION
299
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
06 20 00 - 1 Finish Carpentry
SECTION 06 20 00
FINISH CARPENTRY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide finish carpentry with accessories as required for complete
installation.
1. Provide wood trim, sills, chair rail, and wall base.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 40 00: Architectural woodwork; casework, countertops, and paneling.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Architectural Woodwork Standards, Edition 1, 2009, (AWS) adopted and published
jointly by AWI, AWMA, and Woodwork Institute.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit literature for manufactured items.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials and wood species, component profiles, fastening,
and joining details, finishes, and accessories.
C. Samples: Furnish samples of each type of finish carpentry.
D. Certificates:
1. Assurance Options: AWS certification and monitored compliance programs will
not be required for finish carpentry.
2. Wood Product Certification: Furnish certification indicating wood products are
from FSC “well-managed” forests.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
a. In addition, subcontractors and suppliers shall have not less than two years’
experience with CAL/Green requirements.
2. CALGreen Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements
including those relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants,
and caulks, and for composite wood products formaldehyde limitations.
A. Certified Wood Products: Wood products to be from forests certified “well-managed”
by an agency accredited by Forest Stewardship Council (FSC).
300
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
06 20 00 - 2 Finish Carpentry
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver materials until site conditions are adequate to receive work; protect
items from weather while in transit.
B. Store materials indoors, in ventilated areas with constant but minimum temperature of
60 degrees F and maximum relative humidity of 25% to 55%.
C. Do not begin installation of finish carpentry until space is fully enclosed and
mechanical systems are fully operational.
1. Maintain interior installation areas at 70 degrees F and 50% to 55% relative
humidity.
D. Immediately remove from site materials with visible mold and materials with mildew.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide finish carpentry systems specified complying with
Architectural Woodwork Standards (AWS) and including accessories as required for
complete installation.
B. Transparent Finished Interior Wood Trim:
1. Quality: AWS/Premium Grade.
2. Wood: Maple.
3. Texture: S4S.
C. Transparent Finished Interior Wood Trim:
1. Quality: AWS/Premium Grade.
2. Wood: Ash
D. Opaque Painted Interior Wood Trim:
1. Quality: AWS/Custom Grade.
2. Wood: White Birch or Poplar.
3. Texture: Surfaced.
E. Opaque Painted Interior Wood Trim:
1. Wood: MDF
301
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
06 20 00 - 3 Finish Carpentry
F. Anchors, Nails and Screws: Select the material, type, size and finish required by each
substrate for secure anchorage; provide toothed steel or lead expansion bolt screws
for drilled-in-place anchors.
G. Wood Filler: Color to match wood being filled.
2.1 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate finish carpentry items in accordance with specified quality standard.
B. Use exposed fastening devices or nails only when approved and unavoidable;
arrange neatly.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings and
fabrication where possible; do not delay job progress, allow for trimming and fitting.
B. Verify surfaces are ready to receive work and field measurements are as shown on
shop drawings.
1. Beginning installation signifies acceptance of conditions.
C. Ensure mechanical and electrical items affecting work are properly placed, complete,
and have been inspected by applicable authorities prior to commencement of
installation.
D. Inspect each piece of finish carpentry and discard damaged and defective pieces.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install work consistent with specified AWS quality grade, plumb, level, true and
straight with no distortions; shim as required, using concealed shims.
1. Prime paint surfaces in contact with cementitious materials prior to installation;
comply with requirements of Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating.
B. Secure work to blocking with countersunk, concealed fasteners and blind nailing as
required for a complete installation.
C. Scribe and cut for accurate fit to other finished work.
D. Install finish carpentry in single, unjointed lengths for openings and for runs less than
10'-0".
1. For longer runs, use only one piece less than 10'-0" in any straight run; provide
scarf joints between members.
2. Stagger joints in adjacent members.
302
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
06 20 00 - 4 Finish Carpentry
3. Cope at returns and miter at corners.
E. Accessories: Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations
in locations indicated or as directed by Architect.
F. Acceptable Tolerances:
1. Variation from True Position: Maximum 1/16" at any position and maximum 1/8"
in any 10'-0" length.
2. Adjoining Surfaces of Same Material: No variation permitted.
3. Offset with Abutting Materials: Maximum 1/32".
G. Preparation for Field Finishing:
1. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
2. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and leave ready to
receive site-applied finishes.
3. Seal concealed and semi-concealed surfaces; brush apply only, using primer
consistent with finish coats specified under Section 09 90 00 – Painting and
Coating.
END OF SECTION
303
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
06 40 00 - 1 Architectural Woodwork
SECTION 06 40 00
ARCHITECTURAL WOODWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide mill fabricated architectural woodwork with accessories as
required for complete finished installation including cabinetwork hardware.
1. Provide custom laminate millwork.
2. Provide custom wood veneer millwork.
3. Provide countertops.
4. Provide wood paneling.
B. Related Sections:
1. 06 20 00 Finish Carpentry
1.2 REFERENCES
A. North American Architectural Woodwork Standards, 3.1 (NAAWS).
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s literature for manufactured items.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate materials and wood species, component profiles, fastening,
joining details, finishes, and accessories.
C. Samples: Furnish samples of each exposed finish.
1. Veneers: After approval of type of wood for veneer submit not less than three
potential flitches of matching wood veneers to be reviewed by Architect each with
enough veneering available for Project.
a. Submit photographs with true color of each flitch.
D. Wood Product Certification: Furnish certification indicating wood products are from
FSC “well-managed” forests.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants, and caulks, for
composite wood products formaldehyde limitations, and for paints and coatings.
304
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
06 40 00 - 2 Architectural Woodwork
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Member of Sponsor of North American Architectural
Woodwork Standards with minimum five years successful experience fabricating
woodwork like that required for Project.
C. Standards: Perform architectural woodwork in accordance with North American
Architectural Woodwork Standards (NAAWS).
D. Certified Wood Products: Wood products to be from forests certified “well-managed”
by an agency accredited by Forest Stewardship Council (FSC).
E. Seismic Anchorage: Provide seismic anchorage for wall cabinets as required by
California Code of Regulations (CCR), Title 24, Part 2.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not deliver architectural woodwork until site conditions are adequate to receive
work; protect items from weather while in transit.
1. Allow architectural woodwork shop finish to completely dry prior to delivery to site;
allow materials to off-gas volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions off site.
B. Store materials indoors, in ventilated areas with constant but minimum temperature of
60-degrees F and maximum relative humidity of 25% to 55%.
C. Do not begin installation of architectural woodwork until space is fully enclosed and
mechanical systems are fully operational.
1. Maintain interior installation areas at 70 degrees F and 50% to 55% relative
humidity.
D. Immediately remove from site materials with visible mold and materials with mildew.
At contractor’s expense.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide mill fabricated architectural woodwork with accessories
as required for complete finished installation including cabinetwork hardware.
B. Transparent/Stained Finished Casework:
1. Quality: NAAWS/Premium Grade frameless, flush overlay unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Special: Provide each single length section of casework in largest such
sections as access and openings allow.
1) Multiple self-supporting units fastened together to form larger unit
allowed only where access and openings do not allow single lengths.
305
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
06 40 00 - 3 Architectural Woodwork
C. Plastic Laminate Finished Casework and Countertops:
1. Quality: NAAWS/Custom Grade frameless, flush overlay, unless otherwise
indicated.
a. Special: Provide each single length section of casework in largest such
sections as access and openings allow.
1) Multiple self-supporting units fastened together to form larger unit
allowed only where access and openings do not allow single lengths.
2. Plastic Laminates:
a. Types: NEMA LD-3.1 high pressure laminates.
1) Horizontal Surfaces: General Purpose Type, nominal 0.050".
2) Vertical Surfaces: Vertical Surface Type, nominal 0.032".
3) Unexposed Surfaces: Balanced with 0.030" melamine backing sheet.
4) Formed Surfaces: Postforming Type, nominal 0.042".
b. Manufacturers:
1) Formica Corp.
2) Wilsonart, Wilsonart Engineered Surfaces. Basis of Design
3) Nevamar Corp. Basis of Design
4) Abet Laminati Co.
5) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
c. Solid Color Laminates:
1) Formica Corp./ColorCore2.
2) Wilsonart, Wilsonart Engineered Surfaces/Solicore. Basis of Design
3) Abet Laminati Co/Solid Colors.
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
d. Colors: As indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule.
3. Wood Core: Plywood or medium density fiberboard (MDF) or particleboard, with
no added formaldehyde and free of toxic materials.
D. Casework Hardware: Provide casework hardware items as required for complete
installation as indicated; provide types as listed in North American Architectural
Woodwork Standards for casework, but no less than following types.
1. Adjustable Shelf Standards and Supports: Match BHMA A156.9 B04073
adjustable standards and B04083 closed shelf rest brackets for mortis mounting;
flush mounted in cabinet.
2. Cabinet Hinges: BHMA A156.9 B01602 or B01603 frameless European
concealed type, minimum 160 degree opening, without spring closer.
3. Cabinet Hinges: BHMA A156.9 B014xx pivot (knife) type, polished chrome finish.
306
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
06 40 00 - 4 Architectural Woodwork
4. Cabinet Pulls: Back mounted wire type, 4" center to center, clear aluminum; as
approved by Architect.
5. Drawer Slides: Full extension, rail mounted type, minimum 100 lb. capacity with
ball-bearing rollers; self-closing.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Accuride.
2) Knape & Vogt.
3) Blum.
4) Hettich International.
5) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
6. Cabinet Locks: Pin and tumbler slide bolt lock with five pin tumblers as approved
by Architect, two keys each.
7. Magnetic Catches: BHMA 156.9 B03141.
E. Quartz-Based Solid Polymer Countertops: Manufacturer's standard quartz-based
polymer system with color throughout thickness; provide manufacturer recommended
joint adhesive; exposed surfaces finished to match top.
1. Manufacturers:
a. CaesarStone USA/CaesarStone.
b. Silstone USA/Silstone Countertops.
c. Formica Everform (Basis of Design)
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2. Quality: NAAWS/Premium Grade.
3. Type: Not less than 1/2" thick sheet; coordinate with bowls as indicated and as
specified in Division 22.
4. Colors: As indicated on Finish Plan.
F. Fry Reglet Reveals, trims, corners, etc. Powder coat finish, color: tbd. As indicated
in drawings.
G. Escutcheons where indicated.
H. Grommits: Mockett. Round Wood and Resilient Ring type. Allow 20 ring type and 17
round wood type, 2 ½” dia.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. General: Fabricate architectural woodwork in accordance with specified North
American Architectural Woodwork Standards.
B. Plastic Laminate: Apply plastic laminate finish in full uninterrupted sheets consistent
with manufactured sizes. Make corners and joints hairline; slightly bevel arises.
307
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
06 40 00 - 5 Architectural Woodwork
1. Locate butt joints at least 2'-0" from cutouts.
2. Cap exposed edges with plastic laminate of same finish and pattern.
3. Apply laminate backing sheet to reverse side of laminate surfaces.
4. Provide cutouts for inserts, fixtures and fittings; verify locations from on-site
dimensions.
5. Prime paint contact surfaces of cutouts.
6. Plastic Laminate Countertops: Square butt joints and self edging; applied plastic
or metal edging not permitted.
a. Splashes as indicated or as directed by Architect where not otherwise
indicated.
C. Countertops: Provide maximum sizes available. Locate butt joints at least 2'-0" from
cutouts where more than one-piece countertops are required.
1. Make corners and joints hairline; slightly bevel arises.
2. Provide cutouts for inserts, fixtures and fittings; verify locations from on-site
dimensions.
3. Splashes and edges as indicated or as directed by Architect where not otherwise
indicated.
D. Use exposed fastening devices or nails only when approved and unavoidable;
arrange neatly.
E. Assemble woodwork in shop in sizes easily handled and to ensure passage through
building openings.
2.3 FINISHES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Field Measurements: Take field measurements prior to preparation of shop drawings
and fabrication where possible; do not delay job progress, allow for trimming and
fitting.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install work consistent with Architectural Woodwork Standards specified quality
grade, plumb, level, true and straight with no distortions.
1. Shim as required, using concealed shims.
308
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
06 40 00 - 6 Architectural Woodwork
B. Ensure mechanical and electrical items affecting architectural woodwork are properly
placed, complete, and have been inspected by Architect prior to commencement of
installation.
C. Secure work to grounds, stripping and blocking with countersunk, concealed
fasteners and blind nailing as required for a complete installation.
D. Scribe and cut for accurate fit to other finished work.
E. Install architectural woodwork under supervision of factory-trained mechanics.
F. Attach architectural woodwork securely in place with uniform joints providing for
thermal and building movements.
G. Acceptable Tolerances:
1. Variation from True Position: Maximum 1/16" at any position and maximum 1/8"
in any 10'-0" length.
2. Adjoining Surfaces of Same Material: No variation permitted.
3. Offset with Abutting Materials: Maximum 1/32".
H. Preparation for Field Finishing:
1. Sand work smooth and set exposed nails and screws.
2. Apply wood filler in exposed nail and screw indentations and leave ready to
receive site-applied finishes.
3. Seal concealed and semi-concealed surfaces; brush apply only, using primer
consistent with finish coats specified under Section 09 90 00 - Painting and
Coating.
END OF SECTION
309
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 18 00 - 1 Traffic Coating
SECTION 07 18 00
TRAFFIC COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide traffic-bearing, fluid applied, waterproof, elastomeric
urethane coating with accessories as required for complete weather-tight traffic
coating.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s literature including recommendations for
surface conditioner, elastic flashing, joint cover sheet and crack sealants, and
temperature range for application of traffic coating.
B. Samples: Submit fully cured exposed finish materials in colors selected, with
aggregate topping.
C. Manufacturer Certifications:
1. Installer: Submit certification indicating Installer is an approved applicator.
2. Materials: Submit certification indicating materials comply with Contract
Documents and are suitable for applications indicated.
3. Manufacturer’s Representative: Submit manufacturer’s representative’s field
report indicating traffic coating has been installed in accordance with
manufacturer’s recommendations and installation instructions.
D. Maintenance Instructions: Submit manufacturer’s maintenance instructions.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to finish material pollution control for paints and coatings.
B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years successful experience in
application of traffic deck covering on projects of comparable size and acceptable to
traffic coatings manufacturer.
C. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene not less than one week prior to commencing work
of this section. Require attendance of parties directly affecting work of this section.
1. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related work.
310
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 18 00 - 2 Traffic Coating
1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Comply with manufacturer recommendations for site conditions. Do not apply traffic
coating during inclement weather or when air temperature is below 40-degrees F.
B. Do not apply traffic coating to damp, dirty, dusty and unsuitable surfaces.
1. Allow concrete surfaces to cure minimum 28 days.
2. Moisture Content: Determine substrate moisture content using methods
recommended by system manufacturer.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of system to resist water
penetration except where failure is result of structural failure of building. Repair
system and pay for or replace damaged materials and surfaces.
1. Hairline cracking due to temperature or shrinkage is not considered structural
failure.
2. Period: Two years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Gaco Western Ltd./GW-15-UBU (U-64C).
B. The Neogard Corp./Peda-Gard and Auto-Gard.
C. Dex-O-Tex Div. Crossfield Products Corp./Dex-O-Tex Elastatex 500.
D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
1. Option: Siplast/Terapro PMMA Liquid-Applied Traffic Bearing Waterproofing
reinforced pedestrian system over occupied space.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Requirements: Provide traffic-bearing, fluid applied, waterproof, elastomeric
urethane coating with accessories.
B. Regulatory Requirements, General:
1. Fire Ratings: Provide Underwriters Laboratories listed products with Class A
rating for roofing assemblies, based on ASTM E108.
2. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Emissions: Comply with applicable
requirements limiting volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.
311
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 18 00 - 3 Traffic Coating
a. Comply with applicable Air Quality Management District limitations for
volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.
C. Regulatory Requirements, Slip-Resistance:
1. Slip-Resistant Hard Surfaces: Hard surface finishes to comply with requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction for slip-resistant hard surfaces, including general
code requirements and requirements for access for persons with disabilities.
a. Subcontractor/Installer to verify hard surface material being installed has
either manufacturer testing information indicating materials are suitable for
locations indicated, or experience indicates such materials are appropriate.
b. Notify Architect where hard surface materials may not be appropriate for
applications indicated.
D. Traffic Coating: One or two-part, solvent free low or no VOC 100 percent
polyurethane elastomer without asphalt or tar modifiers, cold applied.
1. System: Provide manufacturer's standard system recommended for pedestrian
type traffic.
2. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide
standard color as directed by Architect.
E. Surface Conditioner: Primer compatible with membrane compound; as recommended
by traffic coating manufacturer.
F. Reinforcing Mesh: Woven uncoated glass fiber mesh or comparable reinforcing
recommended by system manufacturer and designed for and compatible with traffic
coating.
G. Joint and Crack Sealant: As recommended by traffic coating manufacturer.
H. Non-Slip Aggregate: Manufacturer's standard aggregate of size and gradation
recommended for application indicated.
I. Accessories: Types recommended by traffic coating manufacturer to ensure
complete, watertight installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and conditions affecting traffic coating.
B. Beginning installation indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions.
312
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 18 00 - 4 Traffic Coating
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Ensure drains, sleeves, curbs and projections which pass through traffic coating are
properly and rigidly installed.
B. Ensure surfaces are free of cracks, depressions, waves and projections which may
be detrimental to proper installation of traffic coating; repair surfaces as required.
C. Seal cracks and joints with recommended backup material and sealant; ensure
proper depth-width ratio as recommended by sealant manufacturer.
1. Rout or saw-cut cracks exceeding 1/16" wide and fill with sealant.
D. Clean surfaces of dust, dirt and foreign matter detrimental to proper installation of
traffic coating.
E. Metal Surfaces: Remove contaminants that may adversely affect adhesion or
performance of traffic coating; apply metal primer.
F. Use drop cloths or masking to protect adjacent surfaces; close off drains to prevent
spillage and migration of materials into drains.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Apply traffic coating in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
installation instructions.
1. Apply primer/surface conditioner to surfaces indicated to receive traffic coating.
B. Apply bond breaker tape over joints in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Apply and spread traffic coating to thickness recommended by manufacturer for
specific application indicated.
D. Seal items projecting through traffic coating.
E. Install membrane flashings and seal into traffic coating.
F. Embed aggregate in top course of system, using procedure recommended by
manufacturer.
G. After complete installation, close off area to prevent unauthorized traffic or work over
traffic coating.
3.4 SITE QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site Tests: Test traffic coating with 2" depth of water maintained for 24 hours; do not
overload structure, if necessary, section off areas as approved by Architect.
1. Repair leaks revealed by examination of substructure and repeat test until no
leakage is observed.
313
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 18 00 - 5 Traffic Coating
B. Manufacturer's Field Services: Manufacturer’s representative to inspect traffic coating
on regular basis and provide certification traffic coating has been installed in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
314
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 21 00 - 1 Thermal Insulation
SECTION 07 21 00
THERMAL INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide thermal batt insulation with integral vapor retarder and
accessories as required for complete installation.
B. Related Work:
1. Section 07 51 00: Insulation integral with built-up bituminous roofing.
2. Section 07 84 00: Firestopping.
3. Section 09 21 00: Acoustical insulation concealed in gypsum board systems.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Interior Vapor Retarders: Where specifications require foil faced vapor retarders as
part of building thermal insulation system, intent is to prevent migration of spores from
mold and mildew into interior building spaces.
1. Intent is to provide air barrier and vapor retarder on interior surface while allowing
vapor to move through exterior wall vapor permeable surfaces, while vapor
permeable water barriers are maintained at exterior side of wall.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for each type of insulation.
1. Submit Underwriter's Laboratory approval numbers for required fire ratings;
approvals of other laboratories contingent upon acceptance of applicable
authorities.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to energy efficiency.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide thermal batt insulation with integral vapor retarder and
accessories.
B. Thermal Batt Insulation: Preformed slag mineral or glass fiber with thermosetting
resin binders, conforming to ASTM C665; formaldehyde-free.
1. Manufacturers:
315
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 21 00 - 2 Thermal Insulation
a. Johns Manville/FSK-25 Thermal-Shield Insulation.
b. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp./Fiberglas FS-25 Insulation.
c. CertainTeed/Thermafiber FS25 Insulation.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
a. Johns Manville/Thermal-Shield Insulation.
b. Owens-Corning Fiberglas Corp./Fiberglas Insulation.
c. CertainTeed/Thermafiber Insulation.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2. R-Value: Minimum R-19 at walls, R-30 at horizontal surfaces, unless otherwise
indicated.
3. Flame Spread/Smoke Developed Rating: Maximum 25/450, ASTM E84.
4. Vapor Retarder: Type III, aluminum vapor retarder on one side.
5. Vapor Retarder: Type I: No vapor retarder.
6. Combustibility: Pass ASTM E136.
C. Penetration Type Insulation Supports: Galvanized or electroplated steel penetration
supports with adhesive attachment to substrate and support disc.
D. Vapor Retarder Tape: Minimum 2" wide self-adhering type designed to maintain
vapor retarder integrity and complying with fire resistance ratings as required by
applicable codes.
E. Accessories: Furnish as recommended by insulation manufacturer for insulation
types, substrates, and conditions involved.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify substrate and adjacent materials are dry and ready to receive insulation;
beginning installation signifies acceptance of conditions.
B. Ensure mechanical and electrical items affecting work are properly placed, complete,
and have been inspected by Architect prior to commencement of installation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install insulation in accordance with manufacturer's instructions with vapor retarder
toward inside of building.
B. Cut and trim insulation neatly, to fit spaces.
1. Backed Insulation: Use insulation free of ripped backs and edges.
316
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 21 00 - 3 Thermal Insulation
C. Fit insulation tight within spaces and tight to and behind mechanical and electrical
services within insulation plane; leave no gaps or voids; maintain integrity of thermal
barrier.
D. Friction fit in place; use tape or penetration supports as necessary to assure
permanent installation.
1. Taping: Tape perimeters, joints, and tears in vapor retarder, including joints
between insulation and surrounding construction, to ensure vapor-tight
installation.
2. Penetration Supports: Cut or bend pins in locations accessible to maintenance
personnel, to eliminate potential hazards from exposed pin points.
END OF SECTION
317
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 26 00 - 1 Below-Grade Vapor Retarder
SECTION 07 26 00
BELOW-GRADE VAPOR RETARDER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide vapor retarder system for below grade and slab-on-grade
concrete, including sealing joints and protrusions through vapor retarder.
B. Install vapor barrier at trenches cut for floor recessed power/data. Tape vapor barrier
to existing membrane in a like new manner.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.
1.3 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not apply vapor retarder during inclement weather or when air temperature is
below 40 degrees F.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Fortifiber Corp./Ultra 15.
B. Raven Industries, Inc./Vapor Block # VB 15 (15 mil Blue).
C. Stego Industries, Inc./Stego Wrap (15 mil).
D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description Includes: Provide vapor retarder system for below grade and
slab-on-grade concrete, including sealing joints and protrusions through vapor
retarder and sand bed below vapor retarder.
B. Vapor Retarder: ASTM E1745, Class A vapor retarder consisting of 15 mil polyolefin film.
1. Permeance: Maximum 0.025 perms, ASTM F1249 and E154 tests.
2. Resistance to Puncture: Minimum 2200 grams, ASTM D1709, Method B.
3. Tear Resistance: Minimum 8.74 lbs., ASTM D1004.
4. Tensile Strength: Minimum 35 lbs/in., ASTM E154, Section 9, Method D-882, in
both directions.
318
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 26 00 - 2 Below-Grade Vapor Retarder
C. Joint Sealer: Pressure sensitive tape as recommended by vapor retarder
manufacturer and providing comparable permeance to vapor retarder.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Ensure sleeves, curbs and projections that penetrate vapor retarder are properly and
rigidly installed.
B. Ensure substrate is free of projections and irregularities that may be detrimental to
proper installation of vapor retarder.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Apply vapor retarder in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
installation instructions and in accordance with ASTM E1643; comply with most
restrictive where conflicts occur.
1. Seal items projecting through vapor retarder with pressure sensitive tape.
B. Seams: overlap as much as practical, sealed with pressure sensitive tape for vapor
tight seal.
C. Lay vapor retarder membrane smooth with no fish-mouths or bunches of material.
D. Inspect and repair vapor retarder prior to application of concrete slab; tape tears and
repair damage.
END OF SECTION
319
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 28 00 - 1 Weather Barrier/Underlayment
SECTION 07 28 00
WEATHER BARRIER/UNDERLAYMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide weather barrier/underlayment air and water barrier systems
for plaster, flashing, and penetrations with accessories as required for complete
watertight installation.
1. Wall Underlayment: Provide vapor permeable fluid applied underlayment and
flashing for exterior wall applications, with related concealed metal flashings and
accessories as required for complete airtight and watertight installation.
2. Flashings and Sheet Metal Underlayment: Provide self-adhering sheet
membrane underlayment at flashings and sheet metal, with accessories as
required for complete watertight installation.
3. Self-Adhering Sheet Membrane (SASM) Flashing at Penetrations: Provide SASM
flashing for around penetrations through membrane including windows, doors,
and conduit, with accessories as required for complete watertight installation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 60 00: Exposed metal flashing.
2. Section 09 24 00: Portland Cement Plaster
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Weather Barriers: Provide weather barrier/underlayment systems which, with other
building components, comply with applicable code requirements for air barriers and
water barriers.
1. Air Barriers: Air barriers shall be as defined by applicable Energy Code
requirements and shall include standard exterior wall components and air seal
joint sealants specified in Section 07 90 00 – Joint Sealants.
2. Water Barriers: Water barriers shall be as defined by applicable Building Code
requirements and shall include vapor permeable systems with or without
rainscreen barriers intended to extend amount of water drained to exterior.
3. Self-Adhering Flexible Flashings: Intent of flexible flashings at window openings,
door openings, and other wall penetrations is to ensure water cannot move from
exterior surface past water barriers and into building.
320
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 28 00 - 2 Weather Barrier/Underlayment
B. Pre-Installation Meeting: Convene one week prior to commencing work; require
attendance of parties directly affecting underlayment.
1. Review procedures and coordination required with related work.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer’s literature for each type of underlayment.
B. Samples: Furnish samples of each material.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of system to resist damage
from anticipated sources including damage from water penetration. Repair system
and pay for or replace damaged materials and surfaces.
1. Period: Two years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide weather barrier/underlayment air and water barrier
systems for plaster, flashing and sheet metal, and penetrations with accessories.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Provide materials conforming to applicable air quality
management district limitations on volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Provide materials with minimum volatile organic compound
(VOC) emissions available.
D. Wall Underlay: Unperforated asphalt saturated organic felt, conforming to
ASTM D226, Type I, and ASTM D4869 commonly referred to as No. 15.
E. Wall Underlay: Provide vapor permeable fluid applied air and water barrier
underlayment system for complete watertight installation as recommended by
manufacturer for substrates and applications indicated.
1. Manufacturers:
a. GCP Applied Technologies (Grace)/Perm-A-Barrier VPO Fluid Applied.
b. WR Meadows Air Shield LSR
c. DuPont Tyvek Fluid Applied WB+
321
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 28 00 - 3 Weather Barrier/Underlayment
d. Prosoco VB
e. Henry Company/Air-Bloc VP.
f. Carlisle Corp./CCW LiquiFiber-W.
g. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2. Provide specific membrane types as recommended by system manufacturers for
each type of application.
F. Sheet Metal and Flashing Underlayment: Self-adhering rubberized sheet membrane with
primers and seam sealers as required for complete watertight installation; type as
recommended by manufacturer for substrate and for applications indicated.
1. Manufacturers:
a. GCP Applied Technologies (Grace).
b. Henry Company.
c. Carlisle Corp.
d. Protecto Wrap Company.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2. Provide specific membrane types as recommended by system manufacturers for
each type of application.
G. Self-Adhering Sheet Membrane (SASM) Flashing at Penetrations: SASM with primers and
seam sealers as required for complete watertight installation; type as recommended by
manufacturer for substrate and for applications indicated.
1. Manufacturers:
a. GCP Applied Techologies (Grace).
b. Henry Company.
c. Carlisle Corp.
d. Protecto Wrap Company.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2. Provide specific membrane types as recommended by system manufacturers for
each type of application.
H. Concealed Metal Flashings Integral with Underlayment: Minimum 26 gage thick steel
with minimum 0.90 oz/sf galvanized coating; ASTM A653.
1. Fasteners: Flat head round wire type of hot dipped galvanized steel; minimum
19/64" head diameter and 0.104" shank diameter; minimum 7/8" long. Coating
over top of fasteners.
I. Fluid Applied Flashing Coating.
322
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 28 00 - 4 Weather Barrier/Underlayment
J. Accessories: Provide as recommended by underlayment manufacturers for specific
applications.
1. Plastic Cement: Cutback asphaltic type with mineral fiber components, for sealing
and coating flashings; free of toxic solvents and free of asbestos. Capable of setting
within 24 hours at temperatures of approximately 75 degrees F and 50% R.H.
2.2 FLASHING FABRICATION
A. Fabricate metal flashings as recommended by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning
Contractors National Association (SMACNA) "Sheet Metal Manual".
B. Form flashings to drain water to exterior
C. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, in maximum possible lengths and
free from distortion and other defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
D. Hem exposed edges of metal flashings minimum 1/4" on underside.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Coordinate installation with installation of components and items projecting through
underlayment.
3.2 FLASHINGS INSTALLATION
A. Install flashings as recommended by Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors
National Association (SMACNA) "Sheet Metal Manual".
B. Weatherlap joints minimum 2" and seal with plastic cement; secure in place.
C. Fastenings: Concealed in completed installation.
3.3 UNDERLAYMENT INSTALLATION
A. Install weather barrier/underlayment in accordance with installation instructions and
recommendations of each manufacturer and of manufacturers of products to cover
weather barrier/underlayment; comply with applicable code requirements.
1. Penetrations: Apply one-layer of self-adhering sheet membrane extending
minimum 18" from penetrations, including windows and doors; start at bottom of
penetration and weatherlap joints.
a. Apply top layer over metal flashing to direct water to exterior.
2. Weatherlap joints as recommended by system manufacturer.
END OF SECTION
323
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 55 00 - 1 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
SECTION 07 55 00
MODIFIED BITUMINOUS MEMBRANE ROOFING
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Self-Adhered 2 Ply Roofing (StressPly SA FR Mineral). (2.15)(3.7)
B. Accessories. (2.19)
C. Edge Treatment and Roof Penetration Flashings. (2.20)(3.9)
1.2 SCOPE OF WORK
A. Remove existing roofing and properly dispose in approved receptacles. Transport off site.
B. Inspect substrate and walls for damage and report.
C. Install Densdeck Prime and secure with the appropriate number and kind of screws and
plates.
D. Install roofing system as per the specifications, details, and documents.
E. All vertical surface flashings are to be set in Greenlock Plus flashing adhesive.
F. Seal all curb pan and ductwork with Keylock mastic and Garmesh in a three course
application.
G. Apply the Title 24 white Pyramic LO roof coating at 3gal/roofing square in a two-coat cross
hatch pattern.
H. New coping is to be installed. All seams and splice plates to be caulked utilizing Garland Tuff
Stuff sealant. A new continuous cleat should be installed prior to coping placement. All
fastening should be accomplished on the face of the coping. Fastening along the horizontal
plane is discouraged and any fastening on the end laps should be accomplished with the
use of closed end (watertight) rivets and sealed
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ASTM D 41 - Standard Specification for Asphalt Primer Used in Roofing, Dampproofing, and
Waterproofing.
B. ASTM D 312 - Standard Specification for Asphalt used in Roofing.
C. ASTM D 451 - Standard Test Method for Sieve Analysis of Granular Mineral Surfacing for
Asphalt Roofing Products.
D. ASTM D 1970 - Specification for Sheet Materials, Self-Adhering Polymer Modified
Bituminous, Used as Steep Roofing Underlayment for Ice Dam Protection.
E. ASTM D 1079 Standard Terminology Relating to Roofing, Waterproofing and Bituminous
324
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 55 00 - 2 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
Materials.
F. ASTM D 1227 Standard Specification for Emulsified Asphalt Used as a Protective Coating
for Roofing.
G. ASTM D 1863 Standard Specification for Mineral Aggregate Used as a Protective Coating
for Roofing.
H. ASTM D 2178 Standard Specification for Asphalt Glass Felt Used in Roofing and
Waterproofing.
I. ASTM D 2824 Standard Specification for Aluminum-Pigmented Asphalt Roof Coating.
J. ASTM D 4586 Standard Specification for Asphalt Roof Cement, Asbestos-Free.
K. ASTM D 4601 Standard Specification for Asphalt Coated Glass Fiber Base Sheet Used in
Roofing.
L. ASTM D 5147 Standard Test Method for Sampling and Testing Modified Bituminous Sheet
Materials.
M. ASTM D 6162 Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified
Bituminous Sheet Materials Using a Combination of Polyester and Glass Fiber
Reinforcements.
N. ASTM D 6163 Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified
Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Glass Fiber Reinforcements.
O. ASTM D 6164 - Standard Specification for Styrene Butadiene Styrene (SBS) Modified
Bituminous Sheet Materials Using Polyester Reinforcements.
P. ASTM D 6754 - Standard Specification for Ketone Ethylene Ester (KEE) Sheet Roofing.
Q. ASTM D 6757 - Standard Specification for Underlayment Felt Containing Inorganic Fibers
Used in Steep-Slope Roofing.
R. ASTM E 108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Test of Roof Coverings
S. Factory Mutual Research (FM): Roof Assembly Classifications.
T. National Roofing Contractors Association (NRCA): Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.
U. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association, Inc. (SMACNA) -
Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
V. Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL): Fire Hazard Classifications.
W. Warnock Hersey (WH): Fire Hazard Classifications.
X. ANSI-SPRI ES-1 Wind Design Standard for Edge Systems used with Low Slope Roofing
Systems.
Y. ASCE 7, Minimum Design Loads for Buildings and Other Structures
Z. UL - Fire Resistance Directory.
325
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 55 00 - 3 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
AA. FM Approvals - Roof Coverings and/or RoofNav assembly database.
BB. California Title 24 Energy Efficient Standards.
1.4 DESIGN / PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Perform work in accordance with all federal, state and local codes.
B. Exterior Fire Test Exposure: Roof system shall achieve a UL, FM or WH Class rating for roof
slopes indicated on the Drawings as follows:
1. Factory Mutual Class A Rating.
2. Underwriters Laboratory Class A Rating.
3. Warnock Hersey Class A Rating.
C. Design Requirements:
1. Uniform Wind Uplift Load Capacity
a. Installed roof system shall withstand negative (uplift) design wind loading
pressures complying with the following criteria.
1) Design Code: ASCE 7, Method 2 for Components and Cladding.
D. Energy Star: Roof System shall comply with the initial and aged reflectivity required by the
U.S. Federal Government's Energy Star program.
E. membranes containing recycled or bio-based materials shall be third party certified through
UL Environment.
F. Roof system shall have been tested in compliance with the following codes and test
requirements:
1. Miami-Dade County:
a. Self-Adhered Membrane Systems Over:
1) Wood Decks N.O.A.
b. Roofing Underlayments
1) Garland Underlayments N.O.A.
c. Roofing Cements and Coatings
1) Garland Coatings and Mastics N.O.A.
2. Cool Roof Rating Council:
a. CRRC Directory CRRC
3. Warnock Hersey
a. ITS Directory of Listed Products
4. FM Approvals:
a. RoofNav Website
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 01 30 00.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Installation instructions.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit shop drawings including installation details of roofing, flashing,
fastening, insulation, and vapor barrier, including notation of roof slopes and fastening
patterns of insulation and base modified bitumen membrane, prior to job start.
326
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 55 00 - 4 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
D. Design Pressure Calculations: Submit design pressure calculations for the roof area in
accordance with ASCE 7 and local Building Code requirements. Include a roof system
attachment analysis report, certifying the system's compliance with applicable wind load
requirements before Work begins.
E. Recycled or Bio-Based Materials: Provide third party certification through UL Environment of
roof System membranes containing recycled or bio based materials.
F. Verification Samples: For each modified bituminous membrane ply product specified, two
samples, minimum size 6 inches (150 mm) square, representing actual product, color, and
patterns.
G. Manufacturer's Certificates: Provide to certify products meet or exceed specified
requirements.
H. Test Reports: Submit test reports, prepared by an independent testing agency, for all
modified bituminous sheet roofing, indicating compliance with ASTM D5147. Testing must
be performed at 77 deg. F. Tests at 0 deg. F will not be considered.
I. Closeout Submittals: Provide manufacturer's maintenance instructions that include
recommendations for periodic inspection and maintenance of all completed roofing work.
Provide product warranty executed by the manufacturer. Assist Owner in preparation and
submittal of roof installation acceptance certification as may be necessary in connection with
fire and extended coverage insurance on roofing and associated work.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Perform Work in accordance with NRCA Roofing and Waterproofing Manual.
B. Manufacturer Qualifications: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified with
documented ISO 9001 certification and minimum of twelve years of documented experience
and must not have been in Chapter 11 bankruptcy during the last five years.
C. Installer Qualifications: Company specializing in performing Work of this section with
minimum five years documented experience and a certified Pre-Approved Garland
Contractor.
D. Installer's Field Supervision: Maintain a full-time Supervisor/Foreman on job site during all
phases of roofing work while roofing work is in progress.
E. Product Certification: Provide manufacturer's certification that materials are manufactured in
the United States and conform to requirements specified herein, are chemically and
physically compatible with each other, and are suitable for inclusion within the total roof
system specified herein.
F. Source Limitations: Obtain all components of roof system from a single manufacturer.
Secondary products that are required shall be recommended and approved in writing by the
roofing system Manufacturer. Upon request of the Architect or Owner, submit Manufacturer's
written approval of secondary components in list form, signed by an authorized agent of the
Manufacturer.
1.7 PRE-INSTALLATION MEETINGS
A. Convene minimum two weeks prior to commencing Work of this section.
327
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 55 00 - 5 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
B. Review installation procedures and coordination required with related Work.
C. Inspect and make notes of job conditions prior to installation:
1. Record minutes of the conference and provide copies to all parties present.
2. Identify all outstanding issues in writing designating the responsible party for follow-up
action and the timetable for completion.
3. Installation of roofing system shall not begin until all outstanding issues are resolved
to the satisfaction of the Architect.
1.8 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging with labels intact until
ready for installation.
B. Store all roofing materials in a dry place, on pallets or raised platforms, out of direct
exposure to the elements until time of application. Store materials at least 4 inches above
ground level and covered with "breathable" tarpaulins.
C. Stored in accordance with the instructions of the manufacturer prior to their application or
installation. Store roll goods on end on a clean flat surface except store KEE-Stone FB 60
rolls flat on a clean flat surface. No wet or damaged materials will be used in the application.
D. Store at room temperature wherever possible, until immediately prior to installing the roll.
During winter, store materials in a heated location with a 50-degree F (10 degree C)
minimum temperature, removed only as needed for immediate use. Keep materials away
from open flame or welding sparks.
E. Avoid stockpiling of materials on roofs without first obtaining acceptance from the
Architect/Engineer.
F. Adhesive storage shall be between the range of above 50-degree F (10 degree C) and
below 80 degree F (27 degree C). Area of storage shall be constructed for flammable
storage.
1.9 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate Work with installing associated metal flashings as work of this section proceeds.
1.10 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Upon completion of the work, provide the Manufacturer's written and signed NDL Warranty,
warranting that, if a leak develops in the roof during the term of this warranty, due either to
defective material or defective workmanship by the installing contractor, the manufacturer
shall provide the Owner, at the Manufacturer's expense, with the labor and material
necessary to return the defective area to a watertight condition.
1. Warranty Period:
a. 25 + 5 years from date of acceptance. Requires mid period inspection.
328
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 55 00 - 6 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
B. Installer is to guarantee all work against defects in materials and workmanship for a period
indicated following final acceptance of the Work.
1. Warranty Period:
a. 5 years from date of acceptance.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Garland Company, Inc. (The); 3800 E. 91st St., Cleveland, OH
44105. ASD. Toll Free: 800-321-9336. Phone: 216-641-7500. Fax: 216-641-0633. Web
Site: www.garlandco.com. Regional Manager – Sean Gavin 661-343-3337. or pre-approved
equal.
B. Requests for substitutions will be considered in accordance with provisions of
Section 01 60 00.
C. The Products specified are intended to be utilized and the Standard of Quality for the
products required for this project. If other products are proposed, the bidder must submit
those products no later than 10 business days prior to the bid date. If no manufacturer and
products are listed, the bid may be accepted only with the use of products specified.
1. Bidder will not be allowed to change materials after the bid opening date.
2. If alternate products are to be used in the bid, the products must be equal to or
exceed the products specified. Supporting technical data shall be submitted to the
Architect/ Owner for approval at least 10 business days prior to acceptance. Any
substitution request after that time will be rejected for non-compliance with the bid
documents.
3. In making a request for substitution, the Bidder/Roofing Contractor represents that it
has:
a. Personally investigated the proposed product or method, and determined that it
is equal or superior in all respects to that specified.
b. Will provide the same guarantee for substitution as for the product and method
specified.
c. Will coordinate installation of accepted substitution in work, making such
changes as may be required for work to be completed in all respects.
d. Will waive all claims for additional cost related to substitution, which
consequently become apparent.
e. Cost data is complete and includes all related cost under his/her contract or
other contracts, which may be affected by the substitution.
f. Will reimburse the Owner for all redesign cost by the Architect for
accommodation of the substitution.
4. Architect/ Owner reserves the right to be the final authority on the acceptance or
rejection of any or all bids, proposed alternate roofing systems or materials that has
met ALL specified requirement criteria.
5. Failure to submit substitution package, or any portion thereof requested 10 days prior
to bid date, will result in immediate disqualification and consideration for that particular
contractor’s request for manufacturer substitution.
2.2 SELF ADHERED ROOF SYSTEM
A. Nailable Base Sheet: One ply fastened to the deck per wind uplift calculations.
1. HPR SA FR Base Sheet:
329
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 55 00 - 7 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
B. Base (Ply) Sheet: One ply bonded to the prepared substrate with self-adhesive.
1. HPR SA FR Base Sheet:
C. Modified Cap (Ply) Sheet: One ply bonded to the prepared substrate with self-adhesive.
1. StressPly SA FR Mineral:
D. Interply Adhesive: Use over approved cover boards or wood decks for base sheet only
1. SA Primer:
E. Flashing Base Ply: One ply bonded to the prepared substrate.
1. HPR SA FR Base Sheet:
F. Flashing Cap (Ply) Sheet: One ply bonded to the prepared substrate.
1. StressPly SA FR Mineral:
G. Flashing Ply Adhesive:
1. GreenLock Plus Flashing Adhesive
H. Surfacing:
1. Surface Coatings
a. Pyramic Plus LO:
2.3 ACCESSORlES:
A. Glass Fiber Cant - Glass Cant: Continuous triangular cross Section made of inorganic
fibrous glass used as a cant strip as recommended and furnished by the membrane
manufacturer.
2.4 EDGE TREATMENT AND ROOF PENETRATION FLASHINGS
A. Vents and Breathers: Heavy gauge aluminum and fully insulated vent that allows moisture
and air to escape but not enter the roof system as recommended and furnished by the
membrane manufacturer.
B. Drain Flashings should be Zinc or Aluminum.
C. Plumbing stacks should be Zinc or Aluminum, or Tuff Flash liquid flashing system.
D. Liquid Flashing - Tuff-Flash: An asphaltic-polyurethane, low odor, liquid flashing material
designed for specialized details unable to be waterproofed with typical modified membrane
flashings.
1. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 412: 400 psi
2. Elongation, ASTM D 412: 300%
3. Density @77 deg. F 8.5 lb/gal typical
E. Fabricated Flashings: Fabricated flashings and trim are specified in Section 07620.
1. Fabricated flashings and trim shall conform to the detail requirements of SMACNA
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and/or the CDA Copper Development Association
"Copper in Architecture - Handbook" as applicable.
F. Manufactured Roof Specialties: Shop fabricated copings, fascia, gravel stops, control joints,
expansion joints, joint covers and related flashings and trim are specified in Section 07710.
1. Manufactured roof specialties shall conform to the detail requirements of SMACNA
"Architectural Sheet Metal Manual" and/or the NRCA "Roofing and Waterproofing
330
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 55 00 - 8 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
Manual" as applicable.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Inspect and approve the deck condition, slopes and fastener backing if applicable, parapet
walls, expansion joints, roof drains, stack vents, vent outlets, nailers and surfaces and
elements.
C. Verify that work penetrating the roof deck, or which may otherwise affect the roofing, has
been properly completed.
D. If substrate preparation and other conditions are the responsibility of another installer, notify
Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General: Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
1. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving
the best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
2. Fill substrate surface voids that are greater than 1/4 inch wide with an acceptable fill
material.
3. Roof surface to receive roofing system shall be smooth, clean, free from loose gravel,
dirt and debris, dry and structurally sound.
4. Wherever necessary, all surfaces to receive roofing materials shall be power broom
and vacuumed to remove debris and loose matter prior to starting work.
5. Do not apply roofing during inclement weather. Do not apply roofing membrane to
damp, frozen, dirty, or dusty surfaces.
6. Fasteners and plates for fastening components mechanically to the substrate shall
provide a minimum pull-out capacity of 300 lbs. (136 k) per fastener. Base or ply
sheets attached with cap nails require a minimum pullout capacity of 40 lb. per nail.
7. Prime decks where required, in accordance with requirements and recommendations
of the primer and deck manufacturer.
B. Wood Deck:
1. Plywood shall be a minimum 15/32 inch (11.9 mm) thick and conform to the standards
and installation requirements of the American Plywood Association (APA).
2. provide a suitable dry sheathing paper, followed by an approved base sheet nailed
appropriately for the specified roof system, with 1 inch (25 mm) diameter caps and
annular nails unless otherwise required by the applicable Code or Approval agency.
3. In all retrofit roof applications, it is required that deck be inspected for defects. Any
defects are to be corrected per the deck manufacturer's recommendations and
standards of the APA/Engineered Wood Association prior to new roof application.
4. Insulation is to be mechanically attached in accordance with the insulation
manufacturer’s requirements.
5. Light metal wall ties or other structural metal exposed on top of the wood deck shall
be covered with one ply of a heavy roofing sheet, such as HPR Glasbase Base Sheet,
extending 2 inches to 6 inches (51 mm to 152 mm) beyond the metal in all directions.
Nail in place before applying the base ply.
C. Deck Preparation for Self-Adhered Roof System: Insulation shall be mechanically installed.
331
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 55 00 - 9 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
Sweep or blow away any dust, dirt or sand particles that could interfere with adhesion to
approved substrate Georgia Pacific (GP) DensDeck Prime, and prime with self-adhering
primer at the specified coverage rate.
3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. Install modified bitumen membranes and flashings in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions and with the recommendations provided by the National Roofing Contractors
Association's Roofing & Waterproofing Manual, the Asphalt Roofing Manufacturers
Association, and applicable codes.
B. General: Avoid installation of modified bitumen membranes at temperatures lower than 40-
45 degrees F. When work at such temperatures unavoidable use the following precautions:
1. Take extra care during cold weather installation and when ambient temperatures are
affected by wind or humidity, to ensure adequate bonding is achieved between the
surfaces to be joined. Use extra care at material seam welds and where adhesion of
the applied product to the appropriately prepared substrate as the substrate can be
affected by such temperature constraints as well.
2. Unrolling of cold materials, under low ambient conditions must be avoided to prevent
the likelihood of unnecessary stress cracking. Rolls must be at least 40 degrees F at
the time of application. If the membrane roll becomes stiff or difficult to install, it must
be replaced with roll from a heated storage area.
C. Commence installation of the roofing system at the lowest point of the roof (or roof area),
working up the slope toward the highest point. Lap sheets shingle fashion so as to constantly
shed water
D. All slopes greater than 2:12 require back-nailing to prevent slippage of the ply sheets. Use
ring or spiral-shank 1 inch cap nails, or screws and plates at a rate of 1 fastener per ply
(including the membrane) at each insulation stop. Place insulation stops at 16 ft o.c. for
slopes less than 3:12 and 4 feet o.c. for slopes greater than 3:12. On non-insulated
systems, nail each ply directly into the deck at the rate specified above. When slope
exceeds 2:12, install all plies parallel to the slope (strapping) to facilitate backnailing. Install
4 additional fasteners at the upper edge of the membrane when strapping the plies.
3.4 INSTALLATION SELF ADHERED ROOF SYSTEM
A. Optional Nailable Base Sheet: Install base sheet nailed to the substrate with the appropriate
fastener and fastening pattern determined from your wind uplift calculation.
B. Base Ply: Prior to installation sweep or blow away any dust, dirt, or sand particles, on the
surface that could interfere with adhesion.
1. Prime the roof cover board at the recommended coverage rate with SA Primer at a
rate of 0.50 gal per 100 sq.ft. Allow the primer to dry before installing the base sheet
but it should be tacky for the base sheet application.
2. Start HPR SA FR Base Sheet application at the low point of the roof with appropriate
roll width to offset side laps 18 inches (457 mm) from side laps of base sheet. Install
flush to roof edge if over base sheet, otherwise turn the HPR SA FR Base Sheet over
the fascia minimum 2 inches (50 mm) and nail 9 inches (230 mm) o.c. At perimeter
flashing extend the HPR SA FR Base Sheet up a minimum of 8 inches (203 mm).
Design so that side laps are against the flow of water.
3. Fold membrane back halfway lengthwise to remove the split release film. Press
membrane securely into place and repeat with the opposite half of the membrane.
332
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 55 00 - 10 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
Use a heavy, weighted roller over entire surface of the HPR SA FR Base Sheet
membrane to secure membrane. Work outwards to eliminate voids. When working
with full rolls on large roofs, leave the membrane in position and remove the split
release film from underneath the membrane.
4. Overlap side laps of subsequent HPR SA FR Base Sheet membrane lengths 4 inches
(100 mm) and end laps 8 inches (203 mm). Offset (stagger) end laps minimum 3 feet
(0.9 m). Cut end laps at opposing diagonal corners at a 45 degree angle
approximately 3 inches (76 mm) from the corners to minimize "T"- seams. Apply a
bead or small trowel dab (quarter size) of Flashing Bond or Garla-Flex at the edge of
the angled cut to avoid a capillary.
5. Use of a hand-held hot air gun at joint area prior to rolling membrane to maximize
adhesion. Apply a bead of Flashing Bond or Garla-Flex, at all HPR SA FR Base Sheet
side and end laps to eliminate a capillary.
6. Use a heavy, weighted roller over the entire surface of HPR SA FR Base Sheet to
secure it in place and prevent voids, working outward from center of sheet.
7. Repeat the above steps to properly build 1 to 2 plies, as specified, of HPR SA FR
Base Sheet.
8. Don't leave the installed HPR SA FR Base Sheet exposed to the weather; cover with
StressPly SA FR Mineral cap sheet the same day.
C. Modified Cap Ply(s): Prior to installation sweep or blow away any dust, dirt, or sand particles,
on the HPR SA FR Base Sheet that could interfere with adhesion.
1. Install StressPly SA FR Mineral starting at the low point of the roof with an appropriate
roll width to offset sidelaps from the underlying membrane a minimum of 18 inches
(457 mm). Work with manageable lengths for proper handling. Position with salvage
edge release strip at high side of roof. Install in shingle fashion, with no laps against
the flow of water.
2. Once positioned, lift and fold back lengthwise the lower half of the membrane, remove
the split release film, and press firmly into place. Repeat with the other (high side of
the roof) half of the membrane. Follow the same layout and split release film
procedures as for HPR SA FR Base Sheet but overlap sidelaps 4 inches (100 mm)
and endlaps 8 inches (203 mm).
3. Use a heavy, weighted roller over the entire surface of the StressPly SA FR Mineral
sheet to secure it in place and prevent voids, working outward from the center of the
sheet.
4. As subsequent membrane lengths are installed, remove the selvage edge release
strip just prior to overlapping to keep the adhesive area protected and clean. Cut
endlaps at opposing diagonal corners at a 45-degree angle approximately 4 inches
(100 mm) from the corners to minimize "T" seams. Use Flashing Bond or Garla-Flex
trowel grade, over the full 8-inch (200 mm) width of each end lap prior to overlapping.
Apply a uniform 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) troweling of the Flashing Bond or Garla-
Flex the full width of the endlaps to the underlying membrane; then install the
overlapping sheet.
5. Always apply Flashing Bond or Garla-Flex the width of any overlap when applying the
StressPly SA FR Mineral cap over another mineral surface such as the StressPly SA
FR Mineral endlap.
6. Install HPR SA FR Base Sheet and StressPly SA FR Mineral at vertical and other
flashing over the already installed StressPly SA FR Mineral field plies.
D. Fibrous Cant Strips: Provide non-combustible perlite or glass fiber cant strips at all wall/curb
detail treatments where angle changes are greater than 45 degrees. Cant may be set in
approved cold adhesives in accordance with Garland's recommendations.
333
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 55 00 - 11 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
E. Wood Blocking, Nailers and Cant Strips: Provide wood blocking, nailers and cant strips as
specified in Section 06114 and in accordance with Garland's recommendations.
F. Metal Work: Provide metal flashings, counter flashings, parapet coping caps and thru-wall
flashings as specified in Section 07620 or Section 07710. Install in accordance with in
accordance with Garland's recommendations.
G. Termination Bar: Provide metal termination bar or approved top edge securement at the
terminus of all flashing sheets at walls and curbs. Fasten the bar a minimum of 8 inches (203
mm) o/c to achieve constant compression. Provide suitable, sealant at the top edge if
required.
H. Flashing Base Ply: At all vertical and other flashing details, install HPR SA FR Base Sheet
and StressPly SA FR Mineral over the already installed StressPly SA FR Mineral field plies.
1. Prime the horizontal surface with SA Primer at a rate of 0.5 gal per 100 sq.ft. and
allowed to dry.
2. Over installed StressPly SA FR Mineral field plies apply a 3 foot (0.9 m) wide HPR SA
FR Base Sheet extending a minimum of 10 inches (254 mm) onto the field of the roof.
Apply a uniform 1/8 to 1/4 inch (3 to 6 mm) thick troweling of Flashing Bond or Garla-
Flex, on to the existing StressPly SA FR Mineral field cap.
3. If adhesion is not sufficient on the laps apply Flashing Bond or Garla-Flex at a 1/8 to
1/4 inch (3-6 mm) thick to fully seal laps before application of StressPly SA FR
Mineral.
4. Before installing StressPly SA FR Mineral flashing ply to mineral surfaced field ply,
apply Flashing Bond or Garla-Flex, wherever the membrane overlaps onto mineral
surfacing. Proceed with StressPly SA FR Mineral cap sheet installation. Apply a 3 foot
(0.9 m) wide StressPly SA FR mineral extending a minimum of 10 inches (254 mm)
onto the field of the roof, being sure to cover the base ply.
5. Once the membrane has had a chance to bond, check all laps and joints for full
adhesion. If the membrane can be lifted at any area it is not properly adhered. Use a
seam probing tool to check for small voids at laps. If necessary, use appropriate hand-
held hot air welding tool and seam roller to seal small un-bonded areas.
I. Surface Coatings: Apply roof coatings in strict conformance with the manufacturer's
recommended procedures.
J. Flashing Cap Ply: Apply as specified for Flashing Base Ply in strict conformance with the
manufacturer's recommended procedures.
3.5 INSTALLATION EDGE TREATMENT AND ROOF PENETRATION FLASHING
A. Liquid Flashing:
1. Mask target area on roof membrane with tape.
2. Clean all non-porous areas with isopropyl alcohol.
3. Apply 32 wet mil base coat of liquid flashing over masked area.
4. Embed polyester reinforcement fabric into the base coat of the liquid flashing.
5. Apply 48-64 wet mil topcoat of the liquid flashing material over the fabric extending 2
inches (51 mm) past the scrim in all directions.
6. Apply minerals immediately or allow the liquid flashing material to cure 15-30 days
and then install reflective coating.
3.6 CLEANING
A. Clean-up and remove daily from the site all wrappings, empty containers, paper, loose
334
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 55 00 - 12 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
particles and other debris resulting from these operations.
B. Remove asphalt markings from finished surfaces.
C. Repair or replace defaced or disfigured finishes caused by Work of this section.
3.7 PROTECTION
A. Provide traffic ways, erect barriers, fences, guards, rails, enclosures, chutes and the like to
protect personnel, roofs and structures, vehicles and utilities.
B. Protect exposed surfaces of finished walls with tarps to prevent damage.
C. Plywood for traffic ways required for material movement over existing roofs shall be not less
than 5/8 inch (16 mm) thick.
D. In addition to the plywood listed above, an underlayment of minimum 1/2 inch (13 mm)
recover board is required on new roofing.
E. Special permission shall be obtained from the Manufacturer before any traffic shall be
permitted over new roofing.
3.8 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Provide manufacturer's field observations at start-up and at intervals of Daily.
Provide a final inspection upon completion of the Work.
1. Warranty shall be issued upon manufacturer's acceptance of the installation.
2. Field observations shall be performed by a Sales Representative employed full-time
by the manufacturer and whose primary job description is to assist, inspect, and
approve membrane installations for the manufacturer.
3. Provide observation reports from the Sales Representative indicating procedures
followed, weather conditions and any discrepancies found during inspection.
4. Provide a final report from the Sales Representative, certifying that the roofing system
has been satisfactorily installed according to the project specifications, approved
details and good general roofing practice.
3.9 SCHEDULES
A. Field Base Sheet:
HPR SA FR Base Sheet: 80 mil SBS (Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene) self-adhered base
sheet with a woven fiberglass scrim reinforcement.
a. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 5147
1) 2 in/min. @73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 60 lbf/in XD 39 lbf/in
2) 50mm/min. @23 +/- 2 deg. C 10.5 kN/m XD 6.8 kN/m
b. Tear Strength, ASTM D 5147
1) 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 100 lbf XD 95 lbf
2) 50mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C 445 N XD 422.70 lbf
c. Elongation at Maximum Tensile, ASTM D 5147)
1) 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 4% XD 4%
2) 50mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 4% XD 4%
B. Field Cap Sheet:
StressPly SA FR Mineral: 140 mil SBS (Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene) mineral
surfaced self-adhered, rubber modified roofing membrane reinforced with a
335
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 55 00 - 13 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
fiberglass and polyester composite scrim. ASTM D 6162, Type III Grade G
1) Tensile Strength, ASTM D 5147
a) 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 310 lbf/in XD 310 lbf/in
b) 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 54.25 kN/m XD 54.25 kN/m
2) Tear Strength, ASTM D 5147
a) 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 500 lbf XD 500 lbf
b) 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 2224 N XD 2224 N
3) Elongation at Maximum Tensile, ASTM D 5147
a) 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 3.5% XD 3.5%
b) 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 3.5% XD 3.5%
4) Low Temperature Flexibility, ASTM D 5147, Passes -15 deg. F (-26
deg.
C. Flashing Base Sheet
HPR SA FR Base Sheet: 80 mil SBS (Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene) self-adhered base
sheet with a woven fiberglass scrim reinforcement.
a. Tensile Strength, ASTM D 5147
1) 2 in/min. @73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 60 lbf/in XD 39 lbf/in
2) 50mm/min. @23 +/- 2 deg. C 10.5 kN/m XD 6.8 kN/m
b. Tear Strength, ASTM D 5147
1) 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 100 lbf XD 95 lbf
2) 50mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C 445 N XD 422.70 lbf
c. Elongation at Maximum Tensile, ASTM D 5147)
1) 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 4% XD 4%
2) 50mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 4% XD 4%
D. Flashing Cap Sheet:
StressPly SA FR Mineral: 140 mil SBS (Styrene-Butadiene-Styrene) mineral
surfaced self-adhered, rubber modified roofing membrane reinforced with a
fiberglass and polyester composite scrim. ASTM D 6162, Type III Grade G
1) Tensile Strength, ASTM D 5147
a) 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 310 lbf/in XD 310 lbf/in
b) 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 54.25 kN/m XD 54.25 kN/m
2) Tear Strength, ASTM D 5147
a) 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 500 lbf XD 500 lbf
b) 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 2224 N XD 2224 N
3) Elongation at Maximum Tensile, ASTM D 5147
a) 2 in/min. @ 73.4 +/- 3.6 deg. F MD 3.5% XD 3.5%
b) 50 mm/min. @ 23 +/- 2 deg. C MD 3.5% XD 3.5%
4) Low Temperature Flexibility, ASTM D 5147, Passes -15 deg. F (-26 deg.
C)
E. Flashing Ply Adhesive:
Green-Lock Plus Flashing Adhesive: Cold applied solvent free flashing adhesive: zero
V.O.C.
a. Non-Volatile Content ASTM D 4586 100%
b. Density ASTM D 1475 11.8 lbs./gal. (1.17 g/cm3)
c. Viscosity Brookfield 400,000 cPs.
d. Flash Point ASTM D 93 400 deg. F min. (232 deg. C)
F. Surfacing
336
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 55 00 - 14 Modified Bituminous Membrane Roofing
Surface Coatings:
a. Surfacing:
1) Pyramic Plus LO: White elastomeric roof coating, Energy Star approved
acrylic roof coating:
a) Weight/Gallon 11.7 lbs./gal. (1.40 g/cm3)
b) Non-Volatile % (ASTM D 1644) 63 min
c) Reflectance 83%
END OF SECTION
337
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 60 00 - 1 Flashing and Sheet Metal
SECTION 07 60 00
FLASHING AND SHEET METAL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide metal flashings and sheet metal including accessories as
required for complete weathertight installation.
1. Flashing and sheet metal includes copings, fascias, scuppers, gutters,
downspouts, rainwater leaders, reglets, and similar fabricated components as
applicable to Project.
2. Provide concealed sealants used in conjunction with installation of metal flashing
and sheet metal.
3. Provide miscellaneous sheet metal flashing and reglets.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 06 10 50: Miscellaneous rough carpentry.
2. Section 07 51 00 Built-Up Bituminous Roofing Cap Sheet
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Sheet Metal and Air Conditioning Contractors National Association (SMACNA):
Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish literature for manufactured products.
B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate dimensioning, layout, general construction details
including closures, flashings, locations and types of sealants, anchorages, and
method of anchorage.
C. Samples: Furnish samples of typical metal flashing fabrication indicating standard
soldered joints and edge conditions.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements:
1) two years’ successful experience with CAL/Green requirements.
2. CALGreen Requirements: Refer to Section 01 35 15 – CALGreen Environmental
Requirements and comply with applicable CALGreen Checklist indicating
requirements applicable to Project.
338
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 60 00 - 2 Flashing and Sheet Metal
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Provide strippable film protective covering on shop finished flashing materials to
protect materials through shipping, fabrication and installation.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of system to resist damage
from anticipated sources including damage from wind and water penetration. Repair
system and pay for or replace damaged materials and surfaces.
1. Period: Two years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide flashing and sheet metal including reglets and
accessories as required for complete weathertight installation.
B. Design Criteria: Allow for movement of components without causing buckling, failure
of joint seals, undue stress on fasteners or other detrimental effects, when subject to
100-year seasonal temperature ranges.
C. Flashing and Sheet Metal:
1. Galvanized Steel: ASTM A924 and A653 G90 galvanized steel; minimum 24-gage.
a. Mill phosphatized where indicated to be field painted.
b. Location (Concealed): Where indicated, if not otherwise indicated, provide
where flashing will not be exposed to view from exterior of building and
where not exposed to view from spaces within building.
2. Shop Finished Galvanized Steel Flashing and Sheet Metal: ASTM A924 and
A653 G90 galvanized steel; minimum 24-gage; with factory applied fluoropolymer
coating based on Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Ryerson Building Products (800.328.7800)/ColorKlad.
2) Metal Sales Manuf. Corp.(800.406.7387)/PVDF (Kynar 500).
3) K&M Sheet Metal (888.567.7778)/Kynar Steel.
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
b. Location (Exposed): Where indicated, if not otherwise indicated, provide
where flashing will be exposed to view from exterior of building, and where
exposed to view from spaces within building.
339
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 60 00 - 3 Flashing and Sheet Metal
c. Colors: provide custom color as directed by Architect, to match existing
building flashing colors (blue). Where not visible from public spaces,
galvanized sheet metal may be used.
d. Touch-up Paint for Prefinished Sheet Metal: Type recommended by
fluoropolymer manufacturer for field touch-up.
3. Lead Flashing: ASTM B749, type L51121, copper-bearing sheet lead, minimum
four pound per square foot (1/16" thick) lead with 6% to 7% antimony content.
4. Accessories: Provide strainers, outlet tubes, screens, baffles, hangers and gutter
ends as required for a complete system and complying with SMACNA Manual.
5. Provide heavier gage metal where recommended by SMACNA Manual for size of
component.
D. Manufactured Reglets: Snap-on type, for two-piece flashing; metal to match flashing
and sheet metal.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Fry Reglet Corp./Springlok System.
b. W.P. Hickman Co./The Leading-Edge Drive Lock System.
c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
E. Solder and Fasteners: As recommended by SMACNA and complying with applicable
codes and regulations; hot dipped galvanized minimum coating comparable to G90.
F. Concealed Sealant: Butyl type for use in conjunction with sheet metal; non-staining;
non-corrosive; non-shrinking and non-sagging; ultra-violet and ozone resistant for
exterior concealed applications.
G. Bituminous Paint: Acid and alkali resistant type; black color; asbestos free.
H. Plastic Cement: Cutback asphaltic type; asbestos free.
I. Sealing Compound: Type recommended by roofing manufacturer; asbestos free.
J. Gaskets: Type suitable for use in conjunction with sheet metal; non-staining, non-
corrosive, non-shrinking, non-sagging, ultra-violet resistant, and ozone resistant; for
exterior concealed applications.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Emseal USA, Inc./Emseal MST Multi-Use Sealant Tape.
b. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate sheet metal in accordance with SMACNA Architectural Sheet Metal Manual.
340
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 60 00 - 4 Flashing and Sheet Metal
B. Form sections square, true and accurate to size, free from distortion and other
defects detrimental to appearance or performance.
1. Fabricate corners and intersections in shop with solder joints; watertight
fabrication.
C. Form sections in maximum 10'-0" lengths; make allowance for expansion at joints.
D. Hem exposed edges on underside 1/2".
E. Back-paint flashings with heavy bodied bituminous paint where in contact with
cementitious materials or dissimilar metals.
F. Form pitch pans watertight, with minimum 4" upstand and 4" flanges; form pans
minimum 6" wider than item passing through roof membrane.
G. Form umbrella flashings with minimum 2" overhang, to shed water away from pitch
pans.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install metal flashing and sheet metal in accordance with SMACNA Architectural
Sheet Metal Manual.
1. Install tight in place, with corners square, surfaces true and straight in planes,
and lines accurate to profiles as indicated on Drawings.
2. Lap joints in direction of water flow.
3. Hold downspouts in position, clear of wall, by hangers spaced not more than 10'-0" on
center; securely fasten hangers to wall without exposed damage to wall surface.
B. Exercise care when cutting materials on site, to ensure cuttings do not remain on
finished surfaces.
C. Provide expansion joints concealed within system.
D. Use concealed fasteners, continuous cleat type, except where specifically approved
by Architect.
1. Exposed fasteners may be used, where clearly indicated on shop drawings and
approved by Architect, at areas not exposed at exterior walls nor in sight of
interior spaces.
E. Apply sealing compound at junction of metal flashing and felt flashing.
F. Lock seams and end joints; fit flashing tight in place; make corners square, surfaces
true and straight in planes, and lines accurate to profiles.
341
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 60 00 - 5 Flashing and Sheet Metal
G. Counter-flash mechanical and electrical items projecting through roof membrane.
H. Install sealants where required to prevent direct weather penetration.
1. Install continuous gasket behind surface applied reglets.
I. Completed installation shall be free of rattles, noise due to thermal and air movement,
and wind whistles.
J. Install pitch pans and fill with plastic cement.
K. Install umbrella flashing with draw band collars with sheet metal sealant between
penetrating item and flashing; use wood blocking at angle type penetrations and
cover blocking with sealant.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Remove protective coating from shop finished sheet metal when no longer required to
protect roofing and flashing from construction.
B. Touch-up scratched and damaged finish to match new; remove and replace sheet
metal units that cannot be repaired to look identical to adjacent sheet metal when
viewed from 15'-0" away.
END OF SECTION
342
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 72 00 - 1 Roof Hatches
SECTION 07 72 00
ROOF HATCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide manufactured roof hatches with integral support curb,
operable hardware, counterflashing, and accessories as required for complete,
weather-tight installation.
1. Provide fall protection railings where indicated and as required by applicable
regulations.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 05 50 00: Ladder extenders for roof hatch access.
2. Section 07 60 00: Flashing roof hatches to roof system.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer’s literature.
B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate general construction, configurations, jointing
methods and locations when applicable, fastening methods and general details.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Babcock-Davis Hatchways, Inc.
B. Bilco Company.
C. Milcor, Inc.
D. Nystrom Building Products.
E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 ROOF HATCHES
A. System Description: Provide manufactured roof hatches, with integral support curb,
operable hardware, counterflashing, and accessories.
B. Roof Hatches:
1. Type: Single leaf type.
2. Size: 3'-0" by 3'-0" unless otherwise indicated.
343
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/25/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 72 00 - 2 Roof Hatches
C. Construction: Construct with full welded corner joints, insulated hatch lids, and
insulated internal support curbs.
1. Provide complete with integral counter-flashings to roof flashing system and
flanges on support curb for anchorage to roof deck.
2. Loading: Capable of supporting minimum 40-psf external loading and 20-psf
internal loading pressure.
D. Opening Hardware: Manufacturer's standard manually operating type.
1. Capable of ensuring effortless control and smooth operation without causing
damage to hatch or to roofing system.
2. Capable of being opened from inside and outside.
3. Complete with hold-open mechanism and inside padlock hasps.
E. Fall Protection Integral Railings: Provide railings fixed to roof hatch curbs (not
requiring additional penetration of roof assembly); comply with applicable code
requirements; welded construction; cap exposed ends.
1. Railing Design Requirements: Comply with applicable codes and regulations
requirements but not less than lateral force of 50 lbs. /lin. ft. uniform load and 200
lbs. at any single point without permanent set or damage; ASTM E935.
2. Rails: Seamless steel tube rails, 42" height above roof surface, 1-1/2" outside
diameter, continuous railings conforming to applicable code and design
requirements.
3. Chain Closures: Provide welded closed link chain capable of supporting same
loads as railing and designed to allow easy removal for access from hatch to roof
and roof to hatch.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate roof hatches weather-tight, and free of visual distortions and defects.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install roof hatches in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
instructions for complete, weather-tight installation.
B. Coordinate with installation of roofing system and related flashings.
C. Apply bituminous paint on metal surfaces of roof hatches to be in contact with
cementitious materials and dissimilar metals.
END OF SECTION
344
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 84 00 - 1 Firestopping
SECTION 07 84 00
FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide firestopping as required to maintain effective barrier against
spread of flame, smoke and gases, and to retain integrity of time-rated construction
as indicated and at following types of locations.
1. Provide at fire rated system perimeters, and at duct, conduit, piping penetrations
through time-rated construction, and as required by applicable codes.
2. Coordinate requirements for firestopping with work involving penetrations through
fire rated assemblies.
3. Review Project and Contract Documents to ascertain extent of penetrations in fire
rated assemblies and methods included in other sections for maintaining fire ratings.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 90 00: Non-fire rated joint sealants.
2. SECTION 21 05 03 - THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
3. SECTION 23 05 03 - THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
4. SECTION 26 05 03 - THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Coordinate firestopping with fire rated assemblies and penetrations
through fire rated assemblies to ensure compliance with applicable codes and
regulations to maintain integrity of fire rated assemblies.
1. Firestopping may be integral with some systems and may be specified as part of
other systems including mechanical and electrical systems.
B. Coordination with Acoustical Assemblies: Where a firestopping sealant is required at
a penetration of an acoustical assembly, provide a fire-rated acoustical sealant such
as Pecora/AC-20 FTR, or Hilti/CP 606.
1. Do not use intumescent firestopping at acoustically rated assemblies.
2. Coordinate with Section 09 21 00 – Gypsum Board Assemblies.
345
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 84 00 - 2 Firestopping
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature including data for materials and
prefabricated devices, including descriptions to identify materials and devices on job.
1. Submit Underwriter's Laboratory approval numbers for required fire ratings; approval
of other laboratories contingent upon acceptance of applicable authorities.
2. Deferred Approvals: Submit data necessary for applicable authorities for each type
of firestopping required including firestopping at fire rated assembly junctures, and
penetrations through fire rated assemblies.
B. Shop Drawings: Submit manufacturer's installation details.
C. Certificates of Compliance: Submit manufactures’ certificates, accompanied by
classifications, indicating material or combination of materials used meets
requirements specified for flame spread and fire resistance.
1. Certificates to be supported by test reports by nationally recognized testing
authority or otherwise satisfactory to authorities.
D. Manufacturer’s Instructions: Maintain copy of manufacturer's installation instructions
and recommendations at each work area.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements relative to finish
material pollution control for sealants.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDING
A. Deliver materials in their original unopened packages and store in location providing
protection from damage and exposure to elements.
B. Damaged or deteriorated materials shall be removed from site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. AD Fire Protection Systems/AD Firebarrier Firestopping Materials.
B. Hilti, Corp./Hilti Firestop Systems.
C. 3M Fire Protection Products Div./3M Fire Barrier Products.
D. Specified Technologies, Inc. (STI)/SpecSeal and Pensil Firestopping.
E. Tremco/Firestopping Products.
F. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
346
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 84 00 - 3 Firestopping
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide firestopping as required to maintain effective barrier
against spread of flame, smoke and gases, and to retain integrity of time-rated
construction.
1. Choose products and methods meeting applicable codes and Specification
requirements for each firestopping application, subject to Architect's acceptance.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with California Building Code, Chapter 7
requirements for firestopping, including both F Ratings and T Ratings as applicable.
C. Design Requirements: Provide materials tested in accordance with following
standards, unless otherwise specified.
1. American Society for Testing and Materials (ASTM) Publications:
a. ASTM E84, Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
b. ASTM E119, Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials.
c. ASTM E814, Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Fire Stops.
d. ASTM E1966, Test Method for Fire-Resistive Joint Systems.
D. Firestopping Materials: Furnish materials for penetrations in time-rated floor, wall, and
partition assemblies capable of preventing passage of flame, smoke, and hot gases.
1. Penetration Test: Furnish materials passing ASTM E814 or E1966 for penetration fire
stopping indicating maintenance of time-rated adjacent assemblies.
a. Additional Tests: Where required by applicable authorities, provide materials
passing ASTM E119 time-temperature fire conditions for fire ratings
indicated for assemblies.
2. Flame Spread: ASTM E84 flame spread rating of 25 or less.
3. Smoke Developed: ASTM E84 smoke developed rating of 450 or less.
E. Firestopping: Maintain fire rating of assembly in which firestopping is installed, such
as floor, partition, or wall, in accordance with ASTM E119 tests.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine surfaces and conditions receiving or affecting the work. Do not proceed until
unsuitable conditions are corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install firestopping in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
installation instructions.
B. Completely fill void space with firestopping materials regardless of geometric
configuration, subject to tolerances established by firestopping manufacturer.
347
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 84 00 - 4 Firestopping
C. Apply firestopping materials at penetrations of pipes, conduits, and ducts prior to
application of insulation.
1. Remove insulation already in place at penetration prior to application of
firestopping materials unless insulation meets requirements for fire ratings
indicated.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Inspection: Keep area of work available for inspection by Architect and applicable
authorities before and after application of firestopping.
3.4 REPAIR AND CLEAN-UP
A. Repair damage caused by work of this section; clean exposed surfaces soiled by
work and leave work ready to receive following work.
B. On completion of work, remove debris, excess materials, and equipment from site.
END OF SECTION
348
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 90 00 - 1 Joint Sealants
SECTION 07 90 00
JOINT SEALANTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide joint sealants, for interior and exterior joints not specified
elsewhere, with backing rods and accessories as required for complete installation.
1. Joint sealants include joint sealers and calking as indicated.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 60 00: Flashing and sheet metal concealed sealants.
2. Section 07 84 00: Firestopping type joint sealants.
3. Section 08 80 00: Glazing sealants.
4. Section 09 21 00: Sealants used for acoustical treatment at gypsum board.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's descriptive literature.
B. Samples: Furnish samples of each type of exposed joint sealer in required colors.
C. Certifications:
1. Furnish manufacturer's certification joint sealers comply with Contract
Documents and are suitable for Project applications.
2. Furnish certification indicating installers are trained in proper use of specified
products, qualified, and familiar with proper installation techniques.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants, and caulks.
1. Provide joint sealants as required by applicable codes and regulations to fill joints
and openings in building envelope separating conditioned space from
unconditioned space.
B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years successful experience on
projects of similar type and size, using specified products.
C. Installers shall be familiar with proper application procedures to ensure maximum joint
sealer expansion and contraction capabilities.
D. Mock-Up: Provide exterior joint sealers where required for mock-ups of other
systems.
349
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 90 00 - 2 Joint Sealants
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to site in original unopened containers or bundles with labels
indicating manufacturer, product name and designation, color, expiration period for
use, cure time, and mixing instructions.
1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not proceed with installation of joint sealers under unfavorable weather conditions.
B. Install elastomeric sealants when temperature is in lower third of temperature range
recommended by manufacturer.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Extend correction period to two years.
1. Repair or replace joint sealers which fail to perform as intended, because of
leaking, crumbling, hardening, shrinkage, bleeding, sagging, staining, loss of
adhesion, and loss of cohesion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide joint sealants with backing rods and accessories.
B. Performance Requirements:
1. Select materials for compatibility with joint surfaces and indicated exposures.
2. Where not indicated, select modulus of elasticity and hardness or grade
recommended by manufacturer for each application indicated.
3. Comply with applicable limitations on volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.
C. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable regulatory requirements regarding
limitations on volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions limitations.
D. Elastomeric Sealants:
1. Multi-Component Polyurethane Sealant: ASTM C920, Type M, Grade P,
Class 25, self-leveling; minimum 25% expansion and compaction capability.
a. Provide at traffic bearing locations.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Pecora Corp./Urexpan NR-200, or Dynatrol II-SG.
2) Tremco/THC 900-901, or Vulkem 445 SSL.
3) BASF/MasterSeal SL 2
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
350
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 90 00 - 3 Joint Sealants
2. Mildew-Resistant Silicone Rubber Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS,
Class 25, compounded with fungicide, specifically for mildew resistance and
recommended for interior joints in wet areas.
a. Provide at interior joints in damp areas.
b. Manufacturers:
1) GE (Momentive Performance Materials)/SCS 1702 Sanitary Sealant.
2) Dow Corning Corp./786 Bathtub Caulk.
3) Pecora Corp./898 Sanitary Mildew Resistant Sealant.
4) Tremco/Tremsil 200.
5) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
E. Non-Elastomeric Sealants:
1. Acrylic-Emulsion Sealant: ASTM C834 acrylic or latex-rubber-modified acrylic
sealant, permanently flexible, non-staining and non-bleeding; recommended for
general interior exposure; compatible with paints specified in Section 09 90 00.
a. Provide at general interior applications.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Pecora Corp./AC-20.
2) Tremco/Tremflex 834.
3) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2. Air Seals: Provide non-staining and non-bleeding sealers, calks, or foams
appropriate to specific applications for filling openings between conditioned and
unconditioned spaces.
a. Type: As recommended by manufacturer for each specific application;
compatible with adjacent materials.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Dow/Great Stuff.
2) Owens Corning/EnergyComplete Air Sealant.
3) Hilti/Foam Filler CF 812.
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
c. Pest Control Mesh: Openings subject to pest infiltration to have 304 stainless
steel wool, material stuffed in joint before application of air seals using
methods to ensure blocking of gap from pests.
d. Exception: Annular spaces around pipes, electric cables, conduits and other
openings in exterior walls shall be protected against passage of rodents by
closing with cementitious grout.
351
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 90 00 - 4 Joint Sealants
1) Cementitious Grout: ASTM C1107 non-shrink, non-metallic, pre-mixed,
factory-packaged, non-staining, non-corrosive; type specifically
recommended by manufacturer as applicable to job condition.
F. Miscellaneous Materials:
1. Primers/Sealers: Non-staining types recommended by joint sealer manufacturer
for joint surfaces to be primed or sealed.
2. Joint Cleaners: Non-corrosive types recommended by joint sealer manufacturer;
compatible with joint forming materials.
3. Bond Breaker Tape: Polyethylene tape as recommended by joint sealer
manufacturer where bond to substrate or joint filler must be avoided for proper
performance of joint sealer.
4. Sealant Backer Rod: Compressible polyethylene foam rod or other flexible,
permanent, durable non-absorptive material as recommended by joint sealer
manufacturer for compatibility with joint sealer.
a. Oversize backer rod minimum 30% to 50% of joint opening.
G. Colors: As indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of colors
where not indicated.
1. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide
custom color as directed by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prepare joint surfaces in accordance with ASTM C1193 and as recommended by
joint sealer manufacturer.
B. Clean joint surfaces immediately before installation of joint sealer; remove dirt,
insecure materials, moisture and other substances which could interfere with bond of
joint sealer.
C. Prime or seal joint surfaces where recommended by joint sealer manufacturer; do not
allow primer/sealer to spill or migrate onto adjoining surfaces.
D. Ensure protective coatings on surfaces in contact with joint sealers have been
completely stripped.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's printed instructions and ASTM C1193, except where
more stringent requirements are shown or specified.
352
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
07 90 00 - 5 Joint Sealants
B. Pest Control: Install stainless steel wool prior to application of backer rods and bond
breakers at air seal and as required to ensure complete pest blockage at joints where
pest intrusion is a potential.
C. Set sealant backer rods at proper depth or position in joint to coordinate with other
work, including installation of bond breakers and sealant; do not leave voids or gaps
between ends of backer rods.
1. Do not stretch, twist, puncture or tear backer rods.
D. Install bond breaker tape as required to avoid three-sided bond of sealant to
substrate and where required by manufacturer's recommendations to ensure joint
sealers will perform properly.
E. Size materials to achieve required width/depth ratios.
F. Employ installation techniques that will ensure joint sealers are deposited in uniform,
continuous ribbons without gaps or air pockets, with complete "wetting" of bond
surfaces equally on opposite sides.
G. Joint Configuration: Fill sealant joint to a slightly concave surface, slightly below
adjoining surfaces, unless otherwise indicated.
H. Where horizontal joints are between a horizontal surface and vertical surface, fill joint
to form a slight cove, so that joint will not trap moisture or dirt.
I. Install joint sealers to depths recommended by joint sealer manufacturer but within
the following general limitations, measured at center (thin) section of bead.
1. Horizontal Joints: 75% width with minimum depth of 3/8".
2. Elastomeric Joints: 50% width with minimum depth of 1/4".
3. Non-Elastomeric Joints: 75% to 125% of joint width.
J. Spillage: Do not allow sealants or compounds to overflow or spill onto adjoining
surfaces, or to migrate into voids of adjoining surfaces.
1. Clean adjoining surfaces by whatever means may be necessary to eliminate
evidence of spillage.
K. Cure joint sealers in compliance with manufacturer's instructions and
recommendations to obtain high early bond strength, internal cohesive strength and
surface durability.
L. Maintain finished joints free of embedded matter, ridges and sags.
END OF SECTION
353
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 11 10 - 1 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
SECTION 08 11 10
HOLLOW METAL DOORS AND FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide full flush steel (hollow metal) doors and pressed steel
frames, including anchors and silencers.
1. Pressed steel frames include both door and window framing.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 08 11 20 Interior Aluminum Frames
2. Section 08 71 00: Door hardware.
3. Section 08 80 00: Glazing.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Steel Door Institute (SDI): SDI-100 (ANSI/SDI A250.8) - Recommended
Specifications - Standard Steel Doors and Frames.
B. National Association of Architectural Metal Manuf. (NAAMM): Hollow Metal Manual.
C. Underwriters Laboratories: Standards as applicable to fire rated doors and frames.
1. Materials tested, labeled and inspected by Warnock Hersey International are
acceptable upon approval of authorities.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate hardware installation with Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware.
2. Coordinate glass installation with Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturers' literature.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate general construction, configuration, jointing methods,
reinforcement, anchorage methods, hardware locations, and locations of cut-outs.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Amweld Building Products Inc.
354
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 11 10 - 2 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
B. Ceco Door Division Assa Abloy Door Group.
C. Curries Division Assa Abloy Door Group.
D. Door Components, Inc.
E. Republic Doors and Frames.
F. Krieger Steel Products Co.
G. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide full flush steel (hollow metal) doors and pressed steel
frames, including anchors and silencers.
B. Doors: Hollow metal flush steel door, 1-3/4" thick.
1. Typical: Full flush with steel channel or welded edge; close top with flush end
closer treatment, bottom optional flush or recessed channel; steel stiffened core,
insulated at exterior doors; continuous welded seam.
2. Interior Doors: Minimum 0.042” (18-gage).
3. Exterior Doors: Minimum 0.053” (16-gage).
4. Glazed Doors: Provide as indicated on Drawings.
C. Frames:
1. Exterior Frames: Welded (pre-assembled) type.
2. Interior Frames: Knockdown (field-assembled) type; provide 3/8” back bend
return on frames at gypsum board.
3. Gage: Minimum 0.053” (16-gage) interior frames, 0.067” (14-gage) exterior
frames.
4. Door Silencers: Manufacturer's standard resilient type; removable for
replacement.
5. Mortar Guard Boxes: Minimum 0.026” (22-gage) mortar guard boxes welded in
place; provide where frames may be grouted.
D. Glazing Stops: Full flush type with glass centered in opening, unsecured side integral
with unit, secured side fastened with flush, countersunk Allen type fasteners;
minimum 0.053” (16-gage).
355
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 11 10 - 3 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
E. Fire Rated Units: Construct in accordance with requirements for fire rating, NFPA 252
or UL 10C, and NFPA 80.
1. Labels: Place fire rating labels where visible when doors and frames are in
installed, opened position.
2. Fire Ratings: Refer to Drawings for fire rating requirements.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Conform to requirements of SDI (ANSI A250 Series) or NAAMM.
B. Reinforce and prepare doors and frames to receive hardware.
1. Refer to Section 08 71 00 for hardware requirements.
C. Frames:
1. Welded Frames: Accurately form and cut mitered corners of welded type frames;
continuously weld on inside surfaces (fully welded); grind welded joints to smooth
uniform finish.
2. Knocked Down Frames: Accurately form and miter interlocking joints of knocked
down frames to maintain hairline alignment of parts when field assembled.
3. Head Reinforcement: Reinforce frames wider than 4'-0" with minimum 0.093”
(12 gage) formed steel channels welded in place, flush with top of frames.
4. Doors at Glazed Panels: Reinforce jambs and heads of frames for doors which
occur adjacent to glazed sidelights and partitions.
D. Door Silencers:
1. Place three single bumpers on single door frames; space equally along strike
jambs.
2. Place two single bumpers on double door frames; place on frame heads.
3. Place three single bumpers for each door on door frames with removable
mullions, spaced equally along strike jambs, and in addition place two single
bumpers on frame heads to cushion door when mullion is removed.
E. Provide jamb anchors per SDI-100 (ANSI/SDI 250.8) and NAAMM; weld floor jamb
anchors in place.
F. Edge Clearances:
1. Between Doors and Frames: Maximum 1/8" at head and jambs.
2. Door Sills (No Threshold): Maximum 1/2".
3. Door Sills (Threshold): Maximum 3/8" above finished floor.
4. Between Edges of Pairs of Doors: Maximum 1/8".
356
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 11 10 - 4 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
5. Fire Rated Doors: As required for fire ratings.
G. Finish: Comply with requirements of Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating for
primer including application and compatibility with specified finishes.
1. Interior Units: Prime paint.
2. Exterior Exposed Units: Apply minimum A60 non-spangle galvanized coating,
ASTM A924 and A653.
a. Surface treat after galvanizing to remove oils and prepare for painting and
apply one coat of primer; comply with requirements in Section 09 90 00.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install doors and frames in accordance with SDI-100 (ANSI/SDI A250.8) and ANSI/SDI
A250.11 or NAAMM "Hollow Metal Manual" and with manufacturer's recommendations
and installation instructions.
1. Install fire rated units in conformance with fire label requirements and NFPA 80.
B. Install doors and frames plumb and square within 1/16”, and with maximum diagonal
distortion of 1/32".
C. Remove and replace new doors and frames damaged during delivery, storage,
installation and construction at contractor’s expense.
1. Paste filler repair shall not be permitted.
D. After installation, touch-up scratched paint surfaces.
END OF SECTION
357
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 11 20 - 1 Interior Aluminum Frames
SECTION 08 11 20
INTERIOR ALUMINUM FRAMES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide aluminum frames for interior doors and glazed partitions,
with attachments and accessories as required for complete installation.
1. Prepare frames for door hardware.
B. Related Work:
1. Section 08 41 00: Aluminum-framed entrances and storefronts.
2. Section 08 71 00: Door hardware.
3. Section 08 80 00: Glazing.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): Building Materials Directory.
1. Materials tested, labeled and inspected by Warnock Hersey International are
acceptable upon approval of authorities.
B. National Association of Architectural Metal Manuf. (NAAMM): Metal Finishes Manual.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Coordinate hardware installation with Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware.
2. Coordinate glass installation with Section 08 80 00 - Glazing.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, general construction, component
connections and locations, anchor methods and locations.
C. Samples: Submit samples of aluminum finish.
358
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 11 20 - 2 Interior Aluminum Frames
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Wilson Partitions.
B. Western Integrated Materials, Inc.
C. RACO Interior Products.
D. Arcadia
E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide aluminum frames for interior doors and glazed partitions,
with attachments and accessories.
B. Interior Aluminum Frames: Knock-down (field assembled) door frames; extruded
aluminum, ASTM B221, 6063-T5 alloy; profile as indicated.
1. Glazed Partition Frames: Provide extruded aluminum security type snap-in glass
stops.
2. Fire Rated Frames: Provide fire rated frames as indicated, approved by
California State Fire Marshal and ICBO.
3. Door Stop Gasketing: Provide continuous elastomeric vinyl gasketing at door stop.
C. Fluoropolymer Finish: Fluorocarbon polymer based on Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000.
1. Colors: Metallic Silver to match existing door frames.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum frames to allow for clearances and shim spacing around
perimeter; provide for thermal movement.
B. Provide anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fit frames in place.
1. Conceal anchorage devices and fasteners.
C. Accurately fit together joints and corners; match components ensuring continuity of
line and design; ensure joints and connections are flush, hairline and weatherproof.
D. Provide required internal reinforcing for door hardware.
1. Refer to Section 08 71 00 for hardware requirements.
E. Apply coat of bituminous paint on concealed aluminum surfaces to be in contact with
cementitious or dissimilar materials.
359
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 11 20 - 3 Interior Aluminum Frames
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install aluminum frames in accordance with recommendations of manufacturer.
1. Install fire rated units in conformance with fire label requirements and NFPA 80.
B. Ensure assemblies are plumb, level and free of warp or twist; maintain dimensional
tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
C. Use anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fasten frame assemblies to building.
D. After installation, touch-up scratched and damaged surfaces; remove and replace
damaged frames where touch-up is noticeable from 5’-0” or more at expense of the
contractor.
END OF SECTION
360
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 14 00 - 1 Wood Doors
SECTION 08 14 00
WOOD DOORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide flush wood doors as indicated.
1. Contractor Option: Provide shop finished wood doors.
B. Related Work
1. Section 08 11 10 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
2. Section 08 11 20: Interior aluminum frames.
3. Section 08 71 00: Door hardware.
4. Section 08 80 00: Glass and glazing for wood doors.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. North American Architectural Woodwork Standards – 3.1, (NAAWS).
B. Window and Door Manufacturer’s Association (WDMA): Guide Specifications.
C. Underwriters Laboratories Inc. (UL): Building Materials Directory.
1. Materials tested, labeled and inspected by Warnock Hersey International are
acceptable upon approval of authorities.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination:
1. Hardware: Coordinate hardware installation with Section 08 71 00 – Door
Hardware.
2. Glazing: Coordinate glazing with Section 08 80 00 – Glazing.
3. Painting: Coordinate with Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating whether wood
doors are to be shop or field finished.
4. Coordinate with Millwork for (3) millwork gate locations.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate general construction, jointing methods, hardware locations,
and locations of cut-outs.
361
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 14 00 - 2 Wood Doors
C. Samples: Submit samples of wood doors indicating construction, veneering, and
finish.
1. Submit shop finish for wood doors where doors are furnished shop finished.
D. Certificates: Submit manufacturer certification indicating compliance to applicable
requirements of either NAAWS or WDMA Standards; note which standards were
followed or if both standards have been met.
1. Wood Product Certification: Furnish certification indicating wood products are
from FSC “well-managed” forests.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to finish material pollution control for composite wood products formaldehyde
limitations and paints and coatings.
B. Certified Wood Products: Wood products to be from forests certified “well-managed”
by an agency accredited by Forest Stewardship Council (FSC).
1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not deliver or install doors until conditions for temperature and relative humidity
have been stabilized in accordance with referenced standards requirements
applicable to Project location.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for replacing, rehanging, and refinishing wood
doors exhibiting defects in materials or workmanship including warp and
delamination.
1. Period: Two years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Algoma Hardwoods, Inc.
B. Eggers Industries Architectural Door Division.
C. Marshfield Door Systems, Inc.
D. VT Industries. Basis of Design
E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide flush wood doors as indicated.
362
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 14 00 - 3 Wood Doors
B. Solid Core Flush Wood Doors: NAAWS/Premium Grade, 5 Ply Hot Press, 1-3/4" thick
solid wood framed glued block construction or particleboard core five ply construction;
Contractor option to use WDMA comparable standards.
1. Transparent/Stained Wood Veneers: NAAWS/Premium Grade veneers for
transparent/stained finish; nominal 1/40" thick before sanding, not less than 1/50”
after sanding.
a. Wood Veneers:
1) Cherry
a) Stain: WH 18 Wheat at Interior face of Council Chamber doors and
new doors not directly connected to lobby.
b) Stain: T1 18 at lobby side of council chamber doors
And other new doors.
(1) Verify in field to match existing doors. Submit samples for
approval.
2) Walnut: Dais Gates (2): Walnut veneer
a) Wheat Stain (WH18)
2. Edges: Stile edges to match face veneer, minimum 1-1/8" thick after trim.
3. Core: Bond stiles and rails to core and sand prior to assembly of face veneers.
4. Bond Type: Provide Type I Bond for exterior doors, Type II Bond for interior
doors.
5. Bond Type: Provide Type II Bond for interior doors.
6. Fire Rated Flush Wood Doors: 1-3/4" thick, match non-rated door appearance;
comply with applicable codes; UL or Warnock Hersey rated.
a. Labels: Place fire rating labels where visible when doors are installed, in
opened position.
b. Fire Ratings: Refer to Drawings for fire rating requirements.
c. Core: Use wood core construction for 20 minute rated flush doors, mineral
core permitted for longer ratings.
363
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 14 00 - 4 Wood Doors
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate doors in accordance with requirements of specified standards.
1. Prefit wood doors.
2. Prepare doors to receive hardware in shop, refer to Section 08 71 00 for
hardware requirements and templates.
3. Factory machine doors for mortise hardware.
B. Bevel strike edge of single-acting doors, 1/8" in 2".
1. Radius strike edge of double-acting swing doors 2-1/8".
C. Fire Rated Doors: Fabricate fire rated doors in accordance with requirements of
Underwriters' Laboratories (UL) or Warnock Hersey International.
1. Provide fire rated doors with maximum allowable edge strips, of wood species to
match face veneers.
2. Provide doors with blocking designed for addition of closers, even where doors
are not indicated to receive closers.
3. Provide astragals and metal edge trim for double doors.
D. Make cut-outs and provide matching wood stops for glass; profiles as indicated, type
as selected by Architect where not otherwise indicated.
1. Fire Rated Doors: Provide minimum 18-gage metal stops conforming to fire
rating requirements.
E. Shop Finished Doors (Contractor Option): Conform to requirements specified in
Section 09 90 00 – Painting and Coating.
1. Colors: Per finish plans and or door schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install wood doors in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
installation instructions, and reference standards, plumb and square, and with
maximum diagonal distortion of 1/16".
1. Install fire rated wood doors in accordance with requirements for specified fire
label and requirements of NFPA 80.
a. Field cutting of fire rated doors shall not be acceptable.
B. Rehang or replace doors which do not swing or operate freely.
364
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 14 00 - 5 Wood Doors
3.2 PROTECTION
A. Protection: Protect doors as recommended by door manufacturer to ensure doors are
without damage at time of Substantial Completion.
1. Shop Finished Doors: Refinish or replace damaged doors.
END OF SECTION
365
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 31 00 - 1 Access Doors and Panels
SECTION 08 31 00
ACCESS DOORS AND PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide access doors set in finished surfaces.
1. Provide access doors and panels as required for access to controls and valves
behind finished surfaces.
2. Coordinate with various trades for controls and valves which may be concealed.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of access doors required but not indicated on
Architectural Drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Milcor Inc.
B. Karp Associates, Inc.
C. J.L. Industries.
D. Nystrom Building Products.
E. Elmdor Manufacturing Co.
F. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide access doors and panels set in finished surfaces.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Where doors and panels are in fire rated assemblies
provide assemblies listed in Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. "Classified Building
Materials Index" for rating shown.
1. Provide UL label on each rated access door.
2. Materials tested, labeled and inspected by Warnock Hersey International are
acceptable upon approval of authorities.
366
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 31 00 - 2 Access Doors and Panels
C. Access Doors and Panels: Provide access door and panel assemblies consisting of
an integral unit with flush metal doors and panels, complete and ready for installation.
1. Fire Rated Units: Match Milcor/Model UFR Universal flush panel fire rated doors.
2. Wall Units: Match Milcor/Style M flush panel style; prime painted unless
otherwise indicated. Stainless steel at restroom locations.
3. Units Mounted in Plaster: Match MIlcor/Style K, flush panel style.
4. Gypsum Board Ceilings: Match Milcor/Style ATR recessed panel style to receive
gypsum board insert with edges filled and taped. Council Chamber only.
D. Frames: Fabricate from not less than 16-gage steel.
E. Doors: Flush panel type, fabricate from not less than 14-gage steel.
F. Hinges: Provide continuous piano type hinge.
G. Locking Devices: Provide flush, key-operated cylinder lock for each access door;
provide two keys per lock and key locks alike, unless otherwise scheduled.
H. Finish: Finish with manufacturer's factory-applied enamel prime coat applied over
phosphate coating on steel.
1. Stainless Steel: provide Type 304 corrosion resistant nonmagnetic stainless-steel
access doors and frames.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Size Variations: Obtain Architect's acceptance of manufacturer's standard size units
which may vary slightly from sizes shown or scheduled.
B. Fabricate units of continuous welded steel construction; grind welds smooth and flush
with adjacent surfaces.
C. Provide attachment devices and fasteners of type required for specific job conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas and conditions under which access doors are to be installed.
1. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions are corrected;
installation signifies acceptance of conditions.
B. Obtain specific locations and sizes for required access doors from trades requiring
access to concealed equipment; coordinate installation with work of other trades.
367
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 31 00 - 3 Access Doors and Panels
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions for access doors.
1. Install fire rated access doors in accordance applicable code requirements and
with requirements of NFPA 80.
B. Set frames accurately in position and securely attach to supports with face panels
plumb or level in relation to adjacent finish surfaces.
C. Adjust hardware and doors after installation for proper operation.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace doors and frames that are warped, bowed, or otherwise
damaged at contractor’s expense.
END OF SECTION
368
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 41 00 - 1 Entrances & Storefronts
SECTION 08 41 00
ENTRANCES AND STOREFRONTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide aluminum-framed entrances and storefront systems, with
stock non-automatic doors, hardware, anchorage, glazing, and accessories as
required for complete installation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 90 00: Perimeter sealants and back-up materials.
2. Section 08 71 00 Door Hardware
3. Section 08 80 00 Glazing
1.2 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Metal Manufacturers (AAMA): Aluminum Store Front and
Entrance Manual.
B. Glass Association of North America (GANA): Glazing Manual.
C. National Association of Architectural Metal Manuf. (NAAMM): Metal Finishes Manual.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate pertinent dimensioning, general construction, component
connections and locations, anchor methods and locations, hardware locations, and
relevant details.
C. Samples: Furnish samples of metal finish, glass and glazing gasket.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to energy efficiency.
B. Installer Qualifications: Manufacturer or firm with minimum five years successful
experience in the installation of systems similar to type and size required for Project
and approved by manufacturer.
369
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 41 00 - 2 Entrances & Storefronts
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failures including wind damage
and water penetration to interior surfaces, excessive deflections, and deterioration of
finishes, weather-stripping and accessories.
1. Period: Two years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Kawneer, an Arconic Company.
B. Oldcastle Building Envelope.
C. Arcadia, Inc.
D. EFCO Corporation.
E. TRACO.
F. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide aluminum-framed entrances and storefront systems,
with stock non-automatic doors, hardware, anchorage, glazing, and accessories.
B. Regulatory Requirements, General: Comply with requirements of applicable codes.
1. Safety Glass Standard: Comply with applicable codes and CPSC 16 CFR 1201
and pass ANSI Z97.1.
C. Regulatory Requirements, California Energy Code: Comply with California Energy
Commission requirements regarding energy performance of aluminum framed
storefronts.
1. Manufacturer shall be responsible for providing information required by
authorities necessary to verify conformance.
2. Entire assembly, including glass and glazing, shall be certified by the National
Fenestration Rating Council (NFRC) and shall bear NFRC Label indicating
energy performance technical information.
D. Regulatory Requirements, Accessibility: Comply with requirements of California
Building Code and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards to ensure access
to persons with disabilities.
370
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 41 00 - 3 Entrances & Storefronts
E. Design Criteria: Comply with recommendations of AAMA Aluminum Store Front and
Entrance Manual except where more stringent requirements are specified.
1. Deflection: Maximum L/175, ASTM E330.
a. Safety Factor: Design for specified pressures with no glass breakage, no
permanent damage to fasteners, and no permanent deformation of framing
in excess of 0.2% of member clear span.
2. Water Penetration: No uncontrolled water penetration, ASTM E331, with no
water on exposed interior components; static pressure differential of 20% of
inward wind load, with minimum 6-psf load.
3. Air Leakage: Maximum 0.06 cfm/sf, ASTM E283, at differential static pressure of
6.24-psf at fixed glazing and not more than 0.3 cfm/sf at doors.
F. Performance Criteria: Design assemblies capable of withstanding minimum uniform
test pressures as required by applicable codes when tested in accordance with ASTM
E330.
G. Aluminum-Framed Entrance and Storefront Systems: Systems with profiles as
indicated on Drawings; provide extruded aluminum security type glass stops of profile
to suit frame design.
1. Aluminum Type: As recommended by manufacturer for application indicated, but
not less than extruded aluminum, ASTM B221, 6061 or 6063 alloy and T5 or T6
temper.
2. Finish, High Performance Organic Coating: AA-C12C42R1x, prepared,
pretreated, and coated with minimum two coat Kynar 500 or Hylar 5000 system;
AAMA 2605.
a. Color: Blue to match existing adjacent conditions, custom color as selected
by Architect from manufacturer’s full line of colors (non-metallic),
H. Doors, Frames, and Hardware: Barrier-free entry doors meeting code requirements
for providing access for people with physical disabilities; by entrance manufacturer.
1. Type: Medium stile, nominal 3-1/2” wide stiles and head rail with 10" bottom rail.
2. Metal and Finish: Match entrance system.
3. Hardware: Provide complete hardware system except as indicated; match
window wall system finish unless otherwise directed by Architect. Coordinate with
Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware.
a. Pivots/Closers: Center-hung pivots with concealed adjustable type closer,
maximum 5-pound operating pressure when installed in final application.
b. Hinges: Extra heavy-duty ball bearing full mortise (butt) hinges complying
with requirements specified in Section 08 71 00.
371
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 41 00 - 4 Entrances & Storefronts
c. Closers: Concealed adjustable type closer, maximum 5-pound operating
pressure when installed in final application.
d. Push/Pulls: Types as indicated on Drawings; where not otherwise indicated
manufacturer's standard types as selected by Architect; match finish of
similar hardware as specified in Section 08 71 00.
e. Security Locks: Manufacturer's standard.
1) Cylinders: Provided under Section 08 71 00.
f. Weather-Stripping, Sweep Strips: Manufacturer's recommended standard
type, to suit application.
g. Thresholds: Maximum 1/2" height above adjacent surfaces, with maximum
1/4" vertical section and remainder maximum 1:2 slope.
I. Glass: Provide minimum thicknesses specified, but no less than thicknesses required
based on window size and configuration and anticipated wind loading.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Vitro Architectural Glass (formerly PPG).
b. Oldcastle Glass.
c. Guardian Industries Corp.
d. Viracon.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2. Float Glass: Select glazing quality, clear float glass, ASTM C1036; nominal
thickness 1/4".
3. Tempered Glass: Select glazing quality, clear float glass, fully tempered,
ASTM C1048; nominal thickness 1/4"; safety glass.
4. Tinted Glass: Manufacturer's standard tint as directed by Architect.
a. Use one thickness of tinted glass throughout unless otherwise indicated or
approved in advance by Architect.
5. Insulated Glass: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed panes of
glass enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space with minus 20-degree
F dew point.
a. Performance: Certified to ASTM E2190 by Insulating Glass Certification
Council.
b. System: Manufacturer's standard dual seal system compatible with glazing
system, and including spacers, desiccant, and standard corner construction.
c. Glass:
372
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 41 00 - 5 Entrances & Storefronts
1) Float Glass (Typical): Select glazing quality, clear float glass,
ASTM C1036; nominal thickness 1/4".
2) Tempered Glass (Where Indicated and Where Safety Glazing is
Required): Select glazing quality, clear float glass, fully tempered,
ASTM C1048, Kind FT; nominal thickness 1/4"; safety glass.
3) Low Emissivity Coating: Provide high performance low e coating, not
less than Vitro (PPG)/SolarBan 60, on Number 2 surface.
4) Tinted Glass: As indicated, where not otherwise indicated
manufacturer's standard tint as directed by Architect.
5) Use one thickness of tinted glass throughout unless otherwise indicated
or approved in advance by Architect.
6) Spandrel Glass: Double density ceramic frit, heat strengthened spandrel
glass, ASTM C1048, Kind HS; nominal 1/4" thickness.
d. Total Unit Thickness: 1".
J. Glazing Accessories: Of type recommended by manufacturer to suit security locations
and applications for dry glazing installation.
1. Setting Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 80-90 Shore A durometer hardness; 4" long
by 3/8" thick by 1/4" high; ASTM C864.
2. Spacer Shims: Neoprene or EDPM; 45-55 Shore A durometer hardness; 3" long
by 3/32" thick by 1/4" high; ASTM C864.
3. Edge Blocks: Neoprene or EPDM, 60-70 Shore A durometer hardness; 4" long
with minimum two per jamb located at top and bottom edges of glass;
ASTM C864.
4. Glazing Gaskets: Exterior neoprene or EDPM; interior neoprene, EPDM or vinyl;
miter corner joints; ASTM C509 or C864.
K. Miscellaneous Materials:
1. Fasteners: Aluminum or non-magnetic stainless steel of type which will not cause
electrolytic action or corrosion.
a. Do not use exposed fasteners except where unavoidable for assembly or for
application of hardware.
b. Indicate exposed fasteners on shop drawings for specific approval; exposed
fasteners shall be Phillips flat-head screws or Allen screws with finish
matching item fastened.
c. Provide concealed fasteners for glazing stops.
373
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 41 00 - 6 Entrances & Storefronts
2. Steel Reinforcement and Brackets: Manufacturer's standard with minimum 2 oz.
hot-dip zinc coating, ASTM A123, applied after fabrication.
3. Bituminous Paint: Cold-applied mastic, SSPC Paint 12, compounded for 30 mil
thickness per coat.
4. Flashing: Provide sub-sill flashing members; minimum 22 gage sheet aluminum
of sizes and shapes indicated and as required to drain water to exterior; match
adjacent aluminum member finish.
5. Anchoring Devices: Corrosion resistant type capable of supporting entrance
system and superimposed design loads; design to allow adjustments of system
prior to being permanently fastened in place.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate aluminum entrance and storefront system to allow for clearances and shim
spacing around perimeter of assemblies to enable installation; provide for thermal
movement.
B. Provide anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fit entrance assemblies in place.
C. Non-Automatic Doors: Comply with California Building Code and Americans with
Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards relating to access for persons with disabilities.
1. Clear Opening Width: Minimum 32" clear opening width for each door.
D. Accurately fit together joints and corners; match components ensuring continuity of
line and design; ensure joints and connections are flush, hairline and weatherproof.
E. Provide structural reinforcing within framing members where required to maintain
rigidity and as required to accommodate design loads.
F. Allow moisture entering joints and condensation occurring within frame construction
to drain to exterior.
G. Complete cutting, fitting, forming, drilling and grinding of metal work prior to cleaning,
finishing, treatment, and application of coating.
H. Finishing: After fabrication, prepare surfaces for finishing in accordance with
recommendations of aluminum producer and finish manufacturer.
1. Finish components of each assembly simultaneously to attain uniformity of color.
I. Weld by methods recommended by metal manufacturer and AWS; grind exposed
welds smooth and restore mechanical finish; remove arises from cut edges and
corners to a radius of approximately 1/64".
J. Fit and assemble work at shop to greatest extent possible; disassemble only as
required for shipment and erection.
374
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 41 00 - 7 Entrances & Storefronts
K. Reinforce work as necessary for performance requirements and for support.
L. Provide internal reinforcing for hardware.
M. Separate dissimilar materials with bituminous paint or preformed separators which will
prevent corrosion.
N. Separate metal surfaces at moving joints with plastic inserts or other non-abrasive
concealed inserts which permanently prevent "freeze-up" of joint.
O. Fabricate doors and apply hardware in shop. Disassemble only as required for
transportation and installation.
P. Apply coat of bituminous paint on concealed aluminum surfaces to be in contact with
cementitious and with dissimilar materials.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install aluminum framed storefront assemblies, including entrances, in accordance
with manufacturer's recommendations and installation instructions and to meet design
criteria and performance criteria indicated, for weather-tight installation.
1. Separate aluminum and other corrodible metal surfaces from sources of
corrosion or electrolytic action at points of contact with other materials.
B. Ensure assemblies are plumb, level and free of warp or twist; maintain dimensional
tolerances and alignment with adjacent work.
1. Maximum Variation from Plane or Location: 1/8" in 12'-0", with maximum 1/2"
variation in total length.
2. Maximum Offset Between Members: 1/16".
C. Use sufficient anchorage devices to securely and rigidly fasten assemblies to
building.
D. Install hardware in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations, using proper
templates.
1. Install doors to operate freely and smoothly, with a maximum operating pressure
of 5 pounds in accordance with California Building Standards Code.
2. Coordinate installation of cylinders with Section 08 71 00 – Door Hardware.
3. Install sill members and thresholds in bed of compound, joint fillers or gaskets to
provide weathertight construction.
375
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 41 00 - 8 Entrances & Storefronts
E. Glass Installation: Comply with GANA Glazing Manual and glazing manufacturer
instructions.
1. Do not allow glass to touch metal surfaces.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Clean aluminum surfaces promptly after installation of components, exercising care to
avoid damage of finish.
B. Mark glass after installation by crossed streamers attached to framing and held away
from glass; do not apply markers to surface of glass.
C. Remove nonpermanent labels immediately after sealant cures; cure sealants for high
early strength and durability.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged
during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.
END OF SECTION
376
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 1 DOOR HARDWARE
SECTION 08 71 00
DOOR HARDWARE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and
Supplementary Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes commercial door hardware for the following:
1. Swinging Passage doors.
2. Interior Passage Gates
3. Other doors to the extent indicated.
B. Door hardware includes, but is not necessarily limited to, the following:
1. Mechanical door hardware.
2. Electromechanical door hardware.
3. Cylinders specified for doors in other sections.
C. Related Sections:
1. 08 11 10 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
2. 08 11 20 Interior Aluminum Frames
3. 08 14 00 Wood Doors - Flush
4. 08 31 00 Access Doors and Panels
5. 08 41 00 Entrances and Storefronts
D. Codes and References: Comply with the version year adopted by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
1. ANSI A117.1 - Accessible and Usable Buildings and Facilities.
2. ICC/IBC - International Building Code.
3. CBC – California Building Code
4. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
5. NFPA 80 - Fire Doors and Windows.
6. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
7. NFPA 105 - Installation of Smoke Door Assemblies.
8. State Building Codes, Local Amendments.
377
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 2 DOOR HARDWARE
E. Standards: All hardware specified herein shall comply with the following industry
standards as applicable. Any undated reference to a standard shall be interpreted as
referring to the latest edition of that standard:
1. ANSI/BHMA Certified Product Standards - A156 Series.
2. UL10C – Positive Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
3. CAN/ULC-S104 – Standard Method for Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
4. ANSI/UL 294 – Access Control System Units.
5. ULC-S319 - Electronic Access Control Systems.
6. ULC-60839-11-1, Alarm and Electronic Security Systems - Part 11-1: Electronic
Access Control Systems - System and Components Requirements.
7. CAN-ULC-S132 -- Standard Method of Tests for Emergency Exit and Emergency
Fire Exit Hardware.
8. CAN-ULC-S533 - Egress Door Securing and Releasing Devices.
9. UL 305 – Panic Hardware.
10. ULC-S132, Emergency Exit and Emergency Fire Exit Hardware.
11. ULC-S533 – Egress Door Securing and Releasing Devices.
12. ANSI/UL 437- Key Locks.
13. ULC-S328, - Burglary Resistant Key Locks.
F. Registrations: All hardware specified herein shall be registered with the following
agencies, as applicable:
1. Federal Communications Commission (FCC).
2. California State Fire Marshall.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Manufacturer's product data sheets including installation details, material
descriptions, dimensions of individual components and profiles, operational
descriptions and finishes.
B. Door Hardware Schedule: Prepared by or under the supervision of supplier, detailing
fabrication and assembly of door hardware, as well as procedures and diagrams.
Coordinate the final Door Hardware Schedule with doors, frames, and related work to
ensure proper size, thickness, hand, function, and finish of door hardware.
1. Format: Comply with scheduling sequence and vertical format in DHI's
"Sequence and Format for the Hardware Schedule."
2. Organization: Organize the Door Hardware Schedule into door hardware sets
indicating complete designations of every item required for each door or opening.
Organize door hardware sets in same order as in the Door Hardware Sets at the
end of Part 3. Submittals that do not follow the same format and order as the
Door Hardware Sets will be rejected and subject to resubmission.
3. Content: Include the following information:
378
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 3 DOOR HARDWARE
a. Type, style, function, size, label, hand, and finish of each door
hardware item.
b. Manufacturer of each item.
c. Fastenings and other pertinent information.
d. Location of door hardware set, cross-referenced to Drawings, both on
floor plans and in door and frame schedule.
e. Explanation of abbreviations, symbols, and codes contained in
schedule.
f. Mounting locations for door hardware.
g. Door and frame sizes and materials.
h. Warranty information for each product.
4. Submittal Sequence: Submit the final Door Hardware Schedule at earliest
possible date, particularly where approval of the Door Hardware Schedule must
precede fabrication of other work that is critical in the Project construction
schedule. Include Product Data, Samples, Shop Drawings of other work affected
by door hardware, and other information essential to the coordinated review of
the Door Hardware Schedule.
C. Shop Drawings: Details of electrified access control hardware indicating the following:
1. Wiring Diagrams: Upon receipt of approved schedules, submit detailed system
wiring diagrams for power, signaling, monitoring, communication, and control of
the access control system electrified hardware. Differentiate between
manufacturer-installed and field-installed wiring. Include the following:
a. Elevation diagram of each unique access controlled opening showing
location and interconnection of major system components with
respect to their placement in the respective door openings.
b. Complete (risers, point-to-point) access control system block wiring
diagrams.
c. Wiring instructions for each electronic component scheduled herein.
2. Electrical Coordination: Coordinate with related sections the voltages and wiring
details required at electrically controlled and operated hardware openings.
D. Keying Schedule: After a keying meeting with the owner has taken place prepare a
separate keying schedule detailing final instructions. Submit the keying schedule and
reference plan in electronic format. Include keying system explanation, door numbers,
key set symbols, hardware set numbers and special instructions. Owner must approve
submitted keying schedule prior to the ordering of permanent cylinders/cores.
E. Proof of Compliance: (California located Projects): Provide a list of product(s)
containing chemicals known to cause cancer or reproductive toxicity as defined by the
Office of Environmental Health Hazard Assessment (OEHHA) under Proposition 65
(CA Code of Regulations, Title 27, Section 27001). The list includes the specific
chemical(s), if the chemical will be exposed to consumers, the means of warning, and
an illustration of the label.
F. Informational Submittals:
379
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 4 DOOR HARDWARE
1. Product Test Reports: Indicating compliance with cycle testing requirements,
based on evaluation of comprehensive tests performed by manufacturer and
witnessed by a qualified independent testing agency.
G. Operating and Maintenance Manuals: Provide manufacturers operating and
maintenance manuals for each item comprising the complete door hardware
installation in quantity as required in Division 01, Closeout Procedures.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers Qualifications: Engage qualified manufacturers with a minimum 5 years
of documented experience in producing hardware and equipment similar to that
indicated for this Project and that have a proven record of successful in-service
performance.
B. Certified Products: Where specified, products must maintain a current listing in the
Builders Hardware Manufacturers Association (BHMA) Certified Products Directory
(CPD).
C. Installer Qualifications: A minimum 3 years documented experience installing both
standard and electrified door hardware similar in material, design, and extent to that
indicated for this Project and whose work has resulted in construction with a record of
successful in-service performance.
D. Door Hardware Supplier Qualifications: Experienced commercial door hardware
distributors with a minimum 5 years documented experience supplying both
mechanical and electromechanical hardware installations comparable in material,
design, and extent to that indicated for this Project. Supplier recognized as a factory
direct distributor by the manufacturers of the primary materials with a warehousing
facility in Project's vicinity. Supplier to have on staff a certified Architectural Hardware
Consultant (AHC) available during the course of the Work to consult with Contractor,
Architect, and Owner concerning both standard and electromechanical door hardware
and keying.
E. Source Limitations: Obtain each type and variety of door hardware specified in this
section from a single source unless otherwise indicated.
1. Electrified modifications or enhancements made to a source manufacturer's
product line by a secondary or third party source will not be accepted.
2. Provide electromechanical door hardware from the same manufacturer as
mechanical door hardware, unless otherwise indicated.
F. California Building Code: Provide hardware that complies with CBC Section 11B.
1. All openings as a part of an accessible route shall comply with CBC Section 11B-
404.
380
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 5 DOOR HARDWARE
2. The clear opening width for a door shall be 32” minimum. For a swinging door it
shall be measured between the face of the door and the stop, with the door open
90 degrees. There shall be no projections into it below 34” and 4” maximum
projections into it between 34” and 80” above the finish floor or ground. Door
closers and stops shall be permitted to be 78” minimum above the finish floor or
ground. CBC Section 11B-404.2.3.
3. Operable hardware on accessible doors shall comply with CBC Section 11B-
309.4 and shall be operable with one hand and shall not require tight grasping,
pinching, or twisting of the wrist. Operable parts of such hardware shall be 34”
minimum and 44” maximum above finish floor or ground. Where sliding doors are
in the fully open position, operating hardware shall be exposed and usable from
both sides.
4. Hardware (including panic hardware) shall not be provided with “nightlatch”
function for any accessible doors or gates unless the following conditions are
met:
a. Such hardware has a ‘dogging’ feature and is dogged during the time
the facility is open.
b. All ‘dogging’ operation is performed only by employees as their job
function (non-public use).
5. The force for pushing or pulling open a door shall be in accordance with CBC
Section 11B-404.2.9.
a. Interior hinged doors, sliding or folding doors, and exterior hinged
doors: 5 pounds (22.2 N) maximum. Required fire doors: the
minimum opening force allowable by the DSA authority, not to exceed
15 pounds (66.7N). These forces do not apply to the force required to
retract latch bolts or disengage other devices that hold the door in a
closed position.
b. The force required for activating any operable parts, such as lever
hardware, or disengaging other devices shall be 5 pounds (22.2N)
maximum to comply with CBC Section 11B-309.4.
c. The 5 pound (22.2 N) maximum force shall be validated for the size of
the door used. The Building Materials Listing of the California State
Fire Marshal shall indicate that the door hardware meets the 5 pound
(22.2 N) force and shall also list the largest door that can be used.
6. Door closing speed shall comply with CBC Section 11B-404.2.8. Closers shall be
adjusted so that the required time to move a door from an open position of 90
degrees to a position of 12 degrees from the latch is 5 seconds minimum. Spring
hinges shall be adjusted so that the required time to move a door from an open
position of 70 degrees to the closed position is 1.5 seconds minimum.
7. Floor stops shall not be located in the path of travel and 4” maximum from walls.
8. Thresholds shall comply with CBC Section 11B-404.2.5.
381
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 6 DOOR HARDWARE
G. Each unit to bear third party permanent label demonstrating compliance with the
referenced standards.
H. Keying Conference: Conduct conference to comply with requirements in Division 01
Section 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination. Keying conference to
incorporate the following criteria into the final keying schedule document:
1. Function of building, purpose of each area and degree of security required.
2. Plans for existing and future key system expansion.
3. Requirements for key control storage and software.
4. Installation of permanent keys, cylinder cores and software.
5. Address and requirements for delivery of keys.
I. Pre-Submittal Conference: Conduct coordination conference in compliance with
requirements in 01 31 00 Project Management and Coordination with attendance by
representatives of Supplier(s), Installer(s), and Contractor(s) to review proper methods
and the procedures for receiving, handling, and installing door hardware.
1. Prior to installation of door hardware, conduct a project specific training meeting
to instruct the installing contractors' personnel on the proper installation and
adjustment of their respective products. Product training to be attended by
installers of door hardware (including electromechanical hardware) for aluminum,
hollow metal and wood doors. Training will include the use of installation
manuals, hardware schedules, templates and physical product samples as
required.
2. Inspect and discuss electrical roughing-in, power supply connections, and other
preparatory work performed by other trades.
3. Review sequence of operation narratives for each unique access controlled
opening.
4. Review and finalize construction schedule and verify availability of materials.
5. Review the required inspecting, testing, commissioning, and demonstration
procedures
J. At completion of installation, provide written documentation that components were
applied to manufacturer's instructions and recommendations and according to
approved schedule.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Inventory door hardware on receipt and provide secure lock-up and shelving for door
hardware delivered to Project site. Do not store electronic access control hardware,
software or accessories at Project site without prior authorization.
B. Tag each item or package separately with identification related to the final Door
Hardware Schedule, and include basic installation instructions with each item or
package.
C. Deliver, as applicable, permanent keys, cylinders, cores, access control credentials,
software and related accessories directly to Owner via registered mail or overnight
382
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 7 DOOR HARDWARE
package service. Instructions for delivery to the Owner shall be established at the
"Keying Conference".
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Templates: Obtain and distribute to the parties involved templates for doors, frames,
and other work specified to be factory prepared for installing standard and electrified
hardware. Check Shop Drawings of other work to confirm that adequate provisions are
made for locating and installing hardware to comply with indicated requirements.
B. Door and Frame Preparation: Doors and corresponding frames are to be prepared,
reinforced and pre-wired (if applicable) to receive the installation of the specified
electrified, monitoring, signaling and access control system hardware without additional
in-field modifications.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. General Warranty: Reference Division 01, General Requirements. Special warranties
specified in this Article shall not deprive Owner of other rights Owner may have under
other provisions of the Contract Documents and shall be in addition to, and run
concurrent with, other warranties made by Contractor under requirements of the
Contract Documents.
B. Warranty Period: Written warranty, executed by manufacturer(s), agreeing to repair or
replace components of standard and electrified door hardware that fails in materials or
workmanship within specified warranty period after final acceptance by the Owner.
Failures include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Structural failures including excessive deflection, cracking, or breakage.
2. Faulty operation of the hardware.
3. Deterioration of metals, metal finishes, and other materials beyond normal
weathering.
4. Electrical component defects and failures within the systems operation.
C. Standard Warranty Period: One year from date of Notice of Completion, unless
otherwise indicated.
D. Special Warranty Periods:
1. Closers: 30 years for surface, 15 years for concealed.
2. Automatic Operators: 2 years.
3. Exit Devices: 2 years for mechanical, 1 year for electrified.
4. Mortise Locksets: 3 years for mechanical, 1 year for electrified.
5. Cylindrical Locksets: 10 years for mechanical, 1 year for electrified.
383
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 8 DOOR HARDWARE
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Maintenance Tools and Instructions: Furnish a complete set of specialized tools and
maintenance instructions as needed for Owner's continued adjustment, maintenance,
and removal and replacement of door hardware.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SCHEDULED DOOR HARDWARE
A. General: Provide door hardware for each door to comply with requirements in Door
Hardware Sets and each referenced section that products are to be supplied under.
B. Designations: Requirements for quantity, item, size, finish or color, grade, function, and
other distinctive qualities of each type of door hardware are indicated in the Door
Hardware Sets at the end of Part 3. Products are identified by using door hardware
designations, as follows:
1. Named Manufacturer's Products: Product designation and manufacturer are
listed for each door hardware type required for the purpose of establishing
requirements. Manufacturers' names are abbreviated in the Door Hardware
Schedule.
C. Substitutions: Requests for substitution and product approval for inclusive mechanical
and electromechanical door hardware in compliance with the specifications must be
submitted in writing and in accordance with the procedures and time frames outlined in
Division 01, Substitution Procedures. Approval of requests is at the discretion of the
architect, owner, and their designated consultants.
2.2 HANGING DEVICES
A. Hinges: ANSI/BHMA A156.1 certified butt hinges with number of hinge knuckles and
other options as specified in the Door Hardware Sets.
1. Quantity: Provide the following hinge quantity:
a. Two Hinges: For doors with heights up to 60 inches.
b. Three Hinges: For doors with heights 61 to 90 inches.
c. Four Hinges: For doors with heights 91 to 120 inches.
d. For doors with heights more than 120 inches, provide 4 hinges, plus 1
hinge for every 30 inches of door height greater than 120 inches.
2. Hinge Size: Provide the following, unless otherwise indicated, with hinge widths
sized for door thickness and clearances required:
a. Widths up to 3’0”: 4-1/2” standard or heavy weight as specified.
b. Sizes from 3’1” to 4’0”: 5” standard or heavy weight as specified.
384
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 9 DOOR HARDWARE
3. Hinge Weight and Base Material: Unless otherwise indicated, provide the
following:
a. Exterior Doors: Heavy weight, non-ferrous, ball bearing or oil
impregnated bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate standard
weight.
b. Interior Doors: Standard weight, steel, ball bearing or oil impregnated
bearing hinges unless Hardware Sets indicate heavy weight.
4. Hinge Options: Comply with the following:
a. Non-removable Pins: Provide set screw in hinge barrel that, when
tightened into a groove in hinge pin, prevents removal of pin while
door is closed; for the all out-swinging lockable doors.
5. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Ives 5BB Series.
2.3 PIVOT SETS:
A. Requirements:
1. Provide pivot sets complete with oil-impregnated top pivot, unless indicated
otherwise.
2. Where offset pivots are specified, Provide one intermediate pivot for doors less
than 91 inches (2311 mm) high and one additional intermediate pivot per leaf for
each additional 30 inches (762 mm) in height or fraction thereof. Intermediate
pivots spaced equally not less than 25 inches (635 mm) or not more than 35
inches (889 mm) on center, for doors over 121 inches (3073 mm) high.
3. Provide appropriate model where pivot sets are scheduled at fire rated openings.
4. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Ives.
2.4 FLUSH BOLTS
A. Requirements:
1. Provide automatic, constant latching, and manual flush bolts with forged bronze
or stainless steel face plates, extruded brass levers, and with wrought brass
guides and strikes. Provide 12 inch (305 mm) steel or brass rods at doors up to
90 inches (2286 mm) in height. For doors over 90 inches (2286 mm) in height
increase top rods by 6 inches (152 mm) for each additional 6 inches (152 mm) of
door height. Provide dust-proof strikes at each bottom flush bolt.
2. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Ives.
385
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 10 DOOR HARDWARE
2.5 MORTISE LOCKS
A. Requirements:
1. Provide mortise locks conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.13 Series 1000, Grade 1
Operational, Grade 1 Security, and manufactured from heavy gauge steel,
containing components of steel with a zinc dichromate plating for corrosion
resistance. Provide lock case that is multi-function and field reversible for
handing without opening case. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.
2. Provide locks with standard 2-3/4 inches (70 mm) backset with full 3/4 inch (19
mm) throw stainless steel mechanical anti-friction latchbolt. Provide deadbolt
with full 1 inch (25 mm) throw, constructed of stainless steel.
3. Provide standard ASA strikes unless extended lip strikes are necessary to
protect trim.
4. Lever Trim: Solid brass, bronze, or stainless steel, cast or forged in design
specified, with wrought roses and external lever spring cages. Provide thru-
bolted levers with 2-piece spindles.
5. Lever Design: As scheduled.
6. Tactile Warning (Knurling): Where required by authority having jurisdiction.
Provide on levers on exterior (secure side) of doors serving rooms considered to
be hazardous.
7. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Schlage L9000 series.
2.6 CYLINDERS AND KEYING
A. General: Cylinder manufacturer to have minimum (10) years experience designing
secured master key systems and have on record a published security keying system
policy.
B. Source Limitations: Obtain each type of keyed cylinder and keys from the same source
manufacturer as locksets and exit devices, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Cylinders: Original manufacturer cylinders complying with the following:
1. Mortise Type: Threaded cylinders with rings and cams to suit hardware
application.
2. Rim Type: Cylinders with back plate, flat-type vertical or horizontal tailpiece, and
raised trim ring.
3. Bored-Lock Type: Cylinders with tailpieces to suit locks.
4. Mortise and rim cylinder collars to be solid and recessed to allow the cylinder
face to be flush and be free spinning with matching finishes.
5. Keyway: Match Facility Standard.
D. Keying System: Each type of lock and cylinders to be factory keyed.
1. Supplier shall conduct a "Keying Conference" to define and document keying
system instructions and requirements.
386
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 11 DOOR HARDWARE
2. Furnish factory cut, nickel-silver large bow permanently inscribed with a visual
key control number as directed by Owner.
3. New System: Key locks to a new key system as directed by the Owner.
E. Key Quantity: Provide the following minimum number of keys:
1. Change Keys per Cylinder: Two (2)
2. Master Keys (per Master Key Level/Group): Five (5).
3. Construction Keys (where required): Ten (10).
F. Construction Keying: Provide construction master keyed cylinders.
2.7 EXIT DEVICES
A. Requirements:
1. Provide exit devices tested to ANSI/BHMA A156.3 Grade 1, and UL listed for
Panic Exit or Fire Exit Hardware. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.
2. Provide touchpad type exit devices, fabricated of brass, bronze, stainless steel,
or aluminum, plated to standard architectural finishes to match balance of door
hardware.
3. Touchpad: Extend minimum of one half of door width. Match exit device finish,
stainless steel for US26, US26D, US28, US32, and US32D finishes; and for all
other finishes, provide compatible finish to exit device. No plastic inserts are
allowed in touchpads.
4. Provide exit devices with dead-latching feature for security and for future addition
of alarm kits and/or other electrified requirements.
5. Provide flush end caps for exit devices.
6. Provide exit devices with manufacturer’s approved strikes.
7. Provide exit devices cut to door width and height. Install exit devices at height
recommended by exit device manufacturer, allowable by governing building
codes, and approved by Architect.
8. Mount mechanism case flush on face of doors, or provide spacers to fill gaps
behind devices. Where glass trim or molding projects off face of door, provide
glass bead kits.
9. Where lever handles are specified as outside trim for exit devices, provide heavy-
duty lever trims with forged or cast escutcheon plates. Provide vandal-resistant
levers that will travel to 90-degree down position when more than 35 pounds of
torque are applied, and which can easily be re-set.
a. Lever Style: Match lever style of locksets.
b. Tactile Warning (Knurling): Where required by authority having
jurisdiction. Provide on levers on exterior (secure side) of doors
serving rooms considered to be hazardous.
10. Accessibility: Maximum 5lbs force to retract latch bolt per CBC Chapter 11B.
“AX” feature: touchpad directly retracts the latchbolt with 5 lb or less of force.
Provide testing lab certification confirming that the mechanical device is
independent third-party tested to meet this 5 lb requirement.
387
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 12 DOOR HARDWARE
11. Provide UL labeled fire exit hardware for fire rated openings.
12. Provide factory drilled weep holes for exit devices used in full exterior application,
highly corrosive areas, and where noted in hardware sets.
13. Provide electrified options as scheduled.
14. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Von Duprin 98 series.
2.8 DOOR CLOSERS
A. Requirements:
1. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements
by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory. ISO 9000 certify closers.
Stamp units with date of manufacture code.
2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action with high
strength cast iron cylinder, and full complement bearings at shaft.
3. Cylinder Body: 1-1/2 inch (38 mm) diameter with 3/4 inch (19 mm) diameter
double heat-treated pinion journal.
4. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no
seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30
degrees F.
5. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and
providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and
standards.
6. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves, with separate
adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck.
7. Provide closers with solid forged steel main arms and factory assembled heavy-
duty forged forearms for parallel arm closers.
8. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted.
9. Finish for Closer Cylinders, Arms, Adapter Plates, and Metal Covers: Powder
coating finish which has been certified to exceed 100 hours salt spray testing as
described in ANSI Standard A156.4 and ASTM B117, or has special rust inhibitor
(SRI).
10. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms
as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering
with closer mounting.
11. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: LCN 4040XP series.
B. Requirements:
1. Provide door closers conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4 Grade 1 requirements
by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory.
2. Provide door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action cast iron
cylinder.
3. Cylinder Body: 1-1/4 inch (32 mm) diameter with 5/8 inch (16 mm) diameter heat-
treated pinion journal.
388
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 13 DOOR HARDWARE
4. Hydraulic Fluid: Fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C, and requiring no
seasonal closer adjustment for temperatures ranging from 120 degrees F to -30
degrees F.
5. Spring Power: Continuously adjustable over full range of closer sizes, and
providing reduced opening force as required by accessibility codes and
standards.
6. Hydraulic Regulation: By tamper-proof, non-critical valves, with separate
adjustment for latch speed, general speed, and backcheck.
7. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted.
8. Provide special templates, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms
as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering
with closer mounting.
9. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: LCN 1460 series.
2.9 CONCEALED DOOR CLOSERS
A. Requirements:
1. Provide concealed door closers at doors conforming to ANSI/BHMA A156.4
Grade 1 requirements by BHMA certified independent testing laboratory.
2. Provide heavy duty, single-acting closers with single lever arm and roller
assembly.
3. Provide closers capable of being mounted in a minimum 1-3/4 inch header.
4. Provide concealed door closers with fully hydraulic, full rack and pinion action
with high strength cast iron cylinder, and full complement bearings at shaft.
5. Cylinder Body: 1-1/8 inch (29 mm) piston diameter, with 5/8 inch (16 mm)
diameter heat-treated pinion journal.
6. Provide all-weather hydraulic fluid, fireproof, passing requirements of UL10C.
7. Pressure Relief Valve (PRV) Technology: Not permitted.
8. Provide special template, drop plates, mounting brackets, or adapters for arms
as required for details, overhead stops, and other door hardware items interfering
with closer mounting.
1. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: LCN 2030 series.
2.10 ELECTRO-MECHANICAL AUTOMATIC OPERATORS
A. Requirements:
1. Provide low energy automatic operator units that are electro-mechanical design
complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.19.
a. Opening: Powered by DC motor working through reduction gears.
b. Closing: Spring force.
c. Manual, hydraulic, or chain drive closers: Not permitted.
d. Operation: Motor is off when door is in closing mode. Door can be
manually operated with power on or off without damage to operator.
389
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 14 DOOR HARDWARE
Provide variable adjustments, including opening and closing speed
adjustment.
e. Cover: Aluminum.
2. Provide units with manual off/auto/hold-open switch, push and go function to
activate power operator, vestibule interface delay, electric lock delay, hold-open
delay adjustable from 2 to 30 seconds, and logic terminal to interface with
accessories, mats, and sensors.
3. Provide drop plates, brackets, or adapters for arms as required to suit details.
4. Provide hard-wired motion sensors and/or actuator switches for operation as
specified. Provide weather-resistant actuators at exterior applications.
5. Provide key switches, with LED’s, recommended and approved by manufacturer
of automatic operator as required for function as described in operation
description of hardware sets. Cylinders: Refer to “KEYING” article, herein.
6. Provide complete assemblies of controls, switches, power supplies, relays, and
parts/material recommended and approved by manufacturer of automatic
operator for each individual leaf. Actuators control both doors simultaneously at
pairs. Sequence operation of exterior and vestibule doors with automatic
operators to allow ingress or egress through both sets of openings as directed by
Architect. Locate actuators, key switches, and other controls as directed by
Architect.
7. Provide units with inputs for smoke evacuation doors, where specified, which
allow doors to power open upon fire alarm activation and hold open indefinitely or
until fire alarm is reset, presence detector input, which prevents closed door from
opening or door that is fully opened from closing, hold open toggle input, which
allows remote activation for indefinite hold open and close second time input is
activated, vestibule inputs, which allow sequencing operation of two units, and
SPDT relay for interfacing with latching or locking devices.
2.11 ELECTRIC STRIKES
A. Requirements:
1. Provide electric strikes designed for use with type of locks shown at each
opening.
2. Provide electric strikes UL Listed as burglary-resistant.
3. Where required, provide electric strikes UL Listed for fire doors and frames.
4. Provide fail-secure type electric strikes, unless specified otherwise.
5. Coordinate voltage and provide transformers and rectifiers for each strike as
required.
6. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Von Duprin 6000 series.
2.12 POWER SUPPLIES
A. Requirements:
390
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 15 DOOR HARDWARE
1. Provide power supplies, recommended and approved by manufacturer of
electrified locking component, for operation of electrified locks, electrified exit
devices, magnetic locks, electric strikes, and other components requiring power
supply.
2. Provide appropriate quantity of power supplies necessary for proper operation of
electrified locking components as recommended by manufacturer of electrified
locking components with consideration for each electrified component using
power supply, location of power supply, and approved wiring diagrams. Locate
power supplies as directed by Architect.
3. Provide regulated and filtered 24 VDC power supply , and UL class 2 listed.
4. Options:
a. Provide power supply, where specified, with internal capability of charging
sealed backup batteries 24 VDC, in addition to operating DC load.
b. Provide sealed batteries for battery back-up at each power supply where
specified.
c. Provide keyed power supply cabinet.
5. Provide power supply in an enclosure, complete, and requiring 120VAC to fused
input.
6. Provide power supply with emergency release terminals, where specified, that
allow release of all devices upon activation of fire alarm system complete with fire
alarm input for initiating “no delay” exiting mode.
7. Scheduled Manufacturer and Product: Schlage Electronics PS900 series.
2.13 ARCHITECTURAL TRIM
A. Door Protective Trim
1. General: Door protective trim units to be of type and design as specified below or
in the Hardware Sets.
2. Size: Fabricate protection plates (kick, armor, or mop) not more than 2" less than
door width (LDW) on stop side of single doors and 1” LDW on stop side of pairs
of doors, and not more than 1" less than door width on pull side. Coordinate and
provide proper width and height as required where conflicting hardware dictates.
Height to be as specified in the Hardware Sets.
3. Where plates are applied to fire rated doors with the top of the plate more than
16” above the bottom of the door, provide plates complying with NFPA 80.
Consult manufacturer’s catalog and template book for specific requirements for
size and applications.
4. Protection Plates: ANSI/BHMA A156.6 certified protection plates (kick, armor, or
mop), fabricated from the following:
a. Stainless Steel: 300 grade, 050-inch thick.
391
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 16 DOOR HARDWARE
5. Options and fasteners: Provide manufacturer's designated fastener type as
specified in the Hardware Sets. Provide countersunk screw holes.
6. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives.
2.14 DOOR STOPS AND HOLDERS
A. General: Door stops and holders to be of type and design as specified below or in the
Hardware Sets.
B. Door Stops and Bumpers: ANSI/BHMA A156.16, Grade 1 certified door stops and wall
bumpers. Provide wall bumpers, either convex or concave types with anchorage as
indicated, unless floor or other types of door stops are specified in Hardware Sets. Do
not mount floor stops where they will impede traffic. Where floor or wall bumpers are
not appropriate, provide overhead type stops and holders.
1. Scheduled Manufacturer: Ives.
2.15 ARCHITECTURAL SEALS
A. General: Thresholds, weatherstripping, and gasket seals to be of type and design as
specified below or in the Hardware Sets. Provide continuous weatherstrip gasketing on
exterior doors and provide smoke, light, or sound gasketing on interior doors where
indicated. At exterior applications provide non-corrosive fasteners and elsewhere
where indicated.
B. Smoke Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 105 that are listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
for smoke control ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL 1784.
1. Provide smoke labeled perimeter gasketing at all smoke labeled openings.
C. Fire Labeled Gasketing: Assemblies complying with NFPA 80 that are listed and
labeled by a testing and inspecting agency acceptable to authorities having jurisdiction,
for fire ratings indicated, based on testing according to UL-10C.
1. Provide intumescent seals as indicated to meet UL10C Standard for Positive
Pressure Fire Tests of Door Assemblies, and NPFA 252, Standard Methods of
Fire Tests of Door Assemblies.
D. Sound-Rated Gasketing: where indicated
E. Replaceable Seal Strips: Provide only those units where resilient or flexible seal strips
are easily replaceable and readily available from stocks maintained by manufacturer.
F. Scheduled Manufacturer: Zero International.
392
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 17 DOOR HARDWARE
2.16 FABRICATION
A. Fasteners: Provide door hardware manufactured to comply with published templates
generally prepared for machine, wood, and sheet metal screws. Provide screws
according to manufacturers recognized installation standards for application intended.
2.17 FINISHES
A. Standard: Designations used in the Hardware Sets and elsewhere indicate hardware
finishes complying with ANSI/BHMA A156.18, including coordination with traditional
U.S. finishes indicated by certain manufacturers for their products.
B. Provide quality of finish, including thickness of plating or coating (if any), composition,
hardness, and other qualities complying with manufacturer's standards, but in no case
less than specified by referenced standards for the applicable units of hardware
C. Protect mechanical finishes on exposed surfaces from damage by applying a
strippable, temporary protective covering before shipping.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine scheduled openings, with Installer present, for compliance with requirements
for installation tolerances, labeled fire door assembly construction, wall and floor
construction, and other conditions affecting performance.
B. Notify architect of any discrepancies or conflicts between the door schedule, door
types, drawings and scheduled hardware. Proceed only after such discrepancies or
conflicts have been resolved in writing.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Hollow Metal Doors and Frames: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115 series.
B. Wood Doors: Comply with ANSI/DHI A115-W series.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install each item of mechanical and electromechanical hardware and access control
equipment to comply with manufacturer's written instructions and according to
specifications.
393
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 18 DOOR HARDWARE
1. Installers are to be trained and certified by the manufacturer on the proper
installation and adjustment of fire, life safety, and security products including:
hanging devices; locking devices; closing devices; and seals.
B. Mounting Heights: Mount door hardware units at heights indicated in following
applicable publications, unless specifically indicated or required to comply with
governing regulations:
1. Standard Steel Doors and Frames: DHI's "Recommended Locations for
Architectural Hardware for Standard Steel Doors and Frames."
2. Wood Doors: DHI WDHS.3, "Recommended Locations for Architectural
Hardware for Wood Flush Doors."
3. Where indicated to comply with accessibility requirements, comply with ANSI
A117.1 "Accessibility Guidelines for Buildings and Facilities."
4. Provide blocking in drywall partitions where wall stops or other wall mounted
hardware is located.
C. Retrofitting: Install door hardware to comply with manufacturer's published templates
and written instructions. Where cutting and fitting are required to install door hardware
onto or into surfaces that are later to be painted or finished in another way, coordinate
removal, storage, and reinstallation of surface protective trim units with finishing work
specified in Division 9 Sections. Do not install surface-mounted items until finishes
have been completed on substrates involved.
D. Thresholds: Set thresholds for exterior and acoustical doors in full bed of sealant
complying with requirements specified in Division 7 Section "Joint Sealants."
E. Storage: Provide a secure lock up for hardware delivered to the project but not yet
installed. Control the handling and installation of hardware items so that the completion
of the work will not be delayed by hardware losses before and after installation.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Engage qualified manufacturer trained representative to perform inspections and to
prepare inspection reports.
1. Representative will inspect door hardware and state in each report whether
installed work complies with or deviates from requirements, including whether
door hardware is properly installed and adjusted.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. Initial Adjustment: Adjust and check each operating item of door hardware and each
door to ensure proper operation or function of every unit. Replace units that cannot be
adjusted to operate as intended. Adjust door control devices to compensate for final
operation of heating and ventilating equipment and to comply with referenced
accessibility requirements.
394
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 19 DOOR HARDWARE
3.6 CLEANING AND PROTECTION
A. Protect all hardware stored on construction site in a covered and dry place. Protect
exposed hardware installed on doors during the construction phase. Install any and all
hardware at the latest possible time frame.
B. Clean adjacent surfaces soiled by door hardware installation.
C. Clean operating items as necessary to restore proper finish. Provide final protection
and maintain conditions that ensure door hardware is without damage or deterioration
at time of owner occupancy.
3.7 DEMONSTRATION
A. Instruct Owner's maintenance personnel to adjust, operate, and maintain mechanical
and electromechanical door hardware.
3.8 DOOR HARDWARE SETS
A. The hardware sets represent the design intent and direction of the owner and architect.
They are a guideline only and should not be considered a detailed hardware schedule.
Discrepancies, conflicting hardware and missing items should be brought to the
attention of the architect with corrections made prior to the bidding process. Omitted
items not included in a hardware set should be scheduled with the appropriate
additional hardware required for proper application and functionality.
1. Quantities listed are for each pair of doors, or for each single door.
2. The supplier is responsible for handing and sizing all products.
3. Where multiple options for a piece of hardware are given in a single line item, the
supplier shall provide the appropriate application for the opening.
B. Manufacturer’s Abbreviations:
1. DON – Don Jo
2. GLY – Glynn Johnson
3. IVE – Ives
4. KEE – Keedex,Inc.
5. LCN – LCN
6. LOX – Locinox
7. MCK – McKinney
8. SCE – Schlage Electronics
9. SCH – Schlage
10. VON – Von Duprin
11. ZER – Zero International
395
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 20 DOOR HARDWARE
Hardware Sets:
HW SET: 01
DOOR NUMBERS:
130.2
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA PIVOT SET 7215 SET 626 IVE
1 EA POWER TRANSFER EPT10 689 VON
1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-QELX-AX-35A-NL-OP-388-CON 626 VON
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
1 EA 90 DEG OFFSET PULL 8190HD 12" O 630 IVE
1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY
1 EA CONCEALED CLOSER 2030 SERIES ST-2211 WMS 689 LCN
1 EA PERIMETER SEAL BY ALUMINUM DOOR/FRAME
MANUFACTURER
B/O
1 EA THRESHOLD 103A-223 OR PER SILL DETAIL A ZER
1 EA WIRE HARNESS (DOOR) CON- (LENGTH AS REQ'D) SCH
1 EA WIRE HARNESS (FRAME) CON-6W SCH
1 EA CREDENTIAL READER BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR B/O
1 EA DOOR CONTACT 7764 628 SCE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-2RS 120/240 VAC LGR SCE
COORDINATE: ACCESS CONTROL, WIRING, CONDUIT, POWER WITH SECURITY CONTRACTOR.
396
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 21 DOOR HARDWARE
HW SET: 02
DOOR NUMBERS:
106B
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
2 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE
1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 CON TW8 630 IVE
1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-QELX-AX-98-L-NL-06-CON 626 VON
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH 689 LCN
1 EA RAIN DRIP (DOOR) 11A A ZER
1 EA RAIN DRIP (FRAME) 142AA
(OMIT WHERE OVERHANG
OCCURS)
AA ZER
1 EA DOOR SEAL 188SBK PSA BK ZER
1 EA DOOR SHOE 111AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 103A-223 OR PER SILL DETAIL A ZER
1 EA WIRE HARNESS (DOOR) CON- (LENGTH AS REQ'D) SCH
1 EA WIRE HARNESS (FRAME) CON-6W SCH
1 EA CREDENTIAL READER BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR B/O
1 EA DOOR CONTACT 679-05HM BLK SCE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 900-2RS 120/240 VAC LGR SCE
COORDINATE: ACCESS CONTROL, WIRING, CONDUIT, POWER WITH SECURITY CONTRACTOR.
HW SET: 03
DOOR NUMBERS:
105A
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 630 IVE
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE AX-98-L-NL-06 626 VON
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 4040XP SCUSH 689 LCN
1 EA RAIN DRIP (DOOR) 11A A ZER
1 EA RAIN DRIP (FRAME) 142AA
(OMIT WHERE OVERHANG
OCCURS)
AA ZER
1 EA DOOR SEAL 188SBK PSA BK ZER
1 EA DOOR SHOE 111AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 103A-223 OR PER SILL DETAIL A ZER
397
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 22 DOOR HARDWARE
HW SET: 04
DOOR NUMBERS:
100.4
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
2 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE
1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 CON TW8 652 IVE
1 EA ELEC PANIC HARDWARE RX-AX-98-L-M996-06-FSE-CON 626 VON
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 SCUSH FC 689 LCN
1 EA PA MOUNTING PLATE 1460-18PAFC SRT
(IF REQUIRED)
689 LCN
1 EA CUSH SHOE SUPPORT 1460-30 SRT
(IF REQUIRED)
689 LCN
1 EA BLADE STOP SPACER 1460-61 SRT
(IF REQUIRED)
689 LCN
1 EA PERIMETER SEAL BY ALUMINUM DOOR/FRAME
MANUFACTURER
B/O
1 EA WIRE HARNESS (DOOR) CON- (LENGTH AS REQ'D) SCH
1 EA WIRE HARNESS (FRAME) CON-6W SCH
1 EA CREDENTIAL READER BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR B/O
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 120/240 VAC LGR SCE
COORDINATE: ACCESS CONTROL, WIRING, CONDUIT, POWER WITH SECURITY CONTRACTOR.
WIDE STILE DOOR REQUIRED.
398
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 23 DOOR HARDWARE
HW SET: 05
DOOR NUMBERS:
106 131.1 131.3
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
2 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE
1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 CON TW8 652 IVE
1 EA EU STOREROOM LOCK ND80PDEU RHO RX CON 12V/24V
DC
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RW/PA FC 689 LCN
1 EA WALL OR FLOOR STOP WS406/407CCV OR FS436/438 AS
REQ
630 IVE
1 EA PERIMETER SEAL BY ALUMINUM FRAME
MANUFACTURER
B/O
1 EA WIRE HARNESS (DOOR) CON- (LENGTH AS REQ'D) SCH
1 EA WIRE HARNESS (FRAME) CON-6W SCH
1 EA CREDENTIAL READER BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR B/O
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 120/240 VAC LGR SCE
COORDINATE: ACCESS CONTROL, WIRING, CONDUIT, POWER WITH SECURITY CONTRACTOR.
HW SET: 06
DOOR NUMBERS:
112A
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
2 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 CON TW8 652 IVE
1 EA EU STOREROOM LOCK ND80PDEU RHO RX CON 12V/24V
DC
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RW/PA FC
(MOUNT REG ARM)
689 LCN
1 EA WALL OR FLOOR STOP WS406/407CCV OR FS436/438 AS
REQ
630 IVE
1 EA PERIMETER SEAL BY ALUMINUM FRAME
MANUFACTURER
B/O
1 EA WIRE HARNESS (DOOR) CON- (LENGTH AS REQ'D) SCH
1 EA WIRE HARNESS (FRAME) CON-6W SCH
1 EA CREDENTIAL READER BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR B/O
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 120/240 VAC LGR SCE
COORDINATE: ACCESS CONTROL, WIRING, CONDUIT, POWER WITH SECURITY CONTRACTOR.
399
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 24 DOOR HARDWARE
HW SET: 07
DOOR NUMBERS:
105
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE AX-98-L-NL-06 626 VON
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RW/PA FC 689 LCN
1 EA WALL OR FLOOR STOP WS406/407CCV OR FS436/438 AS
REQ
630 IVE
3 EA SILENCER SR64 GRY IVE
HW SET: 08
DOOR NUMBERS:
112B
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80PD RHO
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RW/PA FC 689 LCN
1 EA WALL OR FLOOR STOP WS406/407CCV OR FS436/438 AS
REQ
630 IVE
1 EA PERIMETER SEAL BY ALUMINUM FRAME
MANUFACTURER
B/O
HW SET: 09
DOOR NUMBERS:
130C
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80PD RHO
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RW/PA FC
(MOUNT REG ARM)
689 LCN
1 EA WALL OR FLOOR STOP WS406/407CCV OR FS436/438 AS
REQ
630 IVE
1 EA PERIMETER SEAL BY ALUMINUM FRAME
MANUFACTURER
B/O
400
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 25 DOOR HARDWARE
HW SET: 10
DOOR NUMBERS:
235
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1HW 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80PD RHO
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
1 EA OH STOP 90S 630 GLY
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RW/PA FC
(MOUNT REG ARM)
689 LCN
1 EA PERIMETER SEAL BY ALUMINUM FRAME
MANUFACTURER
B/O
HW SET: 11
DOOR NUMBERS:
140
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80PD RHO
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RW/PA FC
(MOUNT REG ARM)
689 LCN
1 EA WALL OR FLOOR STOP WS406/407CCV OR FS436/438 AS
REQ
630 IVE
1 EA DOOR SEAL 188SBK PSA BK ZER
HW SET: 12
DOOR NUMBERS:
141
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80PD RHO
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RW/PA FC 689 LCN
1 EA WALL OR FLOOR STOP WS406/407CCV OR FS436/438 AS
REQ
630 IVE
1 EA DOOR SEAL 188SBK PSA BK ZER
401
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 26 DOOR HARDWARE
HW SET: 13
DOOR NUMBERS:
217
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
2 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA ELECTRIC HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 CON TW8 652 IVE
1 EA EU STOREROOM LOCK ND80PDEU RHO RX CON 12V/24V
DC
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RW/PA FC
(MOUNT REG ARM)
689 LCN
1 EA WALL OR FLOOR STOP WS406/407CCV OR FS436/438 AS
REQ
630 IVE
1 EA DOOR SEAL 188SBK PSA BK ZER
1 EA AUTO DOOR BOTTOM 364AA-Z49 AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 63A-223 (IF REQUIRED) A ZER
1 EA WIRE HARNESS (DOOR) CON- (LENGTH AS REQ'D) SCH
1 EA WIRE HARNESS (FRAME) CON-6W SCH
1 EA CREDENTIAL READER BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR B/O
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 120/240 VAC LGR SCE
COORDINATE: ACCESS CONTROL, WIRING, CONDUIT, POWER WITH SECURITY CONTRACTOR.
HW SET: 14
DOOR NUMBERS:
113 114 115 116 134 218
241 220 224 242
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA ENTRANCE/OFFICE LOCK ND50PD RHO
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
1 EA WALL OR FLOOR STOP WS406/407CCV OR FS436/438 AS
REQ
630 IVE
1 EA PERIMETER SEAL BY ALUMINUM FRAME
MANUFACTURER
B/O
HW SET: 15 - Not Used
402
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 27 DOOR HARDWARE
HW SET: 16
DOOR NUMBERS:
131.2
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 NRP 652 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70PD RHO
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RW/PA FC 689 LCN
1 EA WALL OR FLOOR STOP WS406/407CCV OR FS436/438 AS
REQ
630 IVE
1 EA PERIMETER SEAL BY ALUMINUM FRAME
MANUFACTURER
B/O
HW SET: 17
DOOR NUMBERS:
130.1
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
6 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA CONST LATCHING BOLT FB61P 630 IVE
1 EA DUST PROOF STRIKE DP1 OR DP2 AS REQ'D 626 IVE
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70PD RHO
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
2 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RW/PA FC
(MOUNT REG ARM)
689 LCN
2 EA WALL OR FLOOR STOP WS406/407CCV OR FS436/438 AS
REQ
630 IVE
1 EA PERIMETER SEAL BY ALUMINUM FRAME
MANUFACTURER
B/O
1 EA ASTRAGAL 41AA AA ZER
403
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 28 DOOR HARDWARE
HW SET: 18
DOOR NUMBERS:
130A
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
3 EA HINGE 5BB1 4.5 X 4.5 652 IVE
1 EA PRIVACY LOCK ND40S RHO 626 SCH
1 EA SURFACE CLOSER 1461 RW/PA FC
(MOUNT REG ARM)
689 LCN
1 EA KICK PLATE 8400 10" X 2" LDW B-CS 630 IVE
1 EA WALL OR FLOOR STOP WS406/407CCV OR FS436/438 AS
REQ
630 IVE
1 EA PERIMETER SEAL BY ALUMINUM FRAME
MANUFACTURER
B/O
HW SET: 19
DOOR NUMBERS:
MG1 MG2
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA SPRING PIVOT HINGE 4007MRB 626 MCK
1 EA ROLLER CATCH 335 626 IVE
1 EA MAGNETIC LOCK M420P 12/24 VDC 628 SCE
1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 3" X 12" 630 IVE
1 EA DOOR PULL 9266 12" I 630-316 IVE
1 EA DESK MOUNT BUTTON 660-T4 628 SCE
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 120/240 VAC LGR SCE
COORDINATE: WIRING, CONDUIT, POWER WITH SECURITY CONTRACTOR.
HW SET: 20
DOOR NUMBERS:
E100
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA SURF. AUTO OPERATOR 9553 REG/STD HL/D AS REQ
(120/240 VAC)
ANCLR LCN
2 EA ACTUATOR, TOUCH 8310-836T 630 LCN
2 EA BOLLARD POST 8310-866FLA LCN
2 EA DOOR SWEEP 39A A ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 1675A-223 OR PER SILL DETAIL A ZER
1 EA CREDENTIAL READER BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR B/O
COORDINATE: ACCESS CONTROL, WIRING, CONDUIT, POWER WITH SECURITY CONTRACTOR.
BALANCE OF EXISTING HARDWARE TO REMAIN.
404
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 29 DOOR HARDWARE
HW SET: 21
DOOR NUMBERS:
E141.1
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA RAIN DRIP (DOOR) 11A A ZER
1 EA RAIN DRIP (FRAME) 142AA
(OMIT WHERE OVERHANG
OCCURS)
AA ZER
1 EA DOOR SEAL 188SBK PSA BK ZER
1 EA DOOR SHOE 111AA AA ZER
1 EA THRESHOLD 103A-223 OR PER SILL DETAIL A ZER
BALANCE OF EXISTING HARDWARE TO REMAIN.
HW SET: 22
DOOR NUMBERS:
E212 R111 R132
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80PD RHO
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211AL FSE DS CON 12/16/24/28
VAC/VDC
630 VON
1 EA WIRE HARNESS (FRAME) CON-6W SCH
1 EA CREDENTIAL READER BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR B/O
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 120/240 VAC LGR SCE
COORDINATE: ACCESS CONTROL, WIRING, CONDUIT, POWER WITH SECURITY CONTRACTOR.
BALANCE OF EXISTING HARDWARE TO REMAIN.
405
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 30 DOOR HARDWARE
HW SET: 23
DOOR NUMBERS:
R112
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE AX-98-L-NL-06 626 VON
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6111 FSE DS CON 12/24 VAC/VDC 630 VON
1 EA WIRE HARNESS (FRAME) CON-6W SCH
1 EA CREDENTIAL READER BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR B/O
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 120/240 VAC LGR SCE
COORDINATE: ACCESS CONTROL, WIRING, CONDUIT, POWER WITH SECURITY CONTRACTOR.
BALANCE OF EXISTING HARDWARE TO REMAIN.
HW SET: 24
DOOR NUMBERS:
E110
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE AX-9827-EO-LBR 626 VON
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE AX-9827-L-LBR-06 626 VON
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
BALANCE OF EXISTING HARDWARE TO REMAIN.
HW SET: 25
DOOR NUMBERS:
R108
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE AX-98-L-06 626 VON
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
BALANCE OF EXISTING HARDWARE TO REMAIN.
406
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 31 DOOR HARDWARE
HW SET: 26
DOOR NUMBERS:
E100.5
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80PD RHO
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
BALANCE OF EXISTING HARDWARE TO REMAIN.
HW SET: 27
DOOR NUMBERS:
R111.1
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA ENTRANCE/OFFICE LOCK ND50PD RHO
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
BALANCE OF EXISTING HARDWARE TO REMAIN.
HW SET: 28
DOOR NUMBERS:
R106.1
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA CLASSROOM LOCK ND70PD RHO
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
BALANCE OF EXISTING HARDWARE TO REMAIN.
HW SET: 29
DOOR NUMBERS:
E206A
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA PRIVACY LOCK ND40S RHO 626 SCH
BALANCE OF EXISTING HARDWARE TO REMAIN.
407
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 32 DOOR HARDWARE
HW SET: 30
DOOR NUMBERS:
E103 E107 E107.1 E110A E133 R117
R118 R119 R120 R121 E200A E200A.1
E200B.1 E203 E206 E208 E210.1 E211
E213 E214 E215 E216 E219 E223
E231 E231A E231B E232 E233 E234
E237 E243 E244 R222 R225 R236
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
ALL EXISTING HARDWARE TO REMAIN. (SINGLE DOOR)
HW SET: 31
DOOR NUMBERS:
E201 E207 E210
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
ALL EXISTING HARDWARE TO REMAIN. (PAIR DOORS)
HW SET: 32
DOOR NUMBERS:
MG3
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA SPRING PIVOT HINGE 4007RB 626 MCK
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK ND80PD RHO
(MATCH OWNER'S STANDARD
KEYING)
626 SCH
1 EA ELECTRIC STRIKE 6211WF FSE DS CON 12/16/24/28
VAC/VDC
630 VON
1 EA WIRE HARNESS (FRAME) CON-6W SCH
1 EA CREDENTIAL READER BY SECURITY CONTRACTOR B/O
1 EA POWER SUPPLY PS902 120/240 VAC LGR SCE
COORDINATE: ACCESS CONTROL, WIRING, CONDUIT, POWER WITH SECURITY CONTRACTOR.
408
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/5/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 71 00 - 33 DOOR HARDWARE
HW SET: 33
DOOR NUMBERS:
YG1
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA STOREROOM LOCK L9080P 06A 630 SCH
1 EA WELDABLE GATE BOX
(LOCK)
K-BXMOR1 600 KEE
BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY GATE MANUFACTURER.
HW SET: 34
DOOR NUMBERS:
YG2 YG3
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 SET GATE HINGE/CLOSER MAMMOTH-HD AL LOX
1 EA PANIC HARDWARE AX-98-L-NL-06-WH 630 VON
1 EA RIM CYLINDER 20-022 626 SCH
BALANCE OF HARDWARE BY GATE MANUFACTURER.
HW SET: 35
DOOR NUMBERS:
YG4
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
ALL HARDWARE BY GATE MANUFACTURER.
HW SET: 36
DOOR NUMBERS:
E102 E104 E202 E204
EACH TO HAVE:
QTY DESCRIPTION CATALOG NUMBER FINISH MFR
1 EA PUSH PLATE 8200 4" X 16" 630 IVE
1 EA PULL PLATE 8303 8" 4" X 16" 630 IVE
1 EA EDGE FILLER PLATE EF-161 600 DON
1 EA ASA STRIKE FILLER PLATE FS-260-PC 600 DON
BALANCE OF EXISTING HARDWARE TO REMAIN.
END OF SECTION
409
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 80 00 - 1 Glazing
SECTION 08 80 00
GLAZING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Provide miscellaneous glass and glazing not provided elsewhere including
accessories as required for complete installation.
a. Provide glazing for metal doors and frames.
b. Provide glazing for interior aluminum frames.
c. Provide glazing for wood doors.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 08 41 00 Entrances and Storefronts
2. Section 08 83 00: Frameless mirrors.
3. Section 08 11 10 Hollow Metal Doors and Frames
4. Section 08 11 20 Interior Aluminum Frames
5. Section 08 14 00 Wood Doors Flush
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Glass Association of North America (GANA): Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish for each type of glass and exposed glazing material.
B. Samples: Furnish samples of glazing assemblies with color to match existing
conditions.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Extend correction period to two years for following.
1. Replacing laminated glass which exhibits signs of delaminating.
2. Replacing insulated glass which exhibits signs of moisture on sealed glass
surfaces.
3. Replacing mirrors which exhibit signs of desilvering or signs of distortion.
410
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 80 00 - 2 Glazing
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Section includes miscellaneous glass and glazing materials for
items typically furnished without glazing and where glazing is not an integral part of
the assembly.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Safety Glass Standard: Comply with applicable codes, CPSC 16 CFR 1201, and
pass ANSI Z97.1.
C. Float Glass: Select glazing quality, clear annealed glass, ASTM C1036; nominal
thickness 1/4".
1. Manufacturers:
a. Vitro Architectural Glass (formerly PPG).
b. Oldcastle Glazing.
c. Guardian Industries Corp.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2. Locations: Provide where indicated as clear glass.
D. Tempered Glass: Select glazing quality, clear float glass, fully tempered,
ASTM C1048, Kind FT; nominal thickness 1/4"; safety glass.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Vitro Architectural Glass (formerly PPG).
b. Oldcastle Glazing.
c. Guardian Industries Corp.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2. Locations: Provide at doors and at window openings where required by
applicable codes and federal requirements.
E. Insulated Glass: Preassembled units consisting of organically sealed panes of glass
enclosing a hermetically sealed dehydrated air space with minus 20-degree F dew
point.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Vitro Architectural Glass (formerly PPG).
b. Oldcastle Glazing.
c. Guardian Industries Corp.
d. Viracon.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2. Performance: Certified to ASTM E2190 by Insulating Glass Certification Council.
411
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 80 00 - 3 Glazing
3. System: Manufacturer's standard dual seal system compatible with glazing
system, and including spacers, desiccant, and standard corner construction.
4. Glass: ASTM C1036, select glazing quality clear float glass; nominal 1/4” thick
glass.
5. Safety Glass: ASTM C1048, Kind FT, fully tempered select glazing quality clear
float glass; nominal 1/4” thick glass; provide at doors and impact areas where
safety glass is required by applicable codes and regulations.
6. Total Unit Thickness: 1".
7. Locations: Provide at exterior windows and doors unless otherwise indicated.
8. Basis of Design is Viracon Solar Cool, Solar Blue + Solar Ban 60. Final
selection based on in field comparison of equivalent samples for color
match to existing.
9. Glazing Materials: Type approved for use in applications indicated for required
fire ratings; refer to fire label requirements.
10. Location: Provide at fire rated openings indicated to receive wired glass.
F. Spacer Shims: Silicone compatible, 50 durometer hardness; 3" long by 3/32" thick by
1/4" high.
G. Setting Blocks: 70-90 durometer hardness; 4” long by 3/8” thick by 1/4” high standard
setting blocks.
H. Glazing Sealant: ASTM C920, Type S, Grade NS, elastomeric one-component
silicone glazing sealants as recommended by sealant manufacturer for application
involved.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Dow Corning Corp.
b. General Electric Co.
c. Pecora Corp.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2. Structural and Butt Glazing: Provide high-modulus structural silicone glazing
materials recommended by sealant manufacturer for applications where sealant
bonds glass to metal system and where sealant bonds glass to glass.
3. Color: As selected by Architect from manufacturer's full range of available colors.
I. Glazing Putty: Linseed oil putty, ASTM C570, Type II; oil and resin base caulking
compound for building construction; knife grade.1.
412
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 80 00 - 4 Glazing
1. Manufacturers:
a. DAP, Inc.
b. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean glazing channels and framing members to receive glass immediately before
glazing; remove coatings not firmly bonded to substrate.
B. Apply primer to joint surfaces where recommended by sealant manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with GANA Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual and glazing manufacturer
recommendations and installation instructions.
1. Do not allow glass to touch metal surfaces.
2. Comply with applicable code requirements and NFPA 80 for glass in fire rated
openings.
B. Place setting blocks at quarter points in thin course of sealant.
C. Install removable stops with glass centered in space with spacer shims at 2'-0"
intervals on both sides of glass, 1/4" below sightline.
D. Sealant Glazing: Fill gap between glass and stops with sealant to depth equal to bite
of frame on glass but not more than 3/8" below sightline.
1. Apply sealant to uniform and level line, flush with sightline; tool or wipe sealant
surface for smooth appearance; at exterior locations tool sealant so water is
carried away from glass.
3.3 CLEANING
A. At areas subject to potential impact mark glass after installation by crossed streamers
attached to framing and held away from glass; do not apply markers to surface of
glass.
B. Remove nonpermanent labels immediately after sealant cures; cure sealants for high
early strength and durability.
C. Remove and replace glass which is broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or damaged
during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and vandalism.
END OF SECTION
413
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 83 00 - 1 Frameless Mirrors
SECTION 08 83 00
FRAMELESS MIRRORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Typical: Provide frameless glass mirrors with accessories as required for
complete installation.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Glass Association of North America (GANA): Glazing Manual and Sealant Manual.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish for mirror glass.
B. Samples: Furnish samples of mirror glass with finished edges and corners.
1.4 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranties: Replace mirrors which exhibit signs of desilvering or signs of
distortion.
1. Special Warranty Period: Two years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide frameless mirrors with accessories as required for
complete installation.
B. Safety Glass Standard: Comply with applicable codes, CPSC 16 CFR 1201, and pass
ANSI Z97.1.
C. Typical Frameless Glass Mirrors: Mirror quality q1 or q2, clear float glass; 1/4" thick;
full silver coating, copper coating and organic coating; factory treated and sealed after
cutting and finishing.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Guardian Glass.
b. Lenoir Mirror Company, Lenoir, NC.
c. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
414
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 83 00 - 2 Frameless Mirrors
2. Edges: Provide edges designed to eliminate cutting potential at edges and
corners commonly referred to as arrised edges, as approved by Architect.
1. Glass: Mirror quality q1 or q2, clear float glass; factory treated and sealed after
cutting and finishing.
2. Edges: Provide edges designed to eliminate cutting potential at edges and
corners commonly referred to as arrised edges, as approved by Architect.
3. Glass Thickness: Nominal 1/4" total thickness unless otherwise indicated.
4. Polyvinyl Butyral Core Thickness: Minimum 30 mil.
5. Reflective Coating: Coating may be standard full silver reflective metallic coating
on Number 2 surface or may be mirror reflective surface on polyvinyl butyral
core.
D. Mirror Attachment:
1. Bottom Supports: Brite anodized aluminum angles such as Glass Distributors
Inc. (301.779.2430)/Brite Anodized Aluminum 3/8” L-Bar Extrusion, provide felt
pads for setting mirrors on angles; provide concealed fasteners.
2. Adhesive: Nontoxic type as recommended by mirror manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with GANA Glazing Manual and mirror manufacturer instructions.
1. Do not allow glass to touch metal surfaces.
B. Provide ventilation to coating.
C. Set or trim felt to face of mirror.
3.2 CLEANING
A. Remove nonpermanent labels immediately after installation.
B. Remove and replace mirrors which are broken, chipped, cracked, abraded or
damaged during construction period, including natural causes, accidents and
vandalism at contractor’s expense.
END OF SECTION
415
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 62 23 -1
SECTION 08 62 23
TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
PART 1 GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Tubular daylighting devices (TDD) and accessories.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 09 51 00 Acoustical Ceilings
B. Section 07 55 00 MODIFIED BITUMINOUS ROOFING
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American Architectural Manufacturers Association (AAMA):
1. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/I.S.2/A440 - Standard/Specification for Windows, Doors, and
Unit Skylights; 2011.
B. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. ANSI C63.4-2014 - American National Standard for Methods of Measurement of
Radio-Noise Emissions from Low-Voltage Electrical and Electronic Equipment in the
Range of 9 kHz to 40 GHz
C. ASTM International (ASTM):
1. ASTM A463/A463M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Aluminum Coated, by
the Hot Dip Process.
2. ASTM A653/A653M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, Zinc Coated
(Galvanized), by the Hot Dip Process.
3. ASTM A792/A792M - Standard Specification for Steel Sheet, 55% Aluminum-Zinc
Alloy-Coated by the Hot-Dip Process.
4. ASTM B209 - Standard Specification for Aluminum and Aluminum-Alloy Sheet and
Plate.
5. ASTM D635 - Test Method for Rate of Burning and/or Extent of Time of Burning of
Self-Supporting Plastics in a Horizontal Position.
6. ASTM D1929 - Test Method for Ignition Properties of Plastics.
7. ASTM D2843 - Standard Test Method for Density of Smoke from the Burning or
Decomposition of Plastics.
8. ASTM F1642 - Standard Test Method for Glazing and Glazing Systems Subject to
Airblast Loading.
9. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials.
10. ASTM E108 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Tests of Roof Coverings.
11. ASTM E283 - Test Method for Rate of Air Leakage Through Exterior Windows,
Curtain Walls, and Doors Under Specified Pressure Differences Across the Specimen.
12. ASTM E308 - Standard Practice for Computing the Colors of Objects by Using the
CIE System.
13. ASTM E330 - Structural Performance of Exterior Windows, Curtain Walls, and Doors.
D. California State OSHA Fall Protection Code of Regulations, Title 8, Section 3212 (e)(1).
E. Code of Federal Regulations (CFR):
1. CFR 47 - Code of Federal Regulations (CFR) Rules and Regulations for FCC, FCC
Part 15 - Radio Frequency Devices, Subpart B - Unintentional Radiators, Section
416
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 62 23 -2
15.107 - Conducted Limits, and 15.109 - Radiated Emission Limits
F. CSA Group (CSA):
1. CSA C22.2 No. 250.0 - Luminaires.
G. Factory Mutual (FM):
1. FM Standard 4431 - The Approval Standard for Skylights.
H. General Services Administration (GSA):
1. GSA-TS01-2003: Standard Test Method for Glazing and Window Systems Subject to
Dynamic Overpressure Loadings.
I. International Building Code (IBC):
1. IBC Section 1710 - Load Test Procedure for Wind Load Testing on Rooftop Daylight
Collecting System - Structural Performance Testing - Devised by ATI PE); 2012.
2. IBC Section 2606.7.2 - Installation - Diffuser Fall Out Test (Devised by PE); 2012.
J. OSHA 29 CFR - 1910.23 (e)(8) (Guarding Requirements for Skylights); 1926 Subpart M (Fall
Protection); 1926.501(b)(4)(i); 1926.501(i)(2); 1926.501(b)(4)(ii).
K. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL):
1. UL 2108 - Low Voltage Lighting Systems.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Daylight Reflective Tubes: Spectralight Infinity with INFRAREDuction Technology combines
ultra-high Visible Light reflectance with Ultra-low Infrared (IR) reflectance. Patented
spectrally-selective optical surface yields an average total- and specular-reflectance for the
Visible Light spectrum (400 nm to 700 nm) providing maximized visible light transmission
and less than 25 percent reflectance for Infrared (IR) heat wavelengths (750 nm to 2500 nm)
for minimized heat transmission, resulting in a spectrally-selective Total Solar Spectrum (250
nm to 2500 nm) reflectance less than 37 percent, as measured using a Perkin Elmer
Lambda 1050 spectrophotometer with a Universal Reflectance Accessory. Color: a* and b*
(defined by CIE L*a*b* color model) shall not exceed plus 2 or be less than minus 2 as
determined in accordance with ASTM E308.
B. SOLAMASTER 750 DS-O (OPEN CEILING)
1. AAMA/WDMA/CSA 101/IS2/A440, Class CW-PG70, size tested 21 inch (530 mm)
diameter, Type TDDOC and Type TDDCC.
a. Air Infiltration Test:
1) Air infiltration will not exceed 0.30 cfm/sf aperture with a pressure delta
of 1.57 psf across the tube when tested in accordance with ASTM E283.
b. Water Resistance Test:
1) Passes water resistance; no uncontrolled water leakage with a pressure
differential of 10.7 psf (512 Pa) or 15 percent of the design load
(whichever is greater) and a water spray rate of 5 gallons/hour/sf for 24
minutes when tested in accordance with ASTM E547 and ASTM E331.
c. Uniform Load Test: All units tested with a safety factor of (3) for positive
pressure and (2) for negative pressure, acting normal to plane of roof in
accordance with ASTM E330.
1) No breakage, permanent damage to fasteners, hardware parts, or
damage to make daylighting system inoperable or cause excessive
permanent deflection of any section when tested at a Positive Load of
150 psf (7.18 kPa) or Negative Load of 70 psf (3.35 kPa).
2. Fire Testing:
a. Fire Rated Roof Assemblies:
417
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 62 23 -3
1) When used with the Dome Edge Protection Band, all domes meet fire
rating requirements as described in the International Building Code for
Class A, B, and C roof assemblies.
b. When used with the Dome Edge Protection Band, all domes meet fire rating
requirements as described in the International Building Code.
c. Self-Ignition Temperature - Greater than 650 degrees F per ASTM D1929.
d. Smoke Density: Rating no greater than 450 per ASTM E84 in way intended for
use. Classification C.
e. Rate of Burn and/or Extent: Maximum Burning Rate: 2.5 inches/min (62
mm/min) Classification CC-2 per ASTM D635.
f. Rate of Burn and/or Extent: Maximum Burn Extent: 1 inch (25 mm)
Classification CC-1 per ASTM D635.
3. Fall Protection Performance:
a. Passes fall protection test: No penetration of dome or curb cap when subject to
400 lb (160 Kg)/42 inch (1066 mm) impact drop test when tested in accordance
with OSHA 29 CFR 1926.506(c) Safety Net Systems.
b. Passes fall protection test: California State OSHA Fall Protection Code of
Regulations, Title 8, Section 3212 (e)(1) Skylight Screens.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 13 00 00.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer's data sheets on each product to be used, including:
1. Preparation instructions and recommendations.
2. Storage and handling requirements and recommendations.
3. Data sheets showing roof dome assembly, flashing base, reflective tubes, diffuser
assembly, and accessories.
4. Installation requirements.
C. Shop Drawings. Submit shop drawings showing layout, profiles, and product components,
including rough opening and framing dimensions, anchorage, roof flashings and
accessories.
D. Electrical wiring diagrams and recommendations for power and control wiring.
E. Test Reports: Independent testing agency or evaluation service reports verifying compliance
with specified performance requirements.
F. Provide manufacturer's standard catalog pages and data sheets including detailed
information on luminaire construction, dimensions, ratings, finishes, mounting requirements,
listings, service conditions, photometric performance, installed accessories, and ceiling
compatibility; include model number nomenclature clearly marked with all proposed features:
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer Qualifications: All primary products specified in this section will be supplied by
a single manufacturer with a minimum of twenty years experience in the top lighting industry.
Secondary products shall be acceptable to the primary manufacturer.
B. Installer Qualifications: All products shall be installed by a single installer with a minimum of
five years demonstrated experience, with adequate equipment, skilled workers, and practical
experience to meet the project schedule. For a list of qualified installers please contact
Robert Busolo 760-597-4424 commsocalbusiness@solatube.com
C. Skylights shall conform with authorities having jurisdiction and be designed to meet design
418
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 62 23 -4
criteria of the project location and the following:
1. Skylights must be certified by NFRC.
2. Skylights must be Tested and labeled in accordance with AAMA/WDMA/CSA
101/I.S.2/A440.
3. Skylights must have Factory Mutual (FM) Approval Class Number 4431.
4. Meet or exceed OSHA 200 pound (90 kg) Drop Tests expressed in 29 CFR
1910.23(e)(8)
5. Skylights shall provide minimum 69 psf (3.30 kPa) design load.
D. Pre-Installation Meeting: Contractor shall convene a pre-installation meeting on the project
site minimum one week before beginning work of this Section. The meeting shall include the
Architect or Owner's Representative and representatives of all related trades to:
1. Coordinate between the at least the following trades.
a. Roofing to install the flashing, skylight, and LED Light Kit (when specified). Cut
holes in roof deck, and flash curb to deck.
b. Ensure clear paths for TDD units and coordinate with mechanical so not to
interfere with pathways.
c. Electrical to wire components and program lighting controls.
2. Verify project requirements and site logistics.
3. Assess integrity of the roofing system and building structure.
4. Review manufacturer's installation instructions and warranty requirements.
1.7 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products in a cool dry location protected from the weather and in the manufacturer's
original unopened containers until ready for installation.
B. Store products in manufacturer's unopened packaging until ready for installation.
1.8 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Coordinate delivery schedule with the Contractor and project schedule to minimize on site
storage.
B. Maintain environmental conditions (temperature, humidity, and ventilation) within limits
recommended by manufacturer for optimum results. Do not install products under
environmental conditions outside manufacturer's absolute limits.
C. Store materials in a dry area, protected from freezing, staining, contamination or damage.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Daylighting Device: Manufacturer's standard warranty for 10 years.
B. Electrical Parts: Manufacturer's standard warranty for 5 years, unless otherwise indicated.
PART 2 PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Acceptable Manufacturer: Solatube International, Inc., which is located at: Solatube
International 2210 Oak Ridge Way; Vista, CA 92081-8341; Michelle Weisman Tel: (818)
577-9952; Email: (mweisman@solatube.com); Web:http://www.solatube.com
B. Substitutions per 01 25 00.
419
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 62 23 -5
2.2 TUBULAR DAYLIGHTING DEVICES
A. Tubular Daylighting Devices General: Transparent roof-mounted skylight dome and self-
flashing curb, reflective tube, and ceiling level diffuser assembly, transferring sunlight to
interior spaces; complying with ICC AC-16.
B. SolaMaster Series: Solatube Model 750 DS, 21 inch (530 mm) Daylighting System:
1. Model:
a. Solatube Model 750 DS-O Open Ceiling. AAMA Type TDDOC.
2. Capture Zone:
a. Roof Dome Assembly: Transparent, UV and impact resistant dome with
flashing base supporting dome and top of tube.
1) Outer Dome Glazing: Type DA, 0.125 inch (3.2 mm) minimum thickness
injection molded acrylic classified as CC2 material; UV inhibiting (100
percent UV C, 100 percent UV B and 98.5 percent UV A), impact
modified acrylic blend.
a) Raybender 3000: Variable prism optic molded into outer dome to
capture low angle sunlight and limit high angle sunlight.
2) Acrylic Dome Plus Inner Dome Glazing: Type DPI, Inner Dome is 0.115
inch (3 mm) minimum thickness polycarbonate classified as CC1
material.
b. Tube Ring: 0.090 inch (2.3 mm) nominal thickness injection molded ASA.
Prevents thermal bridging between base flashing and tubing and channel
condensed moisture. Attached to base of dome ring with butyl glazing rope
0.24 inch (6 mm) diameter; to minimize air infiltration.
c. Dome Seal: Adhesive backed weatherstrip, 0.63 inch (16 mm) tall by 0.28 inch
(7 mm) wide.
3. Flashings:
a. Roof Flashing Base:
1) One Piece: One piece, seamless, leak-proof flashing functioning as base
support for dome and top of tube. Sheet steel, corrosion resistant
conforming to ASTM A653/A653M or ASTM A463/A463M or ASTM
A792/A792M, 0.028 inch (0.7 mm) plus or minus .006 inch (.015 mm)
thick.
a) Base Style: Type FC, Curb cap, with inside dimensions of 27
inches by 27 inches (685 mm by 685 mm) to cover curb as
specified in Section 07 60 00.
b. Curbs: Metal Insulated Roof Curb: Corrosion resistant 18 Gauge hot-dipped
galvanized steel conforming to ASTM A653 G90 with continuous welded
seams, integrated base plate for water tightness and extra strength, lined with
1-1/2 inch fiberglass fireproof sound attenuating thermal insulation, factory
installed 2 by 2 treated wood nailer secured to top ledge of curb. Curb designed
for single-ply roofing, lightweight fill, or tapered insulation low slope roof types.
1) C12 12 inch (305 mm) high Metal insulated curb
c. Flashing Options:
1) Curb Cap Insulation: Type CCI, Nominal 1 inch thick thermal insulation
pad to reduce thermal conduction between curb-cap and tubing and
thermal convection between room air and curb-cap. Rated R-6
(OFxft2xhr/Btu) Insulation is Polyisocyanurate foam utilizing CFC, HCFC,
and HFC free blowing agent. Type-1 Class-1 per ASTM C 1289; Passes
UL 1715 (15-minute thermal barrier per IBC 2603.4); Attic ventilation
may be required per IBC 1203.2(OFxft2xhr/Btu). For use with Flashing
Type FC.
4. Transfer Zone:
420
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 62 23 -6
a. Extension Tubes: Aluminum sheet, thickness 0.018 inch (0.5 mm) conforming
to ASTM B 209.
1) Reflective Tubes:
a) Reflective extension tube, Type EXX and Type EL with total length
of run as indicated on the Drawings.
b) Interior Finish: Spectralight Infinity with INFRAREDuction
Technology combining ultra-high Visible Light reflectance with
Ultra-low Infrared (IR) reflectance.
2) Tube Options
a) Wire Suspension Kit: Type E, Use the wire suspension kit when
additional bracing to the structure is required.
5. Delivery Zone:
a. Diffuser Assemblies for Tubes Not Penetrating Ceilings (Open Ceiling):
Solatube Model 750 DS-O. 21 inch (530 mm) diameter diffuser attached
directly to bottom of tube.
1) Lens: Type L2, Prismatic lens designed to maximize light output and
diffusion. Visible Light Transmission shall be greater than 90 percent at
0.100 inch (2.5 mm) thick. Classified as CC2.
2) Diffuser Seal: Open cell foam, acrylic adhesive backed, 0.75 in (19 mm)
wide by 0.125 in (3.2 mm) thick to minimize condensation and bug, dirt
and air infiltration per ASTM E283.
3) Diffuser Trim Ring: Injection molded acrylic. Nominal wall thickness
0.172 inches (4.4 mm).
b. Delivery Zone Options:
1) Daylight Dimmer - 0 to 10 V Dimmer Control: Provide an electrical
actuator controller, auxiliary switches, and cable as specified in Section
26 05 00; Basic Electrical
a) Low Voltage Daylight Dimmer: Type D1, is an Electro-
mechanically actuated daylight valve; 0-10 V Control, Class-2, UL
Listed. Low voltage Daylight Dimmer electrical actuator provides
for programmable (0 to 10VDC) scene-based dimming control for
daylight output between 2 and 100 percent, auxiliary 12VDC
dimming control for daylight output between 2 and 100 percent, or
auxiliary ON/OFF control. Input voltage: 24VAC at 50 or 60 Hz.
1) Programmable (0 to 10VDC) Control: requires an electrical
actuator controller
2) Auxiliary 12VDC Dimming Control: Requires 12VDC
Dimming Switch (Current Sourcing; 12VDC power supply
not required).
a) Requires CL-2 (Min), 18AWG, stranded copper, two
conductor, twisted cable from lighting controller to
first dimmer and interconnecting between subsequent
dimmers
3) Auxiliary ON/OFF Control: requires commercial or
residential single pole electric light switch.
a) ON/OFF control requires CL-2 (Min), 22 AWG,
stranded, three conductor, twisted cable from switch
to first dimmer and CL-2 (Min), 18 AWG, stranded
copper, two conductor twisted cable; interconnecting
subsequent dimmers.
b) Power can be transformed from line voltage through use of a UL
Listed Class-2, 24VAC Transformer.
6. Accessories
a. Low-voltage Transformer: Solatube Remote Transformer, Type TR20, is a
20VA, 24VAC, 50/60HZ, UL Listed, UL Category XOKV7, CE Marked, Class-2
421
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 62 23 -7
Transformer with cover plate mounting system configured for easy field
assembly onto standard 4.06 inch by 4.06 inch (103 mm by 103 mm) square
junction box: Inherently Limited, Primary: 120VAC, 208VAC, 240VAC, and
277VAC. For use with Daylight Dimmer Type D1 only.
b. Switch: Type S1, is a Low-voltage 0-10V Class 2 control switch (white)
required to operate 0-10V Daylight Dimmer. Note: only one switch is required
per set of up to 50 synchronously controlled dimmers. For use with 0-10V
Daylight Dimmer, Type D1, only.
2.3 ACCESSORlES
A. Fasteners: Same material as metals being fastened, non-magnetic steel, non-corrosive
metal of type recommended by manufacturer, or injection molded nylon.
B. Sealant: Polyurethane or copolymer based elastomeric sealant as provided or
recommended by manufacturer.
PART 3 EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Do not begin installation until substrates have been properly prepared.
B. Examine openings, substrates, structural support, anchorage, and conditions for compliance
with requirements for installation tolerances and other conditions.
C. If substrate and rough opening preparation is the responsibility of another installer, notify
Architect of unsatisfactory preparation before proceeding.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Clean surfaces thoroughly prior to installation.
B. Coordinate requirements for power supply, conduit, and wiring.
C. Prepare surfaces using the methods recommended by the manufacturer for achieving the
best result for the substrate under the project conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions.
B. Coordinate installation with substrates, air and vapor retarders, roof insulation, roofing
membrane, and flashing to ensure that each element of the Work performs properly, and
that finished installation is weather tight.
1. Install flashing to produce weatherproof seal with curb and overlap with roofing
system termination at top of curb.
2. Provide thermal isolation when components penetrate or disrupt building insulation.
Pack fibrous insulation in rough opening to maintain continuity of thermal barriers.
3. Coordinate attachment and seal of perimeter air and vapor barrier material.
C. Where metal surfaces of tubular unit skylights will contact incompatible metal or corrosive
substrates, including preservative-treated wood, provide permanent separation as
recommended by manufacturer
D. Align device free of warp or twist, maintain dimensional tolerances.
422
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
08 62 23 -8
E. Inspect installation to verify secure and proper mounting. Test each fixture to verify
operation, control functions, and performance. Correct deficiencies.
3.4 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Provide independent testing and inspection as specified in Section 01 45 23. Inspect
installation to verify secure and proper mounting.
1. Test for water leaks in accordance with AAMA 502 after installation and curing of
sealants but prior to installation if interior finishes.
2. Perform test for total area of each unit skylight.
3. Notify the Architect and the Contractor of any failed tests.
3.5 CLEANING
A. Clean exposed surfaces according to manufacturer's written instructions. Touch up
damaged metal coatings and finishes. Remove excess sealants, glazing materials, dirt, and
other substances.
3.6 PROTECTION
A. Protect installed products until completion of project.
B. Touch-up, repair or replace damaged products before Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
423
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 21 00 - 1 Gypsum Board Assemblies
SECTION 09 21 00
GYPSUM BOARD ASSEMBLIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide gypsum board systems including gypsum board, light gage
metal framing, suspension system for gypsum board systems, joint treatment,
acoustical accessories, and general accessories for complete installation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 21 00: Building thermal insulation.
2. Section 07 84 00: Firestopping.
3. Section 09 30 00: Cementitious backer unit tile substrates.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C754: Installation of Steel Framing Members to Receive Screw-Attached
Gypsum Wallboard, Backing Board, or Water-Resistant Backing Board.
B. ASTM C840: Application and Finishing of Gypsum Board.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination, Openings: Obtain dimensions and locations from other trades and
provide openings and enclosures for accessories, specialties, equipment, and
ductwork.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for framing, insulation, gypsum board,
and acoustical accessories.
B. Manufacturer’s Certification: Furnish manufacturer's certification indicating products
comply with Contract Documents and applicable codes.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants, and caulks.
B. Level 4 Finish Mock-Up: Provide Level 4 finish mock-up not less than 100 square feet
in location acceptable to Architect. Approved mock-up may be incorporated into
Project.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not begin installation of interior gypsum board until space is enclosed, space is
not exposed to other sources of water, and space is free of standing water.
424
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 21 00 - 2 Gypsum Board Assemblies
B. Maintain areas to receive gypsum board at minimum 50-degree F for 48 hours prior to
application and continuously after application until drying of joint compound is
complete; comply with ASTM C840.
C. Immediately remove from site gypsum board for interior use exposed to water, including
gypsum board with water stains, with signs of mold, and gypsum board with mildew.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. National Gypsum Co.
B. Georgia-Pacific Corp.
C. United States Gypsum Co., USG Corp.
D. Pabco
E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide gypsum board assemblies including gypsum board, light
gage metal framing, suspension system for gypsum board systems, joint treatment,
acoustical accessories, and general accessories.
1. Systems Responsibility: Provide products manufactured by or recommended by
manufacturer of gypsum board to maintain single-source responsibility for
system.
B. Performance Requirements: Perform gypsum board systems work in accordance with
recommendations of ASTM C754 and ASTM C840 unless otherwise specified.
1. Loads: Comply with California Building Code requirements for design of metal
framing for gypsum board systems.
a. Deflection: Maximum L/240 typical, L/360 where tile is indicated.
b. Deflection: Maximum L/240 typical, L/360 where tile or plaster are indicated.
C. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Fire-Rated Assemblies: Provide systems listed in applicable code or by
Underwriter's Laboratory, Gypsum Association (GA) File No's in GA-600 Fire
Resistance Design Manual or other listing approved by applicable authorities.
2. Seismic Requirements: Comply with code requirements for seismic bracing.
425
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 21 00 - 3 Gypsum Board Assemblies
D. Framing: Comply with ASTM C754, 20-gage and lighter unless otherwise indicated;
provide gages as recommended by manufacturer for spans and loads indicated and
as required by applicable codes.
1. Studs: ASTM C645, screw-type Cee-shaped.
a. Shaft Walls: Cee-T or Cee-H shaped studs.
b. Area Separation Walls: Match ClarkDietrich/H-Stud, Breakway Clips System.
2. Runners: Match studs.
3. Furring Members: ASTM C645, screw-type, hat-shaped.
a. Sound Rated Assemblies: Provide resilient channels where indicated and
where required to provide required sound transmission classifications.
1) Acceptable Manufacturers:
a) USG/RC-1.
b) ClarkDietrich/RC-Deluxe.
c) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
4. Channels: ASTM C754.
5. Hangers: ASTM A641, Class 1 wire not less than sizes in Table No. 5 of
ASTM C754 and as required by applicable codes; hanger rods, flat hangers, and
angle-type hangers as required.
6. Suspension System: ASTM C635, suspension system composed of main beams
and cross furring members interlocking to form supporting network;
recommended by gypsum board system manufacturer.
7. Fasteners and Anchorages: As recommended by gypsum board system
manufacturer.
E. Gypsum Board: Comply with ASTM C840; maximum permissible lengths; ends
square cut, tapered edges on boards to be finished.
1. Typical: ASTM C1396, Type X, fire rated gypsum board, unless otherwise indicated.
a. Contractor may use non-type x at non rated conditions, at the contractor’s
discretion.
2. First Layer at Double Layer Applications: ASTM C1396 or ASTM C442, Type X,
fire rated gypsum backing board.
3. Gypsum Core Board/Gypsum Liner Board: ASTM C442, Type X, 1" thick; mildew
and mold resistant.
a. Gypsum Liner Board: Georgia Pacific/DensGlass Ultra Shaft Liner with
ClarkDietrich/H-Stud
426
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 21 00 - 4 Gypsum Board Assemblies
4. Mold Resistant Gypsum Board: Provide at high humidity areas not covered with
tile including but not limited to restrooms, janitorial areas.
a. USG/Sheetrock Mold Tough Firecode Core.
b. Georgia Pacific/ToughRock Mold-Guard Fireguard X.
c. National Gypsum/Gold Bond XP Fire-Shield Gypsum Board.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
5. Tile Substrates: Cementitious backer units specified in Section 09 30 00 - Tiling.
6. Kevlar ballistic panels as indicated on drawings. Level 3 resistance.
7. Contractor Option Coated Glass Mat Backer Units: Georgia Pacific/DenShield, UL
fire rated as required to maintain integrity of fire rated assemblies.
8. Standard Gypsum Sheathing: ASTM C1396, Type X, asphalt impregnated core with
water resistant surfaces; plain back; square ends, V-tongue and groove long edges.
9. Sheathing: Silicone treated glass mat gypsum sheathing, ASTM C1177, Type X,
5/8” thick unless otherwise indicated.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Georgia Pacific/DensGlass Gold.
2) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
10. Exterior Gypsum Soffit Board: ASTM C931, Type X; as recommended by
manufacturer for exterior non-exposed applications.
11. Special High Rated STC Walls: Acoustically enhanced gypsum board designed with
special layer of damping material sandwiched between two pieces of gypsum board
for additional sound damping.
a. National Gypsum/Soundbreak Gypsum Board.
b. PABCO Quiet Rock 530 basis of design
c. Georgia Pacific/ToughRock Sound Deadening Board.
d. USG/Soundboard Drywall.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
12. Extended Exposure Gypsum Board: Fire rated Type X gypsum board designed
specifically for extended exposure to moisture during construction; ASTM C1177;
provide with score of 10 when tested using ASTM D3273 for mold resistance.
a. National Gypsum/eXP Extended Exposure Sheathing.
b. Georgia Pacific/DensArmor Plus or DensGlass.
c. USG/Sheetrock Fiberock Aqua Tough Sheathing.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
427
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 21 00 - 5 Gypsum Board Assemblies
F. Gypsum Board Accessories: Comply with ASTM C840.
1. Provide protective coated steel corner beads and edge trim; type designed to be
concealed in finished construction by tape and joint compound.
2. Corner Beads: Manufacturer's standard metal beads.
3. Edge Trim: “J”, "L", "LK", or "LC" casing beads.
4. Reinforcing Tape, Joint Compound, Adhesive, Water, Fasteners: Types
recommended by system manufacturer and conforming to ASTM C475.
a. Typical Joint Compound: Chemical hardening type for bedding and filling,
ready-mixed or powder vinyl type for topping.
5. Control Joints: Back to back casing beads.
a. Back control joints with 4 mil thick polyethylene air seal.
6. Reveals: Extruded aluminum special trim pieces in manufacturer's standard or
custom shapes to conform to configurations and dimensions indicated.
a. Manufactures:
1) Fry Reglet Corp./Drywall Moldings.
2) Gordon Inc./Final Forms I Drywall Trims.
3) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
G. Acoustical Accessories: Provide as indicated and as required to achieve acoustical
ratings indicated.
1. Acoustical Insulation: Preformed mineral fiber, ASTM C665, Type I; friction fit
type without integral vapor barrier; as required to meet STC ratings indicated, or
of thickness indicated.
2. Acoustical Sealant: ASTM C919, type recommended for use in conjunction with
gypsum board. Paintable, non-shrinking and non-cracking where exposed,
nondrying, nonskinning, nonstaining, and nonbleeding where concealed.
a. Acoustical Sealant Manufacturers:
1) USG/Sheetrock Acoustical Sealant.
2) Tremco/Acoustical Sealant.
3) Pecora/AC-20.
4) Quiet Rock sealants
5) Substitutions: Refer to Division 1.
428
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 21 00 - 6 Gypsum Board Assemblies
3. Electrical Box Pads: Provide at outlet, switch and telephone boxes in walls with
acoustical insulation.
a. Electrical Box Pad Manufacturers for Non-Fire Rated Partitions:
1) Harry A. Lowry & Associates (800.772.2521)/Lowry's Electrical Box Pads.
2) Tremco Sheet Caulking (650.572.1656).
3) Fire rated partition material manufacturers.
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
b. Electrical Box Pad Manufacturers for Fire Rated Partitions:
1) Hevi-Duty Nelson (800.331.7325)/Fire Rated FSP Firestop Putty Pads.
2) Specified Technologies, Inc. (800.992.1180)/Fire Putty Pads.
3) Hilti, Corp./Hilti Box Pads.
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
H. Fire Rated Assembly Accessories: Provide materials and accessories as required to
comply with fire rating requirements of UL, GA or other listing approved by applicable
authorities.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Metal Framing Erection: Erect metal framing in accordance with ASTM C754 and
manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Install members true to lines and levels to provide surface flatness with maximum
variation of 1/8" in 10'-0" in any direction.
2. Door Opening Framing: Install double studs at door frame jambs; install runners on
each side of opening at frame head height between jamb studs and adjacent studs.
3. Install metal framing backing where required for support of fixtures, cabinets,
accessories and hardware.
4. Coordinate installation of bucks, anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical
work which is to be placed in or behind partition framing; allow items to be
installed after framing is complete.
B. Ceiling Framing Installation: Erect in accordance with ASTM C754 and manufacturer's
recommendations.
1. Coordinate location of hangers with other work; provide trapeze supports and
steel bracing as required to support ceiling.
2. Install ceiling furring independent of walls, columns, and above-ceiling work.
3. Space main carrying channels at maximum 48" on center, not more than 6" from
perimeter walls.
429
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 21 00 - 7 Gypsum Board Assemblies
a. Lap splices minimum 12" and secure together 2" from each end of splice.
4. Place furring channels perpendicular to carrying channels at maximum 24" on
center and not more than 2" from perimeter walls.
5. Lap splices minimum 8" and secure together 2" from each end of splice.
6. Reinforce openings in ceiling suspension system which interrupt main carrying
channels or furring channels, with lateral channel bracing; extend bracing
minimum 24" past each end of openings.
7. Laterally brace entire suspension system.
C. Gypsum Board Installation: Install in accordance with ASTM C840 and
manufacturer's recommendations.
1. Use screws when fastening gypsum board to furring and to framing.
2. Erect gypsum board with ends and edges occurring over firm bearing.
a. Ensure joints of second layer do not occur over joints of first layer in double
layer applications.
3. Place control joints to be consistent with lines of building spaces and as directed
by Architect.
a. Provide where system abuts structural elements.
b. Provide at dissimilar materials.
c. Lengths exceeding 30'-0" in partitions.
d. Ceiling areas exceeding 50'-0" or 2500 square feet.
e. Wings of "L", "U" and "T" shaped ceilings.
4. Place corner beads at external corners; use longest practical lengths.
5. Place edge trim where gypsum board abuts dissimilar materials.
6. Tape, fill, and sand exposed joints, edges, corners and openings to produce
surface ready to receive finishes; feather coats onto adjoining surfaces.
7. Finishing: Comply with Gypsum Association (GA) “Levels of Gypsum Board Finish”.
a. GA Level 4 (Typical): Provide three-coat finishing and sanding is required for
surfaces indicated to be painted; provide flush, smooth joints and surfaces
ready for applied paint finishes.
b. Above ceilings at full height walls: tape gypsum board joints. Provide
acoustical sealants at penetrations.
8. Remove and replace defective work at contractor’s expense.
430
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 21 00 - 8 Gypsum Board Assemblies
D. Acoustical Accessories Installation:
1. Place acoustical insulation tight within spaces, around cut openings, behind and
around electrical and mechanical items within partitions, and tight to items
passing through partitions.
2. Place acoustical sealant within partitions in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations; install acoustical sealant at gypsum board perimeter at:
a. Metal Framing: One or two beads.
b. Base layer and face layer.
c. Penetrations of partitions.
3. Tolerance: Maximum 1/4" space between gypsum board at floor, ceiling, and
penetrations and sealed with acoustical sealant.
4. Install electrical box pads with pads molded and pressed on back and all sides of
box, closing openings, in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, for
complete acoustical barrier.
END OF SECTION
431
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 24 00 - 1 Portland Cement Plaster
SECTION 09 24 00
PORTLAND CEMENT PLASTER
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Stucco: Provide three-coat Portland cement plaster (stucco) with rainscreen,
metal lath, and accessories as required for complete finished system.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 07 28 00: Weather barrier underlayment.
2. Section 05 40 00 Cold Formed Metal Framing
3. Section 09 90 00: Painting of stucco.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C926: Application of Portland Cement Based Plaster.
B. ASTM C1063: Installation of Lathing and Furring for Portland Cement Plaster.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product information for each lathing material
and accessory, and for plaster materials.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate locations of control and expansion joints where not shown
on Drawings.
C. Samples: Furnish 24” by 24” stucco samples using materials and methods specified
including lath.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Mock-Ups: Provide not less than 100 sf mock-up of each type of plaster; approved
mock-ups may be incorporated into Project.
1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Take precautionary measures to ensure plaster is not subjected to excessive sun and wind
which could cause uneven and excessive evaporation, premature dehydration, or cracking.
B. Cold-Weather Requirements: Do not apply plaster unless minimum ambient
temperature of 40 degrees F has been and continues to be maintained for minimum
48 hours prior to application and until plaster is cured.
432
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 24 00 - 2 Portland Cement Plaster
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide three coat Portland cement plaster (stucco), with metal
lath and accessories.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with applicable codes.
C. Portland Cement Plaster: Provide either ready-mixed materials unless otherwise
approved in writing by Architect, complying with ASTM C926.
1. Scratch and Brown Coat Materials:
a. Cement: Normal Type 1 or 1A Portland cement, ASTM C150.
b. Hydrated Lime: Special finishing hydrated lime, Type S, ASTM C206.
c. Aggregate: Natural sand, conforming to ASTM C897 or C144.
2. Brown Coat Water Acrylic Admix: Acrylic polymer specifically manufactured for
use in Portland Cement Plaster (Stucco) applications and which will not
detrimentally affect finish.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Larsen Products Corp/Acrylic Admix 101.
2) BASF/Thoro Acryl 60.
3) Chem-Masters Corp/Cretelox.
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
3. Proprietary Finishing Materials: Provide proprietary acrylic based factory mixed
integral color finishing materials as indicated and as approved by Architect.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Omega Products Corp./Akroflex – Multitex Texture (Basis of
Design)
2) La Habra Products, Inc./DPR Acrylic Finish.
3) Senergy, Inc./Acrylic Finish.
4) Sto Corp./Stolit.
5) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
b. Colors: Provide 12 Chenille, basis of design.
4. Water: Clean, fresh and free from injurious amounts of oil, acid, alkali, organic
matter or other deleterious substances.
5. Bonding Agent: Conform to ASTM C932.
433
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 24 00 - 3 Portland Cement Plaster
a. Manufacturers:
1) Larsen Products Corp./Weld-Crete.
2) BASF/Thorobond.
3) Chem-Masters Corp./Polyweld.
4) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
B. Metal Components: Comply with requirements of ASTM C1063.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Phillips Manufacturing Company
b. Alabama Metal Industries Corp (AMICO).
c. ClarkDietrich Building Systems.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2. Exterior Components: Hot-dip galvanized finish; ASTM A924 and A653 minimum
G90 for 18 gage and lighter formed metal products, ASTM A123 galvanized after
fabrication for 16 gage and heavier products.
a. Exposed Exterior Components: Zinc accessories unless fully concealed in
plaster.
3. Exterior Metal Lath: Galvanized expanded diamond mesh; minimum 2.5 psy at
vertical applications, 3.4 psy at horizontal applications.
a. Backing: Weather resistive barrier system specified in Section 07 28 00 –
Weather Barrier/Underlayment.
b. Self-Furring: Where over solid substrate, provide “V” groove type to hold lath
approximately 1/4" from supporting base.
c. Tie Wire: ASTM A641, soft temper, Class 1 zinc coated; minimum 16 gage
for tying metal lath to furring channels and metal lath to metal lath.
4. Inside Corner Mesh: Minimum 26-gage steel; perforated or expanded flanges or
clips shaped to permit complete embedding in plaster; minimum 2" by 2" size.
C. Accessories: Provide as indicated, as recommended by referenced standards, and as
required for complete installation.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Keene Products from Metalex, a Division of The Koller Group.
b. Delta Star, Inc., Superior Metal Trim.
c. Brand X Metals.
d. Lath manufacturers.
e. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2. Casing Beads and Base Screeds: Minimum 26-gage, square edges at casing
beads, drip type base screeds; provide with expanded flanges.
434
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 24 00 - 4 Portland Cement Plaster
3. Expansion Joints: Two-piece slip type joints; commonly referred to as No. 40.
4. Control Joints: One-piece metal joint designed to interlock with plaster similar to
Keene/XJ15-3.
5. Aluminum Vent Strips and Channel Screeds: Extruded aluminum alloy 6063 and
temper T5 or T6, minimum 0.05" thick; with manufacturer's standard baked-on finish.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Fry Reglet Corp./Plaster Moldings.
2) Gordon Inc./Final Forms II.
3) Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
b. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide
custom color as directed by Architect.
D. Anchorages: Tie wire, nails, screws and other approved metal supports, of type and
size to suit application.
1. Staples not permitted.
2.2 PLASTER MIXES
A. Provide plaster mixes in accordance with ASTM C926 as appropriate to the substrate
indicated and the approved samples.
B. Mix only as much plaster as can be used in one hour.
C. Mix materials dry, to uniform color and consistency, before adding water.
D. Protect mixes from frost, dust and evaporation.
E. Do not retemper mixes after initial set has occurred.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prior to application ensure mechanical and electrical services behind surfaces to
receive cement plaster have been tested and approved.
B. Ensure framing has been properly installed and rigidly secured.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Erect furring and lath in accordance with ASTM C1063.
B. Install work true to lines and levels and to provide surface flatness with maximum
variation of 1/8" in 10'-0" in any direction.
435
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 24 00 - 5 Portland Cement Plaster
C. Isolation: Isolate lathing and metal support system where it abuts building structure
horizontally, and where partition/wall work abuts overhead structure, to prevent
transfer of building loads into plaster.
1. Install slip or cushion type joints to absorb deflections but maintain lateral support.
D. Frame both sides of expansion joints independently unless otherwise indicated, do
not bridge joints with furring and lathing or accessories.
E. Fixture Support Framing: Install supplementary framing, blocking and bracing where
work is indicated to support fixtures, equipment, services and similar work requiring
attachment and support.
F. Coordinate installation of anchors, blocking, electrical and mechanical work which is to be
placed in or behind framing; allow such items to be installed after framing is complete.
G. Install expansion and control joints so plaster areas do not exceed 120 ft2, and with
area sides having a maximum one to two and a half (1:2-1/2) ratio, unless otherwise
approved by Architect.
H. Metal Lathing: Apply lath taut, with long dimension perpendicular to supports; secure
end laps with tie wire where they occur between supports; lap ends minimum 1" and
sides 1/2”; secure with tie wires.
1. Continuously reinforce internal angles.
2. Place 6" wide x 12" long strips of metal lath diagonally at corners of openings;
secure rigidly in place.
3. Place 6" wide strips of metal lath at junctions of dissimilar materials; place
parallel with dissimilar materials; secure rigidly in place.
I. Installation of Metal Accessories:
1. Fasten in place true to line and in correct relation to adjacent materials and as
required to prevent dislodging and misalignment by subsequent operations.
2. Fasten at both ends and at maximum 12" on center along sides.
3. Bring grounding edge of accessories to true lines, plumb, level, and straight.
4. Install accessories to provide required depth of plaster and to bring plaster
surface to required plane.
5. Install continuous corner reinforcement for full length of external corners.
6. Install sill and drip screeds with paper sheathing and lath installed over
attachment flange of screeds.
7. Beads: Use single length of metal beads wherever length of run does not exceed
longest standard stock length available; miter or cope corners.
436
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 24 00 - 6 Portland Cement Plaster
a. Provide casing beads where plaster abuts dissimilar construction and at
perimeter of openings where edges of plaster will not be concealed by other
work.
J. Portland Cement Plaster: Conform to ASTM C926.
1. Stucco: Apply three coat cement plaster system, scratch, brown, and finish coats.
2. Base for Surface Bonded Masonry: Apply two coat cement plaster system,
scratch and brown coats.
3. Apply each base coat (scratch and brown) to minimum thickness of 3/8"; allow
each coat to moist cure for minimum period of 48 hours;
a. Moist cure first base coat (scratch coat) during 48-hour period.
4. Allow base coats to cure for minimum 7 days prior to application of finish coat.
5. Evenly dampen base coat, to ensure uniform suction, and apply finish coat; apply
thickness sufficient to secure required texture but in no case less than 1/8".
a. Apply pre-mixed finish coat in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
6. Maintain surface flatness, with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0".
7. Avoid excessive working of surface, delay troweling to avoid drawing excess
fines to surface.
K. Finish: Provide surfaces with finish to match approved sample panel and mock-up.
3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. Cut, patch, point, and repair plaster as necessary to accommodate other work and to
restore cracks, dents, and imperfections.
B. Repair or replace work to eliminate blisters, buckles, crazing, check cracking, dry-
outs, efflorescence, sweat-outs, and similar defects.
C. Finish cutting and patching to match undamaged plaster; patching shall not be visible
in finished installation.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Promptly remove plaster from surfaces not indicated to be plastered.
B. Repair surfaces stained, marred or otherwise damaged during plastering.
END OF SECTION
437
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 30 00 - 1 Tiling
SECTION 09 30 00
TILING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide tile installations with accessories, as required for complete
installation.
1. Provide cementitious backer unit tile substrate.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 21 00: Metal framing and gypsum board.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A108.1: Installation of Tile with Portland Cement Mortar.
B. ANSI A108.5: Installation of Tile with Latex-Portland Cement Mortar.
C. ANSI A108.10: Installation of Grout in Tilework.
D. ANSI A108.11: Interior Installation of Cementitious Backer Units.
E. Tile Council of North America (TCNA): Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination, Large Format Tile and Framing: Tile Council of North America (TCNA)
requires framing at large format tile to be maximum 16” on center and for maximum
deflection of L/720 where large format tile as defined by TCNA is indicated.
1. Coordinate with framing installation to ensure proper stud spacing and deflection
limits are provided at locations where large format tile is indicated.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for each type of material for Project.
B. Samples: Furnish each type of tile clearly indicating pattern, coloration and joints.
1. Color Charts: Submit actual tile sections showing full range of colors, textures
and patterns available for each type of tile.
2. Prepare two 12" square sample panels of each selected type of tile and grout.
438
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 30 00 - 2 Tiling
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants, and caulks.
1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Provide heat and ventilation in areas where ceramic tile work is being performed, to
allow tile to properly set.
B. Take precautionary measures necessary to ensure excessive temperature changes
do not occur.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for correcting failure of system to resist water
penetration except where failure is result of structural failure of building. Repair
system and pay for or replace damaged materials and surfaces.
1. Hairline cracking due to temperature or shrinkage is not considered structural
failure.
2. Period: Two years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide tile installations with tile, grout, setting materials, and
accessories as indicated.
B. Regulatory Requirements, Slip-Resistance:
1. Slip-Resistant Hard Surfaces: Hard surface finishes to comply with requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction for slip-resistant hard surfaces, including general
code requirements and requirements for access for persons with disabilities.
C. Tile: Types as indicated on finish schedule
1. Manufacturers:
a. Manufacturers listed on Finish Schedule.
b. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2. Color, Style and Pattern: As indicated on Finish Schedule
3. Base and Trim: Provide matching trim pieces, coordinated with sizes and
coursing of adjoining flat tile.
439
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 30 00 - 3 Tiling
D. Portland Cement Setting Bed: Portland cement bed conforming to ANSI A108.1 and
TCNA recommendations including separator sheet and reinforcing mesh.
1. Separator sheet may be deleted where over waterproof membrane.
E. Latex Thin Set: Thinset bond coat, consisting of latex-cementitious mortar conforming
to ANSI A118.4.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Laticrete International Inc.
b. Bostik Construction Products/Hydroment.
c. Custom Building Products.
d. Mapei Corp.
e. Parex USA/Mer-Krete.
f. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
F. Latex-Cement Grout: ANSI A118.7, latex-cementitious type, uniform in color, resistant
to shrinkage.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Laticrete International Inc.
b. Bostik Construction Products/Hydroment.
c. Custom Building Products.
d. Mapei Corp.
e. Parex USA/Mer-Krete.
f. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2. Colors: Per Finish Schedule
G. Cementitious Backer Units: ANSI A118.9 aggregated Portland cement with woven
glass-fiber mesh on both faces.
1. Manufacturers:
a. USG Industries, Durabond Division/Durock.
b. National Gypsum Co./PermaBase Cement Board.
c. Custom Building Products/Wonderboard.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2. Contractor Option Coated Glass Mat Backer Units: Georgia Pacific/DenShield,
UL fire rated as required to maintain integrity of fire rated assemblies.
H. Cleaning and Sealing Materials: As recommended by tile and grout manufacturers,
such as Bostik Construction Products/Hydroment CeramaSeal.
440
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 30 00 - 4 Tiling
A. Special Tile Trim Pieces: Provide as indicated on Drawings.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Schluter Systems L.P.
b. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MIXES
A. Mix and proportion cementitious materials for site-made leveling coats, setting beds
and grout as recommended by the TCNA Handbook for Ceramic Tile Installation.
B. Mix and proportion pre-mixed setting beds and grout materials in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Prior to installing tile, ensure surfaces are level; comply with TCNA and tile
manufacturer recommendations but not greater than following.
1. Bed Set Tile Tolerance: Maximum surface variation of 1/4" in 10'-0".
2. Thin Set Tile Tolerance: Maximum surface variation of 1/8" in 10'-0".
B. Ensure surfaces are clean and well cured.
1. Drains: Where indicated, ensure surfaces are properly sloped to drains.
C. Do not commence work until surface conditions are within tolerances required for
proper installation; apply latex leveling material where necessary to meet required
tolerances.
D. Waterproof and Crack Isolation Membrane: Install waterproof membrane at tile areas
located above grade, in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations; extend
membrane minimum 6" up walls.
1. Comply with waterproof membrane manufacturer recommendations for
installation of tile over waterproof membrane.
E. Backer Units: Install units in accordance with ANSI A108.11, manufacturer's
recommendations, and as required to provide fire ratings indicated on Drawings.
441
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 30 00 - 5 Tiling
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install tile in accordance with referenced ANSI Standards and TCNA recommendations
for type of substrate and indicated setting method.
1. Complexity of TCNA variations in types of tile installation systems and potential for
changes to surrounding conditions during design and construction makes exact
listing of potential conditions improbable.
2. Contractor, installers, and manufacturer representatives shall inform Architect where
actual conditions are not covered and where providing similar materials and systems
do not comply with TCNA or manufacturer recommendations.
a. Where specified or similar materials and systems do not comply with TCNA or
manufacturer recommendations submit proposed substitutions along with
statement substitutions are of comparable quality to specified materials.
B. Following systems shall form the basis of tile installation systems required for Project.
Where Project conditions vary from TCNA and manufacturer recommendations, notify
Architect immediately. Where different use similar materials and systems as appropriate.
1. Latex-Cement Thin Set Floors over Concrete: TCNA F113.
2. Latex-Cement Thin Set Floors over Waterproof and Crack Isolation Membrane:
TCNA F122.
3. Latex-Cement Thin Set Floors over Acoustic Underlayment: TCNA F122.
4. Latex-Cement Thin Set Floors over Cementitious Backer Unit over Wood:
TCNA F144.
5. Latex-Cement Thin Set Wall Tile over Cementitious Backer Units: TCNA W244.
6. Latex-Cement Thin Set Wall Tile over Coated Glass Mat Backer Units: TCNA W245.
C. Place tile in accordance with patterns indicated on Drawings or as directed by
Architect; carefully plan tile layouts, ensure pattern is uninterrupted from one surface
to the next and through doorways.
1. Apply latex thin set to back of tile where necessary to ensure 100% bond
between bond coat and substrate; replace tiles which break due to voids
between tile and substrate.
D. Neatly cut tile around fixtures and drains; accurately form corners, base, intersections
and returns.
1. Base, Coves: Flush cove type with base grout joint on wall, cove tile on floor,
unless otherwise indicated.
2. Corners and Edges: Bullnose tile unless otherwise indicated.
442
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 30 00 - 6 Tiling
E. Locate expansion joints, control joints, contraction joints, and isolation joints where
indicated; where not indicated, provide as recommended by TCNA Handbook and as
approved by Architect.
1. Install special trim pieces as indicated on Drawings and in accordance with
manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions, true to lines and
levels indicated and in correct relationship with tile and adjacent materials.
F. Ensure tile joints are uniform in width, subject to normal variance in tolerance allowed
in tile size; ensure joints are watertight, without voids, cracks, excess mortar or grout.
G. Sound tile after setting, remove and replace hollow sounding units at contractor’s
expense.
H. Allow tile to set for a minimum 48 hours prior to grouting.
I. Grout tile to comply with recommendations of TCNA and as specified.
J. Leave completed installation free of broken, damaged and faulty tile.
3.2 CLEANING AND SEALING
A. Clean tile surfaces free of foreign matter upon completion of grouting.
B. Seal tile and grout surfaces where recommended by manufacturer for materials and
applications involved; comply with manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
443
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 51 00 - 1 Acoustical Ceilings
SECTION 09 51 00
ACOUSTICAL CEILINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide suspended acoustical ceiling system with exposed
suspended metal grid system, trim, and accessories as required for complete finished
installation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 21 00: Gypsum board suspended ceiling systems.
2. Divisions 21 through 28: Facilities services for ceiling penetrations.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM C635: Metal Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
B. ASTM C636: Installation of Metal Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and
Lay-in Panel Ceilings.
C. ASTM E580: Application of Ceiling Suspension Systems for Acoustical Tile and Lay-
In Panels in Areas Requiring Seismic Restraint.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordination: Coordinate installation of acoustical ceiling systems with items installed
above ceilings to ensure work above ceilings is complete, ceiling space allows for
concealed items while allowing required ceiling heights, and building is enclosed.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturers' literature.
B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate grid layout and related dimensioning, junctions with
other work and ceiling finishes, and inter-relation of mechanical and electrical items
related to system.
C. Samples: Furnish samples of exposed grid finish and each type of ceiling unit.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years successful experience in
projects of similar type and scope; acceptable to manufacturer of integrated
acoustical ceiling system.
444
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 51 00 - 2 Acoustical Ceilings
1.6 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not install ceilings until building is enclosed, sufficient heat is provided, dust
generating activities have terminated and overhead mechanical work is completed,
tested and approved.
1. Do not allow acoustical ceiling units to be exposed to moisture; immediately remove
acoustical ceiling units with stains, units with signs of mold, and units with mildew.
B. Allow wet work to dry prior to commencement of installation.
C. Maintain uniform temperatures of minimum 60 degrees F and humidity of 20% to 40%
prior to, during and after installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Armstrong World Industries, Inc.
B. CertainTeed.
C. USG Corporation. Basis of Design.
D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide acoustical ceiling systems with exposed suspended
metal grid system, trim, and accessories as required for complete finished installation.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Seismic Design Requirements: Comply with California Building Code
requirements for seismic bracing of ceiling suspension system, and with
ASTM E580.
a. Ceiling Struts: Provide struts as detailed on Drawings and as required by
code, placed maximum 12'-0" on center in both directions and within 6'-0" of
each wall.
b. Slack Wires: Provide safety slack wires, two per fluorescent fixture on
diagonally opposite corners and a single wire for each recessed down light.
2. Fire Performance Characteristics: Provide products listed by Underwriters
Laboratories (UL) or other independent testing laboratory acceptable to applicable
authorities.
a. Flame Spread/Smoke Density: Provide products meeting code requirements
for maximum 25 flame spread and maximum 450 smoke developed.
445
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 51 00 - 3 Acoustical Ceilings
C. Suspension Systems: Comply with ASTM C635, as applicable to type of suspension
system required for type of ceiling units indicated.
1. Grid System:
a. Exposed Grid System: Standard 1" nominal face width, direct hung,
aluminum or steel "T" exposed grid system.
2. Attachment Devices: Size for 5 times design load indicated in ASTM C635, Table 1,
Direct Hung.
3. Hanger Wires: Galvanized carbon steel, ASTM A641, soft temper, pre-stretched,
yield-stress load of at least three times design load, but not less than 12-gage.
4. Straps, Tubes and Angles: Provide galvanized steel as required to meet state
and local requirements for seismic design loads.
5. Structural Class: Minimum intermediate-duty system.
6. Edge Molding: Manufacturer's standard angle molding for edges and
penetrations of ceiling, with single flange of molding exposed.
7. Finish of Exposed Items: Manufacturer's standard white baked enamel.
8. Maximum Allowable Deflection: L/360.
D. Acoustical Panels: ASTM E1264 type and form as indicated on Finish Schedule, as
selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of panels where not otherwise
indicated.
1. Panels:
2. As indicated at council chamber: USG Geometrix, 2’-0” x 2’-0”, profiled
diffusion tile or approved equal.
3. Typical tile: USG Mars, White, 2’-0” x 2’-0” , NRC .90, or approved equal
a. Shadowline tapered edge profile
4. Size: 2'-0" by 2'-0", unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
5. Colors: white.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Furnish layouts for inserts, clips and other supports required to be installed by other
trades for support of acoustical ceilings.
1. Install inserts, clips, and supports where not previously installed and where
additional supports are required for complete installation.
446
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 51 00 - 4 Acoustical Ceilings
B. Measure ceiling area and establish layout of acoustical units to balance border widths
at opposite edges of each ceiling; do not use less than half width units at borders.
C. Coordinate with other work supported by or penetrating through ceilings, including
integral air handling systems, light fixtures, and other systems.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install acoustical ceiling systems in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations
and ASTM C636.
1. Coordinate installation of air handling systems and electrical systems integral
with integrated acoustic ceiling systems.
2. Finished Ceilings: True to lines and levels and free from warped, soiled or
damaged grid or acoustical units.
B. Install ceiling systems in a manner capable of supporting superimposed loads, with
maximum permissible deflection of 1/8" in 10'-0".
C. Install after major above-ceiling work is complete; coordinate location of hangers with
other work.
1. Ensure suspension system is located to accommodate fittings and units of
equipment which is to be placed after installation of ceiling grid.
D. Where ducts or other equipment prevent regular spacing of hangers, reinforce nearest
adjacent hangers and related carrying channels as required to span required distance.
E. Install ceiling suspension system to resist seismic loads as required by state and local
codes, including extra hanger wires and compression supports for ceilings and light
fixtures.
F. Hang system independently of walls, columns, ducts, pipes and conduit. Where
suspension system members are spliced, avoid visible displacement of the
longitudinal axis or face plane of adjacent members.
G. Do not support lighting fixtures from or on main runners or cross runners if weight of
fixture causes total dead load to exceed deflection capability.
1. Support fixture loads independently or provide supplementary hangers located
within 6" of each corner.
H. Do not install fixtures so main runners and cross runners are eccentrically loaded;
where fixture installation would produce rotation of runners, provide stabilizer bars.
I. Install edge moldings at intersection of ceiling and vertical surfaces, using maximum
lengths, straight, true to line and level; miter corners.
1. Provide edge moldings at junctions with other ceiling finishes.
447
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 51 00 - 5 Acoustical Ceilings
J. Where required form expansion joints to accommodate movement and maintain
visual closure without distorting system.
K. Fit acoustic units in place, free from damaged edges or defects detrimental to
appearance and function.
1. Lay directionally patterned units one way with pattern as directed.
2. Fit border units neatly against abutting surfaces.
L. Install system level, in uniform plane and free from twist, warp and dents.
M. Install hold-down clips where required by applicable codes and where ceiling is within
20'-0" of an exterior door.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjustment: Adjust sags or twists which develop in ceiling system and replace any
part which is damaged or faulty at contractor’s expense.
END OF SECTION
448
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 65 10 - 1 Resilient Base
SECTION 09 65 10
RESILIENT BASE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide resilient base and accessories as required for complete
finished installation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 68 00: Carpet edge strips.
2. Section 09 68 10: Carpet tile edge strips.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's product literature.
B. Samples: Furnish samples of each base color and type.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives and resilient flooring.
1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Comply with manufacturer recommendations for site conditions but not less than
following; maintain minimum 70-degree F air temperature at installation area for three
days prior to, during, and for 24 hours after installation.
B. Store materials in area of application; allow three days for material to reach same
temperature as area.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Johnsonite, Inc.
B. Burke Flooring, Division of Burke Industries.
C. Roppe Rubber Corporation.
D. Tarkett
E. As indicated on finish plan/schedule.
F. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
449
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 65 10 - 2 Resilient Base
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide resilient base and accessories as required for complete
finished installation.
B. Performance Requirements: Provide materials tested under ASTM E648, Flooring
Radiant Panel Test, with results of 0.45 watts/sq. cm or higher.
C. Resilient Base: Conform to ASTM F1861, with premolded end stops and external
corners; 1/8" gage; provide coved base at hard floor surfaces, straight base at carpet
unless otherwise indicated.
1. Type: Molded rubber, available in 4’ lengths.
2. Type: Extruded rubber, in rolls.
3. Type: Vinyl base.
4. Height: 4" unless otherwise indicated.
5. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide
custom color as directed by Architect.
D. Primers and Adhesives: Water-resistant nontoxic types recommended by base
manufacturer for specified material and application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Apply to walls, columns, pilasters, casework, and areas where base is required.
1. Fit base joints tight and vertical.
2. Maintain minimum measurement of 18" between joints.
B. Miter internal corners; use molded sections for external corners and exposed ends.
C. Install base on solid backing, adhere tightly to wall and floor surfaces; fill voids along
top edge of base with manufacturer's recommended adhesive filler.
D. Scribe and fit to door frames and other obstructions.
E. Install straight and level to variation of plus or minus 1/8" over 10'-0".
3.2 CLEAN-UP
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces without causing damage.
B. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
450
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 65 20 - 1 Resilient Tile Flooring
SECTION 09 65 20
RESILIENT TILE FLOORING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide resilient tile flooring and accessories as required for
complete finished installation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 65 10: Resilient base.
2. Section 09 68 00: Carpet edge strips.
3. Section 09 68 10: Carpet tile edge strips.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's product literature.
B. Samples: Furnish samples of each type of flooring color and pattern.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives and resilient flooring.
1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Ensure floor surfaces are smooth and flat with maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0".
B. Ensure concrete floors are dry and exhibit negative alkalinity, carbonizing, and
dusting.
C. Maintain minimum 70-degree F air temperature at flooring installation area for three
days prior to, during, and for 24 hours after installation.
D. Store flooring materials in area of application; allow three days for material to reach
same temperature as area.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Tarkett Inc/Azrock.
B. Burke Mercer.
C. Johnsonite, Inc.
451
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 65 20 - 2 Resilient Tile Flooring
D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide resilient tile flooring and accessories.
B. Regulatory Requirements, Flammability: Provide materials tested under ASTM E648,
Flooring Radiant Panel Test, with results of 0.45 watts/sq cm or higher.
C. Regulatory Requirements, Slip-Resistance:
1. Slip-Resistant Hard Surfaces: Hard surface finishes to comply with requirements
of authorities having jurisdiction for slip-resistant hard surfaces, including general
code requirements and requirements for access for persons with disabilities.
D. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): 12" by 12" by 1/8" thick; vinyl composition tile
conforming to ASTM F1066, Composition 1.
1. Colors: Per Finish Schedule
E. Vinyl Composition Tile (VCT): 12" by 12" by 1/8" thick; vinyl composition tile
conforming to ASTM F1066
1. Static Dissipative type. Color per finish schedule
F. Edge Strips: Homogeneous vinyl or rubber, tapered or bullnose edge, color as
selected by Architect.
G. Sub-Floor Filler: White premixed latex-cement paste designed for providing thin solid
surface for leveling and minor ramping of subsurface to adjacent floor finishes.
1. Use material capable of being applied and feathered out to adjacent floor without
spalling.
H. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof nontoxic types as recommended by flooring
manufacturer for specified material and application.
I. Sealer and Wax: Type recommended by flooring manufacturer for material type and
location.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Conform to manufacturer's recommendations for preparation and to ASTM F710.
B. Remove sub-floor ridges and bumps; fill low spots, cracks, joints, holes and defects
with sub-floor filler.
C. Clean floor and apply, trowel and float filler to leave smooth, flat hard surface; prohibit
traffic until filler is cured.
452
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 65 20 - 3 Resilient Tile Flooring
D. Test substrate for moisture content in accordance with flooring manufacturer
recommendations; where moisture content exceeds recommendations take measures
recommended by flooring manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Conform to manufacturer recommendations and installation instructions.
1. Open floor tile cartons, enough to cover each area, and mix tile to ensure shade
variations do not occur within any one area.
B. Spread cement evenly in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure adhesion
over entire area of installation; spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of
flooring before initial set.
C. Set flooring in place using methods to ensure full adhesion.
D. Lay flooring with joints parallel to building lines to produce symmetrical pattern.
E. Install minimum 1/2 tile at room and area perimeter.
F. Terminate resilient flooring at centerline of door openings where adjacent floor finish
is dissimilar.
G. Install edge strips at unprotected and exposed edges.
H. Scribe flooring to walls, columns, floor outlets and other appurtenances, to produce
tight joints.
I. Consult with Architect for floor pattern desired in each area.
J. Edge Strips: Install where edge of tile would otherwise be exposed; butt to flooring
without gaps; set in adhesive.
3.3 CLEAN-UP AND PROTECTION
A. Remove excess adhesive from floor, base and wall surfaces without causing damage.
B. Clean, seal and wax floor surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Prohibit traffic from floor for 48 hours after installation.
END OF SECTION
453
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 68 00 - 1 Carpeting
SECTION 09 68 00
CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide carpeting, adhered directly to substrate, with accessories,
including edge strips where carpeting terminates at other floor finishes, for complete
finished installation.
1. Provide rubber nosing at treads and landings with accessories as required for
complete installation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 65 10: Resilient base for carpeted areas.
2. Section 09 68 10: Tile carpeting.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature for carpet and accessories.
B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate location of seams, method of joining seams, carpet
pile direction, adhesives to be used, integrating edge strips with carpet, and
installation procedures.
C. Samples: Furnish samples of each type, color and pattern of carpet and edge strip.
1. Submit production sample prior to manufacture of custom colors.
2. Submit finished carpet sample prior to installation.
3. Submit sample of resilient nosing at carpet stairs.
D. Certificate of Compliance: Provide manufacturer's certificate of compliance stating
each material delivered conforms to Specifications.
E. Maintenance Recommendations: Prior to final acceptance of carpet installation,
furnish carpet manufacturer's detailed maintenance recommendations for care,
cleaning and repair of carpets installed.
F. Extra Materials: Roll excess carpet on separate rolls for each type and size; label rolls
to identify type, width, length, and locations installed.
1. Wrap and deliver unused portions greater than 2'-0" square and more than 12" wide.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to finish material pollution control for carpet systems, carpet cushion, and
adhesives.
454
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 68 00 - 2 Carpeting
B. Installer Qualifications: Approved by carpet manufacturer; upon request, submit letter
from carpet manufacturer stating installer is acceptable.
C. Mock-Up: Provide not less than 100 sf mock-up of each type of carpet installation at
location as approved by Architect. Approved mock-up may be incorporated into
Project.
1.4 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Do not commence carpet installation until painting and finishing work is complete and
ceiling and other overhead work has been tested, approved and completed, unless
specifically approved.
B. Maintain room temperature at minimum 60 degrees F for at least 24 hours prior to
installation; relative humidity shall be approximately that at which the area is to be
maintained.
C. Schedule, receive, and place carpet on floors indicated; protect from soiling and
damage during transit, storage, and installation.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for promptly repairing or replacing carpet which
exhibits evidence of defective materials or workmanship.
1. Repairs: Make repairs within ten days of Owner's written notification.
2. Period: Two years.
B. Manufacturer’s Warranty: Submit manufacturer’s lifetime warranty that carpet will lose
no more than 10% weight of face yarn, and will not ravel, delaminate, or zipper.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Bentley (Basis of Design)
B. Manufacturers listed on Finish Schedule.
C. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide carpeting with accessories, including edge strips where
carpeting terminates at other floor finishes.
B. Regulatory Requirements, Flammability: Carpet shall have passed following tests.
1. DOC-FF-1-70: Pass.
2. ASTM E662 (Smoke Developed): 450 or less.
455
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 68 00 - 3 Carpeting
3. ASTM E648 or NFPA 253 (Flooring Radiant Panel Test): 0.45 or higher.
C. Design Criteria: Provide carpet materials that bear Carpet and Rug Institute “Green
Label Plus”.
D. Performance Criteria: Carpet shall develop less than 3.0 kilovolts of static at 70-
degrees F and 20% relative humidity.
E. Carpet: Types as indicated on Finish Schedule; where not otherwise indicated types
as selected by Architect based on following criteria.
1. Type: Dense tufted level loop pile carpet.
2. Yarn: Type 6.6 or later generation continuous filament soil hiding nylon.
3. Face Weight: 24 to 26 oz/sy as directed by Architect.
4. Face Weight: 28 to 30 oz/sy as directed by Architect.
5. Face Weight: 32 to 34 oz/sy as directed by Architect.
6. Backing: Polypropylene.
7. Antimicrobial Treatment: Provide to inhibit growth of bacteria, mold, and mildew.
8. Soil-Resistant Treatment: Manufacturer’s standard integral stain resistance.
9. Carpet shall have no latex backing materials.
10. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide
custom color as directed by Architect.
F. Adhesive: Nontoxic type recommended by carpet and underlay manufacturers to suit
application and expected service.
G. Leveling and Ramping Material: Latex-cement material designed for providing thin
solid surface for leveling and minor ramping of subsurface to adjacent floor finishes.
1. Use material capable of being applied and feathered out to adjacent floor without
spalling.
H. Edge Strips: Vinyl or rubber.
1. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide
custom color as directed by Architect.
I. Stair Nosing: Rubber type; minimum 2" exposed surface.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Flexco/No. 73.
b. R.C.A. Rubber/Rubber Carpet Nosing.
c. R.C. Musson/No. 145.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide
custom color as directed by Architect.
J. Accessories: Provide as required for complete finished installation.
456
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 68 00 - 4 Carpeting
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster and other substances
detrimental to proper performance of adhesive and carpet; allow floors to thoroughly dry.
B. Ensure floors are level, with maximum surface variation of 1/4" in 10 feet.
C. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregularities and exhibit neutrality
relative to acidity and alkalinity.
D. Use leveling and ramping material to patch cracks, small holes, leveling and for
ramping to provide finished carpet within 1/2" of adjacent flooring materials.
E. Test substrate for moisture content in accordance with flooring manufacturer
recommendations; where moisture content exceeds recommendations take measures
recommended by flooring manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Adhesive Installation: Prime substrate if required and as recommended by
manufacturer; spread adhesive in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure
proper adhesion over full area of installation.
1. Apply only enough adhesive to permit proper adhesion of carpet before initial set.
B. Install carpet in accordance with carpet manufacturer recommendations and
installation instructions.
1. Check matching of carpet before cutting and ensure there are no visible defects
or variations between dye lots.
2. Lay out rolls of carpet for Architect's approval.
C. Cut carpet, where required, in manner to allow proper seam and pattern match;
ensure cuts are straight, true, and unfrayed.
D. Where possible and practical, locate seams in areas of least amount of traffic; no
seams shall be perpendicular to doors or entries; seams parallel to doors shall be
centered directly under door.
1. Follow wall line parallel to carpet direction for seams occurring at corridor change
of direction.
2. Join seams in recommended manner so as not to detract from appearance of
carpet installation and decrease its life expectancy; ensure seams are straight,
not overlapped or peaked, and free of gaps.
E. Adhesive Installation: Install carpet securely bonded to substrate.
457
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 68 00 - 5 Carpeting
F. Lay carpet with run of pile in direction of anticipated traffic; do not change run of pile
in any one room or from one room to next where continuous through a wall opening.
G. Cut and fit carpet neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other
vertical surfaces.
H. Fit carpet snugly to walls or other vertical surfaces where no base is scheduled,
leaving no gaps.
I. Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpeted surfaces for minimum of 24
hours or until adhesive is set.
J. Lay installation tight and flat to sub-floor, well fastened, and uniform in appearance;
ensure monolithic color, pattern and texture match within any one area.
K. Edging Strips: Install in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and
installation instructions.
1. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings.
2. Use full length pieces only, butt tight to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot
be avoided, butt ends tight and flush.
L. Stair Nosing: Install in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and
installation instructions.
1. Install stair nosing at upper approach and last tread in each run of steps; use full
length pieces only, butt tight to vertical surfaces.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
458
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 68 10 - 1 Tile Carpeting
SECTION 09 68 10
TILE CARPETING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide carpet tile including edge strips where carpeting terminates
at other floor finishes and accessories as required for complete finished installation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 68 00: Broadloom type carpeting.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Prior to final acceptance of carpet tile installation, submit
manufacturer's detailed maintenance recommendations for care, cleaning and repair
of carpet tiles installed.
B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate carpet tile layout, direction of carpet tiles, adhesive
to be used, method of integrating edge strips with carpet tile, and installation
procedures.
C. Samples: Submit samples of each carpet tile type and color, and of each color of
edge strip.
D. Certificate of Compliance: Furnish manufacturer's certificate of compliance stating
each material delivered conforms to Specifications.
E. Maintenance Recommendations: Prior to final acceptance of carpet tile installation,
furnish carpet tile manufacturer's detailed maintenance recommendations for care,
cleaning and repair of carpet tiles installed.
F. Maintenance Materials: Submit unused carpet tiles. Box unused carpet tiles and mark
boxes indicating color and location installed.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to finish material pollution control for carpet systems and adhesives.
B. Installer Qualifications: Firm with minimum five years successful experience in carpet
tile installation and approved by carpet tile manufacturer.
1. Upon request, submit letter from carpet manufacturer stating installer is acceptable.
C. Mock-Up: Provide minimum 12' by 12' mock-up of carpet tile for approval prior to
beginning installation; approved mock-up may be incorporated into finished
installation.
459
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 68 10 - 2 Tile Carpeting
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Do not commence carpet tile installation until painting and finishing work is complete
and ceiling and other overhead work has been tested, approved and completed,
unless specifically approved.
B. Maintain room temperature at minimum 60 degrees F for at least 24 hours prior to
installation; relative humidity shall be approximately that at which area is to be
maintained.
C. Schedule, receive, and place carpet tile on floors indicated; protect from soiling and
damage during transit, storage, and installation.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Provide for promptly making good or replacing defective
materials or workmanship. Repairs shall take place within ten days of written
notification.
1. Period: Two years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Bentley (Basis of Design)
B. Manufacturers listed on Finish Schedule.
C. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide carpet tile including edge strips where carpeting
terminates at other floor finishes and accessories.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Carpet tiles shall have passed following fire and smoke
tests.
1. DOC-FF-1-70: Pass.
2. ASTM E662 (Smoke Developed): 450 or less.
3. ASTM E648 or NFPA 253 (Flooring Radiant Panel Test): 0.45 or higher.
C. Design Criteria: Provide carpet materials that bear Carpet and Rug Institute “Green
Label Plus”.
D. Performance Requirements, Static: Carpet tile shall develop less than 3.0 kilovolts of
static at 70 degrees F and 20 percent relative humidity.
460
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 68 10 - 3 Tile Carpeting
E. Carpet Tile: Types as indicated on Finish Schedule; where carpet tile is not indicated
provide as directed by Architect based on following criteria.
1. Yarn: 6.6 or later generation continuous filament soil hiding nylon.
2. Face Weight: Minimum 30 oz. per square yard.
3. Tile Size: As indicated, as selected by Architect from manufacturer’s full range of
carpet tile sizes where not indicated.
4. Pile Height: Maximum 1/2”.
5. Backing: Integrated polyurethane cushion; no latex backing permitted.
6. Antimicrobial Treatment: Provide to inhibit growth of bacteria, mold, and mildew.
7. Soil-Resistant Treatment: Manufacturer’s standard integral stain resistance.
8. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide
custom color as directed by Architect.
F. Adhesive: Nontoxic type recommended by carpet tile manufacturer to suit application
and expected service.
G. Leveling and Ramping Material: Latex-cement material designed for providing thin
solid surface for leveling and minor ramping of subsurface to adjacent floor finishes.
1. Use material capable of being applied and feathered out to adjacent floor without
spalling.
H. Edge Strips: Vinyl or rubber.
1. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide
custom color as directed by Architect.
I. Accessories: Provide as required for complete finished installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Clean floors of dust, dirt, solvents, oil, grease, paint, plaster and other substances
detrimental to proper performance of adhesive and carpet tile; allow floors to
thoroughly dry.
B. Ensure floors are level, with maximum surface variation of 1/4" in 10 feet.
C. Ensure concrete floors are free from scaling and irregularities and exhibit neutrality
relative to acidity and alkalinity.
D. Use leveling and ramping material to patch cracks, small holes, leveling and for
ramping to provide finished carpet tile within 1/2" of adjacent flooring materials.
461
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 68 10 - 4 Tile Carpeting
E. Test substrate for moisture content in accordance with flooring manufacturer
recommendations; where moisture content exceeds recommendations take measures
recommended by flooring manufacturer.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install carpet tiles in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
installation instructions.
1. Adhere tiles to subfloor unless otherwise approved.
B. Prime substrate if required and as recommended by manufacturer. Spread adhesive
in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure proper adhesion. Apply only
enough adhesive to permit proper adhesion of carpet tile before initial set.
C. Lay carpet tile with run of pile in direction of anticipated traffic; do not change run of pile in
any one room or from one room to next where continuous through a wall opening.
1. Finished installation to provide monolithic carpet tile appearance as approved by
Architect.
D. Cut and fit carpet tile neatly around projections through floor and to walls and other
vertical surfaces.
E. Fit carpet tiles snugly to walls or other vertical surfaces, leaving no gaps.
F. Lay installation tight and flat to subfloor well fastened and uniform in appearance;
ensure monolithic color, pattern and texture match within any one area.
G. Edging Strips: Install in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and
installation instructions.
1. Install edging strips where carpet terminates at other floor coverings.
2. Use full length pieces only, butt tight to vertical surfaces. Where splicing cannot
be avoided, butt ends tight and flush.
H. Do not place heavy objects such as furniture on carpet tiled surfaces for not less than
24 hours or until adhesive is set.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Upon completion of carpet tile installation in each area, visually inspect carpet tile
installed in that area and immediately remove dirt, soil and foreign substance from
exposed face.
B. Clean in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Inspect adjacent surfaces and remove marks and stains caused by carpet tile installation.
D. Remove packaging materials, carpet tile scraps, and other debris from carpet tile
installation.
462
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 68 10 - 5 Tile Carpeting
END OF SECTION
463
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 72 10 - 1 Vinyl-Coated Fabric Wall Covering
SECTION 09 72 10
VINYL-COATED FABRIC WALL COVERING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide adhesive applied vinyl-coated fabric wall coverings with
accessories as required for complete finished installation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 72 20: Fabric Wrapped Acoustical Panels
2. Section 06 20 00: Finish Carpentry
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Federal Specification CCC-W-408: Wall Covering, Vinyl Coated.
B. NSF/ANSI 324: Sustainability Assessment for Wallcovering.
1.3 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Schedule installation of wall covering as late in construction schedule as possible to
prevent damage during construction.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature.
B. Samples: Furnish samples of vinyl wall covering.
C. Maintenance Instructions: Furnish manufacturer's recommended cleaning materials
and application methods, including precautions in use of cleaning materials which
may be detrimental to surfaces.
1.5 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants, and caulks.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store wall covering in clean and dry area where temperatures are maintained at not
less than 40-degrees F with normal humidity.
1. Do not store in upright position.
B. Take precautionary measures with adhesives and solvents to prevent fire hazards.
464
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 72 10 - 2 Vinyl-Coated Fabric Wall Covering
1.7 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Maintain surfaces and materials at minimum 60-degrees F three days before and
during application period.
B. Ensure maximum surface moisture conforms to wall covering manufacturer's
requirements and surface exhibits negative alkalinity.
C. Provide continuous ventilation during work and after installation of wall covering.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers listed on Finish Schedules.
1. Innovations in Wall Covering
B. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide adhesive applied vinyl-coated fabric wall coverings with
accessories.
B. Regulatory Requirements, Fire Ratings:
1. Maximum Flame Spread/Smoke Developed: ASTM E84, 25/450.
2. Corner Burn Test: NFPA 286, pass.
C. Vinyl Wall Covering: Conform to CCC-W-408 Type II, medium duty quality; Class 2
mildew resistant, with cloth backing; paper backing is not acceptable.
1. NSF/ANSI 342: Compliance with NSF/ANSI 342 is acceptable where additional
information is furnished indicating compliance with mildew resistance, and cloth
backing.
2. Innovations in Wall Covering, Color per finish plan.
3. Special Finish: Provide minimum 0.005" thick DuPont/Tedlar finish.
D. Adhesive: Nontoxic type recommended by wall covering manufacturer to suit application
and complying with applicable limitations for volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions.
E. Primer: Provide non-staining, non-toxic release coat primer as recommended by wall
covering manufacturer.
1. Provide primer which allows removal of wall covering from gypsum board without
damaging paper facing of board, and without premature separation of wall
covering from wall.
465
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 72 10 - 3 Vinyl-Coated Fabric Wall Covering
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Ensure surfaces to receive wall covering are clean, true and free of irregularities, do
not commence with work until surfaces are satisfactory.
B. Ensure wall surface flatness tolerance does not vary more than 1/8" in 10'-0", nor
vary at a rate greater than 1/16" per running foot.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. General Substrates: Fill nicks, gouges and other minor imperfections of substrates
with latex filler; sand smooth, flush with surface.
1. Apply prime coat in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Painted Surfaces: Wash down painted surfaces with tri-sodium phosphate, rinse with
clear water; texture glossy surfaces with rough sandpaper for bond then seal; remove
bleeding paint, flaky paint, and wood stain.
3.3 APPLICATION
A. Handle and apply wall covering in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations
and installation instructions.
B. Mix and apply adhesive in accordance with adhesive manufacturer's recommendations.
C. Use panels in exact order as cut from rolls; use rolls in consecutive order as
numbered by manufacturer.
1. Hang smooth, non-match patterns by applying strips on the wall, overlapping the
edges and double cutting through both thicknesses.
2. Patterns and Textures: Where used, trim deeply textures and patterns on a flat
worktable to match textures and patterns from piece to piece.
D. Apply secure, smooth, clean, and without wrinkles, gaps or overlaps; eliminate air
pockets and ensure full bond to wall surface.
E. Horizontal seams and cutting at corners are not acceptable. Cut no closer than 2" of
inside corners and not closer than 6" of outside corners.
F. Fill in spaces above and below windows, above doors and similar areas in sequence
from roll.
G. Remove excess adhesive from each seam before proceeding to next; wipe seam
clean with dry cloth towel.
H. Install wall covering before installation of plumbing, bases, hardware, and similar
accessories.
466
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 72 10 - 4 Vinyl-Coated Fabric Wall Covering
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean wall coverings of adhesives, dust, dirt and other contaminants.
B. Remove debris and leave areas neat and clean.
C. Replace accessories.
END OF SECTION
467
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 77 20 - 1 Fabric Wrapped Panels
SECTION 09 77 20
FABRIC WRAPPED PANELS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide (2) types of fabric wrapped panels including attachment
devices and accessories as required for complete finished installation as specified
below. Class C fire rating for council chamber.
B. Provide fabric wrapped panels in Council area with added diffusion subplate as noted
below providing a rated hole pattern of perforations for 1 dimensional added diffusion
at high frequency. All other panels are hard faced and hard edged absorptive only, no
diffusion subplate unless otherwise noted on plans.
1.2 ADMINISTRATIVE REQUIREMENTS
A. Scheduling: Schedule installation of panels as close to Project completion as possible
to prevent damage during construction and movement of materials.
B. Provide to Prime contractor field and submittal coordination of seams and field
devices as required to ship product in a timely fashion.
C. Provide shop drawings in a timely fashion so as to advance shipping and
procurement lead times. Backordered product due to unapproved or untimely shop
drawings are the responsibility of the acoustic vendor and his field representatives.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s literature including information verifying
compliance with performance requirements.
1. Submit product data sheets with annotated and marked actual model, suffix and
edge profile with dimensions for this specific project site.
a. Do not submit data sheets with multiple names, models, options or
accessories without detailing the exact item to be installed.
b. Keynote or annotate fire ratings of the installed product.
c. Annotate product thickness.
B. All panels shall be tested and rated for acoustic performance by octave band or
spectra in a rated lab condition and noted on the product data sheet.
1. Testing methods for absorption shall be lab tested by ASTM C423 with various
mountings differentiated.
468
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 77 20 - 2 Fabric Wrapped Panels
2. Diffusion subplate is an AES (Audio Engineering Society) test method for random
diffusion, expressed graphically.
3. Absorption with NRC values alone and without octave band data are not
accepted.
C. Shop Drawings: Show panel construction and attachment method on dimensioned
plans. Provide a plan and elevation with actual locations and dimensions noted, that
is coordinated with architectural plans confirming locations, and include:
1. Review electrical device outlets on electrical plans at wall panel locations.
2. Review technology device outlets on technology plans at wall panel locations.
3. Note electrical, technology and AV devices that acoustic panels may cover in
same areas.
a. Note panel for device cutout size and finish dimensions for each device or
location, such as switches, fire devices, AV mounts, video monitors, AV
plates shown on technology plans. Never cover or impede devices.
b. Provide keynotes or as required to coordinate panel cutouts.
c. Dimensioned shop drawings supplied by vendor or manufacturer’s
representative shall be reviewed and approved by the architect prior to
shipping.
D. Samples: Furnish each type of fabric.
1. Furnish corner profile of panel indicating construction, typically 1 ft2 minimum.
E. Maintenance Instructions: Furnish for each fabric.
1. Include recommended cleaning materials and application methods, including
precautions for cleaning materials that may be detrimental to surfaces if
improperly applied.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store fabric panels in clean and dry area where temperatures are maintained at
minimum 40 degrees F with normal humidity. Prevent changes in humidity that
expose fabric and adhesives to release.
B. Maintain surfaces and materials at minimum 60 degrees F for three days before and
during application period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Kinetics Noise Control- Basis of Design (High Impact HardSide).
469
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 77 20 - 3 Fabric Wrapped Panels
B. Real Acoustics equal to above
C. RPG Products equal to above
D. Sound Seal equal to above
E. Provide 2.1 inch thick panels unless specifically noted otherwise on Schedule or
plans.
F. Manufacturers listed on Finish Schedule for Council Dais wall are limited to diffusion
panels with diffusion substrate added:
1. Kinetics Noise Control #T.A.D. (Tuned Acoustic Diffusion)
2. RPG Product # B.A.D (Binaural Acoustic Diffusion)
3. Real Acoustics Diffusion panel.
4. Diffusion panels shall be ½ holes on 1/8 inch thick subplate directly under fabric
that allow increased high frequency diffusion and less absorption as a variable
impedance response with random mid and high frequency diffusion. Hole pattern
shall be software selected and optimized.
a. Peak absorption shall be centered at 400 Hz. Octave.
b. Diffusion shall be effective from 800 Hz. To 5,000 Hz.
G. All panels shall be tested and rated for acoustic performance in a rate lab or NVLAP
lab test condition stated on the product data sheet.
1. 2.1 inch A mount NRC value is greater than 1.00
2. Octave band absorption (125-4,000 Hz):
a. 0.44 0.75 > 1.00 >1.00 >1.00 >1.00
H. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide fabric wrapped panels including attachment devices and
accessories with a two-part composite face for high abuse and durability.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Flame Spread/Smoke Developed maximum 25/450 when
tested in accordance with ASTM E84.
C. Panels: Manufacturer's standard fabric wrapped panel system.
1. Core: Fiberglass core with chemically hardened edges and added 1/8 inch face
on top for high density to resist top and edge damage;
2. Minimum 6-7 lb/cu. ft. fiberglass core density.
470
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 77 20 - 4 Fabric Wrapped Panels
3. Wrap fabric at edges to provide trim less edges.
4. For Council front room walls, diffusion subplate with AES tested hard profile.
Subplate shall only reside directly below fabric, never inside the core.
D. Fabric: As indicated: Basis of Design: Guilford of Maine, FR-701, #Silver Papier
538
E. Panel Fasteners: Manufacturer's standard concealed metallic fastener system.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Secure fabric to panels without wrinkles, gaps, seams or overlaps. Panels shall be
inspected before shipping for same.
B. Table square fabrics to provide completed panels with fabric yarns square and plumb.
C. Provide only dimensionally straight, tight, and uniform seams and edges.
D. Bond fabric to panel uniformly and consistently to avoid puckering, dimples or gaps.
E. Tailor corners to maintain fabric flat and even.
F. Completed Panels: Dimensionally stable fabric wrapped panel system.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION
A. Ensure wall surfaces to receive panels are clean, true and free of irregularities.
B. Ensure all panels are delivered in factory cartons within a humidity controlled, clean
and dry room, no exception.
C. Ensure wall surface flatness tolerance does not vary more than 1/8" in 10'-0", nor
vary at a rate greater than 1/16" per running foot.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Handle and apply panels in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and
installation instructions.
B. Attach clip or magnetic system in accordance with panel manufacturer's
recommendations and installation instructions. Secure to walls as indicated.
C. Apply panels level and true. Panels with dimples, cuts loose fabric or sags shall be
rejected and replaced immediately upon receipt to the site.
471
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/05/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 77 20 - 5 Fabric Wrapped Panels
3.3 CLEANING
A. Remove debris and leave areas neat and clean.
B. Replace damaged and defective panels at contractor’s expense.
END OF SECTION
472
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 90 00 - 1 Painting and Coating
SECTION 09 90 00
PAINTING AND COATING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide painting and finishing of exposed items and surfaces
requiring field painting and finishing including shop primed items.
1. Specified surface preparation, priming and coats of paint are in addition to shop-
priming and surface treatment specified under other sections of work.
2. Painting and finishing include field finishing of exterior and interior items not listed
as "Surfaces not to be Painted" unless clearly indicated otherwise.
3. Painting and finishing include field finishing of select shop finished items such as
mechanical grilles and registers and shop primed items such as access panels
and louvers in doors, to match adjacent surfaces.
a. Match adjacent surfaces in color and sheen unless otherwise indicated.
4. Field paint exposed bare and covered pipes, ducts, and hangers, exposed steel
and iron work, and primed metal surfaces of equipment installed under
mechanical and electrical work in occupied spaces.
5. Wood Doors: Contractor option to factory finish or field finish, coordinate with
Section 08 14 00 - Wood Doors.
B. Surfaces Not to be Painted:
1. Finished items including finished metal surfaces.
2. Walls and ceilings in concealed areas and generally inaccessible areas.
3. Moving parts of operating mechanical and electrical units.
4. Labels: Keep equipment identification and fire rating labels free of paint.
5. Plastic smoke stops and weather-stripping at doors.
C. Related Sections: Shop priming of ferrous metal items is included under various
Specification sections.
1. Section 06 40 00: Shop finishing of architectural woodwork.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical information, including paint label
analysis and application instructions for each material.
473
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 90 00 - 2 Painting and Coating
B. Samples: Submit samples for review of color and texture; provide list of material and
application for each coat of each finish sample.
1. Brush-Outs: Submit samples of each color and material with texture to simulate
actual conditions, on hardboard.
a. Submit 8" square samples of wood finishes on actual wood surfaces; label
and identify each as to location and application.
2. Field Samples: Duplicate painted finishes of approved samples on actual wall
surfaces and components for approval prior to commencing work.
a. Size: Minimum 100 sf located where approved.
1) Provide on building mock ups for each exterior color type indicated on
elevations. Provide 4 alternate colors for each. (approximately 20
unique colors.) Architect to provide color selection during construction.
C. Manufacturer Certificates: Furnish certificates from each manufacturer stating
materials are top quality lines and suitable for intended use on this Project.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to finish material pollution control for paints and coatings.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver materials to job site in original, new and unopened packages and containers
bearing manufacturer's name and label, with:
1. Name of material, color and sheen.
2. Manufacturer's name, stock number and date of manufacture.
3. Contents by volume, for major pigment and vehicle constituents.
4. Thinning and application instructions.
1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Apply water-base paints when temperature of surfaces and surrounding air are
between 50 and 90-degrees F.
B. Do not apply paint in rain, fog or mist; or when relative humidity exceeds 85 percent;
or to damp or wet surfaces.
C. Painting may be continued during inclement weather if areas to be painted are
enclosed and heated within temperature limits specified.
D. Provide additional temporary ventilation during interior application of paints to eliminate
volatile organic compound (VOC) emissions from interior spaces as quickly as possible.
474
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 90 00 - 3 Painting and Coating
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Sherwin-Williams Co.
B. Pittsburgh Paints, PPG
C. Dunn-Edwards Corp.
D. Vista Paint Co.
E. Varathane
F. Minwax
G. Cabot
H. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide painting and finishing of exposed items and surfaces
requiring field painting and finishing including shop primed items.
1. Definition: "Painting" and “coating” as used herein means systems including primers,
emulsions, enamels, stains, sealers and fillers, whether used as prime, intermediate
or finish coats.
B. Regulatory Requirements:
1. Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Emissions: Furnish materials approved for
use by applicable air quality management district for limitations of volatile organic
compounds for architectural or special coatings as applicable.
2. California Stair Stripes: Paint 2" stripes at stair nosing not otherwise marked, full
tread and landing width, in accordance with California Code of Regulations,
Title 24, Access Compliance requirements.
a. Interior Stairs: Provide at landing and last tread at each stair run.
C. Material Quality: Provide top line quality commercial grade (professional painter)
paints; materials not bearing manufacturer's identification as their top line product
shall not be acceptable.
1. Primers: Provide premium grade primers recommended by paint manufacturer
for substrates indicated and for finish systems specified.
2. Undercoats and Barrier Coats: Provide undercoat paints produced by same
manufacturer as finish coats; use only thinners approved by paint manufacturer
and use only within recommended limits.
475
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 90 00 - 4 Painting and Coating
3. Finish Coats: Provide finish coats capable of being washed with mild detergent
without loss of color, sheen, or pigments.
a. Color pigments: Pure, non-fading, applicable types to suit substrates and
service indicated; no lead content permitted.
4. Finish Coat Coordination: Provide finish coats which are compatible with prime
paints, undercoats, and barrier coats used.
a. Review other Specification sections in which prime paints are provided;
ensure compatibility of total coatings systems.
b. Upon request from other trades furnish information on characteristics of
finish materials proposed for use.
c. Provide barrier coats over incompatible primers or remove and prime as
required.
d. Notify Architect in writing of any anticipated problems in use of specified
coating systems with substrates primed by others.
D. Colors and Finishes: Prior to commencement of painting work, Architect will furnish
color chips for surfaces to be painted.
1. Use of proprietary names in color selection is not intended to imply exclusion of
equivalent products of other manufacturers.
2. Final acceptance of colors will be from samples applied on site.
3. Colors: Where color is not indicated on Drawings or Finish Schedule, provide
custom color as directed by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Inspection: Examine areas and conditions under which painting work is to be applied.
1. Start of painting work indicates acceptance of surfaces and conditions of
surfaces and conditions within any area.
2. Where exposed items or surfaces are not specifically mentioned in Schedules,
paint same as adjacent similar materials or areas.
3. Do not paint over dirt, rust, scale, grease, moisture, scuffed surfaces, or
conditions detrimental to a durable paint film.
B. Perform preparation and cleaning procedures in accordance with paint
manufacturer's instructions and as specified for substrate condition.
1. Existing Painted Finishes:
476
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 90 00 - 5 Painting and Coating
a. Clean existing painted surfaces and remove oil, grease, dust, stains, scale,
efflorescence, mildew, mold, algae, blisters, and non-adhering paint.
b. Via Powerwash and other means, remove all organic material from building
attached vines.
c. Measure adhesion of existing paints using ASTM D3359 tape test; remove
existing coatings where poor adhesion is indicated.
d. Feather edges of severely deteriorated paint where several coats are
removed as part of cleaning, to provide smooth transition for new paint.
e. Fill holes, cracks, and defects and fill and sand smooth, ready for new paint
finish.
C. Remove hardware, accessories, and items in place and not to be painted, or provide
protection prior to surface preparation and painting; after painting reinstall removed items.
D. Clean surfaces before applying paint; remove oil and grease prior to mechanical
cleaning; program cleaning so contaminants from cleaning process do not fall onto
wet, newly painted surfaces.
E. Cementitious Materials: Prepare by removing efflorescence, chalk, dirt, grease, oils,
and by roughening as required to remove glaze.
1. Determine alkalinity and moisture content of surfaces to be painted.
2. If surfaces are found to be sufficiently alkaline to cause blistering and burning of
finish paint, neutralize before application of paint.
3. Do not paint over surfaces where moisture content exceeds manufacturer's
printed directions.
F. Wood: Clean wood surfaces of dirt, oil, and other foreign substances; sandpaper
smooth surfaces exposed to view and dust off.
1. Scrape and clean seasoned knots and apply thin coat of recommended knot
sealer, before application of priming coat.
2. Prime, stain, or seal wood required to be job-painted immediately upon delivery
to job; prime edges, ends, faces, undersides, and backsides of wood.
3. After priming, fill holes and imperfections in finish surfaces with putty or plastic
wood-filler; sandpaper smooth when dry.
G. Ferrous Metals: Touch up shop-applied prime coats wherever damaged using same
type of primer as applied in shop or barrier coat compatible with finish paint.
1. Bare Surfaces: Clean surfaces that are not galvanized or shop-coated, of oil, dirt,
loose mill scale and other foreign substances by solvent or mechanical cleaning.
477
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 90 00 - 6 Painting and Coating
2. Galvanized Surfaces: Clean free of oil and surface contaminants, using non-
petroleum-based solvent; primer and touch-up primer to be zinc-rich primer.
H. Mix painting materials in accordance with manufacturer's directions.
I. Store materials in tightly covered containers; maintain containers used in storage, mixing
and application of paint in a clean condition, free of foreign materials and residue.
J. Stir materials before application to produce mixture of uniform density and stir as
required during application; do not stir surface film into material, if necessary, strain
material before using.
3.2 APPLICATION
A. Apply paint in accordance with manufacturer's directions; use applicators and
techniques best suited for substrate and type of material being applied.
1. Apply additional coats when stains or blemishes show through final coat, until
paint is a uniform finish, color and appearance.
2. Provide extra attention during application to assure dry film thickness at corners
and crevices is equivalent to that of flat surfaces.
3. Paint surfaces behind movable equipment and furniture same as similar exposed
surfaces; paint surfaces behind permanently fixed equipment and furniture with
prime coat only.
4. Finish doors on tops, bottoms and side edges same as faces.
5. Paint back sides of access panels and removable or hinged covers to match
exposed surfaces.
6. Paint interior surfaces of ducts, where visible through registers or grilles, with a
flat, non-specular black paint.
7. Sand lightly between coats when recommended by system manufacturer.
B. Scheduling Painting: Apply first coat to surfaces that have been cleaned, pretreated
or prepared for painting as soon as practicable after preparation.
1. Allow time between successive coatings to permit proper drying.
2. Do not recoat until paint feels firm and does not deform or feel sticky under
moderate thumb pressure.
C. Minimum Coating Thickness: Apply materials at not less than manufacturer's
recommended spreading rate, to establish a total dry film thickness as recommended
by coating manufacturer.
D. Prime Coats: Apply to items not previously primed; recoat primed and sealed
surfaces where there is evidence of suction spots or unsealed areas in first coat.
478
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 90 00 - 7 Painting and Coating
E. Finish Coats: Provide even texture; leave no laps, irregularity in texture, skid marks,
or other surface imperfections.
1. Opaque Finishes: Provide opaque, uniform finish, color and coverage;
cloudiness, spotting, holidays, brush marks, runs, sags, ropiness, and other
surface imperfections are not acceptable.
2. Transparent and Stained Finishes: Produce glass smooth surface film of even
luster; provide with no cloudiness, color irregularity, runs, brush marks, orange
peel, nail holes, and other surface imperfections.
3.3 Completed Work: Match approved samples for color, texture and coverage; remove,
refinish or repaint work not accepted, at contractor’s expense.
3.4 PAINTING SCHEDULE
A. Exterior Work: Provide following paint systems and sheens unless otherwise indicated.
1. Metal: Semigloss sheen.
a. 1st Coat: Touch-up primer, prime if none.
b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Exterior 100% acrylic enamel.
2. Concrete: Flat sheen.
a. 1st and 2nd Coat: Exterior acrylic latex emulsion.
3. Plaster: Flat sheen.
a. 1st and 2nd Coat: Heavy body vapor permeable waterproof elastomeric
acrylic coating.
4. Concrete Masonry Units: Flat sheen.
a. 1st Coat: Surface filler.
b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Heavy body waterproof acrylic emulsion.
c. Apply filler at rate to ensure coverage with pores filled.
5. Traffic Line Paint: Manufacturer's standard sheen; colors as required by line or
symbol; blue for handicapped parking spaces.
a. 1st and 2nd Coat: Water based acrylic/epoxy traffic line paint; other systems
subject to prior approval by Architect.
A. Interior Work: Provide following paint systems and sheens unless otherwise indicated.
1. Gypsum Board Systems: Eggshell (satin) sheen at walls, flat sheen at ceilings,
semigloss sheen at toilet rooms.
a. 1st Coat: Universal primer.
b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Interior latex or acrylic latex emulsion.
479
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 90 00 - 8 Painting and Coating
2. Metal: Semigloss sheen.
a. 1st Coat: Touch-up primer, prime if none.
b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: 100% acrylic enamel.
3. Opaque Finished Wood: Semigloss sheen.
a. 1st Coat: Primer undercoat.
b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: 100% acrylic enamel.
4. Stained Wood: Satin rubbed sheen.
a. 1st Coat: Wood stain.
b. 2nd Coat: Sanding sealer.
c. 3rd and 4th Coat: Acrylic modified urethane.
d. Fill open grained wood with filler and wipe before 2nd coat.
5. Transparent Finished Wood: Satin rubbed sheen.
a. 1st Coat: Bleached shellac.
b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Acrylic modified urethane rubbing varnish.
c. Fill open grained wood with filler and wipe before 1st coat.
6. Concrete: Flat sheen.
a. 1st Coat: Primer sealer.
b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Interior latex emulsion.
7. Plaster: Eggshell (satin) sheen at walls, flat sheen at ceilings, semigloss sheen at
toilet rooms.
a. 1st Coat: Latex primer-sealer.
b. 2nd and 3rd Coat: Interior acrylic latex emulsion.
B. Sheens: Comply with ASTM D523, reflectance of paint.
1. Flat: 1-10.
2. Satin: 15-30.
3. Eggshell: 30-45.
4. Semigloss: 45-75.
5. Gloss: 75-100.
3.2 CLEAN-UP, PROTECTION, AND REPAIR
A. Clean-Up: During progress of work, remove discarded paint materials, rubbish, cans
and rags from site at end of each workday.
1. Clean glass and paint-spattered surfaces immediately by proper methods of
washing and scraping, using care not to scratch or damage finished surfaces.
480
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
09 90 00 - 9 Painting and Coating
B. Protection: Protect work of other trades, whether to be painted or not; correct damage
by cleaning, repairing or replacing, and repainting, as acceptable to Architect.
1. Provide "Wet Paint" signs to protect newly painted finishes.
2. Remove temporary protective wrappings provided by others for protection of their
work, after completion of painting operations.
C. Repair: At completion of work of other trades, touch-up and restore damaged
surfaces or defaced painted surfaces.
END OF SECTION
481
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
10 14 00 - 1 Signage
SECTION 10 14 00
SIGNAGE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide general signage as indicated complete with attachment
devices and accessories as required for complete installation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 90 00: Traffic line paint.
2. Section 10 44 00: Fire extinguisher cabinet graphics.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature and indicate each sign type, style,
color, and method of attachment.
B. Shop Drawings: Furnish listing of sign types, lettering and locations, along with
dimensions of each sign.
1. Computerized Output: Furnish computerized samples of signs and graphics at
full scale duplicating final appearance.
2. Dimensional Letter Signs: Furnish complete shop drawings regarding fabrication
and method of attachment of dimension letter signs.
3. Photoluminescent Egress Path Signage: Submit complete shop drawings
indicating locations of luminous egress path markings and signage.
C. Samples: Furnish full size samples where requested.
D. Certification: Furnish manufacturer certification that photoluminescent egress path
markings and signage conform to California Building Code requirements.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Package separately or in like groups of names, labeled as to names enclosed;
include installation template, attachment system and installation instructions.
482
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
10 14 00 - 2 Signage
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Brandex: www.brandexmedia.com
B. ASI Modulex, ASI Sign Systems, Inc.
C. Mohawk Sign Systems.
D. Vomar Products, Inc.
E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide signage as indicated with attachment devices and
accessories.
B. Regulatory Requirements: Provide signs for assuring access for persons with
disabilities in accordance with state and federal regulations.
1. California Regulations: Comply with California Building Code.
2. Federal Regulations: Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards.
C. Dimensional Letter Signage: Provide individual letter signs as indicated. (deferred
approval)
1. Aluminum: Manufacturer's standard for individual letter signs.
a. Finish: Clear anodized finish, AA-M12C22A41, Class I, AAMA 607.1.
2. Fabrication: Fabricate dimensional letters as indicated, of minimum 0.25" plate or
casting with edges and corners smooth and finished to match adjacent metal
finishes.
3. Attachment: Secure letters using connections concealed after installation;
method subject to Architect approval.
a. Take care back welding does not damage exposed sign surfaces.
D. Toilet Room Door Signs: Provide door signs conforming to California requirements for
signs for toilet rooms; concealed mounting system.
1. Material, Plastic: Manufacturer’s standard colored plastic/photopolymer signs.
a. Texture: Smooth.
b. Colors: background color: white at existing doors, tbd at new doors.
1) Shall contrast with door color as required by code, contractor to verify.
483
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
10 14 00 - 3 Signage
2. Total Thickness: 0.25".
3. Provide signs required by California Code of Regulations Title 24.
a. Men's Room: 12" equilateral triangle, vertex pointing up.
b. Ladies' Room: 12" diameter circle.
c. Unisex Toilet: 12" diameter circle with equilateral triangle, vertex pointing up,
superimposed on the circle; circle and triangle each 0.25" thick.
1) Colors: background color: white at existing doors, tbd at new doors.
Shall contrast with door color as required by code, contractor to verify.
4. Symbols: As selected from manufacturer's standard symbols.
5. Adhesive: Type as recommended by sign manufacturer for type of substrate involved.
E. Toilet Room Wall Signs: Provide signs conforming to California Building Code and
ADA Standards for signs for permanent rooms, with inset symbols and with raised
and Braille characters; concealed mounting system.
1. Material, Plastic: Manufacturer’s standard colored plastic/photopolymer signs.
a. Texture: Smooth.
2. Colors: as indicated on details
3. Material: Plastic: Manufacturer’s standard colored plastic/photopolymer signs.
4. Comply with California Building Code and ADA Standards for raised and Braille
characters, pictorial symbols, finish, and contrasts requirements.
F. Entry Decals: Provide minimum 6" square decals with international handicapped
symbol white on blue background with white border, applied to glass at accessible
entry doors of existing buildings where all entry doors are not accessible.
G. Stairway Signs: Provide colored plastic/photopolymer signs in stairways, conforming
to California Building Standards Code, Section 1022.9.
1. Lettering: Type as required by CBC.
2. Colors, Size, and Style: Conform to referenced code requirements and as
approved by Architect.
a. Colors: as indicated in details
3. Information: Identify stairway, indicate whether there is roof access, floor level,
and upper and lower terminus of stairway, and story of and direction to exit
discharge.
484
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
10 14 00 - 4 Signage
4. Provide raised five-pointed star located to left of identifying floor level at exit
discharge level.
5. Provide Floor Identification Signs required by CBC including both tactile and
Braille sign.
H. Porcelain Signs at Parking: Provide porcelain enamel on steel sign with beaded text
and symbols meeting requirements of California Building Standards Code and with
ADA Standards.
1. At entry to parking provide state required sign indicating unauthorized vehicles
parking in accessible parking spaces may be towed at owner's expense using
exact wording required by CBC.
2. Verify location and telephone number of location vehicle is to be towed with
Owner; place this information as permanent part of sign wording.
3. At parking spaces provide California required reflectorized sign, minimum 70 sq.
inches, with symbol indicating accessibility.
4. At van accessible parking spaces provide required "VAN PARKING" signs.
I. Tactile Exit Door Signs: Provide colored plastic/photopolymer signs, conforming to
California Building Code Section 10006 and ADA Standards for signs for permanent
rooms, with tactile raised and Braille characters; concealed mounting system.
1. Colors: as indicated.
2. Size and Style: As indicated on Drawings.
J. Room Identification and Direction Signs: Provide signs conforming to California and
ADA Standards for permanent signs, total thickness 0.125"; provide raised and Braille
characters conforming to California and ADA Standards; concealed mounting.
1. Material, Plastic: Manufacturer’s standard colored plastic/photopolymer signs.
a. Texture: Smooth.
2. Colors: as indicated
K. Vinyl Signs and Graphics: Computer design vinyl signs and graphics to designs and
criteria established by Architect.
a. Vinyl: Opaque non-reflective vinyl film, minimum 0.0035" thick, with pressure
sensitive adhesive backing suitable for applications indicated; match
3M/Scotchcal Vinyl Film.
2. Colors: as indicated or selected from manufacturer’s standard colors.
485
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
10 14 00 - 5 Signage
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General: Install signs in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and
installation instructions, free from distortions and defects.
B. Dimensional Letter Signage: Locate dimensional letters with spacing based on full-
size computer-generated installation drawings secured to structure as required to
resist anticipated loads.
1. Final Location: As approved in field by Architect based on full size drawings.
C. Toilet Room Door Signs: Install signs on doors after doors are painted and finished.
1. Location: Mount signs with centerline of sign between 58" and 60" height as
required by applicable code.
2. Install centered and level, in line, in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations.
3. Clean and polish, remove excess adhesive.
D. Toilet Room Wall Signs: Install signs on walls after surfaces on which they are to be
mounted are painted and finished.
1. Location: Mount signs at 48" to 60" height as required by applicable codes on
strike side of door.
2. Location: Mount signs with tactile characters 48" minimum (baseline of lowest
Braille cells) and 60" maximum (baseline of highest line of raised characters)
above finished floor and with on strike side of door for room identification signs
as required by applicable codes, at heights indicated on details.
3. Install level, in line, in accordance with California Building Code and ADA
Standards to allow a person to approach within 3" of signs without being within a
door swing and without encountering protruding objects.
4. Clean and polish, remove excess adhesive.
E. Entry Signs: Install in locations as approved by Architect.
F. Stair Signs: Install signs inside stairwell after walls are finished, at locations
immediately adjacent to door on strike side as required by referenced code, readily
visible when door is open.
1. Location: Mount signs at 48" to 60" height as required by applicable codes.
G. Parking Signs: Provide mounting hardware, including painted posts, as needed;
mount signs at heights required by state code.
1. Install parking entry sign at location as directed by Architect.
486
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
10 14 00 - 6 Signage
H. Tactile Exit Door Signs: Install at doors with lighted “EXIT” signs; apply after walls are
finished.
1. Location: Mount signs at 48" to 60" height as required by applicable codes on
strike side of door.
2. Install level, in line, in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and
ADA Standards to allow a person to approach within 3" of signs without being
within a door swing and without encountering protruding objects.
3. Clean and polish, remove excess adhesive.
I. Room Identification and Direction Signs: Install signs after walls are finished.
1. Location: Mount signs at 48" to 60" height as required by applicable codes on strike
side of door for room identification signs, where indicated for direction signs.
2. Room Identification Signs Location: Mount signs with tactile characters 48"
minimum (baseline of lowest Braille cells) and 60" maximum (baseline of highest
line of raised characters) above finished floor and with on strike side of door for
room identification signs and where indicated for directional signs.
3. Install signs level, in line, in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations, California Building Code and ADA Standards.
4. Install room identification signs at doors to allow a person to approach within 3" of
signs without being within a door swing and without encountering protruding objects.
5. Clean and polish, remove excess adhesive.
J. Applied Copy Signs and Graphics: Examine surfaces and construction for conditions
adversely affecting installation, performance and quality of work.
1. Apply signage and graphics centered and level, in line, in accordance with
manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION
487
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
10 21 20 - 1 Phenolic Toilet Compartments
SECTION 10 21 20
PHENOLIC TOILET COMPARTMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide phenolic plastic partitions for toilet compartments including
hardware, attachment devices, and integral accessories as required for complete
installation.
1. Urinal Screens: Provide wall mounted phenolic plastic partitions for urinal
screens including attachment hardware for complete finished installation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 10 28 00: Toilet accessories.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards.
B. California Building Code: California Code of Regulations, Title 24, Part 2,
requirements for providing accessibility for persons with disabilities.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.
B. Shop Drawings: Clearly indicate partition layouts, swing of doors, elevations,
anchorage and mounting details, panel construction, hardware, finishes and relevant
dimensions.
C. Samples: Submit samples of metal finish.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants, and caulks.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Global Partitions, an ASI Group Company.
B. Flush Metal Partition Corp.
C. Bradley Corporation Mills Partitions. Basis of Design
488
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
10 21 20 - 2 Phenolic Toilet Compartments
D. General Partitions Mfg. Corp.
E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide phenolic plastic partitions including hardware,
attachment devices, and integral accessories.
1. Toilet Compartment Type: Floor mounted, overhead braced.
2. Urinal Screens: Provide wall mounted urinal screens.
B. Regulatory Requirements, Access: Comply with California Building Code and
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards.
1. Door Width: Provide minimum 32" clear door openings when front entry,
minimum 34" clear door openings when side entry.
2. Spacing: Provide minimum 60" clear width, and front space as applicable for type
of compartment.
3. Reinforcing: Provide reinforcing for grab bars indicated to be partition mounted.
4. Urinal Screens: Provide minimum 30" clear space at urinal.
C. Regulatory Requirements, Fire Rating: Comply with requirements for fire ratings for
interior finishes with either ASTM E84 or NFPA 286, Corner Burn Test as applicable.
D. Phenolic Panels: Manufacturer's standard phenolic core with high pressure melamine
color surface on faces, with exposed black phenolic edges burnished and slightly
rounded.
1. Colors: Smoke Quarstone, basis of design.
E. Pilaster Shoes: 3" high; ASTM A666, Type 304, No. 4 polished finish; stainless steel.
F. Attachments, Screws and Bolts: Stainless steel; tamper proof type; heavy duty
extruded aluminum brackets.
G. Hardware: Manufacturer's standard chrome plated or similar finish.
1. Hinges: Cast pivot hinges, gravity self-closing type, adjustable for door close
positioning; nylon bearings.
2. Latch: Slide latch; door strike and keeper with rubber bumper.
3. Coat Hook/Bumper: Combination coat hook and bumper unit, maximum 48"
above finished floor.
4. Wall Bumper: Wall mounted rubber bumper for out-swinging doors.
489
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
10 21 20 - 3 Phenolic Toilet Compartments
5. Pulls: Manufacturer’s standard; provide two "U-shaped" pulls immediately below
latch at compartments accessible to persons with disabilities (compartments with
grab bars), one inside and one outside.
H. Overhead Braced Partition Headrails: 1" by 1-5/8" tubular metal, with cast socket type
wall brackets.
1. Colors: Bradley Smoke Quartstone, Basis of Design
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Fabricate: Manufacturer’s standard construction.
B. Doors and Panels: Minimum 3/4" thick doors and 1/2” thick panels, minimum 24" wide
by minimum 58" high.
1. Provide wider doors where required for accessibility for persons with disabilities.
C. Pilasters: 1-1/4" thick, constructed same as doors, of sizes required to suit cubicle
widths and spacing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine site conditions to which work is to be applied.
B. Take site dimensions affecting this work.
C. Ensure correct spacing and size of plumbing fixtures; take special note of fixtures in
compartments indicated to be designed for persons with disabilities to assure
clearances complying with access regulations.
D. Ensure correct location of built-in framing, anchorage, and bracing, where required.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install units in accordance with manufacturer recommendations and installation
instructions, secure, plumb, level, and square.
B. Leave 1/2" space between wall, panels and end pilasters.
C. Attach panel brackets securely to walls using anchor devices.
D. Attach panels and pilasters to bracket with through sleeve tamper proof bolts and nuts.
E. Locate headrail joints at pilaster center lines.
F. Provide for adjustment of floor variations with screw jack through steel saddles
integral with pilaster; conceal floor fastenings with stainless steel shoes.
G. Equip each door with hinges, latch, and coat hook/bumper combination.
490
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
10 21 20 - 4 Phenolic Toilet Compartments
H. Install door strike keeper and door bumper on each pilaster in alignment with door latch.
I. Adjust and align hardware to uniform clearance at vertical edges of doors not
exceeding 3/16".
J. Adjust hinges to locate doors in partial open position when unlatched, except adjust hinges
to return doors to closed position at stalls designed for use by persons with disabilities.
K. Anchor urinal screen panels to walls with either two panel brackets each or
continuous angle brackets on both sides.
3.3 CLEANING
A. Field touch-up of scratches and defaced finishes will not be permitted; replace
damaged, scratched and marred defective materials with new, undamaged materials.
B. Remove protective coverings and clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer
recommendations.
END OF SECTION
491
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
10 28 00 - 1 Toilet Accessories
SECTION 10 28 00
TOILET ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide toilet accessories with attachment hardware and rough-in
frames as required for complete, operational installation.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 08 80 00: Frameless glass mirrors.
2. Section 10 21 20 Phenolic Toilet Compartments
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product data illustrating each accessory at large
scale.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver inserts and rough-in frames to jobsite at appropriate time for building in.
B. Do not deliver accessories to site until rooms in which they are to be installed are
ready to receive them.
C. Pack accessories individually, protect each item and its finish.
1.5 SITE CONDITIONS
A. Protect adjacent or adjoining finished surfaces from damage during installation of
work of this section.
B. Before starting work notify Architect in writing of conditions detrimental to installation
or operation of units.
C. Verify with Architect exact location of accessories.
492
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
10 28 00 - 2 Toilet Accessories
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period:
1. Replace mirrors which exhibit signs of desilvering or distortion.
2. Period: Two years.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Bobrick Washroom Equipment, Inc.
B. Bradley Corporation.
C. American Specialties, Inc.
D. Manufacturers listed on Toilet Accessories Schedules.
E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide toilet accessories with attachment hardware and rough-
in frames.
1. Provide standard materials and finishes for accessories listed; where more than
one material or finish is available and not otherwise indicated provide as selected
by Architect from manufacturer’s standard materials and finishes.
B. Regulatory Requirements - Access for Persons with Disabilities: Comply with
California Building Standards Code and Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA)
Standards.
C. Stainless Steel Sheet: ASTM A666, commercial grade, Type 304, gages as standard
with manufacturer of specified items.
D. Stainless Steel Tubing: ASTM A269, commercial grade, seamless welded.
E. Sheet Steel: ASTM A1008, cold rolled stretcher leveled; minimum G90 galvanized
coating, ASTM A924 and A653.
F. Adhesive: Epoxy type contact cement as recommended by accessory manufacturer;
comply with applicable requirements for limitations on volatile organic compound
(VOC) emissions.
G. Fasteners, Screws, and Bolts: Hot dip galvanized; as recommended by accessory
manufacturer for component and substrate.
493
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
10 28 00 - 3 Toilet Accessories
H. Keys: Provide universal keys for access to toilet accessory units requiring internal
access for servicing and supply.
1. Provide minimum six keys to Owner representative.
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Weld and grind smooth joints of fabricated components.
B. Form exposed surfaces from one sheet of stock, free of joints.
C. Fabricate units with tight seams and joints, exposed edges rolled; hang doors and
access panels with continuous piano hinges; provide concealed anchorage where
possible.
D. Provide steel anchor plates and anchor components for installation on building
finishes.
E. Form surfaces flat without distortion; maintain flat surfaces without scratches and
without dents; finish exposed edges eased, free of sharp edges where potential exists
for physical contact.
F. Back paint components where contact is made with building finishes, to prevent
electrolysis.
G. Hot-dip galvanize ferrous metal anchors and fastening devices.
H. Assemble components in shop; package complete with anchors and fittings.
2.4 FINISHES
A. Exposed Finishes: Stainless steel, number 4, satin finish; satin chrome finish
acceptable where stainless steel not available for accessory item listed or scheduled.
B. Concealed Surfaces: Treat and clean, spray-apply one coat primer and baked
enamel finish.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Provide templates and rough-in measurements.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's printed instructions using
fasteners appropriate to substrate.
B. Install true, plumb and level, securely and rigidly anchored to substrate.
C. Use tamper-proof, security type fasteners.
494
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
10 28 00 - 4 Toilet Accessories
D. Adjust accessories for proper operation and verify mechanisms function smoothly.
E. Replace damaged and defective items.
F. Clean and polish exposed surfaces after removing temporary labels.
3.3 TOILET ACCESSORIES SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Drawings.
END OF SECTION
495
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
10 44 00 - 1 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
SECTION 10 44 00
FIRE EXTINGUISHER CABINETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide semi-recessed cabinets for portable fire extinguishers with
accessories as required for complete installation.
1. Fire Extinguisher Bottles: Contractor Furnished for each location.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 21: Fire protection systems.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Furnish manufacturer's literature.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. J.L. Industries.
B. Larsen’s Manufacturing Co.
C. Potter Roemer.
D. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide semi-recessed cabinets for portable fire extinguishers
with accessories.
B. Fire Extinguisher Cabinets: Provide semi-recessed mounting unless otherwise
indicated, maximum 4” extension beyond wall finish surface, provide trim suitable for
installation indicated.
1. Type:
a. J.L. Industries/Ambassador Series.
b. Larsen’s Mfg. Co./Architectural Series.
c. Potter Roemer/Alta Series.
d. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2. Typical Cabinet Depth: Provide cabinets designed for space available in walls
with fire extinguisher cabinets, and of depth to house 2A-10BC multi-purpose dry
chemical type fire extinguisher.
C. Trim: Manufacturer's standard edge trim for specified models.
496
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
10 44 00 - 2 Fire Extinguisher Cabinets
D. Metal Gages: Provide manufacturer's standard gages for cabinets specified.
E. Construction: Mitered and welded one-piece tubular door frames; weld joints and
grind smooth; manufacturer's standard steel box with white baked enamel interior
finish and primed exterior finish.
1. Steel Doors and Trim: Manufacturer's standard, prime coat finished.
2. Doors: Break-glass type secured access, with inside latch and lock.
3. Door Hardware: Continuous hinge permitting door to open 180-degrees.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Examine substrates and conditions under which fire extinguisher cabinets are to be
installed.
B. Do not proceed with work until unsatisfactory conditions have been corrected.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install cabinets in locations and at mounting height to comply with requirements of
governing authorities; prepare recesses in walls as required.
B. Securely fasten to structure, square and plumb, in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions.
1. Wherever exact location of units is not shown, locate as directed by Architect.
3.3 IDENTIFICATION
A. After installation and finishing is completed, silk screen or apply decal letters spelling
"FIRE EXTINGUISHER" as applicable.
B. Letter size, style and location as selected by Architect.
END OF SECTION
497
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 06/07/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
10 75 00 - 1 Metal Flagpoles
SECTION 10 75 00
METAL FLAGPOLES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide embedded ground set cone tapered aluminum flagpoles
with concealed halyard system, revolving truck, pulleys and fittings, and accessories
as required for complete finished installation.
1.2 Related Requirements:
a. Division 01 - General Requirements.
b. Section 03 10 00 Concrete Formwork
c. Section 03 20 00: Concrete Reinforcing
d. Section 03 30 00: Cast In Place Concrete
e. Section 32 13 13: Site Concrete Work.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. National Association of Architectural Metal Manufacturers (NAAMM): Guide
Specifications for Design of Metal Flagpoles.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's literature.
B. Shop Drawings: Indicate dimensions of pole, anchor requirements, all components,
and sizes.
C. Delegated Design: Submit footing design shop drawing and structural calculations
prepared by California licensed structural or civil engineer.
D. Samples: Submit pole finish, indicating polish, texture and color.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Spiral wrap flagpole with protective covering and pack in shipping tubes.
498
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 06/07/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
10 75 00 - 2 Metal Flagpoles
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Interstate Pole Industries (IPI) Basis of Design
B. Morgan Francis Flagpoles and Accessories.
C. American Flagpole, Division of Kearney-National Inc.
D. Concord Industries, Inc.
E. John Ewing & Co. Inc.
F. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide embedded ground set cone tapered aluminum flagpoles
with concealed halyard system, revolving truck, pulleys and fittings, and accessories.
B. Performance Criteria: Flagpole system shall resist 115 mph wind velocity without
permanent deformation, and non-resonant.
1. Comply with NAAMM Guide Specifications for Design of Metal Flagpoles.
C. Flagpoles: One-piece, cone tapered aluminum poles; conforming to NAAMM Metal
Flagpole Manual.
1. Type: Embedded ground mounted type (minimum 6'-0" setting depth).
2. Nominal Height: 20'-0" tall, qty. (2) and 35’-0” tall, qty (1).
3. Outside Diameter: 7" Min. at butt, nominal 3" Min. at top.
4. Wall Thickness: Minimum 0.188".
D. Aluminum: ASTM B221.
1. Finish: Manufacturer's standard clear satin anodized aluminum.
E. Foundation Base: Embedded type concrete construction.
B. Flash Collar/Base: As indicated; where not specifically indicated, as selected by
Architect from manufacturer's standard flash collars and ornamental bases.
F. Internal Halyard System: Manufacturer's standard stainless-steel aircraft cable
system, revolving truck with stainless steel ball-bearings, non-fouling, heavy duty
winch with locked flush access door.
1. Provide bronze snap hooks.
2. Provide rubber covered counterweight.
499
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 06/07/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
10 75 00 - 3 Metal Flagpoles
3. Provide braided sling.
4. Provide two removable crank handles.
G. Lightning Ground Rod: Minimum 10" long copper rod, 3/4" diameter.
H. Lightning Ground Cable: Copper No. 6 AWG stranded, soft drawn.
I. Asphaltic Paint: Bituminous coating, black color.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install concrete foundations for flagpoles correctly sized and positioned.
B. Coat portions of flagpole below grade and in contact with dissimilar materials with
asphaltic paint.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install flagpole, base assembly and fittings in accordance with manufacturer's
recommendations and installation instructions and as indicated on drawings.
B. Ground flagpole installations.
C. Check and adjust installed fittings for smooth operation.
D. Instruct Owner's representative in maintenance and operation.
END OF SECTION
500
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
12 93 00 - 1 Site Furnishings
SECTION 12 93 00
SITE FURNISHINGS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. Drawings and general provisions of the Contract, including General and Supplementary
Conditions and Division 1 Specification Sections, apply to this Section.
1.02 SUMMARY
A. The extent of work in this Section includes the provision and installation of the site
furnishing equipment and structures with all miscellaneous hardware, foundations and
appurtenances required for installation.
B. The general extent of work for this Section is shown on the drawings and includes, but
is not limited to, the following:
1. Trash Receptacle and Recycle Receptacle
2. Bike Rack
3. Flagpole
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All manufactured items shall be inspected and approved upon delivery.
B. Unless otherwise specified, install all materials in accordance with manufacturer’s
recommendations.
1.04 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's technical data and installation instructions for
site furnishings conforming to requirements of Division 1 requirements for Submittal
Procedures.
B. Product Warranty, spare or replacement parts, and/or care instructions shipped with
components shall be delivered to Owner prior to substantial completion.
1.05 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING:
A. Store and handle products so as not to impede the work of others.
B. Protect products from damage or theft during delivery, handling, storage and
installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
501
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
12 93 00 - 2 Site Furnishings
2.01 MATERIALS
Description Manufacturer Model #
1. Trash Receptacle and
Recycle Receptacle DUMOR 107-32-RC-0017 &
107-32-RC-001
2. Bike Racks ANOVA CIRCLEBRS2
3. Flagpoles IPI POLES IPIHD-30-6-3.5-188
Model and manufacturer specified for play structures are school district standard.
Substitutions will not be allowed.
The contractor shall purchase touch-up paint for each color of powder coated products
for use as needed after installation. Deliver un-used touch-up paint to Owner prior to
substantial completion.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SEQUENCING AND SCHEDULING:
A. Coordinate construction timing with installation of site furnishings in conformance with
other pertinent Sections of the Specifications.
3.02 INSTALLATION
A. Site Furnishings: Install where shown on drawings, as detailed and per manufacturer
instructions. All site furnishings shall be secured in a vandal resistant manner
acceptable to the Architect.
B. Concrete Footings: Install footings with top of concrete sloped to drain at 1%. Install
where shown on drawings and as detailed and per manufacturer's instructions.
C. Sleeves: Install site furnishings, standards and posts into sleeves embedded into
concrete bases for removal and replacement where indicated or detailed on drawings.
3.03 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Site furnishings shall be inspected and accepted upon delivery by the Contractor. Final
acceptance of site furnishings and locations of site furnishings shall be approved by
Owner’s Representative in writing.
END OF SECTION
502
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
12 93 00 - 3 Site Furnishings
503
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 03 - 1 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
SECTION 21 05 03
THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Through-Penetration Firestopping.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
B. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
C. ANSI/UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops
D. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems
E. UL Fire Resistance Directory Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ)
F. Intertek / Warnock Hersey - Directory of Listed Products
G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
H. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops
I. NFPA 5000 - Building Construction Safety Code
J. CBC California Building Code
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store, protect and handle products on site. Accept material on site in factory
containers and packing. Inspect for damage. Protect from deterioration or damage due
to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. Follow
manufacturer's instructions for storage.
B. Install material prior to expiration of product shelf life.
1.4 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions,
including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide
through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread
of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases,
and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.
504
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 03 - 2 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
1. Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire partitions, fire barriers, and smoke
barriers.
B. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to light, traffic, moisture, or physical
damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these
conditions both during and after construction.
C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as
determined per ASTM E 84.
D. For through-penetration firestop systems in air plenums, provide products with flame-
spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 50, respectively, as
determined per ASTM E 84.
E. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the
low emitting material limits of the following standards:
1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and
Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources
Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.
2. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant
Applications. All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site shall comply with the
applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168.
3. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied
Paints and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the
applicable VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.
1.5 MEETINGS
A. Pre-installation meeting: A pre-installation meeting shall be scheduled and shall
include the Construction Manager, General Contractor, all Subcontractors associated
with the installation of systems penetrating rated walls. Firestopping Manufacturer's
Representative, and the Owner.
1. Review foreseeable methods related to firestopping work.
2. Tour representative areas where firestopping is to be installed; inspect and
discuss each type of condition and each type of substrate that will be
encountered, and preparation to be performed by other trades.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year warranty on parts and labor.
B. Warranty shall cover repair or replacement of firestop systems which fail in joint
adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance,
migration resistance, stain resistance, general durability, or appear to deteriorate in
any manner not clearly specified by the manufacturer as an inherent quality of the
material.
505
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 03 - 3 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through-
penetration firestop systems indicated for each application that are produced by one of
the following manufacturers. All firestopping systems installed shall be provided by a
single manufacturer.
B. Manufacturers:
1. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division.
2. Hilti, Inc.
3. RectorSeal Corporation, Metacaulk.
4. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division.
5. Johns-Manville.
6. Specified Technologies Inc. (S.T.I.)
7. Spec Seal Firestop Products
8. AD Firebarrier Protection Systems
9. Dow Corning Corp.
10. Fire Trak Corp.
11. International Protective Coating Corp.
2.2 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A. Provide materials and systems classified by or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey to
provide firestopping equal to time rating of construction being penetrated.
B. All firestopping materials shall be free of asbestos, lead, PCB's, and other materials
that would require hazardous waste removal.
C. Firestopping shall be flexible to allow for normal penetrating item movement due to
expansion and contraction.
D. Firestopping systems for plumbing and wet pipe sprinkler piping shall be moisture
resistant.
E. Provide firestopping systems capable of supporting floor loads where systems are
exposed to possible floor loading or traffic.
F. Provide firestopping systems allowing continuous insulation for all insulated pipes.
G. Provide firestopping systems classified by UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey
for penetrations through all fire rated construction. Firestopping systems shall be
selected from the UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory
Category XHEZ based on substrate construction and penetrating item size and
material and shall fall within the range of numbers listed:
1. Combustible Framed Floors and Chase Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated:
a. F Rating = Floor/Wall Rating
506
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 03 - 4 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
2. Non-Combustible Framed Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated:
a. F Rating = Wall Rating
b. L Rating = Penetrations in Smoke Barriers
Penetrating Item UL System No.
No Penetrating Item WL 0000-0999*
Metallic Pipe or Conduit WL 1000-1999
Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit WL 2000-2999
Electrical Cables WL 3000-3999
Cable Trays WL 4000-4999
Insulated Pipes WL 5000-5999
Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical WL 6000-6999
Duct without Damper and Misc.
Mechanical
WL 7000-7999
Multiple Penetrations WL 8000-8999
*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to
match original rated construction.
H. Any opening in walls or floors not covered by the listed series of numbers shall be
coordinated with the firestopping manufacturer.
I. Any openings in floors or walls not described in the UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock
Hersey Fire Resistance Directory, or outlined in manufacturer's information shall be
sealed in a manner agreed upon by the Firestopping Manufacturer, Owner, and the
Authority Having Jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Ensure all surfaces that contact seal materials are free of dirt, dust, grease, oil, rust, or
loose materials. Clean and repair surfaces as required. Remove laitance and form-
release agents from concrete.
B. Ensure substrate and penetrating items have been permanently installed prior to
installing firestopping systems. Ensure penetrating items have been properly spaced
and have proper clearance prior to installing firestopping systems.
C. Surfaces to which sealing materials are to be installed must meet the selected UL or
Intertek / Warnock Hersey system substrate criteria.
D. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer. Confine primer to area of bond.
507
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 03 - 5 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. In existing construction, provide firestopping of openings prior to and after installation
of penetrating items. Remove any existing coatings on surfaces prior to firestopping
installation. Temporary firestopping shall consist of packing openings with fire resistant
mineral wool for the full thickness of substrate, or an alternate method approved by the
Authority Having Jurisdiction. All openings shall be temporarily firestopped immediately
upon their installation and shall remain so until the permanent UL or listed by Intertek /
Warnock Hersey listed firestopping system is installed.
B. Install dams as required to properly contain firestopping materials within openings and
as required to achieve required fire resistance rating. Remove combustible damming
after appropriate curing.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturers and that do not cause damage.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that
ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration
at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration
occurs, remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems
immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified
requirements.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide and install labels adjacent to each firestopping location. Label shall be
provided by the firestop system supplier and contain the following information in a
contrasting color:
1. The words "Warning - Through Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb.
Notify Building Management of Any Damage."
2. Firestop System Supplier; UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey system
number; date installed; contractor name and phone number; manufacturer's
representative name, address, and phone number.
3.5 INSPECTION
A. All penetrations shall be inspected by the manufacturer's representative to ensure
proper installation.
B. Access to firestop systems shall be maintained for examination by the Authority
Having Jurisdiction at their request.
C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop system with other construction
only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with
requirements.
508
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 03 - 6 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
D. The contractor shall allow for visual destructive review of 5% of installed firestop
systems (minimum of one) to prove compliance with specifications and manufacturer's
instructions and details. Destructive system removal shall be performed by the
contractor and witnessed by the engineer and manufacturer's factory representative.
The engineer shall have sole discretion of which firestop system installations will be
reviewed. The contractor is responsible for all costs associated with this requirement
including labor and material for removing and replacing the installed firestop system. If
any firestop system is found to not be installed per manufacturer's specific instructions
and details, all firestop systems are subject to destructive review and replacement at
the engineer's discretion and the contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION 21 05 03
509
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 05 - 1 FIRE SUPPRESSION
DEMOLITION FOR
REMODELING
SECTION 21 05 05
FIRE SUPPRESSION DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fire Suppression Demolition.
B. Cutting and Patching.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment shall be as specified in individual Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. THE DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED TO INDICATE THE GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK
AND DO NOT SHOW EVERY PIPE, DUCT, OR PIECE OF EQUIPMENT THAT MUST
BE REMOVED.
B. Where walls, ceilings, etc., are shown as being removed on general drawings, the
Contractor shall remove all mechanical equipment, devices, fixtures, piping, ducts,
systems, etc., from the removed area.
C. Where ceilings, walls, partitions, etc., are temporarily removed and replaced by others,
This Contractor shall remove, store, and replace equipment, devices, fixtures, pipes,
ducts, systems, etc.
D. Verify that abandoned utilities serve only abandoned equipment or facilities. Extend
services to facilities or equipment that shall remain in operation following demolition.
E. Coordinate work with all other Contractors and the Owner. Schedule removal of
equipment to avoid conflicts.
F. This Contractor shall verify all existing equipment sizes and capacities where
equipment is scheduled to be replaced or modified, prior to ordering new equipment.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect fire protection systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.
510
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 05 - 2 FIRE SUPPRESSION
DEMOLITION FOR
REMODELING
3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING MECHANICAL WORK
A. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
B. Remove abandoned piping to source of supply and/or main lines.
C. Remove exposed abandoned pipes, including abandoned pipes above accessible
ceilings. Cut pipes above ceilings, below floors and behind walls. Cap remaining lines.
Repair building construction to match original. Remove all clamps, hangers, supports,
etc. associated with pipe and duct removal.
D. Disconnect and remove mechanical devices and equipment serving equipment that
has been removed.
E. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension
work.
F. Maintain access to existing mechanical installations which remain. Modify installation
or provide access panels as appropriate.
G. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing
installations, or as specified.
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. This Contractor is responsible for all penetrations of existing construction required to
complete the work of this project. Refer to Section 21 05 29 for additional
requirements.
B. Penetrations in existing construction should be reviewed carefully prior to proceeding
with any work.
C. Penetrations shall be neat and clean with smooth and/or finished edges. Core drill
where possible for clean opening.
D. Repair existing construction as required after penetration is complete to restore to
original condition. Use similar materials and match adjacent construction unless
otherwise noted or agreed to by the Architect/Engineer prior to start of work.
E. This Contractor is responsible for all costs incurred in repair, relocations, or
replacement of any cables, conduits, or other services if damaged without proper
investigation.
3.5 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.
B. Clean all systems adjacent to project which are affected by the dust and debris caused
by this construction.
-
511
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 05 - 3 FIRE SUPPRESSION
DEMOLITION FOR
REMODELING
C. FIRE PROTECTION ITEMS REMOVED AND NOT RELOCATED REMAIN THE
PROPERTY OF THE OWNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL PLACE ITEMS RETAINED BY
THE OWNER IN A LOCATION COORDINATED WITH THE OWNER. THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL DISPOSE OF MATERIAL THE OWNER DOES NOT WANT
TO REUSE OR RETAIN FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES.
3.6 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Review locations of all new penetrations in existing walls. Determine construction type
and review for possible interferences. Bring all concerns to the attention of the
Architect/Engineer before proceeding.
END OF SECTION 21 05 05
512
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 29 - 1 FIRE SUPPRESSION
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
SECTION 21 05 29
FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Hangers, Supports, and Associated Anchors.
B. Sleeves and Seals.
C. Cutting of Openings.
D. Escutcheon Plates and Trim.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Support Sprinkler Piping in conformance with NFPA 13.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,
Application, and Installation.
B. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
C. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.
D. MSS SP-127 - Bracing for Piping Systems Seismic-Wind-Dynamic Design, Selection,
Application
E. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
1.4 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Furnish sleeves and hanger inserts to General Contractor for placement into formwork.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. Refer to Section 21 05 50 for additional requirements for seismic restraints.
513
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 29 - 2 FIRE SUPPRESSION
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
2.2 HANGER RODS
A. Hanger rods for single rod hangers supporting steel, copper, and CPVC piping shall
conform to the following:
Pipe Size Rod Size
4" and smaller 3/8"
5" 6", and 8" 1/2"
10" 5/8"
12" 3/4"
B. Hanger rods and accessories used in mechanical spaces or otherwise dry areas shall
have ASTM B633 electro-plated zinc finish.
C. All hanger rods, nuts, washers, clevises, etc., in damp areas shall have ASTM A123
hot-dip galvanized finish applied after fabrication. This applies to the following areas:
2.3 PIPE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. General:
1. All pipe hangers, clamps, and supports shall conform to Manufacturers
Standardization Society MSS-SP-58, 69, 89, and 127 (where applicable).
B. Vertical Supports:
1. Support and laterally brace vertical pipes at every floor level in multi-story
structures, and more frequently when required by applicable codes, but never at
intervals over 15 feet. Support vertical pipes with riser clamps installed below
hubs, couplings or lugs. Provide sufficient flexibility to accommodate expansion
and contraction without compromising fire barrier penetrations and other fixed
takeoff locations.
a. Products:
1) Anvil Fig.
2) CT121
3) Cooper/B-Line Fig.
4) B3373CT
5) Erico Model 510
6) Nibco/Tolco Fib. 82
2. Wall supports shall be used where vertical height of structure exceeds minimum
spacing requirements. Install wall supports at same spacing as hangers or strut
supports along vertical length of pipe runs.
C. Hangers and Clamps:
514
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 29 - 3 FIRE SUPPRESSION
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
1. Hangers in direct contact with bare copper pipe shall include plastic pipe insert
similar to Unistrut Cush-A-Clamp, Hydra-Zorb, Erico Cushion Clamp or Cooper
Vibra-Clamp.
2. Unless otherwise indicated, hangers shall be as follows:
a. Clevis Type: Service: Bare Metal Pipe, Rigid Plastic Pipe
1) Products: Bare Steel, Plastic or Insulated Pipe
a) Anvil Fig. 260
b) Cooper/B-Line Fig. 3100
c) Erico Model 400
d) Nibco/Tolco Fig. 1.
2) Products: Bare Copper Pipe
a) Anvil Fig. CT65
b) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3104CT
c) Erico Model 402
d) Nibco/Tolco Fig. 81.
b. Adjustable Swivel Ring Type: Service: Bare Metal Pipe - 4 inches and
Smaller
1) Products: Bare Steel Pipe
a) Anvil Fig. 69
b) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3170NF
c) Erico Model FCN
d) Nibco/Tolco Fig. 200.
2) Products: Bare Copper Pipe
a) Anvil Fig. CT69
b) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B170CT
c) Nibco/Tolco Fig. 202.
3. Support may be fabricated from U-channel strut or similar shapes. Piping less
than 4" in diameter shall be secured to strut with clamps of proper design and
capacity as required to maintain spacing and alignment. Strut shall be
independently supported from hanger drops or building structure. Size and
support shall be per manufacturer's installation requirements for structural
support of piping. Clamps shall not interrupt piping insulation.
4. Strut used in mechanical spaces or otherwise dry areas shall have ASTM B633
electro-plated zinc finish.
5. Strut used in damp areas listed in hanger rods shall have ASTM A123 hot-dip
galvanized finish applied after fabrication.
6. Unless otherwise indicated, pipe supports for use with struts shall be as follows:
a. Clamp Type: Service: Bare Metal Pipe, Rigid Plastic Pipe
515
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 29 - 4 FIRE SUPPRESSION
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
1) Clamps in direct contact with copper pipe shall include plastic pipe
insert similar to Unistrut Cush-A-Clamp, Hydra-Zorb, Erico Cushion
Clamp or Cooper Vibra-Clamp.
2) Pipes subject to expansion and contraction shall have clamps slightly
oversized to allow limited pipe movement.
3) Products: Bare Steel, Plastic or Insulated Pipe
a) Unistrut Fig. P1100 or P2500
b) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B2000 or B2400
c) Nibco/Tolco Fig. A-14 or 2STR.
4) Products: Bare Copper Pipe
a) Cooper/B-Line; Fig. BVT
D. Upper (Structural) Attachments:
1. Unless otherwise shown, upper attachments for hanger rods or support struts
shall be as follows:
a. Steel Structure Clamps: C-Type Wide Flange Beam Clamps (for use on top
and/or bottom of wide flanges. Not permitted for use with bar-joists.)
1) Products:
a) Anvil Fig. 92
b) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3033/B3034
c) Erico Model 300
d) Nibco/Tolco 68.
b. Scissor Type Beam Clamps (for use with bar-joists and wide flange):
1) Products:
a) Anvil Fig. 228, 292
b) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3054
c) Erico Model 360
d) Nibco/Tolco Fig. 329.
c. Concentrically Loaded Open Web Joist Hangers (for use with bar joists):
1) Products:
a) MCL. M1, M2 or M3
d. Concrete Inserts Single Rod Galvanized:
1) Products:
a) Anvil Fig. 282
b) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3014
516
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 29 - 5 FIRE SUPPRESSION
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
c) Erico Model 355
d) Nibco/Tolco Fig. 310
e. Concrete Inserts Continuous Strip Galvanized:
1) Products:
a) Unistrut Corp P3200 Series
b) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B22-J
c) Erico CONCT
f. Wood Anchors: Tension wood rod hanger for suspending 3/8" threaded rod.
Zinc plated carbon steel.
1) Minimum allowable tension loads for Douglass Fir/Southern Pine:
a) 3/8" diameter rod; 2-1/2" shank: 600 lb/590 lb.
b) Load values are based on full shank penetration into wood
member. Minimum edge distance 3/4". Minimum end distance
3-1/4".
2) Limitations:
a) Truss: Do not hang from wood trusses without truss
manufacturer or Structural Engineer™™s approval.
b) Sheetrock/Gypsum Ceiling: When drilling through non-wood
materials (e.g., sheet rock, gypsum, etc.), increase shank
length by depth of non-wood materials.
c) Plywood Flooring/Roofing: Do not hang from plywood floor or
roofing.
d) Spacing: Refer to wood structure spacing of hangers.
3) Products:
a) Simpson RWV
b) DeWALT
c) ITI Sammys GT25
2.4 OPENINGS IN FLOORS, WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Exact locations of all openings for the installation of materials shall be determined by
the Contractor and given to the General Contractor for installation or construction as
the structure is built.
B. Coordinate all openings with other Contractors.
C. Hire the proper tradesman and furnish all labor, material and equipment to cut
openings in or through existing structures, or openings in new structures that were not
installed, or additional openings. Repair all spalling and damage to the satisfaction of
the Architect/Engineer.
517
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 29 - 6 FIRE SUPPRESSION
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
D. Said cutting shall be at the complete expense of each Contractor. Failure to coordinate
openings with other Contractors shall not exempt the Contractor from providing
openings at Contractor's expense.
E. Do not cut structural members without written approval of the Architect or Structural
Engineer.
Mode
l
Service Element
Material
Temperature
Range
S Standard (Stainless) EPDM -40°F to 250°F
T Fire Seals (1 hour) Silicone -67°F to 400°F
FS Fire Seals (3 hours) Silicone -67°F to 400°F
OS Oil
Resistant/Stainless
Nitrile -40°F to 210°F
2.5 ESCUTCHEON PLATES AND TRIM
A. Fit escutcheons to all insulated or uninsulated exposed pipes passing through walls,
floors, or ceilings of finished rooms.
B. Escutcheons shall be heavy gauge, cold rolled steel, copper coated under a chromium
plated finish, heavy spring clip, rigid hinge and latch.
2.6 PIPE PENETRATIONS
A. Seal all pipe penetrations. Seal non-rated walls and floor penetrations with grout or
caulk. Backing material may be used.
B. Seal fire rated wall and floor penetrations with fire seal system as specified.
2.7 PIPE ANCHORS
A. Provide all items needed to allow adequate expansion and contraction of all piping. All
piping shall be supported, guided, aligned, and anchored as required.
B. Repair all piping leaks and associated damage. Pipes shall not rub on any part of the
building.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 FIRE SUPPRESSION SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
A. General Installation Requirements:
1. Install all items per manufacturer's instructions.
2. Coordinate the location and method of support of piping systems with all
installations under other Divisions and Sections of the Specifications.
3. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape,
brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
518
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 29 - 7 FIRE SUPPRESSION
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
4. Supports shall extend directly to building structure. Do not support piping from
duct hangers. Do not allow lighting or ceiling supports to be hung from piping
supports.
B. Supports Requirements:
1. Install hangers and supports complete with lock nuts, clamps, rods, bolts,
couplings, swivels, inserts and required accessories.
2. Hangers for horizontal piping shall have adequate means of vertical adjustment
for alignment.
C. Pipe Requirements:
1. Support all piping and equipment, including valves, strainers, and other
specialties and accessories to avoid objectionable or excessive stress,
deflection, swaying, sagging or vibration in the piping or building structure during
erection, cleaning, testing and normal operation of the systems.
2. Do not, however, restrain piping to cause it to snake or buckle between supports
or to prevent proper movement due to expansion and contraction.
3. Support piping at equipment and valves so they can be disconnected and
removed without further supporting the piping.
4. Piping shall not introduce strains or distortion to connected equipment.
5. Parallel horizontal pipes may be supported on trapeze hangers made of
structural shapes and hanger rods; otherwise, pipes shall be supported with
individual hangers.
6. Trapeze hangers may be used where ducts interfere with normal pipe hanging.
7. Provide additional supports where pipe changes direction, adjacent to flanged
valves and strainers, at equipment connections and heavy fittings.
8. Provide at least one hanger adjacent to each joint in grooved end steel pipe with
mechanical couplings.
D. Provided the installation complies with all loading requirements of truss and joist
manufacturers, the following practices are acceptable:
1. Loads of 100 lbs or less may be attached anywhere along the top or bottom
chords of trusses or joists with a minimum 3' spacing between loads.
2. Loads greater than 100 lbs. must be hung concentrically and may be hung from
top or bottom chord, provided one of the following conditions is met:
a. The hanger is attached within 6" from a web/chord joint.
b. Additional L2x2x1/4 web reinforcement is installed per manufacturer's
requirements.
3. It is prohibited to cantilever a load using an angle or other structural component
that is attached to a truss or joist in such a fashion that a torsional force is
applied to that structural member.
4. If conditions cannot be met, coordinate installation with truss or joist
manufacturer and contact Architect/Engineer.
519
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 29 - 8 FIRE SUPPRESSION
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
E. After piping and insulation installation are complete, cut hanger rods back at trapeze
supports so they do not extend more than 3/4" below bottom face of lowest fastener
and blunt any sharp edges.
F. Do not exceed the manufacturer's recommended maximum load for any hanger or
support.
G. Steel/Concrete Structure: Spacing of hangers shall in no case exceed the following:
1. Steel (All steel pipe unless otherwise noted):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 1-1/4" & under: 12'-0"
2) 1-1/2" & larger: 15'-0"
2. Steel (Schedule 40 lightweight alternative):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3" & under: 12'-0"
H. Steel/Concrete Structure: Spacing of hangers shall in no case exceed the following:
1. Steel:
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 1-1/4" & under: 7'-0"
2) 1-1/2": 9'-0"
3) 2": 10'-0"
4) 2-1/2": 11'-0"
5) 3": 12'-0"
6) 4" & larger: 12'-0"
I. Wood Structure: Spacing of hangers shall not exceed the compressive strength of the
insulation inserts, and in no case shall exceed the following:
1. Steel (Std. Weight or Heavier - Liquid Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 1-1/4" & under: 7'-0"
2) 1-1/2": 9'-0"
3) 2": 10'-0"
4) 2-1/2": 11'-0"
5) 3": 12'-0"
6) 4" through 6": 12'-0"8": 9'-0"10": 6'-0"12": 4'-0"
J. Installation of hangers shall conform to MSS SP-58, 69, 89, and applicable NFPA
standards.
520
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 29 - 9 FIRE SUPPRESSION
SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
END OF SECTION 21 05 29
521
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 50 - 1 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
FOR EQUIPMENT AND
SUPPORTS
SECTION 21 05 50
SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Seismic Requirements.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. California Building Code (CBC)
B. ASHRAE - A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint.
C. Technical Manual 5-809-10, NAVFAC P-355, Air Force Manual 88-3, Chapter 13.
D. ASCE 7-16, Chapter 13.
E. SMACNA - Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems.
F. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
1.3 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site. Accept material on site in factory
containers and packing. Inspect for damage. Protect from damage and contamination
by maintaining factory packaging until installation. Follow manufacturer's instructions
for storage.
1.4 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. This project is subject to the seismic bracing requirements of California Building Code.
B. The following criteria are applicable to this project:
1. Risk Category: II
2. Seismic Importance Factor: IE = 1.5
3. Seismic Design Category: D
4. Component Amplification Factors (ap) and Component Response Modification
Factors (Rp) shall be taken from Table 13.5-1 in ASCE 7-16 for the individual
equipment or system being restrained.
5. Component Importance Factors (Ip) shall be taken from Section 13.1.3 in ASCE
7-16 for the individual equipment or system being restrained.
6. The total height of the structure and the height of the system to be restrained
within the structure shall be determined in coordination with architectural plans
and the General Contractor.
522
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 50 - 2 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
FOR EQUIPMENT AND
SUPPORTS
C. Forces shall be calculated with the above requirements and Equation 13.3-1, -2, and -
3 of ASCE 7-16, unless exempted by 13.1.4.
D. Equipment shall meet California Building Code and ASCE 7 seismic qualification
requirements in concurrence with ICC ES AC156 Acceptance Criteria for Seismic
Qualification by Shake-Table Testing of Nonstructural Components and Systems.
E. All seismic anchorage and bracing shall comply with the St. Louis County Rules &
Regulations on Anchorage & Sway Bracing - Mechanical, Electrical & Plumbing (MEP)
System Components.
F. All seismic anchorage and bracing shall comply with FM Global Property Loss
Prevention Data Sheet 1-11, Fire Following Earthquakes.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of seismic bracing with building structural systems
and architectural features, and with mechanical, fire-protection, electrical and other
building features in the vicinity.
B. Coordinate concrete bases with building structural system.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Provide one-year warranty on parts and labor for manufacturer defects and installation
workmanship.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPLIERS
A. Following is a partial list of manufacturer/supplier contact information for seismic
restraints:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc. (800) 851-7415, www.b-line.com.
2. Unistrut Corporation http://www.unistrut.us/
3. Kinetics Noise Control (877) 457-2695, www.kineticsnoise.com.
4. Mason Industries, Inc. www.mason-ind.com.
5. Loos & Co., Inc. (800) 321-5667, www.loosnaples.com.
6. Tolco (909) 737-5599, www.tolco.com
7. ISAT 877.523.6060, www.isatsb.com
8. Vibro-Acoustics (416) 291-7371, https://virs.vibro-acoustics.com/
2.2 SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Definitions
1. Stay in Place:
523
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 50 - 3 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
FOR EQUIPMENT AND
SUPPORTS
a. All systems and equipment shall be anchored and restrained such that the
anchoring system is intended not to fail and equipment and/or system
components will not fall.
2. Remain Operational:
a. Requirements for "Stay in Place" listed above shall be met.
b. The following systems and associated equipment are intended not to fail
externally or internally and are intended to remain operational.
1) Fire Protection
2) Plumbing
3) Heating
4) Cooling
5) Humidification
6) Air Handling
7) Exhaust
2.3 SEISMIC BRACING AND SUPPORT OF SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS
A. General:
1. Seismic restraint designer shall coordinate all attachments with the Structural
Engineer of Record; refer to submittal requirements.
2. The seismic restraint design shall be based on actual equipment data obtained
from manufacturer's submittals or the manufacturer. The equipment
manufacturer shall verify and provide written certification the attachment points
on the equipment can accept the combination of seismic, weight, and other
imposed loads.
3. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept without failure the forces
calculated per the applicable building code.
B. Friction from gravity loads shall not be considered resistance to seismic forces.
C. Fire protection systems shall meet the requirements of NFPA-13 for the building
seismic requirements.
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Use the following materials for restraints:
1. Indoor Dry Locations: Steel, zinc plated.
2. Corrosive Locations: Stainless steel.
2.5 SEISMIC BRACING COMPONENTS
A. Slotted Steel Channel: 1-5/8-by-1-5/8-inch cross section, formed from 0.1046-inch-
thick steel, with 9/16-by-7/8-inch slots at a maximum of 2 inches o.c. in webs, and
flange edges turned toward web.
524
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 50 - 4 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
FOR EQUIPMENT AND
SUPPORTS
1. Materials for Channel: ASTM A 1011, GR 33.
2. Materials for Fittings and Accessories: ASTM A 635, ASTM A 576, or ASTM A
36.
3. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channels and
designed for use with that product.
4. Finish: Baked, rust-inhibiting, acrylic-enamel paint applied after cleaning and
phosphate treatment, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Channel-Type Bracing Assemblies: Slotted steel channel, with adjustable hinged steel
brackets and bolts.
C. Cable-Type Bracing Assemblies: Zinc-coated, high-strength steel wire rope cable
attached to steel thimbles, brackets, and bolts designed for cable service.
1. Wire Rope Cable: Comply with ASTM A 603. Use 49- or 133-strand cable with a
minimum strength of 2 times the calculated maximum seismic force to be
resisted.
D. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Slotted steel channels with internally bolted connections to
hanger rod.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to the applicable code sections and Authority Having Jurisdiction for the exact
seismic restraint requirements of piping, ductwork, conduit, equipment, etc.
B. Layout of transverse and longitudinal bracing shall follow recommendations of
approved design standards listed in Part 1 of this specification section.
C. All seismic restraint systems shall be installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions and all certified submittal data.
D. Installation of seismic restraints shall not cause any change in position of equipment,
piping, or ductwork, resulting in stresses or misalignment.
E. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that
degrade the noise and vibration-isolation system specified.
F. Do not install any equipment, piping, duct, or conduit that makes rigid connections with
the building unless isolation is not specified.
G. Coordinate work with all other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building. Any
conflicts with other trades that will result in rigid contact with equipment or piping due
to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions shall be brought to the
Architect/Engineer's attention prior to specific equipment selection.
525
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 50 - 5 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
FOR EQUIPMENT AND
SUPPORTS
H. Prior to installation, bring to the Architect/Engineer's attention any discrepancies
between the specifications and the field conditions, or changes required due to specific
equipment selection.
I. Bracing may occur from flanges of structural beams, upper truss cords of bar joists,
cast in place inserts, or International Code Council approved seismic anchors for
installation in concrete.
J. Cable restraints shall be installed slightly slack to avoid short-circuiting the isolated
suspended equipment, ductwork, piping, or conduit.
K. Cable assemblies shall be installed taut on non-isolated systems. Solid braces may be
used in place of cables on rigidly attached systems only.
L. Do not install cables over sharp corners.
M. Brace support rods when necessary to accept compressive loads. Welding of
compression braces to the vertical support rods is not acceptable.
N. Provide reinforced clevis bolts when required.
O. The vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as
required. Independent steel rails are not acceptable.
P. Vertical pipe risers flexibly supported to accommodate thermal motion and/or pipe
vibration shall be guided to maintain pipe stability and provide horizontal seismic
restraint.
Q. Seismic restraints shall be mechanically attached to the system. Looping restraints
around the system is not acceptable.
R. Do not brace a system to two different structures such as a wall and a ceiling.
S. Provide appropriately sized openings in walls, floors, and ceilings for anticipated
seismic movement. Provide fire seal systems in fire-rated walls.
T. Exposed seismic supports in occupied areas shall be guarded or covered to protect
occupants.
U. Coordinate seismic bracing of architecturally exposed ductwork with the
Architect/Engineer.
3.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINT EXCLUSIONS
A. Refer to the applicable code sections and Authority Having Jurisdiction for allowable
exclusions.
END OF SECTION 21 05 50
526
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 53 - 1 FIRE SUPPRESSION
IDENTIFICATION
SECTION 21 05 53
FIRE SUPPRESSION IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Identification of products installed under Division 21.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. 3M
B. Bunting
C. Calpico
D. Craftmark
E. Emedco
F. Kolbi Industries
G. Seton
H. W.H. Brady
I. Marking Services.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. All pipe markers (purchased or stenciled) shall conform to ANSI A13.1. Marker lengths
and letter sizes shall be at least the following:
OD of Pipe or Insulation Marker
Length
Size of Letters
Up to and including 1-1/4" 8" 1/2"
1-1/2" to 2" 8" 3/4"
2-1/2" to 6" 12" 1-1/4"
8" to 10" 24" 2-1/2"
Over 10" 32" 3-1/2"
527
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 53 - 2 FIRE SUPPRESSION
IDENTIFICATION
Plastic tags may be used for outside diameters under 3/4"
B. Plastic Nameplates: Laminated three-layer phenolic with engraved black, 1/4"
minimum letters on light contrasting background.
C. Aluminum Nameplates: Black enamel background with natural aluminum border and
engraved letters furnished with two mounting holes and screws.
D. Plastic Tags: Minimum 1-1/2" square or round laminated three-layer phenolic with
engraved, 1/4" minimum black letters on light contrasting background.
E. Brass Tags: Brass background with engraved black letters. Tag size minimum 1-1/2"
square or 1-1/2" round.
F. Plastic Pipe Markers: Semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering;
indicating flow direction and fluid conveyed.
G. Vinyl Pipe Markers: Colored vinyl with permanent pressure sensitive adhesive backing.
H. Stencil Painted Pipe Markers: Use industrial enamel spray paint per ANSI Standard
A13.1. Indicate fluid conveyed and flow direction.
I. Underground Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape 6"
wide by 3.5 mils thick, manufactured for direct burial, with aluminum foil core for
location by non-ferric metal detectors and bold lettering identifying buried item.
J. Tracer Wire:
1. Single copper conductors shall be solid or stranded annealed or hard uncoated
copper per UL83 and ASTM requirements. Tracer tape or copper-coated steel
wire is not acceptable.
2. Conductor shall be insulated with HMWPE as specified and applied in a
concentric manner. The minimum at any point shall not be less than 90% of the
specified average thickness in compliance with UL 83.
3. Tracer wire shall be continuously spark tested at 7500 Volts DC. Other electrical
and mechanical tests shall be in accordance with UL 1581.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all products per manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
C. Valves:
1. All valves (except shutoff valves at equipment) shall have numbered tags.
528
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 53 - 3 FIRE SUPPRESSION
IDENTIFICATION
2. Provide or replace numbered tags on all existing valves that are connected to
new systems or that have been revised.
3. Provide all existing valves used to extend utilities to this project with numbered
tags. Review tag numbering sequence with the Owner prior to ordering tags.
4. Secure tags with heavy duty key chain and brass "S" link or with mechanically
fastened plastic straps.
5. Attach to handwheel or around valve stem. On lever operated valves, drill the
lever to attach tags.
6. Number all tags and show the service of the pipe.
7. Provide one Plexiglas framed valve directory listing all valves, with respective tag
numbers, uses and locations. Mount directory in location chosen by the
Architect/Engineer.
8. Provide one 36" x 24" (minimum Plexiglas framed piping schematic showing
valve locations with respective tag numbers. Mount directory in location chosen
by the Architect/Engineer.
9. Provide two sets of laminated 8-1/2" x 11" (letter size) copies of a valve directory
listing all valves, with respective tag numbers, uses, and locations. The directory
shall be reviewed by the Owner and Architect/Engineer prior to laminating final
copies. Laminated copies shall have brass eyelet in at least one corner for easy
hanging.
3.2 SCHEDULE
A. Pipes to be marked shall be labeled with text shown as follows, regardless of which
method or material is used:
1. FIRE PROTECTION WATER: White lettering; red background
2. SPRINKLER WATER: White lettering; red background
3. Tracer Wire - Water Pipe Lines: White lettering; green background
4. Tracer Wire - All other buried types: White lettering; green background
END OF SECTION 21 05 53
529
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 13 00 - 1 FIRE PROTECTION
SYSTEMS
SECTION 21 13 02
FIRE PROTECTION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe, Fittings, Valves, and Connections for Fire Protection System.
B. Wet-Pipe Sprinkler System.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Equipment and Components: Bear UL/FM label or marking.
B. Valves: Bear UL/FM label or marking. Provide manufacturer's name and pressure
rating marked on valve body. Pressure rating shall match specified pipe system
pressure rating. Remanufactured valves are not acceptable.
C. Sprinkler design drawings submitted by the C16 Contractor , and signed and sealed by
a Professional Engineer licensed in the state where the project is located.
D. Fire sprinkler system pipefitters responsible for installing, altering, or repairing water-
based fire protection systems will require certification by the California State Fire
Marshal's office.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME B16.1 - Cast Iron Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings, Class 25, 125, 250,
and 800.
B. ANSI/ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 150 and 300.
C. ANSI/ASME B16.4 - Cast Iron Threaded Fittings, Class 125 and 250.
D. ANSI/ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
E. ANSI/ASME B16.9 - Factory-made Wrought Steel Butt-Welding Fittings.
F. ANSI/ASME B16.11 - Forged Steel Fittings, Socket-Welding and Threaded.
G. ANSI/ASME B16.25 - Butt-Welding Ends.
H. ANSI/ASME B36.10 - Welded and Seamless Wrought Steel Pipe.
I. ANSI/ASME Section 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
J. ANSI/ASTM A47 - Malleable Iron Castings.
530
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 13 00 - 2 FIRE PROTECTION
SYSTEMS
K. ANSI/ASTM A135 - Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe.
L. ANSI/AWWA C110 - Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings.
M. ANSI/AWWA C151 - Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast.
N. ASME - Boiler and Pressure Vessel Code - Section IX, Welding and Brazing
Requirements.
O. ASTM A153 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped, Zinc-coated Welded and Seamless.
P. AWS D10.9 - Specifications for Qualification of Welding Procedures and Welders for
Piping and Tubing.
Q. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code,
R. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
S. NFPA 25 - Standard for the Inspection, Testing, and Maintenance of Water-Based Fire
Protection Systems.
T. UL - Underwriter's Laboratory Fire Protection Equipment Directory.
U. CBC California Building Code
V. CFC California Fire Code
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings per Section 21 05 00. Indicate pipe materials, joining methods,
supports, floor and wall penetration seals, sprinklers, equipment data and ratings, and
hydraulic calculations.
B. Submit detailed pipe and sprinkler layout and other calculations and forms as
described in NFPA 13.
C. Submit detailed working drawings and obtain review of them in the following order:
1. Engineer/Architect
2. Authority Having Jurisdiction
3. Architect/Engineer
4. Local Fire Department
5. Architect/Engineer
D. Working drawings shall include piping and sprinkler layout, sprinkler types and ratings,
sections and elevations at critical points. Show coordination with lighting, ductwork,
and diffusers, and indicate basic flow and hydraulic design information, including main
location and date that the test was taken.
E. Submit electrical power/controls wiring diagrams and product data indicating general
assembly, components, safety controls, and service connections.
531
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 13 00 - 3 FIRE PROTECTION
SYSTEMS
F. Provide the Owner with one copy of NFPA 25. Standard for the Inspection Testing and
Maintenance of Water-based Fire Protection Systems.
1.5 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide metal storage cabinet, wrenches for each sprinkler type, and extra sprinklers
per NFPA 13 and applicable building code.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store valves and sprinklers in shipping containers, with labels in place.
B. Provide temporary protective coating on iron and steel valves.
C. Maintain temporary end caps and closures in place until installation.
1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Contractor shall design and install the following water-based fire protection systems for
the areas noted on the contract documents:
1. Wet pipe sprinkler system(s)
B. Sprinkler systems shall be designed and installed according to the following
standard(s):
1. NFPA 13 - Standard for the Installation of Sprinkler Systems
C. System design and installation shall include all requirements by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction, local and state building codes, and Owner's insurance company in
addition to the previously listed design standard(s). Those requirements shall take
precedence over the contract documents in the case of discrepancies.
D. Systems shall be hydraulically calculated in accordance with the applicable design
standard(s). Contractor is responsible for final pipe sizing based on results from
hydraulic calculations. Pipe sizing shown on drawings for service entrance and main
risers is based off of field visit.
1.8 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Reference Coordination Drawings article in Section 21 05 00 for required fire
protection systems electronic CAD drawings to be provided to Coordinating Contractor
for inclusion into composite coordination drawings.
1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit manufacturers' operation and maintenance data. Include written maintenance
data on components of system, servicing requirements, and record drawings.
532
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 13 00 - 4 FIRE PROTECTION
SYSTEMS
1.10 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Local fire authority or third-party consultant shall be contracted to determine the flow
and pressure available at the service connection. The Fire Protection Contractor is
responsible to verify this information and make all tests required. Base all pipe sizing
and hydraulic calculations on flow test data no older than 12 months or as required by
AHJ.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PIPE AND FITTINGS - WET PIPE SPRINKLER SYSTEMS
A. Piping - 2" and Under (Steel Pipe):
1. Design Pressure: 175 psig
2. Pipe: Schedule 40, black steel, ASTM A53, ASTM A795, UL/FM. Inner wall shall
be coated with an anti-MIC (microbiologically influenced corrosion) coating.
3.
4. Fittings:
a. Threaded:
1) Cast iron, Class 125, black, UL/FM, ANSI/ASME B16.4.
2) Malleable iron, Class 150, black, UL/FM, ANSI/ASME B16.3.
3) Ductile iron, Class 150, black, UL/FM, ANSI/ASME B16.3.
b. Grooved:
1) Ductile iron housing ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, UL/FM, enamel
coating, Grade E (Type A) EPDM molded pressure-responsive
gaskets suited for 40°°F to 150°°F. Carbon steel bolts and nuts.
c. Flanged:
1) Cast iron, Class 125, black, UL/FM, ANSI/ASME B16.1.
5. Unions: Class 150 malleable iron, ANSI B16.39, ground joint with copper or
copper alloy-to-iron seat.
B. Piping - 2-1/2" and Above (Steel Pipe):
1. Design Pressure: 175 psig
2. Pipe: Schedule 10, black steel, ASTM A135, ASTM A795, UL/FM. Inner wall
shall be coated with an anti-MIC (microbiologically influenced corrosion) coating.
3. Pipe: Lightweight Schedule 10 alternate, black steel, ASTM A135, ASTM A795,
UL/FM. Inner wall shall be coated with an anti-MIC (microbiologically influenced
corrosion) coating.
4. Pipe: Schedule 40, black steel ASTM A53, ASTM A795, UL/FM. Inner wall shall
be coated with an anti-MIC (microbiologically influenced corrosion) coating.
5. Joints: Grooved.
533
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 13 00 - 5 FIRE PROTECTION
SYSTEMS
6. Fittings:
a. Grooved:
1) Ductile iron housing ASTM A-536, Grade 65-45-12, UL/FM, enamel
coating, Grade E (Type A) EPDM molded pressure-responsive
gaskets suited for 40°F to 150°F. Carbon steel bolts and nuts.
b. Flanged:
1) Cast iron, Class 125, black, UL/FM, ANSI/ASME B16.1.
2.2 VALVES
A. Provide handwheels for gate valves. Provide gear operators for butterfly valves.
B. Provide all connections to match pipe joints. Valves shall be same size as pipe.
2.3 EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
2.4 RISER LABELING AND IDENTIFICATION
A. Hydraulic nameplates shall be affixed to each riser and shall include the following
minimum information:
1. Installation contractor
2. Date installed
3. Riser location
4. Number of sprinklers
5. Basis of design (density GPM/ft2 and area of coverage ft2
6. Water flow rate (GPM) and residual pressure (psi) at the base of riser
7. Hose stream allowance (GPM).
8. Occupancy classification
9. Commodity classification (If applicable)
10. Maximum storage height (if applicable)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION - PIPING
A. General Installation Requirements:
1. Coordinate piping and sprinkler locations with all other trades. Ductwork,
diffusers and light fixture locations shall have priority over sprinkler piping and
sprinklers.
2. Ream pipe and tube ends to full inside diameter. Remove burrs. Remove scale
and foreign material, inside and outside, before assembly.
3. Die cut screw joints with full cut standard taper pipe threads.
534
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 13 00 - 6 FIRE PROTECTION
SYSTEMS
4. Coat threads with pipe joint compound or wrap with Teflon tape.
5. Locate piping to minimize obstruction of other work.
6. Route piping in concealed spaces above finished ceiling.
7. Use full and double lengths of pipe wherever possible.
8. Slope all piping for complete drainage. Install auxiliary drains for all trapped
piping per NFPA 13.
9. Reducers are generally not shown. Where pipe sizes change at tee, the tee shall
be the size of the largest pipe shown connecting to it.
10. Comply with manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Wall/Floor Penetration:
1. Seal pipes passing through walls with a wall seal per Section 21 05 29. Provide
Schedule 40 galvanized sleeve at least 2 pipe sizes larger than the pipe. Sleeves
through floors shall extend minimum 1.5" above finished floor.
2. Fire seal all pipe and sleeve penetrations (both wall and floor) to maintain fire
separation required without restraining pipe.
C. Installation Requirements in Electrical Rooms:
1. Do not install piping or other equipment above electrical switchboards or
panelboards. This includes a dedicated space extending 25 feet from the floor to
the structural ceiling with width and depth equal to the equipment. Fire protection
equipment dedicated to the electrical equipment room or space may be installed
above equipment if other alternatives are not available.
D. Hangers and Supports:
1. Provide hangers and supports as required by NFPA 13 and UL/FM, with the
following exceptions:
a. Do not use powder driven devices, explosive devices, wooden plugs, or
plastic inserts.
b. Do not install fasteners to carry the load in tension, unless absolutely
necessary.
2. Seismic supports shall be designed using Tolbrace by Tolco, or equivalent
program accounting for Fp and Cp factors for 2-way and 4-way bracing. Seismic
zone of influence shall be shown on the drawings to support these calculations.
Tolbrace details shall also be included in the drawings.
E. Exposed Piping:
1. Install chrome plated steel escutcheons where exposed pipes penetrate walls or
floors.
2. Remove all scale, rust, dirt, oils, stickers and thoroughly clean exterior of all bare
metal exposed piping, hangers, and accessories in preparation to be painted.
3.2 INSTALLATION - VALVES
A. Install gate valves with stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
535
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 13 00 - 7 FIRE PROTECTION
SYSTEMS
B. Shutoff Valve:
1. Provide drain valves at main shutoff valves, low points of piping and apparatus.
2. Provide monitor switches on all shutoff valves.
3.3 INSTALLATION - EQUIPMENT
A. Coordinate piping and sprinkler locations with all other trades. Ductwork, diffusers and
light fixture locations shall have priority over system equipment and sprinklers.
B. Alarm Bell:
1. Locate outside alarm bell on building wall as shown on fire alarm drawings.
2. Wire all bells, flow switches and supervisory switches to fire alarm system. All
wiring shall be in conduit and meet the requirements of the electrical
specifications.
C. Test Valves:
1. Install test valves where required. Pipe to outdoors or drain. Test connection
shall have flow equivalent to the smallest K-factor sprinkler.
D. Sprinklers:
1. Locate sprinklers to clear lights, ducts and diffusers. Do not run sprinkler pipes
through ducts. Ductwork has priority over sprinkler pipes. Offset pipes as
needed.
2. Center sprinklers in two directions in ceiling tiles and provide offsets as required.
3. Do not allow concealed sprinkler cover plates to be painted. Sprinkler cover
plates are to be factory painted only. Do not field paint.
4. Apply strippable or paper covers so concealed sprinkler cover plates do not
receive field paint finish.
3.4 SYSTEMS CLEANING AND TESTING
A. General Requirement:
1. All water used for testing and remaining in the piping system shall be obtained
from a potable water source.
B. Interior Piping:
1. Verify adequate water flow at the inspector's test connection.
2. Flush all interior piping to remove scale and other foreign material before placing
system into service.
3. Hydrostatically test the entire interior piping system at a minimum of 200 psig or
50 psig more than the normal system working pressure for systems subjected to
pressures more than 150 psig. Maintain test pressure for 2 hours without loss of
pressure.
536
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 13 00 - 8 FIRE PROTECTION
SYSTEMS
C. Fire Alarm System:
1. Test the alarm system by operating the inspector's test connection or the alarm
test valves. Verify that the building fire alarm system activates.
2. Adjust all monitor switches for proper operation.
END OF SECTION 21 13 00
537
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 22 00 - 1 CLEAN AGENT FIRE
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
SECTION 21 22 00
CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Control and Supervision System.
B. Novec 1230 Storage and Distribution Suppression System or Equal.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Source Limitation: Obtain extinguishing agent and equipment through one source,
including the detection and release equipment.
B. Perform work in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 2001, ANSI/NFPA 70 and ANSI/NFPA
72, applicable FM standards, and requirements of applicable codes and ordinances.
C. Extinguishing agent shall be in a virgin state as produced by the manufacturer.
Recycled agent is not allowed.
D. Indicate manufacturer's name and pressure rating on valve bodies. Indicate
manufacturer, type, size, part number, orifice code, or orifice diameter on discharge
nozzles. Markings shall be standard and visible after installation.
E. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ANSI/ASME SEC 9 and applicable
state labor regulations.
F. ASME Compliance: Fabricate piping to comply with ASME B31.1, "Power Piping."
G. FM Global Compliance: Provide components that are FM approved and are listed in
FM's "Fire Protection Approval Guide."
H. UL Compliance: Provide equipment components complying with UL 1058 listed for
clean-agent extinguishing system units in UL's "Fire Protection Equipment Directory."
I. See 21 05 00 for submittal requirements.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. All requirements of Authority Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
B. ANSI/ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 300.
C. ANSI/ASME B16.9 - Factory Made Wrought Steel Butt-Welding Fittings.
D. ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.
538
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 22 00 - 2 CLEAN AGENT FIRE
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
E. ANSI/ASME SEC 8 - Pressure Vessels.
F. ANSI/ASME SEC 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
G. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
H. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
I. ANSI/NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm Code.
J. ANSI/NFPA 75 - Standard for the Protection of Electronic Computer/Data Processing
Equipment
K. ANSI/NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code.
L. ANSI/NFPA 2001 - Clean Agent Fire Extinguishing Systems.
M. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type-C Elastic Element.
N. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.
O. ASTM A106 - Seamless Carbon Steel Pipe for High-Temperature Service.
P. ASTM A135 - Electric-Resistance-Welded Steel Pipe.
Q. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
Elevated Temperatures.
R. UL - Fire Protection Equipment Directory.
S. UL 393 - Indicating Pressure Gauges for Fire and Protection Services.
T. UL 404 - Gauges, Indicating Pressure, for Compressed Gas Service.
U. UL 2127 - Standard for Inert Gas Clean Agent Extinguishing System Units
V. US Environmental Protection Agency, Protection of Stratospheric Ozone 59 FR 13044
(Final SNAP Ruling).
1.4 EXTRA MATERIALS
A. Provide two spare detectors of each type installed.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store equipment in shipping containers with labeling in place. Deliver agent
in approved containers. Protect from damage.
B. Plugs and Cover Plates: Protect threaded ends, flanged ends, flanged openings, with
gasketed metal cover plates to prevent damage during shipment and to prevent
foreign materials from entering. Cap or plug drains, vents, small piping, and gauge
connections.
539
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 22 00 - 3 CLEAN AGENT FIRE
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide a complete clean agent fire suppression system including charged storage
tanks, piping distribution, nozzles, control panel, wiring, annunciators, release and
abort stations, alarm, and all other equipment necessary for a complete operational
system.
B. Design, fabrication, and installation shall comply with requirements and
recommendations of ANSI/NFPA 2001.
C. Acceptable Halocarbon Clean Agents:
1. Extinguishing Agent: Novec 1230, Dodecafluoro-2-methylpentan-3-one. Novec
1230 is a trade name for FK-5-1-12 fire-extinguishing clean agent, manufactured
by 3M.
D. System designed and installed to provide fire-extinguishing capability by totally
flooding the area shown on the drawings.
E. The system(s) shall be actuated by a combination of ionization and photoelectric
smoke detectors installed for maximum coverage of 250 sq. ft per detector. If HVAC
supply airflow is one air change per minute or more, photoelectric detectors only shall
be installed for maximum coverage of 125 sq. ft. per detector.
F. The system shall be actuated by an air sampling smoke detection system provided by
fire alarm contractor. Refer to Section 28 31 50 for more information.
G. Detectors shall be cross-zoned detection requiring two detectors to be in alarm before
release.
H. The system shall be capable of being actuated by manual release stations located at
exit.
I. The use of ozone-depleting substances, such as chlorofluorocarbon (CFC),
hydrochlorofluorocarbon (HCFC) or halon, is prohibited.
1.7 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. Provide sufficient extinguishing agent to extinguish fire. Consider the following when
computing volume:
1. Volume of hazard area.
2. Specific volume of vapor.
3. Additional quantities needed to compensate for unclosable openings, pipe losses
, and nitrogen dilution.
4. Forced ventilation, fan coast-down time and damper actuation time.
5. Server room air conditioning units will not operate during discharge. Unit fans will
have a coast-down period (delay).
6. Mechanical fire/smoke damper controls.
7. Room temperature of the hazard space.
540
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 22 00 - 4 CLEAN AGENT FIRE
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
8. Elevation above sea level.
9. Other special conditions affecting extinguishing efficiency.
B. Locate extinguishing agent supply and backup supply, if required, near each hazard
area.
C. Interface system with building fire alarm system.
1.8 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Design system for Class A or C fires as appropriate for areas being protected and
include safety factor. Use clean agent indicated and in concentration suitable for
occupied areas.
B. Halocarbon Clean Agents:
1. Novec 1230: Provide total flooding of 5.0% Novec 1230 minimum concentration
by room volume for Class A fire protection or 5.2% Novec 1230 minimum
concentration by room volume for Class C fire protection, in maximum 10
seconds at 70°°F for a 10-minute holding time.
a. Novec 1230 concentration greater than 10% immediately after discharge or
less than 4.2% throughout holding time will not be accepted without written
authorization from Owner and Authorities Having Jurisdiction (AHJ).
b. System Capabilities: Vapor pressure of 5.85 psig at 77°F. Super-
pressurized with dry nitrogen to a working pressure of 360 psig at 70°F.
Low pressure alarm shall activate at 290 psig.
1.9 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of products specified in this
section with minimum three years documented experience.
B. Installer: Company specializing in installing the work of this section with minimum three
years documented experience, approved by manufacturer, who maintains a recharging
station and can provide replacement charge within 24 hours.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide one-year warranty for the entire system. Warranty shall include the
replacement agent in the event of a false discharge.
1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Conduct inspections six (6) and twelve (12) months from Date of Notice of Completion
to verify proper operation of system and to check agent container weight and pressure.
Include a thorough check of controls, detection and alarm systems.
B. Submit documents certifying satisfactory system conditions. Include manufacturer's
certificate of acceptance of inspector's qualifications.
541
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 22 00 - 5 CLEAN AGENT FIRE
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEAN AGENT FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Fenwal Protection Systems
2. Kidde Fire Systems
3. Siemens Fire Products
4. Chemetron Fire Systems
5. Fike Corporation; Fire Protection Systems Division
6. Ansul Fire Protection
2.2 PIPE AND PIPING SPECIALTIES
A. Steel Pipe (All Sizes) (Downstream of Orifice Union):
1. Pipe: ASTM A53 or A106, Schedule 40, black.
2. Fittings: ASTM A-197 Malleable Iron Class 300 or ASTM A234 forged steel
welding type fittings for all sizes.
3. Joints: Screwed or ANSI/AWS D1.1 welded.
B. Steel Pipe - 2-1/2" and Over (Downstream of Orifice Union):
1. Pipe: Standard weight black steel, mechanically coupled grooved type, ASTM
A53.
2. Joints: Mechanically coupled grooved type with EPDM gaskets. (Machined
groove only. Rolled grove fittings are not allowed).
3. Fittings: Malleable iron, ASTM A47, Grade 32510, black, mechanically coupled
grooved type.
4. Flanges: Grooved end, flanged adapter.
C. Steel Pipe - Between Storage Tanks and Orifice Union:
1. Pipe: ASTM A53 or A106, Schedule 80, black.
2. Joints: Flanged, ASME B16.5, Class 600.
3. Fittings: Forged-steel Welding Fittings: ASME B16.11, Class 3000, socket
pattern.
D. Valves:
1. General: Brass, suitable for intended operation.
2. Container Valves: With rupture disc or electric solenoid, capable of immediate
and total agent discharge and suitable for intended flow capacity.
3. Valves in Sections of Closed Piping and Manifolds: Fabricate to prevent
entrapment of liquid or install valve and separate pressure-relief devices.
4. Valves in Manifolds: Check valve, installed, to prevent loss of extinguishing agent
when container is removed from manifold.
E. Ordinary cast iron pipe, steel pipe conforming to ASTM A-120 or non-metallic pipe
shall not be used.
542
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 22 00 - 6 CLEAN AGENT FIRE
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
F. Pipe Hangers: UL listed for sprinkler systems, split clamp up to 2-1/2" size, riser
clamps over 2-1/2" size.
G. Escutcheons: Chrome plated pressed or stamped brass, one-piece or split pattern,
minimum 2" larger than opening.
H. Gauges: ASME B40.1 diameter cast aluminum case, phosphor bronze bourdon tube,
rotary brass movement, brass socket, front recalibration adjustment, black figures on
white background, 1% mid-scale accuracy, scale calibrated in psi.
2.3 DISCHARGE NOZZLES
A. Nozzles shall be UL listed and FM approved for installation below a 1'-0" to 12'-0"
ceiling or plenum height with only a single layer of nozzles (not tiered).
B. Select for required rates of discharge and coverage and to distribute agent uniformly
throughout protected area.
C. Provide one-piece chrome plated brass, stainless steel, or aluminum nozzle(s) with
textured finish and female pipe thread integral on body. Direct discharge parallel to
ceiling.
D. Permanently mark nozzles for identification and to show equivalent single orifice
diameter.
2.4 CLEAN AGENT CYLINDERS
A. Design, fabricate, certify, and stamp cylinders in accordance with ANSI/ASME Boiler
and Pressure Vessel Code, SEC 8 for unfired pressure vessels. Cylinders shall be
standard model and size for ease of replacement and addition. Storage cylinders shall
be constructed to meet or exceed the agent manufacturer's recommended tank
working and test pressure.
B. Fill cylinders with required clean agent.
C. Identify cylinders with permanent plate specifying agent, tare and gross weight,
pounds of agent, and pressurization level. Install so plate is visible and legible.
D. Equip cylinders with pressure relief devices.
E. For systems with more than one cylinder, provide discharge manifold and rack to
secure each cylinder. Provide check valves between each cylinder discharge and
manifold.
F. Supply each storage container with a factory installed level indicator to determine
agent content and pressure switch to indicate low tank pressure. The low-pressure
switch shall be wired to the control panel to provide audible and visual "Trouble" alarm.
G. Each inert gas cylinder must have a calibrated gauge on cylinder head.
543
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 22 00 - 7 CLEAN AGENT FIRE
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
2.5 ORIFICE UNIONS/NIPPLE ASSEMBLIES
A. Description: UL-listed device with minimum 2000 psig pressure rating installed in the
manifold to control flow and reduce pressure of Inergen gas in piping.
1. 2" and Smaller: Piping assembly with orifice, sized for system design
requirements.
2. 2-1/2" and Larger: Piping assembly with nipple, size for system design
requirements.
2.6 FIRE SUPPRESSION CONTROL PANEL, DETECTION, AND ALARM SYSTEM
A. Manufacturers:
1. Fenwal Fire Protection Systems
2. Kidde Fire Systems
3. Siemens Fire Products
4. Chemtron Fire Systems Pyrochem
5. Fike Corporation
6. Fire Protection Systems Division.
B. UL listed and FM approved as alarm and releasing device, with solid-state internal
circuitry in NEMA ICS 6, Type 1 cabinet.
C. Control Unit Panel:
1. Control Unit Panel: Modular construction. Surface wall-mounted enclosure,
minimum 0.060 inch steel enclosure with provisions for electrical conduit
connections into the sides and top. The door shall provide a key lock and shall
include a glass or other transparent opening for viewing of all indicators.
2. Each loop (circuit) shall not be loaded over 80% of the maximum device capacity.
For example, in the minimum system capacity column listed below, if the fire
alarm manufacturer's system capacity of intelligent sensors per loop is 99
devices, then no more than 79 devices shall be wired on that loop. The minimum
system capacity shall be as follows:
a. Minimum Total Addressable Points: 99
b. Minimum Total Analog System Sensors: 99
3. Provide the following control panel features:
a. Electrical contacts for shutting down fans, activating valves or dampers,
and operating system electrical devices.
b. Automatic switchover to standby power at loss of primary power.
c. Storage container, low-pressure indicator.
d. Cross zoned and counting zone detection.
544
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 22 00 - 8 CLEAN AGENT FIRE
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
4. Signal Line Circuit Board (SLC):
a. Each board shall receive analog information for all intelligent analog
sensors and shall process this information to determine normal, alarm, or
trouble conditions. The analog information may also be used for automatic
test and determination of maintenance requirements.
b. Each board shall contain its own microprocessor and shall be provided to
monitor and control each signaling line circuit loop of intelligent analog
sensors and addressable modules. The system shall have the ability to
detect duplicate addresses on each SLC loop.
c. Circuits shall be Class A Style 6/7 or Class B Style 4.
5. Display:
a. The board shall provide all controls and indicators used by the system
operator and may also be used to program all control panel parameters.
b. The board shall provide an alphanumeric array for display of custom
alphanumeric labels for all intelligent analog sensors and addressable
modules. It shall also provide indicators for AC Power, System Alarm,
System Trouble, Display Trouble and Signal Silence.
c. The board shall provide a touch key-pad with control capability to command
all system functions and entry of any alphanumeric information. A minimum
of three different passwords with three levels of security shall be supported
to prevent unauthorized manual control or programming.
6. Memory: The CPU and display interface board shall be augmented by non-
volatile field programmable memory. EPROM memory will also be allowed
provided the memory is burned in with minimum expansion capability equal to
the total system capacity of the panel. Memory shall not be lost upon primary and
secondary power failure. Memory shall have the capacity to store event log of up
to a minimum of 800 events.
7. Power Supply:
a. Input power shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hertz. Output power shall be as noted on
the device specifications.
b. Adequate to supply 125% of all control panel and peripheral power needs
as well as 125% of power required for all external audio-visual devices. The
power supply may be increased as needed by adding additional modular
expansion power supplies. Overcurrent protections shall be provided on all
power outputs.
c. All power supplies shall be designed and installed to meet UL and NFPA
requirements for power-limited operation on all external initiating and
indicating circuits.
d. The power supply shall provide integral charger for use with internal
batteries. Battery capacity shall be sufficient for operation of the entire
system for 24 hours in a non-alarm state, followed by alarm mode for 10
minutes, plus 25% spare capacity for future devices.
545
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 22 00 - 9 CLEAN AGENT FIRE
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
D. Maintenance Lock-Out Switch:
1. The maintenance lock-out switch shall be used to disable the fire suppression
system during routine maintenance.
2. This switch shall be key operated, allowing removal of the key in either the
"Normal" or "Lock-Out" position. A red indicator lamp on the switch assembly
shall illuminate when in the "Lock-Out" position. The fire alarm control panel is to
indicate a trouble condition when in the "Lock-Out" position.
E. Initiation Devices:
1. Intelligent Analog Smoke Sensors:
a. Sensors shall connect with two wires to one of the control panel loops.
They shall use the photoelectric principal to measure smoke density and
shall, on command from the control panel, send data to the panel
representing the analog level of smoke density.
b. Analog Ionization Type Sensor: It shall use the dual chamber ionization
principle to measure smoke density and send data to the control panel
representing the analog level of smoke density measured.
c. Mount sensors, where shown on the drawings, on twist-lock bases with all
mounting hardware provided. Provide a two-piece head/base design.
d. The sensors shall have switches for address setting and shall store an
internal identifying code that the control panel shall use to identify the type
of sensor.
e. Provide dual alarm and power indicators that flash under normal conditions
and remain continuous under alarm or trouble conditions. Provide a
connection for attachment of a remote indicator.
2. Addressable Manual Release Stations:
a. Manual release stations shall connect with two wires to one of the control
unit panel loops. They shall be single action, non-break glass type made of
red painted metal. They shall notify the control panel of their state.
b. Stations shall be semi-flush mounted where shown on the drawings, with all
mounting hardware provided.
c. Stations shall have double action push/pull levers to prevent accidental
operation and shall lock on when manually pulled. Stations shall be
restored to normal position only when reset with a key.
d. Stations shall provide address setting means using rotary decimal or DIP
switches.
3. Manual Abort Stations:
a. Manual abort stations shall be momentary type switches and operate as
'dead man' switches, where the agent discharge sequence is interrupted as
long as the station is active.
b. Stations shall be flush surface mounted where shown on drawings, with all
mounting hardware provided.
c. Stations shall be engaged by manually pushing a large pushbutton switch
and disengage when released.
546
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 22 00 - 10 CLEAN AGENT FIRE
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
4. Interface Modules:
a. Interface modules shall connect with two wires to one of the control unit
panel loops. They shall notify the control panel of the state of supervised
dry contacts wired for Style D or Style B operation.
b. Mount the modules in enclosures located in accessible service locations as
near as possible to the devices controlled. Provide all mounting hardware.
c. Modules shall have address setting means using rotary decimal or DIP
switches.
5. Addressable Relays:
a. Addressable relays represent addressable control points used primarily for
the control of auxiliary devices as indicated on the drawings. Contractor to
provide additional slave relay(s) as required, rated for the electrical load
being controlled (Contractor to match voltage, amps, etc.).
b. Relays shall connect directly to an SLC loop and receive power from a
separate 24 VDC circuit.
c. Mount relays in enclosures located in an accessible service location as
near as possible to the device(s) being controlled, unless otherwise shown
on the drawings. Provide all mounting hardware.
d. Relays shall supply 24 VDC power to the device(s) being controlled, unless
otherwise indicated on the drawings.
6. Pressure Operated Switches:
a. The system shall include pressure-operated switches actuated by the agent
discharge for monitoring by the control unit and the building fire alarm
panel.
b. The pressure-operated switch shall be wired into the Emergency Power Off
(EPO) circuitry to shut down power in the event of an agent discharge. EPO
wiring by the Electrical Contractor.
c. The switches shall be UL listed for use with the clean agent suppression
system.
F. Notification Appliance Devices:
1. Audio Horn/Visual: NFPA 72 and ADA 4.28; semi-flush type fire alarm electronic
horn. Sound Rating: 90 dBA at 10 feet. Alarm sound levels shall not exceed 120
dBA at 10 feet. Electronic horns shall be able to be field set to annunciate as a
solid horn tone, ringing bell tone, hi-low chime, wail tone or hi-low whoop.
Provide the housing and backbox with red housing with white lettered FIRE and
clear high intensity xenon strobe or equivalent under a clear lens with 30 candela
rating. Candela rating shall be visible from the outside of the device. The
maximum pulse duration shall be 0.2 seconds with a maximum duty cycle of
40%. The flash rate shall be 1 Hz. Where more than two strobes are visible from
any one location, the fire alarm visual devices shall be synchronized.
2. Alarm Bells: NFPA 72 and ADA 4.28; electric vibrating, 10 inch, with operating
mechanism behind dome. Sound Rating: 81 dBA at 10 feet. Sound levels for
alarm signals shall not exceed 120 dBA.
547
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 22 00 - 11 CLEAN AGENT FIRE
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
3. Rotating Flasher: Weatherproof yellow revolving beacon type. Provide with
electronic piezo beeper with sound rating between 80 dBA and 91 dBA at 10
feet.
2.7 ANNUNCIATION
A. Remote LCD Annunciators:
1. Communications and power to the annunciators shall be supervised. The
annunciator shall receive power from the fire alarm control panel.
2. A single key switch shall enable all switches on the annunciator.
2.8 WIRING
A. Fire alarm wiring/cabling shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and pursuant to National Fire
Codes. Cabling shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with NFPA 70, Article 760
for power-limited fire alarm signal service.
B. Manufacturers of fire alarm cable:
1. Comtran Corp.
2. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.
3. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corp.
4. West Penn Wire/CDT.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SEQUENCES OF OPERATION
A. The Fire Suppression Contractor is responsible to ensure proper operation.
B. System Sequence:
1. Detection of a single detector or air sampling smoke detection system shall:
a. Energize alarm bell.
b. Close ductwork isolation and/or fire/smoke dampers.
c. Open the room pressure relief damper.
d. Signal building fire alarm system.
2. Detection of a second detector shall:
a. Signal building fire alarm system.
b. Activate audio horn/visual devices and de-energize alarm bell.
c. Shut down power to computer room air-conditioning units and close
dampers.
d. Start time delay for up to 30 seconds (adjustable).
548
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 22 00 - 12 CLEAN AGENT FIRE
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
3. Activation of the manual fire suppression agent release shall:
a. Signal building fire alarm system.
b. Activate audio horn/visual devices and de-energize alarm bell (if operating).
Annunciate the audio horn/visual devices with a distinctively faster pulse.
c. Shut down power to computer room air-conditioning units and close
ductwork isolation and/or fire/smoke dampers.
d. Start time delay for 60 seconds (adjustable).
4. After completion of the time delay, the system shall:
a. Release agent into protected area.
b. If abort switch is engaged, delay release.
c. Upon abort switch disengagement, release agent unless system has been
cleared and reset.
d. Shutdown all power to equipment in the hazard area via the pressure
activated switch.
e. Activate the visual alarm (rotating flashers) at the protected area's entrance
door(s).
C. Warning signs at the protected area's entrance doors shall read, "Warning - Do not
enter room when warning light is flashing. Fire extinguishing system has been
activated." Sign shall be engraved plastic laminate with 3/4" minimum letter height.
D. The Fire Suppression Contractor shall test all sequences and submit test results to
Engineer and Owner's representative.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that spaces are ready to receive work.
B. Ensure enclosing walls are continuous above ceilings and below raised floors to allow
required concentration to be maintained for required time to extinguish fire.
C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION - GENERAL
A. General Installation Requirements:
1. Install in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and ANSI/NFPA
2001.
2. Paint in accordance with ANSI/NFPA 2001 requirements. Place directional
arrows and system labels wherever piping changes direction and minimum 20
feet on straight runs.
3. Install engraved plastic instruction plate, detailing emergency procedures, at
control panel and at each manual discharge and abort switch location. At control
panel, identify control logic units, contacts, and major circuits with permanent
nameplates.
4. Post warning signs at each entrance to the protected area.
549
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 22 00 - 13 CLEAN AGENT FIRE
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
5. Remove all scale, rust, dirt, oils, stickers and thoroughly clean exterior of all bare
metal exposed piping, hangers, and accessories in preparation to be painted.
B. Pipe Installation Requirements:
1. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Remove scale and dirt on inside and
outside before assembly. Blow out pipe before nozzles or discharge devices are
installed.
2. Route piping in orderly manner, plumb and parallel to building structure, and
maintain gradient. Install piping to conserve building space, and not interfere with
use of space and other work. All piping shall be concealed above ceilings, below
floors or in walls. Piping to exposed nozzles shall be chrome plated.
3. Securely support piping per ANSI/ASME B31.1 with allowance for agent thrust
forces and thermal expansion and contraction.
4. Install unions downstream of valves and at equipment connections.
5. At hazard area walls, pack space between pipe, pipe sleeve or surface
penetration with mineral fiber with elastomer caulk to depth of 1/2". Provide
escutcheons where exposed piping passes through walls, floors, and ceilings.
Seal pipe penetrations of fire separations.
C. Cylinder Location:
1. Secure cylinders to wall. Where manifolded, mount and support by rack. For
each system, provide same size cylinders containing equal amounts of clean
agent.
3.4 TESTING
A. Testing and Inspection Requirements:
1. The completed clean agent fire suppression system piping shall be pneumatically
tested in a closed circuit for a period of 10 minutes at 40 psig. At the end of 10
minutes, the pressure drop shall not exceed 20% of the test pressure. When
pressurizing the piping, pressure shall be increased in 5 psi increments. A written
report of the test results shall be provided to the Architect/Engineer.
2. The piping system shall be inspected in accordance with NFPA Standard 2001,
Section 6-7.2.2 latest edition.
3. The equipment manufacturer's representative shall verify that all nozzles are
installed in the correct location and that the area of coverage for each nozzle is
within the approved range of the manufacturer's listings and approvals. The
equipment manufacturers shall provide written certification to that effect.
4. The Fire Suppression Contractor shall provide a "puff test" of the completed
piping system to certify to the Architect/Engineer that the piping network is free
and clear of obstructions. The equipment manufacturers shall submit a procedure
for approval prior to beginning the "puff test." The equipment manufacturers shall
provide certified results of the testing to the Architect/Engineer signed by the
equipment manufacturer's representative.
550
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 22 00 - 14 CLEAN AGENT FIRE
SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
5. Conduct an enclosure integrity test in accordance with NFPA 2001, Appendix C,
latest edition. Prior to conducting testing, the equipment manufacturers shall
verify with the general equipment manufacturers that all contemplated enclosure
penetrations have been completed and that all enclosure sealing has been
accomplished.
B. Certification Requirements:
1. Certified "as installed" piping isometric drawings and clean agent flow
calculations shall be completed by the Fire Suppression Contractor prior to
ordering clean agent discharge nozzles. The certified isometric drawing and
clean agent flow calculations shall be stamped "CERTIFIED AS INSTALLED"
and signed by the equipment manufacturer's representative.
2. The Fire Suppression Contractor shall provide certified volumetric calculations of
the final as-built hazard enclosure to verify the clean agent design concentration.
The certified volumetric calculations shall be stamped "CERTIFIED
VOLUMETRIC CALCULATIONS" and signed by the equipment manufacturer's
representative.
3. The equipment manufacturers shall perform a certified weight check of all clean
agent storage containers prior to turning the system over to the
Architect/Engineer. This weight check shall be accomplished by means other
than the liquid level indicator installed in the container. The results of this weight
check shall then be correlated to the liquid level indicator to form the basis for
future testing.
4. The following shall not occur until construction is 100% complete and the Owner
has provided written approval.
a. Upon completion of all testing, the equipment manufacturers shall arm the
system and leave it in 100% working order.
END OF SECTION 21 22 00
551
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 00 - 1 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION
REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 21 05 00
BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Requirements applicable to all Division 21 Sections. Also refer to Division 01 - General
Requirements.
B. All materials and installation methods shall conform to the applicable standards,
guidelines and codes referenced herein and within each specification section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. CCR California Code of Regulation
B. CBC California Building Code
C. CFC California Fire Code
D. CEC California Electric Code
E. CMC California Mechanical Code
F. CPC California Plumbing Code
G. California Title 24 - Building Energy Efficiency Standards
H. SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District
I. Standard For Installation of Sprinkler System – NFPA 13, 2016 Edition (CA Amended)
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Specification and the associated drawings govern the furnishing, installing, testing
and placing into satisfactory operation the Mechanical Systems.
B. Each Contractor shall provide all new materials indicated on the drawings and/or in
these specifications, and all items required to make the portion of the Mechanical Work
a finished and working system.
C. Separate contracts will be awarded for the following work:
D. All work will be awarded under a single General Contract. The division of work listed
below is for the Contractor's convenience and lists normal breakdown of the work.
552
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 00 - 2 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION
REQUIREMENTS
E. Separate contracts will be awarded for the following work. The division of work listed
below is for the contractors' convenience and lists a normal breakdown of the work.
Please refer to the Construction Manager's scope statements for complete scope of
work description.
F. Scope of Work:
1. Plumbing Work: Refer to Section 22 05 00 "Basic Plumbing Requirements".
2. Heating Work: Refer to Section 23 05 00 "Basic HVAC Requirements".
3. Air Conditioning and Ventilating Work: Refer to Section 23 05 00 "Basic HVAC
Requirements".
4. Temperature Control Work: Refer to Section 23 05 00 "Basic HVAC
Requirements".
5. Fire Protection Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to:
a. Extend existing wet pipe sprinkler system for areas noted on the drawings.
b. Furnish all hydraulic calculations and working sprinkler drawings.
c. Furnish and install seismic restraint and equipment designed for use in
seismic conditions described in Section 21 05 50.
d. Furnish and install firestopping systems for penetrations of fire-rated
construction associated with this Contractor's work.
e. Complete all applicable tests, certifications, forms, and matrices.
f. Provide NOVEC 1230 system, or equal, in IT server room.
g. Submit full set of plans for plan check approval, and update plans for
permits.
1.4 DIVISION OF WORK BETWEEN MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL & CONTROL
CONTRACTORS
A. Definitions:
1. "Mechanical Contractors" refers to the following:
a. Plumbing Contractor.
b. Heating Contractor.
c. Air Conditioning and Ventilating Contractor.
d. Temperature Control Contractor.
e. Fire Protection Contractor.
f. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Contractor.
2. Motor Control Wiring: The wiring associated with the remote operation of the
magnetic coils of magnetic motor starters or relays, or the wiring that permits
direct cycling of motors by means of devices in series with the motor power
wiring. In the latter case the devices are usually single phase and are usually
connected to the motor power wiring through a manual motor starter having
"Manual-Off-Auto" provisions.
3. Control devices such as start-stop push buttons, thermostats, pressure switches,
flow switches, relays, etc., generally represent the types of equipment associated
with motor control wiring.
553
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 00 - 3 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION
REQUIREMENTS
4. Motor control wiring is single phase and usually 120 volts. In some instances, the
voltage will be the same as the motor power wiring. Generally, where the motor
power wiring exceeds 120 volts, a control transformer is used to give a control
voltage of 120 volts.
5. Temperature Control Wiring: The wiring associated with the operation of a
motorized damper, solenoid valve or motorized valve, etc., either modulating or
two-position, as opposed to wiring which directly powers or controls a motor used
to drive equipment such as fans, pumps, etc.
a. This wiring will be from a 120 volt source and may continue as 120 volt, or
be reduced in voltage (24 volt) in which case a control transformer shall be
furnished as part of the temperature control wiring.
6. Control Motor: An electric device used to operate dampers, valves, etc. It may be
two-position or modulating. Conventional characteristics of such a motor are 24
volts, 60 cycles, 1 phase, although other voltages may be encountered.
7. Voltage is generally specified and scheduled as distribution voltage. Motor
submittals may be based on utilization voltage if it corresponds to the correct
distribution voltage.
Distribution/Nominal Voltage Utilization Voltage
120 115
208 200
240 230
277 265
480 460
B. General:
1. The purpose of these Specifications is to outline the Electrical and Mechanical
Contractor's responsibilities related to electrical work required for items such as
temperature controls, mechanical equipment, fans, chillers, compressors and the
like. The exact wiring requirements for much of the equipment cannot be
determined until the systems have been selected and submittals reviewed.
Therefore, the electrical drawings show only known wiring related to such items.
All wiring not shown on the electrical drawings, but required for mechanical
systems, is the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor.
2. Where the drawings require the Electrical Contractor to wire between equipment
furnished by the Mechanical Contractor, such wiring shall terminate at terminals
provided in the equipment. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide complete
electrical power/controls wiring diagrams and supervision to the Electrical
Contractor and designate the terminal numbers for correct wiring.
3. All electrical work shall conform to the National Electrical Code. All provisions of
the Electrical Specifications concerning wiring, protection, etc., apply to wiring
provided by the Mechanical Contractor unless noted otherwise.
554
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 00 - 4 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION
REQUIREMENTS
4. Control low (24V) and control line (120V) voltage wiring, conduit, and related
switches and relays required for the automatic control and/or interlock of motors
and equipment, including final connection, are to be furnished and installed under
Divisions 21, 22 and 23. Materials and installation to conform to Class 1 or 2
requirements.
5. All Contractors shall establish utility elevations prior to fabrication and shall
coordinate their material and equipment with other trades. When a conflict arises,
priority is as follows:
a. Light fixtures.
b. Gravity flow piping, including steam and condensate.
c. Electrical busduct.
d. Sheet metal.
e. Electrical cable trays, including access space.
f. Sprinkler piping and other piping.
g. Electrical conduits and wireway.
1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Definitions:
1. Coordination Drawings: A compilation of the pertinent layout and system
drawings that show the sizes and locations, including elevations, of system
components and required access areas to ensure that no two objects will occupy
the same space.
a. Mechanical trades shall include, but are not limited to, mechanical
equipment, ductwork, fire protection systems, plumbing piping, steam and
steam condensate piping, and any item that may impact coordination with
other disciplines.
b. Electrical trades shall include, but are not limited to, electrical equipment,
conduit 1.5" and larger, conduit racks, cable trays, pull boxes, raceway,
busway, lighting, ceiling-mounted devices, and any item that may impact
coordination with other disciplines.
c. Technology trades shall include, but are not limited to, technology
equipment, racks, conduit 1.5" and larger, conduit racks, cable trays, ladder
rack, pull boxes, raceway, ceiling-mounted devices, and any item that may
impact coordination with other disciplines.
d. Maintenance clearances and code-required dedicated space shall be
included.
e. The coordination drawings shall include all underground, underfloor, in-
floor, in chase, and vertical trade items.
2. The contractors shall use the coordination process to identify the proper
sequence of installation of all utilities above ceilings and in other congested
areas, to ensure an orderly and coordinated end result, and to provide adequate
access for service and maintenance.
555
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 00 - 5 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION
REQUIREMENTS
B. Participation:
1. The contractors and subcontractors responsible for work defined above shall
participate in the coordination drawing process.
2. One contractor shall be designated as the Coordinating Contractor for purposes
of preparing a complete set of composite electronic CAD coordination drawings
that include all applicable trades, and for coordinating the activities related to this
process. The Coordinating Contractor for this project shall be the Mechanical
Contractor.
a. The Coordinating Contractor shall utilize personnel familiar with
requirements of this project and skilled as draftspersons/CAD operators,
competent to prepare the required coordination drawings.
3. Electronic CAD drawings shall be submitted to the City for addition of work by
other trades.
C. Drawing Requirements:
1. The file format and file naming convention shall be coordinated with and agreed
to by all contractors participating in the coordination process and the Owner.
a. Scale of drawings:
1) General plans: 1/4 Inch = 1 '-0" (minimum).
2) Mechanical, electrical, communication rooms, and including the
surrounding areas within 10 feet: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
3) Shafts and risers: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
4) Sections of shafts and mechanical and electrical equipment rooms:
1/4 Inch = 1 '-0" (minimum).
5) Sections of congested areas: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
2. Ductwork layout drawings shall be the baseline system for other components.
Ductwork layout drawings shall be modified to accommodate other components
as the coordination process progresses.
3. There may be more drawings required for risers, top and bottom levels of
mechanical rooms, and shafts.
4. The minimum quantity of drawings will be established at the first coordination
meeting and sent to the A/E for review. Additional drawings may be required if
other areas of congestion are discovered during the coordination process.
D. General:
1. Coordination drawing files shall be made available to the A/E and Owner's
Representative. The A/E will only review identified conflicts and give an opinion,
but will not perform as a coordinator.
2. A plotted set of coordination drawings shall be available at the project site.
3. Coordination drawings are not shop drawings and shall not be submitted as
such.
556
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 00 - 6 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION
REQUIREMENTS
4. The contract drawings are schematic in nature and do not show every fitting and
appurtenance for each utility. Each contractor is expected to have included in the
bid sufficient fittings, material, and labor to allow for adjustments in routing of
utilities made necessary by the coordination process and to provide a complete
and functional system.
5. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions due to
participation in the coordination process.
6. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions for
additional fittings, reroutings or changes of duct size, that are essentially
equivalent sizes to those shown on the drawings and determined necessary
through the coordination process.
7. The A/E reserves the right to determine space priority of equipment in the event
of spatial conflicts or interference between equipment, piping, conduit, ducts, and
equipment provided by the trades.
8. Changes to the contract documents that are necessary for systems installation
and coordination shall be brought to the attention of the A/E.
9. Access panels shall preferably occur only in gypsum board walls or plaster
ceilings where indicated on the drawings.
a. Access to mechanical, electrical, technology, and other items located above
the ceiling shall be through accessible lay-in ceiling tile areas.
b. Potential layout changes shall be made to avoid additional access panels.
c. Additional access panels shall not be allowed without written approval from
the A/E at the coordination drawing stage.
d. Providing additional access panels shall be considered after other
alternatives are reviewed and discarded by the A/E and the Owner's
Representative.
e. When additional access panels are required, they shall be provided without
additional cost to the Owner.
10. Complete the coordination drawing process and obtain sign off of the drawings
by all contractors prior to installing any of the components.
11. Conflicts that result after the coordination drawings are signed off shall be the
responsibility of the contractor or subcontractor who did not properly identify their
work requirements, or installed their work without proper coordination.
12. Updated coordination drawings that reflect as-built conditions may be used as
record documents.
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be required for the following items, and for additional items where
required elsewhere in the specifications or on the drawings.
1. Submittals list:
Referenced Specification
Section
Submittal Item
21 05 00 Basic Fire Suppression Requirements
21 05 03 Fire Seal Systems
21 05 05 Fire Suppression Demolition For Remodel
21 05 29 Hangers and Supports
557
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 00 - 7 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION
REQUIREMENTS
Referenced Specification
Section
Submittal Item
21 05 50 Seismic Restraint Systems
21 05 53 Mechanical Identification
21 13 00 Sprinkler Systems
B. General Submittal Procedures: In addition to the provisions of Division 01, the
following are required:
1. Transmittal: Each transmittal shall include the following:
a. Date
b. Project title and number
c. Contractor's name and address
d. Division of work (e.g., plumbing, heating, ventilating, etc.)
e. Description of items submitted and relevant specification number
f. Notations of deviations from the contract documents
g. Other pertinent data
2. Submittal Cover Sheet: Each submittal shall include a cover sheet containing:
a. Date
b. Project title and number
c. Architect/Engineer
d. Contractor and subcontractors' names and addresses
e. Supplier and manufacturer's names and addresses
f. Division of work (e.g., plumbing, heating, ventilating, etc.)
g. Description of item submitted (using project nomenclature) and relevant
specification number
h. Notations of deviations from the contract documents
i. Other pertinent data
j. Provide space for Contractor's review stamps
3. Composition:
a. Submittals shall be submitted using specification sections and the project
nomenclature for each item.
b. Individual submittal packages shall be prepared for items in each
specification section. All items within a single specification section shall be
packaged together where possible. An individual submittal may contain
items from multiple specifications sections if the items are intimately linked
(e.g., pumps and motors).
c. All sets shall contain an index of the items enclosed with a general topic
description on the cover.
558
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 00 - 8 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION
REQUIREMENTS
4. Content: Submittals shall include all fabrication, erection, layout, and setting
drawings; manufacturers' standard drawings; schedules; descriptive literature,
catalogs and brochures; performance and test data; electrical power criteria (e.g.,
voltage, phase, amps, horsepower, kW, etc.) wiring and control diagrams; Short
Circuit Current Rating (SCCR); dimensions; shipping and operating weights;
shipping splits; service clearances; and all other drawings and descriptive data of
materials of construction as may be required to show that the materials,
equipment or systems and the location thereof conform to the requirements of
the contract documents.
5. Contractor's Approval Stamp:
a. The Contractor shall thoroughly review and approve all shop drawings
before submitting them to the Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall
stamp, date and sign each submittal certifying it has been reviewed.
b. Unstamped submittals will be rejected.
c. The Contractor's review shall include, but not be limited to, verification of
the following:
1) Only approved manufacturers are used.
2) Addenda items have been incorporated.
3) Catalog numbers and options match those specified.
4) Performance data matches that specified.
5) Electrical characteristics and loads match those specified.
6) Equipment connection locations, sizes, capacities, etc. have been
coordinated with other affected trades.
7) Dimensions and service clearances are suitable for the intended
location.
8) Equipment dimensions are coordinated with support steel,
housekeeping pads, openings, etc.
9) Constructability issues are resolved (e.g., weights and dimensions
are suitable for getting the item into the building and into place.).
d. The Contractor shall review, stamp and approve all subcontractors'
submittals as described above.
e. The Contractor's approval stamp is required on all submittals. Approval will
indicate the Contractor's review of all material and a complete
understanding of exactly what is to be furnished. Contractor shall clearly
mark all deviations from the contract documents on all submittals. If
deviations are not marked by the Contractor, then the item shall be required
to meet all drawing and specification requirements.
6. Submittal Identification and Markings:
a. The Contractor shall clearly mark each item with the same nomenclature
applied on the drawings or in the specifications.
b. The Contractor shall clearly indicate the size, finish, material, etc.
c. Where more than one model is shown on a manufacturer's sheet, the
Contractor shall clearly indicate exactly which item and which data is
intended.
d. All marks and identifications on the submittals shall be unambiguous.
559
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 00 - 9 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION
REQUIREMENTS
7. Schedule submittals to expedite the project. Coordinate submission of related
items.
8. Identify variations from the contract documents and product or system limitations
that may be detrimental to the successful performance of the completed work.
9. Reproduction of contract documents alone is not acceptable for submittals.
10. Incomplete submittals will be rejected without review. Partial submittals will only
be reviewed with prior approval from the Architect/Engineer.
11. Submittals not required by the contract documents may be returned without
review.
12. The Architect/Engineer's responsibility shall be to review one set of shop drawing
submittals for each product. If the first submittal is incomplete or does not comply
with the drawings and/or specifications, the Contractor shall be responsible to
bear the cost for the Architect/Engineer to recheck and handle the additional
shop drawing submittals.
13. Submittals shall be reviewed and approved by the Architect/Engineer before
releasing any equipment for manufacture or shipment.
14. Contractor's responsibility for errors, omissions. or deviation from the contract
documents in submittals is not relieved by the Architect/Engineer's approval.
15. Schedule shall allow for adequate time to perform orderly and proper review of
submittals, including time for consultants and Owner if required, and resubmittals
by Contractor if necessary, and to cause no delay in Work or in activities of
Owner or other contractors.
a. Allow at least two weeks for Architect's/Engineer's review and processing of
each submittal.
16. Architect/Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal which, in
the Architect/Engineer's opinion, requires coordination with other submittals until
related submittals are received. The Architect/Engineer will notify the Contractor,
in writing, when they exercise this right.
C. Electronic Submittal Procedures:
1. Distribution: Email submittals as attachments to all parties designated by the
Architect/Engineer, unless a web-based submittal program is used.
2. Transmittals: Each submittal shall include an individual electronic letter of
transmittal.
3. Format: Electronic submittals shall be in PDF format only. Scanned copies, in
PDF format, of paper originals are acceptable. Submittals that are not legible will
be rejected. Do not set any permission restrictions on files; protected, locked, or
secured documents will be rejected.
4. File Names: Electronic submittal file names shall include the relevant
specification section number followed by a description of the item submitted, as
follows. Where possible, include the transmittal as the first page of the PDF
instead of using multiple electronic files.
a. Submittal file name: 21 XX XX.description.YYYYMMDD
b. Transmittal file name: 21 XX XX.description.YYYYMMDD
5. File Size: Files shall be transmitted via a pre-approved method. Larger files may
require an alternative transfer method, which shall also be pre-approved.
560
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 00 - 10 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION
REQUIREMENTS
1.7 CHANGE ORDERS
A. A detailed material and labor takeoff shall be prepared for each change order, along
with labor rates and markup percentages. Change orders shall be broken down by
sheet or associated individual line item indicated in the change associated narrative,
whichever provides the most detailed breakdown. Change orders with inadequate
breakdown will be rejected.
B. Itemized pricing with unit cost shall be provided from all distributors and associated
subcontractors.
C. Change order work shall not proceed until authorized.
1.8 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS' INSPECTION
A. The following equipment shall not be placed in operation until a competent installation
and service representative of the manufacturer has inspected the installation and
certified that the equipment is properly installed, adjusted and lubricated; that
preliminary operating instructions have been given; and that the equipment is ready for
operation:
1. Fire Seal Systems
B. Contractor shall arrange for and obtain supplier's on-site inspection(s) at proper time(s)
to assure each phase of equipment installation and/or connection is in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
C. Submit copies of start-up reports to the Architect/Engineer and include copies of
Owner's Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING & MAINTENANCE
A. Exercise care in transporting and handling to avoid damage to materials. Store
materials on the site to prevent damage. Keep materials clean, dry and free from
harmful conditions. Immediately remove any materials that become wet or that are
suspected of becoming contaminated with mold or other organisms.
B. Keep all bearings properly lubricated and all belts properly tensioned and aligned.
C. Coordinate the installation of heavy and large equipment with the General Contractor
and/or Owner. If the Mechanical Contractor does not have prior documented
experience in rigging and lifting similar equipment, he/she shall contract with a
qualified lifting and rigging service that has similar documented experience. Follow all
equipment lifting and support guidelines for handling and moving.
D. Contractor is responsible for moving equipment into the building and/or site. Contractor
shall review site prior to bid for path locations and any required building modifications
to allow movement of equipment. Contractor shall coordinate the work with other
trades.
561
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 00 - 11 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION
REQUIREMENTS
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide one-year warranty, unless otherwise noted, to the Owner for all fixtures,
equipment, materials, and workmanship.
B. The warranty period for all work in this Division of the specifications shall commence
on the date of notice of completion, unless a whole or partial system or any separate
piece of equipment or component is put into use for the benefit of any party other than
the installing contractor with prior written authorization. In this instance, the warranty
period shall commence on the date when such whole system, partial system or
separate piece of equipment or component is placed in operation and accepted in
writing by the Owner.
C. Warranty requirements shall extend to correction, without cost to the Owner, of all
Work found to be defective or nonconforming to the contract documents. The
Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting all damage resulting from defects or
nonconformance with contract documents.
1.11 INSURANCE
A. Contractor shall maintain insurance coverage as set forth in Division 0 of these
specifications.
1.12 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION
A. Where several manufacturers' names are given, the scheduled manufacturer is the
basis for job design and establishes the quality required.
B. Equivalent equipment manufactured by the other listed manufacturers may be used.
Contractor shall ensure that all items submitted by these other manufacturers meet all
requirements of the drawings and specifications and fits in the allocated space. When
using other listed manufacturers, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for any
and all modifications necessary (including, but not limited to structural supports,
electrical connections, piping and ductwork connections and arrangement, plumbing
connections and rough-in, and regulatory agency approval, etc.) and coordinate such
with other contractors.
C. Any material, article or equipment of other unnamed manufacturers which will
adequately perform the services and duties imposed by the design and is of a quality
equal to or better than the material, article or equipment identified by the drawings and
specifications may be used if approval is secured in writing from the Architect/Engineer
not later than ten days prior to the bid opening.
D. This Contractor assumes all costs incurred as a result of using the offered material,
article or equipment, on the Contractors part or on the part of other Contractors whose
work is affected.
562
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 00 - 12 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION
REQUIREMENTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 JOBSITE SAFETY
A. Neither the professional activities of the Architect/Engineer, nor the presence of the
Architect/Engineer or the employees and subconsultants at a construction site, shall
relieve the Contractor and other entity of their obligations, duties and responsibilities
including, but not limited to, construction means, methods, sequence, techniques or
procedures necessary for performing, superintending or coordinating all portions of the
work of construction in accordance with the contract documents and any health or
safety precautions required by any regulatory agencies. The Architect/Engineer and
personnel have no authority to exercise any control over any construction contractor or
other entity or their employees in connection with their work or any health or safety
precautions. The Contractor is solely responsible for jobsite safety. The
Architect/Engineer and the Architect/Engineer's consultants shall be indemnified and
shall be made additional insureds under the Contractor's general liability insurance
policy.
3.2 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OBSERVATION OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall provide seven (7) calendar days' notice to the Architect/Engineer
prior to:
1. Placing fill over underground and underslab utilities.
2. Covering exterior walls, interior partitions and chases.
3. Installing hard or suspended ceilings and soffits.
B. The Architect/Engineer will have the opportunity to review the installation and provide
a written report noting deficiencies requiring correction. The Contractor's schedule
shall account for these reviews and show them as line items in the approved schedule.
C. Above-Ceiling Final Observation
1. All work above the ceilings must be complete prior to the Architect/Engineer's
review. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. Pipe wall penetrations are sealed.
b. Pipe identification is installed.
c. Branch piping in the location of sprinklers shall be dropped to the ceiling.
2. In order to prevent the Above-Ceiling Final Observation from occurring too early,
the Contractor shall review the status of the work and certify, in writing, that the
work is ready for the Above-Ceiling Final Observation.
3. It is understood that if the Architect/Engineer finds the ceilings have been
installed prior to this review and prior to 7 days elapsing, the Architect/Engineer
may not recommend further payments to the contractor until such time as full
access has been provided.
563
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 00 - 13 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION
REQUIREMENTS
3.3 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. General:
1. Provide an electronic copy of the O&M manuals as described below for
Architect/Engineer's review and approval. The electronic copy shall be corrected
as required to address the Architect/Engineer's comments. Once corrected,
electronic copies and paper copies shall be distributed as directed by the
Architect/Engineer.
2. Approved O&M manuals shall be completed and in the Owner's possession prior
to Owner's acceptance and at least 10 days prior to instruction of operating
personnel.
B. Electronic Submittal Procedures:
1. Distribution: Email the O&M manual as attachments to all parties designated by
the Architect/Engineer.
2. Transmittals: Each submittal shall include an individual electronic letter of
transmittal.
3. Format: Electronic submittals shall be in PDF format only. Scanned copies, in
PDF format, of paper originals are acceptable. Submittals that are not legible will
be rejected. Do not set any permission restrictions on files; protected, locked, or
secured documents will be rejected.
4. File Names: Electronic submittal file names shall include the relevant
specification section number followed by a description of the item submitted, as
follows. Where possible, include the transmittal as the first page of the PDF
instead of using multiple electronic files.
a. O&M file name: O&M.div21.contractor.YYYYMMDD
b. Transmittal file name: O&Mtransmittal.div21.contractor.YYYYMMDD
5. File Size: Files shall be transmitted via a pre-approved method. Larger files may
require an alternative transfer method, which shall also be pre-approved.
6. All text shall be searchable.
7. Bookmarks shall be used, dividing information first by specification section, then
systems, major equipment and finally individual items. All bookmark titles shall
include the nomenclature used in the construction documents and shall be an
active link to the first page of the section being referenced.
C. Paper Copy Submittal Procedures:
1. Once the electronic version of the manuals has been approved by the
Architect/Engineer, paper copies of the O&M manual shall be provided to the
Owner. The content of the paper copies shall be identical to the corrected
electronic copy.
564
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 00 - 14 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION
REQUIREMENTS
2. Binder Requirements: The Contractor shall submit O&M manuals in heavy duty,
locking three ring binders. Incorporate clear vinyl sheet sleeves on the front cover
and spine for slip-in labeling. "Peel and stick" labels are not acceptable. Sheet
lifters shall be supplied at the front of each notebook. The three-ring binders shall
be 1/2" thicker than initial material to allow for future inserts. If more than one
notebook is required, label in consecutive order. For example; 1 of 2, 2 of 2. No
other form of binding is acceptable.
3. Binder Labels: Label the front and spine of each binder with "Operation and
Maintenance Instructions", title of project, and subject matter.
4. Index Tabs: Divide information by specification section, major equipment, or
systems using index tabs. All tab titling shall be clearly printed under reinforced
plastic tabs. All equipment shall be labeled to match the identification in the
construction documents.
D. Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall include:
1. Title Page: Include title page with project title, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, all
subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers, with addresses, telephone
numbers, website addresses, email addresses and point of contacts. Website
URLs and email addresses shall be active links in the electronic submittal.
2. Table of Contents: Include a table of contents describing specification section,
systems, major equipment, and individual items.
3. Copies of all final approved shop drawings and submittals. Include
Architect's/Engineer's shop drawing review comments. Insert the individual shop
drawing directly after the Operation and Maintenance information for the item(s)
in the review form.
4. Copy of final approved test and balance reports.
5. Copies of all factory inspections and/or equipment startup reports.
6. Copies of warranties.
7. Schematic electrical power/controls wiring diagrams of the equipment that have
been updated for field conditions. Field wiring shall have label numbers to match
drawings.
8. Dimensional drawings of equipment.
9. Capacities and utility consumption of equipment.
10. Detailed parts lists with lists of suppliers.
11. Operating procedures for each system.
12. Maintenance schedule and procedures. Include a chart listing maintenance
requirements and frequency.
13. Repair procedures for major components.
14. List of lubricants in all equipment and recommended frequency of lubrication.
15. Instruction books, cards, and manuals furnished with the equipment.
3.4 INSTRUCTING THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVES
A. Adequately instruct the Owner's designated representatives in the maintenance, care,
and operation of all systems installed under this contract.
B. Provide verbal and written instructions to the Owner's representatives by FACTORY
PERSONNEL in the care, maintenance, and operation of the equipment and systems.
565
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 00 - 15 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION
REQUIREMENTS
C. Contractor shall make a DVD video recording of instructions to the Owner while
explaining the system so additional personnel may view the instructions at a later date.
The video recording shall be the property of the Owner.
D. The Owner has the option to make a video recording of all instructions. Coordinate
schedule of instructions to facilitate this recording.
E. The instructions shall include:
1. Explanation of all system flow diagrams.
2. Maintenance of equipment.
3. Start-up procedures for all major equipment.
4. Explanation of seasonal system changes.
5. Description of emergency system operation.
F. Notify the Architect/Engineer of the time and place for the verbal instructions to be
given to the Owner's representative so a representative can attend if desired.
G. Minimum hours of instruction for each item shall be:
1. Sprinkler System(s) - 2 hours.
H. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed, written training agenda and submit it to the
Architect/Engineer a minimum of two weeks prior to the formal training for approval.
The written agenda shall include specific training points within the items described
above. For example: how to adjust setpoints, troubleshooting, proper start-up, proper
shut-down, seasonal changes, draining, venting, changing filters, changing belts, etc.
Failure to provide and follow an approved training agenda may result in additional
training required at the expense of the Contractor.
I. Operating Instructions:
1. Contractor is responsible for all instructions to the Owner's representatives for
the fire protection and control systems.
2. If the Contractor does not have staff that can adequately provide the required
instructions the Contractor shall include in the bid an adequate amount to
reimburse the Owner for the Architect/Engineer to perform these services.
3.5 SYSTEM STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. The fire protection systems shall be complete and operating. System startup, testing,
adjusting, and balancing to obtain satisfactory system performance is the responsibility
of the Contractor. This includes calibration and adjustments of all controls, noise level
adjustments and final comfort adjustments as required.
B. Complete all manufacturer-recommended startup procedures and checklists to verify
proper motor rotation, electrical power voltage is within equipment limitations,
equipment controls maintain pressures and temperatures within acceptable ranges, all
filters and protective guards are in-place, acceptable access is provided for
maintenance and servicing, and equipment operation does not pose a danger to
personnel or property.
566
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 00 - 16 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION
REQUIREMENTS
C. All operating conditions and control sequences shall be tested during the start-up
period. Test all interlocks, safety shutdowns, controls, and alarms.
D. The Contractor, subcontractors, and equipment suppliers shall have skilled technicians
to ensure that all systems perform properly.
3.6 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. The following paragraphs supplement Division 01 requirements.
B. Maintain at the job site a separate and complete set of fire protection drawings and
specifications with all changes made to the systems clearly and permanently marked
in complete detail.
C. Mark drawings to indicate revisions to piping size and location, both exterior and
interior; including locations of other control devices, and other units requiring periodic
maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines;
actual inverts and locations of underground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned
from column lines; mains and branches of piping systems, with valves and control
devices located and numbered, concealed unions located, and with items requiring
maintenance located; Change Orders; concealed control system devices.
D. Before completion of the project, a set of reproducible fire protection drawings will be
given to the Contractor for transfer of all as-built conditions from the paper set
maintained at the job site. All marks on reproducibles shall be clear and permanent.
E. Mark specifications to show approved substitutions; Change Orders, and actual
equipment and materials used.
F. Record changes daily and keep the marked drawings available for the
Architect/Engineer's examination at any normal work time.
G. Upon completing the job, and before final payment is made, give the marked-up
drawings to the Architect/Engineer.
3.7 PAINTING
A. This Contractor shall paint the following items:
1. All piping in mechanical room
B. Equipment in finished areas that will be painted to match the room decor will be
painted by others.
C. Equipment cabinets, casings, covers, metal jackets, etc., in equipment rooms or
concealed spaces, shall be furnished in standard or prime finish, free from scratches,
abrasions, chips, etc.
567
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 00 - 17 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION
REQUIREMENTS
D. Equipment in occupied spaces, or if standard to the unit, shall have a baked primer
with baked enamel finish coat free from scratches, abrasions, chips, etc. If color option
is specified or is standard to the unit, this Contractor shall, before ordering, verify with
the Architect/Engineer the color preference and furnish this color.
E. Paint all equipment in unfinished areas such as mechanical spaces, storage room,
etc., furnished by this Contractor. Equipment furnished with a factory coat of paint and
enamel need not be painted, provided the factory applied finish is not marred or
spattered. If so, equipment shall be refinished with the same paint as was factory
applied.
F. Paint all outdoor uninsulated steel piping the color selected by Owner or
Architect/Engineer.
3.8 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Thoroughly clean all equipment and systems prior to the Owner's final acceptance of
the project. Clean all foreign paint, grease, oil, dirt, labels, stickers, and other foreign
material from all equipment.
B. Clean all areas where moisture is present. Immediately report any mold, biological
growth, or water damage. Follow mold remediation scope.
C. Remove all rust, scale, dirt, oils, stickers and thoroughly clean exterior of all exposed
piping, hangers, and accessories.
D. Remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated during construction from the premises.
3.9 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all equipment, valves, etc., with other
trades to maintain clear access area for servicing.
B. All equipment shall be installed in such a way to maximize access to parts needing
service or maintenance. Review the final field location, placement, and orientation of
equipment with the Owner's designated representative prior to setting equipment.
C. Installation of equipment or devices without regard to coordination of access
requirements and confirmation with the Owner's designated representative will result in
removal and reinstallation of the equipment at the Contractor's expense.
D. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the
low emitting material limits of the following standards:
1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and
Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources
Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.
2. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant
Applications. All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site shall comply with the
applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168.
568
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
21 05 00 - 18 BASIC FIRE SUPPRESSION
REQUIREMENTS
3. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied
Paints and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the
applicable VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.
READINESS CERTIFICATION PRIOR TO FINAL JOBSITE OBSERVATION
To prevent the final job observation from occurring too early, we require that the Contractor
review the completion status of the project and, by copy of this document, certify that the job is
indeed ready for the final job observation. The following is a typical list of items that represent
the degree of job completeness expected prior to your requesting a final job observation.
1. Penetrations fire sealed and labeled in accordance with specifications.
2. Fire protection system operational.
3. Pipes labeled.
Accepted by:
Prime Contractor _______________________________________________
By ___________________________________ Date ___________________
Upon Contractor certification that the project is complete and ready for a final job observation,
we require the Contractor to sign this agreement and return it to the Architect/Engineer so that
the final observation can be scheduled.
It is understood that if the Architect/Engineer finds the job not ready for the final observation and
that additional trips and observations are required to bring the project to completion, the costs
incurred by the Architect/Engineers for additional time and expenses will be deducted from the
Contractor's contract retainage prior to final payment at the completion of the job.
END OF SECTION 21 05 00
569
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 1 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 22 05 00
BASIC PLUMBING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Requirements applicable to all Division 22 Sections. Also refer to Division 1 - General
Requirements.
B. All materials and installation methods shall conform to the applicable standards,
guidelines and codes referenced herein and within each specification section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. CCR California Code of Regulation
B. CBC California Building Code
C. CFC California Fire Code
D. CEC California Electric Code
E. CMC California Mechanical Code
F. CPC California Plumbing Code
G. California Title 24 - Building Energy Efficiency Standards
H. SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Specification and the associated drawings govern the furnishing, installing, testing
and placing into satisfactory operation the Mechanical Systems.
B. Each Contractor shall provide all new materials indicated on the drawings and/or in
these specifications, and all items required to make the portion of the Mechanical Work
a finished and working system.
C. All work will be awarded under a single General Contract. The division of work listed
below is for the Contractor's convenience and lists normal breakdown of the work.
570
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 2 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
D. Scope of Work:
1. Plumbing Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to:
a. Extend existing domestic water piping system including cold, hot, and hot
water circulating piping within the building. Insulate all piping as specified.
b. Furnish and install condensate drain piping from plumbing related
equipment.
c. Extend existing sanitary sewer and vent system.
d. Furnish and install plumbing fixtures, roof drains and related piping
specified on fixture schedules on approved drawing set.
e. Furnish and install seismic restraint and equipment designed for use in
seismic conditions described in Section 22 05 50.
f. Furnish and install firestopping systems for penetrations of fire-rated
construction associated with this Contractor's work.
g. Complete all applicable tests, certifications, forms, and matrices.
2. Heating Work: Refer to Section 23 05 00 "Basic HVAC Requirements".
3. Air Conditioning and Ventilating Work: Refer to Section 23 05 00 "Basic HVAC
Requirements".
4. Temperature Control Work: Refer to Section 23 05 00 "Basic HVAC
Requirements".
5. Fire Protection Work: Refer to Section 21 05 00 "Basic Fire Suppression
Requirements".
6. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Work: Refer to Section 23 05 00 "Basic HVAC
Requirements".
1.4 DIVISION OF WORK BETWEEN MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL & CONTROL
CONTRACTORS
A. Definitions:
1. "Mechanical Contractors" refers to the following:
a. Plumbing Contractor.
b. Heating Contractor.
c. Air Conditioning and Ventilating Contractor.
d. Temperature Control Contractor.
e. Fire Protection Contractor.
f. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Contractor.
2. Motor Control Wiring: The wiring associated with the remote operation of the
magnetic coils of magnetic motor starters or relays, or the wiring that permits
direct cycling of motors by means of devices in series with the motor power
wiring. In the latter case the devices are usually single phase and are usually
connected to the motor power wiring through a manual motor starter having
"Manual-Off-Auto" provisions.
3. Control devices such as start-stop push buttons, thermostats, pressure switches,
flow switches, relays, etc., generally represent the types of equipment associated
with motor control wiring.
571
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 3 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
4. Motor control wiring is single phase and usually 120 volts. In some instances, the
voltage will be the same as the motor power wiring. Generally, where the motor
power wiring exceeds 120 volts, a control transformer is used to give a control
voltage of 120 volts.
5. Temperature Control Wiring: The wiring associated with the operation of a
motorized damper, solenoid valve or motorized valve, etc., either modulating or
two-position, as opposed to wiring which directly powers or controls a motor used
to drive equipment such as fans, pumps, etc.
a. This wiring will be from a 120 volt source and may continue as 120 volt, or
be reduced in voltage (24 volt) in which case a control transformer shall be
furnished as part of the temperature control wiring.
6. Control Motor: An electric device used to operate dampers, valves, etc. It may be
two-position or modulating. Conventional characteristics of such a motor are 24
volts, 60 cycles, 1 phase, although other voltages may be encountered.
7. Voltage is generally specified and scheduled as distribution voltage. Motor
submittals may be based on utilization voltage if it corresponds to the correct
distribution voltage.
Distribution/Nominal Voltage Utilization Voltage
120 115
208 200
240 230
277 265
480 460
B. General:
1. The purpose of these Specifications is to outline the Electrical and Mechanical
Contractor's responsibilities related to electrical work required for items such as
temperature controls, mechanical equipment, fans, chillers, compressors and the
like. The exact wiring requirements for much of the equipment cannot be
determined until the systems have been selected and submittals reviewed.
Therefore, the electrical drawings show only known wiring related to such items.
All wiring not shown on the electrical drawings, but required for mechanical
systems, is the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor.
2. Where the drawings require the Electrical Contractor to wire between equipment
furnished by the Mechanical Contractor, such wiring shall terminate at terminals
provided in the equipment. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide complete
electrical power/controls wiring diagrams and supervision to the Electrical
Contractor and designate the terminal numbers for correct wiring.
3. All electrical work shall conform to the National Electrical Code. All provisions of
the Electrical Specifications concerning wiring, protection, etc., apply to wiring
provided by the Mechanical Contractor unless noted otherwise.
572
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 4 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
4. Control low (24V) and control line (120V) voltage wiring, conduit, and related
switches and relays required for the automatic control and/or interlock of motors
and equipment, including final connection, are to be furnished and installed under
Divisions 21, 22 and 23. Materials and installation to conform to Class 1 or 2
requirements, California Electrical Code Article 725.
5. All Contractors shall establish utility elevations prior to fabrication and shall
coordinate their material and equipment with other trades. When a conflict arises,
priority is as follows:
a. Light fixtures.
b. Gravity flow piping, including steam and condensate.
c. Electrical busduct.
d. Sheet metal.
e. Electrical cable trays, including access space.
f. Sprinkler piping and other piping.
g. Electrical conduits and wireway.
C. Mechanical Contractor's Responsibility:
1. Assumes responsibility for internal wiring of all equipment provided by the
Mechanical Contractor, for example:
a. Condensing Units.
b. Packaged Rooftop Units.
2. Assumes all responsibility for the Temperature Control wiring, when the
Temperature Control Contractor is a Subcontractor to the Mechanical Contractor.
3. Shall verify all existing equipment sizes and capacities where units are to be
modified, moved or replaced. Contractor shall notify Architect/Engineer of any
discrepancies prior to ordering new units or replacement parts, including
replacements of equipment motors.
4. Temperature Control Subcontractor's Responsibility:
a. Wiring of all devices needed to make the Temperature Control System
functional.
b. Verifying any control wiring on the electrical drawings as being by the
Electrical Contractor. All wiring required for the Control System, but not
shown on the electrical drawings, is the responsibility of the Temperature
Control Subcontractor.
c. Coordinating equipment locations (such as relays, transformers, etc.) with
the Electrical Contractor, where wiring of the equipment is by the Electrical
Contractor.
5. This Contractor is responsible for coordination of utilities with all other
Contractors. If any field coordination conflicts are found, the Contractor shall
coordinate with other Contractors to determine a viable layout.
---
573
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 5 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Definitions:
1. Coordination Drawings: A compilation of the pertinent layout and system
drawings that show the sizes and locations, including elevations, of system
components and required access areas to ensure that no two objects will occupy
the same space.
a. Mechanical trades shall include, but are not limited to, mechanical
equipment, ductwork, fire protection systems, plumbing piping,, hydronic
piping, steam and steam condensate piping, and any item that may impact
coordination with other disciplines.
b. Technology trades shall include, but are not limited to, technology
equipment, racks, conduit 1.5" and larger, conduit racks, cable trays, ladder
rack, pull boxes, raceway, ceiling-mounted devices, and any item that may
impact coordination with other disciplines.
c. Maintenance clearances and code-required dedicated space shall be
included.
d. The coordination drawings shall include all underground, underfloor, in-
floor, in chase, and vertical trade items.
2. The contractors shall use the coordination process to identify the proper
sequence of installation of all utilities above ceilings and in other congested
areas, to ensure an orderly and coordinated end result, and to provide adequate
access for service and maintenance.
B. Participation:
1. The contractors and subcontractors responsible for work defined above shall
participate in the coordination drawing process.
2. One contractor shall be designated as the Coordinating Contractor for purposes
of preparing a complete set of composite electronic CAD coordination drawings
that include all applicable trades, and for coordinating the activities related to this
process. The Coordinating Contractor for this project shall be the Mechanical
Contractor.
a. The Coordinating Contractor shall utilize personnel familiar with
requirements of this project and skilled as draftspersons/CAD operators,
competent to prepare the required coordination drawings.
3. Electronic CAD drawings shall be submitted to the Coordinating Contractor and
owner for addition of work by other trades. IMEG will provide electronic file
copies of ventilation drawings for contractor's use if the contractor signs and
returns an "Electronic File Transfer" waiver provided by IMEG. IMEG will not
consider blatant reproductions of original file copies an acceptable alternative for
coordination drawings. Owner to recieve copy of CAD files.
574
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 6 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
C. Drawing Requirements:
1. The file format and file naming convention shall be coordinated with and agreed
to by all contractors participating in the coordination process and the Owner. For
construction, plans shall be provided by IMEG prior to bid. Coordination between
trades shall occur prior to bid.
a. |Scale of drawings:
1) |General plans: 1/4 Inch = 1 '-0" (minimum).
2) Mechanical, electrical, communication rooms, and including the
surrounding areas within 10 feet: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
3) Shafts and risers: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
4) Sections of shafts and mechanical and electrical equipment rooms:
1/4 Inch = 1 '-0" (minimum).
5) Sections of congested areas: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
2. Ductwork layout drawings shall be the baseline system for other components.
Ductwork layout drawings shall be modified to accommodate other components
as the coordination process progresses.
3. There may be more drawings required for risers, top and bottom levels of
mechanical rooms, and shafts.
4. The minimum quantity of drawings will be established at the first coordination
meeting and sent to the A/E for review. Additional drawings may be required if
other areas of congestion are discovered during the coordination process.
D. General:
1. Coordination drawing files shall be made available to the A/E and Owner's
Representative. The A/E will only review identified conflicts and give an opinion,
but will not perform as a coordinator.
2. A plotted set of coordination drawings shall be available at the project site.
3. Coordination drawings are not shop drawings and shall not be submitted as
such.
4. The contract drawings are schematic in nature and do not show every fitting and
appurtenance for each utility. Each contractor is expected to have included in the
bid sufficient fittings, material, and labor to allow for adjustments in routing of
utilities made necessary by the coordination process and to provide a complete
and functional system.
5. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions due to
participation in the coordination process.
6. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions for
additional fittings, reroutings or changes of duct size, that are essentially
equivalent sizes to those shown on the drawings and determined necessary
through the coordination process.
7. The A/E reserves the right to determine space priority of equipment in the event
of spatial conflicts or interference between equipment, piping, conduit, ducts, and
equipment provided by the trades.
8. Changes to the contract documents that are necessary for systems installation
and coordination shall be brought to the attention of the A/E.
575
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 7 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
9. Access panels shall preferably occur only in gypsum board walls or plaster
ceilings where indicated on the drawings.
a. Access to mechanical, electrical, technology, and other items located above
the ceiling shall be through accessible lay-in ceiling tile areas.
b. Potential layout changes shall be made to avoid additional access panels.
c. Additional access panels shall not be allowed without written approval from
the A/E at the coordination drawing stage.
d. Providing additional access panels shall be considered after other
alternatives are reviewed and discarded by the A/E and the Owner's
Representative.
e. When additional access panels are required, they shall be provided without
additional cost to the Owner.
10. Complete the coordination drawing process and obtain sign off of the drawings
by all contractors prior to installing any of the components.
11. Conflicts that result after the coordination drawings are signed off shall be the
responsibility of the contractor or subcontractor who did not properly identify their
work requirements, or installed their work without proper coordination.
12. Updated coordination drawings that reflect as-built conditions may be used as
record documents.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor's Responsibility Prior to Submitting Pricing Data:
1. The Contractor is responsible for constructing complete and operating systems.
The Contractor acknowledges and understands that the Contract Documents are
a two-dimensional representation of a three-dimensional object, subject to
human interpretation. This representation may include imperfect data, interpreted
codes, utility guidelines, three-dimensional conflicts, and required field
coordination items. Such deficiencies can be corrected when identified prior to
ordering material and starting installation. The Contractor agrees to carefully
study and compare the individual Contract Documents and report at once in
writing to the Design Team any deficiencies the Contractor may discover. The
Contractor further agrees to require each subcontractor to likewise study the
documents and report at once any deficiencies discovered.
2. The Contractor shall resolve all reported deficiencies with the Architect/Engineer
prior to awarding any subcontracts, ordering material, or starting any work with
the Contractor's own employees. Any work performed prior to receipt of
instructions from the Design Team will be done at the Contractor's risk.
B. Qualifications:
1. Only products of reputable manufacturers are acceptable.
2. All Contractors and subcontractors shall employ only workers skilled in their
trades.
576
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 8 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
C. Compliance with Codes, Laws, Ordinances:
1. Conform to all requirements of the City of Moorpark Codes, Laws, Ordinances
and other regulations having jurisdiction.
2. Conform to all State Codes.
3. Conform to Federal Act S.3874 requiring the reduction of lead in drinking water.
4. If there is a discrepancy between the codes and regulations and these
specifications, the Architect/Engineer shall determine the method or equipment
used.
5. If the Contractor notes, at the time of bidding, that any parts of the drawings or
specifications do not comply with the codes or regulations, Contractor shall
inform the Architect/Engineer in writing, requesting a clarification. If there is
insufficient time for this procedure, Contractor shall submit with the proposal a
separate price to make the system comply with the codes and regulations.
6. All changes to the system made after letting of the contract, to comply with codes
or requirements of Inspectors, shall be made by the Contractor without cost to
the Owner.
7. If there is a discrepancy between manufacturer's recommendations and these
specifications, the manufacturer's recommendations shall govern.
D. Permits, Fees, Taxes, Inspections:
1. Procure all applicable permits and licenses.
2. Abide by all laws, regulations, ordinances, and other rules of the State or Political
Subdivision where the work is done, or as required by any duly constituted public
authority.
3. Pay all charges for permits or licenses.
4. Pay all fees and taxes imposed by the State, Municipal and/or other regulatory
bodies.
5. Pay all charges arising out of required inspections by an authorized body ass
applicable.
6. Pay all charges arising out of required contract document reviews associated
with the project and as initiated by the Owner or authorized agency/consultant as
applicable.
7. Where applicable, all fixtures, equipment and materials shall be listed by
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. and approved by FM Global.
E. Examination of Drawings:
1. The drawings for the plumbing work are completely diagrammatic, intended to
convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangements and
locations of equipment, outlets, etc., and the approximate sizes of equipment.
2. Contractor shall determine the exact locations of equipment and rough-ins, and
the exact routing of pipes and ducts to best fit the layout of the job.
3. Scaling of the drawings is not sufficient or accurate for determining these
locations.
4. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated arrangements and
locations, such changes shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to
the Owner.
577
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 9 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
5. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items, such as fittings, boxes,
valves, unions, etc., may not be shown, but where required by other sections of
the specifications or required for proper installation of the work, such items shall
be furnished and installed.
6. If an item is either on the drawings or in the specifications, it shall be included in
this contract.
7. Determination of quantities of material and equipment required shall be made by
the Contractor from the documents. Where discrepancies arise between
drawings, schedules and/or specifications, the greater number shall govern.
8. Where used in mechanical documents, the word "furnish" shall mean supply for
use, the word "install" shall mean connect complete and ready for operation, and
the word "provide" shall mean to supply for use and connect complete and ready
for operation.
a. Any item listed as furnished shall also be installed, unless otherwise noted.
b. Any item listed as installed shall also be furnished, unless otherwise noted.
F. Field Measurements:
1. Verify all pertinent dimensions at the job site before ordering any materials or
fabricating any supports, pipes or ducts.
G. Electronic Media/Files:
1. Construction drawings for this project have been prepared utilizing Revit.
2. Contractors and Subcontractors may request electronic media files of the
contract drawings and/or copies of the specifications. Specifications will be
provided in PDF format.
3. Upon request for electronic media, the Contractor shall complete and return a
signed "Electronic File Transmittal" form provided by IMEG.
4. If the information requested includes floor plans prepared by others, the
Contractor will be responsible for obtaining approval from the appropriate Design
Professional for use of that part of the document.
5. The electronic contract documents can be used for preparation of shop drawings
and as-built drawings only. The information may not be used in whole or in part
for any other project.
6. The drawings prepared by IMEG for bidding purposes may not be used directly
for shop drawings.
7. The use of these CAD documents by the Contractor does not relieve them from
their responsibility for coordination of work with other trades and verification of
space available for the installation.
578
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 10 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be required for the following items, and for additional items where
required elsewhere in the specifications or on the drawings.
1. Submittals List:
Referenced Specification
Section Submittal Item
22 05 00 Owner Training Agenda
22 05 03 Fire Seal Systems
22 05 29 Hangers and Supports
22 05 53 Plumbing Identification
22 07 19 Plumbing Pipe Insulation
22 09 00 Instrumentation
22 10 00 Plumbing Piping Systems and Valves
22 40 00 Plumbing Fixtures
B. General Submittal Procedures: In addition to the provisions of Division 1, the following
are required:
1. Transmittal: Each transmittal shall include the following:
a. Date
b. Project title and number
c. Contractor's name and address
d. Division of work (e.g., plumbing, heating, ventilating, etc.)
e. Description of items submitted and relevant specification number
f. Notations of deviations from the contract documents
g. Other pertinent data
2. Submittal Cover Sheet: Each submittal shall include a cover sheet containing:
a. Date
b. Project title and number
c. Architect/Engineer
d. Contractor and subcontractors' names and addresses
e. Supplier and manufacturer's names and addresses
f. Division of work (e.g., plumbing, heating, ventilating, etc.)
g. Description of item submitted (using project nomenclature) and relevant
specification number
h. Notations of deviations from the contract documents
i. Other pertinent data
j. Provide space for Contractor's review stamps
3. Composition:
a. Submittals shall be submitted using specification sections and the project
nomenclature for each item.
579
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 11 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
b. Individual submittal packages shall be prepared for items in each
specification section. All items within a single specification section shall be
packaged together where possible. An individual submittal may contain
items from multiple specifications sections if the items are intimately linked
(e.g., pumps and motors).
c. All sets shall contain an index of the items enclosed with a general topic
description on the cover.
4. Content: Submittals shall include all fabrication, erection, layout, and setting
drawings; manufacturers' standard drawings; schedules; descriptive literature,
catalogs and brochures; performance and test data; electrical power criteria (e.g.,
voltage, phase, amps, horsepower, kW, etc.) wiring and control diagrams; Short
Circuit Current Rating (SCCR); dimensions; shipping and operating weights;
shipping splits; service clearances; and all other drawings and descriptive data of
materials of construction as may be required to show that the materials,
equipment or systems and the location thereof conform to the requirements of
the contract documents.
5. Contractor's Approval Stamp:
a. The Contractor shall thoroughly review and approve all shop drawings
before submitting them to the Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall
stamp, date and sign each submittal certifying it has been reviewed.
b. Unstamped submittals will be rejected.
c. The Contractor's review shall include, but not be limited to, verification of
the following:
1) Only approved manufacturers are used.
2) Addenda items have been incorporated.
3) Catalog numbers and options match those specified.
4) Performance data matches that specified.
5) Electrical characteristics and loads match those specified.
6) Equipment connection locations, sizes, capacities, etc. have been
coordinated with other affected trades.
7) Dimensions and service clearances are suitable for the intended
location.
8) Equipment dimensions are coordinated with support steel,
housekeeping pads, openings, etc.
9) Constructability issues are resolved (e.g., weights and dimensions
are suitable for getting the item into the building and into place, sinks
fit into countertops, etc.).
d. The Contractor shall review, stamp and approve all subcontractors'
submittals as described above.
e. The Contractor's approval stamp is required on all submittals. Approval will
indicate the Contractor's review of all material and a complete
understanding of exactly what is to be furnished. Contractor shall clearly
mark all deviations from the contract documents on all submittals. If
deviations are not marked by the Contractor, then the item shall be required
to meet all drawing and specification requirements.
580
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 12 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
6. Submittal Identification and Markings:
a. The Contractor shall clearly mark each item with the same nomenclature
applied on the drawings or in the specifications.
b. The Contractor shall clearly indicate the size, finish, material, etc.
c. Where more than one model is shown on a manufacturer's sheet, the
Contractor shall clearly indicate exactly which item and which data is
intended.
d. All marks and identifications on the submittals shall be unambiguous.
7. Schedule submittals to expedite the project. Coordinate submission of related
items.
8. Identify variations from the contract documents and product or system limitations
that may be detrimental to the successful performance of the completed work.
9. Reproduction of contract documents alone is not acceptable for submittals.
10. Incomplete submittals will be rejected without review. Partial submittals will only
be reviewed with prior approval from the Architect/Engineer.
11. Submittals not required by the contract documents may be returned without
review.
12. The Architect/Engineer's responsibility shall be to review one set of shop drawing
submittals for each product. If the first submittal is incomplete or does not comply
with the drawings and/or specifications, the Contractor shall be responsible to
bear the cost for the Architect/Engineer to recheck and handle the additional
shop drawing submittals.
13. Submittals shall be reviewed and approved by the Architect/Engineer before
releasing any equipment for manufacture or shipment.
14. Contractor's responsibility for errors, omissions or deviation from the contract
documents in submittals is not relieved by the Architect/Engineer's approval.
15. Schedule shall allow for adequate time to perform orderly and proper review of
submittals, including time for consultants and Owner if required, and resubmittals
by Contractor if necessary, and to cause no delay in Work or in activities of
Owner or other contractors.
a. Allow at least two weeks for Architect's/Engineer's review and processing of
each submittal.
16. Architect/Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal which, in
the Architect/Engineer's opinion, requires coordination with other submittals until
related submittals are received. The Architect/Engineer will notify the Contractor,
in writing, when they exercise this right.
C. Electronic Submittal Procedures:
1. Distribution: Email submittals as attachments to all parties designated by the
Architect/Engineer, unless a web-based submittal program is used.
2. Transmittals: Each submittal shall include an individual electronic letter of
transmittal.
3. Format: Electronic submittals shall be in PDF format only. Scanned copies, in
PDF format, of paper originals are acceptable. Submittals that are not legible will
be rejected. Do not set any permission restrictions on files; protected, locked, or
secured documents will be rejected.
581
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 13 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
4. File Names: Electronic submittal file names shall include the relevant
specification section number followed by a description of the item submitted, as
follows. Where possible, include the transmittal as the first page of the PDF
instead of using multiple electronic files.
a. Submittal file name: 22 XX XX.description.YYYYMMDD
b. Transmittal file name: 22 XX XX.description.YYYYMMDD
5. File Size: Files shall be transmitted via a pre-approved method. Larger files may
require an alternative transfer method, which shall also be pre-approved.
1.8 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. The requirements herein are in addition to the provisions of Division 1.
B. Format:
1. Use AIA Document Continuation Sheets G703 or another similar form approved
by the Owner and Architect/Engineer.
2. Submit in Excel format.
3. Support values given with substantiating data.
C. Preparation:
1. Itemize work required by each specification section and list all providers. All work
provided by subcontractors and major suppliers shall be listed on the Schedule of
Values. List each subcontractor and supplier by company name.
2. Break down all costs into:
a. Material: Delivered cost of product with taxes paid.
b. Labor: Labor cost, excluding overhead and profit.
3. Itemize the cost for each of the following:
a. Overhead and profit.
b. Bonds.
c. Insurance.
d. General Requirements: Itemize all requirements.
4. For each line item having an installed cost of more than $5,000, break down
costs to list major products or operations under each item. At a minimum, provide
material and labor cost line items for the following:
a. Excavation and backfill for underground piping systems inside the building.
b. Underground piping systems inside the building (sanitary, storm, etc.) listed
separately. Break down the material and labor for each piping system
based on geography (building, floor, wing and/or phase).
c. Each aboveground piping system (sanitary, storm, domestic water, etc.).
Break down the material and labor for each piping system based on
geography (building, floor, wing and/or phase).
582
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 14 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
d. Pipe insulation with separate material and labor line items for each piping
system listed above.
e. Each piece of equipment requiring shop drawings.
f. Each plumbing fixture (e.g., WC, lavatory, sink, etc.). Multiple units of the
same type can be listed together, provided quantities are also listed so unit
costs can be determined.
g. Site utilities (5' beyond building)
h. Seismic design
i. Water balancing
j. Commissioning
k. Record drawings
l. Punchlist and closeout
D. Update Schedule of Values when:
1. Indicated by Architect/Engineer.
2. Change of subcontractor or supplier occurs.
3. Change of product or equipment occurs.
1.9 CHANGE ORDERS
A. A detailed material and labor takeoff shall be prepared for each change order, along
with labor rates and markup percentages. Change orders shall be broken down by
sheet or associated individual line item indicated in the change associated narrative,
whichever provides the most detailed breakdown. Change orders with inadequate
breakdown will be rejected.
B. Itemized pricing with unit cost shall be provided from all distributors and associated
subcontractors.
C. Change order work shall not proceed until authorized.
1.10 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS' INSPECTION
A. The following equipment shall not be placed in operation until a competent installation
and service representative of the manufacturer has inspected the installation and
certified that the equipment is properly installed, adjusted and lubricated; that
preliminary operating instructions have been given; and that the equipment is ready for
operation:
1. Fire Seal Systems
2. Seismic Restraints and Equipment Bracing
B. Contractor shall arrange for and obtain supplier's on-site inspection(s) at proper time(s)
to assure each phase of equipment installation and/or connection is in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
C. Submit copies of start-up reports to the Architect/Engineer and include copies of
Owner's Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
583
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 15 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
1.11 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING & MAINTENANCE
A. Exercise care in transporting and handling to avoid damage to materials. Store
materials on the site to prevent damage. Keep materials clean, dry and free from
harmful conditions. Immediately remove any materials that become wet or that are
suspected of becoming contaminated with mold or other organisms.
B. Keep all bearings properly lubricated and all belts properly tensioned and aligned.
C. Coordinate the installation of heavy and large equipment with the General Contractor
and/or Owner. If the Mechanical Contractor does not have prior documented
experience in rigging and lifting similar equipment, he/she shall contract with a
qualified lifting and rigging service that has similar documented experience. Follow all
equipment lifting and support guidelines for handling and moving.
D. Contractor is responsible for moving equipment into the building and/or site. Contractor
shall review site prior to bid for path locations and any required building modifications
to allow movement of equipment. Contractor shall coordinate the work with other
trades.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Provide one-year warranty, unless otherwise noted, to the Owner for all fixtures,
equipment, materials, and workmanship.
B. The warranty period for all work in this Division of the specifications shall commence
on the date of notice of completion, unless a whole or partial system or any separate
piece of equipment or component is put into use for the benefit of any party other than
the installing contractor with prior written authorization. In this instance, the warranty
period shall commence on the date when such whole system, partial system or
separate piece of equipment or component is placed in operation and accepted in
writing by the Owner.
C. Warranty requirements shall extend to correction, without cost to the Owner, of all
Work found to be defective or nonconforming to the contract documents. The
Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting all damage resulting from defects or
nonconformance with contract documents.
1.13 INSURANCE
A. Contractor shall maintain insurance coverage as set forth in Division 0 of these
specifications.
1.14 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION
A. Where several manufacturers’ names are given, the first manufacturer is the basis for
job design and establishes the quality.
584
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 16 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
B. Equivalent equipment manufactured by the other listed manufacturers may be used.
Contractor shall ensure that all items submitted by these other manufacturers meet all
requirements of the drawings and specifications and fits in the allocated space. When
using other listed manufacturers, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for any
and all modifications necessary (including, but not limited to structural supports,
electrical connections, piping and ductwork connections and arrangement, plumbing
connections and rough-in, and regulatory agency approval, etc.) and coordinate such
with other contractors.
C. Any material, article or equipment of other unnamed manufacturers which will
adequately perform the services and duties imposed by the design and is of a quality
equal to or better than the material, article or equipment identified by the drawings and
specifications may be used if approval is secured in writing from the Architect/Engineer
not later than ten days prior to the bid opening.
D. This Contractor assumes all costs incurred as a result of using the offered material,
article or equipment, on the Contractor's part or on the part of other Contractors whose
work is affected.
E. This Contractor may list voluntary add or deduct prices for alternate materials on the
bid form. These items will not be used in determining the low bidder.
F. All material substitutions requested later than ten (10) days prior to bid opening must
be listed as voluntary changes on the bid form.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 JOBSITE SAFETY
A. Neither the professional activities of the Architect/Engineer, nor the presence of the
Architect/Engineer or the employees and subconsultants at a construction site, shall
relieve the Contractor and other entity of their obligations, duties and responsibilities
including, but not limited to, construction means, methods, sequence, techniques or
procedures necessary for performing, superintending or coordinating all portions of the
work of construction in accordance with the contract documents and any health or
safety precautions required by any regulatory agencies. The Architect/Engineer and
personnel have no authority to exercise any control over any construction contractor or
other entity or their employees in connection with their work or any health or safety
precautions. The Contractor is solely responsible for jobsite safety. The
Architect/Engineer and the Architect/Engineer's consultants shall be indemnified and
shall be made additional insureds under the Contractor's general liability insurance
policy.
585
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 17 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
3.2 EXCAVATION, FILL, BACKFILL, COMPACTION
A. General:
1. Prior to the commencement of any excavation or digging, the Contractor shall
verify all underground utilities with the regional utility locator. Provide prior notice
to the locator before excavations. Contact information for most regional utility
locaters can be found at the following website (https://call811.com/) or by calling
811.
2. The Contractor shall do all excavating, filling, backfilling and compacting
associated with the work.
B. Excavation:
1. Make all excavations to accurate, solid, undisturbed earth, and to proper
dimensions.
2. Where excavations are made in error below foundations, concrete of same
strength as specified for the foundations or thoroughly compacted sand-gravel
fill, as determined by the Architect/Engineer, shall be placed in such excess
excavations. Place thoroughly compacted, clean, stable fill in excess excavations
under slabs on grade, at the Contractor's expense.
3. Trim bottom and sides of excavations to grades required for foundations.
4. Protect excavations against frost and freezing.
5. Take care in excavating not to damage surrounding structures, equipment, or
buried pipe. Do not undermine footing or foundation.
6. Perform all trenching in a manner to prevent cave-ins and risk to workers.
7. Where original surface is pavement or concrete, the surface shall be saw cut to
provide clean edges and assist in the surface restoration.
8. Where satisfactory bearing soil for foundations is not found at the indicated
levels, the Architect/Engineer or their representative shall be notified
immediately, and no further work shall be done until further instructions are given
by the Architect/Engineer or their representative.
C. Underground Obstructions:
1. Known underground piping, foundations, and other obstructions in the vicinity of
construction are shown on the drawings. Use great care in making installations
near underground obstruction.
2. If objects not shown on the drawings are encountered, remove, relocate, or
perform extra work as directed by the Architect/Engineer.
D. Fill and Backfilling:
1. Utilities Bedding: Lay underground utilities on minimum of 6" sand bedding or.
Compact bedding under utilities smooth, with no sharp edges protruding, to
protect the utilities from puncture. Shape bedding to provide continuous support
for bells, joints, and barrels of utilities and for joints and fittings.
586
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 18 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
2. Envelope around utilities to 6" above utilities: Place and compact sand or to a
height of 6" over utilities in 6" layers. Each layer shall be placed, then carefully
and uniformly tamped, to eliminate lateral or vertical displacement. After
connection joints are made, any misalignment can be corrected by tamping
backfill around the utilities.
3. Backfill from 6" above utilities to earthen grade: Place all backfill materials above
the utilities in uniform layers not exceeding 6" deep. Each layer shall be placed,
then carefully and uniformly tamped, to eliminate lateral or vertical displacement.
4. Backfill from 6" above utilities to below slabs or paved area: Where the fill and
backfill will ultimately be under a building, floor or paving, each layer of backfill
materials shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum density determined by
AASHTO Designation T 99 or ASTM Designation D 698. Moisture content of soil
at time of compaction shall not exceed plus or minus 2% of optimum moisture
content determined by AASHTO T 99 or ASTM D 698 test.
5. Backfill Materials: Native soil materials may be used as backfill if approved by the
Geotechnical Engineer. Backfill material shall be free of rock or gravel larger than
3" in any dimension and shall be free of debris, waste, frozen materials,
vegetation, high void content, and other deleterious materials. Water shall not be
permitted to rise in unbackfilled trenches.
6. Dispose of excess excavated earth as directed.
7. Backfill all trenches and excavations immediately after installing utilities or
removal of forms, unless other protection is provided.
8. Around piers and isolated foundations and structures, backfill and fill shall be
placed and consolidated simultaneously on all sides to prevent wedge action and
displacement. Fill and backfill materials shall be spread in 6 inch uniform
horizontal layers with each layer compacted separately to required density.
E. Surface Restoration:
1. Where trenches are cut through existing graded, planted, or landscaped areas,
the areas shall be restored to the original condition. Replace all planting removed
or damaged to its original condition. A minimum of 6 inches of topsoil shall be
applied where disturbed areas are to be seeded or sodded.
2. Concrete or asphalt type pavement, seal coat, rock, gravel or earth surfaces
removed or damaged shall be replaced with comparable materials and restored
to original condition.
3.3 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OBSERVATION OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall provide seven (7) calendar days' notice to the Architect/Engineer
prior to:
1. Placing fill over underground and underslab utilities.
2. Covering exterior walls, interior partitions and chases.
3. Installing hard or suspended ceilings and soffits.
B. The Architect/Engineer will have the opportunity to review the installation and provide
a written report noting deficiencies requiring correction. The Contractor's schedule
shall account for these reviews and show them as line items in the approved schedule.
587
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 19 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
C. Above-Ceiling Final Observation
1. All work above the ceilings must be complete prior to the Architect/Engineer's
review. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. Pipe insulation is installed and fully sealed.
b. Pipe wall penetrations are sealed.
c. Pipe identification and valve tags are installed.
2. In order to prevent the Above-Ceiling Final Observation from occurring too early,
the Contractor shall review the status of the work and certify, in writing, that the
work is ready for the Above-Ceiling Final Observation.
3. It is understood that if the Architect/Engineer finds the ceilings have been
installed prior to this review and prior to 7 days elapsing, the Architect/Engineer
may not recommend further payments to the contractor until such time as full
access has been provided.
3.4 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.
B. Final Jobsite Observation:
1. In order to prevent the Final Jobsite Observation from occurring too early, the
Contractor is required to review the completion status of the project and certify
that the job is ready for the final jobsite observation.
2. Attached to the end of this section is a typical list of items that represent the
degree of job completeness expected prior to requesting a review.
3. Upon Contractor certification that the project is complete and ready for a final
observation, the Contractor shall sign the attached certification and return it to
the Architect/Engineer so that the final observation can be scheduled.
4. It is understood that if the Architect/Engineer finds the job not ready for the final
observation and that additional trips and observations are required to bring the
project to completion, the costs incurred by the Architect/Engineer's additional
time and expenses will be deducted from the Contractor's contract retainage prior
to final payment at the completion of the job.
C. Before final payment is authorized, this Contractor must submit the following:
1. Operation and maintenance marked-up manuals with copies of approved shop
drawings.
2. Record documents including marked-up drawings and specifications.
3. A report documenting the instructions given to the Owner's representatives
complete with the number of hours spent in the instruction. The report shall bear
the signature of an authorized agent of This Contractor and shall be signed by
the Owner's representatives.
4. Start-up reports on all equipment requiring a factory installation inspection or
start-up.
5. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra materials in quantities specified in
individual specification sections. Deliver to project site; receipt by
Architect/Engineer required prior to final payment approval.
588
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 20 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. General:
1. Provide an electronic copy of the O&M manuals as described below for
Architect/Engineer's review and approval. The electronic copy shall be corrected
as required to address the Architect/Engineer's comments. Once corrected,
electronic copies and paper copies shall be distributed as directed by the
Architect/Engineer.
2. Approved O&M manuals shall be completed and in the Owner's possession prior
to Owner's acceptance and at least 10 days prior to instruction of operating
personnel.
B. Electronic Submittal Procedures:
1. Distribution: Email the O&M manual as attachments to all parties designated by
the Architect/Engineer.
2. Transmittals: Each submittal shall include an individual electronic letter of
transmittal.
3. Format: Electronic submittals shall be in PDF format only. Scanned copies, in
PDF format, of paper originals are acceptable. Submittals that are not legible will
be rejected. Do not set any permission restrictions on files; protected, locked, or
secured documents will be rejected.
4. File Names: Electronic submittal file names shall include the relevant
specification section number followed by a description of the item submitted, as
follows. Where possible, include the transmittal as the first page of the PDF
instead of using multiple electronic files.
a. O&M file name: O&M.div22.contractor.YYYYMMDD
b. Transmittal file name: O&Mtransmittal.div22.contractor.YYYYMMDD
5. File Size: Files shall be transmitted via a pre-approved method. Larger files may
require an alternative transfer method, which shall also be pre-approved.
6. Provide the Owner with an approved copy of the O&M manual on compact discs
(CD), digital video discs (DVD), or flash drives with a permanently affixed label,
printed with the title "Operation and Maintenance Instructions", title of the project
and subject matter of disc/flash drive when multiple disc/flash drives are required.
7. All text shall be searchable.
8. Bookmarks shall be used, dividing information first by specification section, then
systems, major equipment and finally individual items. All bookmark titles shall
include the nomenclature used in the construction documents and shall be an
active link to the first page of the section being referenced.
C. Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall include:
1. Title Page: Include title page with project title, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, all
subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers, with addresses, telephone
numbers, website addresses, email addresses and point of contacts. Website
URLs and email addresses shall be active links in the electronic submittal.
2. Table of Contents: Include a table of contents describing specification section,
systems, major equipment, and individual items.
589
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 21 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
3. Copies of all final approved shop drawings and submittals. Include
Architect's/Engineer's shop drawing review comments. Insert the individual shop
drawing directly after the Operation and Maintenance information for the item(s)
in the review form.
4. Copy of final approved test and balance reports.
5. Copies of all factory inspections and/or equipment startup reports.
6. Copies of warranties.
7. Schematic electrical power/controls wiring diagrams of the equipment that have
been updated for field conditions. Field wiring shall have label numbers to match
drawings.
8. Dimensional drawings of equipment.
9. Capacities and utility consumption of equipment.
10. Detailed parts lists with lists of suppliers.
11. Operating procedures for each system.
12. Maintenance schedule and procedures. Include a chart listing maintenance
requirements and frequency.
13. Repair procedures for major components.
14. List of lubricants in all equipment and recommended frequency of lubrication.
15. Instruction books, cards, and manuals furnished with the equipment.
16. Owner and Contractor attendance list for domestic water systems operation,
maintenance, and flushing training.
3.6 INSTRUCTING THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVES
A. Adequately instruct the Owner's designated representatives in the maintenance, care,
and operation of all systems installed under this contract.
B. Provide verbal and written instructions to the Owner's representatives by FACTORY
PERSONNEL in the care, maintenance, and operation of the equipment and systems.
C. Contractor shall make a DVD video recording of instructions to the Owner while
explaining the system so additional personnel may view the instructions at a later date.
The video recording shall be the property of the Owner.
D. The Owner has the option to make a video recording of all instructions. Coordinate
schedule of instructions to facilitate this recording.
E. The instructions shall include:
1. Explanation of all system flow diagrams.
2. Maintenance of equipment.
3. Start-up procedures for all major equipment.
4. Explanation of seasonal system changes.
5. Explanation of Owner’s Responsibilities to operate, maintain, and flush domestic
water system (i.e., ASHRAE Standard 188).
F. Notify the Architect/Engineer of the time and place for the verbal instructions to be
given to the Owner's representative so a representative can attend if desired.
590
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 22 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
G. Minimum hours of instruction for each item shall be:
1. Domestic Hot Water System - 2 hours
2. All Domestic Water Systems operation, maintenance and flushing of all fixtures
and dead legs - 2 hours
H. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed, written training agenda and submit it to the
Architect/Engineer a minimum of two weeks prior to the formal training for approval.
The written agenda shall include specific training points within the items described
above. For example: how to adjust setpoints, troubleshooting, proper start-up, proper
shut-down, seasonal changes, draining, venting, changing filters, changing belts, etc.
Failure to provide and follow an approved training agenda may result in additional
training required at the expense of the Contractor.
I. Operating Instructions:
1. Contractor is responsible for all instructions to the Owner's representatives for
the mechanical and control systems.
2. If the Contractor does not have staff that can adequately provide the required
instructions the Contractor shall include in the bid an adequate amount to
reimburse the Owner for the Architect/Engineer to perform these services.
3.7 SYSTEM STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. The plumbing systems shall be complete and operating. System startup, testing,
adjusting, and balancing to obtain satisfactory system performance is the responsibility
of the Contractor. This includes calibration and adjustments of all controls, noise level
adjustments and final adjustments as required.
B. Complete all manufacturer-recommended startup procedures and checklists to verify
proper motor rotation, electrical power voltage is within equipment limitations,
equipment controls maintain pressures and temperatures within acceptable ranges, all
filters and protective guards are in-place, acceptable access is provided for
maintenance and servicing, and equipment operation does not pose a danger to
personnel or property.
C. Contractor shall adjust the plumbing systems and controls at season changes during
the one year warranty period, as required, to provide satisfactory operation and to
prove performance of all systems in all seasons.
D. All operating conditions and control sequences shall be tested during the start-up
period. Test all interlocks, safety shutdowns, controls, and alarms.
591
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 23 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
E. The Contractor, subcontractors, and equipment suppliers shall have skilled technicians
to ensure that all systems perform properly. If the Architect/Engineer is requested to
visit the job site for trouble shooting, assisting in start-up, obtaining satisfactory
equipment operation, resolving installation and/or workmanship problems, equipment
substitution issues or unsatisfactory system performance, including call backs during
the warranty period, through no fault of the design; the Contractor shall reimburse the
Owner on a time and materials basis for services rendered at the Architect/Engineer's
standard hourly rates in effect when the services are requested. The Contractor shall
pay the Owner for services required that are product, installation or workmanship
related. Payment is due within 30 days after services are rendered.
3.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. The following paragraphs supplement Division 1 requirements.
B. Maintain at the job site a separate and complete set of plumbing drawings and
specifications with all changes made to the systems clearly and permanently marked
in complete detail.
C. Mark drawings to indicate revisions to piping size and location, both exterior and
interior; including locations devices, requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual
equipment locations, dimensioned from column lines; actual inverts and locations of
underground piping; concealed equipment, dimensioned from column lines; mains and
branches of piping systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered,
concealed unions located, and with items requiring maintenance located; Change
Orders; concealed control system devices.
D. Before completion of the project, a set of reproducible plumbing drawings will be given
to the Contractor for transfer of all as-built conditions from the paper set maintained at
the job site. All marks on reproducibles shall be clear and permanent.
E. Mark specifications to show approved substitutions; Change Orders, and actual
equipment and materials used.
F. Record changes daily and keep the marked drawings available for the
Architect/Engineer's examination at any normal work time.
G. Upon completing the job, and before final payment is made, give the marked-up
drawings to the Architect/Engineer.
3.9 PAINTING
A. Paint all equipment that is marred or damaged prior to the Owner's acceptance. Paint
and color shall match original equipment paint and shall be obtained from the
equipment supplier if available.
B. Equipment in finished areas that will be painted to match the room decor will be
painted by others. Should this Contractor install equipment in a finished area after the
area has been painted, the Contractor shall have the equipment and all its supports,
hangers, etc., painted to match the room decor.
592
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 24 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
C. Equipment cabinets, casings, covers, metal jackets, etc., in equipment rooms or
concealed spaces, shall be furnished in standard or prime finish, free from scratches,
abrasions, chips, etc.
D. Equipment in occupied spaces, or if standard to the unit, shall have a baked primer
with baked enamel finish coat free from scratches, abrasions, chips, etc. If color option
is specified or is standard to the unit, this Contractor shall, before ordering, verify with
the Architect/Engineer the color preference and furnish this color.
E. Paint all equipment in unfinished areas such as boiler room, mechanical spaces,
storage room, etc., furnished by this Contractor. Equipment furnished with a factory
coat of paint and enamel need not be painted, provided the factory applied finish is not
marred or spattered. If so, equipment shall be refinished with the same paint as was
factory applied.
F. Paint all outdoor uninsulated steel piping the color selected by Owner or
Architect/Engineer.
G. After surfaces have been thoroughly cleaned and are free of oil, dirt, and other foreign
matter; paint all pipes and equipment with the following:
1. Bare Metal Surfaces - Apply one coat of primer suitable for the metal being
painted. Finish with two coats of Alkyd base enamel paint.
2. Insulated Surfaces - Paint insulation jackets with two coats of semi-gloss acrylic
latex paint.
3. Color of paint shall be as follows:
a. All piping in mechanical room:
1) Domestic Cold Water: Blue pipe/white letters
2) Domestic Hot Water: Red pipe/white letters
3) Sanitary Waste: Green pipe/black letters
3.10 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Thoroughly clean all equipment and systems prior to the Owner's final acceptance of
the project. Clean all foreign paint, grease, oil, dirt, labels, stickers, and other foreign
material from all equipment.
B. Clean all areas where moisture is present. Immediately report any mold, biological
growth, or water damage.
C. Remove all rust, scale, dirt, oils, stickers and thoroughly clean exterior of all exposed
piping, hangers, and accessories.
D. Remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated during construction from the premises.
3.11 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all equipment, valves, dampers,
operators, etc., with other trades to maintain clear access area for servicing.
593
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 25 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
B. All equipment shall be installed in such a way to maximize access to parts needing
service or maintenance. Review the final field location, placement, and orientation of
equipment with the Owner's designated representative prior to setting equipment.
C. Installation of equipment or devices without regard to coordination of access
requirements and confirmation with the Owner's designated representative will result in
removal and reinstallation of the equipment at the Contractor's expense.
D. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the
low emitting material limits of the following standards:
1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and
Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources
Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.
2. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant
Applications. All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site shall comply with the
applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168.
3. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied
Paints and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the
applicable VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.
594
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 00 - 26 BASIC PLUMBING
REQUIREMENTS
READINESS CERTIFICATION PRIOR TO FINAL JOBSITE OBSERVATION
To prevent the final job observation from occurring too early, we require that the Contractor
review the completion status of the project and, by copy of this document, certify that the job is
indeed ready for the final job observation. The following is a typical list of items that represent
the degree of job completeness expected prior to your requesting a final job observation.
1. Penetrations fire sealed and labeled in accordance with specifications.
2. All pumps operating and balanced.
3. All plumbing fixtures installed and caulked.
4. Pipe insulation complete, pipes labeled and valves tagged.
5. Owner and Contractor attendance list for domestic water systems operation, maintenance,
and flushing training.
Accepted by:
Prime Contractor _______________________________________________
By ___________________________________ Date ___________________
Upon Contractor certification that the project is complete and ready for a final job observation,
we require the Contractor to sign this agreement and return it to the Architect/Engineer so that
the final observation can be scheduled.
It is understood that if the Architect/Engineer finds the job not ready for the final observation and
that additional trips and observations are required to bring the project to completion, the costs
incurred by the Architect/Engineers for additional time and expenses will be deducted from the
Contractor's contract retainage prior to final payment at the completion of the job.
END OF SECTION 22 05 00
595
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 03 - 1 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
SECTION 22 05 03
THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Through-Penetration Firestopping.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
Section.
B. Installer: Individuals performing work shall be certified by the manufacturer of the
system selected for installation.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
B. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
C. ANSI/UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops
D. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems
E. UL Fire Resistance Directory Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ)
F. Intertek / Warnock Hersey - Directory of Listed Products
G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
H. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops
I. The Building Officials and Code Administrators National Building Code
J. 2019 Uniform Building Code
K. 2018 International Building Code
L. NFPA 5000 - Building Construction Safety Code
M. CBC California Building Code
596
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 03 - 2 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00.
B. Submit Firestopping Installers Certification for all installers on the project.
C. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-
penetration firestop system, along with the following information:
1. Types of penetrating items.
2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where
applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated.
3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop
design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
4. F ratings for each firestop system.
D. Maintain a notebook on the job site at all times that contains copies of approved
submittals for all through penetration firestopping to be installed. Notebook shall be
made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction at their request and turned over to
the Owner at the end of construction as part of the O&M Manuals.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store, protect and handle products on site. Accept material on site in factory
containers and packing. Inspect for damage. Protect from deterioration or damage due
to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. Follow
manufacturer's instructions for storage.
B. Install material prior to expiration of product shelf life.
1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions,
including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide
through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread
of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases,
and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.
B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings
determined per UL 1479:
1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings
indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of
constructions penetrated.
C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to light, traffic, moisture, or physical
damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these
conditions both during and after construction.
597
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 03 - 3 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as
determined per ASTM E 84.
E. For through-penetration firestop systems in air plenums, provide products with flame-
spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 50, respectively, as
determined per ASTM E 84.
F. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the
low emitting material limits of the following standards:
1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and
Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources
Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.
2. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant
Applications. All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site shall comply with the
applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168.
3. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied
Paints and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the
applicable VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.
1.7 MEETINGS
A. Pre-installation meeting: A pre-installation meeting shall be scheduled and shall
include the General Contractor, all Subcontractors associated with the installation of
systems penetrating fire barriers, Firestopping Manufacturer's Representative, and the
Owner.
1. Review foreseeable methods related to firestopping work.
2. Tour representative areas where firestopping is to be installed; inspect and
discuss each type of condition and each type of substrate that will be
encountered, and preparation to be performed by other trades.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year warranty on parts and labor.
B. Warranty shall cover repair or replacement of firestop systems which fail in joint
adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance,
migration resistance, stain resistance, general durability, or appear to deteriorate in
any manner not clearly specified by the manufacturer as an inherent quality of the
material.
598
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 03 - 4 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through-
penetration firestop systems indicated for each application that are produced by one of
the following manufacturers. All firestopping systems installed shall be provided by a
single manufacturer.
1. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division.
2. Hilti, Inc.
3. Johns-Manville.
4. Dow Corning Corp.
2.2 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A. Provide materials and systems classified by or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey to
provide firestopping equal to time rating of construction being penetrated.
B. All firestopping materials shall be free of asbestos, lead, PCB's, and other materials
that would require hazardous waste removal.
C. Firestopping shall be flexible to allow for normal penetrating item movement due to
expansion and contraction.
D. Firestopping systems for plumbing and wet pipe sprinkler piping shall be moisture
resistant.
E. Provide firestopping systems capable of supporting floor loads where systems are
exposed to possible floor loading or traffic.
F. Provide firestopping systems allowing continuous insulation for all insulated pipes.
G. Provide firestopping systems classified by UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey
for penetrations through all fire rated construction. Firestopping systems shall be
selected from the UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory
Category XHEZ based on substrate construction and penetrating item size and
material and shall fall within the range of numbers listed:
1. Combustible Framed Floors and Chase Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated:
a. F Rating = Floor/Wall Rating
Penetrating Item UL System No.
No Penetrating Item FC 0000-0999*
Metallic Pipe or Conduit FC 1000-1999
Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit FC 2000-2999
Electrical Cables FC 3000-3999
Cable Trays FC 4000-4999
Insulated Pipes FC 5000-5999
Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical FC 6000-6999
599
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 03 - 5 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
Penetrating Item UL System No.
Duct without Damper and Misc.
Mechanical
FC 7000-7999
Multiple Penetrations FC 8000-8999
*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to
match original rated construction.
Penetrating Item UL System No.
No Penetrating Item WL 0000-0999*
Metallic Pipe or Conduit WL 1000-1999
Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit WL 2000-2999
Electrical Cables WL 3000-3999
Cable Trays WL 4000-4999
Insulated Pipes WL 5000-5999
Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical WL 6000-6999
Duct without Damper and Misc.
Mechanical
WL 7000-7999
Multiple Penetrations WL 8000-8999
*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to
match original rated construction.
H. Any opening in walls or floors not covered by the listed series of numbers shall be
coordinated with the firestopping manufacturer.
I. Any openings in floors or walls not described in the UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock
Hersey Fire Resistance Directory, or outlined in manufacturer's information shall be
sealed in a manner agreed upon by the Firestopping Manufacturer, Owner, and the
Authority Having Jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Ensure all surfaces that contact seal materials are free of dirt, dust, grease, oil, rust, or
loose materials. Clean and repair surfaces as required. Remove laitance and form-
release agents from concrete.
B. Ensure substrate and penetrating items have been permanently installed prior to
installing firestopping systems. Ensure penetrating items have been properly spaced
and have proper clearance prior to installing firestopping systems.
C. Surfaces to which sealing materials are to be installed must meet the selected UL or
Intertek / Warnock Hersey system substrate criteria.
D. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer. Confine primer to area of bond.
600
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 03 - 6 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. In existing construction, provide firestopping of openings prior to and after installation
of penetrating items. Remove any existing coatings on surfaces prior to firestopping
installation. Temporary firestopping shall consist of packing openings with fire resistant
mineral wool for the full thickness of substrate, or an alternate method approved by the
Authority Having Jurisdiction. All openings shall be temporarily firestopped immediately
upon their installation and shall remain so until the permanent UL or listed by Intertek /
Warnock Hersey listed firestopping system is installed.
B. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of the UL or
Intertek / Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory and with the manufacturer's
printed application instructions.
C. Install dams as required to properly contain firestopping materials within openings and
as required to achieve required fire resistance rating. Remove combustible damming
after appropriate curing.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturers and that do not cause damage.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that
ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration
at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration
occurs, remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems
immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified
requirements.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide and install labels adjacent to each firestopping location. Label shall be
provided by the firestop system supplier and contain the following information in a
contrasting color:
1. The words "Warning - Through Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb.
Notify Building Management of Any Damage."
2. Firestop System Supplier; UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey system
number; date installed; contractor name and phone number; manufacturer's
representative name, address, and phone number.
3.5 INSPECTION
A. All penetrations shall be inspected by the manufacturer's representative to ensure
proper installation.
B. Access to firestop systems shall be maintained for examination by the Authority
Having Jurisdiction at their request.
601
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 03 - 7 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop system with other construction
only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with
requirements.
D. The contractor shall allow for visual destructive review of 5% of installed firestop
systems (minimum of one) to prove compliance with specifications and manufacturer's
instructions and details. Destructive system removal shall be performed by the
contractor and witnessed by the engineer and manufacturer's factory representative.
The engineer shall have sole discretion of which firestop system installations will be
reviewed. The contractor is responsible for all costs associated with this requirement
including labor and material for removing and replacing the installed firestop system. If
any firestop system is found to not be installed per manufacturer's specific instructions
and details, all firestop systems are subject to destructive review and replacement at
the engineer's discretion and the contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION 22 05 03
602
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 05 - 1 PLUMBING DEMOLITION
FOR REMODELING
SECTION 22 05 05
PLUMBING DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Plumbing Demolition.
B. Cutting and Patching.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment shall be as specified in individual Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. THE DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED TO INDICATE THE GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK
AND DO NOT SHOW EVERY PIPE, DUCT, OR PIECE OF EQUIPMENT THAT MUST
BE REMOVED.
B. Where walls, ceilings, etc., are shown as being removed on general drawings, the
Contractor shall remove all mechanical equipment, devices, fixtures, piping, ducts,
systems, etc., from the removed area.
C. Where ceilings, walls, partitions, etc., are temporarily removed and replaced by others,
This Contractor shall remove, store, and replace equipment, devices, fixtures, pipes,
ducts, systems, etc.
D. Verify that abandoned utilities serve only abandoned equipment or facilities. Extend
services to facilities or equipment that shall remain in operation following demolition.
E. Coordinate work with all other Contractors and the Owner. Schedule removal of
equipment to avoid conflicts.
F. This Contractor shall verify all existing equipment sizes and capacities where
equipment is scheduled to be replaced or modified, prior to ordering new equipment.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Disconnect plumbing systems in walls, floors, and ceilings scheduled for removal.
603
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 05 - 2 PLUMBING DEMOLITION
FOR REMODELING
B. Provide temporary connections to maintain existing systems in service during
construction. When work must be performed on operating equipment, use personnel
experienced in such operations.
3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING MECHANICAL WORK
A. Demolish and extend existing plumbing work under provisions of Division 2 and this
Section.
B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
C. Remove abandoned piping to source of supply and/or main lines.
D. Remove exposed abandoned pipes, including abandoned pipes above accessible
ceilings. Cut pipes above ceilings, below floors and behind walls. Cap remaining lines.
Repair building construction to match original. Remove all clamps, hangers, supports,
etc. associated with pipe and duct removal.
E. Disconnect and remove mechanical devices and equipment serving equipment that
has been removed.
F. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension
work.
G. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing
installations, or as specified.
H. Remove unused sections of domestic water piping back to mains and cap. Capped
pipe shall be less than 2 feet from main to prevent "dead legs".
3.4 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. This Contractor is responsible for all penetrations of existing construction required to
complete the work of this project. Refer to Section 22 05 29 for additional
requirements.
B. Penetrations in existing construction should be reviewed carefully prior to proceeding
with any work.
C. Penetrations shall be neat and clean with smooth and/or finished edges. Core drill
where possible for clean opening.
D. Repair existing construction as required after penetration is complete to restore to
original condition. Use similar materials and match adjacent construction unless
otherwise noted or agreed to by the Architect/Engineer prior to start of work.
E. Floor slabs may contain conduit systems. This Contractor is responsible for taking any
measures required to ensure no conduits or other services are damaged. This includes
x-ray or similar non-destructive means.
604
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 05 - 3 PLUMBING DEMOLITION
FOR REMODELING
F. This Contractor is responsible for all costs incurred in repair, relocations, or
replacement of any cables, conduits, or other services if damaged without proper
investigation.
3.5 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.
B. Clean all systems adjacent to project which are affected by the dust and debris caused
by this construction.
C. PLUMBING ITEMS REMOVED AND NOT RELOCATED REMAIN THE PROPERTY
OF THE OWNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL PLACE ITEMS RETAINED BY THE
OWNER IN A LOCATION COORDINATED WITH THE OWNER. THE CONTRACTOR
SHALL DISPOSE OF MATERIAL THE OWNER DOES NOT WANT TO REUSE OR
RETAIN FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES.
END OF SECTION 22 05 05
605
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 29 - 1 PLUMBING SUPPORTS
AND ANCHORS
SECTION 22 05 29
PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Hangers, Supports, and Associated Anchors.
B. Equipment Bases and Supports.
C. Sleeves and Seals.
D. Flashing and Sealing of Equipment and Pipe Stacks.
E. Cutting of Openings.
F. Escutcheon Plates and Trim.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,
Application, and Installation.
B. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
C. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices
D. MSS SP-127 - Bracing for Piping Systems Seismic-Wind-Dynamic Design, Selection,
Application.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 22 05 00. Include
plastic pipe manufacturers' support spacing requirements.
1.4 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Furnish sleeves and hanger inserts to General Contractor for placement into formwork.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SEISMIC RESTRAINTS
A. Refer to Section 22 05 50 for additional requirements for seismic restraints.
606
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 29 - 2 PLUMBING SUPPORTS
AND ANCHORS
2.2 HANGER RODS
A. Hanger rods for single rod hangers shall conform to the following:
Hanger Rod Diameter
Pipe Size Column #1 Column #2
2-1/2" and smaller 3/8" 3/8"
3" through 3-5/8" 3/8" 3/8"
4" and 5" 1/2" 1/2"
6" 3/4" 5/8"
Column #1: Steel, cast iron, and glass pipe.
Column #2: Copper and plastic pipe.
B. Rods for double rod hangers may be reduced one size. Minimum rod diameter is 3/8
inches.
C. Hanger rods and accessories used in mechanical spaces or otherwise dry areas shall
have ASTM B633 electro-plated zinc finish.
D. All hanger rods, nuts, washers, clevises, etc., in damp areas shall have ASTM A123
hot-dip galvanized finish applied after fabrication. This applies to the following areas:
2.3 PIPE AND STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS
A. General:
1. Pipe hangers, clamps, and supports shall conform to Manufacturers
Standardization Society MSS SP-58, 69, 89, and 127 (where applicable).
2. On all insulated piping, provide at each support an insert of same thickness and
contour as adjoining insulation, between the pipe and insulation jacket, to prevent
insulation from sagging and crushing. Refer to insulation specifications for
materials and additional information.
3. Copper piping located in an exposed area, including indirect waste piping in
kitchens and janitor's closets, shall use split ring standoff hangers for copper
tubing. Support shall include plastic pipe insert similar to Unistrut Cush-A-Clamp,
Hydra-Zorb, Erico Cushion Clamp or Cooper Vibra-Clamp. Use electro-
galvanized or more corrosion resistant and threaded rod for floor applications.
Use anchors applicable to the wall type with corrosion resistant threaded rod for
wall applications.
a. Products:
1) B-Line Fig. 3198HCT
2) Anvil Fig. CT138R
3) Nibco/Tolco Fig. 301CT
607
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 29 - 3 PLUMBING SUPPORTS
AND ANCHORS
B. Vertical Supports:
1. Support and laterally brace vertical pipes at every floor level in multi-story
structures, unless otherwise noted by applicable codes, but never at intervals
over 15 feet Support vertical pipes with riser clamps installed below hubs,
couplings, or lugs. Provide sufficient flexibility to accommodate expansion and
contraction to avoid compromising fire barrier penetrations or stressing piping at
fixed takeoff locations.
a. Products:
1) Cooper/B-Line Fig B3373 Series
2) Nibco/Tolco Fig. 82
2. Cold Pipe: Place restrained neoprene mounts beneath vertical pipe riser clamps
to prevent sweating of cold pipes. Select neoprene mounts based on the weight
of the pipe to be supported. Insulate over mounts.
a. Products:
1) Mason RBA, RCA or RDA
2) Mason BR
3. Cold Pipe Alternative: Insulated pipe riser clamp with no thermal bridging
between clamp and pipe; water repellant calcium silicate insulation material
adhered inside the clamp; ASTM A653 galvanized steel clamp.
a. Products:
1) Pipeshields E100
4. Wall supports shall be used where vertical height of structure exceeds minimum
spacing requirements. Install wall supports at same spacing as hangers or strut
supports along vertical length of pipe runs. Wall supports shall be coordinated
with the Structural Engineer.
C. Hangers and Clamps:
1. Oversize all hangers, clamps, and supports on insulated piping to allow insulation
and jacket to pass through unbroken. This applies to both hot and cold pipes.
2. Hangers in direct contact with bare copper pipe shall include plastic pipe insert
similar to Unistrut Cush-A-Clamp, Hydra-Zorb, Erico Cushion Clamp or Cooper
Vibra-Clamp within their temperature limits of -65°F to +275°F.
3. Vertical cold pipe drops and rough-ins to fixtures shall be supported by insulated
pipe clamps to prevent thermal bridging and condensation.
4. On all insulated piping, provide a semi-cylindrical metallic shield and vapor
barrier jacket.
608
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 29 - 4 PLUMBING SUPPORTS
AND ANCHORS
5. Unless otherwise indicated, hangers shall be as follows:
a. Clevis Type:
1) Service: Bare Metal Pipe, Rigid Plastic Pipe, Insulated Cold Pipe,
Insulated Hot Pipe - 3 inches & Smaller
2) Products: Bare Steel Plastic or Insulated Pipe:
a) Anvil Fig. 260
b) Cooper/B-Line Fig. 3100
c) Nibco/Tolco Fig. 1
3) Products: Bare Copper Pipe:
a) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3100C
b) Nibco/Tolco Fig. 81PVC
b. Continuous Channel with Clevis Type: Service: Plastic Tubing, Flexible
Hose, Soft Copper Tubing:
1) Products:
a) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3106, with Fig. B3106V
b) Nibco/Tolco Fig. 1V
c. Adjustable Swivel Ring Type:
1) Service: Bare Metal Pipe - 4 inches and Smaller
2) Bare Steel Pipe:
a) Anvil Fig. 69
b) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3170NF
c) Nibco/Tolco Fig. 200
3) Bare Copper Pipe:
a) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3170CTC
b) Nibco/Tolco Fig. 203
6. Support may be fabricated from U-channel strut or similar shapes. Piping less
than 4" in diameter shall be secured to strut with clamps of proper design and
capacity as required to maintain spacing and alignment. Strut shall be
independently supported from hanger drops or building structure. Size and
support shall be per manufacturer's installation requirements for structural
support of piping. Clamps shall not interrupt piping insulation.
a. Strut used in mechanical spaces or otherwise dry areas shall have ASTM
B633 electro-plated zinc finish.
b. Strut used in damp areas listed in hanger rods shall have ASTM A123 hot-
dip galvanized finish applied after fabrication.
609
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 29 - 5 PLUMBING SUPPORTS
AND ANCHORS
7. Unless otherwise indicated, pipe supports for use with struts shall be as follows:
a. Clamp Type:
1) Service: Bare Metal Pipe, Rigid Plastic Pipe, Insulated Cold Pipe,
Insulated Hot Pipe - 3 inches and smaller
2) Clamps in direct contact with copper pipe shall include plastic pipe
insert similar to Unistrut Cush-A-Clamp, Hydra-Zorb, Erico Cushion
Clamp or Cooper Vibra-Clamp.
3) Pipes subject to expansion and contraction shall have clamps
oversized to allow limited pipe movement.
4) Bare Steel, Plastic or Insulated Pipe:
a) Unistrut Fig. P1100 or P2500
b) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B2000 or B2400
c) Nibco/Tolco Fig. A-14 or 2STR
5) Bare Copper Pipe:
a) Cooper/B-Line Fig. BVT
D. Upper (Structural) Attachments:
1. Unless otherwise shown, upper attachments for hanger rods or support struts
shall be as follows:
a. Steel Structure Clamps: C-Type Wide Flange Beam Clamps (for use on top
and/or bottom of wide flanges. Not permitted for use with bar-joists.):
1) Products:
a) Anvil Fig. 92
b) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3033/B3034
c) Nibco/Tolco 68
b. Concentrically Loaded Open Web Joist Hangers (for use with bar joists):
1) Products:
a) MCL. M1, M2 or M3
c. Concrete Anchors: Fasten to concrete using cast-in or post-installed
anchors designed per the requirements of Appendix D of ACI 318-05. Post-
installed anchors shall be qualified for use in cracked concrete by ACI-
355.2.
610
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 29 - 6 PLUMBING SUPPORTS
AND ANCHORS
d. Wood Anchors: Tension wood rod hanger for suspending 3/8" threaded rod.
Zinc plated carbon steel.
1) Minimum allowable tension loads for Douglass Fir/Southern Pine:
a) 3/8" diameter rod; 2-1/2" shank: 600 lb/590 lb.
b) Load values are based on full shank penetration into wood
member. Minimum edge distance 3/4". Minimum end distance
3-1/4".
2) Limitations:
a) Truss: Do not hang from wood trusses without truss
manufacturer or Structural Engineer’s approval.
b) Sheetrock/Gypsum Ceiling: When drilling through non-wood
materials (e.g., sheet rock, gypsum, etc.), increase shank
length by depth of non-wood materials.
c) Plywood Flooring/Roofing: Do not hang from plywood floor or
roofing.
d) Spacing: Refer to wood structure spacing of hangers.
3) Products:
a) Simpson RWV
b) DeWALT
c) ITI Sammys GT25
E. Supports:
1. Provide sufficient clips, inserts, hangers, racks, rods, and auxiliary steel to
securely support all suspended material, equipment and conduit without sag.
2. Hang heavy equipment from concrete floors or ceilings with Architect/Engineer-
approved concrete inserts, furnished and installed by the Contractor whose work
requires them, except where indicated otherwise.
F. Grout:
1. Grout shall be non-shrinking premixed (Master Builders Company "Embecco"),
unless otherwise indicated on the drawings or approved by the
Architect/Engineer.
2. Use Mix No. 1 for clearances of 1" or less, and Mix No. 2 for all larger
clearances.
3. Grout under equipment bases, around pipes, at pipe sleeves, etc., and where
shown on the drawings.
2.4 OPENINGS IN FLOORS, WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Exact locations of all openings for the installation of materials shall be determined by
the Contractor and given to the General Contractor for installation or construction as
the structure is built.
611
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 29 - 7 PLUMBING SUPPORTS
AND ANCHORS
B. Coordinate all openings with other Contractors.
C. Hire the proper tradesman and furnish all labor, material and equipment to cut
openings in or through existing structures, or openings in new structures that were not
installed, or additional openings. Repair all spalling and damage to the satisfaction of
the Architect/Engineer. Make saw cuts before breaking out concrete to ensure even
and uniform opening edges.
D. Said cutting shall be at the complete expense of each Contractor. Failure to coordinate
openings with other Contractors shall not exempt the Contractor from providing
openings at Contractor's expense.
E. Do not cut structural members without written approval of the Architect or Structural
Engineer.
F. Exposed Housing Penetrations: Seal pipes with surface temperature below 150°F,
penetrating housings with conical stepped, white silicone, EPDM or neoprene pipe
flashings and stainless steel clamps equal to Portals Plus Pipe Boots or Pipetite.
2.5 ROOF PENETRATIONS
A. Roof Curb Enclosure: Provide weatherproof roof curb and enclosure for pipe
penetrations. Refer to drawings for details.
B. Conical Pipe Boot: Seal pipes with surface temperature below 150°F penetrating
single-ply roofs with conical stepped, UV-resistant silicone, EPDM or neoprene pipe
flashings and stainless steel clamps equal to Portals Plus Pipe Boots or Pipetite.
Color: White shall match roofing membrane.
C. Break insulation only at the clamp for pipes between 60°F and 150°F. Seal outdoor
insulation edges watertight.
2.6 ESCUTCHEON PLATES AND TRIM
A. Fit escutcheons to all insulated or uninsulated exposed pipes passing through walls,
floors, or ceilings of finished rooms.
B. Escutcheons shall be heavy gauge, cold rolled steel, copper coated under a chromium
plated finish, heavy spring clip, rigid hinge and latch.
C. Install galvanized steel (unless otherwise indicated) trim strip to cover vacant space
and raw construction edges of all rectangular openings in finished rooms. This
includes pipe openings.
2.7 PIPE PENETRATIONS
A. Seal all pipe penetrations. Seal non-rated walls and floor penetrations with grout or
caulk. Backing material may be used.
B. Seal fire rated wall and floor penetrations with fire seal system as specified.
612
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 29 - 8 PLUMBING SUPPORTS
AND ANCHORS
2.8 FINISH
A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports in crawl
spaces, pipe shafts, and suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PLUMBING SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
A. General Installation Requirements:
1. Install all items per manufacturer's instructions.
2. Coordinate the location and method of support of piping systems with all
installations under other Divisions and Sections of the Specifications.
3. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape,
brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
4. Supports shall extend directly to building structure. Do not support piping from
duct hangers unless coordinated with sheet metal contractor prior to installation.
Do not allow lighting or ceiling supports to be hung from piping supports.
B. Supports Requirements:
1. Where building structural steel is fireproofed, all hangers, clamps, auxiliary steel,
etc., which attach to it shall be installed prior to application of fireproofing. Repair
all fireproofing damaged during pipe installation.
2. Set all concrete inserts in place before pouring concrete.
3. Furnish, install and prime all auxiliary structural steel for support of piping
systems that are not shown on the Drawings as being by others.
4. Install hangers and supports complete with lock nuts, clamps, rods, bolts,
couplings, swivels, inserts and required accessories.
5. Hangers for horizontal piping shall have adequate means of vertical adjustment
for alignment.
C. Pipe Requirements:
1. Support all piping and equipment, including valves, strainers, traps and other
specialties and accessories to avoid objectionable or excessive stress,
deflection, swaying, sagging or vibration in the piping or building structure during
erection, cleaning, testing and normal operation of the systems.
2. Do not, however, restrain piping to cause it to snake or buckle between supports
or to prevent proper movement due to expansion and contraction.
3. Support piping at equipment and valves so they can be disconnected and
removed without further supporting the piping.
4. Piping shall not introduce strains or distortion to connected equipment.
5. Parallel horizontal pipes may be supported on trapeze hangers made of
structural shapes and hanger rods; otherwise, pipes shall be supported with
individual hangers.
6. Trapeze hangers may be used where ducts interfere with normal pipe hanging.
7. Provide additional supports where pipe changes direction, adjacent to flanged
valves and strainers, at equipment connections and heavy fittings.
613
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 29 - 9 PLUMBING SUPPORTS
AND ANCHORS
8. Provide at least one hanger adjacent to each joint in grooved end steel pipe with
mechanical couplings.
D. Provided the installation complies with all loading requirements of truss and joist
manufacturers, the following practices are acceptable:
1. Loads of 100 lbs. or less may be attached anywhere along the top or bottom
chords of trusses or joists with a minimum 3' spacing between loads.
2. Loads greater than 100 lbs. must be hung concentrically and may be hung from
top or bottom chord, provided one of the following conditions is met:
a. The hanger is attached within 6" from a web/chord joint.
b. Additional L2x2x1/4 web reinforcement is installed per manufacturer's
requirements.
3. It is prohibited to cantilever a load using an angle or other structural component
that is attached to a truss or joist in such a fashion that a torsional force is
applied to that structural member.
4. If conditions cannot be met, coordinate installation with truss or joist
manufacturer and contact Architect/Engineer.
E. After piping and insulation installation are complete, cut hanger rods back at trapeze
supports so they do not extend more than 3/4" below bottom face of lowest fastener
and blunt any sharp edges.
F. Do not exceed the manufacturer's recommended maximum load for any hanger or
support.
G. Wood Structure: Spacing of hangers shall not exceed the compressive strength of the
insulation inserts, and in no case shall exceed the following:
1. Steel and Fiberglass (Std. Weight or Heavier - Liquid Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 1-1/4" & under: 7'-0"
2) 1-1/2": 9'-0"
3) 2": 10'-0"
4) 2-1/2": 11'-0"
5) 3": 12'-0"
6) 4" through 6": 12'-0"
7) 8": 9'-0"
8) 10": 6'-0"
9) 12": 4'-0"
614
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 29 - 10 PLUMBING SUPPORTS
AND ANCHORS
2. Steel (Std. Weight or Heavier - Vapor Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 1-1/4" and under: 9'-0"
2) 1-1/2": 12'-0"
3) 2" & larger: 12'-0"
4) 2-1/2": 11'-0"
5) 3": 12'-0"
6) 4" through 8": 12'-0"
7) 10": 9'-0"
8) 12": 6'-0"
3. Hard Drawn Copper & Brass (Liquid Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3/4" and under: 5'-0"
2) 1": 6'-0"
3) 1-1/4": 7'-0"
4) 1-1/2" 8'-0"
5) 2": 8'-0"
6) 2-1/2": 9'-0"
7) 3": 10'-0"
8) 4": 12'-0"
9) 6": 12'-0"
4. Hard Drawn Copper & Brass (Vapor Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3/4" & under: 7'-0"
2) 1": 8'-0"
3) 1-1/4": 9'-0"
4) 1-1/2": 10'-0"
5) 2": 11'-0"
6) 2-1/2" & larger: 12'-0"
5. Ultra-Flexible Pipe, Flexible Hose, and Soft Copper Tubing:
a. Continuous channel with hangers maximum 8'-0" OC.
H. Wood Structure: Spacing of hangers shall not exceed the compressive strength of the
insulation inserts, and in no case shall exceed the following:
1. Steel and Fiberglass (Std. Weight or Heavier - Liquid Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 1-1/4" & under: 7'-0"
2) 1-1/2": 9'-0"
615
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 29 - 11 PLUMBING SUPPORTS
AND ANCHORS
3) 2": 10'-0"
4) 2-1/2": 11'-0"
5) 3": 12'-0"
6) 4" through 6": 12'-0"
7) 8": 9'-0"
8) 10": 6'-0"
9) 12": 4'-0"
2. Steel (Std. Weight or Heavier - Vapor Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 1/2" and under: 6'-0"
2) 3/4" to 1": 8'-0"
3) 1-1/4" and under: 9'-0"
4) 1-1/2": 10'-0"
5) 2" & larger: 10'-0"
6) 3": 12'-0"
7) 4" through 8": 12'-0"
8) 10": 9'-0"
9) 12": 6'-0"
3. Hard Drawn Copper & Brass (Liquid Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3/4" & under: 5'-0"
2) 1": 6'-0"
3) 1-1/4": 6'-0"
4) 1-1/2": 6'-0"
5) 2": 8'-0"
6) 2-1/2": 9'-0"
7) 3": 10'-0"
8) 4": 10'-0"
9) 6": 10'-0"
4. Hard Drawn Copper & Brass (Vapor Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3/4" & under: 6'-0"
2) 1": 6'-0"
3) 1-1/4": 6'-0"
4) 1-1/2": 6'-0"
5) 2": 10'-0"
6) 2-1/2" & larger: 10'-0"
5. Ultra-Flexible Pipe, Flexible Hose, and Soft Copper Tubing:
a. Continuous channel with hangers maximum 8'-0" OC.
616
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 29 - 12 PLUMBING SUPPORTS
AND ANCHORS
I. Installation of hangers shall conform to MSS SP-58, 69, 89 and the applicable
Plumbing Code.
END OF SECTION 22 05 29
617
MOORPARK CITY HALL 02/03/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 50 - 1 Seismic Requirements for
Equipment and Supports
SECTION 22 05 50
SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Seismic Requirements.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General:
1. The contractor shall retain a specialty consultant or equipment manufacturer to
develop a seismic restraint and support system and perform seismic calculations
in accordance with these specifications, state, and local codes.
2. Items used for seismic restraint of equipment and systems shall be specifically
manufactured for seismic restraint.
3. These requirements are beyond those listed in Section 22 05 29 of these
specifications. Where a conflict arises between the seismic requirements of this
section and any other section, the Architect/Engineer shall be immediately
notified for direction to proceed.
B. Manufacturer:
1. System Supports/Restraints: Company specializing in the manufacture of
products specified in this Section.
2. Equipment: Each company providing equipment that must meet seismic
requirements shall provide certification included in project submittals the
equipment supplied for the project meets or exceeds the seismic requirements of
the project.
C. Testing Agency: An independent testing agency, acceptable to Authorities Having
Jurisdiction, with experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated.
D. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. International Building Code, 2018.
B. California Building Code (CBC)ASHRAE - A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint.
C. ASCE 7-16, Chapter 13.
D. SMACNA - Seismic Restraint Manual Guidelines for Mechanical Systems.
E. NFPA 13 - Installation of Sprinkler Systems.
618
MOORPARK CITY HALL 02/03/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 50 - 2 Seismic Requirements for
Equipment and Supports
F. NFPA 14 - Standpipe and Hose Systems.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 22 05 00.
B. Submittal to Code Official:
1. Contractor shall submit copies of the seismic shop drawings to the governing
code authority for approval.
C. Shop Drawings:
1. Calculations, restraint selections, and installation details shall be designed and
sealed by a Professional Structural Engineer licensed in the state where the
project is located experienced in seismic restraint design and installation.
2. Coordination Drawings: Plans and sections drawn to scale, coordinating seismic
bracing of mechanical components with other systems and equipment in the
vicinity, including other seismic restraints.
3. Manufacturer's Certifications: Professional Structural Engineer licensed in the
state where the project is located shall review and approve manufacturer's
certifications of compliance.
4. System Supports/Restraints - Submit for each condition requiring seismic
bracing:
a. Calculations for each seismic brace and detail utilized on the project.
b. Plan drawings showing locations and types of seismic braces on contractor
fabrication/installation drawings.
c. Cross-reference between details and plan drawings to indicate exactly
which brace is being installed at each location. Details provided are to
clearly indicate attachments to structure, correctly representing the
fastening requirements of bracing.
d. Clear indication of brace design forces and maximum potential component
forces at attachment points to building structure for confirmation of
acceptability by the Structural Engineer of Record.
5. Equipment - Submit for each piece of equipment supplied:
a. Certification that the equipment supplied for the project meets or exceeds
the seismic requirements specified.
b. Specific details of seismic design features of equipment and maximum
seismic loads imparted to the structural support.
c. Engineering calculations and details for equipment anchorage and support
structure.
619
MOORPARK CITY HALL 02/03/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 50 - 3 Seismic Requirements for
Equipment and Supports
D. A seismic restraint designer shall be provided whether or not exceptions listed in the
applicable building code are met. If seismic restraints are not provided for a system
that requires seismic bracing, the seismic designer shall submit a signed and sealed
letter to the Architect/Engineer and Authorities Having Jurisdiction stating the
exceptions, along with code reference, utilized for each item. Seismic designer shall
review system installation for general conformance to the exception requirements
stated in the code and document, in writing, the system has been installed in
accordance to the exception.
1.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Special Inspection and Testing shall be done in accordance with Chapter 17 of the
California Building Code.
B. The Contractor shall employ a Special Inspection Agency to perform the duties and
responsibilities specified in Section 1704 and 1705.
C. Work performed on the premises of a fabricator approved by the building official need
not be tested and inspected. The fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance that
the work has been performed in accordance with the approved plans and
specifications to the building official and the Architect and Engineer of Record.
D. The Special Inspection Agency shall furnish inspection reports to the building official,
the Owner, the Architect, the Engineer of Record, and the General Contractor. The
reports shall be completed and furnished within 48 hours of inspected work. A final
signed report stating whether the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of
the Special Inspection Agency's knowledge, in conformance with the approved plans
and specifications shall be submitted.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site. Accept material on site in factory
containers and packing. Inspect for damage. Protect from damage and contamination
by maintaining factory packaging until installation. Follow manufacturer's instructions
for storage.
1.7 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. This project is subject to the seismic bracing requirements of the International Building
Code, 2018 edition.
B. This project is subject to the seismic bracing requirements of the California Building
Code.
C. The following criteria are applicable to this project:
1. Seismic Use Group: III
2. Occupancy Category: III
3. Risk Category: III
4. Seismic Importance Factor: IE = 1.25
5. Seismic Design Category: D
620
MOORPARK CITY HALL 02/03/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 50 - 4 Seismic Requirements for
Equipment and Supports
6. Component Amplification Factors (ap) and Component Response Modification
Factors (Rp) shall be taken from Table 1621.3r in CBC 2016 for the individual
equipment or system being restrained.
7. Component Importance Factors (Ip) shall be taken from Section 1621.1.6 in CBC
2016 for the individual equipment or system being restrained.
8. The total height of the structure and the height of the system to be restrained
within the structure shall be determined in coordination with architectural plans
and the General Contractor.
D. Forces shall be calculated with the above requirements and Equations of CBC 2016
unless exempted by 13.1.4.
E. Equipment shall meet California Building Code and ASCE 7 seismic qualification
requirements in concurrence with ICC ES AC156 Acceptance Criteria for Seismic
Qualification by Shake-Table Testing of Nonstructural Components and Systems.
F. All seismic anchorage and bracing shall comply with FM Global Property Loss
Prevention Data Sheet 1-11, Fire Following Earthquakes.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of seismic bracing with building structural systems
and architectural features, and with mechanical, fire-protection, electrical and other
building features in the vicinity.
B. Coordinate concrete bases with building structural system.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Provide one-year warranty on parts and labor for manufacturer defects and installation
workmanship.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPLIERS
A. Following is a partial list of manufacturer/supplier contact information for seismic
restraints:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc. (800) 851-7415, www.b-line.com.
2. Unistrut Corporation http://www.unistrut.us/
3. Kinetics Noise Control (877) 457-2695, www.kineticsnoise.com.
4. Mason Industries, Inc. www.mason-ind.com.
5. Loos & Co., Inc. (800) 321-5667, www.loosnaples.com.
6. Tolco (909) 737-5599, www.tolco.com
7. ISAT 877.523.6060, www.isatsb.com
8. Vibro-Acoustics (416) 291-7371, https://virs.vibro-acoustics.com/
621
MOORPARK CITY HALL 02/03/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 50 - 5 Seismic Requirements for
Equipment and Supports
2.2 SEISMIC DESIGN CRITERIA
A. This section describes the requirements for seismic restraint of systems and
equipment related to continued operation of the facility after a design seismic event.
B. Definitions
1. Stay in Place:
a. All systems and equipment shall be anchored and restrained such that the
anchoring system is intended not to fail and equipment and/or system
components will not fall.
2.3 SEISMIC BRACING AND SUPPORT OF SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS
A. General:
1. Seismic restraint designer shall coordinate all attachments with the Structural
Engineer of Record; refer to submittal requirements.
2. The seismic restraint design shall be based on actual equipment data obtained
from manufacturer's submittals or the manufacturer. The equipment
manufacturer shall verify and provide written certification the attachment points
on the equipment can accept the combination of seismic, weight, and other
imposed loads.
3. Design analysis shall include calculated dead loads, static seismic loads, and
capacity of materials utilized for the connection of the equipment or system to the
structure.
4. Analysis shall detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment, and weld
length.
5. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept without failure the forces
calculated per the applicable building code.
6. All seismic restraints and combination isolator/restraints shall have verification of
their seismic capabilities witnessed by an independent testing agency.
B. Friction from gravity loads shall not be considered resistance to seismic forces.
C. Fire protection systems shall meet the requirements of NFPA-13 and NFPA-14 for the
building seismic requirements.
D. Housekeeping Pads:
1. Reinforced housekeeping pads shall be provided to handle shear, tension, and
compression forces with proper reinforcement, doweling, and attachments
connecting the pad to the structural slab.
2.4 SEISMIC RESTRAINT AND CONSTRUCTION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment supplied for the project shall be designed to meet the requirements of
lateral forces calculated using the applicable code and method described above.
622
MOORPARK CITY HALL 02/03/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 50 - 6 Seismic Requirements for
Equipment and Supports
B. The following is a partial list of equipment that shall be restrained and that shall be
constructed to meet seismic forces described in this section:
1. Pumps
2. Tanks
2.5 MATERIALS
A. Use the following materials for restraints:
1. Indoor Dry Locations: Steel, zinc plated.
2. Outdoors and Damp Locations: Galvanized steel.
3. Corrosive Locations: Stainless steel.
2.6 ANCHORAGE AND STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Strength: Defined in reports by ICC Evaluation Service or another agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension and shear of components used shall
be at least two times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be
subjected.
B. Concrete and Masonry Anchor Bolts and Studs: Steel-expansion wedge type. Comply
with IBC, ACI and ICC ES requirements for cracked concrete anchors.
C. Concrete Inserts: Steel-channel type.
D. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM F3125,
Grade A 325.
E. Welding Lugs: Comply with MSS SP-69, Type 57.
F. Beam Clamps for Steel Beams and Joists: Double sided. Single-sided type is not
acceptable.
G. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene units designed for
seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to the type and size of
anchor bolts and studs used.
H. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings,
and matched to the type and size of attachment devices used.
2.7 SEISMIC BRACING COMPONENTS
A. Slotted Steel Channel: 1-5/8-by-1-5/8-inch cross section, formed from 0.1046-inch-
thick steel, with 9/16-by-7/8-inch slots at a maximum of 2 inches o.c. in webs, and
flange edges turned toward web.
1. Materials for Channel: ASTM A 1011, GR 33.
623
MOORPARK CITY HALL 02/03/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 50 - 7 Seismic Requirements for
Equipment and Supports
2. Materials for Fittings and Accessories: ASTM A 635, ASTM A 576, or ASTM A
36.
3. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channels and
designed for use with that product.
4. Finish: Baked, rust-inhibiting, acrylic-enamel paint applied after cleaning and
phosphate treatment, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Channel-Type Bracing Assemblies: Slotted steel channel, with adjustable hinged steel
brackets and bolts.
C. Cable-Type Bracing Assemblies: Zinc-coated, high-strength steel wire rope cable
attached to steel thimbles, brackets, and bolts designed for cable service.
1. Arrange units for attachment to the braced component at one end and to the
structure at the other end.
2. Wire Rope Cable: Comply with ASTM A 603. Use 49- or 133-strand cable with a
minimum strength of 2 times the calculated maximum seismic force to be
resisted.
D. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Slotted steel channels with internally bolted connections to
hanger rod.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to the applicable code sections and Authority Having Jurisdiction for the exact
seismic restraint requirements of piping, ductwork, conduit, equipment, etc.
B. Layout of transverse and longitudinal bracing shall follow recommendations of
approved design standards listed in Part 1 of this specification section.
C. All rigid floor mounted equipment shall have a resilient media between the equipment
mounting hole and the anchor bolt in concrete.
D. All seismic restraint systems shall be installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions and all certified submittal data.
E. Installation of seismic restraints shall not cause any change in position of equipment,
piping, or ductwork, resulting in stresses or misalignment.
F. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that
degrade the noise and vibration-isolation system specified.
G. Do not install any equipment, piping, duct, or conduit that makes rigid connections with
the building unless isolation is not specified.
624
MOORPARK CITY HALL 02/03/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 50 - 8 Seismic Requirements for
Equipment and Supports
H. Coordinate work with all other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building. Any
conflicts with other trades that will result in rigid contact with equipment or piping due
to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions shall be brought to the
Architect/Engineer's attention prior to specific equipment selection.
I. Prior to installation, bring to the Architect/Engineer's attention any discrepancies
between the specifications and the field conditions, or changes required due to specific
equipment selection.
J. Bracing may occur from flanges of structural beams, upper truss cords of bar joists,
cast in place inserts, or International Code Council approved seismic anchors for
installation in concrete.
K. Cable restraints shall be installed slightly slack to avoid short-circuiting the isolated
suspended equipment, ductwork, piping, or conduit.
L. Cable assemblies shall be installed taut on non-isolated systems. Solid braces may be
used in place of cables on rigidly attached systems only.
M. Do not install cables over sharp corners.
N. Brace support rods when necessary to accept compressive loads. Welding of
compression braces to the vertical support rods is not acceptable.
O. Provide reinforced clevis bolts when required.
P. The vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as
required. Independent steel rails are not acceptable.
Q. Post-Installed anchors shall be provided to meet seismic requirements.
R. Vertical pipe risers flexibly supported to accommodate thermal motion and/or pipe
vibration shall be guided to maintain pipe stability and provide horizontal seismic
restraint.
S. Seismic restraints shall be mechanically attached to the system. Looping restraints
around the system is not acceptable.
T. Piping crossing building seismic or expansion joints, passing from building to building,
or supported from different portions of the building shall be installed to allow differential
support displacements without damaging the pipe, equipment connections, or support
connections. Pipe offsets, loops, anchors, and guides shall be installed as required to
provide required motion capability and limit motion of adjacent piping.
U. Water tanks shall be secured to their saddles by welding or proper concrete
attachment, and those saddles shall be properly attached to the structure.
V. Brace all terminal units with water coils as required by the building code and provide
flexible connection to the coil if bracing is required.
625
MOORPARK CITY HALL 02/03/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 50 - 9 Seismic Requirements for
Equipment and Supports
W. Independently brace duct mounted equipment (terminal units, in-line fans, etc.) and the
associated suspended ductwork.
X. Do not brace a system to two different structures such as a wall and a ceiling.
Y. Provide appropriately sized openings in walls, floors, and ceilings for anticipated
seismic movement. Provide fire seal systems in fire-rated walls.
Z. Positively attach all roof mounted equipment to roof curbs. Positively attach all roof
curbs to building structure.
AA. Exposed seismic supports in occupied areas shall be guarded or covered to protect
occupants.
BB. Coordinate seismic bracing of architecturally exposed ductwork with the
Architect/Engineer.
3.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINT EXCLUSIONS
A. Refer to the applicable code sections and Authority Having Jurisdiction for allowable
exclusions.
END OF SECTION
626
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 53 - 1 PLUMBING
IDENTIFICATION
SECTION 22 05 53
PLUMBING IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Identification of products installed under Division 22.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
B. ASTM B-1, B-3, and B-8 for copper conductors.
C. ASTM D-1248 for Polyethylene Extrusion Materials, ICEA S-70-547 Weatherproof
Resistant Polyethylene Conductors, ICEA S-61-402/NEMA WC5 Thermoplastic
Insulated Wire & Cable, ICEA S-95-658/NEMA WC70 Non-Shielded 0 “ 2kV Cables.
D. CGA Pamphlet C-9, Standard Color-Marking of Compressed Gas Cylinders for
Medical Use.
E. UL 1581 Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Include valve chart and schedule listing valve tag number, location, function, and valve
manufacturer's name and model number.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
1. 3M
2. Bunting
3. Calpico
4. Craftmark
5. Emedco
6. Kolbi Industries
7. Seton
8. W.H. Brady
9. Marking Services
627
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 53 - 2 PLUMBING
IDENTIFICATION
2.2 MATERIALS
A. All pipe markers (purchased or stenciled) shall conform to ANSI A13.1. Marker lengths
and letter sizes shall be at least the following:
OD of Pipe or Insulation Marker
Length
Size of Letters
Up to and including 1-1/4" 8" 1/2"
1-1/2" to 2" 8" 3/4"
2-1/2" to 6" 12" 1-1/4"
Plastic tags may be used for outside diameters under 3/4"
B. Plastic Nameplates: Laminated three-layer phenolic with engraved black, 1/4"
minimum letters on light contrasting background.
C. Brass Tags: Brass background with engraved black letters. Tag size minimum 1-1/2"
square or 1-1/2" round.
D. Plastic Pipe Markers: Semi-rigid plastic, preformed to fit around pipe or pipe covering;
indicating flow direction and fluid conveyed.
E. Underground Pipe Markers: Bright colored continuously printed plastic ribbon tape 6"
wide by 3.5 mils thick, manufactured for direct burial, with aluminum foil core for
location by non-ferric metal detectors and bold lettering identifying buried item.
F. Tracer Wire:
1. Single copper conductors shall be solid or stranded annealed or hard uncoated
copper per UL83 and ASTM requirements. Tracer tape or copper-coated steel
wire is not acceptable.
2. Conductor shall be insulated with HMWPE as specified and applied in a
concentric manner. The minimum at any point shall not be less than 90% of the
specified average thickness in compliance with UL 83.
3. Tracer wire shall be continuously spark tested at 7500 Volts DC. Other electrical
and mechanical tests shall be in accordance with UL 1581.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all products per manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
C. Valves:
1. All valves (except shutoff valves at equipment) shall have numbered tags.
2. Provide or replace numbered tags on all existing valves that are connected to
new systems or that have been revised.
628
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 53 - 3 PLUMBING
IDENTIFICATION
3. Provide all existing valves used to extend utilities to this project with numbered
tags. Review tag numbering sequence with the Owner prior to ordering tags.
4. Secure tags with heavy duty key chain and brass "S" link or with mechanically
fastened plastic straps.
5. Attach to handwheel or around valve stem. On lever operated valves, drill the
lever to attach tags.
6. Number all tags and show the service of the pipe.
7. Provide one Plexiglas framed valve directory listing all valves, with respective tag
numbers, uses and locations. Mount directory in location chosen by the
Architect/Engineer.
8. Provide one 36" x 24" minimum Plexiglas framed piping schematic showing valve
locations with respective tag numbers. Mount directory in location chosen by the
Architect/Engineer.
9. Provide two sets of laminated 8-1/2" x 11" (letter size) copies of a valve directory
listing all valves, with respective tag numbers, uses, and locations. The directory
shall be reviewed by the Owner and Architect/Engineer prior to laminating final
copies. Laminated copies shall have brass eyelet in at least one corner for easy
hanging.
D. Pipe Markers:
1. Adhesive Backed Markers: Use Brady Style 1, 2, or 3 on pipes 3" diameter and
larger. Use Brady Style 4, 6, or 8 on pipes under 3" diameter. Similar styles by
other listed manufacturers are acceptable. Secure all markers at both ends with a
wrap of pressure sensitive tape completely around the pipe.
2. Snap-on Markers: Use Seton "Setmark" on pipes up to 5-7/8" OD. Use Seton
"Setmark" with nylon or Velcro ties for pipes 6" OD and over. Similar styles by
other listed manufacturers are acceptable.
3. Apply markers and arrows in the following locations where clearly visible:
a. At each valve.
b. On both sides of walls that pipes penetrate.
c. At least every 20 feet along all pipes.
d. On each riser and each leg of each "T" joint.
e. At least once in every room and each story traversed.
4. Underground Pipe Markers: Install 8" to 10" below grade, directly above buried
pipes.
E. Equipment:
1. All equipment not easily identifiable such as controls, relays, gauges, etc.; and all
equipment in an area remote from its function shall have nameplates or plastic
tags listing name, function, and drawing symbol. Do not label exposed equipment
in public areas.
2. Mechanical equipment that is not covered by the U.S. National Appliance Energy
Conservation Act (NAECA) of 1987 shall carry a permanent label installed by the
manufacturer stating that the equipment complies with the requirements of
ASHRAE 90.1.
629
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 05 53 - 4 PLUMBING
IDENTIFICATION
F. Tracer Wire:
1. Tracer wire shall be installed on top of all non-metallic buried utilities.
2. Tracer wire shall be taped directly to plastic water or drain pipe.
3. Tracer wire shall not be fastened directly or indirectly to gas piping.
4. Tracer wire when attached shall be secured to the pipe a minimum of every 10
feet and at all changes of direction.
5. Tape shall be Polyken "930-35", Protecto-Wrap "310", or approved equal.
6. Tracer wire shall be continuous between boxes and shall be tested for continuity.
7. Splices in tracer wire shall be made with a water proof splice kit to prevent
corrosion. Wire nuts shall not be used.
8. The tracer wire shall daylight to grade through a 2" PVC conduit, at the point of
the utility entrance to building. PVC conduit shall be capped and labeled as future
contact point to locate the utility.
3.2 SCHEDULE
A. Pipes to be marked shall be labeled with text as follows, regardless of which method or
material is used:
1. CONDENSATE DRAIN: White lettering; green background
2. DOMESTIC COLD WATER: White lettering; green background
3. DOMESTIC HOT WATER - 115°F: White lettering; green background
4. DOMESTIC HOT WATER CIRCULATING - 115°F: White lettering; green
background
5. SANITARY SEWER: Black lettering; yellow background
6. VENT: Black lettering; yellow background
7. STORM SEWER (PRIMARY AND SECONDARY): White lettering; green
background
8. All Underground Pipes: Varies
9. Tracer Wire - All other buried types: White lettering; green background
END OF SECTION 22 05 53
630
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 07 19 - 1 PLUMBING PIPING
INSULATION
SECTION 22 07 19
PLUMBING PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping Insulation.
B. Insulation Jackets.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in piping insulation application with five years
minimum experience.
B. Materials: Listed and labeled for flame spread/smoke developed rating of no more than
25/50 when tested per ASTM E84 or UL 723 as required by code. Factory label
insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material
containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
C. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
D. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride
content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. Insulation
materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the
manufacturing process.
F. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the
low emitting material limits of the following standards:
1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and
Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources
Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.
2. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant
Applications. All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site shall comply with the
applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168.
3. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied
Paints and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the
applicable VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for
Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
631
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 07 19 - 2 PLUMBING PIPING
INSULATION
B. ANSI/ASTM C533 - Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
C. ANSI/ASTM C534 - Elastomeric Foam Insulation.
D. ASTM C591 - Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Insulation.
E. ASTM C1126 - Standard Specification for Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic
Thermal Insulation.
F. ASTM C1729 - Standard Specification for Aluminum Jacketing for Insulation.
G. ASTM C1767 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Jacketing for Insulation.
H. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
I. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
J. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
K. National Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards - 1999 Edition - as published by
Midwest Insulation Contractors Association and endorsed by National Insulation
Contractors Association.
L. California Title 24 - Building Energy Efficiency Standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings per Section 22 05 00. Include product description, list of
materials and thickness for each service, and locations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION
A. Type A: Glass fiber; ANSI/ASTM C547; 0.24 maximum 'K' value at 75°F; non-
combustible. All-purpose polymer or polypropylene service jacket, listed and labeled at
no more than 25/50 when tested per ASTM E84 or UL 723 as required by code.
2.2 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS
A. All-purpose polymer or polypropylene service jacket vapor barrier with self-sealing
adhesive joints. Beach puncture resistance ratio of at least 50 units. Tensile strength:
35 psi minimum. Single, self-seal acrylic adhesive on longitudinal jacket laps and butt
strips.
B. Polyvinylidene Chloride (PVDC or Saran) film and tape: Durable and highly moisture
and moisture vapor resistant. Please refer to manufacturer's recommended installation
guidelines.
632
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 07 19 - 3 PLUMBING PIPING
INSULATION
2.3 JACKET COVERINGS
A. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM C1729; 0.016" thick (thicker where required by ASTM
C1729); stucco embossed finish with Z edge seams and aluminum bands for outdoor
use. Where colored jacket covers are called for, provide factory-applied hard film
acrylic paint in color selected by Architect.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install insulation after piping has been tested. Pipe shall be clean, dry and free of rust
before applying insulation.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:
1. Install materials per manufacturer's instructions, building codes and industry
standards.
2. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations. This applies to all
insulated piping. Maintain fire rating of all penetrations.
B. Insulated Piping Operating Between 60°F and 140°F:
1. Do not insulate flanges and unions, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such
locations. Insulate all fittings, valves and strainers.
C. Exposed Piping:
1. Locate and cover seams in least visible locations.
2. Where exposed insulated piping extends above the floor, provide a sheet metal
guard around the insulation extending 12" above the floor. Guard shall be 0.016"
cylindrical smooth or stucco aluminum and shall fit tightly to the insulation.
3.3 SUPPORT PROTECTION
A. Provide a shield on all insulated piping at each support between the insulation jacket
and the support.
B. On all insulated piping greater than 1-1/2", provide shield with insulation insert of same
thickness and contour as adjoining insulation at each support, between the pipe and
insulation jacket, to prevent insulation from sagging and crushing. Inserts shall be as
follows:
1. The insert shall be suitable for planned temperatures, be suitable for use with
specific pipe material, and shall be a minimum 180° cylindrical segment the same
length as metal shields. Inserts shall be:
633
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 07 19 - 4 PLUMBING PIPING
INSULATION
a. Molded hydrous calcium silicate (only use for pipes with operating
temperatures above 90°F, with a minimum compressive strength of 100 psi
is acceptable for pipe sizes 14" and below. For pipe sizes larger than 14",
provide rolled steel plate in addition to the shield.
b. As an alternative to separate pipe insulation insert and saddle, properly
sized manufactured integral rigid insulation insert and shield assemblies
may be used.
1) Products:
a) Buckaroo CoolDry
b) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3380 through B3384
c) Pipe Shields A1000, A2000
c. Insulation Couplings:
1) Molded thermoplastic slip coupling, -65°F to 275°F, sizes up to 4-1/8"
OD, and receive insulation thickness up to 1". Suitable for use
indoors or outdoors with UV stabilizers. Vertical insulation riser
clamps shall have a 1,000lb vertical load rating. On cold pipes
operating below 60°F, cover joint and coupling with vapor barrier
mastic to ensure continuous vapor barrier.
2) Horizontal Strut Mounted Insulated Pipe Manufacturers:
a) Klo-Shure or equal
3) Vertical:
a) Manufacturers: Klo-Shure Titan or equal
d. Rectangular blocks, plugs, or wood material are not acceptable.
e. Temporary wood blocking may be used by the Piping Contractor for proper
height; however, these must be removed and replaced with proper inserts
by the Insulation Contractor. Refer to Supports and Anchors specification
section for additional information.
C. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
D. Install metal shields between all hangers or supports and the pipe insulation. Shields
shall be galvanized sheet metal, half-round with flared edges. Adhere shields to
insulation. On cold piping, seal the shields vapor-tight to the insulation as required to
maintain the vapor barrier, or add separate vapor barrier jacket.
E. Shields shall be at least the following lengths and gauges:
Pipe Size Shield Size
1/2" to 3-1/2" 12" long x 18 gauge
4" 12" long x 16 gauge
5” to 6" 18" long x 16 gauge
8” to 14" 24" long x 14 gauge
16” to 24" 24" long x 12 gauge
634
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 07 19 - 5 PLUMBING PIPING
INSULATION
F. Ferrous hot piping 4 inches and larger, provide steel saddle at rollers as described in
Section 22 05 29 "Plumbing Supports and Anchors".
G. Minimum 1/4" rolled galvanized steel plates shall be provided in addition to the sleeves
as reinforcement on large pipes to reduce point loading on roller, trapeze hanger and
strut support locations depending on insulation compressive strength. Refer to section
above for exact locations.
3.4 INSULATION
A. Type A Insulation:
1. All Service Jackets: Seal all longitudinal joints with self-seal laps using a single
pressure sensitive adhesive system. Do not staple.
2. Insulation without self-seal lap may be used if installed with Benjamin Foster 85-
20 or equivalent Chicago Mastic, 3M or Childers lap adhesive.
3. Apply insulation with laps on top of pipe.
4. Fittings, Valve Bodies and Flanges: For 4" and smaller pipes, insulate with 1 lb.
density insulation wrapped under compression to a thickness equal to the
adjacent pipe insulation. For pipes over 4", use mitered segments of pipe
insulation. Finish with preformed plastic fitting covers. Secure fitting covers with
pressure sensitive tape at each end. Overlap tape at least 2" on itself. For pipes
operating below 60°F seal fitting covers with vapor retarder mastic in addition to
tape.
B. Type B Insulation:
1. Install per manufacturer's instructions or ASTM C1710.
2. Elastomeric Cellular Foam: Where possible, slip insulation over the open end of
pipe without slitting. Seal all butt ends, longitudinal seams, and fittings with
adhesive. At elbows and tees, use mitered connections. Do not compress or
crush insulation at cemented joints. Joints shall be sealed completely and not
pucker or wrinkle. Paint the outside of outdoor insulation with two coats of latex
enamel paint recommended by the manufacturer.
3. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
a. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
b. Insulation must be installed in compression to allow for expansion and
contraction. Insulation shall be pushed onto the pipe, never pulled.
Stretching of insulation may result in open seams and joints.
4. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
a. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available.
b. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe
insulation to valve body.
c. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation
without disturbing insulation.
635
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 07 19 - 6 PLUMBING PIPING
INSULATION
3.5 JACKET COVER INSTALLATION
A. Metal Covering:
1. Provide vapor barrier as specified for insulation type. Cover with aluminum jacket
covering with seams located on the bottom of horizontal piping. Include fittings,
joints and valves.
2. Seal all interior and exterior butt joints with metal draw bands and sealant. Seal
all exterior joints watertight.
3. Interior joints do not need to be sealed.
4. Use metal covering on the following pipes:
a. All exterior piping.
b. Cover insulation with aluminum jacketing.
END OF SECTION 22 07 19
636
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 09 00 - 1 INSTRUMENTATION
SECTION 22 09 00
INSTRUMENTATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pressure Gauge.
B. Pressure Gauge Accessories.
C. Thermometers.
D. Test Plugs.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/AWWA C700 - Cold Water Meters - Displacement Type, Bronze Main Case.
B. ANSI/AWWA C701 - Cold Water Meters - Turbine Type, for Customer Service.
C. ANSI/AWWA C702 - Cold Water Meters - Compound Type.
D. ANSI/AWWA C706 - Direct Reading, Remote Registration Systems for Cold Water
Meters.
E. ASME B40.1 - Gauges - Pressure Indicating Dial Type - Elastic Element.
F. ASME MFC-3M - Measurement of Fluid Flow in Pipes Using Orifice, Nozzle and
Venturi.
G. ASTM E1 - Specification for ASTM Thermometers.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings per Section 22 05 00. Include list that indicates use, operating
range, total range and location for manufactured components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 PRESSURE GAUGES
A. Gauges shall be 4-1/2" diameter with aluminum or stainless steel case with phosphor
bronze bourdon tube, brass socket for water or oil application, 1/4" or 1/2" bottom
connection. Gauges shall be 1% full scale accurate with bronze bushed brass
movement and adjustable pointer. Standard ranges to be either pressure or pressure
and vacuum as required of application.
637
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 09 00 - 2 INSTRUMENTATION
1. Manufacturers:
a. Trerice
b. Weiss
c. Weksler
B. Select gauge range for normal reading near center of gauge.
2.2 PRESSURE GAUGE ACCESSORIES
A. All pressure gauges shall have valves and pressure snubbers. All pressure gauges on
steam shall have pigtail syphon.
B. Shutoff Valve: 1/4" ball valve as specified for each piping system.
2.3 THERMOMETERS
A. Dial Type:
1. 4-1/2" diameter, hermetically sealed case. Stainless steel case and stem.
Accuracy of 1% full scale with external recalibrator.
2. Select thermometers for appropriate temperature range. Adjustable elbow joint
with locking device to allow rotation of thermometer to any angle.
3. Stem lengths as required for application with minimum insertion of 2-1/2".
4. Thermometers for water shall have brass or steel separable socket.
Thermometer wells shall be stainless steel, pressure rated to match piping
system design pressure; with 2-inch extension for insulated piping and threaded
cap nut with chain permanently fastened to well and cap.
5. Manufacturer:
a. Trerice
b. Weiss
c. Weksler
B. Select scales to cover expected range of temperatures.
2.4 TEST PLUGS
A. Test Plug: 1/4" or 1/2" brass fitting and cap, with Nordel core for temperatures up to
275°F , for receiving 1/8" outside diameter pressure or temperature probe. Plugs shall
be rated for zero leakage from vacuum to 500 psi.
B. Provide extended units for all plugs installed in insulated piping.
C. Test Kit: Carrying case, internally padded and fitted containing one 3-1/2" diameter
pressure gauge with 0-100 psi range, one gauge adapter with 1/8" probes, two 1-1/2"
dial thermometers with 0° to 220°F and -25°F to 125°F ranges and 5" stems.
D. Manufacturers:
1. Peterson Equipment
2. Trerice
638
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 09 00 - 3 INSTRUMENTATION
3. Watts Regulator.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:
1. Install per manufacturer's instructions.
2. Coil and conceal excess capillary on remote element instruments.
3. Install gauges and thermometers in locations where they are easily read from
normal operating level.
4. Do not install instrumentation when areas are under construction, except for
required rough-in, taps, supports and test plugs.
B. Pressure Gauges:
1. Connect pressure gauges to suction and discharge side of all pumps.
2. Provide snubber for each pressure gauge.
3. Provide coil syphon for each pressure gauge connected to steam piping.
C. Thermometers:
1. Install piping system thermometers in sockets with short couplings. Enlarge pipes
smaller than 2-1/2" for installation of thermometer sockets.
2. Install thermometer sockets adjacent to control system thermostat, transmitter
and sensor sockets.
END OF SECTION 22 09 00
639
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 00 - 1 PLUMBING PIPING
SECTION 22 10 00
PLUMBING PIPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Pipe and Pipe Fittings.
B. Valves.
C. Check Valves.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Valves: Manufacturer's name and pressure rating marked on valve body.
Remanufactured valves are not acceptable.
B. Welding Materials and Procedures: Conform to ASME Code and applicable state labor
regulations.
C. Welders Certification: In accordance with ANSI/ASME Sec 9 or ANSI/AWS D1.1.
D. Piping, Fittings, Valves, and Flux for Potable Water Systems: All components shall be
lead free per Federal Act S.3874, Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act.
E. Pipe hangers and supports shall be spaced per 2019 CPC, Table 313.3, as applied to
each pipe system listed. Refer to Section 22 05 29 for hanger and support
components. Seismic supports shall be submitted as a deferred approval using OPM
guidelines. Shop drawings shall be submitted for review to the AHJ: State, local or
agency reviewing the project. Upon approval, these shop drawings shall be included in
the record set.
F. Potable water piping and fittings shall comply with California Assembly Bill AB1953
limiting lead content. Also described in 2019 CPC: 604.2 Lead Content.
G. Valves for potable water systems shall comply with California Assembly Bill AB1953
limiting lead content. Also described in 2019 CPC: 604.2 Lead Content.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME A112.3.1 - Stainless Steel Drainage Systems for Sanitary DWV, Storm,
and Vacuum Applications, Above and Below Ground.
B. ASME A112.6.9 - Siphonic Drain Test; The American Society of Mechanical
Engineers.
C. ANSI/ASME B16.22 - Wrought Copper and Bronze Solder-Joint Pressure Fittings.
640
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 00 - 2 PLUMBING PIPING
D. ANSI/ASME B16.23 - Cast Copper Alloy Solder Joint Drainage Fittings - DWV.
E. ANSI/ASME B16.29 - Wrought Copper and Wrought Copper Alloy Solder Joint
Drainage Fittings - DWV.
F. ANSI/ASME B16.3 - Malleable Iron Threaded Fittings Class 150 NS 300.
G. ANSI/ASME B16.5 - Pipe Flanges and Flanged Fittings.
H. ANSI/ASME B16.9 - Factory-Made Wrought Steel Butt Welding Fittings.
I. ANSI/ASME B31.3 - Chemical Plant and Petroleum Refinery Piping.
J. ANSI/ASME Sec 9 - Welding and Brazing Qualifications.
K. ANSI/ASTM B32 - Solder Metal.
L. ANSI/AWS D1.1 - Structural Welding Code.
M. ANSI/AWWA C110 - Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Fittings 3" through 48", for Water and
Other Liquids.
N. ANSI/AWWA C111 - Rubber-Gasket Joints for Ductile Iron and Gray Iron Pressure
Pipe and Fittings.
O. ANSI/AWWA C151 - Ductile Iron Pipe, Centrifugally Cast in Metal Molds or Sand-
Lined Molds, for Water or Other Liquids.
P. ANSI/AWWA C153 - Compact Ductile Iron Fittings 3" through 48", for Water and Other
Liquids.
Q. ASSE 1003 - Water Pressure Reducing Valves for Domestic Water Supply Systems.
R. ASTM A53 - Pipe, Steel, Black and Hot-Dipped Zinc Coated, Welded and Seamless.
S. ASTM A74 - Hub and Spigot Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
T. ASTM A234 - Pipe Fittings of Wrought Carbon Steel and Alloy Steel for Moderate and
Elevated Temperatures.
U. ASTM A312 - Standard for Seamless, Welded, and Heavily Cold Worked Austenitic
Stainless Steel Pipes.
V. ASTM A888 - Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
W. ASTM B88 - Seamless Copper Water Tube.
X. ASTM B306 - Copper Drainage Tube (DWV).
Y. ASTM C564 - Rubber Gaskets for Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
Z. ASTM C1540 - Shielded Couplings Joining Hubless Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings.
641
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 00 - 3 PLUMBING PIPING
AA. ASTM D2321 - Standard Practice for Underground Installation of Thermoplastic Pipe
for Sewers and Other Gravity-Flow Applications.
BB. ASTM F402 - Standard Practice for Safe Handling of Solvent Cements, Primers, and
Cleaners Used for Joining Thermoplastic Pipe and Fittings.
CC. AWS A5.8 - Brazed Filler Metal.
DD. AWWA C651 - Disinfecting Water Mains.
EE. CISPI 301 - Cast Iron Soil Pipe and Fittings for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.
FF. CISPI 310 - Joints for Hubless Cast Iron Sanitary Systems.
GG. FM 1680 - Couplings Used in Hubless Cast Iron Systems.
HH. NFPA 24 - Private Fire Service Mains and Their Appurtenances.
II. NFPA 54 - National Fuel Gas Code.
JJ. NFPA 58 - Storage and Handling of Liquefied Petroleum Gases.
KK. NSF - National Sanitation Foundation
LL. CCR - California Code of Regulation
MM. CBC - California Building Code
NN. CPC - California Plumbing Code
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings per Section 22 05 00.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver and store valves in shipping containers with labeling in place.
1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Reference Coordination Drawings article in Section 22 05 00 for required plumbing
systems electronic CAD drawings to be provided to Coordinating Contractor for
inclusion into composite coordination drawings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CAST IRON PIPE
A. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; Hub and Spigot Joints:
1. Pipe: Standard weight hub and spigot cast iron soil pipe, corrosion protective
coating inside and outside, CISPI 301 or ASTM A888.
2. Design Pressure: Gravity Maximum Design Temperature: 180°F
642
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 00 - 4 PLUMBING PIPING
3. Joints: Compression gasket, ASTM C564.
4. Restraints: Install pipe and fittings per the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute's
Designation 301. Restrain pipe and fittings using an engineered and tested
product manufactured for restraining no-hub cast iron soil pipe. Install per
manufacturer's recommendations.
5. Adapters: Heavy duty no-hub transition for joining cast iron and PVC pipe.
Adapters shall be tested and certified to ASTM C 1460 and be constructed with
Type 304 stainless steel shield, thickness 0.015" shield, gasket material to meet
ASTM C564, 1-1/2" to 4" will be 3" wide with four 304 stainless steel bands, and
6" to 10" will be 4" wide with six 304 stainless steel bands and 3/8" 305 stainless
steel hex head screws torqued to 80 inch pounds.
B. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; No-Hub Sleeve Gaskets:
1. Pipe: Standard weight no-hub cast iron soil pipe, corrosion protective coating
inside and outside, CISPI 301 or ASTM A888.
2. Design Pressure: Gravity Maximum Design Temperature: 180°F
3. Joints: Heavy duty, neoprene sleeve gasket, ASTM C-564, 300 Series stainless
steel shield, clamp, and screws with at least four screw type clamps, FM 1680 or
ASTM C1540.
4. Restraints: Install pipe and fittings per the Cast Iron Soil Pipe Institute's
Designation 310. Restrain pipe and fittings using an engineered and tested
product manufactured for restraining no-hub cast iron soil pipe. Install per
manufacturer's recommendations.
5. Adapters: Transitions from cast iron soil pipe to other pipe materials with
manufactured adapters. Heavy duty neoprene sleeve gasket, ASTM C-564, 300
Series stainless steel shield, clamp, and screws with not less than four screw
type clamps, FM 1680 or ASTM C1540.
2.2 COPPER PIPE
A. Copper Pipe; Type L; Solder Joints:
1. Pipe: Type L hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B88.
2. Design Pressure: 175 psi; Maximum Design Temperature: 200°F.
3. Joints: Solder with 100% lead-free solder and flux, ASTM B32.
4. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22.
B. Copper Pipe; Type L; Mechanical Press Connection:
1. Pipe: Type L hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B88.
2. Design Pressure: 175 psi; Maximum Design Temperature: 200°F.
3. Joints: Mechanical press connection.
4. Fittings: Copper, ANSI B-16.22, with embedded EPDM O-ring, NSF-61.
5. Manufacturers:
a. Viega ProPress
b. Nibco Press System Fittings and Valves
c. Mueller Streamline PRS
643
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 00 - 5 PLUMBING PIPING
C. Copper Pipe; Type K; Solder Joints:
1. Pipe: Type K annealed copper tube, ASTM B88.
2. Design Pressure: 150 psi. Maximum Design Temperature: 200°F.
3. Joints: Solder with 100% lead-free solder and flux ASTM B32.
4. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22.
D. Copper Pipe: Type DWV; Solder Joints:
1. Pipe: Type DWV hard temper seamless copper drainage tube, ASTM B306.
2. Design Pressure: Gravity Maximum Design Temperature: 180°F
3. Joints: Solder with 100% lead-free solder and flux, ASTM B32.
4. Fittings: Cast brass solder joint drainage type, ANSI B16.23 or wrought copper
solder joint drainage type, ANSI B16.29.
E. Copper Pipe: Type M; Solder Joints:
1. Pipe: Type M hard temper seamless copper drainage tube, ASTM B306.
2. Design Pressure: Gravity Maximum Design Temperature: 180°F
3. Joints: Solder with 100% lead-free solder and flux, ASTM B32.
4. Fittings: Cast brass solder joint drainage type, ANSI B16.23 or wrought copper
solder joint drainage type, ANSI B16.29.
2.3 VALVES
A. Shutoff Valves:
1. For pipe systems where mechanical press connections are allowed, shutoff
valves with mechanical press connections are acceptable subject to the
requirements in the paragraphs below.
B. Throttling Valves
1. Globe Valves:
a. GL-1: 2" and under, 150# saturated steam, 300# CWP, screwed, bronze.
Crane #7TF, Stockham #B22T, Walworth #3095, Milwaukee #590,
Hammond #IB413T, Watts #B-4010-T, Nibco T-235Y.
2. Plug Valves:
a. PL-1: 2" and under, 125# steam @ 450°F, 175# CWP @ 180°F, cast iron
body, screwed, full port. Walworth #1700, DeZurik #425, S-RS49.
2.4 STRAINERS
A. For pipe systems where mechanical press connections are allowed, strainers with
mechanical press connections are acceptable subject to the requirements in the
paragraphs below.
644
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 00 - 6 PLUMBING PIPING
B. ST-1: Bronze body, screwed ends, screwed cover, 150 psi S @ 350°F, 200 psi CWP
@ 150°F. Armstrong #F4SC, Metraflex #TS, Mueller Steam Specialty Co. #351, Sarco
#BT, Watts #777.
2.5 CHECK VALVES
A. For pipe systems where mechanical press connections are allowed, check valves with
mechanical press connections are acceptable subject to the requirements in the
paragraphs below.
B. CK-1: 2" and under, 125# steam @ 406°F, 200# CWP @ 150°F, screwed, bronze,
horizontal swing. Crane #37, Hammond #IB904, Stockham #B319-Y, Walworth #3406,
Milwaukee #509, Watts #G-5000, Nibco T-413B.
2.6 VALVE BOX/CURB BOX
A. VB-1: 2" and under, extension type curb box with arch pattern base and sufficient
length to allow top to terminate flush with finished grade. Cast iron lid with integrally
cast brass bushing and marked "water" in integrally cast raised letters. Furnished with
valve operating wrench of sufficient length to extend 3' above finished grade when
engaged with valve. Construction of curb box shall meet all local codes and
requirements. Mueller H-10000 Series, A.Y. McDonald 5600 Series, Tyler Pipe 6500
Series.
2.7 LOCK OUT TRIM
A. Provide lock out trim for all quarter turn shutoff valves opening to atmosphere and
installed in domestic water piping over 120°F and as indicated on the drawings.
2.8 VALVE OPERATORS
A. Provide handwheels for gate valves and gear operators for butterfly valves.
2.9 VALVE CONNECTIONS
A. Provide all connections to match pipe joints. Valves shall be same size as pipe unless
noted otherwise.
2.10 CONNECTIONS BETWEEN DISSIMILAR METALS
A. Connections between dissimilar metals shall be insulating dielectric types that provide
a water gap between the connected metals, and that either allow no metal path for
electron transfer or that provide a wide water gap lined with a non-conductive material
to impede electron transfer through the water path.
B. Joints shall be rated for the temperature, pressure, and other characteristics of the
service in which they are used, including testing procedure.
C. Aluminum, iron, steel, brass, copper, bronze, galvanized steel and stainless steel are
commonly used and require isolation from each other with the following exceptions:
1. Iron and steel connected to each other.
645
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 00 - 7 PLUMBING PIPING
2. Brass, copper, and bronze connected to each other.
3. Brass or bronze valves and specialties connected in closed systems with steel,
iron, or stainless steel on both sides of the brass or bronze valves and
specialties. Where two or more brass or bronze items occur together, they shall
be connected with brass nipples. Brass or bronze valves and specialties cannot
be used as a dielectric separation between pipe materials.
D. Dielectric protection is required at connections to equipment of a material different than
the piping.
E. Screwed Joints (acceptable up to 2" size):
1. Dielectric waterway rated for 300 psi CWP and 225°F.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Victaulic Series 647
b. Grinnell Series 407
F. Flanged Joints (any size):
1. Use 1/8" minimum thickness, non-conductive, full-face gaskets.
2. Employ one-piece molded sleeve-washer combinations to break the electrical
path through the bolts.
3. Sleeve-washers are required on one side only, with sleeves minimum 1/32" thick
and washers minimum 1/8" thick.
4. Install steel washers on both sides of flanges to prevent damage to the sleeve-
washer.
5. Separate sleeves and washers may be used only if the sleeves are
manufactured to exact lengths and installed carefully so the sleeves must extend
partially past each steel washer when tightened.
6. Manufacturers:
a. EPCO
b. Central Plastics
c. Pipeline Seal and Insulator
d. F. H. Maloney
e. Calpico
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install all products per manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Ream pipe and tube ends. Remove burrs. Bevel plain end ferrous pipe.
C. Remove scale and dirt, on inside and outside, before assembly.
D. Remove all scale, rust, dirt, oils, stickers and thoroughly clean exterior of all bare metal
exposed piping, hangers, and accessories in preparation to be painted.
646
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 00 - 8 PLUMBING PIPING
E. Connect to equipment with flanges or unions.
F. Use only piping materials rated for the maximum temperature of the application, e.g.,
do not use PVC for dishwasher drainage or piping that receives boiler blowdown.
G. Roof Penetration (Vent) Flashing:
1. Built-up Roofing: Flash vents with 3# seamless sheet lead of sufficient size to
extend 15" into roofing felts for built-up roofs.
2. Membrane: Flash vents with premolded pipe flashing cones for single-ply
membrane roofs, metal roofs, or shingled roofs.
H. Existing building sewers or building drains which are shown on the documents to be
reused shall be inspected and recorded by closed circuit television for their condition.
Report findings back to the Architect, Engineer, and Owner before proceeding with
work so any necessary rework can take place if needed.
3.2 SYSTEM, PIPING AND VALVE SCHEDULE
A. Cold Water, Hot Water, Tempered Water - Potable and Non-Potable (Above Ground):
1. Copper Pipe; Type L; Solder Joints: All Sizes
2. Copper Pipe; Type L; Mechanical Press Connection: 4" and Under
3. Shutoff Valves:, BA-1
4. Throttling Valves: GL-1
5. Check Valves: CK-1
6. Strainers: ST-1
B. Cold Water, Hot Water, Tempered Water - Potable and Non-Potable (Underground):
1. Copper Pipe; Type K; Solder Joints: All Sizes
C. Combination Water and Fire Protection Service:
1. Copper Pipe; Type K; Solder Joints: 2" and under
2. Shutoff Valves:
3. Valve Box: VB-1
D. Shutoff Valves: BA-1, BA-1ASanitary Waste and Vent, Gravity (Above Ground):
1. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; Hub and Spigot Joints: All Sizes
2. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; No-Hub Sleeve Gaskets: 1-1/2" to 15"
3. Copper Pipe: Type DWV; Solder Joints: 1-1/4" to 4"
E. Sanitary Indirect Drainage (Above Ground):
1. Copper Pipe: Type DWV; Solder Joints: 1-1/4" to 4"
2. Copper Pipe: Type M; Solder Joints: 1-1/4" to 4"
F. Storm Drainage, Gravity (Above Ground):
1. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; No-Hub Sleeve Gaskets: 1-1/2" to 15"
647
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 00 - 9 PLUMBING PIPING
G. Sanitary Waste and Vent, Gravity (Underground - Inside Building):
1. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; Hub and Spigot Joints: All Sizes
2. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; No-Hub Sleeve Gaskets: 1-1/2" to 15"
H. Storm Drainage, Gravity (Underground - Inside Building):
1. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; Hub and Spigot Joints: All Sizes
2. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; No-Hub Sleeve Gaskets: 1-1/2" to 15"
I. Sanitary Waste and Vent, Gravity (Underground - Outside Building):
1. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; Hub and Spigot Joints: All Sizes
J. Storm Drainage, Gravity (Underground - Outside Building):
1. Cast Iron; Standard Weight; Hub and Spigot Joints: All Sizes
3.3 TESTING PIPING
A. Sanitary Drainage:
1. Test all piping with water to prove tight.
2. Test piping before insulation is applied.
3. Hydrostatically test all soil, waste, and vent piping inside of building with 10 feet
head of water for 15 minutes. Inspect before fixtures are connected. If leaks
appear, repair them and repeat the test.
4. Hydrostatically test interior downspouts with 10 feet head of water for 15 minutes
with no leaks.
5. A smoke/air test at the same pressure may be used in lieu of the hydrostatic
water test. Exception: Smoke/air test shall not be performed on plastic piping.
6. Test force mains with water at 105% of the operating pump discharge pressure
for 15 minutes.
7. Test pressures stated above shall be as listed or as required by the Authority
Having Jurisdiction, whichever is most stringent.
8. Test piping per CPC requirements.
B. Hot Water - Potable and Non-Potable, Cold Water - Potable and Non-Potable:
1. Test pipes underground or in chases and walls before piping is concealed.
2. Test all pipes before the insulation is applied. If insulation is applied before the
pipe is tested and a leak develops which ruins the insulation, replace damaged
insulation.
3. Test the pipe with 100 psig water pressure or equal inert gas such as nitrogen.
Exception: Inert gas test shall not be used to test plastic piping.
4. Hold test pressure for at least 2 hours.
5. Test to be witnessed by the Architect/Engineer's representative, if requested by
the Architect/Engineer.
648
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 00 - 10 PLUMBING PIPING
C. Fire Service:
1. Hydrostatically test the entire system for two hours at 200 psig. Maximum
leakage shall be:
a. Interior Piping: 0 quarts per hour.
b. Underground Piping: 2 quarts per 100 joints per hour.
D. All Other Piping:
1. Test piping at 150% of normal operating pressure.
2. Piping shall hold this pressure for one hour with no drop in pressure.
3. Test piping using water, nitrogen, or air as compatible with the final service of the
pipe. Do not use combustible fluids.
4. Drain and clean all piping after testing is complete.
3.4 CLEANING PIPING
A. Assembly:
1. Before assembling pipe systems, remove all loose dirt, scale, oil and other
foreign matter on internal or external surfaces by means consistent with good
piping practice subject to approval of the Architect/Engineer's representative.
Blow chips and burrs from machinery or thread cutting operation out of pipe
before assembly. Wipe cutting oil from internal and external surfaces.
2. During fabrication and assembly, remove slag and weld spatter from both internal
and external joints by peening, chipping and wire brushing.
3. Notify the Architect/Engineer's representative before starting any post erection
cleaning in sufficient time to allow witnessing the operation. Consult with and
obtain approval from the Architect/Engineer's representative regarding specific
procedures and scheduling. Dispose of cleaning and flushing fluids properly.
4. Prior to blowing or flushing erected piping systems, disconnect all
instrumentation and equipment, open wide all valves, and be certain all strainer
screens are in place.
B. Air Blow:
1. Blow out pipe and components with clean compressed air. Instrument air, argon,
nitrogen and sulfuric acid lines shall be blown out with dry, oil free air or nitrogen
gas. "Oil Free" is defined as air compressed in a centrifugal, Teflon ring, carbon
ring or water pumped air compressor. Where air supply is judged to be
inadequate to continually attain cleaning velocity, alternate pressurization and
sudden relief procedure may be used until discharge at all blow out points is
clean. Use 80-90 psig pressure unless otherwise indicated.
2. Air blow applies to the following systems:
a. Acetylene
b. Carbon Dioxide
c. Nitrogen (use oil free air or nitrogen gas)
d. Argon (use oil free air or nitrogen gas)
e. Instrument Air (use oil free air or nitrogen gas)
f. Distilled Water (use maximum of 50 psig pressure)
649
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 00 - 11 PLUMBING PIPING
g. Chemical Feed
h. Air Compressor Intakes
i. Sulfuric Acid (use oil free air or nitrogen gas)
C. All Water Piping:
1. Flush all piping using faucets, flush valves, etc. until the flow is clean.
2. After flushing, thoroughly clean all inlet strainers, aerators, and other such
devices.
3. If necessary, remove valves to clean out all foreign material.
D. Fire Service:
1. Flush all underground piping with minimum flow equal to the system design flow
but not less than the following:
a. 390 gpm for 4" pipes.
b. 880 gpm for 6" pipes.
c. 1560 gpm for 8" pipes.
d. 2440 gpm for 10" pipes.
e. 3500 gpm for 12" pipes.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:
1. Provide dielectric connections between dissimilar metals.
2. Route piping in orderly manner and maintain gradient. Install to conserve building
space.
3. Group piping whenever practical at common elevations.
4. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints,
or equipment.
5. Slope water piping and arrange to drain at low points.
6. Install bell and spigot piping with bells upstream.
7. Where pipe supports are welded to structural building framing, scrape, brush
clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welds.
8. Seal pipes passing through exterior walls with a wall seal per Section 22 05 29.
Provide Schedule 40 galvanized sleeve at least 2 pipe sizes larger than the pipe.
9. All non-potable outlets shall be clearly marked with a permanently affixed
laminated sign with 3/8" high lettering saying "Non-Potable Water Not for Human
Consumption." Sign shall have black lettering on a yellow background.
10. All vertical pipe drops to sinks or other equipment installed below the ceiling shall
be routed within a wall cavity, unless specifically noted otherwise to be surface
mounted. For renovation projects, this Contractor is responsible for opening and
patching existing walls for installation of piping. Wall patching shall match
existing condition.
B. Installation Requirements in Electrical Rooms:
1. Do not install piping or other equipment above electrical switchboards or
panelboards. This includes a dedicated space extending 25 feet from the floor to
the structural ceiling with width and depth equal to the equipment.
650
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 00 - 12 PLUMBING PIPING
C. Valves/Fittings and Accessories:
1. Install shutoff valves that permit the isolation of equipment/fixtures in each room
without isolating any other room or portion of the building. Individual fixture angle
stops do not meet this requirement. Exception: Back-to-back rooms in no more
than two adjacent rooms.
2. Provide clearance for installation of insulation and access to valves and fittings.
3. Provide access doors for concealed valves and fittings.
4. Install valve stems upright or horizontal, not inverted.
5. Provide one plug valve wrench for every ten plug valves 2" and smaller, minimum
of one. Provide each plug valve 2-1/2" and larger with a wrench with set screw.
6. Install corrugated, stainless steel tubing system according to manufacturer's
written instructions. Include striker plates to protect tubing from puncture where
tubing is restrained and cannot move.
D. Underground Piping:
1. Install buried water piping outside the building with at least 5 feet of cover.Refer
to Section 22 05 00 for Excavation, Fill, Backfill and Compaction requirements
2. Direct buried, uninsulated steel pipe shall have a factory applied external
protective coating consisting of two coats with an intermediate layer of 18 mil
fibrous glass mat. Coating thickness shall total not less than 3/32". The outer
coating shall be further protected by a wrapping of heavy Kraft paper. This
external protection shall extend and be exposed for a minimum of 1 foot beyond
the buried or concealed portion of the pipe.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Pipe Line Service Co., Franklin Park, Illinois
2) Lithcote Corp., Melrose Park, Illinois
3. As an option, the Contractor may provide factory applied protective coatings
consisting of a polyethylene plastic film bonded to the pipe surface by a hot
applied thermo-plastic adhesive.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Republic Steel Corp. "X-Tru-Coat"
4. Exercise care in handling, storing and laying pipe to avoid damaging factory
applied coatings. If any damage occurs, repair the coating to a condition equal to
the original.
5. Field application of protective coatings to joints, fittings and to any damaged
factory applied coatings shall be similar to factory applied coatings specified
above and shall be done in strict accordance with recommendations of the
supplier of pipe coatings.
6. After completion of the fabrication, laying and field coating of the joints and
fittings, but prior to backfilling, inspect the entire line in the presence of the
Architect/Engineer's representative with an electronic holiday detector. Any
defects in the protective coatings shall be repaired in accordance with
requirements for original coatings.
7. Coat flange bolts and nuts in pits and below ground at the time of installation with
a corrosion protective coating.
651
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 00 - 13 PLUMBING PIPING
E. Sanitary and Storm Piping:
1. Install all sanitary and storm piping inside the building with a slope as shown on
the drawings.
2. Install horizontal offset at all connections to roof drains to allow for pipe
expansion.
3. Sway Bracing: Where horizontal sanitary and/or storm pipes 4 inches and larger
change flow direction greater than 45°, rigid bracing or thrust restraints shall be
installed to resist movement of the upstream pipe in the direction of pipe flow.
The rigid bracing or thrust restraint shall be connected to structure. A change of
flow direction from horizontal into a vertical pipe does not require the upstream
pipe to be braced.
4. Starter fittings with internal baffles are not permitted.
3.6 PIPE ERECTION AND LAYING
A. Carefully inspect all pipe, fittings, valves, equipment and accessories before
installation. Any items that are unsuitable, cracked or otherwise defective shall be
removed from the job immediately.
B. All pipe, fittings, valves, equipment and accessories shall have factory applied
markings, stampings, or nameplates with sufficient data to determine their
conformance with specified requirements.
C. Exercise care at every stage of storage, handling, laying and erecting to prevent entry
of foreign matter into piping, fittings, valves, equipment and accessories. Do not install
any item that is not clean.
D. Until system is fully operational, all openings in piping and equipment shall be kept
closed except when actual work is being performed on that item or system. Closures
shall be plugs, caps, blind flanges or other items specifically designed and intended for
this purpose.
E. Run pipes straight and true, parallel to building lines with minimum use of offsets and
couplings. Provide only offsets required to provide needed headroom or clearance and
to provide needed flexibility in pipe lines.
F. Make changes in direction of pipes only with fittings or pipe bends. Changes in size
only with fittings. Do not use miter fittings, face or flush bushings, or street elbows. All
fittings shall be of the long radius type, unless otherwise shown on the drawings or
specified.
G. Provide flanges or unions at all final connections to equipment, traps and valves.
H. Arrange piping and connections so equipment served may be totally removed without
disturbing piping beyond final connections and associated shutoff valves.
I. Use full and double lengths of pipe wherever possible.
J. Unless otherwise indicated, install all piping, including shutoff valves and strainers, to
coils, pumps and other equipment at line size with reduction in size being made only at
control valve or equipment.
652
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 00 - 14 PLUMBING PIPING
K. Cut all pipe to exact measurement and install without springing or forcing except in the
case of expansion loops where cold springing is indicated on the drawings.
L. Underground pipe shall be laid in dry trenches maintained free of accumulated water.
Refer to Section 22 05 00 for Excavation, Fill, Backfill and Compaction requirements.
M. Unless otherwise indicated, branch take-offs shall be from top of mains or headers at
either a 45° or 90° angle from the horizontal plane for air lines, and from top, bottom or
side for liquids.
N. Do not use geotextile fabric with footing tile if silt content of soil exceeds 40% or if clay
content exceeds 50%. The fabric shall be installed around 1" river rock or 2" limestone.
3.7 DRAINING AND VENTING
A. Unless otherwise indicated on the drawings, all horizontal water lines, including
branches, shall pitch 1" in 40 feet to low points for complete drainage, removal of
condensate and venting.
B. Maintain accurate grade where pipes pitch or slope for venting and drainage. No pipes
shall have pockets due to changes in elevation.
C. Provide drain valves at all low points of water piping systems for complete or
sectionalized draining.
D. Use eccentric reducing fittings on horizontal runs when changing size of pipes for
proper drainage and venting. Install gravity drain pipes with bottom of pipe and
eccentric reducers in a continuous line; all other liquid lines with top of pipe and
eccentric reducers in a continuous line.
E. Provide air vents at high points and wherever else required to eliminate air in all water
piping systems.
F. Install air vents in accessible locations. If necessary to trap and vent air in a remote
location, install an 1/8" pipe from the tapping location to an accessible location and
terminate with a venting device.
G. All vent and drain piping shall be of same materials and construction for the service
involved.
3.8 PLUMBING VENTS
A. Vent as shown on the drawings and in accordance with all codes having jurisdiction.
B. Extend the high side of the soil and waste stacks at least 12" above roof.
C. Flash pipes at the roof with 3# lead sheet. Extend flashing under roofing 15" in all
directions from pipe to be flashed. Extend a lead collar up on the outside of pipe to be
flashed and extend 1" beyond the top of the pipe. The 1" excess length of collar shall
be turned down into the top of the pipe where it shall fit tight to the inside of the pipe.
653
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 00 - 15 PLUMBING PIPING
D. Flash pipes at roof with premolded EPDM pipe flashing cones adhered to roof
membrane by General Contractor. Secure top of cone with stainless steel clamp and
seal watertight.
E. Increase vent pipes through the roof two pipe sizes with long increasers located at
least 12" below the roof.
F. In no case shall the vent through the roof be less than 4" in diameter.
G. Vent pipes through the roof shall be located a minimum of 10 feet from any air intake
opening on the roof.
3.9 BRANCH CONNECTIONS
A. For domestic water and vent systems only, make branch connections with standard
tee or cross fittings of the type required for the service.
B. Reducers are generally not shown. Where pipe sizes change at tee, the tee shall be
the size of the largest pipe shown connecting to it.
C. Do not use double wye or double combination wye and eighth bend DWV fittings in
horizontal piping.
D. Branch connections from the headers and mains may be mechanically formed using
an extraction device. The branch piping connection shall be brazed connection for the
following services only:
1. Domestic water piping above ground.
E. Further limit use of mechanically formed fittings as follows:
1. Must have at least same pressure rating as the main.
2. Main must be Type K or L copper tubing.
3. Permanent marking shall indicate insertion depth and orientation.
4. Branch pipe shall conform to the inner curve of the piping main.
5. Main must be 1" or larger.
6. Branch must be 3/4" or larger.
F. Branch connections from headers and mains may be cut into black steel pipe using
forged weld-on fittings.
G. Forged weld-on fittings are limited as follows:
1. Must have at least same pressure rating as the main.
2. Main must be 2-1/2" or larger.
3. Branch line is at least two pipe sizes under main size.
654
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 00 - 16 PLUMBING PIPING
3.10 JOINING OF PIPE
A. Solder Joints (Copper Pipe):
1. Make up joints with 100% lead-free solder, ASTM B32. Cut tubing so ends are
perfectly square and remove all burrs inside and outside. Thoroughly clean
sockets of fittings and ends of tubing to remove all oxide, dirt and grease just
prior to soldering. Apply flux evenly, but sparingly, over all surfaces to be joined.
Heat joints uniformly so solder will flow to all mated surfaces. Wipe excess
solder, leaving a uniform fillet around cup of fitting.
2. Flux shall be non-acid type.
3. Solder end valves may be installed directly in the piping system if the entire valve
is suitable for use with 470°F melting point solder. Remove discs and seals
during soldering if they are not suitable for 470°F.
B. Mechanical Press Connection (Copper and Stainless Steel Pipe):
1. Copper press fitting shall be made in accordance with the manufacturer's
installation instructions.
2. Fully insert tubing into the fitting and mark tubing.
3. Prior to making connection, the fitting alignment shall be checked against the
mark made on the tube to ensure the tubing is fully engaged in the fitting.
4. Joint shall be pressed with a tool approved by the manufacturer.
5. Installers shall be trained by manufacturer personnel or representative. Provide
documentation upon request.
C. Hub and Spigot Joints - Sanitary Pipe and Storm Pipe (Cast Iron and Stainless Steel
Pipe):
1. Lead and Oakum Joints: Pack joint with oakum made of vegetable fiber, cotton,
or hemp. Pour joint with molten lead up to top of hub. Ensure leak-free joints by
working joint with inside and outside caulking irons.
2. Compression Gasket Joints: Joint shall be one-piece double seal compression
type gasket made specifically for joining cast iron soil pipe. Gasket shall be
neoprene, permitting joint to flex as much as 5 degrees without loss of seal.
Gasket shall be extra heavy weight class, conforming to ASTM C-564.
D. No-Hub Sleeve Gaskets (No-Hub) (Cast Iron Pipe):
1. Gasket shall be heavy weight class, conforming to ASTM C564.
2. The gasket shall have an internal center stop.
3. The gasket shall be covered by a stainless steel band secured with a minimum of
four stainless steel bands per fitting/joint.
4. Sleeve gaskets shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's
installation instructions.
655
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 00 - 17 PLUMBING PIPING
3.11 DISINFECTION OF DOMESTIC WATER PIPING SYSTEM
A. Disinfection of the domestic water piping shall be completed within three (3) weeks
prior to building occupancy. Contractor is responsible for disinfecting water piping if
used by workers during construction; disinfection during construction does not
eliminate the requirement for final disinfection prior to occupancy. Flushing of piping
shall be completed within two (2) weeks prior to building occupancy.
B. Provide necessary connections at the start of individual sections of mains for adding
chlorine.
C. Before starting work, verify system is complete, flushed and clean.
D. Ensure pH of water to be treated is between 7.4 and 7.6 by adding alkali (caustic soda
or soda ash) or acid (hydrochloric).
E. Inject disinfectant, free chlorine in liquid, powder, tablet or gas form, throughout system
to obtain 50 to 80 mg/L residual.
F. Bleed water from all outlets to ensure chlorine distribution throughout the entire
domestic water system.
G. Verify initial chlorination levels by testing at minimum 15% of outlets located
throughout entire building, including the last fixture connected to each main and each
branch extending over 50 feet from a main.
H. Maintain disinfectant in system for 24 hours, after which test at minimum 15% of
outlets located throughout entire building, including the last fixture connected to each
main and each branch extending over 50 feet from a main. If final disinfectant residual
tests less than 25 mg/L at any one of the tested outlets, flush the entire system and
repeat disinfection and testing procedure.
I. After final disinfectant residuals test at or above 25 mg/L after a minimum 24-hour
duration, flush disinfectant from system at a minimum velocity of 3.0 feet/second until
residual is equal to that of incoming water or 1.0 mg/L.
J. Take water samples, no sooner than 24 hours after flushing, from 2% of outlets and
from water entry. Obtain, analyze, and test samples in accordance with AWWA C651,
Section 5 - Verification.
K. Disinfection shall comply with CPC - 609.9: Disinfection of Potable Water Systems.
END OF SECTION 22 10 00
656
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 30 - 1 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
SECTION 22 10 30 - PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cleanouts.
B. Traps.
C. Trap Seals and Primers.
D. Floor Drains and Sinks
E. Hub Drains and Standpipes
F. Roof Drains.
G. Backflow Preventers.
H. Strainers.
I. Unions.
J. Water Hammer Arresters.
K. Dielectric Fittings (Connections Between Dissimilar Metals).
L. Air Vents.
M. Drain Valves.
N. Relief Valves.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: For each product specified, provide components by same manufacturer
throughout.
B. Perform work in accordance with State of California Plumbing Codes and municipality
of local area standards.
C. Piping, Fittings, Valves, and Flux for Potable Water Systems: All components shall be
lead free per Federal Act S.3874, Reduction of Lead in Drinking Water Act.
D. Valves for potable water systems shall comply with California Assembly Bill AB1953
limiting lead content. Also described in 2019 CPC: 604.2 Lead Content.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A112.21.1 - Floor Drains.
657
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 30 - 2 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
B. ANSI A112.21.2 - Roof Drains.
C. ASSE 1010 - Water Hammer Arresters.
D. ANSI A112.6.4 - RoofDrains; The American Society of Mechanical Engineers.
E. PDI WH-201 - Water Hammer Arresters.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Include sizes, rough-in requirements, service sizes, and finishes.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CLEANOUTS
A. Provide cleanouts as shown and specified on the drawings as well as required by
code.
B. Coordinate floor cleanout cover with surrounding floor finish. Provide solid, recessed
for tile as applicable.
C. Cleanouts on exposed pipes shall be cast iron with heavy duty cast brass plug with
raised head.
D. Cleanout shall be same size as the pipe up to 6" and 6" for larger pipes.
2.2 TRAPS
A. Provide all individual connections to the sanitary system with P-traps, except where
such drains discharge directly into a properly trapped collection basin or sump. Unless
otherwise specified or shown, traps shall be:
1. Chromium plated cast brass when used with plumbing fixtures or when installed
exposed in finished spaces.
2. Insulated at accessible lavatories.
3. Cast iron, deep-seal pattern where concealed above ceiling, below grade or in
unfinished areas.
4. Deep-seal pattern of the same material and/or coating where drainage lines are
of special materials or coatings such as polypropylene, PVDF, CPVC, etc.
B. All traps shall have accessible, removable cleanouts, except where installed on floor
drains with removable strainers.
C. Each trap shall be completely filled with water at the end of construction but before
building turnover to the Owner. All floor drains, floor sinks, etc. shall be filled with water
and a 1/2" minimum layer of mineral oil.
2.3 TRAP SEALS AND PRIMERS
A. Provide trap seals as specified on the drawings.
658
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 30 - 3 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
B. Provide trap primers as shown and specified on the drawings.
2.4 HUB DRAINS AND STANDPIPES
A. A hub drain shall be in the form of a hub or pipe without a grate/strainer extending
through the floor for receiving indirect waste. A hub drain has a flood level rim above
the finished floor.
B. Provide hub drains as shown and specified on the drawings as well as required by
code.
2.5 ROOF DRAINS
A. Provide roof drains as shown and specified on the drawings as well as required by
code.
2.6 STRAINERS
A. Unless otherwise indicated, strainers shall be Y-pattern and have stainless steel
screens with perforations as follows:
1. Water:
a. 1/4" - 2": 3/64" perforations
B. Furnish pipe nipple with shutoff valve to blow down all strainer screens.
C. Use bronze body strainers in copper piping and iron body strainers in ferrous piping.
2.7 UNIONS
A. Copper pipe - wrought copper fitting - ground joint.
2.8 WATER HAMMER ARRESTERS
A. Provide water hammer arresters as shown and specified on the drawings as well as
required by code.
B. ANSI A112.26.1; sized and located in accordance with PDI WH-201, precharged for
operation between -100°F and 300°F and maximum 250 psig working pressure.
2.9 DIELECTRIC FITTINGS (CONNECTIONS BETWEEN DISSIMILAR METALS)
A. Connections between dissimilar metals shall be insulating dielectric types that provide
a water gap between the connected metals, and that either allow no metal path for
electron transfer or that provide a wide water gap lined with a non-conductive material
to impede electron transfer through the water path.
B. Joints shall be rated for the temperature, pressure, and other characteristics of the
service in which they are used, including testing procedure.
659
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 30 - 4 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
C. Aluminum, iron, steel, brass, copper, bronze, and stainless steel are commonly used
and require isolation from each other with the following exceptions:
1. Iron, steel, and stainless steel connected to each other.
2. Brass, copper, and bronze connected to each other.
3. Brass or bronze valves and specialties connected in closed systems with steel,
iron, or stainless steel on both sides of the brass or bronze valves and
specialties. Where two or more brass or bronze items occur together, they shall
be connected with brass nipples. Brass or bronze valves and specialties cannot
be used as a dielectric separation between pipe materials.
D. Dielectric protection is required at connections to equipment of a material different than
the piping.
E. Screwed Joints (acceptable up to 2" size):
1. Dielectric waterway rated for 300 psi CWP and 225°F.
2. Acceptable Manufacturers: Elster Group ClearFlow fittings, Victaulic Series 47,
Grinnell Series 407, Matco-Norca.
F. Flanged Joints (any size):
1. Use 1/8" minimum thickness, non-conductive, full-face gaskets.
2. Employ one-piece molded sleeve-washer combinations to break the electrical
path through the bolts.
3. Sleeve-washers are required on one side only, with sleeves minimum 1/32" thick
and washers minimum 1/8" thick.
4. Install steel washers on both sides of flanges to prevent damage to the sleeve-
washer.
5. Separate sleeves and washers may be used only if the sleeves are
manufactured to exact lengths and installed carefully so the sleeves must extend
partially past each steel washer when tightened.
6. Acceptable Manufacturers: EPCO, Central Plastics, Pipeline Seal and Insulator,
F. H. Maloney, or Calpico.
2.10 AIR VENTS
A. Provide means for venting air at all high points in the piping system and at all other
points where air may be trapped.
B. At end of main and other points where large volume of air may be trapped - Use 1/4"
globe valve, angle type, 125 psi, Crane #89, attached to coupling in top of main, 1/4"
discharge pipe turned down with cap.
2.11 DRAIN VALVES
A. Drain valves shall be shutoff valves as specified for the intended service with added
3/4" male hose thread outlet and cap.
660
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 30 - 5 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION AND APPLICATION
A. Coordinate construction to receive drains at required invert elevations.
B. Install all items per manufacturer's instructions.
C. Water Hammer Arresters:
1. Install water hammer arresters in accessible locations. Provide access doors as
required. Coordinate type with Architect/Engineer/Owner.
2. Water hammer arrestors shall be installed in cold and hot water lines upstream of
all plumbing fixtures or equipment, with a quick acting valve or multiple quick
acting valves. Quick acting valves shall be defined as solenoid actuated valves,
manual flush valves, sensor activated faucets and flush valves, squeeze handle
spray faucets, and other similar type valves.
3. Install multiple water hammer arrestors in toilet group branch piping greater than
20 feet in developed length from the cold and hot water mains.
D. Cleanouts:
1. Provide cleanouts where shown on the drawings and as required by code, but in
no case farther apart than 50 feet in pipe less than 6" size and 100 feet apart in
6" and larger pipes inside the building. Provide cleanouts at bases of all sanitary
and storm risers as shown on the drawings and as required by code.
2. Extend cleanouts to the floor with long sweep elbows.
3. Install a full size, two-way cleanout within 5 feet of the foundation inside or
outside of building.
4. Extend cleanouts to finished floor or wall surface. Lubricate threaded cleanout
plugs with graphite and linseed oil. Ensure clearance at cleanouts for rodding of
drainage system.
5. Wall cleanouts shall be installed above the flow line of the pipe they serve, but no
less than 12" above the finished floor.
E. Yard Cleanouts:
1. Install cleanouts on maximum 90 foot centers (including riser) for pipes 8" and
smaller.
2. Extend cleanout to grade. Encase cleanout in 5" thick concrete pad extending 6"
beyond cleanout, set low enough not to interfere with lawn mowers.
F. Trap Seals and Primers:
1. Install trap primer on drains not receiving continuous discharge and subject to
drying out.
2. Connect trap primer to an active water line 1-1/2" in size or less and which will
produce a 3 PSI pressure drop upon fixture operation downstream of the trap
primer.
661
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 10 30 - 6 PLUMBING SPECIALTIES
G. Hub Drains and Standpipes:
1. The top of a hub drain/standpipe shall extend above the finished floor elevation.
Refer to drawings for dimensions above the finished floor.
2. Access shall be provided to drains and standpipes for rodding.
H. Roof Drains:
1. Roof drains shall have bearing pans.
2. Provide auxiliary support steel under drains as required to prevent movement of
the drain.
3. All roof drains shall have underdeck clamps.
4. Drains in built-up roofing systems shall have a 36" x 36", 3 lb density lead sheet
flashing.
END OF SECTION 22 10 30
662
MOORPARK CITY HALL 02/03/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 30 00 - 1 Plumbing Equipment
SECTION 22 30 00
PLUMBING EQUIPMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Water Heaters.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Products and installation of specified products shall conform to recommendations and
requirements of the following organizations:
1. American Gas Association (AGA).
2. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF).
3. American Society of Mechanical Engineers (ASME).
4. National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel Inspectors (NBBPVI).
5. National Electrical Manufacturers' Association (NEMA).
6. Underwriters' Laboratories (UL).
B. Perform work in accordance with State of California Plumbing Codes and municipality
of local area standards.
C. Water Heater Performance Requirements: Equipment efficiency not less than
prescribed by ASHRAE 90.1 when tested in accordance with DOE 10 CFR, ANSI
Z21.10.1 and ANSI Z21.10.3.
D. Conform to ASME Section VIII for construction of water heaters and heat exchangers.
Provide boilers registered with the National Board of Boiler and Pressure Vessel
Inspectors.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for
Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
B. ANSI/ASME Section 8D - Pressure Vessels.
C. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
D. ANSI/UL 1453 - Electric Booster and Commercial Storage Tank Water Heaters.
E. ASSE 1005 - Water Heater Drain Valves, 3/4" Iron Pipe Size.
F. UL 174 - Household Electric Storage Tank Water Heaters.
663
MOORPARK CITY HALL 02/03/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 30 00 - 2 Plumbing Equipment
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 22 05 00.
B. Include dimension drawings of water heaters indicating components and connections
to other equipment and piping.
C. Include heat exchanger dimensions, size of tappings, and performance data.
D. Include dimensions of tanks, tank lining methods, anchors, attachments, lifting points,
tappings, and drains.
E. For equipment connected to an electric power source, submit short circuit rating
(SCCR) of integrated unit.
F. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions including control and electrical
power/controls wiring diagrams.
G. Submit manufacturer's certificate that pressure vessels meet or exceed specified
requirements.
H. Submit operation, maintenance, and inspection data, replacement part numbers and
availability, and service depot location and telephone number.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Provide temporary inlet and outlet caps. Maintain caps in place until installation.
1.6 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Water heaters shall conform to AGA, ANSI/NFPA 54, ANSI/NFPA 70, ANSI/UL 1453
as applicable.
B. Conform to ANSI/ASME Section 8 Division 1 for fabrication of steel pressure vessels.
C. Conform to ANSI/ASME Section 10 for manufacture of fiber-reinforced plastic pressure
vessels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 WATER HEATERS
A. All water heaters shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all items in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
664
MOORPARK CITY HALL 02/03/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 30 00 - 3 Plumbing Equipment
3.2 WATER HEATER INSTALLATION
A. Install water heaters on concrete bases. Coordinate sizes and locations of concrete
bases. Refer to Section 22 05 29.
B. Install water heaters level and plumb, according to drawings, manufacturer's
instructions, and referenced standards. Maintain manufacturer's recommended
clearances. Arrange units so controls and devices needing service are accessible.
C. Install combination temperature and pressure relief valves in top portion of storage
tanks. Use relief valves with sensing elements that extend into tanks. Extend drain
piping full size from relief valve and discharge by positive air gap onto closest floor
drain. Discharge pipe material shall be same as domestic water piping.
END OF SECTION
665
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 40 00 - 1 PLUMBING FIXTURES
SECTION 22 40 00
PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. All plumbing fixtures.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI A112.6.1M - Supports for Off-the-Floor Plumbing Fixtures for Public Use.
B. ANSI A112.18.1 - Finished and Rough Brass Plumbing Fixture Fittings.
C. ANSI A112.19.1M - Enameled Cast Iron Plumbing Fixtures.
D. ANSI A112.19.2M - Vitreous China Plumbing Fixtures.
E. ANSI A112.19.3 - Stainless Steel Plumbing Fixtures (Designed for Residential Use).
F. ASME A112.19.4 - Porcelain Enameled Formed Steel Plumbing Fixtures.
G. ANSI A112.19.5 - Trim for Water-Closet Bowls, Tanks, and Urinals.
H. AHRI 1010 - Drinking Fountains and Self-Contained Mechanically Refrigerated
Drinking Water Coolers.
I. ASSE 1002 - Water Closet Flush Tank Ball Cocks.
J. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA), Title III.
K. The Energy Policy Act (EPAct) of 2005.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 22 05 00. Submittals shall include
fixture carriers for record purposes only. Architect/Engineer does not review or
approve carriers except for manufacturer.
B. Include fixtures, sizes, rough-in dimensions, utility sizes, trim, and finishes.
C. For fixtures and trim requiring electrical connections, submit product data indicating
general assembly, components, electrical power/controls wiring diagrams, and service
connections.
666
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 40 00 - 2 PLUMBING FIXTURES
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Wall Hung Fixture Carriers:
1. Material: All Metal, ASME/ANSI A112.6.1M.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Zurn
b. Smith
c. Josam
d. Watts
e. Mifab.
3. Water closet carrier shall be rated to support 500 lbs. unless noted otherwise on
the drawings.
B. All fixtures shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
C. All china shall be from the same manufacturer where possible.
D. All lavatory and sink trim shall be from the same manufacturer where possible.
E. All fixtures shall be lead free. Faucets, traps, stops, and other fixture accessories shall
not contain more lead than allowed per the latest State or Federal Act.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:
1. Review millwork shop drawings. Confirm location and size of fixtures and
openings before rough-in and installation.
2. Install each fixture with trap easily removable for servicing and cleaning. Use
screwed tailpiece couplings. Connect fixture waste to stack with slip fitting.
3. Provide fixtures with chrome plated rigid or flexible supplies, loose key stops,
reducers, and escutcheons.
4. Install components level and plumb.
5. Caulk joint between finish floor and floor mounted fixtures and between finish
walls and wall mounted fixtures with silicon caulk. Caulk the joint, between rim
and fixture where a fixture builds into a counter top, with caulking compound.
Refer to DIVISION 7 for "Caulking" requirements. Color to match fixture.
6. Where there is a possibility of water following pipe brackets, etc., into a wall;
caulk escutcheons, space around brackets, etc., to exclude water. Refer to
DIVISION 7 for "Caulking" requirements.
7. Refer to architectural drawings for fixture mounting heights.
8. All non-potable outlets shall be clearly marked with a permanently affixed
laminated sign with 3/8" high lettering saying "Non-Potable Water Not for Human
Consumption." Sign shall have black lettering on a yellow background.
667
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 40 00 - 3 PLUMBING FIXTURES
B. Wall-Mounted Fixture Requirements:
1. All wall-mounted fixtures shall have compatible carriers designed for their
intended service and suitable for the space available and configuration of
fixtures. All carriers shall extend to the floor and be anchored to the slab.
C. Floor-Mounted Fixture Requirements:
1. Where floor mounted fixtures are installed on a sloped floor, the open void below
the fixture shall be grouted, leveled, and caulked to eliminate stress on the fixture
and to prevent water migration to the floor below.
D. Exposed or Inside Accessible Cabinets Traps, Valve and Pipe Requirements:
1. All traps exposed under fixtures or inside accessible cabinets shall be chrome
plated brass.
2. All water or waste piping for plumbing fixtures that is exposed or inside cabinets
shall be chrome plated.
3. All exposed flush valves for water closets and urinals shall have a chrome plated
hanger to anchor the piping to the wall.
4. All exposed water supply piping and fittings in a finished space to a shower
valve, hose bibb, or other water outlet shall be chrome plated.
E. ADA Accessible Exposed Sink and Lavatory Trim:
1. All exposed sink and lavatory traps, piping and angle stops installed at
accessible sink and lavatory locations shall include offset style drain tailpiece, p-
trap installed near and parallel with back wall, and insulation kit specially
manufactured for this installation. Armaflex with duct tape is not acceptable.
F. ADA Accessible Water Closet Requirements:
1. Handicapped accessible water closet flush valve handles shall face the center of
the stall.
2. Coordinate flush valves in handicap accessible locations with grab bars installed
by the General Contractor. Make modifications as necessary to flush valve piping
to avoid conflict with grab bars. Common solutions include shortened or offset
vacuum breaker tailpieces.
3.2 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Adjust stops or valves for intended water flow rate to fixtures without splashing, noise,
or overflow.
B. At completion, clean plumbing fixtures, equipment, and faucet aerator screens.
3.3 FIXTURE ROUGH-IN SCHEDULE
A. Rough-in fixture piping connections in accordance with table on plumbing drawings of
minimum sizes for particular fixtures.
668
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
22 40 00 - 4 PLUMBING FIXTURES
END OF SECTION 22 40 00
669
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 1 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 23 05 00
BASIC HVAC REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Requirements applicable to all Division 23 Sections. Also refer to Division 01 - General
Requirements.
B. All materials and installation methods shall conform to the applicable standards,
guidelines and codes referenced herein and within each specification section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. CCR California Code of Regulation
B. CBC California Building Code
C. CFC California Fire Code
D. CEC California Electric Code
E. CMC California Mechanical Code
F. CPC California Plumbing Code
G. California Title 24 - Building Energy Efficiency Standards
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Specification and the associated drawings govern the furnishing, installing, testing
and placing into satisfactory operation the Mechanical Systems.
B. Each Contractor shall provide all new materials indicated on the drawings and/or in
these specifications, and all items required to make the portion of the Mechanical Work
a finished and working system.
C. All work will be awarded under a single General Contract. The division of work listed
below is for the Contractor's convenience and lists normal breakdown of the work.
D. The division of work listed below is for the contractors' convenience and lists a normal
breakdown of the work. Please refer to the Construction Manager's scope statements
for complete scope of work description.
670
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 2 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
E. Scope of Work:
1. Heating Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited to:
a. Furnish and install refrigerant piping, accessories, and final charge of
refrigerant.
b. Furnish and install condensate drain piping from cooling related equipment
such as air handlers and cooling coil drain pans.
c. Furnish and install firestopping systems for penetrations of fire-rated
construction associated with this Contractor's work.
d. Complete all applicable tests, certifications, forms, and matrices.
2. Air Conditioning and Ventilating Work shall include, but is not necessarily limited
to:
a. Furnish and install package rooftop air handling units complete with curbs.
b. Furnish and install air-cooled condensing units and curbs.
c. Furnish and install complete supply air ductwork systems including all
fittings, insulation, and outlets.
d. Furnish and install complete return air ductwork systems including all
fittings, insulation, and inlets.
e. Furnish and install complete exhaust ductwork systems including all fittings,
insulation, inlets, and fans.
f. Furnish and install all temperature control systems.
g. Furnish and install all fire dampers.
h. Complete all applicable tests, certifications, forms, and matrices.
3. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Work shall include, but is not necessarily
limited to:
a. Furnish complete testing, adjusting, and balancing as specified in Section
23 05 93, including, but not limited to, air systems, plumbing systems, and
verification of control systems.
b. Complete all applicable tests, certifications, forms, and matrices.
1.4 DIVISION OF WORK BETWEEN MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL & CONTROL
CONTRACTORS
A. Definitions:
1. "Mechanical Contractors" refers to the following:
a. Plumbing Contractor.
b. Heating Contractor.
c. Air Conditioning and Ventilating Contractor.
d. Temperature Control Contractor.
e. Fire Protection Contractor.
f. Testing, Adjusting, and Balancing Contractor.
671
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 3 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
2. Motor Control Wiring: The wiring associated with the remote operation of the
magnetic coils of magnetic motor starters or relays, or the wiring that permits
direct cycling of motors by means of devices in series with the motor power
wiring. In the latter case the devices are usually single phase and are usually
connected to the motor power wiring through a manual motor starter having
"Manual-Off-Auto" provisions.
3. Control devices such as start-stop push buttons, thermostats, pressure switches,
flow switches, relays, etc., generally represent the types of equipment associated
with motor control wiring.
4. Motor control wiring is single phase and usually 120 volts. In some instances, the
voltage will be the same as the motor power wiring. Generally, where the motor
power wiring exceeds 120 volts, a control transformer is used to give a control
voltage of 120 volts.
5. Temperature Control Wiring: The wiring associated with the operation of a
motorized damper, solenoid valve or motorized valve, etc., either modulating or
two-position, as opposed to wiring which directly powers or controls a motor used
to drive equipment such as fans, pumps, etc.
a. This wiring will be from a 120 volt source and may continue as 120 volt, or
be reduced in voltage (24 volt) in which case a control transformer shall be
furnished as part of the temperature control wiring.
6. Control Motor: An electric device used to operate dampers, valves, etc. It may be
two-position or modulating. Conventional characteristics of such a motor are 24
volts, 60 cycles, 1 phase, although other voltages may be encountered.
7. Voltage is generally specified and scheduled as distribution voltage. Motor
submittals may be based on utilization voltage if it corresponds to the correct
distribution voltage.
Distribution/Nominal Voltage Utilization Voltage
120 115
208 200
240 230
277 265
480 460
General:
8. The purpose of these Specifications is to outline the Electrical and Mechanical
Contractor's responsibilities related to electrical work required for items such as
temperature controls, mechanical equipment, fans, chillers, compressors and the
like. The exact wiring requirements for much of the equipment cannot be
determined until the systems have been selected and submittals reviewed.
Therefore, the electrical drawings show only known wiring related to such items.
All wiring not shown on the electrical drawings, but required for mechanical
systems, is the responsibility of the Mechanical Contractor.
672
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 4 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
9. Where the drawings require the Electrical Contractor to wire between equipment
furnished by the Mechanical Contractor, such wiring shall terminate at terminals
provided in the equipment. The Mechanical Contractor shall provide complete
electrical power/controls wiring diagrams and supervision to the Electrical
Contractor and designate the terminal numbers for correct wiring.
10. All electrical work shall conform to the National Electrical Code. All provisions of
the Electrical Specifications concerning wiring, protection, etc., apply to wiring
provided by the Mechanical Contractor unless noted otherwise.
11. Control low (24V) and control line (120V) voltage wiring, conduit, and related
switches and relays required for the automatic control and/or interlock of motors
and equipment, including final connection, are to be furnished and installed under
Divisions 21, 22 and 23. Materials and installation to conform to Class 1 or 2
requirements, California Electrical Code Article 725.
12. All Contractors shall establish utility elevations prior to fabrication and shall
coordinate their material and equipment with other trades. When a conflict arises,
priority is as follows:
a. Light fixtures.
b. Electrical busduct.
c. Sheet metal.
d. Electrical cable trays, including access space.
e. Sprinkler piping and other piping.
f. Electrical conduits and wireway.
B. Mechanical Contractor's Responsibility:
1. Assumes responsibility for internal wiring of all equipment provided by the
Mechanical Contractor, for example:
a. Split System Units.
b. Packaged Rooftop Units.
2. Assumes all responsibility for the Temperature Control wiring, when the
Temperature Control Contractor is a Subcontractor to the Mechanical Contractor.
3. Shall verify all existing equipment sizes and capacities where units are to be
modified, moved or replaced. Contractor shall notify Architect/Engineer of any
discrepancies prior to ordering new units or replacement parts, including
replacements of equipment motors.
4. Temperature Control Subcontractor's Responsibility:
a. Wiring of all devices needed to make the Temperature Control System
functional.
b. Verifying any control wiring on the electrical drawings as being by the
Electrical Contractor. All wiring required for the Control System, but not
shown on the electrical drawings, is the responsibility of the Temperature
Control Contractor.
c. Coordinating equipment locations (such as relays, transformers, etc.) with
the Electrical Contractor, where wiring of the equipment is by the Electrical
Contractor.
673
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 5 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
5. This Contractor is responsible for coordination of utilities with all other
Contractors. If any field coordination conflicts are found, the Contractor shall
coordinate with other Contractors to determine a viable layout.
C. Electrical Contractor's Responsibility:
1. Provides disconnect devices shown on the Electrical Drawings or indicated to be
by the Electrical Contractor on the Mechanical Drawings or Specifications.
2. Installs and wires all remote control devices furnished by the Mechanical
Contractor or Temperature Control Contractor when so noted on the Electrical
Drawings.
3. Provides motor control and temperature control wiring, where so noted on the
drawings.
4. Coordinate with the Mechanical Contractor for size of motors and/or other
electrical devices involved with repair or replacement of existing equipment.
5. Furnishes, installs and connects all relays, etc., for automatic shutdown of certain
fans upon actuation of the Fire Alarm System as indicated and specified in
Division 28.
6. This Contractor is responsible for coordination of utilities with all other
Contractors. If any field coordination conflicts are found, the Contractor shall
coordinate with other Contractors to determine a viable layout.
1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Definitions:
1. Coordination Drawings: A compilation of the pertinent layout and system
drawings that show the sizes and locations, including elevations, of system
components and required access areas to ensure that no two objects will occupy
the same space.
a. Mechanical trades shall include, but are not limited to, mechanical
equipment, ductwork, fire protection systems, and any item that may impact
coordination with other disciplines.
b. Electrical trades shall include, but are not limited to, electrical equipment,
conduit 1.5" (40 mm) and larger, conduit racks, cable trays, pull boxes,
transformers, raceway, busway, lighting, ceiling-mounted devices, and any
item that may impact coordination with other disciplines.
c. Technology trades shall include, but are not limited to, technology
equipment, racks, conduit 1.5" (40 mm) and larger, conduit racks, cable
trays, ladder rack, pull boxes, raceway, ceiling-mounted devices, and any
item that may impact coordination with other disciplines.
d. Maintenance clearances and code-required dedicated space shall be
included.
e. The coordination drawings shall include all underground, underfloor, in-
floor, in chase, and vertical trade items.
2. The contractors shall use the coordination process to identify the proper
sequence of installation of all utilities above ceilings and in other congested
areas, to ensure an orderly and coordinated end result, and to provide adequate
access for service and maintenance.
674
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 6 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
B. Participation:
1. The contractors and subcontractors responsible for work defined above shall
participate in the coordination drawing process.
2. One contractor shall be designated as the Coordinating Contractor for purposes
of preparing a complete set of composite electronic CAD coordination drawings
that include all applicable trades, and for coordinating the activities related to this
process. The Coordinating Contractor for this project shall be the Mechanical
Contractor.
a. The Coordinating Contractor shall utilize personnel familiar with
requirements of this project and skilled as draftspersons/CAD operators,
competent to prepare the required coordination drawings.
3. Electronic CAD drawings shall be submitted to the Coordinating Contractor and
owner for addition of work by other trades. IMEG will provide electronic file
copies of ventilation drawings for contractor's use if the contractor signs and
returns an "Electronic File Transfer" waiver provided by IMEG. IMEG will not
consider blatant reproductions of original file copies an acceptable alternative for
coordination drawings.
C. Drawing Requirements:
1. The file format and file naming convention shall be coordinated with and agreed
to by all contractors participating in the coordination process and the Owner.
Drawings to be submitted to IMEG for approval. Coordination between trades
shall occur prior to bid.
a. Scale of drawings:
1) General plans: 1/4 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
2) Mechanical, electrical, communication rooms, and including the
surrounding areas within 10 feet: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
3) Shafts and risers: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
4) Sections of shafts and electrical equipment rooms: 1/4 Inch = 1'-0"
(minimum).
5) Sections of congested areas: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
2. Ductwork layout drawings shall be the baseline system for other components.
Ductwork layout drawings shall be modified to accommodate other components
as the coordination process progresses.
3. There may be more drawings required for risers, top and bottom levels of shafts.
4. The minimum quantity of drawings will be established at the first coordination
meeting and sent to the A/E for review. Additional drawings may be required if
other areas of congestion are discovered during the coordination process.
D. General:
1. Coordination drawing files shall be made available to the A/E and Owner's
Representative. The A/E will only review identified conflicts and give an opinion,
but will not perform as a coordinator.
675
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 7 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
2. A plotted set of coordination drawings shall be available at the project site.
3. Coordination drawings are not shop drawings and shall not be submitted as
such.
4. The contract drawings are schematic in nature and do not show every fitting and
appurtenance for each utility. Each contractor is expected to have included in the
bid sufficient fittings, material, and labor to allow for adjustments in routing of
utilities made necessary by the coordination process and to provide a complete
and functional system.
5. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions due to
participation in the coordination process.
6. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions for
additional fittings, reroutings or changes of duct size, that are essentially
equivalent sizes to those shown on the drawings and determined necessary
through the coordination process.
7. The A/E reserves the right to determine space priority of equipment in the event
of spatial conflicts or interference between equipment, piping, conduit, ducts, and
equipment provided by the trades.
8. Changes to the contract documents that are necessary for systems installation
and coordination shall be brought to the attention of the A/E.
9. Access panels shall preferably occur only in gypsum board walls or plaster
ceilings where indicated on the drawings.
a. Access to mechanical, electrical, technology, and other items located above
the ceiling shall be through accessible lay-in ceiling tile areas.
b. Potential layout changes shall be made to avoid additional access panels.
c. Additional access panels shall not be allowed without written approval from
the A/E at the coordination drawing stage.
d. Providing additional access panels shall be considered after other
alternatives are reviewed and discarded by the A/E and the Owner's
Representative.
e. When additional access panels are required, they shall be provided without
additional cost to the Owner.
10. Complete the coordination drawing process and obtain sign off of the drawings
by all contractors prior to installing any of the components.
11. Conflicts that result after the coordination drawings are signed off shall be the
responsibility of the contractor or subcontractor who did not properly identify their
work requirements, or installed their work without proper coordination.
12. Updated coordination drawings that reflect as-built conditions may be used as
record documents.
676
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 8 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor's Responsibility Prior to Submitting Pricing Data:
1. The Contractor is responsible for constructing complete and operating systems.
The Contractor acknowledges and understands that the Contract Documents are
a two-dimensional representation of a three-dimensional object, subject to
human interpretation. This representation may include imperfect data, interpreted
codes, utility guidelines, three-dimensional conflicts, and required field
coordination items. Such deficiencies can be corrected when identified prior to
ordering material and starting installation. The Contractor agrees to carefully
study and compare the individual Contract Documents and report at once in
writing to the Design Team any deficiencies the Contractor may discover. The
Contractor further agrees to require each subcontractor to likewise study the
documents and report at once any deficiencies discovered.
2. The Contractor shall resolve all reported deficiencies with the Architect/Engineer
prior to awarding any subcontracts, ordering material, or starting any work with
the Contractor's own employees. Any work performed prior to receipt of
instructions from the Design Team will be done at the Contractor's risk.
B. Qualifications:
1. Only products of reputable manufacturers are acceptable.
2. All Contractors and subcontractors shall employ only workers skilled in their
trades.
C. Compliance with Codes, Laws, Ordinances:
1. If there is a discrepancy between the codes and regulations and these
specifications, the Architect/Engineer shall determine the method or equipment
used.
2. If the Contractor notes, at the time of bidding, that any parts of the drawings or
specifications do not comply with the codes or regulations, Contractor shall
inform the Architect/Engineer in writing, requesting a clarification. If there is
insufficient time for this procedure, Contractor shall submit with the proposal a
separate price to make the system comply with the codes and regulations.
3. All changes to the system made after letting of the contract, to comply with codes
or requirements of Inspectors, shall be made by the Contractor without cost to
the Owner.
4. If there is a discrepancy between manufacturer's recommendations and these
specifications, the manufacturer's recommendations shall govern.
5. All rotating shafts and/or equipment shall be completely guarded from all contact.
Partial guards and/or guards that do not meet all applicable OSHA standards are
not acceptable. Contractor is responsible for providing this guarding if it is not
provided with the equipment supplied.
D. Permits, Fees, Taxes, Inspections:
1. Procure all applicable permits and licenses.
677
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 9 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
2. Abide by all laws, regulations, ordinances, and other rules of the State or Political
Subdivision where the work is done, or as required by any duly constituted public
authority.
3. Pay all charges for permits or licenses.
4. Pay all fees and taxes imposed by the State, Municipal and/or other regulatory
bodies.
5. Pay all charges arising out of required inspections by an authorized body as
applicable.
6. Pay all charges arising out of required contract document reviews associated
with the project and as initiated by the Owner or authorized agency/consultant as
applicable.
7. Where applicable, all fixtures, equipment and materials shall be listed by
Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc. and approved by FM Global.
E. Examination of Drawings:
1. The drawings for the mechanical work are completely diagrammatic, intended to
convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangements and
locations of equipment, outlets, etc., and the approximate sizes of equipment.
2. Contractor shall determine the exact locations of equipment and rough-ins, and
the exact routing of pipes and ducts to best fit the layout of the job.
3. Scaling of the drawings is not sufficient or accurate for determining these
locations.
4. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated arrangements and
locations, such changes shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to
the Owner.
5. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items, such as fittings, boxes,
valves, unions, etc., may not be shown, but where required by other sections of
the specifications or required for proper installation of the work, such items shall
be furnished and installed.
6. If an item is either on the drawings or in the specifications, it shall be included in
this contract.
7. Determination of quantities of material and equipment required shall be made by
the Contractor from the documents. Where discrepancies arise between
drawings, schedules and/or specifications, the greater number shall govern.
8. Where used in mechanical documents, the word "furnish" shall mean supply for
use, the word "install" shall mean connect complete and ready for operation, and
the word "provide" shall mean to supply for use and connect complete and ready
for operation.
a. Any item listed as furnished shall also be installed, unless otherwise noted.
b. Any item listed as installed shall also be furnished, unless otherwise noted.
F. Field Measurements:
1. Verify all pertinent dimensions at the job site before ordering any materials or
fabricating any supports, pipes or ducts.
G. Electronic Media/Files:
678
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 10 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
1. Construction drawings for this project have been prepared utilizing AutoCAD
MEP.
2. Contractors and Subcontractors may request electronic media files of the
contract drawings and/or copies of the specifications. Specifications will be
provided in PDF format.
3. Upon request for electronic media, the Contractor shall complete and return a
signed "Electronic File Transmittal" form provided by IMEG.
4. If the information requested includes floor plans prepared by others, the
Contractor will be responsible for obtaining approval from the appropriate Design
Professional for use of that part of the document.
5. The electronic contract documents can be used for preparation of shop drawings
and as-built drawings only. The information may not be used in whole or in part
for any other project.
6. The drawings prepared by IMEG for bidding purposes may not be used directly
for shop drawings.
7. The use of these CAD documents by the Contractor does not relieve them from
their responsibility for coordination of work with other trades and verification of
space available for the installation.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be required for the following items, and for additional items where
required elsewhere in the specifications or on the drawings.
B. General Submittal Procedures: In addition to the provisions of Division 01, the
following are required:
1. Transmittal: Each transmittal shall include the following:
a. Date
b. Project title and number
c. Contractor's name and address
d. Division of work (e.g., plumbing, heating, ventilating, etc.)
e. Description of items submitted and relevant specification number
f. Notations of deviations from the contract documents
g. Other pertinent data
2. Submittal Cover Sheet: Each submittal shall include a cover sheet containing:
a. Date
b. Project title and number
c. Architect/Engineer
d. Contractor and subcontractors' names and addresses
e. Supplier and manufacturer's names and addresses
f. Division of work (e.g., plumbing, heating, ventilating, etc.)
g. Description of item submitted (using project nomenclature) and relevant
specification number
h. Notations of deviations from the contract documents
i. Other pertinent data
j. Provide space for Contractor's review stamps
679
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 11 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
3. Composition:
a. Submittals shall be submitted using specification sections and the project
nomenclature for each item.
b. Individual submittal packages shall be prepared for items in each
specification section. All items within a single specification section shall be
packaged together where possible. An individual submittal may contain
items from multiple specifications sections if the items are intimately linked
(e.g., pumps and motors).
c. All sets shall contain an index of the items enclosed with a general topic
description on the cover.
4. Content: Submittals shall include all fabrication, erection, layout, and setting
drawings; manufacturers' standard drawings; schedules; descriptive literature,
catalogs and brochures; performance and test data; electrical power criteria (e.g.,
voltage, phase, amps, horsepower, kW, etc.) wiring and control diagrams; Short
Circuit Current Rating (SCCR); dimensions; shipping and operating weights;
shipping splits; service clearances; and all other drawings and descriptive data of
materials of construction as may be required to show that the materials,
equipment or systems and the location thereof conform to the requirements of
the contract documents.
5. Contractor's Approval Stamp:
a. The Contractor shall thoroughly review and approve all shop drawings
before submitting them to the Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall
stamp, date and sign each submittal certifying it has been reviewed.
b. Unstamped submittals will be rejected.
c. The Contractor's review shall include, but not be limited to, verification of
the following:
1) Only approved manufacturers are used.
2) Addenda items have been incorporated.
3) Catalog numbers and options match those specified.
4) Performance data matches that specified.
5) Electrical characteristics and loads match those specified.
6) Equipment connection locations, sizes, capacities, etc. have been
coordinated with other affected trades.
7) Dimensions and service clearances are suitable for the intended
location.
8) Equipment dimensions are coordinated with support steel,
housekeeping pads, openings, etc.
9) Constructability issues are resolved (e.g., weights and dimensions
are suitable for getting the item into the building and into place, sinks
fit into countertops, etc.).
d. The Contractor shall review, stamp and approve all subcontractors'
submittals as described above.
680
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 12 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
e. The Contractor's approval stamp is required on all submittals. Approval will
indicate the Contractor's review of all material and a complete
understanding of exactly what is to be furnished. Contractor shall clearly
mark all deviations from the contract documents on all submittals. If
deviations are not marked by the Contractor, then the item shall be required
to meet all drawing and specification requirements.
6. Submittal Identification and Markings:
a. The Contractor shall clearly mark each item with the same nomenclature
applied on the drawings or in the specifications.
b. The Contractor shall clearly indicate the size, finish, material, etc.
c. Where more than one model is shown on a manufacturer's sheet, the
Contractor shall clearly indicate exactly which item and which data is
intended.
d. All marks and identifications on the submittals shall be unambiguous.
7. Schedule submittals to expedite the project. Coordinate submission of related
items.
8. Identify variations from the contract documents and product or system limitations
that may be detrimental to the successful performance of the completed work.
9. Reproduction of contract documents alone is not acceptable for submittals.
10. Incomplete submittals will be rejected without review. Partial submittals will only
be reviewed with prior approval from the Architect/Engineer.
11. Submittals not required by the contract documents may be returned without
review.
12. The Architect/Engineer's responsibility shall be to review one set of shop drawing
submittals for each product. If the first submittal is incomplete or does not comply
with the drawings and/or specifications, the Contractor shall be responsible to
bear the cost for the Architect/Engineer to recheck and handle the additional
shop drawing submittals.
13. Submittals shall be reviewed and approved by the Architect/Engineer before
releasing any equipment for manufacture or shipment.
14. Contractor's responsibility for errors, omissions. or deviation from the contract
documents in submittals is not relieved by the Architect/Engineer's approval.
15. Schedule shall allow for adequate time to perform orderly and proper review of
submittals, including time for consultants and Owner if required, and resubmittals
by Contractor if necessary, and to cause no delay in Work or in activities of
Owner or other contractors.
a. Allow at least two weeks for Architect's/Engineer's review and processing of
each submittal.
16. Architect/Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal which, in
the Architect/Engineer's opinion, requires coordination with other submittals until
related submittals are received. The Architect/Engineer will notify the Contractor,
in writing, when they exercise this right.
C. Electronic Submittal Procedures:
681
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 13 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
1. Distribution: Email submittals as attachments to all parties designated by the
Architect/Engineer, unless a web-based submittal program is used.
2. Transmittals: Each submittal shall include an individual electronic letter of
transmittal.
3. Format: Electronic submittals shall be in PDF format only. Scanned copies, in
PDF format, of paper originals are acceptable. Submittals that are not legible will
be rejected. Do not set any permission restrictions on files; protected, locked, or
secured documents will be rejected.
4. File Names: Electronic submittal file names shall include the relevant
specification section number followed by a description of the item submitted, as
follows. Where possible, include the transmittal as the first page of the PDF
instead of using multiple electronic files.
a. Submittal file name: 23 XX XX.description.YYYYMMDD
b. Transmittal file name: 23 XX XX.description.YYYYMMDD
5. File Size: Files shall be transmitted via a pre-approved method. Larger files may
require an alternative transfer method, which shall also be pre-approved.
1.8 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. The requirements herein are in addition to the provisions of Division 01.
B. Format:
1. Use AIA Document Continuation Sheets G703 or another similar form approved
by the Owner and Architect/Engineer.
2. Submit in Excel format.
3. Support values given with substantiating data.
C. Preparation:
1. Itemize work required by each specification section and list all providers. All work
provided by subcontractors and major suppliers shall be listed on the Schedule of
Values. List each subcontractor and supplier by company name.
2. Break down all costs into:
a. Material: Delivered cost of product with taxes paid.
b. Labor: Labor cost, excluding overhead and profit.
3. Itemize the cost for each of the following:
a. Overhead and profit.
b. Bonds.
c. Insurance.
d. General Requirements: Itemize all requirements.
4. For each line item having an installed cost of more than $5,000, break down
costs to list major products or operations under each item. At a minimum, provide
material and labor cost line items for the following:
682
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 14 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
a. Each piece of equipment requiring shop drawings (e.g., each air handling
unit, pump, exhaust fan, etc.). Use the equipment nomenclature (AHU-1, P-
1, EF-1, etc.) on the Schedule of Values.
b. Each type of small unitary equipment (e.g., FCUs, UHs, CABs, etc.).
Multiple units of the same type can be listed together, provided quantities
are also listed so unit costs can be determined.
c. Each piping system (chilled water, heating water, steam, condensate, etc.).
In addition, for larger projects, break down the material and labor for each
piping system based on geography (building, floor, and/or wing).
d. Each duct system (supply, return, relief, outside air, etc.) listed separately
for each unit they serve (AHU-1 supply air ductwork, AHU-1 return air
ductwork, etc.).
e. Pipe insulation with separate material and labor line items for each piping
system listed above.
f. Duct insulation with separate material and labor line items for each duct
system listed above.
g. Temperature controls broken down into material and labor for the following:
1) Engineering
2) Controllers, devices, sensors, etc.
3) Control dampers
4) Conduit
5) Wiring
6) Programming
7) Commissioning
h. Site utilities (5' beyond building)
i. Seismic design
j. Air balancing
k. Commissioning
l. Record drawings
m. Punchlist and closeout
D. Update Schedule of Values when:
1. Indicated by Architect/Engineer.
2. Change of subcontractor or supplier occurs.
3. Change of product or equipment occurs.
1.9 CHANGE ORDERS
A. A detailed material and labor takeoff shall be prepared for each change order, along
with labor rates and markup percentages. Change orders shall be broken down by
sheet or associated individual line item indicated in the change associated narrative,
whichever provides the most detailed breakdown. Change orders with inadequate
breakdown will be rejected.
B. Itemized pricing with unit cost shall be provided from all distributors and associated
subcontractors.
C. Change order work shall not proceed until authorized.
683
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 15 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
1.10 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS' INSPECTION
A. The following equipment shall not be placed in operation until a competent installation
and service representative of the manufacturer has inspected the installation and
certified that the equipment is properly installed, adjusted and lubricated; that
preliminary operating instructions have been given; and that the equipment is ready for
operation:
1. Air Cooled Condensers
2. Condensing Units
B. Contractor shall arrange for and obtain supplier's on-site inspection(s) at proper time(s)
to assure each phase of equipment installation and/or connection is in accordance with
the manufacturer's instructions.
C. Submit copies of start-up reports to the Architect/Engineer and include copies of
Owner's Operation and Maintenance Manuals.
1.11 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING & MAINTENANCE
A. Exercise care in transporting and handling to avoid damage to materials. Store
materials on the site to prevent damage. Keep materials clean, dry and free from
harmful conditions. Immediately remove any materials that become wet or that are
suspected of becoming contaminated with mold or other organisms.
B. Keep all bearings properly lubricated and all belts properly tensioned and aligned.
C. Coordinate the installation of heavy and large equipment with the General Contractor
and/or Owner. If the Mechanical Contractor does not have prior documented
experience in rigging and lifting similar equipment, he/she shall contract with a
qualified lifting and rigging service that has similar documented experience. Follow all
equipment lifting and support guidelines for handling and moving.
D. Contractor is responsible for moving equipment into the building and/or site. Contractor
shall review site prior to bid for path locations and any required building modifications
to allow movement of equipment. Contractor shall coordinate the work with other
trades.
1.12 WARRANTY
A. Provide one-year warranty, unless otherwise noted, to the Owner for all fixtures,
equipment, materials, and workmanship.
B. The warranty period for all work in this Division of the specifications shall commence
on the date of final acceptance, unless a whole or partial system or any separate piece
of equipment or component is put into use for the benefit of any party other than the
installing contractor with prior written authorization. In this instance, the warranty
period shall commence on the date when such whole system, partial system or
separate piece of equipment or component is placed in operation and accepted in
writing by the Owner.
684
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 16 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
C. Warranty requirements shall extend to correction, without cost to the Owner, of all
Work found to be defective or nonconforming to the contract documents. The
Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting all damage resulting from defects or
nonconformance with contract documents.
1.13 INSURANCE
A. Contractor shall maintain insurance coverage as set forth in Division 0 of these
specifications.
1.14 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION
A. Where several manufacturers' names are given, the scheduled manufacturer is the
basis for job design and establishes the quality required.
B. Equivalent equipment manufactured by the other listed manufacturers may be used.
Contractor shall ensure that all items submitted by these other manufacturers meet all
requirements of the drawings and specifications and fits in the allocated space. When
using other listed manufacturers, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for any
and all modifications necessary (including, but not limited to structural supports,
electrical connections, piping and ductwork connections and arrangement, plumbing
connections and rough-in, and regulatory agency approval, etc.) and coordinate such
with other contractors.
C. Any material, article or equipment of other unnamed manufacturers which will
adequately perform the services and duties imposed by the design and is of a quality
equal to or better than the material, article or equipment identified by the drawings and
specifications may be used if approval is secured in writing from the Architect/Engineer
not later than ten days prior to the bid opening.
D. This Contractor assumes all costs incurred as a result of using the offered material,
article or equipment, on the Contractors part or on the part of other Contractors whose
work is affected.
E. This Contractor may list voluntary add or deduct prices for alternate materials on the
bid form. These items will not be used in determining the low bidder.
F. All material substitutions requested later than ten (10) days prior to bid opening must
be listed as voluntary changes on the bid form.
685
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 17 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 JOBSITE SAFETY
A. Neither the professional activities of the Architect/Engineer, nor the presence of the
Architect/Engineer or the employees and subconsultants at a construction site, shall
relieve the Contractor and other entity of their obligations, duties and responsibilities
including, but not limited to, construction means, methods, sequence, techniques or
procedures necessary for performing, superintending or coordinating all portions of the
work of construction in accordance with the contract documents and any health or
safety precautions required by any regulatory agencies. The Architect/Engineer and
personnel have no authority to exercise any control over any construction contractor or
other entity or their employees in connection with their work or any health or safety
precautions. The Contractor is solely responsible for jobsite safety. The
Architect/Engineer and the Architect/Engineer's consultants shall be indemnified and
shall be made additional insureds under the Contractor's general liability insurance
policy.
3.2 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OBSERVATION OF WORK
A. The Contractor shall provide seven (7) calendar days' notice to the Architect/Engineer
prior to:
1. Covering exterior walls, interior partitions and chases.
2. Installing hard or suspended ceilings and soffits.
B. The Architect/Engineer will have the opportunity to review the installation and provide
a written report noting deficiencies requiring correction. The Contractor's schedule
shall account for these reviews and show them as line items in the approved schedule.
C. Above-Ceiling Final Observation
1. All work above the ceilings must be complete prior to the Architect/Engineer's
review. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. Pipe insulation is installed and fully sealed.
b. Pipe and duct wall penetrations are sealed.
c. Main, branch and flexible ducts are installed.
d. Diffusers, registers and grilles are installed and connected to ductwork.
2. In order to prevent the Above-Ceiling Final Observation from occurring too early,
the Contractor shall review the status of the work and certify, in writing, that the
work is ready for the Above-Ceiling Final Observation.
3. It is understood that if the Architect/Engineer finds the ceilings have been
installed prior to this review and prior to 7 days elapsing, the Architect/Engineer
may not recommend further payments to the contractor until such time as full
access has been provided.
686
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 18 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
3.3 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 01.
B. Final Jobsite Observation:
1. In order to prevent the Final Jobsite Observation from occurring too early, the
Contractor is required to review the completion status of the project and certify
that the job is ready for the final jobsite observation.
2. Attached to the end of this section is a typical list of items that represent the
degree of job completeness expected prior to requesting a review.
3. Upon Contractor certification that the project is complete and ready for a final
observation, the Contractor shall sign the attached certification and return it to
the Architect/Engineer so that the final observation can be scheduled.
4. It is understood that if the Architect/Engineer finds the job not ready for the final
observation and that additional trips and observations are required to bring the
project to completion, the costs incurred by the Architect/Engineer's additional
time and expenses will be deducted from the Contractor's contract retainage prior
to final payment at the completion of the job.
C. Before final payment is authorized, this Contractor must submit the following:
1. Operation and maintenance manuals with copies of approved shop drawings.
2. Record documents including marked-up or reproducible drawings and
specifications.
3. A report documenting the instructions given to the Owner's representatives
complete with the number of hours spent in the instruction. The report shall bear
the signature of an authorized agent of This Contractor and shall be signed by
the Owner's representatives.
4. Start-up reports on all equipment requiring a factory installation inspection or
start-up.
5. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra materials in quantities specified in
individual specification sections. Deliver to project site; receipt by
Architect/Engineer required prior to final payment approval.
3.4 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. General:
1. Provide an electronic copy of the O&M manuals as described below for
Architect/Engineer's review and approval. The electronic copy shall be corrected
as required to address the Architect/Engineer's comments. Once corrected,
electronic copies and paper copies shall be distributed as directed by the
Architect/Engineer.
2. Approved O&M manuals shall be completed and in the Owner's possession prior
to Owner's acceptance and at least 10 days prior to instruction of operating
personnel.
B. Electronic Submittal Procedures:
687
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 19 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
1. Distribution: Email the O&M manual as attachments to all parties designated by
the Architect/Engineer.
2. Transmittals: Each submittal shall include an individual electronic letter of
transmittal.
3. Format: Electronic submittals shall be in PDF format only. Scanned copies, in
PDF format, of paper originals are acceptable. Submittals that are not legible will
be rejected. Do not set any permission restrictions on files; protected, locked, or
secured documents will be rejected.
4. File Names: Electronic submittal file names shall include the relevant
specification section number followed by a description of the item submitted, as
follows. Where possible, include the transmittal as the first page of the PDF
instead of using multiple electronic files.
a. O&M file name: O&M.div23.contractor.YYYYMMDD
b. Transmittal file name: O&Mtransmittal.div23.contractor.YYYYMMDD
5. File Size: Files shall be transmitted via a pre-approved method. Larger files may
require an alternative transfer method, which shall also be pre-approved.
6. Provide the Owner with an approved copy of the O&M manual on compact discs
(CD), digital video discs (DVD), or flash drives with a permanently affixed label,
printed with the title "Operation and Maintenance Instructions", title of the project
and subject matter of disc/flash drive when multiple disc/flash drives are required.
7. All text shall be searchable.
8. Bookmarks shall be used, dividing information first by specification section, then
systems, major equipment and finally individual items. All bookmark titles shall
include the nomenclature used in the construction documents and shall be an
active link to the first page of the section being referenced.
C. Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall include:
1. Title Page: Include title page with project title, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, all
subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers, with addresses, telephone
numbers, website addresses, email addresses and point of contacts. Website
URLs and email addresses shall be active links in the electronic submittal.
2. Table of Contents: Include a table of contents describing specification section,
systems, major equipment, and individual items.
3. Copies of all final approved shop drawings and submittals. Include
Architect's/Engineer's shop drawing review comments. Insert the individual shop
drawing directly after the Operation and Maintenance information for the item(s)
in the review form.
4. Copy of final approved test and balance reports.
5. Copies of all factory inspections and/or equipment startup reports.
6. Copies of warranties.
7. Schematic electrical power/controls wiring diagrams of the equipment that have
been updated for field conditions. Field wiring shall have label numbers to match
drawings.
8. Dimensional drawings of equipment.
9. Capacities and utility consumption of equipment.
10. Detailed parts lists with lists of suppliers.
11. Operating procedures for each system.
688
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 20 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
12. Maintenance schedule and procedures. Include a chart listing maintenance
requirements and frequency.
13. Repair procedures for major components.
14. List of lubricants in all equipment and recommended frequency of lubrication.
15. Instruction books, cards, and manuals furnished with the equipment.
3.5 INSTRUCTING THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVES
A. Adequately instruct the Owner's designated representatives in the maintenance, care,
and operation of all systems installed under this contract.
B. Provide verbal and written instructions to the Owner's representatives by FACTORY
PERSONNEL in the care, maintenance, and operation of the equipment and systems.
C. Contractor shall make a DVD video recording of instructions to the Owner while
explaining the system so additional personnel may view the instructions at a later date.
The video recording shall be the property of the Owner.
D. The Owner has the option to make a video recording of all instructions. Coordinate
schedule of instructions to facilitate this recording.
E. The instructions shall include:
1. Explanation of all system flow diagrams.
2. Explanation of all air handling systems.
3. Temperature control system operation including calibration, adjustment and
proper operating conditions of all sensors.
4. Maintenance of equipment.
5. Smoke control systems.
6. Start-up procedures for all major equipment.
7. Explanation of seasonal system changes.
F. The Contractor shall prepare a detailed, written training agenda and submit it to the
Architect/Engineer a minimum of two weeks prior to the formal training for approval.
The written agenda shall include specific training points within the items described
above. For example: how to adjust setpoints, troubleshooting, proper start-up, proper
shut-down, seasonal changes, draining, venting, changing filters, changing belts, etc.
Failure to provide and follow an approved training agenda may result in additional
training required at the expense of the Contractor.
G. Operating Instructions:
1. Contractor is responsible for all instructions to the Owner's representatives for
the mechanical and control systems.
2. If the Contractor does not have staff that can adequately provide the required
instructions the Contractor shall include in the bid an adequate amount to
reimburse the Owner for the Architect/Engineer to perform these services.
689
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 21 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
3.6 SYSTEM STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. The mechanical systems shall be complete and operating. System startup, testing,
adjusting, and balancing to obtain satisfactory system performance is the responsibility
of the Contractor. This includes calibration and adjustments of all controls, noise level
adjustments and final comfort adjustments as required.
B. Complete all manufacturer-recommended startup procedures and checklists to verify
proper motor rotation, electrical power voltage is within equipment limitations,
equipment controls maintain pressures and temperatures within acceptable ranges, all
filters and protective guards are in-place, acceptable access is provided for
maintenance and servicing, and equipment operation does not pose a danger to
personnel or property.
C. Operate all HVAC systems continuously for at least one week prior to occupancy to
bring construction materials to suitable moisture levels. Areas with mechanical cooling
shall be maintained below 60% RH.
D. Contractor shall adjust the mechanical systems and controls at season changes during
the one year warranty period, as required, to provide satisfactory operation and to
prove performance of all systems in all seasons.
E. All operating conditions and control sequences shall be tested during the start-up
period. Test all interlocks, safety shutdowns, controls, and alarms.
F. The Contractor, subcontractors, and equipment suppliers shall have skilled technicians
to ensure that all systems perform properly. If the Architect/Engineer is requested to
visit the job site for trouble shooting, assisting in start-up, obtaining satisfactory
equipment operation, resolving installation and/or workmanship problems, equipment
substitution issues or unsatisfactory system performance, including call backs during
the warranty period, through no fault of the design; the Contractor shall reimburse the
Owner on a time and materials basis for services rendered at the Architect/Engineer's
standard hourly rates in effect when the services are requested. The Contractor shall
pay the Owner for services required that are product, installation or workmanship
related. Payment is due within 30 days after services are rendered.
3.7 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. The following paragraphs supplement Division 01 requirements.
B. Maintain at the job site a separate and complete set of mechanical drawings and
specifications with all changes made to the systems clearly and permanently marked
in complete detail.
690
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 22 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
C. Mark drawings to indicate revisions to piping and ductwork, size and location, both
exterior and interior; including locations of coils, dampers, other control devices, filters,
and other units requiring periodic maintenance or repair; actual equipment locations,
dimensioned from column lines; actual inverts and locations of underground piping;
concealed equipment, dimensioned from column lines; mains and branches of piping
systems, with valves and control devices located and numbered, concealed unions
located, and with items requiring maintenance located (e.g., traps, strainers, expansion
compensators, tanks, etc.); Change Orders; concealed control system devices.
D. Before completion of the project, a set of reproducible mechanical drawings will be
given to the Contractor for transfer of all as-built conditions from the paper set
maintained at the job site. All marks on reproducibles shall be clear and permanent.
E. Mark specifications to show approved substitutions; Change Orders, and actual
equipment and materials used.
F. Record changes daily and keep the marked drawings available for the
Architect/Engineer's examination at any normal work time.
G. Upon completing the job, and before final payment is made, give the marked-up
drawings to the Architect/Engineer.
3.8 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Thoroughly clean all equipment and systems prior to the Owner's final acceptance of
the project. Clean all foreign paint, grease, oil, dirt, labels, stickers, and other foreign
material from all equipment.
B. Clean all drain pans and areas where moisture is present. Immediately report any
mold, biological growth, or water damage.
C. Remove all rust, scale, dirt, oils, stickers and thoroughly clean exterior of all exposed
bare metal ductwork, piping, hangers, and accessories.
D. Remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated during construction from the premises.
3.9 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Contractor shall coordinate the installation of all equipment, valves, dampers,
operators, etc., with other trades to maintain clear access area for servicing.
B. All equipment shall be installed in such a way to maximize access to parts needing
service or maintenance. Review the final field location, placement, and orientation of
equipment with the Owner's designated representative prior to setting equipment.
C. Installation of equipment or devices without regard to coordination of access
requirements and confirmation with the Owner's designated representative will result in
removal and reinstallation of the equipment at the Contractor's expense.
D. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the
low emitting material limits of the following standards:
691
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 23 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and
Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources
Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.
3.10 MAINTAINING CLEAN DUCTWORK THROUGHOUT CONSTRUCTION
A. Throughout the duration of construction, all ductwork shall be capped or sealed with
sheet metal caps, polyethylene film, or other airtight protective to keep dust, dirt, and
construction debris out of ducts. Similar means shall be used to seal air-side
connections of HVAC equipment to include, but not limited to, air handling units, fans,
terminal air boxes, fan coil units, cabinet heaters, blower coils, and the like.
B. When air terminal devices are installed, contractors shall seal all supply, return, and
exhaust grilles with polyethylene film or other airtight protective to keep dust, dirt, and
construction debris out of ducts.
C. Should HVAC equipment be started during construction, Contractor shall remove
airtight protectives and shall install one-inch thick MERV 8 filter media over all return
and exhaust grilles to prevent dust, dirt, and construction debris from entering
ductwork. Filter media shall cover the entire grille face and shall be secured such that
air cannot bypass filter media.
D. Should filter media become laden with dust and dirt, Contractor shall replace filter
media with new media to prevent damage to air distribution system and equipment.
E. The following steps shall be taken during testing, adjusting, and balancing of each air
system:
1. All construction activities in all spaces served by the air system shall stop.
2. All airtight protectives and temporary filter media shall be removed from all
portions of the air system.
3. Testing, adjusting, and balancing work shall not commence until all construction
activity is stopped and all airtight protectives and temporary filter media is
removed.
4. Once testing, adjusting, and balancing work is complete for the air system,
airtight protectives or temporary filter media shall be installed over all ductwork
openings and air terminals on the air system prior to resuming construction
activities in any spaces served by the air system.
F. The Owner shall agree the building is sufficiently clean prior to the removal of any
filtration media and airtight protectives from air terminal devices.
692
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 00 - 24 BASIC HVAC
REQUIREMENTS
READINESS CERTIFICATION PRIOR TO FINAL JOBSITE OBSERVATION
To prevent the final job observation from occurring too early, we require that the Contractor
review the completion status of the project and, by copy of this document, certify that the job is
indeed ready for the final job observation. The following is a typical list of items that represent
the degree of job completeness expected prior to your requesting a final job observation.
1. Penetrations fire sealed and labeled in accordance with specifications.
2. All air handling units operating and balanced.
3. All fans shall be operating and balanced.
4. All miscellaneous mechanical systems (unit heaters, fan coil units, cabinet heaters, etc.)
operating.
5. All temperature control systems operating, programmed and calibrated.
6. Pipe insulation complete, pipes labeled and valves tagged.
7. Fire damper and fire/smoke damper access doors labeled in accordance with specifications.
Accepted by:
Prime Contractor _______________________________________________
By ___________________________________ Date ___________________
Upon Contractor certification that the project is complete and ready for a final job observation,
we require the Contractor to sign this agreement and return it to the Architect/Engineer so that
the final observation can be scheduled.
It is understood that if the Architect/Engineer finds the job not ready for the final observation and
that additional trips and observations are required to bring the project to completion, the costs
incurred by the Architect/Engineers for additional time and expenses will be deducted from the
Contractor's contract retainage prior to final payment at the completion of the job.
END OF SECTION 23 05 00
693
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 03 - 1 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
SECTION 23 05 03
THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Through-Penetration Firestopping.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
Section.
B. Installer: Individuals performing work shall be certified by the manufacturer of the
system selected for installation.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
B. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
C. ANSI/UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops
D. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems
E. UL Fire Resistance Directory Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ)
F. Intertek / Warnock Hersey - Directory of Listed Products
G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
H. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops
I. The Building Officials and Code Administrators National Building Code
J. 2019 Uniform Building Code
K. NFPA 5000 - Building Construction Safety Code
L. CBC California Building Code
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
694
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 03 - 2 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
B. Submit Firestopping Installers Certification for all installers on the project.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit for each condition requiring firestopping. Include descriptions
of the specific penetrating item, actual wall/floor construction, manufacturer's
installation instructions, and UL or Intertek / Warnock Hersey Assembly number.
D. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-
penetration firestop system, along with the following information:
1. Types of penetrating items.
2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where
applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated.
3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop
design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
4. F ratings for each firestop system.
E. Maintain a notebook on the job site at all times that contains copies of approved
submittals for all through penetration firestopping to be installed. Notebook shall be
made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction at their request and turned over to
the Owner at the end of construction as part of the O&M Manuals.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store, protect and handle products on site. Accept material on site in factory
containers and packing. Inspect for damage. Protect from deterioration or damage due
to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. Follow
manufacturer's instructions for storage.
B. Install material prior to expiration of product shelf life.
1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions,
including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide
through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread
of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases,
and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.
B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings
determined per UL 1479:
1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings
indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of
constructions penetrated.
2. L-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings of
not more than 5.0 cfm/sq. ft at both ambient temperature and 400°F for smoke
barriers.
C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to light, traffic, moisture, or physical
damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these
conditions both during and after construction.
695
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 03 - 3 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as
determined per ASTM E 84.
E. For through-penetration firestop systems in air plenums, provide products with flame-
spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 50, respectively, as
determined per ASTM E 84.
1. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with
the low emitting material limits of the following standards: CDPH Standard
Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile
Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
Chambers Version 1.1.
1.7 MEETINGS
A. Pre-installation meeting: A pre-installation meeting shall be scheduled and shall
include the Construction Manager, General Contractor, all Subcontractors associated
with the installation of systems penetrating fire barriers, Firestopping Manufacturer's
Representative, and the Owner.
1. Review foreseeable methods related to firestopping work.
2. Tour representative areas where firestopping is to be installed; inspect and
discuss each type of condition and each type of substrate that will be
encountered, and preparation to be performed by other trades.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year warranty on parts and labor.
B. Warranty shall cover repair or replacement of firestop systems which fail in joint
adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance,
migration resistance, stain resistance, general durability, or appear to deteriorate in
any manner not clearly specified by the manufacturer as an inherent quality of the
material.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through-
penetration firestop systems indicated for each application that are produced by one of
the following manufacturers. All firestopping systems installed shall be provided by a
single manufacturer.
1. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division.
2. Hilti, Inc.
3. RectorSeal Corporation, Metacaulk.
696
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 03 - 4 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
2.2 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A. Provide materials and systems classified by or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey to
provide firestopping equal to time rating of construction being penetrated.
B. All firestopping materials shall be free of asbestos, lead, PCB's, and other materials
that would require hazardous waste removal.
C. Firestopping shall be flexible to allow for normal penetrating item movement due to
expansion and contraction.
D. Firestopping systems for plumbing and wet pipe sprinkler piping shall be moisture
resistant.
E. Provide firestopping systems capable of supporting floor loads where systems are
exposed to possible floor loading or traffic.
F. Provide firestopping systems allowing continuous insulation for all insulated pipes.
G. Provide firestopping systems classified by UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey
for penetrations through all fire rated construction. Firestopping systems shall be
selected from the UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory
Category XHEZ based on substrate construction and penetrating item size and
material and shall fall within the range of numbers listed:
1. Combustible Framed Floors and Chase Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated:
a. F Rating = Floor/Wall Rating
Penetrating Item UL System No.
No Penetrating Item FC 0000-0999*
Metallic Pipe or Conduit FC 1000-1999
Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit FC 2000-2999
Electrical Cables FC 3000-3999
Cable Trays FC 4000-4999
Insulated Pipes FC 5000-5999
Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical FC 6000-6999
Duct without Damper and Misc.
Mechanical
FC 7000-7999
Multiple Penetrations FC 8000-8999
*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to
match original rated construction.
697
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 03 - 5 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
2. Non-Combustible Framed Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated:
a. F Rating = Wall Rating
b. L Rating = Penetrations in Smoke Barriers
Penetrating Item UL System No.
No Penetrating Item WL 0000-0999*
Metallic Pipe or Conduit WL 1000-1999
Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit WL 2000-2999
Electrical Cables WL 3000-3999
Cable Trays WL 4000-4999
Insulated Pipes WL 5000-5999
Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical WL 6000-6999
Duct without Damper and Misc.
Mechanical
WL 7000-7999
Multiple Penetrations WL 8000-8999
*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to
match original rated construction.
H. Any opening in walls or floors not covered by the listed series of numbers shall be
coordinated with the firestopping manufacturer.
I. Any openings in floors or walls not described in the UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock
Hersey Fire Resistance Directory, or outlined in manufacturer's information shall be
sealed in a manner agreed upon by the Firestopping Manufacturer, Owner, and the
Authority Having Jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Ensure all surfaces that contact seal materials are free of dirt, dust, grease, oil, rust, or
loose materials. Clean and repair surfaces as required. Remove laitance and form-
release agents from concrete.
B. Ensure substrate and penetrating items have been permanently installed prior to
installing firestopping systems. Ensure penetrating items have been properly spaced
and have proper clearance prior to installing firestopping systems.
C. Surfaces to which sealing materials are to be installed must meet the selected UL or
Intertek / Warnock Hersey system substrate criteria.
D. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer. Confine primer to area of bond.
698
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 03 - 6 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. In existing construction, provide firestopping of openings prior to and after installation
of penetrating items. Remove any existing coatings on surfaces prior to firestopping
installation. Temporary firestopping shall consist of packing openings with fire resistant
mineral wool for the full thickness of substrate, or an alternate method approved by the
Authority Having Jurisdiction. All openings shall be temporarily firestopped immediately
upon their installation and shall remain so until the permanent UL or listed by Intertek /
Warnock Hersey listed firestopping system is installed.
B. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of the UL or
Intertek / Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory and with the manufacturer's
printed application instructions.
C. Install dams as required to properly contain firestopping materials within openings and
as required to achieve required fire resistance rating. Remove combustible damming
after appropriate curing.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturers and that do not cause damage.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that
ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration
at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration
occurs, remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems
immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified
requirements.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide and install labels adjacent to each firestopping location. Label shall be
provided by the firestop system supplier and contain the following information in a
contrasting color:
1. The words "Warning - Through Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb.
Notify Building Management of Any Damage."
2. Firestop System Supplier; UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey system
number; date installed; contractor name and phone number; manufacturer's
representative name, address, and phone number.
3.5 INSPECTION
A. All penetrations shall be inspected by the manufacturer's representative to ensure
proper installation.
B. Access to firestop systems shall be maintained for examination by the Authority
Having Jurisdiction at their request.
699
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 03 - 7 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop system with other construction
only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with
requirements.
D. The contractor shall allow for visual destructive review of 5% of installed firestop
systems (minimum of one) to prove compliance with specifications and manufacturer's
instructions and details. Destructive system removal shall be performed by the
contractor and witnessed by the Architect/Engineer and manufacturer's factory
representative. The Architect/Engineer shall have sole discretion of which firestop
system installations will be reviewed. The contractor is responsible for all costs
associated with this requirement including labor and material for removing and
replacing the installed firestop system. If any firestop system is found to not be
installed per manufacturer's specific instructions and details, all firestop systems are
subject to destructive review and replacement at the Architect/Engineer's discretion
and the contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION 23 05 03
700
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 05 - 1 HVAC DEMOLITION FOR
REMODELING
SECTION 23 05 05
HVAC DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Mechanical demolition.
B. Cutting and Patching.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment shall be as specified in individual Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. THE DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED TO INDICATE THE GENERAL SCOPE OF WORK
AND DO NOT SHOW EVERY PIPE, DUCT, OR PIECE OF EQUIPMENT THAT MUST
BE REMOVED.
B. Where walls, ceilings, etc., are shown as being removed on general drawings, the
Contractor shall remove all mechanical equipment, devices, fixtures, piping, ducts,
systems, etc., from the removed area.
C. Where ceilings, walls, partitions, etc., are temporarily removed and replaced by others,
This Contractor shall remove, store, and replace equipment, devices, fixtures, pipes,
ducts, systems, etc.
D. Verify that abandoned utilities serve only abandoned equipment or facilities. Extend
services to facilities or equipment that shall remain in operation following demolition.
E. Coordinate work with all other Contractors and the Owner. Schedule removal of
equipment to avoid conflicts.
F. This Contractor shall verify all existing equipment sizes and capacities where
equipment is scheduled to be replaced or modified, prior to ordering new equipment.
3.2 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING MECHANICAL WORK
A. Demolish and extend existing mechanical work under provisions of Division 2 and this
Section.
701
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 05 - 2 HVAC DEMOLITION FOR
REMODELING
B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
C. Remove abandoned ducts and piping to source of supply and/or main lines.
D. Remove exposed abandoned pipes and ducts, including abandoned pipes and ducts
above accessible ceilings. Cut ducts flush with walls and floors, cap duct that remains,
and patch surfaces. Cut pipes above ceilings, below floors and behind walls. Cap
remaining lines. Repair building construction to match original. Remove all clamps,
hangers, supports, etc. associated with pipe and duct removal.
E. Disconnect and remove mechanical devices and equipment serving equipment that
has been removed.
F. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension
work.
G. Maintain access to existing mechanical installations which remain. Modify installation
or provide access panels as appropriate.
H. Remove unused sections of supply and return air ductwork back to mains. Patch
opening with sheet metal and seal airtight. Patch existing insulation to match existing.
Where existing ductwork is to be capped and reused, locate the end cap within 6" of
the last branch. End caps shall be 3" pressure class and seal class "A".
I. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing
installations, or as specified.
J. Properly reclaim and dispose of all refrigerant in demolished equipment and as
required for extension of existing equipment.
3.3 CUTTING AND PATCHING
A. This Contractor is responsible for all penetrations of existing construction required to
complete the work of this project. Refer to Section 23 05 29 for additional
requirements.
B. Penetrations in existing construction should be reviewed carefully prior to proceeding
with any work.
C. Penetrations shall be neat and clean with smooth and/or finished edges. Core drill
where possible for clean opening.
D. Repair existing construction as required after penetration is complete to restore to
original condition. Use similar materials and match adjacent construction unless
otherwise noted or agreed to by the Architect/Engineer prior to start of work.
E. This Contractor is responsible for all costs incurred in repair, relocations, or
replacement of any cables, conduits, or other services if damaged without proper
investigation.
-
702
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 05 - 3 HVAC DEMOLITION FOR
REMODELING
3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment which remain or are to be reused.
B. Clean all systems adjacent to project which are affected by the dust and debris caused
by this construction.
C. MECHANICAL ITEMS REMOVED AND NOT RELOCATED REMAIN THE
PROPERTY OF THE OWNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL PLACE ITEMS RETAINED BY
THE OWNER IN A LOCATION COORDINATED WITH THE OWNER. THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL DISPOSE OF MATERIAL THE OWNER DOES NOT WANT
TO REUSE OR RETAIN FOR MAINTENANCE PURPOSES.
END OF SECTION 23 05 05
703
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 13 - 1 MOTORS
SECTION 23 05 13
MOTORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Single Phase and Three Phase Electric Motors.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
B. AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
C. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for
Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
D. ANSI/IEEE 112 - Test Procedure for Polyphase Induction Motors and Generators.
E. ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators.
F. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
G. Energy Independence and Security Act of 2007.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 23 05 00. Include nominal efficiency
and power factor for all premium efficiency motors. Efficiencies must meet or exceed
the nominal energy efficiency levels presented below.
B. Submit shop drawings for all three phase motors.
C. Submit motor data with equipment when motor is installed by the manufacturer at the
factory.
D. Submit shaft grounding rings or brushes or ceramic bearings for all motors as required.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect motors stored on site from weather and moisture by maintaining factory covers
and suitable weatherproof coverings. For extended outdoor storage, follow
manufacturer's recommendations for equipment and motor.
1.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data including assembly drawings, bearing data
including replacement sizes, and lubrication instructions.
704
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 13 - 2 MOTORS
1.6 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in the manufacture of commercial and industrial
motors and accessories, with a minimum of three years documented manufacturing
experience.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MOTORS - GENERAL CONSTRUCTION AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Refer to the drawings for required electrical characteristics. Voltage is generally
specified and scheduled as distribution voltage. Motor submittals may be based on
utilization voltage if it corresponds to the correct distribution voltage.
Distribution/Nominal Voltage Utilization Voltage
120 115
208 200
240 230
277 265
480 460
B. Design motors for continuous operation in 40ºC environment, and for temperature rise
in accordance with ANSI/NEMA MG 1 limits for insulation class, service factor, and
motor enclosure type.
C. Visible Nameplate: Indicating horsepower, voltage, phase, hertz, RPM, full load amps,
locked rotor amps, frame size, manufacturer's name and model number, service factor,
power factor, insulation class.
D. Electrical Connection: Boxes, threaded for conduit. For fractional horsepower motors
where connection is made directly, provide conduit connection in end frame.
E. Unless otherwise indicated, motors 3/4 HP and smaller shall be single phase, 60 hertz,
open drip-proof or totally enclosed fan-cooled type.
F. Unless otherwise indicated, motors 1 HP and larger shall be three phase, 60 hertz,
squirrel cage type, NEMA Design Code B (low current in-rush, normal starting torque),
open drip-proof or totally enclosed fan-cooled type.
G. Each contractor shall set all motors furnished by him.
H. All motors shall have a minimum service factor of 1.15.
I. All motors shall have ball or roller bearings with a minimum L-10 fatigue life of 150,000
hours in direct-coupled applications and 50,000 hours for belted applications. Belted
rating shall be based on radial loads and pulley sizes called out in NEMA MG1-14.43.
J. Bearings shall be sealed type for 10 HP and smaller motors. Bearings shall be
regreasable type for larger motors.
705
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 13 - 3 MOTORS
K. Motor Driven Equipment:
1. No equipment shall be selected or operate above 90% of its motor nameplate
rating. Motor size may not be increased to compensate for equipment with
efficiency lower than that specified.
2. If a larger motor than specified is required on equipment, the contractor supplying
the equipment is responsible for all additional costs due to larger starters, wiring,
etc.
L. Provide all belted motors with a means of moving and securing the motor to tighten
belts. Motors over 2 HP shall have screw type tension adjustment. Motors over 40 HP
shall have dual screw adjusters. Slide bases shall conform to NEMA standards.
M. Motors for fans and pumps 1/12 HP or greater and less than 1 HP shall be
electronically-commutated motors or shall have a minimum motor efficiency of 70%
when rated in accordance with DOE 10 CFR 431. These motors shall also have the
means to adjust motor speed for either balancing or remote control. Belt-driven fans
may use sheave adjustments for airflow balancing in lieu of varying motor speed.
2.2 ELECTRICALLY COMMUTATED MOTORS (ECM)
A. Motor shall be variable speed, constant torque, brushless DC motor for direct-drive
applications. Electronics shall be encapsulated for moisture protection and shall
integral surge protection. Motor shall be pre-wired for specific voltage and phase.
B. Motor frame shall be NEMA 48; UL recognized components shall be provided for the
motor construction.
C. All EC motors shall be a minimum of 85% efficient at all speeds.
D. Motors shall be permanently lubricated; utilize ball bearings to match with the
connected driven equipment.
E. Provide motor with on-board motor control module. Motor speed shall be limited to
provide electronic over current protection. Starter shall provide soft start to reduce
inrush current and shall be controllable from 20% to 100% of full rated speed.
F. Operational mode shall be as scheduled and shall be one of the following:
1. Constant Flow
2. Constant Temperature
3. Constant Pressure
2.3 PREMIUM EFFICIENCY MOTORS (INCLUDING MOST 3-PHASE GENERAL
PURPOSE MOTORS)
2.4 SHEAVES
A. All sheaves shall conform to NEMA Standard MG1-14.42, which lists minimum
diameters and maximum overhangs. Locate motors to minimize overhang.
B. When replacing sheaves, use sheaves of at least the originally supplied sizes.
706
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 13 - 4 MOTORS
C. Contractor responsible for motor shall also be responsible for replacement sheaves.
Coordinate with testing and balancing of the equipment.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. All rotating shafts and/or equipment shall be completely guarded from all contact.
Partial guards and/or guards that do not meet all applicable OSHA standards are not
acceptable. Contractor is responsible for providing this guarding if it is not provided
with the equipment supplied.
B. For flexible coupled drive motors, mount coupling to the shafts in accordance with the
coupling manufacturer's recommendations. Align shafts to manufacturer's
requirements or within 0.002 inch per inch diameter of coupling hub.
C. For belt drive motors, mount sheaves on the appropriate shafts per manufacturer's
instructions. Use a straight edge to check alignment of the sheaves. Reposition
sheaves as necessary so the straight edge contacts both sheave faces squarely. After
sheaves are aligned, loosen the adjustable motor base so the belt(s) can be added,
and tighten the base so the belt tension is in accordance with the drive manufacturer's
recommendations. Frequently check belt tension and adjust if necessary during the
first day of operation and again after 80 hours of operation.
END OF SECTION 23 05 13
707
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 29 - 1 HVAC SUPPORTS AND
ANCHORS
SECTION 23 05 29
HVAC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Hangers, Supports, and Associated Anchors.
B. Equipment Bases and Supports.
C. Sleeves and Seals.
D. Flashing and Sealing of Equipment and Pipe Stacks.
E. Cutting of Openings.
F. Escutcheon Plates and Trim.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME B31.1 - Power Piping.
B. MSS SP-58 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Materials, Design, Manufacture, Selection,
Application, and Installation.
C. MSS SP 69 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Selection and Application.
D. MSS SP 89 - Pipe Hangers and Supports - Fabrication and Installation Practices.
E. MSS SP-127 - Bracing for Piping Systems Seismic-Wind-Dynamic Design, Selection,
Application
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 23 05 00. Include
plastic pipe manufacturers' support spacing requirements.
1.4 WORK FURNISHED BUT INSTALLED UNDER OTHER SECTIONS
A. Furnish sleeves and hanger inserts to General Contractor for placement into formwork.
708
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 29 - 2 HVAC SUPPORTS AND
ANCHORS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HANGER RODS
Hanger Rod Diameter
Pipe Size Column #1 Column #2
2-1/2" and smaller 3/8" 3/8"
3" through 3-5/8" 3/8" 3/8"
4" and 5" 1/2" 1/2"
6" 3/4" 5/8"
8" through 12" 7/8" 3/4"
14" 1" 7/8"
16" and 18" 1" N/A
20" and 24" 1-1/4" N/A
Column #1: Steel pipe.
Column #2: Copper, plastic and fiberglass reinforced pipe.
A. Rods for double rod hangers may be reduced one size. Minimum rod diameter is 3/8
inches.
B. Hanger rods and accessories used in mechanical spaces or otherwise dry areas shall
have ASTM B633 electro-plated zinc finish.
C. All hanger rods, nuts, washers, clevises, etc., in damp areas shall have ASTM A123
hot-dip galvanized finish applied after fabrication.
2.2 PIPE AND STRUCTURAL SUPPORTS
A. General:
1. Pipe hangers, clamps, and supports shall conform to Manufacturers
Standardization Society MSS SP-58, 69, 89, and 127 (where applicable).
2. On all insulated piping, provide at each support an insert of same thickness and
contour as adjoining insulation, between the pipe and insulation jacket, to prevent
insulation from sagging and crushing. Refer to insulation specifications for
materials and additional information.
B. Vertical Supports:
1. Support and laterally brace vertical pipes at every floor level in multi-story
structures, unless otherwise noted by applicable codes, but never at intervals
over 15 feet. Support vertical pipes with riser clamps installed below hubs,
couplings, or lugs. Provide sufficient flexibility to accommodate expansion and
contraction to avoid compromising fire barrier penetrations or stressing piping at
fixed takeoff locations.
a. Products:
1) Cooper/B-Line Fig B3373 Series
2) Erico 510 Series
709
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 29 - 3 HVAC SUPPORTS AND
ANCHORS
3) Nibco/Tolco Fig. 82
2. Cold Pipe: Place restrained neoprene mounts beneath vertical pipe riser clamps
to prevent sweating of cold pipes. Select neoprene mounts based on the weight
of the pipe to be supported. Insulate over mounts.
a. Products:
1) Mason RBA, RCA or RDA
2) Mason BR
3. Wall supports shall be used where vertical height of structure exceeds minimum
spacing requirements. Install wall supports at same spacing as hangers or strut
supports along vertical length of pipe runs. Wall supports shall be coordinated
with the Structural Engineer of record
C. Hangers and Clamps:
1. Oversize all hangers, clamps, and supports on insulated piping to allow insulation
and jacket to pass through unbroken. This applies to both hot and cold pipes.
2. Hangers in direct contact with bare copper pipe shall include plastic pipe insert
similar to Unistrut Cush-A-Clamp, Hydra-Zorb, Erico Cushion Clamp or Cooper
Vibra-Clamp within their temperature limits of -65°F to +275°F.
3. On all insulated piping, provide a semi-cylindrical metallic shield and vapor
barrier jacket.
a. Products:
1) Anvil Fig. 160, 161, 162, 163, 164, 165
2) Cooper/B-Line Fig. 3160, 3161, 3162, 3163, 3164, 3165
3) Erico Model 630, 631, 632, 633, 634, 635
4) Nibco/Tolco Fig. 260-1, 261-1 1/2, 262-2, 263-2 1/2, 264-3, 265-4
4. Unless otherwise indicated, hangers shall be as follows:
a. Clevis Type: Service: Bare Metal Pipe, Rigid Plastic Pipe, Insulated Cold
Pipe, Insulated Hot Pipe - 3 inches and Smaller:
1) Products: Bare Steel, Plastic or Insulated Pipe:
a) Anvil Fig. 260
b) Cooper/B-Line Fig. 3100
c) Erico Model 400
d) Nibco/Tolco Fig. 1
2) Products: Bare Copper Pipe:
a) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3100C
b) Nibco/Tolco Fig. 81PVC
710
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 29 - 4 HVAC SUPPORTS AND
ANCHORS
b. Adjustable Swivel Ring Type: Service: Bare Metal Pipe - 4 inches and
Smaller:
1) Products: Bare Copper Pipe:
a) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3170CTC
b) Erico 102A0 Series
c) Nibco/Tolco Fig. 203
5. Support may be fabricated from U-channel strut or similar shapes. Piping less
than 4" in diameter shall be secured to strut with clamps of proper design and
capacity as required to maintain spacing and alignment. Strut shall be
independently supported from hanger drops or building structure. Size and
support shall be per manufacturer's installation requirements for structural
support of piping. Clamps shall not interrupt piping insulation.
a. Strut used in mechanical spaces or otherwise dry areas shall have ASTM
B633 electro-plated zinc finish.
b. Strut used in damp areas listed in hanger rods shall have ASTM A123 hot-
dip galvanized finish applied after fabrication.
6. Unless otherwise indicated, pipe supports for use with struts shall be as follows:
a. Clamp Type: Service: Bare Metal Pipe, Rigid Plastic Pipe, Insulated Cold
Pipe, Insulated Hot Pipe - 3 inches and smaller:
1) Clamps in direct contact with copper pipe shall include plastic pipe
insert similar to Unistrut Cush-A-Clamp, Hydra-Zorb, Erico Cushion
Clamp or Cooper Vibra-Clamp.
2) Pipes subject to expansion and contraction shall have clamps
oversized to allow limited pipe movement.
3) Products: Bare Steel, Plastic or Insulated Pipe:
a) Unistrut Fig. P1100 or P2500
b) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B2000 or B2400
c) Nibco/Tolco Fig. A-14 or 2STR
4) Products: Bare Copper Pipe:
a) Cooper/B-Line Fig. BVT
D. Upper (Structural) Attachments:
1. Unless otherwise shown, upper attachments for hanger rods or support struts
shall be as follows:
a. Wood Anchors: Tension wood rod hanger for suspending 3/8" threaded rod.
Zinc plated carbon steel.
711
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 29 - 5 HVAC SUPPORTS AND
ANCHORS
1) Minimum allowable tension loads for Douglass Fir/Southern Pine:
a) 3/8" diameter rod; 2-1/2" shank: 600 lb/590 lb.
b) Load values are based on full shank penetration into wood
member. Minimum edge distance 3/4". Minimum end distance
3-1/4".
2) Limitations:
a) Truss: Do not hang from wood trusses without truss
manufacturer or Structural Engineers approval.
b) Sheetrock/Gypsum Ceiling: When drilling through non-wood
materials (e.g., sheet rock, gypsum, etc.), increase shank
length by depth of non-wood materials.
c) Plywood Flooring/Roofing: Do not hang from plywood floor or
roofing.
d) Spacing: Refer to wood structure spacing of hangers.
3) Products:
a) Simpson RWV
b) DeWALT
c) ITI Sammys GT25
2.3 FOUNDATIONS, BASES, AND SUPPORTS
A. Supports:
1. Provide sufficient clips, inserts, hangers, racks, rods, and auxiliary steel to
securely support all suspended material, equipment and conduit without sag.
2.4 OPENINGS IN FLOORS, WALLS AND CEILINGS
A. Exact locations of all openings for the installation of materials shall be determined by
the Contractor and given to the General Contractor for installation or construction as
the structure is built.
B. Coordinate all openings with other Contractors.
C. Hire the proper tradesman and furnish all labor, material and equipment to cut
openings in or through existing structures, or openings in new structures that were not
installed, or additional openings. Repair all spalling and damage to the satisfaction of
the Architect/Engineer. Make saw cuts before breaking out concrete to ensure even
and uniform opening edges.
D. Said cutting shall be at the complete expense of each Contractor. Failure to coordinate
openings with other Contractors shall not exempt the Contractor from providing
openings at Contractor's expense.
E. Do not cut structural members without written approval of the Architect or Structural
Engineer of record.
712
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 29 - 6 HVAC SUPPORTS AND
ANCHORS
2.5 ROOF PENETRATIONS
A. Roof Curb Enclosure: Provide weatherproof roof curb and enclosure for pipe and
penetrations. Refer to drawings for details.
B. Break insulation only at the clamp for pipes between 60°F and 150°F. Seal outdoor
insulation edges watertight.
2.6 ESCUTCHEON PLATES AND TRIM
A. Fit escutcheons to all insulated or uninsulated exposed pipes passing through walls,
floors, or ceilings of finished rooms.
B. Escutcheons shall be heavy gauge, cold rolled steel, copper coated under a chromium
plated finish, heavy spring clip, rigid hinge and latch.
C. Install galvanized steel (unless otherwise indicated) trim strip to cover vacant space
and raw construction edges of all rectangular openings in finished rooms. This
includes pipe openings.
2.7 PIPE PENETRATIONS
A. Seal all pipe penetrations. Seal non-rated walls and floor penetrations with grout or
caulk. Backing material may be used.
B. Seal fire rated wall and floor penetrations with fire seal system as specified.
2.8 PIPE ANCHORS
A. Provide all items needed to allow adequate expansion and contraction of all piping. All
piping shall be supported, guided, aligned, and anchored as required.
B. Repair all piping leaks and associated damage. Pipes shall not rub on any part of the
building.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 HVAC SUPPORTS AND ANCHORS
A. General Installation Requirements:
1. Install all items per manufacturer's instructions.
2. Coordinate the location and method of support of piping systems with all
installations under other Divisions and Sections of the Specifications.
3. Where pipe support members are welded to structural building framing, scrape,
brush clean, and apply one coat of zinc rich primer to welding.
4. Supports shall extend directly to building structure. Do not support piping from
duct hangers unless coordinated with sheet metal contractor prior to installation.
Do not allow lighting or ceiling supports to be hung from piping supports.
713
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 29 - 7 HVAC SUPPORTS AND
ANCHORS
B. Supports Requirements:
1. Install hangers and supports complete with lock nuts, clamps, rods, bolts,
couplings, swivels, inserts and required accessories.
2. Hangers for horizontal piping shall have adequate means of vertical adjustment
for alignment.
C. Pipe Requirements:
1. Support all piping and equipment, including accessories to avoid objectionable or
excessive stress, deflection, swaying, sagging or vibration in the piping or
building structure during erection, cleaning, testing and normal operation of the
systems.
2. Do not, however, restrain piping to cause it to snake or buckle between supports
or to prevent proper movement due to expansion and contraction.
3. Support piping at equipment and valves so they can be disconnected and
removed without further supporting the piping.
4. Piping shall not introduce strains or distortion to connected equipment.
5. Parallel horizontal pipes may be supported on trapeze hangers made of
structural shapes and hanger rods; otherwise, pipes shall be supported with
individual hangers.
6. Provide additional supports where pipe changes direction, adjacent to flanged
valves and strainers, at equipment connections and heavy fittings.
7. Provide at least one hanger adjacent to each joint in grooved end steel pipe with
mechanical couplings.
D. Provided the installation complies with all loading requirements of truss and joist
manufacturers, the following practices are acceptable:
1. Loads of 100 lbs. or less may be attached anywhere along the top or bottom
chords of trusses or joists with a minimum 3' spacing between loads.
2. Loads greater than 100 lbs. must be hung concentrically and may be hung from
top or bottom chord, provided one of the following conditions is met:
a. The hanger is attached within 6" from a web/chord joint.
b. Additional L2x2x1/4 web reinforcement is installed per manufacturer's
requirements.
3. It is prohibited to cantilever a load using an angle or other structural component
that is attached to a truss or joist in such a fashion that a torsional force is
applied to that structural member.
4. If conditions cannot be met, coordinate installation with truss or joist
manufacturer and contact Architect/Engineer.
E. After piping and insulation installation are complete, cut hanger rods back at trapeze
supports so they do not extend more than 3/4" below bottom face of lowest fastener
and blunt any sharp edges.
F. Do not exceed the manufacturer's recommended maximum load for any hanger or
support.
714
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 29 - 8 HVAC SUPPORTS AND
ANCHORS
1. Hard Drawn Copper & Brass (Liquid Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3/4" and under: 5'-0"
2) 1": 6'-0"
3) 1-1/4": 7'-0"
4) 1-1/2" 8'-0"
2. Hard Drawn Copper & Brass (Vapor Service):
a. Maximum Spacing:
1) 3/4" & under: 7'-0"
2) 1": 8'-0"
3) 1-1/4": 9'-0"
4) 1-1/2": 10'-0"
END OF SECTION 23 05 29
715
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 53 - 1 HVAC IDENTIFICATION
SECTION 23 05 53
HVAC IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Identification of products installed under Division 23.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASME A13.1 - Scheme for the Identification of Piping Systems.
B. ASTM B-1, B-3, and B-8 for copper conductors.
C. ASTM D-1248 for Polyethylene Extrusion Materials, ICEA S-70-547 Weatherproof
Resistant Polyethylene Conductors, ICEA S-61-402/NEMA WC5 Thermoplastic
Insulated Wire & Cable, ICEA S-95-658/NEMA WC70 Non-Shielded 0 - 2kV Cables.
D. CGA Pamphlet C-9, Standard Color-Marking of Compressed Gas Cylinders for
Medical Use.
E. NFPA-99 - Health Care Facilities.
F. UL 1581 Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 23 05 00. Include list of items
identified, wording, letter sizes, and color coding.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. 3M
B. Bunting
C. Craftmark
2.2 MATERIALS
A. Aluminum Nameplates: Black enamel background with natural aluminum border and
engraved letters furnished with two mounting holes and screws.
716
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 53 - 2 HVAC IDENTIFICATION
B. Ductwork Markers:
1. Vinyl Markers: Colored vinyl with permanent pressure sensitive adhesive backing
suitable for indoor and outdoor application.
C. Ceiling Markers:
1. Label Style:
a. The intent is for the ceiling labels to be inconspicuous but easy to find and
read while standing underneath. The labels shall be located on the grid T-
bar nearest the ceiling tile that can be removed to provide the best access
to the serviceable side of equipment or to valves. An arrow can be used to
point to the tile needing removal.
b. The label tape shall be approximately 1/2" wide with all capitalized letters
approximately 3/16" tall.
c. Ceiling grid labels shall be made with a label maker with durable adhesive
labels having a clear background and black letters.
d. Equipment labels shall be as designated on the drawings (e.g., FCU-606B,
etc.).
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all products per manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Degrease and clean surfaces to receive adhesive for identification materials.
C. Equipment:
1. All equipment not easily identifiable such as controls, relays, gauges, etc.; and all
equipment in an area remote from its function such as air handling units, exhaust
fans, filters, reheat coils, dampers, etc.; shall have nameplates or plastic tags
listing name, function, and drawing symbol. Do not label exposed equipment in
public areas.
2. Fasten nameplates or plastic tags with stainless steel self-tapping screws or
permanently bonding cement.
3. Mechanical equipment that is not covered by the U.S. National Appliance Energy
Conservation Act (NAECA) of 1987 shall carry a permanent label installed by the
manufacturer stating that the equipment complies with the requirements of
ASHRAE 90.1.
D. Miscellaneous:
1. Attach self-adhesive vinyl labels at all duct access doors used to reset fusible
links or actuators on fire, fire/smoke, or smoke dampers. Lettering shall be a
minimum of 1/2" high. Labels shall indicate damper type.
2. Provide engraved plastic tags at all hydronic or steam system make-up water
meters.
717
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 53 - 3 HVAC IDENTIFICATION
3.2 SCHEDULE
A. Pipes to be marked shall be labeled with text as follows, regardless of which method or
material is used:
1. REFRIGERANT LIQUID: White lettering; purple background
2. REFRIGERANT SUCTION: White lettering; purple background
3. REFRIGERANT HOT GAS: White lettering; purple background
END OF SECTION 23 05 53
718
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 93 - 1 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING
SECTION 23 05 93
TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND BALANCING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of air systems.
B. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of heating systems.
C. Testing, adjusting, and balancing of cooling systems.
D. Measurement of final operating condition of HVAC systems.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Agency shall be a company specializing in the adjusting and balancing of systems
specified in this section with minimum three years' experience. Perform work under
supervision of AABC Certified Test and Balance Engineer, NEBB Certified Testing,
Balancing and Adjusting Supervisor, SMARTA Certified Air and Hydronic Balancer, or
TABB Certified Supervisor.
B. Work shall be performed in accordance with the requirements of the references listed
at the start of this section.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AABC - National Standards for Total System Balance, Seventh Edition.
B. ADC - Test Code for Grilles, Registers, and Diffusers.
C. AMCA - Publication 203-90; Field Performance Measurement of Fan Systems.
D. ASHRAE - 2019 HVAC Applications Handbook; Chapter 39, Testing, Adjusting and
Balancing.
E. ASHRAE/ANSI - Standard 111-2008; Practices for Measurement, Testing, Adjusting
and Balancing of Building HVAC&R Systems.
F. NEBB - Procedural Standards for Testing, Adjusting and Balancing of Environmental
Systems, Ninth Edition, 2019.
G. SMACNA - HVAC Systems; Testing, Adjusting and Balancing, Third Edition, 2002.
H. TABB - International Standards for Environmental Systems Balance.
719
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 93 - 2 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit copies of report forms, balancing procedures, and the name and qualifications
of testing and balancing agency for approval within 30 days after award of Contract.
B. Electronic Copies:
1. Submit a certified copy of test reports to the Architect/Engineer for approval.
Electronic copies shall be in PDF format only. Scanned copies, in PDF format, of
paper originals are acceptable. Copies that are not legible will be returned to the
Contractor for resubmittal. Do not set any permission restrictions on files;
protected, locked, or secured documents will be rejected.
2. Electronic file size shall be limited to a maximum of 10MB. Larger files shall be
divided into files that are clearly labeled as "1 of 2", "2 of 2", etc.
3. All text shall be searchable.
4. Bookmarks shall be used. All bookmark titles shall be an active link to the index
page and index tabs.
1.5 REPORT FORMS
A. Submit reports on AABC, SMACNA or NEBB forms. Use custom forms approved by
the Architect/Engineer when needed to supply specified information.
B. Include in the final report a schematic drawing showing each system component,
including balancing devices, for each system. Each drawing shall be included with the
test reports required for that system. The schematic drawings shall identify all testing
points and cross-reference these points to the report forms and procedures.
C. Refer to PART 4 for required reports.
1.6 WARRANTY/GUARANTEE
A. The TAB Contractor shall include an extended warranty of 90 days after owner receipt
of a completed balancing report, during which time the Owner may request a recheck
of terminals, or resetting of any outlet, coil, or device listed in the test report. This
warranty shall provide a minimum of 24 manhours of onsite service time. If it is
determined that the new test results are not within the design criteria, the balancer
shall rebalance the system according to design criteria.
B. Warranty/Guarantee must meet one of the following programs: TABB International
Quality Assurance Program, AABC National Project Performance Guarantee, NEBB's
Conformance Certification.
1.7 SCHEDULING
A. Coordinate schedule with other trades. Provide a minimum of seven days' notice to all
trades and the Architect/Engineer prior to performing each test.
B. Project will be constructed in phases. Provide balancing report after each phase is
complete.
720
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 93 - 3 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS (Not Used)
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. All procedures must conform to a published standard listed in the References article of
this section. All equipment shall be adjusted in accordance with the manufacturer's
recommendations. Any system not listed in this specification but installed under the
contract documents shall be balanced using a procedure from a published standard
listed in the References article.
B. The Balancing Contractor shall incorporate all pertinent documented construction
changes (e.g. submittals/shop drawings, change orders, RFIs, ASIs, etc.) and include
in the balancing report.
C. Recorded data shall represent actual measured or observed conditions.
D. Cut insulation, ducts, pipes, and equipment cabinets for installation of test probes to
the minimum extent necessary to allow adequate performance of procedures. After
testing and balancing is complete, close probe holes and patch insulation with new
materials as specified. Restore vapor barrier and finish as specified.
E. Permanently mark setting of valves, dampers, and other adjustment devices allowing
for settings to be restored. Set and lock memory stops.
F. Leave systems in proper working order, replacing belt guards, closing access doors,
closing doors to electrical switch boxes, plugging test holes, and restoring thermostats
to specified settings.
G. The Balancing Contractor shall measure terminal air box air flow, and the TCC shall
adjust DDC readout to match. Refer to Section 23 09 00 for additional information.
H. Installations with systems consisting of multiple components shall be balanced with all
system components operating.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Before beginning work, verify that systems are complete and operable. Ensure the
following:
1. General Equipment Requirements:
a. Equipment is safe to operate and in normal condition.
b. Equipment with moving parts is properly lubricated.
c. Temperature control systems are complete and operable.
d. Proper thermal overload protection is in place for electrical equipment.
e. Direction of rotation of all fans and pumps is correct.
f. Access doors are closed and end caps are in place.
721
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 93 - 4 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING
2. Duct System Requirements:
a. All filters are clean and in place. If required, install temporary media.
b. Duct systems are clean and free of debris.
c. Fire/smoke and manual volume dampers are in place, functional and open.
d. Air outlets are installed and connected.
e. Duct system leakage has been minimized.
B. Report any defects or deficiencies to Architect/Engineer.
C. Promptly report items that are abnormal or prevent proper balancing.
D. If, for design reasons, system cannot be properly balanced, report as soon as
observed.
E. Beginning of work means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.3 PREPARATION
A. Provide instruments required for testing, adjusting, and balancing operations. Make
instruments available to the Architect/Engineer for spot checks during testing.
B. Instruments shall be calibrated within six months of testing performed for project, or
more recently if recommended by the instrument manufacturer.
3.4 INSTALLATION TOLERANCES
A. ± 10% of scheduled values:
1. Adjust air inlets and outlets to ± 10% of scheduled values.
2. Adjust piping systems to ±10% of design values.
3.5 ADJUSTING
A. After adjustment, take measurements to verify balance has not been disrupted or that
disruption has been rectified.
B. Once balancing of systems is complete, at least one damper or valve must be 100%
open.
C. After testing, adjusting and balancing are complete, operate each system and
randomly check measurements to verify system is operating as reported in the report.
Document any discrepancies.
D. Contractor responsible for each motor shall also be responsible for replacement
sheaves. Coordinate with contractor.
E. Contractor responsible for pump shall trim impeller to final duty point as instructed by
this contractor on all pumps not driven by a VFD. Coordinate with contractor.
722
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 93 - 5 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING
3.6 SYSTEM PERFORMANCE REPORT
A. After the conclusion of balancing operations, utilize the building DDC system or install
portable data loggers to simultaneously record temperatures and humidity during
summer and winter conditions for a seven-day period, continuous over a weekend,
and including at least one period of operation at outside conditions within 5°F wet bulb
temperature of maximum summer design condition and within 10°F dry bulb
temperature of minimum winter design condition.
B. Architect/Engineer will direct all test locations.
C. Report of test results shall include original recording and three reproductions.
3.7 SUBMISSION OF REPORTS
A. Fill in test results on appropriate forms.
PART 4 - SYSTEMS TO BE TESTED, ADJUSTED AND BALANCED
4.1 Verification of existing systems.
A. Perform a pre-balance of systems serving the area of construction prior to the start of
any other work. Do not make adjustments to the systems. If the systems are not
operating at maximum capacity, temporarily drive system to maximum and take
readings for the system. Return the system to its original state when measurements
are complete.
1. Air Handling Unit:
a. General Requirements:
1) Existing Equipment Tag (if available).
2) Location.
3) Manufacturer, model, arrangement, class, discharge.
4) Fan RPM.
b. Flow Rate:
1) Supply flow rate (cfm)
2) Return flow rate (cfm)
3) Outside flow rate (cfm)
c. Pressure Drop and Pressure:
1) Filter pressure drop.
2) Total static pressure. (Indicate if across fan or external to unit).
3) Inlet pressure.
4) Discharge pressure.
723
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 93 - 6 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING
2. Exhaust Fan
a. Drawing symbol.
b. Location.
c. Manufacturer and model.
d. Flow rate (cfm).
e. Total static pressure. (Indicate measurement locations).
f. Inlet pressure.
g. Discharge pressure.
h. Fan RPM.
3. Air Terminal (Inlet or Outlet):
a. Room number/location.
b. Terminal type and size.
c. Velocity.
d. Flow rate (cfm)
B. Report findings to Architect/Engineer on standard forms. Provide four (4) copies of
report.
4.2 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Title Page:
1. Project name.
2. Project location.
3. Project Architect.
4. Project Engineer (IMEG Corp.).
5. Project General Contractor.
6. TAB Company name, address, phone number.
7. TAB Supervisor's name and certification number.
8. TAB Supervisor's signature and date.
9. Report date.
B. Report Index
C. General Information:
1. Test conditions.
2. Nomenclature used throughout report.
3. Notable system characteristics/discrepancies from design.
4. Test standards followed.
5. Any deficiencies noted.
6. Quality assurance statement.
D. Instrument List:
1. Instrument.
2. Manufacturer, model, and serial number.
3. Range.
724
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 93 - 7 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING
4. Calibration date.
4.3 AIR SYSTEMS
A. Duct Leakage Test:
1. Air system and fan.
2. Leakage class.
3. Test pressure.
4. Construction pressure.
5. Flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.
6. Leakage (refer to Section 23 31 00 in the specifications): specified and actual.
7. Statement that fire dampers, reheat coils and other accessories were included in
the test.
8. Pass or Fail.
B. Air Moving Equipment:
1. General Requirements:
a. Drawing symbol.
b. Location.
c. Manufacturer, model, arrangement, class, discharge.
d. Fan RPM.
e. Multiple RPM fan curve with operating point marked. (Obtain from
equipment supplier).
2. Flow Rate:
a. Supply flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.
b. Return flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.
c. Outside flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.
3. Pressure Drop and Pressure:
a. Filter pressure drop: specified and actual.
b. Total static pressure: specified and actual. (Indicate if across fan or external
to unit).
c. Inlet pressure.
d. Discharge pressure.
C. Fan Data:
1. Drawing symbol.
2. Location.
3. Manufacturer and model.
4. Flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.
5. Total static pressure: specified and actual. (Indicate measurement locations).
6. Inlet pressure.
725
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 05 93 - 8 TESTING, ADJUSTING, AND
BALANCING
D. Electric Motors:
1. Drawing symbol of equipment served.
2. Manufacturer, Model, Frame.
3. Nameplate: HP, phase, service factor, RPM, operating amps, efficiency.
4. Measured: Amps in each phase.
E. Air Terminal (Inlet or Outlet):
1. Drawing symbol.
2. Terminal type and size.
3. Velocity: specified and actual.
4. Flow rate (cfm): specified and actual.
5. Percent of design flow rate.
END OF SECTION 23 05 93
726
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 07 13 - 1 DUCTWORK INSULATION
SECTION 23 07 13
DUCTWORK INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Ductwork Insulation.
B. Insulation Jackets.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in ductwork insulation application with five years
minimum experience. When requested, installer shall submit manufacturer's certificate
indicating qualifications.
B. Materials:
1. Listed and labeled for flame spread/smoke developed rating of no more than
25/50 when tested per ASTM E84 or UL 723 as required by code.
2. Fungal Resistance: No growth when tested in accordance with ASTM G21
(antifungal test).
3. Rated velocity on coated air side for air erosion in accordance with UL 181 at
5,000 fpm minimum.
4. UL listed in Category HNKT.
C. Adhesives: UL listed, meeting NFPA 90A/90B requirements.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for
Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
B. ANSI/ASTM C553 - Mineral Fiber Blanket and Felt Insulation.
C. ANSI/ASTM C612 - Mineral Fiber Block and Board Thermal Insulation.
D. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
E. ASTM E136 - Standard Test Method for the Behavior of Materials in a Vertical Tube
Furnace at 750°C.
F. ASTM E814 - Fire Tests of Through Penetrations Firestops.
G. ASTM E2336-04 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Resistive Grease Duct Enclosure
Systems.
727
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 07 13 - 2 DUCTWORK INSULATION
H. ASTM G21 - Standard Practice for Determining Resistance of Synthetic Polymeric
Materials to Fungi.
I. National Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards - 1999 Edition - as published by
Midwest Insulation Contractors Association and endorsed by National Insulation
Contractors Association.
J. NFPA 96 - Standard for the Installation of Equipment for Removal of Smoke and
Grease-Laden Vapors from Commercial Cooking Equipment.
K. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
L. UL - XHEZ - Through Penetration Firestop Systems.
M. UL 181 - Standard for Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors.
N. UL 263 - Full Scale External Fire Tests with Hose Stream.
O. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
P. UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through Penetrations Firestops.
Q. California Title 24 - Building Energy Efficiency Standards
R. CMC California Mechanical Code
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings per Section 23 05 00. Include product description, list of
materials and thickness for each service, and location.
B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Type A: Flexible Fiberglass - Outside Wrap; ANSI/ASTM C553; commercial grade;
0.28 / 0.26 (Out-Of-Package/Installed-Compressed 25%) maximum 'K' value at 75°F;
foil scrim Kraft facing, 1.0 lb./cu. ft. density. Submit both "Out of Package" and
"Installed-Compressed 25%" K and R-values.
B. Type C: Flexible Fiberglass Liner; ANSI/ASTM C1071; 0.28 maximum 'K' value at
75°F; 1.5 lb/cu ft minimum density; coated air side for 5000 fpm air velocity.
C. Type D: Rigid Fiberglass Liner; 0.23 maximum 'K' value at 75°F; smooth coated mat
facing laminated to the insulation, suitable for 5000 fpm air side velocity.
728
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 07 13 - 3 DUCTWORK INSULATION
R-VALUE PER THICKNESS
THICKNESS 0.5 1 1.5 2 2.5 3 4 5
TYPE K-FACTOR R-VALUE
Flexible Fiberglass
Outside Wrap 0.28 5.4 7.1 8.9 10.7 14.3 17.9
Semi-Rigid
Fiberglass Board
Wrap 0.25 6.0 8.0 10.0 12.0 16.0 20.0
Flexible Fiberglass
Liner 0.28 1.8 3.6 5.4 7.1 8.9 10.7 14.3 17.9
Rigid fiberglass liner 0.23 4.3 6.5 8.7 10.9 13.0 17.4 21.7
Double Wall
Ductwork 0.27 3.7 5.6 7.4 9.3 11.1 14.8 18.5
Flexible High Temp
Rigid Preformed
Fiberglass
Acoustical Liner 0.23 4.3 6.5 8.7 10.9 13.0 17.4 21.7
2.2 JACKETS
A. Vapor Barrier Jackets: Kraft reinforced foil scrim vapor barrier with self-sealing
adhesive joints. Beach puncture resistance ratio of at least 25 units. Tensile strength:
35 psi minimum. Single, self-seal acrylic adhesive on longitudinal jacket laps and butt
strips.
2.3 JACKET COVERINGS
A. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM B209; 0.016" thick; smooth or embossed stucco finish with Z
edge seams and aluminum bands for outdoor use. Where colored jacket covers are
called for, provide factory-applied hard film acrylic paint in color selected by Architect.
B. Laminated flexible aluminum, self-adhering, protective jacketing, vapor barrier and
weather proofing membrane with having high-performance adhesive capable of
installation with no additional mechanical attachment. Owner/Architect shall select
from manufacturer's standard finishes.
1. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. VentureClad 1577CW
b. Polyguard Alumaguard
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions, codes, and industry
standards.
B. Install materials after ductwork has been tested.
729
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 07 13 - 4 DUCTWORK INSULATION
C. Clean surfaces for adhesives.
D. Provide insulation with vapor barrier when air conveyed may be below ambient
temperature.
E. Exterior Duct Wrap - Flexible, Type A:
1. Apply with edges tightly butted.
2. Cut slightly longer than perimeter of duct to insure full thickness at corners. Do
not wrap excessively tight.
3. Seal joints with adhesive backed tape.
4. Apply so insulation conforms uniformly and firmly to duct.
5. Seal all penetrations of the vapor barrier by strap hangers or slip cable hangers
with adhesive backed tape.
6. Provide high-density insulation inserts on rectangular ducts at trapeze duct
hangers to prevent crushing of insulation. Provide high-density insulation inserts
with clamp-on round ducts requiring two (2) rods or straps to prevent crushing of
insulation. Maintain continuous vapor barrier through the hanger.
7. Tape all joints with Royal Tapes #RT 350 (216-439-7229), Venture Tape
1525CW, or Compac Type FSK. No substitutions will be accepted without written
permission from the Architect/Engineer.
8. Press tape tightly to the duct covering with a squeegee for a tight continuous
seal. Fish mouths and loose tape edges are not acceptable.
9. Staples may be used, but must be covered with tape.
10. Vapor barrier must be continuous.
11. Mechanically fasten on 12" centers at bottom of ducts over 24" wide and on all
sides of vertical ducts.
F. Interior Insulation - Flexible Duct Liner, Type C:
1. Observation of Duct Lining:
a. After installation of ductwork, Architect/Engineer may select random
observation points in each system.
1) At each observation point, cut and remove an 18" x 18" section of
ductwork and liner for verification of installation.
2) Random observation points based on one opening per 75 lineal ft. of
total duct run.
b. When any of the observation points shows non-compliance, additional
points will be designated by the Architect/Engineer, and observation
repeated.
c. If 20% of points observed do not comply, remove and replace all lined ducts
and repeat tests. Where replacement is not required, correct all non-
compliances.
d. At end of observation, repair all duct lining and observation holes by
installing standard, insulated, hinged access doors per Section 23 33 00.
e. Paint or finish to match adjacent duct surfaces.
730
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 07 13 - 5 DUCTWORK INSULATION
2. Impale on spindle anchors welded or mechanically fastened to the duct.
Adhesive or glue fastened anchors are not acceptable. Maximum anchor spacing
per SMACNA Duct Construction Standards or manufacturer's recommendations,
whichever is more restrictive. Locate pins less than 3" from corners and at
intervals not over 6" around the perimeter at leading and trailing edges. Locate
pins within 3" of transverse joints and at intervals not over 16" long the length of
the duct. Pins must be long enough to prevent compressing the insulation.
3. In addition to anchors, secure liner with UL listed adhesive covering over 90% of
the duct surface.
4. Install per the latest edition of the SMACNA Manual.
5. Leading edges shall be covered as follows:
a. For duct velocities below 3000 fpm, coat leading edges with adhesive.
Neatly butt liner without gaps at transverse joints. Cut liner flush with end of
the duct section for tight joints with no exposed duct. If adhesive is shop
installed, field apply additional adhesive to the end of each duct section for
complete adhesion of the liner. Protect edges from dirt and debris.
b. For duct velocities above 3000 fpm, cover leading edges with metal nosing.
Use nosing on upstream edges of each section of duct. If the duct can be
installed in either direction, provide nosing on each end or clearly mark the
duct to allow visual verification after installation. Verify duct velocities based
on the scheduled air flow rates and determine where metal nosing is
required.
c. Install metal nosing in the following locations (regardless of velocity):
1) The first three fittings downstream of all fans.
2) At all duct liner interruptions. This includes fire dampers, access
doors, branch connections, and all other locations where the edge of
the liner is exposed.
3) Trailing edges of transverse joints do not require metal nosings.
6. Overlap liner at longitudinal joints. Make longitudinal joints at corners of the duct
unless the duct size does not allow this. Coat longitudinal joints with adhesive at
velocities over 2500 fpm.
7. Seal all damaged duct liner with adhesive and glass cloth. Do not damage duct
liner surface coatings.
8. Duct dimensions given are net inside dimensions. Increase sheet metal to allow
for insulation thickness.
G. Plenum Walls - Type D:
1. Brush apply adhesive to the wall before installing insulation. Provide 100%
coverage.
2. Apply pins to the wall with adhesive. Locate pins 15" O.C. maximum and within
2" of all insulation edges.
3. Secure insulation to pins with speed clips and cut all pins off close to the clips.
Cover raw ends of pins with glass fabric set in adhesive.
4. Cover all joints with 3" wide strips of glass fabric set in adhesive.
5. Protect all door openings with sheet metal angles.
H. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations unless code prohibits.
731
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 07 13 - 6 DUCTWORK INSULATION
I. Provide 2" wide, 24" high, 26 gauge, galvanized sheet metal corner protection angles
for all externally insulated ductwork extending to a floor or curb.
3.2 SCHEDULE
A. Refer to Section 23 31 00 for scheduling of insulation.
B. Unless noted otherwise, HVAC plenums and unit housings not pre-insulated at factory
shall be insulated to geographical R-value requirements based on California Title 24,
R-4.2, R-6 or R-8.
END OF SECTION 23 07 13
732
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 07 19 - 1 HVAC PIPING INSULATION
SECTION 23 07 19
HVAC PIPING INSULATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Piping Insulation.
B. Insulation Jackets.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Applicator: Company specializing in piping insulation application with five years
minimum experience.
B. Materials: Listed and labeled for flame spread/smoke developed rating of no more than
25/50 when tested per ASTM E84 or UL 723 as required by code. Factory label
insulation and jacket materials and adhesive, mastic, tapes, and cement material
containers with appropriate markings of applicable testing agency.
C. Products shall not contain asbestos, lead, mercury, or mercury compounds.
D. Products that come in contact with stainless steel shall have a leachable chloride
content of less than 50 ppm when tested according to ASTM C 871. Insulation
materials for use on austenitic stainless steel shall be qualified as acceptable
according to ASTM C 795.
E. Foam insulation materials shall not use CFC or HCFC blowing agents in the
manufacturing process.
F. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the
low emitting material limits of the following standards:
1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and
Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources
Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for
Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
B. ANSI/ASTM C195 - Mineral Fiber Thermal Insulation Cement.
C. ANSI/ASTM C533 - Calcium Silicate Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
D. ANSI/ASTM C534 - Elastomeric Foam Insulation.
733
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 07 19 - 2 HVAC PIPING INSULATION
E. ANSI/ASTM C547 - Mineral Fiber Preformed Pipe Insulation.
F. ANSI/ASTM C552 - Cellular Glass Block and Pipe Thermal Insulation.
G. ASTM C449 - Mineral Fiber Hydraulic-setting Thermal Insulating and Finishing
Cement.
H. ASTM C591 - Unfaced Preformed Rigid Cellular Polyisocyanurate Insulation.
I. ASTM C578 - Preformed Cellular Polystyrene Thermal Insulation.
J. ASTM C1126 - Standard Specification for Faced or Unfaced Rigid Cellular Phenolic
Thermal Insulation.
K. ASTM C1729 - Standard Specification for Aluminum Jacketing for Insulation.
L. ASTM C1767 - Standard Specification for Stainless Steel Jacketing for Insulation.
M. ASTM E84 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
N. NFPA 255 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
O. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials.
P. National Commercial & Industrial Insulation Standards - 1999 Edition - as published by
Midwest Insulation Contractors Association and endorsed by National Insulation
Contractors Association.
Q. California Title 24 - Building Energy Efficiency Standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings per Section 23 05 00. Include product description, list of
materials and thickness for each service, and locations.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INSULATION
A. Type A: Glass fiber; ANSI/ASTM C547; 0.24 maximum 'K' value at 75°F; non-
combustible. All-purpose polymer or polypropylene service jacket, listed and labeled at
no more than 25/50 when tested per ASTM E84 or UL 723 as required by code.
B. Type B: Flexible elastomeric foam insulation; closed-cell, sponge or expanded rubber
(polyethylene type is not permitted); ANSI/ASTM C534, Grade 1 Type I for tubular
materials; flexible plastic; 0.25 maximum 'K' value at 75°F, listed and labeled at more
than 25/50 when tested per ASTM E84 or UL 723 as required by code. Maximum 1"
thick per layer where multiple layers are specified.
734
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 07 19 - 3 HVAC PIPING INSULATION
C. Type C: Molded rigid cellular glass; ANSI/ASTM C-552; 0.29 maximum 'K' value at
75°F; density 7.3lb/ft; minimum compressive strength 90 psi parallel to rise; moisture
resistant, non-combustible; suitable for -100°F to +900°F. For below grade installations
use asphaltic mastic paper vapor barrier jacket. Use self-seal all-purpose polymer or
polypropylene service jacket for above grade installations.
2.2 VAPOR BARRIER JACKETS
A. All-purpose polymer or polypropylene service jacket vapor barrier with self-sealing
adhesive joints. Beach puncture resistance ratio of at least 50 units. Tensile strength:
35 psi minimum. Single, self-seal acrylic adhesive on longitudinal jacket laps and butt
strips.
B. Polyvinylidene Chloride (PVDC or Saran) film and tape: Durable and highly moisture
and moisture vapor resistant. Please refer to manufacturer's recommended installation
guidelines.
2.3 JACKET COVERINGS
A. Aluminum Jackets: ASTM C1729; 0.016" thick (thicker where required by ASTM
C1729); stucco embossed finish with Z edge seams and aluminum bands for outdoor
use. Where colored jacket covers are called for, provide factory-applied hard film
acrylic paint in color selected by Architect.
2.4 REMOVABLE INSULATION JACKETS
A. Removable insulation jackets shall consist of outer covering, interstitial insulation
material, and inner covering.
B. Inner and outer covering shall be constructed from a minimum 16.5 oz./yd2 PTFE
fiberglass composite and suitable for insulating surface temperatures up to 550°F.
C. Interstitial insulation blanket shall be minimum 1-1/2" thick and shall consist of either:
1. Silica and glass-fiber insulation felts and blankets - minimum 6 lb./ft3 density.
D. Construction: Inner and outer covering with interstitial insulation material shall be
joined into a single assembly using a double sewn lock stitch with 4-6 stitches/inch.
The thread used shall be able to withstand minimum 550°F surface temperatures
without degradation. The use of hog rings, staples, and wires for closure of assembly
are not acceptable. The interstitial insulation shall be sewn as an integral part of the
inner and outer coverings to prevent shifting of the insulation. Insulation pins are not
an allowable method of preventing the insulation from shifting and shall not be used.
E. No raw cut jacket edges shall be exposed.
F. Jackets shall be fastened to equipment and piping components using hook and loop
(Velcro) straps and minimum 1" slide buckles.
G. Jacket coverings shall have an inner covering edge with a continuous strip of hook &
loop closure (Velcro) that is parallel to the seam and overlaps the outer covering by a
minimum of 2 inches.
735
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 07 19 - 4 HVAC PIPING INSULATION
H. Manufacturers:
1. Firwin Corp
2. Lewco Specialty Products
3. ThermaXX Jackets LLC
4. Approved equivalent
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Install insulation after piping has been tested. Pipe shall be clean, dry and free of rust
before applying insulation.
B. Patch and repair torn insulation. Paint to match adjacent insulation surface.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:
1. Install materials per manufacturer's instructions, building codes and industry
standards.
2. Continue insulation with vapor barrier through penetrations. This applies to all
insulated piping. Maintain fire rating of all penetrations.
3. All piping and insulation that does not meet 25/50 that is in an air plenum shall
have written approval from the Authority Having Jurisdiction and the local fire
department for authorization and materials approval. If approval has been
allowed, the non-rated material shall be wrapped with a product that has been
listed and labeled having a flame spread index of not more than 25 and a smoke-
developed index of not more than 50 when tested as a composite in accordance
with ASTM E84 or UL 723.
4. On 1" and smaller piping routed through metal wall studs, provide a plastic
grommet to protect the piping. The piping shall be insulated between the wall
studs, and the insulation shall butt up to each stud.
B. Insulated Piping Operating Below 60°F:
1. Insulate fittings, valves, unions, flanges, flexible connections, flexible hoses, and
expansion joints. Seal all penetrations of vapor barrier.
C. Insulated Piping Operating Between 60°F and 140°F:
1. Do not insulate flanges and unions, but bevel and seal ends of insulation at such
locations. Insulate all fittings, valves and strainers.
736
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 07 19 - 5 HVAC PIPING INSULATION
D. Refrigerant Piping:
1. On refrigerant piping (25°F and above) and not required to meet the 25/50
flame/smoke, provide at each strut or clevis support an insulation coupling to
support pipe and to accept insulation thickness of adjoining insulation, to prevent
insulation from sagging and crushing. The coupling shall be suitable for planned
temperatures, use with specified pipe material, and shall be a 360°, one-piece
cylindrical segment. Use mechanical fasteners where coupling cannot be
installed on pipe during installation. Contractor shall apply adhesive to ends of
insulation entering insulation coupling to maintain vapor barrier.
E. Exposed Piping:
1. Locate and cover seams in least visible locations.
2. Where exposed insulated piping extends above the floor, provide a sheet metal
guard around the insulation extending 12" above the floor. Guard shall be 0.016"
cylindrical smooth or stucco aluminum and shall fit tightly to the insulation.
3.3 SUPPORT PROTECTION
A. Provide a shield on all insulated piping at each support between the insulation jacket
and the support.
B. On all insulated piping greater than 1-1/2", provide shield with insulation insert of same
thickness and contour as adjoining insulation at each support, between the pipe and
insulation jacket, to prevent insulation from sagging and crushing. Inserts shall be as
follows:
1. The insert shall be suitable for planned temperatures, be suitable for use with
specific pipe material, and shall be a minimum 180° cylindrical segment the same
length as metal shields. Inserts shall be:
a. Molded hydrous calcium silicate (only use for pipes with operating
temperatures above 90°F, with a minimum compressive strength of 100 psi
is acceptable for pipe sizes 14" and below. For pipe sizes larger than 14",
provide rolled steel plate in addition to the shield.
b. Cellular glass (for all temperature ranges) with a minimum compressive
strength of 90 psi is acceptable for pipe sizes 14" and below. For pipe sizes
larger than 14, provide rolled steel plate in addition to the shield.
c. Phenolic (for pipes operating below 250°F with a minimum compressive
strength of 90 psi is acceptable for pipe sizes 14" and below. For pipe sizes
larger than 14", provide rolled steel plate in addition to the shield.
d. As an alternative to separate pipe insulation insert and saddle, properly
sized manufactured integral rigid insulation insert and shield assemblies
may be used.
1) Products:
a) Buckaroo CoolDry
b) Cooper/B-Line Fig. B3380 through B3384
c) Pipe Shields A1000, A2000
737
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 07 19 - 6 HVAC PIPING INSULATION
e. Insulation Couplings:
1) Molded thermoplastic slip coupling, -65°F to 275°F, sizes up to 4-1/8"
OD, and receive insulation thickness up to 1". Suitable for use
indoors or outdoors with UV stabilizers. Vertical insulation riser
clamps shall have a 1,000lb vertical load rating. On cold pipes
operating below 60°F, cover joint and coupling with vapor barrier
mastic to ensure continuous vapor barrier.
2) Horizontal Strut Mounted Insulated Pipe Manufacturers:
a) Klo-Shure or equal
3) Vertical Manufacturers:
a) Manufacturers: Klo-Shure Titan or equal
f. Rectangular blocks, plugs, or wood material are not acceptable.
g. Temporary wood blocking may be used by the Piping Contractor for proper
height; however, these must be removed and replaced with proper inserts
by the Insulation Contractor. Refer to Supports and Anchors specification
section for additional information.
C. Neatly finish insulation at supports, protrusions, and interruptions.
D. Install metal shields between all hangers or supports and the pipe insulation. Shields
shall be galvanized sheet metal, half-round with flared edges. Adhere shields to
insulation. On cold piping, seal the shields vapor-tight to the insulation as required to
maintain the vapor barrier, or add separate vapor barrier jacket.
3.4 INSULATION
A. Type A Insulation:
1. All Service Jackets: Seal all longitudinal joints with self-seal laps using a single
pressure sensitive adhesive system. Do not staple.
2. Insulation without self-seal lap may be used if installed with Benjamin Foster 85-
20 or equivalent Chicago Mastic, 3M or Childers lap adhesive.
3. Fittings, Valve Bodies and Flanges: For 4" and smaller pipes, insulate with 1 lb.
density insulation wrapped under compression to a thickness equal to the
adjacent pipe insulation. For pipes over 4", use mitered segments of pipe
insulation. Finish with preformed plastic fitting covers. Secure fitting covers with
pressure sensitive tape at each end. Overlap tape at least 2" on itself. For pipes
operating below 60°F, seal fitting covers with vapor retarder mastic in addition to
tape.
B. Type B Insulation:
1. Install per manufacturers instructions or ASTM C1710.
738
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 07 19 - 7 HVAC PIPING INSULATION
2. Elastomeric Cellular Foam: Where possible, slip insulation over the open end of
pipe without slitting. Seal all butt ends, longitudinal seams, and fittings with
adhesive. At elbows and tees, use mitered connections. Do not compress or
crush insulation at cemented joints. Joints shall be sealed completely and not
pucker or wrinkle. Paint the outside of outdoor insulation with two coats of latex
enamel paint recommended by the manufacturer.
3. Insulation Installation on Straight Pipes and Tubes:
a. Seal longitudinal seams and end joints with manufacturer's recommended
adhesive to eliminate openings in insulation that allow passage of air to
surface being insulated.
b. Insulation must be installed in compression to allow for expansion and
contraction. Insulation shall be pushed onto the pipe, never pulled.
Stretching of insulation may result in open seams and joints.
4. Insulation Installation on Valves and Pipe Specialties:
a. Install preformed sections of same material as straight segments of pipe
insulation when available.
b. When preformed sections are not available, install mitered sections of pipe
insulation to valve body.
c. Arrange insulation to permit access to packing and to allow valve operation
without disturbing insulation.
C. Type C Insulation:
1. Seal all longitudinal joints with manufacturer approved adhesive. Secure butt joint
strips in a similar manner.
2. Insulate fittings with prefabricated fittings.
3.5 JACKET COVER INSTALLATION
A. Metal Covering:
1. Provide vapor barrier as specified for insulation type. Cover with aluminum jacket
covering with seams located on the bottom of horizontal piping. Include fittings,
joints and valves.
2. Seal all interior and exterior butt joints with metal draw bands and sealant. Seal
all exterior joints watertight.
3. Interior joints do not need to be sealed.
4. Use metal covering on the following pipes:
a. All exterior piping.
b. All exposed piping in areas noted on drawings.
END OF SECTION 23 07 19
739
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 09 05 - 1 SMALL EQUIPMENT
CONTROLS
SECTION 23 09 05
SMALL EQUIPMENT CONTROLS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Complete System of Automatic Controls.
B. Control Devices, Components, Wiring and Material.
C. Instructions for Owners.
D. Remodeling.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing the products specified in this
Section with minimum five years' experience.
B. TCC: Company specializing in the work of this section with minimum three years
temperature control experience.
C. Technician: Minimum three years' experience installing commercial temperature
control systems.
D. TCCs are limited to firms regularly employing a minimum of one full-time temperature
control technician within 100 miles of the job site.
E. Control low (24V) and control line (120V) voltage wiring, conduit, and related switches
and relays required for the automatic control and/or interlock of motors and equipment,
including final connection, are to be furnished and installed under this section.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for
Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
B. ANSI/ASHRAE Standard 135-2016: BACnet® - A Data Communication Protocol for
Building Automation and Control Networks, including all amendments.
C. ANSI/NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 volts Maximum).
D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
E. ANSI/NFPA 90A - Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.
F. ASHRAE 62.1 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
740
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 09 05 - 2 SMALL EQUIPMENT
CONTROLS
G. ASHRAE 85 - Automatic Control Terminology for Heating, Ventilating, Air Conditioning.
H. FCC CFR 47 - Radio Frequency Devices
I. Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) Publication 197 - AES-128
Advanced Encryption Standard
J. Federal Information Processing Standards (FIPS) Publication 198 - HMAC Keyed
Hash Message Authentication Code
K. Title 24 Part 6 California Energy Code (latest adopted edition)
L. Title 24 Part 6 California Mechanical Code (latest adopted edition)
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Equipment Coordination:
1. The Mechanical Contractor shall obtain approved equipment submittals from
other contractors to determine equipment wiring connections, to choose
appropriate controllers, and to provide programming.
2. Coordinate the control interface of all equipment with the equipment
manufacturers prior to submittal submission.
B. Shop Drawings:
1. Submit shop drawings per Section 23 05 00. In addition, submit an electronic
copy of the shop drawings in Adobe Acrobat (.pdf) format to the Owner for
review.
2. Cross-reference all control components and point names in a single table located
at the beginning of the submittal with the identical nomenclature used in this
section.
3. System Architecture: Provide riser diagrams of wiring between central control
unit and all control panels. This shall include specific protocols associated with
each level within the architecture. Identify all interface equipment between CPU
and control panels.
4. Diagrams shall include:
a. Wiring diagrams and layouts for each control panel showing all termination
numbers.
b. Schematic diagrams for all control, communication, and power wiring.
Provide a schematic drawing of the central system installation. Label all
cables and ports with computer manufacturers' model numbers and
functions. Show all interface wiring to the control system.
c. Identification of all control components connected to emergency power.
d. Schematic diagrams for all field sensors and controllers.
e. A schematic diagram of each controlled system. The schematics shall have
all control points labeled. The schematics shall graphically show the
location of all control elements in the system.
741
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 09 05 - 3 SMALL EQUIPMENT
CONTROLS
f. A schematic wiring diagram for each controlled system. Each schematic
shall have all elements labeled. Where a control element is the same as
that shown on the control system schematic, label it with the same name.
Label all terminals.
g. A tabular instrumentation list for each controlled system. The table shall
show element name, type of device, manufacturer, model number and
product data sheet number.
h. All installation details and any other details required to demonstrate that the
system will function properly.
i. All interface requirements with other systems.
5. The network infrastructure shall conform to the published guidelines for wire type,
length, number of nodes per channel, termination, and other relevant wiring and
infrastructure criteria as published. The number of nodes per channel shall be no
more than 80% of the defined segment (logical or physical) limit in order to
provide future system enhancement with minimal infrastructure modifications.
6. Sequences: Submit a complete description of the operation of the control system,
including sequences of operation. The description shall include and reference a
schematic diagram of the controlled system. The wording of the control
sequences in the submittal shall match verbatim that included in the construction
documents to ensure there are no sequence deviations from that intended by the
Architect/Engineer. Clearly highlight any deviations from the specified sequences
on the submittals.
7. Points List Schedule: Submit a complete points list of all points to be connected
to the TCS and FMCS. The points list for each system controller shall include
both inputs and outputs (I/O), point number, the controlled device associated with
the I/O point, the location of the I/O device, and reference drawings. Where a
control point is the same as that shown on the control system schematic, label it
with the same name. Points list shall specifically identify alarms, trends, event
history, archive, totalization, graphic points, and all mapped points from other
systems (security systems, lighting control, fire alarm, etc.). Provide points lists,
point naming convention, and factory support information for systems provided
and integrated into the FMCS.
8. Product Data Sheets: Required for each component that includes: unique
identification tag that is consistent throughout the submittal, manufacturer's
description, technical data, performance curves, installation/maintenance
instructions, and other relevant items. When manufacturer's literature applies to a
product series rather than a specific product, the data specifically applicable to
the project shall be highlighted or clearly indicated by other means. Each
submitted piece of literature and drawings shall clearly reference the specification
and/or drawing that the submittal is to cover. General catalogs shall not be
accepted as cutsheets to fulfill submittal requirements.
9. Provide documentation of submitted products that have been tested and listed by
the BACnet Testing Laboratory (BTL) or provide a letter on the manufacturer's
company letterhead indicating the anticipated date by which testing is expected
to be completed. If, for any reason, BTL testing and listing has not been
completed, a written commitment to upgrade installed controls to a version that
meets BTL testing and listing requirements if problems are found during BTL
testing is required.
742
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 09 05 - 4 SMALL EQUIPMENT
CONTROLS
10. Control System Demonstration and Acceptance: Provide a description of the
proposed process, along with all reports and checklists to be used.
11. Clearly identify work by others in the submittal.
12. Quantities of items submitted may be reviewed but are the responsibility of the
Contractor to verify.
C. Operation and Maintenance Manual:
1. In addition to the requirements of Section 23 05 00, submit an electronic copy of
the O&M manuals in PDF format.
2. Provide three complete sets of manuals.
3. Each O&M manual shall include:
a. Table of contents with indexed tabs dividing information as outlined below.
b. Definitions: List of all abbreviations and technical terms with definitions.
c. Warranty Contacts: Names, addresses, and 24-hour telephone numbers of
contractors installing equipment and controls and service representatives of
each.
d. Licenses, Guarantees, and Warranties: Provide documentation for all
equipment and systems.
e. System Components: Alphabetical list of all system components, with the
name, address, and telephone number of the vendor.
f. Operating Procedures: Include procedures for operating the control
systems; logging on/off; enabling, assigning, and reporting alarms;
generating reports; collection, displaying, and archiving of trended data;
overriding computer control; event scheduling; backing up software and
data files; and changing setpoints and other variables.
g. Programming: Description of the programming language (including syntax),
statement descriptions (including algorithms and calculations used), point
database creation and modification, program creation and modification, and
use of the editor.
h. Engineering, Installation, and Maintenance: Explain how to design and
install new points, panels, and other hardware; recommended preventive
maintenance procedures for all system components, including a schedule
of tasks (inspection, cleaning, calibration, etc.), time between tasks, and
task descriptions; how to debug hardware problems; and how to repair or
replace hardware. A list of recommended spare parts.
i. Original Software: Complete original issue CDs for all software provided,
including operating systems, programming language, operator workstation
software, and graphics software. In lieu of CDs, provide login information
and access to a web application where the current information can be
downloaded at no additional cost.
D. Training Manual:
1. Provide a course outline and training manuals for each training class. Provide
login information and access to a web application where the current training
manuals can be downloaded at no additional cost.
743
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 09 05 - 5 SMALL EQUIPMENT
CONTROLS
E. Record Documents:
1. Submit record documentation per Section 23 05 00.
2. Provide a complete set of "as-built" drawings and application software on CDs.
Provide drawings as AutoCAD¢¢ or Visio¢¢ compatible files. Provide two copies
of the "as-built" drawings with revisions clearly indicated in addition to the
documents on compact disk. Provide all product data sheets in PDF format.
3. Submit two hard copies and one electronic copy of as-built versions of the shop
drawings, including product data and record drawings with revisions clearly
indicated. Provide floor plans showing actual locations of control components
including panels, thermostats, sensors, and hardware.
4. Provide all completed testing and commissioning reports and checklists.
5. Submit printouts of all graphic screens with current values (temperatures,
pressures, etc.) to the A/E verifying completion and proper operation of all points.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE AND HANDLING
A. Provide factory-shipping cartons for each piece of equipment and control device.
Maintain cartons through shipping, storage, and handling as required to prevent
equipment damage. Store equipment and materials inside and protected from weather.
B. Factory-Mounted Components: Where control devices specified in this section are
indicated to be factory mounted on equipment, arrange for shipping control devices to
unit manufacturer.
1.6 AGENCY AND CODE APPROVALS
A. All products shall have the following agency approvals. Provide verification that the
approvals exist for all submitted products with the submittal package.
1. UL-916; Energy Management Systems.
2. C-UL listed to Canadian Standards Association C22.2 No. 205-M1983 "Signal
Equipment."
3. EMC Directive 89/336/EEC (European CE Mark).
4. FCC, Part 15, Subpart J, Class A Computing Devices.
1.7 ACRONYMS
A. Acronyms used in this specification are as follows:
1. PICS - Product Interoperability Compliance Statement
2. TCS - Temperature Control System
1.8 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Provide materials and labor necessary to connect factory-supplied control
components.
B. Provide central and remote hardware, software, and interconnecting wire and conduit
where required.
744
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 09 05 - 6 SMALL EQUIPMENT
CONTROLS
C. For each touchscreen display, mobile application, and web user interface provided,
furnish one legal copy of all software tools, configuration tools, management tools, and
utilities used during system commissioning and installation. All tools shall be readily
available in the market. Contractor shall convey to the Owner all software tools and
their legal licenses at project closeout.
1.9 JOB CONDITIONS
A. Cooperation with Other Trades: Coordinate the Work of this section with that of other
sections to ensure that the Work will be carried out in an orderly fashion. It is this
Contractor's responsibility to check the Contract Documents for possible conflicts
between the Work of this section and that of other crafts in equipment location; pipe,
duct and conduit runs; electrical outlets and fixtures; air diffusers; and structural and
architectural features.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Refer to Section 23 05 00 for warranty requirements.
B. Within the warranty period, any defects in the work provided under this section due to
faulty materials, methods of installation or workmanship shall be promptly (within 48
hours after receipt of notice) repaired or replaced by this Contractor at no expense to
the Owner.
C. Update all software and back-ups during warranty period and all user documentation
on the Owner's archived software disks.
1.11 WARRANTY ACCESS
A. The Owner shall grant to this Contractor reasonable access to the TCS and FMCS
during the warranty period.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 OPERATOR INTERFACES
A. Touchscreen Display:
1. 10" color touchscreen display that allows the users to accomplish the following
tasks:
a. Control the setpoints for multiple pieces of equipment with a single touch.
Setpoint adjustment by the occupant shall be bound by editable limits.
Occupant override of the system/equipment operating mode shall be
possible with a single touch on the touchscreen display.
b. The touchscreen display shall provide user access to a system schedule.
Users shall have the ability to schedule events more than one year in
advance. Exception schedules and holidays shall be shown clearly on the
calendar, visible to the occupant on the touchscreen display.
745
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 09 05 - 7 SMALL EQUIPMENT
CONTROLS
c. The touchscreen display shall offer PIN control, which shall limit system
control access to only those with proper login credentials.
d. The touchscreen display shall display the alerts that require service of the
connected equipment.
2.2 ZONE SENSORS
A. Temperature Sensors:
1. Room Temperature Sensor:
a. Sensor Only: Two-piece construction, ventilated plastic enclosure, off-white
color, thermistor sensing element or resistance temperature device (RTD),
45°F to 90°F operating range, ± 0.50°F accuracy, no setpoint adjustment or
override button.
b. Sensor with Setpoint Adjustment: Two-piece construction, ventilated plastic
enclosure, off-white color, thermistor sensing element or resistance
temperature device (RTD), 45°F to 90°F operating range, ± 0.50°F
accuracy, with exposed single setpoint adjustment (no numeric temperature
scale - provide with a single warmer/cooler or red/blue visual scale), no
override button.
c. Sensor with Override: Two-piece construction, ventilated plastic enclosure,
off-white color, thermistor sensing element or resistance temperature
device (RTD), 45°F to 90°F operating range, ± 0.50°F accuracy,
occupied/unoccupied override button with LED, no setpoint adjustment.
d. Sensor with Setpoint Adjustment and Override: Two-piece construction,
ventilated plastic enclosure, off-white color, thermistor sensing element or
resistance temperature device (RTD), 45°F to 90°F operating range, ±
0.50°F accuracy, with exposed single setpoint adjustment (no numeric
temperature scale - provide with a warmer/cooler or red/blue visual scale),
occupied/unoccupied override button with LED.
e. Sensors shall include the following functions:
1) A signal strength on the space sensor display.
2) Error codes shall be displayed on the digital display. Error codes
shall include: not associated, address to 000, improper software
configuration, input voltage too high, or general sensor failure. Codes
shall be indicated on inside of sensor back cover.
3) Text display shall be a minimum font size of 12 points.
4) Provide an LCD display readable in low light conditions, and text
display shall be a minimum font size of 12 points.
5) Space/wall sensors shall be supplied with batteries having a
minimum life of 15 years.
6) Space/wall sensors shall be supplied with power harvesting
capabilities to supplement battery life.
746
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 09 05 - 8 SMALL EQUIPMENT
CONTROLS
B. Carbon Dioxide Sensors:
1. Microprocessor based non-dispersive infrared sensor with range of 0 to 2,000
ppm CO2 with ± 100 ppm accuracy, maximum drift (compensated) of ± 5% full
scale in five years, VOC software and hardware sensing, duct mounting where
applicable, 0-10V dc or 4-20 mA output directly proportional to ppm, adjustable
alarm limit, membrane filter, and terminal block. The diffusion gas chamber in the
sensor shall incorporate a reflective light pipe or wave guide surrounded by a gas
permeable membrane that prevents particulate contamination of the sensor. Unit
shall have selectable IAQ mode with output signal and sum of CO2 and VOC
levels.
2.3 CONDUIT AND BOXES
A. Conduit and Boxes: Refer to Electrical Section 26 05 33 for materials, sizing, and other
requirements.
B. Conduit and Box Identification (Color and Labeling):
1. Refer to the Temperature Control Contractor notes located on the mechanical
cover sheet for raceway and box color requirements.
2. Refer to Electrical Section 26 05 53 for raceway and box labeling requirements.
2.4 WIRE AND CABLE
A. Wire and Cable: Refer to Electrical Section 26 05 13 for wire and cable materials.
1. Wire and Cable Color: Refer to the Temperature Control Contractor notes
located on the mechanical cover sheet for wire and cable color requirements.
2.5 SEQUENCE OF OPERATION (PRESCRIPTIVE)
A. The following items are prescriptive sequences. Refer to the drawings for the complete
sequence of operations.
B. System Operating Modes: The system controller shall send the equipment controllers
Occupied/Unoccupied, Morning Warm-up/Pre-cool, and Heat/Cool modes. If
communication is lost, the equipment controllers shall operate using default modes
and setpoints.
1. Night Setback: During unoccupied mode, the system shall shut off. If the zone
temperature drifts to the unoccupied heating or cooling setpoint, the system shall
start up to heat or cool the zone while the OA damper remains closed (unless
economizing).
2. Optimal Start: The system controller shall automatically determine the optimal
start time such that each zone reaches its occupied setpoint just in time for
scheduled occupancy.
3. Demand Controlled Ventilation: For those zones equipped with an occupancy
sensor or CO2 sensor, outdoor airflow shall be reset based on occupancy status
and/or measured CO2 concentration.
747
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 09 05 - 9 SMALL EQUIPMENT
CONTROLS
C. Single-Zone Constant Volume System:
1. Occupied Heat/Cool: The RTU shall operate the supply fan continuously and
modulate (or cycle) compressors, modulate (or stage) heat, and/or enable airside
economizing to maintain zone temperature at setpoint. The OA damper shall
open to bring in the required amount of ventilation.
2. Morning Warm-Up/Pre-Cool: The RTU shall operate the supply fan and modulate
(or cycle) compressors or modulate (or stage) heat to raise/lower zone
temperature to its occupied setpoint. The OA damper shall remain closed, unless
economizing.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL INSTALLATION
A. Verify that systems are ready to receive work. Beginning of installation means installer
accepts existing conditions.
B. Install system and materials in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
C. Install all operators, sensors, and control devices where accessible for service,
adjustment, calibration, and repair. Do not install devices where blocked by piping or
ductwork. Devices with manual reset or limit adjustments shall be installed below 6'-0"
if practical to allow inspection without using a ladder.
D. Verify locations of wall-mounted devices (such as thermostats, temperature and
humidity sensors, and other exposed sensors) with drawings and room details before
installation. Coordinate mounting heights to be consistent with other wall-mounted
devices. Maximum height above finished floor shall not exceed 48".
E. Mount control panels adjacent to associated equipment on vibration-free walls or
freestanding angle iron supports. One cabinet may accommodate more than one
system in same equipment room.
F. After completion of installation, test and adjust control equipment.
G. Check calibration of instruments. Recalibrate or replace.
H. Furnish and install conduit, wire, and cable per the National Electric Code, unless
noted otherwise in this section. All hardware, software, equipment, accessories, wiring
(power and sensor), relays, sensors, power supplies, transformers, and
instrumentation required for a complete and operational FMCS system, but not shown
on the electrical drawings, are the responsibility of the TCC.
748
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 09 05 - 10 SMALL EQUIPMENT
CONTROLS
I. Remodeling:
1. All room devices as indicated on the drawings shall be removed by this
Contractor. The Contractor shall also prepare the wall for finishes. Preparing the
wall shall include patching old anchor holes (after the anchoring device has been
removed) and sanding the wall to remove old paint outlines remaining from
original devices. The wall shall be painted to match the existing wall prior to the
installation of the new room device. If wall covering requires patching, the
Contractor shall furnish new wall covering to match existing. If new wall covering
is not available to match existing, the Contractor shall furnish a white acrylic or
Plexiglas plate, 1/4" thick and sized to cover the void.
J. Labels For Control Devices:
1. Provide labels indicating service of all control devices in panels and other
locations.
2. Labels may be made with permanent marking pen in the control panels if clearly
legible.
3.2 CONDUIT AND BOXES INSTALLATION
A. Conduit and Box Installation: Refer to Electrical Section 26 05 33 for execution and
installation.
B. Conduit and Box Identification (color and labeling) installation. Refer to Electrical
Section 26 05 53 for raceway and box identification installation.
C. Outlet Box Schedule: Thermostat/temperature sensor:
1. Dry Interior Locations: Provide 4" square galvanized steel with raised cover to fit
flush with finished wall line. When located in concrete block walls, provide square
edge title cover of sufficient depth to extend out to face of block or masonry
boxes.
3.3 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Wire and Cable Installation: Refer to Electrical Section 26 05 13 for execution and
installation.
B. Field Quality Control:
1. Inspect wire and cable for physical damage and proper connection.
2. Torque test conductor connections and terminations to manufacturer's
recommended values.
749
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 09 05 - 11 SMALL EQUIPMENT
CONTROLS
3. Protection of cable from foreign materials:
a. It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide adequate physical protection
to prevent foreign material application or contact with any cable type.
Foreign material is defined as any material that would negatively impact the
validity of the manufacturer's performance warranty. This includes, but is
not limited, to overspray of paint (accidental or otherwise), drywall
compound, or any other surface chemical, liquid or compound that could
come in contact with the cable, cable jacket or cable termination
components.
b. Overspray of paint on any cable, cable jacket or cable termination
component will not be accepted. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to
replace any component containing overspray, in its entirety, at no additional
cost to the project. Cleaning of the cables with harsh chemicals is not
allowed. This requirement is regardless of the PASS/FAIL test results of the
cable containing overspray. Should the manufacturer and warrantor of the
structured cabling system desire to physically inspect the installed condition
and certify the validity of the structured cabling system (via a signed and
dated statement by an authorized representative of the structured cabling
manufacturer), the Owner may, at their sole discretion, agree to accept said
warranty in lieu of having the affected cables replaced. In the case of
plenum cabling, in addition to the statement from the manufacturer, the
Contractor shall also present to the Owner a letter from the local Authority
Having Jurisdiction stating that they consider the plenum rating of the cable
to be intact and acceptable.
C. Installation Schedule:
1. Conduit terminations to all devices installed in applications with rotating
equipment, expansion/contraction or vibration shall be made with flexible metallic
conduit, unless noted otherwise. Final terminations to exterior devices installed in
damp or wet locations shall be made with liquidtight flexible metallic conduit.
Terminations in hazardous areas, as defined in the National Electrical Code,
shall be made with flexible conduit rated for the environment.
3.4 PREPARATION FOR BALANCING
A. Verify that all dampers are in the position indicated by the controller (e.g., open, closed
or modulating).
B. Check the calibration and setpoints of all controllers.
C. Check the locations of all thermostats for potential erratic operation from outside
influences such as sunlight, drafts, or cold walls.
D. Check that all sequences operate as specified. Verify that no simultaneous heating
and cooling occurs, unless specified. Observe that heating cannot begin at TAB reheat
terminals until the unit is at the minimum cfm.
E. Verify the operation of all interlock systems.
750
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 09 05 - 12 SMALL EQUIPMENT
CONTROLS
3.5 TEST AND BALANCE COORDINATION
A. The Contractor shall furnish a single set of all tools necessary to interface to the
control system for test and balance purposes.
B. The tools used during the test and balance process shall be returned at the completion
of the testing and balancing.
3.6 DEMONSTRATION AND ACCEPTANCE
A. At completion of installation, provide four hours minimum instruction for operators.
Demonstrate operation of all controls and systems. Describe the normal operation of
all equipment.
3.7 INSTALLATION OF SENSORS
A. Install sensors in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Mount sensors rigidly and adequately for the environment within which the sensor
operates.
C. All wires attached to sensors shall be air sealed in their raceways or in the wall to stop
air transmitted from other areas affecting sensor readings.
D. Averaging sensors and low limits shall be installed at the top of the assembly with the
element on a slight downward incline away from the sensor making a serpentine
pattern over the cross-sectional area with elements spaced not over 12" apart and
within 6" of the top and bottom of the area.
E. Install all wall-mounted CO2 sensors between 3 feet and 6 feet above the floor.
END OF SECTION 23 09 05
751
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 31 00 - 1 DUCTWORK
SECTION 23 31 00
DUCTWORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Galvanized Ductwork
B. Ductwork Reinforcement
C. Ductwork Sealants
D. Rectangular Ductwork
E. Round Ductwork
F. Exposed Ductwork (Rectangular, Round, or Oval)
G. Flexible Duct
H. Acoustical Lagging
I. Leakage Testing
J. Ductwork Penetrations
1.2 REFERENCES: Conform to all applicable requirements of the following publications:
A. ADC Flexible Duct Performance and Installation Standards, 3rd Edition 1996.
B. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for
Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
C. ANSI/AWS A5.11M (1997) - Specification for Nickel and Nickel Alloy Welding
Electrodes for Shielded Metal Arc Welding.
D. ASHRAE - Handbook 2012 Systems and Equipment; Chapter 19 - Duct Construction.
E. ASHRAE - Handbook 2013 Fundamentals; Chapter 21 - Duct Design.
F. ASHRAE 170 (latest published edition) - Ventilation of Health Care Facilities.
G. ASTM A90 - Standard Test Method for Weight (Mass) of Coating on Iron and Steel
Articles with Zinc or Zinc-Alloy Coatings.
H. ASTM A653 - Steel Sheet, Zinc-Coated (Galvanized) or zinc-Iron Alloy-Coated
(Galvannealed) by the Hot-Dip Process.
752
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 31 00 - 2 DUCTWORK
I. ASTM A924 - Specification for General Requirements for Steel Sheet, Metallic-Coated
by the Hot-Dip Process.
J. ASTM E90-02 - Standard Test Method for Laboratory Measurement of Airborne Sound
Transmission Loss of Building Partitions.
K. ASTM E413-87 - Classification for Rating Sound Insulation.
L. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation
of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
Chambers Version 1.1.
M. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
N. NFPA 90B - Installation of Warm Air Heating and Air- Conditioning Systems.
O. NFPA 96 - Ventilation Control and Fire Protection of Commercial Cooking Equipment.
P. SMACNA - Air Duct Leakage Test Manual.
Q. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards.
R. SMACNA - Round Industrial Duct Construction Standards - 1999 Edition.
S. UL 181 - Factory-Made Air Ducts and Air Connectors.
T. UL 181A - Closure Systems for Use with Rigid Air Ducts and Air Connectors
U. UL 181B - Closure Systems for Use with Flexible Air Ducts and Air Connectors.
V. CMC California Mechanical Code
W. CBC California Building Code
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings per Section 23 05 00.
B. Submit duct fabrication standards in compliance with SMACNA and these
specifications. Clearly indicate metal gauges, reinforcement, and joining methods
intended for use for each pressure classification. Furnish details of all common duct
fittings and joint connections to be used on this project.
C. The Architect/Engineer may require field verification of sheet metal gauges and
reinforcing to verify compliance with these specifications. At the request of the
Architect/Engineer, the contractor shall remove a sample of the duct for verification.
The contractor shall repair as needed.
753
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 31 00 - 3 DUCTWORK
D. Duct Layout Drawings: Submit detailed duct layout drawings at 1/4" minimum scale
complete with the following information:
1. Actual duct routing, ductwork fittings, actual sheet metal dimensions including
insulation liner and wrap, duct hanger and support types, ductwork accessories,
etc. with lengths and weights noted.
2. Differentiate ducts that are wrapped. Include insulation thickness, type of
insulation, and acoustical lagging.
3. Room names and numbers, ceiling types, and ceiling heights.
4. Indicate location of all beams, bar joists, etc. along with bottom of steel
elevations for each member.
5. Verify clearances and interferences with other trades prior to preparing drawings.
IMEG will provide electronic copies of ventilation drawings for contractor's use if
the contractor signs and returns the "Electronic File Transfer" waiver. IMEG will
not consider blatant reproductions of original file copies an acceptable alternative
for this submittal. Refer also to Section 23 05 00. Contractor shall submit CAD
files to owner.
E. Duct Leakage Test Summary Report: Upon completion of the pressure test described
in Part 3, the Contractor shall submit an air duct leakage test summary report as
outlined in the SMACNA HVAC Duct Leakage Test Manual.
1.4 DEFINITIONS
A. Duct Sizes shown on drawings are inside clear dimensions. Maintain clear dimensions
inside any lining.
B. Transitions are generally not shown in single-line ductwork. Where sizes change at a
divided flow fitting, the larger size shall continue through the fitting.
C. Exterior Duct: Ductwork located outside the conditioned envelope including exposed
ductwork above the roof, outside exterior walls, in attics above insulated ceilings,
inside parking garages, and crawl spaces.
D. Interior Duct: Ductwork located within the conditioned envelope including return air
plenums and indirectly conditioned spaces.
1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Reference Coordination Drawings article in Section 23 05 00 for required duct systems
electronic CAD drawings to be provided to Coordinating Contractor for inclusion into
composite coordination drawings.
B. Duct drawings shall be at 1/4" minimum scale complete with the following information:
1. Actual duct routing, ductwork fittings, actual sheet metal dimensions including
insulation liner and wrap, duct hanger and support types, ductwork accessories,
etc. with lengths and weights noted.
2. Differentiate ducts that are lined or wrapped. Include insulation thickness, type of
insulation, and acoustical lagging.
3. Location and size of all duct access doors.
4. Room names and numbers, ceiling types, and ceiling heights.
754
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 31 00 - 4 DUCTWORK
5. Indicate location of all beams, bar joists, etc. along with bottom of steel
elevations for each member.
6. IMEG will provide electronic file copies of ventilation drawings for contractor's use
if the contractor signs and returns an "Electronic File Transfer" waiver provided
by IMEG. IMEG will not consider blatant reproductions of original file copies an
acceptable alternative for coordination drawings. Architectural plans will need to
be obtained from the Architect. Contractor shall submit CAD files to owner.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SHAPE
A. Rectangular Duct - Single Wall:
1. General Requirements:
a. All ductwork gauges and reinforcements shall be as listed in SMACNA Duct
Construction Standards Chapter 2. Where necessary to fit in confined
spaces, furnish heaviest duct gauge and least space consuming
reinforcement.
2. Exceptions and modifications to the 2005 HVAC Duct Construction Standards
are:
a. All ducts shall be cross-broken or beaded.
b. Snap lock seams are not permitted.
c. Turning vanes shall be used in all 90° mitered elbows, unless clearly noted
otherwise on the drawings. Vanes shall be as follows:
1) Type 1:
a) Description: Single wall type with 22-gauge (0.029") or heavier
vanes, 3-1/4" blade spacing, and 4" to 4-1/2" radius. Vanes
hemmed if recommended by runner manufacturer. Runners
shall have extra-long locking tabs. C-value independently
tested at below 0.26. EZ Rail II by Sheet Metal Connectors or
equal.
b) Usage: Limited to 3,000 fpm and vane lengths 36" and under.
d. Where smooth radius rectangular elbows are shown, they shall be
constructed per SMACNA Figure 4-2. Type RE1 shall be constructed with a
centerline duct radius R/W of 1.0. Where shown on drawings, Type RE3
elbows with 3 vanes shall be used with centerline duct radius R/W of 0.6
(SMACNA r/W=0.1). RE1 or RE3 elbows may be used where mitered
elbows are shown if space permits. Mitered elbows (with or without turning
vanes) may not be substituted for radius elbows. Do not make branch
takeoffs within 4 duct diameters on the side of the duct downstream from
the inside radius of radius elbows.
e. Rectangular branch and tee connections in ducts over 1" pressure class
shall be 45° entry type per Figs. 4-5 and 4-6. Rectangular straight taps are
not acceptable above 1" pressure class.
755
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 31 00 - 5 DUCTWORK
f. Bellmouth fittings shown on return duct inlets shall expand at a 60-degree
total angle horizontally and vertically (space permitting) and have length of
at least 25% of the smallest duct dimension.
g. Round taps off rectangular unlined ducts shall be flanged conical or
bellmouth type (equal to Buckley Bellmouth or Sheet Metal Connectors E-Z
Tap), or 45° rectangular with transition to round (equal to Sheet Metal
Connectors Inc. High Efficiency Takeoff). Straight taps are acceptable if
pressure class is 1" or less, round duct is 12" diameter or less, and the tap
is not located between fans and TAB devices.
h. Duct offsets shall be constructed as shown on drawings. Additional offsets
required in the field shall be formed of mitered elbows without turning vanes
for offsets up to 30° maximum angle in accordance with SMACNA offset
Type 2. Offsets of greater than 30° angle shall be formed of radius elbows
with centerline radius R/W=1.0 or greater. SMACNA Type 1 offsets are not
permitted.
i. All lined duct shall utilize dovetail joints where round or conical taps occur.
The dovetail joints shall extend past the liner before being folded over.
j. Cushion heads are acceptable only downstream of TAB devices in ducts up
to ± 2" pressure class, and must be less than 6" in length.
k. Slide-on flanged transverse joint systems are acceptable provided they are
a manufactured product that has been tested for conformance with Chapter
2 of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for sheet and joint
deflection at the specified pressure class.
1) Apply sealant to all inside corners. Holes at corners are not
acceptable.
2) Manufacturers:
a) Ductmate Industries - 25/35/45
b) Nexus
c) Mez
d) WDCI
e) Other manufacturers must submit test data and fabrication
standards and receive Architect/Engineer's approval before any
fabrication begins.
l. Formed-on flanged transverse joint systems are acceptable provided they
are a manufactured product that has been tested for conformance with
Chapter 2 of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards for sheet
and joint deflection at the specified pressure class.
1) Apply sealant to all inside corners. Holes at corners are not
acceptable.
2) Flanges shall be 24-gauge minimum (not 26 gauge).
3) Manufacturers:
a) Lockformer TDC
b) TDF
c) United McGill
756
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 31 00 - 6 DUCTWORK
B. Round and Flat Oval Spiral Seam Ductwork - Single Wall:
1. Conform to applicable portions of Rectangular Duct Section. Round or flat oval
ductwork may be substituted for rectangular ductwork where approved by the
Architect/Engineer. The spiral seam ductwork shall meet the standards set forth
in this specification. The ductwork shall meet or exceed the specified cross-
sectional area and insulation requirements. The substitution shall be coordinated
with all other trades prior to installation.
2. 90° elbows shall be smooth radius or have a minimum of five sections with
mitered joints and R/D of at least 1.5.
3. Duct and fittings shall meet the required minimum gauges listed in chapter 3 of
the SMACNA requirements for the specified pressure class. Ribbed and
lightweight duct are not permitted.
4. Ductwork shall be suitable for velocities up to 5,000 fpm.
5. Divided flow fittings may be made as separate fittings or factory installed taps
with sound, airtight, continuous welds at intersection of fitting body and tap.
6. Ducts with minor axis less than 22" shall be spiral seam type. Larger ducts may
be rolled, longitudinal welded seam type. SMACNA seams RL-2 and RL-3 are
not permitted.
7. Transverse Joint Connections:
a. Crimped joints are not permitted.
b. Ducts and fittings 36" in diameter and smaller shall have slip joint
connections. Size fitting ends to slip inside mating duct sections with
minimum 2-inch insertion length and a stop bead. Use inside slip couplings
for duct-to-duct joints, and outside slip couplings for fitting-to-fitting joints.
c. Ducts and fittings larger than 36" shall have flanged connections.
d. Secure all joints with at least 3 sheet metal screws before sealing.
e. Manufacturers:
1) Slide-on Flanges:
2) Ductmate Industries - SpiralMate
3) Accuflange
4) Sheet Metal Connectors are acceptable.
f. Manufacturers, Self-Sealing Duct Systems:
1) Lindab
2) Ward "Keating Coupling"
2.2 MATERIAL AND APPLICATION SPECIFIC
A. Galvanized Steel:
1. General Requirements:
a. Duct and reinforcement materials shall conform to ASTM A653 and A924.
b. Interior Ductwork and reinforcements: G60 galvanized (0.60 ounces per
square foot total zinc coating for two sides per ASTM A90) unless noted
otherwise.
757
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 31 00 - 7 DUCTWORK
c. Exterior Ductwork: G90 galvanized (0.90 ounces per square foot total zinc
coating for two sides per ASTM A90) unless noted otherwise. G60 is not
acceptable for exterior use.
d. Ductwork reinforcement shall be of galvanized steel.
2. Duct Hangers and Support:
a. Ductwork supports shall be of galvanized or painted steel.
b. All fasteners shall be galvanized or cadmium plated.
c. Strap Hangers: Strap hanger shall be a minimum of 1 inch, 18 gauge
galvanized steel attached to the bottom of ducts at 8'-0" OC and as
required by CMC/UMC and SMACNA guidelines.
d. Cable Hangers:
1) Aircraft cable and slip cable hangers are acceptable for ducts up to
18" diameter. Protective sleeve tubing shall be used on the cable
when supporting duct with exterior insulation. Corner saddles are
required when supporting rectangular ductwork. Manufacturers;
Supports:
a) Gripple
b) Ductmate
c) Duro Dyne
d) Architect/Engineer approved
2) Aircraft cable with 2-point support in standard horseshoe
arrangement. Protective sleeve tubing shall be used on the cable
when supporting duct with exterior insulation. 8'-0" OC and as
required by CMC/UMC and SMACNA guidelines.
e. Integral Corner Connector Hanger: Integral hanger and corner assembly for
use with TDC/TDF style duct flanges. Die stamped offset hanger connects
to the flanged corner assembly. For use with aircraft cable or 1/4" or 3/8"
diameter threaded rods. Tested to hold up to 1,400 lbs. Install per
manufacturer™™s ratings and instructions.
1) Manufacturers; Supports:
a) EZ Hanger
2.3 DUCTWORK REINFORCEMENT
A. All reinforcement shall be external to the duct except that tie rods may be used with
the following limitations.
1. Ducts must be over 18" wide.
2. Duct dimensions must be increased 2" in one dimension (h or w) for each row of
tie rods installed.
3. Tie rods must not exceed 1/2" diameter.
4. Manufacturer of tie rod system must certify pressure classifications of various
arrangements, and this must be in the shop drawings.
758
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 31 00 - 8 DUCTWORK
2.4 DUCTWORK SEALANTS
A. One-part joint sealers shall be water-based mastic systems that meet the following
requirements: maximum 48-hour cure time, service temperature of -20°F to +175°F,
resistant to mold, mildew and water, flame spread rating below 25 and smoke-
developed rating below 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, suitable for all
SMACNA seal classes and pressure classes. Mastic used to seal flexible ductwork
shall be marked UL 181B-M.
B. Two-part joint sealers shall consist of a minimum 3" wide mineral-gypsum compound
impregnated fiber tape and a liquid sealant. Sealant system shall meet the following
requirements: maximum 48-hour cure time, service temperature of 0°F to 200°F,
resistant to mold, mildew, and water, flame spread rating below 25 and smoke
developed rating below 50 when tested in accordance with ASTM E84, suitable for all
SMACNA seal classes and pressure classes. Joint sealers for use on exterior weather
exposed ductwork shall be rated for -30°F to +175°F and 2000-hour minimum UV
resistance per ASTM G-53.
C. Pressure sensitive tape used for sealing ductwork shall be minimum 2.5-inch wide,
listed and marked UL 181A-P, having minimum 60 oz/inch peel adhesion to steel, and
service temperature range from -20°F to +250°F.
D. Where pressure sensitive tape is called for on drawings and specifications for sealing
flexible ductwork, tape shall be minimum 2.5-inch wide, UL 181 B-FX listed, and
marked tape having minimum 60 oz/inch peel adhesion to steel and service
temperature range from -20°F to +250°F.
1. Manufacturers, Pressure-Sensitive Tape:
a. Venture Tape 1581A
b. Compac #340
c. Scotch Foil Tape 3326
d. Polyken 339
2.5 FLEXIBLE DUCT
A. Flexible duct shall be listed and labeled as UL 181 Class 1 Air Duct Material, and shall
comply with NFPA 90A and 90B, and meet GSA, FHA and other U.S. Government
agency standards. Flexible duct shall bear the ADC Seal of Certification.
B. Flame Spread/Smoke Developed: Not over 25/50.
C. Stretch all flexible duct to prevent sags and reduce air friction. Shorten and reinstall all
sagging or loose flexible duct. Avoid sharp elbows. Elbows shall maintain 1.5 diameter
centerline turning radius.
D. Install per the SMACNA Flexible Duct Manual. Secure inner layer with draw band.
Wrap with pressure sensitive tape for protection prior to installing draw band. Pressure
sensitive tape alone is not acceptable.
759
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 31 00 - 9 DUCTWORK
E. Standard:
1. Flexible duct shall have corrosion-resistant wire helix, bonded to an inner liner
that prevents air from contacting the insulation, covered with minimum 1-1/2", 3/4
lb/cf density fiberglass insulation blanket, sheathed in a vapor barrier of
metalized polyester film laminated to glass mesh. Usage: All areas unless noted
otherwise.
2. Flexible duct shall have polymer wire helix, bonded to an inner liner that prevents
air from contacting the insulation, covered with minimum 1-1/2" thick, 3/4 lb/cf
density fiberglass insulation blanket, sheathed in a vapor barrier of polyester film
laminated to glass mesh. Usage: MRI rooms.
3. Inner liner shall be airtight and suitable for 6" WC static pressure through 16"
diameter. Outer jacket shall act as a vapor barrier only with permeance not over
0.1 perm per ASTM E96, Procedure A. "R" value shall not be less than 4.0
ft2*°F*hr/Btuh. Temperature range of at least 0-180°F. Maximum velocity of
4,000 fpm.
4. Usage:
a. Take-offs from supply ducts to inlets of terminal air boxes. Do not exceed
36" in length.
b. Connections to air inlets and outlets. Do not exceed 5'-0" in length.
F. Acoustic:
1. Flexible duct shall be acoustic rated in accordance with ASTM E477 and ADC
Test Code FD 72-RI by ETL. Insertion loss values noted below are for flow
velocities less than 2,500 fpm. Submittals shall include insertion losses ratings
per sizes and lengths listed below regardless of sizes shown on the drawings.
2. Flexible have corrosion-resistant wire helix, bonded to a nylon fabric core inner
liner that prevents air from contacting the insulation, covered with minimum 1-
1/2", 3/4 lb/cf density fiberglass insulation blanket, sheathed in a vapor barrier of
metalized polyester film laminated to glass mesh. Usage: All areas unless noted
otherwise.
3. Inner liner shall be airtight and suitable for 6" WC static pressure through 16"
diameter. Outer jacket shall act as a vapor barrier only with permeance not over
0.1 perm per ASTM E96, Procedure A. "R" value shall not be less than 4.0
ft2*ºF*hr/Btuh. Temperature range of at least 0-180ºF. Maximum velocity of
4,000 fpm.
4. Minimum Acoustic Insertion Losses per octave band:
a. Straight Duct:
Dia Length 63hz 125hz 250hz 500hz 1000hz 2000hz 4000hz
6" ø 6 ft 4.0 13 15 15 16 17 16
6" ø 3 ft 2.3 4.9 5.3 5.3 5.5 5.8 5.4
8" ø 6 ft 5.7 14 13 15 16 18 16
8" ø 3 ft 2.9 5.0 4.9 5.7 5.6 5.8 5.6
12" ø 6 ft 5.5 13 12 15 15 18 13
12" ø 3 ft 2.8 4.8 4.7 5.3 5.3 5.8 4.9
760
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 31 00 - 10 DUCTWORK
b. 90deg Elbow:
Dia Length 63hz 125h
z
250h
z
500h
z
1000hz 2000hz 4000hz
6" ø 6 ft 10 15 16 17 18 17 18
6" ø 3 ft 3.8 5.4 5.5 5.7 5.9 5.8 5.9
8" ø 6 ft 10 15 16 17 16 18 18
8" ø 3 ft 2.4 5.3 5.6 5.8 5.6 5.9 6.0
12" ø 6 ft 11 14 15 16 15 16 15
12" ø 3 ft 4.4 5.1 5.3 5.5 5.4 5.6 5.3
5. Usage:
a. Take-offs from supply ducts to inlets of terminal air boxes. Do not exceed
36" in length.
b. Connections to air inlets and outlets. Do not exceed 5'-0" in length.
c. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1) Flexmaster USA - Type 6
2) Thermaflex M-Ke
G. Radius Forming Elbows:
1. Flexible plastic radius forming elbow for use with flexible ducts to create 90deg
elbow. One size for 6" to 16" diameter ducts. UL listed for return plenum spaces.
2. Usage: All supply air terminals with flexible ductwork connection.
3. Installation: Attach to flex duct and secure draw bands without crushing flex duct
to form smooth radius elbow. Suspend radius forming elbow to structure. Install
per manufacturer's instructions.
4. Acceptable Manufacturers:
a. Hart & Cooley - Smartflow
b. Thermaflex - Flexflow
c. Titus - Flexright
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Provide openings in ducts for thermometers and controllers.
B. Locate ducts with space around equipment for normal operation and maintenance.
C. Do not install ducts or other equipment above electrical switchboards or panelboards.
This includes a dedicated space extending 25 feet from the floor to the structural
ceiling with width and depth equal to the electrical equipment. Unless intended to
serve these rooms, do not install any ductwork or equipment in electrical rooms,
transformer rooms, electrical closets, telephone rooms or elevator machine rooms.
761
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 31 00 - 11 DUCTWORK
D. Provide temporary closures of metal or taped polyethylene on open ducts to prevent
dust from entering ductwork.
E. Supply ductwork shall be free of construction debris, and shall comply with Level of the
SMACNA Duct Cleanliness for New Construction Guidelines.
F. Repair all duct insulation and liner tears.
G. Install manual volume dampers in branch supply ducts so all outlets can be adjusted.
Do not install dampers at air terminal device or in outlets, unless specifically shown.
H. Insulate terminal air box reheat coils. Seal insulation tight to form a tight vapor barrier.
I. Install flexible duct in accordance with the ADC Flexible Duct Performance and
Installation Standards.
J. Install all exterior ductwork per SMACNA Fig. 6-3. Where drawings do not indicate
otherwise, ductwork seams and joints shall be sealed watertight and pitched to shed
water.
K. Support all duct systems in accordance with the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction
Standards: Metal and Flexible and the SMACNA Seismic Restraint Manual: Guidelines
for Mechanical Systems, where applicable. Refer to Section 23 05 50 for seismic
requirements.
L. Install ducts with hangers and braces designed to withstand, without damage to
equipment, seismic force required by California Building Codes.
M. Adhesives, sealants, tapes, vapor retarders, films, and other supplementary materials
added to ducts, plenums, housing panels, silencers, etc. shall have flame
spread/smoke developed ratings of under 25/50 per ASTM E84, NFPA 255, or UL 723.
N. All duct support shall extend directly to building structure. Do not support ductwork
from pipe hangers unless coordinated with piping contractor prior to installation. Do not
allow lighting or ceiling supports to be hung from ductwork or ductwork supports.
1. Shape:
a. Rectangular Duct - Single Wall
b. Round Snap-Lock Seam Ductwork - Single Wall
3.2 DUCTWORK SEALING
A. General Requirements:
1. Openings, such as rotating shafts, shall be sealed with bushings or similar.
2. Pressure sensitive tape shall not be used as the primary sealant unless it has
been certified to comply with UL-181A or UL-181B by an independent testing
laboratory and the tape is used in accordance with that certification.
762
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 31 00 - 12 DUCTWORK
3. All connections shall be sealed including, but not limited to, taps, other branch
connections, access doors, access panels, and duct connections to equipment.
Sealing that would void product listings is not required. Spiral lock seams need
not be sealed.
4. Mastic-based duct sealants shall be applied to joints and seams in minimum 3
inch wide by 20 mil thick bands using brush, putty knife, trowel, or spray, unless
manufacturer's data sheet specifies other application methods or requirements.
B. All ducts systems, regardless of pressure class, shall be Seal Class A as defined by
Section 5-1 of SMACNA HVAC Air Duct Leakage Test Manual per the Energy Code,
unless specifically noted otherwise. Seal Class A shall include sealing of all transverse
joints, longitudinal seams, and duct wall penetrations with welds, gaskets, mastics, or
fabric-embedded mastic system. Joints are inclusive of, but not limited to, girth joints,
branch and sub-branch intersections, duct collar tap-ins, fitting subsections, louver and
air terminal connections to ducts, access door and access panel frames and jambs,
duct, plenum, and casing abutments to building structures.
3.3 TESTING
A. Interior Duct - Less than 3" WG (positive or negative):
1. Leak testing of these pressure classes is not normally required for interior
ductwork (inside the building envelope). However, leak tests will be required if, in
the opinion of the Architect/Engineer, the leakage appears excessive. All exterior
ductwork shall be tested. If duct has outside wrap, testing shall be done before it
is applied.
2. Leak test shall be at the Contractor's expense and shall require capping and
sealing all openings.
3. Seal ducts to bring the air leakage into compliance.
4. Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer five business days prior to
pressurizing ductwork for testing.
B. Interior Duct - 3" WG and Above (positive or negative):
1. A minimum of 25% of interior ductwork (inside the building envelope) shall be
tested. The Owner or designated representative shall select the sections to be
tested. If duct has outside wrap, testing shall be done before it is applied.
2. Duct system shall be completely pressure tested. If duct has outside wrap,
testing shall be done before it is applied.
3. Leak test shall be at the Contractor's expense and shall require capping and
sealing all openings.
4. Seal ducts to bring the air leakage into compliance.
5. Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer five business days prior to
pressurizing ductwork for testing.
C. Exterior Duct - 1/2" WG and Above (positive or negative):
1. All exterior ductwork (outside the building envelope) shall be completely pressure
tested. If duct has outside wrap, testing shall be done before it is applied.
2. Leak test shall be at the Contractor's expense and shall require capping and
sealing all openings.
3. Seal ducts to bring the air leakage into compliance.
763
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 31 00 - 13 DUCTWORK
4. Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer five business days prior to
pressurizing ductwork for testing.
D. Test Procedure:
1. Testing shall be as listed in the latest edition of the SMACNA HVAC Duct
Leakage Manual, with the following additional requirements:
a. The required leakage class for Seal Class A, rectangular ducts, shall be 4;
round shall be 2.
b. Test pressure shall be the specified duct pressure class. Testing at reduced
pressures and converting the results mathematically is not acceptable. This
is required to test the structural integrity of the duct system.
c. If any leak causes discernible noise at a distance of 3 feet, that leak shall
be eliminated, regardless of whether that section of duct passed the
leakage test.
d. All joints shall be felt by hand, and all discernible leaks shall be sealed.
e. Totaling leakage from several tested sections and comparing them to the
allowable leakage for the entire system is not acceptable. Each section
must pass the test individually.
f. Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer five business days prior to
pressurizing ductwork for testing. Failure to notify the Architect/Engineer of
pressure testing may require the contractor to repeat the duct pressure test
after proper notification.
g. Upon completion of the pressure test, the contractor shall submit an air duct
leakage test summary report as outlined in the SMACNA HVAC Duct
Leakage Test Manual.
h. All access doors, taps to terminal air boxes, and other accessories and
penetrations must be installed prior to testing. Including terminal air boxes
in the test is not required.
i. Positive pressure leakage testing is acceptable for negative pressure
ductwork.
3.4 DUCTWORK PENETRATIONS
A. All duct penetrations of firewalls shall have fire or fire/smoke dampers where required
by code.
B. Dampers shall be compatible with fire rating of wall assembly. Verify actual rating of
any wall being penetrated with Architect/Engineer.
C. Seal all duct penetrations of walls that are not fire rated by caulking or packing with
fiberglass. Install trim strip to cover vacant space and raw construction edges of all
openings in finished rooms. Install escutcheon ring at all round duct openings in
finished rooms. Trim strips and rings shall be same material and finish as exposed
duct.
END OF SECTION 23 31 00
764
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 33 00 - 1 DUCTWORK
ACCESSORIES
SECTION 23 33 00
DUCTWORK ACCESSORIES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Manual Volume Dampers.
B. Fire Dampers.
C. Backdraft Dampers.
D. Fabric Connectors.
E. Drip Pans.
F. Duct Access Doors.
G. Duct Test Holes.
H. Remote Volume Control Devices.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ASTM E477-06a - Standard Test Method for Measuring Acoustical and Airflow
Performance of Duct Liner Materials and Prefabricated Silencers.
B. ASTM E2336-04 - Standard Test Methods for Fire Resistive Grease Duct Enclosure
Systems.
C. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation
of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
Chambers Version 1.1.
D. NFPA 90A - Installation of Air-Conditioning and Ventilating Systems.
E. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards - Third Edition - 2005.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Include UL ratings, California State Fire Marshal approval and NFPA 90A, dynamic
ratings, leakage, pressure drop and maximum pressure data.
765
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 33 00 - 2 DUCTWORK
ACCESSORIES
D. Submit certification that ductwork accessories will withstand seismic forces defined in
Section 23 05 50. Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces
specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified
and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUAL VOLUME DAMPERS
A. Fabricate in accordance with SMACNA Duct Construction Standards, and as
indicated.
B. Fabricate single blade dampers for duct sizes to 9-1/2 x 30 inches.
C. Fabricate multi-blade damper of opposed blade pattern with maximum blade sizes 12"
x 72". Assemble center and edge crimped blades in prime coated or galvanized
channel frame with suitable hardware.
D. Except in round ductwork 12 inches and smaller, provide end bearings. On multiple
blade dampers, provide molded synthetic or oil-impregnated nylon or sintered bronze
bearings.
E. Provide locking quadrant regulators on single and multi-blade dampers.
F. On insulated ducts, mount quadrant regulators on stand-off mounting brackets, bases,
or adapters.
G. If blades are in open position and extend into the main duct, mount damper so blades
are parallel to airflow.
2.2 FIRE/SMOKE DAMPERS (FSD)
A. General:
1. Furnish and install fire/smoke dampers in ducts, where shown on the drawings,
at the point where they pass through a fire/smoke partition and in all other
locations required by the local Fire Department, the National Fire Protection
Association Pamphlet No. 90A, and all other applicable codes.
766
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 33 00 - 3 DUCTWORK
ACCESSORIES
2. Fire Resistance Rating: Assemblies shall be 1-1/2 hour rated under UL Standard
555 unless noted otherwise on drawings.
3. Airflow Rating: Dynamic rated at 2,000 fpm and 4" WC.
4. Temperature Rating: Assemblies shall be UL 555S listed for use in smoke control
system with a 250°F temperature rating.
5. Leakage Rating: Class II. Shall not leak over 20 cfm per square foot at 4" WC.
6. FSD dampers shall be furnished complete with factory-mounted actuators, and
the damper/operator assemblies shall meet all requirements listed below.
7. Where dampers are located in aluminum or stainless steel duct, provide stainless
steel dampers.
8. The complete assembly must be factory assembled, cycled and tested prior to
shipment.
9. All operators shall be located with easy access for servicing.
10. Contractor to field verify actuator installation and clearance requirements prior to
ordering. Actuator should not be taller than duct height. Rotate or turn over the
actuator if this is the case.
B. Construction:
1. Frame: 5 inches x minimum 16 gauge roll formed, galvanized steel hat-shaped
channel, reinforced at corners.
2. Sleeve: Dampers shall be installed in sleeves of sufficient thickness to comply
with UL555 Standard for Safety Fire Dampers listing of the damper. Where
UL555 permits sleeve thickness to be the same as that of the duct gauge, such
thickness shall not be less than that specified in NFPA 90A for breakaway style
sleeves. If a breakaway style duct/sleeve connection is not used, the sleeve shall
be a minimum of 16 gauge for dampers up to 36" wide by 24" high and 14 gauge
for dampers exceeding 36" wide by 24" high. Damper sleeve shall not extend
more than 6" beyond the firewall or partition unless damper is equipped with an
actuator or factory installed access door. Sleeve may extend up to 16" beyond
the firewall or partition on sides equipped with the actuator or factory installed
access door.
3. Blades: Opposed blade; airfoil-shaped, single piece, minimum 14 gauge double
skin. Galvanized steel. Maximum 6" damper blades.
4. Seals: Blade seal shall be silicone fiberglass material to maintain smoke leakage
rating to minimum of 450°F and galvanized steel for flame seal to 1,900°F. Seal
to be mechanically attached to blade edge. Jam seal shall be stainless steel,
flexible metal compression type.
5. Bearings: Self-lubricating stainless-steel sleeve, in extruded hole in frame.
6. Axle: Minimum 1/2" plated steel, hex shaped, mechanically attached to blade.
C. Electric Actuator: Externally mounted, electric direct coupled. Actuator shall be 24VAC.
Wiring by Electrical Contractor. "Stall type" actuators are NOT acceptable. Actuator
shall carry a manufacturers 5 year warranty. Fail to closed position.
D. Remote Position Indication: Blade position indicator switches - Two position indicator
switches linked directly to damper blade in order to allow remote indication of damper
blade position at the firefighter smoke control panel and remote indicator panel
mounted on ceiling below respective fire smoke damper.
767
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 33 00 - 4 DUCTWORK
ACCESSORIES
E. Access Door: Locate access door in ductwork for visual inspection and on the latch
side to replace link easily. Each access door shall have a label with letters at least 1/2"
high reading "FIRE/SMOKE DAMPER".
F. Supplemental California Requirements: Furnish and install California State Fire
Marshal approved combination smoke/fire dampers where shown on plans. The fire-
releasing device must also be listed by the CSFM for use with the damper assembly.
Melting fusible links are not acceptable. The dampers shall be provided in sleeves with
pre-mounted motor actuators The motors must be FSLF120 Belimo, and both damper
and motor are to have a minimum 5-year warranty. Dampers shall be rated for at least
20,000 complete cycles. Actuators shall draw no more than 27VA running or 10 VA
holding for 70"/lb torque. Actuator operating time shall be 15 seconds or less to drive
open or spring closed from 32°F. Actuator must reopen damper fully even if power
failed for less than 2 seconds. The motors must be mounted on a bracket that allows
for use of slip joint connections or "Duct-mate" type connections without modification.
Provide Belimo Air Controls FSNF 120 actuator. All smoke/fire dampers shall be tested
by the Contractor in the presence of the field inspector and the State Fire Marshal.
This test shall be performed prior to the installation of the ceilings.
2.3 BACKDRAFT DAMPERS
A. Gravity backdraft dampers, size 18 inches x 18 inches or smaller, furnished with air
moving equipment, may be air moving equipment manufacturer's standard
construction.
B. Fabricate multi-blade, parallel action gravity balanced backdraft dampers of extruded
aluminum, with blades of maximum 6 inch width, with felt or flexible vinyl sealed
edges, linked together in rattle-free manner with 90° stop, and plated steel pivot pin;
adjustment device to permit setting for varying differential static pressure.
C. Models:
1. Ruskin CBD4
2. Arrow 655
3. Safe-Air/Dowco BRL
4. Greenheck EM.
2.4 FABRIC CONNECTORS
A. Fabric connectors shall be installed between all fans or fan units and metal ducts or
casings to prevent transfer of fan or motor vibration.
B. The fabric connectors shall be completely flexible material which shall be in folds and
not drawn tight.
C. Fabric connectors shall be of glass fabric double coated with neoprene, with UL
approval. Weight = 30 oz. per square yard minimum. Fabric shall not be affected by
mildew and shall be absolutely waterproof, airtight and resistant to acids, alkalis,
grease and gasoline, and shall be noncombustible.
768
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 33 00 - 5 DUCTWORK
ACCESSORIES
D. Fabric connections shall not exceed 6" in length on ductwork that has a positive
pressure. On ductwork that has a negative pressure, the length shall not exceed 2" in
length.
E. All corners shall be folded, sealed with mastic and stapled on 1" centers.
F. Unless otherwise shown on the drawings, the fabric connection at the inlet to
centrifugal fans shall be at least one duct diameter from the fan to prevent inlet
turbulence.
G. Materials:
1. Durodyne MFN-4-100
2. Vent Fabrics, Inc.
3. "Ventglas"
4. Proflex PFC3NGA
H. Fabric connectors exposed to sunlight and weather shall be as described above,
except the coating shall be hypalon in lieu of neoprene.
I. Materials:
1. Durodyne "Duralon MFD-4-100"
2. Vent Fabrics, Inc.
3. "Ventlon"
4. Proflex PFC3HGA
2.5 DRIP PANS
A. Install drip pans under all rooftop exhaust fans, intake hoods, exhaust hoods and other
roof penetrations that do not have ductwork below them to intercept dripping water.
B. Drip pans shall be 22 gauge minimum cross-broken or reinforced sheet metal with 2"
welded upturned lips.
C. Pans shall extend 6" in all directions beyond the opening and shall have the top of the
lip located 25% of the maximum throat dimension below the opening.
D. Insulate interior of drip pan with 1" thick elastomeric foam insulation. Adhere foam to
drip pan with standard foam adhesive.
2.6 DUCT ACCESS DOORS
A. Fabricate per Fig. 7-2 and 7-3 of the SMACNA HVAC Duct Construction Standards
and as indicated.
B. Review locations prior to fabrication. Install access doors at fire dampers, smoke
dampers, motorized dampers, fan bearings, filters, automatic controls, humidifiers,
louvers, duct coils and other equipment requiring service inside the duct.
769
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 33 00 - 6 DUCTWORK
ACCESSORIES
C. Construction shall be suitable for the pressure class of the duct. Fabricate rigid,
airtight, and close-fitting doors of materials identical to adjacent ductwork with sealing
gaskets butt or piano hinges, and quick fastening locking devices. For insulated
ductwork, install minimum one inch thick insulation with sheet metal cover.
D. Access doors with sheet metal screw fasteners are not acceptable.
E. Minimum size for access doors shall be 24" x 16" or full duct size, whichever is less.
F. Provide duct access door in all horizontal return ductwork at 20 foot intervals per
NFPA 90A.
G. Fire Damper, Fire/Smoke Damper Access Provide quantity of access doors such that
two hands can fit inside ductwork to manually reset fire dampers. For ducts larger than
12x12, provide one access door. For ducts 12" x 12" and smaller, provide one access
door on bottom and one on side.
2.7 REMOTE VOLUME CONTROL DEVICES - MANUAL
A. Remote volume control balancing damper shall be supplied with either miter gears or
right angle worm gears. Provide all damper shafts, gearboxes, couplings, U-joints,
bearings, shafts, offsets, adapters, and adjustable concealed covers as required.
B. When distances, angles, or offsets prevent installing solid rods, the mechanical cable
control system may be utilized. Provide all damper shafts, rack and pinion gear
operator, cables and sleeves, and adjustable ceiling mounting cups.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Young Regulator Company
2. Metropolitan Air Technology
2.8 DUCTWORK ACCESSORY SEALANTS
A. Ductwork accessory sealants and adhesives shall conform to Section 23 31 00.
B. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the
low emitting material limits of the following standards:
1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and
Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources
Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.
2. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant
Applications. All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site shall comply with the
applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168.
3. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied
Paints and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the
applicable VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.
770
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 33 00 - 7 DUCTWORK
ACCESSORIES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:
1. Install accessories in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
2. Where duct access doors are located above inaccessible ceilings, provide ceiling
access doors. Coordinate location with the Architect/Engineer.
3. Coordinate and install access doors provided by others.
4. Provide access doors for all equipment requiring maintenance or adjustment
above an inaccessible ceiling. Minimum size shall be 24" x 24".
5. Provide duct test holes where indicated and as required for testing and balancing
purposes.
B. Manual Volume Damper:
1. Provide manual volume dampers at points on low pressure supply, return, and
exhaust systems where branches are taken from larger ducts where indicated on
drawings and as required for air balancing. Use splitter dampers only where
indicated.
2. Provide ceiling access doors for manual volume dampers. When manual volume
dampers are located above an inaccessible ceiling and an access door cannot
be installed, provide a remote-controlled volume control device for operation of
the damper. Coordinate location with the Architect/Engineer.
C. Drain Pan:
1. Drain pans shall be installed per ASHRAE 62.1.
a. All drain pans shall be field tested under normal operating conditions to
ensure proper drainage.
b. Field testing of drain pans is not required if units with factory installed drain
pans have been certified (attested in writing) by the manufacturer for proper
operation when installed as recommended.
END OF SECTION 23 33 00
771
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 34 23 - 1 POWER VENTILATORS
SECTION 23 34 23
POWER VENTILATORS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Roof Exhaust Fan.
B. Rooftop Fan Curbs.
C. In-Line Cabinet Fan.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Performance Ratings: Conform to AMCA 210 and bear AMCA Certified Rating Seal.
B. Sound Ratings: AMCA 301, tested to AMCA 300.
C. Fabrication: Conform to AMCA 99.
D. Fan Energy Index (FEI): Fans shall meet or exceed the minimum FEI scheduled at the
specified airflow, pressure, and air density (duty point). In no case shall the FEI at the
specified duty point fall below 1.0.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AMCA 99 - Standards Handbook.
B. AMCA 208 - Calculation of the Fan Energy Index (FEI).
C. AMCA 210 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Fans for Rating Purposes.
D. AMCA 230 - AMCA 230 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Air Circulating Fans for
Rating and Certification.
E. AMCA 300 - Test Code for Sound Rating Air Moving Devices.
F. AMCA 301 - Method of Publishing Sound Ratings for Air Moving Devices.
G. ANSI/AFBMA 9 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Ball Bearings.
H. ANSI/AFBMA 11 - Load Ratings and Fatigue Life for Roller Bearings.
I. SMACNA - HVAC Duct Construction Standards, 1995 Edition.
772
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 34 23 - 2 POWER VENTILATORS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings per Section 23 05 00. Include data on all fans and accessories.
Submit sound power levels for both fan inlet and outlet at rated capacity. Submit motor
ratings and electrical characteristics, plus motor and electrical accessories. Submit
multi-speed fan curves including minimum and maximum fan speed with specified
operating points clearly plotted. Submit the Fan Energy Index (FEI) at the selected
duty point (ceiling and HVLS fans are exempt from FEI submittal requirements).
B. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
C. Submit electrical power/controls wiring diagrams and product data indicating general
assembly, components, safety controls, and service connections.
D. Submit certification that power ventilators, accessories, and components will withstand
seismic forces defined in Section 23 05 50. Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces
specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified
and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
1.5 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide one (1) extra belt set for each fan unit per owner approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ROOFTOP EXHAUST FAN - DIRECT DRIVEN
A. Fan Wheel: Centrifugal type, aluminum or composite with backward inclined or airfoil
blades, statically and dynamically balanced.
B. Housing: Removable, spun aluminum dome or rectangular top, with square, one piece,
aluminum base and curb cap with Venturi inlet cone.
C. All steel parts galvanized or epoxy coated. Non-corrosive fasteners.
D. Direct drive, motor mounted outside of air stream and ventilated with outside air.
E. Aluminum or brass bird screen. Plastic mesh will not be allowed.
773
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 34 23 - 3 POWER VENTILATORS
F. Furnish factory mounted and wired disconnect switch: Non-fusible type with thermal
overload protection mounted inside fan housing, factory wired through an aluminum
conduit.
G. Disconnect provided by Electrical Contractor.
H. Furnish solid-state dial speed controller. Mount and wire inside fan unless shown
otherwise on the drawings. Provide permanent marking at balanced point.
I. Furnish normally closed, electric motorized damper. Provide step-down transformer if
required. Install and wire damper to open when fan runs.
J. Manufacturers:
1. Cook "ACE-D"
2. Greenheck
2.2 ROOFTOP FAN CURBS
A. Furnish and install prefabricated roof curbs for all rooftop fans.
B. Size curb to match the curb cap of fan.
C. Unitized construction, continuous arc welded corner seams. Insulated with 1-1/2" thick,
3 lb. density rigid fiberglass board. Damper support angle. Pressure treated wood
nailer.
D. 18-gauge galvanized steel construction.
E. Curb without cant.
2.3 IN-LINE CABINET FAN
A. Fiberglass lined, sheet metal housing, arranged for in-line installation.
B. Rubber torsion motor mounts.
C. Built-in backdraft damper.
D. Centrifugal fan.
E. Provide variable speed controller if shown on the drawings.
F. Manufacturers:
1. Cook
2. Greenheck
774
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 34 23 - 4 POWER VENTILATORS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Secure roof exhausters with cadmium plated lag screws to roof curb.
C. If manufacturer has no recommendations, secure roof exhaust fans to curbs with 1/4"
lag bolts on 8" maximum centers.
D. MC shall install and wire factory provided damper to open when the fan runs if the
manufacturer does not provide an option to pre-wire the damper.
END OF SECTION 23 34 23
775
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 37 00 - 1 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS
SECTION 23 37 00
AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Grilles And Registers.
B. Linear Diffusers.
C. Roof Curbs.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Test and rate performance of air inlets and outlets per ASHRAE 70.
B. Test and rate performance of louvers per AMCA 500L-99.
C. All air handling and distribution equipment mounted outdoors shall be designed to
prevent rain intrusion into the airstream when tested at design airflow and with no
airflow, using the rain test apparatus described in Section 58 of UL 1995.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AMCA 500-L-12 - Laboratory Methods of Testing Louvers for Rating.
B. ANSI/ASHRAE 70 - Method of Testing for Rating the Air Flow Performance of Inlets
and Outlets.
C. SMACNA - Duct Construction Standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
B. Submit schedule of inlets and outlets indicating type, size, location, application, and
noise level.
C. Review requirements of inlets and outlets as to size, finish, and type of mounting prior
to submitting product data and schedules of inlets and outlets.
D. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
E. Submit electrical power/controls wiring diagrams and product data indicating general
assembly, components, safety controls, and service connections.
776
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 37 00 - 2 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A.
B. Conform to ASHRAE 90.1.
1.6 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide clean filters in all filter return grilles at time of installation per owner approval
B. Provide one additional set of replacement filters for all filter return grilles. Deliver to
Owner at job site per owner approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AIR TERMINALS - GRILLES AND REGISTERS
A. Reference to a grille means an air supply, exhaust or transfer device without a
damper.
B. Reference to a register means an air supply, exhaust or transfer device with a damper.
C. The type of unit, margin, material, finish, etc., shall be as shown on the drawing
schedule and suitable for the intended use.
D. All margins shall be compatible with ceiling types specified (including 'Thin-Line' T-bar
lay-in grid system). Any discrepancies in contract documents shall be brought to the
attention of the Architect/Engineer, in writing, prior to Bid Date. Submission of Bid
indicates ceiling and air inlet and outlet types have been coordinated.
E. The capacity and size of the unit shall be as shown on the drawings.
F. All units shall handle the indicated cfm as shown on the drawings while not exceeding
an NC level of 25, referenced to 10-12 watts with a 10 dB room effect. Noise in
classrooms may not exceed 35 dBA or 55 dBC per ANSI Standard S12.60-2002 and
ASHRAE 70.
G. Refer to the drawings for construction material, color and finish, margin style,
deflection, and sizes of grilles and registers.
H. Provide with 3/4" blade spacing. Blades shall have steel friction pivots to allow for
blade adjustment, plastic pivots are not acceptable.
I. Corners of steel grilles and registers shall be welded and ground smooth before
painting. Aluminum grilles and registers shall have staked corners.
J. Where specified to serve registers, provide opposed blade volume dampers operable
from the face of the register.
777
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 37 00 - 3 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS
K. Where specified to have filters, provide with filter rack suitable for 2" thick MERV-8
pleated media filters. Grille border shall be fabricated from minimum 22 gauge steel or
minimum 0.040-inch thick for aluminum grilles. Provide removable grille face with
metal knurled knob or quarter turn fastener to allow for filter media replacement.
L. Screw holes for surface fasteners shall be countersunk for a neat appearance. Provide
concealed fasteners for installation in lay-in ceilings and as specified on the drawings.
M. Manufacturers:
1. Titus
2. Price
3. Metalaire
4. Krueger
5. Anemostat
2.2 AIR TERMINALS - SQUARE MODULAR CORE DIFFUSERS
A. Reference to a diffuser means an air supply device, ceiling mounted, that shall diffuse
air uniformly throughout the conditioned space.
B. The type of unit, margin, material, finish, etc., shall be as shown on the drawing
schedule.
C. All margins shall be compatible with ceiling types specified (including 'Thin-Line' T-bar
lay-in grid system). Any discrepancies in contract documents should be brought to the
attention of the Architect/Engineer, in writing, prior to bid date. Submission of bid
indicates ceiling and air inlet and outlet types have been coordinated.
D. The capacity and size of the unit shall be as shown on the drawings.
E. All units shall handle the indicated cfm as shown on the drawings while not exceeding
an NC level of 25, referenced to 10-12 watts with a 10 dB room effect. [Noise in
classrooms may not exceed 35 dBA or 55 dBC per ANSI Standard S12.60-2002 and
ASHRAE 70].
F. Modular core diffusers shall consist of an outer frame assembly to facilitate mounting
and shall include an integral square collar to allow connection to the square duct.
Where shown on the drawings, the diffuser shall be supplied with a square to round
adapter. Flat-oval inlets are not acceptable for connection to flexible ducts.
G. Each louvered module shall be removable to allow access to any damper or other
component in or near the diffuser neck.
H. The core's blade spacing shall be 1 inch on center.
I. Manufacturers:
1. Titus
2. Price
3. Krueger
4. Anemostat
778
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 37 00 - 4 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS
2.3 AIR TERMINALS - LINEAR DIFFUSERS
A. Linear Bar Grille Diffusers:
1. The type of unit, margin size, material, finish, etc., shall be as shown on the
Drawing Schedule. Flat-oval inlets are NOT acceptable for connection to flexible
ducts. Provide sheet metal oval-to-round transition if required.
2. The capacity and size of the unit shall be as shown on the drawings.
3. All units shall handle the indicated cfm as shown on the drawings while not
exceeding an NC level of 25, referenced to 10-12 watts with a 10 dB room effect
per ANSI/ASHRAE 70.
4. Install T-bars on both sides of diffusers for lay-in ceiling system, install
manufacturer frame for sheetrock or plaster ceiling system. Diffuser margins
system shall be compatible with ceiling types specified, color to match ceiling
system. Contractor shall coordinate margin types with ceilings prior to submitting
shop drawings.
5. Provide with concealed fasteners for installation in the field.
6. Linear bar diffusers and mounting frames shall be furnished as one piece up to 6'
in length. Provide auxiliary support per manufacturer's recommendations for slot
diffusers greater than 4' in length.
7. A manual volume damper shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor in
branch ductwork to each bar grille. Balancing dampers shall not be installed in
supply plenum or at air outlet unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
8. Diffuser length and width, bar width, and spacing between bars shall be as
shown on the drawings.
9. Manufacturers:
a. Krueger 1500/1600
b. Titus CT
c. Metalaire 2000
d. Anemostat AL/TL
2.4 AIR TERMINALS - LINEAR DIFFUSER SUPPLY PLENUM
A. Linear diffusers shall be provided with field fabricated or prefabricated supply plenums.
Plenum shall be a minimum of 2-1/2" wider than total slot width, minimum length of
slot, and minimum height of 10". Plenums with end fed duct connections shall not
exceed 8' in length. The cross sectional area of the plenum shall be designed for a
maximum velocity of 500 fpm and the aspect ratio shall be limited to a width-to-height
ratio of less than 1.5. Plenums with side outlets shall be designed for a maximum
velocity of 600 fpm and inlet ducts to plenum shall be spaced 5' on center maximum.
Inlet ducts to plenums shall have a maximum velocity of 900 fpm. Flat-oval inlets are
NOT acceptable for connection to flexible ducts. Provide sheet metal oval-to-round
transition if required.
B. Plenum shall be constructed with 24 gauge galvanized steel and shall have side inlets
unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Refer to Ductwork Application Schedule in
Section 23 31 00 for insulation requirements.
779
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 37 00 - 5 AIR INLETS AND OUTLETS
2.5 ROOF CURBS
A. Furnish and install, where shown on the drawings, prefabricated roof curbs for all
rooftop hood openings.
B. Roof Mounting Curb: Curb shall be sized to match curb cap of the hood. Curb height
as shown on drawings, minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel, one-piece construction,
insulated, all welded, wood nailer.
C. Curbs shall be unitized construction, 18 gauge galvanized steel, with continuous arc
welded corner seams, insulated with 1-1/2" thick, 3 lb. density rigid fiberglass board
and damper support angle.
D. Curb without cant - suitable for use with membrane type roof.
E. Curb with built-in cant with step for roof insulation.
F. Manufacturers:
1. Same manufacturer as the equipment it serves or Pate, RPS, or Thy.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:
1. Install items in accordance with manufacturers' instructions.
2. Check location of inlets and outlets and make necessary adjustments in position
to conform to architectural features, symmetry, and lighting arrangement.
3. Install diffusers to ductwork with air tight connections.
4. Flexible ducts shall NOT be joined to flat-oval connections. Provide sheet metal
oval-to-round transitions where required.
5. Supply grille and register blades shall be aimed in the field to provide adequate
air distribution in the space. All return grilles and registers blades shall be
oriented to minimize sight distance beyond installed device.
B. Volume Damper:
1. Provide manual volume dampers on duct take-off to diffusers when there are
multiple connections to a common duct. Locate volume dampers as far as
possible from the air inlet or outlet.
C. Maintaining Duct Cleanliness:
1. When grilles, registers, and diffusers are installed, Contractor shall prevent
construction dust, dirt, and debris from entering ductwork as required by Section
23 05 00.
END OF SECTION 23 37 00
780
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 40 00 - 1 AIR CLEANING
SECTION 23 40 00
AIR CLEANING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Filters and Filter Media.
B. Side Access Filter Housings.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Filter media shall be tested under ANSI/UL 900 and labeled.
B. Provide all filters and filter banks by one manufacturer.
C. Air filters shall be State Fire Marshal approved and of a listed type. Preformed filters
having combustible framing shall be tested as a complete assembly. Air filters in all
occupancies shall be Class 2 or better (as shown in the State Fire Marshal listing). Air
filters shall be accessible for cleaning or replacement.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/UL 586 - Test Performance of High Efficiency Particulate, Air Filter Units.
B. ASHRAE 26 - Guideline for Field Testing of General Ventilation Devices and Systems
for Removal Efficiency In-Situ by Particle Size and Resistance to Flow.
C. ASHRAE 52 - Method of Testing Air Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for
Removing Particulate Matter.
D. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings per Section 23 05 00. Include data on media, performance,
assembly and frames.
B. Submit certification that all air cleaning devices, accessories, and components will
withstand seismic forces defined in Section 23 05 50. Include the following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces
specified."
781
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 40 00 - 2 AIR CLEANING
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
1.5 EXTRA STOCK
A. Provide a total of three (3) sets of filters for all units.
1. Provide clean filters in all units at time of installation.
2. Provide clean filters in all units at project final completion after all interior finishes
are complete.
3. Provide one additional set of replacement filters for all units. Deliver to Owner at
job site per owner approval.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MERV 13 (85% EFFICIENT) RIGID FILTER - DISPOSABLE - TYPE F
A. Pleated, rigid, disposable type with high density, fine fiberglass laminated to non-
woven synthetic backing. Welded wire grid media support bonded to the filter media.
Galvanized steel enclosing frame bonded to media periphery to eliminate air bypass.
B. Maximum 12" thick cartridges with at least 14.5 square feet of media per square foot of
face area.
C. 80-85% efficiency and 98% arrestance per ASHRAE 52.1 or MERV 13 per ASHRAE
52.2. Maximum 0.60" WG initial resistance at 500 fpm face velocity.
D. Manufacturers:
1. Camfil
2. Flanders
3. American Air Filter
2.2 SIDE ACCESS FILTER HOUSING
A. 16 gauge welded galvanized steel construction with bracing and prepunched standing
flanges on inlet and outlet.
B. Full size, hinged access doors on each end of housing with 16 gauge galvanized steel,
reinforced, positive sealing heavy duty latches and resilient gasketing.
C. 16 gauge galvanized steel or extruded aluminum holding tracks. "U" shaped bearing
channel. Replaceable woven pile seals for filters.
D. Filter channel suitable for 1" or 2" thick prefilter and bag or cartridge type.
E. Manufacturers:
1. Camfil
2. American Air Filter
782
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 40 00 - 3 AIR CLEANING
3. Flanders
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all products per manufacturers' instructions.
B. Seal filter media to prevent passage of unfiltered air around filters with felt, rubber, or
neoprene gaskets.
C. Do not operate fan systems without filters.
D. Install static pressure tips upstream and downstream of filters. Mount filter gauges on
outside of filter housing or filter plenum, in accessible position. Adjust and calibrate.
Every filter bank, including packaged units, shall have a filter gauge.
E. Install four (4) high efficiency filter test holes, two upstream and two downstream, at all
high efficiency filter banks in air handling units and ductwork (85% efficiency and
higher). Coordinate location of test holes with Owner.
END OF SECTION 23 40 00
783
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 74 16.12 - 1 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR
CONDITIONING UNITS 25
TON AND BELOW
SECTION 23 74 16.12
PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR CONDITIONING UNITS 25 TON AND BELOW
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Packaged Rooftop Unit.
B. Unit Controls.
C. Roof Mounting Frame and Base.
D. Economizers.
E. Power Exhaust.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. All insulation inside the unit and in the air stream must comply with the requirement of
NFPA 90A (maximum flame spread of 25 and maximum smoke developed of 50).
B. All units must be UL or ETL listed and must contain UL labeled components.
C. Fans shall be tested and rated in cabinet in accordance with AMCA Standard 210. All
fan assemblies shall be dynamically balanced in cabinet at final assembly.
D. Conform to ASHRAE 90.1California Energy Code Title 24.
E. All air handling and distribution equipment mounted outdoors shall be designed to
prevent rain intrusion into the airstream when tested at design airflow and with no
airflow, using the rain test apparatus described in Section 58 of UL 1995.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. AHRI 210 - Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment.
B. AHRI 240 - Air Source Unitary Heat Pump Equipment.
C. AHRI 270 - Sound Rating of Outdoor Unitary Equipment.
D. ASHRAE 37 - Methods of Testing for Rating Unitary Air Conditioning and Heat Pump
Equipment.
E. ANSI/ASHRAE/IES Standard 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for
Buildings Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
784
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 74 16.12 - 2 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR
CONDITIONING UNITS 25
TON AND BELOW
F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
G. UL - Underwriters' Laboratory.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
B. Indicate electrical service and duct connections on shop drawings or product data.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Submit electrical power/controls wiring diagrams and product data indicating general
assembly, components, safety controls, and service connections.
E. Provide 8 octave maximum sound power levels at unit discharge and return
connection.
F. Submit certification that the packaged rooftop air conditioning units, accessories, and
components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 23 05 50. Include the
following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces
specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified
and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
3. Detailed description of equipment anchorage devices on which the certification is
based and their installation requirements.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Protect units from physical damage by storing off site until roof mounting frames are in
place, ready for immediate installation of units.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data.
B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, installation instructions, maintenance and
repair data, and parts listing.
785
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 74 16.12 - 3 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR
CONDITIONING UNITS 25
TON AND BELOW
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide five (5) year manufacturer's warranty for compressors.
1.8 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Contractor shall furnish complete service and maintenance of packaged roof top units
for one year from Date of Substantial Completion.
B. Provide maintenance service with a two-month interval as maximum time period
between calls. Provide 24-hour emergency service on breakdowns and malfunctions.
C. Include maintenance items as outlined in manufacturer's operating and maintenance
data, including minimum of four (quarterly) filter replacements, minimum of one fan belt
replacement, and controls checkout, seasonal adjustments, and recalibrations.
D. Submit copy of service call work order or report and include description of work
performed to Owner and Architect/Engineer.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design: The scheduled manufacturer is the Basis of Design. The Contractor is
responsible for all costs, schedule impacts, and construction coordination, including
design costs and regulatory agency approvals, related to using a specified alternate
product other than the Basis of Design. Refer to Section 23 05 00 for additional
information.
B. Carrier
C. Ruud
2.2 MANUFACTURED UNITS
A. Provide roof-mounted units having electric refrigeration.
B. Unit shall be self-contained, packaged, factory assembled, pre-wired and tested,
consisting of cabinet and frame, supply fan, exhaust fan, controls, air filters, refrigerant
cooling coil and compressor, condenser coil, condenser fan, and a full refrigerant
charge.
C. Unit shall be furnished with non-fused disconnect switch, short fuse protection of all
internal electrical components, and all necessary motor starters, contactors, and over-
current protection.
786
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 74 16.12 - 4 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR
CONDITIONING UNITS 25
TON AND BELOW
2.3 FABRICATION
A. Cabinet: Galvanized steel with baked enamel finish, access doors or removable
access panels with quick fasteners screwdriver operated flush cam type. Access doors
shall be provided at each section (e.g., filter section, supply fan section, etc.). All
exterior access panels must be permanently labeled on the outside indicating what is
behind the panel. Structural members shall be minimum 18 gauge, with access doors
or removable panels of minimum 20 gauge.
B. Outside Air Intakes: The outside air intakes shall be located a minimum of 15 inches
above the roof mounting curb to minimize the effect of heat pickup from the roof during
the natural cooling cycle and the effects of snow on the roof during winter operation.
Each air intake shall be furnished with rain eliminators.
C. Insulation: Minimum of 1/2" thick, 1.5 lb./cu.ft. density coated glass fiber insulation on
surfaces where conditioned air is handled. Protect edges from erosion.
2.4 ROOF MOUNTING FRAME AND BASE
A. Roof Mounting Curb: Minimum 24 inches high, minimum 14 gauge galvanized steel,
one-piece construction, insulated, all welded, wood nailer.
2.5 FANS/MOTORS
A. Fans:
1. Supply Fans: Centrifugal
2. Exhaust Fans: Propeller
3. All fans shall be aluminum or composite construction with fan shaft: turned,
ground and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
4. Direct drive motor.
5. All fan bearings must be capable of being lubricated by easily accessible grease
fittings.
6. All fans must be statically and dynamically balanced.
B. Motors:
1. Motors shall be open drip-proof with grease lubricated bearings.
2. Motors shall be "variable frequency drive rated" when controlled by VFDs. Refer
to Section 23 05 13.
3. No equipment shall be selected or operate above 90% of its motor nameplate
rating.
4. Motor shall have 1.15 service factor.
5. ECM motors may be provided.
C. Belt Drive Fans:
1. Belt drive fans must be within ± 10% of scheduled RPM.
2. Belt drive fans shall have slide rails, adjusting screws, anchor bolts, and
bedplates.
787
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 74 16.12 - 5 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR
CONDITIONING UNITS 25
TON AND BELOW
3. Drives shall be V-belt type with adjustable pitch sheaves for units 20 HP and
below. On units over 20 HP, use fixed sheaves. This Contractor shall provide
replacement sheaves and belts as required to allow final air balancing.
4. Units used with variable speed drives shall have fixed sheaves. This Contractor
shall provide replacement sheaves and belts as required to allow final air
balancing.
2.6 EVAPORATOR COIL
A. Provide copper tube with aluminum fin coil assembly.
B. Install a drain pan under each cooling coil meeting requirements as outlined in
ASHRAE 62.1. The drain pans shall extend the entire width of each coil, including
piping and header if in the air stream. The length shall be as necessary to limit water
droplet carryover beyond the drain pan to 0.0044oz per ft2 of face area per hour under
peak sensible and peak dew point design conditions, considering both latent load and
coil face velocity. Pitch drain pans in two directions towards the outlet, with a slope of
at least 1/8" per foot.
C. Provide capillary tubes or thermostatic expansion valves for units of 6 tons capacity
and less, and thermostatic expansion valves and alternate row circuiting for units 7.5
tons cooling capacity and larger.
D. Provide insulation on liquid refrigerant and suction piping between compressor and
evaporator coil where not protected by drain pans. Insulation shall be elastomeric
cellular foam; ANSI/ASTM C534; flexible plastic; 0.27 maximum 'K' value at 75°F,
25/50 flame spread/smoke developed rating when tested in accordance with ASTM
E84 (UL 723). Maximum 1" thick per layer where multiple layers are specified.
E. Drain Pan Condensate Overflow Switch: Float with integral magnet overflow switch
conforming to UL508. Factory installed in drain pan and wired to shut the rooftop unit
down with a fault alarm. No standby power required.
2.7 COMPRESSOR
A. Provide hermetic or semi-hermetic compressors (quantity as scheduled on drawings),
3600 rev/min maximum, resiliently mounted with positive lubrication, high and low
pressure safety controls, motor overload protection, suction and discharge service
valves and gauge ports, and filter drier.
B. Five minute timed off circuit shall delay compressor start.
C. For heat pump units, provide reversing valve, suction line accumulator, flow control
check valve, and solid-state defrost control utilizing thermistors.
D. The use of hydrochlorofluorocarbon (HCFC) or chlorofluorocarbon (CFC) based
refrigerants is prohibited.
788
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 74 16.12 - 6 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR
CONDITIONING UNITS 25
TON AND BELOW
2.8 CONDENSER
A. Condenser shall provide design capacity between the minimum and maximum ambient
conditions scheduled on the drawings.
B. Condenser Coil:
1. Round Copper Tube and Aluminum Fins: Construct condenser coils of aluminum
fins mechanically bonded to seamless copper tubing. Air test under water to 450
psig. Coils and frame shall include 5000+ hour salt spray resistance (ASTM
B117-90).
C. Condenser Fans: Provide direct drive low noise blade design propeller fans, resiliently
mounted with fan guard, motor overload protection, wired to operate with compressor.
D. Condenser Motors: Fan motors shall be an ECM type motor for proportional control.
The motor shall include thermal overload protection and protect the motor in the case
of excessive motor temperatures. The motor shall have phase failure protection and
prevent the motor from operation in the event of a loss of phase.
E. Entire fan assembly shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
F. Provide refrigerant pressure switches to cycle condenser fans.
G. Provide hail guards on all condenser coils.
H. Liquid and discharge isolation valves with staged and digital scrolls.
2.9 MIXING SECTION
A. Dampers: Provide outside, return, and relief dampers with damper operator and
control package to automatically vary outside air quantity. Outside air damper shall fail
to closed position.
2.10 ECONOMIZERS
A. Factory installed by approved rooftop unit manufacturer with fully modulating
motorized outside air and return air dampers.
B. Shall be equipped with 100% capable relief barometric damper relieving up to 100%
return air and sealed to meet ASHRAE 90.1 requirements.
C. Shall be capable of introducing up to 100% outside air.
D. Shall maintain minimum airflow into the building during occupied period and provide
design ventilation rate for full occupancy.
E. Dampers shall be capable of completely closing when unit is in unoccupied mode.
F. Outside air damper normally closed and return air damper normally open.
789
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 74 16.12 - 7 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR
CONDITIONING UNITS 25
TON AND BELOW
G. Provide factory installed and tested, outdoor air monitor that controls outdoor air ± 15%
accuracy down to 40 cfm per ton.
H. Economizer assembly shall be California Title 24 compliant. controls shall display a
warning, if the economizer malfunctions in accordance with Title 24 specifications.
I. Provide a field installed duct/space-mounted C02 sensor. Outside air damper position
shall modulate between the demand control ventilation limit (minimum position
setpoint) and the ventilation limit (maximum non-economizer position setpoint) to
satisfy the space requirements. Damper position shall be controlled to the greater of
the two command signals, either minimum outside airflow or space IAQ (CO2).
J. Economizer Fault Detection and Diagnostics (FDD):
1. Air-cooled unitary direct-expansion units that are equipped with an economizer
shall include a fault detection and diagnostics system complying with the
following:
a. The following temperature sensors shall be permanently installed to monitor
system operation:
1) Outside air.
2) Supply air.
3) Return air.
b. Temperature sensors shall have an accuracy of ±2°F over the range of
40°F to 80°F.
c. Refrigerant pressure sensors, where used, shall have an accuracy of ± 3
percent of full scale.
d. The unit controller shall be configured to provide system status by
indicating the following:
1) Free cooling available.
2) Economizer enabled.
3) Compressor enabled.
4) Heating enabled.
5) Mixed air low limit cycle active.
6) The current value of each sensor.
e. The unit controller shall be capable of manually initiating each operating
mode so that the operation of compressors, economizers, fans, and the
heating system can be independently tested and verified.
f. The fault detection and diagnostics system shall be configured to detect the
following faults:
1) Air temperature sensor failure/fault.
2) Not economizing when the unit should be economizing.
3) Economizing when the unit should not be economizing.
4) Damper not modulating.
5) Excess outdoor air.
790
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 74 16.12 - 8 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR
CONDITIONING UNITS 25
TON AND BELOW
g. The unit shall be configured to report faults to a fault management
application available for access by day-to-day operating or service
personnel or annunciated locally on zone thermostats.
2.11 POWER EXHAUST
A. Factory installed by economizer supplier or compatible equivalent.
B. Controlled by economizer controls.
C. Power exhaust shall be factory wired to electrical section complete with conduit,
feeders, disconnect, and overcurrent protection. Power exhaust shall be energized
based on building pressure or when dampers open past the adjustable setpoint of the
economizer control.
D. Must comply with Energy Code Fan Power Limitation formula.
E. Fans:
1. All fans shall be aluminum or composite construction with fan shaft: turned,
ground and polished steel; keyed to wheel hub.
2. Fan and motor assemblies shall be resiliently mounted
3. Direct drive motor.
4. All fan bearings must be capable of being lubricated by easily accessible grease
fittings.
5. All fans must be statically and dynamically balanced.
F. Motors:
1. Motors shall be open drip-proof with grease lubricated bearings.
2. Motors shall be "variable frequency drive rated" when controlled by VFDs. Refer
to Section 23 05 13.
3. No equipment shall be selected or operate above 90% of its motor nameplate
rating.
4. Motor shall have 1.15 service factor.
5. ECM motors may be provided.
2.12 ELECTRICAL
A. Provide with single point power connection to service all controls, dampers, outlet, and
fans, complete with non-fused disconnect switch, short circuit protection of all internal
electrical components, and all necessary motor starters, contactors, and over-current
protection, transformer.
B. All units must be so constructed that when the electrical section access panel is
opened, all electrical power to the unit (with the exception of the 120 volt duplex
convenience outlet) is disconnected by means of a single disconnect.
791
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 74 16.12 - 9 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR
CONDITIONING UNITS 25
TON AND BELOW
C. All wiring must be labeled, numbered, and terminate in "spade clips". All terminal strips
must be keyed to the wiring numbers. Each control device must be permanently
labeled to indicate its function.
D. Wiring diagrams for all circuits must be permanently affixed to the inside of the
electrical section access panel. The markings of terminal strips and wiring must agree
with the numbering on the wiring diagrams.
E. All units shall include a transformer for controls and convenience outlet.
F. Only one power cable connection to the unit shall be necessary.
G. Motor shall include phase failure protection and prevent the motor from operation in
the event of phase loss.
2.13 OPERATING CONTROLS - SINGLE ZONE UNITS
A. When ECM are applied:
1. Single Zone VAV: The unit controller shall proportionally control the ECM motors
on the supply fan based on space temperature. The unit controller shall
increase/decrease the speed of the supply fan in order to maintain the space
temperature within its setpoint and deadband. The unit controller shall provide
discharge air temperature control with the compressor modulation.
B. When variable speed drives are applied:
1. Single Zone VAV: An electronic variable frequency drive shall be provided for the
supply air fan. Each drive shall be factory installed out of the airstream in a
conditioned cabinet. Drives shall meet UL Standard 95-5V. The completed unit
assembly shall be listed by a recognized safety agency, such as ETL. Drives are
to be accessible through a hinged door assembly. Mounting arrangements that
expose drives to high temperature unfiltered ambient air are not acceptable.
C. Room thermostat shall incorporate:
1. Automatic switching from heating to cooling.
2. Preferential rate control to minimize overshoot and deviation from set point.
3. Set-up for four separate temperatures per day.
4. Short cycle protection.
5. Programming based on weekdays, Saturday and Sunday.
6. Switch selection features including imperial or metric display, 12 or 24 hour clock,
keyboard disable, remote sensor, fan on-auto.
D. Room thermostat display shall include:
1. Time of day.
2. Actual room temperature.
3. Programmed temperature.
4. Programmed time.
792
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 74 16.12 - 10 PACKAGED ROOFTOP AIR
CONDITIONING UNITS 25
TON AND BELOW
5. Duration of timed override.
6. Day of week.
7. System model indication: heating, cooling, auto, off, fan auto, fan on.
8. Stage (heating or cooling) operation.
E. Provide low limit sequence to close outside air dampers and stop supply fan.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that roof is ready to receive work and opening dimensions are as indicated on
shop drawings and illustrated by the manufacturer.
B. Verify that proper power supply is available.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Mount units on factory built roof mounting curb and provide watertight enclosure to
protect ductwork and utility services. Install unit level.
C. All field wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electrical Code.
D. P-traps must be provided for all drain pans.
E. Comb all coils to repair bent fins.
F. Contractor shall coordinate unit access stair and walkway placement to ensure
compliance with OSHA requirements.
3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Provide initial start-up and shutdown during first year of operation.
END OF SECTION 23 74 16.12
793
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 81 26 - 1 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR
CONDITIONING UNITS
SECTION 23 81 26
SPLIT SYSTEM AIR CONDITIONING UNITS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Split system air conditioning wall, and/or ceiling-concealed units.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ARI 210 - Unitary Air Conditioning Equipment
B. ARI 240 - Air Source Unitary Heat Pump Equipment
C. ANSI NFPA 90A - Installation of Air Conditioning and Ventilation Systems.
D. ANSI/ASHRAE 62.1 - Ventilation for Acceptable Indoor Air Quality.
E. ANSI/NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum).
F. ASHRAE 52 - Air Cleaning Devices Used in General Ventilation for Removing
Particulate Matter.
G. ASTM B1003 - Standard Specification for Seamless Copper Tube for Linesets.
H. FS TT-C-490 - Cleaning Method and Pretreatment of Ferrous Surfaces for Organic
Coatings.
I. UL - Underwriters' Laboratories.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 23 05 00.
B. Indicate drain, electrical, and refrigeration rough-in connections on shop drawings or
product data.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions.
D. Submit certification that split system air conditioning equipment, accessories, and
components will withstand seismic forces defined in Section 23 05 50. Include the
following:
1. Basis for Certification: Indicate whether certification is based on actual test of
assembled components or on calculation.
794
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 81 26 - 2 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR
CONDITIONING UNITS
a. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces
specified."
b. The term "withstand" means "the unit will remain in place without separation
of any parts from the device when subjected to the seismic forces specified
and the unit will be fully operational after the seismic event."
2. Dimensioned Outline Drawings of Equipment Unit: Identify center of gravity and
locate and describe mounting and anchorage provisions.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Accept units and components on site in factory protective containers, with factory
shipping skids and lifting lugs. Inspect for damage.
B. Comply with manufacturer's installation instruction for rigging, unloading, and
transporting units.
C. Protect units from weather and construction traffic by storing in dry, roofed location
until units are ready for immediate installation.
1.5 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to ANSI/NFPA 90A for the installation of computer room air conditioning
units.
B. Conform to ASHRAE 90.1 (latest published edition) - Energy Standard for Buildings
Except Low-Rise Residential Buildings.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data.
B. Include manufacturer's descriptive literature, operating instructions, installation
instructions, and maintenance and repair data.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide five (5) year manufacturer's warranty on all compressors.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SPLIT SYSTEM WALL
A. Manufacturers:
1. Carrier/Toshiba
2. LG
3. Samsung
4. Trane/Mitsubishi
795
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 81 26 - 3 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR
CONDITIONING UNITS
5. York/Hitachi
6. Lennox
B. Manufactured Units:
1. Provide packaged, air-cooled, factory assembled, pre-wired and pre-piped unit
consisting of cabinet, fans, filters, remote condensing unit, and controls. Wall-
mounted units shall be furnished with integral wall mounting bracket and
mounting hardware.
2. Assemble unit for wall-mounted or ceiling installation with service access
required.
3. Performance shall be as scheduled on the drawings.
4. Unit shall be rated per AHRI Standards 210/240 and listed in the AHRI directory
as a matched system.
5. Provide unit with factory-supplied cleanable air filters.
6. The units shall be listed by Electrical Laboratories (ETL) in accordance with UL-
1995 certification and bear the ETL label.
7. All wiring shall be in accordance with the National Electric Code (NEC).
C. Evaporator Cabinet and Frame:
1. Cabinet:
a. Refer to schedule on drawings for mounting type (wall-mounted, or ceiling
concealed).
b. Exposed units shall have a finished appearance with concealed refrigerant
piping, condensate drain piping, and wiring connections.
D. Evaporator Fans and Motors:
1. Fans:
a. The evaporator fan shall be direct drive with a single motor having
permanently lubricated bearings.
b. The fan shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
c. The indoor fan shall have at least three speeds.
2. Motor:
a. Direct driven, digitally controlled with multiple speeds. Permanently
lubricated with internal overload protection.
E. Evaporator Coils (Direct Expansion):
1. Direct expansion cooling coil of seamless copper tubes expanded into aluminum
fins.
2. Single refrigeration circuit with externally equalized expansion valve.
3. Coils shall be pressure tested at the factory.
4. A sloped, corrosion-resistant condensate pan with drain shall be provided under
the coil.
796
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 81 26 - 4 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR
CONDITIONING UNITS
F. Electrical Panel:
1. Service Connections, Wiring, and Disconnect Requirements: Conform to the
National Electrical Code and local electrical codes.
G. Control:
1. The unit shall have a hard-wired 7-day programmable remote controller to
operate the system. Provide wall mounting bracket for controller.
2. Remote controller shall have "automatic", "dry" (dehumidification), and "fan only"
operating modes.
3. The remote controller shall have the following features:
a. On/Off power switch.
b. Mode Selector to operate the system in auto, cool, heat, fan, or
dehumidification (dry) operation.
c. Fan Setting to provide multiple fan speeds.
d. On/Off Timer for automatically switching the unit off or on.
e. Temperature Adjustment allows for the increase or decrease of the desired
temperature.
f. Powerful Operation to allow quick cool down or heating up in the desired
space to achieve maximum desired temperature in the shortest allowable
time.
4. The indoor unit microprocessor shall have the capability to receive and process
commands via return air temperature and indoor coil temperature sensors
enabled by commands from the remote controller.
H. Outdoor Unit:
1. General:
a. The outdoor unit shall be specifically matched to the corresponding indoor
unit size. The outdoor unit shall be completely factory assembled and pre-
wired with all necessary electronic and refrigerant controls.
2. Cabinet:
a. The outdoor unit shall be fabricated of galvanized steel, bonderized and
coated with a baked enamel finish for corrosion protection.
3. Fan:
a. The fan shall be direct drive, propeller type fan with fan guard.
b. Fan blades shall be statically and dynamically balanced.
c. The fan shall have permanently lubricated type bearings.
d. Motor shall be protected by internal thermal overload protection.
e. Airflow shall be horizontal discharge.
797
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 81 26 - 5 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR
CONDITIONING UNITS
4. Coil:
a. The outdoor coil shall be nonferrous construction with corrugated fin tube.
b. The coil shall be protected with an internal guard.
c. Refrigerant flow from the condenser shall be controlled via a metering
device.
5. Compressor:
a. Hermetic or scroll refrigerant compressors with resilient suspension system,
inverter driven, oil strainer, sight glass/moisture indicator, internal motor
protection, high pressure switch, and crankcase heater.
b. The outdoor unit shall have an accumulator and four-way reversing valve.
6. Refrigerant:
a. Unit shall use R-410a.
b. The use of chlorofluorocarbon (CFC)-based refrigerants is prohibited.
I. Integral Condensate Pump:
1. Packaged unit matched to evaporator unit including float switch, pump, motor
assembly, check valve, and reservoir.
2. Provide alarm to indicate high level reservoir.
3. Unit shall be powered from evaporator unit with appropriate field connections
available.
2.2 PIPING
A. Design Pressure: 450 psig; Maximum Design Temperature: 250°F
B. Type ACR Seamless Copper Tube Linesets; Brazed Joints:
1. 3/4" and under.
2. Tubing: Type ACR seamless copper tube linesets, ASTM B1003. Sizes indicated
are nominal designation.
3. Joints: Brazed with silver solder.
4. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22.
5. Special Requirements: All tubing shall be cleaned, dehydrated, pressurized with
dry nitrogen, plugged, and tagged by manufacturer "for refrigeration service".
During brazing operations, continuously purge the interior of the pipe with
nitrogen to prevent oxide formation.
6. Limitations:
a. Only between refrigerant splitter box and indoor terminal unit.
b. For use above ceiling only. Do not use in exposed areas.
C. Type ACR Hard Drawn Seamless Copper Tube; Brazed Joint:
1. 4" and under.
798
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 81 26 - 6 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR
CONDITIONING UNITS
2. Tubing: Type ACR hard drawn seamless copper tube, ASTM B280. Sizes
indicated are nominal designation.
3. Joints: Brazed with silver solder.
4. Fittings: Wrought copper solder joint, ANSI B16.22.
5. Special Requirements: All tubing shall be cleaned, dehydrated, pressurized with
dry nitrogen, plugged and tagged by manufacturer "for refrigeration service".
During brazing operations, continuously purge the interior of the pipe with
nitrogen to prevent oxide formation.
2.3 INSULATION
A. EPDM (NBR/PVC Blend is not permitted) elastomeric cellular foam; ANSI/ASTM
C534; flexible plastic; 0.25 maximum 'K' value at 75°F, 25/50 flame spread/smoke
developed rating when tested in accordance with ASTM E84 (UL 723). Minimum 1/2"
thick for pipe sizes less than 1-1/4" and 3/4" thick for pipe sizes 1-1/4" and above.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that proper power supply is available.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. General Installation Requirements:
1. Install piping to allow for expansion and contraction without stressing pipe, joints,
or connected equipment.
2. Install units in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Install all units level
and plumb. Indoor units shall be installed using manufacturer's standard
mounting hardware securely fastened to building structure.
3. Coordinate the exact mounting location of all indoor and outdoor units with
architectural and electrical work. Coordinate installation of ceiling-mounted units
with ceiling grid layout. Provide additional ceiling grid reinforcement or
modification as required and coordinate the work with the GC. Locate the indoor
unit where it is readily accessible for maintenance and filter changes. Where
outdoor units are located on the roof, locate at least 10' from the roof edge.
4. Verify locations of wall-mounted remote controllers with drawings and room
details before installation. Coordinate mounting heights to be consistent with
other wall-mounted devices. Height above finished floor shall not exceed 48".
B. Condensate Removal:
1. Install condensate piping with trap and route from drain pan to nearest drain.
Discharge to nearest code-approved receptor or to a properly vented indirect
waste fitting. Flush all piping before making final connections to units.
C. Comb all coils to repair bent fins.
D. Install new filters in the unit at Substantial Completion.
799
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 81 26 - 7 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR
CONDITIONING UNITS
E. A factory-authorized service agent shall assist in commissioning the unit and
inspecting the installation prior to startup. Submit startup report with O&M manuals.
3.3 REFRIGERANT PIPING
A. Install refrigerant piping from the indoor unit(s) to the condensing unit. Refrigerant pipe
sizes, lengths, specialties and configurations shall be as recommended by the
manufacturer. Evacuate refrigerant piping and fully charge system with refrigerant per
manufacturer's requirements.
B. Provide weather-tight insulated roof curb to accommodate refrigerant piping and
conduit roof penetrations.
C. Insulate all refrigerant piping. Both liquid and suction lines shall be insulated between
the indoor and outdoor units.
D. Joining of Piping:
1. Brazed Joints:
a. Make up joints with brazing filler metal conforming to ANSI/AWS A5.8. Cut
copper tubing ends perfectly square and remove all burrs inside and
outside. Thoroughly clean sockets of fittings and ends of tubing to remove
all oxide, dirt, and grease just prior to brazing. Apply flux evenly, but
sparingly, to all surfaces to be joined. Brazing filler metal with a flux coating
may also be used. Heat joints uniformly to proper brazing temperature so
braze filler metal flows to all mated surfaces. Wipe excess braze filler metal,
leaving a uniform fillet around cup of fitting.
b. Flux shall conform to ANSI/AWS A5.31.
c. Remove composition discs and all seals during brazing if not suitable for a
minimum of 840°For greater than the melting temperature of the brazing
filler metal, whichever is greater.
E. Insulation:
1. Insulate all refrigerant pipes between the heat pump and indoor units. This
includes the liquid pipe, the suction pipe, the hot gas pipe, and the high/low
pressure gas pipe. All fittings, valves, and specialty refrigerant components in the
piping between the indoor and heat pump units shall also be insulated. The
insulation shall have a continuous vapor barrier and shall pass through hangers
and supports unbroken. All exterior insulated piping shall be painted with
minimum of one (1) coat of UV resistant paint. Over size hangers and supports to
allow the insulation to pass through unbroken. Following are the minimum
insulation thicknesses unless noted otherwise in the manufacturer's literature or
required by local AHJ:
a. Refrigerant Suction (40°F & Below):
1) Up to 1": 1/2"
2) 1" and up: 1"
800
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
23 81 26 - 8 SPLIT SYSTEM AIR
CONDITIONING UNITS
b. Refrigerant Suction (41°F to 60°F):
1) Up to 1-1/2": 1/2"
2) 1-1/2" and up: 1"
c. Refrigerant Liquid:
1) Up to 1-1/2": 1"
2) 1-1/2" and up: 1-1/2"
2. California Title 24 - 2019:
a. Refrigerant Suction (40°F & Below):
1) Up to 1": 1"
2) 1" and up: 1-1/2"
b. Refrigerant Suction (41°F to 60°F:
1) Up to 1-1/2": 1/2"
2) 1-1/2" and up: 1"
c. Refrigerant Low Pressure Gas (141°F to 200°F):
1) Up to 1-1/2": 1-1/2"
2) 1-1/2" and up: 2"
d. Refrigerant High Pressure Gas (201°F to 250°F):
1) Up to 4": 2-1/2"
e. Refrigerant Liquid:
1) Up to 1": 1"
2) 1" and up: 1-1/2"
END OF SECTION 23 81 26
801
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 1 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 26 05 00
BASIC ELECTRICAL REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Requirements applicable to all Division 26 Sections. Also refer to Division 1 - General
Requirements. This section is also applicable to Interior Communications Pathways
Section 27 05 28. This section is also applicable to Fire Alarm and Detection Systems
Section 28 31 00.
B. All materials and installation methods shall conform to the applicable standards, guidelines
and codes referenced herein and within each specification section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
B. CEC California Electrical Code
C. CCR California Code of Regulation
D. CBC California Building Code
E. CFC California Fire Code
F.CMC California Mechanical Code
G. CPC California Plumbing Code
H. California Title 24 - Building Energy Efficiency Standards
I. SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Specification and the associated drawings govern furnishing, installing, testing and
placing into satisfactory operation the Electrical Systems.
B. The Contractor shall furnish and install all new materials as indicated on the drawings,
and/or in these specifications, and all items required to make the portion of the Electrical
Work a finished and working system.
C. All work will be awarded under a single General Contract. The division of work listed below
is for the Contractor's convenience and lists normal breakdown of the work.
D. Description of Systems shall be as follows:
802
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 2 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
1. Electrical power system to and including luminaires, equipment, motors, devices,
etc.
2. Grounding system.
3. Fire alarm system.
4. Security system.
5. Wiring system for temperature control system as shown on the drawings.
6. Wiring of equipment furnished by others.
7. Removal work and/or relocation and reuse of existing systems and equipment.
8. Telecommunications rough-in, as shown on drawings, for installation of
telecommunications equipment by others under separate contract.
9. Technology Systems as described in Division 27/28 and on the T-series documents
as described in the Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility.
10. Furnish and install firestopping systems for penetrations of fire-rated construction
associated with this Contractor's work.
E. Work Not Included:
1. Telecommunications cabling will be by Division 27, in raceways and conduits
furnished and installed as part of the Electrical work.
2. Temperature control wiring for plumbing and HVAC equipment (unless otherwise
indicated) will be by other Contractors.
1.4 WORK SEQUENCE
A. Itemize all work and list associated hours and pay scale for each item.
1.5 DIVISION OF WORK BETWEEN MECHANICAL, ELECTRICAL, and CONTROL
CONTRACTORS
A. Division of work is the responsibility of the Prime Contractor. Any scope of work described
at any location on the contract document shall be sufficient for including said requirement
in the project. The Prime Contractor shall be solely responsible for determining the
appropriate subcontractor for the described scope. In no case shall the project be
assessed an additional cost for scope that is described on the contract documents on bid
day. The following division of responsibility is a guideline based on typical industry
practice.
B. Definitions:
1. "Mechanical Contractors" refers to the Contractors listed in Division 21/22/23 of this
Specification.
2. "Technology Contractors" refers to the Contractors furnishing and installing systems
listed in Division 27/28 of this Specification.
3. Motor Power Wiring: The single phase or 3 phase wiring extending from the power
source (transformer, panelboard, feeder circuits, etc.) through disconnect switches
and motor controllers to, and including the connections to the terminals of the motor.
803
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 3 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
4. Motor Control Wiring: The wiring associated with the remote operation of the
magnetic coils of magnetic motor starters or relays, or the wiring that permits direct
cycling of motors by means of devices in series with the motor power wiring. In the
latter case, the devices are usually single phase, have "Manual-Off-Auto" provisions,
and are usually connected into the motor power wiring through a manual motor
starter.
5. Control devices such as start-stop push buttons, thermostats, pressure switches,
flow switches, relays, etc., generally represent the types of equipment associated
with motor control wiring.
6. Motor control wiring is single phase and usually 120 volts. In some instances, the
voltage will be the same as the motor power wiring. When the motor power wiring
exceeds 120 volts, a control transformer is usually used to give a control voltage of
120 volts.
7. Temperature Control Wiring: The wiring associated with the operation of a motorized
damper, solenoid valve or motorized valve, etc., either modulating or two-position,
as opposed to wiring that directly powers or controls a motor used to drive
equipment such as fans, pumps, etc. This wiring will be from a 120-volt source and
may continue as 120 volt, or be reduced in voltage (24 volt), in which case a control
transformer shall be furnished as part of the temperature control wiring.
8. Control Motor: An electric device used to operate dampers, valves, etc. It may be
two-position or modulating. Conventional characteristics of such a motor are 24
volts, 60 cycles, 1 phase, although other voltages may be encountered.
9. Low Voltage Technology Wiring: The wiring associated with the technology systems,
used for analog or digital signals between equipment.
10. Telecommunications/Technology Rough-in: Relates specifically to the backboxes,
necessary plaster rings and other miscellaneous hardware required for the
installation or mounting of telecommunications/technology information outlets.
C. General:
1. The purpose of these Specifications is to outline the Electrical and Mechanical
Contractors' responsibilities related to electrical work required for items such as
temperature controls, mechanical equipment, fans, chillers, compressors, etc. The
exact wiring requirements for much of the equipment cannot be determined until the
systems have been selected and submittals approved. Therefore, the electrical
drawings show only known wiring related to such items. All wiring not shown on the
electrical drawings, but required for mechanical systems, is the responsibility of the
Mechanical Contractor.
2. Where the drawings require the Electrical Contractor to wire between equipment
furnished by the Mechanical Contractor, such wiring shall terminate at terminals
provided in the equipment. The Mechanical Contractor shall furnish complete wiring
diagrams and supervision to the Electrical Contractor and designate the terminal
numbers for correct wiring.
3. Control low (24V) and control line (120V) voltage wiring, conduit, and related
switches and relays required for the automatic control and/or interlock of motors and
equipment, including final connection, are to be furnished and installed under
Divisions 21, 22 and 23. Materials and installation to conform to Class 1 or 2
requirements, California Electrical Code Article 725.
804
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 4 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
4. The Electrical Contractor shall establish electrical utility elevations prior to fabrication
and installation. The Electrical Contractor shall coordinate utility elevations with other
trades. When a conflict arises, priority shall be as follows:
a. Luminaires.
b. Gravity flow piping, including steam and condensate.
c. Electrical bus duct.
d. Sheet metal.
e. Cable trays, including access space.
f. Other piping.
g. Conduits and wireway.
D. Mechanical Contractor's Responsibility:
1. Assumes responsibility for internal wiring of all equipment furnished by the
Mechanical Contractor.
2. Assumes all responsibility for miscellaneous items furnished by the Mechanical
Contractor that require wiring but are not shown on the electrical drawings or
specified in the Electrical Specification. If items such as relays, flow switches, or
interlocks are required to make the mechanical system function correctly or are
required by the manufacturer, they are the responsibility of the Mechanical
Contractor.
3. Assumes all responsibility for Temperature Control wiring, if the Temperature
Control Contractor is a Subcontractor to the Mechanical Contractor.
4. This Contractor is responsible for coordination of utilities with all other Contractors. If
any field coordination conflicts are found, the Contractor shall coordinate with other
Contractors to determine a viable layout.
E. Temperature Control Contractor's or Subcontractor's Responsibility:
1. Wiring of all devices needed to make the Temperature Control System functional.
2. Verifying any control wiring on the electrical drawings as being by the Electrical
Contractor. All wiring required for the Control System, but not shown on the electrical
drawings, is the responsibility of the Temperature Control Contractor or
Subcontractor.
3. Coordinating equipment locations (such as PE's, EP's, relays, transformers, etc.)
with the Electrical Contractor, where wiring of the equipment is by the Electrical
Contractor.
F. Electrical Contractor's Responsibility:
1. Furnishes and installs all combination starters, manual starters and disconnect
devices shown on the Electrical Drawings or indicated to be by the Electrical
Contractor in the Mechanical Drawings or Specifications.
2. Installs and wires all remote-control devices furnished by the Mechanical Contractor
or Temperature Control Contractor when so noted on the Electrical Drawings.
3. Furnishes and installs motor control and temperature control wiring, when noted on
the drawings.
805
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 5 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
4. Furnishes, installs, and connects all relays, etc., for automatic shutdown of certain
mechanical equipment (supply fans, exhaust fans, etc.) upon actuation of the Fire
Alarm System.
5. This Contractor is responsible for coordination of utilities with all other Contractors. If
any field coordination conflicts are found, the Contractor shall coordinate with other
Contractors to determine a viable layout.
G. General (Electrical/Technology):
1. "Electrical Contractor" as referred to herein shall be responsible for scope listed in
Division 27/28 of this specification when the "Suggested Matrix of Scope
Responsibility" indicated work shall be furnished and installed by the EC. Refer to
the Contract Documents for this "Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility".
2. The purpose of these Specifications is to outline the Electrical and Technology
Contractor's work responsibilities as related to Telecommunications Rough-in,
conduit, cable tray, power wiring and Low Voltage Technology Wiring.
3. The exact wiring requirements for much of the equipment cannot be determined until
the systems have been purchased and submittals approved. Therefore, only known
wiring, conduits, raceways and electrical power related to such items is shown on
the Technology drawings. Other wiring, conduits, raceways, junction boxes and
electrical power not shown on the Technology Drawings but required for operation of
the systems is the responsibility of the Technology Contractor and included in said
Contractor's bid.
4.Where the Electrical Contractor is required to install conduit, conduit sleeves and/or
power connections in support of Technology systems, the final installation shall not
be until a coordination meeting between the Electrical Contractor and the
Technology Contractor has convened to determine the exact location and
requirements of the installation.
5. Where the Electrical Contractor is required to install cable tray that will contain Low
Voltage Technology Wiring, installation shall not begin prior to a coordination review
of the cable tray shop drawings by the Technology Contractor.
H. Technology Contractor's Responsibility:
1. Assumes all responsibility for the low voltage technology wiring of all systems,
including cable support where open cable is specified.
2. Assumes all responsibility for all required backboxes, conduit and power
connections not specifically shown as being furnished and installed by the Electrical
Contractor on the "Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility".
3. Assumes all responsibility for providing and installing all ladder rack and other cable
management hardware (as defined herein).
4. Responsible for providing the Electrical Contractor with the required grounding lugs
or other hardware for each piece of technology equipment which is required to be
bonded to the telecommunications ground bar.
5. This Contractor is responsible for coordination of utilities with all other Contractors. If
any field coordination conflicts are found, the Contractor shall coordinate with other
Contractors to determine a viable layout.
806
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 6 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Definitions:
1. Coordination Drawings: A compilation of the pertinent layout and system drawings
that show the sizes and locations, including elevations, of system components and
required access areas to ensure that no two objects will occupy the same space.
a. Mechanical trades shall include, but are not limited to, mechanical equipment,
ductwork, fire protection systems, plumbing piping, medical gas systems,
hydronic piping, steam and steam condensate piping, and any item that may
impact coordination with other disciplines.
b. Electrical trades shall include, but are not limited to, electrical equipment,
conduit 1.5" and larger, conduit racks, cable trays, pull boxes, transformers,
raceway, busway, lighting, ceiling-mounted devices, and any item that may
impact coordination with other disciplines.
c. Technology trades shall include, but are not limited to, technology equipment,
racks, conduit 1.5" and larger, conduit racks, cable trays, ladder rack, pull
boxes, raceway, ceiling-mounted devices, and any item that may impact
coordination with other disciplines.
d. Maintenance clearances and code-required dedicated space shall be included.
e. The coordination drawings shall include all underground, underfloor, in-floor, in
chase, and vertical trade items.
2. The contractors shall use the coordination process to identify the proper sequence of
installation of all utilities above ceilings and in other congested areas, to ensure an
orderly and coordinated end result, and to provide adequate access for service and
maintenance.
B. Participation:
1. The contractors and subcontractors responsible for work defined above shall
participate in the coordination drawing process.
2. One contractor shall be designated as the Coordinating Contractor for purposes of
preparing a complete set of composite electronic CAD coordination drawings that
include all applicable trades, and for coordinating the activities related to this
process. The Coordinating Contractor for this project shall be the Mechanical
Contractor.
a. The Coordinating Contractor shall utilize personnel familiar with requirements
of this project and skilled as draftspersons/CAD operators, competent to
prepare the required coordination drawings.
3. Electronic CAD drawings shall be submitted to the City of Moorpark and
Coordinating Contractor for addition of work by other trades. IMEG will provide
electronic file copies of ventilation drawings for contractor's use if the contractor
signs and returns an "Electronic File Transfer" waiver provided by IMEG. IMEG will
not consider blatant reproductions of original file copies an acceptable alternative for
coordination drawings.
807
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 7 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
4. Coordination between trades shall occur prior to Bidding.
5. For Construction, plans shall be submitted to the City prior to Bidding.
C. Drawing Requirements:
1. The file format and file naming convention shall be coordinated with and agreed to
by all contractors participating in the coordination process and the Owner.
a. Scale of drawings:
1) General plans: 1/4 Inch = 1 '-0" (minimum).
2) Mechanical, electrical, communication rooms, and including the
surrounding areas within 10 feet: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
3) Shafts and risers: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
4) Sections of shafts and mechanical and electrical equipment rooms: 1/4
Inch = 1 '-0" (minimum).
5) Sections of congested areas: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
2. Ductwork layout drawings shall be the baseline system for other components.
Ductwork layout drawings shall be modified to accommodate other components as
the coordination process progresses.
3. There may be more drawings required for risers, top and bottom levels of
mechanical rooms, and shafts.
4. The minimum quantity of drawings will be established at the first coordination
meeting and sent to the A/E for review. Additional drawings may be required if other
areas of congestion are discovered during the coordination process.
D. General:
1. Coordination and/or Construction drawing files shall be made available to the A/E
and City Representative. The A/E will only review identified conflicts and give an
opinion, but will not perform as a coordinator.
2. A plotted set of coordination drawings shall be available at the project site.
3. Coordination drawings are not shop drawings and shall not be submitted as such.
4. The contract drawings are schematic in nature and do not show every fitting and
appurtenance for each utility. Each contractor is expected to have included in the bid
sufficient fittings, material, and labor to allow for adjustments in routing of utilities
made necessary by the coordination process and to provide a complete and
functional system.
5. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions due to
participation in the coordination process.
6. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions for additional
fittings, reroutings or changes of duct size, that are essentially equivalent sizes to
those shown on the drawings and determined necessary through the coordination
process.
7. The A/E reserves the right to determine space priority of equipment in the event of
spatial conflicts or interference between equipment, piping, conduit, ducts, and
equipment provided by the trades.
8. Changes to the contract documents that are necessary for systems installation and
coordination shall be brought to the attention of the A/E.
808
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 8 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
9. Access panels shall preferably occur only in gypsum board walls or plaster ceilings
where indicated on the drawings.
a. Access to mechanical, electrical, technology, and other items located above
the ceiling shall be through accessible lay-in ceiling tile areas.
b. Potential layout changes shall be made to avoid additional access panels.
c. Additional access panels shall not be allowed without written approval from the
A/E at the coordination drawing stage.
d. Providing additional access panels shall be considered after other alternatives
are reviewed and discarded by the A/E and the Owner's Representative.
e. When additional access panels are required, they shall be provided without
additional cost to the Owner.
10. Complete the coordination drawing process and obtain sign-off of the drawings by all
contractors prior to installing any of the components.
11. Conflicts that result after the coordination drawings are signed off shall be the
responsibility of the contractor or subcontractor who did not properly identify their
work requirements, or installed their work without proper coordination.
12. Updated coordination drawings that reflect as-built conditions may be used as record
documents.
1.7 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Contractor's Responsibility Prior to Submitting Pricing/Bid Data:
1. The Contractor is responsible for constructing complete and operating systems. The
Contractor acknowledges and understands that the Contract Documents are a two-
dimensional representation of a three-dimensional object, subject to human
interpretation. This representation may include imperfect data, interpreted codes,
utility guides, three-dimensional conflicts, and required field coordination items. Such
deficiencies can be corrected when identified prior to ordering material and starting
installation. The Contractor agrees to carefully study and compare the individual
Contract Documents and report at once in writing to the Architect/Engineer any
deficiencies the Contractor may discover. The Contractor further agrees to require
each subcontractor to likewise study the documents and report at once any
deficiencies discovered.
2. The Contractor shall resolve all reported deficiencies with the Architect/Engineer
prior to awarding any subcontracts, ordering material, or starting any work with the
Contractor's own employees. Any work performed prior to receipt of instructions from
the Architect/Engineer will be done at the Contractor's risk.
B. Qualifications:
1. Only products of reputable manufacturers as determined by the Architect/Engineer
are acceptable.
2. All Contractors and subcontractors shall employ only workmen who are skilled in
their trades. At all times, the number of apprentices at the job site shall be less than
or equal to the number of journeymen at the job site.
809
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 9 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
C. Compliance with Codes, Laws, Ordinances:
1. Conform to all requirements of the City of Moorpark Codes, Laws, Ordinances and
other regulations having jurisdiction.
2. If there is a discrepancy between the codes and regulations and these
specifications, the Architect/Engineer shall determine the method or equipment
used.
3. If the Contractor notes, at the time of bidding, that any parts of the drawings or
specifications do not comply with the codes or regulations, Contractor shall inform
the Architect/Engineer in writing, requesting a clarification. If there is insufficient time
for this procedure, Contractor shall submit with the proposal a separate price to
make the system comply with the codes and regulations.
4. All changes to the system made after the letting of the contract to comply with codes
or the requirements of the Inspector, shall be made by the Contractor without cost to
the Owner.
5. If there is a discrepancy between manufacturer's recommendations and these
specifications, the manufacturer's recommendations shall govern.
6. If there are no local codes having jurisdiction, the current issue of the National
Electrical Code shall be followed.
D. Permits, Fees, Taxes, Inspections:
1. Procure all applicable permits and licenses.
2. Abide by all laws, regulations, ordinances, and other rules of the State or Political
Subdivision where the work is done, or as required by any duly constituted public
authority.
3. Pay all charges for permits or licenses.
4. Pay all fees and taxes imposed by State, Municipal, and other regulatory bodies.
5. Pay all charges arising out of required inspections by an authorized body as
applicable,
6. Pay all charges arising out of required contract document reviews associated with
the project and as initiated by the Owner or authorized agency/consultant as
applicable.
7. Where applicable, all fixtures, equipment and materials shall be listed by
Underwriter's Laboratories, Inc. or a nationally recognized testing organization.
8. Pay all telephone company charges related to the service or change in service.
E. Examination of Drawings:
1. The drawings for the electrical work are completely diagrammatic, intended to
convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangements and
locations of equipment, outlets, etc., and the approximate sizes of equipment.
2. Contractor shall determine the exact locations of equipment and rough-ins, and the
exact routing of raceways to best fit the layout of the job. Conduit entry points for
electrical equipment including, but not limited to, panelboards, switchboards,
switchgear, shall be determined by the Contractor unless noted in the contract
documents.
3. Scaling of the drawings will not be sufficient or accurate for determining these
locations.
810
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 10 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
4. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in arrangements and locations,
such changes shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
5. Because of the scale of the drawings, certain basic items, such as junction boxes,
pull boxes, conduit fittings, etc., may not be shown, but where required by other
sections of the specifications or required for proper installation of the work, such
items shall be furnished and installed.
6. If an item is either shown on the drawings or called for in the specifications, it shall
be included in this contract.
7. The Contractor shall determine quantities and quality of material and equipment
required from the documents. Where discrepancies arise between drawings,
schedules and/or specifications, the greater and better-quality number shall govern.
8. Where used in electrical documents the word "furnish" shall mean supply for use,
the word "install" shall mean connect up complete and ready for operation, and the
word "provide" shall mean to supply for use and connect up complete and ready for
operation.
9. Any item listed as furnished shall also be installed unless otherwise noted.
10. Any item listed as installed shall also be furnished unless otherwise noted.
F. Electronic Media/Files:
1. Construction drawings for this project have been prepared utilizing Revit.
2. Contractors and Subcontractors may request electronic media files of the contract
drawings and/or copies of the specifications. Specifications will be provided in PDF
format.
3. Upon request for electronic media, the Contractor shall complete and return a signed
"Electronic File Transmittal" form provided by IMEG.
4. If the information requested includes floor plans prepared by others, the Contractor
will be responsible for obtaining approval from the appropriate Design Professional
for use of that part of the document.
5. The electronic contract documents can be used for preparation of shop drawings
and as-built drawings only. The information may not be used in whole or in part for
any other project.
6. The construction drawings prepared by IMEG for bidding purposes may not be used
directly for ductwork layout drawings or coordination drawings.
7. The use of these CAD documents by the Contractor does not relieve them from their
responsibility for coordination of work with other trades and verification of space
available for the installation.
8. Plans and specifications shall be provided to the City once design in complete.
G. Field Measurements:
1. Verify all pertinent dimensions at the job site before ordering any conduit,
conductors, wireways, bus duct, fittings, etc.
1.8 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be required for the following items, and for additional items where
required elsewhere in the specifications or on the drawings.
811
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 11 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
1. Submittals list:
Referenced
Specification Section Submittal Item
Coordination
Drawing
26 05 03 Through Penetration Firestopping
26 05 13 Wire and Cable
26 05 26 Grounding and Bonding
26 05 33 Conduit and Boxes +> 1.5"
26 05 48 Seismic Requirements for Equipment
and Supports
26 05 53 Electrical Identification
26 09 33 Lighting Control System
26 24 16 Panelboards Yes
26 27 16 Cabinets and Enclosures Yes
26 27 26 Wiring Devices Ceiling mount
26 28 13 Fuses
26 28 16 Disconnect Switches Yes
26 32 13 Packaged Engine Generator
Systems
Yes
26 36 00 Transfer Switch Yes
26 51 19 LED Lighting Yes
28 31 00 Fire Alarm and Detection Systems Yes
Drawings Photocells, Timeclocks, Relays
B. General Submittal Procedures: In addition to the provisions of Division 1, the following are
required:
1. Transmittal: Each transmittal shall include the following:
a. Date
b. Project title and number
c. Contractor's name and address
d. Division of work (e.g., electrical, plumbing, heating, ventilating, etc.)
e. Description of items submitted and relevant specification number
f. Notations of deviations from the contract documents
g. Other pertinent data
2. Submittal Cover Sheet: Each submittal shall include a cover sheet containing:
a. Date
b. Project title and number
c. Architect/Engineer
d. Contractor and subcontractors' names and addresses
e. Supplier and manufacturer's names and addresses
f. Division of work (e.g., electrical, plumbing, heating, ventilating, etc.)
g. Description of item submitted (using project nomenclature) and relevant
specification number
h. Notations of deviations from the contract documents
812
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 12 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
i. Other pertinent data
j. Provide space for Contractor's review stamps
3. Composition:
a. Submittals shall be submitted using specification sections and the project
nomenclature for each item.
b. Individual submittal packages shall be prepared for items in each specification
section. All items within a single specification section shall be packaged
together where possible. An individual submittal may contain items from
multiple specifications sections if the items are intimately linked (e.g., pumps
and motors).
c. All sets shall contain an index of the items enclosed with a general topic
description on the cover.
4. Content: Submittals shall include all fabrication, erection, layout, and setting
drawings; manufacturers' standard drawings; schedules; descriptive literature,
catalogs and brochures; performance and test data; wiring and control diagrams;
dimensions; shipping and operating weights; shipping splits; service clearances; and
all other drawings and descriptive data of materials of construction as may be
required to show that the materials, equipment or systems and the location thereof
conform to the requirements of the contract documents.
5. Contractor's Approval Stamp:
a. The Contractor shall thoroughly review and approve all shop drawings before
submitting them to the Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall stamp, date
and sign each submittal certifying it has been reviewed.
b. Unstamped submittals will be rejected.
c. The Contractor's review shall include, but not be limited to, verification of the
following:
1) Only approved manufacturers are used.
2) Addenda items have been incorporated.
3) Catalog numbers and options match those specified.
4) Performance data matches that specified.
5) Electrical characteristics and loads match those specified.
6) Equipment connection locations, sizes, capacities, etc. have been
coordinated with other affected trades.
7) Dimensions and service clearances are suitable for the intended
location.
8) Equipment dimensions are coordinated with support steel,
housekeeping pads, openings, etc.
9) Constructability issues are resolved (e.g., weights and dimensions are
suitable for getting the item into the building and into place, sinks fit into
countertops, etc.).
d. The Contractor shall review, stamp and approve all subcontractors' submittals
as described above.
813
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 13 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
e. The Contractor's approval stamp is required on all submittals. Approval will
indicate the Contractor's review of all material and a complete understanding
of exactly what is to be furnished. Contractor shall clearly mark all deviations
from the contract documents on all submittals. If deviations are not marked by
the Contractor, then the item shall be required to meet all drawing and
specification requirements.
6. Submittal Identification and Markings:
a. The Contractor shall clearly mark each item with the same nomenclature
applied on the drawings or in the specifications.
b. The Contractor shall clearly indicate the size, finish, material, etc.
c. Where more than one model is shown on a manufacturer's sheet, the
Contractor shall clearly indicate exactly which item and which data is intended.
d. All marks and identifications on the submittals shall be unambiguous.
7. Schedule submittals to expedite the project. Coordinate submission of related items.
8. Identify variations from the contract documents and product or system limitations
that may be detrimental to the successful performance of the completed work.
9. Reproduction of contract documents alone is not acceptable for submittals.
10. Incomplete submittals will be rejected without review. Partial submittals will only be
reviewed with prior approval from the Architect/Engineer.
11. Submittals not required by the contract documents may be returned without review.
12. The Architect/Engineer's responsibility shall be to review one set of shop drawing
submittals for each product. If the first submittal is incomplete or does not comply
with the drawings and/or specifications, the Contractor shall be responsible to bear
the cost for the Architect/Engineer to recheck and handle the additional shop
drawing submittals.
13. Submittals shall be reviewed and approved by the Architect/Engineer before
releasing any equipment for manufacture or shipment.
14. Contractor's responsibility for errors, omissions or deviation from the contract
documents in submittals is not relieved by the Architect/Engineer's approval.
15. Schedule shall allow for adequate time to perform orderly and proper review of
submittals, including time for consultants and Owner if required, and resubmittals by
Contractor if necessary, and to cause no delay in Work or in activities of Owner or
other contractors.
a. Allow at least two weeks for Architect's/Engineer's review and processing of
each submittal.
16. Architect/Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal which, in the
Architect/Engineer's opinion, requires coordination with other submittals until related
submittals are received. The Architect/Engineer will notify the Contractor, in writing,
when they exercise this right.
814
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 14 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
C. Electronic Submittal Procedures:
1. Distribution: Email submittals as attachments to all parties designated by the
Architect/Engineer, unless a web-based submittal program is used.
2. Transmittals: Each submittal shall include an individual electronic letter of
transmittal.
3. Format: Electronic submittals shall be in PDF format only. Scanned copies, in PDF
format, of paper originals are acceptable. Submittals that are not legible will be
rejected. Do not set any permission restrictions on files; protected, locked, or
secured documents will be rejected.
4. File Names: Electronic submittal file names shall include the relevant specification
section number followed by a description of the item submitted, as follows. Where
possible, include the transmittal as the first page of the PDF instead of using multiple
electronic files.
a. Submittal file name: 26 XX XX.description.YYYYMMDD
b. Transmittal file name: 26 XX XX.description.YYYYMMDD
5. File Size: Files shall be transmitted via a pre-approved method. Larger files may
require an alternative transfer method, which shall also be pre-approved.
1.9 SCHEDULE OF VALUES
A. The requirements herein are in addition to the provisions of Division 1.
B. Format:
1. Use AIA Document Continuation Sheets G703 or another similar form approved by
the Owner and Architect/Engineer.
2. Submit in Excel format.
3. Support values given with substantiating data.
C. Preparation:
1. Itemize work required by each specification section and list all providers. All work
provided by subcontractors and major suppliers shall be listed on the Schedule of
Values. List each subcontractor and supplier by company name.
2. Break down all costs into:
a. Material: Delivered cost of product with taxes paid.
b. Labor: Labor cost, excluding overhead and profit.
3. Itemize the cost for each of the following:
a. Overhead and profit.
b. Bonds.
c. Insurance.
d. General Requirements: Itemize all requirements.
815
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 15 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
4. For each line item having an installed cost of more than $5,000, break down costs to
list major products or operations under each item. At a minimum, provide material
and labor cost line items for the following:
a. Each piece of equipment requiring shop drawings. Use the equipment
nomenclature (SB-1, PANEL P-1, etc.) on the Schedule of Values.
b. Each type of small unitary equipment (e.g., FDS, FCS, CS, etc.). Multiple units
of the same type can be listed together provided quantities are also listed so
unit costs can be determined.
c. Each conduit system (medium voltage, normal, emergency, low voltage
systems, etc.). In addition, for larger projects breakdown the material and labor
for each conduit system based on geography (building, floor, and/or wing).
d. Fire alarm broken down into material and labor for the following:
1) Engineering
2) Controllers, devices, sensors, etc.
3) Conduit
4) Wiring
5) Programming
6) Commissioning
e. Site utilities (5' beyond building)
f. Seismic design
g. Testing
h. Commissioning
i. Record drawings
j. Punchlist and closeout
D. Update Schedule of Values when:
1. Indicated by Architect/Engineer.
2. Change of subcontractor or supplier occurs.
3. Change of product or equipment occurs.
1.10 CHANGE ORDERS
A. A detailed material and labor takeoff shall be prepared for each change order, along with
labor rates and markup percentages. Change orders shall be broken down by sheet or
associated individual line item indicated in the change associated narrative, whichever
provides the most detailed breakdown. Change orders with inadequate breakdown will be
rejected.
B. Itemized pricing with unit cost shall be provided from all distributors and associated
subcontractors.
C. Change order work shall not proceed until authorized.
D. In addition to Division 01, General Requirements, front end governs.
816
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 16 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
1.11 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING and MAINTENANCE
A. Exercise care in transporting and handling to avoid damage to materials. Store materials
on the site to prevent damage.
B. Keep all materials clean, dry and free from damaging environments.
C. Coordinate the installation of heavy and large equipment with the General Contractor
and/or Owner. If the Electrical Contractor does not have prior documented experience in
rigging and lifting similar equipment, he/she shall contract with a qualified lifting and
rigging service that has similar documented experience. Follow all equipment lifting and
support guidelines for handling and moving.
D. Contractor is responsible for moving equipment into the building and/or site. Contractor
shall review site prior to bid for path locations and any required building modifications to
allow movement of equipment. Contractor shall coordinate the work with other trades.
1.12 NETWORK / INTERNET CONNECTED EQUIPMENT
A. These specifications may require certain equipment or systems to have network, Internet
and/or remote access capability ("Network Capability"). Any requirement for Network
Capability shall be interpreted only as a functional capability and is not to be construed as
authority to connect or enable any Network Capability. Network Capability may only be
connected or enabled with the express written consent of the Owner.
1.13 WARRANTY
A. Provide one-year warranty for all fixtures, equipment, materials, and workmanship.
B. The warranty period for all work in this specification Division shall commence on the date
of Substantial Completion or successful system performance whichever occurs later. The
warranty may also commence if a whole or partial system or any separate piece of
equipment or component is put into use for the benefit of any party other than the installing
contractor with prior written authorization of the Owner. In this instance, the warranty
period shall commence on the date when such whole system, partial system or separate
piece of equipment or component is placed in operation and accepted in writing by the
Owner.
C. Warranty requirements extend to correction, without cost to the Owner, of all work found to
be defective or nonconforming to the contract documents. The Contractor shall bear the
cost of correcting all damage due to defects or nonconformance with contract documents
excluding repairs required as a result of improper maintenance or operation, or of normal
wear as determined by the Architect/Engineer.
1.14 INSURANCE
A. This Contractor shall maintain insurance coverage as set forth in Division 1 of these
specifications.
817
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 17 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
1.15 MATERIAL SUBSTITUTION
A. Where several manufacturers’ names are given, the manufacturer for which a catalog
number is given is the basis for job design and establishes the quality.
B. Equivalent equipment manufactured by the other listed manufacturers may be used.
Contractor shall ensure that all items submitted by these other manufacturers meet all
requirements of the drawings and specifications and fits in the allocated space. When
using other listed manufacturers, the Contractor shall assume responsibility for any and all
modifications necessary (including, but not limited to structural supports, electrical
connections and rough-in, and regulatory agency approval, etc.) and coordinate such with
other contractors. The Architect/Engineer shall make the final determination of whether a
product is equivalent.
C. Any material, article or equipment of other unnamed manufacturers which will adequately
perform the services and duties imposed by the design and is of a quality equal to or
better than the material, article or equipment identified by the drawings and specifications
may be used if approval is secured in writing from the Architect/Engineer via addendum.
The Contractor assumes all costs incurred as a result of using the offered material, article
or equipment, on the Contractors part or on the part of other Contractors whose work is
affected.
D. Voluntary add or deduct prices for alternate materials may be listed on the bid form. These
items will not be used in determining the low bidder. This Contractor assumes all costs
incurred as a result of using the offered material or equipment on the Contractors part or
on the part of other Contractors whose work is affected.
E. All material substitutions requested after the final addendum must be listed as voluntary
changes on the bid form.
F. In addition to Division 01, General Requirements, front end governs.
G. SPECIFIER: LEED REQUIREMENTS briefly explains the LEED goals for the project.
LEED is a global checkbox parameter and will be included or deleted with the global
checkbox. This definition and list of points should match across divisions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. All items of material having a similar function (e.g., safety switches, panelboards,
switchboards,) shall be of the same manufacturer unless specifically stated otherwise on
drawings or elsewhere in specifications.
818
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 18 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 JOBSITE SAFETY
A. Neither the professional activities of the Architect/Engineer, nor the presence of the
Architect/Engineer or the employees and subconsultants at a construction site, shall
relieve the Contractor and any other entity of their obligations, duties and responsibilities
including, but not limited to, construction means, methods, sequence, techniques or
procedures necessary for performing, superintending or coordinating all portions of the
work of construction in accordance with the contract documents and any health or safety
precautions required by any regulatory agencies. The Architect/Engineer and personnel
have no authority to exercise any control over any construction contractor or other entity or
their employees in connection with their work or any health or safety precautions. The
Contractor is solely responsible for jobsite safety. The Architect/Engineer and the
Architect/Engineer's consultants shall be indemnified and shall be made additional
insureds under the Contractor's general liability insurance policy.
3.2 EXCAVATION, FILL, BACKFILL, COMPACTION
A. General:
1. Prior to the commencement of any excavation or digging, the Contractor shall verify
all underground utilities with the regional utility locator. Provide prior notice to the
locator before excavations. Contact information for most regional utility locaters can
be found by calling 811.
2. The Contractor shall do all excavating, filling, backfilling, compacting, and restoration
in connection with the work.
B. Excavation:
1. Make all excavations to accurate, solid, undisturbed earth, and to proper
dimensions.
2. If excavations are carried in error below indicated levels, concrete of same strength
as specified for the foundations or thoroughly compacted sand-gravel fill, as
determined by the Architect/Engineer shall be placed in such excess excavations
under the foundation. Place thoroughly compacted, clean, stable fill in excess
excavations under slabs on grade, at the Contractor's expense.
3. Trim bottom and sides of excavations to grades required for foundations.
4. Protect excavations against frost and freezing.
5. Take care in excavating not to damage surrounding structures, equipment or buried
pipe. Do not undermine footing or foundation.
6. Perform all trenching in a manner to prevent cave-ins and risk to workmen.
7. Where original surface is pavement or concrete, the surface shall be saw cut to
provide clean edges and assist in the surface restoration.
8. If satisfactory bearing soil is not found at the indicated levels, immediately notify the
Architect/Engineer or their representative, and do no further work until the
Architect/Engineer or their representative gives further instructions.
819
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 19 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
9. Excavation shall be performed in all ground conditions, including rock, if
encountered. Bidders shall visit the premises and determine the soil conditions by
actual observations, borings, or other means. The cost of all such inspections,
borings, etc., shall be borne by the bidder.
10. If a trench is excavated in rock, a compacted bed with a depth of 3" (minimum) of
sand and gravel shall be used to support the conduit unless masonry cradles or
encasements are used.
11. Mechanical excavation of the trench to line and grade of the conduit or to the bottom
level of masonry cradles or encasements is permitted, unless otherwise indicated on
the electrical drawings.
12. Mechanical excavation of the trench to line and grade where direct burial cables are
to be installed is permitted provided the excavation is made to a depth to permit
installation of the cable on a fine sand bed at least 3 inches deep.
C. Dewatering:
1. Furnish, install, operate and remove all dewatering pumps and pipes needed to keep
trenches and pits free of water.
D. Underground Obstructions:
1. Known underground piping, conduit, feeders, foundations, and other obstructions in
the vicinity of construction are shown on the drawings. Review all Bid Documents for
all trades on the project to determine obstructions indicated. Take great care in
making installations near underground obstructions.
2. If objects not shown on the drawings are encountered, remove, relocate, or perform
extra work as directed by the Architect/Engineer.
E. Fill and Backfilling:
1. Utilities Bedding: Lay underground utilities on minimum of 6"sand bedding or.
Compact bedding under utilities smooth, with no sharp edges protruding, to protect
the utilities from puncture. Shape bedding to provide continuous support for bells,
joints, and barrels of utilities and for joints and fittings.
2. Envelope around utilities to 6" above utilities: Place and compact sand or to a height
of 6" over utilities in 6" layers. Each layer shall be placed, then carefully and
uniformly tamped, to eliminate lateral or vertical displacement. After connection
joints are made, any misalignment can be corrected by tamping backfill around the
utilities.
3. Backfill from 6" above utilities to earthen grade: Place all backfill materials above the
utilities in uniform layers not exceeding 6" deep. Each layer shall be placed, then
carefully and uniformly tamped, to eliminate lateral or vertical displacement.
4. Backfill from 6" above utilities to below slabs or paved area: Where the fill and
backfill will ultimately be under a building, floor or paving, each layer of backfill
materials shall be compacted to 95% of the maximum density determined by
AASHTO Designation T 99 or ASTM Designation D 698. Moisture content of soil at
time of compaction shall not exceed plus or minus 2% of optimum moisture content
determined by AASHTO T 99 or ASTM D 698 test.
-
820
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 20 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
5. Backfill Materials: Native soil materials may be used as backfill if approved by the
Geotechnical Engineer. Backfill material shall be free of rock or gravel larger than 3"
in any dimension and shall be free of debris, waste, frozen materials, vegetation,
high void content, and other deleterious materials. Water shall not be permitted to
rise in unbackfilled trenches.
6. Dispose of excess excavated earth as directed.
7. Backfill all trenches and excavations immediately after installing utilities or removal
of forms, unless other protection is provided.
8. Around piers and isolated foundations and structures, backfill and fill shall be placed
and consolidated simultaneously on all sides to prevent wedge action and
displacement. Fill and backfill materials shall be spread in 6 inch uniform horizontal
layers with each layer compacted separately to required density.
F. Surface Restoration:
1. Where trenches are cut through existing graded, planted, or landscaped areas, the
areas shall be restored to the original condition. Replace all planting removed or
damaged to its original condition. A minimum of 6 inches of topsoil shall be applied
where disturbed areas are to be seeded or sodded.
2. Concrete or asphalt type pavement, seal coat, rock, gravel or earth surfaces
removed or damaged shall be replaced with comparable materials and restored to
original condition.
3.3 ARCHITECT/ENGINEER OBSERVATION OF WORK
A. The contractor shall provide seven (7) calendar days' notice to the Architect/Engineer prior
to:
1. Placing fill over underground and underslab utilities.
2. Covering exterior walls, interior partitions and chases.
3. Installing hard or suspended ceilings and soffits.
B. The Architect/Engineer will review the installation and provide a written report noting
deficiencies requiring correction. The contractor's schedule shall account for these reviews
and show them as line items in the approved schedule.
C. Above-Ceiling Final Observation:
1. All work above the ceilings must be complete prior to the Architect/Engineer's
review. This includes, but is not limited to:
a. All junction boxes are closed and identified in accordance with Section 26 05
53 Electrical Identification.
b. Luminaires, including ceiling-mounted exit and emergency lights, are installed
and operational.
c. Luminaire whips are supported above the ceiling.
d. Conduit identification is installed in accordance with Section 26 05 53 Electrical
Identification.
e. Luminaires are suspended independently of the ceiling system when required
by these contract documents.
f. All wall penetrations have been sealed.
821
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 21 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
2. To prevent the Above-Ceiling Final Observation from occurring too early, the
Contractor shall review the status of the work and certify, in writing, that the work is
ready for the Above-Ceiling Final Observation.
3. It is understood that if the Architect/Engineer finds the ceilings have been installed
prior to this review and prior to seven days elapsing, the Architect/Engineer may not
recommend further payments to the contractor until full access has been provided.
3.4 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. The following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.
B. Final Jobsite Observation:
1. To prevent the Final Jobsite Observation from occurring too early, the Contractor
shall review the completion status of the project and certify that the job is ready for
the final jobsite observation.
2. Attached to the end of this section is a typical list of items that represent the degree
of job completeness expected prior to requesting a review. The Contractor shall sign
the attached certification and return it to the Architect/Engineer so that the final
observation can be scheduled.
3. It is understood that if the Architect/Engineer finds the job not ready for the final
observation and additional trips and observations are required to bring the project to
completion, the cost of the additional time and expenses incurred by the
Architect/Engineer will be deducted from the Contractor's final payment.
4. Contractor shall notify Architect/Engineer 48 hours prior to installation of ceilings or
lay-in ceiling tiles.
C. The following must be submitted before Architect/Engineer recommends final payment:
1. Operation and maintenance manuals with copies of approved shop drawings.
2. Record documents including marked-up drawings and specifications.
3. A report documenting the instructions given to the Owner's representatives complete
with the number of hours spent in the instruction. The report shall bear the signature
of an authorized agent of this Contractor and shall be signed by the Owner's
representatives.
4. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra materials in quantities specified in
individual specification sections. Deliver to project site and submit receipt to
Architect/Engineer.
5. Inspection and testing report by the fire alarm system manufacturer.
6. Start-up reports on all equipment requiring a factory installation or start-up.
822
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 22 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
D. Circuit Directories:
1. Provide custom typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Provide
updated custom typed circuit directory for each existing branch circuit panelboard
with new or revised circuits per the scope of work. Label shall include equipment
name or final approved room name, room number, and load type for each circuit
(examples: SUMP SP-1 or ROOM 101 RECEPT). Revise directory to reflect circuit
changes required to balance phase loads. Printed copies of the bid document panel
schedules are not acceptable as circuit directories.
3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. General:
1. Provide an electronic copy of the O&M manuals as described below for
Architect/Engineer's review and approval. The electronic copy shall be corrected as
required to address the Architect/Engineer's comments. Once corrected, electronic
copies and paper copies shall be distributed as directed by the Architect/Engineer.
2. Approved O&M manuals shall be completed and in the Owner's possession prior to
Owner's acceptance and at least 10 days prior to instruction of operating personnel.
B. Electronic Submittal Procedures:
1. Distribution: Email the O&M manual as attachments to all parties designated by the
Architect/Engineer.
2. Transmittals: Each submittal shall include an individual electronic letter of
transmittal.
3. Format: Electronic submittals shall be in PDF format only. Scanned copies, in PDF
format, of paper originals are acceptable. Submittals that are not legible will be
rejected. Do not set any permission restrictions on files; protected, locked, or
secured documents will be rejected.
4. File Names: Electronic submittal file names shall include the relevant specification
section number followed by a description of the item submitted, as follows. Where
possible, include the transmittal as the first page of the PDF instead of using multiple
electronic files.
a. O&M file name: O&M.div26.contractor.YYYYMMDD
b. Transmittal file name: O&Mtransmittal.div26.contractor.YYYYMMDD
5. File Size: Files shall be transmitted via a pre-approved method. Larger files may
require an alternative transfer method, which shall also be pre-approved.
6. Provide the Owner with an approved copy of the O&M manual on compact discs
(CD), digital video discs (DVD), or flash drives with a permanently affixed label,
printed with the title "Operation and Maintenance Instructions", title of the project and
subject matter of disc/flash drive when multiple disc/flash drives are required.
7. All text shall be searchable.
823
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 23 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
8. Bookmarks shall be used, dividing information first by specification section, then
systems, major equipment and finally individual items. All bookmark titles shall
include the nomenclature used in the construction documents and shall be an active
link to the first page of the section being referenced.
C. Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall include:
1. Title Page: Include title page with project title, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, all
subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers, with addresses, telephone numbers,
website addresses, email addresses and point of contacts. Website URLs and email
addresses shall be active links in the electronic submittal.
2. Table of Contents: Include a table of contents describing specification section,
systems, major equipment, and individual items.
3. Copies of all final approved shop drawings and submittals. Include
Architect's/Engineer's shop drawing review comments. Insert the individual shop
drawing directly after the Operation and Maintenance information for the item(s) in
the review form.
4. Copies of all factory inspections and/or equipment startup reports.
5. Copies of warranties.
6. Schematic wiring diagrams of the equipment that have been updated for field
conditions. Field wiring shall have label numbers to match drawings.
7. Dimensional drawings of equipment.
8. Detailed parts lists with lists of suppliers.
9. Operating procedures for each system.
10. Maintenance schedule and procedures. Include a chart listing maintenance
requirements and frequency.
11. Repair procedures for major components.
12. Replacement parts and service material requirements for each system and the
frequency of service required.
13. Instruction books, cards, and manuals furnished with the equipment.
14. Include record drawings of the one-line diagrams for each major system. The
graphic for each piece of equipment shown on the one-line diagram shall be an
active link to its associated Operation & Maintenance data.
15. Copies of all panel schedules in electronic Microsoft Excel spreadsheet (.xlsx) file.
Each panelboard shall be a separate tab in the workbook.
3.6 INSTRUCTING THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Adequately instruct the Owner's designated representatives in the maintenance, care, and
operation of the complete systems installed under this contract.
B. Provide verbal and written instructions to the Owner's representatives by FACTORY
PERSONNEL in the care, maintenance, and operation of the equipment and systems.
C. Contractor shall make a DVD video recording of instructions to the Owner while explaining
the system so additional personnel may view the instructions at a later date. The video
recording shall be the property of the Owner.
D. The Owner has the option to make a video recording of all instructions. Coordinate
schedule of instructions to facilitate this recording.
824
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 24 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
E. The instructions shall include:
1. Maintenance of equipment.
2. Start-up procedures for all major equipment.
3. Description of emergency system operation.
F. Notify the Architect/Engineer of the time and place for the verbal instructions to be given to
the Owner's representative so a representative can be present if desired.
G. Minimum hours of instruction time for each item and/or system shall be as indicated in
each individual specification section.
H. Operating Instructions:
1. Contractor is responsible for all instructions to the Owner's representatives for the
electrical and specialized systems.
3.7 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. The following paragraphs supplement Division 1 requirements.
B. Maintain at the job site a separate and complete set of electrical drawings and
specifications with all changes made to the systems clearly and permanently marked in
complete detail.
C. Mark drawings and specifications to indicate approved substitutions; Change Orders, and
actual equipment and materials used. All Change Orders, RFI responses, Clarifications
and other supplemental instructions shall be marked on the documents. Record
documents that merely reference the existence of the above items are not acceptable.
Should this Contractor fail to complete Record Documents as required by this contract,
this Contractor shall reimburse Architect/Engineer for all costs to develop record
documents that comply with this requirement. Reimbursement shall be made at the
Architect/Engineer's hourly rates in effect at the time of work.
D. Record changes daily and keep the marked drawings available for the Architect/Engineer's
examination at any normal work time.
E. Upon completing the job, and before final payment is made, give the marked-up drawings
to the Architect/Engineer.
F. Record actual routing of conduits exceeding 2 inches.
3.8 PAINTING
A. Paint all equipment that is marred or damaged prior to the Owner's acceptance. Paint and
color shall match original equipment paint and shall be obtained from the equipment
supplier if available. All equipment shall have a finished coat of paint applied unless
specifically allowed to be provided with a prime coat only.
825
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 25 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
B. Equipment in finished areas that will be painted to match the room decor will be painted by
others. Should this Contractor install equipment in a finished area after the area has been
painted, the Contractor shall have the equipment and all its supports, hangers, etc.,
painted to match the room decor. Painting shall be performed as described in project
specifications.
C. Equipment cabinets, casings, covers, metal jackets, etc., located in equipment rooms or
concealed spaces, shall be furnished in standard finish, free from scratches, abrasions,
chippings, etc.
D. Equipment in occupied spaces, or if standard to the unit, shall have a baked primer with
baked enamel finish coat free from scratches, abrasions, chipping, etc. If color option is
specified or is standard to the unit, verify with the Architect the color preference before
ordering.
E. Paint all equipment in unfinished areas such as mechanical spaces, and storage rooms.
Equipment furnished with a suitable factory finish need not be painted; provided the
factory applied finish is not marred or spattered. If so, equipment shall be refinished with
the same paint as was factory applied.
F. All electrical conduit and equipment, fittings, hangers, structural supports, etc., in
unfinished areas, such as equipment and storage room area, shall be painted two (2)
coats of oil paint of colors selected by the Architect.
G. Do NOT paint electric conduits inspaces above suspended ceilings except that where
conduit is in a damp location give exposed threads at joints two coats of sealer after joint
is made up.
H. After surfaces have been thoroughly cleaned and are free of oil, dirt or other foreign
matter, paint all raceway and equipment with the following:
1. Bare Metal Surfaces - Apply one coat of metal primer suitable for the metal being
painted. Finish with two coats of Alkyd base enamel paint.
2. Plastic Surfaces - Paint plastic surfaces with two coats of semi-gloss acrylic latex
paint.
3.9 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Thoroughly clean all equipment and systems prior to the Owner's final acceptance of the
project.
B. Clean all foreign paint, grease, oil, dirt, labels, stickers, etc. from all equipment.
C. Remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated during construction from the premises.
3.10 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Coordinate the installation of all equipment, controls, devices, etc., with other trades to
maintain clear access area for servicing.
826
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 26 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
B. Install all equipment to maximize access to parts needing service or maintenance. Review
the final location, placement, and orientation of equipment with the Owner's representative
prior to setting equipment.
C. Installation of equipment or devices without regard to coordination of access requirements
and confirmation with the Owner's representative will result in removal and reinstallation of
the equipment at the Contractor's expense.
D. Raceway and Cable Routing Restrictions: Raceways and cable are restricted from being
routed in the following locations, unless serving the space or permitted by the authority
having jurisdiction.
1. Elevator machine rooms and hoistways.
2. Exit enclosures.
3. Other areas restricted by code.
4. Technology, data, server rooms.
5. Fire pump and sprinkler rooms.
6. Normal power in emergency power equipment rooms: Limited to feeders and branch
circuits serving the emergency power equipment located in the room.
7. Emergency power in normal power equipment rooms: Limited to feeders and branch
circuits serving the normal power equipment located in the room.
E. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the low
emitting material limits of the following standards:
1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and
Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources Using
Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.
2. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant
Applications. All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site shall comply with the
applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168.
3. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied
Paints and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the
applicable VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.
3.11 SYSTEM STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. The electrical systems shall be complete and operating. System startup, testing, adjusting,
and balancing to obtain satisfactory system performance is the responsibility of the
Contractor. This includes all calibration and adjustment of electrical controls, balancing of
loads, troubleshooting and verification of software, and final adjustments that may be
needed.
B. Complete all manufacturer-recommended startup procedures and checklists to verify
proper equipment operation and does not pose a danger to personnel or property.
C. All operating conditions and control sequences shall be tested during the start-up period.
Testing all interlocks, safety shut-downs, controls, and alarms.
827
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 27 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
D. The Contractor, subcontractors, and equipment suppliers shall have skilled technicians to
ensure that all systems perform properly. If the Architect/Engineer is requested to visit the
job site for trouble shooting, assisting in start-up, obtaining satisfactory equipment
operation, resolving installation and/or workmanship problems, equipment substitution
issues or unsatisfactory system performance, including call backs during the warranty
period, through no fault of the design; the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner on a time
and materials basis for services rendered at the Architect/Engineer's standard hourly rates
in effect when the services are requested. The Contractor shall pay the Owner for services
required that are product, installation or workmanship related. Payment is due within 30
days after services are rendered.
3.12 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General:
1. Conduct all tests required during and after construction. Submit test results in NETA
format, or equivalent form, that shows the test equipment used, calibration date,
tester's name, ambient test conditions, humidity, conductor length, and results
corrected to 40°C.
2. Supply necessary instruments, meters, etc., for the tests. Supply competent
technicians with training in the proper testing techniques.
3. All cables and wires shall be tested for shorts and grounds following installation and
connection to devices. Replace shorted or grounded wires and cables.
4. Any wiring device, electrical apparatus or luminaire, if grounded or shorted on any
integral "live" part, shall have all defective parts or materials replaced.
5. Test cable insulation of service and panel feeder conductors for proper insulation
values. Tests shall include the cable, all splices, and all terminations. Each
conductor shall be tested and shall test free of short circuits and grounds and have
an insulation value not less than Electrical Code Standards. Take readings between
conductors, and between conductors and ground.
6. If the results obtained in the tests are not satisfactory, make adjustments,
replacements, and changes as needed. Then repeat the tests, and make additional
tests, as the Architect/Engineer or authority having jurisdiction deems necessary.
B. Ground Resistance:
1. Conduct service ground resistance tests using an approved manufactured ground
resistance meter. Submit to the Architect/Engineer a proposed test procedure
including type of equipment to be used. (The conventional ohmmeter is not an
acceptable device.)
2. Make ground resistance measurements during normal dry weather and not less than
48 hours after a rain. Ground resistance values shall be verified by the
Architect/Engineer at the time the readings are taken.
3. If the ground resistance value obtained is more than the value set forth in Section 26
05 26, the following shall be done to obtain the value given:
a. Verify that all connections in the service ground system are secure.
b. Increase the depth to which ground rods are driven by adding section lengths
to the rods and retest. If the resistance is still excessive increase the depth by
adding an additional rod section and retest.
828
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 28 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
c. If the resistance is still excessive, furnish and install additional ground rods,
spaced not less than 20 feet from other ground rods unless otherwise noted on
plans, and connect into the ground electrode system. Retest.
d. Review results with the Architect/Engineer.
4. Before final payment is made to the Contractor submit a written report to the
Architect/Engineer including the following:
a. Date of test.
b. Number of hours since the last rain.
c. Soil condition at the time of the test in the ground electrode location. That is:
dry, wet, moist, sand, clay, etc.
d. Diagram of the test set-up showing distances between test equipment, ground
electrode, auxiliary electrodes, etc.
e. Make, model, and calibration date of test equipment.
f. Tabulation of measurements taken and calculations made.
C. Ground-Fault Equipment Performance Testing:
1. Test: Perform ground-fault performance testing when system is installed. The test
process shall use primary current injection per manufacturer instruction and
procedures. Perform test for the following:
a. Service disconnects
b. Solid state molded case circuit breakers and solid-state insulated case circuit
breakers equipped with ground fault protection.
c. Fusible switches with ground fault relay protection.
d. Outside branch circuits and feeders.
e. Code required.
2. Report: Provide copy of test result report with Operation and Maintenance manuals.
Provide report to Authority Having Jurisdiction when requested.
D. Arc Energy Reduction Equipment Performance Testing:
1. Test: Perform arc energy protection performance testing when system is installed.
The test process shall use primary current injection or approved method per
manufacturer instructions and procedures. Perform test for the following:
a. All arc energy reduction systems installed.
2. Report: Provide copy of test result report with Operation and Maintenance manuals.
Provide report to Authority Having Jurisdiction when requested.
829
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 29 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
E. Other Equipment:
1. Give other equipment furnished and installed by the Contractor all standard tests
normally made to assure that the equipment is electrically sound, all connections
properly made, phase rotation correct, fuses and thermal elements suitable for
protection against overloads, voltage complies with equipment nameplate rating, and
full load amperes are within equipment rating.
F. If any test results are not satisfactory, make adjustments, replacements and changes as
needed and repeat the tests and make additional tests as the Architect/Engineer or
authority having jurisdiction deem necessary.
G. Contractor shall thermographic study all electrical gear, switchboard, panelboards, etc. at
the end of construction to identify any unusual conditions/heating within the equipment.
Coordinate with Owner/Architect/Engineer to have an Owner/Architect/Engineer
representative present during testing.
H. Report shall include color printouts, in binder, of pictures taken to use as a baseline
reading after building is occupied.
I. Upon completion of the project, the Contractor shall provide amperage readings for all
panelboards and switchboards and turn the results over to the Owner for "benchmark"
amperages.
3.13 UTILITY REBATE
A. Submit utility rebate forms, where offered at project location, with rebate items completed.
Rebate may include lighting, lighting controls, variable speed drives, heat pumps, package
terminal A/C, air conditioners, chillers, water heaters, programmable thermostats, and
motors.
B. Contractor must submit notification of any value engineering or product substitution that
will affect the utility rebate amount prior to approval.
830
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 00 - 30 BASIC ELECTRICAL
REQUIREMENTS
READINESS CERTIFICATION PRIOR TO FINAL JOBSITE OBSERVATION
To prevent the final job observation from occurring too early, we require that the Contractor review
the completion status of the project and, by copy of this document, certify that the job is indeed
ready for the final job observation. The following is a typical list of items that represent the degree of
job completeness expected prior to your requesting a final job observation.
1. Penetrations of fire-rated construction fire sealed in accordance with specifications.
2. Electrical panels have typed circuit identification.
3. Smoke and fire/smoke dampers are wired and have been tested.
4. Per Section 26 05 00, cable insulation test results have been submitted.
6. Per Section 26 05 00, ground resistance test results have been submitted.
7. Operation and Maintenance manuals have been submitted as per Section 26 05 00.
8. Bound copies of approved shop drawings have been submitted as per Section 26 05 00.
9. Report of instruction of Owner's representative has been submitted as per Section 26 05 00.
10. Fire alarm inspection and testing report has been submitted as per Sections 26 05 00 and 28 31
00.
11. Start-up reports from factory representative have been submitted as per Section 26 05 00.
Accepted by:
Prime Contractor _______________________________________________
By ___________________________________ Date ___________________
Upon Contractor certification that the project is complete and ready for a final job observation, we
require the Contractor to sign this agreement and return it to the Architect/Engineer so that the final
observation can be scheduled.
It is understood that if the Architect/Engineer finds the job not ready for the final observation and
that additional trips and observations are required to bring the project to completion, the costs
incurred by the Architect/Engineers for additional time and expenses will be deducted from the
Contractor's contract retainage prior to final payment at the completion of the job.
END OF SECTION 26 05 00
831
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 03 - 1 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
SECTION 26 05 03
THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Through-Penetration Firestopping.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
Section.
B. Installer: Individuals performing work shall be certified by the manufacturer of the
system selected for installation.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
B. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
C. ANSI/UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops
D. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems
E. UL Fire Resistance Directory Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ)
F. Intertek / Warnock Hersey - Directory of Listed Products
G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
H. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops
I. The Building Officials and Code Administrators National Building Code
J. 2018 International Building Code
K. NFPA 5000 - Building Construction Safety Code
L. CBC California Building Code
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Submit Firestopping Installers Certification for all installers on the project.
832
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 03 - 2 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
C. Shop Drawings: Submit for each condition requiring firestopping. Include descriptions
of the specific penetrating item, actual wall/floor construction, manufacturer's
installation instructions, and UL or Interek / Warnock Hersey Assembly number.
D. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-
penetration firestop system, along with the following information:
1. Types of penetrating items.
2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where
applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated.
3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop
design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
4. F ratings for each firestop system.
E. Maintain a notebook on the job site at all times that contains copies of approved
submittals for all through penetration firestopping to be installed. Notebook shall be
made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction at their request and turned over to
the Owner at the end of construction as part of the O&M Manuals.
F. Submit VOC rating of firestopping material in g/L (less water) with documentation that
it meets the limits set forth in SCAQMD Rule 1168.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store, protect and handle products on site. Accept material on site in factory
containers and packing. Inspect for damage. Protect from deterioration or damage due
to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. Follow
manufacturer's instructions for storage.
B. Install material prior to expiration of product shelf life.
1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions,
including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide
through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread
of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases,
and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.
1. Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire partitions, fire barriers, and smoke
barriers.
2. Fire-resistance-rated horizontal assemblies including floors, floor/ceiling
assemblies, and ceiling membranes of roof/ceiling assemblies.
B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings
determined per UL 1479:
1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings
indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of
constructions penetrated.
833
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 03 - 3 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to light, traffic, moisture, or physical
damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these
conditions both during and after construction.
D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as
determined per ASTM E 84.
E. For through-penetration firestop systems in air plenums, provide products with flame-
spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 50, respectively, as
determined per ASTM E 84.
F. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the
low emitting material limits of the following standards:
1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and
Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources
Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.
2. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant
Applications. All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site shall comply with the
applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168.
3. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied
Paints and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the
applicable VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.
1.7 MEETINGS
A. Pre-installation meeting: A pre-installation meeting shall be scheduled and shall
include the Construction Manager, General Contractor, all Subcontractors associated
with the installation of systems penetrating fire barriers, Firestopping Manufacturer's
Representative, and the Owner.
1. Review foreseeable methods related to firestopping work.
2. Tour representative areas where firestopping is to be installed; inspect and
discuss each type of condition and each type of substrate that will be
encountered, and preparation to be performed by other trades.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year warranty on parts and labor.
B. Warranty shall cover repair or replacement of firestop systems which fail in joint
adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance,
migration resistance, stain resistance, general durability, or appear to deteriorate in
any manner not clearly specified by the manufacturer as an inherent quality of the
material.
834
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 03 - 4 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through-
penetration firestop systems indicated for each application that are produced by one of
the following manufacturers. All firestopping systems installed shall be provided by a
single manufacturer.
1. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division
2. Hilti, Inc.
3. RectorSeal Corporation, Metacaulk
4. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division
5. Johns-Manville
6. Specified Technologies Inc. (S.T.I.)
7. Spec Seal Firestop Products
8. AD Firebarrier Protection Systems
9. Wiremold/Legrand: FlameStopper
10. Dow Corning Corp
11. Fire Trak Corp
12. International Protective Coating Corp
2.2 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A. Provide materials and systems classified by or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey to
provide firestopping equal to time rating of construction being penetrated.
B. All firestopping materials shall be free of asbestos, lead, PCB's, and other materials
that would require hazardous waste removal.
C. Firestopping shall be flexible to allow for normal penetrating item movement due to
expansion and contraction.
D. Provide firestopping systems capable of supporting floor loads where systems are
exposed to possible floor loading or traffic.
E. Provide firestopping systems allowing continuous insulation for all insulated pipes.
F. Provide firestopping systems classified by UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey
for penetrations through all fire rated construction. Firestopping systems shall be
selected from the UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory
Category XHEZ based on substrate construction and penetrating item size and
material and shall fall within the range of numbers listed:
1. Combustible Framed Floors and Chase Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated:
a. F Rating = Floor/Wall Rating
Penetrating Item UL System No.
No Penetrating Item FC 0000-0999*
Metallic Pipe or Conduit FC 1000-1999
Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit FC 2000-2999
835
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 03 - 5 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
Penetrating Item UL System No.
Electrical Cables FC 3000-3999
Cable Trays FC 4000-4999
Insulated Pipes FC 5000-5999
Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical FC 6000-6999
Duct without Damper and Misc.
Mechanical
FC 7000-7999
Multiple Penetrations FC 8000-8999
*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to
match original rated construction.
2. Non-Combustible Framed Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated:
a. F Rating = Wall Rating
Penetrating Item UL System No.
No Penetrating Item WL 0000-0999*
Metallic Pipe or Conduit WL 1000-1999
Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit WL 2000-2999
Electrical Cables WL 3000-3999
Cable Trays WL 4000-4999
Insulated Pipes WL 5000-5999
Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical WL 6000-6999
Duct without Damper and Misc.
Mechanical
WL 7000-7999
Multiple Penetrations WL 8000-8999
*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to
match original rated construction.
G. Any opening in walls or floors not covered by the listed series of numbers shall be
coordinated with the firestopping manufacturer.
H. Any openings in floors or walls not described in the UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock
Hersey Fire Resistance Directory, or outlined in manufacturer's information shall be
sealed in a manner agreed upon by the Firestopping Manufacturer, Owner, and the
Authority Having Jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Ensure all surfaces that contact seal materials are free of dirt, dust, grease, oil, rust, or
loose materials. Clean and repair surfaces as required. Remove laitance and form-
release agents from concrete.
B. Ensure substrate and penetrating items have been permanently installed prior to
installing firestopping systems. Ensure penetrating items have been properly spaced
and have proper clearance prior to installing firestopping systems.
836
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 03 - 6 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
C. Surfaces to which sealing materials are to be installed must meet the selected UL or
Intertek / Warnock Hersey system substrate criteria.
D. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer. Confine primer to area of bond.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. In existing construction, provide firestopping of openings prior to and after installation
of penetrating items. Remove any existing coatings on surfaces prior to firestopping
installation. Temporary firestopping shall consist of packing openings with fire resistant
mineral wool for the full thickness of substrate, or an alternate method approved by the
Authority Having Jurisdiction. All openings shall be temporarily firestopped immediately
upon their installation and shall remain so until the permanent UL or listed by Intertek /
Warnock Hersey listed firestopping system is installed.
B. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of the UL or
Intertek / Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory and with the manufacturer's
printed application instructions.
C. Install dams as required to properly contain firestopping materials within openings and
as required to achieve required fire resistance rating. Remove combustible damming
after appropriate curing.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturers and that do not cause damage.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that
ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration
at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration
occurs, remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems
immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified
requirements.
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide and install labels adjacent to each firestopping location. Label shall be
provided by the firestop system supplier and contain the following information in a
contrasting color:
1. The words "Warning - Through Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb.
Notify Building Management of Any Damage."
2. Firestop System Supplier; UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey system
number; date installed; contractor name and phone number; manufacturer's
representative name, address, and phone number.
837
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 03 - 7 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
3.5 INSPECTION
A. All penetrations shall be inspected by the manufacturer's representative to ensure
proper installation.
B. Access to firestop systems shall be maintained for examination by the Authority
Having Jurisdiction at their request.
C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop system with other construction
only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with
requirements.
D. The contractor shall allow for visual destructive review of 5% of installed firestop
systems (minimum of one) to prove compliance with specifications and manufacturer's
instructions and details. Destructive system removal shall be performed by the
contractor and witnessed by the Architect/Engineer and manufacturer's factory
representative. The Architect/Engineer shall have sole discretion of which firestop
system installations will be reviewed. The contractor is responsible for all costs
associated with this requirement including labor and material for removing and
replacing the installed firestop system. If any firestop system is found to not be
installed per manufacturer's specific instructions and details, all firestop systems are
subject to destructive review and replacement at the Architect/Engineer's discretion
and the contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION 26 05 03
838
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 05 - 1 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
FOR REMODELING
SECTION 26 05 05
ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION FOR REMODELING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Electrical demolition
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS AND EQUIPMENT
A. Materials and equipment for patching and extending work shall be as specified in
individual Sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. THE DRAWINGS ARE INTENDED TO INDICATE THE SCOPE OF WORK
REQUIRED AND DO NOT INDICATE EVERY BOX, CONDUIT, OR WIRE THAT
MUST BE REMOVED.
B. |Where walls, ceilings, structures, etc., are indicated as being removed on general or
electrical drawings, the Contractor shall be responsible for the removal of all electrical
equipment, devices, fixtures, raceways, wiring, systems, etc., from the removed area.
C. Where ceilings, walls, structures, etc., are temporarily removed and replaced by
others, this Contractor shall be responsible for the removal, storage, and replacement
of equipment, devices, fixtures, raceways, wiring, systems, etc.
D. Where mechanical or technology equipment is indicated as being removed on
electrical, mechanical, or technology drawings, the Contractor shall be responsible for
disconnecting the equipment and removing all starters, VFD, controllers, electrical
equipment, raceways, wiring, etc. associated with the device.
E. Verify that abandoned wiring and equipment serve only abandoned equipment or
facilities. Extend conduit and wire to facilities and equipment that will remain in
operation following demolition. Extension of conduit and wire to equipment shall be
compatible with the surrounding area. Extended conduit and conductors to match
existing size and material.
F. Coordinate scope of work with all other Contractors and the Owner at the project site.
Schedule removal of equipment and electrical service to avoid conflicts.
839
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 05 - 2 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
FOR REMODELING
3.2 PREPARATION
A. The Contractor shall obtain approval from the Owner before turning off power to
circuits, feeders, panels, etc. Coordinate all outages with Owner.
B. Coordinate utility service outages with Utility Company.
C. Provide temporary wiring and connections to maintain existing systems in service
during construction. When work must be performed on energized equipment or
circuits, use personnel experienced in such operations. Assume all equipment and
systems must remain operational unless specifically noted otherwise on drawings.
D. Disconnect electrical systems in walls, floors, structures, and ceilings scheduled for
removal.
3.3 DEMOLITION AND EXTENSION OF EXISTING ELECTRICAL WORK
A. Demolish and extend existing electrical work under provisions of Division 1 of
Specifications and this Section.
B. Remove, relocate, and extend existing installations to accommodate new construction.
C. Remove exposed abandoned raceway, including abandoned raceway above
accessible ceiling finishes. Cut raceway flush with walls and floors, and patch
surfaces. Remove all associated clamps, hangers, supports, etc. associated with
raceway removal.
D. Disconnect and remove outlets and devices that are to be demolished. Remove outlet
or devices' associated back box, supports, and conduit and conductors back to source.
Patch opening created from removal of device to match surrounding finishes.
E. Disconnect and remove abandoned panelboards and distribution equipment.
F. Disconnect and remove electrical devices and equipment serving utilization equipment
that has been removed.
G. Disconnect and remove abandoned luminaires. Remove brackets, stems, hangers,
and other accessories. Ballasts in light fixtures installed prior to 1980 shall be
incinerated in EPA approved incinerator or disposed of in EPA certified containers and
deposited in an EPA landfill certified for PCB disposal or recycled by permitted ballast
recycler. Punctured or leaking ballasts must be disposed of according to Federal
Regulations under the Toxic Substance Control Act. Provide Owner and
Architect/Engineer with a Certificate of Destruction to verify proper disposal.
H. Repair adjacent construction and finishes damaged during demolition and extension
work. Patch openings to match existing surrounding finishes.
I. Maintain access to existing electrical installations that remain active. Modify installation
or provide junction boxes and access panel as appropriate.
840
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 05 - 3 ELECTRICAL DEMOLITION
FOR REMODELING
J. Extend existing installations using materials and methods compatible with existing
electrical installations, or as specified. Extended conduit and conductors to match
existing size and material.
K. HID and fluorescent lamps, determined by the Toxicity Characteristic Leachate
procedure (TCLP), to be hazardous waste shall be disposed of in an EPA-permitted
hazardous waste disposal facility or by a permitted lamp recycler.
L. Regulatory Requirements: Comply with governing EPA notification regulations before
beginning demolition. Comply with hauling and disposal regulations of authorities
having jurisdiction.
M. Floor slabs may contain conduit systems. This Contractor is responsible for taking any
measures required to ensure no conduits or other services are damaged. This includes
x-ray or similar non-destructive means. Where conduit is in concrete slab, cut conduit
flush with floor, pull out conductors, and plug conduit ends.
N. This Contractor is responsible for all costs incurred in repair, relocations, or
replacement of any cables, conduits, or other services if damaged without proper
investigation.
3.4 CLEANING AND REPAIR
A. Clean and repair existing materials and equipment that remain or are to be reused.
B. Panelboards: Clean exposed surfaces and check tightness of electrical connections.
Replace damaged circuit breakers and provide closure plates for vacant positions.
Provide typed circuit directory showing revised circuiting arrangement.
C. ELECTRICAL ITEMS (E.G., LIGHTING FIXTURES, RECEPTACLES, SWITCHES,
CONDUIT, WIRE, ETC.) REMOVED AND NOT RELOCATED REMAIN THE
PROPERTY OF THE OWNER. CONTRACTOR SHALL PLACE ITEMS RETAINED BY
THE OWNER IN A LOCATION COORDINATED WITH THE OWNER. THE
CONTRACTOR SHALL BE RESPONSIBLE FOR THE DISPOSAL OF MATERIAL
THE OWNER DOES NOT WANT.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. Install relocated materials and equipment under the provisions of Division 1 of
Specifications.
END OF SECTION 26 05 05
-
841
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 13 - 1 WIRE AND CABLE
SECTION 26 05 13
WIRE AND CABLE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 05 53 - Electrical Identification: Refer to electrical identification for color and
identification labeling requirements.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
B. CEC California Electrical Code
C. UL 44 - Thermoset-Insulated Wires and Cables
D. UL 83 - Thermoplastic-Insulated Wires and Cables
E. UL 854 - Service-Entrance Cables
F. UL 1581 - Standard for Electrical Wires, Cables, and Flexible Cords
G. UL 2196 - Fire Resistive, Fire Resistant and Circuit Integrity Cables
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BUILDING WIRE
A. Feeders and Branch Circuits 8 AWG and larger: Copper, stranded conductor, 600-volt
insulation, THHN/THWN or XHHW-2.
B. Feeders and Branch Circuits 8 AWG and larger in Underground Conduit: Copper,
stranded conductor, 600-volt insulation, THWN or XHHW-2.
C. Feeders and Branch Circuits 10 AWG and Smaller: Copper, solid or stranded
conductor, 600-volt insulation, THHN/THWN, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
Aluminum conductor is not acceptable.
D. Control Circuits: Copper, stranded conductor 600-volt insulation, THHN/THWN.
E. Each 120 and 277-volt branch circuit shall have a dedicated neutral conductor. Neutral
conductors shall be considered current-carrying conductors for wire derating.
842
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 13 - 2 WIRE AND CABLE
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 WIRE AND CABLE INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Above Accessible Ceilings:
1. Building wire shall be installed in raceway.
2. Metal clad cable, Type MC, 1/2" size with minimum #12 conductors and ground,
shall be allowed for flexible whips to individual luminaires on non-essential
circuits. The flexible whips shall be between 18" to 72" in length per Electrical
Code.
B. All Other Locations: Building wire in raceway.
C. Above Grade: All conductors installed above grade shall be type "THHN".
D. Underground or In Slab: All conductors shall be type "THWN".
E. Low Voltage Cable (less than 100 volts): Low voltage cables in ducts, plenums, and
other air handling spaces shall be plenum listed. Low voltage cables in non-accessible
areas shall be installed in conduit. Low voltage cable may be installed without conduit
in accessible areas using the following types of cable supports. Cable support
types/systems shall comply with the warranty requirements of the low voltage cable
manufacturer.
1. J-hooks
2. Bridle rings with saddle supports
F. Low Voltage Cable (less than 100 volts): Low voltage cable shall be installed in
raceway.
G. Fire-Rated 2-Hour Feeders and Circuit Requiring Continuous Operation (CI): Refer to
Part 2 of this section for acceptable products and assemblies. Installation shall meet
UL 2196.
3.2 CONTRACTOR CHANGES
A. The basis of design is copper conductors installed in raceway based on ambient
temperature of 30°C, CEC California Electrical Code edition Table 310.15(B)(16).
Service entrance conductors are based on copper conductor installed in underground
electrical ducts, CEC California Electrical Code Table B310.15(B)(2)(7).
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for derating and sizing conductors and conduits to
equal or exceed the ampacity of the basis of design circuits, if he/she chooses to use
methods or materials other than the basis of design.
C. Underground electrical duct ampacity rating shall be in accordance with CEC
California Electrical Code Table B310.15(B)(2)(7). The calculations and a sketch of the
proposed installation shall be submitted prior to any conduit being installed.
843
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 13 - 3 WIRE AND CABLE
D. Conductor length(s) listed on plans and schedules. The drawings are diagrammatic
with intent to convey the components of the electrical distribution system. Conductor
length(s) when listed on plans and schedules are for engineering calculation purposes.
Conductor length(s) shall NOT be used for bidding purposes.
E. Record drawing shall include the calculations and sketches.
3.3 GENERAL WIRING METHODS
A. Use no wire smaller than 12 AWG for power and lighting circuits, and no smaller than
14 AWG for control wiring.
B. Use no wire smaller than 18 AWG for low voltage control wiring below 100 volts.
C. Use 10 AWG conductor for 20 ampere, 120-volt branch circuit home runs longer than
75 feet, and for 20 ampere, 277-volt branch circuit home runs longer than 200 feet.
D. Use no wire smaller than 8 AWG for outdoor lighting circuits.
E. The ampacity of multiple conductors in one conduit shall be derated per the Electrical
Code. In no case shall more than 4 conductors be installed in one conduit to such
loads as motors larger than 1/4 HP, panelboards, motor control centers, etc.
F. Where installing parallel feeders, place an equal number of conductors for each phase
of a circuit in same raceway or cable.
G. Splice only in junction or outlet boxes.
H. Neatly train and lace wiring inside boxes, equipment, and panelboards.
I. Make conductor lengths for parallel circuits equal.
J. All conductors shall be continuous in conduit from last outlet to their termination.
K. Terminate all spare conductors on terminal blocks, and label the spare conductors.
L. Cables or wires shall not be laid out on the ground before pulling.
M. Cables or wires shall not be dragged over earth or paving.
N. Care shall be taken so as not to subject the cable or wire to high mechanical stresses
that would cause damage to the wire and cable.
O. At least six (6)-inch loops or ends shall be left at each outlet for installation connection
of luminaires or other devices.
P. All wires in outlet boxes not connected to fixtures or other devices shall be rolled up,
spliced if continuity of circuit is required, and insulated.
844
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 13 - 4 WIRE AND CABLE
3.4 WIRING INSTALLATION IN RACEWAYS
A. Pull all conductors into a raceway at the same time. Use UL listed wire pulling lubricant
for pulling 4 AWG and larger wires. Do not use wire pulling lubricant for isolated
(ungrounded) power system wiring.
B. Install wire in raceway after interior of building has been physically protected from the
weather and all mechanical work likely to injure conductors has been completed.
C. Pulling shall be continuous without unnecessary stops and starts with wire or cable
only partially through raceway.
D. Where reels of cable or wire are used, they shall be set up on jacks close to the point
where the wire or cable enters the conduit or duct so that the cable or wire may be
unreeled and run into the conduit or duct with a minimum of change in the direction of
the bend.
E. Conductors shall not be pulled through conduits until plastering or masonry work is
completed and conduits are free from moisture. Care shall be taken so that long pulls
of wire or pulls around several bends are not made where the wire may be
permanently stretched and the insulation damaged.
F. Only nylon rope shall be permitted to pull cables into conduit and ducts.
G. Completely and thoroughly swab raceway system before installing conductors.
H. Conductor Supports in Vertical Raceways:
1. Support conductors in vertical raceways in accordance with the Electrical Code
Spacing of Conductors Supports.
2. Supports shall be of insulated wedge type (OZ Gedney Type S, or equal) and
installed in a tapered insulated bushing fitting or a metal woven mesh with a
support ring that fits inside conduit fitting installed in an accessible junction box
(Hubbell Kellems support grip or equal).
3.5 CABLE INSTALLATION
A. Provide protection for exposed cables where subject to damage.
B. Use suitable cable fittings and connectors.
C. Run all open cable parallel or perpendicular to walls, ceilings, and exposed structural
members. Follow the routing as illustrated on the drawings as closely as possible.
Cable routing on drawings scaled 1/4"=1'-0" or less shall be considered
diagrammatical, unless noted otherwise. The correct routing, when shown
diagrammatically, shall be chosen by the Contractor based on information in the
contract documents; in accordance with the manufacturer's written instructions,
applicable codes, the NECA's "Standard of Installation", recognized industry
standards; and coordinated with other contractors.
845
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 13 - 5 WIRE AND CABLE
D. Open cable shall be supported by the appropriate size J-hooks or other means if called
for on the drawings. Wire and cable from different systems shall not be installed in the
same J-hook. J-hooks shall be sized with 20% spare capacity. J-hooks shall provide
proper bend radius support for data cable and fiber cables.
E. Open cable installed above suspended ceilings shall not rest on the suspended ceiling
construction, nor utilize the ceiling support system for wire and cable support.
F. J-hook support spans shall be based on the smaller of the manufacturer's load ratings
and code requirements. In no case shall horizontal spans exceed 5 feet and vertical
spans exceed 4 feet. All J-hooks shall be installed where completely accessible and
not blocked by piping, ductwork, inaccessible ceilings, etc. J-hooks shall be
independently rigidly attached to a structural element. J-hooks shall be installed to
provide 2" horizontal separation and 6" vertical separation between systems.
G. Open cable shall only be installed where specifically shown on the drawings, or
permitted in these specifications.
3.6 WIRING CONNECTIONS AND TERMINATIONS
A. Splice and tap only in accessible junction boxes.
B. Use solderless, tin-plated copper, compression terminals (lugs) applied with
circumferential crimp for conductor terminations, 8 AWG and larger.
C. Use solderless, tin-plated, compression terminals (lugs) applied with indenter crimp for
copper conductor terminations, 10 AWG and smaller.
D. Use solderless pressure connectors with insulating covers for copper wire splices and
taps, 8 AWG and smaller. For 10 AWG and smaller, use insulated spring wire
connectors with plastic caps.
E. Use compression connectors applied with circumferential crimp for conductor splices
and taps, 6 AWG and larger. Tape uninsulated conductors and connectors with
electrical tape to 150 percent of the insulation value of conductor. Cold shrink
connector insulator with 1kV rating shall be used in damp and wet locations.
F. Thoroughly clean wires before installing lugs and connectors.
G. Make splices, taps and terminations to carry full ampacity of conductors without
perceptible temperature rise.
H. Phase Sequence: All apparatus shall be connected to operate in the phase sequence
A-B-C representing the time sequence in which the phase conductors so identified
reach positive maximum voltage.
I. As a general rule, applicable to switches, circuit breakers, starters, panelboards,
switchgear and the like, the connections to phase conductors are intended thus:
1. Facing the front and operating side of the equipment, the phase identification
shall be:
a. Left to Right - A-B-C
846
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 13 - 6 WIRE AND CABLE
b. Top to Bottom - A-B-C
J. Connection revisions as required to achieve correct rotation of motors shall be made at
the load terminals of the starters or disconnect switches.
K. Use antioxidant joint compound on all aluminum conductor terminations. Apply
antioxidant joint compound per manufacturer's recommendations.
END OF SECTION 26 05 13
847
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 26 - 1 GROUNDING AND
BONDING
SECTION 26 05 26
GROUNDING AND BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Equipment grounding system
B. Grounding electrode system
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
B. CEC California Electrical Code
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Product Data: For the following:
1. Ground rods.
C. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
D. Indicate layout of ground field, location of system grounding electrode connections,
and routing of grounding electrode conductor and ground ring.
1.4 SUMMARY
A. This section includes grounding of electrical systems and equipment. Grounding
requirements specified in this Section may be supplemented by special requirements
of systems described in other Sections.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GROUNDING CONDUCTORS
A. For insulated conductors, comply with Division 26 Section 26 05 13 "Wire and Cable".
B. Material: Copper.
C. Equipment Grounding Conductors: Insulated. Refer to Section 26 05 53 for insulation
color.
D. Grounding Electrode Conductors: Stranded cable.
848
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 26 - 2 GROUNDING AND
BONDING
E. Underground Conductors: Bare, tinned, stranded, unless otherwise indicated.
F. Copper Bonding Conductors: As follows:
1. Bonding Conductor: No. 4 or No. 6 AWG, stranded copper conductor.
G. GB; Grounding Bar:
1. Bare, annealed copper bars of rectangular cross section, with insulators. 1/4" x
2", length of technology or applicable room.
H. IBT; Intersystem Bonding Termination:
1. Copper bar, 1/4" x 2" x 24". Provide with wall mounting brackets, insulators and
pre-tapped holes.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Harger GBI Series.
b. Erico EGB Series.
2.2 GROUNDING ELECTRODES
A. Ground Rods Copper-clad steel Stainless steel.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONNECTIONS
A. General: Make connections so galvanic action or electrolysis possibility is minimized.
Select connectors, connection hardware, conductors, and connection methods so
metals in direct contact will be galvanically compatible.
1. Use electroplated or hot-tin-coated materials to ensure high conductivity and to
make contact points closer to order of galvanic series.
2. Make connections with clean, bare metal at points of contact.
3. Make aluminum-to-steel connections with stainless-steel separators and
mechanical clamps.
4. Make aluminum-to-galvanized steel connections with tin-plated copper jumpers
and mechanical clamps.
5. Coat and seal connections having dissimilar metals with inert material to prevent
future penetration of moisture to contact surfaces.
B. Equipment Grounding Conductor Terminations: For No. 8 AWG and larger, use
pressure-type grounding lugs. No. 10 AWG and smaller grounding conductors may be
terminated with winged pressure-type connectors.
849
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 26 - 3 GROUNDING AND
BONDING
C. Noncontact Metal Raceway Terminations: If metallic raceways terminate at metal
housings without mechanical and electrical connection to housing, terminate each
conduit with a grounding bushing. Connect grounding bushings with a bare grounding
conductor to grounding bus or terminal in housing. Bond electrically non-continuous
conduits at entrances and exits with grounding bushings and bare grounding
conductors, unless otherwise indicated.
D. Underground Connections: Exothermic-welded connections.Use for underground
connections, except those at test wells.
E. Connections at back boxes, junction boxes, pull boxes, and equipment terminations:
The equipment grounding conductor(s) associated with all circuits in the box shall be
connected together and to the box using a suitable grounding screw. The removal of
the respective receptacle, luminaire, or other device served by the box shall not
interrupt the grounding continuity. The connection to the non-metallic boxes shall be
made to any metallic fitting or device requiring grounding.
F. Tighten screws and bolts for grounding and bonding connectors and terminals
according to manufacturer's published torque-tightening values. If manufacturer's
torque values are not indicated, use those specified in UL 486A and UL 486B.
G. Moisture Protection: If insulated grounding conductors are connected to ground rods or
grounding buses, insulate entire area of connection and seal against moisture
penetration of insulation and cable.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Use only copper conductors for both insulated and bare grounding conductors in direct
contact with earth, concrete, masonry, crushed stone, and similar materials.
B. Grounding Conductors: Route along shortest and straightest paths possible, unless
otherwise indicated. Avoid obstructing access or placing conductors where they may
be subjected to strain, impact, or damage. Each grounding conductor that passes
through a below grade wall must be provided with a waterstop.
C. Grounding electrode conductor (GEC) shall be protected from physical damage by
rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC) in exposed locations.
D. Bonding Straps and Jumpers: Install so vibration by equipment mounted on vibration
isolation hangers and supports is not transmitted to rigidly mounted equipment. Use
exothermic-welded connectors for outdoor locations, unless a disconnect-type
connection is required; then use a bolted clamp. Bond straps directly to the basic
structure, taking care not to penetrate any adjacent parts. Install straps only in
locations accessible for maintenance.
E. In raceways, use insulated equipment grounding conductors.
F. Underground Grounding Conductors: Use copper conductor, No. 2/0 AWG minimum.
Bury at least 24 inches below grade or bury 12 inches above duct bank when installed
as part of the duct bank.
850
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 26 - 4 GROUNDING AND
BONDING
G. Grounding Bus: Install in electrical and telephone equipment rooms, in rooms housing
service equipment, below access floors, and elsewhere as indicated, with bolted
connections to form a continuous ground path.
3.3 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING SYSTEM
A. Comply with Electrical Code, for types, sizes, and quantities of equipment grounding
conductors, unless specific types, larger sizes, or more conductors than required by
Electrical Code are indicated.
B. Install equipment grounding conductors in all feeders and circuits. Terminate each end
on a grounding lug or bus.
C. Install insulated equipment grounding conductor with circuit conductors for the
following items, in addition to those required by Electrical Code:
1. Lighting and receptacle circuits. Terminate each end on a grounding lug or bus.
2. Single-phase and three-phase motor and appliance branch circuits.
3. Flexible raceway runs, including FMC and LFMC.
4. Armored and metal-clad cable runs.
D. Nonmetallic Raceways: Install an equipment grounding conductor in nonmetallic
raceways unless they are designated for telephone or data cables.
3.4 BONDING SYSTEM
A. Isolated Equipment Enclosure: For designated equipment supplied by a branch circuit
or feeder, isolate equipment enclosure from supply raceway with a nonmetallic
raceway fitting listed for the purpose. Install fitting where raceway enters enclosure,
and install a separate equipment bonding conductor.
B. Exterior Metallic Pull and Junction Box Covers, Metallic Hand Rails: Bond to grounding
system using flexible grounding conductors.
C. Equipment Circuits: Install a bonding conductor to duct-mounted electrical devices
operating at 120 V and more, including air cleaners, dampers, and heaters. Bond
conductor to each unit and to air duct. Bond interior metal piping systems and metal air
ducts to equipment grounding conductors of associated pumps, fans, blowers, electric
heaters, and air cleaners. Use braided-type bonding straps or copper conductor sized
equal to the equipment grounding conductor.
D. Connect bonding conductors to metal water pipe using a suitable ground clamp. Make
connections to flanged piping at street side of flange. Provide bonding jumper around
water meter.
E. Signal and Communication Systems: For telephone, alarm, voice and data, and other
communication systems, provide No. 6 AWG minimum insulated bonding conductor in
raceway from grounding electrode system to each service location, terminal cabinet,
wiring closet, and central equipment location. Leave 10 feet of slack conductor at
terminal board.
851
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 26 - 5 GROUNDING AND
BONDING
F. Telecom Service and Central Equipment Locations and Wiring Closets: Terminate
grounding conductor on a 1/4-by-2-by-12-inch grounding bar.
G. Terminal Cabinets: Terminate bonding conductor on cabinet grounding terminal.
H. Remote control, signaling, and fire alarm circuits shall be bonded in accordance with
the most recent version of the National Electric Code.
I. Metal Poles Supporting Outdoor Lighting Fixtures > 15 feet: Provide a grounding
electrode in addition to installing a separate equipment grounding conductor with
supply branch-circuit conductors.
J. Common Ground Bonding with Lightning Protection System: Bond electrical power
system ground directly to lightning protection system grounding conductor at closest
point to electrical service grounding electrode. Use bonding conductor sized same as
system grounding electrode conductor, and install in conduit.
3.5 GRADING AND PLANTING
A. Restore surface features, including vegetation, at areas disturbed by Work of this
Section. Reestablish original grades, unless otherwise indicated. If sod has been
removed, replace it as soon as possible after backfilling is completed. Restore areas
disturbed by trenching, storing of dirt, cable laying, and other activities to their original
condition. Include application of topsoil, fertilizer, lime, seed, sod, sprig, and mulch.
Comply with Division 2. Maintain restored surfaces. Restore disturbed paving.
END OF SECTION 26 05 26
852
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 27 - 1 SUPPORTING DEVICES
SECTION 26 05 27 - SUPPORTING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Conduit and Equipment Supports
B. Fastening Hardware
C. Concrete Housekeeping Pads
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Support systems shall be adequate for weight of equipment and conduit, including
wiring, which they carry.
1.3 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate size, shape and location of concrete pads with section on Cast-in-Place
Concrete or Concrete Topping.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Allied Support Systems
B. Cooper B-Line
C. Erico, Inc.
D. Hilti
E. Power Fasteners
F. Orbit Industries
2.2 MATERIAL
A. Support Channel: Hot-dip galvanized; painted steel for interior/dry locations. All field
cut ends shall be touched up with matching finish to inhibit rusting.
B. Hardware: Corrosion resistant.
C. Anchorage and Structural Attachment Components:
1. Strength: Defined in reports by ICBO Evaluation Service or another agency
acceptable to Authorities Having Jurisdiction.
853
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 27 - 2 SUPPORTING DEVICES
a. Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension and shear of components used
shall be at least two times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be
subjected.
2. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM A
325.
3. Concrete Anchors: Fasten to concrete using cast-in or post-installed anchors
designed per the requirements of Appendix D of ACI 318-05. Post-installed
anchors shall be qualified for use in cracked concrete by ACI-355.2.
D. Concrete Housekeeping Pads:
1. Concrete bases for all floor mounted equipment and wall mounted equipment
which is surface mounted and extends to within 6" of the finished floor, unless
shown otherwise on the drawings, shall be 3-1/2" thick concrete.
2. Bases shall extend 3" on all sides of the equipment (6" larger than factory base).
3. Where the base is less than 12" from a wall, the base shall be carried to the wall
to prevent a "dirt-trap".
4. Concrete materials and workmanship required for the Contractor's work shall be
provided by the Contractor. Materials and workmanship shall conform to the
applicable standards of the Portland Cement Association. Reinforce with 6" x 6",
W1.4-W1.4 welded wire fabric. Concrete shall withstand 3,000 pounds
compression per square inch at twenty-eight days.
E. Rooftop Support System:
1. Provide pre-fabricated roof supports for all conduit and equipment installed
above the roof. Support all conduit and equipment a minimum of 4" above roof.
2. Support system shall be compatible with single ply, bituminous, metal, and spray
foam roof systems. The base shall be rounded to prevent damage to the roof,
and drainage holes shall prevent ponding of water in the support.
3. All metal components shall be hot dipped galvanized. Mounting hardware shall
be stainless steel or hot dipped galvanized. Support shall be UV, corrosion, and
freeze/thaw resistant. Support shall include orange paint, reflective safety orange
accents, or similar markings for increased visibility.
4. Products:
a. Anvil International HBS-Base Series
b. Cooper B-Line Dura-Blok
c. Erico Caddy Pyramid 50, 150, 300, or 600 (to match load).
F. Truss and Joist Support System: Provided the installation complies with all loading
requirements of truss and joist manufacturers, the following practices are acceptable:
1. Loads of 100 lbs. or less may be attached anywhere along the top or bottom
chords of trusses or joists with a minimum 3' spacing between loads.
2. Loads greater than 100 lbs. must be hung concentrically and may be hung from
top or bottom chord, provided one of the following conditions is met:
a. The hanger is attached within 6" from a web/chord joint.
b. Additional L2x2x1/4 web reinforcement is installed per manufacturer's
requirements.
854
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 27 - 3 SUPPORTING DEVICES
3. It is prohibited to cantilever a load using an angle or other structural component
that is attached to a truss or joist in such a fashion that a torsional force is
applied to that structural member.
4. If conditions cannot be met, coordinate installation with truss or joist
manufacturer and contact Architect/Engineer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Fasten hanger rods, conduit clamps, and outlet and junction boxes to building
structure using expansion anchors in concrete and beam clamps on structural steel.
B. Trapeze support installation: Cut hanger rods back at trapeze supports so they do not
extend more than 3/4" below bottom face of lowest fastener and blunt any sharp
edges.
C. Use toggle bolts or hollow wall fasteners in hollow masonry, plaster, or gypsum board
partitions and walls; expansion anchors or preset inserts in solid masonry walls; self-
drilling anchors or expansion anchor on concrete surfaces; sheet metal screws in
sheet metal studs; and wood screws in wood construction.
D. Do not fasten supports to ceiling systems, piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or
conduit, unless otherwise noted.
E. Do not use powder-actuated anchors without specific permission.
F. Do not drill structural steel members.
G. Fabricate supports from structural steel or steel channel, rigidly welded or bolted to
present a neat appearance. Use hexagon head bolts with spring lock washers under
all nuts.
H. In wet locations and on all building floors below exterior earth grade install free-
standing electrical equipment on concrete pads.
I. Install cabinets and panelboards with minimum of four anchors. Provide horizontal
backing/support framing in stud walls for rigid mounting. Provide steel channel
supports to stand surface-mounted panelboard or cabinet one inch off wall.
J. Bridge studs top and bottom with channels to support flush-mounted cabinets and
panelboards in stud walls.
K. Refer to Section 26 05 33 for special conduit supporting requirements.
3.2 FINISH
A. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports in crawl
spaces, pipe shafts, and above suspended ceiling spaces are not considered exposed.
855
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 27 - 4 SUPPORTING DEVICES
B. Trim all ends of exposed field fabricated steel hangers, slotted channel and threaded
rod to within 1" of support or fastener to eliminate potential injury to personnel unless
shown otherwise on the drawings. Smooth ends and install elastomeric insulation with
two coats of latex paint if exposed steel is within 6'-6" of finish floor and presents
potential injury to personnel.
END OF SECTION 26 05 27
856
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 33 - 1 CONDUIT AND BOXES
SECTION 26 05 33
CONDUIT AND BOXES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Rigid metallic conduit and fittings (RMC)
B. Intermediate metallic conduit and fittings (IMC)
C. Electrical metallic tubing and fittings (EMT)
D. Flexible metallic conduit and fittings (FMC)
E. Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit and fittings (PVC)
F. Wall and ceiling outlet boxes
G. Pull and junction boxes
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 05 53 - Electrical Identification: Refer to electrical identification for color and
identification labeling requirements.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. American National Standards Institute (ANSI):
1. ANSI C80.1 - Rigid Steel Conduit, Zinc-Coated
2. ANSI C80.3 - Electrical Metallic Tubing, Zinc-Coated and Fittings
3. ANSI C80.4 - Fittings for Rigid Metal Conduit and Electrical Metallic Tubing
4. ANSI C80.6 - Intermediate Metal Conduit, Zinc Coated
5. ANSI/NEMA OS 1 - Sheet-Steel Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box
Supports
6. ANSI/NEMA OS 2 - Nonmetallic Outlet Boxes, Device Boxes, Covers and Box
Supports
B. Federal Specifications (FS):
1. A-A-50553A - Fittings for Conduit, Metal, Rigid, (Thick-Wall and Thin-Wall (EMT)
Type
2. A-A-55810 - Specification for Flexible Metal Conduit
C. NECA "Standards of Installation"
D. National Electrical Manufacturers Association (NEMA):
857
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 33 - 2 CONDUIT AND BOXES
1. ANSI/NEMA FB 1 - Fittings, Cast Metal Boxes, and Conduit Bodies for Conduit,
Electrical Metallic Tubing and Cable
2. RN 1 - Polyvinyl chloride (PVC) Externally Coated Galvanized Rigid Steel
Conduit, Rigid Aluminum Conduit, and Intermediate Metal Conduit
3. TC 2 - Electrical Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC) Conduit
4. TC 9 - Fittings for PVC Plastic Utilities Duct for Underground Installation
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
F. CEC California Electrical Code
G. Underwriters Laboratories (UL): Applicable Listings
1. UL 1 - Flexible Metal Conduit
2. UL 6 - Rigid Metal Conduit
3. UL 360 - Liquid Tight Flexible Steel Conduit
4. UL514-B - Conduit Tubing and Cable Fittings
5. UL651-A - Type EB and a PVC Conduit and HDPE Conduit
6. UL651-B - Continuous Length HDPE Conduit
7. UL746A - Standard for Polymeric Materials - Short Term Property Evaluations
8. UL797 - Electrical Metal Tubing
9. UL1242 - Intermediate Metal Conduit
H. American Standard of Testing and Materials (ASTM):
1. ASTM D 570 - Standard Test Method for Water Absorption of Plastics
2. ASTM D 638 - Standard Test Method for Tensile Properties of Plastics
3. ASTM D 648 - Standard Test Method for Deflection Temperature of Plastics
under Flexural Load in the Edge Wise Position
4. ASTM D 2412 - Standard Test Method for Determination of External Loading
Characteristics of Plastic Pipe by Parallel-Plate Loading
5. ASTM D 2447 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene (PE) Plastic Pipe,
Schedules 40 and 80, Based on Outside Diameter
6. ASTM D 3350 - Standard Specification for Polyethylene Plastic Pipe and Fittings
Material
I. Definitions:
1. Fittings: Conduit connection or coupling.
2. Body: Enlarged fittings with opening allowing access to the conductors for pulling
purposes only.
3. Mechanical Spaces: Enclosed areas, usually kept separated from the general
public, where the primary use is to house service equipment and to route
services. These spaces generally have exposed structures, bare concrete and
non-architecturally emphasized finishes.
4. Finished Spaces: Enclosed areas where the primary use is to house personnel
and the general public. These spaces generally have architecturally emphasized
finishes, ceilings and/or floors.
5. Concealed: Not visible by the general public. Often indicates a location either
above the ceiling, in the walls, in or beneath the floor slab, in column coverings,
or in the ceiling construction.
858
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 33 - 3 CONDUIT AND BOXES
6. Above Grade: Not directly in contact with the earth. For example, an interior wall
located at an elevation below the finished grade shall be considered above grade
but a wall retaining earth shall be considered below grade.
7. Slab: Horizontal pour of concrete used for a floor or sub-floor.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RIGID METALLIC CONDUIT (RMC) AND FITTINGS
A. Manufacturers:
1. Allied
2. LTV
3. Steelduct
4. Calbond Calpipe
5. Wheatland Tube Co
6. O-Z Gedney
7. or approved equal.
B. Manufacturers of RMC Conduit Fittings:
1. Appleton Electric
2. O-Z/Gedney Co.
3. Electroline
4. Raco
5. Bridgeport
6. Midwest
7. Regal
8. Thomas & Betts
9. Crouse-Hinds
10. Killark
11. Orbit Industries
12. or approved equal.
C. Minimum Size Galvanized Steel: 3/4 inch, unless otherwise noted.
D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies:
1. End Bell Fittings: Malleable iron, hot dip galvanized, threaded flare type with
provisions for mounting to form.
2. Expansion Joints: Malleable iron and hot dip galvanized providing a minimum of
4 inches of movement. Fitting shall be watertight with an insulating bushing and a
bonding jumper.
3. Conduit End Bushings: Malleable iron type with molded-on high impact phenolic
thermosetting insulation. Where required elsewhere in the contract documents,
bushing shall be complete with ground conductor saddle and clamp. High impact
phenolic threaded type bushings are not acceptable.
4. All other fittings and conduit bodies shall be of malleable iron construction and
hot dip galvanized.
859
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 33 - 4 CONDUIT AND BOXES
2.2 ELECTRICAL METALLIC TUBING (EMT) AND FITTINGS
A. Minimum Size Electrical Metallic Tubing: 3/4 inch, unless otherwise noted.
B. Manufacturers of EMT Conduit:
1. Allied
2. Calbond Calpipe
3. LTV
4. Steelduct
5. Wheatland Tube Co
6. or approved equal.
C. Fittings and Conduit Bodies:
1. 2" Diameter or Smaller: Compression type of steel designed for their specific
application.
2. 1/2" and 3/4" Conduit: Push-on connectors and couplers with locking ring and
washer of zinc plated steel, listed for use in dry locations.
3. Larger than 2": Compression type of steel designed for their specific application.
4. Manufacturers of EMT Conduit Fittings:
a. Appleton Electric
b. O-Z/Gedney Co.
c. Electroline
d. Raco
e. Bridgeport
f. Midwest
g. Regal
h. Thomas & Betts
i. Orbit Industries
j. or approved equal.
2.3 FLEXIBLE METALLIC CONDUIT (FMC) AND FITTINGS
A. Minimum Size Galvanized Steel: 3/4 inch, unless otherwise noted. Lighting branch
circuit wiring to an individual luminaire may be a manufactured, UL listed 3/8" flexible
metal conduit and fittings with #14 AWG THHN conductors and an insulated ground
wire. Maximum length of 3/8" FMC shall be six (6) feet.
B. Manufacturers:
1. American Flex
2. Alflex
3. Electri-Flex Co
4. or approved equal.
C. Construction: Flexible steel, approved for conduit ground, zinc coated, threadless type
formed from a continuous length of spirally wound, interlocked zinc coated strip steel.
Provide a separate equipment grounding conductor when used for equipment where
flexibility is required.
D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies:
860
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 33 - 5 CONDUIT AND BOXES
1. Threadless hinged clamp type, galvanized zinc coated cadmium plated malleable
cast iron or screw-in type, die-cast zinc.
2. Fittings and conduit bodies shall include plastic or cast metal inserts supplied by
the manufacturer to protect conductors from sharp edges.
3. Manufacturers:
a. O-Z/Gedney Co.
b. Thomas & Betts
c. Appleton Electric
d. Electroline
e. Bridgeport
f. Midwest
g. Regal
h. Orbit Industries
i. or approved equal.
2.4 RIGID NON-METALLIC CONDUIT (PVC) AND FITTINGS
A. Minimum Size Rigid Smooth-Wall Nonmetallic Conduit: 3/4 inch, unless otherwise
noted.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers:
1. Carlon (Lamson & Sessions) Type 40
2. Cantex, J.M. Mfg.
3. or approved equal.
C. Construction: Schedule 40 and Schedule 80 rigid polyvinyl chloride (PVC), UL labeled
for 90°C.
D. Fittings and Conduit Bodies: NEMA TC 3; sleeve type suitable for and manufactured
especially for use with the conduit by the conduit manufacturer.
E. Plastic cement for joining conduit and fittings shall be provided as recommended by
the manufacturer.
ASTM Test Description Values HDPE
D-1505 Density g/CM 3 less than 0.941
D-1238 Melt Index, g/10 min Condition E greater than 0.55 grams/10
min.
D-638 Tensile Strength at yield (psi) 3000 min.
D-1693 Environmental Stress Crack
Resistance Condition B, F 20
96 hrs.
D-790 Flexural Modulus, MPa (psi) less than 80,000
D-746 Brittleness Temperature -75°C Max
2.5 OUTLET BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Outlet Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel, 16 gauge
(approximately 0.0625 inches), with 1/2-inch male fixture studs where required.
861
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 33 - 6 CONDUIT AND BOXES
B. Outlet boxes for luminaires to be not less than 1-1/2" deep, deeper if required by the
number of wires or construction. The box shall be coordinated with surface luminaires
to conceal the box from view or provide a finished trim plate.
C. Switch outlet boxes for local light control switches, dimmers and occupancy sensors
shall be 4 inches square by 2-1/8 inches deep, with raised cover to fit flush with finish
wall line. Multiple gang switch outlets shall consist of the required number of gang
boxes appropriate to the quantity of switches comprising the gang. Where walls are
plastered, provide a plaster raised cover. Where switch outlet boxes occur in exposed
concrete block walls, boxes shall be installed in the block cavity with a raised square
edge tile cover of sufficient depth to extend out to face of block or masonry boxes.
D. Outlet boxes for telephone substations in walls and columns shall be 4 inches square
and 2-1/8 inches deep with single gang raised cover to fit flush with finished wall line
equipped with flush telephone plate.
E. Wall or column receptacle outlet boxes shall be 4 inches square with raised cover to fit
flush with finished wall line. Boxes in concrete block walls shall be installed the same
as for switch boxes in block walls.
2.6 JB; PULL AND JUNCTION BOXES
A. Sheet Metal Boxes: ANSI/NEMA OS 1; galvanized steel.
B. Sheet metal boxes larger than 12 inches in any dimension that contain terminations or
components: Continuous hinged enclosure with 1/4 turn latch and white back panel for
mounting terminal blocks and electrical components.
C. Flanged type boxes shall be used where installed flush in wall.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONDUIT INSTALLATION SCHEDULE AND SIZING
A. In the event the location of conduit installation represents conflicting installation
requirements as specified in the following schedule, a clarification shall be obtained
from the Architect/Engineer. If this Contractor is unable to obtain a clarification as
outlined above, concealed rigid galvanized steel conduit installed per these
specifications and the Electrical Code shall be required.
B. Installation Schedule: Refer to drawings.
C. Size conduit as shown on the drawings and specifications. Where not indicated in the
contract documents, conduit size shall be according to the Electrical Code. Conduit
and conductor sizing shall be coordinated to limit conductor fill to less than 40%,
maintain conductor ampere capacity as required by the Electrical Code (to include
enlarged conductors due to temperature and quantity derating values) and to prevent
excessive voltage drop and pulling tension due to long conduit/conductor lengths.
D. Minimum Conduit Size (Unless Noted Otherwise):
862
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 33 - 7 CONDUIT AND BOXES
1. Above Grade: 3/4 inch. (The use of 1/2 inch would be allowed for installation
conduit to individual light switches, individual receptacles and individual fixture
whips from junction box.)
2. Below Grade 5' or less from Building Foundation: 1 inch.
3. Below Grade More than 5' from Building Foundation: 1 inch.
4. Telecommunication Conduit: 1 inch.
5. Controls Conduit: 3/4 inch.
E. Conduit sizes shall change only at the entrance or exit to a junction box, unless
specifically noted on the drawings.
3.2 CONDUIT ARRANGEMENT
A. In general, conduit shall be installed concealed in walls, in finished spaces and where
possible or practical, or as noted otherwise. Conduit shall be installed parallel or
perpendicular to walls, ceilings, and exposed structural members. In unfinished
spaces, mechanical and utility areas, conduit may run either concealed or exposed as
conditions dictate and as practical unless noted otherwise on drawings. Installation
shall maintain headroom in exposed vicinities of pedestrian or vehicular traffic.
B. Exposed conduit on exterior walls or above roof will not be allowed without prior written
approval of Architect/Engineer. A drawing of the proposed routing and a photo of the
location shall be submitted 14 days prior to start of conduit rough-in. Routing shall be
shown on coordination drawings.
C. Conduit shall not share the same cell as structural reinforcement in masonry walls.
D. Conduit runs shall be routed as shown on large scale drawings. Conduit routing on
drawings scaled 1/4"=1'-0" or less shall be considered diagrammatic, unless noted
otherwise. The correct routing, when shown diagrammatically shall be chosen by the
Contractor based on information in the contract documents, in accordance with
manufacturer's written instructions, applicable codes, the NECA's "Standard of
Installation", in accordance with recognized industry standards, and coordinated with
other contractors.
E. Contractor shall adapt Contractor's work to the job conditions and make such changes
as required and permitted by the Architect/Engineer, such as moving to clear beams
and joists, adjusting at columns, avoiding interference with windows, etc., to permit the
proper installation of other mechanical and/or electrical equipment.
F. Contractor shall cooperate with all contractors on the project. Contractor shall obtain
details of other contractor's work to ensure fit and avoid conflict. Any expense due to
the failure of This Contractor to do so shall be paid for in full by Contractor. The other
trades involved as directed by the Architect/Engineer shall perform the repair of work
damaged as a result of neglect or error by This Contractor. The resultant costs shall be
borne by This Contractor.
3.3 CONDUIT SUPPORT
A. Conduit runs installed above a suspended ceiling shall be properly supported. In no
case shall conduit rest on the suspended ceiling construction, nor utilize ceiling
support system for conduit support.
863
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 33 - 8 CONDUIT AND BOXES
1. Support wire used to independently support raceway and wiring systems above
suspending ceilings shall be supported on both ends, minimum 12 gauge
suspended ceiling support wire, and distinguishable from ceiling support systems
by color (field paint), tagging, or equivalent means.
B. Conduit shall not be supported from ductwork, water, sprinkler piping, or other non-
structural members, unless approved by the Architect/Engineer. All supports shall be
from structural slabs, walls, structural members, and bar joists, and coordinated with
all other applicable contractors, unless noted otherwise.
C. Conduit shall be held in place by the correct size of galvanized one-hole conduit
clamps, two-hole conduit straps, patented support devices, clamp back conduit
hangers, or by other means if called for on the drawings.
D. Support individual horizontal raceways with separate, malleable-iron pipe hangers or
clamps.
E. Spring-steel conduit clips specifically designed for supporting single conduits or tubing
may be used in lieu of malleable-iron hangers for 1-1/2" and smaller raceways serving
lighting and receptacle branch circuits above accessible ceilings and for securing
raceways to slotted channel and angle supports.
F. Group conduits in parallel runs where practical and use conduit racks or trapeze
hangers constructed of steel channel, suspended with threaded solid rods or wall
mounted from metal channels with conduit straps or clamps. Provide space in each
rack or trapeze for 25% additional conduits.
G. Do not exceed 25 lbs. per hanger and a minimum spacing of 2'-0" on center when
attaching to metal roof decking (excludes concrete on metal deck). This 25 lbs. load
and 2'-0" spacing include adjacent electrical and mechanical items hanging from deck.
If the hanger restrictions cannot be achieved, supplemental framing off steel framing
will need to be added.
H. Arrange supports in vertical runs so the weight of raceways and enclosed conductors
is carried entirely by raceway supports, with no weight load on raceway terminals.
I. Supports for metallic conduit shall be no greater than 10 feet. A smaller interval may
be used if necessitated by building construction, but in no event shall support spans
exceed the Electrical Code requirements. Conduit shall be securely fastened within 3
feet of each outlet box, junction box, device box, cabinet, or fitting.
J. Supports of flexible conduit shall be within 12 inches of each outlet box, junction box,
device box, cabinet, or fitting and at intervals not to exceed 4.5 feet.
K. Supports for non-metallic conduit shall be at sufficiently close intervals to eliminate any
sag in the conduit. The manufacturer's recommendations shall be followed, but in no
event shall support spans exceed the Electrical Code requirements.
L. Where conduit is to be installed in poured concrete floors or walls, provide concrete-
tight conduit inserts securely fastened to forms to prevent conduit misplacement.
M. Finish:
--
864
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 33 - 9 CONDUIT AND BOXES
1. Prime coat exposed steel hangers and supports. Hangers and supports in crawl
spaces, pipe shafts, and above suspended ceiling spaces are not considered
exposed.
2. Trim all ends of exposed field fabricated steel hangers, slotted channel and
threaded rod to within 1" of support or fastener to eliminate potential injury to
personnel unless shown otherwise on the drawings. Smooth ends and install
elastomeric insulation with two coats of latex paint if exposed steel is within 6'-6"
of finish floor and presents potential injury to personnel.
3.4 CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A. Conduit Connections:
1. Shorter than standard conduit lengths shall be cut square using industry
standards. The ends of all conduits cut shall be reamed or otherwise finished to
remove all rough edges.
2. Metallic conduit connections in slab on grade installation shall be sealed and one
coat of rust inhibitor primer applied after the connection is made.
3. Where conduits with tapered threads cannot be coupled with standard couplings,
then approved split or Erickson couplings shall be used. Running threads will not
be permitted.
B. Conduit terminations for all low voltage wiring shall have nylon bushings installed on
each end of every conduit run.
C. Conduit Bends:
1. Use a hydraulic one-shot conduit bender or factory elbows for bends in conduit 2"
in size or larger. All steel conduit bending shall be done cold; no heating of steel
conduit shall be permitted.
2. All bends of rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC) shall be made with the
manufacturer's approved bending equipment. The use of spot heating devices
will not be permitted (i.e. blow torches).
3. A run of conduit shall not contain more than the equivalent of four (4) quarter
bends (360°), including those bends located immediately at the outlet or body.
4. Telecommunications conduits shall have no more than two (2) 90-degree bends
between pull points and contain no continuous sections longer than 100 feet.
Insert pull points or pull boxes for conduits exceeding 100 feet in length.
a. A third bend is acceptable if:
1) The total run is not longer than (33) feet.
2) The conduit size is increased to the next trade size.
5. Telecommunications pull boxes shall not be used in lieu of a bend. Align conduits
that enter the pull box from opposite ends with each other. Pull box size shall be
twelve (12) times the diameter of the largest conduit. Slip sleeves or gutters can
be used in place of a pull box.
6. Telecommunications Conduit(s): Maintain appropriate conduit bend radius at all
times. For conduits with an internal diameter of less than 2", maintain a bend
radius of at least 6 times the internal diameter. For conduits with an internal
diameter 2" or greater, maintain a bend radius of at least 10 times the internal
diameter.
--
865
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 33 - 10 CONDUIT AND BOXES
7. Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC) runs longer than 100 feet or runs which
have more than two 90° equivalent bends (regardless of length) shall use rigid
metal or RTRC factory elbows for bends.
8. Use conduit bodies to make sharp changes in direction (i.e. around beams).
D. Conduit Placement:
1. Conduit shall be mechanically continuous from source of current to all outlets.
Conduit shall be electrically continuous from source of current to all outlets,
unless a properly sized grounding conductor is routed within the conduit. All
metallic conduits shall be bonded per the Electrical Code.
2. Route exposed conduit and conduit above suspended ceilings (accessible or not)
parallel/perpendicular to the building structural lines, and as close to building
structure as possible. Wherever possible, route horizontal conduit runs above
water and steam piping.
3. Route conduit through roof openings provided for piping and ductwork where
possible. If not provided or routing through provided openings is not possible,
route through roof jack with pitch pocket. Coordinate roof penetrations with other
trades.
4. Conduits, raceway, and boxes shall not be installed in concealed locations in
less than 1.5" below bottom of roof decking.
5. Avoid moisture traps where possible. Where unavoidable, provide a junction box
with drain fitting at conduit low point.
6. All conduits through walls shall be grouted or sealed into openings. Where
conduit penetrates firewalls and floors, seal with a UL listed sealant. ; refer to
Section 26 05 03 for through penetration firestopping requirements.
7. Seal interior of conduit at exterior entries, air handling units, coolers/freezers,
etc., and where the temperature differential can potentially be greater than 20°F,
to prevent moisture penetration. Seal shall be placed where conduit enters warm
space. Conduit seal fitting shall be a drain/seal, with sealing compound, identified
for use with cable and raceway system, equal to O-Z/Gedney type EYD.
8. Horizontal conduit routing through slabs above grade
a. Conduits, if run in concrete structure, shall be in middle one-third of slab
thickness, and leave at least 3" min. concrete cover. Conduits shall run
parallel to each other and spaced at least 8" apart centerline to centerline.
Secure raceways to reinforcing rods to prevent sagging or shifting during
concrete placement. Maximum conduit outside diameter 1".
b. No conduits are allowed in concrete on metal deck unless expressly
approved in writing by the Structural Engineer of Record.
c. No conduits are allowed to be routed horizontally through slabs above
grade.
9. Do not route conduits across each other in slabs on grade.
10. Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC) shall be installed when material surface
temperatures and ambient temperature are greater than 40°F.
11. Where rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC) is used below grade, in a slab,
below a slab, etc., a transition to rigid galvanized steel or PVC-coated steel
conduit shall be installed before conduit exits earth. The metallic conduit shall
extend a minimum of 6" into the surface concealing the non-metallic conduit.
12. Contractor shall provide suitable mechanical protection around all conduits
stubbed out from floors, walls or ceilings during construction to prevent bending
or damaging of stubs due to carelessness with construction equipment.
866
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 33 - 11 CONDUIT AND BOXES
13. Contractor shall provide a polypropylene pull cord with 2000 lbs. tensile strength
in each empty conduit (indoor and outdoor), except in sleeves and nipples.
14. Telecommunications conduits that protrude through the structural floor shall be
installed 1 to 3" above finished floor (AFF).
15. Telecommunications conduits that enter into Telecommunications rooms below
the finished ceiling shall terminate a minimum of 4" below ceiling and as close to
the wall as possible.
16. Telecommunications conduits that are below grade and enter into a building shall
terminate a minimum of 4" above finished floor (AFF) and as close to the wall as
possible.
3.5 CONDUIT TERMINATIONS
A. Where conduit bonding is indicated or required in the contract documents, the
bushings shall be a grounding type sized for the conduit and ground bonding
conductor as manufactured by O-Z/Gedney, Appleton, Thomas & Betts, Burndy,
Regal, Orbit Industries or approved equal.
B. Conduits with termination fittings shall be threaded for one (1) lock nut on the outside
and one (1) lock nut and bushing on the inside of each box.
C. Where conduits terminate in boxes with knockouts, they shall be secured to the boxes
with lock nuts and provided with approved screw type tinned iron bushings or fittings
with plastic inserts.
D. Where conduits terminate in boxes, fittings, or bodies with threaded openings, they
shall be tightly screwed against the shoulder portion of the threaded openings.
E. Conduit terminations to all motors shall be made with flexible metallic conduit (FMC),
unless noted otherwise. Final connections to roof exhaust fans, or other exterior
motors and motors in damp or wet locations shall be made with liquidtight flexible
metallic conduit (LFMC). Flexible conduit shall not exceed 6' in length. Route
equipment ground conductors from circuit ground to motor ground terminal through
flexible conduit.
F. Rigid polyvinyl chloride conduit (PVC) shall be terminated using fittings and bodies
produced by the manufacturer of the conduit, unless noted otherwise. Prepare conduit
as per manufacturer's recommendations before joining. All joints shall be solvent
welded by applying full even coat of plastic cement to the entire areas that will be
joined. Turn the conduit at least a quarter to one half turn in the fitting and let the joint
cure for 1-hour minimum or as per the manufacturer's recommendations.
G. All conduit ends shall be sealed with plastic immediately after installation to prevent
the entrance of any foreign matter during construction. The seals shall be removed
and the conduits blown clear of all foreign matter prior to any wires or pull cords being
installed.
3.6 RIGID POLYVINYL CHLORIDE CONDUIT (PVC) OVERHEAD CONDUIT
INSTALLATION
A. Conduit shall be installed away from high temperature piping and equipment.
B. Conduit shall be installed to prevent exposure to ultraviolet radiation.
867
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 33 - 12 CONDUIT AND BOXES
C. Proper allowances shall be made for expansion and/or contraction of the conduit
during installation.
D. Expansion fittings shall be installed in any 100' continuous run of conduit and at each
100' thereafter.
E. Supports shall be made from non-corroding materials and spacing shall not be greater
than the listing in the Electrical Code, but also shall not exceed the manufacturer's
recommendations depending on the expected surface temperature.
3.7 UNDERGROUND CONDUIT INSTALLATION
A. Conduit Connections:
1. Conduit joints in a multiple conduit run shall be staggered at least one foot apart.
B. Conduit Bends (Lateral):
1. Conduits shall have long sweep radius elbows instead of standard elbows
wherever special bends are indicated and noted on the drawings, or as required
by the manufacturer of the equipment or system being served.
2. Telecommunications conduit bend radius shall be six times the diameter for
conduits under 2" and ten times the diameter for conduits over 2". Where long
cable runs are involved, sidewall pressures may require larger radius bends.
Coordinate with Architect/Engineer prior to conduit installation to determine bend
radius.
C. Conduit Elbows (vertical):
1. Minimum metal or RTRC elbow radiuses shall be 30 inches for primary conduits
(greater than 600V) and 18 inches for secondary conduits (less than 600V).
Increase radius, as required, based on pulling tension calculation requirements.
D. Conduit Placement:
1. Conduit runs shall be pitched a minimum of 4" per 100 feet to drain toward the
terminations. Duct runs shall be installed deeper than the minimum wherever
required to avoid any conflicts with existing or new piping, tunnels, etc.
2. For parallel runs, use suitable separators and chairs installed not greater than 4'
on centers. Band conduit together with suitable banding devices. Securely
anchor conduit to prevent movement during concrete placement or backfilling.
3. Where concrete is required, the materials for concreting shall be thoroughly
mixed to a minimum f'c = 2500 and immediately placed in the trench around the
conduits. No concrete that has been allowed to partially set shall be used.
4. Before the Contractor pulls any cables into the conduit, Contractor shall have a
mandrel 1/4" smaller than the conduit inside diameter pulled through each
conduit and if any concrete or obstructions are found, the Contractor shall
remove them and clear the conduit. Spare conduit shall also be cleared of all
obstructions.
5. Conduit terminations in manholes, masonry pull boxes, or masonry walls shall be
with malleable iron end bell fittings.
6. All spare conduits not terminated in a covered enclosure shall have its
terminations plugged as described above.
868
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 33 - 13 CONDUIT AND BOXES
7. Ductbanks and conduit shall be installed a minimum of 24" below finished grade,
unless otherwise noted on the drawings or elsewhere in these specifications.
8. All non-metallic conduit installed underground outside of a slab shall be rigid.
3.8 BOX INSTALLATION SCHEDULE
A. Galvanized steel boxes may be used in:
1. Concealed interior locations above ceilings and in hollow studded partitions.
2. Exposed interior locations in mechanical rooms and in rooms without ceilings;
higher than 8' above the highest platform level.
3. Direct contact with concrete except slab on grade.
3.9 COORDINATION OF BOX LOCATIONS
A. Provide electrical boxes as shown on the drawings, and as required for splices, taps,
wire pulling, equipment connections, and code compliance.
B. Electrical box locations shown on the Contract Drawings are approximate, unless
dimensioned. Verify location of floor boxes and outlets in offices and work areas prior
to rough-in.
C. Locate and install boxes to allow access. Avoid interferences with ductwork, piping,
structure, equipment, etc. Recessed luminaires shall not be used as access to outlet,
pull, and junction boxes. Where installation is inaccessible, provide access doors.
Coordinate locations and sizes of required access doors with the Architect/Engineer
and General Contractor.
D. Locate and install to maintain headroom and to present a neat appearance.
3.10 OUTLET BOX INSTALLATION
A. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls.
1. Provide a minimum horizontal separation of 6 inches between boxes installed on
opposite sides of non-rated stud walls. When the minimum separation cannot be
maintained, install sound insulation pads on all five sides of the back box in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
2. Provide a minimum horizontal separation of 24 inches between boxes installed
on opposite sides of fire-rated walls. When the minimum separation cannot be
maintained, the box is greater than 16 square inches or the total box area (all
trades) per 100 square feet is greater than or equal to 100 square inches, install
fire-rated moldable pads to all five sides of the back box to maintain the fire rating
of the wall. Install moldable pads in accordance with UL listing for the specific
product. Sound insulation pads are not acceptable for use in fire-rated wall
applications unless the product carries the necessary fire rating.
B. Install sound insulation pads on all five sides of the back of all boxes in sound-rated
wall assemblies. Sound-rated wall assemblies are defined as partition types carrying a
Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating.
869
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 33 - 14 CONDUIT AND BOXES
C. The Contractor shall anchor switch and outlet box to wall construction so that it is flush
with the finished masonry, paneling, drywall, plaster, etc. The Contractor shall check
the boxes as the finish wall surface is being installed to assure that the box is flush.
(Provide plaster rings as necessary.)
D. Mount at heights shown or noted on the drawings or as generally accepted if not
specifically noted.
E. Locate boxes in masonry walls to require cutting of masonry unit corner only.
Coordinate masonry cutting to achieve neat openings for boxes.
F. Provide knockout closures for unused openings.
G. Support boxes independently of conduit.
H. Use multiple-gang boxes where more than one device is mounted together; do not use
sectional boxes. Provide barriers to separate wiring of different voltage systems.
I. Install boxes in walls without damaging wall insulation.
J. Coordinate mounting heights and locations of outlets mounted above counters.
K. Position outlets to locate luminaires as shown on reflected ceiling drawings.
L. Provide recessed outlet boxes in finished areas; secure boxes to interior wall and
partition studs, accurately positioned to allow for surface finish thickness. Use stamped
steel stud bridges for flush outlets in hollow stud wall, and adjustable steel channel
fasteners for flush ceiling outlet boxes.
M. Align wall-mounted outlet boxes for switches, thermostats, and similar devices.
N. Provide cast outlet boxes in exterior locations and wet locations, and where exposed
rigid or intermediate conduit is used.
3.11 PULL AND JUNCTION BOX INSTALLATION
A. Locate pull boxes and junction boxes above accessible ceilings or in unfinished areas.
B. Support pull and junction boxes independent of conduit.
C. Do not install boxes back-to-back in walls.
1. Provide a minimum horizontal separation of 6 inches between boxes installed on
opposite sides of non-rated stud walls. When the minimum separation cannot be
maintained, install sound insulation pads on all five sides of the back box in
accordance with the manufacturer's instructions.
870
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 33 - 15 CONDUIT AND BOXES
2. Provide a minimum horizontal separation of 24 inches between boxes installed
on opposite sides of fire-rated walls. When the minimum separation cannot be
maintained, the box is greater than 16 square inches or the total box area (all
trades) per 100 square feet is greater than or equal to 100 square inches, install
fire-rated moldable pads to all five sides of the back box to maintain the fire rating
of the wall. Install moldable pads in accordance with UL listing for the specific
product. Sound insulation pads are not acceptable for use in fire-rated wall
applications unless the product carries the necessary fire rating.
D. Install sound insulation pads on all five sides of the back of all boxes in sound-rated
wall assemblies. Sound-rated wall assemblies are defined as partition types carrying a
Sound Transmission Class (STC) rating.
3.12 EXPOSED BOX INSTALLATION
A. Boxes shall be secured to the building structure with proper size screws, bolts, hanger
rods, or structural steel elements.
B. On brick, block and concrete walls or ceilings, exposed boxes shall be supported with
no less than two (2) Ackerman-Johnson, Paine, Phillips, or approved equal screw
anchors or expansion shields and round head machine screws. Cast boxes shall not
be drilled.
C. On steel structures, exposed boxes shall be supported to the steel member by drilling
and tapping the member and fastening the boxes by means of round head machine
screws.
D. Boxes may be supported on steel members by APPROVED beam clamps if conduit is
supported by beam clamps.
E. Boxes shall be fastened to wood structures by means of a minimum of two (2) wood
screws adequately large and long to properly support. (Quantity depends on size of
box.)
F. Wood, plastic, or fiber plugs shall not be used for fastenings.
G. Explosive devices shall not be used unless specifically allowed.
END OF SECTION 26 05 33
871
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 48 - 1 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
FOR EQUIPMENT AND
SUPPORTS
SECTION 26 05 48 - SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS FOR EQUIPMENT AND SUPPORTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Seismic Requirements.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. General:
1. The contractor shall retain a specialty consultant or equipment manufacturer to
develop a seismic restraint and support system and perform seismic calculations
in accordance with these specifications, state, and local codes.
2. Items used for seismic restraint of equipment and systems shall be specifically
manufactured for seismic restraint.
3. These requirements are beyond those listed in Section 26 05 27 of these
specifications. Where a conflict arises between the seismic requirements of this
section and any other section, the Architect/Engineer shall be immediately
notified for direction to proceed.
B. Manufacturer:
1. System Supports/Restraints: Company specializing in the manufacture of
products specified in this Section.
2. Equipment: Each company providing equipment that must meet seismic
requirements shall provide certification included in project submittals the
equipment supplied for the project meets or exceeds the seismic requirements of
the project.
C. Testing Agency: An independent testing agency, acceptable to Authorities Having
Jurisdiction, with experience and capability to conduct the testing indicated.
D. Installer: Company specializing in performing the work of this Section.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. International Building Code, 2018.
B. California Building Code (CBC)
C. ASHRAE - A Practical Guide to Seismic Restraint.
D. Technical Manual 5-809-10, NAVFAC P-355, Air Force Manual 88-3, Chapter 13.
E. ASCE 7-16, Chapter 13.
872
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 48 - 2 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
FOR EQUIPMENT AND
SUPPORTS
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Submittal to Code Official:
1. Contractor shall submit copies of the seismic shop drawings to the governing
code authority for approval.
C. A seismic restraint designer shall be provided whether or not exceptions listed in the
applicable building code are met. If seismic restraints are not provided for a system
that requires seismic bracing, the seismic designer shall submit a signed and sealed
letter to the Architect/Engineer and Authorities Having Jurisdiction stating the
exceptions, along with code reference, utilized for each item. Seismic designer shall
review system installation for general conformance to the exception requirements
stated in the code and document, in writing, the system has been installed in
accordance to the exception.
1.5 TESTING AND INSPECTION
A. Special Inspection and Testing shall be done in accordance with Chapter 17 of the
International Building Code.
B. The Contractor shall employ a Special Inspection Agency to perform the duties and
responsibilities specified in Section 1704 and 1705.
C. Work performed on the premises of a fabricator approved by the building official need
not be tested and inspected. The fabricator shall submit a certificate of compliance that
the work has been performed in accordance with the approved plans and
specifications to the building official and the Architect and Engineer of Record.
D. The Special Inspection Agency shall furnish inspection reports to the building official,
the Owner, the Architect, the Engineer of Record, and the General Contractor. The
reports shall be completed and furnished within 48 hours of inspected work. A final
signed report stating whether the work requiring special inspection was, to the best of
the Special Inspection Agency's knowledge, in conformance with the approved plans
and specifications shall be submitted.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver, store, protect and handle products to site. Accept material on site in factory
containers and packing. Inspect for damage. Protect from damage and contamination
by maintaining factory packaging until installation. Follow manufacturer's instructions
for storage.
1.7 DESIGN REQUIREMENTS
A. This project is subject to the seismic bracing requirements of the International Building
Code, 2018 edition.
B. This project is subject to the seismic bracing requirements of California Building Code,.
873
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 48 - 3 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
FOR EQUIPMENT AND
SUPPORTS
C. Equipment shall meet California Building Code and ASCE 7 seismic qualification
requirements in concurrence with ICC ES AC156 Acceptance Criteria for Seismic
Qualification by Shake-Table Testing of Nonstructural Components and Systems.
D. All seismic anchorage and bracing shall comply with FM Global Property Loss
Prevention Data Sheet 1-11, Fire Following Earthquakes.
1.8 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of seismic bracing with building structural systems
and architectural features, and with mechanical, fire-protection, electrical and other
building features in the vicinity.
B. Coordinate concrete bases with building structural system.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Provide one-year warranty on parts and labor for manufacturer defects and installation
workmanship.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SUPPLIERS
A. Following is a partial list of manufacturer/supplier contact information for seismic
restraints:
1. B-Line Systems, Inc. (800) 851-7415, www.b-line.com.
2. Unistrut Corporation http://www.unistrut.us/
3. Kinetics Noise Control (877) 457-2695, www.kineticsnoise.com.
4. Mason Industries, Inc. www.mason-ind.com.
5. Loos & Co., Inc. (800) 321-5667, www.loosnaples.com.
6. Tolco (909) 737-5599, www.tolco.com
7. ISAT 877.523.6060, www.isatsb.com
8. Vibro-Acoustics (416) 291-7371, https://virs.vibro-acoustics.com/
2.2 SEISMIC BRACING AND SUPPORT OF SYSTEMS AND COMPONENTS
A. General:
1. Seismic restraint designer shall coordinate all attachments with the Structural
Engineer of Record; refer to submittal requirements.
2. The seismic restraint design shall be based on actual equipment data obtained
from manufacturer's submittals or the manufacturer. The equipment
manufacturer shall verify and provide written certification the attachment points
on the equipment can accept the combination of seismic, weight, and other
imposed loads.
3. Design analysis shall include calculated dead loads, static seismic loads, and
capacity of materials utilized for the connection of the equipment or system to the
structure.
874
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 48 - 4 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
FOR EQUIPMENT AND
SUPPORTS
4. Analysis shall detail anchoring methods, bolt diameter, embedment, and weld
length.
5. All seismic restraint devices shall be designed to accept without failure the forces
calculated per the applicable building code.
6. All seismic restraints and combination isolator/restraints shall have verification of
their seismic capabilities witnessed by an independent testing agency.
B. Friction from gravity loads shall not be considered resistance to seismic forces.
C. Housekeeping Pads:
1. Reinforced housekeeping pads shall be provided to handle shear, tension, and
compression forces with proper reinforcement, doweling, and attachments
connecting the pad to the structural slab.
2.3 SEISMIC RESTRAINT AND CONSTRUCTION OF EQUIPMENT
A. Equipment supplied for the project shall be designed to meet the requirements of
lateral forces calculated using the applicable code and method described above.
B. The following is a partial list of equipment that shall be restrained and that shall be
constructed to meet seismic forces described in this section:
1. Switchboards, Distribution Panelboards,
2. Emergency Feeders
3. Cable tray, Busway, Ductbank
4. Disconnect Switches
5. Automatic/Manual Transfer Switches
6. Interior Luminaires
7. Emergency Luminaires and Exit Signs
8. Emergency Power Supply
9. Engine Generator Systems
10. Fire Alarm Panel, Initiating and Notification Appliances
2.4 MATERIALS
A. Use the following materials for restraints:
1. Indoor Dry Locations: Steel, zinc plated.
2. Outdoors and Damp Locations: Galvanized steel.
3. Corrosive Locations: Stainless steel.
2.5 ANCHORAGE AND STRUCTURAL ATTACHMENT COMPONENTS
A. Strength: Defined in reports by ICC Evaluation Service or another agency acceptable
to authorities having jurisdiction.
1. Structural Safety Factor: Strength in tension and shear of components used shall
be at least two times the maximum seismic forces to which they will be
subjected.
875
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 48 - 5 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
FOR EQUIPMENT AND
SUPPORTS
B. Concrete and Masonry Anchor Bolts and Studs: Steel-expansion wedge type. Comply
with IBC, ACI and ICC ES requirements for cracked concrete anchors.
C. Concrete Inserts: Steel-channel type.
D. Through Bolts: Structural type, hex head, high strength. Comply with ASTM F3125,
Grade A 325.
E. Welding Lugs: Comply with MSS SP-69, Type 57.
F. Beam Clamps for Steel Beams and Joists: Double sided. Single-sided type is not
acceptable.
G. Bushings for Floor-Mounted Equipment Anchors: Neoprene units designed for
seismically rated rigid equipment mountings, and matched to the type and size of
anchor bolts and studs used.
H. Bushing Assemblies for Wall-Mounted Equipment Anchorage: Assemblies of neoprene
elements and steel sleeves designed for seismically rated rigid equipment mountings,
and matched to the type and size of attachment devices used.
2.6 SEISMIC BRACING COMPONENTS
A. Slotted Steel Channel: 1-5/8-by-1-5/8-inch cross section, formed from 0.1046-inch-
thick steel, with 9/16-by-7/8-inch slots at a maximum of 2 inches o.c. in webs, and
flange edges turned toward web.
1. Materials for Channel: ASTM A 1011, GR 33.
2. Materials for Fittings and Accessories: ASTM A 635, ASTM A 576, or ASTM A
36.
3. Fittings and Accessories: Products of the same manufacturer as channels and
designed for use with that product.
4. Finish: Baked, rust-inhibiting, acrylic-enamel paint applied after cleaning and
phosphate treatment, unless otherwise indicated.
B. Channel-Type Bracing Assemblies: Slotted steel channel, with adjustable hinged steel
brackets and bolts.
C. Cable-Type Bracing Assemblies: Zinc-coated, high-strength steel wire rope cable
attached to steel thimbles, brackets, and bolts designed for cable service.
1. Arrange units for attachment to the braced component at one end and to the
structure at the other end.
2. Wire Rope Cable: Comply with ASTM A 603. Use 49- or 133-strand cable with a
minimum strength of 2 times the calculated maximum seismic force to be
resisted.
D. Hanger Rod Stiffeners: Slotted steel channels with internally bolted connections to
hanger rod.
876
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 48 - 6 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
FOR EQUIPMENT AND
SUPPORTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Refer to the applicable code sections and Authority Having Jurisdiction for the exact
seismic restraint requirements of conduit, equipment, etc.
B. Layout of transverse and longitudinal bracing shall follow recommendations of
approved design standards listed in Part 1 of this specification section.
C. All rigid floor mounted equipment shall have a resilient media between the equipment
mounting hole and the anchor bolt in concrete.
D. All seismic restraint systems shall be installed in strict accordance with the
manufacturer's written instructions and all certified submittal data.
E. Installation of seismic restraints shall not cause any change in position of equipment
lighting or conduits resulting in stresses or misalignment.
F. No rigid connections between equipment and the building structure shall be made that
degrade the noise and vibration-isolation system specified.
G. Do not install any equipment or conduit that makes rigid connections with the building
unless isolation is not specified.
H. Coordinate work with all other trades to avoid rigid contact with the building. Any
conflicts with other trades that will result in rigid contact with equipment or conduit due
to inadequate space or other unforeseen conditions shall be brought to the
Architect/Engineer's attention prior to specific equipment selection.
I. Prior to installation, bring to the Architect/Engineer's attention any discrepancies
between the specifications and the field conditions, or changes required due to specific
equipment selection.
J. Bracing may occur from flanges of structural beams, upper truss cords of bar joists,
cast in place inserts, or International Code Council approved seismic anchors for
installation in concrete.
K. Cable restraints shall be installed slightly slack to avoid short-circuiting the isolated
suspended equipment or conduit.
L. Cable assemblies shall be installed taut on non-isolated systems. Solid braces may be
used in place of cables on rigidly attached systems only.
M. Do not install cables over sharp corners.
N. Brace support rods when necessary to accept compressive loads. Welding of
compression braces to the vertical support rods is not acceptable.
O. Provide reinforced clevis bolts when required.
877
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 48 - 7 SEISMIC REQUIREMENTS
FOR EQUIPMENT AND
SUPPORTS
P. The vibration isolation manufacturer shall furnish integral structural steel bases as
required. Independent steel rails are not acceptable.
Q. Post-Installed anchors shall be provided to meet seismic requirements.
R. Vertical conduit risers flexibly supported to accommodate thermal motion and/or
conduit vibration shall be guided to maintain conduit stability and provide horizontal
seismic restraint.
S. Seismic restraints shall be mechanically attached to the system. Looping restraints
around the system is not acceptable.
T. Do not brace a system to two different structures such as a wall and a ceiling.
U. Provide appropriately sized openings in walls, floors, and ceilings for anticipated
seismic movement. Provide fire seal systems in fire-rated walls.
V. Positively attach all roof-mounted equipment to roof curbs. Positively attach all roof
curbs to building structure.
W. Exposed seismic supports in occupied areas shall be guarded or covered to protect
occupants.
3.2 SEISMIC RESTRAINT EXCLUSIONS
A. Refer to the applicable code sections and Authority Having Jurisdiction for allowable
exclusions.
END OF SECTION 26 05 48
878
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 53 - 1 ELECTRICAL
IDENTIFICATION
SECTION 26 05 53
ELECTRICAL IDENTIFICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Adhesive Markings and Field Labels
B. Nameplates and Signs
C. Product Colors
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70E - National Electrical Safety Code
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
C. CEC California Electrical Code
D. ANSI A13.1 - Standard for Pipe Identification
E. ANSI Z535.4 - Standard for Product Safety Signs and Labels
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. General: Submit the following in accordance with Division 1 Specification Sections and
under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
1. Product Data for each type of product specified.
2. Schedule of nomenclature to be used for identification signs and labels for each
piece of equipment including, but not limited to, the following equipment types as
specified in Division 26.
3. Samples of each color, lettering style and other graphic representation required
for identification materials including samples of labels and signs.
4. Identification required in this section shall apply to equipment furnished in
Division 26 and any other applicable Divisions including Division 21/22/23.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ADHESIVE MARKINGS AND FIELD LABELS
A. Text Sizes:
1. The following information shall be used for text heights, fonts, and size, unless
otherwise noted.
879
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 53 - 2 ELECTRICAL
IDENTIFICATION
a. Font: Normal 721 Swiss Bold
b. Adhesive Labels: 3/16 inch minimum text height
c. Vinyl / Plastic Laminate Labels: 3/4" inch minimum text height
2.2 NAMEPLATES AND SIGNS
A. Engraved, Plastic-Laminated Labels, Signs and Instruction Plates: Engraving stock
melamine plastic laminate, 1/16-inch minimum thick for signs up to 20 square inches,
or 8 inches in length; 1/8 inch thick for larger sizes. Labels shall be punched for
mechanical fasteners.
B. Text Sizes:
1. The following information shall be used for text heights, fonts, and size, unless
otherwise noted.
a. Text Height: 3/8 inch minimum
C. Safety Signs: Comply with 29 CFR, Chapter XVII, Part 1910.145.
D. Fasteners for Plastic-Laminated Signs; Self-tapping stainless steel screws or number
10/32 stainless steel machine screws with nuts and flat and lock washers.
2.3 PRODUCT COLORS
A. Adhesive Markings and Field Labels:
1. All Labels: Black letters on white face
2. Normal Power and General Labels:
3. Control Labels:
4. Emergency:
B. Nameplates and Signs:
1. NORMAL POWER: Black letters on white face
2. Control Labels: Black letters on white face
3. EMERGENCY: White letters on red face
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Lettering and Graphics: Coordinate names, abbreviations, colors, and other
designations used in electrical identification work with corresponding designations
specified or indicated. Install numbers, lettering, and colors as approved in submittals
and as required by code.
880
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 53 - 3 ELECTRICAL
IDENTIFICATION
B. Exposed Ceilings and Finished Spaces: The project includes exposed ceilings in
finished spaces. The installation of colored raceways and labeling may not be
aesthetically desirable in finished spaces. The contractor shall coordinate identification
requirements in exposed ceilings of finished spaces with the A/E prior to installation
and ordering of materials.
C. Electrical System Color Chart: This Contractor shall furnish and install framed 8" x 12"
charts of the color-coded identification scheme used for the electrical system in all
electrical rooms and next to the main fire alarm panel.
D. Install identification devices in accordance with manufacturer's written instruction and
requirements of Electrical Code.
E. Sequence of Work: Where identification is to be applied to surfaces that require finish,
install identification after completion of finish work. All mounting surfaces shall be
cleaned and degreased prior to identification installation.
F. Circuit Identification: Tag or label conductors as follows:
1. Multiple Power or Lighting Circuits in Same Enclosure: Where multiple branch
circuits are terminated or spliced in a box or enclosure, label each conductor with
source and circuit number.
2. Multiple Control Wiring and Communication/Signal Circuits in Same Enclosure:
For control and communications/signal wiring, use wire/cable marking tape at
terminations in wiring boxes, troughs, and control cabinets. Use consistent
letter/number conductor designations throughout on wire/cable marking tape.
3. Match identification markings with designations used in panelboards shop
drawings, Contract Documents, and similar previously established identification
schemes for the facility's electrical installations.
G. Apply warning, caution and instruction signs as follows:
1. Install warning, caution or instruction signs where required by Electrical Code,
where indicated, or where reasonably required to assure safe operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and of the items to which they connect. Install
engraved plastic-laminated instruction signs with approved legend where
instructions or explanations are needed for system or equipment operation.
Install metal-backed butyrate signs for outdoor items.
2. Emergency Operating Signs: Install, where required by Electrical Code, where
indicated, or where reasonably required to assure safe operation and
maintenance of electrical systems and of the items to which they connect,
engraved laminate signs with white legend on red background with minimum 3/8-
inch high lettering for emergency instructions on power transfer, or other
emergency operations.
H. Apply circuit/control/item designation labels of engraved plastic laminate for
pushbuttons, pilot lights, alarm/signal components, and similar items, except where
labeling is specified elsewhere.
I. Install labels parallel to equipment lines at locations as required and at locations for
best convenience of viewing without interference with operation and maintenance of
equipment.
881
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 53 - 4 ELECTRICAL
IDENTIFICATION
J. Install ARC FLASH WARNING signs on all power distribution equipment per Section
26 05 73.
K. Install ARC FLASH WARNING signs on all switchboards, panelboards, industrial
control panels, and motor control centers.
1. Sample Label:
! WARNING
ARC FLASH AND SHOCK HAZARD
APPROPRIATE PPE REQUIRED
FAILURE TO COMPLY CAN RESULT IN DEATH OR INJURY
REFER TO NFPA 70E
L. Circuits with more than 600V: Identify raceway and cable with "DANGER-HIGH
VOLTAGE" in black letters 2 (50mm) inches high on orange background at 10'-0 foot
intervals.
1. Entire floor area directly above conduits running beneath and within 12 inches of
a basement or ground floor that is in contact with earth or is framed above
unexcavated space.
2. Wall surfaces directly external to conduits concealed within wall.
3. All accessible surfaces of concrete envelope around conduits in vertical shafts,
exposed in building, or concealed above suspended ceilings.
M. Selective Coordination Label: Install caution signs on all switchboards, distribution
panels, panelboards, disconnects, and other equipment with selectively coordinated
overcurrent protection devices. Sign at a minimum shall contain:
1. CAUTION: OVERCURRENT DEVICES IN THIS ENCLOSURE ARE
SELECTIVELY COORDINATED. EQUIVALENT REPLACEMENTS AND TRIP
SETTINGS ARE REQUIRED.
N. Underground Electrical Lines: For exterior underground power, control, signal, and
communication lines, install continuous underground plastic line marker located
directly above line at 6 (150mm) to 8 (205mm) inches below grade. A single plastic line
marker is permitted when the width of the common trench does not exceed 16 inches;
provide a second plastic line marker to mark each edge of the trench when 16 inches
of width is exceeded. Install line marker for underground wiring, both direct-buried
cables and cables in raceway.
3.2 BOX LABELING
A. Products:
1. Adhesive labels and field markings
B. Identify Junction, Pull and Connection Boxes: Labeling shall be 3/8-inch Kroy tape OR
Brother self-laminating vinyl label, letters/numbers color coded same as conduits. In
rooms that are painted out, provide labeling on inside of cover.
C. All junction, pull, and connection boxes shall be identified as follows:
882
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 53 - 5 ELECTRICAL
IDENTIFICATION
1. For power and lighting circuits, indicate system voltage and identity of contained
circuits ("120V, 1LA1-3,5,7").
2. Essential Electrical System EES: When applicable the label shall include
"Essential Electrical System EES". Maximum interval between label intervals
shall be 25 feet or as required by code.
3. For other wiring, indicate system type and description of wiring ("FIRE ALARM
NAC #1").
3.3 EQUIPMENT CONNECTION IDENTIFICATION
A. Products:
1. Nameplates and signs
B. Provide identification for hard wired electrical connections to equipment such as
disconnects switches, starters, etc. Plug and cord type connections do not require this
specific label.
C. Identification shall be provided for all connections to equipment furnished by this
Contractor, other contractors, or the Owner. The following list of equipment is
specifically being listed to receive an equipment connection label; this list does not limit
the equipment that shall receive a label:
1. Mechanical heating, ventilation, and air conditioning equipment; , pumps, air
handing ventilation units, condensing units, unit heaters, and similar equipment
2. Plumbing equipment
3. Fire protection equipment
4. Elevator
D. Labeling shall include:
1. Equipment type and contract documents designation of equipment being served
2. Location of equipment being served if it is not located within sight.
3. Voltage and rating of the equipment.
4. Panel and circuit numbers(s) serving the equipment
5. Available fault current; refer to one-line diagram or panel schedule of panel
serving equipment.
6. Date of fault current study; refer to one-line diagram
7. Sample Label:
UNIT HEATER UH-1 ("LOCATED IN STORAGE ROOM 200")
480V: 3-PHASE
FED FROM "1HA1-1"
22,000 AMPS AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT
DATE OF STUDY: 1 JAN 2017
3.4 POWER DISTRIBUTION EQUIPMENT IDENTIFICATION
A. Products:
1. Nameplates and signs
883
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 53 - 6 ELECTRICAL
IDENTIFICATION
B. Provide identification on the front of all power distribution equipment such as
panelboards, switchboards, switchgear,, generators,, storage battery disconnects,
transfer switches, etc. Labels shall be visible on the exterior of the gear, correspond to
the one-line diagram nomenclature, and identify each cubicle of multi-section gear.
1. Interior Equipment: The identification material shall be engraved plastic-
laminated labels.
2. Exterior Equipment: The identification material shall be engraved vinyl labels.
3. Labeling shall include:
a. Essential Electrical System EES: When applicable the label shall include
"Essential Electrical System EES". Applicable equipment includes
components of the life safety and critical branch for healthcare facilities
(generators, transfer switches, switchboards, distribution panels,
panelboards, etc.).
b. Equipment type and contract documents designation of equipment.
c. Voltage of the equipment.
d. Name of the upstream equipment and location of the upstream equipment if
it is not located within sight.
e. Rating and type of the overcurrent protection device serving the equipment
if it is not located within sight ("FED BY 400A/3P BREAKER").
f. Sample Label:
DISTRIBUTION PANEL DP-H1
480Y/277V
FED FROM SWITCHBOARD "SB-1" (LOCATED IN MAIN ELEC ROOM)
4. Provide the following on a separate label, installed below the label above:
a. Available fault current; refer to one-line diagram or panel schedules
b. Date of fault current study; refer to one-line diagram
c. Sample Label:
22,000 AMPS AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT
DATE OF STUDY: 1 JAN 2017
C. Service Equipment Label: A separate nameplate for the service entrance equipment
and include:
1. Nominal system voltage, service wire size, quantity, material, distance
2. Maximum available fault current; refer to one-line diagram for values
3. Clearing time of overcurrent protection devices based on available fault current.
Refer to calculations and report from Section 26 05 73 for value.
4. Date of fault current study; refer to one-line diagram
5. Date of label
6. Sample Label:
480Y/277V, 6 SETS 4#750KCM CU, 75FT
39,800 AMPS AVAILABLE FAULT CURRENT
0.07 SECOND CLEARING TIME
DATE OF STUDY: 1 JAN 2017
DATE OF LABEL: 4 JUL 2017
884
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 53 - 7 ELECTRICAL
IDENTIFICATION
D. Arc Energy Reduction Label:
1. Provide a separate engraved plastic laminate label centered at the top of each
vertical section of the electrical gear indicating the following when applicable.
a. Label: "This equipment is designed with a system listed below".
b. Applicable Systems:
1) Zone-selective interlocking system for selective coordination and arc
energy reduction
2) Differential relaying system for selective coordination and arc energy
reduction
3) Arc energy reducing maintenance switch
4) Energy reducing active arc flash mitigation system
E. Adjustable-Trip Over Current Protection Label:
1. Provide a separate engraved plastic laminate label adjacent to each overcurrent
projection device with adjustable trip settings. Provide label separate from load
identification label.
a. Label:
1) Long-time delay:
2) Long-time pickup:
3) Short-time delay:
4) Short-time pickup:
5) Instantaneous:
6) Ground fault delay:
7) Ground fault:
b. Sample Label:
Long-time delay: 10.0
Long-time pickup: 1.0
Short-time delay: 0.15
Short-time pickup: 5.0
Instantaneous: 2.0
Ground fault delay: 0.25
Ground fault: 50.0
F. Nominal System Voltage Label:
1. Where more than one nominal voltage system exists in a building or facility, the
identification of color coding used in the panelboard or equipment shall be
permanently posted on the interior of the door or cover.
885
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 53 - 8 ELECTRICAL
IDENTIFICATION
G. Distribution panelboards and switchboards shall have each overcurrent protection
device identified with name and location of the load being served ("AHU-1 LOCATED
IN PENTHOUSE 1"). Provide a separate engraved plastic laminate label adjacent to
each overcurrent projection device with feeder wire size, feeder wire quantity,
conductor material and distance in feet. Provide label separate from load identification
label and adjustable trip settings label.
1. Sample Labels for Feeders:
4#3/0 CU & 1#6 CU GND, 125FT
4#250KCM AL & 1#6 GND CU, 125FT
2 SETS 4#400KCM CU & 1#1 GND CU, 125FT
3.5 ELECTRICAL WORKING CLEARANCE IDENTIFICATION
A. Products:
1. Safety Yellow paint and custom stencils
B. Provide custom identification of electrical equipment working clearances in
mechanical, electrical, storage, janitorial, and similar non-public areas.
3.6 SERIES RATING IDENTIFICATION
A. Products:
1. Nameplates and signs
B. Upstream devices of series rated components not enclosed in a single NEMA type
enclosure shall be identified with a nameplate reading "CAUTION - SERIES RATED
SYSTEM - IDENTICAL COMPONENT REPLACEMENT REQUIRED".
C. Downstream devices of series rated components not enclosed in a single NEMA type
enclosure shall be identified with a nameplate reading "CAUTION - SERIES RATED
SYSTEM - ADDITIONAL SERIES COMBINATION RATING: XX,XXX RMS
SYMMETRICAL AMPERES" where XX,XXX shall be the series combination rating.
END OF SECTION 26 05 53
886
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 73 - 1 POWER SYSTEM STUDY
SECTION 26 05 73 - POWER SYSTEM STUDY
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Low voltage distribution system power study.
B. Short-circuit analysis and report.
C. Selective coordination analysis and report.
D. Arc-flash hazard analysis and report.
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 26 05 00 - Basic Electrical Requirements
B. Section 26 24 16 - Panelboards
C. Section 26 32 13 - Packaged Engine Generator Systems
D. Section 26 36 00 - Transfer Switch
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Analyses shall be performed by an agent authorized by the manufacturer of equipment
specified in the related specification sections.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Documentation shall bear the seal/signature of the licensed Professional Engineer who
performed the analysis.
B. The input for the power system study shall be based on the contract documents, with
estimated conductor lengths and field investigation of existing equipment types, sizes,
ratings provided by the Electrical Contractor. IMEG will provide a preliminary Power
Tools for Windows project file for information, if requested.
C. Documentation of the analyses shall be submitted in a single bound electronic (PDF or
equal) format and shall accompany the shop drawing submittals for equipment
provided under the related work specification sections. The submittal of these related
specification sections will not be reviewed without this documentation. Submit a
sample arc-flash hazard label for Owner review and approval prior to printing.
1.5 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
B. CEC California Electrical Code
C. NFPA 70E - Standard for Electrical Safety in the Workplace
887
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 73 - 2 POWER SYSTEM STUDY
D. IEEE 1584 - IEEE Guide for Performing Arc-Flash Hazard Calculations, latest version
E. ANSI Z535.4 - Products Safety Signs and Labels
1.6 SCOPE
A. Provide a power system study of the electrical system shown on the plans. The study
shall include arc-fault analysis, selective coordination analysis and arc flash hazard
analysis.
B. Contractor is required to provide a fully coordinated system for the normal emergency
electrical system or emergency electrical system and the associated normal side of
each transfer switch and all other locations indicated on the one line diagram.
Contractor shall provide overcurrent protective devices with the appropriate models,
frame sizes, trip units, etc. as required to provide a selectively coordinated system.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Power systems study shall be completed in Power Tools for Windows (PTW) 8.0 or
later version or pre-approved equivalent program.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SHORT-CIRCUIT ANALYSIS
A. Provide a complete short-circuit analysis from the utility service to and including the
entire building distribution as shown on the drawings.
B. Analysis shall include the entire distribution system from the point of connection to the
utility power source to the distribution panels and branch circuit panelboards.
C. Short-circuit analysis documentation shall be made in one-line diagram form showing
the magnitude and location of each calculated fault. Fault current calculations shall be
made at the main bus of each switchboard, distribution panel, and branch circuit panel.
A summary of the fault currents available shall also be submitted and made available
to the AHJ if requested.
3.2 SELECTIVE COORDINATION ANALYSIS
A. Provide a complete selective coordination analysis comparing time/current curves of
the protective devices to be installed to assure coordination between main and
downstream devices. Overcurrent protection devices shall be coordinated based on
the maximum available fault current results of the short-circuit analysis report.
B. Provide a complete selective coordination analysis, comparing time/current curves of
the protective devices to be installed to assure complete selectivity between main and
downstream devices for code-required branches and branches identified on one-line
drawings. Overcurrent protective devices serving the normal shall selectively
coordinate for the period of time that a fault's duration extends beyond0.1 second.
888
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 73 - 3 POWER SYSTEM STUDY
C. Provide trip settings for all (selectively coordinated and non-selectively coordinated)
adjustable trip over current protection devices including long time delay, long time
pickup, short time delay, short time pickup, instantaneous and ground fault. Selectively
coordinated branches shall be based on the selective coordination study results. Non-
selective coordinated branches shall be based on the design trip ratings. Provide
selective coordination between all ground fault trip settings.
D. The analysis shall include primary protective device, secondary main switchboard
device(s), switchboard branch feeder devices, generator breaker, distribution panel,
panelboard main devices, and branch feeder devices.
E. The coordination plots provided shall indicate graphically the coordination proposed for
the system on full-size log forms and shall define the types of protective devices
selected, together with proposed time dial and pickup settings required. The plots shall
include titles, representative one-line diagrams, legend, complete parameters for
transformer(s), and complete operating bands for circuit breaker trip devices, fuses,
etc.
1. The long-time region of the coordination plots shall designate the pickups
required for the circuit breakers.
2. The short-time region shall indicate the magnetizing in-rush and ASA-withstand-
transformer parameter, the circuit breaker, short-time and instantaneous trip
devices, fuse-manufacturing tolerance bands, significant symmetrical fault
currents, etc.
3. Each primary protective device required for the transformer shall be selected so
the characteristics or operating band is within the transformer parameters, which
shall include a parameter equivalent to 58% of the withstand point to afford
protection for secondary line-to-ground faults. The transformer damage curve
shall be included for the transformer when the selected protective device is not
within the associated parameters.
4. Molded case circuit breakers shall be separated from each other and the
associated primary protective device by a 16% current margin for coordination
and protection in the event of secondary line-to-line faults.
5. Include zone selective interlocking, differential relaying, and other selective
coordination technology in the study when required by other specification
sections.
6. The protective device characteristics or operating bands shall be suitably
indicated to reflect the actual symmetrical fault currents sensed by the device.
7. The drawings and specifications indicate the general requirements for motors,
motor-starting equipment, and medium-voltage and low-voltage equipment, but
additional specific requirements of equipment furnished shall be determined in
accordance with the results of the coordination study.
a. The study shall include verification of equipment ratings and settings. The
Contractor shall keep the study up-to-date with any project changes which
affect the study and submit the revised study for review. A final electronic
copy shall be submitted with the record drawings.
F. Provide summary table of adjustable overcurrent protective devices settings for the
operating and maintenance manual.
889
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 73 - 4 POWER SYSTEM STUDY
3.3 ARC FLASH HAZARD ANALYSIS
A. The arc flash hazard analysis shall be performed according to the IEEE 1584
equations that are presented in NFPA70E.
B. The flash protection boundary and the incident energy shall be calculated at all
significant locations in the electrical distribution system (switchboards, switchgear, unit
substations, motor-control centers, panelboards, busway, and splitters) where work
could be performed on energized parts.
C. Safe working distances shall be based on the calculated arc flash boundary
considering an incident energy of 1.2 cal/cm2.
D. When appropriate, the short circuit calculations and the clearing times of the phase
overcurrent devices will be retrieved from the short-circuit analysis and coordination
study models. Ground overcurrent relays should not be taken into consideration when
determining the clearing time when performing incident energy calculations
E. The short-circuit calculations and the corresponding incident energy calculations for
multiple system scenarios must be compared, and the greatest incident energy must
be uniquely reported for each equipment location. Calculations must be performed to
represent the maximum and minimum contributions of fault current magnitude for all
normal and emergency operating conditions. The minimum calculation will assume
that the utility contribution is at a minimum and will assume a minimum motor
contribution (all motors off). Conversely, the maximum calculation will assume a
maximum contribution from the utility and will assume the maximum amount of motors
to be operating. Calculations shall take into consideration the parallel operation of
synchronous generators with the electric utility, where applicable.
F. The incident energy calculations must consider the accumulation of energy over time
when performing arc flash calculations on buses with multiple sources. Iterative
calculations must take into account the changing current contributions, as the sources
are interrupted or decremented with time. Fault contribution from motors and
generators should be decremented as follows:
1. Fault contribution from induction motors should not be considered beyond 3 to 5
cycles.
2. Fault contribution from synchronous motors and generators should be decayed
to match the actual decrement of each as closely as possible (e.g., contributions
from permanent magnet generators will typically decay from 10 per unit to 3 per
unit after 10 cycles).
G. For each equipment location with a separately enclosed main device (where there is
adequate separation between the line side terminals of the main protective device and
the work location), calculations for incident energy and flash protection boundary shall
include both the line and load side of the main breaker.
H. Include Arc Energy Reduction (AER) analysis in the study when required by other
specification sections.
I. When performing incident energy calculations on the line side of a main breaker (as
required per the above), the line side and load side contributions must be included in
the fault calculation.
890
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 05 73 - 5 POWER SYSTEM STUDY
J. Miscoordination should be checked among all devices within the branch containing the
immediate protective device upstream of the calculation location, and the calculation
should utilize the fastest device to compute the incident energy for the corresponding
location.
K. Where it is not physically possible to move outside the flash protection boundary in
less than 2 seconds during an arc flash event, a maximum clearing time based on the
specific location shall be utilized.
L. Create and install NFPA 70E compliant labels describing the arc flash hazard level at
all switchboards, panelboards, and other locations in the electrical distribution system
where work could be performed on energized parts.
M. Labels shall be vinyl or laminated, with a self-adhesive backing, conform with ANSI
Z535.4 Products Safety Signs and Labels standard, and include the following:
1. Arc flash boundary
2. Available incident energy calculated in the analysis and the corresponding
working distance, or the arc flash personal protective equipment (PPE category)
for the equipment, but not both.
N. Examples showing the minimum required information follow:
O. A list of all hazard categories and the corresponding PPE requirements shall be posted
in the main electric room, engineering office, or other location. The list shall be plastic
laminate or typewritten and housed in a plastic frame.
3.4 ADJUSTMENTS
A. Manufacturer's authorized representative or Contractor shall set all adjustable
protective devices to values indicated in the approved coordination study. Apply
settings prior to placing equipment into operation. When the scope of work or
execution includes remodel or phases construction, the contractor shall adjust
applicable settings as required prior to each system component placed in operation.
B. Wherever the arc flash incident energy exceeds Arc Flash Category 2 (i.e. greater than
8 cal/cm^2), provide options for adjusting breaker trip times, if possible, to reduce
energies to Category 2 or below.
3.5 TRAINING
A. Provide four hours of Owner training to explain the implications of arc-flash
requirements and work permit procedure.
END OF SECTION 26 05 73
891
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 09 16 - 1 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS
AND RELAYS
SECTION 26 09 16
ELECTRICAL CONTROLS AND RELAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Relays and Timers
B. Pushbutton Operators
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TIME RELAYS
A. ; Time relays: shall be rated and shall be electric type incorporating mode of on delay
off delay interval one shot repeat cycle off impulse. Time period shall be adjustable.
B. Time relays shall be mounted in NEMA 1 enclosures in control terminal cabinet.
C. Manufacturers:
1. Square D Class 9050 Type RE7
2. Eaton
3. ABB
4. Siemens
2.2 EMERGENCY POWER OFF (EPO)
A. Mushroom head, (1) N.O. (1) N.C. contacts, 120 volt, turn to release, provide engraved
nameplate. Provide guarded enclosure cover to protect from accidental operation.
Parallel wire all EPO in suite when applicable.
1. Provide engraved nameplate: emergency off.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Square D 9001 XB5AS8445- KYG1Y
b. Eaton
c. ABB
d. Siemens 52PA2W2A
2.3 MOMENTARY PUSHBUTTON (PB)
A. Non-illuminated, round 1-3/8" diameter mushroom button, (1) normally open, (1)
normally closed contact. Contacts rated 10 amps continuous. Provide 2-1/4" square
engraved nameplate with white background and black letters. Nameplate to read
"EMERGENCY POWER OFF".
892
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 09 16 - 2 ELECTRICAL CONTROLS
AND RELAYS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Coordinate with Mechanical Division 23 in connection of control conduit into control
terminal.
B. Install line voltage thermostats for single phase motors.
END OF SECTION 26 09 16
893
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 09 33 - 1 LIGHTING CONTROL
SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 09 33
LIGHTING CONTROL SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Line and low voltage standalone lighting controls
B. Automatic load control relay (ALCR20)
C. Branch circuit emergency lighting transfer switch (BCELTS)
D. Distributed lighting control
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. The lighting system design includes a combination of luminaire sources, lighting
control components, programming sequences, and supplementary components for
building and energy code compliance. The design uses performance-based
specifications for portions of the lighting system to account for the limitation of
comparable product solutions available by competitive manufacturers. The Contractor
shall reference related specification sections, plans, schedules, and details prior to
submitting pricing, submittals, and installation. The Contractor shall coordinate system
component compatibility among various manufacturers and suppliers for a turnkey
lighting system. Referenced sections include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. 26 51 19 LED Lighting
2. Electrical Drawings: Plans, luminaire schedules, lighting control sequence of
operations, diagrams, and details.
1.3 RELATED WORK
A. Section 01 91 00 - Commissioning
B. Section 23 09 00 - Facility Management Control System (FMCS)
C. Section 26 51 00 - Lighting
D. Section 27 41 00 - Audio/Visual System
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturers shall be regularly engaged in the manufacture of lighting control
equipment and ancillary equipment, of types and capacities required, whose products
have been in satisfactory use in similar service for not less than five (5) years.
B. All components and assemblies are to be factory pre-tested prior to delivery and
installation.
894
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 09 33 - 2 LIGHTING CONTROL
SYSTEMS
C. Comply with Electrical Code as applicable to electrical wiring work.
D. Comply with applicable portions of NEMA standards pertaining to types of electrical
equipment and enclosures.
E. Panels and accessory devices are to be UL listed under UL 916 Energy Management
Equipment. Panels and accessories used for control of life safety and critical branch
circuits shall be listed under UL 924 Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment.
F. All assemblies are to be in compliance with FCC emissions standards specified in Part
15 Subpart J for Class A applications.
1.5 REFERENCES
A. FCC Rules and Regulations, Part 15, Subpart J - Radio Frequency Interference
B. FS W S 896 Switch, Toggle
C. California Energy Code - Building Energy Efficiency Standards Title 24
D. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices
E. NEMA WD 7 - Occupancy Motion Sensors
F. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
G. CEC California Electrical Code
H. UL Standard 916 Energy Management Equipment
I. UL 924 - Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
J. UL 1472 - Solid-State Dimming Controls
1.6 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Submit a comprehensive package including devices, hardware, software, product
specification, finishes, dimensions, installation instructions, warranty, system software
requirements, and roles and responsibilities of all persons and groups involved in
installation, execution, and commissioning.
C. Provide floor plan showing location, orientation, and coverage area of each control
device, sensor, and controller/interface. For areas requiring multiple sensor devices for
appropriate coverage, submit specific manufacturer-approved sensor layout as an
overlay directly on the project drawings, either in print or approved electronic form.
D. Submit a list of devices and equipment that will be installed for each sequence of
operation.
895
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 09 33 - 3 LIGHTING CONTROL
SYSTEMS
E. Submit project specific control wiring diagrams showing all equipment, line voltage,
and control wiring requirements for all components including, but not limited to,
dimmers, relays, low voltage switches, occupancy sensors, control stations, and
communication interfaces and programming instructions for each sequence of
operation. Include network cable specification and end-of-line termination details, if
required.
F. Project specific network riser diagram including floor and building level details.
Illustrate points of connection to integrated systems. Coordinate integration with
mechanical and/or other trades.
1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit project record documents under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Accurately record location of all controls and devices. Include description of switching
sequences and circuiting arrangements.
1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit emergency, operation, and maintenance data under provisions of Section 26
05 00. Data shall also include the following:
1. Schedule for routine maintenance, inspection, and calibration of all lighting
control devices and system components. Recommended schedule for inspection
and recalibration of sensors.
2. Complete narrative describing intended operation and sequence for each control
scenario and system component, updated to reflect all changes resulting from
commissioning of systems. Narrative shall indicate recommended settings for
devices where applicable.
3. Replacement part numbers for all system components.
B. Identify installed location and labeling for each luminaire controlled by automated
lighting controls.
C. Submit software operating and maintenance manuals, program software backup on
compact disc or compatible media with data files, device address list, and a printout of
software application and graphic screens, where applicable.
1.9 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Statement: This specification section and the accompanying lighting
design documents describe the minimum material quality, required features, and
operational requirements of the lighting control system (LCS). These documents do
not convey every wire that must be installed and every equipment connection that
must be made. Based on the performance required of the system, as presented in
these documents, the Contractor and system manufacturer/vendor are solely
responsible for determining all equipment, wiring, and programming required for a
complete and operational system.
896
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 09 33 - 4 LIGHTING CONTROL
SYSTEMS
B. Provide an integrated lighting controls system consisting of panels, power supplies,
controllers, sensors, relays, switches, devices, wiring, etc. necessary to perform the
Lighting Control Sequence of Operation as defined on the plans and specifications.
Contractor is responsible for confirming that all components and luminaires
interoperate as a single system.
1. Sequence of Operation: Describes the required operation and performance for
lighting control in each space. Sequences of operation are indicated on the
drawings.
2. Drawings: The drawings include sequences of operation, locations of control
interface devices, sensors, and control zones. Wiring and additional equipment to
make a complete and functioning system has not been shown, but shall be
submitted with the shop drawings.
C. The following control types and features are acceptable. Acceptable control locations
are shown on the drawings.
1. Line Voltage Control: Control equipment consists of traditional line voltage wiring
devices and equipment such as switches, dimmers and combination
occupancy/vacancy sensor switches, etc.
2. Distributed Control: Control equipment is in the space/zone being controlled; not
reliant on centralized controllers.
a. All locations shall have the ability to be networked for remote control and
monitoring, but network connections are not required.
1.10 COMMISSIONING
A. The Contractor shall provide all services necessary for compliance with the IECC
Section C408 Commissioning. The commissioning shall include, but not be limited to,
a commissioning plan, preliminary commissioning report, construction documents,
manuals, final commissioning report, and lighting system functional testing.
B. This project will have selected building systems commissioned. The Contractor is
responsible to execute commissioning. The commissioning process, equipment, and
systems to be commissioned are defined in Division 1.
C. The Contractor shall notify the Architect/Engineer and Owner's Representative ten (10)
working days prior to scheduled commissioning date.
D. The commissioning process requires meeting attendance. Refer to Division 1 for
meeting requirements.
E. The system shall be functionally tested by a factory-authorized engineer and comply
with the Sequence of Operation. All loads shall be tested live for continuity and
freedom from defects, and all control wiring shall be tested for continuity and
connections prior to energizing the system.
897
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 09 33 - 5 LIGHTING CONTROL
SYSTEMS
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Manufacturer shall warrant products under normal use and service to be free from
defects in materials and workmanship for a period of two (2) years from date of
commissioning.
B. Occupancy, vacancy, daylight sensors and controls shall have a five (5) year warranty
from date of Substantial Completion.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LIGHTING CONTROLS
A. All items of material having a similar function (e.g., switches, dimmers, sensors,
contactors, relays, etc.) shall be of the same manufacturer, unless specifically stated
otherwise on drawings or elsewhere in the specifications. Lighting control switches,
systems, and components shall be listed.
B. Color of lighting controls and sensors shall match the receptacle wiring devices
specified in the space.
C. The functions described in the lighting sequence of operation shall dictate the actual
lighting control device required to accomplish the functions described for the space.
2.2 DEVICE COLOR
A. All switch, lighting controls, and coverplate colors shall be the same as wiring devices,
unless indicated otherwise.
2.3 COVERPLATES
A. All switches and lighting controls shall be complete with coverplates that match
material and color of the wiring device coverplates in the space.
B. Where several devices are ganged together, the coverplate shall be of the ganged
style for the number of devices used.
C. Install nameplate identification as indicated in Section 26 05 53.
D. Plate-securing screws shall be metal with head color matching the wall plate finish.
2.4 WALL SWITCHES
A. Refer to Electrical Symbols List for device type.
B. Switch touch surfaces shall have an antimicrobial additive that suppresses the growth
of harmful bacteria, mold, mildew, and fungi. Coverplate color shall match the switch
color.
1. Manufacturers:
898
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 09 33 - 6 LIGHTING CONTROL
SYSTEMS
a. Cooper 7621 CuVerro
b. Leviton A5621
C. SW-1P; Single Pole Switch:
1. Single throw, 120/277-volt, 20-amp maintained contact. Toggle handle, side and
back wired.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Hubbell HBL1221
b. Leviton 1221-2
c. Pass & Seymour PS20AC1
d. Cooper AH1221
2.5 WALL DIMMERS
A. SW-D-LED; LED Electronic Driver Dimmer:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Compatible with provided LED driver.
B. SW-D-LVE; Low Voltage Electronic Ballast Dimmer:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Lutron NELV-450
b. Lightolier MP625QE
C. SW-D3-LED; LED Electronic Driver Three-Way Dimmer:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Compatible with provided LED driver.
D. SW-OD; Wall 0-10V Dimmer / Occupancy sensor:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Sensor Switch WSX D Series
2.6 LOCAL DAYLIGHTING CONTROLS
A. Standalone Interior Photo Sensors:
1. SW-LS; Daylight Level Sensor - On/Off Control - One Zone:
a. On/Off control. Range of 10-200 FC. Adjustable deadband prevents cycling.
Adjustable time delay. 120/277 volt.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Watt Stopper LS-102
899
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 09 33 - 7 LIGHTING CONTROL
SYSTEMS
2) Sensor Switch CM-PC
3) Hubbell Automation DLCPC Series
4) Greengate PPS-4
2. Sensor shall detect changes in ambient light level and provide triggering of
lighting groups in area based on sequence of operation.
3. Sensor shall provide on/off setpoints in quantity as specified on drawings and as
shown in the sequence of operation.
4. Sensor shall be ceiling- or wall-mounted for range and viewing angle meeting
application requirements as outlined in the sequence of operation.
5. Output signal from sensor shall be linear with light level.
2.7 INDOOR OCCUPANCY AND VACANCY SENSORS
A. General Description: Wall- or ceiling-mounting, solid-state units with a separate power
supply/relay unit.
1. Operation: Unless otherwise indicated, turn lights on when covered area is
occupied and off when unoccupied, with a time delay for turning lights off,
adjustable over a minimum range of 1 to 30 minutes. Vacancy sensors require a
manual switch operation to turn lights on and off, with a time delay for turning
lights off when unoccupied.
2. Sensor Output: Contacts rated to operate the connected relay, complying with UL
773A. Sensor shall be powered from the relay unit.
3. Relay Unit: Dry contacts rated for 20 A ballast load at 120 and 277 VAC, for 13-
amp tungsten at 120 VAC, and for 1 hp at 120 VAC. Power supply to sensor
shall be 24 V dc, 150-mA, Class 2 power source as defined by Electrical Code.
4. Mounting:
a. Sensor: Suitable for mounting in any position on a standard outlet box.
b. Relay: Externally mounted through a 1/2-inch knockout in a standard
electrical enclosure. Mount relay above accessible ceiling near entry door
to room or area.
c. Time Delay and Sensitivity Adjustments: Recessed and concealed.
5. Indicator: LED to show when motion is being detected during testing and normal
operation of the sensor.
6. Bypass Switch: Override the on function in case of sensor failure.
7. Power Supply and Child Packs: Provide as required for sensor quantity and
switching scheme. Mount to standard 1/2" knockout on electrical box above
accessible ceiling near entry door to room or area. Sensor power shall be from
emergency circuit if emergency lighting is in the area.
8. Detection Coverage (Room): Detect occupancy anywhere in an area based on
hand motion.
9. Detection Coverage (Corridor): Detect occupancy based on a half-step motion.
10. Warranty: Five (5) year warranty.
B. Dual-Technology Type: Detect occupancy by using a combination of PIR and
ultrasonic or acoustic detection methods in area of coverage. Particular technology or
combination of technologies that controls on and off functions shall be selectable in the
field by operating controls on unit.
900
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 09 33 - 8 LIGHTING CONTROL
SYSTEMS
1. SW-VS-D or SW-OC-D; 360 Degree Coverage Pattern:
a. Frequency greater than 40 KHz. Dual sensing verifications (requires both
technologies to activate), either technology maintains on status. Integrated
ambient light level sensor (2 to 200 FC range), adjustable sensitivity and
time delay, integrated isolated relay contact. Sensor shall control all circuits
in area, unless noted otherwise. Initial settings: ambient sensor 40 FC.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Watt Stopper DT 300 Series
2) Hubbell OMNI-DT2000 or ATD2000C
3) Greengate OAC-DT
4) Leviton OSC##-MOW
5) Sensor Switch CM PDT 10
2. SW-VS-D-W or SW-OC-D-W; Wall Mounted on Adjustable Swivel Mount:
a. Wall or ceiling sensor with adjustable settings to allow manual on/auto off or
auto on/auto off. Integrated ambient light level sensor (2 to 100 FC range).
b. Manufacturers:
1) Watt Stopper DT-200 Series
2) Hubbell LODTRP
3) Leviton OSM12--M series
4) Sensor Switch WvPDT 16 Series
3. SW-O; Wall Switch:
a. Wall switch with manual on/auto off. 120/277 VAC load rating of 0-800 W
for ballast, LED or tungsten. 5-, 15-, 30-minute adjustable OFF delay.
Coverage of minor motion in 12' x 15' pattern.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Watt Stopper DW-100 Series
2) Hubbell LHMTS, Leviton OSSMT series
3) Sensor Switch WSX-PDT SA Series
4. Sensitivity Adjustment: Separate for each sensing technology.
5. Detection Coverage:
a. Task Areas: Detect occupancy anywhere in an area based on hand motion.
b. Circulation Areas: Detect occupancy anywhere in an area based upon half-
step walking motion.
C. Mask sensors where necessary to prevent nuisance switching from adjacent areas.
D. PIR Type: Detect occupancy by sensing a combination of heat and movement in area
of coverage.
1. SW-O; Wall Switch Occupancy Sensor:
901
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 09 33 - 9 LIGHTING CONTROL
SYSTEMS
a. Passive infrared, zero crossing circuitry, integrated ambient light sensor (10
to 150 FC range), adjustable sensitivity and time delay, no minimum load
requirements, manual or auto on operation, Initial settings: 10 minutes,
ambient sensor 40 FC. Manual ON for vacancy sensing.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Watt Stopper PW-100 Series
2) Sensor Switch WSX
3) Hubbell LHIRS1 or AP1277
4) Leviton ODS15
5) Greengate OSW-P-0451
2. SW-OC-P-P; Ceiling Mounted - 360 Degree Coverage Pattern:
a. Passive infrared, zero crossing circuitry, integrated ambient light sensor (4
to 190 FC Range), adjustable sensitivity and time delay, integral isolated
relay contact. Sensor shall control all circuits in the area unless noted
otherwise. Initial settings: ambient sensor 40 FC.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Watt Stopper CI Series
2) Sensor Switch CM-9
3) Hubbell Automation Omni-IR
4) Leviton OSC Series
5) Greengate OMR-P Series
3. SW-OC-P-P2; Ceiling Mounted - 100 Degree Coverage Pattern:
a. Passive infrared, zero crossing circuitry, integrated ambient light sensor (4
to 190 FC Range), adjustable sensitivity and time delay, integral isolated
relay contact. Sensor shall control all circuits in the area unless noted
otherwise. Initial settings: ambient sensor 40 FC.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Watt Stopper WPIR Series
2) Sensor Switch CM-9
3) Hubbell LOIRWV or ATD1600W
4. With daylight filter and lens to afford coverage applicable to space to be
controlled.
2.8 DISTRIBUTED LIGHTING CONTROL
A. Manufacturers: as listed below meet the qualifications as outlined in this specification.
Contractor is responsible for verifying that selected manufacturer is capable of
furnishing the complete system as specified herein.
1. Acuity Controls nLight Series
2. Legrand Watt Stopper DLM Series
902
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 09 33 - 10 LIGHTING CONTROL
SYSTEMS
3. Hubbell Automation NX Series
4. Eaton Greengate RC3 Series (room-based system)
5. Lutron
B. System Description: The lighting control system shall be a network of remote modules
System includes all associated wiring, relay modules, photocells, switches, dimmers,
time clock, occupancy sensors, network interfaces, and hubs. System shall utilize
distributed relays modules, allowing these relay modules to be located above
accessible ceilings in or adjacent to rooms they are controlling.
C. Control Devices: All occupancy sensors (ultrasonic, IR and dual technology type),
photocells, switches, and timers shall be provided with system and designed to
operate on system network. Supplemental power packs shall be provided as required
for multiple control devices. This equipment shall be identified in shop drawing
submission.
D. Relay Modules: Mounted in NEMA enclosure with physically separate 120/277-volt
wiring compartment from low voltage control wiring. Provide low voltage digital
communication to control devices as shown on drawings and schedules. Supplemental
power packs shall be provided as required for multiple control devices. This equipment
shall be identified in shop drawing submission. Dimmable relay modules shall be
provided where indicated. Relay modules shall contain up to four (4) relays. Relay
modules shall be labeled with room number that relays control lighting within.
E. Single-Pole Relays: Mechanically held unless otherwise indicated; split-coil,
momentary-pulsed type, rated 20 A, 125-volt AC for tungsten filaments and 20 A, 277-
volt AC for electronic ballasts, 50,000 cycles at rated capacity.
F. System server / central station shall provide programmable operation of lights
connected via system relays and controlled with system devices. System software
shall provide control of relays and control devices, time and sequence scheduling,
timed out and blink light operation, and monitoring and reporting of system events and
components. Initial programming shall be as shown on plans and schedules.
G. Server / Central Control Station: Lighting control system manufacturer shall be
responsible to assure coordination between relay modules, network hubs, and control
system server/ central station such that system performs as described. Server shall be
provided with monitor, keyboard, and mouse, and plugged into a receptacle connected
to an equipment emergency circuit as a minimum.
H. Network Hub: Network Hub shall contain processor and astronomic time clock for
control and monitoring of lighting. Network hub shall be fed from an equipment
emergency circuit at a minimum.
2.9 CONDUCTORS AND CABLES
A. Control Wiring:
1. Where installed with the line-voltage wiring, control wiring shall be copper
conductors not smaller than No. 16 AWG with insulation voltage rating and
temperature rating equal to that of the line-voltage wiring, complying with Division
26 Section 26 05 13 "Wire and Cable."
903
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 09 33 - 11 LIGHTING CONTROL
SYSTEMS
2. Tap conductors to switches or relays: Stranded copper conductors of 16 AWG or
solid 16 or 18 AWG with insulation rating equal to that of the line-voltage wiring.
3. Tap conductors to dimming ballasts: Solid copper conductors of 18 AWG with
insulation voltage rating equal to that of the line-voltage wiring and insulation
temperature rating not less than 90°C.
4. Network cabling as required by manufacturer.
B. Splices and Taps:
1. Tapping or wire trap connectors shall be used to splice all Class 1 and Class 2
control wiring. Twist-on, wire-nut type connectors are not allowed.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PRE-CONSTRUCTION MEETING
A. Schedule a pre-construction meeting with the controls representative, installing
contractor, Architect/Engineer, and Owner to explain the proposed lighting control
centralized, wireless, and distributed systems.
3.2 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Verify field dimensions and coordinate physical size of all equipment with the
architectural requirements of the spaces into which they are to be installed. Allow
space for adequate ventilation and circulation of air.
C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.
D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and approved shop drawings.
B. All wiring shall be installed in conduit. Class II low voltage control wiring may be open
wiring and shall maintain 150 mm (6 inch) spacing from electronic ballast and other
RFI/EMI sources.
C. All branch load circuits shall be live tested before connecting the loads to the lighting
control panel.
3.4 SUPPORT SERVICES
A. System Startup:
1. Manufacturer shall provide factory authorized technician to confirm proper
installation and operation of all system components.
B. Testing:
904
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 09 33 - 12 LIGHTING CONTROL
SYSTEMS
1. System shall be completely functional tested by a factory-authorized technician.
All loads shall be tested live for continuity and freedom from defects, and all
control wiring shall be tested for continuity and connections prior to energizing
the system components.
2. Programming of initial zones, schedules, lighting levels, control station groups,
and sensor settings shall be performed by a factory-authorized technician.
Lighting Control Sequence of Operation shall serve as a basis for programming,
However, all final decisions regarding groups and schedules shall be at the
direction of the Owner. The following procedures shall be performed at a
minimum:
a. Confirm occupancy sensor placement, sensitivity, and time delay settings to
meet specified performance criteria.
b. Confirm daylight sensor placement, sensitivity, deadband, and delay
settings to meet specified performance criteria.
c. Confirm that schedules and time controls are configured to meet specified
performance criteria and Owner's operating requirements.
3. Verify occupancy/vacancy and daylight sensor operation is correct after furniture
and equipment is installed in each area. Make adjustments to sensor settings
and time delays to allow proper operation.
4. Verify occupancy/vacancy sensors are located to provide complete coverage for
the area served with no nuisance switching.
a. Relocate sensors or provide additional sensors as necessary to provide
adequate coverage.
b. Mask occupancy sensors where necessary to prevent nuisance switching
from adjacent areas.
C. Training:
1. Manufacturer shall provide competent factory-authorized technician to train
Owner personnel in the operation, maintenance and programming of the lighting
control system. Submit training plan with notification seven (7) days prior to
proposed training dates.
2. Training duration shall be no less than three (3) days, with one (1) day being
scheduled at least two (2) weeks after initial training.
D. Documentation:
1. Manufacturer shall provide system documentation including:
a. System one-line showing all panels, number and type of control stations
and sensors, communication line, and network or BMS/BAS interface unit.
b. Drawings for each panel showing hardware configuration and numbering.
c. Panel wiring schedules.
d. Typical diagrams for each component.
END OF SECTION 26 09 33
905
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 24 16 - 1 PANELBOARDS
SECTION 26 24 16
PANELBOARDS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Service and distribution panelboards: DP-#, DP-#
B. Lighting and appliance branch circuit panelboards: Panel '###'
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS AND WORK
A. Refer to the Electrical Distribution Diagram and Electrical Schedules for size, rating,
and configuration.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers
B. NEMA FU 1 - Low voltage cartridge fuses
C. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches
D. NEMA PB 1 - Panelboards
E. NEMA PB 1.1 - Instructions for Safe Installation, Operation and Maintenance of
Panelboards Rated 600 Volts or Less
F. NEMA PB 1.2 - Application Guide for Ground-fault Protective Devices for Equipment
G. UL 248 - Low-Voltage Fuses
H. UL 67 - Panelboards
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings for equipment and component devices under provisions of
Section 26 05 00.
B. Include outline and support point dimensions, voltage, main bus ampacity, integrated
short circuit ampere rating, circuit breaker and fusible switch arrangement and sizes.
C. Selective Coordination Study: Submit study to prove that all essential electrical
systems, emergency systems and legally required standby system panelboards are
selectively coordinated with all supply side overcurrent protective devices.
D. Arc Energy Reduction Documentation: Submit documentation to demonstrate the arc
energy reduction system is set to operate at a value below the available arcing current.
906
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 24 16 - 2 PANELBOARDS
E. Submit manufacturer's instructions under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 RATINGS
A. Definitions:
1. Series rated equipment shall be defined as equipment that can achieve a
required UL AIC rating with an upstream device such as a main breaker or a
combination of devices to meet or exceed a required UL AIC rating. All series
rated equipment shall have a permanently attached nameplate indicating that
device rating must be maintained. See Section 26 05 53 for additional
requirements.
2. Fully rated equipment shall be defined as equipment where all devices in that
equipment shall carry a minimum of the AIC rating that is specified.
B. The panelboards for this project shall be fully rated unless otherwise specifically noted
in the Drawings or Specifications.
2.2 MAIN AND DISTRIBUTION PANELBOARDS
A. General
1. Manufacturers:
a. Square D QMB, I-Line
b. ABB ReliaGear Entelleon
c. Siemens F2, P4
d. Eaton PRL4, PRL5
B. Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; type as shown on the drawings.
C. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1; Type 1.
D. Provide cabinet front with concealed trim clamps and hinged trim on door to allow
access to wiring gutters without removal of trim and flush lock. Door hardware shall
provide swing clear operation (180-degree swing). Finish in manufacturer's standard
gray enamel.
E. Provide panelboards with copper bus, ratings as scheduled on the drawings. Provide
copper ground bus in all panelboards.
F. All spaces shown on the one-line diagram shall be fully prepared spaces for future
breakers.
G. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: 100,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 240-
volt panelboards; 50,000 amperes rms symmetrical for 480-volt panelboards, or as
shown on the drawings.
907
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 24 16 - 3 PANELBOARDS
H. Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; quick-make, quick-break, load interrupter
enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle. Provide interlock to prevent
opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable in OFF position.
I. Fuse Clips (Switches 600 Amperes and Smaller): Provide with Class 'R' rejection clips.
Fuse Clips (601 Amperes and Larger): Designed to accommodate Class 'L' fuses.
J. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Provide circuit breakers with integral thermal and
instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole.
K. Molded Case Circuit Breakers with Current Limiters: Provide circuit breakers with
replaceable current limiting elements, in addition to integral thermal and instantaneous
magnetic trip in each pole.
L. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Provide circuit breakers with integral
thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically
resetting current limiting elements in each pole. Interrupting rating 100,000
symmetrical amperes, let-through current and energy level less than permitted for
same size Class RK-5 fuse.
M. Solid State Molded Case Circuit Breakers: (All breakers identified on plans as solid-
state with 1,200 ampere frame sizes and below.) Provide molded case switch with
electronic sensing, timing, and tripping circuits for fully adjustable time current
characteristic settings including ground fault trip, instantaneous trip, long time trip, long
time delay, short time trip, and short time delay. Trip setting shall be field
programmable with a sealable clear cover.
N. Suitable for use as service entrance equipment. Provide line side (service style)
barriers.
2.3 BRANCH CIRCUIT PANELBOARDS
A. General
1. Manufacturers:
a. Square D NQ, NF
b. ABB A Series
c. Siemens P1
d. Eaton PRL1, PRL2
B. Lighting and Appliance Branch Circuit Panelboards: NEMA PB 1; circuit breaker type.
C. Enclosure: NEMA PB 1; Type 1.
D. Provide cabinet front with door-in-door construction, concealed hinge, and flush lock all
keyed alike. Door hardware shall provide swing clear operation (180-degree swing).
Finish in manufacturer's standard gray enamel.
E. Provide panelboards with copper bus, ratings as scheduled on the drawings. Provide
copper ground bus in all panelboards.
908
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 24 16 - 4 PANELBOARDS
F. All unlabeled circuits shown on the panelboard schedule shall be fully prepared spaces
for future breakers.
G. All multiple-section panelboards shall have the same dimensional back box and
cabinet front size.
H. Minimum Integrated Short Circuit Rating: As shown on the drawings.
I. Provide handle lock-on devices for all breakers serving exit sign and lighting circuits
with emergency battery units. Provide handle lock-on devices and red handles for
breakers serving fire alarm panels.
J. Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Bolt-on type thermal magnetic trip circuit breakers, with
common trip handle for all poles. Provide circuit breakers UL listed as Type SWD for
lighting circuits. Provide UL Class A ground fault interrupter circuit breakers where
scheduled on the drawings. Do not use tandem circuit breakers.
K. Current Limiting Molded Case Circuit Breakers: Provide circuit breakers with integral
thermal and instantaneous magnetic trip in each pole, coordinated with automatically
resetting current limiting elements in each pole. Interrupting rating 100,000
symmetrical amperes, let-through current and energy level less than permitted for
same size Class RK-5 fuse.
L. Suitable for use as service entrance equipment. Provide line side (service style)
barriers.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install panelboards plumb as indicated on the drawings in conformance with NEMA PB
1.1.
B. Height: 6 feet to handle of highest device.
C. Provide filler plates for unused spaces in panelboards.
D. Provide custom typed circuit directory for each branch circuit panelboard. Provide
updated custom typed circuit directory for each existing branch circuit panelboard with
new or revised circuits per the scope of work. Label shall include equipment name or
final approved room name, room number, and load type for each circuit (examples:
SUMP SP-1 or ROOM 101 RECEPT). Revise directory to reflect circuit changes
required to balance phase loads. Printed copies of the bid document panel schedules
are not acceptable as circuit directories.
E. Install fuses in fusible switch assemblies.
909
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 24 16 - 5 PANELBOARDS
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Measure steady state load currents at each panelboard feeder. Should the difference
at any panelboard between phases exceed 20 percent, rearrange circuits in the
panelboard to balance the phase loads within 20 percent. Take care to maintain proper
phasing for multi-wire branch circuits.
B. Visual and Mechanical Inspection: Inspect for physical damage, proper alignment,
anchorage, and grounding. Check proper installation and tightness of connections for
circuit breakers, fusible switches, and fuses.
END OF SECTION 26 24 16
910
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 27 16 - 1 CABINETS AND
ENCLOSURES
SECTION 26 27 16
CABINETS AND ENCLOSURES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Cabinets
B. Terminal blocks and accessories
1.2 REFERENCES
A. NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
B. ANSI/NEMA ICS 1 - Industrial Control and Systems
C. ANSI/NEMA ICS 4 - Terminal Blocks for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems
D. ANSI/NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Control Equipment and Systems
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Shop Drawings for Equipment Panels: Include wiring schematic diagram, wiring
diagram, outline drawing and construction diagram as described in ANSI/NEMA ICS 1.
C. Include cabinets and enclosures in composite electronic coordination files. Refer to
Section 26 05 00 for coordination drawing requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABINETS
A. Cabinet Fronts: Steel, flush type with concealed trim clamps, concealed hinge and
flush lock keyed to match branch circuit panelboard; finish in gray baked enamel.
2.2 TERMINAL BLOCKS AND ACCESSORIES
A. Terminal Blocks: ANSI/NEMA ICS 4; UL listed.
B. Power Terminals: Unit construction type, closed-back type, with tubular pressure
screw connectors, rated 600 volts.
C. Signal and Control Terminals: Modular construction type, channel mounted; tubular
pressure screw connectors, rated 300 volts.
911
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 27 16 - 2 CABINETS AND
ENCLOSURES
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install cabinets and enclosures plumb; anchor securely to wall and structural supports
at each corner, minimum.
B. Provide accessory feet for free-standing equipment enclosures.
C. Install trim plumb.
END OF SECTION 26 27 16
912
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 27 26 - 1 WIRING DEVICES
SECTION 26 27 26
WIRING DEVICES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Device plates and box covers
B. Receptacles (REC-#)
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Provide similar devices from a single manufacturer.
B. Electrical Components, Devices, and Accessories: Listed and labeled as defined in the
Electrical Code, by a testing agency to Authorities Having Jurisdiction and marked for
intended use.
C. Comply with the Electrical Code.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. DSCC W-C-896F - General Specification for Electrical Power Connector
B. FS W-C-596 - Electrical Power Connector, Plug, Receptacle, and Cable Outlet
C. NEMA WD 1 - General Color Requirements for Wiring Devices
D. NEMA WD 6 - Wiring Devices - Dimensional Requirements
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
F. CEC California Electrical Code
G. UL 498 - Standard for Attachment Plugs and Receptacles
H. UL 943 - Standard for Ground Fault Circuit Interrupters
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Provide product data showing configurations, finishes, dimensions, and manufacturer's
instructions.
C. Provide a non-returnable sample of each countertop and furniture-mounted receptacle
assembly as part of the submittal process.
913
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 27 26 - 2 WIRING DEVICES
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Receptacles for Owner Furnished Equipment: Match plug configurations.
B. Cord and Plug Sets: Match equipment requirements.
C. Coordinate installation of receptacle assemblies in countertops and furniture with the
Contractor providing the countertop or furniture. Contractor shall coordinate
penetrations and conduit routing in countertops and furniture with drawings and other
obstacles below the installation surface.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 DEVICE COLOR
A. All switch, receptacle, and outlet colors shall be white, unless indicated otherwise.
2.2 COVERPLATES
A. All switches, receptacles, and outlets shall be complete with the following:
1. Unbreakable thermoplastic/thermoset plastic and match device color coverplates
in finished spaces where walls are finished.
2. Decorator Grade - Public: Decorator thermoset plastic and match device color
thermoplastic and match device color #302 stainless steel wallplates in public
finished spaces where walls are finished.
a. Manufacturer:
1) Leviton Decora
2) Hubbell Decorator
3) Cooper Decorator
4) or approved equal
3. Decorator Grade - Screwless: Decorator snap-on nylon or polycarbonate
wallplates with sub-base in public finished spaces; match device color.
a. Manufacturer:
1) Leviton 803##
2) Hubbell RCW
3) Cooper PJS
4) Pass & Seymour SWP
5) or approved equal
4. #302 stainless steel coverplates in unfinished spaces for flush boxes.
5. Galvanized steel coverplates in unfinished spaces for surface mounted boxes.
B. Where several devices are ganged together, the coverplate shall be of the ganged
style for the number of devices used.
C. Plate securing screws shall be metal with head color matching the wall plate finish.
914
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 27 26 - 3 WIRING DEVICES
2.3 RECEPTACLES
A. Refer to Electrical Symbols List for device type.
B. REC-DUP: NEMA 5-20R Duplex Receptacle:
1. Standard Grade: 125-volt, 20 amp, 3-wire grounding type with impact resistant
thermoplastic face and steel back strap.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Hubbell 5352A
2) Leviton, 5362-S
3) Pass & Seymour 5362
4) Cooper 5352
2. Decorator Grade: Provide decorative style duplex receptacles in public spaces
where walls are finished.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Hubbell DR20
2) Leviton 16362
3) Pass & Seymour 26342
4) Cooper 6352
3. Spec Grade: 125-volt, 20 amp, 3-wire grounding type with impact resistant
thermoplastic face and brass back strap.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Hubbell 5352
2) Leviton 5362-S
3) Pass & Seymour 5362
4) Cooper 5362
C. REC-DUP-GFI: NEMA 5-20R Ground Fault Duplex Receptacle:
1. Standard Grade: 125-volt, 20 amp, 3-wire grounding type with test and reset
buttons in impact resistant thermoplastic face.
a. Device shall perform self-test of GFCI circuitry in accordance with UL 943.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Hubbell GF20L GFCI type devices are not allowed. Contractor may
substitute an alternative manufacturer when Hubbell is the basis of
submittal for all other wiring devices.
2) Leviton GFNT2
3) Pass & Seymour 2097
4) Cooper SGF20
D. REC-DUP-WP: NEMA 5-20R Weatherproof Ground Fault Duplex Receptacle:
915
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 27 26 - 4 WIRING DEVICES
1. 125-volt, 20 amp, 3-wire grounding type with test and reset buttons in impact
resistant thermoplastic face, weather resistant WR listed. Provide extra-duty
NEMA 3R rated while-in-use clear cover.
2. Device shall perform self-test of GFCI circuitry in accordance with UL 943.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Hubbell:
a) GFTWRST20 with clear housing RW57300
b) GFCI type devices are not allowed. Contractor may substitute
an alternative manufacturer when Hubbell is the basis of
submittal for all other wiring devices.
2) Leviton GFWT2 with clear housing 5977-CL
3) Pass & Seymour 2097TRWR with clear housing WIUC10-C
4) Cooper WRSGF20 with clear housing WIU-1
E. REC-TAMP: NEMA 5-20R Tamper Resistant Duplex Receptacle:
1. Standard Grade: 125-volt, 20 amp, 3-wire grounding type with impact resistant
thermoplastic face.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Hubbell BR20TR
2) Leviton TBR20
3) Pass & Seymour TR5362
4) Cooper TRBR20
2. Decorative Grade: Provide decorative style duplex tamper resistant receptacles
in public spaces where walls are finished.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Hubbell DR20TR
2) Leviton TDR20
F. REC-TAMP-GFI: NEMA 5-20R GFI Tamper Resistant Receptacle:
1. Standard Grade: 125-volt, 20 amp, 3-wire grounding type tamper-resistant with
test and reset buttons in impact resistant thermoplastic face.
a. Device shall perform self-test of GFCI circuitry in accordance with UL 943.
b. Manufacturers:
1) Hubbell GFTR20
2) Cooper TRSGF20
3) Pass & Seymour 2097TR
2. Hospital Grade: 125-volt, 20 amp, 3-wire grounding type hospital grade tamper-
resistant, weather resistant WR listed, with test and reset buttons in impact
resistant thermoplastic face.
916
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 27 26 - 5 WIRING DEVICES
G. REC-TAMP-QUAD: NEMA 5-20R Double Duplex Tamper Resistant Receptacle:
1. Consists of two duplex tamper resistant receptacles, double gang box, plaster
ring and faceplate.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Refer to Tamper Resistant Receptacle above.
H. REC-QUAD-O: NEMA 5-20R Plug Load Controlled Duplex Receptacle:
1. Consists of two plug load controlled duplex receptacles, double gang box, plaster
ring and faceplate.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Refer to Plug Load Controlled Duplex Receptacle above.
I. REC-QUAD: NEMA 5-20R Double Duplex Receptacle:
1. Consists of two duplex receptacles, double gang box, plaster ring and faceplate.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Refer to Duplex Receptacle above.
J. REC-QUAD-GFI: NEMA 5-20R Double Duplex GFI Receptacle:
1. Consists of two duplex GFI receptacles, double gang box, plaster ring and
faceplate.
a. Manufacturers:
1) Refer to Duplex GFI Receptacle above.
K. Back wired devices shall be complete with eight holes that are screw activated with
metal clamps for connection to #12 or #10 copper conductors.
L. Side wired devices shall have four binding screws that are undercut for positive wire
retention.
M. Ground fault circuit interrupter (GFCI) receptacles shall comply with UL 943 requiring
increased surge immunity, improved corrosion resistance, improved resistance to false
tripping and diagnostic indication for miswiring if the line and load conductors are
reversed during installation.
N. Isolated ground receptacles shall have the equipment ground contacts connected only
to the green grounding screw terminal of the device with inherent electrical isolation
from the mounting strap.
2.4 FLOOR BOXES
A. Cover Color and Style: Verify with Architect from manufacturer standard options.
917
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 27 26 - 6 WIRING DEVICES
B. Refer to Technology drawings for voice/data, Audio/Video outlet, and coordination
requirements.
C. FB-#: Square or Rectangular (Standard):
1. Floor Box, square or rectangular, square/rectangular flush-mounted hinged cover
with flange, provide complete with appropriate outlet cover plates and hardware,
for use with -inch minimum concrete pour floors, fully adjustable.
2. Gang / Outlet Descriptions:
a. 125 Volt, 20 amp, NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacle with 3/4-inch conduit.
b. Voice/Data outlet with 3/4-inch conduit.
c. Audio/Visual outlet with 1-inch conduit.
d. Power furniture/equipment feed with flexible whip and 1-inch conduit.
e. Voice/Data furniture/equipment feed with flexible whip and 1-inch conduit.
f. Audio/Visual furniture/equipment feed with flexible whip and 1-inch conduit.
g. Spare with 1- inch conduit.
h. Refer to Technology drawings for additional information related to
voice/data and audio/visual outlet requirements.
3. Manufacturers:
a. Cast:
1) Hubbell B### Series
2) Legrand Wiremold 880 Series
3) ABB Steel City 640 / 840 Series
b. Stamped Steel:
1) Hubbell 242# Series
2) Legrand Wiremold 880 Series
3) ABB Steel City 740 Series
c. Non-Metallic PVC:
1) Hubbell
2) Legrand Wiremold 880 Series
3) ABB Steel City 640 Series
4. Installation: Group route raceway conduits under slab on grade or in elevated
slab to nearest wall. Route conduits to nearest wall or as shown on drawings.
Provide hub reducers when applicable.
2.5 POKE-THROUGH FITTINGS
A. Cover Color and Style: Verify with Architect from manufacturer standard options.
B. Refer to Technology drawings for voice/data, Audio/Video outlet, and coordination
requirements.
C. Terminate in 4-inch square by 2-1/2-inch deep junction box.
918
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 27 26 - 7 WIRING DEVICES
D. Suitable for installation with a floor thickness of 2-1/4 to 7 inches.
E. PT-#: 3" Fire Rated Poke-Through:
1. Semi-flush mounted, hinged covers, for use with 3-inch core holes, provide
complete with appropriate outlet coverplates and hardware. UL 514 scrub rated
listed.
2. Gang / Outlet Descriptions, route conduit in ceiling space of lower level. Provide
provisions to core drill floor to route power circuits to panel on same floor as poke
through. Route low voltage raceways to scheduled technology room:
a. 125 Volt, 20 amp, NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacle.
b. Voice/Data outlet.
c. Audio/Visual outlet.
d. Power furniture/equipment feed with flexible whip.
e. Voice/Data furniture/equipment feed with flexible whip.
f. Audio/Visual furniture/equipment feed with flexible whip.
g. Conduit Raceway (in ceiling space below floor):
1) Power: 3/4-inch conduit.
2) Voice/Data: 3/4-inch conduit.
3) Audio/Visual: 1-inch conduit.
h. Refer to Technology drawings for additional information related to
voice/data and audio/visual outlet requirements.
3. Manufacturers:
1) Hubbell PT2X2
2) Wiremold
3) Thomas & Betts
F. PT-#: 4" Fire Rated Poke-Through:
1. Semi-flush mounted, hinged covers, for use with 4-inch core holes, provide
complete with appropriate outlet coverplates and hardware. UL 514 scrub rated
listed.
2. Gang / Outlet Descriptions, route conduit in ceiling space of lower level. Provide
provisions to core drill floor to route power circuits to panel on same floor as poke
through. Route low voltage raceways to scheduled technology room:
a. 125 Volt, 20 amp, NEMA 5-20R duplex receptacle.
b. Voice/Data outlet.
c. Audio/Visual outlet.
d. Power furniture/equipment feed with flexible whip.
e. Voice/Data furniture/equipment feed with flexible whip.
f. Audio/Visual furniture/equipment feed with flexible whip.
g. Spare.
h. Conduit Raceway (in ceiling space below floor):
1) Power: 3/4-inch conduit.
2) Voice/Data: 3/4-inch conduit.
3) Audio/Visual: 1-inch conduit.
919
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 27 26 - 8 WIRING DEVICES
i. Refer to Technology drawings for additional information related to
voice/data and audio/visual outlet requirements.
3. Manufacturers:
a. Hubbell SystemOne Series
b. Legrand Wiremold 4RF/RC Series
c. ABB Steel City FPT4 Series
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install convenience receptacles at elevations indicated in the General Installation
Notes on the contract drawings.
B. Install specific-use receptacles at heights shown on the contract drawings. Install
devices level, plumb, and square with building lines. Coordinate installation of adjacent
devices of separate systems with common mounting heights, including lighting, power,
systems, technology, and temperature control device rough-ins.
C. Ground Fault Protection: Provide ground fault protection for all branch circuit breakers
serving 120/208 receptacle outlets rated 21 - 50 amps single phase and 21-100 amps
three phase in the following locations, as shown on drawings, or required by adopted
code:
1. Bathrooms
2. Break Room
3. Rooftops
4. Interior/Exterior locations subject to damp/wet conditions
5. When located within 6 feet of sinks.
D. Tamper Resistant Protection: Provide tamper resistant protection for all 15 / 20-amp
120/208 straight blade wiring devices in the following locations, as shown on the
drawings, or required by adopted code.
1. Business Office: Corridors, waiting rooms, common areas
2. Public Buildings: Corridors, waiting rooms, common areas
E. Drill opening for poke-through fitting installation in accordance with manufacturer's
instructions. This Contractor is responsible for taking any measures required to ensure
no conduits or other services are damaged. This may include X-ray or similar non-
destructive means.
F. Install receptacles vertically with ground slot up or where indicated on the drawings,
horizontally with ground slot to the left.
G. Install decorative plates on switch, receptacle, and blank outlets in finished areas,
using jumbo size plates for outlets installed in masonry walls.
H. Install galvanized steel plates on outlet boxes and junction boxes in unfinished areas,
above accessible ceilings, and on surface-mounted outlets.
920
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 27 26 - 9 WIRING DEVICES
I. Install devices and wall plates flush and level.
END OF SECTION 26 27 26
921
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 28 13 - 1 FUSES
SECTION 26 28 13
FUSES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fuses
1.2 REFERENCES
A. UL 198C - High-Interrupting Capacity Fuses; Current Limiting Types
B. UL 198E - Class R Fuses
C. FS W-F-870 - Fuseholders (For Plug and Enclosed Cartridge Fuses)
D. NEMA FU 1 - Low Voltage Cartridge Fuses
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
F. CEC California Electrical Code
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Where ambient temperature to which fuses are directly exposed is less than 40°F or
more than 100°F, apply manufacturer's ambient temperature adjustment factors to
fuse ratings.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS - FUSES
A. Bussman, Division of Eaton
B. Edison Fuse, Division of Cooper Industries
C. Mersen
D. Littelfuse Inc
2.2 FUSES
A. Dimensions and Performance: NEMA FU 1, Class as specified or indicated.
B. Voltage: Provide fuses with voltage rating suitable for circuit phase-to-phase voltage.
922
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 28 13 - 2 FUSES
C. Fuses with ratings larger than 600 amperes: Class L (time delay), unless otherwise
noted on the drawings.
D. Fuses with ratings larger than 200 amperes but equal to or less than 600 amperes:
Class RK-1 (time delay), unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
E. Fuses with ratings less than or equal to 200 amperes (not including control transformer
fuses): Class RK-5, unless otherwise noted on the drawings.
F. Fuses for packaged equipment: Size and type as recommended by equipment
manufacturer.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install fuses where indicated on the drawings and specifications.
B. Install fuses in accordance with manufacturer's instruction.
C. Install fuses in packaged equipment as required by equipment manufacturer.
D. Install fuse with label oriented such that manufacturer, type, and size are easily read.
END OF SECTION 26 28 13
923
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 28 16 - 1 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
SECTION 26 28 16
DISCONNECT SWITCHES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Fusible switches
B. Non-fusible switches
C. Motor disconnect switch
D. Enclosures
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS AND WORK
A. Refer to the Disconnect and Starter Schedule for rating and configuration.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. NEMA KS 1 - Enclosed Switches
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Product Data: For each type of enclosed switch, circuit breakers, accessory and
component indicated, include dimensions, weights, and manufacturer's technical data
on features, performance, and ratings.
C. Electrical Characteristics: For each type of enclosed switch, enclosure types, current
and voltage ratings, short-circuit current ratings, UL listing for series rating of installed
devices, features, characteristics, ratings, and factory settings of individual overcurrent
protective devices and auxiliary components.
1.5 COORDINATION
A. Coordinate layout and installation of switches, circuit breakers, and components with
other construction, including conduit, piping, equipment, and adjacent surfaces.
Maintain required workspace clearances and required clearances for equipment
access doors and panels.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FUSIBLE AND NON-FUSIBLE SWITCHES
A. Acceptable Manufacturers:
924
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 28 16 - 2 DISCONNECT SWITCHES
1. Square D 3110 Series
2. Eaton DH Series
3. ABB TH Series
4. Siemens HNF / HF Series
B. FDS-#; Fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; Type heavy duty, quick-make, quick-
break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle
interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable
in OFF position. Fuse Clips: Class 'R' fuse clips only, unless indicated otherwise on the
drawings.
C. DS-#; Non-fusible Switch Assemblies: NEMA KS 1; Type heavy duty, quick-make,
quick-break, load interrupter enclosed knife switch with externally operable handle
interlocked to prevent opening front cover with switch in ON position. Handle lockable
in OFF position.
D. Enclosures: Type as indicated on the disconnect schedule.
E. Accessories: As indicated on the disconnect schedule.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install disconnect switches where indicated on the drawings.
B. Install fuses in fusible disconnect switches.
C. Provide adhesive label on inside door of each switch indicating UL fuse class and size
for replacement.
3.2 ADJUSTING
A. Set field-adjustable circuit breaker trip ranges.
END OF SECTION 26 28 16
925
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 32 13 - 1 PACKAGED ENGINE
GENERATOR SYSTEMS
SECTION 26 32 13
PACKAGED ENGINE GENERATOR SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Battery and charger
1.2 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NEMA 250 - Enclosures for Electrical Equipment (1000 Volts Maximum)
B. ANSI/NEMA AB 1 - Molded Case Circuit Breakers
C. ANSI/NEMA MG 1 - Motors and Generators
D. NFPA 37 - Installation and Use of Stationary Combustion Engines and Gas Turbines
E. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
F. CEC California Electrical Code
G. NFPA 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems
H. IEEE 446 - Recommended Practice for Emergency and Standby Power Systems for
Commercial and Industrial Applications
I. Environmental Protection Agency EPA Emission Standards for Compressed Ignition
Engines
J. Noise Emission: Comply with applicable state and local government requirements for
maximum noise level at property boundaries due to sound emitted by the generator
set, its components and the operation thereof.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Submit shop drawings showing plan and elevation views with overall and
interconnection point dimensions, fuel consumption rate curves at various loads,
ventilation and combustion air requirements, and electrical diagrams including
schematic and interconnection diagrams.
C. Submit product data showing dimensions, weights, ratings, interconnection points, and
internal wiring diagrams for engine, generator, control panel, battery, battery rack,
battery charger, exhaust silencer, vibration isolators, and remote annunciator.
926
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 32 13 - 2 PACKAGED ENGINE
GENERATOR SYSTEMS
1. Include work clearance and equipment access information. Clearly identify
required equipment access locations for installation, maintenance, testing, and
repair.
D. Submit certificates for compliance with EPA Emissions Standards for Compressed
Ignition Engines.
E. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
F. EXTRA MATERIALSFurnish Extra Material per City Approval
G. Submit maintenance materials under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
H. Furnish one set of tools required for preventative maintenance of the engine generator
system. Package tools in adequately sized metal toolbox.
I. Provide two additional sets of each fuel, oil, and air filter element required for the
engine generator system. Provide additional fuel polishing filters for one year of
operation.
1.4 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
C. Accept packaged engine generator set and accessories on site in crates and verify
damage.
D. Protect equipment from dirt and moisture by securely wrapping in heavy plastic.
1.5 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Engine generator system to provide source of emergency and standby power.
B. System Capacity: 250 KW, 313KVA , at an elevation of 1,000 feet above sea level,
and ambient temperature between -20°F and 110°F; standby rating using engine-
mounted radiator.
C. Emergency Power Supply System (EPSS) shall be NFPA 110 Type 10 Class 48
Level 1.
D. Operation: In accordance with ANSI/NFPA 110.
1.6 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Reference Coordination Drawings article in Section 26 05 00 for required generator
electronic CAD drawings to be provided to Coordinating Contractor for inclusion into
composite coordination drawings. Show generator, fuel system components, battery
system components, and exhaust system in 1/4" scale plan of room.
927
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 32 13 - 3 PACKAGED ENGINE
GENERATOR SYSTEMS
1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit record documents under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Accurately record location of engine generator and mechanical and electrical
connections.
1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Include instructions for normal operation, routine maintenance requirements, service
manuals for engine and day tank, oil sampling and analysis for engine wear, and
emergency maintenance procedures.
1.9 QUALIFICATIONS
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in packaged engine generator system with
minimum five (5) years documented experience.
B. Manufacturer: Company with minimum five (5) years of documented on-board
paralleling system experience.
C. Supplier: Authorized distributor of engine generator manufacturer with service facilities
within 100 miles of the project site.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Provide a two (2) year warranty under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
1.11 MAINTENANCE SERVICE
A. Furnish service and maintenance of packaged engine generator system for one (1)
year from Date of Notice of Completion. Maintenance service shall be performed by
skilled employees of manufacturer's designated service organization. Include quarterly
exercising, and routine preventive maintenance as recommended by manufacturer and
adjusting as required for proper operation. Maintenance agreements shall include
parts, supplies, and labor. After one year, City will exercise maintenance agreement in
place for all others.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Generac.
B. Cummins Power Generation
C. Caterpillar
D. Kohler
928
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 32 13 - 4 PACKAGED ENGINE
GENERATOR SYSTEMS
2.2 PACKAGED ENGINE-GENERATOR SET (GEN-1)
A. Packaged engine-generator set shall be a coordinated assembly of compatible
components. Stationary generators shall be listed.
B. Safety Standard: Comply with ASME B15.1 and UL 2200.
C. Nameplates: Each major system component shall be equipped with a nameplate to
identify manufacturer's name and address, model and serial number, and component
rating in integrated set and as required by the contract documents.
D. Fabricate engine-generator set mounting frame and attachment of components to
resist generator-set movement during a seismic event when generator-set mounting
frame is anchored to generator concrete pad.
E. Maximum Dimensions : 208.3"L x 53.4"W x 134.3"H.
2.3 ENGINE
A. Type: Water-cooled in-line or V-type, ignition diesel electric ignition internal
combustion engine.
B. Rating: Sufficient to operate at 100 percent load for 48 hours at specified elevation
and ambient limits.
C. Fuel: Appropriate for use of No. 2 fuel oil.
D. Engine Speed: 1800 RPM.
E. Governor: Isochronous type with speed sensing.
F. Safety Devices: Engine shutdown on high water temperature, low oil pressure,
overspeed, and engine overcrank. Limits as selected by manufacturer.
G. Frequency Response:
1. Steady State Operational Bandwidth: 0.5 percent of rated frequency from no load
to full load.
2. Transient Response: Less than 5 percent for a 50 percent step-load increase or
decrease. Frequency shall recover and remain within the steady state operating
band within 5 seconds.
H. Fuel System:Engine mounted diesel fuel pump and relief-bypass valve.
I. Fuel Supply System:
929
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 32 13 - 5 PACKAGED ENGINE
GENERATOR SYSTEMS
1. Base-Mounted Fuel Tank: UL 142 listed fuel tank with 48-hour rated (NFPA 110
minimum run time by class) capacity. Integral rupture basin with leak detection.
Provide fueling port with an overfill prevention type receptacle and lockable cap
for exterior units. The tank shall include structural steel supports for top mounted
engine generator set. Furnish complete with flexible fuel line connectors lockable
cover, and analog level gauge. Furnish complete with float switches to indicate .
The footprint of the base-mounted fuel tank shall not exceed the footprint of the
generator frame for interior applications or the footprint of the enclosure for
exterior installations.
2. Fuel Cooler: Provide unit-mounted fuel cooler with all required hoses, fittings and
mounting hardware. Generators without a unit-mounted radiator shall have an
integral fan powered by a 120V circuit.
J. Lubrication System: Engine or skid mounted filter and strainer, thermostatic control
valve capable of full flow and designed to be fail safe, and crankcase drain arranged
for gravity drainage with siphon or pump.
K. Engine Jacket Heater: Thermal circulation type water heater with integral thermostatic
control, sized to maintain engine jacket water at 90°F, and suitable for operation on
208-3Ø volts AC. The minimum wattage of the heater shall be watts or as
recommended by the manufacturer.
L. Cooling System: Closed loop, liquid cooled, with radiator factory mounted on engine-
generator set mounting frame and integral engine-driven coolant pump.
1. Fan and Core: Nonferrous-metal construction sized to contain expansion of total
system. Blower type fan, sized to maintain safe engine temperature in ambient
temperature of 110°F. Radiator Airflow Restriction: 0.5 inches of water,
maximum.
2. Coolant: Solution of 50 percent ethylene-glycol-based antifreeze and 50 percent
water, with anti-corrosive additives.
3. Provide expansion tank with gage glass and petcock, and self-contained,
thermostatic-control temperature control valve.
M. Engine Starting: DC starting system with positive engagement, number and voltage of
starter motors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions. Include remote starting
control circuit, with MANUAL-OFF-REMOTE selector switch on engine-generator
control panel. Provide the following accessories:
1. Battery: Voltage to match starter with capacity for three cranking cycles without
recharge. Provide with battery cables and acid resistant battery tray.
2. Battery-Charging Alternator: Factory mounted on engine with solid state voltage
regulation.
3. Remote Start Circuit Monitoring: Provide continuous monitoring of the generator
start circuits. A failure shall initiate visual and audible alarms at the generator,
remote annunciators, and start the generator.
4. BC-#1 Battery Charger: Current limiting type designed to float at 2.17 volts per
cell and equalize at 2.33 volts per cell. Include overload protection, full wave
rectifier, DC voltmeter and ammeter, and 120 volts AC fused input. Provide wall-
mounted enclosure to meet ANSI/NEMA 250, Type 1 requirements.
930
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 32 13 - 6 PACKAGED ENGINE
GENERATOR SYSTEMS
5. Provide two battery strings, two DC power supply/chargers with monitoring, and
a best battery selector system. Each shall be sized to provide total starting
capacity.
6. DC Power Supply/Charger: Utility grade current limiting type with battery
temperature compensation designed to float at 2.17 volts per cell and equalize at
2.33 volts per cell. Include overload protection, full wave filtered rectifier, digital
DC voltmeter and ammeter, and 120 volts AC fused input. Provide wall-mounted
enclosure to meet ANSI/NEMA 250, Type 1 requirements.
7. Best battery selector system for dual battery single load configuration. Solid-state
design must isolate battery strings from each other.
N. Exhaust System: Industrial type silencer (20 to 75 Hz frequency range; 87 dBA max at
25 feet), side inlet with muffler companion flanges and flexible stainless steel exhaust
fitting, suitable for horizontal orientation, sized in accordance with engine
manufacturer's instructions. Silencer shall include a threaded opening for connection of
¾" drain line. Opening shall be flush on inside of silencer.
O. The packaged engine generator shall comply with the current Environmental
Protection Agency EPA Emissions standards.
P. Engine Accessories: Fuel filter, lube oil filter, intake air filter, lube oil cooler, fuel
transfer pump, fuel priming pump, gear-driven water pump. Include fuel pressure
gauge, water temperature gauge, and lube oil pressure gauge on engine-generator
control panel.
Q. Mounting: Provide unit with suitable spring-type vibration isolators.
2.4 GENERATOR
A. Generator: ANSI/NEMA MG 1; three phase, re-connectible brushless synchronous
generator with brushless exciter and PMG alternator excitation.
B. Rating: As indicated on the drawings, at 0.8 power factor, 60 Hertz at RPM to match
engine rating.
C. Insulation: ANSI/NEMA MG 1, Class F.
D. Temperature Rise: 105°C continuous.
E. Enclosure: Standard Weather Protective Enclosure, Steel
F. Voltage Regulation:
1. The maximum instantaneous voltage dip (IVD) shall be 28 percent.
2. Include solid-state type voltage regulator, separate from exciter to match engine
and generator characteristics, with voltage regulation ±1 percent from no load to
full load. Include manual controls to adjust voltage drop ±5 percent voltage level,
and voltage gain.
G. Subtransient Reactance (X'd): Maximum 15 percent.
H. Windings: Two-thirds pitch stator winding and fully linked amortisseur winding.
931
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 32 13 - 7 PACKAGED ENGINE
GENERATOR SYSTEMS
I. Strip Heater: Thermostatically controlled unit arranged to maintain stator windings
above dew point.
2.5 CONTROLS AND INDICATION
A. Operating and safety indications, protective devices, basic system controls, and
engine gauges shall be grouped in a common control and monitoring panel mounted
on the generator set. Mounting method shall isolate the control panel from generator-
set vibration.
B. Ground Fault: Provide ground fault sensing at the generator. The sensor shall be
located ahead of the generator service disconnect. Provide a ground fault indication on
the engine-generator control panel. Provide an instruction nameplate at the control
panel.
1. Instruction nameplate: Provide operational instructions for a ground fault
indication as approved by the local Authority Having Jurisdiction.
C. GANN; Remote Engine Annunciator Panel: NFPA 110 for a Level 1 system. Include
the listed pre-alarm and alarm points, audible alarm, alarm silencing means, repetitive
alarm circuitry, and lamp test switch in a surface mountInserted panel with brushed
stainless steel finish. Provide all interconnecting wiring in conduit per manufacturer's
requirements by the Electrical Contractor. The remotely reported alarms shall include
the following.
1. Overcrank
2. Low water (engine) temperature
3. High engine temperature pre-alarm
4. High engine temperature
5. Low lube oil pressure pre-alarm
6. Low lube oil pressure
7. Overspeed
8. Low fuel main tank
9. Low coolant level
10. Not in auto
11. Emergency Power Supply (EPS) supplying load
12. High battery voltage
13. Low battery voltage
14. Battery charger failure (includes AC failure)
15. Generator running
16. Normal utility power
17. Emergency stop
18. Rupture basin alarm
19. Emergency Power Off Switch activated (EPO)
20. Alarm for power supply or UPS serving motorized breakers
21. Generator control and start signal failure.
22. On-board paralleling controls.
23. 80% load alarm.
932
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 32 13 - 8 PACKAGED ENGINE
GENERATOR SYSTEMS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work and field dimensions are as shown on
the drawings.
B. Verify that required utilities are available in proper location and ready for use.
C. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
B. Install remote manual stop station in location shown on plans. Provide 120 Volt power
and wiring in conduit as required. Coordinate installation with the manufacturer
approved shop drawings and wiring diagrams. The remote manual stop station shall
shunt trip the generator mounted circuit breaker an d signal the engine prime mover to
stop.
C. The A-B-C phase rotation of the generator source shall match the A-B-C phase
rotation of the utility source. The Contractor shall verify the generator and utility phase
rotation match to prevent three phase motors and similar loads from operating
backwards while being served by the generator.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust generator output voltage and engine speed.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Clean work under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Clean engine and generator surfaces. Replace oil and fuel filters.
END OF SECTION 26 32 13
933
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 36 00 - 1 TRANSFER SWITCH
SECTION 26 36 00
TRANSFER SWITCH
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Automatic transfer switch with delayed transition ATS-#
B. Remote annunciator for ATS RA-ATS-#
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS AND WORK
A. Refer to the Transfer Switch Schedule for rating and configuration.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in automatic transfer equipment with three (3)
years documented experience.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. NEMA ICS 1 - General Standards for Industrial Control and Systems
B. NEMA ICS 2 - Standards for Industrial Control Devices, Controllers, and Assemblies
C. NEMA ICS 6 - Enclosures for Industrial Controls and Systems
D. NEMA ICS 10 - Guide to Application of Low-Voltage Automatic Transfer Switch
Equipment
E. UL 1008 - Standard for Automatic Transfer Switches
F. NFPA 110 - Standard for Emergency and Standby Power Systems
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Submit product data for transfer switches showing overall dimensions, electrical
connections, electrical ratings, and environmental requirements.
C. Submit manufacturer's installation instructions under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
1.6 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit operation and maintenance data under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Include instructions for operating equipment.
934
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 36 00 - 2 TRANSFER SWITCH
C. Include instructions for operating equipment under emergency conditions when engine
generator is running.
D. Identify operating limits which may result in hazardous or unsafe conditions.
E. Document ratings of equipment and each major component.
F. Include routine preventive maintenance and lubrication schedule.
G. List special tools, maintenance materials, and replacement parts.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to applicable code for emergency and standby electrical systems.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCH WITH DELAYED TRANSITION
A. Automatic transfer switch, microprocessor controlled, three-position switch
mechanism, delayed transition with local manual operation.
B. Acceptable Manufacturers, Standard Grade:
1. Generac W Series
2. Cummins OTPC Series
3. Caterpillar CTG Series
4. Kohler KCS Series
C. Description: NEMA ICS 2; automatic transfer switch.
D. Configuration: Electrically-operated, three-position delayed transition / off capable,
mechanically-held transfer switch.
E. Control panel shall be micro-processor based.
2.2 SERVICE CONDITIONS
A. Service Conditions: NEMA ICS 1. Suitable for use as service entrance equipment.
Provide line side (service style) barriers.
2.3 RATINGS
A. Refer to the electrical diagrams for the Withstand and Close Ratings WCR available
interrupting capacity (AIC) at the transfer switch. The transfer switch shall be series
rated with the equipment feeding the transfer switch. The series rating shall be the
larger of the two Short Circuit Current Ratings SCCR values when the SCCR rating of
the equipment feeding the normal and emergency sides of the transfer switch is not
equal.
B. Series rating with upstream devices shall be allowed per UL-1008.
935
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 36 00 - 3 TRANSFER SWITCH
2.4 AUTOMATIC SEQUENCE OF OPERATION
A. Initiate Time Delay to Start Alternate Source Engine Generator: Upon initiation by
normal source monitor.
B. Time Delay to Start Alternate Source Engine Generator: 0 to 10 seconds, adjustable.
C. Initiate Transfer Load to Alternate Source: Upon initiation by normal source monitor
and permission by alternate source monitor.
D. Initiate Retransfer Load to Normal Source: Upon permission by normal source monitor.
E. Time Delay Before Transfer to Normal Power: 0 to 30 minutes, adjustable; bypass time
delay in event of alternate source failure.
F. Time Delay Before Engine Shut Down: 0 to 30 minutes, adjustable, of unloaded
operation.
2.5 ENCLOSURE
A. Enclosure: NEMA 3R
2.6 ACCESSORIES
A. Provide 2 N.O. and 2 N.C. isolated contacts to indicate:
1. Normal source available.
2. Emergency source available.
3. Exercise mode in operation.
B. RA-ATS-insert# Remote Annunciator: A remote annunciator shall be provided that
shall monitor and control the following functions for each transfer switch:
1. Load Connect to Emergency/Normal Indication
2. Source Available: Emergency/Normal Indication
3. Time Delay Indication and Key Locked Bypass Switch
4. Transfer Test Indication and Key Locked Switch
5. Remote transfer loads between normal and emergency sources with Key Locked
Switch
6. Remote generator start with Key Locked Switch
7. Remote generator stop with Key Locked Switch
C. Annunciators shall be located where shown on the drawings, as directed by the
Owner. Extend conduit and wire as required by the manufacturer.
D. An adjustable emergency to normal pre-signal signal to elevator controller.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
936
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 36 00 - 4 TRANSFER SWITCH
B. Verify field measurements are as instructed by the manufacturer.
C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.
D. Beginning of installation means acceptance of existing conditions.
3.2 CONTROL AND SIGNAL CABLING
A. Provide control and signal cabling per manufacturer recommendations for the following
systems components:
1. Remote annunciator.
2. Elevator controller. Provide wiring to elevator controller for emergency source
mode and emergency to normal pre-signal.
3. Generator start signal. The generator start signal cabling for the following transfer
switches shall be fire protected for a minimum of 2 hours using an approved
method:
a. Emergency, legally required, optional standby transfer switches
b. Approved Methods:
1) Raceway or cable encased in a minimum of 2 inches of concrete
cover.
2) Listed fire resistive raceway / cable system.
3) Raceway / cable is protected by a listed electrical circuit protective
system.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Install in accordance with manufacturer's instructions.
END OF SECTION 26 36 00
937
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 51 19 - 1 LED LIGHTING
SECTION 26 51 19
LED LIGHTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Interior luminaires and accessories
B. Exterior luminaires and accessories
C. Light-emitting diode (LED) luminaire systems
D. LED emergency lighting units
E. Emergency exit signs
1.2 RELATED SECTIONS
A. The lighting system design includes a combination of luminaire sources, lighting
control components, programming sequences, and supplementary components for
building and energy code compliance. The design uses performance-based
specifications for portions of the lighting system to account for the limitation of
comparable product solutions available by competitive manufacturers. The Contractor
shall reference related specification sections, plans, schedules, and details prior to
submitting pricing, submittals, and installation. The Contractor shall coordinate system
component compatibility among various manufacturers and suppliers for a turnkey
lighting system. Referenced sections include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Electrical drawings: Plans, luminaire schedules, lighting control sequence of
operations, diagrams, and details.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. ANSI C78.377 - Specifications for the Chromaticity of Solid State Lighting Products
B. ANSI C82.16 - Light-Emitting Diode Drivers - Method of Measurement
C. ANSI C82.77 - Standard for Harmonic Emission Limits and Related Power Quality
Requirements for Lighting Equipment
D. NFPA 70E - National Electrical Safety Code
E. NEMA SSL1 - Electronic Drivers for LED Devices, Arrays or System
F. UL 8750 - Light Emitting Diode (LED) Equipment for use in Lighting Products
G. LM-79 - Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric Measurements of Solid-State
Lighting Products
938
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 51 19 - 2 LED LIGHTING
H. LM-80 - Measuring Luminous Flux and Color Maintenance of LED
I. FS W-L-305 - Light Set, General Illumination (Emergency or Auxiliary)
J. UL 924 - Standard for Emergency Lighting and Power Equipment
K. UL676 Standard for Underwater Luminaires and Submersible Junction Box
L. Project site classification as defined in IESNA RP-33 LZ3.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Basic Requirements of Submittal:
1. Submit product data sheets for luminaires, LED light engines, drivers and poles.
Include complete product model number with all options as specified. Submittal
shall be arranged with luminaires listed in ascending order, and with each
luminaire's, LED light engine, driver, or pole information following luminaire's
product data. Failure to organize submittal in this manner will result in the
submittal being rejected.
2. Submit lens product data, dimensions and weights if not included in product data
sheet submittal.
3. Include outline drawings, support points, weights, and accessory information for
each luminaire.
4. Submit manufacturer origin of LED chipset and driver.
C. LED Lighting - Performance Testing Submittal (when requested by
Architect/Engineer):
1. IESNA LM-79: Include photometric report for the latest generation system being
furnished. Provide name of independent testing laboratory, report number, date
of test, luminaire series/model number, input wattage, and light source
specifications.
2. IESNA LM-80: Measuring Lumen Maintenance of LED Light Sources.
D. LED Lighting - Control Compatibility Submittal:
1. Submit lighting control capability data for each LED luminaire. The submittal shall
clearly identify device data proposed by the Contractor and approved by the
luminaire manufacturer for dimming, switching, addressable, wireless, and similar
control characteristics.
E. Submit Design Lights Consortium (DLC) information for each luminaire type.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site. Store and protect under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Protect luminaire finishes, lenses, and trims from damage during storage and
installation. Do not remove protective films until construction cleanup within each area
is complete.
939
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 51 19 - 3 LED LIGHTING
C. Handle site lighting poles carefully to prevent breakage and damage to finish.
1.6 MOCKUP
A. Provide and install luminaires with power and control connections in mockup rooms as
identified in Division 1. Approved luminaires in mockup may be reused as part of
complete work if in original condition.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. The warranty period begins at the date of Notice of Completion.
B. LED Light Engines and Drivers:
1. LED Drivers and Dimming Drivers: Five (5) years
2. Light Emitting Diode (LED) Light Engines: Five (5) years
C. Emergency Lighting Units and Exit Signs:
1. Emergency Lighting Units: Three (3) year, non-prorated
2. Exit Signs: Three (3) year, non-prorated
3. Emergency Unit and Exit Sign Battery: Sealed lead acid or lead calcium cell,
requiring no maintenance or replacement for ten (10) years under normal
conditions.
1.8 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. Conform to NFPA 101 for installation requirements
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 INTERIOR LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES - GENERAL
A. Lensed Troffers: Provide hinged frames with latches and 0.125-inch thick virgin acrylic
lenses. Prismatic lenses shall have depth of no less than 0.080", KSH12 or equal.
Other lenses as scheduled.
B. Luminaires: Louvers shall be anodized low iridescent specular aluminum with mitered
corners and interlocking construction.
C. Suspended Luminaires: Coordinate power feed and suspension canopies with ceiling
type and architectural RCP for proper fit and location. Ensure finished installations are
plumb and level at elevations specified. Verify suspension length prior to submittal.
D. Painted reflector surfaces shall have a minimum reflectance of 90%.
E. All painted components shall be painted after fabrication.
2.2 EXTERIOR LUMINAIRES AND ACCESSORIES - GENERAL
A. Listed for wet or damp location as scheduled.
B. Provide low temperature LED drivers, with reliable starting to -20°F.
940
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 51 19 - 4 LED LIGHTING
C. In-grade luminaires shall have lamp/optic separation to prevent surface temperature
from exceeding 115°F. Compartment separation of wire entry and control gear/lamp
chamber.
D. Exterior LED luminaires shall contain separate, easily accessible and replaceable
Category C surge protection device.
2.3 LIGHT EMITTING DIODE (LED) LUMINAIRE SYSTEMS
A. Light emitting diodes used in interior applications shall have a minimum color
rendering index (CRI) of 80. The R9 color rendering value shall be a minimum of 50.
Light emitting diodes used in exterior applications shall have a minimum color
rendering index (CRI) of 70. Color temperature of the luminaires shall be as noted on
the luminaire schedule. Provide light source color consistency by utilizing a binning
tolerance within a maximum 3-step McAdam ellipse unless noted otherwise.
B. Refer to the luminaire schedule for color temperature and minimum color rendering
index CRI requirements. Provide light source color consistency by utilizing a binning
tolerance within a maximum 3-step McAdam ellipse unless noted otherwise.
C. LED chip arrays specified as color changing shall have chip colors as noted on the
luminaire schedule.
D. Rated life shall be minimum of 50,000 hours at L70.
E. LED chips shall be wired so that failure of one chip does not prohibit operation of the
remainder of the chip array.
F. Warm Dim LED (WLED): Variable warm dimming LED systems shall offer a range of
temperature control from 3000K through 1800K. Color rendering index shall be a
minimum of 80. Dimming control from 100% to 1%. Shall offer compatibility with any
LED dimming driver/controller including 0-10V, DALI, DMX, etc.
G. Luminaire delivered lumens is defined as the absolute lumens per the manufacturers
LM-79-08 test report.
H. LED luminaires shall be designed for ease of component replacement including
modular replaceable boards or Zhaga sockets. Luminaires that are factory sealed and
do not have field replaceable parts shall provide a 10-year warranty.
I. LED light engine shall have a maximum LLD of 0.85 at 50,000 hours at 25°C ambient.
J. LED Driver:
1. Solid state driver with integral heat sink. Driver shall have over-heat, short-circuit
and overload protection, power factor 0.90 or above and maximum total
harmonic distortion of 10%. Driver shall have a voltage fluctuation tolerance of +/-
10%.
2. Drivers shall have dimming capabilities as outlined in the luminaire schedule for
each luminaire type. Dimming shall control light output in a continuous curve from
100% to 10% unless noted otherwise.
3. Driver shall have a minimum of 50,000 hours rated life.
941
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 51 19 - 5 LED LIGHTING
4. Driver shall be tested to ANSI C82-16 for input current inrush, total harmonic
distortion (THD), and power factor. Driver start time shall be less than 0.5
seconds to 98% of initial light output. Flicker should be less than 30% throughout
the operating range.
5. Driver shall be field replaceable without removal of the luminaire.
6. Class A sound rating; inaudible in a 27 dBA ambient.
7. Demonstrate no visible change in light output with a variation of plus or minus 10
percent change in line-voltage input.
2.4 LED EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS
A. Self-Powered Emergency Lighting Units: One-piece, self-contained unit with sealed,
maintenance-free nickel cadmium battery, automatic charger and electronic circuitry.
Relay automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80
percent of nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay
disconnects lamps from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on
charger.
B. Battery: Maintenance free lead calcium type, with 90 minute capacity to supply the
connected lamp load.
C. Charger: Dual-rate solid state charger, capable of maintaining the battery in a full-
charge state during normal conditions, and capable of recharging discharged battery to
full charged within 168 hours. Low voltage disconnect to prevent deep discharge of
battery.
D. LED Lamp Wattage: As scheduled on luminaire schedule.
E. Remote Lamps: Match LED lamps on unit.
F. Indicators: Provide lamps to indicate AC ON and RECHARGING. Provide voltmeter.
G. Provide test switch to transfer unit from normal supply to battery supply.
H. Electrical Connection: Knockout for conduit connection.
I. Unit Voltage: Refer to luminaire schedule volts, AC.
2.5 EMERGENCY EXIT SIGNS
A. Exit Signs: Stencil face, 6-inch high letters, directional arrows as indicated, universal
mounting type as indicated on the drawings.
B. Self-Powered Exit Signs: Stencil face, 6-inch high letters, directional arrows as
indicated, universal mounting type as indicated on the drawings. One-piece, self-
contained unit with sealed, maintenance-free nickel cadmium battery, test switch, AC
ON pilot light, automatic charger, and electronic circuitry. Power failure relay
automatically energizes lamp from battery when circuit voltage drops to 80 percent of
nominal voltage or below. When normal voltage is restored, relay disconnects lamps
from battery, and battery is automatically recharged and floated on charger.
C. Directional Indicators: The directional indicator for exit signage shall be of a chevron
type meeting all requirements of NFPA 101.
942
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 51 19 - 6 LED LIGHTING
D. Self-Diagnostics and Testing:
1. Unit shall be self-diagnostic with continuous monitoring of charger performance
and battery voltage. Any malfunction of battery, charger, transfer circuit, or
emergency lamps shall be detected and visually indicated.
2. Unit shall be programmed to exercise the battery and test emergency operation
by performing a five-minute discharge/diagnostic cycle every six months. A
manual test switch shall allow a five minute discharge/diagnostic test at any time.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Securely fasten luminaires to the listed and labeled ceiling framing member by
mechanical means such as bolts, screws, rivets or listed clips identified for use with
the type of ceiling framing members.
1. Install recessed flanged luminaires to permit removal from below. Use
manufacturer-supplied plaster frames and swing gate supports. Provide
independent support as follows:
a. Luminaires less than 56 lbs: Provide a minimum of two (2) #12 gauge
suspended ceiling support wires located on diagonal corners of the
luminaires.
b. Luminaires 56 lbs or greater: Provide a minimum of four (4) #12 gauge
suspended ceiling support wires located on diagonal corners of the
luminaires. Support luminaire independent of the ceiling system.
c. Luminaires larger than eight square feet (8 ft2): Support luminaire
independent of the ceiling system.
B. Do not fasten luminaire supports to piping, ductwork, mechanical equipment, or
conduit, unless otherwise noted. Support wires shall be tightly wrapped (minimum of
three turns within 3 inches of the connection) and sharply bend to prevent vertical
movement.
C. Support suspended or pendant mounted luminaires independent of ceiling grid with
adjustable stainless steel aircraft cables or per luminaire schedule mounting
requirements. Suspension assembly and anchors shall be capable of supporting 300
pounds dead load at each suspension point.
D. Support wire used to independently support luminaires, raceways, and wiring systems
shall be distinguishable from ceiling support systems by color (field paint), tagging or
equivalent means.
E. Provide seismic bracing of luminaires per CBCChapter 16. Design pendant luminaires
on a component seismic coefficient (Cc) of 0.67. Design vertical supports with a factor
of safety of 4.0. Contractor shall verify the Seismic Hazard Exposure Group and
Performance Criteria Factor.
F. Install lamps in lamp holders of luminaires.
943
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
26 51 19 - 7 LED LIGHTING
G. Adjust aimable luminaires to obtain lighting levels on objects and areas as directed to
obtain desired lighting levels.
H. Industrial Pendant Luminaires: Use power hook hangers rated 500 pounds minimum
or provide safety chain between driver and structure. Provide safety chain between
reflector and driver.
I. Use belt slings or non-chafing ropes to raise and set pre-finished luminaire poles.
3.2 CONSTRUCTION USE OF PROJECT LUMINAIRES
A. The Contractor shall provide temporary construction lighting per the requirements of
Division 1.
B. The project luminaires shown on the construction documents shall not be used for
temporary construction purposes without providing a plan for Owner approval that
addresses energy and luminaire operating hours.
3.3 EMERGENCY LIGHTING UNITS AND EXIT SIGNS
A. Install units plumb and level.
B. Aim directional lamp heads as directed.
C. Test emergency lighting equipment for 60 minutes to determine proper operation, prior
to Substantial Completion. Provide electronic copy of periodic test log form to Owner's
Representative. Explain and instruct Owner's Representative of requirements for
testing and maintenance. Refer to latest adopted NFPA 101 for testing and logging
requirements.
3.4 RELAMPING
A. Replace failed LED light engine modules or arrays at completion of work.
3.5 ADJUSTING AND CLEANING
A. Align luminaires and clean lenses and diffusers at completion of work. Clean paint
splatters, dirt, and debris from installed luminaires.
B. Touch up luminaire and pole finish at completion of work.
3.6 LUMINAIRE SCHEDULE
A. As shown on the drawings.
END OF SECTION 26 51 19
944
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 00 - 1 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 27 05 00
BASIC COMMUNICATIONS SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Basic Communications Systems Requirements specifically applicable to Division 27
sections, in addition to Division 1 - General Requirements.
B. All materials and installation methods shall conform to the applicable standards,
guidelines and codes referenced herein and within each specification section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. CCR California Code of Regulation
B. CBC California Building Code
C. CFC California Fire Code
D. CEC California Electric Code
E. CMC California Mechanical Code
F. CPC California Plumbing Code
G. California Title 24 - Building Energy Efficiency Standards
H. SCAQMD Southern California Air Quality Management Division
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Specification and the associated drawings govern furnishing, installing, testing
and placing into satisfactory operation the Communications Systems.
B. The Contractor shall furnish and install all new materials as indicated on the drawings,
and/or in these specifications, and all items required to make the portion of the
Communications Work a finished and working system.
C. Description of Systems include, but are not limited to, the following:
1. Complete Structured Cabling System including, but not limited to:
a. Voice and data backbone cabling and terminations.
b. Voice and data horizontal cabling and terminations.
c. Information outlets (IOs) including faceplates, jacks and labeling.
d. Equipment racks, cabinets, cable management and equipment.
e. Telecommunication Room equipment including patch panels, optical
distribution cabinets, and termination blocks.
945
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 00 - 2 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
f. Cabling pathways.
g. Grounding and Bonding
h. Testing
2. Complete Data Communications Equipment Systems.
3. Complete Voice Communications Equipment Systems.
4. Complete Audio/Visual Systems.
5. Complete Paging Systems.
6. Mounting and patching of wireless access points provided by others.
7. Low Voltage Communications Wiring (less than +120VAC) as specified and
required for proper system control and communications.
8. All associated electrical backboxes, conduit, miscellaneous cabling, and power
supplies required for proper system installation and operation as defined in the
"Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility".
9. Firestopping of penetrations as described in Division 7.
10. Seismic requirements as described in Section 26 05 48 "Seismic Requirements
for Equipment and Supports".
1.4 DIVISION OF WORK BETWEEN ELECTRICAL AND COMMUNICATIONS
CONTRACTORS
A. Division of work is the responsibility of the Prime Contractor. Any scope of work
described in the contract document shall be sufficient for including said requirement in
the project. The Prime Contractor shall be solely responsible for determining the
appropriate subcontractor for the described scope. In no case shall the project be
assessed an additional cost for scope that is described in the contract documents. The
following division of responsibility is a guideline based on typical industry practice.
B. Definitions:
1. "Electrical Contractor" as referred to herein refers to the Contractors listed in
Division 26 of this Specification.
2. "Electrical Contractor" shall also refer to the Contractor listed in Division 27 of
this specification when the "Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility" indicates
the work shall be provided by the EC. Refer to the Contract Documents for the
"Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility".
3. "Technology Contractor" as referred to herein refers to the Contractors listed in
Division 27 of this Specification.
4. Low Voltage Technology Wiring: The wiring (less than 120VAC) associated with
the Technology Systems, used for analog and/or digital signals between
equipment.
5. Telecommunications/Technology Rough-in: Relates specifically to the
backboxes, necessary plaster rings and other miscellaneous hardware required
for the installation and mounting of the telecommunications/technology outlet.
Rough-in shall include conduit from the information outlet backbox to above the
lay-in ceiling. Where surface mounted backboxes are required, conduit shall be
routed to above the lay-in ceiling.
946
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 00 - 3 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
C. General:
1. The purpose of these specifications is to outline typical Electrical and Technology
Contractor's work responsibilities as related to technology systems including
telecommunications rough-in, audio/visual systems rough-in, conduit, cable tray,
power wiring, and low voltage communications and technology wiring. The prime
contractor is responsible for all divisions of work.
2. The exact wiring requirements for much of the equipment cannot be determined
until the systems have been purchased and submittals are approved. Therefore,
only known wiring, conduits, raceways, and electrical power as related to such
items, is shown on the technology drawings. Other wiring, conduits, raceways,
junction boxes, and electrical power not shown on the technology drawings but
required for the successful operation of the systems shall be the responsibility of
the Technology Contractor and included in the Contractor's bid.
3. Where the Electrical Contractor is required to install conduit, conduit sleeves
and/or power connections in support of technology systems, the final installation
shall not begin until a coordination meeting between the Electrical Contractor and
the Technology Contractor has convened to determine the exact location and
requirements of the installation.
4. Where the Electrical Contractor is required to install cable tray that will contain
low voltage technology wiring, the installation shall not begin until the Technology
Contractor has completed a coordination review of the cable tray shop drawing.
5. This Contractor shall establish electrical and technology utility elevations prior to
fabrication and installation. The Technology Contractor shall cooperate with the
Electrical Contractor and the determined elevations in accordance with the
guidelines below. This Contractor shall coordinate utility elevations with other
trades. When a conflict arises, priority shall be as follows:
a. Lighting Fixtures
b. Gravity Flow Piping, including Steam and Condensate
c. Sheet Metal
d. Electrical Busduct
e. Cable Trays, including 12" access space
f. Sprinkler Piping and other Piping
g. Conduit and Wireway
h. Open Cabling
D. Electrical Contractor's Responsibility:
1. Assumes all responsibility for all required conduit and power connections when
shown on the "Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility" to be provided by the
Electrical Contractor.
2. Assumes all responsibility for providing and installing cable tray.
3. Responsible for Communications Systems grounding and bonding.
4. This Contractor is responsible for coordination of utilities with all other
Contractors. If any field coordination conflicts are found, the Contractor shall
coordinate with other Contractors to determine a viable layout.
E. Technology Contractor's Responsibility:
1. Assumes all responsibility for the low voltage technology wiring of all systems,
including cable support where open cable is specified.
947
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 00 - 4 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
2. Assumes all responsibility for all required backboxes, conduit and power
connections not specifically shown as being provided by the Electrical Contractor
on the "Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility."
3. Assumes all responsibility for providing and installing all ladder rack and other
cable management hardware (as defined herein).
4. Responsible for providing the Electrical Contractor with the required grounding
lugs or other hardware for each piece of technology equipment which is required
to be bonded to the technology bonding system.
5. This Contractor is responsible for coordination of utilities with all other
Contractors. If any field coordination conflicts are found, the Contractor shall
coordinate with other Contractors to determine a viable layout.
1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Definitions:
1. Coordination Drawings: A compilation of the pertinent layout and system
drawings that show the sizes and locations, including elevations, of system
components and required access areas to ensure that no two objects will occupy
the same space.
a. Mechanical trades shall include, but are not limited to, mechanical
equipment, ductwork, fire protection systems, plumbing piping, steam and
steam condensate piping, and any item that may impact coordination with
other disciplines.
b. Electrical trades shall include, but are not limited to, electrical equipment,
conduit 1.5" and larger, conduit racks, cable trays, pull boxes, transformers,
raceway, busway, lighting, ceiling-mounted devices, and any item that may
impact coordination with other disciplines.
c. Technology trades shall include, but are not limited to, technology
equipment, racks, conduit 1.5" and larger, conduit racks, cable trays, ladder
rack, pull boxes, raceway, ceiling-mounted devices, and any item that may
impact coordination with other disciplines.
d. Maintenance clearances and code-required dedicated space shall be
included.
e. The coordination drawings shall include all underground, underfloor, in-
floor, in chase, and vertical trade items.
2. The contractors shall use the coordination process to identify the proper
sequence of installation of all utilities above ceilings and in other congested
areas, to ensure an orderly and coordinated end result, and to provide adequate
access for service and maintenance.
B. Participation:
1. The contractors and subcontractors responsible for work defined above shall
participate in the coordination drawing process.
2. One contractor shall be designated as the Coordinating Contractor for purposes
of preparing a complete set of composite electronic CAD coordination drawings
that include all applicable trades, and for coordinating the activities related to this
process. The Coordinating Contractor for this project shall be the Mechanical
Contractor.
948
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 00 - 5 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
a. The Coordinating Contractor shall utilize personnel familiar with
requirements of this project and skilled as draftspersons/CAD operators,
competent to prepare the required coordination drawings.
3. Electronic CAD drawings shall be submitted to the Coordinating Contractor for
addition of work by other trades. IMEG will provide electronic file copies of
ventilation drawings for contractor's use if the contractor signs and returns an
"Electronic File Transfer" waiver provided by IMEG. IMEG will not consider
blatant reproductions of original file copies an acceptable alternative for
coordination drawings.
C. Drawing Requirements:
1. The file format and file naming convention shall be coordinated with and agreed
to by all contractors participating in the coordination process and the Owner.
a. Scale of drawings:
1) General plans: 1/4 Inch = 1 '-0" (minimum).
2) Mechanical, electrical, communication rooms, and including the
surrounding areas within 10 feet: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
3) Shafts and risers: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
4) Sections of shafts and mechanical and electrical equipment rooms:
1/4 Inch = 1 '-0" (minimum).
5) Sections of congested areas: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
2. Ductwork layout drawings shall be the baseline system for other components.
Ductwork layout drawings shall be modified to accommodate other components
as the coordination process progresses.
3. There may be more drawings required for risers and shafts.
4. The minimum quantity of drawings will be established at the first coordination
meeting and sent to the A/E for review. Additional drawings may be required if
other areas of congestion are discovered during the coordination process.
D. General:
1. Coordination drawing files shall be made available to the A/E and Owner's
Representative. The A/E will only review identified conflicts and give an opinion,
but will not perform as a coordinator.
2. A plotted set of coordination drawings shall be available at the project site.
3. Coordination drawings are not shop drawings and shall not be submitted as
such.
4. The contract drawings are schematic in nature and do not show every fitting and
appurtenance for each utility. Each contractor is expected to have included in
his/her bid sufficient fittings, material, and labor to allow for adjustments in
routing of utilities made necessary by the coordination process and to provide a
complete and functional system.
5. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions due to
participation in the coordination process.
949
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 00 - 6 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
6. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions for
additional fittings, reroutings or changes of duct size, that are essentially
equivalent sizes to those shown on the drawings and determined necessary
through the coordination process.
7. The A/E reserves the right to determine space priority of equipment in the event
of spatial conflicts or interference between equipment, piping, conduit, ducts, and
equipment provided by the trades.
8. Changes to the contract documents that are necessary for systems installation
and coordination shall be brought to the attention of the A/E.
9. Access panels shall preferably occur only in gypsum board walls or plaster
ceilings where indicated on the drawings.
a. Access to mechanical, electrical, technology, and other items located above
the ceiling shall be through accessible lay-in ceiling tile areas.
b. Potential layout changes shall be made to avoid additional access panels.
c. Additional access panels shall not be allowed without written approval from
the A/E at the coordination drawing stage.
d. Providing additional access panels shall be considered after other
alternatives are reviewed and discarded by the A/E and the Owner's
Representative.
e. When additional access panels are required, they shall be provided without
additional cost to the Owner.
10. Complete the coordination drawing process and obtain signoff of the drawings by
all contractors prior to installing any of the components.
11. Conflicts that result after the coordination drawings are signed off shall be the
responsibility of the contractor or subcontractor who did not properly identify their
work requirements, or installed their work without proper coordination.
12. Updated coordination drawings that reflect as-built conditions may be used as
record documents.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Telecommunications Structured Cabling System Standards:
1. All work and equipment shall conform to the most current ratified version of the
following published standards unless otherwise indicated that draft standards are
to be followed:
a. ANSI/NECA/BICSI 568 - Standard for Installing Commercial Building
Telecommunications Cabling
b. ANSI/TIA-568-C.0 - Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer
Premises
1) C.1 - Commercial Building Telecommunications Standard
2) C.2 - Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunications Cabling and
Components Standard
3) C.3 - Optical Fiber Cabling Components Standard
4) C.4 - Broadband Coaxial Cabling and Components Standard
c. ANSI/TIA-569-C - Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
950
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 00 - 7 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
d. ANSI/TIA-606-B - Administration Standard for Commercial
Telecommunications Infrastructure
e. ANSI/TIA-607-B - Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications
f. ANSI/TIA-1152 - Requirements for Field Test Instruments and
Measurements for Balanced Twisted-Pair Cabling
g. ANSI/TIA/EIA-598-C - Optical Fiber Cable Color Coding
h. NFPA 70 (NEC) - National Electrical Code (Current Edition)
i. UL 444 - Standard for Safety for Communications Cable
j. California Electrical Code Article 725
B. Refer to individual sections for additional Quality Assurance requirements.
C. Qualifications:
1. Only products of reputable manufacturers as determined by the
Architect/Engineer will be acceptable.
2. The installing Contractor shall be certified by the manufacturer of the structured
cabling system. Certification of Contractor shall have been in place for a
minimum of one (1) year prior to bidding this project. Documentation of
certification is required at the time of bid. Shop drawings will not be approved
until proof of certification is submitted. Refer to the end of this specification
section for certification documentation requirements.
3. Each Contractor and their subcontractors shall employ only workers who are
skilled in their respective trades and fully trained. All workers involved in the
termination of cabling shall be individually certified by the manufacturer.
4. The Contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall be
required to demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and
size.
5. The Contractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment necessary for
successful installation and testing of optical and copper structured cabling
systems and have personnel adequately trained in the use of such tools and
equipment.
6. The Contractor shall have certified BICSI installation technicians on staff to
perform the following tasks on the project:
a. Act as the field superintendent or job foreman with the responsibility of
monitoring the daily work of each technician.
b. Oversee all testing and termination of cabling.
7. The Contractor shall have certified BICSI Installer 2 on staff to perform the
following tasks:
a. Installation and termination of copper cable.
b. Installation and termination of optical fiber.
8. A resume of qualification shall be submitted with the Contractor's bid indicating
the following:
a. Documentation of certification of This Contractor by the proposed
structured cabling system manufacturer as required at the end of this
specification section.
951
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 00 - 8 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
D. Compliance with Codes, Laws, Ordinances:
1. Conform to all requirements of the State of California Codes, Laws, Ordinances
and other regulations having jurisdiction.
2. In the event there are no local codes having jurisdiction over this job, the current
issue of the National Electrical Code shall be followed.
3. If there is a discrepancy between the codes and regulations having jurisdiction
over this installation, and these specifications, Architect/Engineer shall determine
the method or equipment used.
4. If the Contractor notes, at the time of bidding, any parts of the drawings and
specifications which are not in accordance with the applicable codes or
regulations, he shall inform the Architect/Engineer in writing, requesting a
clarification. If there is insufficient time to follow this procedure, he shall submit
with the proposal, a separate price required to make the system shown on the
drawings comply with the codes and regulations.
5. Verify the installation environment prior to purchasing or installing any cable.
Cable installed in a plenum environment shall be appropriately rated. Bring all
discrepancies between the contract documents and installation conditions to the
attention of the Architect/Engineer prior to purchase or installation.
6. All changes to the system made after the letting of the contract, in order to
comply with the applicable codes or the requirements of the Inspector, shall be
made by the Contractor without cost to the Owner.
E. Permits, Fees, Taxes, Inspections:
1. Procure all applicable permits and licenses.
2. Abide by all applicable laws, regulations, ordinances, and other rules of the State
or Political Subdivision wherein the work is done, or as required by any duly
constituted public authority.
3. Pay all applicable charges for such permits or licenses that may be required.
4. Pay all applicable fees and taxes imposed by the State, Municipal and/or other
regulatory bodies.
5. Pay all charges arising out of required inspections due to codes, permits,
licenses or as otherwise may be required by an authorized body as applicable.
6. Pay all charges arising out of required contract document reviews associated
with the project and as initiated by the Owner or authorized independent
agency/consultant as applicable.
7. Pay any charges by the service provider related to the service or change in
service to the project.
8. All equipment and materials shall be as approved or listed by the following
(unless approval or listing is not applicable to an item by all acceptable
manufacturers):
a. Factory Mutual
b. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
F. Service Provider Requirements:
1. Secure from the telecommunications service provider all applicable
requirements.
2. Comply with all service provider requirements.
952
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 00 - 9 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
G. Examination of Drawings:
1. The drawings for the technology systems work are diagrammatic, intended to
convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangements and
locations of equipment etc., and the approximate sizes of equipment.
2. Contractor shall determine the exact locations of equipment and the exact routing
of cabling to best fit the layout of the job. Scaling of the drawings will not be
sufficient or accurate for determining this layout. Where a specific route is
required, such route will be indicated on the drawings.
3. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated arrangements and
locations, such changes shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to
the Owner.
4. If an item is either shown on the drawings, called for in the specifications or
required for proper operation of the system, it shall be considered sufficient for
including same in this contract.
5. The determination of quantities of material and equipment required shall be
made by the Contractor from the drawings. Schedules on the drawings and in the
specifications are completed as an aid to the Contractor but where discrepancies
arise, the greater number shall govern.
6. Where words "provide", "install", or "furnish" are used on the drawings or in the
specifications, it shall be taken to mean, to furnish, install and terminate
completely ready for operation, the items mentioned.
H. Electronic Media/Files:
1. Construction drawings for this project have been prepared utilizing Revit.
2. Contractors and Subcontractors may request electronic media files of the
contract drawings and/or copies of the specifications. Specifications will be
provided in PDF format.
3. Upon request for electronic media, the Contractor shall complete and return a
signed "Electronic File Transmittal" form provided by IMEG.If the information
requested includes floor plans prepared by others, the Contractor will be
responsible for obtaining approval from the appropriate Design Professional for
use of that part of the document.
4. The electronic contract documents can be used for preparation of shop drawings
and as-built drawings only. The information may not be used in whole or in part
for any other project.
5. The drawings prepared by IMEG for bidding purposes may not be used directly
for ductwork layout drawings or coordination drawings.
6. The use of these CAD documents by the Contractor does not relieve them from
their responsibility for coordination of work with other trades and verification of
space available for the installation.
7. The information is provided to expedite the project and assist the Contractor with
no guarantee by IMEG as to the accuracy or correctness of the information
provided. IMEG accepts no responsibility or liability for the Contractor's use of
these documents.
8. The use of these documents by the Contractor does not relieve them from their
responsibility for coordination of work with other trades and verification of space
available for the installation.
953
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 00 - 10 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
I. Field Measurements:
1. Before ordering any materials, this Contractor shall verify all pertinent dimensions
at the job site and be responsible for their accuracy.
2. Field conditions that will result in telecommunications drops that exceed the
length limitations identified in the contract documents shall be brought to the
attention of the Architect/Engineer prior to installation. The cost of reworking
cabling that is too long, that was not brought to the written attention of the
Architect/Engineer will be borne entirely by the Contractor.
3. This Contractor shall provide the Architect/Engineer with written documentation
of any cabling drops that will not be able to use the cable tray (where cable tray
is available) due to the resulting cabling lengths. This documentation shall be
submitted prior to installation and installation shall not commence until approved
by the Architect/Engineer.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be required for the following items, and for additional items where
required elsewhere in the specifications or on the drawings.
1. Submittals list:
Referenced
Specification
Section Submittal Item
27 05 03 Through Penetration Firestopping
27 05 26 Communications Bonding
27 05 28 Interior Communications Pathways
27 05 53 Identification and Administration
27 11 00 Communication Equipment Rooms
27 13 00 Backbone Cabling Requirements
27 15 00 Horizontal Cabling Requirements
27 17 10 Testing
27 41 00 Professional Audio Video System
B. General Submittal Procedures: In addition to the provisions of Division 1, the following
are required:
1. Transmittal: Each transmittal shall include the following:
a. Date
b. Project title and number
c. Contractor's name and address
d. Description of items submitted and relevant specification number
e. Notations of deviations from the contract documents
f. Other pertinent data
2. Submittal Cover Sheet: Each submittal shall include a cover sheet containing:
a. Date
b. Project title and number
954
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 00 - 11 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
c. Architect/Engineer
d. Contractor and subcontractors' names and addresses
e. Supplier and manufacturer's names and addresses
f. Description of item submitted (using project nomenclature) and relevant
specification number
g. Notations of deviations from the contract documents
h. Other pertinent data
i. Provide space for Contractor's review stamps
3. Composition:
a. Submittals shall be submitted using specification sections and the project
nomenclature for each item.
b. Individual submittal packages shall be prepared for items in each
specification section. All items within a single specification section shall be
packaged together where possible. An individual submittal may contain
items from multiple specifications sections if the items are intimately linked
(e.g., pumps and motors).
c. All sets shall contain an index of the items enclosed with a general topic
description on the cover.
4. Content: Submittals shall include all fabrication, erection, layout, and setting
drawings; manufacturers' standard drawings; schedules; descriptive literature,
catalogs and brochures; performance and test data; wiring and control diagrams;
dimensions; shipping and operating weights; shipping splits; service clearances;
and all other drawings and descriptive data of materials of construction as may
be required to show that the materials, equipment or systems and the location
thereof conform to the requirements of the contract documents.
5. Contractor's Approval Stamp:
a. The Contractor shall thoroughly review and approve all shop drawings
before submitting them to the Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall
stamp, date and sign each submittal certifying it has been reviewed.
b. Unstamped submittals will be rejected.
c. The Contractor's review shall include, but not be limited to, verification of
the following:
1) Only approved manufacturers are used.
2) Addenda items have been incorporated.
3) Catalog numbers and options match those specified.
4) Performance data matches that specified.
5) Electrical characteristics and loads match those specified.
6) Equipment connection locations, sizes, capacities, etc. have been
coordinated with other affected trades.
7) Dimensions and service clearances are suitable for the intended
location.
8) Equipment dimensions are coordinated with support steel,
housekeeping pads, openings, etc.
9) Constructability issues are resolved (e.g., weights and dimensions
are suitable for getting the item into the building and into place, sinks
fit into countertops, etc.).
955
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 00 - 12 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
d. The Contractor shall review, stamp and approve all subcontractors'
submittals as described above.
e. The Contractor's approval stamp is required on all submittals. Approval will
indicate the Contractor's review of all material and a complete
understanding of exactly what is to be furnished. Contractor shall clearly
mark all deviations from the contract documents on all submittals. If
deviations are not marked by the Contractor, then the item shall be required
to meet all drawing and specification requirements.
6. Submittal Identification and Markings:
a. The Contractor shall clearly mark each item with the same nomenclature
applied on the drawings or in the specifications.
b. The Contractor shall clearly indicate the size, finish, material, etc.
c. Where more than one model is shown on a manufacturer's sheet, the
Contractor shall clearly indicate exactly which item and which data is
intended.
d. All marks and identifications on the submittals shall be unambiguous.
7. Schedule submittals to expedite the project. Coordinate submission of related
items.
8. Identify variations from the contract documents and product or system limitations
that may be detrimental to the successful performance of the completed work.
9. Reproduction of contract documents alone is not acceptable for submittals.
10. Incomplete submittals will be rejected without review. Partial submittals will only
be reviewed with prior approval from the Architect/Engineer.
11. Submittals not required by the contract documents may be returned without
review.
12. The Architect/Engineer's responsibility shall be to review one set of shop drawing
submittals for each product. If the first submittal is incomplete or does not comply
with the drawings and/or specifications, the Contractor shall be responsible to
bear the cost for the Architect/Engineer to recheck and handle the additional
shop drawing submittals.
13. Submittals shall be reviewed and approved by the Architect/Engineer before
releasing any equipment for manufacture or shipment.
14. Contractor's responsibility for errors, omissions or deviation from the contract
documents in submittals is not relieved by the Architect/Engineer's approval.
15. Schedule shall allow for adequate time to perform orderly and proper review of
submittals, including time for consultants and Owner if required, and resubmittals
by Contractor if necessary, and to cause no delay in Work or in activities of
Owner or other contractors.
a. Allow at least two weeks for Architect's/Engineer's review and processing of
each submittal.
16. Architect/Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal which, in
the Architect/Engineer's opinion, requires coordination with other submittals until
related submittals are received. The Architect/Engineer will notify the Contractor,
in writing, when they exercise this right.
C. Electronic Submittal Procedures:
956
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 00 - 13 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
1. Distribution: Email submittals as attachments to all parties designated by the
Architect/Engineer, unless a web-based submittal program is used.
2. Transmittals: Each submittal shall include an individual electronic letter of
transmittal.
3. Format: Electronic submittals shall be in PDF format only. Scanned copies, in
PDF format, of paper originals are acceptable. Submittals that are not legible will
be rejected. Do not set any permission restrictions on files; protected, locked, or
secured documents will be rejected.
4. File Names: Electronic submittal file names shall include the relevant
specification section number followed by a description of the item submitted, as
follows. Where possible, include the transmittal as the first page of the PDF
instead of using multiple electronic files.
a. Submittal file name: 27 XX XX.description.YYYYMMDD
b. Transmittal file name: 27 XX XX.description.YYYYMMDD
5. File Size: Files shall be transmitted via a pre-approved method. Larger files may
require an alternative transfer method, which shall also be pre-approved.
1.8 EQUIPMENT SUPPLIERS' INSPECTION
A. The following equipment shall not be placed in operation until a representative of the
manufacturer has inspected the installation and certified that the equipment is properly
installed and that the equipment is ready for operation:
1. Firestopping, including mechanical firestop systems.
1.9 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING & MAINTENANCE
A. Exercise care in transporting and handling to prevent damage to fixtures, equipment
and materials.
B. Store materials on the site to prevent damage.
C. Keep fixtures, equipment and materials clean, dry and free from deleterious conditions.
1.10 NETWORK / INTERNET CONNECTED EQUIPMENT
A. These specifications may require certain equipment or systems to have network,
Internet and/or remote access capability ("Network Capability"). Any requirement for
Network Capability shall be interpreted only as a functional capability and is not to be
construed as authority to connect or enable any Network Capability. Network
Capability may only be connected or enabled with the express written consent of the
Owner.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. At a minimum, provide a one (1) year warranty for all equipment, materials, and
workmanship. Individual specifications sections within Division 27 may require
additional warranty requirements for specific equipment or systems.
957
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 00 - 14 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
B. The warranty period for the entire installation described in this Division of the
specifications shall commence on the date of substantial completion unless a whole or
partial system or any separate piece of equipment or component is put into use for the
benefit of any party other than the installing contractor with prior written authorization.
In this instance, the warranty period shall commence on the date when such whole
system, partial system or separate piece of equipment or component is placed in
operation and accepted in writing by the Owner or their representative.
C. Warranty requirements shall extend to correction, without cost to the final user, of all
work and/or equipment found to be defective or nonconforming to the contract
documents. The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting all damage resulting from
such defects or nonconformance with contract documents exclusive of repairs required
as a result of improper maintenance or operation, or of normal wear as determined by
the Architect/Engineer.
1.12 INSURANCE
A. Contractor shall maintain insurance coverage per city front end requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CABLE JACKET RATING
A. This project does not require all cable jackets to carry a plenum rating.
2.2 Refer to individual sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 JOBSITE SAFETY
A. Neither the professional activities of the Architect/Engineer, nor the presence of the
Architect/Engineer or his or her employees and subconsultants at a construction site,
shall relieve the Contractor and any other entity of their obligations, duties and
responsibilities including, but not limited to, construction means, methods, sequence,
techniques or procedures necessary for performing, superintending or coordinating all
portions of the work of construction in accordance with the contract documents and
any health or safety precautions required by any regulatory agencies. The
Architect/Engineer and his or her personnel have no authority to exercise any control
over any construction contractor or other entity or their employees in connection with
their work or any health or safety precautions. The Contractor is solely responsible for
jobsite safety. The Architect/Engineer and the Architect/Engineer's consultants shall be
indemnified and shall be made additional insureds under the Contractor's general
liability insurance policy.
958
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 00 - 15 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Installation of all conduit and cabling shall comply with Sections 26 05 33 and 26 05
13. Additional conduit requirements described within this Division shall be
supplemental to the requirement described in Section 26 05 33. Should conflicts exist
between the two Divisions the more stringent (more expensive material and labor)
condition shall prevail until bidding addendum or construction clarification or RFI can
be submitted and responded to. In no case shall the Contractor carry the least
stringent condition in the pricing.
B. It is the Contractor's responsibility to survey the site and include all necessary costs to
perform the installation as specified.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for identifying and reporting to the
Architect/Engineer any existing conditions including but not limited to damage to walls,
flooring, ceiling and furnishings prior to start of work. All damage to interior spaces
caused by this Contractor shall be repaired at this Contractor's expense to pre-existing
conditions, including final colors and finishes.
D. All cables and devices installed in damp or wet locations, including any underground or
underslab location, shall be listed as suitable for use in such environments. Follow
manufacturer's recommended installation practices for installing cables and devices in
damp or wet locations. Any cable or device that fails as a result of being installed in a
damp or wet location shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General:
1. Refer to specific Division 27 sections for further requirements.
2. The Contractor shall conduct all tests required and applicable to the work both
during and after construction of the work.
3. The necessary instruments and materials required to conduct or make the tests
shall be supplied by the Contractor who shall also supply competent personnel
for making the tests who has been schooled in the proper testing techniques.
4. In the event the results obtained in the tests are not satisfactory, This Contractor
shall make such adjustments, replacements and changes as are necessary and
shall then repeat the test or tests which disclose faulty or defective work or
equipment, and shall make such additional tests as the Architect/Engineer or
code enforcing agency deems necessary.
5. All communications cable tests that fail, including those due to excessive cabling
lengths, shall be remedied by the Contractor without cost to the project.
B. Protection of cable from foreign materials:
1. It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide adequate physical protection to
prevent foreign material application or contact with any cable type. Foreign
material is defined as any material that would negatively impact the validity of the
manufacturer's performance warranty. This includes, but is not limited, to
overspray of paint (accidental or otherwise), drywall compound, or any other
surface chemical, liquid or compound that could come in contact with the cable,
cable jacket or cable termination components.
959
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 00 - 16 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
2. Application of foreign materials of any kind on any cable, cable jacket or cable
termination component will not be accepted. It shall be the Contractor's
responsibility to replace any component containing overspray, in its entirety, at
no additional cost to the project. Cleaning of the cables with harsh chemicals is
not allowed. This requirement is regardless of the PASS/FAIL test results of the
cable containing overspray. Should the manufacturer and warrantor of the
structured cabling system desire to physically inspect the installed condition and
certify the validity of the structured cabling system (via a signed and dated
statement by an authorized representative of the structured cabling
manufacturer), the Owner may, at their sole discretion, agree to accept said
warranty in lieu of having the affected cables replaced. In the case of plenum
cabling, in addition to the statement from the manufacturer, the Contractor shall
also present to the Owner a letter from the local Authority Having Jurisdiction
stating that they consider the plenum rating of the cable to be intact and
acceptable.
3.4 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: PROJECT CLOSEOUT for requirements. The
following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.
B. Final Jobsite Observation:
1. The Architect/Engineer will not perform a final jobsite observation until the project
is ready. This is not dictated by schedule, but rather by completeness of the
project.
2. Refer to the end of this specification section for a "STATEMENT INDICATING
READINESS FOR FINAL JOBSITE OBSERVATION."
3. The Contractor shall sign this form and return it to the Architect/Engineer so that
the final observation can commence.
C. Before final payment will be authorized, this Contractor must have completed the
following:
1. Submitted operation and maintenance manuals to the Architect/Engineer for
review.
2. Submitted bound copies of approved shop drawings.
3. Record documents including edited drawings and specifications accurately
reflecting field conditions, inclusive of all project revisions, change orders, and
modifications.
4. Submitted a report stating the instructions given to the Owner's representative
complete with the number of hours spent in the instruction. The report shall bear
the signature of an authorized agent of This Contractor and shall be signed by
the Owner's representative as having received the instructions.
5. Submitted testing reports for all systems requiring final testing as described
herein.
6. Submitted start-up reports on all equipment requiring a factory installation
inspection and/or start.
7. Provide System Assurance Warranty certificate for the telecommunications
system.
960
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 00 - 17 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. General:
1. Provide an electronic copy of the O&M manuals as described below for
Architect/Engineer's review and approval. The electronic copy shall be corrected
as required to address the Architect/Engineer's comments. Once corrected,
electronic copies and paper copies shall be distributed as directed by the
Architect/Engineer.
2. Approved O&M manuals shall be completed and in the Owner's possession prior
to Owner's acceptance and at least 10 days prior to instruction of operating
personnel.
B. Electronic Submittal Procedures:
1. Distribution: Email the O&M manual as attachments to all parties designated by
the Architect/Engineer.
2. Transmittals: Each submittal shall include an individual electronic letter of
transmittal.
3. Format: Electronic submittals shall be in PDF format only. Scanned copies, in
PDF format, of paper originals are acceptable. Submittals that are not legible will
be rejected. Do not set any permission restrictions on files; protected, locked, or
secured documents will be rejected.
4. File Names: Electronic submittal file names shall include the relevant
specification section number followed by a description of the item submitted, as
follows. Where possible, include the transmittal as the first page of the PDF
instead of using multiple electronic files.
a. O&M file name: O&M.div27.contractor.YYYYMMDD
b. Transmittal file name: O&Mtransmittal.div27.contractor.YYYYMMDD
5. File Size: Files shall be transmitted via a pre-approved method. Larger files may
require an alternative transfer method, which shall also be pre-approved.
6. Provide the Owner with an approved copy of the O&M manual on compact discs
(CD), digital video discs (DVD), or flash drives with a permanently affixed label,
printed with the title "Operation and Maintenance Instructions", title of the project
and subject matter of disc/flash drive when multiple disc/flash drives are required.
7. All text shall be searchable.
8. Bookmarks shall be used, dividing information first by specification section, then
systems, major equipment and finally individual items. All bookmark titles shall
include the nomenclature used in the construction documents and shall be an
active link to the first page of the section being referenced.
C. Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall include:
1. Title Page: Include title page with project title, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, all
subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers, with addresses, telephone
numbers, website addresses, email addresses and point of contacts. Website
URLs and email addresses shall be active links in the electronic submittal.
2. Table of Contents: Include a table of contents describing specification section,
systems, major equipment, and individual items.
961
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 00 - 18 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
3. Copies of all final approved shop drawings and submittals. Include
Architect's/Engineer's shop drawing review comments. Insert the individual shop
drawing directly after the Operation and Maintenance information for the item(s)
in the review form.
4. Copy of final approved test and balance reports.
5. Copies of all factory inspections and/or equipment startup reports.
6. Copies of warranties.
7. Schematic wiring diagrams of the equipment that have been updated for field
conditions. Field wiring shall have label numbers to match drawings.
8. Dimensional drawings of equipment.
9. Capacities and utility consumption of equipment.
10. Detailed parts lists with lists of suppliers.
11. Operating procedures for each system.
12. Maintenance schedule and procedures. Include a chart listing maintenance
requirements and frequency.
13. Repair procedures for major components.
14. List of lubricants in all equipment and recommended frequency of lubrication.
15. Instruction books, cards, and manuals furnished with the equipment.
3.6 INSTRUCTING THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Adequately instruct the Owner's designated representative or representatives in the
maintenance, care, and operation of the complete systems installed under this
contract.
B. Provide verbal and written instructions to the Owner's representative or
representatives by FACTORY PERSONNEL in the care, maintenance, and operation
of the equipment and systems.
C. The Owner has the option to make a video recording of all instructions. Coordinate
schedule of instructions to facilitate this recording.
D. The Architect/Engineer shall be notified of the time and place for the verbal instructions
to be given to the Owner's representative so that their representative can be present if
desirable.
E. Refer to the individual specification sections for minimum hours of instruction time for
each system.
F. Operating Instructions:
1. The Contractor is responsible for all instructions to the Owner and/or Owner's
operating staff on the Communications Systems.
962
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 00 - 19 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
3.7 SYSTEM STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. The Communications Systems included in the construction documents are to be
complete and operating systems. The Architect/Engineer will make periodic job site
observations during the construction period. The system start-up, testing,
configuration, and satisfactory system performance is the responsibility of the
Contractor. This shall include all calibration and adjustments of electrical equipment
controls, equipment settings, software configuration, troubleshooting and verification of
software, and final adjustments that may be required.
B. All operating conditions and control sequences shall be simulated and tested during
the start-up period.
3.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: PROJECT CLOSEOUT for requirements. The
following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.
B. Mark specifications to indicate approved substitutions, change orders, and actual
equipment and materials used.
C. This Contractor shall maintain at the job site, a separate and complete set of
technology drawings which shall be clearly and permanently marked and noted in
complete detail any changes made to the location and arrangement of equipment or
made to the Technology Systems and wiring as a result of building construction
conditions or as a result of instructions from the Architect or Engineer. All Change
Orders, RFI responses, Clarifications and other supplemental instructions shall be
marked on the documents. Record documents that merely reference the existence of
the above items are not acceptable. Should This Contractor fail to complete Record
Documents as required by this contract, This Contractor shall reimburse
Architect/Engineer for all costs to develop record documents that comply with this
requirement. Reimbursement shall be made at the Architect/Engineer's hourly rates in
effect at the time of work.
D. Record actual routing of all conduits sized 2" or larger.
E. The above record of changes shall be made available for the Architect and Engineer's
examination during any regular work time.
F. Upon completion of the job, and before final payment is made, This Contractor shall
give the marked-up drawings to the Architect/Engineer.
3.9 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and systems prior to the Owner's final
acceptance of the project.
B. Contractor shall clean all foreign paint, grease, oil, dirt, labels, stickers, and other
foreign material from equipment.
C. Contractor shall remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated during the Contractor's
operations from the premises.
963
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 00 - 20 BASIC COMMUNICATIONS
SYSTEMS REQUIREMENTS
3.10 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the
low emitting material limits of the following standards:CDPH Standard Method V1.1-
2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical
Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.
1. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant
Applications. All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site shall comply with the
applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168.
B. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied Paints and
Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the applicable VOC limits of
SCAQMD Rule 1113.
END OF SECTION 27 05 00
964
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 03 - 1 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
SECTION 27 05 03
THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Through-Penetration Firestopping.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this
Section.
B. Installer: Individuals performing work shall be certified by the manufacturer of the
system selected for installation.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
B. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
C. ANSI/UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops
D. UL 2079 - Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems
E. UL Fire Resistance Directory Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ)
F. Intertek / Warnock Hersey - Directory of Listed Products
G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building
Materials
H. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops
I. CBC California Building Code
J. The Building Officials and Code Administrators National Building Code
K. 2018 International Building Code
L. NFPA 5000 – Building Construction Safety Code
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Division 1.
965
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 03 - 2 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
B. Submit Firestopping Installers Certification for all installers on the project.
C. Shop Drawings: Submit for each condition requiring firestopping. Include descriptions
of the specific penetrating item, actual wall/floor construction, manufacturer's
installation instructions, and UL or Intertek / Warnock Hersey Assembly number.
D. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-
penetration firestop system, along with the following information:
1. Types of penetrating items.
2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where
applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated.
3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop
design designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
4. F ratings for each firestop system.
E. Maintain a notebook on the job site at all times that contains copies of approved
submittals for all through penetration firestopping to be installed. Notebook shall be
made available to the Authority Having Jurisdiction at their request and turned over to
the Owner at the end of construction as part of the O&M Manuals.
F. Submit VOC rating of firestopping material in g/L (less water) with documentation that
it meets the limits set forth in SCAQMD Rule 1168.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store, protect and handle products on site. Accept material on site in factory
containers and packing. Inspect for damage. Protect from deterioration or damage due
to moisture, temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. Follow
manufacturer's instructions for storage.
B. Install material prior to expiration of product shelf life.
1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions,
including both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide
through-penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread
of fire according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases,
and maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.
1. Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire partitions/barriers.
B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings
determined per UL 1479:
1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings
indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of
constructions penetrated.
2. L-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings of
not more than 5.0 cfm/sq.ft. at both ambient temperature and 400°F.
966
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 03 - 3 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to light, traffic, moisture, or physical
damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these
conditions both during and after construction.
D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with
flame-spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as
determined per ASTM E 84.
E. For through-penetration firestop systems in air plenums, provide products with flame-
spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 50, respectively, as
determined per ASTM E 84.
1. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with
the low emitting material limits of the following standards: CDPH Standard
Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile
Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources Using Environmental
Chambers Version 1.1.
2. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant
Applications. All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site shall comply with the
applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168.
3. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied
Paints and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the
applicable VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year warranty on parts and labor.
B. Warranty shall cover repair or replacement of firestop systems which fail in joint
adhesion, cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance,
migration resistance, stain resistance, general durability, or appear to deteriorate in
any manner not clearly specified by the manufacturer as an inherent quality of the
material.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through-
penetration firestop systems indicated for each application that are produced by one of
the following manufacturers. All firestopping systems installed shall be provided by a
single manufacturer.
1. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division
2. Hilti, Inc.
3. RectorSeal Corporation, Metacaulk
4. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division
5. Johns-Manville
6. Specified Technologies Inc. (S.T.I.)
7. Spec Seal Firestop Products
967
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 03 - 4 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
8. AD Firebarrier Protection Systems
9. Wiremold/Legrand: FlameStopper
10. Dow Corning Corp
11. Fire Trak Corp
12. International Protective Coating Corp
2.2 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A. Provide materials and systems classified by or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey to
provide firestopping equal to time rating of construction being penetrated.
B. All firestopping materials shall be free of asbestos, lead, PCB's, and other materials
that would require hazardous waste removal.
C. Firestopping shall be flexible to allow for normal penetrating item movement due to
expansion and contraction.
D. Firestopping systems for plumbing and wet pipe sprinkler piping shall be moisture
resistant.
E. Provide firestopping systems capable of supporting floor loads where systems are
exposed to possible floor loading or traffic.
F. Provide firestopping systems allowing continuous insulation for all insulated pipes.
G. Provide firestopping systems classified by UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey
for penetrations through all fire rated construction. Firestopping systems shall be
selected from the UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory
Category XHEZ based on substrate construction and penetrating item size and
material and shall fall within the range of numbers listed:
1. Combustible Framed Floors and Chase Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated:
a. F Rating = Floor/Wall Rating
b. L Rating = Penetrations in Smoke Barriers
Penetrating Item UL System No.
No Penetrating Item FC 0000-0999*
Metallic Pipe or Conduit FC 1000-1999
Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit FC 2000-2999
Electrical Cables FC 3000-3999
Cable Trays FC 4000-4999
Insulated Pipes FC 5000-5999
Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical FC 6000-6999
Duct without Damper and Misc.
Mechanical
FC 7000-7999
Multiple Penetrations FC 8000-8999
*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to
match original rated construction.
968
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 03 - 5 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
2. Non-Combustible Framed Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated:
a. F Rating = Wall Rating
b. L Rating = Penetrations in Smoke Barriers
Penetrating Item UL System No.
No Penetrating Item WL 0000-0999*
Metallic Pipe or Conduit WL 1000-1999
Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit WL 2000-2999
Electrical Cables WL 3000-3999
Cable Trays WL 4000-4999
Insulated Pipes WL 5000-5999
Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical WL 6000-6999
Duct without Damper and Misc.
Mechanical
WL 7000-7999
Multiple Penetrations WL 8000-8999
*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to
match original rated construction.
3. Concrete Floors and Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated:
a. F Rating = Wall/Floor Rating
b. L Rating = Penetrations in Smoke Barriers
Penetrating Item UL System No.
No Penetrating Item CAJ 0000-0999*
Metallic Pipe or Conduit CAJ 1000-1999
Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit CAJ 2000-2999
Electrical Cables CAJ 3000-3999
Cable Trays CAJ 4000-4999
Insulated Pipes CAJ 5000-5999
Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical CAJ 6000-6999
Duct without Damper and Misc.
Mechanical
CAJ 7000-7999
Multiple Penetrations CAJ 8000-8999
*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to
match original rated construction.
H. Any opening in walls or floors not covered by the listed series of numbers shall be
coordinated with the firestopping manufacturer.
I. Any openings in floors or walls not described in the UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock
Hersey Fire Resistance Directory, or outlined in manufacturer's information shall be
sealed in a manner agreed upon by the Firestopping Manufacturer, Owner, and the
Authority Having Jurisdiction.
969
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 03 - 6 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Ensure all surfaces that contact seal materials are free of dirt, dust, grease, oil, rust, or
loose materials. Clean and repair surfaces as required. Remove laitance and form-
release agents from concrete.
B. Ensure substrate and penetrating items have been permanently installed prior to
installing firestopping systems. Ensure penetrating items have been properly spaced
and have proper clearance prior to installing firestopping systems.
C. Surfaces to which sealing materials are to be installed must meet the selected UL or
Intertek / Warnock Hersey system substrate criteria.
D. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturer. Confine primer to area of bond.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. In existing construction, provide firestopping of openings prior to and after installation
of penetrating items. Remove any existing coatings on surfaces prior to firestopping
installation. Temporary firestopping shall consist of packing openings with fire resistant
mineral wool for the full thickness of substrate, or an alternate method approved by the
Authority Having Jurisdiction. All openings shall be temporarily firestopped immediately
upon their installation and shall remain so until the permanent UL or listed by Intertek /
Warnock Hersey listed firestopping system is installed.
B. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of the UL or
Intertek / Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory and with the manufacturer's
printed application instructions.
C. Install dams as required to properly contain firestopping materials within openings and
as required to achieve required fire resistance rating. Remove combustible damming
after appropriate curing.
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and
with cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop
system manufacturers and that do not cause damage.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that
ensure that through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration
at time of Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration
occurs, remove damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems
immediately and install new materials to produce systems complying with specified
requirements.
970
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 03 - 7 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
3.4 IDENTIFICATION
A. Provide and install labels adjacent to each firestopping location. Label shall be
provided by the firestop system supplier and contain the following information in a
contrasting color:
1. The words "Warning - Through Penetration Firestop System - Do Not Disturb.
Notify Building Management of Any Damage."
2. Firestop System Supplier; UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey system
number; date installed; contractor name and phone number; manufacturer's
representative name, address, and phone number.
3.5 INSPECTION
A. All penetrations shall be inspected by the manufacturer's representative to ensure
proper installation.
B. Access to firestop systems shall be maintained for examination by the Authority
Having Jurisdiction at their request.
C. Proceed with enclosing through-penetration firestop system with other construction
only after inspection reports are issued and firestop installations comply with
requirements.
D. The contractor shall allow for visual destructive review of 5% of installed firestop
systems (minimum of one) to prove compliance with specifications and manufacturer's
instructions and details. Destructive system removal shall be performed by the
contractor and witnessed by the Architect/Engineer and manufacturer's factory
representative. The Architect/Engineer shall have sole discretion of which firestop
system installations will be reviewed. The contractor is responsible for all costs
associated with this requirement including labor and material for removing and
replacing the installed firestop system. If any firestop system is found to not be
installed per manufacturer's specific instructions and details, all firestop systems are
subject to destructive review and replacement at the Architect/Engineer's discretion
and the contractor's expense.
END OF SECTION 27 05 03
971
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 26 - 1 COMMUNICATIONS
BONDING
SECTION 27 05 26
COMMUNICATIONS BONDING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Bonding Conductors
B. Bonding Connectors
C. Grounding Busbar (TMGB and TGB)
D. Rack-mount Telecommunications Grounding Busbar
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 05 33 - Conduit and Boxes
B. Section 26 05 36 - Cable Trays
C. Section 26 05 13 - Wire and Cable
D. Section 26 05 26 - Grounding and Bonding
E. Section 27 05 00 - Basic Communications Systems Requirements
F. Section 27 05 03 - Through Penetration Firestopping
G. Section 27 11 00 - Communication Equipment Rooms
H. Section 27 05 28 - Interior Communication Pathways
I. Section 27 05 53 - Identification and Administration
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for relevant standards.
B. Communications bonding system component, device, equipment, and material
manufacturer(s) shall have a minimum of five (5) years documented experience in the
manufacture of communications bonding products.
C. The entire installation shall comply with all applicable electrical codes, safety codes,
and standards. All applicable components, devices, equipment, and material shall be
listed by Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
972
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 26 - 2 COMMUNICATIONS
BONDING
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/IEEE 1100 - Recommended Practice for Power and Grounding Sensitive
Electronic Equipment in Industrial and Commercial Power Systems
B. ANSI/TIA/EIA 568-C - Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
C. ANSI/TIA/EIA 569-A - Commercial Building Standard for Telecommunications
Pathways and Spaces
D. ANSI/TIA/EIA 606 - Administration Standard for the Telecommunications Infrastructure
of Commercial Buildings
E. ANSI/TIA/EIA 758 - Customer Owned Outside Plant
F. ANSI-J-STD-607-A - Commercial Building Grounding (Earthing) and Bonding
Requirements for Telecommunications
G. IEEE 81 - IEEE Guide for Measuring Earth Resistivity, Ground Impedance, and Earth
Surface Potentials of a Ground System Part 1: Normal Measurements
H. IEEE 837 - IEEE Standard for Qualifying Permanent Connections Used in Substation
Grounding
I. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
J. NFPA 780 - Standard for the Installation of Lightning Protection Systems
K. UL 96 - Lightning Protection Components
L. UL 96A - Installation Requirements for Lightning Protection Systems
M. UL 467 - Grounding and Bonding Equipment
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit product data and shop drawings under provisions of Section 27 05 00 and
Division 1.
B. Provide manufacturer's technical product specification sheet for each individual
component type. Submitted data shall show the following:
1. Compliance with each requirement of these documents. The submittal shall
acknowledge each requirement of this section, item-by-item, including
construction, materials, ratings, and all other parameters identified in Part 2 -
Products.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions indicating application conditions and
limitations of use stipulated by product testing agency. Include instructions for
storage, handling, protection, examination, preparation, installation, and starting
of product.
973
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 26 - 3 COMMUNICATIONS
BONDING
C. Provide CAD-generated, project-specific system shop drawings as follows:
1. Provide a system block diagram indicating system configuration, system
components, interconnection between components, and conductor routing. The
diagram shall clearly indicate all wiring and connections required in the system.
When multiple devices or pieces of equipment are required in the exact same
configuration (e.g., multiple identical equipment racks or sections of ladder tray),
the diagram may show one device and refer to the others as "typical" of the
device shown. The diagram shall list room numbers where system equipment will
be located.
2. Installation details for all system components.
D. Provide system checkout test procedure to be performed at acceptance.
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to the site under the provisions of Section 27 05 00.
B. Store and protect products under the provisions of Section 27 05 00.
C. Contractor shall exercise care to prevent corrosion of any products prior to installation.
Corroded products shall not be acceptable for use on this project.
1.7 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. This section describes the requirements for the furnishing, installation, adjusting, and
testing of a complete turnkey communications bonding system, including connection to
the electrical ground grid.
B. Performance Statement: This specification section and the accompanying drawings
are performance based, describing the minimum material quality, required features,
operational requirements, and performance of the system. These documents do not
convey every wire that must be installed, every equipment connection that must be
made, or every feature and function that must be configured. Based on the equipment
constraints described and the performance required of the system as presented in
these documents, the Contractor is solely responsible for determining all components,
devices, equipment, wiring, connections, and terminations required for a complete and
operational system that provides the required performance.
C. This document describes the major components of the system. All additional
hardware, subassemblies, supporting equipment, and other miscellaneous equipment
required for complete, proper system installation and operation shall be provided by
the Contractor.
D. Basic System Requirements:
1. A complete communications bonding infrastructure is required for this project.
Refer to the drawings and the requirements of ANSI-J-STD-607-A and NFPA 70
for complete information.
974
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 26 - 4 COMMUNICATIONS
BONDING
2. The bonding system shall include, but not be limited to, the following major
components:
a. Bonding Conductor for Telecommunications (BCT)
b. Telecommunications Main Grounding Busbar (TMGB)
c. Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB)
d. Telecommunications Grounding Busbar(s) (TGB)
e. Rack mount Telecommunications Grounding Busbar(s)
f. Bonding Conductor(s) (BC)
g. Bonding Connectors
h. Bonding system labeling and administration as defined in Section 27 05 53.
1.8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit documents under the provisions of Section 27 05 00.
B. Provide final system block diagram showing any deviations from approved shop
drawing submittal.
C. Provide floor plans that document the following:
1. Actual locations of system components, devices, and equipment.
2. Actual conductor routing.
3. Actual system component, device, equipment, and conductor labels.
D. Provide statement that system checkout test, as outlined in the approved shop drawing
submittal, is complete and test results were satisfactory.
E. Complete all operation and maintenance manuals as described below.
1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit under provisions of Section 27 05 00.
B. Submitted data shall include:
1. Approved shop drawings.
2. Descriptions of recommended system maintenance procedures, including:
a. Inspection
b. Periodic preventive maintenance
c. Fault diagnosis
d. Repair or replacement of defective components
975
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 26 - 5 COMMUNICATIONS
BONDING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BONDING CONDUCTORS
A. Bare Copper:
1. Annealed uncoated stranded conductor.
2. Minimum size 6 AWG.
B. Insulated Copper:
1. Annealed uncoated stranded conductor.
2. Insulation:
a. PVC insulation with nylon outer jacket.
b. Rated at 600 volts.
c. Green.
3. Minimum size 6 AWG.
C. All bonding conductors shall be listed and recognized by a nationally recognized
testing laboratory as being suitable for the intended purpose and for installation in the
space in which they are installed.
D. Bonding Conductor Sizing:
1. All communications bonding system conductors shall be sized by length as
follows:
Length
Linear ft (m)
Size
(AWG)
Less than 13 (4) 6
14 - 20 (4 - 6) 4
21 - 26 (6 - 8) 3
27 - 33 (8 - 10) 2
34 - 41 (10 - 13) 1
42 - 52 (13 - 16) 1/0
53 - 66 (16 - 20) 2/0
Greater than 66 (20) 3/0
2. The BCT shall be the same size as the TBB or larger.
2.2 BONDING CONNECTORS
A. Acceptable Types:
1. Two-hole compression lug
2. Exothermic weld
3. Irreversible compression
976
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 26 - 6 COMMUNICATIONS
BONDING
B. Connectors shall be provided in kit form and selected per manufacturer's written
instructions.
C. Connectors shall comply with IEEE 837 and UL 467 and be listed for use for specific
types, sizes, and combinations of conductors and connected items.
2.3 GROUNDING BUSBAR (TMGB AND TGB)
A. Features:
1. Wall-mount configuration.
2. Listed and recognized by a nationally recognized testing laboratory as being
suitable for intended purpose.
3. Hole patterns compliant with BICSI recommendations and ANSI-J-STD-607-A
standards.
4. Predrilled holes.
5. Integral insulators.
6. Stainless steel offset mounting brackets.
B. Specifications:
1. Material: Electrolytic tough pitch copper bar with tin plating.
2. Minimum Dimensions: 1/4" thick x 4" high x 12" long.
a. Increase dimensions and/or quantity furnished and installed as required to
accommodate all terminations required by the project, plus 20% spare
capacity.
3. Hole pattern shall include:
a. A minimum of 15 sets of 5/16" holes, 5/8" on center, to accommodate "A"
spaced 2-hole compression lugs.
b. A minimum of three (3) sets of 7/16" holes, 1" on center, to accommodate
"C" spaced 2-hole compression lugs.
2.4 RACK-MOUNT TELECOMMUNICATIONS GROUNDING BUSBAR
A. Features:
1. Listed and recognized by a nationally recognized testing laboratory as being
suitable for intended purpose.
2. Predrilled holes.
3. Mounts in a standard 19" equipment rack.
B. Specifications:
1. Material: Electrolytic tough pitch copper bar with tin plating.
2. Minimum Dimensions: 3/16" thick x 3/4" high x 19" long.
977
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 26 - 7 COMMUNICATIONS
BONDING
a. Increase dimensions and/or quantity furnished and installed as required to
accommodate all terminations required by the project, plus 20% spare
capacity.
3. Hole pattern shall include:
a. A minimum of eight (8) 6-32 tapped lug mounting holes on 1" centers.
b. A minimum of two (2) pairs of 5/16" diameter holes spaced 3/4" apart.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. General Bonding Requirements:
1. The communications bonding system shall be a complete system. Contractor
shall furnish and install all necessary miscellaneous components, devices,
equipment, material, and hardware, including, but not limited to, lock washers,
paint-piercing washers, hex nuts, compression lugs, insulators, mounting screws,
lugs, etc., to provide a complete system.
2. A licensed electrician shall perform all bonding.
3. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation
of all products.
B. Main Cross Connect and Service Entrance Room Bonding Requirements:
1. Locate the TMGB in the service entrance room unless otherwise noted on the
drawings.
2. The location of the TMGB shall be the shortest practical distance from the
telecommunications primary lightning protection devices.
3. Bond the telecommunications primary protectors to the TMGB. Maintain a
minimum 1 foot separation of the bonding conductor from all DC power cables,
switchboard cable, and high frequency cable.
4. In service entrance rooms where the entrance pathway contains an isolation gap,
the pathway on the facility side of the gap shall be bonded to the TMGB.
C. Where the service entrance cable contains a shield, the shield(s) shall be bonded to
the TMGB using manufacturer-approved hardware.
D. Telecommunications Main Ground Bar (TMGB) Requirements:
1. Install TMGB such that it is insulated from its support with a minimum 2" standoff.
2. Bond the TMGB to the electrical service ground via the BCT.
a. A minimum of 1 foot separation shall be maintained between the BCT and
any DC power cables, switchboard cable, or high frequency cables.
3. Where backbone or horizontal cabling contains a shield, the shield(s) shall be
bonded to the TMGB.
978
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 26 - 8 COMMUNICATIONS
BONDING
4. TMGB shall be bonded to all electrical panels located in the same room or space
as the TMGB or in an immediately adjacent space within 20 linear feet of the
TMGB. TMGB shall be bonded to all electrical panels providing electrical power
to communications equipment located in the same room or space as the TMGB.
5. TMGB shall be bonded to accessible metallic building structure located within the
same room or space as the TMGB.
6. All metallic continuous cable pathways, including, but not limited to, cable trays,
basket trays, ladder racks, raceways, conduits, conduit sleeves, and fire-rated
cable pathway devices, located within the same room or space as the TMGB,
shall be bonded to the TMGB.
7. All metallic communications equipment, including, but not limited to, cable pair
protectors, surge suppressors, cross-connect frames, patch panels, equipment
cabinets, etc., located within the same room or space as the TMGB, shall be
bonded to the TMGB.
E. Telecommunications Ground Bar (TGB) Requirements:
1. Provide a TGB in each telecommunications equipment room.
2. Install TGB such that it is insulated from its support with a minimum 2" standoff.
3. Bond each TGB to the TMGB via the TBB.
a. A minimum of 1 foot separation shall be maintained between the TBB and
any DC power cables, switchboard cable, or high frequency cables.
b. The TBB may be routed from TGB to TGB or as a radial feed to each TGB
as the layout requires.
4. If more than one (1) TGB is provided within the same room or space, they shall
all be bonded together via a BC the same size as the TBB.
5. Where horizontal cabling contains a shield, the shield(s) shall be bonded to the
TGB.
6. TGBs shall be bonded to accessible metallic building structure located within the
same room or space as the TGBs.
7. TGBs shall be bonded to all electrical panels located in the same room or space
as the TGB or in an immediately adjacent space within 20 linear feet of the TGB.
TGBs shall be bonded to all electrical panels providing electrical power to
communications equipment located in the same room or space as the TGB.
8. All metallic continuous cable pathways, including, but not limited to, cable trays,
basket trays, ladder racks, raceways, conduits, conduit sleeves, and fire-rated
cable pathway devices, located within the same room or space as the TGB, shall
be bonded to the TGB.
9. All metallic communications equipment, including, but not limited to, cable pair
protectors, surge suppressors, cross-connect frames, patch panels, equipment
cabinets, etc., located within the same room or space as the TGB, shall be
bonded to the TGB.
F. Rack-mount Telecommunications Ground Bar Requirements (RTGB):
1. Provide a rack-mount telecommunications ground bar in each equipment rack
and equipment rack enclosure.
979
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 26 - 9 COMMUNICATIONS
BONDING
2. Install RTGB such that it is electrically bonded to the rack. Where necessary,
remove paint and/or use paint-piercing washers to provide proper electrical bond
between RTGB and equipment rack.
3. Bond each RTGB to the TGB via a BC.
4. If more than one (1) RTGB is provided within the same room or space, they shall
all be bonded together via a BC.
5. Where horizontal cabling containing a shield is terminated on rack-mounted
termination hardware, the shield(s) shall be bonded to the RTGB.
6. All contractor-furnished and/or contractor-installed metallic communications
equipment, including, but not limited to patch panels, fiber optic distribution
enclosures, splice enclosures, active electronics, uninterruptible power supplies,
etc., mounted within the same equipment rack as the RTGB, shall be bonded to
the RTGB. Where necessary, remove paint and/or use paint-piercing washers to
provide proper electrical bond between equipment rack and installed metallic
communications equipment. Active electronics and uninterruptible power
supplies shall be bonded to the RTGB via a dedicated BC for each device.
G. Metallic Interior Communication Pathway Bonding Requirements:
1. All metallic interior continuous communication cable pathways, including, but not
limited to, conduit, conduit sleeves, fire-rated cable pathway devices, cable tray,
basket tray, and ladder rack, shall be bonded to the communications bonding
system.
H. Bonding Conductor Requirements:
1. Bonding conductors shall be green or marked with a distinctive green color.
2. Bonding conductors shall be routed parallel and perpendicular to building
structure along shortest and straightest paths possible. Number of bends and
changes in direction should be minimized. Install and secure conductors in a
manner that protects the conductors from impact and from physical or
mechanical strain or damage.
3. Bonding conductors shall not be installed in metallic conduit.
4. All conductors, including, but not limited, to the BCT, TBB, GE(s), and BC(s),
shall be installed splice-free. If the Contractor believes that site conditions do not
allow a splice-free installation, the Contractor may request permission from the
Architect/Engineer to splice a specific communications bonding system
conductor.
a. Where documented permission to splice a conductor is granted:
1) The number of splices shall be limited to as few as possible.
2) Splices shall be made using exothermic welding or irreversible
compression-type connections only. Splice hardware shall be listed
for grounding and bonding. Solder is not an acceptable means of
splicing conductors.
3) Splices shall be made in telecommunications spaces in accessible
locations to facilitate future inspection and maintenance.
4) Splices shall be adequately supported and protected from impact
and from physical or mechanical strain or damage.
980
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 26 - 10 COMMUNICATIONS
BONDING
5. All bonding conductors shall be labeled in accordance with the requirements of
Section 27 05 53. In addition to the requirements of Section 27 05 53:
a. Labels shall be nonmetallic.
b. Labels shall be printer-generated.
c. Labels shall be located on conductors as close as is practical to their point
of termination in a readable position.
d. Additionally, conductors shall be labeled as follows:
1) "IF THIS CONNECTOR OR CABLE IS LOOSE OR MUST BE
REMOVED, PLEASE CALL THE BUILDING
TELECOMMUNICATIONS MANAGER."
6. Interior water piping is not acceptable for use as a communications bonding
system bonding conductor.
7. Metallic cable shields are not acceptable for use as communications bonding
system bonding conductors.
I. Bonding Connection Requirements:
1. Make all connections in accessible locations to facilitate future inspection and
maintenance.
2. Communications bonding system connections shall be made using exothermic
welding, two-hole compression lugs, or other irreversible compression-type
connections. The use of 1-hole lugs is prohibited, except for connections to a
rack-mount telecommunications ground bar. Connection hardware shall be listed
for grounding and bonding. Sheet metal screws shall not be used to make
communications bonding system connections.
3. Thoroughly clean conductors before installing lugs and connectors.
4. Install and tighten all connectors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions,
using the appropriate purpose-designed tool(s) recommended by the
manufacturer for that purpose. Exercise care not to tighten connectors beyond
manufacturer's recommendations.
5. Where necessary, remove paint and/or use paint-piercing washers to provide
proper electrical bond at all connections.
6. All bonding connections shall be coated in anti-oxidant joint compound that is
purpose-designed and purpose-manufactured for that use. Anti-oxidant joint
compound shall be applied in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations
and instructions.
7. All installed connectors on conductors installed in damp locations shall be sealed
with dielectric grease and then covered with heat shrink tubing to protect against
moisture ingress. Applied heat shrink tubing shall overlap conductor's outer
jacket a minimum of four (4) inches past connector and be installed in
accordance with manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing shall be performed under provisions of Section 27 05 00.
981
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 26 - 11 COMMUNICATIONS
BONDING
B. Where these specifications require a product or assembly without the use of a brand or
trade name, provide a product from a reputable manufacturer that meets the
requirements of the specifications.
C. Periodic observations will be performed during construction to verify compliance with
the requirements of the specifications. These services do not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for compliance with the contract documents.
3.3 ADJUSTING
A. Adjust work under provisions of Section 27 05 00.
B. Contractor shall make any and all adjustments to the communications bonding system
necessary to ensure that the installed system meets all requirements listed herein.
Modifications necessary to comply with listed requirements or to provide specified
performance shall be completed by the Contractor at no additional cost to the Owner.
3.4 TESTING
A. Test installed system under provisions of Section 27 17 10.
B. Measure and document resistance to ground at TMGB, each TGB, each RTGB, and
each electrical distribution panel bonded to the TMGB or a TGB.
1. Measurements shall be made not less than two full days after the last trace of
precipitation, and without the soil being moistened by any means other than
natural drainage or seepage, and without chemical treatment or other artificial
means of reducing natural ground resistance. Perform tests by the fall-of-
potential method according to IEEE 81.
2. Measured resistance to ground at TMGB, each TGB, and each RTGB must not
exceed 2 ohms.
3. Under no circumstances shall any point in the communications bonding system
have a lower resistance to ground than that of nearby electrical distribution
system components that it is bonded to.
C. Measure and document voltage between screen of installed and terminated ScTP,
FTP, and/or SSTP horizontal cables and electrical ground of electrical outlet(s) serving
the information outlet location area.
1. The voltage between the screen and the ground wire shall not exceed 1.0 V rms,
and 1.0 V dc for any installed and terminated ScTP, FTP, and/or SSTP horizontal
cables.
D. Include measurement documentation in test data submitted at completion of project
under provisions of Section 27 17 10.
3.5 SYSTEM TRAINING
A. All labor and materials required for on-site system training shall be provided. Training
shall be conducted at the project site using the project equipment.
982
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 26 - 12 COMMUNICATIONS
BONDING
1. Provide two week's advanced notice of training to the Owner and
Architect/Engineer.
2. The Architect/Engineer shall be presented with the option to attend the training.
3. Provide a training outline agenda describing the subject matter and the
recommended audience for each topic.
B. At a minimum, the following training shall be conducted:
1. A course detailing the system functions and operations that a technical user will
encounter. Provide training on all aspects of using the system, including making
new bonding connections to the TMGB, TGB, or RTGB. Provide training on all
recommended inspection, maintenance, and repair procedures for the system.
C. Minimum on-site training times shall be:
1. Technical user: One hour.
END OF SECTION 27 05 26
983
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 28 - 1 INTERIOR
COMMUNICATION
PATHWAYS
SECTION 27 05 28
INTERIOR COMMUNICATION PATHWAYS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. The work covered under this section consists of the furnishing of all necessary labor,
supervision, materials, equipment, tests and services to install conduits, sleeves,
innerduct, etc. for an interior cabling plant as shown on the drawings.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 05 33 - Conduit and Boxes
B. Section 27 05 00 - Basic Communications Systems Requirements
C. Section 27 05 26 - Communications Bonding
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for requirements.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ANSI/NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Under the provisions of Section 27 05 00 and Division 1, prior to the start of work the
Contractor shall submit:
1. Manufacturer's data covering all products proposed, including construction,
materials, ratings and all other parameters identified in Part 2 - Products, below.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Coordination Drawings:
1. Include cable tray and conduit sleeve layout in composite electronic coordination
files. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for coordination drawing requirements.
2. Reference AV and Owner provided Broadcast drawings for Control Room and
Server Room areas.
984
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 28 - 2 INTERIOR
COMMUNICATION
PATHWAYS
1.6 DRAWINGS
A. The drawings, which constitute a part of these specifications, indicate the general
route of conduit, sleeves, etc. Data presented on these drawings is as accurate as
preliminary surveys and planning can determine until final equipment selection is
made. Accuracy is not guaranteed and field verification of all dimensions, routing, etc.,
is required.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 CONDUIT
A. Refer to Section 26 05 33 for conduit requirements for this project.
2.2 CABLE HANGERS AND SUPPORTS
A. Provide a non-continuous cable support system suitable for use with open cable.
B. Cable Hooks:
1. Construction: Flat bottom design with a minimum cable bearing surface of 1-5/8".
Hooks shall have 90-degree radius edges.
2. All cable hook mounting hardware shall be recessed to prevent damage to cable
during installation. Installed cabling shall be secured using a cable latch retainer
that shall be removable and reusable.
3. Finish: Pre-galvanized steel, ASTM A653 suitable for general duty use.
2.3 INNERDUCT - CORRUGATED
A. Fabricated from self-extinguishing high-impact polyvinyl chloride (PVC), orange in
color.
B. Fittings and accessories fabricated from same material as conduit and usable with
rigid nonmetallic conduit.
C. Solvent-cement type joints as recommended by manufacturer.
D. Inside diameter not less than that of rigid steel conduit.
E. Dielectric strength a minimum of 400 volts per mil.
F. Corrugated wall construction.
G. Pull rope pre-installed by manufacturer.
985
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 28 - 3 INTERIOR
COMMUNICATION
PATHWAYS
H. Innerduct installed within buildings (not including riser paths) or utility tunnels shall
meet all the above General requirements plus:
1. Be fabricated of flame-retardant materials (plenum rated) suitable for installation
in such environments.
2. Meet or exceed all requirements for flame resistant duct as required by Bellcore
TR-NWT-000356 (Section 4.33).
I. Innerduct installed within building riser shafts shall meet all the above general
requirements plus:
1. Be fabricated of flame-retardant materials suitable for installation in such
environment.
J. Meet or exceed all requirements for flame propagation as specified by test method
UL-1666 and referenced by the National Electrical Code (NEC) Section 770-53 for
listed optical fiber raceways being installed in vertical runs in a shaft between floors.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INNER DUCT INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Inner duct shall be riser or plenum rated as required by the installation environment. At
minimum, inner duct should extend to the ladder rack above the termination enclosure
at system endpoints. Where not installed in a continuous length, inner duct segments
should be spliced using couplings designed for that purpose.
B. All exposed inner duct is to be labeled at 35-foot intervals with tags indicating
ownership, the cable type (e.g., "Fiber Optic Cable") and the cables it contains (e.g.,
MA-CS or FS-CS).
C. Where exposed, fiber optic cable shall be installed in protective inner duct.
D. Contractor shall determine optimum size and quantity to satisfy the requirements of the
installation and to ensure that the mechanical limitations, including minimum bend
radius of the cable, are considered.
E. The inner duct should extend into the termination enclosure at system endpoints.
F. Where not installed in a continuous length, inner duct segments should be spliced
using couplings designed for that purpose.
3.2 CABLE HOOK SUPPORT SYSTEM
A. In areas where cabling is not supported by cable tray, ladder rack, enclosed wireway
or installed in conduit, such cabling shall be supported by an approved cable hook
support system.
986
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 28 - 4 INTERIOR
COMMUNICATION
PATHWAYS
B. Refer to manufacturer's requirements for allowable fill capacity for selected cable hook.
In no case shall a 40% fill capacity be exceeded.
C. Cable hooks shall be securely mounted per manufacturer's instructions. In no case
shall the side-to-side travel of any cable hook exceed 6".
D. Cable hooks shall be selected based on the contractor's cable routing. Hooks shall be
capable of supporting a minimum of 30 pounds with a safety factor of 3.
E. J-hook support spans shall be based on the smaller of the manufacturer's load ratings
and code requirements. In no case shall horizontal spans exceed 5 feet and vertical
spans exceed 4 feet.
F. The resting and supporting of cabling on structural members shall not meet the
requirements for cabling support specified herein.
G. The use of tie-wraps or hook and loop type fasteners is specifically prohibited as a
substitute for cable hooks specified herein.
3.3 CONDUIT AND CABLE ROUTING
A. Refer to Section 26 05 33 for additional requirements.
B. All conduits shall be reamed and shall be installed with a nylon bushing.
C. Maintain appropriate conduit bend radius at all times. For conduits with an internal
diameter of less than 2", maintain a bend radius of at least 6 times the internal
diameter. For conduits with an internal diameter 2" or greater, maintain a bend radius
of at least 10 times the internal diameter.
D. No conduit or sleeve containing more than two (2) cables shall exceed 40% fill ratio,
regardless of length.
E. Any conduit exceeding 90' in length or containing more than two (2) 90-degree bends
shall contain a pull box sized per ANSI/TIA/EIA 569 requirements.
1. A separate pull box is required for each 90' (or greater) length section.
2. A separate pull box is required after any two (2) consecutive 90-degree bends.
3. Pull box shall be located in an area that maintains accessibility of box, including
the ability to remove box lid without removal or relocation of any other materials.
F. Any conduit with bends totaling 90 degrees or more shall have the fill capacity derated
by 15% for each 90 degrees of cumulative bend.
G. Cables installed in any conduits that do not meet the above requirements shall be
replaced at the Contractor's expense, after the conduit condition has been remedied.
END OF SECTION 27 05 28
987
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 53 - 1 IDENTIFICATION AND
ADMINISTRATION
SECTION 27 05 53
IDENTIFICATION AND ADMINISTRATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section describes the identification and administration requirements relating to the
structured cabling system and its termination components and related subsystems.
B. Identification and labeling.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 27 05 00 - Basic Communications Systems Requirements
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for relevant standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Under the provisions of Section 27 05 00 and Division 1, prior to the start of work the
Contractor shall submit:
1. Documentation of labeling scheme.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 LABELING
A. Adhesive labels shall meet the requirements of UL 969 (Ref D-16) for legibility,
defacement and adhesion. Exposure requirements of UL 969 for indoor and outdoor
(as applicable) use shall be met.
B. Insert labels shall meet the requirements of UL 969 for legibility, defacement and
general exposure.
C. Labeling shall be consistent for all common elements in the project. This consistency
shall include label size, color, typeface an attachment method.
D. Tag all CAT 6 and optical fiber cables at both the Communications Equipment Room
and the information outlets using the following alphanumeric labeling system:
1. (Telecom Room Number) - (Patch Panel Letter) - (Patch Panel Port Number).
2. "Telecom Room Number" shall be as indicated on the drawings.
988
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 53 - 2 IDENTIFICATION AND
ADMINISTRATION
3. "Patch Panel Letter" shall start with 'A' for the top modular patch panel,
increasing sequentially from top to bottom across the equipment rack.
4. "Patch Panel Port Number" shall start with '1' for the upper left port in each
modular patch panel, increasing sequentially from left to right and top to bottom
across the modular patch panel face.
5. Example #1: MC/1-A3 indicates the third modular patch panel port in modular
patch panel 'A' in Main Equipment Room (MC/1).
6. Example #2: HC/2-C39 indicates the thirty-ninth modular patch panel port in
modular patch panel C in Horizontal Cross-Connect room (HC/2).
2.2 DOCUMENTATION/AS-BUILTS/RECORDS
A. General:
1. Upon completion of the installation, the Contractor shall submit as-builts per the
requirements of Section 27 05 00 and Division 1. Documentation shall include
the items detailed in the subsections below.
2. All documentation, including hard copy and electronic forms shall become the
property of the Owner.
B. Record Drawings:
1. The drawings are to include cable routes and outlet locations. Outlet locations
shall be identified by their sequential number as defined elsewhere in this
document. Numbering, icons and drawing conventions used shall be consistent
throughout all documentation provided.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 IDENTIFICATION AND LABELING
A. Cable Labeling: Backbone and horizontal cables shall be labeled at each end.
1. Provide additional cable labeling at each manhole and pull box.
2. Cables that are routed through multiple pathway segments shall contain
reference to all pathway segments in the pathway linkage field.
3. Cables that differ only by performance class shall have a suitable marking or
label to indicate the higher performance class. For example, station cabling
utilizing the blue color, may include blue with a white stripe to indicate the higher
performance class station cabling.
B. Information Outlet Labeling: Tag all voice and data jacks as defined herein.
C. Termination Hardware Labeling:
1. An identifier shall be provided at each termination hardware location or its label.
989
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 05 53 - 3 IDENTIFICATION AND
ADMINISTRATION
D. Grounding/Bonding Labeling:
1. The TMGB shall be labeled "TMGB." There shall be only one TMGB in the
facility.
2. Label all TBB conductors connecting to the TMGB with a unique label, located at
both ends of the TBB.
3. Each TGB shall be labeled with a unique label.
4. All TBB conductors connecting to the TGB shall be labeled uniquely at each end
of the cable.
END OF SECTION 27 05 53
990
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 11 00 - 1 COMMUNICATION
EQUIPMENT ROOMS (CER)
SECTION 27 11 00
COMMUNICATION EQUIPMENT ROOMS (CER)
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section describes the products and execution requirements related to furnishing
and installing equipment for communication equipment rooms.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 27 05 00 - Basic Communications Systems Requirements
B. Section 27 05 26 - Communications Bonding
C. Section 27 05 28 - Interior Communication Pathways
D. Section 27 15 00 - Horizontal Cabling Requirements
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for applicable standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Under the provisions of Section 27 05 00 and Division 1, prior to the start of work the
Contractor shall submit:
1. Manufacturer's data covering all products including construction, materials,
ratings and all other parameters identified in Part 2 - Products, below.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
B. Coordination Drawings:
1. Include ladder racking, equipment racks, cable tray and conduit sleeve layout in
composite electronic coordination files. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for coordination
drawing requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 EQUIPMENT GROUNDING
A. Refer to specification section 27 05 26 for grounding requirements.
B. All equipment required to be grounded shall be provided with a grounding lug suitable
for termination of the specified size electrode conductor.
991
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 11 00 - 2 COMMUNICATION
EQUIPMENT ROOMS (CER)
2.2 EQUIPMENT RACKS AND CABINETS
A. Where identified on the drawings in Communication Equipment Rooms, equipment
racks and/or equipment cabinets shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor to
house cable termination components (e.g., copper, optical fiber, coax) and network
electronics.
B. The equipment rack shall conform to the following requirements:
1. Standard TIA/EIA 19" Floor Rack:
a. Equipment rack shall be 84" in height, self-supporting and provide a
useable mounting height of 45 rack units (RU) (1 RU = 1 3/4").
b. Channel uprights shall be spaced to accommodate industry standard 19"
mounting.
c. Equipment rack shall be 3/8" square punched to accept cage nuts. Uprights
shall also be drilled on back to accept cable brackets, clamps, power
strip(s), etc. Hole pattern on rack front shall be per TIA/EIA specifications.
Hole pattern on the rear shall be at 3" intervals to accept cable brackets.
d. Equipment racks shall be provided with a supply of spare screws and cage
nuts (minimum of 24).
e. Equipment racks shall be provided with a ground bar and #6 AWG ground
lug.
f. Provide all mounting hardware and accessories as required for a complete
installation.
2.3 CABLE MANAGEMENT - VERTICAL AND HORIZONTAL
A. Equipment Racks:
1. Equipment racks shall be equipped with vertical and horizontal cable
management hardware in the form of rings and guides. Racks shall incorporate
vertical and horizontal covers, to allow an orderly, hidden, routing of copper,
optical fiber, and coax jumpers from the modular patch panels and/or 110-type
termination blocks to the customer provided network electronics. Vertical and
horizontal cable management hardware shall be as follows:
a. Horizontal cable management hardware shall be 16 gauge cold rolled steel
construction with six (6) pass-thru holes and seven (7) front-mounted 3.5"
steel rod D-rings. Provide with cover designed to conceal and protect cable.
b. At a minimum, horizontal cable management hardware shall be positioned
above and below (a) each grouping of two rows of jacks on modular patch
panels, and (b) above and below each optical fiber patch panel and (c)
each grouping of two rows of F-type connectors on coax patch panels.
c. Vertical cable management hardware shall provide for cable routing on
front and rear of each rack and be 14" deep x 6" wide (minimum). Where
multiple equipment racks are to be installed, this hardware shall be
mounted between the uprights of adjacent equipment racks. Equipment
rack uprights and the spacers shall be secured together per manufacturer's
recommendations. Provide with cover designed to conceal and protect
cable.
992
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 11 00 - 3 COMMUNICATION
EQUIPMENT ROOMS (CER)
2. Each equipment rack shall be supplied with a minimum of 12 releasable (e.g.,
"hook and loop") cable support ties.
3. Where cable termination hardware is wall-mounted, the Contractor shall be
responsible for establishing a cable pathway for jumpers routed from the
equipment rack(s) to the wall. This shall be in the form of slotted ducts or
troughs. Routing of jumpers via the overhead cable tray or ladder rack system is
NOT acceptable. The proposed method shall be included in the submittals
required by this document and shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer prior
to installation.
2.4 PATCH PANELS
A. Where identified on the drawings in Communication Equipment Rooms, modular patch
panels shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor for termination of copper
cable.
B. Copper cabling shall be terminated in Communication Equipment Rooms on modular
patch panels consisting of a modular connector system incorporating modular jacks
meeting the specifications for the jacks detailed in Section 27 15 00.
C. The largest single modular patch panel configuration shall not exceed 48-Ports.
Modular patch panels shall be fully populated (all ports occupied by jacks) and be
provided in increments of no less than 12 jacks. High-density modular patch panels will
not be accepted.
D. The modular patch panel blocks shall have the ability to seat and cut eight (8)
conductors (4 pairs) at a time and shall have the ability of terminating 22- through 26-
gauge plastic insulated, solid and stranded copper conductors. Modular patch panel
blocks shall be designed to maintain the cables' pair twists as closely as possible to
the point of mechanical termination.
E. Modular patch panels shall incorporate cable support and/or strain relief mechanisms
to secure the horizontal cables at the termination block and to ensure that all
manufacturers minimum bend radius specifications are adhered to.
2.5 OPTICAL FIBER PANELS
A. All terminated optical fibers shall be mated to simplex LC-type couplings mounted on
enclosed fiber distribution cabinets. Couplings shall be mounted on a panel that, in
turn, snaps into the enclosure. The proposed enclosure shall be designed to
accommodate a changing variety of connector types including SC, ST, Fixed Shroud
Duplex (e.g., "FDDI Connector"), Biconic, FC, and MT-RJ by changing panels on
which connector couplings are mounted.
B. The fiber distribution cabinet shall be sized to accommodate the total fiber count to be
installed at each location as defined in the specifications and drawings, including those
not terminated (if applicable). Connector panels and connector couplings (sleeves,
bulkheads, etc.) adequate to accommodate the number of fibers to be terminated shall
be furnished and installed by the Contractor.
993
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 11 00 - 4 COMMUNICATION
EQUIPMENT ROOMS (CER)
C. The fiber distribution cabinet shall be an enclosed assembly affording protection to the
cable subassemblies and to the terminated ends. The enclosures shall incorporate a
hinged or retractable front cover designed to conceal and protect the optical fiber
couplings, connectors, and cable.
D. Access to the inside of the fiber distribution cabinet's enclosure during installation shall
be from the front and/or rear. Panels that require any disassembly of the fiber
distribution cabinet to gain entry will not be accepted.
E. The fiber distribution cabinet's enclosure shall provide for strain relief of incoming
optical fiber cables and shall incorporate radius control mechanisms to limit bending of
the optical fiber to the manufacturer's recommended minimums or ½½", whichever is
larger.
F. All fiber distribution cabinets shall provide protection to both the "facilities" and "user"
side of the coupling. The fiber distribution cabinet's enclosure shall be configured to
require front access only when patching. The incoming optical fiber cables (e.g.,
backbone, riser, horizontal, etc.) shall not be accessible from the patching area of the
panel. The fiber distribution cabinet's enclosure shall provide a physical barrier to
access such optical fiber cables.
G. Where "Loose Buffered" cables are installed, the 250 µµm coated optical fibers
contained in these cables may be terminated either by (1) splicing of factory-
terminated cable assemblies ("pigtails") or (2) the use of a "fan-out" kit. In the latter
approach, individual fibers are to be secured in a protective covering, an Aramid (e.g.,
Kevlar¢¢) reinforced tube for example, with connectors mated to the resulting
assembly. In both instances, the proposed termination hardware shall incorporate a
mechanism by which cable and subassemblies are secured to prevent damage.
Splicing shall be by the "fusion" method. Individual splice loss shall not exceed 0.3 dB
for multi-mode fibers. Direct termination of 250 µµm coated optical fibers shall not be
permitted.
H. Fiber distribution cabinets for horizontal cabling: Where optical fiber horizontal cabling
is to be terminated, the enclosure shall be compliant to all the above requirements plus
the enclosure shall incorporate a storage mechanism designed to allow simplified
identification, access to and termination of individual optical fibers. This may be in the
form of a storage cassette, tray or other appropriate mechanism.
2.6 OPTICAL FIBER COUPLERS/ADAPTERS
A. Optical Fiber Couplings (LCtype) (Multimode/Singlemode):
1. LC-type optical fiber couplings shall be used to terminate optical fiber backbone
cable on fiber distribution cabinet panels in communication equipment rooms.
Horizontal optical fiber cables shall also be terminated using optical fiber
couplings at their designated work area locations on information outlet faceplates
for "fiber to the desk."
2. LC-type optical fiber couplings shall be snap-type with locking washer and nut.
3. LC-type optical fiber couplings shall incorporate domed zirconia ferrule and shall
utilize a PC polish to ensure fiber-to-fiber physical contact for low loss and
reflections.
994
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 11 00 - 5 COMMUNICATION
EQUIPMENT ROOMS (CER)
4. LC-type optical fiber couplings shall accept 125-micron outside diameter
multimode fiber.
5. The attenuation per mated pair shall not exceed 0.7 dB (individual) and 0.5 dB
(average). Connectors shall sustain a minimum of 200 mating cycles per
TIA/EIA-455-21 without violating specifications.
6. LC-type optical fiber couplings shall meet the following performance criteria:
Test Procedure Maximum Attenuation
Change
Cable Retention (FOTP-6) 0.2 dB
Durability (FOTP-21) 0.2 dB
Impact (FOTP-2) 0.2 dB
Thermal Shock (FOTP-3) 0.2 dB
Humidity (FOTP-5) 0.2 dB
7. Performance Requirements:
a. Length: 2 inches
b. Operating Temperature: -40 to 85 degrees C
2.7 LADDER RACK
A. Provide complete ladder rack system including metallic ladder rack, splice connectors,
fastening hardware and other miscellaneous materials as required for a complete
installation per manufacturer's recommendations.
B. Tubing Style Ladder Rack:
1. Rolled steel siderail stringer, minimum 1.5" stringer height, 9" spaced welded
rungs.
2. Steel shall meet the requirements of ASTM A1011 SS Grade 33.
3. Loading limits shall be 185 lbs/ft for 4 ft spans.
C. Ladder rack finish shall be flat black powder coat.
2.8 D-RINGS
A. Rounded edge D-rings for support of cabling in vertical and horizontal configurations.
B. EIA 310D compliant, manufactured from materials meeting UL94-V0 specifications.
C. Provide 1/4" screw holes for wall mounting.
2.9 POWER STRIPS
A. Provide power strips on all equipment racks, unless noted otherwise. These power
strips shall have the following characteristics:
1. Standard Rack Mount:
a. TIA/EIA 19" equipment rack mountable.
995
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 11 00 - 6 COMMUNICATION
EQUIPMENT ROOMS (CER)
b. Compliant with UL-1449 Third Edition and UL-497A.
c. Provide transient suppression to 12,000-A. Protection shall be in all three
modes (line-neutral, line-ground and neutral-ground).
d. Shall meet or exceed ANSI C62 Category A3 requirements.
e. Provide high-frequency noise suppression as follows:
1) Greater than 20-dB @ 50 kHz
2) Greater than 40-dB @ 150 kHz
3) Greater than 80-dB @ 1 MHz
4) Greater than 30-dB @ 6 to 1000 MHz
f. Protection Modes and UL 1449 Clamping Voltage: 475 volt L-N, L-G, and
N-G.
g. Components: Nonmodular units composed of 20mm metal oxide varistors
(MOV). Series inductors, SAD, or selenium cells may be used in addition to
MOVs.
h. Be equipped with a 10-foot power cord.
2.10 COPPER PATCH CORDS
A. Modular Patch Panel:
1. Provide Category 6 copper patch cords for 50% of all assigned ports on the
modular patch panel. Of these cords, 60% shall be 3' in length and 40% shall be
5' in length. These patch cords shall be the cross-connect between the network
electronics and the horizontal RJ-45 modular patch panel. Copper patch cords
shall be equipped with a 4-pair RJ-45 connector on each end.
2. Refer to Section 27 15 00 for cable and connector performance requirements.
3. Patch cords shall not be made-up in the field.
2.11 FIBER PATCH CORDS
A. Optical Fiber Patch Cords (Multimode):
1. Provide 50/125 mm multimode (MM) optical fiber utilizing tight buffer construction
for 50% of all assigned ports on the fiber distribution cabinet. These patch cords
shall be the cross-connect between the backbone fiber distribution cabinet and
the Owner's network electronics (hub/switch). Optical fiber patch cords shall be
equipped with a ceramic tipped LC-type connector on each end and shall be a
minimum of 5 feet in length. Connector body shall be of materials similar to that
used in the proposed couplings. Provide required lengths as determined on the
plans.
2. Channels shall be of equal length.
3. Refer to Section 27 15 00 for cable and connector performance requirements.
B. Optical Fiber Patch Cords (Singlemode):
1. The optical fiber patch cord shall be 8.3/3 mm singlemode (SM) optical fiber,
utilizing tight buffer construction. The optical fiber patch cords shall be a
minimum of 5 feet in length.
996
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 11 00 - 7 COMMUNICATION
EQUIPMENT ROOMS (CER)
2. Provide 8.3/3 mm singlemode (SM) optical fiber utilizing tight buffer construction
for 50% of all assigned ports on the fiber distribution cabinet. These patch cords
shall be the cross-connect between the backbone fiber distribution cabinet and
the Owner's network electronics (hub/switch). Optical fiber patch cords shall be
equipped with a ceramic tipped LC-type connector on each end and shall be a
minimum of 5 feet in length. Connector body shall be of materials similar to that
used in the proposed couplings. Provide required lengths as determined on the
plans.
3. Channels shall be of equal length.
4. Refer to Section 27 15 00 for cable and connector performance requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EQUIPMENT RACKS
A. Equipment racks shall be furnished and installed as shown on the drawings.
B. The Contractor shall bolt the rack to the floor as recommended by the manufacturer.
Multiple racks shall be joined and the ground made common on each. The rack shall
be stabilized by extending a brace to the wall. Alternately, overhead ladder rack by
which the cabling accesses the equipment rack(s) may provide this function.
C. A space between the rack upright and the wall (approximately 4") should be provided
to allow for cabling in that area. The rear of the rack should be approximately 40" from
the wall to allow for access by maintenance personnel. In all cases, a minimum of 40"
workspace in front of the rack is also required. Locations where these guidelines
cannot be followed should be brought to the attention of the Architect/Engineer for
resolution prior to installation.
D. All hardware and equipment is to be mounted between 18" and 79" above floor level.
This is to afford easy access and, in the case of the lower limit, prevent damage to the
components. Positioning of hardware should be reviewed and approved by the
Architect/Engineer and Site Coordinator(s) prior to installation.
E. Equipment racks shall be equipped with cable management hardware as to allow an
orderly and secure routing of optical fiber and/or copper cabling to the optical fiber
distribution cabinets and/or modular patch panels. At minimum, one such horizontal
jumper management panel shall be placed below each optical fiber distribution cabinet
installed by the Contractor. Additional Jumper Management panels may be required
pending installation of other cable types on the equipment rack.
F. Each rack shall be grounded to the Telecommunications Ground Bar (GND) using a #6
AWG (or larger) insulated stranded copper conductor (GREEN jacket) directly or via
an adjacent grounded equipment rack. Refer to grounding requirements below.
3.2 LADDER RACK
A. Provide support for ladder rack on 4 ft centers.
B. Maintain a 1.5 safety factor on all load limits specified herein.
997
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 11 00 - 8 COMMUNICATION
EQUIPMENT ROOMS (CER)
C. Ladder rack support shall be by 5/8" diameter threaded rod when ceiling mounted.
Ladder rack requiring wall mounting shall utilize accessories supplied by the ladder
rack manufacturer specifically for the purpose of wall mounting ladder rack.
3.3 D-RINGS
A. Provide D-rings for cable routing and management in all areas where open cabling is
routed along the wall in an Equipment Room.
B. Locate D-rings on 24" centers vertically and horizontally.
C. Securely attach D-rings to the wall as required by the manufacturer.
3.4 GROUNDING
A. Provide a complete grounding system in accordance with the requirements of Section
27 05 26.
3.5 CROSS CONNECT INSTALLATION
A. Bend radius of cable shall not exceed 4 times the outside cable diameter or
manufacturer's recommendation, whichever is less.
B. Cables shall be neatly bundled and dressed to their respective panels and/or blocks.
Each shall be fed by an individual bundle separated and dressed to the point of cable
entrance into the rack and/or frame.
C. The cable jacket shall be maintained as close as possible to the termination point.
D. Each cable shall be clearly labeled on the cable jacket behind the patch panel at a
location that is visible without removing the bundle support.
3.6 OPTICAL FIBER TERMINATION
A. All fiber slack shall be neatly coiled within fiber splice enclosures or splice trays. No
slack loops shall be allowed external to the enclosure.
B. Each cable shall be individually attached to the respective fiber enclosure by
mechanical means. The cable strength member shall be securely attached to the cable
strain relief bracket in the enclosure.
C. Each cable shall be clearly labeled at the entrance to all enclosures.
D. A maximum of 12 strands shall be spliced in any tray.
3.7 CONDUITS AND CABLE ROUTING
A. Refer to Section 26 05 33 for additional requirements.
998
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 11 00 - 9 COMMUNICATION
EQUIPMENT ROOMS (CER)
B. Where conduits enter a telecommunications room, conduits shall be terminated on the
wall where shown on the contract documents. Conduits entering the room from the
floor shall extend 3" above the floor slab.
C. Where cabling rises vertically in a telecommunications rooms, provide vertical cable
management to support the cabling from floor to ceiling level.
D. All conduits shall be reamed and shall be installed with a nylon bushing.
E. Maintain appropriate conduit bend radius at all times. For conduits with an internal
diameter of 2" or less, maintain a bend radius of at least 6 times the internal diameter.
For conduits with an internal diameter greater than 2", maintain a bend radius of at
least 10 times the internal diameter.
END OF SECTION 27 11 00
999
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 13 00 - 1 BACKBONE CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 27 13 00
BACKBONE CABLING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section describes the products and execution requirements relating to furnishing
and installing backbone communications cabling and termination components and
related subsystems as part of a cabling plant. The cabling plant consists of both optical
fiber and/or copper cabling.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 27 05 00 - Basic Technology Systems Requirements.
B. Section 27 15 00 - Horizontal Cabling Requirements.
C. Section 27 17 20 - Structured Cabling System Warranty.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for relevant standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Under the provisions of Section 27 05 00 and Division 1, prior to the start of work the
Contractor shall submit:
1. Manufacturer's data covering all products proposed, including construction,
materials, ratings and all other parameters identified in Part 2 - Products, below.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. The basis of design is listed herein. Refer to Section 27 17 20 for additional acceptable
manufacturers.
2.2 OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE - INSIDE PLANT
A. Multimode (MM)/Singlemode (SM):
1. This optical fiber backbone cable shall be suitable for installation in building riser
systems, in conduit, in cable tray and/or in innerduct.
2. Optical fiber cable materials shall be all dielectric (no conductive material).
1000
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 13 00 - 2 BACKBONE CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
3. Optical fiber cable shall carry an OFNR (optical fiber non-conductive riser) or
OFNP (optical fiber non-conductive plenum) rating. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for
project requirements.
4. Optical fiber cable shall be interlocking armored cable.
5. Outer Sheath: The outer sheath shall be marked with the manufacturer's name,
date of manufacture, fiber type, flame rating, UL symbol, and sequential length
markings every two feet.
6. Temperature Range:
a. Storage: -40°C to +70°C (no irreversible change in attenuation).
b. Operating: -40°C to +70°C.
7. Humidity Range: 0% to 100%.
8. Maximum Tensile Strength (å? 12 fibers):
a. During Installation: 1332 N (300 lb. force) (no irreversible change in
attenuation).
b. Long-Term: 600 N (135 lb. force).
9. Maximum Tensile Strength (ä? 6 fibers):
a. During Installation: 1000 N (225 lb. force) (no irreversible change in
attenuation).
b. Long-Term: 100 N (67 lb. force).
10. Bending Radius:
a. During Installation: 20 times cable diameter.
b. No Load: 10 times cable diameter.
B. Optical fiber cables suitable for installation in multiple environments (e.g., underground
duct and building risers) may be used at the Contractor's option. Such optical fiber
cables shall meet all specifications noted above for cables designated for each
environment through which the optical fiber cable shall pass.
C. Basis of Design (OM3 Multimode):
1. CommScope
D. Basis of Design (Singlemode):
1. CommScope
E. Optical Fiber Pigtails (Multimode):
1. Single-fiber fiber optic pigtails shall be constructed from 50/125 µm multimode
(MM) optical fiber of the same grade as the multimode fiber optic backbone cable
utilizing tight buffer construction.
2. Fiber optic pigtails shall be factory terminated with a ceramic tipped LC-type
connector on one end and shall be a minimum of 5 feet (1.5m) in length or as
indicated on the drawings. Channels shall be of equal length.
1001
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 13 00 - 3 BACKBONE CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
3. Connector body shall be of materials similar to that used in the proposed
couplings. Refer to Section 27 15 00 for connector performance requirements.
4. Provide in quantity to terminate all backbone fiber optic cable strands on each
end.
5. Basis of Design:
a. Multimode Optical Fiber Pigtails shall be from the same manufacturer as
used for the fiber optic termination equipment.
F. Optical Fiber Pigtails (Singlemode):
1. Single-fiber fiber optic pigtails shall be constructed from singlemode (SM) optical
fiber of the same grade as the singlemode fiber optic backbone cable utilizing
tight buffer construction.
2. Fiber optic pigtails shall be factory terminated with a ceramic tipped LC-type
connector on one end and shall be a minimum of 5 feet (1.5m) in length or as
indicated on the drawings. Channels shall be of equal length.
3. Connector body shall be of materials similar to that used int he proposed
couplings. Refer to Section 27 15 00 for connector performance requirements.
4. Provide in quantity to terminate all backbone fiber optic cable strands on each
end.
5. Basis of Design:
a. Multimode Optical Fiber Pigtails shall be from the same manufacturer as
used for the fiber optic termination equipment.
G. Optical Fiber Connectors (LC-type) (Multimode/Singlemode):
1. LC-type Optical Fiber Connectors: Shall be used to terminate optical fiber in
communication equipment rooms.
2. LC-type optical fiber connector plugs shall be snap-type with an integrated pull-
proof design.
3. LC-type optical fiber connector plugs shall incorporate a zirconium ceramic
ferrule and shall utilize a factory pre-polish end face to ensure fiber-to-fiber
physical contact for low loss and reflections.
4. LC-type optical fiber connector plugs shall accept 1.6mm - 2.0mm and 3.0mm
outside diameter fiber.
5. The average insertion loss is 0.3db for multimode and single mode connectors
6. LC-type optical fiber connector plugs shall meet the following performance
criteria:
Test Procedure Maximum Attenuation Change
Cable Retention (FOTP-6) 0.2dB
Durability (FOTP-21) 0.2dB
Impact (FOTP-2) 0.2dB
Thermal Shock (FOTP-3) 0.2dB
Humidity (FOTP-5) 0.2dB
1002
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 13 00 - 4 BACKBONE CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
7. Additional Performance Requirements:
a. Length: 2.23 inches
b. Operating Temperature: -40 to 85 degrees C
8. Basis of Design:
a. Multimode Optical Fiber Pigtails shall be from the same manufacturer as
used for the fiber optic termination equipment.
2.3 OPTICAL FIBER BACKBONE PERFORMANCE
A. OM3 Multimode (MM):
1. Fiber Type: Multimode; doped silica core surrounded by a concentric glass
cladding.
2. Index Profile: Graded Index.
3. Transmission Windows: 850-nm and 1300-nm.
4. Core Diameter (nom): 50-èm (microns) ±± 2.5.
5. Cladding Diameter: 125-èm ±± 1.
6. Core-clad Concentricity: ä? 1.0-èm.
7. Cladding Non-circularity: ä? 1.0%.
8. Fiber Coating Diameter:
a. 245-èm ±± 10 (primary coating).
b. 900-èm (nominal) secondary coating (tight buffer)
c. All coatings shall be mechanically strippable without damaging the optical
fiber.
9. Attenuation (maximum @ 23 ±± 5°C; backbone):
a. @ 850-nm: 3.0 dB/km.
b. @ 1300-nm: 1.0 dB/km.
c. @ 1300-nm thru 1380-nm: 1.0dB/km
1) When tested in accordance with FOTP-3, "Procedure to Measure
Temperature Cycling Effects on Optical Fibers, Optical Cable, and
Other Passive Fiber Optic Components," the average change in
attenuation over the rated temperature range of the optical cable
shall not exceed 0.50 dB/km with 80% of the measured fibers not
exceeding 0.25 dB/km.
10. Bandwidth (minimum):
a. @ 850-nm: 2000 MHz*km.
b. @ 1300-nm: 500 MHz*km.
11. No optical fiber shall show a point discontinuity greater than 0.2 dB at the
specified wavelengths. Such a discontinuity or any discontinuity showing a
reflection at that point shall be cause for rejection of that optical fiber by the
Owner.
1003
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 13 00 - 5 BACKBONE CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
B. Singlemode (SM):
1. Fiber Type: Singlemode; doped silica core surrounded by a concentric glass
cladding.
2. Core Diameter: 8 to 9 µm. All optical fibers shall be of the same nominal core
diameter and profile.
3. Cladding Diameter: 125 ±± 1.0 µm.
4. Cladding Non-circularity: ä? 1%.
5. Core to Cladding Offset: ä? 0.8 µm.
6. Fiber Coating Diameter:
a. 245 ±± 15µm (primary coating).
b. 900-nm (nominal) secondary coating (tight buffer).
c. All coatings shall be mechanically strippable without damaging the optical
fiber.
7. Cut-off Wavelength (cabled fiber; ìccf) ä? 1260-nm.
8. Mode Field Diameter: 8.3 to 9.8 m at 1300-nm; 10.5 ±± 1.0 µm at 1550-nm.
9. Zero Dispersion Wavelength (ì0): 1301.5 nm less than l0 less than 1321.5 nm.
10. Zero Dispersion Slope (S0): Less than 0.092 ps/nm2*km.
11. Fiber Attenuation (maximum @ 23 ±± 5°C; Backbone):
a. @ 1300-nm: 2.0 dB/km
b. @ 1550-nm: 1.75 dB/km
1) When tested in accordance with FOTP-3, "Procedure to Measure
Temperature Cycling Effects on Optical Fibers, Optical Cable, and
Other Passive Fiber Optic Components," the average change in
attenuation over the rated temperature range of the optical fiber
cable shall not exceed 0.05 dB/km at 1550-nm. The magnitude of the
maximum attenuation change of each individual optical fiber shall not
be greater than 0.15 dB/km at 1550-nm.
12. Fiber Dispersion (maximum):
a. @ 1285 to 1330-nm: 3.2-ps/nm*km
b. @ 1550-nm: 18-ps/nm*km
13. No optical fiber shall show a point discontinuity greater than 0.1 dB at the
specified wavelengths. Such a discontinuity or any discontinuity showing a
reflection at that point shall be cause for rejection of that optical fiber by the
Owner.
1004
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 13 00 - 6 BACKBONE CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CABLE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Cable slack shall be provided in each backbone fiber optic cable. This slack is
exclusive of the length of fiber that is required to accommodate termination
requirements and is intended to provide for cable repair and/or equipment relocation.
The cable slack shall be stored in a fashion as to protect it from damage and be
secured in the termination enclosure or a separate enclosure designed for this
purpose. Multiple cables may share a common enclosure.
B. A minimum of 5 meters (approximately 15 feet) of slack cable (each cable if
applicable) shall be coiled and secured at both ends located in the entrance room,
Telecommunications Room or main equipment room, for backbone and intra-building
cable.
C. Where exposed, all backbone fiber optic cable shall be installed in protective inner
duct. This includes areas where the cable is routed in cable tray and where making a
transition between paths (e.g., between conduit and cable tray or into equipment
racks). The inner duct should extend into the termination and/or storage enclosure(s)
at system endpoints.
3.2 CROSS-CONNECTS
A. The Owner will be responsible for all cross-connects between the data backbone
cabling and network electronics and between the data network electronics and
horizontal cabling.
B. The Owner shall be responsible for the cross-connect wiring between the horizontal
and backbone voice cabling.
C. This Contractor shall be responsible for cross-connects between the cabling
terminations at the Entrance Room and the telephone utility network point-of-presence.
It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor, to work with the Owner and provide the
necessary assistance to allow Owner and/or telephone company personnel to make
the necessary connections to establish service on the new cable system. These
activities include, but are not limited to cross-connect documentation, general wiring
overview and cable pair identification.
END OF SECTION 27 13 00
1005
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 15 00 - 1 HORIZONTAL CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 27 15 00
HORIZONTAL CABLING REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section describes the products and execution requirements relating to furnishing
and installing horizontal communications cabling and termination components and
related subsystems as part of a cabling plant. The cabling plant consists of copper
cabling.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 27 05 00 - Basic Communications Systems Requirements
B. Section 27 17 20 - Structured Cabling System Warranty
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for relevant standards and plenum or non-plenum cable
requirements.
B. The channel shall be required to meet the performance requirements indicated herein.
The manufacturer shall warranty the performance of their system to the required
performance (and not just to the Standard, should the required performance exceed
the Standard).
C. Specific components of the channel shall be required, at a minimum, to meet the
Standard component requirements for that particular component.
D. The installing contractor must be certified by the manufacturer of the structured cabling
system.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Under the provisions of Section 27 05 00 and Division 1, prior to the start of work the
Contractor shall submit:
1. Manufacturer's data covering all products proposed, including construction,
materials, ratings and all other parameters identified in Part 2 - Products, below.
2. Manufacturer's installation instructions.
1006
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 15 00 - 2 HORIZONTAL CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 HORIZONTAL CABLE
A. CAT 6A Cable:
1. The horizontal cable requirements must be met, as well as the following channel
requirements.
2. CAT 6A cable shall terminate on rack-mounted modular patch panels in their
respective communication equipment room as indicated on the drawings.
3. Cable shall exceed transmission requirements listed in ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.2.
Performance tests shall be conducted using swept frequency testing through 500
MHz for the channel. All numbers given are for a 4-connection channel. Discrete
frequency testing results at 500 MHz is not acceptable.
4. Performance tests shall be conducted using swept frequency testing through 500
MHz for the channel. All numbers given are for a 4-connection channel. Discrete
frequency testing results at 500 MHz is not acceptable.
5. Performance data shall be provided by third-party independent testing
laboratories only. Testing data shall be submitted on the third-party testing
laboratory letterhead. Test data will only be accepted if it displays testing as a
channel. Electrical characteristics of the performance of the cable itself will not
satisfy this requirement.
6. The structured cabling and connectivity may be provided by the same company.
For the purpose of this specification that shall mean that the cabling and
connectivity must be marketed, branded, supported, warranted, and distributed
by the same company. Specifically, ally or partnerships between cabling
manufacturers and connectivity manufacturers do not meet this requirement
unless otherwise listed in Section 27 17 20 as an acceptable manufacturer.
Specifically, products made by others through an OEM relationship are
acceptable if the products are marketed, branded, supported, warranted, and
distributed by the same company.
7. The 4-connector channel performance margins in the table below shall be
guaranteed margins above ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-C.2:
Electrical Value
(1 - 500 MHz)
Minimum Margin
Insertion Loss: 3%
NEXT: 2 dB
PS NEXT: 3 dB
PSA NEXT: 3 dB
PSA NEXT (Average):
ACR-F: 2 dB
PS ACR-F: 3 dB
PSA ACR-F: 3 dB
PSA ACR-F (Average): 3 dB
Return Loss: 2 dB
1007
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 15 00 - 3 HORIZONTAL CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
8. The jacket color for CAT 6A cable shall be blue for all applications.
9. Basis of Design:
a. CommScope
2.2 FACEPLATES/JACKS
A. Cat 6A Jacks:
1. CAT 6A horizontal cable shall each be terminated at its designated work area
location on RJ-45 modular jacks. These modular jack assemblies shall snap into
a modular mounting frame. The combined modular jack assembly is referred to
as an information outlet.
2. The same orientation and positioning of modular jacks shall be utilized
throughout the installation. Prior to installation, the Contractor shall submit the
proposed configuration for each information outlet type for review by the
Architect/Engineer.
3. Information outlet faceplates shall incorporate recessed designation strips at the
top and bottom of the frame for identifying labels. Designation strips shall be
fitted with clear plastic covers.
4. Where standalone CAT 6A only modular jacks are identified, the information
outlet faceplate shall be configured as to allow for the addition of one (1)
additional modular jack to be installed to supplement each such modular jack as
defined by this project. The installation of these supplemental modular jacks is
NOT part of this project.
5. Any unused modular jack positions on an information outlet faceplate shall be
fitted with a removable blank inserted into the opening.
6. The information outlet faceplate shall be constructed of high impact plastic
(except where noted otherwise). The information outlet faceplate color shall:
a. Match the receptacle color used for other utilities in the building, or
b. When installed in surface raceway (if applicable), match the color of that
raceway.
7. Different faceplate and frame designs for locations, which include optical fiber
cabling relative to those, that terminate only copper cabling are acceptable.
Information outlets that incorporate optical fiber shall be compliant with the above
requirements plus:
a. Be a low-profile assembly.
b. Incorporate a mechanism for storage of cable and fiber slack needed for
termination.
c. Position the optical fiber couplings to face downward or at a downward
angle to prevent contamination.
d. Incorporate a shroud that protects the optical fiber couplings from impact
damage.
8. All information outlets and the associated modular jacks shall be of the same
manufacturer throughout the project.
9. The CAT 6A modular jacks shall be non-keyed 8-pin modular jacks.
1008
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 15 00 - 4 HORIZONTAL CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
10. The interface between the modular jack and the horizontal cable shall be an
angled insulation displacement type contact and shall provide separation for
ANEXT suppression. Termination components shall be designed to maintain the
horizontal cable's pair twists as closely as possible to the point of mechanical
termination.
11. CAT 6A modular jacks shall be pinned per TIA-568B.
12. CAT 6A termination hardware shall, as a minimum, meet all the mechanical and
electrical performance requirements of the following standards:
a. ANSI/TIA/EIA-568-B.2-10
b. IEEE 802.af (PoE)
c. IEEE 802.an 10GBASE-T
d. ISO/IEC 60603-7
e. ISO 11801 Class E Compliant
f. FCC PART 68.5 SUBPART F
13. The color for CAT 6A jacks shall be applications and blue for data applications.
2.3 COPPER WORK AREA CORDS
A. RJ-45:
1. Provide the same quantity of Category 6A copper work area cords as copper
patch panel cords specified in Section 27 11 00. Copper work area cords shall be
equipped with an 8-pin modular RJ-45 connector on each end.
2. Work area cords shall be 10' in length.
3. Manufacturer of copper patch cable shall be the same as the manufacturer of the
horizontal copper cable.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CABLE INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Horizontal Cabling:
1. The maximum horizontal cable drop length for Data UTP shall not exceed 295
feet (90 meters) in order to meet data communications performance
specifications. This length is measured from the termination panel in the wiring
closet to the outlet and must include any slack required for the installation and
termination. The Contractor is responsible for installing horizontal cabling in a
fashion so as to avoid unnecessarily long runs. Any area that cannot be reached
within the above constraints should be identified and reported to the
Architect/Engineer prior to installation. Changes to the contract documents shall
be approved by the Architect/Engineer.
2. All cable shall be free of tension at both ends. In cases where the cable must
bear some stress, Kellum grips may be used to spread the strain over a longer
length of cable.
3. Manufacturer's minimum bend radius specifications shall be observed in all
instances.
1009
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 15 00 - 5 HORIZONTAL CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
4. Horizontal cabling installed as open cabling shall be supported at a maximum of
5' between supports. Refer to the specifications for required cable supports.
5. Horizontal cabling installed as open cable or in cable tray shall be bundled at not
less than 10' intervals with hook-and-loop tie wraps. The use of plastic cable ties
is strictly prohibited.
6. The maximum conduit fill for horizontal cabling shall not exceed 40% regardless
of conduit length.
7. Cable sheaths shall be protected from damage from sharp edges. Where a cable
passes over a sharp edge, a bushing or grommet shall be used to protect the
cable.
B. A coil of 3 feet in each cable shall be placed in the ceiling at the last support (e.g., J-
hook, bridle ring, etc.) before the cables enter a fishable wall, conduit, surface raceway
or box. At any location where cables are installed into movable partition walls or
modular furniture via a service pole, approximately 15-feet of slack shall be left in each
horizontal cable under 250 feet in length to allow for change in the office layout without
re-cabling. These "service loops" shall be secured at the last cable support before the
cable leaves the ceiling and shall be coiled from 100% to 200% of the cable
recommended minimum bend radius.
1. Category 6A cables shall not be mixed with any other category cable in any
bundle. Bundles of Category 6A cable shall maintain a 0.5" separation from
bundles of cables containing different categories (e.g., Cat 6, Cat 5E).
2. To reduce or eliminate EMI, the following minimum separation distances from
480V power lines shall be adhered to:
a. Twelve (12) inches from power lines of less than 5-kVa.
b. Eighteen (18) inches from high-voltage lighting (including fluorescent).
c. Thirty-nine (39) inches from power lines of 5-kVa or greater.
d. Thirty-nine (39) inches from transformers and motors.
3. Information outlets shown on floor plans with the subscript "W" are intended to be
used for wall mounted telephones. Back boxes for wall mounted telephones shall
not be located within 12" vertically, or horizontally, from any light switches, power
receptacles, nurse call devices, thermostats, or any other architectural element
that would otherwise prevent the installation of a wall mounted telephone on the
mating lugs.
C. Horizontal Cabling in Modular Furniture:
1. This Contractor shall be responsible for providing and installing cable completely
to the information outlet in the furniture. This Contractor's responsibility does not
end at the furniture feed point.
2. Where furniture panels are installed to include contact with a wall, cabling shall
be fed to the furniture panels via conduit.
3. Cabling shall be protected in the transition from the floor or wall fittings to the
modular furniture via a length of flexible plastic conduit or other approved
protective means. Conduit fittings shall be compatible with the Floor and Wall
Fittings proposed. There shall be no exposed cable in the transition to the
modular furniture. Fill ratio (cable area vs. conduit area) in each feed shall not
exceed 40%.
1010
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 15 00 - 6 HORIZONTAL CABLING
REQUIREMENTS
4. For purposes of bidding, it is to be assumed that the cable pathway shall be
limited to the bottom panel of the modular furniture only. Communications cables
would be run through these channels to the jack location.
5. For purposes of bidding, it is to be assumed that it will be the responsibility of the
Contractor to punch and reinstall the bottom molding panels on the modular
furniture as required to accommodate the communications cabling and
information outlets. The panels shall be marked prior to installation by the Owner
to identify the desired location of the information outlets.
6. The information outlet shall be secured to the panel via mounting tabs, pop-
rivets, screws or other approved method. Use of adhesive tape is not acceptable.
The method of securing the information outlet to the panel shall not result in
sharp protrusions (e.g., sheet metal screw tip) into the channel behind the panel.
3.2 CABLE TERMINATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Cable Terminations - Data UTP:
1. Modular patch panels shall be designed and installed in a fashion as to allow
future horizontal cabling to be terminated on the panel without disruption to
existing connections.
2. If the "last" patch (per rack) is greater than 50% utilized, one additional patch
panel shall be provided for future use.
3. At information outlets and modular patch panels, the Contractor shall ensure that
the twists in each cable pair are preserved to within 0.5-inch of the termination for
data cables. The cable jacket shall be removed only to the extent required to
make the termination.
END OF SECTION 27 15 00
1011
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 17 10 - 1 TESTING
SECTION 27 17 10
TESTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. This section describes the testing requirements relating to the structured cabling
system and its termination components and related subsystems.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 27 05 00 - Basic Communications Systems Requirements
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for relevant standards.
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Under the provisions of Section 27 05 00 and Division 1, prior to the start of work, the
Contractor shall submit:
1. Complete information on testing procedure as described herein.
2. Test plan summary for each cable type to be tested including equipment to be
used, setup, test frequencies or wavelengths, results format, etc.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TESTING COPPER
A. General Requirements:
1. Perform acceptance tests as indicated below for each sub-system (e.g.,
backbone, horizontal, etc.) as it is completed.
2. Supply all equipment and personnel necessary to conduct the acceptance tests.
The method of testing shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer.
3. Visually inspect all cabling and termination points to ensure that they are
complete and conform to the wiring pattern defined herein. Provide the
Architect/Engineer with a written certification that this inspection has been made.
4. Conduct acceptance testing according to a schedule coordinated with the
Owner/Architect/Engineer. Representatives of the Owner may be in attendance
to witness the test procedures. Provide a minimum of one (1) week's advance
notice to the Architect/Engineer to allow for such participation. The notification
shall include a written description of the proposed conduct of the tests, including
copies of blank test result sheets to be used.
1012
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 17 10 - 2 TESTING
5. Tests related to connected equipment of others shall only be done with the
permission and presence of the Contractor involved. The Contractor shall
ascertain that testing only is required to prove the wiring connections are correct.
6. Provide test results and describe the conduct of the tests including the date of
the tests, the equipment used, and the procedures followed. At the request of the
Architect/Engineer, provide copies of the original test results in their native
format.
7. All cabling shall be 100% fault-free unless noted otherwise. If any cable is found
to be outside the specification defined herein, that cable and the associated
termination(s) shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor. The applicable
tests shall then be repeated.
8. Should it be found by the Architect/Engineer that the materials or any portion
thereof furnished and installed under this Contract fail to comply with the
specifications and drawings with respect or regard to the quality, amount, or
value of materials, appliances, or labor used in the work, it shall be rejected and
replaced by the Contractor and all work disturbed by changes necessitated in
consequence of said defects or imperfections shall be made good at the
Contractor's expense.
a. CAT 6A Cable:
1) Testing shall be from the modular jack at the information outlet to the
modular patch panel in the communication equipment room.
2) Horizontal cable shall be free of shorts within the pairs and be
verified for continuity, pair validity and polarity, and conductor
position on the modular jack (e.g., wire map). Any defective, split, or
mis-positioned pairs must be identified and corrected.
3) CAT 6A horizontal cable shall be tested to 500 MHz as defined by
TIA/EIA-568-C.2. Measurements shall be of the "Channel Link",
including patch cords, cabling and modular jacks at the information
outlet and modular patch panel. Parameters to be tested must
include:
a) Wire Map
b) Length
c) NEXT Loss (Pair-to-Pair)
d) NEXT (Power Sum)
e) ELFEXT (Pair-to-Pair)
f) ELFEXT (Power Sum)
g) Return Loss
h) Attenuation
i) Propagation Delay
j) Delay Skew
4) The maximum length of horizontal cable shall not exceed 295 feet,
which allows 33 feet for technology equipment and modular patch
cords.
1013
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 17 10 - 3 TESTING
5) To establish testing baselines, cable samples of known length and of
the cable type and lot installed shall be tested. The cable may be
terminated with an eight-position CAT 6A modular connector (8-pin)
to facilitate testing. Nominal Velocity of Propagation (NVP) and
nominal attenuation values shall be calculated based on this test and
be used during the testing of the installed cable plant. This
requirement can be waived if NVP and nominal attenuation data is
available from the cable manufacturer for the exact cable type under
test.
6) CAT 6A horizontal cable testing shall be performed using a test
instrument designed for testing to 500 MHz or higher. Test records
shall verify "PASS" on each cable and display the specified
parameters, comparing test values with standards based "templates"
integral to the unit. Test records that report a PASS*, FAIL*, or FAIL
result for any of the parameters will not be accepted.
7) In the event results of the tests are not satisfactory, the Contractor
shall make adjustments, replacements, and changes as necessary
and shall then repeat the test or tests that disclosed faulty or
defective material, equipment, or installation methods, and shall
make additional tests as the Architect/Engineer deems necessary at
no additional expense to the project or user agency.
2.2 TESTING FIBER
A. General Requirements:
1. Perform acceptance tests as indicated below for each optical fiber sub-system
(e.g., backbone, horizontal, etc.) as it is completed.
2. Supply all equipment and personnel necessary to conduct the acceptance tests.
The method of testing shall be approved by the Architect/Engineer.
3. Visually inspect all optical fiber cabling and termination points to ensure that they
are complete and conform to the standards defined herein. Provide the
Architect/Engineer with a written certification that this inspection has been made.
4. Conduct acceptance testing according to a schedule coordinated with the
Owner/Architect/Engineer. Representatives of the Owner may be in attendance
to witness the test procedures. Provide a minimum of one (1) week's advance
notice to the Architect/Engineer to allow for such participation. The notification
shall include a written description of the proposed conduct of the tests, including
copies of blank test result sheets to be used.
5. Tests related to connected equipment of others shall only be done with the
permission and presence of the Contractor involved. The Contractor shall
ascertain that testing only is required to prove that the optical fiber connections
are correct.
6. Provide test results and describe the conduct of the tests including the date of
the tests, the equipment used and the procedures followed. At the request of the
Architect/Engineer, provide copies of the original test results.
7. All optical fiber cabling shall be 100% fault-free unless noted otherwise. If any
optical fiber cable is found to be outside the specification defined herein, that
optical fiber cable and the associated connector(s) shall be replaced at the
expense of the Contractor. The applicable tests shall then be repeated.
1014
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 17 10 - 4 TESTING
8. Should it be found by the Architect/Engineer that the materials or any portion
thereof furnished and installed under this Contract fail to comply with the
specifications and drawings with respect or regard to the quality, amount, or
value of materials, appliances, or labor used in the work, it shall be rejected and
replaced by the Contractor and all work disturbed by changes necessitated in
consequence of said defects or imperfections shall be made good at the
Contractor's expense.
9. The optical fibers utilized in the installed cable shall be traceable to the
manufacturer. Upon request by the Owner, provide cable manufacturer's test
report for each reel of cable provided. These test reports shall include
manufacturer's on-reel attenuation test results at 850-nm and 1300-nm for each
optical fiber of each reel prior to shipment from the manufacturer.
a. On-the-reel bandwidth performance as tested at the factory. Factory data
shall be provided upon request.
b. The testing noted for optical fiber cabling utilizes an Optical Time Domain
Reflectometer (OTDR). However, the Contractor may submit to the
Architect/Engineer for pre-approval of alternate fiber optic testing
equipment.
B. Tests Prior to Installation: The Contractor, at their discretion and at no cost to the
Owner, may perform an attenuation test with an OTDR at 850-nm or 1300-nm on each
optical fiber of each cable reel prior to installation. Supply this test data to the
Architect/Engineer prior to installation.
C. Tests After Installation: Upon completion of cable installation and termination, the
optical fiber cabling shall be tested to include:
1. Optical Attenuation ("Insertion Loss" Method):
a. Optical Attenuation shall be measured on all terminated optical fibers in one
direction of transmission using the "Insertion Loss" method measurement in
accordance with the TIA/EIA 526-14, Method B, and be inclusive of the
optical connectors and couplings installed at the system endpoints. Access
jumpers shall be used at both the transmit and receive ends to ensure that
an accurate measurement of connector losses is made. Multimode optical
fibers shall be tested at 850 ±± 30 nm. Singlemode optical fibers (if
applicable) shall be tested at 1300 ±± 20 nm.
b. Attenuation of optical fibers shall not exceed the values calculated as follows:
1) Attenuation (max.) = 2*C+L*F+S dB.
2)Where C is the maximum allowable Connector Loss (in dB), L is the
length of the run (in kilometers), and F is the maximum allowable
optical fiber loss (in dB/km). S is the total splice loss (# of splices *
maximum attenuation per splice).
1015
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 17 10 - 5 TESTING
2. Verification of Link Integrity (OTDR):
a. All optical fibers shall be documented in one direction of transmission using
an Optical Time Domain Reflectometer (OTDR). Multimode optical fibers
shall be tested at 850-nm and 1300-nm (nominal). Singlemode optical
fibers (if applicable) shall be tested at 1310-nm and 1550-nm (nominal).
The OTDR(s) shall incorporate high-resolution optics optimized for viewing
of short cable sections. Access jumpers of adequate length to allow viewing
of the entire length of the cable, including the connectors at the launch and
receive end, shall be used. Access jumpers used for testing shall match the
type and core diameter of the fiber optic strand under test.
b. Set OTDR's test variables to the manufacturer's published backscatter
coefficient and velocity of propagation figure for the specific strand of fiber
under test. OTDR's range should be set to approximately 1.5 times the
length of the strand under test, pulse width should be optimized for the
length of the fiber optic strand under test, and number of averages should
be adjusted to approximately 120 seconds per wavelength.
c. OTDR traces revealing a point discontinuity greater than 0.2 dB in a
multimode optical fiber or 0.1 dB in a singlemode optical fiber (if applicable)
at any of the tested wavelengths or any discontinuity showing a reflection at
that point shall be a valid basis for rejection of that optical fiber by the
Owner. The installation of that optical fiber cable shall be reviewed in an
effort to remove any external stress that may be causing the fault. If such
efforts do not remove the fault, that optical fiber cable and the associated
terminations shall be replaced at the expense of the Contractor.
2.3 DOCUMENTATION/AS-BUILTS/RECORDS
A. General:
1. Upon completion of the installation, submit as-builts per the requirements of
Section 27 05 00 and Division 1. Documentation shall include the items detailed
in the subsections below.
2. All documentation, including hard copy and electronic forms, shall become the
property of the Owner.
3. The Architect/Engineer may request that a 10% random field retest be conducted
on the cable system at no additional cost to verify documented findings. Tests
shall be a repeat of those defined above. If findings contradict the documentation
submitted by the Contractor, additional testing can be requested to the extent
determined necessary by the Architect/Engineer, including a 100% retest. This
retest shall be at no additional cost to the Owner.
B. Copper Media Test Data:
1. Test results shall include a record of test frequencies, cable type, conductor pair
and cable (or Outlet) I.D., measurement direction, test equipment type, model
and serial number, date, reference setup, and crew member name(s).
1016
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 17 10 - 6 TESTING
2. Printouts generated for each cable by the wire test instrument shall be submitted
as part of the documentation package. The Contractor shall furnish this
information in electronic form (USB thumb drive). The thumb drive shall contain
the electronic equivalent of the test results as defined by the bid specification and
be in the tester's native format as well as summaries of each test in pdf format.
Provide a licensed copy of the software required to view and print the data that is
provided in a proprietary format. Furnish one (1) copy of the data and display (if
applicable) software.
C. Optical Fiber Media Test Data:
1. Test results shall include a record of test wavelengths, cable type, fiber and cable
(or Outlet) I.D., measurement direction, test equipment type, model and serial
number, date, reference setup, and crew member name(s).
2. OTDR traces of individual optical fiber "signatures" obtained as specified above
shall be provided to the Architect/Engineer in electronic form for review. Trace
files shall be so named as to identify each individual optical fiber by location in
the cable system and optical fiber number or color. Where traces are provided in
electronic form, provide along with the above documentation, one (1) licensed
copy of software that will allow for the display of OTDR traces provided. The
software shall run on a Microsoft Windows-based personal computer.
D. Record Drawings:
1. The drawings are to include cable routes and outlet locations. Outlet locations
shall be identified by their sequential number as defined elsewhere in this
document. Numbering, icons, and drawing conventions used shall be consistent
throughout all documentation provided.
PART 3 - EXECUTION (Not Used)
END OF SECTION 27 17 10
1017
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 1 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
SECTION 27 41 00
PROFESSIONAL AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. System Components
B. Audio Connectors
C. Audio Cabling
D. Video Connectors
E. Analog Video Cabling
F. Digital Video Cabling
G. Control Cabling
H. Horizontal Copper and Fiber Cabling and Connectors
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 05 33 - Conduit
B. Section 26 05 13 - Wire and Cable
C. Section 27 05 00 - Basic Communications Requirements
D. Section 27 05 26 - Communications Bonding
E. Section 27 05 03 - Through Penetration Firestopping
F. Section 27 11 00 - Communication Equipment Rooms
G. Section 27 05 28 - Interior Communications Pathway
H. Section 27 15 00 - Horizontal Cabling Requirements
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: The manufacturer of equipment shall have a complete service
organization for all products in the manufacturer's line.
1018
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 2 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
B. Integrator/Dealer: The Contractor shall be a factory-authorized and certified
integrator/dealer specializing in each selected manufacturer's products, with
demonstrated prior experience with the selected manufacturer's system installation
and programming.
C. The following qualifications have been endorsed by the AudioVisual and Integrated
Experience Association (AVIXA), which is formerly known as InfoComm International.
1. The Contractor shall have a Certified Technology Specialist with a specialized
Installation endorsement (CTS-I) and or a Certified Technology Specialist with a
specialized Design endorsement (CTS-D) on staff and supervising the project.
D. Control System Dealer: The media control system shall be provided, terminated,
installed, and programmed by a factory-authorized and certified dealer and integrator
in good standing with the manufacturer. The dealer shall have direct purchasing and
support authority. These services shall not be subcontracted.
E. Control System Programmer: The media control system shall be programmed by a
factory-trained and certified programmer.
1. Should the installer of the system not employ a factory-trained and certified
programmer, a representative from the equipment manufacturer or certified
independent programmer shall be retained for programming services. The
Contractor shall be responsible for payment of his/her services until the job is
complete and signed off.
2. The Contractor shall have all certifications required by the manufacturer(s) for the
installed system components on staff for the appropriate duties and
responsibilities required by the manufacturer.
a. The control system programmer shall have all refresher courses completed
for the latest features of the control platform prior to bidding the project to
ensure that the Contractor is up to date with the latest software features.
3. The Contractor shall be fluent in the control systems preferred language (e.g.,
Python, C#, Java, JavaScript, SQL, PHP, etc.) required to complete the
programing requirements of the AV system.
a. Other languages may be required to integrate with other systems, such as
the HVAC and lighting system. The Contractor shall coordinate the
programming services with the on-site contractor for the integrated system.
The Contractor shall hire the services of a certified contractor to program
these other systems as required by the manufacturer of these other
systems.
F. Audio System Programmer: All digital sound processing equipment (DSP) used on the
project shall be setup, programmed and calibrated by a factory-trained and certified
technician. The audio system programmer shall have the following complementary
certifications:
1. Associated manufacturer certifications
1019
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 3 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
G. Video System Programmer: All video distribution and processing used on the project
shall be setup, programmed and calibrated by a factory-trained and certified
technician.
H. The Contractor shall have acquired and maintained all certifications for a minimum of
one (1) month prior to the posted bid date of this project.
I. Servicing Contractor: The installer must be factory certified to provide service on the
installed manufacturer's equipment and must have local service representatives within
a 100 mile radius of the project site.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ADA - Americans with Disabilities Act
B. ADAAG - Americans with Disability Accessibility Guidelines
C. ANSI - American National Standards Institute
D. AVIXA - Audiovisual and Integrated Experience Association (Formerly InfoComm)
E. ANSI/InfoComm A102.01:2017 - Audio Coverage Uniformity
F. ANSI/InfoComm 2M-2010 - Standard Guide for Audiovisual Systems Design and
Coordination Processes
G. ANSI/InfoComm F501.01:2015 - Cable Labeling for Audiovisual Systems
H. ANSI/InfoComm 10:2013 - Audiovisual Systems Performance Verification
I. ANSI/AVIXA V202.01:2016 - Display Image Size for 2D Content in Audiovisual
Systems
J. ANSI/InfoComm 3M-2011 - Projected Image System Contrast Ratio
K. IBC - International Building Code
L. IEC - International Electrotechnical Commission
M. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
N. UL 813 - Commercial Audio Equipment
O. UL 1419 - Professional Video and Audio Equipment
P. UL 1480 - Speakers for Fire Alarm, Emergency, and Commercial and Professional
Use
Q. UL 1492 - Audio/Video Products and Accessories
R. CBC - California Building Code (Current Version)
1020
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 4 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 27 05 00.
B. General Requirements:
1. Submittals will be submitted in multiple passes over the course of construction.
Each pass will be a dedicated single submission for review as outlined in the
general submittal requirements outlined in section 27 05 00.
2. Upon acceptance of an item in the submittal, the Contractor shall remove them
from future resubmittals of the same submittal "pass".
3. Should the Contractor not provide shop drawings in a timely fashion, not
complete requirements, or extend the time of any resubmittals so as to
jeopardize schedules, cause delay, or limit access for field work, the Contractor
bears responsibility for impact and delay that may occur. This includes access or
lift to overhead positions and associated protection of work already in place.
C. First Pass Submittals: To be submitted after the project is awarded but before
equipment is submitted, purchased and installed.
1. Contractor(s) resume of qualifications.
2. All certifications shall be current and valid. Any certificate with expired dates will
not be accepted.
3. All applicable AudioVisual and Integrated Experience Association (AVIXA)
certifications. Qualifications from InfoComm that have not expired will be
accepted.
4. All certifications outlined in the qualifications shall be included in this submittal.
Refer to the qualifications section for additional information. Certifications
include, but are not limited to:
a. All installed manufacturer certifications required by the manufacturer.
b. Control system authorized dealer certification.
c. Control system certified programmer certification(s).
d. Audio system DSP dealer certification.
e. Audio system DSP programmer certification.
f. Professional audio components dealer certification(s).
g. Video system dealer certification(s).
h. All other applicable dealer, installation and programming certifications.
i. All applicable networking certifications.
5. If an alternate manufacturer(s) is submitted, the equivalent certifications to the
basis of design manufacturer(s) shall be required and submitted.
6. Audio and video calibration equipment certifications.
7. Audio and video testing and calibration equipment and software procedures and
manufacturer-specific equipment calibration certificates.
D. Second Pass Submittals: To be submitted after all initial submittals have been
approved but before equipment is purchased, installed, configured, and programmed.
This can be submitted with the first pass submittal but will require to be submitted as a
separate document.
1021
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 5 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
1. Alternate System Drawings: If an approved alternate manufacturer is submitted,
the Contractor shall provide project-specific system CAD drawings. These will be
required to be submitted with the product data.
a. Provide a system block diagram noting system components and
interconnection between components. The interconnection of components
shall clearly indicate all wiring required in the system. When multiple pieces
of equipment are required in the exact same configuration (e.g., multiple
identical controllers), the diagram may show one device and refer to the
others as "typical" of the device shown.
2. Product Data: Provide manufacturer's technical product specification sheet for
each individual component type. Submitted data shall show the following:
a. Compliance with each requirement of these documents.
b. All component options and accessories specific to this project.
c. Electrical power consumption rating and voltage.
d. Wiring requirements.
e. Pre-terminated cable distances and requirements identified by each room
where required.
f. Product manuals are not an acceptable format and will be rejected.
E. Final Pass Submittals: To be submitted after all initial submittals have been approved
but before the equipment is installed, configured and programmed. These should not
be submitted until after the pre-installation meeting outlined in Part 3.
1. System Drawings: Project-specific system drawings shall be provided as follows:
a. Provide a system block diagram noting system components and
interconnection between components. The interconnection of components
shall clearly indicate all wiring required in the system. When multiple pieces
of equipment are required in the exact same configuration (e.g., multiple
identical controllers), the diagram may show one device and refer to the
others as "typical" of the device shown.
b. Submittals shall contain shop drawings indicating physical plan locations
and placement of installed devices and accessories with associated scope
or field conditions for review and coordination. Provide mounting details,
suspensions, and rough-in notes with trade demarcations.
1) Identify any non-standard back boxes or mounting assembly required
by product or specifications and elaborate contractor means and
methods for mounting.
2) Provide rack drawing(s) showing the mounting of equipment in each
rack or cabinet on the project. Racks should be numbered and
coordinated with all relevant trades sharing rack space.
3) All display mounts shall be coordinated with the Architect to verify the
exact vertical and horizontal positioning of the display. Coordinate in-
wall stud locations for installation of recessed display mounts to
install in the exact location as coordinated with the architectural
drawings.
1022
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 6 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
4) Projector mounts, projector screens, recessed ceiling speakers, in-
ceiling microphones, and all other above ceiling devices shall be
coordinated with other trades in the field (e.g., mechanical ductwork,
lights, diffusers, etc.) to minimize changes that will impact the
performance of the system design.
c. Submit wiring and cable path requirements, including field wiring, path
verification, signal separation, and outside diameter of cables for conduit
sizing and verification that can be used for field installation and electrical
coordination.
d. Reproduction of contract documents is not acceptable for submittals. Wire
CAD type drawings and cable tag lists or schedules, or typical
manufacturer's abbreviated single lines alone, are not complete.
2. The Contractor shall submit graphic or emulated representations of the control
system touch panels for each unique space and layout prior to purchase,
installation and programming for review and comment by the Architect/Engineer
and Owner. These shall show and describe the intended programming/macro
control features and functions of each button/icon for all pages.
3. The Contractor shall submit graphic or emulated representations of the control
system keypads for each unique space and layout prior to purchase, installation
and programming for review and comment by the Architect/Engineer and Owner.
These shall show and describe the intended programming/macro control features
and functions of each button/knob.
4. The Contractor shall submit the actual DSP audio processor files or single line
audio path file diagram prior to installation for review and comment by the
Architect/Engineer. Provide preliminary settings with processor blocks identified
and note resources allocated.
5. The Contractor shall submit the number of IP addresses, VLANS, and
subnetworks that will be required from the Owner's Information Systems
Department.
6. Submit meeting agenda for planning/programming meetings as required in Part 3
of this specification.
7. Submit detailed description of Owner training to be conducted at project end,
including specific training times and typical attendees expected.
8. Provide rack drawing(s) showing the mounting of equipment in each rack or
cabinet on the project. Rack drawings shall include the following:
a. Equipment placement including mounting on the front or rear of the rack.
b. Spacing separation as required by equipment for adequate airflow and heat
dissipation.
c. Signal separation based on AVIXA standards as required by the design.
d. Heating/cooling load requirements for submitted equipment to verify the
heating/cooling load of the rack. This shall include Owner-provided
equipment coordinated with the Owner.
e. Power requirements for each rack including plug type and loads based on
the final approved products.
9. A console and equipment rack plan shall be provided showing console,
countertop, rough-in, cable paths, and wall plates with dimensions in plan view
and elevation. The plan shall include equipment layout within the console and
rack.
1023
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 7 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
10. Submit the detailed engineered and coordinated mounting solution(s) for wall-
mounted and ceiling-mounted devices including the following items:
a. Surface-mounted and/or flown loudspeakers.
b. Video displays including blocking or ceiling span requirements, height from
finished floor, and back box location.
11. If an alternate loudspeaker design is going to be utilized, the Contractor shall
submit the following sets of calculations:
a. EASE Calculations:
1) All calculations shall be completed at a minimum patch size
resolution of 1.00ft at 1/3 octave, 35ms split time, and shown with
Summed Interference and Map with Shadow turned on. The
calculations shall be submitted electronically as EASE OpenGL
(*.egl) files. The Contractor shall also provide a copy of the latest
version of the EASE GLL viewer to view the electronic EASE files.
2) Provide coverage maps (print or pdf) for each main loudspeaker and
combined composite of all main loudspeakers as Direct SPL at 500
Hz, 1000 Hz, 2000 Hz, 4000 Hz, 8000 Hz, and three octave mid-
band sum centered at 2000 Hz.
3) Articulation Loss of Consonants (ALCons).
4) Calculated Speech Transmissible Index (STI) using the Modulation
Transfer Index (MTI) with noise levels.
5) The Contractor shall use the latest version of EASE.
6) The Contractor shall refer to the architectural drawings and
specifications for room geometry, room dimensions and surface
finishes.
7) The Contractor shall use a listener sitting height of four (4) feet for
rooms where the primary function will be sitting. The Contractor shall
utilize a listener standing height of five feet three inches (5.25') for
rooms where the primary function will be standing.
8) The Contractor shall use a standard indoor temperature of 68°°F,
60% humidity and a standard pressure of 29.8 Hg, unless more
specific data is available.
9) The Contractor shall submit packed electronic EASE files or an
EASE generated list of materials and room data for review and
approval by the Architect/Engineer.
F. Discontinued Products and New Model Releases:
1. For each product, the Contractor shall submit (in addition to the specified
product) a product cut sheet if the specified product has been replaced, improved
upon, phased out or otherwise upgraded at the time of shop drawing submittal.
a. The intent of this requirement is for the Contractor to submit only direct
replacements for the specified products. A direct replacement shall be
defined as a product of newer release that has equal or greater capabilities,
which is available for not more than a 10% premium over the specified
product's bid unit cost.
1024
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 8 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
b. It is not the intent of this requirement for the Contractor to submit new
products or other product options that significantly differ in capability and/or
cost from the specified product.
G. Coordination Drawings:
1. Include all ceiling-mounted devices in composite electronic coordination files.
Refer to Section 27 05 00 for coordination drawing requirements.
2. Coordinate with owner provided Broadcast System drawings, layouts and single-
line functionals.
1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. This specification section describes the furnishing, installation, commissioning and
programming of audio/video components and systems.
B. Performance Statement: This specification section and the accompanying Contract
Documents are performance based, describing the minimum material quality, required
features, and operational requirements of the system. These documents do not convey
every wire that must be installed, every equipment connection that must be made and
every feature and function that must be programmed and configured. Based on the
equipment constraints described and the performance required of the system, as
presented in these documents, the Vendor and the Contractor are solely responsible
for determining all wiring, programming and miscellaneous equipment required for a
complete and operational system.
C. This document describes the major components of the system. All additional
hardware, subassemblies, supporting equipment and other miscellaneous equipment
required for proper system installation and operation shall be provided by the
Contractor.
D. This document describes the major programming features and functions of the system.
All additional programming, configuration and integration required for proper system
installation and operation shall be provided by the Contractor.
E. When a specific manufacturer is not provided in this document for minor pieces of
equipment, the Contractor shall provide only those materials considered to be of the
same industry commercial and professional quality level as the major equipment
manufacturers. Owner shall determine if item is of comparable quality.
F. General System Description:
1. The purpose of this section is to define the overall AV system requirements for
each space identified on the project drawings. This is to represent the end-user
needs, applications, tasks and Functions and features for each space to assist
with identifying programing requirements for each space.
G. Room Type Requirements:
1. Council Chamber
a) System on/off
1025
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 9 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
b) Audio and/or video source and destination selection
c) Audio level
d) Source on/off
e) Codec functions such as dialup, address book, etc.
f) Speaker timer
g) Voting control
h) System on/off
i) Audio and/or video source and destination selection
j) Audio level
k) Source on/off
2. Conference Room (Room 201):
a. The large conference system shall provide support for videoconferences as
well as presentations and meetings. This room should also be able to serve
as overflow for Council Meetings.
b. System Requirements:
1) Provide in-room display of video sources including local inputs,
Council inputs, a Blu-ray player and video conferencing codec.
2) Provide the capability for the display of temporary video sources
connected through an auxiliary input panel in the table.
3) Provide ceiling-mounted array microphones for audio input to the
videoconferencing codec.
4) Provide a PTZ video camera for video input to the videoconferencing
codec.
5) Provide flat panel display mounted on the front wall of the room as
the primary display device.
6) Provide ceiling loudspeakers and associated electronics to
reproduce the mono or summed-stereo to mono audio signal.
7) Provide a control system with touch screen control panel.
8) The control system to provide control for:
a) System on/off
b) Audio and/or video source and destination selection
c) Audio level
d) Source on/off
e) Codec functions such as camera control, dialup, address book,
etc.
9) Provide portable ALS system compliant with 2013 CBC 11B-219 and
11B-706, signage compliant with 2013 CBC 11B-216.10, and two (2)
receivers, one of which shall be hearing aid compatible.
10) Mount equipment in owner furnished credenza with integrated
equipment rack.
3. Conference Room (Room 134):
a. The conference system shall provide support for presentations and
meetings. This room should also be able to serve as overflow for Council
Meetings.
b. Systems Description:
1026
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 10 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
1) Provide in-room display of local and Council video sources.
2) Provide the capability for the display of temporary video sources .
3) Provide panel display mounted on the front wall of the room as the
primary display device.
4) Provide ceiling loudspeakers and associated electronics to
reproduce the mono or summed-stereo to mono audio signal.
5) Provide a control system with touch screen control panel.
6) The control system to provide control for:
a) System on/off
b) Audio and/or video source and destination selection
c) Audio level
d) Source on/off
e) Codec functions such as camera control, dialup, address book,
etc.
7) Provide portable ALS system compliant with 2013 CBC 11B-219 and
11B-706, signage compliant with 2013 CBC 11B-216.10, and two (2)
receivers, one of which shall be hearing aid compatible.
8) Equipment to be installed in AVR equipment rack.
4. Conference Room (Room 206) & Collaboration Lounge:
a. Thesespaces shall provide support for presentations and meetings. These
rooms should also be able to serve as overflow for Council Meetings.
b. System Requirements:
1) Provide capability for the display of temporary video sources
connected through a wall plate.
2) Provide apanel display with built-in speakers mounted on the front
wall of the room as the primary display device.
3) Provide a control system with touch screen control panel.
4) The control system to provide control for:
a) System on/off
b) Display input selection
c) Audio level
d) Channel control
c. Architectural and Infrastructure Requirements:
1) Provide appropriate backing for mounting the display to the wall.
Coordinate with electrical backboxes.
2) Provide apanel display with built-in speakers mounted on the front
wall of the room as the primary display device.
3) Provide a control system with touch screen control panel.
4) The control system to provide control for:
a) System on/off
b) Display input selection
c) Audio level
1027
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 11 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
d) Channel control
d. Architectural and Infrastructure Requirements:
1) Provide appropriate backing for mounting the display to the wall.
Coordinate with electrical backboxes.
1.7 LICENSING REQUIREMENTS
A. All user licenses required for system operation shall be included in the Contractor's
bid. User licenses shall include, but not be limited to, server and workstation software
and any other licensing that is required by the manufacturer for operation of any
system component.
1. Licenses shall be provided on a one-to-one basis. One license shall be provided
for each server, workstation, and device requiring a license. In the event the
manufacturer requires the purchase of a block of licenses, the minimum standard
licensing package to support all devices shall be provided.
1.8 INTELLECTUAL PROPERTY OWNERSHIP
A. All supporting documentation, programming, uncompiled source code, graphic files,
DSP code and diagrams, written and electronic files, including all latest versions of the
documentation and software necessary to edit and adapt the system(s), shall be
provided to the Owner for all spaces and all systems. The integrator and/or
programmer shall also maintain a current copy to be provided at the Owner's request.
1. The Owner shall have the right to modify the intellectual property directly, or to
have the intellectual property modified by any party of the Owner's choosing.
2. Credentials for all system software and hardware must be verified by the Owner
as valid and functional before completion of project.
1.9 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit documents under the provisions of Section 27 05 00.
B. Provide all applicable certifications.
C. Provide statement that system checkout test, as outlined in the shop drawing
submittal, is complete and satisfactory.
D. Provide schedules documenting all terminal block wiring, including cable numbers.
E. Warranty: Submit written warranty and complete all Owner registration forms.
F. Complete all operation and maintenance manuals as described below.
G. The Contractor shall include all factory-provided test results for equipment installed on
the project.
H. The Contractor shall include all test results from system demonstration and
performance testing specified in this document.
1028
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 12 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
I. Record Drawings shall minimally include:
1. All revisions to, or deviations from the original drawings, as well as final
dimensions, cable routes, connector panel drawings, cable numbering charts,
and control system programming documentation. A complete as-installed
equipment list, listed by room, and with manufacturers' names, model numbers,
serial numbers, and quantities of each item.
2. A complete and correct system schematic, showing detailed connections for all
parts of the system, including wire numbers, terminal block numbers and layouts,
and other designations and programming code.
3. Complete equipment rack layouts showing locations of all rack-mounted
equipment items.
4. Additional information, diagrams or explanations as designated under respective
equipment or systems specification section.
J. Within each equipment room, the appropriate floor plan for which that equipment room
serves shall be laminated and mounted for use by the Owner. Functional drawings
shall be posted at each AV closet or included at every AV rack within a room.
K. Upon completion and final acceptance of the project, the Contractor shall provide the
Owner a copy of the programming code for any and all AV systems and devices
programmed by the Contractor.
1. For any subsequent modifications to the programming code, an updated copy of
the code shall be provided to the Owner.
1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit documents under the provisions of Section 27 05 00.
B. Manuals: Final copies of the manuals shall be delivered after completing the
installation. Each manual's contents shall be identified on the cover. The manual shall
include names, addresses, and telephone numbers of the Contractor responsible for
the installation and maintenance of the system and the factory representatives for
each item of equipment for each system. The manuals shall have a table of contents
and labeled sections. The final copies delivered after completion of the installation
shall include all modifications made during installation, checkout, and acceptance.
Manuals shall be submitted in electronic format. The manuals shall consist of the
following:
1. Functional Design Manual: The functional design manual shall identify the
operational requirements for the system and explain the theory of operation,
design philosophy, and specific functions. A description of hardware and
software functions, interfaces, and requirements shall be included.
2. Hardware Manual: The manual shall describe all equipment furnished including:
a. General description and specifications.
b. Installation and checkout procedures.
c. Equipment layout and electrical schematics to the component level.
d. System layout drawings and schematics.
e. Alignment and calibration procedures.
f. Manufacturers repair parts list indicating sources of supply.
1029
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 13 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
3. Software Manual: The software manual shall describe the functions of all
software and shall include all other information necessary to enable proper
loading, testing, and operation. The manual shall include:
a. Definition of terms and functions.
b. System use and application software.
c. Initializations, startup, and shutdown.
d. Reports generation.
e. Details on forms customization and field parameters.
4. Operator's Manual: The operator's manual shall fully explain all procedures and
instructions for the operation of the system including:
a. Computers and peripherals.
b. System startup and shutdown procedures.
c. Use of system, command, and applications software.
d. Recovery and restart procedures.
e. Use of report generator and generation of reports.
f. Data entry.
g. Operator commands.
h. Alarm messages and reprinting formats.
i. System permissions functions and requirements.
5. Maintenance Manual: The maintenance manual shall include descriptions of
maintenance for all equipment including inspection, periodic preventive
maintenance, fault diagnosis, and repair or replacement of defective
components.
C. Intellectual Property Ownership: Provide all uncompiled source code and DSP
programming for all systems and spaces as described in Part 3 of this specification
section.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Unless otherwise noted, provide warranty for one (1) year after Notice of Completion
for all materials and labor.
B. Onsite Work During Warranty Period: This work shall be included in the Contractor's
bid and performed during regular working hours, Monday through Friday.
C. Operation: Upon the performance of any scheduled adjustments or repairs, Contractor
shall verify operation of the systems.
D. Emergency Service: The Owner will initiate service calls when the systems are not
functioning properly. Qualified personnel shall be available to provide service within
the distance defined within this specification section. The Owner shall be furnished
with telephone number(s) where service personnel can be reached 24/7/365. Service
personnel shall be at site within 24 hours after receiving a request for service.
1030
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 14 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
E. Records and Logs: The Contractor shall keep records and logs of each task completed
under warranty. The log shall contain all initial settings at substantial completion.
Complete logs shall be kept and shall be available for review on site, demonstrating
that planned and systematic adjustments and repairs have been accomplished for the
systems.
F. Work Requests: The Contractor shall separately record each service call request on a
service request form. The form shall include the model and serial number identifying
the component involved, its location, date and time the call was received, specific
nature of trouble, names of service personnel assigned to the task, instructions
describing what must be done, the amount and nature of the materials used, the time
and date work started, and the time and date of completion. The Contractor shall
deliver a record of the work performed within five (5) business days after work is
accomplished.
G. System Modifications: The Contractor shall make any recommendations for system
modification in writing to the Owner. No system modifications shall be made without
prior approval of the Owner. Any modifications made to the system shall be
incorporated into the operations and maintenance manuals, and other documentation
affected. To the fullest extent possible, the Owner shall be provided with electronic
restorable versions of all configurations prior to the modifications being made.
H. Software: The Contractor shall provide all software and firmware updates during the
period of the warranty and verify operation of the system upon installation. These
updates shall be accomplished in a timely manner, fully coordinated with system
operators, shall include training for the new changes/features, and shall be
incorporated into the operations and maintenance manuals, and software
documentation.
I. Refer to the individual product sections for further warranty requirements of individual
system components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYSTEM COMPONENTS
A. Refer to the project drawings for basis of design system components. Equivalent
products shall meet or exceed all requirements defined on the project drawings. The
following product information represents the minimum additional requirements for
equivalent products:
B. Media Players:
1. All media players, including Blu-ray players that are capable of outputting
protected content including HDCP and DPCP, shall have a minimum of 16 keys
available.
C. Audio/Video GUI Control Systems:
1031
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 15 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
1. Contractor shall furnish a programmable software-based audio/video control
system. The system shall be field configurable and programmable by the factory
and/or a factory-trained programmer.
2. The control system shall be TCP/IP based allowing direct connection of the
system processors to a 10/100BaseT compatible Ethernet network.
3. Refer to project drawings for required central processors, touch panels, keypads
and additional information.
D. Audio Amplifiers:
1. Power Amplifier(s), 25, 70.7 and 100 Volt:
a. Power: The following calculation shall be used to determine the minimum
required output of the amplifier(s):
1) Calculate the total power tap value of each transformer with insertion
loss using the following equation:
a) Tap wattage x 10^(xdB/10) where x = the rated insertion loss at
1,000Hz.
2) Calculate the total wattage loss based on cable distance, cable
gauge and cable resistance.
3) Add together all the speaker taps' total power values that will be on a
single channel of the amplifier. Multiply that total by 1.2, which will
allow for a 20% future expansion. Multiply that number by 1.25 to
ensure the amplifier never exceeds 75% of its total output. Utilize the
final number to determine the minimum amplifier power
requirements.
E. Assisted Listening Systems (ALS):
1. Assisted listening requirements for this project shall follow the local jurisdiction's
requirements to quantify the number of devices for use on this project.
2. All spaces with amplified audible communications require an ALS. The
Contractor shall refer to the ADA and ADAAG guidelines, as well as CBC Section
1108.2.7 for ALS rules, regulations and guidelines. Refer to the table below for
the required number of receivers to be provided for each space (Source: IBC,
Table 1108.2.7.1). Alternatively, if the building is managed by a single entity and
all systems are fully compatible and interoperable, the total number of seats for
all areas can be used in accordance with the table below.
Capacity of
Seating in
Assemble
Areas
Minimum Required Number of
Receivers
Minimum Number of
Receivers to be
Hearing-aid (T-coil)
Compatible
50 or less 2 2
51 to 200 2, plus 1 per 25 seats over 50 seats 2
201 to 500 2, plus 1 per 25 seats over 50 seats 1 per 4 receivers
501 to 1,000 20, plus 1 per 33 seats over 500
seats
1 per 4 receivers
1032
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 16 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
Capacity of
Seating in
Assemble
Areas
Minimum Required Number of
Receivers
Minimum Number of
Receivers to be
Hearing-aid (T-coil)
Compatible
1,101 to 2,000 35, plus 1 per 50 seats over 1,000
seats
1 per 4 receivers
Over 2,000 55, plus 1 per 100 seats over 2,000
seats
1 per 4 receivers
3. Receivers required to be hearing-aid compatible shall interface with telecoils in
hearing aids through the provision of neckloops and shall be over-the-ear type
headphones. Earbuds are not acceptable for this use.
4. Receivers shall include a 1/8" (3.2mm) standard mono output jack.
5. Refer to the Access Board Research "Large Area Assistive Listening Systems:
Review and Recommendations" ALS report for additional recommendations.
F. Power Conditioning and Surge Protective Devices:
1. All equipment shall be plugged in through a power conditioning surge arrestor.
2. Provide a minimum of 50 dB noise attenuation.
3. Provide a minimum of 1,500 joules of surge protection.
4. UL 1449 “Standard for Safety for Surge Protective Devices listed to 330 volt
clamping voltage.
5. Provide automatic voltage regulation from 97 VAC to 137 VAC at a minimum to
maintain a stable 120 VAC where specified.
6. Power sequencers shall be equipped with contact closures bi-directional RS-232
or Ethernet control for remote turn on and off.
7. Refer to the project drawings for additional information.
G. Digital Video Signal Equalizers and Regenerators:
1. For any cable run that exceeds the manufacturer-recommended distances or
fails to transmit video or audio due to cable length, the Contractor shall provide
and install a signal equalizer at the far end (sink) with the following minimum
features:
a. HDMI/DVI equalizers shall be HDCP compliant and support actively
buffered DDC transmission.
b. Display port equalizers shall be HDCP and DPCP compliant, support
actively buffered DDC transmission, and be DP++ compatible.
c. Provide automatic equalization.
d. Pass all embedded audio and metadata.
e. Have an auxiliary power input when adequate power is not available on the
cable.
f. Provide output reclocking and jitter reduction for multi-rate SDI signals.
2. For any cable run that that fails to transmit video or audio due to a weak source
signal, the Contractor shall provide and install a signal regenerator at the near
end (source) with the following minimum features:
a. HDMI/DVI regenerators shall be HDCP compliant and support actively
buffered DDC.
1033
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 17 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
b. Display port regenerators shall be HDCP and DPCP compliant, support
DDC transmission, and be DP++ compatible.
c. Provide automatic output reclocking and jitter reduction.
d. Pass all embedded audio and metadata.
e. Have an auxiliary power input when adequate power is not available on the
cable.
H. Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) Emulators:
1. If any source or Owner-furnished equipment (OFE) is not outputting video
properly, the Contractor shall provide and install an EDID Emulator and set it to
the highest common EDID table of the displays (sinks) being outputted to, with
the following minimum features:
a. EDID capture mode from a display.
b. Have an auxiliary power input when adequate power is not available on the
cable.
I. Audio Unbalanced to Balanced Converters, Balanced to Unbalanced Converters,
Combiners, Dividers, Isolation Transformers, and Line Drivers Minimum
Requirements:
1. Unbalanced to Balanced Active Converter:
a. Provide signal isolation from the audio signals of differing channels.
b. Provide output trim gain and set to optimal output level while preventing
over amplification and clipping of the signal.
c. Minimum frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz (±± 0.5dB).
d. Provide with appropriate power supply and mounting kit for rack or wall use.
e. Provide appropriate converter for mono to mono, mono to stereo, stereo to
stereo, or stereo to mono to match the input of the equipment to which it is
being connected.
2. Balanced to Unbalanced Passive Converter:
a. Provide transformer isolation from the input to output.
b. Provide output trim attenuation and set to optimal output level while
preventing over-amplification and clipping of the signal.
c. Minimum frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz (±± 0.5dB).
d. Provide with appropriate mounting kit for rack or wall use.
e. Provide appropriate converter for mono to mono, mono to stereo, stereo to
stereo, or stereo to mono to match the input of the equipment to which it is
being connected.
3. Stereo to Mono and Mono to Stereo Passive Combiner/Divider:
a. Passive resistive network.
b. Provide RF filtering.
c. Provide a minimum of 3dB of isolation between channels.
d. Provide no greater than 3dB of Insertion Loss.
e. Minimum frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz (±± 3dB).
f. Provide with appropriate mounting kit for rack or wall use.
1034
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 18 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
g. Provide appropriate passive combiner for low impedance or high
impedance and balanced or unbalanced signals to maintain the original
signal type.
4. Passive Isolation Transformer:
a. Provide Galvanic Isolation.
b. Minimum frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz (±± 3dB).
c. Isolate the input shield from the output shield. Input shield is electrically
isolated from the transformer chassis and provides a ground return. The
output shield is connected to the transformer chassis.
d. Provide with appropriate mounting kit for rack or wall use.
e. Provide appropriate isolation transformer for low impedance or high
impedance, stereo or mono signals, and balanced or unbalanced signals to
maintain the original signal type.
5. Active Signal Line Driver:
a. Provide balanced or unbalanced inputs with balanced outputs.
b. Provide input trim gain for a minimum of unity gain from -14dBu to +24dBu,
set to optimal output level while preventing over-amplification and clipping
of the signal.
c. Provide a minimum balanced output of +4dBu nominal for a minimum
output gain of +25dBu.
d. Minimum frequency response of 20 Hz to 20 kHz (±± 0.5dB).
e. Provide with appropriate power supply and mounting kit for rack or wall use.
f. Provide appropriate line driver for low impedance or high impedance and
stereo or mono signals.
J. Refer to project drawings for all other equipment not listed.
2.2 AUDIO CONNECTORS
A. This article includes minimum requirements for all connectors that are acceptable on
this project. Should the Contractor request an alternative connector, it shall be
submitted with the product submittals and clearly identified with which connector it will
be replaced.
B. XLR Plug:
1. Professional grade, 360°° strain relief, nickel shell, silver pins. Provide colored
boot.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Switchcraft
b. Neutrik
C. Loudspeaker Connector:
1. Panel Mount: Twist-lock type, 4-conductor.
2. Manufacturers:
1035
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 19 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
a. Neutrik
b. Speakon
2.3 AUDIO CABLING
A. Refer to Section 27 05 00 for cable rating requirements.
B. Microphone Level Audio Cabling:
1. For patch cables less than or equal to 25 feet:
a. 24 AWG 2-conductor, twisted, stranded (19x36) tinned bare copper.
b. Single Layer Shield:
1) Shield: 100% aluminum foil shield
c. Nominal Capacitance: 30.0 pF/Ft
1) Belden
2) West Penn
3) Liberty
2. For cable runs greater than or equal to 25 feet:
a. 22 AWG 2-conductor, twisted, stranded (16x34) tinned bare copper.
b. Dual Layer Shield:
1) Shield: 85% total tinned copper braid shield
c. Nominal Capacitance: 18.0 pF/Ft
d. Manufacturers:
1) Belden
2) West Penn
3) Liberty
C. Line Level Audio Cabling:
1. For patch cables less than or equal to 25 feet:
a. 22 AWG 2-conductor, twisted, stranded (7x30) tinned bare copper.
b. Single Layer Shield:
1) Shield: 100% aluminum foil shield
c. Nominal Capacitance for non-plenum cable: 24.0pF/Ft
d. Nominal Capacitance for plenum cable: 35.0 pF/Ft
e. Manufacturers:
1) Belden
2) West Penn
3) Liberty
1036
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 20 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
2. For cable runs greater than or equal to 25 feet:
a. 18 AWG 2-conductor, twisted, stranded (16x30) tinned bare copper.
b. Single Layer Shield:
1) Shield: 100% aluminum foil shield
c. Manufacturers:
1) Belden
2) West Penn
3) Liberty
D. AES/EBU Digital Audio Cabling:
1. For patch cables less than or equal to 25 feet:
a. 24 AWG 2-conductor, twisted, stranded (7x32) tinned bare copper.
b. Single Layer Shield:
1) Outer Shield: 100% aluminum foil shield
c. Nominal Impedance: 110 ohms
d. Nominal Capacitance: 12.0 pF/Ft
e. Velocity of Propagation for non-plenum cable: 76%
f. Velocity of Propagation for plenum cable: 78%.
g. Maximum Attenuation (per 100 feet):
1) at 2-MHz: 1.3 dB
2) at 4-MHz: 1.56 dB
3) at 5-MHz: 1.7 dB
4) at 6-MHz: 1.81 dB
5) at 12-MHz: 2.28 dB
6) at 24-MHz: 3.08 dB
h. Manufacturers:
1) Belden
2) West Penn
3) Liberty
2. For cable runs greater than or equal to 25 feet:
a. 22 AWG 2-conductor, twisted, stranded (7x30) tinned bare copper.
b. Dual Layer Shield:
1) Inner shield: 100% aluminum foil shield
2) Outer shield: 90% tinned copper braid shield
c. Nominal Impedance: 110 ohms
d. Nominal Capacitance: 13.0 pF/Ft
e. Velocity of Propagation: 76%
1037
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 21 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
f. Maximum Attenuation (per 100 feet):
1) at 2-MHz: .93 dB
2) at 4-MHz: 1.15 dB
3) at 5-MHz: 1.2 dB
4) at 6-MHz: 1.3 dB
5) at 12-MHz: 1.6 dB
6) at 24-MHz: 1.97 dB
g. Manufacturers:
1) Belden 1696A
2) West Penn
3) Liberty
E. Constant Voltage Speaker Cabling:
1. Class 2, stranded, twisted, 2-conductor, minimum of 16-gauge wire for all
25/70.7/100-volt applications unless noted otherwise.
2. The Contractor shall size cabling as required for distance power and shall
provide larger gauge cable as required.
3. Manufacturers:
a. Belden
b. Liberty
c. Or pre-approved equal
F. High Performance Low Capacitance Speaker/Subwoofer Cabling:
1. Class 2, high strand count (259x34), oxygen free copper, low capacitance (23.2
pF/Ft), twisted, 2-conductor, 10-gauge wire for all 4/8-ohm low impedance
applications where amplifier output is 150 watts or greater and/or the distance is
greater than 50', unless noted otherwise.
2. The Contractor shall size cabling as required for distance power and shall
provide larger gauge cable as required.
3. Cable shall be installed in conduit within plenum areas.
4. Manufacturers:
a. Belden
b. Liberty
c. Or pre-approved equal
2.4 ANALOG VIDEO CONNECTORS
A. BNC Connector:
1. 75 ohm, broadcast quality, two-piece compression type. Return Loss: Less than -
36 dB to 1 GHz, -25 dB to 2 GHz, -23 dB to 3 GHz. Twist-on and crimp
connectors are not acceptable.
2. Manufacturers:
a. Corning Gilbert
1038
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 22 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
b. King
c. Amphenol
2.5 ANALOG VIDEO CABLING
A. RF Video Cable:
1. For cable runs less than or equal to 100 feet:
a. RG-6, center conductor: 18 AWG bare copper covered steel; 0.040" OD
(nominal).
b. Four Layer Shield:
1) Inner shield: 100% aluminum-polypropylene-aluminum laminated
tape with overlap bonded to dielectric.
2) Second shield: 60% 34 AWG bare aluminum braid wire.
3) Third shield: 100% non-bonded aluminum foil tape.
4) Outer shield: 40% 34 AWG bare aluminum braid wire.
c. Nominal Impedance: 75 ohms
d. Nominal Capacitance: 16.2 pF/Ft
e. Velocity of Propagation: 83%
f. Maximum attenuation for non-plenum cable (per 100 feet):
1) at 5-MHz: 0.67 dB
2) at 55-MHz: 1.60 dB
3) at 400-MHz: 4.00 dB
4) at 700-MHz: 5.45 dB
5) at 1000-MHz: 6.54 dB
g. Manufacturers:
1) Belden
2) CommScope
3) Liberty
4) Times Fiber
5) Or pre-approved equal
2. For cable runs greater than or equal to 100 feet:
a. For any cable run that exceeds the manufacturer-recommended distances,
the Contractor shall provide and install an RF booster amplifier and set the
gain and slope to achieve the proper signal level.
b. RG-11, center conductor: 14 AWG bare copper covered steel; 0.064" OD
(nominal).
c. Four Layer Shield:
1) Inner shield: 100% aluminum-polypropylene-aluminum laminated
tape with overlap bonded to dielectric.
2) Second shield: 60% 34 AWG bare aluminum braid wire.
3) Third shield: 100% non-bonded aluminum foil tape.
4) Outer shield: 40% 34 AWG bare aluminum braid wire.
1039
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 23 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
d. Nominal Impedance: 75 ohms
e. Nominal Capacitance: 16.2 pF/Ft
f. Velocity of Propagation for non-plenum cable: 83%
g. Maximum attenuation for non-plenum cable (per 100 feet):
1) at 5-MHz: 0.38 dB
2) at 55-MHz: 0.97 dB
3) at 400-MHz: 2.47 dB
4) at 700-MHz: 3.37 dB
5) at 1000-MHz: 4.23 dB
h. Manufacturers:
1) Belden
2) CommScope
3) Liberty
4) Times Fiber
5) Or pre-approved equal
2.6 DIGITAL VIDEO CABLING
A. All digital video cabling shall be pre-assembled and tested in a factory and not field
terminated. The contractor shall field verify the cable distance and provide the proper
cable type and length.
B. High Definition Multi-Media Interface (HDMI) "High Speed" Cable:
1. For any cable run that exceeds the manufacturer-recommended distances or
fails to transmit video or audio due to cable length, the Contractor shall provide
and install am HDCP-compliant signal equalizer at the far end.
2. For cable runs less than or equal to 25 feet:
a. Four (4) 28AWG solid bonded twisted pairs for clock and data, and seven
(7) 28AWG solid conductors for control.
b. Two Layer Shield:
1) Inner shield: non-bonded aluminum foil tape.
2) Outer shield: 85% tinned copper braid shield.
c. Nominal attenuation of clock and data pairs (per 100 feet):
1) at 100-MHz: 9.6 dB
2) at 400-MHz: 19.3 dB
3) at 825-MHz: 28.9 dB
4) at 1200-MHz: 36.1 dB
d. Nominal capacitance between shielded pairs: 15.3 pF/ft nominal.
e. Nominal capacitance between control pairs: 16.5 pF/ft nominal.
f. Nominal return loss of shielded pairs: 15 dB, 1-1200 MHZ.
g. Nominal shield DC resistance of individual shield: 24.4 ohms/1000 ft.
h. Nominal shield DC resistance of overall shield: 3.7 ohms/1000 ft.
1040
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 24 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
i. The cable shall be HDMI 1.3a Category 1 certified to 25 feet, and HDMI
1.3a Category 2 certified to 15 feet.
j. Supports a maximum digital data rate of 10.2 Gbit/s.
k. Supports up to eight (8) channels of HD audio.
l. HDCP compliant.
m. Manufacturers:
1) Belden
2) Or pre-approved equal
3. For cable runs greater than 25 feet:
a. Four (4) 24AWG solid bonded twisted pairs for clock and data, and seven
(7) 24AWG solid conductors for control.
b. Two Layer Shield:
1) Inner shield: non-bonded aluminum foil tape.
2) Outer shield: 82% tinned copper braid shield.
c. Nominal attenuation of clock and data pairs (per 100 feet):
1) at 100-MHz: 6.0 dB
2) at 400-MHz: 13.5 dB
3) at 825-MHz: 19.8 dB
4) at 1200-MHz: 24.1 dB
d. Nominal capacitance between shielded pairs: 15.3 pF/ft nominal.
e. Nominal capacitance between control pairs: 16.5 pF/ft nominal.
f. Nominal return loss of shielded pairs: 15 dB, 1-1200 MHZ.
g. Nominal shield DC resistance of individual shield: 15.0 ohms/1000 ft.
h. Nominal shield DC resistance of overall shield: 1.75 ohms/1000 ft.
i. The cable shall be HDMI 1.3a Category 1 certified to 45 feet, and HDMI
1.3a Category 2 certified to 25 feet.
j. Supports a maximum digital data rate of 10.2 Gbit/s.
k. Supports up to eight (8) channels of HD audio.
l. HDCP compliant.
m. Manufacturers:
1) Belden
2) Or pre-approved equal
C. High Definition Serial Digital Interface (HD-SDI) Cabling:
1. For patch cables less than or equal to 25 feet:
a. RG-59, center conductor: 22 AWG stranded (7x29) bare copper, 0.023" OD
(nominal), polyethylene dielectric.
b. Single Layer Shield:
1) Outer Shield: 98% tinned copper braid
c. Nominal Impedance: 75 ohms
1041
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 25 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
d. Nominal Capacitance: 21.0 pF/Ft
e. Velocity of Propagation: 66%
f. Maximum Attenuation (per 100 feet):
1) at 1-MHz: 0.3 dB
2) at 71.5-MHz: 2.5 dB
3) at 360-MHz: 6.0 dB
4) at 750-MHz: 8.9 dB
5) at 1000-MHz: 10.5 dB
g. Manufacturers:
1) Belden
2) CommScope
3) Liberty
4) Extron
2. For horizontal cable runs less than or equal to 100 feet:
a. RG-59, center conductor: 20 AWG solid bare copper, 0.031" OD (nominal),
FEP insulation.
b. Double Layer Shield:
1) Outer Shield: 95% tinned copper braid outside and bonded foil
inside.
c. Nominal Impedance: 75 ohms
d. Nominal Capacitance: 16.1 pF/Ft
e. Velocity of Propagation: 83%
f. Maximum insertion loss (per 100 feet):
1) at 1-MHz: 0.3 dB
2) at 71.5-MHz: 2.1 dB
3) at 360-MHz: 4.4 dB
4) at 750-MHz: 6.5 dB
5) at 1000-MHz: 7.6 dB
g. Manufacturers:
1) Belden non-plenum or plenum
2) CommScope
3) Liberty
4) Extron
3. For horizontal cable runs greater than or equal to 100 feet:
a. For any cable run that exceeds the manufacturer-recommended distances
or fails to transmit video or audio due to cable length, the Contractor shall
provide and install a signal equalizer at the far end (sink).
b. RG-6, center conductor: 18 AWG solid bare copper, 0.274" OD (nominal),.
c. Double Layer Shield:
1042
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 26 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
1) Inner Shield: 100% non-bonded aluminum foil tape
2) Outer Shield: 95% tinned copper braid
d. Nominal Impedance: 75 ohms
e. Nominal Capacitance: 15.9 pF/Ft
f. Velocity of Propagation: 84.5%
g. Maximum attenuation for non-plenum cable (per 100 feet):
1) at 1-MHz: 0.2 dB
2) at 71.5-MHz: 1.6 dB
3) at 360-MHz: 3.5 dB
4) at 750-MHz: 5.1 dB
5) at 1000-MHz: 5.9 dB
h. Manufacturers:
1) Belden
2) CommScope
3) Liberty
4) Extron
2.7 CONTROL CABLING
A. Control:
1. For Bidding Purposes: Two-pair, twisted, shielded, one (1) #18 AWG pair and
one (1) #22 AWG pair. Provide with plenum-rated jacket where used in a plenum
space without conduit.
2. Size conductors as required for distance and voltage drop.
3. Coordinate exact requirements with selected manufacturer and system prior to
submitting bid.
B. Other Control Circuits:
1. #20 AWG, stranded, shielded cable, number of conductors as required for the
applications. Provide with plenum-rated jacket where used in a plenum space
without conduit. Provide PVC jacket where installed in conduit or non-plenum
areas.
2. Coordinate exact requirements with selected manufacturers prior to submitting
bid.
2.8 HORIZONTAL COPPER DATA AND FIBER CABLING AND CONNECTORS
A. Refer to Section 27 15 00 - Horizontal Cabling Requirements, for telecommunications
cabling and connector requirements including fiber optics being utilized for A/V
systems.
B. Refer to Section 27 17 10 - Testing, for telecommunications cabling testing
requirements including fiber optics being utilized for A/V systems.
1043
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 27 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
C. All category-rated copper data cabling and fiber optic cabling shall be installed,
terminated, tested and certified by the Division 27 Telecommunications contractor
certified by the selected manufacturers for the copper and fiber optic cabling plant. The
Contractor shall submit all cabling and certifications to the Architect/Engineer for
approval in the shop drawings.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Verify that surfaces are ready to receive work.
B. Verify field dimensions and coordinate physical size of all equipment with the
architectural requirements of the spaces into which they are to be installed. Allow
space for adequate ventilation and circulation of air.
C. Verify that required utilities are available, in proper location, and ready for use.
D. Beginning of installation means installer accepts existing conditions.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of all
products.
B. Provide all system wiring between all components as directed by the manufacturer or
required for proper system operation.
C. Mount all touch screen and keypad devices where shown on plans in accordance with
Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements for both side reach and front
reach.
D. Cabling Requirements:
1. Non-plenum rated cabling may be used instead of plenum when installed with-in
conduit in plenum rated areas.
2. All cabling shall be routed according to function. Cabling shall be grouped and
bundled by groups, such as: microphone and line level audio, control, video and
speaker. In no case shall cabling from different functional groups be intermixed.
No cabling shall be routed parallel to 120 VAC or higher power circuits unless
separated by a minimum of 6" and the 120 VAC or higher power is installed in
conduit.
3. When cabling is installed in conduit, a separate conduit shall be provided for
each cabling functional type.
4. Cable bundles shall be loosely bundled to allow the visual following of individual
cables within the bundle and to permit the easy removal and addition of cables
as necessary.
5. Horizontal cabling installed as open cable or in cable tray shall be bundled at not
less than 10' intervals with hook-and-loop tie wraps. The use of plastic cable zip
ties is strictly prohibited in any situation.
6. Cabling shall not be spliced under any circumstances.
1044
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 28 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
7. Each cable shall be appropriately identified (as defined on the record documents)
at each end's termination point using pressure sensitive label strips.
8. Audio Cabling:
a. All amplified audio cabling shall not be in the same enclosed pathway as
any other type of cabling as required by the NEC. Refer to the NEC for
definitions and additional requirements.
b. The polarity of all cabling shall remain consistent throughout the project, on
all equipment. Red conductors shall be used for the positive "+" side, and
black used for the negative "-" side.
c. Cable shield length shall be equal to the cable's conductor length.
d. All shielded cables drain wire SHALL be grounded and continuous
throughout the entire length of the system, including splices where
speakers are installed.
e. Balanced audio connections shall be used whenever the mating equipment
allows.
f. Do not run unbalanced cables longer than 3m. For interconnecting of
unbalanced equipment in lengths longer than 3m, the Contractor shall
provide a line driver located at the source.
9. Video Cabling:
a. All video cabling, unless otherwise noted, shall be provided with BNC
connectors of the two-piece compression type. Twist-on BNC connectors
are not permitted.
b. Provide BNC 75-ohm terminators where required for all open BNC
connectors.
c. All coaxial video cables used for S-video, component/RGB and RGBHV
shall be the same length to minimize skew.
10. Twisted Pair Cabling for All Applications:
a. The Contractor shall ensure that the twists in each cable pair are preserved
to within 0.5 inch of the termination. The cable jacket shall be removed only
to the extent required to make the termination.
b. The Contractor shall ensure that the cable shields are continuous
throughout, terminated, and grounded according to the manufacturer's
recommendations.
E. Grounding Requirements:
1. Provide a minimum of #6 AWG conductor from the nearest electrical service
ground bus or nearest telecommunications room ground bus bar to the A/V
equipment racks and cabinets regardless of location. Size cable as required by
the NEC.
2. Cables containing shields shall not have the shields grounded at conduits, boxes,
racks, etc. Ground the shield only at the equipment end.
3. Audio cable shields for line-level signals shall be connected to the metal
equipment chassis at both ends of the cable.
4. Audio cables connected to transformers shall have the cable shield connected to
the transformer shield and transformer case ground.
5. The Contractor shall not connect cable shields together from differing cables.
1045
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 29 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
6. XLR cable shields shall be connected to chassis ground.
7. Signal-grounded balanced shields are not acceptable and shall not be installed.
All balanced shields shall be chassis grounded.
F. Rack and Cabinet Requirements:
1. Ground equipment racks/cabinets as noted within this specification section and
Section 27 05 26 - Communications Grounding.
2. Provide one (1) RU of space between adjacent pieces of equipment with top
and/or bottom vents, above the topmost piece of equipment, and below the
bottommost piece of equipment. Provide a vented cover panel covering each
rack space.
3. Terminate all speaker cabling on individual barrier strips for positive "+", negative
"-", and shield. The shield barrier strip shall be grounded.
4. Provide a power conditioning surge arrestor in the rack for distribution of AC
power from the wall receptacles indicated on the plans. The quantity of plugs
shall be adequate so that no equipment in the rack shall require plugging into an
AC source outside the rack.
5. Power sequencing shall be provided in the racks where shown on the drawings.
All amplifiers located in the racks shall be sequenced "last on – first off". Power
sequencers shall provide power conditioning and surge protection.
G. Video System Installation Requirements:
1. The Contractor shall confirm calculations for the optimal distance from the screen
to the projector lens based on actual field conditions and submit to the
Architect/Engineer for review and approval.
2. If the projector and screen are in a fixed position, the Contractor shall provide the
appropriate lens for the throw distance.
3. Video display image shall fill screen area with native aspect ratio
H. Audio System Installation Requirements:
1. The Contractor shall perform calculations for the optimal speaker tap settings to
reach the desired SPL level and coverage without overloading the amplifier(s).
a. At a minimum, the following calculations shall be used:
1) Add together all speaker taps that will be on a single channel of the
amplifier. Multiply that total by 1.2, which will allow for a 20% future
expansion. Multiply that number by 1.25 to ensure the amplifier never
exceeds 75% of its total output. Utilize the final number to determine
the minimum amplifier power requirements.
2) For direct coupled systems (low impedance), allow a minimum of 10
dB headroom before any distortion occurs at the amplifier input
indicator when beginning gain stage tests are set up. Increase
headroom as appropriate for high impact and clarity needs, typically
exceeding 12 to 15 dB during continuous operation.
2. Connections of balanced to unbalanced equipment shall only be done through an
active converter at the unbalanced side.
1046
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 30 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
3. Connections of unbalanced to balanced equipment shall only be done through an
active converter at the unbalanced side.
4. Connections from stereo balanced or unbalanced equipment to mono equipment
of the same signal type shall only be done through a passive combiner.
5. Connections from mono balanced or unbalanced equipment to stereo equipment
of the same signal type shall only be done through a passive divider.
6. The Contractor shall provide an isolation transformer for any balanced or
unbalanced audio line that exhibits a hum, noise from EMI or RFI, power line
noise, or ground loops.
7. The Contractor shall provide an active audio line driver for all balanced and
unbalanced signals that exceed the distance limitations of the cabling.
I. Control System Installation Requirements:
1. The Contractor shall perform calculations for the required wire AWG size based
on distance for system power for touch panels, keypads and other devices being
powered. A minimum of a 15% overhead is required.
3.3 VIDEO SYSTEM TESTING AND CALIBRATION
A. All video equipment shall receive proper testing and configuration.
B. Color Space Optimization:
1. The Contractor shall set the color space of each source and display device to a
uniform color space to optimize the switching speed and compatibility of a digital
video system. Each device shall be set to an RGB or YCbCr color space
depending on the systems primary function and compatibility of the devices.
2. If the primary function of the space is video and other digital media, the color
space of each device shall be set to a YCbCr color space. If the primary function
of the space is computer-based graphics and presentations, the color space of
each device shall be set to an RGB color space.
3. Chroma subsampling shall be set to a consistent 4:4:4 or 4:2:2 across all
devices. Set to 4:4:4 when all equipment is capable.
4. If all devices are not capable of displaying a certain color space, all devices shall
be set to a common shared color space.
C. Extended Display Identification Data (EDID) Management:
1. The Contractor shall set the EDID management tables in capable equipment so
all sources output the highest common EDID table of the displays (sinks).
2. For systems with capable matrix switches, the matrix shall dynamically adjust its
EDID tables so any source will output the highest common EDID table of the
displays (sinks) being outputted to.
3. If any source or Owner-furnished equipment (OFE) is not outputting properly, the
Contractor shall provide and install an EDID Emulator and set it to the highest
common EDID table of the displays (sinks) being outputted to.
D. Projectors, monitors and receivers shall be tested and adjusted for proper signal sync,
convergence, brightness, contrast, and color level. The Contractor shall adjust all other
parameters necessary to achieve a proper video image.
1047
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 31 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
E. All video source selections shall be tested and verified.
F. All projectors and displays shall have a minimum burn-in time of 96 hours prior to any
adjustments are made and the completion of the project
G. All projectors and displays shall have their hue/tint and color/saturation calibrated with
a video signal test generator and blue lens filter after a minimum warmup time of 20
minutes. Provide all calibrated settings results for each projector and display in the
final documentation.
H. All projectors and displays shall have their brightness, contrast and sharpness
calibrated with a video signal test generator after a minimum warmup time of 20
minutes. Provide all calibrated settings results for each projector and display in the
final documentation.
I. All dynamic contrast functions shall be turned off.
3.4 AUDIO SYSTEM TESTING AND CALIBRATION:
A. This Contractor shall field adjust any surface-mounted or flown loudspeaker orientation
to achieve the necessary coverage pattern to the intended listening plane.
Loudspeakers always face listeners and minimize coverage on walls. The contractor
shall be familiar with the named and specified nominal coverage angle of all speakers
above its crossover point or for speech range, (500-4,000 Hz).
B. All speakers shall be tested for polarity prior to high work and a table of test results
shall be included for A/E inspection. All loudspeakers shall be connected with uniform
polarity, where a positive pressure pulse at the input corresponds to a positive driver
excursion, and all drivers are uniform always moving in the same direction. Main
speakers shall not be lifted or hoisted into high access areas without polarity testing.
C. The Contractor shall make incremental adjustments on the equipment output and input
tolerances to achieve matching signal levels while preserving +10 dB minimum
headroom and also unity gain. Insert all broadband or high pass filters first for system
protection after review of manufacturers specifications for power and bandpass.
D. Provide high quality media with full bandpass program material for critical listening.
MP3 or streaming audio is not acceptable. Testing shall illustrate WAV file quality
playback for impact and clarity.
E. The Contractor shall provide graphic plots of the reference ambient noise for each
space at the time of the calibration and submit with the calibration results. Test signal
shall be 10dB minimum above ambient noise levels during testing.
F. The Contractor shall use a listener sitting height of four (4) feet ± 1" for rooms where
the primary function will be sitting. The Contractor shall use a listener standing height
of five feet three inches (5.25') ± 1" for rooms where the primary function will be
standing
1048
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 32 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
3.5 ASSISTED LISTENING SYSTEM (ALS) PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. The Contractor shall verify that the ALS system(s) meets the following minimum
performance requirements at the earphone or headset:
1. Reach a minimum total SPL of 75 dBA and no greater than 95 dBA, with a
minimum of a 50dB dynamic range volume control.
2. Achieve a minimum signal-to-noise (S/N) ratio of 18dB. It is recommended to
achieve a minimum signal-to-noise (S/N) ratio of 25dB to accommodate children.
3. Ensure the peak clipping levels do not exceed 18dB down from the peak input
signal level.
B. FM-based systems shall operate within the FCC-reserved assisted listening
frequencies of 72 to 76 MHz or the 216 to 217 MHz (preferred) range and comply with
the FCC transmitter power requirements.
C. Infrared (IR)-based systems shall provide IR coverage throughout the entire listening
area.
1. The IR system's RF sub-carrier frequency shall operate at 95kHz, 250kHz, or
2.3MHz.
3.6 DSP-BASED AUDIO PROCESSOR PROGRAMMING
A. Full system programming shall be provided for the system. Programming shall be
performed by a factory trained and certified programmer or an employee of the
equipment manufacturer.
B. DSP pathfile with initial settings shall be provided by the Contractor for review by the
Architect/Engineer before installation.
C. The IP-based audio (IEEE AVB, Dante, etc.) and components shall be on a dedicated
Virtual LAN (VLAN) for the A/V systems. These components shall be on a dedicated
subnetwork of the VLAN. The Contractor shall coordinate these requirements with the
Owner prior to installation.
D. A parametric EQ shall be provided after each crossover point or as approved in the
DSP pathfile during shop submittal review. These equalizers should not be made
available to the user to adjust.
E. Levelers, compressor/limiters, duckers, gates and delays shall be preset during testing
and commissioning and are not available for user adjustment following commissioning.
F. Provide each microphone input with high-pass filter, 5-band parametric EQ, auto-
leveler and volume module. Provide line level inputs with high-pass filter, 3-band
parametric EQ, compressor/limiter, and volume module.
G. Acoustic Echo Cancelation (AEC) shall be provided for each conference microphone
input.
--
1049
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 33 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
H. A broadband pink noise generator shall be provided with a selectable on/off control
button within the DSP pathfile. The noise shall be routable through all processing EQs
and speaker outputs during testing.
I. Provide volume meters with labeling for each input and each output.
J. The Contractor shall utilize the latest version of the programming software.
K. The Contractor shall ensure that all components are updated to the latest firmware at
the completion of the project.
3.7 MULTIMEDIA CONTROL SYSTEM INTEGRATION AND PROGRAMMING
A. Programming and Integration for Control Systems:
1. Full system programming shall be provided for the system. Programming shall be
performed by a factory trained and certified programmer or an employee of the
equipment manufacturer.
2. The Contractor shall schedule a series of meetings with the Owner and
Architect/Engineer to define and determine the exact integration requirements of
the control system prior to the installation of the control system and components.
An Owner sign-off of the final configuration shall be required.
3. This section only defines the minimum requirements. The programmer shall
provide complete programming for a fully functional system.
4. The Contractor shall utilize the latest version of the programming software.
5. The Contractor shall ensure that all components are updated to the latest
firmware at the completion of the project.
6. The IP-based control system and controlled components shall be on a dedicated
Virtual LAN (VLAN) for the A/V systems. These components shall be on a
dedicated subnetwork of the VLAN. The Contractor shall coordinate these
requirements with the Owner prior to installation.
7. Integration and programming of the following pieces of equipment shall be
provided, with the following minimum features and functions:
a. All equipment shall include on/off control, except for equipment that must
remain active for system functionality.
b. Integration of HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and DPCP
(Display Port Content Protection) protected content and sources:
1) No protected sources or content shall be allowed to be selected to
route through non-protected devices and displays. A warning shall be
displayed stating this information to the user.
c. Matrix Switcher Integration:
1) The Contractor shall provide bi-directional RS-232 or Ethernet control
system connections and programming with the following minimum
functions:
a) On/off control of the matrix switcher.
b) Allow for independent video routing of individual video inputs to
any audio number of audio outputs.
1050
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 34 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
c) Allow for audio follow video switcher mode.
d) Provide source detection of video inputs.
e) HDCP (High-bandwidth Digital Content Protection) and DPCP
(Display Port Content Protection) Protection:
f) For HDCP/DPCP - compliant sources; switcher shall only allow
for routing of signals to HDCP compliant devices.
g) For HDCP/DPCP - complaint switchers; room
combining/uncombining features shall allow for complete audio
and /or video devices to be connected to the system using a
simplified interface.
d. DSP Audio Processor Integration:
1) The Contractor shall provide bi-directional RS-232 or Ethernet control
system connections and programming with the following minimum
functions:
a) On/off control of all microphones.
b) Volume and mute control of all microphones and input sources.
c) Volume and mute control of all outputs.
d) Independent volume and mute control of all assisted listening
outputs.
e) On/off and reset control of feedback eliminators and
suppressors.
f) Advanced routing of audio signals.
g) Audio conferencing dialer keypad with speed dials.
h) Audio conferencing CallerID display on touchpanel and/or
workstation.
i) Acoustic Echo Cancelation (AEC) control.
e. Audio Conference Integration:
1) Refer to DSP Audio Processor Integration for requirements.
f. Display Integration:
1) The displays shall be integrated into the A/V control system via bi-
directional RS-232 or Ethernet control. Provide with the following
minimum functions:
a) On/off control.
b) Display status feedback.
c) Source switching control.
d) Audio volume control with mute.
e) Video mute.
f) Tuner channel control with direct channel access.
g) Station presets with station icons.
g. Video Conference/Telepresence Integration:
1051
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 35 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
1) The Contractor shall provide bi-directional RS-232 or Ethernet control
system connections and programming with the following minimum
functions:
a) Refer to DSP Audio Processor Integration for audio
requirements.
b) Video conferencing dialer keypad with speed dials.
c) PTZ near end camera control.
h. Pan/Tilt/Zoom (PTZ) Camera Integration:
1) The Contractor shall provide bi-directional RS-232 or Ethernet control
system connections and programming with the following minimum
functions:
a) Provide full pan, tilt and zoom control.
b) Provide presets for fixed camera positions, contractor shall
coordinate with the Owner for desired preset positions.
i. DVD/Blu-ray and/or VCR Player Integration:
1) The Contractor shall provide bi-directional RS-232 or Ethernet control
system connections and programming with the following minimum
functions:
a) Typical DVD/Blu-ray and/or VCR functions shall be provided.
b) Real time metadata (if available).
c) Player status feedback.
d) Provide standard Blu-ray menu navigation Red, Green, Blue
and Yellow buttons, in that order, for touch panel-based
systems.
j. TV Tuner Integration:
1) The Contractor shall provide bi-directional RS-232 or Ethernet control
system connections and programming with the following minimum
functions:
a) Channel up/down control.
b) Direct type in channel access.
k. Power Sequencer Integration:
1) The Contractor shall provide contact closure based controlbi-
directional RS-232 or Ethernet control system connections and
programming with the following minimum functions:
a) Power on/off control.
l. Lighting Integration:
1052
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 36 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
1) Lighting shall be integrated into the A/V control system via bi-
directional RS-232 or Ethernet control. The A/V contractor shall
coordinate with the lighting control contractor for full system
integration.
2) Basic scene presets shall be provided for different presentation
modes.
a) The A/V contractor shall schedule a meeting to coordinate with
the Owner and lighting control contractor for desired scene
presets.
3) A master dimmer shall be provided.
4) This defines only the basic integration requirements.
5) Refer to the Electrical Lighting Integration Section 26 09 33 for
additional information.
B. Programming and Configuration for Touch Panels:
1. This section only defines the minimum requirements. The programmer shall
provide complete touch panel layouts and programming for a fully functional
system.
2. The Contractor shall schedule a series of meetings with the Owner and
Architect/Engineer to define and determine the exact touch panel layout
requirements prior to the purchase and installation of the touch panels. An Owner
sign-off of the final layouts shall be required.
a. Some tabs, pages, buttons and functions may be required to have a
password at the Owner's discretion. This shall be coordinated during the
meetings.
3. Contractor logos are not allowed on the touch panels. The Contractor shall
coordinate with the Owner on desired logos to be displayed.
4. All programming for interface and control of all devices shown on the drawings
shall be provided. Programming shall be provided for the following minimum
functionality:
a. The main screen shall include graphical buttons for the primary room
functions.
1) Upon selection of the graphical button, all the required functions shall
be displayed on the screen. All required equipment shall turn on.
b. Master System On/Off Control:
1) When the master system off button is selected, all capable
components within the system shall be turned off or placed on
standby, except for equipment that is required to remain on for the
system to function like the control system processor.
2) In the event major systems become unresponsive, a secondary
power cycle button shall be available to cycle power on all
equipment.
1053
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 37 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
c. The main screen shall include graphical buttons for the selection of
individual source selections.
1) Upon selection of the graphical button for a source selection, all
functional controls for the pieces of equipment, as well as all status
indicators, shall be provided in graphical format on the screen.
2) Rooms with multiple independent outputs and displays shall have a
source routing matrix to allow any input to be routed to any output.
d. The main screen shall include a button for advanced equipment status and
monitoring.
1) Upon selection of the graphical button, the page shall display the
on/off status of all monitored equipment, projector lamp hours,
projector filter status, and all other features listed within this section
that require monitoring
e. The main screen shall include a button for microphone volume control and
muting.
1) Upon selection of the graphical button, it shall display the individual
volume level of each wired and wireless microphone, with a mute for
each.
2) Rooms with multiple independent audio outputs and zones shall
have a source routing matrix to allow any input to be routed to any
output or zone.
f. At all times, on all screens, a button shall be provided to return to the main
screen, except for modal pop-ups.
g. A master volume control and mute shall be provided at all times on all
screens, except for modal pop-ups.
h. A master video mute shall be provided at all times on all screens, except for
modal pop-ups and audio-only functions.
i. A modal countdown timer shall be displayed showing the warmup and
cooldown time of the projector. All functions shall be locked out while the
projector is in cooldown mode.
j. All unused hard buttons shall not be labeled. A blank touch panel bezel
shall be provided if no hard buttons are used.
C. Touch Panel Layout Principles, Considerations and Guidelines:
1. Icons and Buttons:
a. Icons shall not be used solely as a button but can be embedded in a button.
b. Icons shall appear to be flat and unpressable.
c. Status bars or text windows for time, date, room number, and similar
information shall appear to be slightly depressed into the screen and
appear to be unpressable.
d. Buttons shall appear to be pressable by appearing to come off the screen
with beveled edges, lighting gradients, and shadows. When pressed, the
button shall appear to be depressed into the screen.
1054
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 38 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
1) Buttons that are momentary shall change color when pressed,
appear to depress, then pop back up and revert to the original button
color and state.
2) Buttons that are not momentary shall change color when pressed,
appear to depress, remain depressed, then pop back up, and revert
to the original button color and state when pressed again.
e. Buttons and icons shall appear to be lit from the top left corner of the
screen.
f. Buttons shall be grouped together according to general function.
g. Button size shall be based on the ratio of Phi (1:1.618) and be sized
appropriately based on the screen area and dpi (pixel pitch).
h. Maintain a minimum of 5 to 10 pixels between buttons on small to medium
touch panels, and a minimum of 10 to 15 pixels between buttons on
medium to large touch panels.
i. Telephone dialer keypads shall be based on the ITU-T E.161/ANSI TI-703
standard telephone layout and include the a-z letters below each
appropriate number.
j. TV and radio tuner keypads shall be based on the ITU-T E.161/ANSI TI-
703 standard telephone layout, except for the asterisk (*) being replaced by
a dot (.) and the pound (#) being replaced with Enter.
k. IP-address keypads shall be based on the standard computer keyboard 10-
key numeric keypad typically found on the right side of the keyboard.
l. Buttons such as Power, Play, Stop, Record, Rewind, Previous, Forward,
Eject, Return, Next, Up, Down, Left, Right, Plus, Minus, etc. shall use
standard industry symbols. Record shall always be a solid red circle.
2. Text and Fonts:
a. The Contractor shall use a standard sans-serif bold Arial or Calibri font style
unless the Owner dictates otherwise.
b. Words shall have the first letter capitalized and the rest of the word lower
case. No words shall be all capitals or all lower case. Follow standard
grammatically correct sentence structure where the first word is capitalized
and the rest of the sentence is lower case, followed by the appropriate
punctuation mark with accurate syntax and correct verbs.
c. All font size in a single group or cluster shall maintain the same font size.
Headers to a group or cluster shall have a slightly enlarged font size. and
footers shall have a slightly smaller font size in comparison to the group
font size to maintain a visual hierarchy.
3. Color Considerations:
a. Colors shall be selected so that, when converted to monochrome, all text,
buttons, icons, groups, clusters, borders, etc. are clearly visible to
accommodate all color blind or color-impaired individuals and ADA
requirements.
b. Background colors shall be cool low saturation colors such as grey, blue, or
green and their analogous colors, and be a gradient from top down or top
left to bottom right.
c. Base colors shall be analogous to the background color but be of a higher
saturation to stand out more clearly.
1055
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 39 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
d. Button colors shall be analogous to the background color, stand out clearly
from the base colors, and be of a higher saturation cool color, gray, or a low
saturation black.
e. Icon, symbols, and text color shall be a neutral white or black, or a low
saturation grey, and shall clearly stand out from the background or button it
is placed on.
f. Buttons for modal acknowledgement, exit or return, or other modal action
shall be a warm color such as red or yellow and their analogous colors.
g. Buttons, icons, symbols or text for emergency or urgent notifications shall
be bright red.
4. Pages and Background:
a. Groups and clusters shall have clearly defined borders, with spacing
between adjacent groups.
b. Modal pop-up windows or pages shall be required when a command
requires user input before it is executed or when a button has multiple
nested elements to control, such as microphone volumes, zone control,
lighting and environment control, advanced system controls, etc.
1) The modal pop-up pages shall dim and grey out the background and
buttons, overlay the main page, and have a clear back or exit button
to bring the user back into the active page the user was on before
the modal pop-up.
2) A model pop-up timer page shall appear when a projector is being
turned on or off for the appropriate warmup or cooldown time. No
additional commands shall be allowed during this time.
3) Model pop-ups shall not replace or completely overlay the
background.
c. Images or pictures shall never be used as backgrounds to any page other
than a master start page, if appropriate.
5. Medium to Large Format Touch Panel Layout Guideline Template:
a. IMAGEClient Logo - Static Window
b. A/V Source Selection - Static Window
c. Display Power, Screen Controls, Light Controls, Shade Controls, and other
Environmental Controls - Static Window
d. Controls for Selected Source and Status or Home Page - Dynamic Window
e. Master Volume and Mute, Video Mute, and Microphone Volume - Static
Window
f. Home Button - Static Window
g. Date, Time, and Room Number - Static Window
h. Master System Off - Static Window
6. Small Format Touch Panel Layout Guideline Template:
a. A/V Source Selection and Source Control and Status After Selection -
Dynamic Window
b. Home Button - Static Window
c. Date, Time, and Room Number - Static Window
1056
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 40 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
d. Master System Off - Static Window
7. Small Format Room Scheduling Touch Layout Guideline Template
a. Room Schedule and Scheduling Control - Dynamic Window
b. Chime Button - Static Window
c. Date, Time, and Room Number - Static Window
D. Programming and Configuration for Keypads:
1. This section only defines the minimum requirements. The programmer shall
provide complete keypad layouts and programming for a fully functional system.
2. Full system programming and configuration shall be provided for the system.
Programming and configuration shall be performed by a factory-trained and
certified programmer or an employee of the equipment manufacturer.
3. This section only defines the minimum requirements. The programmer shall
provide complete programming and configuration for a fully functional system.
4. The Contractor shall utilize the latest version of the programming and
configuration software.
5. The Contractor shall ensure that all components are updated to the latest
firmware at the completion of the project.
6. All programming and configuration for interface and control of all devices shown
on the drawings shall be provided. Programming and configuration shall be
provided for the following minimum functionality:
a. A master system on and off button.
1) All capable components within the system shall be turned off or
placed on standby when the system is selected to be off.
b. A master volume control up/down buttons or knob and a mute
c. Source select or source toggle button(s).
d. All unused hard buttons shall not be labeled.
3.8 SYSTEM COMMISSIONING
A. The Contractor shall notify the Owner prior to conducting final system commissioning.
B. System verification testing is part of the commissioning process. Verification testing
shall be performed by the Contractor and witnessed and documented by the
Commissioning Agent. Refer to Section 01 09 00 - General Commissioning for system
verification tests and commissioning requirements.
C. Contractor shall demonstrate system performance of all equipment and adjust settings
as directed by the Architect/Engineer and/or Owner.
1. All system settings, software options and other parameters shall be simulated
and tested by the Contractor
1057
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 41 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
3.9 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Where these specifications require a product or assembly without the use of a brand or
trade name, provide a product that meets the requirements of the specifications, as
supplied and warranted by the system vendor. If the product or assembly is not
available from the system vendor, provide product or assembly as recommended by
the system vendor.
B. Periodic observations will be performed during construction to verify compliance with
the requirements of the specifications. These services do not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.10 FIELD SERVICES
A. The installer shall conduct a planning meeting with the Owner. The purpose of this
meeting shall be to determine all equipment settings that are considered preferences
(where proper system operation does not depend on the setting).
B. The installer shall include labor for all planning and all programming activities required
to implement the Owner's preferences for equipment settings.
C. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor/installer to provide a complete, functional
system as described by the design documents. These responsibilities include:
1. Complete hardware setup, installation and wiring and software configuration.
2. Complete programming of software in accordance with the Owner's desires
determined by the planning meeting.
3. Complete system diagnostic verification.
4. Complete system commissioning.
3.11 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
A. The Contractor shall submit for review a formal acceptance and system checkout
procedure. The system checkout procedures shall include all system components and
software. The Contractor shall perform the tests and settings and document all results.
3.12 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION
A. Complete documentation shall be provided for the system. The documentation shall
describe:
1. All operational parameters of the system.
2. Complete documentation of programming and features.
3. Complete operating instructions for all hardware and software.
B. The following sections shall be provided in the system documentation:
1. User Manual: A step-by-step guide and instructions detailing all system user
functions.
2. Technical Manual: A comprehensive document providing all system operations,
troubleshooting flowcharts, functional system layout, wiring diagrams, block
diagrams and schematic diagrams.
1058
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
27 41 00 - 42 PROFESSIONAL
AUDIO/VIDEO SYSTEM
3. Maintenance Manual: A comprehensive document on all aspects of physical
maintenance of the systems, including cleaning of the displays.
3.13 SYSTEM TRAINING
A. All labor and materials required for on-site system training shall be provided. Training
shall be conducted at the project site using the project equipment.
1. Provide two week's advanced notice of training to the Owner and
Architect/Engineer.
2. The Architect/Engineer shall be presented with the option to attend the training.
3. Provide a training outline agenda describing the subject matter and the
recommended audience for each topic.
B. At a minimum, the following training shall be conducted:
1. User Manual: A course detailing the system functions and operations that a daily
user will encounter.
2. Technical User: Provide configuration training on all aspects of the system(s),
including equipment and software.
3. Maintenance User: Provide training on all aspects of physical maintenance of the
systems, including cleaning of the displays, bulb changes, filter cleaning and filter
changing.
C. Minimum on-site training times shall be:
1. User Manual: One (1) day.
2. Technical user: One (1) day.
3. Maintenance user: Four (4) hours.
END OF SECTION 27 41 00
1059
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 00 - 1 BASIC ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
SECTION 28 05 00
BASIC ELECTRONIC SAFETY AND SECURITY SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Basic Safety and Security System Requirements (herein referred to Security)
specifically applicable to Division 28 sections, in addition to Division 1 - General
Requirements.
B. All materials and installation methods shall conform to the applicable standards,
guidelines and codes referenced herein and within each specification section.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. CCR California Code of Regulation
B. CBC California Building Code
C. CFC California Fire Code
D. CEC California Electric Code
E. CMC California Mechanical Code
F. CPC California Plumbing Code
G. California Title 24 - Building Energy Efficiency Standards
H. SCAQMD South Coast Air Quality Management District
1.3 SCOPE OF WORK
A. This Specification and the accompanying drawings govern the work involved in
furnishing, installing, testing and placing into satisfactory operation the security
systems as shown on the drawings and specified herein.
B. Each Contractor shall provide all new materials as indicated in the schedules on the
drawings, and/or in these specifications, and all items required to make the portion of
the security systems a finished and working system.
C. All work will be awarded under a single General Contract. The division of work listed
below is for the Contractor's convenience and lists normal breakdown of the work.
D. Description of systems include but are not limited to the following:
1. Electronic access control system
1060
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 00 - 2 BASIC ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
2. Electronic intrusion detection system
3. Video surveillance
4. Fire detection and alarm.
5. Low voltage security wiring (less than +120VAC) as specified and required for
proper system control and communications.
6. All associated electrical backboxes, conduit, miscellaneous cabling, and power
supplies required for proper system installation and operation as defined in the
"Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility".
7. Firestopping of penetrations of fire-rated construction as described in Section 28
05 03.
1.4 DIVISION OF WORK BETWEEN ELECTRICAL AND SECURITY CONTRACTORS
A. Division of work is the responsibility of the Prime Contractor. Any scope of work
described in the contract document shall be sufficient for including said requirement in
the project. The Prime Contractor shall be solely responsible for determining the
appropriate subcontractor for the described scope. In no case shall the project be
assessed an additional cost for scope that is described in the contract documents. The
following division of responsibility is a guideline based on typical industry practice.
B. Definitions:
1. "Electrical Contractor" as referred to herein refers to the Contractors listed in
Division 26 of this Specification.
2. "Electrical Contractor" shall also refer to the Contractor listed in Division 28 of
this specification when the "Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility" indicates
the work shall be provided by the EC. Refer to the Contract Documents for the
"Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility".
3. "Security Contractor" as referred to herein refers to the Contractors listed in
Division 28 of this Specification.
4. Low Voltage Security Wiring: The wiring (less than 120VAC) associated with the
Security Systems, used for analog and/or digital signals between equipment.
C. General:
1. The purpose of these Specifications is to outline typical Electrical and Security
Contractor's work responsibilities as related to security systems including back
boxes, conduit, cable tray, power wiring and low voltage security wiring. The
prime contractor is responsible for all divisions of work.
2. The exact wiring requirements for much of the equipment cannot be determined
until the systems have been purchased and submittals are approved. Therefore,
only known wiring, conduits, raceways, and electrical power as related to such
items, is shown on the Security Drawings. Other wiring, conduits, raceways,
junction boxes, and electrical power not shown on the Security Drawings but
required for the successful operation of the systems shall be the responsibility of
the Security Contractor and included in the Contractor's bid.
1061
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 00 - 3 BASIC ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
3. Where the Electrical Contractor is required to install conduit, conduit sleeves
and/or power connections in support of Security systems, the final installation
shall not begin until a coordination meeting between the Electrical Contractor and
the Security Contractor has convened to determine the exact location and
requirements of the installation.
4. Where the Electrical Contractor is required to install cable tray that will contain
Low Voltage Security Wiring, the installation shall not begin until the Security
Contractor has completed a coordination review of the cable tray shop drawing.
5. This Contractor shall establish Electrical and Security utility elevations prior to
fabrication and installation. The Security Contractor shall cooperate with the
Electrical Contractor and the determined elevations in accordance with the
guidelines below. This Contractor shall coordinate utility elevations with other
trades. When a conflict arises, priority shall be as follows:
a. Lighting Fixtures
b. Gravity Flow Piping, including Steam and Condensate
c. Sheet Metal
d. Electrical Busduct
e. Cable Trays, including 12" access space
f. Sprinkler Piping and other Piping
g. Conduit and Wireway
h. Open Cabling
D. Electrical Contractor's Responsibility:
1. Assumes all responsibility for all required conduit and power connections when
shown on the "Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility" to be provided by the
Electrical Contractor.
2. Assumes all responsibility for providing and installing cable tray.
3. Responsible for Security Systems grounding and bonding.
4. This Contractor is responsible for coordination of utilities with all other
Contractors. If any field coordination conflicts are found, the Contractor shall
coordinate with other Contractors to determine a viable layout.
E. Security Contractor's Responsibility:
1. Assumes all responsibility for the low voltage security wiring of all systems,
including cable support where open cable is specified.
2. Assumes all responsibility for all required backboxes, conduit and power
connections not specifically shown as being provided by the Electrical Contractor
on the "Suggested Matrix of Scope Responsibility."
3. Responsible for providing the Electrical Contractor with the required grounding
lugs or other hardware for each piece of security equipment which is required to
be bonded to the telecommunications bonding system.
1062
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 00 - 4 BASIC ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
1.5 COORDINATION DRAWINGS
A. Definitions:
1. Coordination Drawings: A compilation of the pertinent layout and system
drawings that show the sizes and locations, including elevations, of system
components and required access areas to ensure that no two objects will occupy
the same space.
a. Mechanical trades shall include, but are not limited to, mechanical
equipment, ductwork, fire protection systems, plumbing piping, medical gas
systems, hydronic piping, steam and steam condensate piping, and any
item that may impact coordination with other disciplines.
b. Electrical trades shall include, but are not limited to, electrical equipment,
conduit 1.5" and larger, conduit racks, cable trays, pull boxes, transformers,
raceway, busway, lighting, ceiling-mounted devices, and any item that may
impact coordination with other disciplines.
c. Technology trades shall include, but are not limited to, technology
equipment, racks, conduit 1.5" and larger, conduit racks, cable trays, ladder
rack, pull boxes, raceway, ceiling-mounted devices, and any item that may
impact coordination with other disciplines.
d. Maintenance clearances and code-required dedicated space shall be
included.
e. The coordination drawings shall include all underground, underfloor, in-
floor, in chase, and vertical trade items.
2. The contractors shall use the coordination process to identify the proper
sequence of installation of all utilities above ceilings and in other congested
areas, to ensure an orderly and coordinated end result, and to provide adequate
access for service and maintenance.
B. Participation:
1. The contractors and subcontractors responsible for work defined above shall
participate in the coordination drawing process.
2. One contractor shall be designated as the Coordinating Contractor for purposes
of preparing a complete set of composite electronic CAD coordination drawings
that include all applicable trades, and for coordinating the activities related to this
process. The Coordinating Contractor for this project shall be the Mechanical
Contractor.
a. The Coordinating Contractor shall utilize personnel familiar with
requirements of this project and skilled as draftspersons/CAD operators,
competent to prepare the required coordination drawings.
1063
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 00 - 5 BASIC ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
3. Electronic CAD drawings shall be submitted to the Coordinating Contractor for
addition of work by other trades. IMEG will provide electronic file copies of
ventilation drawings for contractor's use if the contractor signs and returns an
"Electronic File Transfer" waiver provided by IMEG. IMEG will not consider
blatant reproductions of original file copies an acceptable alternative for
coordination drawings.
C. Drawing Requirements:
1. The file format and file naming convention shall be coordinated with and agreed
to by all contractors participating in the coordination process and the Owner.
a. Scale of drawings:
1) General plans: 1/4 Inch = 1 '-0" (minimum).
2) Mechanical, electrical, communication rooms, and including the
surrounding areas within 10 feet: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
3) Shafts and risers: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
4) Sections of shafts and mechanical and electrical equipment rooms:
1/4 Inch = 1 '-0" (minimum).
5) Sections of congested areas: 1/2 Inch = 1'-0" (minimum).
2. Ductwork layout drawings shall be the baseline system for other components.
Ductwork layout drawings shall be modified to accommodate other components
as the coordination process progresses.
3. There may be more drawings required for risers, top and bottom levels of
mechanical rooms, and shafts.
4. The minimum quantity of drawings will be established at the first coordination
meeting and sent to the A/E for review. Additional drawings may be required if
other areas of congestion are discovered during the coordination process.
D. General:
1. Coordination drawing files shall be made available to the A/E and Owner's
Representative. The A/E will only review identified conflicts and give an opinion,
but will not perform as a coordinator.
2. A plotted set of coordination drawings shall be available at the project site.
3. Coordination drawings are not shop drawings and shall not be submitted as
such.
4. The contract drawings are schematic in nature and do not show every fitting and
appurtenance for each utility. Each contractor is expected to have included in the
bid sufficient fittings, material, and labor to allow for adjustments in routing of
utilities made necessary by the coordination process and to provide a complete
and functional system.
5. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions due to
participation in the coordination process.
6. The contractors will not be allowed additional costs or time extensions for
additional fittings, reroutings or changes of duct size, that are essentially
equivalent sizes to those shown on the drawings and determined necessary
through the coordination process.
1064
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 00 - 6 BASIC ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
7. The A/E reserves the right to determine space priority of equipment in the event
of spatial conflicts or interference between equipment, piping, conduit, ducts, and
equipment provided by the trades.
8. Changes to the contract documents that are necessary for systems installation
and coordination shall be brought to the attention of the A/E.
9. Access panels shall preferably occur only in gypsum board walls or plaster
ceilings where indicated on the drawings.
a. Access to mechanical, electrical, technology, and other items located above
the ceiling shall be through accessible lay-in ceiling tile areas.
b. Potential layout changes shall be made to avoid additional access panels.
c. Additional access panels shall not be allowed without written approval from
the A/E at the coordination drawing stage.
d. Providing additional access panels shall be considered after other
alternatives are reviewed and discarded by the A/E and the Owner's
Representative.
e. When additional access panels are required, they shall be provided without
additional cost to the Owner.
10. Complete the coordination drawing process and obtain signoff of the drawings by
all contractors prior to installing any of the components.
11. Conflicts that result after the coordination drawings are signed off shall be the
responsibility of the contractor or subcontractor who did not properly identify their
work requirements, or installed their work without proper coordination.
12. Updated coordination drawings that reflect as-built conditions may be used as
record documents.
1.6 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Qualifications:
1. Only products of reputable manufacturers as determined by the
Architect/Engineer will be acceptable.
2. Each Contractor and their subcontractors shall employ only workers who are
skilled in their respective trades and fully trained. All workers involved in the
installation, termination, testing, and placing into operation electronic security
devices shall be individually trained by the manufacturer.
3. The Contractor shall be experienced in all aspects of this work and shall be
required to demonstrate direct experience on recent systems of similar type and
size.
4. The Contractor shall own and maintain tools and equipment necessary for
successful installation and testing of electronic security devices and have
personnel adequately trained in the use of such tools and equipment.
B. Compliance with Codes, Laws, Ordinances:
1. Conform to all requirements of the State of California Codes, Laws, Ordinances
and other regulations having jurisdiction.
2. Conform to all published standards of City of Moorpark.
1065
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 00 - 7 BASIC ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
3. In the event there are no local codes having jurisdiction over this job, the current
issue of the National Electrical Code shall be followed.
4. If there is a discrepancy between the codes and regulations having jurisdiction
over this installation, and these specifications, Architect/Engineer shall determine
the method or equipment used.
5. If the Contractor notes, at the time of bidding, that any parts of the drawings or
specifications do not comply with the codes or regulations, Contractor shall
inform the Architect/Engineer in writing, requesting a clarification. If there is
insufficient time to follow this procedure, Contractor shall submit with the
proposal a separate price to make the system comply with the codes and
regulations.
6. Verify the installation environment prior to purchasing or installing any cable.
Cable installed in a plenum environment shall be appropriately rated. Bring all
discrepancies between the contract documents and installation conditions to the
attention of the Architect/Engineer prior to purchase or installation.
7. All changes to the system made after the letting of the contract, in order to
comply with the applicable codes or the requirements of the Inspector, shall be
made by the Contractor without cost to the Owner.
C. Permits, Fees, Taxes, Inspections:
1. Procure all applicable permits and licenses.
2. Abide by all applicable laws, regulations, ordinances, and other rules of the State
or Political Subdivision wherein the work is done, or as required by any duly
constituted public authority.
3. Pay all applicable charges for such permits or licenses that may be required.
4. Pay all applicable fees and taxes imposed by the State, Municipal and/or other
regulatory bodies.
5. Pay all charges arising out of required inspections due to codes, permits as
applicable licenses or as otherwise may be required by an authorized body
6. Pay all charges arising out of required contract document reviews associated as
applicable with the project and as initiated by the Owner or authorized
independent agency/consultant.
7. All equipment, and materials shall be as approved or listed by the following:
(Unless approval or listing is not applicable to an item by all acceptable
manufacturers.)
a. Factory Mutual
b. Underwriters' Laboratories, Inc.
D. Examination of Drawings:
1. The drawings for the Security Systems work are diagrammatic, intended to
convey the scope of the work and to indicate the general arrangements and
locations of equipment etc., and the approximate sizes of equipment.
2. Contractor shall determine the exact locations of equipment and the exact routing
of cabling to best fit the layout of the job. Scaling of the drawings will not be
sufficient or accurate for determining this layout. Where a specific route is
required, such route will be indicated on the drawings.
1066
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 00 - 8 BASIC ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
3. Where job conditions require reasonable changes in indicated arrangements and
locations, such changes shall be made by the Contractor at no additional cost to
the Owner.
4. If an item is either shown on the drawings, called for in the specifications or
required for proper operation of the system, it shall be considered sufficient for
including same in this contract.
5. The determination of quantities of material and equipment required shall be
made by the Contractor from the drawings. Schedules on the drawings and in the
specifications are completed as an aid to the Contractor but where discrepancies
arise, the greater number shall govern.
6. Where words "provide", "install", or "furnish" are used on the drawings or in the
specifications, it shall be taken to mean, to furnish, install and terminate
completely ready for operation, the items mentioned.
E. Electronic Media/Files:
1. Construction drawings for this project have been prepared utilizing Revit.
2. Contractors and Subcontractors may request electronic media files of the
contract drawings and/or copies of the specifications. Specifications will be
provided in PDF format.
3. Upon request for electronic media, the Contractor shall complete and return a
signed "Electronic File Transmittal" form provided by IMEG. If the information
requested includes floor plans prepared by others, the Contractor will be
responsible for obtaining approval from the appropriate Design Professional for
use of that part of the document.
4. The electronic contract documents can be used for preparation of shop drawings
and as-built drawings only. The information may not be used in whole or in part
for any other project.
5. The drawings prepared by IMEG for bidding purposes may not be used directly
for ductwork layout drawings or coordination drawings.
6. The use of these CAD documents by the Contractor does not relieve them from
their responsibility for coordination of work with other trades and verification of
space available for the installation.
7. The information is provided to expedite the project and assist the Contractor with
no guarantee by IMEG as to the accuracy or correctness of the information
provided. IMEG accepts no responsibility or liability for the Contractor's use of
these documents.
8. The use of these documents by the Contractor does not relieve them from their
responsibility for coordination of work with other trades and verification of space
available for the installation.
F. Field Measurements:
1. Before ordering any materials, this Contractor shall verify all pertinent dimensions
at the job site and be responsible for their accuracy.
1.7 SUBMITTALS
A. Submittals shall be required for the following items, and for additional items where
required elsewhere in the specifications or on the drawings.
1067
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 00 - 9 BASIC ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
1. Submittals list:
Referenced
Specification
Section Submittal Item
Coordination
Drawings
28 05 03 Through-Penetration
Firestopping
28 13 00 Electronic Access Control
28 16 00 Intrusion Detection System Yes
28 23 00 Video Surveillance Yes
B. General Submittal Procedures: In addition to the provisions of Division 1, the following
are required:
1. Transmittal: Each transmittal shall include the following:
a. Date
b. Project title and number
c. Contractor's name and address
d. Division of work (e.g., plumbing, heating, ventilating, etc.)
e. Description of items submitted and relevant specification number
f. Notations of deviations from the contract documents
g. Other pertinent data
2. Submittal Cover Sheet: Each submittal shall include a cover sheet containing:
a. Date
b. Project title and number
c. Architect/Engineer
d. Contractor and subcontractors' names and addresses
e. Supplier and manufacturer's names and addresses
f. Division of work (e.g., plumbing, heating, ventilating, etc.)
g. Description of item submitted (using project nomenclature) and relevant
specification number
h. Notations of deviations from the contract documents
i. Other pertinent data
j. Provide space for Contractor's review stamps
3. Composition:
a. Submittals shall be submitted using specification sections and the project
nomenclature for each item.
b. Individual submittal packages shall be prepared for items in each
specification section. All items within a single specification section shall be
packaged together where possible. An individual submittal may contain
items from multiple specifications sections if the items are intimately linked
(e.g., pumps and motors).
c. All sets shall contain an index of the items enclosed with a general topic
description on the cover.
1068
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 00 - 10 BASIC ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
4. Content: Submittals shall include all fabrication, erection, layout, and setting
drawings; manufacturers' standard drawings; schedules; descriptive literature,
catalogs and brochures; performance and test data; wiring and control diagrams;
dimensions; shipping and operating weights; shipping splits; service clearances;
and all other drawings and descriptive data of materials of construction as may
be required to show that the materials, equipment or systems and the location
thereof conform to the requirements of the contract documents.
5. Contractor's Approval Stamp:
a. The Contractor shall thoroughly review and approve all shop drawings
before submitting them to the Architect/Engineer. The Contractor shall
stamp, date and sign each submittal certifying it has been reviewed.
b. Unstamped submittals will be rejected.
c. The Contractor's review shall include, but not be limited to, verification of
the following:
1) Only approved manufacturers are used.
2) Addenda items have been incorporated.
3) Catalog numbers and options match those specified.
4) Performance data matches that specified.
5) Electrical characteristics and loads match those specified.
6) Equipment connection locations, sizes, capacities, etc. have been
coordinated with other affected trades.
7) Dimensions and service clearances are suitable for the intended
location.
8) Equipment dimensions are coordinated with support steel,
housekeeping pads, openings, etc.
9) Constructability issues are resolved (e.g., weights and dimensions
are suitable for getting the item into the building and into place, sinks
fit into countertops, etc.).
d. The Contractor shall review, stamp and approve all subcontractors'
submittals as described above.
e. The Contractor's approval stamp is required on all submittals. Approval will
indicate the Contractor's review of all material and a complete
understanding of exactly what is to be furnished. Contractor shall clearly
mark all deviations from the contract documents on all submittals. If
deviations are not marked by the Contractor, then the item shall be required
to meet all drawing and specification requirements.
6. Submittal Identification and Markings:
a. The Contractor shall clearly mark each item with the same nomenclature
applied on the drawings or in the specifications.
b. The Contractor shall clearly indicate the size, finish, material, etc.
c. Where more than one model is shown on a manufacturer's sheet, the
Contractor shall clearly indicate exactly which item and which data is
intended.
d. All marks and identifications on the submittals shall be unambiguous.
1069
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 00 - 11 BASIC ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
7. Schedule submittals to expedite the project. Coordinate submission of related
items.
8. Identify variations from the contract documents and product or system limitations
that may be detrimental to the successful performance of the completed work.
9. Reproduction of contract documents alone is not acceptable for submittals.
10. Incomplete submittals will be rejected without review. Partial submittals will only
be reviewed with prior approval from the Architect/Engineer.
11. Submittals not required by the contract documents may be returned without
review.
12. The Architect/Engineer's responsibility shall be to review one set of shop drawing
submittals for each product. If the first submittal is incomplete or does not comply
with the drawings and/or specifications, the Contractor shall be responsible to
bear the cost for the Architect/Engineer to recheck and handle the additional
shop drawing submittals.
13. Submittals shall be reviewed and approved by the Architect/Engineer before
releasing any equipment for manufacture or shipment.
14. Contractor's responsibility for errors, omissions or deviation from the contract
documents in submittals is not relieved by the Architect/Engineer's approval.
15. Schedule shall allow for adequate time to perform orderly and proper review of
submittals, including time for consultants and Owner if required, and resubmittals
by Contractor if necessary, and to cause no delay in Work or in activities of
Owner or other contractors.
a. Allow at least two weeks for Architect's/Engineer's review and processing of
each submittal.
16. Architect/Engineer reserves the right to withhold action on a submittal which, in
the Architect/Engineer's opinion, requires coordination with other submittals until
related submittals are received. The Architect/Engineer will notify the Contractor,
in writing, when they exercise this right.
C. Electronic Submittal Procedures:
1. Distribution: Email submittals as attachments to all parties designated by the
Architect/Engineer, unless a web-based submittal program is used.
2. Transmittals: Each submittal shall include an individual electronic letter of
transmittal.
3. Format: Electronic submittals shall be in PDF format only. Scanned copies, in
PDF format, of paper originals are acceptable. Submittals that are not legible will
be rejected. Do not set any permission restrictions on files; protected, locked, or
secured documents will be rejected.
4. File Names: Electronic submittal file names shall include the relevant
specification section number followed by a description of the item submitted, as
follows. Where possible, include the transmittal as the first page of the PDF
instead of using multiple electronic files.
a. Submittal file name: 28 XX XX.description.YYYYMMDD
b. Transmittal file name: 28 XX XX.description.YYYYMMDD
1070
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 00 - 12 BASIC ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
5. File Size: Files shall be transmitted via a pre-approved method. Larger files may
require an alternative transfer method, which shall also be pre-approved.
1.8 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, HANDLING & MAINTENANCE
A. Exercise care in transporting and handling to prevent damage to fixtures, equipment
and materials.
B. Store materials on the site to prevent damage.
C. Keep fixtures, equipment and materials clean, dry and free from harmful conditions.
1.9 NETWORK / INTERNET CONNECTED EQUIPMENT
A. These specifications may require certain equipment or systems to have network,
Internet and/or remote access capability ("Network Capability"). Any requirement for
Network Capability shall be interpreted only as a functional capability and is not to be
construed as authority to connect or enable any Network Capability. Network
Capability may only be connected or enabled with the express written consent of the
Owner.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. At a minimum, provide a one (1) year warranty for all equipment, materials, and
workmanship. Individual specifications sections within Division 28 may require
additional warranty requirements for specific equipment or systems.
B. The warranty period for the entire installation described in this Division of the
specifications shall commence on the date of substantial completion unless a whole or
partial system or any separate piece of equipment or component is put into use for the
benefit of any party other than the installing contractor with prior written authorization.
In this instance, the warranty period shall commence on the date when such whole
system, partial system or separate piece of equipment or component is placed in
operation and accepted in writing by the Owner or their representative.
C. Warranty requirements shall extend to correction, without cost to the final user, of all
work and/or equipment found to be defective or nonconforming to the contract
documents. The Contractor shall bear the cost of correcting all damage resulting from
such defects or nonconformance with contract documents exclusive of repairs required
as a result of improper maintenance or operation, or of normal wear as determined by
the Architect/Engineer.
1.11 INSURANCE
A. Contractor shall maintain insurance coverage as set forth in Division 0 of these
specifications.
1071
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 00 - 13 BASIC ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 Refer to individual sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 JOBSITE SAFETY
A. Neither the professional activities of the Architect/Engineer, nor the presence of the
Architect/Engineer or the employees and subconsultants at a construction site, shall
relieve the Contractor and any other entity of their obligations, duties and
responsibilities including, but not limited to, construction means, methods, sequence,
techniques or procedures necessary for performing, superintending or coordinating all
portions of the work of construction in accordance with the contract documents and
any health or safety precautions required by any regulatory agencies. The
Architect/Engineer and personnel have no authority to exercise any control over any
construction contractor or other entity or their employees in connection with their work
or any health or safety precautions. The Contractor is solely responsible for jobsite
safety. The Architect/Engineer and the Architect/Engineer's consultants shall be
indemnified and shall be made additional insureds under the Contractor's general
liability insurance policy.
3.2 GENERAL INSTALLATION REQUIREMENTS
A. Installation of all conduit and cabling shall comply with Sections 26 05 33 and 26 05
13. Additional conduit requirements described within this Division shall be
supplemental to the requirement described in Section 26 05 33. Should conflicts exist
between the two Divisions the more stringent (more expensive material and labor)
condition shall prevail until bidding addendum or construction clarification or RFI can
be submitted and responded to. In no case shall the Contractor carry the least
stringent condition in the pricing.
B. It is the Contractor's responsibility to survey the site and include all necessary costs to
perform the installation as specified.
C. The Contractor shall be responsible for identifying and reporting to the
Architect/Engineer any existing conditions including but not limited to damage to walls,
flooring, ceiling and furnishings prior to start of work. All damage to interior spaces
caused by this Contractor shall be repaired at this Contractor's expense to pre-existing
conditions, including final colors and finishes.
D. All cables and devices installed in damp or wet locations, including any underground or
underslab location, shall be listed as suitable for use in such environments. Follow
manufacturer's recommended installation practices for installing cables and devices in
damp or wet locations. Any cable or device that fails as a result of being installed in a
damp or wet location shall be replaced at the Contractor's expense.
1072
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 00 - 14 BASIC ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. General:
1. Refer to specific Division 28 sections for further requirements.
2. The Contractor shall conduct all tests required and applicable to the work both
during and after construction of the work.
3. The necessary instruments and materials required to conduct or make the tests
shall be supplied by the Contractor who shall also supply competent personnel
for making the tests who has been schooled in the proper testing techniques.
4. In the event the results obtained in the tests are not satisfactory, This Contractor
shall make such adjustments, replacements and changes as are necessary and
shall then repeat the test or tests which disclose faulty or defective work or
equipment, and shall make such additional tests as the Architect/Engineer or
code enforcing agency deems necessary.
B. Protection of cable from foreign materials:
1. It is the Contractor's responsibility to provide adequate physical protection to
prevent foreign material application or contact with any cable type. Foreign
material is defined as any material that would negatively impact the validity of the
manufacturer's performance warranty. This includes, but is not limited, to
overspray of paint (accidental or otherwise), drywall compound, or any other
surface chemical, liquid or compound that could come in contact with the cable,
cable jacket or cable termination components.
2. Application of foreign materials of any kind on any cable, cable jacket or cable
termination component will not be accepted. It shall be the Contractor's
responsibility to replace any component containing overspray, in its entirety, at
no additional cost to the project. Cleaning of the cables with harsh chemicals is
not allowed. This requirement is regardless of the PASS/FAIL test results of the
cable containing overspray. Should the manufacturer and warrantor of the
structured cabling system desire to physically inspect the installed condition and
certify the validity of the structured cabling system (via a signed and dated
statement by an authorized representative of the structured cabling
manufacturer), the Owner may, at their sole discretion, agree to accept said
warranty in lieu of having the affected cables replaced. In the case of plenum
cabling, in addition to the statement from the manufacturer, the Contractor shall
also present to the Owner a letter from the local Authority Having Jurisdiction
stating that they consider the plenum rating of the cable to be intact and
acceptable.
3.4 PROJECT CLOSEOUT
A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: PROJECT CLOSEOUT for requirements. The
following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.
B. Final Jobsite Observation:
1073
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 00 - 15 BASIC ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
1. The Architect/Engineer will not perform a final jobsite observation until the project
is ready. This is not dictated by schedule, but rather by completeness of the
project.
2. Refer to the end of this section for a "STATEMENT INDICATING READINESS
FOR FINAL JOBSITE OBSERVATION."
3. The Contractor shall sign this form and return it to the Architect/Engineer so that
the final observation can commence.
C. Before final payment will be authorized, this Contractor must have completed the
following:
1. Submitted operation and maintenance manuals to the Architect/Engineer for
review.
2. Submitted bound copies of approved shop drawings.
3. Record documents including edited drawings and specifications accurately
reflecting field conditions, inclusive of all project revisions, change orders, and
modifications.
4. Submitted a report stating the instructions given to the Owner's representative
complete with the number of hours spent in the instruction. The report shall bear
the signature of an authorized agent of This Contractor and shall be signed by
the Owner's representative as having received the instructions.
5. Submitted testing reports for all systems requiring final testing as described
herein.
6. Submitted start-up reports on all equipment requiring a factory installation
inspection and/or start.
7. Provide spare parts, maintenance, and extra materials in quantities specified in
individual specification sections. Deliver to project site; submit receipt to
Architect/Engineer prior to final payment being approved.
3.5 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE MANUALS
A. General:
1. Provide an electronic copy of the O&M manuals as described below for
Architect/Engineer's review and approval. The electronic copy shall be corrected
as required to address the Architect/Engineer's comments. Once corrected,
electronic copies and paper copies shall be distributed as directed by the
Architect/Engineer.
2. Approved O&M manuals shall be completed and in the Owner's possession prior
to Owner's acceptance and at least 10 days prior to instruction of operating
personnel.
B. Electronic Submittal Procedures:
1. Distribution: Email the O&M manual as attachments to all parties designated by
the Architect/Engineer.
2. Transmittals: Each submittal shall include an individual electronic letter of
transmittal.
1074
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 00 - 16 BASIC ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
3. Format: Electronic submittals shall be in PDF format only. Scanned copies, in
PDF format, of paper originals are acceptable. Submittals that are not legible will
be rejected. Do not set any permission restrictions on files; protected, locked, or
secured documents will be rejected.
4. File Names: Electronic submittal file names shall include the relevant
specification section number followed by a description of the item submitted, as
follows. Where possible, include the transmittal as the first page of the PDF
instead of using multiple electronic files.
a. O&M file name: O&M.div28.contractor.YYYYMMDD
b. Transmittal file name: O&Mtransmittal.div28.contractor.YYYYMMDD
5. File Size: Files shall be transmitted via a pre-approved method. Larger files may
require an alternative transfer method, which shall also be pre-approved.
6. Provide the Owner with an approved copy of the O&M manual on compact discs
(CD), digital video discs (DVD), or flash drives with a permanently affixed label,
printed with the title "Operation and Maintenance Instructions", title of the project
and subject matter of disc/flash drive when multiple disc/flash drives are required.
7. All text shall be searchable.
8. Bookmarks shall be used, dividing information first by specification section, then
systems, major equipment and finally individual items. All bookmark titles shall
include the nomenclature used in the construction documents and shall be an
active link to the first page of the section being referenced.
C. Operation and Maintenance Instructions shall include:
1. Title Page: Include title page with project title, Architect, Engineer, Contractor, all
subcontractors, and major equipment suppliers, with addresses, telephone
numbers, website addresses, email addresses and point of contacts. Website
URLs and email addresses shall be active links in the electronic submittal.
2. Table of Contents: Include a table of contents describing specification section,
systems, major equipment, and individual items.
3. Copies of all final approved shop drawings and submittals. Include
Architect's/Engineer's shop drawing review comments. Insert the individual shop
drawing directly after the Operation and Maintenance information for the item(s)
in the review form.
4. Copy of final approved test and balance reports.
5. Copies of all factory inspections and/or equipment startup reports.
6. Copies of warranties.
7. Schematic wiring diagrams of the equipment that have been updated for field
conditions. Field wiring shall have label numbers to match drawings.
8. Dimensional drawings of equipment.
9. Capacities and utility consumption of equipment.
10. Detailed parts lists with lists of suppliers.
11. Operating procedures for each system.
12. Maintenance schedule and procedures. Include a chart listing maintenance
requirements and frequency.
13. Repair procedures for major components.
14. List of lubricants in all equipment and recommended frequency of lubrication.
15. Instruction books, cards, and manuals furnished with the equipment.
1075
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 00 - 17 BASIC ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
3.6 INSTRUCTING THE OWNER'S REPRESENTATIVE
A. Adequately instruct the Owner's designated representative or representatives in the
maintenance, care, and operation of the complete systems installed under this
contract.
B. Provide verbal and written instructions to the Owner's representative or
representatives by FACTORY PERSONNEL in the care, maintenance, and operation
of the equipment and systems.
C. The Owner has the option to make a video recording of all instructions. Coordinate
schedule of instructions to facilitate this recording.
D. Notify the Architect/Engineer of the time and place for the verbal instructions to be
given to the Owner's representative so a representative can be present if desired.
E. Refer to the individual specification sections for minimum hours of instruction time for
each system.
F. Operating Instructions:
1. The Contractor is responsible for all instructions to the Owner and/or Owner's
operating staff on the security systems.
2. If the Contractor does not have Engineers and/or Technicians on staff that can
adequately provide the required instructions on system operation, performance,
troubleshooting, care and maintenance, the Contractor shall include in the bid an
adequate amount to reimburse the Owner for the Architect/Engineer to perform
these services.
3.7 SYSTEM STARTING AND ADJUSTING
A. The security systems included in the construction documents are to be complete and
operating systems. The Architect/Engineer will make periodic job site observations
during the construction period. The system start-up, testing, configuration, and
satisfactory system performance is the responsibility of the Contractor. This shall
include all calibration and adjustments of electrical equipment controls, equipment
settings, software configuration, troubleshooting and verification of software, and final
adjustments that may be required.
B. All operating conditions and control sequences shall be simulated and tested during
the start-up period.
1076
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 00 - 18 BASIC ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
C. The Contractor, subcontractors, and equipment suppliers are expected to have skilled
technicians to ensure that the system performs as designed. If the Architect/Engineer
is requested to visit the job site for the purpose of trouble shooting, assisting in the
satisfactory start-up, obtaining satisfactory equipment operation, resolving installation
and/or workmanship problems, equipment substitution issues or unsatisfactory system
performance, including call backs during the warranty period through no fault of the
design; the Contractor shall reimburse the Owner on a time and material basis for
services rendered at the Architect/Engineer's standard hourly rates in effect at the time
the services are requested. The Contractor shall be responsible for making payment to
the Owner for services required that are product, installation or workmanship related.
Payment is due within 30 days after services are rendered.
3.8 RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Refer to the Division 1 Section: PROJECT CLOSEOUT for requirements. The
following paragraphs supplement the requirements of Division 1.
B. Mark specifications to indicate approved substitutions, change orders, and actual
equipment and materials used.
C. This Contractor shall maintain at the job site, a separate and complete set of Security
Drawings which shall be clearly and permanently marked and noted in complete detail
any changes made to the location and arrangement of equipment or made to the
Technology Systems and wiring as a result of building construction conditions or as a
result of instructions from the Architect or Engineer. All Change Orders, RFI
responses, Clarifications and other supplemental instructions shall be marked on the
documents. Record documents that merely reference the existence of the above items
are not acceptable. Should This Contractor fail to complete Record Documents as
required by this contract, This Contractor shall reimburse Architect/Engineer for all
costs to develop record documents that comply with this requirement. Reimbursement
shall be made at the Architect/Engineer's hourly rates in effect at the time of work.
D. Record actual routing of all conduits sized 2" or larger.
E. The above record of changes shall be made available for the Architect and Engineer's
examination during any regular work time.
F. Upon completion of the job, and before final payment is made, This Contractor shall
give the marked-up drawings to the Architect/Engineer.
3.9 ADJUST AND CLEAN
A. Contractor shall thoroughly clean all equipment and systems prior to the Owner's final
acceptance of the project.
B. Contractor shall clean all foreign paint, grease, oil, dirt, labels, stickers, and other
foreign material from equipment.
C. Contractor shall remove all rubbish, debris, etc., accumulated during the Contractor's
operations from the premises.
1077
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 00 - 19 BASIC ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
3.10 SPECIAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the
low emitting material limits of the following standards:CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 -
Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC
from Indoor Sources Using Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.
1. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant
Applications. All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site shall comply with the
applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168.
2. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied Paints
and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the applicable VOC
limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.
STATEMENT INDICATING
1078
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 00 - 20 BASIC ELECTRONIC
SAFETY AND SECURITY
SYSTEM REQUIREMENTS
READINESS FOR FINAL JOBSITE OBSERVATION
To assist the contractor in a timely close-out of the project, it is crucial that the final jobsite
observation is not conducted prior to the project being ready. The contractor is required to
review the completion status of the project at the time the observation is scheduled. This review,
and the subsequent submittal of this form to the Architect/Engineer, shall indicate the
contractor's agreement that the area of the project being requested for final observation is ready
as defined below. The following list represents the degree of completeness required prior to
requesting a final observation:
1. All cabling pathways (cable tray, ladder rack, conduit sleeves, etc.) are installed and all
cabling has been pulled through them.
2. All mechanical firestop products are installed and all other penetrations have been sealed.
3. All CCTV cameras, mounts, cabling and all headend equipment are installed, programmed
and operational.
4. All access control system equipment, including card readers, conduits, cabling, electronic
locks, controllers and all headend equipment, is installed, programmed and operational.
Prime Contractor: _________________________ By: _____________________________
Requested Observation Date ________________ Today's Date: _____________________
Contractor shall sign this readiness statement and transmit to Architect/Engineer at least 10
days prior to the requested date of observation.
It is understood that if the Architect/Engineer finds that the project is not complete as defined
above and that the final jobsite observation cannot be completed on the requested date, the
Architect/Engineer will return to the site at a later date. All additional visits to the site for the
purposes of completing the final observation will be billed T&M to the Contractor at our standard
hourly rates, including travel expenses or the contractor's retainage may be deducted for the
same amount.
END OF SECTION 28 05 00
1079
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 03 - 1 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
SECTION 28 05 03
THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOPPING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Through-Penetration Firestopping.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: Company specializing in manufacturing products specified in this Section.
B. Installer: Individuals performing work shall be certified by the manufacturer of the system
selected for installation.
1.3 REFERENCES
A. UL 263 - Fire Tests of Building Construction and Materials
B. UL 723 - Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
C. ANSI/UL 1479 - Fire Tests of Through Penetration Firestops
D. UL 2079 Tests for Fire Resistance of Building Joint Systems
E. UL Fire Resistance Directory Through Penetration Firestop Systems (XHEZ)
F. Intertek / Warnock Hersey - Directory of Listed Products
G. ASTM E84 - Standard Test Method for Surface Burning Characteristics of Building Materials
H. ASTM E814 - Standard Test Method for Fire Tests of Through-Penetration Firestops
I. CBC California Building Code
J. 2018 International Building Code
1.4 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit under provisions of Section 28 05 00.
B. Submit Firestopping Installers Certification for all installers on the project.
1080
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 03 - 2 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
C. Shop Drawings: Submit for each condition requiring firestopping. Include descriptions of the
specific penetrating item, actual wall/floor construction, manufacturer's installation
instructions, and UL or Intertek / Warnock Hersey Assembly number.
D. Through-Penetration Firestop System Schedule: Indicate locations of each through-
penetration firestop system, along with the following information:
1. Types of penetrating items.
2. Types of constructions penetrated, including fire-resistance ratings and, where
applicable, thicknesses of construction penetrated.
3. Through-penetration firestop systems for each location identified by firestop design
designation of qualified testing and inspecting agency.
4. F ratings for each firestop system.
E. Maintain a notebook on the job site at all times that contains copies of approved submittals
for all through penetration firestopping to be installed. Notebook shall be made available to
the Authority Having Jurisdiction at their request and turned over to the Owner at the end of
construction as part of the O&M Manuals.
F. Submit VOC rating of firestopping material in g/L (less water) with documentation that it
meets the limits set forth in SCAQMD Rule 1168.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Store, protect and handle products on site. Accept material on site in factory containers and
packing. Inspect for damage. Protect from deterioration or damage due to moisture,
temperature changes, contaminants, or other causes. Follow manufacturer's instructions for
storage.
B. Install material prior to expiration of product shelf life.
1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. General: For penetrations through the following fire-resistance-rated constructions, including
both empty openings and openings containing penetrating items, provide through-
penetration firestop systems that are produced and installed to resist spread of fire
according to requirements indicated, resist passage of smoke and other gases, and
maintain original fire-resistance rating of construction penetrated.
1. Fire-resistance-rated walls including fire partitions, fire barriers, and smoke barriers.
B. Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with the following ratings
determined per UL 1479:
1. F-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with F-ratings
indicated, but not less than that equaling or exceeding fire-resistance rating of
constructions penetrated.
2. L-Rated Systems: Provide through-penetration firestop systems with L-ratings of not
more than 5.0 cfm/sq.ft. at both ambient temperature and 400°°F.
1081
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 03 - 3 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
C. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to light, traffic, moisture, or physical
damage, provide products that, after curing, do not deteriorate when exposed to these
conditions both during and after construction.
D. For through-penetration firestop systems exposed to view, provide products with flame-
spread and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 450, respectively, as determined
per ASTM E 84.
E. For through-penetration firestop systems in air plenums, provide products with flame-spread
and smoke-developed indexes of less than 25 and 50, respectively, as determined per
ASTM E 84.
F. Adhesives and Sealants: All sealers, adhesives, and sealants shall comply with the low
emitting material limits of the following standards:
1. CDPH Standard Method V1.1-2010 - Standard Method for the Testing and Evaluation
of Volatile Organic Chemical Emissions VOC from Indoor Sources Using
Environmental Chambers Version 1.1.
2. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule 1168 - Adhesive and Sealant
Applications. All adhesives and sealants wet-applied on site shall comply with the
applicable chemical content requirements of SCAQMD Rule 1168.
3. South Coast Air Quality Management District Rule SCAQMD 1113 - Wet Applied
Paints and Coatings. All paints and coatings wet-applied on site must meet the
applicable VOC limits of SCAQMD Rule 1113.
1.7 MEETINGS
A. Pre-installation meeting: A pre-installation meeting shall be scheduled and shall include the
Construction Manager, General Contractor, all Subcontractors associated with the
installation of systems penetrating fire barriers, Firestopping Manufacturer's Representative,
and the Owner.
1. Review foreseeable methods related to firestopping work.
2. Tour representative areas where firestopping is to be installed; inspect and discuss
each type of condition and each type of substrate that will be encountered, and
preparation to be performed by other trades.
1.8 WARRANTY
A. Provide one year warranty on parts and labor.
B. Warranty shall cover repair or replacement of firestop systems which fail in joint adhesion,
cohesion, abrasion resistance, weather resistance, extrusion resistance, migration
resistance, stain resistance, general durability, or appear to deteriorate in any manner not
clearly specified by the manufacturer as an inherent quality of the material.
1082
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 03 - 4 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Products: Subject to compliance with requirements, provide one of the through-penetration
firestop systems indicated for each application that are produced by one of the following
manufacturers. All firestopping systems installed shall be provided by a single manufacturer.
1. 3M; Fire Protection Products Division
2. Hilti, Inc.
3. RectorSeal Corporation, Metacaulk
4. Tremco; Sealant/Weatherproofing Division
5. Johns-Manville
6. Specified Technologies Inc. (S.T.I.)
7. Spec Seal Firestop Products
8. AD Firebarrier Protection Systems
9. Wiremold/Legrand: FlameStopper
10. Dow Corning Corp
11. Fire Trak Corp
12. International Protective Coating Corp
2.2 THROUGH PENETRATION FIRESTOP SYSTEMS
A. Provide materials and systems classified by or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey to
provide firestopping equal to time rating of construction being penetrated.
B. All firestopping materials shall be free of asbestos, lead, PCB's, and other materials that
would require hazardous waste removal.
C. Firestopping shall be flexible to allow for normal penetrating item movement due to
expansion and contraction.
D. Firestopping systems for plumbing and wet pipe sprinkler piping shall be moisture resistant.
E. Provide firestopping systems capable of supporting floor loads where systems are exposed
to possible floor loading or traffic.
F. Provide firestopping systems allowing continuous insulation for all insulated pipes.
G. Provide firestopping systems classified by UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey for
penetrations through all fire rated construction. Firestopping systems shall be selected from
the UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory Category XHEZ
based on substrate construction and penetrating item size and material and shall fall within
the range of numbers listed:
1. Combustible Framed Floors and Chase Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated:
a. F Rating = Floor/Wall Rating
b. L Rating = Penetrations in Smoke Barriers
1083
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 03 - 5 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
Penetrating Item UL System No.
No Penetrating Item FC 0000-0999*
Metallic Pipe or Conduit FC 1000-1999
Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit FC 2000-2999
Electrical Cables FC 3000-3999
Cable Trays FC 4000-4999
Insulated Pipes FC 5000-5999
Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical FC 6000-6999
Duct without Damper and Misc. Mechanical FC 7000-7999
Multiple Penetrations FC 8000-8999
*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to match
original rated construction.
2. Non-Combustible Framed Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated:
a. F Rating = Wall Rating
b. L Rating = Penetrations in Smoke Barriers
Penetrating Item UL System No.
No Penetrating Item WL 0000-0999*
Metallic Pipe or Conduit WL 1000-1999
Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit WL 2000-2999
Electrical Cables WL 3000-3999
Cable Trays WL 4000-4999
Insulated Pipes WL 5000-5999
Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical WL 6000-6999
Duct without Damper and Misc. Mechanical WL 7000-7999
Multiple Penetrations WL 8000-8999
*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to match
original rated construction.
3. Concrete Floors and Walls - 1 or 2 Hour Rated:
a. F Rating = Wall/Floor Rating
b. L Rating = Penetrations in Smoke Barriers
Penetrating Item UL System No.
No Penetrating Item CAJ 0000-0999*
Metallic Pipe or Conduit CAJ 1000-1999
Non-Metallic Pipe or Conduit CAJ 2000-2999
Electrical Cables CAJ 3000-3999
Cable Trays CAJ 4000-4999
Insulated Pipes CAJ 5000-5999
Bus Duct and Misc. Electrical CAJ 6000-6999
Duct without Damper and Misc. Mechanical CAJ 7000-7999
1084
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 03 - 6 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
Penetrating Item UL System No.
Multiple Penetrations CAJ 8000-8999
*Alternate method of firestopping is patching opening to match
original rated construction.
H. Any opening in walls or floors not covered by the listed series of numbers shall be
coordinated with the firestopping manufacturer.
I. Any openings in floors or walls not described in the UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock
Hersey Fire Resistance Directory, or outlined in manufacturer's information shall be sealed
in a manner agreed upon by the Firestopping Manufacturer, Owner, and the Authority
Having Jurisdiction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Ensure all surfaces that contact seal materials are free of dirt, dust, grease, oil, rust, or loose
materials. Clean and repair surfaces as required. Remove laitance and form-release agents
from concrete.
B. Ensure substrate and penetrating items have been permanently installed prior to installing
firestopping systems. Ensure penetrating items have been properly spaced and have proper
clearance prior to installing firestopping systems.
C. Surfaces to which sealing materials are to be installed must meet the selected UL or Intertek
/ Warnock Hersey system substrate criteria.
D. Prime substrates where recommended in writing by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturer. Confine primer to area of bond.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. In existing construction, provide firestopping of openings prior to and after installation of
penetrating items. Remove any existing coatings on surfaces prior to firestopping
installation. Temporary firestopping shall consist of packing openings with fire resistant
mineral wool for the full thickness of substrate, or an alternate method approved by the
Authority Having Jurisdiction. All openings shall be temporarily firestopped immediately upon
their installation and shall remain so until the permanent UL or listed by Intertek / Warnock
Hersey listed firestopping system is installed.
B. Install penetration seal materials in accordance with printed instructions of the UL or Intertek
/ Warnock Hersey Fire Resistance Directory and with the manufacturer's printed application
instructions.
C. Install dams as required to properly contain firestopping materials within openings and as
required to achieve required fire resistance rating. Remove combustible damming after
appropriate curing.
1085
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 05 03 - 7 THROUGH PENETRATION
FIRESTOPPING
3.3 CLEANING AND PROTECTING
A. Clean excess fill materials adjacent to openings as Work progresses by methods and with
cleaning materials that are approved in writing by through-penetration firestop system
manufacturers and that do not cause damage.
B. Provide final protection and maintain conditions during and after installation that ensure that
through-penetration firestop systems are without damage or deterioration at time of
Substantial Completion. If, despite such protection, damage or deterioration occurs, remove
damaged or deteriorated through-penetration firestop systems immediately and install new
materials to produce systems complying with specified requirements.
END OF SECTION 28 05 03
1086
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 13 00 - 1 ELECTRONIC ACCESS
CONTROL
SECTION 28 13 00
ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Field Control Hardware
B. Credentials and Badging
C. Portal Devices
D. Interfaces and Integrations
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 08 71 00 - Door Hardware
B. Section 26 05 13 - Wire and Cable
C. Section 26 05 33 - Conduits and Boxes
D. Section 27 05 26 - Communications Bonding
E. Section 27 05 28 - Interior Communication Pathways
F. Section 27 05 53 - Identification and Administration
G. Section 27 15 00 - Horizontal Cabling Requirements
H. Section 28 05 00 - Basic Electronic Safety and Security System Requirements.
I. Section 28 05 03 - Through Penetration Fire stopping.
J. Section 28 16 00 - Intrusion Detection System
K. Section 28 23 00 - Video Surveillance
L. Section 28 31 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm Systems.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: The manufacturer shall have a minimum of ten (10) years documented
experience in the development and manufacture of access control software and hardware.
1087
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 13 00 - 2 ELECTRONIC ACCESS
CONTROL
B. Contractor:
1. Shall be a factory-authorized installation, service and support company specializing in
the selected manufacturer's product, with demonstrated prior experience of a
minimum of one (1) year installing, programming and supporting the selected
manufacturer's system.
C. Material:
1. All material which is Contractor furnished shall be new, unused and free from defects.
2. Where more than one of any specified item of equipment or material is used, all such
items shall be the same product from the same manufacturer.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. International Building Code
B. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
C. The BOCA National Building Code
D. UL 294 - Standard for Access Control Systems.
E. UL 1449 - Standard for Surge Protective Devices.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 28 05 00.
B. Product Data Submittal: Provide manufacturer's technical product specification sheet for
each individual component type. Submitted data shall show the following:
1. Compliance with each requirement of these documents. The submittal shall
acknowledge each requirement of this section, item-by-item.
2. All component options and accessories specific to this project.
3. Electrical power consumption rating and voltage.
4. Heat generation for all power consuming devices.
5. Wiring requirements.
6. Server processor(s), workstation configurations, total and available disk space, and
memory size.
7. All network bandwidth, latency and reliability requirements.
8. Backup/archive system size and configuration.
9. Submit two of each type of credential to be used (access card, key fob, etc.).
C. System Drawings: Project-specific system CAD drawings shall be provided as follows:
1088
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 13 00 - 3 ELECTRONIC ACCESS
CONTROL
1. Provide a system block diagram noting system components and interconnection
between components. The interconnection of components shall clearly indicate all
wiring required in the system. When multiple pieces of equipment are required in the
exact same configuration (e.g., multiple identical controllers), the diagram may show
one device and refer to the others as "typical" of the device shown. The diagram shall
list room numbers where each controller will be located. This block diagram shall be
provided in Adobe PDF.
2. Provide a schedule of all controllers and the doors/points each controller controls.
This schedule shall be provided in Adobe PDF.
3. Provide schedules describing each system input location by an architecturally familiar
reference, e.g., Door 312A. The architectural door schedule shall be used as the
basis. These schedules shall be provided in Adobe PDF
D. Submit sample format of site specific programming guides to be used for system
planning/programming conference with Owner. These guides shall be provided in Adobe
PDF.
E. So that required Owner personnel are present at the planning/programming conference
required in Part 3 of this section, submit meeting agenda for the conference a minimum of
two weeks prior to the conference.
F. Submit detailed description of Owner training to be conducted at project end, including
specific training times. Refer to Part 3 of this section for details.
G. IP Addresses: Contractor shall provide to Owner, in a documented transmittal and in
Microsoft Excel format, the names and locations of devices which require an IP address.
An authorized representative of the Owner shall furnish the addresses for the associated
devices in Microsoft Excel format in a documented transmittal. Should Owner change the
IP address structure after approval of the list, Owner may be responsible for additional fees
involved with reprogramming.
H. Quality Assurance:
1. Provide materials documenting experience requirements of the manufacturer and
Installing Contractor. Provide documentation of the training and other applicable
certifications of the Contractor.
2. Provide system checkout test procedure to be performed at acceptance. Test
procedures shall include all external alarm events.
1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. This section describes the furnishing, installation, programming and commissioning of a
complete, turnkey access control system. The terms "access control system" and "security
management system", or SMS, may be used interchangeably herein.
B. The company, manufacturer, and product names used in this section are for identification
purposes only. All trademarks and registered trademarks are the property of their
respective owners.
1089
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 13 00 - 4 ELECTRONIC ACCESS
CONTROL
C. Performance Statement: This section and the accompanying access control-specific design
documents are performance based, describing the minimum material quality, required
features, and operational requirements of the system. These documents do not convey
every wire that must be installed and every equipment connection that must be made.
Based on the equipment constraints described and the performance required of the
system, as presented in these documents, the vendor and the Contractor are solely
responsible for determining all wiring, programming, and miscellaneous equipment
required. The Contractor shall be responsible for determining quantities of materials
required for a complete and operational system. Floor plan drawings and schedules have
been developed to aid the Contractor in determining device quantities and installation
locations, but, where discrepancies between floor plans and schedules arise, the greater
number shall govern.
D. Basic System Description:
1. The access control system shall provide the following functionality:
a. Electronic control access to designated areas.
b. Validation of cardholder credentials by use of personnel database, card
formats, PINs. The system shall compare the time, location, and unique
credentials of an attempted entry with information stored in the database.
c. Access to designated areas will be validated only when a user's credential has
a valid number for its facility and the number is valid for the current time and for
the reader where it is used.
d. The system software shall access the hardware that validates the person and
monitors the security of a building by use of intelligent system controllers,
reader interfaces, locks, readers, inputs and outputs. When access has been
validated, a signal to the portal locking device shall be activated to enable alarm
free access at that location.
e. The system shall be configured by use of application software.
f. The system shall monitor activities using operator monitoring software which
includes graphical maps which display alarms, status and activity.
g. The system shall differentiate and restrict administrative and operational access
through use of password authentication.
h. The system shall report on various aspects of the system by use of reports,
both default and customizable. Reports shall be able to be printed.
i. The system shall have the capability to report alarms both audibly and visually.
j. The system shall control hardware from the monitoring station by use of manual
actions and events.
k. The system shall provide record and data management by use of journals.
There shall be a full audit trail.
l. The system shall allow for data to be imported from other products by use of
database migration tools. These products may include Human Resources
databases for name and/or time and attendance information, information from
previous access control systems consisting of badge numbers from credentials
that will be re-used, Microsoft Excel spreadsheets, or other systems as defined
herein.
E. Integrations, Software Development Kit (SDK) and Application Programming Interface
(API):
1090
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 13 00 - 5 ELECTRONIC ACCESS
CONTROL
1. The manufacturers of the systems that are integrated shall make an SDK available to
other manufacturers.
2. Prior to the release of this section, the manufacturers of the systems that are to be
integrated shall have made available to each other all APIs to perform the specific
integrated functions required in this section.
3. The integrations shall be completed and tested, and shall have been implemented on
at least one system of similar size prior to the release of this section. The integrations
shall not be accomplished for the first time for this project unless written pre-approval
has been granted by Owner to Contractor prior to bid deadline.
4. During the warranty period, should a new API or version of software be released by
the SMS manufacturer or any of the manufacturers of systems or devices that are
integrated, that API or version of software shall be installed in the appropriate system
or device defined in this section at no charge to Owner. Should any loss of
functionality in the integration be exposed through this installation, as compared to
the accepted system, Contractor shall correct the functionality at no charge to Owner.
5. Any and all development costs for specified functionality or inter-system integrations
shall be included in the Contractor's bid. No additional costs or fees for the
integrations shall be charged to Owner from the time of notice to proceed through
system acceptance.
1.7 OWNER FURNISHED MATERIAL
A. Telephone service
B. Data circuit / internet service
C. Active telephone service equipment, such as key system, PBX or VOIP switch equipment
D. Active computer network equipment:
1. Routers
2. Switches
3. Hubs
4. Wireless access points
5. Uninterruptible power supplies for Owner furnished products
E. Active computer equipment:
1. SMS server - refer to Part 2 for details
2. SMS workstation(s) - refer to Part 2 for details
3. SMS badging station(s) - refer to Part 2 for details
4. Uninterruptible power supplies for Owner furnished products
F. Credentials:
1. Badges
2. Key fobs
3. Adhesive tags
1091
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 13 00 - 6 ELECTRONIC ACCESS
CONTROL
4. Active transmitters
1.8 LICENSING REQUIREMENTS
A. All user licenses required for system operation shall be included in the Contractor's bid.
User licenses shall include server and workstation software, network controllers, card
readers, printers, badging stations, and any other licensing that is required by the
manufacturer for operation of any system component.
1. Licenses shall be provided on a one-to-one basis. One license shall be provided for
each device requiring a license. In the event the manufacturer requires the purchase
of a block of licenses, license blocks provided shall be no greater than what is
required for the number of devices in this project. Contractor shall document the
number of remaining licenses in the project record documents and Operations and
Maintenance data.
2. In addition to the licensing requirements listed above, provide licensing and
configuration of system administration/operation software for two (2) workstations.
The workstation licenses shall be concurrent use seats, and the client software shall
be able to be loaded on an unlimited number of workstations at no extra cost to the
Owner. Contractor shall install client software on the same number of machines as
licenses provided. As part of the training, Contractor shall demonstrate to Owner how
to install client software on additional workstations.
3. The system described herein is an extension of an existing Paxton system. All
licensing shall be new for each installed device. The Contractor shall not use any of
the Owner's existing (spare) licenses for any new components.
4. All Contractor-furnished software shall contain a perpetual, permanent license in
which no other fees beyond the single payment for the work of this section are
required in order to use the proposed software indefinitely. Owner understands that,
after the initial warranty period has expired, maintenance and technical support fees
may be required annually, quarterly, or monthly in order to receive software updates
and technical support. However, it remains the option of Owner to purchase or
decline this service. If Owner chooses to discontinue or never purchase this service,
the software shall continue to be legally licensed for use. All software shall be the
latest version released, and all Contractor-furnished servers and workstations shall
be current on all patches and updates for all software on the machines at the time of
acceptance of the associated systems.
5. The SMS shall require only a single license key present on the server for the SMS to
operate. The key shall be a physical device or a software key. License keys shall not
be required at the client workstations.
1.9 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit documents under the provisions of Section 28 05 00.
B. Provide final system block diagram showing any deviations from shop drawing submittal.
C. Provide statement that system checkout test, as outlined in the shop drawing submittal, is
complete and satisfactory.
1092
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 13 00 - 7 ELECTRONIC ACCESS
CONTROL
D. Provide schedules documenting:
1. Controller installation locations including specific door numbers being controlled.
2. All terminal block wiring, including cable numbers.
E. Warranty: Submit written warranty and complete all Owner registration forms.
F. Complete all operation and maintenance data manuals as described below.
1.10 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit documents under the provisions of Section 28 05 00.
B. Manuals: Final copies of the manuals shall be delivered within 30 days after completing the
installation test. Each manual's contents shall be identified on the cover. The manual shall
include names, addresses, and telephone numbers of the contractor responsible for the
installation and maintenance of the system, and the factory representatives for each item of
equipment for each system. The manuals shall have a table of contents and labeled
sections. The final copies delivered after completion of the installation test shall include all
modifications made during installation, checkout, and acceptance testing. Manuals shall be
submitted in electronic format only, Adobe PDF. The manuals shall consist of the following:
1. Hardware Manual: The manual shall describe all equipment furnished including:
a. General description and specifications.
b. Installation and check out procedures.
c. System and equipment layout and electrical schematics to the control board
and field device level. For multiple devices wired identically, only one wiring
diagram is required per door configuration, to be labeled "TYPICAL".
d. Alignment and calibration procedures.
e. Manufacturers repair parts list indicating sources of supply.
2. Software Manual: The software manual shall describe the functions of all software
and shall include all other information necessary to enable proper loading, testing,
and operation. The manual shall include:
a. Definition of terms and functions.
b. System use and application software.
c. Initializations, startup, and shutdown procedures.
d. Reports generation.
e. Details on forms customization and field parameters.
3. Operator's Manual: The operator's manual shall fully explain all procedures and
instructions for the operation of the system including:
a. Computers and peripherals.
b. Log in/Log out procedures.
c. Use of system, command, and applications software.
d. Recovery and restart procedures.
e. Graphic alarm presentation.
1093
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 13 00 - 8 ELECTRONIC ACCESS
CONTROL
f. Use of report generator and generation of reports.
g. Data entry.
h. Operator commands.
i. Alarm messages.
j. System permissions functions and requirements.
4. Maintenance Manual: The maintenance manual shall include descriptions of
maintenance for all equipment including inspection, cleaning, periodic preventive
maintenance, fault diagnosis, and repair or replacement of defective components.
1.11 WARRANTY
A. Unless otherwise noted, provide warranty for one (1) year after date of Notice of
Completion for all materials and labor.
B. Operation: Upon the completion of any scheduled adjustments or repairs, Contractor shall
verify operation of the SMS.
C. Service: The Owner will initiate service calls when the SMS is not functioning properly. If
requested by the Owner, the Contractor shall respond or remain at the site after normal
business hours, and the Owner shall reimburse the Contractor for the incremental cost
difference between premium labor rates and standard labor rates. This reimbursement
applies to premium labor rates that do not exceed time-and-one-half rates after normal
business hours and double-time rates for Sundays and holidays. The Owner shall be
furnished with telephone number(s) where service personnel can be reached 24/7/365.
Qualified service personnel shall be at the site within twenty four (24) hours after receiving
a request for service.
D. Records, Logs and Work Requests: Contractor shall keep records and logs of each task
completed under and outside of warranty. These logs shall be maintained in Microsoft
Word or Excel. The log shall include the model and serial number identifying the
component involved, its location, date and time the call was received, specific nature of
trouble, names of service personnel assigned to the task, description of work performed,
the amount and nature of the material used, and the time and date of commencement and
completion of the work. Complete logs shall be kept and shall be available for review on
site, demonstrating that planned and systematic adjustments and repairs have been
accomplished for the SMS. The Contractor shall deliver a record of the work performed
within three (3) business days after work is completed. Defective items that have been
replaced shall be given to the Owner. Should the replacement item be a temporary
replacement until the removed item is repaired, Contractor shall retain possession of the
defective item for repair and subsequent re-installation.
E. System Modifications: Modifications by the Contractor are allowed after system
acceptance. Contractor shall make recommendations for system modification in writing to
the Owner. No system modifications shall be made without prior, written approval of the
Owner. Any modifications made to the system shall be incorporated into the Operations
and Maintenance Manuals, and other documentation affected. The Owner shall be
provided with electronic restorable versions of all configurations prior to the modifications
being made.
1094
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 13 00 - 9 ELECTRONIC ACCESS
CONTROL
F. Software: At no charge, the Contractor shall provide to Owner all updates released by the
manufacturer during the period of the warranty and verify operation of the system upon
installation. These updates include system software updates, patches, bug fixes and
revisions, as well as firmware updates. These updates shall be accomplished in a timely
manner, fully coordinated with SMS administrators and operators, shall include training for
the new changes/features, and shall be incorporated into the Operations and Maintenance
Manuals and software documentation.
G. Refer to the individual product sections for further warranty requirements of individual
system components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ELECTRONIC ACCESS CONTROL SYSTEM MANUFACTURERS
A. Paxton Net2
2.2 FIELD CONTROL HARDWARE
A. Interior Control Panels:
1. Control boards, power distribution and terminals shall be enclosed in a NEMA 1 rated
enclosure that is key lockable. Contractor shall not furnish padlock. All enclosures
that are part of this project shall be keyed alike. Contractor shall furnish and install a
mechanically fastened tamper switch on the interior of the enclosure.
2. Control boards are allowed to be in an enclosure separate from the power
supplies/power distribution. Should they be in separate enclosures, the interface
wiring shall be in rigid metallic conduit, RMC, with Myers hubs at both ends of the
conduit.
3.Intra-enclosure wiring shall be dressed using tie wraps and/or covered plastic wire
way. Hook-up wires for identical purposes shall have the same color insulation. For
example, if one input pair utilizes green and white insulated conductors, all similar
inputs shall use green and white insulated conductors. The same color scheme shall
be followed for all access control panels that are part of this project.
4. Cabling from field devices such as readers, door position switches, request-to-exit
devices and locking devices shall not be directly terminated to the control boards and
power supplies. The field devices shall be terminated to terminals located on the left
side, right side or both sides of the enclosure back panel. Intra-enclosure wiring shall
be routed from the terminals to the control boards and power distribution. Quantity
and functional sequence of the terminals shall be identical portal to portal.
5. All devices inside the enclosure, less cabling and batteries, shall be mechanically
fastened to a removable solid or perforated metal back panel with either:
a. Metal or plastic standoffs
b. DIN rail
1095
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 13 00 - 10 ELECTRONIC ACCESS
CONTROL
6. Hook and loop fasteners, double sided tape or adhesives are not allowed to attach
devices to the back panel. Mounting devices to the interior of the door shall only be
allowed when the following two (2) conditions are met:
a. The access control hardware manufacturer offers prefabricated enclosures with
devices mounted to the interior of the door.
b. Only the same devices that the access control manufacturer mounts to the
interior of the door are allowed to be mounted in a different enclosure, and
those devices shall be mounted in an identical manner.
7. 120V 20A input power shall be hard wired to a circuit breaker disconnect and to one
duplex receptacle on the interior of the enclosure. Should devices in the enclosures
require plug-in transformers/power supplies, the receptacle shall be utilized. One (1)
power strip with integrated circuit breaker shall be located in the bottom of the
enclosure as needed.
8. Power to the locking devices shall be provided by a power distribution board with no
fewer than four (4) outputs. Each lock shall be individually protected. The power
distribution board shall:
a. Provide protection with fuses or positive temperature coefficient (PTC) devices.
b. Provide control so that each output is individually selectable as latching or non-
latching with fire alarm activation.
c. Provide control so that each output shall have Fail Safe and Fail Secure
terminals.
d. Provide a fire alarm input with associated trigger LED.
e. Provide an individual LED per output to indicate when an input has been
triggered and the associated output has been activated.
f. Accept a dry, closed contact input to activate the individual lock outputs.
g. Provide a dry, Form C relay that energizes on activation of the fire alarm input.
This output may then be used as a fire alarm input to other power distribution
boards in the same or a different enclosure, or may provide input to another
device such as a multi-pole relay.
9. A minimum of four (4) 12V 7 AH rechargeable, sealed, lead acid batteries shall be
located in the bottom of the enclosure. Two of the batteries shall be connected in
series for 24V devices, and two batteries shall be connected in parallel for 12V
devices. Contractor shall provide additional batteries as needed to power all devices
for a minimum of twenty four (24) hours.Connections to the batteries shall be made
with appropriate terminals crimped on the connecting conductors. Batteries shall be
clearly labeled in a permanent manner with the date of installation.
10. Power to control boards, readers and auxiliary devices such as request-to-exit motion
detectors shall be provided by a power distribution board with no fewer than four (4)
outputs. All devices powered by the same voltage at an individual portal shall be
protected by the same fuse or PTC unless current requirements dictate otherwise.
Individual fuses or PTCs may protect more than one control board.
11. All access control panels, when populated with control boards and power supplies,
shall have the following capacities:
1096
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 13 00 - 11 ELECTRONIC ACCESS
CONTROL
a. Control of a minimum of two (2) portals.
b. Spare capacity of a minimum of one (1) access control portal, two (2) auxiliary
inputs and two (2) auxiliary outputs greater than the requirements of the project
at the time of system specification.
c. Five (5) spare fuses of each type used, to be in their original packaging, to be
located in each power supply enclosure.
d. 50% spare current capacity on all power supplies located in unconditioned
spaces and 40% spare capacity for those in conditioned spaces. Lower spare
capacities are allowable based on prior approval of Contractor-provided power
calculations.
12. Locations where enclosures may be mounted are shown on the plans. Final location,
with approval of Owner's representative, shall be selected by Contractor based on
distribution of controlled portals and devices.
13. At time of Substantial Completion, Contractor shall furnish a schematic diagram of
intra-enclosure wiring and a complete bill of materials for the enclosures and the
devices located within. This documentation shall include a schedule of fuses and the
device(s) that each fuse protects. This documentation shall be placed by Contractor
in a Contractor-furnished print pocket located on the inside of the enclosure door.
B. Intelligent System Controllers (ISC):
1. The controller shall communicate with the host via an on board 10/100 Base T
Ethernet port.
2.The controllers shall be a distributed architecture with full peer-to-peer networking
capability. Parent/Child controller configurations are not acceptable. All controllers in
the system shall be capable of operating in a standalone mode if communication is
lost with the server or main controller. In no case shall a controller depend on
communication with an upstream controller for proper standalone operation.
3. The communications bus shall be supervised for wiring integrity. If a communication
failure is detected, the system shall report the loss. All controllers unable to receive
communication shall operate as standalone devices including grant/deny decisions,
complete with event buffers. All events shall be uploaded to the server upon
restoration of communications.
4. The controllers shall utilize flash memory or similar technology, allowing program
updates to be downloaded from the server. Program storage shall be in ROM.
5. The controllers shall have the capacity for 15,000 cardholders and 45,000
transactions. All access decisions involving these cardholders shall be made at the
lowest controller level without communication to the server.
6. 32-bit microprocessor controlled.
7. Handle all non-host related access control monitoring and decision making.
8. LED indicators for power, fault and communications.
9. Provide for local and global input/output linking:
a. The SMS shall support a global linkage feature whereby any input/output/event
shall be linked to any other input/output/event in the SMS. Input/output linkages
shall be able to span across intelligent system controllers.
1097
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 13 00 - 12 ELECTRONIC ACCESS
CONTROL
b. System administrators shall be able to create global input/output function lists,
each consisting of a sequence of actions to be performed, such as changing
card reader modes, activating outputs, and opening or closing anti-pass back
areas. Each function list may include up to six actions.
10. Reporting of transactions and status information to the server.
11. Interface with standard reader technologies without special interface hardware,
additional logic panels or other integrators. Supported technologies shall include:
a. 13.56 MHz Contactless Smart with or without biometrics or keypad
b. 13.56 MHz Multi-technology Smart
c. Proximity, with or without keypad
d. Magnetic stripe, with or without keypad
e. Wiegand
f. Bar code
g. Keypad
h. Biometric, with Wiegand output
C. Reader Interface Module (RIM):
1. Reader interface modules are not shown on the plans. Refer to the installation
section of this specification for allowable equipment mounting locations. It is the
responsibility of the Contractor to determine the number and configuration of reader
interface modules required based on the inherent characteristics of each product line
and the requirements and restrictions described in this document.
2. RIM shall interface with and accept data from TTL, Wiegand and RS-485 type
readers and door hardware.
3. RIM shall provide a minimum of three (3) inputs per portal for portal position, request
to exit and auxiliary input.
4. RIM shall provide a minimum of two (2) outputs per portal for locking device and
auxiliary output. Each output shall be Form C and shall be rated at 3A at 28VDC.
5. RIM shall communicate to controller by RS-485.
D. Input Control Module (ICM):
1. The input control module shall provide supervised and non-supervised alarm input
zones and monitor/report line fault conditions, alarm conditions, power faults and
tampers.
2. Input control modules are not shown on the plans. Refer to the installation section of
this specification for allowable equipment mounting locations. It is the responsibility of
the Contractor to determine the number and configuration of input control modules
required, based on the inherent characteristics of each product line and the
requirements and restrictions described in this document.
3. UL 294 and 1076 listed.
4. Each input configurable for normally open or normally closed.
5. Each input configurable for timing.
6. Each input configurable for end of line resistance.
7. Status LEDs for communication to the host, heartbeat and input status.
8. Communications line supervision.
9. AES 128 bit encryption.
10. 2-wire RS485 communications.
1098
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 13 00 - 13 ELECTRONIC ACCESS
CONTROL
11. No fewer than eight (8) inputs per board/control module.
12. Assignment of unit addresses and communications speed.
13. Alarm Masking: The ability to mask the alarm input on a time zone basis.
14. Activate Output: The ability for any input to activate any output.
15. Configuration of Debounce Time: The ability to control the amount of time that an
input state change must remain consistent in order for it to be considered a real
change of state.
16. Elevator control support for number of floors shown on the drawings.
17. Noise rejection filtering to prevent false alarms.
18. Global Linkage: The ability to link outputs with inputs that are attached to any
ICM/output control module (OCM).
19. Checkpoint: The ability to configure an input as a designated stop on one or more
guard tours.
20. Entry/Exit Delay: The ability to set up entry/exit delays for inputs that are attached to
any ICM. This shall include:
a. Non-Latched Entry: When an input activates, the alarm will not be reported until
the entry delay expires. If the input is still active when the entry delay expires,
the alarm will be reported. If the input is not active when the entry delay expires,
then the alarm will not report.
b. Latched Entry: When an input activates, the alarm will not be reported until the
entry delay expires. If the input is still active when the entry delay expires and
the alarm has not been masked, the alarm will be reported. If the input has
been masked when the entry delay expires, then the alarm will not report.
c. Exit Delay: When an input activates, the alarm will not be reported (operates as
if masked) until the exit delay expires. If the input is still active when the exit
delay expires, the alarm will be reported. If the input is not active when the exit
delay expires, the alarm will not be reported.
E. Output Control Module (OCM) and Functionality:
1. Output control modules are not shown on the plans. Refer to the installation section
of this specification for allowable equipment mounting locations. It is the responsibility
of the Contractor to determine the number and configuration of output control
modules required, based on the inherent characteristics of each product line and the
requirements and restrictions described in this document.
2. The output control module(s) shall provide Form C relay contacts for load switching,
rated at 3A at 28VDC.
3. Each relay shall support "On" "Off" and "Pulse."
4. Outputs can be pulsed from 0.1 seconds to 24 hours.
5. Status LEDs for communication to the host, heartbeat and relay status.
6. 2-wire RS485 communications.
7. No fewer than eight (8) outputs per board/control module.
8. Communications line supervision.
2.3 CREDENTIALS AND BADGING
A. Badging Station:
1. Provisioning:
1099
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 13 00 - 14 ELECTRONIC ACCESS
CONTROL
a. The workstation(s) shall be furnished by the Owner and shall meet the
specifications defined by the SMS software manufacturer to meet or exceed the
functionality and performance specifications of the system and integrations
defined in this and related sections. Contractor shall furnish specifications to the
Owner in writing as part of the submittals.
2. Software:
a. Licensing
1) Required badging/credential management licensing shall be furnished.
2.4 PORTAL DEVICES
A. Credential Readers:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Honeywell OmniClass with integral keypad
2. Multi-Technology:
a. Compatible with 125 kHz proximity, 13.56 MHz Contactless Smart card,
MIFARE, DESFire EV1.
b. Backwards compatibility with legacy 13.56 MHz Contactless Smart cards and
125 kHz proximity access control formats, including 26, 32, 35, 37 bit as well as
HID Corporate 1000 format.
3. Card readers manufactured specifically for non-access control applications shall not
be acceptable.
4. FIPS 201 compliant.
5. Provide compatibility with most access control systems by providing card data
outputs in Wiegand and Clock/Data.
6. Allow the firmware to be updated in the field without the need to remove the reader
from the wall.
7. Secure mounting methods using tamper resistant screws.
8. An audio beeper that provides various tones to signify access granted, access
denied, power up and diagnostics.
9. Tri-color LED or three (3) LEDs for visual notification of various conditions.
10. ISO1443A, 1443B and 15693 compliant.
11. The ability to transmit an alarm from an integrated tamper switch.
12. Support dual authentication of identity through the combined use of access badge
and personal identification number (PIN) on an integrated 12 key keypad.
13. PBT polymer or UL94 polycarbonate.
14. Read Range:
a. Using 125 kHz cards or 13.56 MHz Contactless Smart cards, minimum
operational read range shall not be less than one (1) inch after the readers
have been installed in their permanent locations.
1100
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 13 00 - 15 ELECTRONIC ACCESS
CONTROL
15. Operational voltage of 5-16 VDC, with operating temperature range of -31° F to 150°
F, and rated for outdoor use with a minimum rating of IP55.
16. Readers and credentials shall be compatible with each other and shall be from the
same manufacturer.
17. Available in sizes to be mounted to a standard single gang box or to a mullion.
Maximum sizes:
a. Single gang box mount, with or without keypad: 5.1" x 3.1" x 1.1"
b. Mullion mount: 6.0" x 1.9" x 0.9"
18. Lifetime warranty against defects in material and workmanship.
B. Door Position Switch:
1. Manufacturers:
a. GE
b. Honeywell
c. Pre-approved equal
2. Interior or Perimeter Door:
a. One (1) inch or 0.75 (3/4) inch diameter, recessed
b. DPDT contacts
c. 0.75" to 1.25" (3/4" to 1-1/4") gap for wood door
d. Maximum 0.375" to 0.625" (3/8" to 5/8") gap for steel door
e. Basis of Design: UTC/GE/Sentrol 1076D
C. Cable:
1. Composite cable is allowed, although sufficient conductors may not be available in
composite cables for all portal configurations. Contractor shall be responsible for
additional required cables beyond one composite cable to each portal to meet
functional requirements of the system.
a. Reader: 22 AWG, 3 pair, stranded, overall shield. Shield shall be grounded at
control panel end only.
b. Request to Exit Motion Detector: 22 AWG, 4 conductor, stranded.
c. Door Position Switch: 22 AWG, 2 conductor, stranded.
d. Request to Exit Button: 18 AWG, 4 conductor, stranded.
e. Lock: Minimum 18 AWG, 4 conductor, stranded.
1) Lock may require heavier gauge cable depending on door hardware
solution power requirements. Contractor shall coordinate with door
hardware provider for higher current devices and shall adjust the gauge
of the lock cable accordingly.
f. Auxiliary Devices: Refer to plans for requirements.
D. Locks and Door Hardware:
1101
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 13 00 - 16 ELECTRONIC ACCESS
CONTROL
1. Electric/electronic locks shall be furnished and installed by the door hardware
provider.
2. Access Control Contractor shall interface with and terminate cables to locks.
3. Access Control Contractor shall coordinate with door hardware provider for specified
sequences of operation at the various portals.
4. Magnetic locks shall have a magnetic bond sensor.
5. Refer to architectural specifications and/or the architectural door schedule.
2.5 INTERFACES AND INTEGRATIONS
A. Elevator Interface
1. The SMS shall provide a relay based interface to the elevator system consisting of:
a. The credential reader shall be located on the outside of the cab. The car call
button shall not be operational until a valid credential is presented to the reader.
After valid credential presentation, the car call button shall be functional for a
period of time programmed in the SMS. This functionality does not prevent
tailgating.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of all
products.
B. Provide all system wiring between all components as shown on the project drawings or as
directed by the manufacturer, whichever is the more stringent requirement.
C. Network controllers shall be installed centralized in the nearest telecommunications
room(s). Mount controllers to the structural walls in a location coordinated with other
utilities. Coordinate exact location with Architect/Engineer prior to installation. Provide
dedicated +120 VAC power circuit to the controllers using #12 AWG wiring from the
nearest electrical power distribution panel board.
D. Provide wiring and connection to all electrified locking hardware devices. Complete
programming and testing of all electrified locking hardware devices.
E. Install all credential readers in accordance with manufacturer's instructions where shown
on floor plans, in accordance with the Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) requirements.
Provide wiring and connection to all credential readers. Complete programming,
adjustment, and testing of all credential readers.
F. Provide wiring and connection to all hardware request-to-exit devices that are integral to
electrified door hardware. Provide wiring and connection to all request-to-exit motion
detectors. Complete programming and testing of all integrated request-to-exit devices.
Where possible, avoid false activation by persons passing by but not exiting.
1102
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 13 00 - 17 ELECTRONIC ACCESS
CONTROL
G. Install all door alarm contacts in accordance with manufacturer's instructions either
recessed in the door header or surface mounted as required. Provide wiring and
connection to door alarm contact devices. Complete programming, adjustment and testing
of all door alarm contacts.
H. Install, wire, configure, adjust, program and test all access control system servers,
workstations, badging workstations and other user interfaces.
I. Install, wire, configure, adjust, program, and test all specified interfaces and integrations
between access control and other systems. Contractor shall provide all cabling, wiring,
terminations, components, devices, accessories, hardware, software and other material
and accessories necessary to complete all specified interfaces and integrations and make
them fully operational.
J. All low voltage access control cabling shall be installed in conduit from end to end.
K. Electronic access control system cabling shall not be spliced.
L. Flexible conduit is not allowed except with prior approval. Refer to Section 26 05 33 for
conduit requirements. Refer to Section 27 05 28 for cable hanger and support
requirements.
M. Each cable shall be appropriately identified, as defined on the record documents, at each
end's termination point using pressure sensitive label strips.
N. The conductor color code used in terminating system cabling at system devices shall
remain consistent from device to device for each unique device type throughout the project.
O.Install and tighten all connectors in accordance with manufacturer's instructions using the
appropriately designed tools recommended by the manufacturer for that purpose. Do not
strip or damage connectors, terminals, or equipment by over tightening termination
fasteners.
P. Grounding and Bonding Requirements:
1. Provide a minimum of 6AWG bonding conductor from each electronic access control
system control panel, power supply and surge suppression device to the nearest
telecommunications grounding busbar. Actual bonding conductor size is determined
by its length; refer to Section 27 05 26 for grounding and bonding conductor sizing
criteria.
2. Cables containing shields shall not have the shields grounded at conduits, boxes,
racks, etc. Ground the shield only at the control panel end.
Q. Coordinate installation of all devices with other trades and utilities in the vicinity.
R. Cabling shall be plenum rated when installed outside conduit in plenum ceilings.
1103
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 13 00 - 18 ELECTRONIC ACCESS
CONTROL
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Where these specifications require a product or assembly without the use of a brand or
trade name, provide a product that meets the requirements of the specifications as supplied
and warranted by the system vendor. If the product or assembly is not available from the
system vendor, provide product or assembly as recommended by the system vendor.
B. Periodic observations will be performed during construction to verify compliance with the
requirements of the specifications. These services do not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for compliance with the contract documents.
C. Furnish products listed and classified by Underwriters Laboratories, Inc. (UL) as suitable for
purpose specified and indicated.
3.3 MANUFACTURER AND INTEGRATOR COMBINED FIELD SERVICES
A. Installation shall be performed by a factory-trained and certified Contractor.
B. The Contractor shall provide a comprehensive, site-specific customer planning guide for
the system. The Contractor shall conduct conference(s) with the Owner prior to any
installation to discuss the programming and configuration options of the system and the
planning guide.
C. The Contractor shall include labor for all planning and all programming activities required to
implement the Owner's access policies for each system point and each operator and
administrator. Any software programmable access policy, within the bounds of the
hardware specified, shall be included.
D. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor to provide a complete, functional system as
described by the design documents. These responsibilities include:
1. Complete hardware setup, installation, wiring and software configuration of the
system server, all workstations and all peripheral hardware.
2. Complete programming of all operator software in accordance with the Owner's
access policies determined by the planning guide conference(s).
3. Configuration of the network software for operation of the system. Templates shall be
established representative of all user access right levels.
4. Complete system diagnostic verification.
E. The SMS Installation Contractor shall be present at meetings to coordinate all door
hardware requirements with the door hardware vendor.
3.4 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION
A. Complete documentation shall be provided for the system. The documentation shall
describe:
1. All operational parameters of the system
2. Complete documentation of programming and access policies
3. Complete operating instructions for all hardware and software
1104
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 13 00 - 19 ELECTRONIC ACCESS
CONTROL
B. The following sections shall be provided in the system documentation:
1. System Administrator Manual: Provides an overview and a step-by-step guide and
instructions detailing all system administrator responsibilities and functions.
2. User Manual: A step-by-step guide and instructions detailing all system user
functions.
3. Alarm Monitoring Manual: A step-by-step guide and instructions detailing all alarm
monitoring system functions and responsibilities.
4. Technical Maintenance Manual: A comprehensive document providing all
maintenance actions, system testing schedules, troubleshooting flowcharts,
functional system layout, wiring diagrams, block diagrams and schematic diagrams.
5. Refer to Part 1 for details.
3.5 SYSTEM TRAINING
A. All labor and materials required for on-site system training by a certified representative of
the system manufacturer shall be provided. Training shall be conducted at the project site
using the project equipment.
B. Coordinate training days and times with Owner.
C. Provide a training outline agenda describing the subject matter and the recommended
audience for each topic.
D. At a minimum, the following training shall be conducted:
1. System Administrators: A course detailing the system functions, configurations and
operations. Provide training on all aspects of the system including data import/export,
report, cardholder management, system workstation and server configuration and
maintenance, software and hardware configuration and peripheral hardware
operation.
2. Operators: A course detailing the operational features of all aspects of the user
interface. Topics shall include alarm monitoring functions, reports, error handling,
alarm handling, output relay control, operation of integrated systems interface, and
general overview of the report hardware.
E. Minimum on-site training times shall be:
1. System Administrators:Two (2) hours.
2. Operators:Two (2) hours.
3.6 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
A. The SMS vendor shall submit for review a formal acceptance and system checkout
program. The system checkout procedures shall include all system components, software
and functionality. The Contractor shall perform the tests and document all results under the
supervision of the manufacturer's systems engineer.
1105
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 13 00 - 20 ELECTRONIC ACCESS
CONTROL
B. All operational scenarios, as defined by the customer planning guide, shall be tested to
simulate the actual use of the system in the normal operating environment. The successful
completion of these operational scenarios shall be documented.
C. The system shall not be accepted until all requirements of system documentation and
training have been completed.
END OF SECTION 28 13 00
1106
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 16 00 - 1 INTRUSION DETECTION
SYSTEM
SECTION 28 16 00
INTRUSION DETECTION SYSTEM
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Security Control Panel.
B. Initiation Devices.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 05 33 - Conduit and Boxes
B. Section 26 05 13 - Wire and Cable
C. Section 28 05 00 - Basic Electronic Safety and Security System Requirements
D. Section 28 31 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm Systems
E. Section 28 23 00 - Video Surveillance
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Manufacturer: The access control system shall be a single-source manufacturer such that
the single vendor distributes, supports, warranties and services all components. The
manufacturer shall have a minimum of five (5) years documented experience.
B. Installer: The installing dealer must be a factory-authorized service and support company
specializing in the selected manufacturer's product, with demonstrated prior experience
with the selected manufacturer's system installation and programming.
C. Servicing Contractor: The manufacturer of the system must have local service
representatives within 60 miles of the project site.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code.
B. UL 294 - Standard for Access Control Systems.
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 28 05 00.
B. Product Data Submittal: Provide manufacturer's technical product specification sheet for
each individual component type. Submitted data shall show the following:
1107
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 16 00 - 2 INTRUSION DETECTION
SYSTEM
1. Compliance with each requirement of these documents. The submittal shall
acknowledge each requirement of this section, item-by-item.
2. All component options and accessories specific to this project.
3. Electrical power consumption rating and voltage.
4. Wiring requirements.
C. System Drawings: Project-specific system CAD drawings shall be provided as follows:
1. Provide a system block diagram noting system components and interconnection
between components. The interconnection of components shall clearly indicate all
wiring required in the system. When multiple pieces of equipment are required in
the exact same configuration (i.e., multiple identical controllers), the diagram may
show one device and refer to the others as "typical" of the device shown.
2. Provide schedules describing each system input location by an architecturally
familiar reference (i.e., Door 312A). The architectural door schedule shall be used
as the basis.
D. Submit detailed description of Owner training to be conducted at project end, including
specific training times.
E. Quality Assurance:
1. Provide materials documenting experience requirements of the manufacturer and
Installing Contractor.
2. Provide system checkout test procedure to be performed at acceptance. Test
procedures shall include all external alarm events.
F. Coordination Drawings:
1. Include all ceiling-mounted devices in composite electronic coordination files. Refer
to Section 28 05 00 for coordination drawing requirements.
1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. This specification section describes the furnishing, installation, commissioning and
programming of a complete, turnkey security management system.
B. Performance Statement: This specification section and the accompanying access control-
specific design documents are performance based, describing the minimum material
quality, required features, and operational requirements of the system. These documents
do not convey every wire that must be installed and every equipment connection that
must be made. Based on the equipment constraints described and the performance
required of the system, as presented in these documents, the Vendor and the Contractor
are solely responsible for determining all wiring, programming and miscellaneous
equipment required for a complete and operational system.
C. Basic System Description: The security management system shall provide an integrated
hardware and software solution for access control.
1108
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 16 00 - 3 INTRUSION DETECTION
SYSTEM
1.7 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit documents under the provisions of Section 28 05 00.
B. Provide final system block diagram showing any deviations from shop drawing submittal.
C. Provide statement that system checkout test, as outlined in the shop drawing submittal, is
complete and satisfactory.
D. Provide schedules documenting:
1. Controller installation locations including specific door numbers being controlled.
2. All terminal block wiring, including cable numbers.
E. Warranty: Submit written warranty and complete all Owner registration forms.
F. Complete all operation and maintenance manuals as described below.
1.8 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit documents under the provisions of Section 28 05 00.
B. Operation Data: Provide full system operation instructions for each piece of equipment.
C. Maintenance Data: Document any manufacturer's recommended preventative
maintenance procedures to be performed by the Owner.
1.9 WARRANTY
A. Unless otherwise noted, provide warranty for one (1) year after Date of Notice of
Completion for all materials and labor.
B. The warranty shall include emergency service and repair on-site, with acknowledgment
response time of one (1) hour from time of notification and on-site response within four
(4) hours. The system shall be repaired and restored to operation within twenty-four (24)
hours of notification.
C. Refer to the individual product sections for further warranty requirements of individual
system components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SECURITY CONTROL PANEL
A.Control Panel: Modular construction with surface wall-mounted enclosure.
B. Power Supply: Adequate to serve control panel modules ,remote detectors, remote
annunciators and alarm signaling devices.
1109
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 16 00 - 4 INTRUSION DETECTION
SYSTEM
1. Include battery operated emergency power supply with capacity for operating
system in standby mode for 24 hours.
C. System Supervision: Provide electrically-supervised system, with supervised alarm
initiating and alarm signaling circuits. Component or power supply failure places system
in alarm mode.
D. Initiating Circuits: Supervised zone module with alarm and trouble indication.
E. Remote Station Signal Transmitter: Electrically supervised, capable of transmitting alarm
and trouble signals over telephone lines to central station receiver.
F. Alarm Sequence of Operation: Actuation of Intrusion Detecting device places system in
alarm mode, which causes the following operations:
1. Sound and display local alarm signaling devices with non-coded signal.
2. Transmit zone-coded signal to central station.
3. Indicate location of actuated device on control panel and on remote annunciator
panel.
4. Alarm Reset: Key-accessible reset function resets alarm system out of alarm if
alarm initiating circuits have cleared.
2.2 INITIATION DEVICES
A. Door Contacts:
1. Contacts shall be single-pole, double-throw (SPDT) suitable for use in a line
supervision circuit. Gap length shall be 1" on the latch side.
2. Provide magnetic alarm contacts at each door (recessed in the door header) where
shown on the plans. Contacts shall provide a signal to the controller when the
contact status changes.
3. The contacts shall have the capability of being shunted by a request-to-exit device.
When the system grants access at a controlled point, the system shall shunt the
door alarm input for that point.
B. Motion Detectors:
1. Passive infrared, ceiling mounted, 12 VDC.
2. Adaptive technology for humidity and temperature stability.
3. 360-degree coverage, 60' coverage range.
4. Fresnel pattern lens with a minimum of a 30-zone pattern.
C. Glass Break Detectors:
1. Shock sensor type, mounted to glass.
2. 10' protection range on single-pane glass.
3. Piezo transducer technology providing power to sensor. No external power is
required.
4. +15 VDC maximum input.
1110
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 16 00 - 5 INTRUSION DETECTION
SYSTEM
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of all
products.
B. Provide all system wiring between all components as directed by the manufacturer.
C. Mount all readers where shown on plans in accordance with Americans with Disabilities
Act (ADA) requirements.
D. Locate all request to exit motion detectors directly above the door frame, centered on the
door opening. Adjust sensitivity to permit operation on motion of persons within 2'-0" of
door. Avoid false activation by persons passing by where possible.
E. Provide wiring to the request-to-exit devices located in the electrified door hardware.
F. Install, terminate and test all door alarm contacts. Contacts shall be recessed in the door
header.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Where these specifications require a product or assembly without the use of a brand or
trade name, provide a product that meets the requirements of the specifications, as
supplied and warranted by the system vendor. If the product or assembly is not available
from the system vendor, provide product or assembly as recommended by the system
vendor.
B. Periodic observations will be performed during construction to verify compliance with the
requirements of the specifications. These services do not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for compliance with the Contract Documents.
3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Installation shall be performed by a factory-trained and certified Contractor Installer.
B. It shall be the responsibility of the Contractor/Installer to provide a complete, functional
system as described by the Contract Documents. These responsibilities include:
1. Complete hardware setup, installation and wiring, and software configuration of the
system.
2. Complete system diagnostic verification.
1111
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 16 00 - 6 INTRUSION DETECTION
SYSTEM
3.4 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
A. The SMS Vendor shall submit for review a formal acceptance and system checkout
program. The system checkout procedures shall include all system components and
software, including but not limited to all system computers, field controllers, card reader
devices, biometric readers and remote system interfaces. The Contractor shall perform
the tests and document all results under the supervision of the manufacturer's system
engineer.
B. All operational scenarios, as defined by the customer planning guide, shall be tested to
simulate the actual use of the system in the normal operating environment. The
successful completion of these operational scenarios shall be documented.
3.5 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION
A. Complete documentation shall be provided for the system. The documentation shall
describe:
1. All operational parameters of the system.
2. Complete documentation of programming and access policies.
3. All data sets.
4. Complete operating instructions for all hardware and software.
B. The following sections shall be provided in the system documentation:
1. User Manual: A step-by-step guide and instructions detailing all system user
functions.
2. Technical Maintenance Manual: A comprehensive document providing all
maintenance actions, system testing schedules, troubleshooting flowcharts,
functional system layout, wiring diagrams, block diagrams and schematic diagrams.
3.6 SYSTEM TRAINING
A. All labor and materials required for on-site system training by a certified representative of
the system manufacturer shall be provided. Training shall be conducted at the project site
using the project equipment.
B. Provide two weeks advanced notice of training to the Owner.
C. Provide a training outline agenda describing the subject matter and the recommended
audience for each topic.
D. At a minimum, the following training shall be conducted:
1. Alarm Monitoring Users: Provide a detailed course outlining the operational features
of all aspects of the user interface. Topics shall include alarm monitoring functions,
reports, error handling, alarm handling, output relay control and general overview of
the report hardware.
E. Minimum on-site training times shall be:
1112
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 16 00 - 7 INTRUSION DETECTION
SYSTEM
1. Alarm Monitoring Users: One day.
END OF SECTION 28 16 00
1113
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 23 00 - 1 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
SECTION 28 23 00
VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Network Video Management System (NVMS).
B. Video Printer.
C. Equipment Racks.
D. Cabling.
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 05 33 - Conduit and Boxes
B. Section 26 05 13 - Wire and Cable
C. Section 27 15 00 - Horizontal Cabling Requirements
D. Section 28 05 00 - Basic Electronic Safety and Security System Requirements
E. Section 28 31 00 - Fire Detection and Alarm Systems
F. Section 28 13 00 - Electronic Access Control
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. NVMS Software Developer (Manufacturer): The NVMS system shall be a single-source
manufacturer such that the single manufacturer develops, supports, and warranties the
NVMS software solution. The manufacturer shall have three (3) years documented
experience.
1. The software developer shall be an active ONVIF member with current available
product recognized by ONVIF as a Conformant Product.
B. Integrator/Installer (Contractor): The Contractor must be a NVMS-certified installation,
service, and support company specializing in the selected manufacturer's product, with
demonstrated prior experience with the selected manufacturer's system installation and
programming.
1. The installer shall have in-house a Microsoft MCSE or equivalent technician for the
purposes of server deployment, software configuration, and system integration.
2. The integrator must have local service representatives within 100 miles of the project
site.
1114
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 23 00 - 2 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
1.4 REFERENCES
A. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code
B. Electronic Industries Association (EIA) Video Surveillance Equipment Standards
C. UL 2044 - Standard for Commercial Closed Circuit Television Equipment
D. UL 3044 - Standard for Safety for Surveillance Closed Circuit Television Equipment
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 28 05 00.
B. Product Data Submittal: Provide manufacturer's technical product specification sheet for
each individual component type. Submitted data shall show the following:
1. Compliance with each requirement of these documents.
2. All component options and accessories specific to this project.
3. Electrical power consumption rating and voltage.
4. Heat generation for all power consuming devices.
5. All required wiring shall be identified.
6. Number of IP addresses that will be required from the Owner's Information Systems
Department.
7. Statement of Acceptability of Designed Server:
a. If the Contractor agrees that the server(s) designed and described herein is
acceptable for the chosen manufacturer's solution and meets the demand of
the application, this shall be stated in writing and submitted as part of the shop
drawing submittal.
b. If the Contractor does not agree that the server(s) designed and described
herein is acceptable for the chosen manufacturer's solution, Contractor shall
itemize the quantity, technical specifications, and capacities of the servers
required to support the functionality and device quantities required by the
project drawings. Indicate the capacity utilization factor for each server.
c. Contractor's bid shall include any required changes in server(s) capacity.
8. Calculation for storage required based on city's one year retention.
9. Calculation for required network bandwidth, including any latency restrictions.
10. Provide annual cost and all terms and conditions for the NVMS Software
Maintenance Agreement. Include all additional costs and terms and conditions for
any Annual Service Contracts provided by the Contractor for all services that are not
included in the Software Maintenance Agreement.
C. System Drawings: Project-specific system CAD drawings shall be provided as follows:
1. Provide a system block diagram noting system components and interconnection
between components. The interconnection of components shall clearly indicate all
wiring required in the system. When multiple pieces of equipment are required in the
exact same configuration (e.g., multiple identical cameras), the diagram may show
one device and refer to the others as "typical" of the device shown.
1115
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 23 00 - 3 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
D. Sample format of site specific programming guides to be used for system
planning/programming conference with Owner.
E. Meeting agenda for planning/programming conference required in Part 3 of this
specification.
F. Submit detailed description of Owner training to be conducted at project end, including
specific training time.
G. Quality Assurance:
1. Provide materials documenting experience requirements of the manufacturer and
installing contractor.
2. Provide system checkout test procedure to be performed at acceptance. Test
procedures shall include all external alarm events.
H. Coordination Drawings:
1. Include all ceiling-mounted devices in composite electronic coordination files. Refer to
Section 28 05 00 for coordination drawing requirements.
1.6 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. This specification section describes the furnishing, installation, commissioning and
programming of a complete, turnkey, video surveillance system.
B. Performance Statement: This specification section and the accompanying project drawings
are performance based, describing the minimum material quality, required features, and
operational requirements of the system. These documents do not convey every wire that
must be installed and every equipment connection that must be made. Based on the
equipment constraints described and the performance required of the system as presented
in these documents, the vendor and the Contractor are solely responsible for determining
all wiring, programming and miscellaneous equipment required for a complete and
operational system.
C. Refer to the project drawings for model numbers for the Basis of Design for all equipment.
1.7 LICENSING REQUIREMENTS
A. All licenses required for system operation shall be included in the Contractor's bid.
Licenses shall include, but not be limited to, server and workstation software, cameras,
encoders/decoders, and any other licensing that is required by the manufacturer for
operation of any system component.
1. Camera licenses shall be provided for all cameras listed on the Camera Schedule
whether cameras are new or existing.
1116
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 23 00 - 4 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
2. The system shall be provided with installed software capacity to accommodate a
minimum quantity of fifty (50) cameras. The licensing for all fifty (50) cameras shall
NOT be included in the Contractor's bid. Licensing shall only be included for the
quantity of cameras shown on the Camera Schedule. However, the system's ability to
support up to a total capacity of fifty (50) cameras shall ONLY require future payment
of additional per-unit camera licensing fees by the Owner. In no case shall the Owner
be required to upgrade the software provided in the Contractor's bid to achieve
support for a total of fifty (50) cameras, including the payment of any software
upgrade fees, installing a different software version, etc.
3. If the manufacturer requires the purchase of a block of licenses (instead of selling a
single license for a single device) the Contractor's bid shall include the appropriate
block of licenses that accommodates all device quantities described by the project
drawings, plus two (2) additional devices for future growth.
4. Camera licensing that is restricted to a particular device MAC address or in any way
is only valid for a particular manufacturer or model number is not acceptable. Camera
licenses shall be issued such that the Owner can replace a camera with another
camera brand and/or model number and transfer the license from the old camera to
the new camera at no additional cost at any future time. This license transfer
procedure shall be capable of being performed by the Owner and shall not require
the services of an integrator.
a. Exception: When a camera license is issued as a no-cost license in the limited
condition that the NVMS manufacturer and the camera manufacturer are the
same company, it is permissible to charge a future license fee to the Owner if
the Owner elects to replace the NVMS manufacturer-branded camera with a
third-party manufacturer's camera.
5. The Contractor shall fill out the NVMS Bid Inventory Form located herein and provide
at the time of bid.
1.8 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit documents under the provisions of Section 28 05 00.
B. Provide final system block diagram showing any deviations from shop drawing submittal.
C. Provide statement that system checkout test, as outlined in shop drawing submittal, is
complete and satisfactory.
D. Provide final camera type and camera requirements schedules documenting all changes
made during construction.
E. Warranty: Submit written warranty and complete all Owner registration forms.
F. Complete all operation and maintenance manuals as described below.
1.9 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit documents under the provisions of Section 28 05 00.
1117
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 23 00 - 5 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
B. Manuals: Final copies of the manuals shall be delivered within thirty (30) days after
completing the installation test. Each manual's contents shall be identified on the cover.
The manual shall include names, addresses, and telephone numbers of the contractor
responsible for the installation and maintenance of the system and the manufacturer for
each piece of equipment for each system. The manuals shall have a table of contents and
labeled sections. The final copies delivered after completion of the installation test shall
include all modifications made during installation, checkout, and acceptance testing. The
manuals shall consist of the following:
1. Hardware Manual: The manual shall describe all equipment furnished including:
a. General description and specifications.
b. Installation and check out procedures.
c. System layout drawings and schematics.
d. Alignment and calibration procedures.
2. Software Manual: The software manual shall describe the functions of all software
and shall include all other information necessary to enable proper installation, testing,
and operation. The manual shall include:
a. Definition of terms and functions.
b. System use and application software.
c. Graphical user interface use.
d. Reports generation.
3. Operator's Manual: The operator's manual shall fully explain all procedures and
instructions for the operation of the system including:
a. Computers and peripherals.
b. System startup and shutdown procedures.
c. Use of system.
d. Recovery and restart procedures.
e. Use of report generator and generation of reports.
f. Data entry.
g. Operator commands.
h. Alarm messages.
i. System permissions functions and requirements.
4. Maintenance Manual: The maintenance manual shall include descriptions of
maintenance for all equipment including inspection, periodic preventive maintenance,
fault diagnosis, and repair or replacement of defective components.
1.10 WARRANTY
A. Unless otherwise noted, provide warranty for one (1) year after Date of Notice of
Completion for all materials and labor.
B. Onsite Work During Warranty Period: This work shall be included in the Contractor's bid
and performed during regular working hours, Monday through Friday.
1. Inspections: Perform one minor inspection six-months after Substantial Completion
and one major inspection prior to the expiration of the warranty.
1118
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 23 00 - 6 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
2. Minor Inspections: Inspections shall include:
a. Visual checks and operational tests of all equipment, field hardware, and
electrical and mechanical controls.
b. Mechanical adjustments if required on any mechanical or electromechanical
devices.
c. Install all available software updates, patches, or bug fixes available from the
NVMS manufacturer.
3. Major Inspections: Inspections shall include all work described under paragraph
Minor Inspections and the following work:
a. Clean all equipment, including interior and exterior surfaces.
b. Perform diagnostics on all equipment, including all system software diagnostics,
and correct all diagnosed problems.
c. Adjust all camera alignments that have become out of alignment from their
documented position at Substantial Completion.
d. Install all available software updates, patches, or bug fixes available from the
NVMS manufacturer.
e. All warrantable system deficiencies during the Major Inspection shall be
remedied under warranty at no cost to the Owner.
C. Operation: Upon the performance of any scheduled adjustments or repairs, verify operation
of the NVMS system.
D. Emergency Service: The Owner will initiate service calls when the NVMS system is not
functioning properly. Qualified personnel shall be available to provide service within the
distance defined above. The Owner shall be furnished with telephone number(s) where
service personnel can be reached 24/7/365.
E. Records and Logs: Keep records and logs of each task completed under warranty. The log
shall contain all initial settings upon Substantial Completion. Complete logs shall be kept
and shall be available for review on site, demonstrating that planned and systematic
adjustments and repairs have been accomplished for the NVMS system.
F. Work Requests: Record each service call request on a service request form. The form shall
include the model and serial number identifying the component involved, its location, date
and time the call was received, specific nature of trouble, names of service personnel
assigned to the task, instructions describing what must be done, the amount and nature of
the materials used, the time and date work started, and the time and date of completion.
Deliver a record of the work performed within five (5) days after work is accomplished.
G. System Modifications: Make any recommendations for system modification in writing to the
Owner. No system modifications shall be made without prior approval of the Owner. Any
modifications made to the system shall be incorporated into the operations and
maintenance manuals, and other documentation affected. To the fullest extent possible, the
Owner shall be provided with electronic restorable versions of all configurations prior to the
modifications being made.
1119
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 23 00 - 7 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
H. Software: Provide all software updates during the period of the warranty and verify
operation in the system. These updates shall be accomplished in a timely manner, fully
coordinated with NVMS system operators, shall include training for the new
changes/features enabled, and shall be incorporated into the operations and maintenance
manuals, and software documentation.
I. Refer to the individual product sections for further warranty requirements of individual
system components.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 NETWORK VIDEO MANAGEMENT SYSTEM - GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. The network video management system (NVMS) shall be an enterprise-class client/server
based video security solution that provides management of digital video, audio and data
across a TCP/IP network.
B. The VMS shall utilize network switch ports provided by the Owner for all required IP
connections. Provide the Owner with a complete list of all IP ports required.
C. ONVIF Compliance:
1. The NVMS system shall be ONVIF certified as an ONVIF Network Video Client.
2. Cameras shall be ONVIF certified as an ONVIF Network Transmitter unless
specifically noted as an exception to this requirement in the project drawings.
D. The NVMS system shall be an "open system."
1. To meet this requirement, the NVMS must directly support cameras from a minimum
of three (3) readily available camera manufacturers.
2. The three (3) camera manufacturers must have no corporate relationship to the
NVMS manufacturer.
3. "Directly support" shall be defined as plug-n-play using drivers that are commercially
available at the time of bid that utilize the ONVIF specification as the means of
integration.
4. In addition to the requirement to support three (3) independent manufacturer's
cameras, the NVMS may support an unlimited additional quantity of in-house or other
proprietary cameras.
5. The open system shall not require proprietary storage solutions. It shall support third
party storage solutions, including:
a. Commercially available Direct Attached Storage (DAS) devices.
b. Network Attached Storage (NAS) devices.
c. Storage Area Networks (SAN) for primary or archival storage purposes.
Primary support for SAN shall be defined as:
1) The ability to directly record to SAN device without first recording to an
NAS or DAS.
2) The NVMS is provided with a user experience that makes the video
recorded to the SAN transparent to the user. This shall be defined as:
1120
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 23 00 - 8 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
a) Full search, bookmarking, and other software features for finding,
marking, locating, and identifying video are supported by the
NVMS for video recorded to a SAN in an identical way to video that
is recorded to an NAS or DAS.
b) No loading of the video from the SAN into the NVMS shall be
required.
c) Full playback, windowing of camera video, archiving, and exporting
is supported by the NVMS for video recorded to the SAN in an
identical way as video recorded to an NAS or DAS.
6. The system must have a published API/SDK permitting third party integrations to the
product without restrictions.
7. The NVMS shall support active directory using LDAP protocol.
E. The NVMS system shall consist of the following hardware/software components:
1. Software:
a. Server and client
b. Recording services, archival services, and storage management
c. Configuration tools
2. System storage as specified on the project drawings.
3. Cameras and related hardware as specified on the project drawings.
4. Hardware: Servers, workstations, and miscellaneous hardware (keyboard, mouse,
KVM) as specified on the projects drawings.
5. Network electronics and related hardware and software as specified on the project
drawings.
F. Video from any camera on the system (on the LAN, WAN or Internet) shall be capable of
being viewed from single or multiple workstations simultaneously at any time, limited only
by network bandwidth.
G. The NVMS shall support simultaneous displaying of live (30 fps) video of a minimum of 16
cameras while the video monitoring screen is configured in a 16-camera split configuration.
In no case shall the frame rate of the camera be required to be restricted to less than 30 fps
to display a 16-camera split view.
H. Simultaneous display and recording of every camera shall be supported with independent
user-adjustable frame rates that can be set differently for the display stream and the
recording stream. These independent settings shall be unique per camera.
I. The NVMS monitoring software shall support any combination of recorded and live video in
any multiple camera split view, including viewing recorded video and live video from the
same camera.
J. The NVMS shall support continuous recording and event-based recording simultaneously.
This shall be capable of being set on a per camera basis.
1121
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 23 00 - 9 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
K. Viewing of video (live and recorded) shall be possible from client software from any client
hardware that is connected to the security LAN/WAN or Internet (through appropriate
firewalls). In addition, system administration shall be permitted from remote client
hardware.
2.2 NVMS MANUFACTURERS
A. Basis of Design:
1. Milestone
2.3 NVMS SERVER REQUIREMENTS
A. The NVMS shall operate on the Windows Server 2019 IoT Essentials Operating System.
The server software shall be a multi-tasking, multi-threading application system architecture
designed specifically for the Windows environment.
B. The server shall communicate on a TCP/IP based Ethernet LAN capable of utilizing
100/1000BaseT.
C. The server shall be provided by the NVMS system vendor.
D. The server(s) requirements have been calculated based on the NVMS Basis of Design
manufacturer noted above. By submitting a bid, the Contractor acknowledges that the
calculated server requirements listed here may not be sufficient for a listed alternate,
acceptable manufacturer selected by the Contractor. The Contractor shall modify the
calculated server requirements listed herein based on the calculated requirement of the
chosen manufacturer. The server requirements for the basis of design are as follows:
1. Server Quantity and Location: Refer to project drawings for quantity of servers
required and their location.
2.4 NVMS CLIENT REQUIREMENTS
A. The NVMS PC workstation(s) shall be provided by the Owner.
2.5 NVMS RECORDING REQUIREMENTS
A. The NVMS shall provide management of the recording and playback of video, audio, and
data (bookmarking, alarm data, etc.).
B. Refer to the Camera Schedules on the project drawings for specific variables to be used on
a per-camera basis for the purpose of calculating storage capacity and retention.
1. Total distributed storage requirements shall be determined based on a minimum of
one (1) year storage retention.
2. Cameras, unless otherwise noted on the Camera Schedule(s), shall be assumed to
be recording 24 hours per day, 7 days per week, 365 days per year. Specific per-
camera assumptions stated on the Camera Schedule for percent motion shall be
used in the storage calculation.
1122
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 23 00 - 10 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
3. Compression shall be permitted to be used in the storage calculation. The
compression algorithm (MPEG-4, H.264, etc.) shall be used on a per-camera basis. If
the NVMS permits variable levels of compression intensity, the use of the "average"
or "medium" level setting shall be used in the storage calculation unless otherwise
noted.
4. The Contractor shall provide the complete storage analysis and calculation as a shop
drawing.
C. Network Video Recorder (NVR) Hardware Platform:
1. The NVR shall be defined as a storage device for recording IP video streams from IP
cameras or from analog cameras that have been encoded to IP. In both cases, the
NVR shall record IP streams from cameras or encoders located anywhere on the IP
network without being direct-cable connected to the NVR.
2. Refer to the project drawings for specific requirements, model numbers, and basis of
design for the NVR.
3. NVR Configuration:
a. The NVR shall contain one hard drive for the operating system and software,
and all hard drive storage required to achieve the required storage retention.
b. Provide with RAID 5 hard disk controller configuration for the video storage
hard drives.
4. The NVMS shall provide a failover function where an NVR can be assigned as a
backup to other NVRs. When an assigned NVR goes out of service, the failover NVR
takes over the responsibilities of the failed NVR. When the primary NVR returns to
service, the control shall be automatically transferred back to the primary NVR.
5. It shall be possible to assign a redundant NVR to every NVR for use in normal
operation of all NVR(s) in the system. The redundant NVR shall record the same
streams as the primary NVR. The redundant NVR shall have its own disk drives
where it shall store the recorded data.
a. It shall be possible to view the data recorded by the redundant NVR in the client
software. The redundant NVR shall have camera symbols that can be placed in
the camera selection tree. These cameras shall have the same name as the
cameras of the primary NVR. An indication shall be provided to indicate that the
camera names are located on the redundant NVR.
2.6 NVMS CABLING
A. Refer to Division 27 for all cabling requirements.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Comply with the manufacturer's instructions and recommendations for installation of all
products.
1123
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 23 00 - 11 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
B. Provide all system wiring between all components as shown on the project drawings or as
directed by the manufacturer, whichever is the more stringent requirement.
C. Mount all cameras in the approximate locations shown on the drawings. Coordinate
installation with other trades and utilities in the vicinity. Cameras containing fixed lenses,
moved by more than 1'-0" from their location shown on the drawings, shall have a new lens
calculation performed by the Contractor. Provide Architect/Engineer with results of lens
calculation before proceeding with installation.
D. Coordinate with Owner's IT Department to acquire network connections as well as any
network configuration information, such as IP numbers, that will be required to connect
NVMS to Owner network (if applicable).
E. Provide all low voltage and +120 VAC power to all devices as required for proper system
operation. Refer to Sections 26 05 33 and 26 05 13 for further requirements.
F. All low voltage security wiring shall be routed with other low voltage cabling and shall use
the cable tray to the fullest extent possible.
G. Cabling shall be plenum rated when installed outside of conduit in plenum ceilings.
3.2 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Where these specifications require a product or assembly without the use of a brand or
trade name, provide a product that meets the requirements of the specifications as supplied
and warranted by the system vendor. If the product or assembly is not available from the
system vendor, provide product or assembly as recommended by the system vendor.
B. Periodic observations will be performed during construction to verify compliance with the
requirements of the specifications. These services do not relieve the Contractor of
responsibility for compliance with the project drawings.
C. It shall be the Contractor's responsibility to correct all inadequate picture quality issues prior
to acceptance of the system.
3.3 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Installation shall be performed by a factory-trained and certified Contractor.
1. Provide a comprehensive, site-specific customer planning guide for the system.
Conduct a conference with the Owner prior to any installation to discuss the
programming options of the system and the planning guide. The result of this
planning guide shall be the determination of the system options for each device and
for the software.
B. Include labor for all planning and all programming activities required to implement the
Owner's operational preferences for each device and software. Any software
programmable option, within the bounds of the capabilities of the hardware specified, shall
be included.
C. Provide a complete, functional system as described by the project drawings. These
responsibilities include:
1124
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 23 00 - 12 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
1. Complete hardware setup, installation, wiring, and software configuration of the
system, including all remote operator locations and all peripheral hardware.
2. Complete programming of all hardware and software options in accordance with the
Owner's preferences as determined by the planning guide conference.
3. Programming of all custom graphic GUI screens including devices.
4. Complete system diagnostic verification.
D. Provide an authorized manufacturer representative to commission the system and ensure
that facility-wide standards and project setup procedures are adhered to.
3.4 SYSTEM ACCEPTANCE
A. Submit for review a formal acceptance and system checkout program. The system
checkout procedures shall include all system components and software. Perform the tests
and document all results under the supervision of the manufacturer's system engineer.
B. All operational scenarios, as defined by the customer planning guide, shall be tested to
simulate the actual use of the system in the normal operating environment. The successful
completion of these operational scenarios shall be documented.
3.5 SYSTEM DOCUMENTATION
A. Complete documentation shall be provided for the system. The documentation shall
describe:
1. All operational parameters of the system.
2. Complete documentation of all programming and options.
3. Complete operating instructions for all hardware and software.
B. The following sections shall be provided in the system documentation:
1. System Administrator Manual: Provides an overview and a step-by-step guide and
instructions detailing all system administrator responsibilities and functions.
2. User Manual: A step-by-step guide and instructions detailing all system user
functions.
3. Technical Maintenance Manual: A comprehensive document providing all
maintenance actions, system testing schedules, troubleshooting flowcharts,
functional system layout, wiring diagrams, block diagrams, and schematic diagrams.
3.6 SYSTEM TRAINING
A. All labor and materials required for on-site system training by a certified representative of
the system manufacturer shall be provided. Training shall be conducted at the project site
using the project equipment.
B. Provide two weeks advanced notice of training to the Owner.
C. Provide a training outline agenda describing the subject matter and the recommended
audience for each topic.
D. At a minimum, the following training shall be conducted:
1125
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 23 00 - 13 VIDEO SURVEILLANCE
1. System Administrators: A course detailing the system functions and operations.
Provide configuration training on all aspects of the system.
2. Users: Provide a detailed course outlining the operational features of all aspects of
the user interface. Topics shall include alarm monitoring functions, reports, error
handling, alarm handling, output relay control, and general overview of the report
hardware.
3. GUI Editing: Conduct detailed training on using the GUI editing software. Topics shall
include the editing of existing graphical maps and the creation of new graphical
maps.
E. Minimum on-site training times shall be:
1. System Administrators: Three (3) days.
2. Users: One (1) day.
3. GUI Editing: One (1) day.
END OF SECTION 28 23 00
1126
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 26 05 - 1 RESCUE ASSISTANCE
COMMUNICATION
SECTION 28 26 05
RESCUE ASSISTANCE COMMUNICATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. General:
1. Furnish all labor, materials, tools, equipment and services for a complete area of
Rescue Assistance Communication System as indicated in Contract Documents
and as required by the American with Disabilities Accessibility Guidelines
(ADAAG).
2. Completely coordinate with work of all other trades.
3. Although such work is not specifically indicated, furnish and install all
supplementary or miscellaneous items, appurtenances and devices incidental to
or necessary for a sound, secure and complete installation.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Transistors, capacitors, resistors, integrated circuits and other components shall not be
operated to exceed their rated values. Design systems for 24-hour continuous
operation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS (REFER TO SECTION 28 05 00)
A. Product Data:
1. Technical data on each product including finishes.
2. Description of system operation.
3. Riser diagrams and system data.
4. Equipment design considerations for future expansion when indicated.
5. Materials list and backbox schedule (including unique backboxes).
B. Project Data:
1. Operating and Maintenance Data: Refer to Section 28 05 00.
a. Factory-prepared operation and service manual for each system.
b. Include operation details, schematics, wiring diagrams, color coding,
terminal numbers and component values for printed-circuit boards.
c. Owner Instruction Reports: Refer to Section 28 05 00.
1.4 OPERATION
A. General: Provide two way audible/visual communication between a master annunciator
station and the area of rescue assistance communication stations.
1127
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 26 05 - 2 RESCUE ASSISTANCE
COMMUNICATION
1.5 SYSTEM OPERATION
A. The master annunciator panel shall be located as defined on the drawings. Calls placed
between rescue assistance stations and the master annunciator panel shall be
identifiable at the master annunciator panel to indicate which station has placed a call.
The master annunciator panel shall include both a handset and a speakerphone to
allow two-way communication to each station. Upon activation of an emergency
pushbutton at call stations, a call will automatically be placed to the master annunciator
panel. If no one answers the call, it shall automatically dial a secondary location to a
continuously manned location.
B. Rescue assistance stations shall be located on each level above the first floor of the
building within elevator lobbies.
C. Call stations shall provide audible and visual indication that a call has been placed.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 ACCEPTABLE MANUFACTURERS
A. Rath IP Series
2.2 EQUIPMENT
A. Master Remote Annunciator shall consist of a modular arrangement of intercom 'ON'
and flashing red zone LED indicators in multiples of four zones. The annunciator panel
shall include a "push to talk" and an audible alarm device with a sound level of not less
than 90 dB at 30 cm. The panel shall be constructed of 0.125" thick clear anodized
aluminum. Permanent silk-screened zone designations shall be provided on the panel
as well as a designation strip. Backbox and panel dimensions will vary depending upon
system configuration and number of zones required.
B. Power source shall be a transformer rated for total system devices with an optional
battery-backed DC power supply with battery supply for continuous operation of 4
hours.
C. Wiring to call station shall be supervised. In the event of a wire fault, a yellow LED zone
indicator on the annunciator shall illuminate and a repeating audio alarm shall sound.
D. Remote rescue assistance call station shall consist of one momentary switch with LED,
incandescent lamp not acceptable, and one audible alarm device with a minimum
sound level of not less than 70 dB at 30 cm all mounted on a one gang stainless steel
plate. Permanent silk-screened designations shall be provided on the plate.
E. Wiring shall consist of 22 gauge (minimum) wire or as indicated on drawings. Three
conductors plus one shielded pair are required between each rescue assistance call
station and the annunciator panel not to exceed 3,000 feet. Power wire shall be 12
gauge (minimum). Two conductors are required between the power supply or
transformer and the annunciator panel.
1128
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 26 05 - 3 RESCUE ASSISTANCE
COMMUNICATION
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Install all components and complete system as indicated and in accord with
manufacturer's recommendations and instructions.
B. All cabling shall be installed to meet the applicable requirements for pathway
survivability. Cabling installation shall consist of the following:
1. 2-hour fire rated circuit integrity (CI) cable
2. 2-hour fire rated cable system
3. 2-hour fire rated enclosure or protected area
C. Contractor is to provide and install a typewritten list in a Plexiglas frame permanently
fastened to the wall next to the master rescue assistance annunciator panel to indicate
the building location of each of the remote area of rescue assistance call stations and to
which annunciator zone and LED they correspond.
D. Contractor is to provide a typewritten list of area of rescue assistance communication
instructions in a Plexiglas frame permanently fastened to the wall next to each remote
switch and the annunciator panel to explain the operation of the system.
E. Provide code-required signage acceptable to the Authority Having Jurisdiction at each
call station location.
3.2 SYSTEM TESTING
A. Test each component and complete system for proper operation, including all modes.
Perform correctional work when required. Testing shall be done in the presence of the
Owner's Representative(s).
3.3 OWNER PERSONNEL INSTRUCTION
A. Instruct maintenance and staff personnel in complete operation, including actual staff
use of system, by authorized distributor personnel. Arrange timing of the session in
writing to best coordinate with Owner's working hours. Allow four (4) hours of training.
This training session shall be videotaped by the Contractor.
END OF SECTION 28 26 05
1129
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 1 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
SECTION 28 31 00 - FIRE ALARM AND DETECTION SYSTEMS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SECTION INCLUDES
A. The fire alarm and detection system shall be included as a deferred submittal package.
B. The fire alarm and detection system shall be Owner Furnished Owner Installed.
Contractor to coordinate with Owner's Vendor for Owner Furnished Owner Installed
Fire Alarm System.
C. Performance-based designs shall be submitted to the Authority Having Jurisdiction
(AHJ) for review and approval in a format acceptable to the approving authority. The
submittal shall include documentation for each system function, performance objective,
integration with other system(s), and design configuration. Documentation shall also
include design calculations for system batteries, voltage drop, and other
AHJ-requested items. The AHJ shall act as the sole authority for approval and shall
approve all applicable modifications/variations to the design prior to installation.
D. The fire alarm and automatic detection systems shall be designed, stamped,
programmed, submitted for approval, installed, tested, and commissioned as a turnkey
solution by the Contractor. Contractor shall be responsible for the coordination and
interface of other systems.
E. The contract documents define the minimum fire alarm system requirements. The
most stringent requirement/interpretation shall apply when there is a discrepancy
among the contract documents, code-minimum requirements, and the interpretation of
the AHJ. No additional costs to owner to incorporate AHJ requirements for plan
approval.
F. The scope of the fire alarm and automatic detection system includes interface and
integration with the following systems. The following list is provided as a courtesy.
Contractor shall review the entire set of contract documents to identify the
project-specific conditions and third-party systems requiring fire alarm interface and
integration.
1. Fire Protection (Sprinkler): Monitor modules, flow switches, post indicator values,
sprinkler system, fire alarm cabinets, electric bells.
2. Dry Chemical Fire Protection Systems.
3. Fire Smoke Dampers Air Handing Unit Systems: Fire/smoke dampers shall be
closed in groups by air handling system. Fire/smoke dampers shall be closed
when air handling systems are not operational.
4. Elevator Control: Machine room (or roomless) / lobby / shaft detection, elevator
recall operation, hoistway damper control, fire fighter operation.
5. Ceiling Fan Control: Shutdown control of larger ceiling fans per NFPA 13.
1130
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 2 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
1.2 RELATED WORK
A. Section 26 05 53 - Electrical Identification: Refer to electrical identification for color and
identification labeling requirements.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer: A factory-authorized electrical or security contractor licensed with the State
and local jurisdiction with five years' experience in the design, installation and
maintenance of fire alarm systems by that manufacturer.
B. Qualifications: The person managing/overseeing the preparation of shop drawings and
the system installation/programming/testing shall be trained and certified by the
system manufacturer and shall be Fire Alarm Certified by NICET, minimum Level 2.
This person's name and certification number shall appear on the start-up and testing
reports.
1.4 REFERENCES
A. ASME A17.1 - Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators
B. NFPA 20 - Standard for Centrifugal Fire Pumps
C. NFPA 70 - National Electrical Code (NEC)
D. CEC California Electrical Code
E. NFPA 72 - National Fire Alarm and Signaling Code
F. NFPA 101 - Life Safety Code
G. UL 2017 - General Purpose Signaling Devices and Systems
H. UL 217 / 268 - Standard for Smoke Alarms / Smoke Detectors for Fire Alarm Systems
I. UL 2572 - Control and Communication Units for Mass Notification Systems
J. California Fire Code (CFC)
1.5 SUBMITTALS
A. Submit shop drawings and product data under provisions of Section 26 05 00 and as
noted below.
1. Failure to comply with all the following and all the provisions in 26 05 00 will
result in the shop drawing submittal being rejected without review.
2. Failure to submit the fire alarm without all requirements fulfilled in a single
comprehensive submittal will be grounds to require a complete resubmittal.
B. Provide product catalog data sheets as shop drawings.
1131
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 3 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
1. Provide a product catalog data sheet for each item shown on the Electrical
Symbols List and for each piece of equipment that is not shown on the drawings,
but required for the operation of the system.
2. Where a particular Electrical Symbols List item has one or more variations (such
as those denoted by subscripts, etc.) a separate additional product catalog data
sheet shall be provided for each variation that requires a different part number to
be ordered. The corresponding Electrical Symbols List symbol shall be shown on
the top of each sheet.
3. Where multiple items and options are shown on one data sheet, the part number
and options of the item to be used shall be clearly denoted.
C. Submit CAD Floor Plans as Shop Drawings:
1. The complete layout of the entire system, device addresses, auxiliary equipment,
and manufacturer's wiring requirements shall be shown.
2. Indicate the precise routing of notification appliance circuits under the provisions
of circuit survivability. Refer to "Wiring" under Part 3 - Execution of this
specification section for requirements.
3. A legend or key shall be provided to show which symbols shown on the submittal
floor plans correspond with symbols shown on the Contract Documents.
D. About all fire alarm circuits, provide the following: manufacturer's wiring requirements
(manufacturer, type, size, etc.) and voltage drop calculations.
E. Provide installation and maintenance manuals under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
F. Submit manufacturer's certificate that system meets or exceeds specified
requirements.
G. Provide information on the system batteries as follows: total battery capacity, total
capacity used by all devices on this project, total available future capacity.
H. Submit photocopy proof of NICET certification of the person overseeing the
preparation of drawings and installation/testing.
I. When required to comply with local or state regulatory reviews, the fire alarm submittal
shall have a Professional Engineer's stamp and signature NICET Certification of the
state in which the project is completed.
J. EXTRA MATERIALSFurnish extra materials per City approvalthat match products
installed and that are packaged with protective covering for storage and identified with
labels describing contents.
1. Provide quantity equal to 2 percent (2%) of amount of each type installed, but no
less than two (2) units of each type.
a. Smoke and heat detectors, manual pull stations, duct smoke detectors,
monitor modules, control modules and relays.
b. Notification Appliances: Speakers, speaker strobes, and strobes.
1132
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 4 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
2. Keys: The installing contractor shall collect all equipment spare keys provided
with each lockable or resettable device/cabinet minimum of one (1) set each and
shall turn over to the Owner upon completion.
3. All spare parts shall be housed in metal cabinet labeled "Fire Alarm Spare Parts."
1.6 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Deliver products to site under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Store and protect products under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
1.7 REGULATORY REQUIREMENTS
A. System: UL or FM Global listed.
B. Conform to requirements of NFPA 101.
C. Conform to requirements of Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA).
D. Conform to UL 864 Fire Alarm, UL 1076 Security, UL2017 General Signaling, and UL
2572 Mass Notification Communications.
1.8 CODES, LAWS, AND ORDINANCES
A. The fire alarm design shall comply with the following applicable codes, laws, and
standards:
1. ASME A17.1 Safety Code for Elevators and Escalators
2. IFC 2018 International Fire Code with local amendments
3. NFPA 72 National Fire Alarm & Signaling Code 2019
4. NFPA 70 National Electrical Code 2020
5. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
6. NFPA 20 Standards for Centrifugal Fire Pumps
7. NFPA 13 Installation of Sprinkler Systems
8. NFPA 80 Fire Door and other Opening Protectives
9. NFPA 101 Life Safety Code
10. Conform to all requirements of State of California codes, laws, ordinances and
other regulations having jurisdiction.
11. Conform to published standards of City of Moorpark.
1.9 SYSTEM DESCRIPTION
A. Performance Statement: This specification section and the accompanying fire alarm
specific design documents describe the minimum material quality, required features,
and operational requirements of the system. These documents do not convey every
wire that must be installed and every equipment connection that must be made. Based
on the equipment described and the performance required of the system, as presented
in these documents, the Vendor and the Contractor are solely responsible for
determining all wiring, programming and miscellaneous equipment required for a
complete and operational system.
1133
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 5 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
B. This section of the specifications includes the furnishing, installation and connection of
the microprocessor controlled, intelligent reporting, fire alarm equipment required to
form a complete coordinated system that is ready for operation. It shall include, but is
not limited to, alarm initiating devices, control panels, auxiliary control devices,
annunciators, power supplies, and wiring as indicated on the drawings and specified
herein.
C. Fire Alarm System: NFPA 72; Automatic and manual fire alarm system, non-coded,
analog-addressable with automatic sensitivity control of certain detectors, multiplexed
signal transmission.
D. System Supervision: Provide electrically supervised system, with supervised Signal
Line Circuit (SLC) and Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC). Occurrence of single
ground or open condition in initiating or signaling circuit places circuit in TROUBLE
mode. Component or power supply failure places system in TROUBLE mode.
E. Alarm Reset: Key-accessible RESET function resets alarm system out of ALARM if
alarm initiating circuits have cleared.
F. Lamp Test: Manual LAMP TEST function causes alarm indication at each zone at fire
alarm control panel and at annunciator panels.
G. Drawings: Only device layouts and some equipment have been shown on the contract
drawings. Wiring and additional equipment to make a complete and functioning system
has not been shown, but shall be submitted on the shop drawings.
1.10 SYSTEM DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Audio Notification: Horn based; full exterior coverage
B. Visual Notification: Full coverage
C. Automatic Fire/Smoke/Heat Detection: Partial coverage
D. Full coverage is defined as all occupiable interior spaces.
E. Partial coverage is defined as all commonly occupied spaces including corridors,
lobbies/waiting, toilets/restrooms, open office areas, meeting rooms, common work
spaces, storage, mechanical/electrical spaces, and stairways.
1.11 AUTOMATIC DETECTION DESIGN CRITERIA
A. Smoke Detectors: Environmentally conditioned spaces not susceptible to dirt and
dusty conditions.
B. Combination Rate of Rise and 135°F Heat Detectors: Environmentally conditioned
spaces susceptible to the accumulation of dirt or dusty conditions; examples: paper
processing areas, storage rooms, mechanical/electrical spaces, back-of-house areas,
trash/recycle collections spaces.
1134
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 6 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
C. 200°F Fixed Temperature Heat Detectors: Environmentally conditioned spaces subject
to higher maintained ambient temperatures; examples: elevator shafts.
D. Air Sampling Smoke Detectors
1.12 PROJECT RECORD DOCUMENTS
A. Submit documents under the provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Include location of end-of-line devices.
C. Provide a CAD drawing of each area of the building (minimum scale of 1/16" = 1'-0")
showing each device on the project and its address. The devices shall be shown in
their installed location and shall be labeled with the same nomenclature as is used in
the fire alarm panel programming.
D. Submit test results of sound pressure level (dBA) and intelligibility (STI) with the rooms
tested designated on the floor plan. Notification devices shall have the tap wattage
designated.
1.13 OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE DATA
A. Submit data under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Include operating instructions, and maintenance and repair procedures.
C. Include results of testing of all devices and functions.
D. Include manufacturer's representative's letter stating that system is operational.
E. Include the CAD floor plan drawings.
F. Include shop drawings as reviewed by the Architect/Engineer and the local Authority
Having Jurisdiction.
1.14 DOCUMENT STORAGE CABINET
A. The cabinet shall have all fire alarm system documents, including record drawings,
wiring diagrams, operation manuals, etc. A legend sheet permanently attached to the
door shall contain system passwords and inspection logs. The enclosure shall also
provide two (2) key ring holders for system keys and a location for a standard size
business card with service contact information.
B. The cabinet will have, permanently and securely mounted inside, a digital flash
memory device with a minimum of 4 GB of storage capacity and a standard USB B
connector for uploading and downloading electronic versions of record documents and
system programming information.
C. The cabinet shall be red in color with an identification label reading "FIRE ALARM
DOCUMENTS". Refer to Identification Section 26 05 53. The cabinet shall be lockable.
The minimum cabinet size shall be 14" x 14" x 48".
1135
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 7 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
D. The final version of the system database program shall be stored within the cabinet.
E. Locate cabinet as shown on the drawings.
1.15 WARRANTY
A. Provide one (1) year warranty on all materials and labor from Date of Noticeof
Substantial Completion.
B. Warranty requirements shall include furnishing and installing all software upgrades
issued by the manufacturer during the one (1) year warranty period.
1.16 ANNUAL INSPECTION/TESTING AND SERVICE CONTRACT
A. Provide cost to furnish service, inspect, and test all devices of the fire alarm system
per the requirement of NFPA for one (1) year, starting one year after the Date of
Substantial Completion. Submit written reports of inspection testing per NFPA 72,
Chapter 14.
B. Provide an alternate cost for a complete inspection/testing and service/maintenance
contract for the fire alarm system for one (1) year, starting one year after the Date of
Substantial Completion. Submit sample contract terms and conditions for review with
shop drawings.
C. The Owner may enter into a contract directly with the vendor after shop drawing
submittals. This specification is not a contract between the Owner and the vendor to
perform these services.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MANUFACTURERS
A. Notifier by Honeywell
B. Edwards - EST
C. Gamewell - FCI
2.2 FIRE ALARM CONTROL PANEL (FAP)
A. Control Panel: Modular, power-limited electronic design. Provide surface wall-mounted
enclosure as shown on plans. Enclosure shall be minimum 0.060 steel with provisions
for electrical conduit connections into the sides and top. The door shall provide a key
lock and shall include a glass or other transparent opening for viewing of all indicators.
B. Each Signaling Line Circuit (SLC loop) shall not be loaded over 80% of the maximum
device capacity. For example, in the minimum system capacity column listed below, if
the fire alarm manufacturer's system capacity of analog sensors per loop is 99
devices, then no more than 79 devices shall be wired on that loop. The minimum
system capacity shall be as follows:
1136
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 8 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
1. Panel Expansion Capability, Minimum Total SLC Loops: 10
2. Minimum Node Capacity for Network System: 100
C. Signal Line Circuit (SLC) and Notification Appliance Circuit (NAC) Boards:
1. Each board shall communicate directly with each addressable analog sensor and
binary input to determine normal, alarm, or trouble conditions. Analog signals
would be used for automatic test and determination of maintenance
requirements.
2. Each board shall contain its own microprocessor and shall be provided to monitor
addressable inputs and to control addressable outputs (addressable relays). The
board shall communicate and provide power to all devices on its loop over a
single pair of wires, except where 4-wire devices require a separate power
circuit.
D. Central Processing Unit:
1. The central processing unit (CPU) shall communicate with the monitor and
control all other modules in the panel. Removal, disconnection or failure of any
control panel module shall be detected and reported to the CPU.
2. The CPU shall execute all control-by-event programs for specific action to be
taken if a designated situation is detected in the system. A real-time system clock
for time annotations on the display and printer shall be included.
3. All power for the unit shall be supervised and supplied by the FAP.
E. Display:
1. The board shall provide all controls and indicators used by the system operator
and may also be used to program all control panel parameters.
2. The board shall provide an alphanumeric array for display of custom
alphanumeric labels for all addressable points. It shall also provide indicators for
AC Power, System Alarm, System Trouble, Display Trouble and Signal Silence.
3. Displayed descriptions of addressable points shall include actual room
names/numbers selected by the Owner. This information shall be obtained prior
to programming. Room names/numbers shown on floor plans shall not be used.
4. The board shall provide a touch key-pad with control capability to command all
system functions and entry of any alphanumeric information. Twenty different
passwords with four levels of security shall be supported to prevent unauthorized
manual control or programming.
F. Memory: The CPU and display interface board shall be augmented by non-volatile field
programmable memory. EPROM memory will also be allowed provided the memory is
burned in with minimum expansion capability equal to the total system capacity of the
panel. Memory shall not be lost upon primary and secondary power failure.
G. Serial Interface Board: The board shall provide interfaces to a printer, LCD display and
other monitoring devices through RS-232 connections. The minimum operational
distance between the board and the peripheral devices shall be 500 feet. Up to three
(3) RS-232 outputs shall be supported.
1137
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 9 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
H. Power Supply:
1. Input power shall be 120 VAC, 60 Hertz. Output power shall be as noted on the
device specifications and drawings. Each component of the fire alarm system
requiring 120 VAC input power shall be served from a dedicated emergency
branch circuit. Provide two #12 conductors and one #12 ground in 3/4" conduit to
a dedicated 20A/1P circuit breaker with a red handle and a manufacturer's
standard handle lock-on device. Identify/label breaker and branch circuit in
accordance with NFPA requirements and Specification Section 26 05 53.
2. Adequate to supply 125% of all control panel and peripheral power needs as well
as 125% of power required for all external audio-visual devices. The power
supply may be increased as needed by adding additional modular expansion
power supplies. Over-current protections shall be provided on all power outputs.
3. All power supplies shall be designed and installed to meet UL and NFPA
requirements for power-limited operation on all external initiating and indicating
circuits.
4. The power supply shall provide integral charger for use with internal batteries.
Battery capacity shall be sufficient for operation of the entire system for 24 hours
in a non-alarm state followed by alarm mode for 15 minutes, plus 25% spare
capacity for future devices.
I. Surge Protection:
1. All fire alarm control panels, NAC panels, etc. shall be provided with a surge
protection device (SPD). The SPD shall be UL listed to Standard 1449 Rev 3.
The unit should be clearly labeled in accordance with Identification Section 26 05
53. The SPD shall have thermal fuses to protect against fire in short circuit
conditions. The unit shall provide visual indication that the unit is protecting and
functioning.
2. Any communications or signaling circuits associated with the fire alarm system,
which leave or enter a facility, shall be provided with a surge protection device.
The devices shall be as recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer.
J. Dual Digital Communicator:
1. Provide dual phone line interface capable of fire alarm notification to the local fire
department, fire protection agency, or monitoring service. Communicator shall
report in SIA and most major communication formats, with the capability of
transmitting each device address point in a format compatible with the central
station receiver.
2. Monitoring fees and initial connection charges are not part of this project.
3. Communicator shall be fully supervised and shall operate on loop start phase
lines ahead of the building PBX system.
4. Communicator shall be FCC registered. Contractor shall provide two RJ31X
jacks. Contractor to provide connection of communicators to Owner's telephone
system as shown on the drawings.
5. Approvals: UL listed - UL 864/NFPA 72, FM approved.
6. The communicator shall be provided integral to the fire alarm panel as furnished
by the fire alarm panel manufacturer. If the panel construction requires a
separate unit, the unit shall be as manufactured by Silent Knight, Ademco, or fire
alarm panel manufacturer approved equal.
1138
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 10 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
2.3 FIRE ALARM PATHWAY CLASS AND SURVIVABILITY LEVEL
A. Pathway Class:
1. Pathway Class B: Circuits NOT capable of transmitting an alarm beyond the
location of the fault condition. Wiring of outgoing and return conductors is
permitted to be run in the same conduit or cable.
2.4 FIRE ALARM TERMINAL CABINET (FATC)
A. Fire Alarm Terminal Cabinet with locked hinged door. Provide as an extension of the
main fire alarm system.
2.5 SIGNALING LINE CIRCUIT DEVICES
A. Combination Devices: Subscripts identify combination type devices when applicable.
Contractor shall provide the combination device or provide multiple device(s) to meet
the functionality when the manufacturer does not offer the required functionality with a
single device.
B. Signal Line Device(s):
1. Subscripts: Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and
identify the device with a specific sequence of operation.
a. Device types as follows:
1) W - Weather Proof
2) WG = Wire guard is required
3) Candela Ratings:
a) ## = 15 Candela; 30 Candela; 75 Candela; 110 Candela; 177
Candela
b) CD = NICET designer shall select Candela rating as required to
provide full coverage of the space.
b. Sequence of operation as follows:
1) A=Atrium
2) CA = Clean Agent System
3) CR=Computer Room
4) E=Elevator Recall
5) D=HVAC Control
6) DH=Door Hold Release
7) DIPS = Dual Interlock Pre-Action System
8) FD= Fire Door Release
9) MP=Medical Procedure Room
10) S=Sleeping / Patient Room
11) SW=Stairwell
1139
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 11 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
C. FA-120; Smoke Detectors:
1. Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and identify the device
with a specific sequence of operation.
a. Device types as follows:
1) Blank = Photoelectric
2) AT = Attic (located in)
3) BR = Beam Receiver
4) BT = Beam Transmitter
5) CO = Combination Smoke / Carbon Monoxide
6) COH = Combination Smoke / Carbon Monoxide / Heat
7) COS = Combination Smoke / Carbon Monoxide / Strobe
8) H = Combination Smoke / Heat Detectors
9) ION = Ionization Type
10) ID = In-Duct Detector
11) SA = Stand Alone with Sounder
12) SB = Sounder Base
13) SV = Stand Alone with Sounder and 177 Candela Strobe
2. (BLANK) Analog Photoelectric Type Sensor: Shall use the photoelectric principle
to measure smoke density and send data to the control panel representing the
analog level of smoke density measured.
3. (H) Combination Smoke / Heat Detector:
a. Multi-criteria sensor for photoelectrical smoke sensing and rate of rise heat
detection. Carbon monoxide electrolytic sensing module shall provide toxic
gas sensing to UL2034 and UL2075 standards.
b. The detector shall use only one address on the SLC.
4. (IN) In-Duct Smoke Detectors:
a. Analog Photoelectric Type Sensor: Shall use the photoelectric principle to
measure smoke density and send data to the control panel representing the
analog level of smoke density measured.
b. Analog Ionization Type Sensor: Shall use the dual chamber ionization
principle to measure smoke density and send data to the control panel
representing the analog level of smoke density measured.
c. Low Flow Type: Listed for use in duct with 0-2000 feet per minute velocity.
d. Each smoke detector shall connect directly to an SLC loop.
e. Each detector shall be mounted, where shown on the drawings, on a
twist-lock base with all mounting hardware provided to match the duct
application. Provide a two-piece head/base design.
f. Each detector shall have a manual switching means to set the internal
identifying code (address) of that detector, which the control panel shall use
to identify its address with the type of sensor connected.
g. Provide a remote LED indicator device (FA-240/241), mounted in ceiling
directly below detector with a single-gang faceplate labeled: Duct Smoke
Detector.
1140
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 12 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
5. Each smoke detector shall connect directly to an SLC loop, unless listed as stand
alone.
6. Each detector shall be mounted, on a twist-lock base with all mounting hardware
provided. Provide a two-piece head/base design.
7. Each detector shall have a manual switching means to set the internal identifying
code (address) of that detector, which the control panel shall use to identify its
address with the type of sensor connected.
8. Dual alarm and power indicators shall be provided that flash under normal
conditions and remain continuous under alarm or trouble conditions. Remote
indicator terminals shall be provided. Provide a remote LED indicator device if
detector is not visible from a floor standing position.
9. A test means shall be provided to simulate an alarm condition.
10. Where operation is noted as required below 32°F and/or above 120°F, a
conventional device shall be installed with a unique monitor module located in
the nearest available location with maintained temperatures between 32°F and
120°F.
D. FA-122; Duct Smoke Detectors, Sampling Tube Type:
1. Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and identify the device
with a specific sequence of operation.
a. Device types as follows:
1) # = Equipment or system
b. Duct-type smoke detectors shall use the same analog photoelectric sensor
technology, with the same features specified for standard smoke detectors,
except with additional features as specified below.
c. Provide sampling tubes and mounting hardware to match the duct to which
it is attached. Where the detector housing is larger than the duct height,
Contractor shall fabricate a mounting bracket for the detector and attach
according to the fire alarm manufacturer's recommendations.
d. Provide a remote alarm LED indicator device (FA-241 or FA-242) if detector
is not visible from a floor-standing position. If detector is located above a
suspended ceiling, mount remote indicator in ceiling directly below detector
with a white single-gang faceplate labeled: Duct Smoke Detector.
E. FA-130; Manual Pull Stations:
1. Manual pull station, addressable, double action, reset key lock, semi-flush mount,
red high abuse plastic or cast metal construction with white lettering. Provided
with all necessary mounting hardware. Use surface mount only on precast
concrete or structure.
2. Manual stations shall connect directly to an SLC loop. Stations shall provide
address setting means using rotary decimal or DIP switches.
3. Where operation is noted as required below 32°F and/or above 120°F, a
conventional device shall be installed with a unique monitor module located in
the nearest available location, with maintained temperatures between 32°F and
120°F.
1141
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 13 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
F. FA-140; Heat Detectors:
1. Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and identify the device
with a specific sequence of operation.
a. Device types as follows:
1) Blank = Combination Rate of Rise / Fixed Temp
2) AT = Attic (located in)
3) F = Fixed Temp
4) RC = Rate Compensated
5) X = Explosion Proof
2. (BLANK) Combination rate of rise and 135°F fixed temperature analog thermal
type sensor. Factory programmed to alarm at 135°F and at 15°F per minute
rate-of-rise. Sensor shall measure heat level and send data to the control panel
representing the analog level of thermal measurement and rate-of-rise.
3. (F) 200°F fixed temperature. Provide a remote addressable monitor module to
interface with addressable system as shown on the plans.
4. (RC) Rate Compensated
5. Provide a two-piece head/base design, with a manual switching means to set the
internal identifying code (address) of that detector, which the control panel shall
use to identify its address with the type of sensor connected.
6. Heat detectors shall connect directly to SLC loops. Where fixed temperature or
explosion proof detectors are used, one monitor module may be used to monitor
all detectors in one room/area as shown on the drawings.
7. Detectors shall be mounted, on a twist-lock base with all mounting hardware
provided.
8. Provide a remote LED indicator device if detector is not visible from a
floor-standing position.
9. Dual alarm and power indicators shall be provided that flash under normal
conditions and remain continuous under alarm or trouble conditions. A
connection for attachment of a remote indicator shall be provided.
10. A test means shall be provided to simulate an alarm condition.
11. Where operation is noted as required below 32°F and/or above 120°F, a
conventional device shall be installed with a unique monitor module located in
the nearest available location with maintained temperatures between 32°F and
120°F.
G. FA-160; Monitor Modules:
1. Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and identify the device
with a specific sequence of operation.
a. Device types as follows:
1) Blank = Refer to Plans
2) KB = Knox Box Monitor
1142
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 14 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
2. Monitor Module shall connect directly to an SLC loop and receive power from a
separate 24 VDC circuit. It shall interface initiating devices with the control panel
using Style D or Style B circuits. Contractor option: Use an interface module
(2-wire operation) for Style B circuits connected to normally-open dry contacts,
such as a flow switch.
3. The module shall be mounted in an enclosure located in an accessible service
location as near as possible to the device(s) being monitored, or where shown on
the drawings. All mounting hardware shall be provided.
4. The module shall supply the required power to operate the monitored device(s).
5. The module shall provide address setting means using rotary decimal or DIP
switches.
H. FA-161; Addressable Control Module:
1. Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and identify the device
with a specific sequence of operation.
a. Device types as follows:
1) Blank = Refer to Plans
2) DH = Door Hold Open
3) PD = Hold Open Override
2. Relay that represents an addressable control point used primarily for the control
of auxiliary devices. Contractor to provide additional child relay(s), as required,
rated for the electrical load being controlled (Contractor to match voltage, amps,
etc.).
3. Relay shall connect directly to an SLC loop and receive power from a separate
24 VDC circuit.
4. The relay shall be mounted in an enclosure located in an accessible service
location as near as possible to the device(s) being controlled, unless otherwise
shown on the drawings. All mounting hardware shall be provided.
5. The relay shall supply 24 VDC power to the device(s) being controlled, unless
otherwise indicated on the drawings.
I. FA-280; Isolation Module:
1. Provide fault isolation modules or isolator detector base capable of isolating and
removing the fault from Class A or Class X addressable loop data circuits while
allowing the remaining data loop to continue operation. Provide a minimum of
two isolation modules or bases and between every 15 devices.
2.6 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE DEVICES
A. Combination Devices: Subscripts identify combination type devices when applicable.
Contractor shall provide the combination device or provide multiple device(s) to meet
the functionality when the manufacturer does not offer the required functionality with a
single device.
1143
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 15 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
B. Notification Appliance Device(s):
1. Subscripts: Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and
identify the device with a specific sequence of operation.
a. Device types as follows:
1) W = Weather Proof
2) WG = Wire guard is required
3) Candela Ratings:
a) ## = 15 Candela; 30 Candela; 75 Candela; 110 Candela; 177
Candela.
b) CD = NICET designer shall select Candela rating as required to
provide full coverage of the space.
C. Notification Device(s):
1. Wall Mounted: Red housing with white lettering or pictogram.
2. Ceiling Mounted: Red housing with white lettering or pictogram.
D. FA-200; Visual Alarm Devices:
1. Wall or ceiling mounted, refer to plans.
2. High intensity (Candela rating as scheduled on the drawings) xenon strobe or
equivalent under a lens. Candela rating shall be visible from exterior of the
device.
3. The maximum pulse duration shall be 0.2 seconds with a maximum duty cycle of
40%. The flash rate shall be 1 Hz. Where more than two strobes are visible from
any one location, the fire alarm visual devices shall be synchronized.
4. Device, housing, and backbox shall be UL listed for fire alarm/emergency
applications.
5. (W) Weatherproof Visual Notification Device: High intensity strobe, square
housing, 75 Candela rating, suitable for wet locations. Provide with weatherproof
back box.
a. Mounting: Semi-flush wall.
b. Conduit shall not be exposed.
E. FA-210; Audio Horn Alarm Devices:
1. Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and identify the device
with a specific sequence of operation.
2. Device types as follows:
a. M = Mini-Horn
3. Wall or ceiling mounted, refer to plans.
4. Sound Rating: 85 dB at 10 feet. Sound levels for alarm signals shall not exceed
120 dBA in the occupied area.
1144
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 16 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
5. Device shall be capable of a high and low dB level setting. Unless noted
otherwise, the device shall be set to the high setting at building completion.
6. Device, housing, and backbox shall be UL listed for fire alarm/emergency
applications.
7. (M) Mini-Horn Audio Notification Device: Electronic horn.
a. Mounting: single-gang flush wall.
F. FA-211; Combination Audio Horn and Visual Alarm Device:
1. Wall or ceiling mounted, refer to plans.
2. Combine audio and visual components into a single device. Refer to the
corresponding paragraphs above for requirements of each component.
3. (W) Weatherproof Audio/Visual Notification Device: Electronic horn with high
intensity strobe, square housing, 75 Candela, suitable for wet locations. Provide
with weatherproof back box.
a. Mounting: Semi-flush wall.
b. Conduit shall not be exposed.
2.7 DOOR HOLD-OPEN DEVICES
A. FA-270; Electromagnetic Door Holder Devices:
1. Surface wall mounted.
2. Voltage: 24VDC.
3. Holding force shall be 25 pounds minimum.
4. Provide fail-safe operation; power failure releases door.
5. Provide self-adjusting swivel catch plate with pivot points to adjust to door
alignment changes.
6. Provide all hardware and wiring needed to accommodate the complete
functioning door holder installation.
7. Ensure that the door hardware and trim projections are compatible with total
projection of door release.
8. Provide firm anchoring for the electromagnet, such that the mounting box and
device will not move independently from the wall or floor they are mounted to.
This device and mounting will function as a doorstop and hold the force of the
door closer mechanism.
9. Follow manufacturer's recommended installation and location instructions unless
noted otherwise.
10. Electromagnetic door holder devices, housing, and back box shall be UL listed.
2.8 ELEVATOR SHAFT DAMPER CONTROL
A. Smoke detectors in the hoistway or elevator lobbies shall open the elevator hoistway
vent automatic damper upon detection of smoke.
B. FA-253: Hoistway Damper (Elevator Shaft Damper):
1145
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 17 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
1. Motorized type, 24VDC, furnished and installed by MC. Fire Alarm control and
power connections by EC. A subscript is used to identify a hoistway damper with
a specific elevator or bank of elevators.
C. FA-253: Hoistway damper switch for manual control of elevator shaft damper.
2-position selector switch for open/close control, maintained operator, NEMA ICS 5-1
contact block. Provide normally open contact for fire alarm interface. Nameplate shall
identify associated elevator and open/close damper position. Flush mount enclosure
provided by fire alarm vendor to match control panel.
1. Manufacturers:
a. Allen Bradley 800T-H2A
b. Square D
2.9 NOTIFICATION APPLIANCE CIRCUIT PANEL (NAC)
A. As shown on the plans or as a Contractor's option if not shown, furnish and install NAC
extender panels as necessary to provide remote power supply for notification
appliance circuits (NAC). Contractor shall indicate quantity and locations of each NAC
on the shop drawing submittals.
B. Each NAC shall be self-contained remote power supply with batteries, and battery
charger mounted in a surface lockable cabinet. Battery capacity shall be sufficient for
operation for 24 hours in a non-alarm state followed by alarm for 15 minutes, plus 25%
spare capacity for future devices. Each NAC provides a minimum of up to 4 outputs,
2A continuous, or 6A full load total capacity.
C. Power for each NAC shall be from a local 120 VAC emergency circuit. Provide two #12
conductors and one #12 ground in 1/2" conduit to each NAC from a dedicated 20A/1P
circuit breaker with a red handle and a manufacturer's standard handle lock-on device.
Coordinate panel and circuit number with the Architect/Engineer prior to installation.
D. NAC extender panels may be installed only where shown on drawings.
E. Mounting: Flush.
2.10 ANNUNCIATION
A. FAA; Remote LCD Annunciators:
1. Auxiliary annunciators shall indicate alarm and trouble conditions visually and
audibly as shown on the drawings. Provide local TROUBLE ACKNOWLEDGE,
TEST, and ALARM SILENCE capability. Minimum 80-character display.
2. Communications and power to the annunciators shall be supervised. The
annunciator shall receive power from the fire alarm control panel.
3. A single key switch shall enable all switches on the annunciator.
4. Mounting: Flush.
1146
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 18 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
B. FA-242; Fire Alarm Remote Indicator and Test Switch:
1. Red LED type.
2. Key switch test selector.
3. Mounts flush to a single gang box.
2.11 CONNECTIONS TO AUXILIARY DEVICES PROVIDED BY OTHERS
A. FA-250; Smoke Damper and Fire/Smoke Damper Controller:
1. Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and identify the device
with a specific sequence of operation.
2. Device types as follows:
a. # = Indicates equipment system associated with smoke or fire/smoke
damper.
3. Motorized type, 24 VDC, furnished and installed by MC. A subscript is used to
identify the device with a specific air handler or zone for its sequence of
operation.
4. The EC provides:
a. Fire alarm control and power connections by EC.
b. Fire alarm addressable control module (FA-161) located within 5 feet of
smoke damper.
c. Smoke Detection, selected by NICET designer based on duct size,
ventilation airflow, and specific field conditions. Detector shall be mounted
within 5 feet of smoke damper. Approved options include:
1) Smoke Detector (FA-120) (ID) In Duct Detector. In-duct smoke
detector in ducts less than 18". Detector shall be listed for use in
HVAC ductwork.
2) Duct Smoke Detector FA-122. Sampling type duct detector [FA-122]
in ducts 18" and larger.
d. Remote indicator[ FA-241] or Remote Indicator with test switch[ FA-242]
mounted in visible location.
e. The smoke damper shall close upon activation of the detector, and a
supervisory signal shall be sent to the fire alarm control panel. Refer to the
Fire Alarm Operation Matrix and these specifications for complete
requirements.
5. Provide an enclosure and equipment for interface of dampers with the fire alarm
system and temperature control system. Refer to drawings for layout, wiring and
components.
B. FA-260; Flow Switch:
1. (FA-260) Connection to flow switch to monitor fire protection flow switch or
discharge output contacts. Normally open dry contacts for fire alarm interface.
Furnished and installed and MC; wired by EC.
1147
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 19 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
2. Provide a dedicated monitor switch for each sprinkler flow switch.
C. FA-261; Tamper / Monitor Switch:
1. (FA-261) Connection to monitor switch to monitor fire protection system
supervisory switches or output contacts. Normally open dry contacts for fire
alarm interface. Furnished and installed by MC; wired by EC.
2. Tamper switches in the same room or system may be monitored by a single
monitor switch when shown grouped on the plans.
3. Subscripts: Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and
identify the device with a specific sequence of operation.
4. Device types as follows:
a. Blank = Refer to Plans
b. PIV = Post Indicator Valve
5. (PIV) Post Indicator Valve. Connection to post indicator valve for sprinkler system
supervisory notification. Normally open dry contacts for fire alarm interface.
Furnished and installed by MC; wired by EC. Provide surge protection device as
recommended by the fire alarm system manufacturer on line entering/leaving the
facility.
D. FA-263; Electronic Bell:
1. Electronic bell for sprinkler alarm, electro-mechanical type, 120 VAC. Furnished
and installed by MC. Fire alarm control and power connections by EC.
E. FA-271; Door Hold Device:
1. Subscript: Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and identify
the device with a specific sequence of operation.
a. DH = Door Hold Open
b. PD = Hold Open Override
2. (BLANK) Integral with door hardware 24 VDC. Furnished and installed by GC.
Fire alarm control and power connections by EC.
3. (PD) Hold open override connection to GC-provided power door operator. EC
shall intercept the hold open switch wiring (unless specific contacts for this
purpose are provided on the door) and connect addressable relay to override this
switch and allow the door to close. All modifications to the power door operator
shall be coordinated with the GC.
F. FA-160; Knox Box Monitor:
1. Subscript: Subscripts are used to define the device type, installation, and identify
the device with a specific sequence of operation.
a. KB = Knox Box
1148
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 20 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
2. Monitored Knox box furnished and installed by GC. Provide addressable monitor
module (FA-160) for Knox box monitoring. Refer to architectural plans for
requirements and location.
2.12 WIRING
A. Fire alarm wiring/cabling shall be furnished and installed by the Contractor in
accordance with the manufacturer's recommendations and pursuant to National Fire
Codes. Cabling shall be UL listed and labeled as complying with the Electrical Code
for power-limited fire alarm signal service.
B. Fire Alarm Cable:
1. Manufacturers:
a. Comtran Corp.
b. Helix/HiTemp Cables, Inc.
c. Rockbestos-Suprenant Cable Corp.
d. West Penn Wire/CDT.
e. Radix.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 SEQUENCES OF FIRE ALARM OPERATION
A. General:
1. Refer to the Fire Alarm Sequence Of Operations on the drawings for basic
requirements and system operation.
2. The GUI/graphic annunciator shall display audible and visual alarms. The device
activated shall be immediately displayed on a CAD floor plan at approximately
1/8" scale. Visual indication shall further indicate the device by utilizing an easily
recognized color change of the symbol. The use of flashing symbols is
encouraged.
3. All system output programs assigned via control-by-event equations to be
activated by the particular point in alarm shall be executed, and the associated
system outputs (alarm notification appliances and/or relays) shall be activated.
B. Panel/Annunciator Alarm, Trouble, Supervisory Indication:
1. Appropriate system Alarm, Trouble, or Supervisory LED shall flash at the control
panel, transponder, and annunciator locations.
2. A local signal in the control panel shall sound.
3. The LCD display shall indicate all information associated with the condition,
including the name of the item, type of device and its location within the protected
premises.
4. Printing and history storage equipment shall log the information associated with
the fire alarm control panel (FAP) condition, along with the time and date.
5. Transmit the appropriate signal (supervisory, trouble, alarm) to the central station
via the digital communicator.
1149
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 21 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
6. Transmit the appropriate signal (supervisory, trouble, alarm) to the building
automation system via addressable relays tied to contact monitors on the
system.
C. Audible Alarms Sequence:
1. Audible alarms throughout the building shall sound.
2. Audible alarms within the floor or fire/smoke compartment where the emergency
signal originated and in adjacent areas shall sound.
D. Visual Alarms Sequence:
1. Visual alarms throughout the building shall flash.
2. Visual alarms within the floor or fire/smoke compartment where the emergency
signal originated and in adjacent areas shall flash.
E. Fire Protection Electric Sprinkler Bell Sequence:
1. The fire alarm shall utilize an addressable relay to energize the electric sprinkler
bell upon activation of the flow switch.
F. Smoke Damper Control Sequence:
1. The fire alarm system shall utilize an addressable relay to open the power
connection to smoke or fire/smoke dampers and allow them to close. Coordinate
other requirements with damper installer.
2. Where a damper is in a main air duct, where closure of that single damper will
entirely block airflow in the duct system, the smoke damper sequence shall also
initiate the AHU and mechanical fan shutdown sequence for the affected unit.
3. The AHU and mechanical fan shutdown sequence shall be initiated only when
ALL the dampers associated with that unit or mechanical fan are closed.
Otherwise, the AHU or mechanical fan shall continue to serve other areas.
4. Smoke and fire/smoke dampers located in branch ductwork shall be closed
individually or in groups, as identified on the plans.
5. All smoke and fire/smoke dampers shall be closed throughout the building.
G. AHU and Mechanical Fan Shutdown Sequence:
1. The fire alarm system shall utilize addressable relays to de-energize all AHU
motor controllers and mechanical fans. Coordinate other requirements with
HVAC installer.
2. The fire alarm system shall directly shut down the AHU or mechanical fan
through the local HVAC control device (i.e., variable frequency drive or motor
starter).
3. Where a facility has more than one AHU or mechanical fan, each shall be
shutdown individually based on input from initiation devices in the area served by
the unit or designated for each air distribution system.
4. All AHUs and mechanical fans shall be shutdown simultaneously throughout the
building.
1150
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 22 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
H. Fire Door Release Sequence:
1. The fire alarm system shall utilize an addressable relay to signal the fire door or
curtain to close. Once the alarm is cleared, the addressable relay shall allow the
door to open.
2. Where a facility has more than one fire door, each shall release individually
based on input from initiation devices in the vicinity of each door and noted
specifically for door closure.
I. Door Holder Release Sequence:
1. The fire alarm system shall utilize an addressable relay to open the power
connection to integral and magnetic door holders.
2. The fire alarm system shall utilize an addressable relay to open the 'hold' switch
circuitry, integral to the power door.
3. Door holders shall release individually based on initiation devices in the vicinity of
the door and noted specifically for door closure.
4. All door holders throughout the building shall release simultaneously.
J. Elevator Recall Sequence:
1. Elevator recall sequences shall meet the requirements of ASME/ANSI A17.1 and
NFPA 72.
2. Upon signal from a smoke detector in the machine room, hoistway, or any
elevator lobby other than the "designated level" the fire alarm shall utilize an
addressable relay to signal the elevator to recall to the designated level as
determined by the Authority Having Jurisdiction.
3. Upon signal from a smoke detector in the elevator lobby of the "designated
level," the fire alarm system shall utilize an addressable relay to signal the
elevator to recall to the "alternate level" as determined by the Authority Having
Jurisdiction.
4. All elevators, throughout the building, shall be recalled simultaneously.
5. All elevators that share the same hoistway, machine room or lobby shall be
recalled simultaneously. Elevators served by different machine rooms, hoistways
and lobbies shall continue to operate.
K. Elevator Shutdown Sequence:
1. Elevator shutdown shall meet the requirements of ASME/ANSI A17.1.
2. All elevators that share the same hoistway, machine room, or lobby shall be shut
down simultaneously. Elevators served by different machine rooms, hoistways,
and lobbies shall continue to operate.
3. The fire alarm system shall utilize an addressable relay to energize the shunt trip
of the main elevator breaker, disconnecting power to the elevator.
4. The fire alarm system shall utilize an addressable relay to de-energize the relay
on the elevator power module, disconnecting power to the elevator.
L. Elevator Hoistway Damper Sequence:
1. Provide control of each elevator shaft damper in accordance with ASME/ANSI
A17.1, as indicated on the drawings.
1151
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 23 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
2. The fire alarm system shall utilize an addressable relay to open or close the
elevator shaft vent damper from a manually operated switch.
3. The hoistway vent damper shall open automatically when the hoistway or
elevator lobby smoke detectors activate.
4. When the damper is in the open position, the fire alarm system shall provide
status indication (e.g., "Elevator 2-3 damper open") on the fire alarm panels and
annunciators. Once the damper is closed, the status indication shall
automatically return to the normal state.
M. Ceiling Fan Shutdown Sequence:
1. The fire alarm shall utilize an addressable relay to de-energize the ventilation
ceiling fan and controller. Coordinate the connection to the fan shutdown
contacts on the fan controller or interrupt the power circuit with the addressable
relay.
N. Access Control Override Sequence:
1. The fire alarm shall use addressable output relay(s) to signal the access control
panel.
2. Refer to the access control specifications for requirement upon fire alarm signal.
The fire alarm shall initiate an override of delayed egress doors.
3.2 INSTALLATION
A. Install system in accordance with manufacturer's instructions and referenced codes.
B. Fire Alarm Control Panel:
1. Install the control panel where shown on the drawings.
2. All expansion compartments, if required, shall be located at the control panel.
3. The fire alarm voice prerecorded messages shall be verified by the Contractor,
as approved by the Owner, prior to the shop drawing submittal process.
C. Devices:
1. General:
a. All ceiling-mounted devices shall be located where shown on the reflected
floor plans. If not shown on the reflected floor drawings, the devices shall
be installed in the relative locations shown on the floor drawings in a neat
and uniform pattern.
b. All devices shall be coordinated with luminaires, diffusers, sprinkler heads,
piping and other obstructions to maintain a neat and operable installation.
Mounting locations and spacing shall not exceed the requirements of NFPA
72.
c. Where the devices are to be installed in a grid type ceiling system, the
detectors shall be centered in the ceiling tile.
1152
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 24 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
d. The location of all fire alarm devices shall be coordinated with other devices
mounted in the proximity. Where a conflict arises with other items or with
architectural elements that will not allow the device to be mounted at the
location or height shown, the Contractor shall adjust location of device so
that new location meets all requirements in NFPA 72 and all applicable
building codes.
2. Per the requirements of NFPA, detector heads shall not be installed until after the
final construction cleaning unless required by the local Authority Having
Jurisdiction (AHJ). If detector heads must be installed prior to final cleaning (for
partial occupancy, to monitor finished areas or as otherwise required by the
AHJ), they shall not be installed until after the fire alarm panel is installed, with
wires terminated, ready for operation. Any detector head installed prior to the
final construction cleaning shall be removed and cleaned prior to closeout.
3. Protection of Fire Alarm System:
a. A smoke detector shall be installed within the vicinity of the main fire alarm
panel and every NAC extender panel per NFPA 72. A heat detector may be
substituted when a smoke detector is not appropriate for the environment of
installation.
4. Analog Smoke and Heat Detectors:
a. In elevator shafts and elevator equipment rooms, provide a heat detector
for elevator shutdown within 2' of every sprinkler head. Coordinate with fire
protection contractor.
5. Duct-type Analog Smoke Detectors:
a. Duct-type analog smoke detectors shall be installed on the duct where
shown on the drawings and details. The sampling tubes shall be installed in
the respective duct at the approximate location where shown on the
electrical drawings to meet the operation requirements of the system.
b. All detectors shall be accessible.
c. Duct-type detectors shall be installed according to the manufacturer's
instructions.
6. In-Duct Analog Smoke Detectors:
a. In-duct analog smoke detectors shall be installed in the duct where shown
on the drawings and details. The devices shall be installed in the respective
duct at the approximate location where shown on the electrical drawings to
meet the operation requirements of the system.
b. All detectors shall be accessible.
7. Heat Detector, Linear Wire Type:
a. Install detection wire within 20 inches of the underside of building roof, floor,
or as recommended by the manufacturer.
b. The protected area shall not exceed 4,000 square feet per zone. Provide a
separate zone for areas divided by fire/smoke rated walls.
1153
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 25 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
8. Manual Pull Stations:
a. Stations shall be located where shown and at the height noted on the
drawings.
9. Addressable Relays and Monitor Modules:
a. Modules shall be located as near to the respective monitor or control
devices as possible, unless otherwise indicated on the drawings.
b. All modules shall be mounted in or on a junction box in an accessible
location.
c. Where not visible from a floor standing position, a remote indicator shall be
installed to allow inspection of the device status from a local floor standing
location.
10. SLC Loop Isolation Modules:
a. Isolation modules shall be installed to limit the number of addressable
devices that are incapacitated by a circuit fault.
b. Install all Isolation Modules within the fire alarm control panel, unless
otherwise indicated on the drawings.
11. Notification Appliance Devices:
a. Devices shall be located where shown on the drawings.
b. Wall-mounted audio, visual and audio/visual alarm devices shall be
mounted as denoted on the drawings.
c. Where ceiling mounted visual alarm devices or combination audio/visual
alarm devices are shown where the ceiling is greater than 30'-0" high, they
shall be stem mounted so that the entire unit is below 30'-0". This does not
apply to audio-only alarm devices.
D. Wiring:
1. Fire alarm wiring/cabling shall be provided by the Contractor in accordance with
the manufacturer's recommendations and pursuant to National Fire Codes.
2. Wiring shall be installed in conduit. Refer to Identification Section 26 05 13 for
color and identification requirements.
3. Wiring shall be installed in conduit from device to above accessible ceilings.
Exposed plenum-rated cable (FPLP) shall be used above accessible ceilings
supported every 4 feet or run in cable trays (if applicable) maintaining a minimum
of 5-inches clearance from all lighting ballasts. Fire alarm cabling shall not be
installed in the same bridle rings or cable trays designated for the cabling of other
systems.
4. All junction boxes with SLC and NAC circuits shall be identified on cover. Refer
to Identification Section 26 05 13 for color and identification requirements.
1154
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 26 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
5. Partial evacuation or relocation of occupants is the standard operating procedure
for this facility in the event of an alarm. Therefore, all notification appliance
circuits (NAC), including circuits serving NAC extender panels (NAC) and other
network communication circuits, must be installed and protected in accordance
with the "circuit survivability" requirements described in NFPA 72. Contractor
shall maintain the following:
a. NACs serving separate evacuation signaling zones shall be routed
separately such that they are no less than 4 feet apart when run
horizontally and 1 foot apart when run vertically. They may come
simultaneously only within 10 feet of the control panel.
b. NACs passing through other evacuation signaling zone(s) shall be installed
in conduit and routed through the 2-hour fire-rated chase(s) or enclosure(s)
identified on the drawings.
c. NACs passing through other evacuation signaling zone(s) shall be
Electrical Code classified CIC cable (Fire Alarm Circuit Integrity) installed in
conduit. Provide CIC cable meeting UL requirements for 2-hour listing.
1) The CIC cable system shall be installed in a conduit system meeting
all requirements of its UL-listed installation system (conduit, boxes,
connectors, etc.).
6. Fire Alarm Power Branch Circuits: Building wiring as specified in Section 26 05
13.
7. Notification Appliance Circuits shall provide the features listed below. These
requirements may require separate circuits for visual and audible devices.
a. Fire alarm temporal audible notification for all audio appliances.
b. Synchronization of all visual devices where two or more devices are visible
from the same location.
c. Ability to silence audible alarm while maintaining visual device operation.
d. Emergency communication alert and textual visible appliance notification.
8. Notification Appliance Circuits shall not span floors or smoke compartments.
Refer to architectural drawings for smoke compartments.
9. Signal line circuits connecting devices shall not span floors or 2-hour smoke
compartments.
10. Signal line circuits connecting devices shall be provided with an isolation module
at each floor separation or as otherwise shown on the drawings.
11. No wiring other than that directly associated with fire alarm detection, alarm or
auxiliary fire protection functions shall be in fire alarm conduits. Wiring splices
shall be avoided to the extent possible, and if needed, they shall be made only in
junction boxes, and enclosed by plastic wire nut type connectors. Transposing or
changing color coding of wires shall not be permitted. All conductors in conduit
containing more than one wire shall be labeled on each end, in all junction boxes,
and at each device with "E-Z Markers" or equivalent. Conductors in cabinets
shall be carefully formed and harnessed so that each drops off directly opposite
to its terminal. Cabinet terminals shall be numbered and coded, and no
unterminated conductors are permitted in cabinets or control panels. All controls,
function switches, etc. shall be clearly labeled on all equipment panels.
1155
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 27 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
E. Fire Alarm Cabling Color Code: Provide circuit conductors with insulation color coding
as follows, or using colored tape at each conductor termination and in each junction
box.
1. Power Branch Circuit Conductors: In accordance with Section 26 05 53.
2. Signaling Line Circuit: Overall red jacket with black and red conductors.
3. DC Power Supply Circuit: Overall red jacket with violet and brown conductors.
4. Notification Appliance Circuit: Overall red jacket with blue and white conductors.
5. Door Release Circuit: Gray conductors.
6. Central Station Trip Circuit: Orange conductors.
7. Central Station Fire Alarm Loop: Black and white conductors.
F. Devices surface mounted in finished areas shall be mounted on surface backboxes
furnished by fire alarm equipment supplier. Backboxes shall be painted to match
device, shall be the same shape and size as the device shall not have visible
knockouts.
G. Make conduit and wiring connections to door release devices, sprinkler flow and
pressure switches, sprinkler valve monitor switches, fire suppression system control
panels, duct analog smoke detectors and all other system devices shown or noted on
the Contract Documents or required in the manufacturer's product data and shop
drawings.
3.3 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Field inspection and testing will be performed under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Test in accordance with NFPA 72, Chapter 14 and local fire department requirements.
Submit documentation with O & M manuals in accordance with Section 14.6 of the
Code.
C. Contractor shall test and adjust the fire alarm system as follows:
1. Speaker taps shall be adjusted to the lowest tap setting which achieves a sound
level higher than or equal to the greatest of the following:
a. 70dBA.
b. 15 dBA above ambient levels as indicated in NFPA 72 Table A.18.4.3.
c. 15 dBA above measured ambient. 5 dBA above the maximum measured
sound level with duration of more than 60 seconds.
d. As specified on the drawings.
2. Sound level measurement procedure shall meet the following requirements:
a. All measurements shall use the 'A' weighted, dBA, sound measurement
scale.
b. All measurements shall be taken after furnishings, wall coverings and floor
coverings are in place.
c. All measurements shall be taken after fixed equipment (HVAC units, etc.)
producing ambient noise is installed and is in operation.
1156
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 28 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
d. Final ambient sound measurements shall be taken during occupancy and
the units shall be re-adjusted at that time, if necessary.
e. All sound level measurements shall be taken at a height of 5' above the
finished floor level.
f. Measurements shall be taken in every unique room. If there are multiple
rooms, which have the identical dimensions and function, 10%, or a
minimum of 2 rooms shall be tested. The results from the rooms tested
shall be averaged and the remaining rooms may be adjusted per the
average.
g. Measurements shall be taken on a 20' x 20' grid and the results for all
points taken shall be averaged. If the room is smaller than 20' x 20' a
minimum of two measurements are required.
h. Measurements shall be taken halfway between speakers or halfway
between a speaker and the wall. No measurements shall be taken at the
extreme edges of the room, nor directly under speakers.
D. Additionally, test the voice alarm communication system intelligibility per IEC 60849:
1. The following acoustically distinguishable spaces shall be tested: All unique
rooms shall be tested. If there are multiple rooms with the identical dimensions
and function, 10%, or a minimum of two (2) rooms, shall be tested. The results
from the rooms tested shall be averaged, and the remaining rooms may be
adjusted per the average.
2. Utilize equipment designed to test per IEC 60849 per the equipment
manufacturer's instructions. This equipment includes a signal generator, which is
input to the fire alarm system and a portable measurement device. This
equipment is available from Simplex Grinnell or Gold Line.
3. Testing equipment that can simulate 'crowd babble' shall be used in rooms with
occupancy of greater than 200.
4. Wide-area notification intelligibility shall be tested in acoustically distinguishable
spaces and areas as designated by the Owner.
5. When testing for intelligibility, the quantity and location of the measurement
points shall be the same as the points used for measurement of dBA level.
6. Provide a room by room report, showing the average dBA level and STI for each
room tested, the number and location of. The report shall be presented to the
Architect/Engineer in an Excel .xls file.
3.4 MANUFACTURER'S FIELD SERVICES
A. Provide manufacturer's field services under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Include services of the manufacturer's software programmer to write initial custom-user
program (for Color Graphics Annunciation System).
C. Include services of certified technician to supervise installation, adjustments, final
connections, and system testing.
1157
MOORPARK CITY HALL 05/30/2023
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
28 31 00 - 29 FIRE ALARM AND
DETECTION SYSTEMS
D. Note that room numbers depicted on the architectural/engineering drawings will not
necessarily reflect the actual room (signage) numbers that the Owner selects. The
Contractor and fire alarm manufacturer shall coordinate the actual room numbers as
the Owner directs to identify each device. This list shall be a part of the floor plan
record drawing to be turned in at the project closeout.
E. Include the services to train up to three of the Owner's staff in operation, maintenance,
and programming of the fire alarm system at the manufacturer's factory. Airfare and
lodging expenses for the Owner's staff will be by the Owner.
F. System Occupancy Adjustments: When requested by Owner within 12 months of date
of Substantial Completion, provide on-site system adjustments to suit actual occupied
conditions. For this purpose, provide up to two (2) site visits, 4 hours each visit, outside
normal occupancy hours.
3.5 SYSTEM TRAINING
A. System training shall be performed under provisions of Section 26 05 00.
B. Minimum on-site training times shall be:
1. System Operators: One (1) day.
2. GUI Operation and Editing: One (1) day.
END OF SECTION 28 31 00
1158
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
31 11 00 - 1 Site Clearing and Grubbing
SECTION 31 11 00
SITE CLEARING AND GRUBBING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Clearing vegetation, debris, trash and other materials within limits indicated.
B. Grubbing of vegetation within limits indicated.
1.02 RELATED SECTIONS
A. Section 31 31 19 Vegetation Control
B. Section 32 93 01 Tree Pruning
1.03 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. California Building Code: Site Work, Demolition and Construction.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 NOT USED
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PREPARATION
A. Locate and clearly flag vegetation to remain or to be relocated.
3.02 RESTORATION
A. Repair or replace vegetation indicated to remain that is damaged by construction
operations, as directed by the Owner.
B. Employ a qualified arborist, licensed in jurisdiction where the Project is located, to
submit details of proposed repairs and to repair damage to shrubs.
3.03 CLEARING AND GRUBBING
A. Remove obstructions, trees, shrubs, grass, and other vegetation to permit installation
of new construction. Removal includes digging out stumps and obstructions and
grubbing roots.
B. Remove trash, debris, logs, concrete, masonry and other waste materials.
C. Do not remove trees, shrubs, and other vegetation indicated to remain or to be
relocated.
D. Completely remove stumps, roots, obstructions, and debris extending to a depth of
18-inches below subgrade.
1159
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
31 11 00 - 2 Site Clearing and Grubbing
E. Use only hand methods for grubbing within drip line of remaining trees.
END OF SECTION
1160
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
31 31 19 - 1 Vegetation Control
SECTION 31 31 19
VEGETATION CONTROL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SECTION INCLUDES
A. Application of soil sterilant on subgrades for roadways, driveways, parking areas,
walks, paths, trails, and any other site improvements.
1.02 RELATED DOCUMENTS
A. CAL/OSHA, Title 8.
1.03 SUBMITTALS
A. Follow submittal procedures outlined in Section 01 31 00 – Submittal Procedures.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 SOIL STERILANT
A. Commercial chemical for weed control, registered by EPA. Provide granular, liquid, or
wet-able powder form.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SOIL STERILIZATION
A. Apply soil sterilant to newly installed site improvements such as beneath asphalt
concrete pavement, brick pavement, concrete pavement and at grade concrete slabs,
including sidewalks, curbs, and gutters. Also, apply soil sterilant below newly
constructed expansion and control joints and at areas where pipes, ducts or other
features penetrate slabs.
B. Apply soil sterilant uniformly and at the rates recommended by the manufacturer.
C. Apply soil sterilant to prepared subgrade, or after installation of aggregate base as
recommended by the manufacturer.
3.02 DISPOSAL
A. Lawfully dispose of all unsuitable and excess or surplus material off-site at no cost to
the Owner.
END OF SECTION
1161
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
31 31 19 - 2 Vegetation Control
1162
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
31 22 00 - 1 Site Clearing
SECTION 31 10 00
SITE CLEARING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1.. Removal of concrete and bituminous surfaces.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 31 2200 - Grading.
3. Section 31 2313 - Excavation and Fill.
4. Section 31 2316 - Excavation and Fill for Pavement.
5. Section 31 2326 - Base Course.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit site plan indicating extent of site clearing.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current
edition, as a minimum requirement.
PART 2 - EXECUTION
2.01 CONCRETE AND BITUMINOUS SURFACING REMOVAL
A. Break up and completely remove existing concrete surfacing, curbs, gutters, walks
and bituminous surfacing to indicated limits. Cutting shall be performed to a neat
and even line with proper tools or a concrete cutting saw. Minimum depth of cut
shall be 1 1/2-inch, unless otherwise indicated. Remove concrete broken beyond
the indicated limits to the nearest joint or score line and replace with new concrete
to match existing.
1163
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
31 22 00 - 1 Site Clearing
2.02 CLEANUP
A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of per 01 74 10.
END OF SECTION
1164
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 02/03/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
SECTION 31 22 00
GRADING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. General exterior grading, cutting and filling, including grading for building area, paving, planting areas, banks and hillsides.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing.
3. Section 31 2313 - Excavation and Fill.
4. Section 31 2316 - Excavation and Fill for Pavement.
5. Section 31 2326 - Base Course.
1.2 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
A. General:
1. Fees: Pay as required by authorities having jurisdiction over the area.
2. Bonds: Post as required by authorities having jurisdiction over the area.
3. Haul Routes and Restrictions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction over the area.
4. Before grading, contact Underground Service Alert of Southern California (USASC) for information on public buried utilities and pipelines. Retain the services of an underground utility locator for on- site utilities.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
31 22 00 - 1 Grading
1165
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 02/03/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Materials shall conform to requirements specified in this and related sections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PREPARATION
A. Protect and maintain installed stakes until their removal is required for the Work. Provide replacement grade or location stakes lost or disturbed.
B. Install grade stakes and compare to indicated grades. If discrepancies are found between existing grades and grades indicated on Drawings, do not proceed until discrepancies are resolved.
3.2 ROUGH AND FINE GRADING
A. Rough grade area sufficiently high to require cutting by fine grading:
1. Grade area for bituminous surfacing and other paving to the indicated grades, equal to the section of the indicated base and pavement.
2. Rough grade, fill and compact banks beyond indicated finish grades. Finish grade banks and slopes to indicated grades and specified soil densities.
3. Grade Only Areas: In areas not indicated to receive pavement, rough grade to approximate finish grades and then scarify, moisten and roll to obtain required density and indicated finish grades.
4. Tolerances: Finish grades shall be within a tolerance of 0.05 inch per foot above or below grades indicated. Provide an average grade as indicated.
B. Base or Subgrade:
1. After subgrade has been constructed to approximate required grades, scarify to a depth of at least 12 inches:
a. After scarifying, process loosened material to a finely divided condition and adjust moisture content to optimum condition by addition of water, addition and blending of dry suitable material, or by drying of existing material.
31 22 00 - 2 Grading
1166
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 02/03/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
b. Subgrade material shall be compacted by tamping, sheepsfoot rollers or pneumatic tire rollers. Required relative compaction shall be 90 percent minimum for the top 6 inches below subgrade.
c. Install base course in accordance with Section 31 2326 - Base Course.
2. Tolerance of completed grades of base or subgrade shall not vary more than
0.03 inch per foot from grades indicated. Provide an average grade as indicated.
3.3 SHORING
A. Provide shoring as necessary to properly and safely support earth sides of excavations, and existing curbs, sidewalks, gutter, drives and stairs, against movement and collapse.
B. Design and Calculations: Provide in accordance with requirement of CalOHSA.
C. Remove shoring upon completion of the Work of this section or when no longer needed unless required otherwise by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.4 EXCESS MATERIAL DISPOSAL
A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
31 22 00 - 3 Grading
1167
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
31 23 13 - 1 Excavation Fill
SECTION 31 23 13
EXCAVATION AND FILL
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Excavating, filling, backfilling, and compacting for Project site pavement, planting areas, buildings, and other structures.
2. Trenches for utility lines such as storm drain and other utility appurtenances.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing.
3. Section 31 2200 - Grading.
4. Section 31 2326 - Base Course.
5. Section 32 1313 - Site Concrete Work.
6. Section 33 4000 - Storm Drainage Utilities.
1.2 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
A. Import and Export of Earth Materials:
1. Fees: Pay as required by authorities having jurisdiction over the area.
2. Bonds: Post as required by authorities having jurisdiction over the area.
3. Haul Routes and Restrictions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction over the area.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Shoring calculations as required in Article 3.03 of this Section.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition, except as modified herein.
1168
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
31 23 13 - 2 Excavation Fill
1.5 TESTING
A. OWNER will retain a Geotechnical Engineer as an OWNER Consultant who will provide observations, tests, inspections and approvals identified in the Contract Documents as being responsibility of OWNER.
B. Imported Soils: The Geotechnical Engineer will obtain initial product Sample for testing in accordance Article 3.05 of this Section.
C. Minimum 72 hour notice shall be provided for testing and any specialized inspection services.
D. If any testing, inspections and/or observations fail the requirements on the plans and within the specifications, contractor shall be responsible for fixing the work in a matter that meets the requirements of the specifications at no additional cost to the City.
1.6 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Information on Drawings or in soil investigation report does not constitute a guarantee of accuracy or uniformity of soil conditions over the Project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIALS
A. Fill and backfill material shall be a granular material previously removed from excavation or imported fill material, free of clods and stones larger than 3 inches, (2½ inches for utility trenches) foreign materials, vegetable growths, sod, expansive soils, rubbish and debris. The city should be notified if imported fill materials will be required on-site. Material shall conform to these specified requirements and related sections.
B. Fill material exhibiting a wide variation in consistency and moisture content shall be blended and aerated to stabilize and upgrade the material.
C. Bedding material from trench bottom to one foot above the pipe:
1. Sand, gravel, crushed aggregate or native free-draining granular material providing a sand equivalent of at least 20 or a coefficient of permeability greater than 1.4 inches per hour.
2. Sand complying with the Specifications for cement concrete aggregates.
1169
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
31 23 13 - 3 Excavation Fill
D. Brick rubble and broken concrete originating from the Project site shall be legally disposed of off the Project site No such material shall be imported from outside the Project site.
E. Cement-sand slurry shall be provided with one sack of cement per cubic yard of the mixture.
2.02 BASE MATERIALS
A. Concrete Slabs on Grade: Provide "Crushed Aggregate Base" as specified in Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 200 - Rock Materials, with 3/4 inch maximum size aggregates. Provide 3 inch thick base, unless noted otherwise.
B. Bituminous Surfacing: Provide as indicated on Drawings and specified in Section 31 2326 Base Course.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 GENERAL
A. Before initiating intrusive activities, contact Underground Service Alert of Southern California (USA or Dig Alert) to obtain a Dig Alert ticket for location information on buried public and USA member utilities and pipelines at least 48-hours prior to beginning work. A copy of the Dig Alert ticket shall be
forwarded to the OWNER. For on-site utilities, retain a state-licensed third party underground utility locating service.
B. Where the Work includes a building extension or addition on an occupied Project site, perform Work in such a manner, and at such times, as not to disrupt performance of existing utility services to existing Project site facilities. Where an interruption is necessary, obtain review from the owner’s authorized representative before proceeding.
C. Remove concrete or bituminous pavement to straight lines by saw cutting.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Protect and guard excavations against danger to life, limb, and property as required by, but not limited to, OSHA regulations.
B. Protect existing improvements including landscaping against damage. Repair or replace damaged items at the expense of the Contractor,
C. Protect existing utility services and distribution systems from damage or displacement.
D. Remove conduits or pipes not in service, exposed during Work, unless a minimum cover of two feet is provided. Remove concrete, clay or other non- metallic pipe over 8 inches in diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
1170
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
31 23 13 - 4 Excavation Fill
E. Shore, crib, or lag excavations and earthen banks as necessary to prevent cave in, erosion or gullying of sides.
F. Provide excavations free from standing water by pumping, draining, or providing protection against water intrusion. If soil becomes soft, soggy, or saturated, excavate to firm undisturbed earth and fill as required. Slope adjacent grades away from excavations to minimize entry of water.
3.03 SHORING
A. Provide shoring as necessary to properly and safely support earth sides of excavations, and existing curbs, sidewalks, gutter, and drives, against movement and collapse.
B. Design and Calculations: Provide in accordance with requirement of governing Cal-OSHA requirements.
C. Remove shoring upon completion of the Work of this Section or when no longer needed unless required otherwise by authorities having jurisdiction.
3.04 EXCAVATION
A. Unclassified Excavations: Comply with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 300: "Earthwork", except as modified herein.
B. Form sides of footings, pads, grade beams, and slab foundations, unless otherwise indicated. Provide excavations of sufficient size to permit installation and removal of forms and other required Work.
C. Machine-drill excavation for round footings to size and depth indicated. Provide a collar or casing, or other adequate protection, to exclude dirt and debris. Protect excavations with plank covers until concrete is placed.
D. Provide excavation bottoms level and free from loose material. Excavate to indicated or required elevations of undisturbed earth.
E. Barricade trenches, ditches, pits, sumps, and similar Work outside the barricaded working area with chain link fence as specified in Section 01 5000 - Construction Facilities and Temporary Controls, and in accord with Cal-OSHA standards and requirements.
F. Trenches over five feet in depth shall comply with the Construction Safety Orders of the California Division of Industrial Safety.
G. Where indicated or required to excavate in lawn areas, protect adjoining lawn areas outside of the Work area. Replace or install removed sod upon completion of backfill by installing sod level with adjacent lawns. If installation of removed sod fails, furnish sod and install to match existing lawns.
1171
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
31 23 13 - 5 Excavation Fill
H. For Structures:
1. Calculate excavation quantities based on elevations or depths indicated on Drawings.
2. Special preparation of bottom of excavated planes areas: Excavate areas shown on Drawings as bottom of excavated planes (B.E.P.), by excavating and filling to indicated grades and elevations.
I. For Utilities:
1. Excavate trenches to required depth for utility lines, such as pipes and conduits with minimum allowance of 6 inches at the bottom and 12 inches at the sides for bedding or concrete encasement as indicated on Drawings. Grade bottom of trenches to a uniform smooth surface. Remove loose soil from the excavation before placing sand bedding or concrete encasement.
2. Do not install piping lengthwise under concrete walks without review by the ARCHITECT.
3. Do not excavate trenches parallel to footings closer than 18 inches from the face of the footing or below a plane having a downward slope of two horizontal to one vertical, from a line 9 inches above bottom of footings.
a. Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings, depth of excavations outside buildings shall provide for a minimum coverage above top of piping, tank or conduit measured from the lowest adjoining finished grade, as follows:
Steel Pipe 24 inches below finish grade
Copper Water Tube 18 inches below finish grade
Cast-Iron, Pressure Pipe 36 inches below finished grade
Plastic Pipe (other than waste) 30 inches below finished grade
Tanks or other structure 36 inches below finished grade
Soil, sewer and storm drain minimum 18 inches below finished
grade, and as required for proper pitch and traffic load. Install polypropylene sewer pipe with at least 24 inches of coverage.
Irrigation Pipe: Non-pressure pipe - 12 inches, pressure pipe - 24 inches.
b. Trench width shall provide space for fitting and joining. Excavate for piping bells and fittings, bell and spigot pipe and other fittings.
4. Where portions of existing structures, walks, paving, or other improvements are removed or cut for piping or conduit installation, replace the material with equal quality, finished to match adjoining
1172
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
31 23 13 - 6 Excavation Fill
existing improvements.
5. Provide a minimum clear dimension of 2 inches from sides of wall excavation to outer surfaces of buried pipes or conduits placed in the same trench or outside surfaces of containers and tanks.
3.05
A.
IMPORT/EXPORT OF MATERIALS
Unclassified Fill and Compaction: Comply with the Standard Specifications for
Public Works Construction, Section 300 - Earthwork, except as modified herein. Install and compact fill in layers not to exceed 6 inches in thickness.
B. Provide fill materials as specified in Part 2- Products. If excavated materials from the Project site are not of required quality or sufficient quantity, import additional materials as necessary. Notify City prior to import.
C. Imported fill materials shall be sampled by the Geotechnical Engineer, for compliance with the requirements of Part 2 of this Section.
D. The Geotechnical Engineer, will submit the samples to an independent to owner approved testing laboratory for testing.
E. Initial sampling and testing shall be performed before importing material to the Project site. Identify the location of the source site in addition to the address, name of the person and entity responsible for the source site. The Geotechnical Engineer, will obtain both the initial and additional samples from the identified site and submit samples for required testing.
F. If the total quantity of import is determined to be less than 1000 yards, one sample shall be obtained and submitted for testing for each 100 cubic yards of imported material.
G. The independent approved testing laboratory will perform the required tests and report results of tests noting if the tested material passed or failed such tests and will furnish copies to the Project Inspector, ARCHITECT, Owner’s Authorized Representative, CONTRACTOR, and others as required. Report shall state tests were conducted under the responsible charge of a licensed State of California professional engineer and the material was tested in accordance with applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, and California Building Code. Upon completion of the Work of this Section, the independent testing laboratory and Geotechnical Engineer will submit a verified report to the owner as required by the CBC. If failed tests. Contractor responsible for performing work in accordance with specifications at no additional cost to the City.
H. Bills of lading or equivalent documentation will be submitted to the Project Inspector on a daily basis.
1173
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
31 23 13 - 7 Excavation Fill
I. Upon completion of import operations, provide the Owner’s authorized representative a certification statement attesting that imported material has been obtained from the identified source site.
3.6 INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS
A. Pavement: Fill or backfill materials shall be installed in horizontal layers of 6 inches, unless otherwise required. Each layer shall be evenly placed and moistened or aerated as necessary. Unless otherwise reviewed by the Geotechnical Engineer, each layer of fill material shall cover the length and width of the area to be filled before the next layer of material is installed. Top surface of each layer shall be installed to an approximate level with a crown or crossfall of at least 1 in 50, but not more than 1 in 20. Provide adequate drainage at all times during installation of the Work of this Section.
B. Structures:
1. After concrete has been placed, forms removed, and concrete Work inspected, backfill excavations with earth to indicated or required grades. Backfill simultaneously on each side of walls or grade beams.
Remove rubbish, debris and other waste materials from excavations before placing backfill.
2. Before placing backfill, adequately cure concrete and provide bracing, if required to stabilize structure. Remove bracing as backfill operation progresses.
3. Rigidly control the amount of water to be installed to provide optimum moisture content for type of fill material furnished. Do not over-saturate or compact by flooding or jetting.
C. Utilities:
1. Do not install backfill until the Work of this Section has been inspected and tested. Do not furnish or install materials excavated from the Project site containing materials not permitted for backfill.
2. Backfill electrical or other excavated utility trenches areas within 24 hours after inspection by the Inspector of Record.
3. Install backfill in layers not exceeding 4 inches in thickness, except cement-sand slurry.
4. If materials excavated from the Project site are not permitted for trench backfill in paved areas, backfill trenches with a cement-sand slurry mix and notify the City before the work commence.. Install backfill to an elevation of the existing undisturbed grades plus one inch.
3.7 COMPACTING
A. Each layer of fill material shall be compacted by tamping, sheepsfoot rollers, or pneumatic-tired rollers to provide specified relative compaction. At
1174
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
31 23 13 - 8 Excavation Fill
inaccessible locations, provide specified compaction by manually held, operated and directed compaction equipment.
B. Install and compact sand bedding to provide a uniform bearing under the full length of piping and conduits.
C. Unless otherwise indicated, compact each layer of fill material to a relative compaction of at least ninety-five percent.
D. When fill materials, or a combination of fill materials, are encountered or provided which develop densely packed surfaces as a result of installation or compacting operations, scarify each layer of compacted fill before installing the next succeeding layer.
3.8 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. The Geotechnical Engineer will inspect and test excavations, sample material quality for testing as set required in Part 2, and observe installation and compaction of fill materials.
B. The Geotechnical Engineer will sample imported fill materials from their designated source and submit samples to the independent approved testing laboratory before delivery to the Project site.
C. Installation of backfill shall be observed by the Geotechnical Engineer.
D. The Geotechnical Engineer will inspect and test excavation Work before the installation of fill and other materials.
E. Compaction: Test compaction in accordance with ASTM D1557, Method C.
F. The Project Inspector will inspect foundation excavations when completed and ready for forms, after forms are in place, and before first placement of concrete.
G. If any tests or inspections fail, contractor responsible for performing the work necessary to meet the requirements of the specs and plans at no additional cost to the City.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this Section until Substantial Completion.
3.10 CLEANING
A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
1175
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
31 23 16 - 1 Excavation Fill Paving
SECTION 31 23 16
EXCAVATION AND FILL FOR PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Excavating, backfill, and compacting for paved areas.
2. Installation of fill materials.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing.
3. Section 31 2200 - Grading.
4. Section 32 2326 - Base Course.
5. Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving.
6. Section 32 1313 - Site Concrete Work.
1.2 PROJECT REQUIREMENTS
A. Import and Export of Earth Materials:
1. Fees: Pay as required by authorities having jurisdiction over the area.
2. Bonds: Post as required by authorities having jurisdiction over the area.
3. Haul Routes and Restrictions: Comply with requirements of authorities having jurisdiction over the area.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition, except as modified herein.
1176
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
31 23 16 - 2 Excavation Fill Paving
1.4 TESTING
A. OWNER will retain a Geotechnical Engineer as an OWNER Consultant who will provide observations, tests, inspections and approvals identified in the Contract Documents as being responsibility of OWNER.
B. Imported Soils: The Geotechnical Engineer will obtain initial product Sample for testing in accordance Article 3.05 of this Section.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Information on Drawings or in soils report does not constitute a guarantee of accuracy or uniformity of soil conditions over the Project site.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
BASE MATERIALS
Concrete Slabs On Grade: Provide “Crushed Aggregate Base “as specified in
the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 200: “Rock Materials,” with ¾ inch maximum size aggregates. Provide 3-inch thick base, unless noted otherwise.
B. Bituminous Surfacing: As indicated on Drawings and specified in Section 31 2326 - Base Course.
2.02 FILL AND BACKFILL MATERIALS
A. Fill and backfill materials shall be previously excavated materials or imported fill material, free of clods and stones larger than 3-inch, foreign materials, vegetable growths, sod, expansive soils, rubbish and debris. Material shall conform to these specified requirements and related sections.
B. Fill material exhibiting a wide variation in consistency and moisture content shall be blended or aerated to stabilize and upgrade the material.
C. Imported Fill Material:
1. Provide suitable materials obtained from Project site excavations for earthwork and fill materials. If excavated materials are not of suitable quality or sufficient quantity, import additional materials as necessary. Notify the City if excavated materials are not suitable.
2. Imported fill shall be a granular material with sufficient binder to form a firm and stable unyielding subgrade and shall not have more than 60 percent of fines passing 200 mesh sieve. Material shall have a
1177
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
31 23 16 - 3 Excavation Fill Paving
coefficient of expansion of not more than 2 percent from air dry to optimum moisture content and not more than 6 percent from air dry to saturation. Imported material shall be clean and free of rubbish, debris, and toxic or hazardous contaminants. Adobe or clay soils are not permitted.
D. Brick rubble and broken concrete originating from the Project site shall be legally disposed of off the Project site. No such materials shall be imported from outside the Project site.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 GENERAL
A. Before initiating intrusive activities, contact Underground Service Alert of Southern California (USA or Dig Alert) to obtain a Dig Alert ticket for location information on buried public and USA member utilities and pipelines at least 48-hours prior to beginning work. A copy of the Dig Alert ticket shall be forwarded to the OWNER. For on-site utilities, retain a state-licensed third party underground utility locating service.
B. Clear the Project site as indicated in Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing.
3.02
A.
PROTECTION
Protect and guard excavations against danger to life, limb, and property as
required by, but not limited to, Cal-OSHA regulations.
B. Protect adjacent existing improvements including landscaping against damage.
3.03 EXISTING UTILITY LINES
A. Protect existing utility lines from damage or displacement.
B. Remove conduits or pipes not in service, exposed during Work, unless a minimum cover of 2 feet is provided. Remove concrete, clay or other non- metallic pipe over 8 inches in diameter, unless otherwise indicated.
C. Notify the City if encounter conduits, pipe, etc less than 2' depth for direction and related protection measures.
3.04 EXCAVATION
A. Unclassified Excavations: Comply with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 300: "Earthwork,” except as modified herein.
3.05 FILL
1178
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
31 23 16 - 4 Excavation Fill Paving
A. Unclassified Fill and Compaction: Comply with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 300: "Earthwork,” except as modified herein.
B. Provide fill materials as specified in Part 2 - Products. If excavated materials from the Project site are not of required quality or sufficient quantity, import additional materials as necessary. Notify the City prior to import.
C. Imported fill materials will be sampled by the Geotechnical Engineer for compliance with the requirements of Part 2 of this Section.
D. The Geotechnical Engineer will submit samples to an owner approved independent approved testing laboratory for testing.
E. Initial sampling will be performed by the Geotechnical Engineer before importing material to the Project site. Identify the location of the source site in addition to the address, name of the person and/or entity responsible for the source site. The Geotechnical Engineer will obtain both the initial and additional samples from the identified site and will submit samples to the approved independent testing laboratory for testing.
F. If the total quantity of import is determined to be less than 1,000 yards, one sample shall be obtained and submitted for testing for each 100 cubic yards of imported material.
G. The independent approved testing laboratory will perform the required tests and report results of tests noting if the tested material passed or failed such tests and will furnish copies to the Project Inspector, ARCHITECT, Owner’s Authorized Representative, CONTRACTOR, and others as required. Report shall state tests were conducted under the responsible charge of a licensed State of California professional engineer and the material was tested in accordance with applicable provisions of the Contract Documents, CBC, and the owner. Upon completion of the Work of this Section, the independent testing laboratory and Geotechnical Engineer shall submit a verified report to the owner as required by CBC.
H. Bills of lading or equivalent documentation will be submitted to the Project Inspector on a daily basis.
I. Upon completion of import operations, provide the owner’s authorized representative a certification statement attesting that imported material has been obtained from the identified source site.
1179
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
31 23 16 - 5 Excavation Fill Paving
3.06 INSTALLATION OF MATERIALS
A. Fill or backfill materials shall be installed in horizontal layers of 6 inches, unless otherwise required. Each layer shall be evenly placed and moistened or aerated as necessary. Unless otherwise reviewed by the Geotechnical Engineer, each layer of fill material shall cover the length and width of the area to be filled before the next layer of material is installed. Top surface of each layer shall be installed to an approximate level with a crown or crossfall of at least 1 in 50, but no more than 1 in 20. Provide adequate drainage at all times during construction of the Work of this Section.
3.07 COMPACTING
A. Each layer of fill material shall be compacted by tamping, sheepsfoot rollers, or pneumatic-tired rollers to provide specified relative compaction. At inaccessible locations, provide specified compaction by manually held, operated and directed compaction equipment.
B. Unless otherwise indicated, compact each layer of earth fill to a relative compaction of at least 95 percent.
C. When fill materials, or a combination of fill materials, are encountered or provided which develop densely packed surfaces as a result of installation or compacting operations, scarify each compacted layer before installing the next succeeding layer.
3.08 INSPECTION AND TESTING
A. The Geotechnical Engineer will inspect and test excavations, sample material quality as required in Part 2, and observe installation and compaction of fill materials.
B. The Geotechnical Engineer will sample imported fill materials from their designated source before delivery to the Project site.
C. Installation of backfill will be observed by the Geotechnical Engineer.
D. The Geotechnical Engineer will inspect and test excavation Work before the installation of fill and/or other materials.
E. Compaction: Test compaction in accordance with ASTM D1557, Method C.
F. If any tests or inspections fail, contractor responsible for performing the work
necessary to meet the requirements of the specs and plans at no additional cost
to the City.
3.9 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this Section until Substantial Completion.
3.10 CLEANING
1180
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
31 23 16 - 6 Excavation Fill Paving
A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
1181
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 02/03/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
SECTION 31 23 26
BASE COURSE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Installation of base material.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 31 1000 - Site Clearing.
3. Section 31 2200 - Grading.
4. Section 31 2313 - Excavation and Fill.
5. Section 31 2316 - Excavation and Fill for Paving.
6. Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving.
7. Section 32 1313 - Site Concrete Work.
1.02
A.
SUBMITTALS
Crushed aggregate base (CAB) shall consist of native rock without naturally
occurring asbestos or recycled materials. The CONTRACTOR shall submit written documentation, which identifies the source, volume, and proposed transport date of the material for review and approval by OWNER’S Office of Environmental Health and Safety (OEHS) prior to importing the material. A statement on company letterhead from the CAB source, stamped by either a California Professional Geologist or Engineer, which states that the subject materials are native rock, do not contain any recycled materials and that the source quarry does not mine ultramafic materials, a source of natural occurring asbestos shall be included in the submittal to OEHS. To be considered for a variance, the CONTRACTOR shall submit a documentation package for OEHS approval, which includes all of the aforementioned information at least 48 hours in advance of planned import.
1. Frequently used suppliers for projects include:
a. Hansen Aggregates.
31 23 26 - 1 Base Course
1182
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 02/03/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
b.
c.
Vulcan Materials, Reliance Company.
Vulcan Materials Durbin.
C. Product Data: Submit material source, technical information and test data for base materials. Gradation and quality certifications shall be dated within 30 days of the submittal.
D. Sample: Submit sample of proposed base course material.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement: Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01
A.
MATERIALS
Crushed Aggregate Base (CAB) materials shall conform to the requirements of
the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction: Section 200 - Rock Materials.
B. Crushed Miscellaneous Base (CMB) or materials generated on site shall not be used as a base course material.
2.02 MATERIAL APPROVAL
A. Base material shall be inspected by the Project Inspector for gradation and material content prior to installation. The OWNER may choose to have additional tests performed by a geotechnical engineer, retained by the OWNER, before installation.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
INSTALLATION
Install base course material in layers not exceeding 4 inches in thickness,
unless required otherwise. Grade and compact to indicated levels or grades, cut and fill, water and roll until the surface is hard and true to line, grade and required section. Provide a relative compaction of at least 95 percent, unless otherwise required.
B. Grade base course to elevations indicated on Drawings, ready to receive surfacing, in accordance with Section 31 2200 - Grading.
3.02 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
31 23 26 - 2 Base Course
1183
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 02/03/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
3.3 CLEANUP
A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
31 23 26 - 3 Base Course
1184
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 02/03/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
SECTION 32 12 36
ROLLED SLURRY SEAL, EXISTING PAVEMENT
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Asphalt emulsion slurry seal as indicated.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 32 0117 - Pavement Repair.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit plan indicating extent of areas to be sealed.
B. Product Data: Submit mix design.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement: Standard Specifications for Public Works
Construction, current edition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Slurry Seal: Provide the following material grades in accordance with Section 203 - Bituminous
Materials of the Standard Specification for Public Works Construction, current edition.
1. Emulsified asphalt shall be slow set type grade CSS-1h.
2. Grading of the combined aggregate and percentage of emulsified asphalt shall conform to
Type I slurry requirements.
3. Installed slurry seal shall be sufficiently cured to permit vehicle traffic within one day after
application.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 REPAIRING AND ROLLED SLURRY SEAL EXISTING SURFACES
A. Preparation of Surfaces:
32 12 36 - 1 Rolled Slurry Seal, Existing Pavement
32 01 17 - Pavement Repair
1185
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 02/03/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
1. Before starting slurry seal operations, existing bituminous surfacing shall be cleaned of
loose material, oil spots, vegetation, and other objectionable material.
2. Dampen surface to receive slurry seal with a light application of water to ensure coverage
and proper bond.
3. Provide adequate protection over manholes, yard boxes, utility vaults and other
improvements adjacent to the areas to receive slurry seal. Project Inspector shall inspect
surfaces before the installation of slurry seal.
B. Repair of Existing Surfacing: Cracks more than ½ inch wide, low areas, holes or depressions in
existing surfacing shall be repaired as specified in Section 32 0117: Asphalt Pavement Repair, prior
to the installation of slurry seal.
C. Rolled Slurry Seal: Work shall be performed in accordance to Sub-section 302-4, Slurry, of the
Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition.
1. Roll slurry surfacing with a 10-ton pneumatic roller with a tire pressure of 50 psi and
equipped with a water spray system. Roll as soon as the surfacing is sufficiently cured and
will not pick up on tires of roller. Surfaced areas shall receive a minimum of two coverage
passes by roller. Provide a smooth surface free from ridges or surface variations.
2. Depressions occurring in cracks after initial slurry seal installation shall be filled with sand
slurry before rolling and seal coat installation.
3.02 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
3.03 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
32 12 36 - 2 Rolled Slurry Seal, Existing Pavement
1186
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 01 90 - 1 Operation and Maintenance
SECTION 32 01 90
OPERATION AND MAINTENANCE
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Work Specified in this Section: Furnish all labor, material, equipment, and services
required to maintain the landscape in an attractive condition as specified herein for a
period of 90 calendar days.
B. Definition: The word Architect as used herein shall refer to the Landscape Architect or
the Owner's authorized representative.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. The Contractor's representatives and employees shall be experienced in landscape
maintenance.
1.3 90 CALENDAR DAY MAINTENANCE PERIOD
A. The Contractor shall continuously maintain all areas involved in this Contract during
the progress of work. Maintenance period shall not start until all elements of
construction, planting, and irrigation for the entire project are in accordance with
Plans and specifications.
1. A prime requirement is that all lawn and groundcover areas shall have been
planted and that all lawn areas shall show an even, healthy stand of grass
seedlings or sod, either of which shall have been mowed twice. Maintenance
period will not be shortened when these criteria is met but may be lengthened if
not met.
2. The Contractor’s maintenance period will be extended if the provisions required
within the Plans and specifications are not fulfilled. Project may not be segmented
into maintenance phases.
3. The Contractor shall request a Pre-Maintenance inspection by the Owner and
Architect at the completion of the installation process.
4. The Maintenance Period shall begin upon successful completion of the Pre-
Maintenance walk-through punch list and acceptance of the landscape installation
by the Owner.
5. If such criteria are met to the satisfaction of the Owner, a field notification will be
issued to the Contractor to establish the effective beginning date of the
maintenance period.
B. The Maintenance Period continues for 90 calendar days until final acceptance of the
work by the Owner. Improper maintenance or poor condition of planting at the
1187
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 01 90 - 2 Operation and Maintenance
termination of the scheduled maintenance period shall cause postponement of the
final completion date of the Contract.
C. Any day when the Contractor fails to adequately maintain planting, replace unsuitable
plants, or do weed control or other work, as determined necessary by the Owner, will
not be credited as one of the maintenance periods working days.
1.4 GUARANTEE AND REPLACEMENT
A. Guarantee: All plant material installed under the contract shall be guaranteed for a
period of one year. Plants found to be dead or in poor condition due to faulty
materials or workmanship, as determined solely by the Architect, shall be replaced by
the Contractor at his expense.
1. Replacement: Materials found to be dead, missing, or in poor condition during
the Maintenance period shall be replaced immediately.
2. The Architect shall be the sole judge as to the condition of material.
3. The Contractor shall replace material rejected during the Guarantee period within
fifteen (15) days of written notification by the Owner.
1.6 OBSERVATION VISITS
A. The Contractor shall request progress visits from the Architect at least 48 hours in
advance of anticipated visits. Normal observation visits are as follows:
1. Immediately prior to the commencement of the work in this section.
2. Completion of first 90 days of maintenance.
3. Final acceptance.
B. Fabricator Qualifications: Firm experienced in successfully producing metal
fabrications similar to that shown on the drawings, with sufficient production capacity
to produce required units without causing delay in the work.
C. All materials used shall be free of lead and asbestos fibers.
1.7 OBSERVATION VISITS
A. Prior to the date of the final observation visit, the Contractor shall acquire from the
Architect-approved reproducible Plans and record (from the job record set) all
changes made during construction, label these Plans "Record Drawings", and deliver
to the Architect for review and approval.
B. B. Prior to the date of final inspection, the Contractor shall deliver to the Architect a
written "Landscape and Irrigation Guarantee" as required herein.
1188
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 01 90 - 3 Operation and Maintenance
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. All materials used shall either conform to landscape specifications in other sections or
shall otherwise be acceptable to the Owner.
B. The Owner shall be given a monthly record of all herbicides, insecticides, and
disease control chemicals used. Failure to provide such a record will continue
maintenance period until compliance occurs.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 MAINTENANCE
A. Maintenance shall be performed according to the following standards:
1. All areas shall be weeded and cultivated at intervals of not more than ten (10)
days.
2. Watering, mowing, rolling, edging, trimming, fertilization, spraying, and pest and
rodent control, as may be required, shall be included in the maintenance period.
3. Street gutters shall be cleaned as part of the maintenance program.
4. The Contractor shall be responsible for maintaining adequate protection of the
area.
a. Damaged areas shall be repaired at the Contractor's expense.
5. Between the 15th day and the 20th day of the maintenance period, the
Contractor shall reseed and re-sod all spots or areas within the lawn where
normal turf growth is not evident.
B. The Contractor shall be responsible for reporting to the Owner conditions beyond his
control that prevent or have negative impact on the work required herein.
3.2 TREE AND SHRUB CARE
A. Watering
1. Apply enough irrigation water so that moisture penetrates throughout root zone
and only as frequently as necessary to maintain healthy growth.
a. Do not maintain soils in a constantly wet condition.
b. The contractor shall be responsible for familiarizing himself with the
particular water requirements for the various plantings and shall be
responsible for setting and maintaining the automatic controller to optimum
minimum levels.
1189
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 01 90 - 4 Operation and Maintenance
c. Damage to the plantings caused by over-watering or under-watering shall be
the responsibility of the Contractor to replace at no cost to Owner.
2. Maintain a water basin around newly planted plants so that water can be applied
to moisturize throughout the root zone. At the end of the maintenance period
these basins shall be flattened out to match surrounding grades.
3. If hand-watering, use a fan spray nozzle to break the water force.
B. Tree Pruning
1. Nursery grown trees will not normally require pruning for the first year. Prune
trees only if directed by Architect or Owner, and only for these purposes:
a. Selection and development of permanent scaffold branches that have a
vertical spacing of from 18" to 48" and radial orientation so as not to cross
each other.
b. Elimination of diseased or damaged growth.
c. Elimination of narrow V-shaped branch forks that lack strength.
d. Reduction of toppling and wind damage by thinning out crowns.
e. Maintenance of growth within space limitations.
f. Maintenance of natural appearance.
g. Balancing of crown-to-root ratio.
2. Under no circumstances will stripping of lower branches ("rising up") of young
trees be permitted.
a. Lower branches shall be retained in a “tipped-back" or pinched condition
with as much foliage as possible to promote caliper trunk growth (tapered
trunk).
b. Lower branches can be cut flush with trunk only after the tree is able to stand
erect without staking or other support.
3. Evergreen trees shall be thinned out and shaped when necessary to prevent
wind and storm damage. The primary pruning of deciduous trees shall be done
during the dormant season. Damaged trees or those that constitute health or
safety hazards shall be pruned at any time of the year as required.
C. Shrub Pruning
1. The objectives of shrub pruning are the same as for trees. Shrubs shall not be
clipped into balled or boxed forms unless such is required by the design.
2. All pruning cuts shall be made to lateral branches or buds or flush with the trunk.
"Stubbing" will not be permitted.
1190
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 01 90 - 5 Operation and Maintenance
D. Staking and Guying: Stakes and guys shall remain in place until final acceptance and
are to be continuously inspected and adjusted to prevent girdling of trunks or
branches and to prevent rubbing that causes bark wounds and to allow trees to sway
freely. Stakes and guys are to be removed when trees become sufficiently well rooted
or after one year. When stakes or guys are removed, tree heads may be thinned to
reduce wind load.
E. Weed Control: Keep all areas, including basins and areas between plants, free of
weeds.
1. Use recommended legally approved herbicides only when mechanical removal
methods are not feasible.
2. Avoid frequent soil cultivation next to trees or shrubs that destroys shallow roots.
3. Use mulches to help prevent weed seed germination.
F. Pest and Disease Control: Maintain control of insect and rodent infestations. The
preferred method of control shall be biological control, or with non-toxic, biodegradable,
organic materials. If stronger materials are needed, only materials that are recommended
by a licensed Pest Control Advisor and are EPA approved and regulated shall be used.
Only registered and licensed Pest Control Operators shall apply insecticide or chemical
applications. Notify Owner a minimum of five (5) working days before chemical
applications.
G. Fertilization.
1. Fertilize all planting areas at 30-day intervals, with fertilizer and at rate as
recommended by Soils Report.
a. Avoid applying fertilizer to root balls and bases of main stems
b. Spread fertilizer evenly around plants to drip line.
c. Distribute fertilizer evenly over turf or groundcover areas to avoid patchy
coloration.
d. Replacement of Plants: Replace dead, dying, and missing plants with plants of
a size, condition, and variety acceptable to Architect or Owner at Contractor's
expense.
3.3 GROUND COVER CARE
A. Weed Control: Control weeds preferably with mechanical methods, and with pre-
emergent herbicides and selective systemic herbicides. Hoe weeds as little as
possible since this may result in plant damage. Foot traffic in planted areas shall be
minimized, and soil compaction shall be loosened immediately.
B. Watering: Water enough so that moisture penetrates throughout root zone and only
as frequently as necessary to maintain healthy growth.
1. Do not maintain soils in a constantly wet condition.
1191
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 01 90 - 6 Operation and Maintenance
2. The contractor shall familiarize himself with the particular water requirements for
the planting and shall be responsible for setting and maintaining the automatic
controller to optimum minimum levels.
3. Damage to the planting caused by over-watering or under-watering shall be the
responsibility of the Contractor to replace.
C. Trash: Remove trash weekly. Remove debris, clippings or branches produced by
maintenance activities within 8 hours.
D. Edging and Trimming: Edge ground cover to keep in bounds and trim top growth as
necessary to achieve an overall even appearance.
E. Replacement: Replace dead and missing plants at Contractor's expense.
3.4 IRRIGATION SYSTEM
A. System Inspection: Contractor shall continuously check all systems for proper
operation. Lateral lines shall be flushed out after removing the last sprinkler head or
two at each of the lateral. All heads are to be continuously adjusted as necessary for
proper coverage and to eliminate over-spray on buildings or paving. Contractors’
regular maintenance personnel shall test, observe, and adjust each sprinkler system
no less than once per month.
B. Controllers: Set and program automatic controllers for seasonal water requirements
and minimum optimum water use. Give Owner's representative a key to controllers
and instructions on how to turn off system in case of emergency.
C. Repairs: Repair all damage to irrigation system at Contractor's expense. Repairs shall
be made within one watering period.
END OF SECTION
1192
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 12 36 - 1 Seal Bituminous Surfacing
SECTION 32 12 36
SEAL BITUMINOUS SURFACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Surface sealer over bituminous surfacing.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product information and application procedures
for bituminous surfacing.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the Standard Specifications For Public Works Construction, current
edition.
B. Agitate bulk materials during transport.
1.04 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Provide 10 gallons in unopened containers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Provide one of the following surface seals:
Product Name Manufacturer
1. Guard-Top CALMAT / Industrial Asphalt
2. Over Kote Diversified Asphalt Product
3. Park Top Western Colloid Products
4. Sure Seal Asphalt Coating Engineering
1193
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 12 36 - 2 Seal Bituminous Surfacing
5. Super Drive Top. SAF– T Seal. Inc.
6. Equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 SURFACE PREPARATION
A. Thoroughly wash surfaces with water to remove dirt, debris, excessive oil and grease, or
other foreign matter.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Install seal coat in strict accordance with manufacturer's written directions and
recommendations.
B. Install two coats of surface seal to new bituminous surfacing. First coat shall be
installed before flood testing. Clean surface and allow to dry before installing second
coat. Second coat shall be installed after bituminous surfacing has passed flood test.
C. Where new bituminous surfacing is installed adjacent to existing bituminous surfacing,
overlap surface seal a minimum of 12 inches onto existing bituminous surfacing.
D. Where existing bituminous surfacing is indicated to be patched and sealed, install two
coats of surface seal after patching. Refer to Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving.
3.03 PROTECTION OF SURFACES
A. Protect sealed and unsealed surfaces from damage and traffic during performance of the
Work of this section and until surface seal has thoroughly set and cured. Do not permit
traffic of any kind for at least 24 hours after completion of installation.
B. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
3.04 TESTING
A. Owner reserves the right to obtain samples, perform tests to ensure compliance with the
Specifications, and to review weight slips and invoices of materials delivered to the
Project site.
3.05 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
1194
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 17 00 - 1 Parking Bumpers
SECTION 32 17 00
PARKING BUMPERS
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide precast concrete parking bumpers (wheel stops), with
anchorage, for complete secure installation.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data/Shop Drawings: Submit for parking bumpers dimensions, anchorage,
and locations in accessible parking spaces.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants, and caulks.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide precast concrete parking bumpers (wheel stops).
B. Accessibility Regulatory Requirements: Provide for assuring access for persons with
disabilities in accordance with state and federal regulations.
1. California Regulations: Comply with California Building Standards Code.
2. Federal Regulations: Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards.
C. Regulatory Requirements, Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Emissions: Comply
with applicable air quality management district for VOC emissions for adhesives.
D. Parking Bumpers: Stock manufactured parking bumpers of not less than 3000 psi
concrete, without holes.
E. Epoxy Adhesive: Nontoxic epoxy adhesive as recommended by adhesive
manufacturer for use with parking bumpers and capable of withstanding loads from
automobile wheels; steel anchor devices are not acceptable.
1195
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 03/15/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 17 00 - 2 Parking Bumpers
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSTALLATION
A. Set parking bumpers in minimum two spots of epoxy adhesive at locations indicated
and as required by applicable codes and regulations.
1. Provide at front of each parking space unless otherwise indicated on Drawings.
B. Set square and true with parking space lines.
END OF SECTION
1196
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
32 17 20 - 1 Tactile Warning Surfaces
SECTION 32 17 20
TACTILE WARNING SURFACES
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes: Provide tactile warning surface to ensure tactile warning for persons
with visual impairments as required by state and federal requirements.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 09 90 00: Painted traffic lines and symbols.
1.2 REFERENCES
A. California Building Standards Code, Title 24, requirements for access for persons with
disabilities.
B. Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product literature.
B. Samples: Submit sample of tactile warning surface material.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Sustainability Requirements: Comply with CALGreen requirements including those
relative to finish material pollution control for adhesives, sealants, and caulks.
1.5 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Ensure substrates to receive tactile warning surfaces are smooth and flat with
maximum variation of 1/8" in 10'-0".
B. Ensure concrete is dry (maximum 7 percent moisture content) and exhibit negative
alkalinity, carbonizing and dusting.
1.6 WARRANTY
A. Extended Correction Period: Extend correction period to two years.
1. Repair or replace tactile warning units which break, delaminate or otherwise fail
under normal usage.
1197
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
32 17 20 - 2 Tactile Warning Surfaces
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 SYTEMS MANUFACTURERS
A. ADA Solutions.
B. Advantage Tactile Systems.
C. Armor-Tile.
D. SafetyStep TD.
E. Substitutions: Refer to Section 01 25 00.
2.2 MATERIALS
A. System Description: Provide tactile warning surfaces with accessories.
B. Regulatory Requirements, Accessibility: Provide for assuring access for persons with
disabilities in accordance with state and federal regulations.
1. California Regulations: Comply with California Building Standards Code.
2. Federal Regulations: Comply with Americans with Disabilities Act (ADA) Standards.
C. Regulatory Requirements, Volatile Organic Compound (VOC) Emissions: Comply
with applicable air quality management district for VOC emissions for adhesives.
D. Regulatory Requirements, Slip-Resistance: Hard surface finishes to comply with
requirements of authorities having jurisdiction for slip-resistant hard surfaces, including
general code requirements and requirements for access for persons with disabilities.
E. Tactile Warning Surface: Comply with applicable codes and regulations. Tactile
warning surface shall differ from adjoining walking surfaces in resiliency or sound-on-
cane contact.
1. Type: Contractor option to choose systems from manufacturers listed and to
ensure preparation of installation of tactile warning surfaces result in top surface
of system to be flush with adjacent surfaces unless otherwise indicated.
a. Where otherwise indicated provide transition strips to comply with access
requirements for ensuring smooth transition from adjacent surfaces to
primary surface of tactile warning surfaces.
2. Color: Comply with applicable codes and regulations; where options are provided
as selected by Architect from full range of code approved colors available.
F. Primers and Adhesives: Waterproof epoxy or modified epoxy type as recommended
by system manufacturer for specified material and extra heavy-duty application.
1198
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
32 17 20 - 3 Tactile Warning Surfaces
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine adjacent construction and ensure preparation for installation of tactile
warning surfaces has been correctly coordinated.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Remove subsurface ridges, bumps and voids, and clean substrate.
3.3 INSTALLATION
A. Spread cement evenly in quantity recommended by manufacturer to ensure adhesion
over entire area of installation.
1. Spread only enough adhesive to permit installation of tactile surface material
before initial set.
B. Set in place with tight, even joints, and full adhesion in accordance with manufacturer
recommendations and installation instructions.
1. Where radius installation is indicated, install with maximum 3/16" gap at leading
edge of units using units designed for surface installation with tapered edges.
C. Install units with tapered edges where edges of system are not recessed or not flush
with adjacent surfaces.
3.4 CLEANING
A. Remove excess adhesive from unit surfaces without causing damage to tactile
surface or to adjacent surfaces.
1. Clean surfaces in accordance with manufacturer's recommendations.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Prohibit traffic for not less than 48 hours after installation unless otherwise noted in
manufacturer's literature.
END OF SECTION
1199
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 84 00 - 1 Landscape Irrigation
SECTION 32 84 00
LANDSCAPE IRRIGATION
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 DESCRIPTION
A. Section includes automatic-control irrigation system as shown on the Drawings and as follows:
1. Trenching
2. Piping and Fitting
3. Valving
4. Assemblies
5. Automatic Controllers
6. Specialties
7. Wiring
8. Bubblers
9. Drip Irrigation
10. Cleanup
11. Connections to existing mains or municipal water systems.
a. Related work:
1) Section 32 01 90: Operation and Maintenance of Planting
2) Section 32 93 00: Planting
b. Definition: The word Architect as used herein shall refer to the Landscape Architect
or the Owner's authorized representative.
1.2 QUALITY ASSURANCE AND REQUIREMENTS
A. Permits and Fees: The Contractor shall obtain and pay for any normally required permits, fees
and inspections as required.
1. Manufacturer's Directions: Manufacturer's directions and detailed Drawings shall be
followed in cases where the manufacturers of articles used in this contract furnish
directions covering points not shown in the Drawings and Specifications.
2. Ordinances and Regulations: Any local, municipal and state laws, and rules and
regulations governing or relating to any portion of this work, are hereby incorporated into
and made a part of these Specifications and their provisions shall be carried out by the
1200
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 84 00 - 2 Landscape Irrigation
Contractor. Anything contained in these Specifications shall not be construed to conflict
with any of the above rules and regulations or requirements of the same. However, when
these Specifications and Drawings call for or describe materials, workmanship, or
construction of a better quality, higher standard, or larger size than is required by the
above rules and regulations, the provisions of these Specifications and Drawings shall
take precedence.
a. Comply with requirements of utility company supplying water. Include tapping of
water mains and backflow prevention.
b. Comply with standards of authorities having jurisdiction for potable-water-service
piping, including materials, installation, testing, and disinfection.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Material List
1. Furnish the articles, equipment, materials, or processes specified by name in the
Drawings and Specifications per requirements of Division 1 or the General Provisions. No
substitutions will be allowed without prior written approval by the Architect.
2. Submit a complete materials list to the Architect prior to performing any work. Material list
shall include the manufacturer, model number and description of all materials and
equipment to be used according to example as follows:
Item Description Manufacturer Model No.
1 Controller
2 Isolation Valve
3 Etc.
3. Irrigation submittals must be specific and complete. All items must be listed and should
include solvent and primer, wire, wire connectors, valve boxes, etc. No copies of
manufacturer's literature (catalog cuts) are required as submittal information.
4. Equipment or materials installed or furnished without prior approval of the Architect may
be rejected and the Contractor required to remove such materials from the site at his own
expense.
5. Approval of any item, alternate or substitute indicates only that the product or products
apparently meet the requirements of the Drawings and Specifications based on the
information or samples submitted.
B. Record Drawings
1. Refer to Division 1 or General Provisions.
2. Record Set During the Work: At site, maintain not less than one complete set of Drawings
as a Field Record Set. Record by showing depth and dimensioning horizontally from two
permanent points of reference, building corners, sidewalk, or road intersections, etc., the
location of the following items:
a. Connection to existing water lines.
b. Connection to existing electrical power.
I I
1201
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 84 00 - 3 Landscape Irrigation
c. Ball valves.
d. Control valves.
e. Quick coupling valves.
f. Routing of mainline (pressurized line).
g. Routing of control wiring.
h. Items specified under Division 1 or as directed by the Architect.
C. Final Record Drawings
1. Prior to substantial completion, the Architect will order for the Contractor, at the
Contractor's expense, one complete set of reverse-reading, reproducible Mylar
transparencies.
2. The Contractor shall transfer recorded changes in the work indicated on the field set to
the reproducible set, neatly and clearly, technically correct, and drafted in ink by a skilled
draftsman.
3. On or before the date of the final inspection, the Contractor shall deliver the corrected
and completed reproducible plans to the Architect with a transmittal containing the date,
project title and number, Contractor's name, address, and authorized signature.
4. Delivery of the reproducible plans will not relieve the Contractor of the responsibility of
furnishing required information that may be omitted from the prints.
D. Controller Charts
1. Record Drawings shall be approved by the Architect before controller charts are
prepared.
2. Provide one controller chart for each controller supplied. The chart shall show the area
controlled by the automatic controller and shall be the maximum size that the controller
door will allow.
3. The chart shall be a reduced drawing of the actual as-built system. However, in the event
the controller sequence is not legible when the drawing is reduced, it shall be enlarged to
a size that will be readable when reduced.
4. The chart shall be a black and white bond print and a different color highlighter shall be
used to indicate the area of coverage for each station.
5. When completed and approved, the chart shall be hermetically laminated between two
pieces of plastic, each piece being minimum 10 mils thick.
6. These charts shall be completed and approved prior to final inspection of the irrigation
system.
E. Operation and Maintenance Manuals
1. Prepare and deliver to Owner within 10 days prior to completion, three hardcover ring
binders with the following in each:
1202
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 84 00 - 4 Landscape Irrigation
a. Index
b. Guarantee statement.
c. Address and phone number of Contractor
d. Catalog and parts sheets on every material and equipment installed under this
Contract with name, address and phone numbers of manufacturers and local
representatives.
e. 11” x 17” color copy of controller charts (not laminated).
f. Complete operating and maintenance instructions on all major equipment and
include maintenance schedules for all major equipment.
2. In addition to the above-mentioned maintenance manuals, provide the Owner's
maintenance personnel with instructions for major equipment and show evidence in
writing to the Architect at the conclusion of the project that this service has been
rendered.
F. Extra Equipment to be Furnished
1. Furnish extra materials described below (match products installed), packaged with
protective covering for storage and identified with labels describing contents.
a. Special Tools: Two sets of special tools required for removal, disassembling, and
adjusting each type of sprinkler, drip emitter, and valve on the project.
b. Controller Keys: Two keys for each automatic controller.
2. The above-described equipment shall be turned over to the Owner at the conclusion of
the project. Before final inspection can occur, evidence that the Owner has received
material must be shown to Architect.
1.4 PRODUCT DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Handling of PVC Pipe and Fittings: The Contractor is cautioned to exercise care in handling,
loading, unloading, and storing of PVC pipe and fittings.
1. All PVC pipes shall be transported in a vehicle which allows the length of pipe to lie flat
so as not to subject it to undue bending or concentrated external load at any point.
2. Do not drop PVC pipe on hard surfaces.
3. Any section of pipe that has been dented or damaged is to be discarded and replaced at
the contractor’s expense.
4. If damaged material is installed, it shall be replaced with new material.
1.5 WARRANTY
A. The contractor shall fully warrant and agree to replace any poor, inadequate or defective
materials and workmanship for one year from the date of acceptance of completed Irrigation
System. The Architect shall be the sole judge of the acceptability of materials or workmanship.
1203
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 84 00 - 5 Landscape Irrigation
B. Replacement: Materials found to be defective, missing or in poor condition during the warranty
period shall be replaced immediately. The Architect shall be the sole judge as to the condition
of material. Material to be replaced during the warranty period shall be replaced by the
Contractor within 15 days of written notification by Owner.
1.6 PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
A. Handling Location of Bubblers and Specialties: Design location is approximate. Make minor
adjustments necessary to avoid plantings and obstructions such as signs and light standards.
Notify City prior to making adjustments.
B. Explanation of Drawings
1. Drawings are diagrammatic and indicative of the work to be installed. All offsets, fittings,
sleeves, etc., which may be required, may not be indicated. Carefully investigate the
structural and finished conditions affecting all of the work and plan the work, accordingly,
furnishing such fittings, etc., as may be required to meet such conditions. The work shall
be installed in such a manner as to avoid conflicts between irrigation systems, planting,
architectural features, drainage systems, or hardscape construction.
2. Do not install the irrigation system as shown on the Drawings when it is obvious in the
field that obstructions, grade differences, or discrepancies in area dimensions exist that
might not have been considered in the engineering.
a. Any discrepancy in Drawings shall be brought to the attention of the Architect.
Contractor assumes full responsibility for work installed without clarification.
3. The final location and exact positioning of automatic controllers, backflow prevention
assemblies, gate valves, pressure regulators, or other equipment shall be approved by
the Owner's authorized representative prior to installation.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 GENERAL
A. Use only new materials of brands and types noted on the Drawings, as specified herein, or
approved equivalents.
2.2 PIPE
A. Non-pressure lines 3/4 inch in diameter and larger downstream of the remote control valve
shall be SCH 40 solvent weld PVC conforming to ASTM D1785.Bar Stock: ASTM A276, Type
302 or 304.
2.3 POLY VINYL CHLORIDE (PVC) PIPES, TUBES & FITTINGS
A. PVC pipe, tubes & fittings shall be of the schedule rating designated on the contract Drawings.
B. PVC pipe shall continuously bear the following markings.
1. Nominal pipe size.
2. PVC Schedule or class.
3. Type of plastic material in standard code
1204
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 84 00 - 6 Landscape Irrigation
4. Pressure rating in psi
5. SDR for class rated pipe
6. ASTM designation
7. National Sanitation Foundation (NSF) approval.
8. Manufacturer's name or trademark
9. Date of extrusion.
C. Schedule rated PVC Pipe shall be made from NSF approved Type 1, Grade I, PVC compound
conforming to ASTM D-1785.
D. PVC Fittings, Solvent and Primer.
1. For schedule rated pipe, fittings shall correspond to the same schedule rating.
2. For class rated pipe, fittings shall be Schedule 40.
3. PVC solvent-weld fittings shall be Type 1, Grade I, NSF approved, conforming to ASTM
test procedure D-2466.
4. All fittings shall bear the manufacturer's name or trademark, material designation, size,
applicable IPS schedule and NSF seal of approval.
5. Solvent cement and primer for PVC solvent-weld pipe and fittings shall be of the type
prescribed by the pipe manufacturer. Installation methods shall be according to ASTM D-
2885.Extruded Bars and Shapes: ASTM B221, alloy 6061-T6 or 6063-T6 for bearing bars
of gratings and shapes and 6061-T6 for grating cross bars.
2.4 BRASS PIPE AND FITTINGS
A. Where indicated on the Drawings or required by Code, use red brass screwed pipe
conforming to ASTM B43.
B. B. Fittings shall be red brass.
2.5 VALVES
A. Isolation Valves.
1. Shall be as called out on Drawings and details.
2. Brass and stainless steel, fully ported ball valves
3. 150 PSI at 73°
B. Automatic Electric Control Valves.
1. Shall be as called out on Drawings and details.
2. Normally closed, diaphragm type with manual flow adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac
solenoid.
1205
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 84 00 - 7 Landscape Irrigation
3. Automatic control valve shall have a brass or bronze body and bonnet.
C. Master Control Valve.
1. Shall be as called out on Drawings and details.
2. Normally closed, diaphragm type with manual flow adjustment, and operated by 24-V ac
solenoid.
3. Master control valve shall have a brass or bronze body and bonnet.
D. Pressure Reducing Valve and Wye Strainer.
1. The pressure reducing valve shall be Wilkins Model #500HLR with wye strainer and bronze
body. Size and pressure setting shall be as noted on irrigation Drawings.
2. Wye strainer used alone shall be Wilkins Model #YBXL with bronze body. Size shall be as
noted on irrigation Drawings.
E. Flow Sensor
1. Shall be as called out on Drawings and details.
2. Brass bodied, female threaded ends.
F. Drip Flush Valve.
1. Shall be as called out on Drawings and details.
2. Sch. 40 PVC bodied, female slip ends.
G. Check Valves.
1. Shall be as called out on Drawings and details.
2. Brass bodied, female threaded ends.
2.6 CONTROL WIRING
A. Connections between the automatic controllers and the electric control valves shall be made
with #14 THHN - UF 600-volt stranded copper wire manufactured for irrigation system use.
Pilot wires shall be red.
B. Common wires shall be white.
C. Install in accordance with valve manufacturer's specifications and wire chart. In no case shall
wire size be less than #14.
D. Install control wires inside steel conduit, sweeps and junction boxes between the controller
and the control valves.
E. All control wire splices shall be made with waterproof wire connectors. Manufacturers: 3M
DBY/R-6 or approved equal.
F. All electrical work shall conform to local codes and ordinances. Above ground wires shall be
conduit enclosed.
1206
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 84 00 - 8 Landscape Irrigation
2.7 AUTOMATIC CONTROLLERS
A. Shall be of the size and type shown on the Drawings.
B. Controller shall be weather based, with a satellite service providing daily evapotranspiration
data to allow for the self-adjusting of the programming.
C. Automatic controllers shall be as indicated on the drawings complete with hookup to electrical
sources.
D. All controllers shall be enclosed in a vandal-resistant, waterproof enclosure.
E. Controller shall be connected to a rain sensor as shown on the Drawings.
2.8 VALVE BOXES
A. Plastic Valve Boxes (to be used when valve is in planting areas).
1. For Drip System Flush valve, use.
a. 10" diameter x 10" deep round box, Carson #910-4B or approved equivalent.
b. Use min 10" diameter extensions to achieve proper depth below assembly.
c. Lid shall be T-form, bolt-down type.
d. Label: heat brand lid with the text “FV” in 1” tall block letters.
2. For Drip System Air Relief Valves, use.
a. 8" diameter x 10" deep round box, Carson #809 or approved equivalent.
b. Label: heat brand lid with the text “ARV” in 1” tall block letters.
3. Brand boxes with a commercially produced branding iron, as manufactured by BrandNew
Industries, Inc. (800) 964-8251, or equal.
2.9 BUBBLER HEADS
A. All sprinkler heads shall be of the same size, type and deliver the same rate of precipitation
with the diameter (or radius) of throw, pressure, and discharge as shown on the plans and/or
specified in these Specifications.
B. Bubbler heads shall be installed on pop-up bodies. Anti-drain valves shall be installed as
required for elimination of low head drainage.
C. Riser nipples and swing joints for all sprinkler heads shall be the same size as the riser
opening in the sprinkler body.
1. All sprinkler heads of the same type shall be of the same manufacturer.
2.10 DRIP IRRIGATION EQUIPMENT
A. Drip emitters and inline drip tubing shall be of the size and type shown on the Drawings.
1207
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 84 00 - 9 Landscape Irrigation
B. B. Single outlet emitters shall be a self-flushing and pressure compensating type. Emitter
bodies shall be constructed of durable UV resistant plastic and have a self-piercing barb on
the inlet side of the emitter. Regulating diaphragms shall be constructed of silicone rubber.
C. C. Air / vacuum relief valve: Rainbird ARV050.
D. D. Screen filters shall be manufactured by Hunter with pressure rating of at least 115 psi.
Disc type filter element shall be minimum 150 mesh screen equivalent. Screen filters shall
have glass reinforced nylon bodies and threaded male connections.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 INSPECTION OF EXISTING SITE CONDITIONS
A. Before any work begins, a conference shall be held with the Owner's authorized
representative and the Contractor regarding general requirements for the project.
B. It is the responsibility of the Contractor to familiarize himself with future locations of walls,
paving, grade differences, etc. He shall coordinate his work with the General Contractor and
other Sub-Contractors for the location and installation of pipe sleeves through walls, footings,
under paving, etc., and so that there is no difficulty in the subsequent planting of trees or
shrubs which are shown in the plans.
C. Exercise extreme care in excavating and working near existing utilities. The contractor shall be
responsible for damage to utilities that are caused by his operation or neglect. Check existing
utilities Drawings for existing utility locations. Before excavating, call Underground Service
Alert, (800) 422-4133
D. The contractor shall not willfully install the irrigation system as shown on the Drawings when it
is obvious in the field those obstructions, grade differences, or differences in dimensions of
areas exist that might not have been considered in the engineering.
1. Such obstructions or differences shall be brought to the attention of the Owner's
authorized representative.
2. In the event this notification is not performed, the Contractor shall assume full
responsibility for any revisions necessary.
E. The contractor shall carefully check all grades to satisfy himself that he may safely proceed
before starting work on the sprinkler irrigation system.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Physical Layout: Prior to installation, the Contractor shall stake out all pressure supply lines,
routing, and location of sprinkler heads. All layouts shall be approved by Architect prior to
installation.
3.3 WATER SUPPLY
A. The Contractor shall verify static pressure on site prior to commencement of any work.
B. The system design is based upon the minimum operating pressure and maximum flow
demand shown on the Drawings.
1208
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 84 00 - 10 Landscape Irrigation
1. Contractor shall report any difference between the water pressure shown on the
Drawings and the actual pressure at the point of connection to the Owner's authorized
representative.
C. All work required for proper point of connection and laying of irrigation supply line shall be in
accordance with all applicable codes and ordinances.
D. Connections shall be made at approximate locations as shown on Drawings. The contractor is
responsible for minor changes caused by actual site conditions.
3.4 ELECTRICAL SUPPLY
A. Electrical connections for automatic controller shall be made to electrical points of connection
at approximate locations as shown on Drawings. The contractor is responsible for minor
changes caused by actual site conditions.
3.5 INSTALLATION
A. Trenching
1. Dig trenches straight and support pipe continuously on bottom of trench. Lay pipe to even
grade. Trenching excavation shall follow layout indicated on Drawings and as noted.
2. Provide a minimum cover of 12" for all non-pressure lines.
3. Provide a minimum cover of 18” for all pressure lines.
4. Provide a minimum cover of 18” minimum for all non-pressure lines under paved areas.
5. Provide a minimum cover of 24” minimum for all pressure lines under paved areas.
B. Backfilling - General
1. The trenches shall not be backfilled until all required tests are performed. Trenches shall
be carefully backfilled with the excavated materials approved for backfilling, consisting of
earth, loam, sandy clay, sand or other approved materials, free from large clods of earth
or stones. Backfill shall be mechanically compacted in landscaped areas to a dry density
equivalent to adjacent undisturbed soil in planting areas. Backfill will conform to adjacent
grades without dips, sunken areas, humps, or other surface irregularities.
2. A fine granular material backfill will be initially placed on all lines. No foreign matter larger
than 1/2" in size will be permitted in the initial backfill.
3. Flooding of trenches will be permitted only with approval of the Architect.
4. Under no circumstances shall truck wheels be used to compact soil.
5. Provide sand backfill a minimum of 6" over and under all piping routed under paving
areas.
6. If settlement occurs and subsequent adjustments in pipe, valves, bubbler heads, planting,
paving or other construction are necessary, the Contractor shall make all required
adjustments without cost to the Owner.
1209
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 84 00 - 11 Landscape Irrigation
C. Trenching and Backfill under Paving
1. Trenches located under areas where paving, asphaltic concrete or concrete will be
installed shall be backfilled with sand (a layer three inches below the pipe and three
inches above the pipe) and compacted to 90% compaction, using manual or mechanical
tamping devices. Trenches for piping shall be compacted to equal the compaction of the
existing adjacent undisturbed soil and shall be left in a firm unyielding condition. All
trenches shall be left flush with the adjoining grade. The contractor shall set in place, cap,
and pressure test all piping under paving prior to the paving work.
2. Generally, piping under existing walks is done by jacking, boring or hydraulic driving, but
where any cutting or breaking of sidewalks and/or concrete is necessary, it shall be done
and re-placed by the Contractor as part of the contract cost. Permission to cut or break
sidewalks and/or concrete shall be obtained from the Architect. No hydraulic driving will
be permitted under concrete paving. Where cutting and breaking has occurred, the entire
concrete panel from joint-to-joint shall be replaced and not just a “patch”.
3. Provide a minimum cover of 24" between the top of the pipe and the bottom of the
aggregate base for all pressure and non-pressure piping installed under asphaltic
concrete paving.
D. Assemblies
1. Routing of sprinkler irrigation lines as indicated on the Drawings is diagrammatic. Install
lines and various assemblies to conform to the details shown on Drawings.
2. Perform all directional changes using 45-degree elbows. No 90-degree elbows will be
permitted without approval of Architect.
3. Install all assemblies in accordance with respective details. In absence of detail Drawings
or Specifications pertaining to specific items required to complete work, perform such
work in accordance with best standard practice with prior approval of Architect.
4. PVC pipe and fittings shall be thoroughly cleaned of dirt, dust, and moisture before
installation. Installation and solvent-welding methods shall be as recommended by the
pipe and fitting manufacturer.
5. On PVC to metal connections, the Contractor shall work the metal connections first.
Teflon tape or approved equivalent shall be used on all threaded PVC-to-PVC joints, and
on all threaded PVC-to-metal joints. Light wrench pressure is all that is required. Where
threaded PVC connections are required, use threaded PVC adapters into which the pipe
may be welded.
E. Line Clearance: All lines shall have a minimum clearance of six inches from each other and
from lines of other trades. Parallel lines shall not be in-stalled directly over one another.
F. Automatic Controller
1. Install as per manufacturer's instructions. Remote control valves shall be connected to
the controller in numerical sequence shown on the Drawings.
2. The Architect shall approve the final location of automatic controllers. Unless otherwise
noted on the plans, the 120-volt electrical power to the automatic controller location to be
furnished by others. The final electrical hookup shall be the responsibility of the irrigation
1210
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 84 00 - 12 Landscape Irrigation
Contractor. All electrical work shall conform to local codes, ordinances, and governing
authorities having jurisdiction.
3. Install a line voltage surge device (intermatic ag2401c3/ or square d sdsa1175) for 120v
in a junction box prior to controller.
4. Grounding for the irrigation controller is to be installed per the manufacturer's
specifications and per the American Society of Irrigation Consultants guideline 100-2002
for earth grounding electronic equipment in irrigation systems found at
www.asic.org/design_guides.aspx. For technical support regarding the irrigation
controller or grounding please contact the manufacturer’s technical services.
5. A rain sensor shall be installed on the building eave adjacent to the controller. The
sensor shall be mounted in a location in full sun and open to rainfall. The sensor shall be
no more than 200' from wireless receiver. mount wireless receiver on or adjacent to the
irrigation controller.
G. Control Wiring
1. An expansion curl shall be provided within three feet of each wire connection.
2. A minimum of one additional blank remote control valve station wire shall be run from the
controller to the furthest point of each separate leg of the mainline. Terminate wire in
nearest valve box and tag "blank" in valve box and in controller.
3. Wiring shall occupy the same trench and shall be installed along the same route as the
pressure supply lines wherever possible.
4. Where more than one wire is placed in a trench, the wiring shall be taped together at
intervals of 12 feet.
5. All connections shall be of an approved type and shall occur in a valve box. Provide an
18-inch service loop at each connection.
6. An expansion loop of 12 inches shall be provided at each wire connection and/ or
directional turn, and one of 24 inches shall be provided at each remote-control valve.
7. A continuous run of wire shall be used between the controller and each remote-control
valve. Under no circumstances shall splices be used without prior approval.
8. Wire running from controller to control valves shall be AWG-UF 600V, No. 14 minimum,
solid core, single conductor copper wire, and style Br. (direct burial type).
9. Spare control wires shall be run to valve box locations as shown on the plans. Provide an
18-inch expansion loop at valve box.
H. Remote Control Valves: Install where shown on Drawings and details.
I. Low Head Drainage: It is the intention of the design to indicate check valves and/or low head
drain valves to prevent water from running out of sprinkler heads when systems are shut off.
The Contractor shall include as part of the cost of his work installing any necessary check
valves and/or low head drain valves which are necessary and may not be shown on the plans.
J. Flushing of System
1211
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 84 00 - 13 Landscape Irrigation
1. After all the new sprinkler pipe lines and risers are in place and connected, and prior to
installation of sprinkler heads, the control valves shall be opened and full head of water
used to flush out the system.
2. Sprinkler heads shall be installed only after flushing of the system has been
accomplished to the complete satisfaction of the Architect.
K. Bubbler Heads
1. Install the bubbler heads as designated on the Drawings and details. Bubbler heads to
be installed in this work shall be equivalent in all respects to those itemized.
2. Spacing of heads shall not exceed the maximum indicated on the Drawings. In no case
shall the spacing exceed the maxi-mum recommended.
L. Drip Irrigation installation
1. Install control valves and rigid PVC distribution lines prior to planting operations.
2. Drip tubing shall be installed in parallel rows not to exceed the spacing indicated on the
Drawings and details. The perimeter row of tubing in all planters shall be installed a
maximum of 4” from the edge of the planter, all interior rows shall be evenly spaced at a
distance not exceeding 16” on center. Closer spacing of the tubing may be required in
some or all planters due to planter size.
3. Flush and adjust systems, eliminate leaks, operate for a one-hour period, then re-check
and re-adjust systems.
4. Complete planting and mulching operations.
3.6 TEMPORARY REPAIRS
A. The Owner reserves the right to make temporary repairs as necessary to keep the sprinkler
system equipment in operating condition. The exercise of this right by the builder/developer
shall not relieve the Contractor of his responsibilities under the terms of the guarantee as
herein specified.
3.7 FIELD QUALITY CONTROL
A. Adjustment of the System
1. The Contractor shall flush and adjust all sprinkler heads for optimum performance and to
prevent over-spray onto walks, roadways, and buildings.
2. If it is determined that adjustment in the irrigation equipment will provide proper and more
adequate coverage, the Contractor shall make such adjustments prior to planting.
Adjustments may also include changes in nozzle size and degrees of arc as required.
3. When the radius of any bubbler head requires downward adjustment to better suit actual
conditions, the Contractor shall install pressure-compensating screens by the same
manufacturer as the sprinkler nozzle, for flow and radius control.
4. The Contractor shall lower raised sprinkler heads within 10 days after notification by
Owner.
1212
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 84 00 - 14 Landscape Irrigation
5. All bubbler heads shall be set perpendicular to finished grades unless otherwise
designated on the plans.
3.8 CLEAN-UP
A. Cleanup shall be made as each portion of work progresses.
1. Refuse and excess dirt shall be removed from the site.
2. All walks and paving shall be swept or washed down.
3. Any damage sustained on the work of others shall be repaired to original conditions
acceptable to the Owner and Architect.
B. Cleanup shall be performed at the end of each working day, and a maximum cleanup effort
shall be made for each weekend by the Contractor in a manner satisfactory to the Owner.
3.9 FINAL OBSERVATION PRIOR TO ACCEPTANCE
A. The Contractor shall operate each system in its entirety for the Architect at time of final
observation. Any items deemed not acceptable shall be reworked at the contractor’s expense
and must be to the complete satisfaction of the Architect.
B. The Contractor shall show evidence to the Architect that the Owner has received all
accessories, extra parts, charts, record Drawings, and equipment as required before final
observation can occur.
3.10 OBSERVATION SCHEDULE
A. The contractor shall be responsible for notifying the Architect in advance of the following
observations according to the time indicated.
1. Pre-job Conference - Seven days.
2. Lateral line and bubbler installation - 48 hours.
3. Final observation - Seven days.
B. When inspections have been conducted by someone other than the Architect, show evidence
of when and by whom these inspections were made.
C. No observation shall commence without adequate preparation or as-built Drawings. In the
event the Contractor calls for an observation without as-built Drawings without completing
previously noted corrections, or without preparing the system for observations, he shall be
responsible for reimbursing the Architect at the hourly rate in effect at the time the observation
portal-to-portal (plus transportation costs) for the inconvenience. No further inspections will be
scheduled until this charge has been paid.
END OF SECTION
1213
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 93 00 - 1 LANDSCAPE PLANTING
SECTION 32 93 00
LANDSCAPE PLANTING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. This Section includes the supplying and installation of the following:
1. Trees.
2. Shrubs.
B. Related Sections:
1. Section 01 56 39 - "Temporary Tree and Plant Protection"
2. Section 32 84 00 - “Landscape Irrigation”
1.2 DEFINITIONS
A. Container-Grown Stock: Healthy, vigorous, well-rooted exterior plants grown in a container
with well-established root system reaching sides of container and maintaining a firm ball
when removed from container. Container shall be rigid enough to hold ball shape and
protect root mass during shipping and be sized according to ANSI Z60.1 for kind, type, and
size of exterior plant required.
B. Finish Grade: Elevation of finished surface of planting soil.
C. Planting Soil: Native topsoil, or surface soil modified to become topsoil; mixed with soil
amendments.
D. Sub-grade: Surface or elevation of subsoil remaining after completing excavation.
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: For each type of product indicated.
B. Product Certificates: For each type of manufactured product, signed by product
manufacturer, and complying with the following:
1. Manufacturer's certified analysis for standard products.
2. Analysis of other materials by a recognized laboratory made according to methods
established by the Association of Official Analytical Chemists, where applicable.
C. Qualification Data: For landscape Installer.
D. Material Test Reports: For existing surface soil.
1214
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 93 00 - 2 LANDSCAPE PLANTING
E. Planting Schedule: Indicating anticipated planting dates for exterior plants.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Installer Qualifications: A qualified landscape installer whose work has resulted in the
successful establishment of exterior plants. The installer shall have a valid contractor C-27
license.
1. Installer's Field Supervision: Require Installer to maintain an experienced full-time
supervisor on Project site when exterior planting is in progress.
B. Soil-Testing Laboratory Qualifications: An independent laboratory, recognized by the State
Department of Agriculture, with the experience and capability to conduct the testing
indicated and that specializes in types of tests to be performed.
C. Topsoil Analysis: Furnish agronomic and MWELO soil analysis by a qualified soil-testing
laboratory stating percentages of organic matter; gradation of sand, silt, and clay content;
pH; and mineral and plant-nutrient content of topsoil.
1. Report suitability of topsoil for plant growth. The state recommended quantities of
nitrogen, phosphorus, and potash nutrients and soil amendments to be added to
produce satisfactory topsoil.
2. Apply appropriate amendments based on soil test results with approval by the
owner’s authorized representative.
D. Provide quality, size, genus, species, and variety of exterior plants indicated, complying
with applicable requirements in ANSI Z60.1, "American Standard for Nursery Stock."
E. Tree and Shrub Measurements: Measure according to ANSI Z60.1 with branches and
trunks or canes in their normal position. Do not prune to obtain required sizes.
F. Observation: City authorized representatives may observe trees and shrubs at site before
planting for compliance with requirements for genus, species, variety, size, and quality.
The city authorized representative retains right to observe trees and shrubs further for size
and condition of balls and root systems, insects, injuries, and latent defects and to reject
unsatisfactory or defective material at any time during progress of work. Remove rejected
trees or shrubs immediately from Project site.
1. Notify Owner’s authorized representative of planting materials seven days in advance
of delivery to site.
1.5 DELIVERY, STORAGE, AND HANDLING
A. Do not prune trees and shrubs before delivery, except as approved by the city authorized
representative. Protect bark, branches, and root systems from sunscald, drying, sweating,
whipping, and other handling and tying damage. Do not bend or bind-tie trees or shrubs in
such a manner as to destroy their natural shape. Provide protective covering of exterior
plants during delivery. Do not drop exterior plants during delivery.
B. Handle planting stock by root ball, container, or box.
1215
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 93 00 - 3 LANDSCAPE PLANTING
C. Deliver exterior plants after preparations for planting have been completed and install
immediately. If planting is delayed more than six hours after delivery, set exterior plants
trees in shade, protect from weather and mechanical damage, and keep roots moist.
1. Do not remove container-grown stock from containers before time of planting.
2. Water root systems of exterior plants stored on-site with a fine-mist spray. Water as
often as necessary to maintain root systems in a moist condition.
1.6 COORDINATION
A. Weather Limitations: Proceed with planting only when existing and forecasted weather
conditions permit.
1.7 WARRANTY
A. Special Warranty: Warrant the following exterior plants, for the warranty period indicated,
against defects including death and unsatisfactory growth, except for defects resulting from
lack of adequate maintenance, neglect, or abuse by Owner, or incidents that are beyond
Contractor's control.
1. Warranty Period for Trees and 5-gallon Shrubs: One year from date of Substantial
Completion.
2. Remove dead exterior plants immediately. Replace immediately unless required to
plant in the succeeding planting season.
3. Replace exterior plants that are more than 25 percent dead or in an unhealthy
condition at end of warranty period.
4. A limit of one replacement for each exterior plant will be required, except for losses or
replacements due to failure to comply with requirements.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 TREE AND SHRUB MATERIAL
A. General: Furnish nursery-grown trees and shrubs complying with ANSI Z60.1, with healthy
root systems developed by transplanting or root pruning. Provide well-shaped, fully
branched, healthy, vigorous stock free of disease, insects, eggs, larvae, and defects such
as knots, sunscald, injuries, abrasions, and disfigurement.
B. Grade: Provide trees and shrubs of sizes and grades complying with ANSI Z60.1 for type
of trees and shrubs required. Trees and shrubs of a larger size may be used if acceptable
to City authorized representative, with a proportionate increase in size of roots or rootballs.
C. If formal arrangements for consecutive order of trees or shrubs are shown, select stock for
uniform height and spread.
1216
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 93 00 - 4 LANDSCAPE PLANTING
2.2 ORGANIC SOIL AMENDMENTS
A. Wood Derivatives: Decomposed, nitrogen-treated sawdust, ground bark, or wood waste; of
uniform texture, free of chips, stones, sticks, soil, or toxic materials.
2.3 FERTILIZER
A. Commercial Fertilizer: Commercial-grade complete fertilizer of neutral character, consisting
of fast- and slow-release nitrogen, 50 percent derived from natural organic sources of urea
formaldehyde, phosphorous, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in
soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.
B. Slow-Release Fertilizer: Granular or pelleted fertilizer consisting of 50 percent water-
insoluble nitrogen, phosphorus, and potassium in the following composition:
1. Composition: Nitrogen, phosphorous, and potassium in amounts recommended in
soil reports from a qualified soil-testing agency.
2.4 MULCHES
A. Organic Mulch: Free from deleterious materials and suitable as a top dressing of trees and
shrubs, consisting of one of the following:
1. Type: Shredded Bark Mulch. Reference Section 32 93 00 Part 2.1.
2.5 STAKES AND GUYS
A. Upright Stakes: Sound, new pressure-preservative-treated lodge pole, free of holes, cross
grain, and other defects, 2-inch diameter by length indicated, pointed at one end.
B. Rubber Tree Ties: Per Detail or approved equal.
2.6 PLANTING SOIL MIX
A. Planting Soil Mix: Mix topsoil with the following soil amendments and fertilizers in the
following quantities:
1. Ratio of Loose Wood Derivatives to Topsoil by Volume: 1:4.
2. Weight of Commercial Fertilizer per 1000 Sq. Ft.: 10 lbs.
1217
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 93 00 - 5 LANDSCAPE PLANTING
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 EXAMINATION
A. Examine areas to receive exterior plants for compliance with requirements and conditions
affecting installation and performance. Proceed with installation only after unsatisfactory
conditions have been corrected.
3.2 PREPARATION
A. Protect structures, utilities, sidewalks, pavements, and other facilities, and lawns and
existing exterior plants from damage caused by planting operations.
B. Provide erosion-control measures to prevent erosion or displacement of soils and discharge
of soil-bearing water runoff or airborne dust to adjacent properties and walkways.
C. Lay out individual tree and shrub locations and areas for multiple exterior plantings.
3.3 PLANTING BED ESTABLISHMENT
A. Loosen sub-grade of planting beds to a minimum depth of 4 inches. Remove stones larger
than 2 inches in any dimension and sticks, roots, rubbish, and other extraneous matter and
legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
1. Spread amendments and fertilizer onto surface, and thoroughly incorporate into the
top 6” depth of soil by roto-till, or equal.
B. Finish Grading: Grade planting beds to a smooth, uniform surface plane with loose,
uniformly fine texture. Roll and rake, remove ridges, and fill depressions to meet finish
grades.
C. Restore planting beds if eroded or otherwise disturbed after finish grading and before
planting.
3.4 TREE AND SHRUB EXCAVATION
A. Pits and Trenches: Excavate circular pits with sides sloped inward. Trim base leaving
center area raised slightly to support root ball and assist in drainage. Do not further disturb
base. Scarify sides of plant pit smeared or smoothed during excavation.
1. Excavate approximately three times as wide as ball diameter for container-grown
stock.
B. Subsoil removed from excavations may be used as backfill.
C. Obstructions: Notify City authorized representative if unexpected rock or obstructions
detrimental to trees or shrubs are encountered in excavations.
1218
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 93 00 - 6 LANDSCAPE PLANTING
D. Drainage: Notify City authorized representative if subsoil conditions evidence unexpected
water seepage or retention in tree or shrub pits.
3.5 TREE PLANTING
A. Set container-grown stock plumb and in center of pit or trench with top of root ball 1 inch
above adjacent finish grades.
1. Carefully remove root ball from container without damaging root ball or plant.
2. Place planting soil mix around root ball in layers, tamping to settle mix and eliminate
voids and air pockets. When pit is approximately one-half backfilled, water
thoroughly before placing remainder of backfill. Repeat watering until no more water
is absorbed. Water again after placing and tamping the final layer of planting soil mix.
B. Organic Mulching: Apply 3-inch average thickness of organic mulch extending 12 inches
beyond edge of planting pit or trench. Do not place mulch within 3 inches of trunks or
stems.
3.6 SHRUB PLANTING
A. Shrub installation.
1. Positioning: After removing plant from container, scarify side of root ball to prevent
formation of girdling roots and position plant in planting pit.
2. Backfilling: Use planting soil mixed to backfill plant pits. Set each plant plumb and
brace rigidly in position until planting soil has been tamped solidly around the ball and
roots. When plant pits have been backfilled approximately two-thirds (2/3) full, water
thoroughly and saturate root ball before installing remainder of the backfill mix,
eliminating all air pockets. Install remainder of mix to top of pit.
3. Where fertilizers are recommended, use a slow-release fertilizer. Place evenly
distributed in plant pits when backfilled two-thirds (2/3) to finish grade according to
the schedule.
4. Adjustment: Adjust plants to that after full settlement has occurred; the natural grade
at the base of the plants is one (1) inch above the adjacent planting finish grade.
B. Watering Basin: Form saucer with four (4) inches high berm centered around shrub pits
twelve (12) inches wider than ball diameter.
C. Watering: Water all plants immediately after planting.
D. Labels: Remove all nursery-type plant labels from plants.
3.7 STAKING
A. Upright Staking and Tying: Stake all single trunk trees. Use a minimum of 2 stakes of
length required to penetrate at least 18 inches below bottom of backfilled excavation and to
extend at least 72 inches above grade. Set vertical stakes and space to avoid penetrating
root balls or root masses. Support trees with two rubber ties at contact points with tree
trunk. Allow enough slack to avoid rigid restraint of tree.
1219
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 93 00 - 7 LANDSCAPE PLANTING
3.8 WEED ABATEMENT
A. Weed Abatement Prior to Planting:
1. Water all areas thoroughly and uniformly. Continue watering at the frequency and
duration necessary to germinate all residual week seeds, and as directed by the
Agency’s Authorized Representative.
2. Unless otherwise directed, maintain watering for not less than three (3) weeks.
3. When perennial weeds appear, apply approved contact herbicide over affected areas.
Apply in accord with manufacturer’s instructions.
4. When annual weeds appear, apply approved contact herbicide over affected areas.
Apply in accord with manufacturer’s instructions.
5. Do not water affected areas for a period of four (4) days minimum, following
application of contact herbicides.
6. Follow manufacturer’s instructions relating to time required for chemicals to effectively
destroy week growth.
7. Resume watering and continue for a second period of three (3) weeks.
a. A shorter watering period may be permitted by the Agency’s Authorized
Representative, as determined by project conditions.
8. Discontinue watering for one (1) day prior to a second application of herbicide
spraying.
a. Reapply straight contact herbicide in accord with manufacturer’s instructions.
b. Do not water treat areas for a period of four (4) days minimum following
application of herbicide.
c. Remove all desiccated weeds from the slopes to the finish grade.
3.9 PLANTER AREA MULCHING
A. Mulch surfaces of planting areas.
1. Organic Mulch: Apply 3-inch thickness of organic mulch, and finish level with adjacent
finish grades. Do not place mulch against plant stems or trunks. Do not bury any low-
lying branches or plant material in mulch.
3.10 CLEANUP AND PROTECTION
A. During exterior planting, keep adjacent pavings and construction clean and work area in an
orderly condition.
B. Protect exterior plants from damage due to landscape operations, operations by other
contractors and trades, and others. Maintain protection during installation and maintenance
periods. Treat, repair, or replace damaged exterior planting.
3.11 DISPOSAL
A. Disposal: Remove surplus soil and waste material, including excess subsoil, unsuitable
soil, trash, and debris, and legally dispose of them off Owner's property.
END OF SECTION
1220
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 93 01 - 1 Tree Pruning
SECTION 32 93 01
TREE PRUNING
PART 1 – GENERAL
1.1 GENERAL CONDITIONS
A. The Conditions of the Contract and Division 1 apply to this section as fully as if
repeated herein.
1.2 SUMMARY
A. Work Included: All labor, materials, equipment, and services necessary to
provide pruning of existing trees indicated to remain, or to be relocated and
disposing of waste materials off the worksite.
1. Remove dead, diseased, and injured limbs.
2. Balance canopy with root system distribution.
3. Reduce density of tree canopy as directed.
4. Root pruning.
B. Related Work:
1. Section 01 56 39 – Temporary Tree and Plant Protection
2. Section 31 11 00 – Site Clearing and Grubbing
3. Section 32 93 00 – Landscape Planting
1.3 SUBMITTALS
A. Comply with provisions of Section 01340 - SUBMITTALS of DIVISION 1 -
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS of these Specifications.
B. Make all submittal 30 calendar days prior to start of Work of this Section.
C. Submit in quintuplicate 5 complete lists of landscape materials and equipment,
including manufacturer's name and address, specific trade names, catalog
numbers, complete with illustrations and descriptive literature and clearly mark or
underline proposed items.
D. Disapprovals: Promptly resubmit for approval necessary data concerning a
substitution for a disapproved item.
E. Procurement List: Use the approved list of landscape materials and equipment
for procurement without deviation unless otherwise authorized in writing by the
Local City/County Jurisdiction.
1221
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 93 01 - 2 Tree Pruning
F. Certification: In addition to other required certifications, furnish a certificate with
each delivery of bulk material, stating its source, quantity, type of material
furnished and that such item or material conforms to specification requirements.
G. Bonds: Furnish a faithful performance bond in the amount specified in the
Contract Documents to cover the guarantees per Section 4.01.
1.4 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Workers: Use adequate numbers of skilled workers who are thoroughly trained
and experienced in the necessary crafts and who are familiar with the specified
requirements and the methods needed for proper performance of the Work of
this Section. Contractors shall have a licensed arborist present on site during
any root pruning.
B. Codes and Regulations: All materials and workmanship in this Section shall
comply with all applicable City, County, Federal and State Codes and
Regulations. The contractor will obtain and pay for all required permits. Deliver
all permits and certifications of inspection to the Local City/County Jurisdiction.
1.5 GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
A. Approvals by the local city/county jurisdiction:
1. All approvals on required submittals hereinafter specified.
2. All re-submittals requested by the Local City/County Jurisdiction
B. Inspection: Notify the local city/county jurisdiction at least 72 hours prior to time
of the following required inspections:
1. At the time of all tree pruning.
C. Existing Utilities and Plant Materials: Protect utilities and/or plant materials not
designated for removal or modification in place against damage resulting from
work of this Contract. Perform any removal and/or modifications only on
approval or instructions from the Local City/County Jurisdiction or in accordance
with applicable provisions noted or specified on the Contract Drawings or in other
sections of these Specifications.
D. Verifications of Dimensions and Quantities: Verify all scaled dimensions and
quantities prior to start of work. Plant quantities noted on the Contract Drawings
are for the convenience of the Contractor only and do not limit the Contractor to
those specific quantities. Furnish the quantities as may be necessary to do the
specific work. Promptly notify the architect of any discrepancies between the
Contract Drawings and Specifications and/or actual job-site conditions which
would affect the proper executions of the landscaping work. Do not work in
areas where such discrepancies occur until further instructed by the architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
1222
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 93 01 - 3 Tree Pruning
2.1 PRUNING PAINT
A. Waterproof, antiseptic, adhesive, elastic and free from kerosene, coal tar,
creosote and other substances harmful to plants. Do not use shellac.
2.2 FUNGICIDE AND INSECTICIDE
A. Selected by the Contractor, but approval by the Local City/County Jurisdiction via
submittal before application.
B. Inspect trees and surrounding areas for adverse conditions that may impede or
adversely affect the Work, such as, but not limited to, overhead wires, wind
conditions, and soundness and strength of tree. Notify the Local City/County
Jurisdiction or its designee of any such adverse conditions. Do not proceed with
pruning until the Local City/County Jurisdiction or its designee has been advised
of the correction of such conditions.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 PRUNING
A. Cut limbs and branches, as necessary, to healthy wood, in accordance with the
undercut, overcut, and flush-cut technique to reduce tree canopy density as
directed. Do not remove limbs of diameter greater than two inches unless
directed by the Local City/County Jurisdiction. Seal wounds larger than one inch
in diameter with tree wound dressing. Trim bruises back to sound bark and tight
cambium, and coat with tree wound dressing. Prune tree roots with cross-
section larger than one inch and which will remain exposed during excavation
operations. Cut exposed roots approximately three inches below elevation of
finish grade. Coat wounds with root wound dressing and wrap with wet root
wrap.
B. Engage a qualified arborist to recommend procedures to compensate for loss of
roots, such as pruning of branches and stimulation of root growth. Furnish
maintenance during the Contract period, and as recommended by the arborist
and accepted by the Local City/County Jurisdiction. Do not allow exposed roots
to dry out before permanent backfill is placed; either cover roots with earth or
pack with peat moss and wrap with burlap. Water, keep moist, and temporarily
support and protect roots from damage until they have been permanently
relocated and covered with backfill.
3.2 INSECTICIDE
A. Apply fungicide and insecticide if trees exhibit symptoms of being attacked.
Apply in accordance with the manufacturers' printed application instructions.
3.3 GUARANTEE
A. General: Guarantee the life of all trees for a period of one year from the date of
acceptance of the work.
1223
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 05/26/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
32 93 01 - 4 Tree Pruning
B. Deficiencies: Should any deficiencies develop within the specified guarantee
period, correct such deficiencies to the full satisfaction of the Local City/County
Jurisdiction without added expense to the city.
3.4 FINAL CLEAN-UP
A. Required: Upon completion of all landscape work and before final acceptance,
remove all tools, surplus materials, apparatus, debris, weeds and exterminate
rodents from the jobsite. leave the jobsite in a neat, clean condition, acceptable
to the City Inspector. Wash, clean and leave all paved areas without stains.
B. Use, storage and disposal of containers and equipment shall comply with
pertinent Federal, State, and local agency requirements.
END OF SECTION
1224
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 02/03/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
SECTION 32 01 17
ASPHALT PAVEMENT REPAIR
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.01 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Bituminous Surfacing Repair: Areas removed for utility trenches, heaved by tree roots,
cracked areas, protruding areas where pavement meets hard surfaces, depressed areas,
holes and areas around new structures, and raveled bituminous pavement.
2. Areas heaved by tree roots, cracked areas, holes and trenches, and areas around new
structures.
B. Related Sections:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 31 2200 - Grading.
3. Section 31 2313 - Excavation and Fill.
4. Section 31 2316 - Excavation and Fill for Paving.
5. Section 31 2326 - Base Course.
6. Section 32 0113 - Rolled Slurry Seal, Existing Pavement.
7. Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving.
8. Section 32 1313 - Site Concrete Work.
9. Section 32 1236 - Seal for Bituminous Surfacing.
1.02 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit Shop Drawings indicating areas to be repaired.
B. Product Data: Submit manufacturer’s technical data for materials and products.
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Base course materials: Section 31 2326 - Base Course.
B. Asphalt paving materials: Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving.
C. Seal materials: Section 32 1236 - Seal for Bituminous Surfacing.
D. Headers: Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving.
32 01 17 – 1 Asphalt Pavement Repair
1225
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 02/03/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
1.03 QUALITY ASSURANCE
B. Comply with Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, current edition.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
E. Base course materials: Section 31 2326 - Base Course.
F. Asphalt paving materials: Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving.
G. Seal materials: Section 32 1236 - Seal for Bituminous Surfacing.
H. Headers: Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving.
2.02 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
A. Provide materials and products of the class, grade or type indicated, conforming to relevant
provisions of Section 203 - Bituminous Materials of the latest Standard Specifications for Public
Works Construction.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01 PAVEMENT REMOVAL
A. Remove bituminous and concrete pavement in accordance with applicable provisions of Section
300 - Earthwork of the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.
B. Pavement Heaved By Roots: Remove pavement to limits of distortion and expose roots. Trim roots
to provide at least 12-inch clearance to pavement. Coordinate with OWNER’s Tree Trimming
Department for recommendations and approval prior to trimming roots.
C. Remove protruding bituminous surfaces flush with the surrounding grade using a suitable tool or
equipment so that adjacent finishes are not blackened.
D. Remove raveled and depressed bituminous pavement to limits indicated or required.
E. Saw cut existing improvements, trim holes and trenches in bituminous and concrete pavement to
permit mechanical hand tampers to compact the fill.
F. Remove broken concrete by saw cutting. If the required cut line is within 30 inches of a score or
joint line or edge, cut and remove to the score, joint line, or edge.
3.02 EXCAVATING, BACKFILLING AND COMPACTING
A. Conform to requirements in Section 31 2313 - Excavation and Fill; Section 31 2316 - Excavation
and Fill for Paving, as required.
32 01 17 – 2 Asphalt Pavement Repair
1226
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 02/03/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
B. Where subgrade or base is deemed to be unstable or otherwise unsuitable, excavate such materials
to firm earth, and replace with a required material. Install and compact fill materials in accordance
with the requirements of Section 31 2316 Excavation and Fill for Paving.
3.03 HEADERS
A. Install headers along edge of bituminous surfacing abutting turf, earth, or planting area, unless
indicated otherwise.
B. Install headers so the bottom surface has continuous bearing on solid grade. Where excavation for
headers is undercut, thoroughly tamp soil under the header. Compact backfill on both sides of
header to the density of the adjacent undisturbed grade.
C. Fasten headers in place with redwood or Douglas fir stakes of length necessary to extend into solid
earth a minimum of 12 inches. Stakes shall be of sound material, neatly pointed, driven vertically,
and securely nailed to headers. Space stakes, not to exceed 4 feet on centers with top of stakes
set one inch below top of header. Provide a minimum of two 12d galvanized common nails through
each stake.
D. Remove existing headers where new surfacing is installed adjacent to existing surfacing.
E. Install temporary headers at transverse joints of paving where continuous paving operations are not
maintained.
F. Provide additional stakes and devices as required to fasten headers.
3.04 BASE COURSE
A. Unless otherwise indicated, base course shall be crushed aggregate base, fine grade, 3 inches thick
or equal to thickness of the existing base, whichever is greater.
B. Fill grade and compact as specified in Section 31 2200 - Grading.
3.05 RESURFACING
A. Utility Trenches: Remove loose dirt and backfill with cement-sand slurry allowing for surfacing one
inch thicker than existing. Resurface flush with existing adjoining pavement installing the same type
of materials and section provided in existing improvements.
B. Other Areas: Other surface improvements damaged or removed shall be cut to a neat even line and
excavated one inch below the bottom of the existing pavement. Resurface by following the original
grades and installing the same type of materials provided in existing improvements.
C. Where bituminous surfacing abuts concrete, masonry, walks or paving, tamp joint smooth, if
necessary, as described above to obtain a uniformly even joint, true to line and grade. Tamp and
smooth materials before asphalt cools.
3.06 REPAIRING AND RESEALING EXISTING SURFACES
32 01 17 – 3 Asphalt Pavement Repair
1227
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 02/03/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
A. Preparation of Surfaces: Prior to filling cracks, clean existing bituminous surfacing of loose and
foreign materials and coat with a film of asphalt emulsion.
B. Repair of Existing Surfacing:
1. Fill cracks 1/2 inch wide and less with RS-1 emulsion and washed plaster sand or other
OEHS approved crack filler material. Cracks larger than ½ inch wide shall be filled with
Type F/Sheet Mix Asphalt Concrete as specified. Cracks shall be filled to the level of
adjacent surfacing.
2. Where low areas, holes, or depressions occur in existing surfacing, refer to Section 32 1216;
Asphalt Paving, Article 3.02. Use Type E/School Mix and feather edge joint flush to the level
of adjacent surfacing.
C. Testing: Flood test entire area in presence of the Project Inspector. Inspect area after waiting one
hour. Entire area tested shall be free of standing water or puddles in excess of 0.01 foot. Practical
field measurement: 0.01 foot = two quarters stacked.
D. Surface Seal: After surface has been repaired and tested, install seal coat over entire area indicated.
Surface seal shall be as specified in Section 32 1236 - Seal for Bituminous Surfacing.
3.07 CLEANING
A. Remove all stains on the Project site and adjacent properties caused by or attributed to the Work of
this section.
B. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
3.08 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
32 01 17 – 4 Asphalt Pavement Repair
1228
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
32 12 16 - 1 Asphalt Paving
SECTION 32 12 16
ASPHALT PAVING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Paving for parking areas.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 31 2200 - Grading.
4. Section 31 2326 - Base Course.
5. Section 32 1236 - Seal for Bituminous Surfacing.
6. Section 32 1313 - Site Concrete Work.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit site plan indicating extent of paving and accessories.
B. Product Data: Manufacturer’s technical data for materials and products.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with the following as a minimum requirement: Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.
1.4 PROJECT CONDITIONS
A. Information on Drawings or in soils report does not constitute a guarantee of accuracy or uniformity of soil conditions over the Project site.
B A copy of the soils report is available for examination in the office of the Architect during regular office hours of the Architect.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 BITUMINOUS MATERIALS
1229
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
32 12 16 - 2 Asphalt Paving
A. Provide materials of the class, grade, or type indicated on the Drawings,
conforming to relevant provisions of Section 203 - Bituminous Materials of the
2.02
Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction.
HEADERS
A.
B.
Concrete: Per specification Section 32 1313 - Site Concrete Work.
Wood:
1. Redwood, Construction Heart Grade, size 2 by 6, unless otherwise
indicated.
2. Stakes: 2 by 4 redwood or 2 by 3 Douglas fir, Construction Grade.
3. Nails: Common, galvanized, 12d minimum.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.1 CONSTRUCTION OF ASPHALT CONCRETE PAVEMENT
A. Thickness of Surfacing: Unless otherwise indicated on Drawings or specified, install bituminous surfacing to a compacted thickness of 2 inches.
B. Provide surfacing material over base course as specified in Section 31 2326 - Base Course.
C. Surfaces of walls, concrete, masonry, or existing bituminous surfacing indicated to be in direct contact with installed bituminous surfacing shall be cleaned, dried and uniformly coated with an asphaltic emulsion film.
D. Thicken edges of bituminous surfacing that do not abut walls, concrete, or masonry, and edges joining existing bituminous surfaces. Remove headers at existing bituminous surfacing where new bituminous surfacing is to be installed. Thicken edges an additional 2 inches and taper to the indicated or specified thickness 6 inches back from such edges.
E. Provide adequate protection for concrete, planting areas, and other finish Work adjacent to areas indicated to receive bituminous surfacing.
F. Placing:
1. Do not install bituminous surfacing when atmospheric temperature is below 40 degrees F; or when fog or other unsuitable weather conditions are present. Temperature of mixture at time of installation shall not be lower than 260 degrees F in warm weather or higher than 320 degrees F in cold weather.
2. Where 2-inch or 3-inch thick surfacing is indicated or specified, install surfacing in one course. Where surfacing is indicated or specified 4 inches or more in thickness, except for thickened edges, install
1230
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
32 12 16 - 3 Asphalt Paving
bituminous surfacing in courses of approximately equal thickness, each course not exceeding 2 ½ inches in thickness.
G. Stakes or Screeds: Provide grade or screed stakes spaced not more than 15 feet apart in flow lines with grades of less than one percent. Continuous screeds may be provided instead of stakes.
H. Spreading: Install bituminous surfacing in a manner to cause least possible handling of mixture. In open areas and wherever practicable, install by mechanical means with a self-propelled mechanical spreader. In confined or restricted areas, install mixture with hot shovels and rakes, and smooth with lutes.
I. Joints: Provide vertical joints between successive runs. Install joints true to line, grade, and cross section. Lapped joints are not permitted.
J. Rolling:
1. Finish roll with a self-propelled tandem roller weighing at least 8 tons. Break down roll with a self-propelled roller weighing between 1 ½ tons and 8 tons.
2. Roll in a manner that preserves flow lines and the established finished grades. Break down roll in areas adjacent to flow lines parallel to flow lines. Break down roll after bituminous surfacing is installed without shoving or cracking of mixture under roller. Continue finish rolling until surfacing is unyielding, true to grade, and meets requirements for specified smoothness. Areas inaccessible to finish roller may be finish rolled with breakdown roller or tamped with hot tamping irons and smoothed with hot smoothing irons or hand roller.
3. Where bituminous surfacing abuts concrete, masonry, walks or paving, tamp joint smooth, if necessary, as described above to obtain a uniformly even joint, true to line and grade. Tamp and smooth to properly compact.
4. Compacted bituminous surfacing shall be provided with a bulk specific gravity of at least 2.31 when tested in accordance with ASTM D1188.
3.2 TOLERANCE
A. Smoothness: Surface of bituminous surfacing after rolling, shall be even, smooth and uniform in texture with no voids or rock pockets, free of roller marks or other irregularities, and not varying by more than 0.03 foot, except at local depressions or raised areas as indicated, when a 10-foot straightedge is placed on surface.
B. Grade: Finished grade shall not vary more than 0.02 foot above or below required grade. Variations within prescribed tolerance shall be compensating so that average grade and cross-section are provided.
3.3 TESTING
1231
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
02/03/2023
32 12 16 - 4 Asphalt Paving
A. After first coat of surface seal has been installed and after a 24 hour period, the flood test shall be completed of the bituminous surfacing in presence of the Project Inspector. Repair areas of standing water or puddles and flood test locally; install surface seal and retest as necessary.
3.4 SURFACE SEALING
A. After bituminous surfacing has passed flood test, clear and allow to dry and provide one more coat of surface seal as specified in Section 32 1236 - Seal for Bituminous Surfacing.
B. Where indicated, provide multiple coats of surface seal to existing bituminous surfacing.
C. Where new bituminous surfacing joins existing bituminous surfacing, overlap surface seal a minimum of 12 inches onto existing bituminous surfacing.
3.5 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
3.6 CLEANUP
A. Remove rubbish, debris and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
END OF SECTION
1232
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 02/03/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
SECTION 32 12 36
SEAL BITUMINOUS SURFACING
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Surface sealer over bituminous surfacing.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving.
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Product Data: Submit manufacturer's product information and application procedures
for bituminous surfacing.
1.03
A.
QUALITY ASSURANCE
Comply with the Standard Specifications For Public Works
Construction,
current
edition.
B. Agitate bulk materials during transport.
1.04 MAINTENANCE
A. Extra Materials: Provide 10 gallons in unopened containers.
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.1 MATERIALS
A. Provide one of the following surface seals:
Product Name Manufacturer
32 12 36 - 1 Seal Bituminous Surfacing
1. Guard-Top CALMAT / Industrial Asphalt
2. Over Kote Diversified Asphalt Product
3. Park Top Western Colloid Products
4. Sure Seal Asphalt Coating Engineering
1233
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 02/03/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
5. Super Drive Top. SAF– T Seal. Inc.
6. Equal.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
END OF SECTION
32 12 36 - 2 Seal Bituminous Surfacing
3.01
A.
SURFACE PREPARATION
Thoroughly wash surfaces with water to remove dirt, debris, excessive oil and grease,
or other foreign matter.
3.02 APPLICATION
A. Install seal coat in strict accordance with manufacturer's written directions and
recommendations.
B. Install two coats of surface seal to new bituminous surfacing. First coat shall be
installed before flood testing. Clean surface and allow to dry before installing second
coat. Second coat shall be installed after bituminous surfacing has passed flood test.
C. Where new bituminous surfacing is installed adjacent to existing bituminous surfacing,
overlap surface seal a minimum of 12 inches onto existing bituminous surfacing.
D. Where existing bituminous surfacing is indicated to be patched and sealed, install two
coats of surface seal after patching. Refer to Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving.
3.03 PROTECTION OF SURFACES
A. Protect sealed and unsealed surfaces from damage and traffic during performance of
the Work of this section and until surface seal has thoroughly set and cured. Do not
permit traffic of any kind for at least 24 hours after completion of installation.
B. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
3.04 TESTING
A. Owner reserves the right to obtain samples, perform tests to ensure compliance with
the Specifications, and to review weight slips and invoices of materials delivered to the
Project site.
3.05 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
1234
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 02/03/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
SECTION 32 13 13
SITE CONCRETE WORK
PART 1 - GENERAL
1.1 SUMMARY
A. Section Includes:
1. Portland cement concrete pavement, cement walks, curbs, gutters, trash pick-up area, pipe bedding and encasements, thrust blocks, transition structures, flagpoles and light standard bases and footings.
B. Related Requirements:
1. Division 01 - General Requirements.
2. Section 31 2200 - Grading.
3. Section 31 2313 - Excavation and Fill.
4. Section 31 2316 - Excavation and Fill for Pavement.
5. Section 31 2326 - Base Course.
6. Section 32 1216 - Asphalt Paving
1.2 SUBMITTALS
A. Shop Drawings: Submit plans, elevations and details of concrete site Work.
B. Product Data: Submit mix designs and manufacturer’s technical data for materials and products. Submit 3-inch by 3-inch concrete Sample of each specified color.
1.3 QUALITY ASSURANCE
A. Comply with Standard Specifications For Public Works Construction.
32 13 13 - 1 Site Concrete Work
1235
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 02/03/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
PART 2 - PRODUCTS
2.01 MATERIALS
A. Concrete, Mortar and Related Materials: Comply with applicable provisions of Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 201 - Concrete, Mortar and Related Materials:
1. Concrete: 28-day compressive strength 2,500 psi, unless specified otherwise.
2. Expansion Joint Filler: Preformed expansion joint filler, bituminous type, complying with ASTM D994.
B. Form Materials:
1. Side forms: Douglas fir, Construction Grade or Better or metal forms.
2. Stakes: Douglas fir, Construction Grade or Better or metal stakes.
PART 3 - EXECUTION
3.01
A.
CONSTRUCTION OF FORMS FOR CAST-IN-PLACE STRUCTURES
Concrete Pavement: Install Portland cement concrete pavement in compliance
with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 302- Roadway Surfacing.
B. Miscellaneous Exposed Concrete: Install concrete curbs, walks, gutters, cross gutters, access ramps, driveways, catch basins, yard boxes, vaults and similar structures, in compliance with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 303 - Concrete and Masonry Construction.
32 13 13 - 2 Site Concrete Work
1236
MOORPARK CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT 02/03/2023
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA
C. Exposed Concrete Bases: Install bases, such as for post, flagpole, light standards and similar bases, in compliance with the Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 303 - Concrete and Masonry Construction.
D. Post, flagpole, light standard footings below grade, underground conduit bedding, encasements, thrust blocks and similar structures may be placed \directly in excavations conforming to the required sizes.
E. Reinforcement installation and concrete placement, surface finishes, curing and removal of forms shall be performed in compliance with applicable provisions of Standard Specifications for Public Works Construction, Section 303 - Concrete and Masonry Construction. Provide heavy broom finish at slopes exceeding six percent and medium broom finish at slopes up to six percent.
3.2 CLEAN UP
A. Remove rubbish, debris, and waste materials and legally dispose of off the Project site.
3.3 PROTECTION
A. Protect the Work of this section until Substantial Completion.
END OF SECTION
32 13 13 - 3 Site Concrete Work
1237
RESOLUTION NO. 2023-___
A RESOLUTION OF THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF
MOORPARK, CALIFORNIA, AMENDING THE FISCAL
YEAR 2023/24 BUDGET TO ALLOCATE $6,880,750 FROM
THE SPECIAL PROJECTS FUND (3004) FOR CITY HALL
TENANT IMPROVEMENT PROJECT (C0070)
WHEREAS, the City Council adopted the Operating and Capital Improvement
Budget for Fiscal Year 2023/24 on June 21, 2023; and
WHEREAS, a staff report has been presented to City Council requesting approval
of an agreement with Monet Construction, Inc. for City Hall Tenant Improvement Project
(C0070) in the total amount of $6,580,750 which includes a contingency of $598,250; and
WHEREAS, the staff report also requests an additional $300,000 for Owner-
Furnished-Owner-Installed work for the project; and
WHEREAS, a budget amendment in the amount of $6,880,750 from the Special
Projects Fund (3004) is needed to fund the work; and
WHEREAS, Exhibit “A” hereof describes said budget amendment and its resultant
impact to the budget line items.
NOW, THEREFORE, THE CITY COUNCIL OF THE CITY OF MOORPARK DOES
HEREBY RESOLVE AS FOLLOWS:
SECTION 1. A budget amendment in the amount of $6,880,750 from the Special
Projects Fund (1000), as more particularly described in Exhibit A, is hereby approved.
SECTION 2. The City Clerk shall certify to the adoption of this resolution and shall
cause a certified resolution to be filed in the book of original resolutions.
PASSED AND ADOPTED this 2nd day of August, 2023.
________________________________
Chris R. Enegren, Mayor
ATTEST:
___________________________________
Ky Spangler City Clerk
Attachment: Exhibit A – Budget Amendment
ATTACHMENT 2
1238
Resolution No. 2023-___
Page 2
FUND BALANCE ALLOCATION:
Fund-Account Number Amount
3004-000-00000-33990 6,880,750.00$
Total 6,880,750.00$
EXPENDITURE APPROPRIATION:
Account Number Current Budget Revision Amended Budget
3004-120-C0070-55400 -$ 6,880,750.00$ 6,880,750.00$
-$ -$ -$
-$ -$ -$
-$ -$ -$
-$ -$ -$
Total -$ 6,880,750.00$ 6,880,750.00$
Fund Title
SPECIAL PROJECTS FUND
EXHIBIT A
BUDGET AMENDMENT FOR
SPECIAL PROJECTS FUND
CITY HALL TENANT IMPROVEMENT PROJECT (C0070)
FY 2023/2024
1239
26